Part A
Ferrous Material Specifications
(Beginning to SA-450)
SECTION II
MATERIALS
ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
2019 ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code
An International Code II
MATERIALS
Part A
Ferrous Material
Specifications
(Beginning to SA-450)
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
on Materials
AN INTERNATIONAL CODE
2019 ASME Boiler &
Pressure Vessel Code
2019 Edition July 1, 2019
SA-6/SA-6M Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars,
Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SA-20/SA-20M Specification for General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels 65
SA-29/SA-29M Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought, General Requirements
for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
SA-31 Specification for Steel Rivets and Bars for Rivets, Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . 121
SA-36/SA-36M Specification for Carbon Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
SA-47/SA-47M Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
SA-53/SA-53M Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
SA-105/SA-105M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . 169
SA-106/SA-106M Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service 177
SA-134 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (ARC)-Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and
Over) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
SA-135 Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
SA-178/SA-178M Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel and Carbon-
Manganese Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
SA-179/SA-179M Specification for Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger
and Condenser Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
SA-181/SA-181M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping . . . . . . 215
SA-182/SA-182M Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges,
Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service . . . 221
SA-192/SA-192M Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Boiler Tubes for High-Pressure Service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
SA-193/SA-193M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High-Temperature
or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications . . . . . . 241
SA-194/SA-194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or
High Temperature Service, or Both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
SA-203/SA-203M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
SA-204/SA-204M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum . . . . . . . . 271
SA-209/SA-209M Specification for Seamless Carbon-Molybdenum Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
SA-210/SA-210M Specification for Seamless Medium-Carbon Steel Boiler and Superheater
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
SA-213/SA-213M Specification for Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater,
and Heat-Exchanger Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
iii
Manufacture
Stockholder
Distributor
SA-214/SA-214M Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger
and Condenser Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
SA-216/SA-216M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for
High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
SA-217/SA-217M Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for
Pressure-Containing Parts, Suitable for High-Temperature Service . . . . . 311
SA-225/SA-225M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Vanadium-
Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
SA-231/SA-231M Specification for Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Spring Wire . . . . . . . . . . 323
SA-232/SA-232M Specification for Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Valve Spring Quality Wire 329
SA-234/SA-234M Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
SA-240/SA-240M Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications . . . . . . . . . . . 345
SA-249/SA-249M Specification for Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater,
Heat-Exchanger, and Condenser Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
SA-250/SA-250M Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Ferritic Alloy-Steel Boiler and
Superheater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
SA-263 Specification for Stainless Chromium Steel-Clad Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
SA-264 Specification for Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel-Clad Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
SA-265 Specification for Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy-Clad Steel Plate . . . . . . . . . . 389
SA-266/SA-266M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessel Components . . 397
SA-268/SA-268M Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
SA-276 Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
SA-278/SA-278M Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Pressure Containing Parts for Temperatures
up to 650°F (350°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
SA-283/SA-283M Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates 429
SA-285/SA-285M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and
Intermediate-Tensile Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
SA-299/SA-299M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon . 437
SA-302/SA-302M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Molybdenum
and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
SA-307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength 445
SA-311/SA-311M Specification for Cold-Drawn, Stress-Relieved Carbon Steel Bars Subject to
Mechanical Property Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
SA-312/SA-312M Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
SA-320/SA-320M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
SA-325 Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
SA-333/SA-333M Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature Service
and Other Applications With Required Notch Toughness . . . . . . . . . 487
SA-334/SA-334M Specification for Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy-Steel Tubes for
Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
SA-335/SA-335M Specification for Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
SA-336/SA-336M Specification for Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
SA-350/SA-350M Specification for Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch
Toughness Testing for Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
SA-351/SA-351M Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for
Pressure-Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
SA-352/SA-352M Specification for Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure-
Containing Parts, Suitable for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
SA-353/SA-353M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Double-Normalized and
Tempered 9% Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
SA-354 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other
Externally Threaded Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
SA-358/SA-358M Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service and General Applications . 569
SA-369/SA-369M Specification for Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for
High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
SA-370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products . . . 585
SA-372/SA-372M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Thin-Walled Pressure
Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
SA-376/SA-376M Specification for Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Central-Station Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
SA-387/SA-387M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-
Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
SA-395/SA-395M Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at
Elevated Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
SA-403/SA-403M Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . 685
SA-409/SA-409M Specification for Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive
or High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
SA-414/SA-414M Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
SA-420/SA-420M Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
SA-423/SA-423M Specification for Seamless and Electric-Welded Low-Alloy Steel Tubes . . . . 719
SA-426/SA-426M Specification for Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
SA-435/SA-435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates . . . . 731
SA-437/SA-437M Specification for Stainless and Alloy-Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Specially
Heat Treated for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
SA-449 Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/
105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
SA-450/SA-450M Specification for General Requirements for Carbon and Low Alloy Steel
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
SA-451/SA-451M Specification for Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
SA-453/SA-453M Specification for High-Temperature Bolting, With Expansion Coefficients
Comparable to Austenitic Stainless Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
SA-455/SA-455M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High-Strength
Manganese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
SA-476/SA-476M Specification for Ductile Iron Castings for Paper Mill Dryer Rolls . . . . . . . . 775
SA-479/SA-479M Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other
Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
SA-480/SA-480M Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and
Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
SA-484/SA-484M Specification for General Requirements for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and
Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
SA-487/SA-487M Specification for Steel Castings Suitable for Pressure Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
SA-508/SA-508M Specification for Quenched and Tempered Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy
Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
SA-513 Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical
Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
SA-515/SA-515M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and
Higher-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
SA-516/SA-516M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and
Lower-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
SA-517/SA-517M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, High-Strength, Quenched
and Tempered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
SA-522/SA-522M Specification for Forged or Rolled 8 and 9% Nickel Alloy Steel Flanges, Fittings,
Valves, and Parts for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
SA-524 Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower
Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
SA-530/SA-530M Specification for General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy
Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
SA-533/SA-533M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered,
Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel . . . . . . . . 913
SA-537/SA-537M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-
Silicon Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
SA-540/SA-540M Specification for Alloy-Steel Bolting for Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
SA-541/SA-541M Specification for Quenched and Tempered Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings
for Pressure Vessel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
SA-542/SA-542M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenchedand-
Tempered, Chromium-Molybdenum, and Chromium-Molybdenum-
Vanadium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
SA-543/SA-543M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered,
Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
SA-553/SA-553M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered
7, 8, and 9% Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
SA-556/SA-556M Specification for Seamless Cold-Drawn Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
SA-557/SA-557M Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
SA-562/SA-562M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Titanium
for Glass or Diffused Metallic Coatings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
SA-563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
SA-564/SA-564M Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel
Bars and Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
SA-568/SA-568M Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-
Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for . . . . . . . . . . 997
SA-572/SA-572M Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural
Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
SA-574 Specification for Alloy Steel Socket-Head Cap Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
SA-577/SA-577M Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination of Steel Plates . . . . . 1047
SA-578/SA-578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Rolled Steel Plates
for Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
SA-587 Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Low-Carbon Steel Pipe for the
Chemical Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
SA-592/SA-592M Specification for High-Strength Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Steel
Forged Fittings and Parts for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
SA-609/SA-609M Specification for Castings, Carbon, Low-Alloy, and Martensitic Stainless Steel,
Ultrasonic Examination Thereof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
SA-612/SA-612M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High Strength, for
Moderate and Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
SA-638/SA-638M Specification for Precipitation Hardening Iron Base Superalloy Bars, Forgings,
and Forging Stock for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
SA-645/SA-645M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, 5% and 51/2% Nickel Alloy Steels,
Specially Heat Treated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
SA-649/SA-649M Specification for Forged Steel Rolls, Used for Corrugating Paper Machinery 1089
SA-656/SA-656M Specification for Hot-Rolled Structural Steel, High-Strength Low-Alloy Plate
With Improved Formability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
SA-660 Specification for Centrifugally Cast Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
SA-662/SA-662M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, for
Moderate and Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
SA-666 Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,
Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
SA-667/SA-667M Specification for Centrifugally Cast Dual Metal (Gray and White Cast Iron)
Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
SA-671/SA-671M Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and
Lower Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
SA-672/SA-672M Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service
at Moderate Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
SA-675/SA-675M Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
SA-688/SA-688M Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Feedwater
Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
SA-691/SA-691M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion-Welded for
High-Pressure Service at High Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157
SA-693 Specification for Precipitation-Hardening Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel
Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
SA-696 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought or Cold-Finished, Special
Quality, for Pressure Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
SA-703/SA-703M Specification for Steel Castings, General Requirements, for Pressure-
Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
SA-705/SA-705M Specification for Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
SA-723/SA-723M Specification for Alloy Steel Forgings for High-Strength Pressure Component
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
SA-724/SA-724M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel,
Quenched and Tempered, for Welded Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217
SA-727/SA-727M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Components with Inherent
Notch Toughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
SA-731/SA-731M Specification for Seamless, Welded Ferritic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel
Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229
SA-736/SA-736M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-
Copper-Chromium-Molybdenum-Columbium (Niobium) Alloy Steel . . . . 1235
SA-737/SA-737M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel . . . 1239
SA-738/SA-738M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-
Silicon Steel, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
SA-739 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought, for Elevated Temperature or
Pressure-Containing Parts, or Both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
SA-745/SA-745M Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Austenitic Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . 1253
SA-747/SA-747M Specification for Steel Castings, Stainless, Precipitation Hardening . . . . . . . 1255
SA-748/SA-748M Specification for Statically Cast Chilled White Iron-Gray Iron Dual Metal Rolls
for Pressure Vessel Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
SA-749/SA-749M Specification for Steel, Strip, Carbon and High-Strength, Low-Alloy,
Hot-Rolled, General Requirements for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
SA-751 Specification for Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical
Analysis of Steel Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
SA-765/SA-765M Specification for Carbon Steel and Low-Alloy Steel Pressure-Vessel-
Component Forgings With Mandatory Toughness Requirements . . . . . . . 1285
SA-770/SA-770M Specification for Through-Thickness Tension Testing of Steel Plates for Special
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291
SA-781/SA-781M Specification for Castings, Steel and Alloy, Common Requirements, for General
Industrial Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
SA-788/SA-788M Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
SA-789/SA-789M Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
SA-790/SA-790M Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel
Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
SA-803/SA-803M Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic Stainless Steel Feedwater
Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347
SA-813/SA-813M Specification for Single- or Double-Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe . 1355
SA-814/SA-814M Specification for Cold-Worked Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . 1367
SA-815/SA-815M Specification for Wrought Ferritic, Ferritic/Austenitic, and Martensitic
Stainless Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
SA-832/SA-832M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-
Molybdenum-Vanadium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
SA-834 Specification for Common Requirements for Iron Castings for General Industrial
Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391
SA-836/SA-836M Specification for Titanium-Stabilized Carbon Steel Forgings for Glass-Lined
Piping and Pressure Vessel Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
SA-841/SA-841M Specification for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels, Produced by Thermo-
Mechanical Control Process (TMCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
SA-874/SA-874M Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Castings Suitable for Low-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
SA-905 Specification for Steel Wire, Pressure Vessel Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
SA-941 Specification for Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related Alloys,
and Ferroalloys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
SA-960/SA-960M Specification for Common Requirements for Wrought Steel Piping Fittings 1431
SA-961/SA-961M Specification for Common Requirements for Steel Flanges, Forged Fittings,
Valves, and Parts for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
SA-962/SA-962M Specification for Common Requirements for Bolting Intended for Use at any
Temperature From Cryogenic to the Creep Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
SA-965/SA-965M Specification for Steel Forgings, Austenitic, for Pressure and High-
Temperature Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469
SA-985/SA-985M Specification for Steel Investment Castings General Requirements, for
Pressure-Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477
SA-995 Specification for Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for
Pressure-Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499
SA-999/SA-999M Specification for General Requirements for Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe . 1505
SA-1008/SA-1008M Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength
Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability . . . 1517
SA-1010/SA-1010M Specification for Higher-Strength Martensitic Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
SA-1011/SA-1011M Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability,
and Ultra-High-Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531
SA-1016/SA-1016M Specification for General Requirements for Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic
Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
SA-1017/SA-1017M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy-Steel, Chromium-
Molybdenum-Tungsten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1553
SF-568M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric
Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557
SA/AS 1548 Specification for Fine Grained, Weldable Steel Plates for Pressure
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
SA/CSA-G40.21 Specification for Structural Quality Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1571
SA/EN 10025-2 Specification for Hot Rolled Products of Structural Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573
SA/EN 10028-2 Specification for Flat Products Made of Steels for Pressure Purposes . . . . . 1575
SA/EN 10028-3 Specification for Flat Products Made of Steels For Pressure Purposes . . . . 1579
SA/EN 10028-4 Specification for Flat Products Made of Steels For Pressure Purposes . . . . 1581
SA/EN 10028-7 Specification for Flat Products Made of Steels for Pressure Purposes . . . . . 1585
SA/EN 10088-2 Specification for Stainless Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1587
SA/EN 10088-3 Specification for Stainless Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589
SA/EN 10216-2 Specification for Seamless Steel Tubes for Pressure Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . 1593
SA/EN 10217-1 Specification for Welded Steel Tubes for Pressure Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595
SA/EN 10222-2 Specification for Steel Forgings for Pressure Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1597
SA/GB 713 Specification for Steel Plates for Boilers and Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . 1599
SA/IS 2062 Specification for Steel for General Structural Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
SA/JIS G3118 Specification for Carbon Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels for Intermediate
and Moderate Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
SA/JIS G4303 Specification for Stainless Steel Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
SA/JIS G5504 Specification for Heavy-Walled Ferritic Spheroidal Graphite Iron Castings for
Low Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607
SA/NF A 36-215 Specification for Weldable Fine Grain Steels for Transportation of Dangerous
Substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
Mandatory Appendix I Standard Units for Use in Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611
Mandatory Appendix II Basis for Use of Acceptable ASME, ASTM, and Non-ASTM Editions . . . . 1612
II-100 Materials Adopted for Use in Construction Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612
II-200 Acceptable Editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612
II-300 Other Acceptable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
II-400 References to ASTM Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
II-500 Country of Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
Mandatory Appendix III Guidelines on Multiple Marking of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624
III-100 Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624
III-200 Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624
Mandatory Appendix IV Guidelines on the Approval of New Materials Under the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
IV-100 Code Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
IV-200 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
IV-300 Chemical Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
IV-400 Metallurgical Structure and Heat Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
IV-500 Mechanical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
IV-600 Definitions for Data Collection Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
IV-700 Required Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
IV-800 Time-Independent Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
IV-900 Time-Dependent Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
IV-1000 Low-Temperature Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
IV-1100 Toughness Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
IV-1200 Stress–Strain Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
IV-1300 Fatigue Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
IV-1400 Physical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
IV-1500 Data Requirements for Welds, Weldments, and Weldability . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
IV-1600 Long-Term Properties Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
IV-1700 Requests for Additional Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
IV-1800 New Materials Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
IV-1900 Requirements for Recognized National or International Specifications . . . . 1634
IV-2000 Publication of Recognized National or International Specifications . . . . . . . 1634
IV-2100 CEN Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634
Nonmandatory Appendix A Sources of Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1636
TABLES
I-1 Standard Units for Use in Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611
II-200-1 Other Acceptable ASTM Editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614
II-200-2 Other Acceptable Non-ASTM Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
IV-100-1 Hot Isostatically Pressed Component Requirements for Austenitic Stainless Steels, Austenitic–
Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steels, Martensitic Stainless Steels, Ferritic Steels, and Nickel
Alloys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
IV-800-1 ASTM Test Methods and Units for Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630
IV-1500-1 Example of a Comparison of Allowable Stresses of Base Metals With Compositions Similar to
Those of Selected Welding Consumables and the Proposed New Base Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
LIST OF SECTIONS ð19Þ
SECTIONS
I Rules for Construction of Power Boilers
II Materials
• Part A — Ferrous Material Specifications
• Part B — Nonferrous Material Specifications
• Part C — Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler Metals
• Part D — Properties (Customary)
• Part D — Properties (Metric)
III Rules for Construction of Nuclear Facility Components
• Subsection NCA — General Requirements for Division 1 and Division 2
• Appendices
• Division 1
– Subsection NB — Class 1 Components
– Subsection NC — Class 2 Components
– Subsection ND — Class 3 Components
– Subsection NE — Class MC Components
– Subsection NF — Supports
– Subsection NG — Core Support Structures
• Division 2 — Code for Concrete Containments
• Division 3 — Containment Systems for Transportation and Storage of Spent Nuclear Fuel and High-Level
Radioactive Material
• Division 5 — High Temperature Reactors
IV Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers
V Nondestructive Examination
VI Recommended Rules for the Care and Operation of Heating Boilers
VII Recommended Guidelines for the Care of Power Boilers
VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels
• Division 1
• Division 2 — Alternative Rules
• Division 3 — Alternative Rules for Construction of High Pressure Vessels
IX Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Qualifications
X Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels
XI Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components
• Division 1 — Rules for Inspection and Testing of Components of Light-Water-Cooled Plants
• Division 2 — Requirements for Reliability and Integrity Management (RIM) Programs for Nuclear Power
Plants
XII Rules for Construction and Continued Service of Transport Tanks
INTERPRETATIONS
Interpretations are issued in real time in ASME’s Interpretations Database at http://go.asme.org/Interpretations. Historical
BPVC interpretations may also be found in the Database.
CODE CASES
The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code committees meet regularly to consider proposed additions and revisions to the
Code and to formulate Cases to clarify the intent of existing requirements or provide, when the need is urgent, rules for
materials or constructions not covered by existing Code rules. Those Cases that have been adopted will appear in the
appropriate 2019 Code Cases book: “Boilers and Pressure Vessels” or “Nuclear Components.” Each Code Cases book
is updated with seven Supplements. Supplements will be sent or made available automatically to the purchasers of
the Code Cases books up to the publication of the 2021 Code. Code Case users can check the current status of any Code
Case at http://go.asme.org/BPVCCDatabase. Code Case users can also view an index of the complete list of Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code Cases and Nuclear Code Cases at http://go.asme.org/BPVCC.
FOREWORD ð19Þ
In 1911, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers established the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee to formulate
standard rules for the construction of steam boilers and other pressure vessels. In 2009, the Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Committee was superseded by the following committees:
(a) Committee on Power Boilers (I)
(b) Committee on Materials (II)
(c) Committee on Construction of Nuclear Facility Components (III)
(d) Committee on Heating Boilers (IV)
(e) Committee on Nondestructive Examination (V)
(f) Committee on Pressure Vessels (VIII)
(g) Committee on Welding, Brazing, and Fusing (IX)
(h) Committee on Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels (X)
(i) Committee on Nuclear Inservice Inspection (XI)
(j) Committee on Transport Tanks (XII)
(k) Technical Oversight Management Committee (TOMC)
Where reference is made to “the Committee” in this Foreword, each of these committees is included individually and
collectively.
The Committee’s function is to establish rules of safety relating only to pressure integrity, which govern the construction
of boilers, pressure vessels, transport tanks, and nuclear components, and the inservice inspection of nuclear components
and transport tanks. The Committee also interprets these rules when questions arise regarding their intent. The
technical consistency of the Sections of the Code and coordination of standards development activities of the Committees
is supported and guided by the Technical Oversight Management Committee. This Code does not address other
safety issues relating to the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, transport tanks, or nuclear components, or the inservice
inspection of nuclear components or transport tanks. Users of the Code should refer to the pertinent codes, standards,
laws, regulations, or other relevant documents for safety issues other than those relating to pressure integrity.
Except for Sections XI and XII, and with a few other exceptions, the rules do not, of practical necessity, reflect the likelihood
and consequences of deterioration in service related to specific service fluids or external operating environments.
In formulating the rules, the Committee considers the needs of users, manufacturers, and inspectors of pressure vessels.
The objective of the rules is to afford reasonably certain protection of life and property, and to provide a margin for
deterioration in service to give a reasonably long, safe period of usefulness. Advancements in design and materials
and evidence of experience have been recognized.
This Code contains mandatory requirements, specific prohibitions, and nonmandatory guidance for construction activities
and inservice inspection and testing activities. The Code does not address all aspects of these activities and those
aspects that are not specifically addressed should not be considered prohibited. The Code is not a handbook and cannot
replace education, experience, and the use of engineering judgment. The phrase engineering judgment refers to technical
judgments made by knowledgeable engineers experienced in the application of the Code. Engineering judgments must
be consistent with Code philosophy, and such judgments must never be used to overrule mandatory requirements or
specific prohibitions of the Code.
The Committee recognizes that tools and techniques used for design and analysis change as technology progresses
and expects engineers to use good judgment in the application of these tools. The designer is responsible for complying
with Code rules and demonstrating compliance with Code equations when such equations are mandatory. The Code
neither requires nor prohibits the use of computers for the design or analysis of components constructed to the requirements
of the Code. However, designers and engineers using computer programs for design or analysis are cautioned that
they are responsible for all technical assumptions inherent in the programs they use and the application of these programs
to their design.
The rules established by the Committee are not to be interpreted as approving, recommending, or endorsing any proprietary
or specific design, or as limiting in any way the manufacturer’s freedom to choose any method of design or any
form of construction that conforms to the Code rules.
The Committee meets regularly to consider revisions of the rules, new rules as dictated by technological development,
Code Cases, and requests for interpretations. Only the Committee has the authority to provide official interpretations of
this Code. Requests for revisions, new rules, Code Cases, or interpretations shall be addressed to the Secretary in writing
and shall give full particulars in order to receive consideration and action (see Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees). Proposed revisions to the Code resulting from inquiries will be presented
to the Committee for appropriate action. The action of the Committee becomes effective only after confirmation
by ballot of the Committee and approval by ASME. Proposed revisions to the Code approved by the Committee are submitted
to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and published at http://go.asme.org/BPVCPublicReview to
invite comments from all interested persons. After public review and final approval by ASME, revisions are published at
regular intervals in Editions of the Code.
The Committee does not rule on whether a component shall or shall not be constructed to the provisions of the Code.
The scope of each Section has been established to identify the components and parameters considered by the Committee
in formulating the Code rules.
Questions or issues regarding compliance of a specific component with the Code rules are to be directed to the ASME
Certificate Holder (Manufacturer). Inquiries concerning the interpretation of the Code are to be directed to the Committee.
ASME is to be notified should questions arise concerning improper use of the ASME Single Certification Mark.
When required by context in this Section, the singular shall be interpreted as the plural, and vice versa, and the feminine,
masculine, or neuter gender shall be treated as such other gender as appropriate.
STATEMENT OF POLICY ON THE USE OF THE ASME SINGLE
CERTIFICATION MARK AND CODE AUTHORIZATION IN
ADVERTISING
ASME has established procedures to authorize qualified organizations to perform various activities in accordance
with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. It is the aim of the Society to provide recognition
of organizations so authorized. An organization holding authorization to perform various activities in accordance with
the requirements of the Code may state this capability in its advertising literature.
Organizations that are authorized to use the ASME Single Certification Mark for marking items or constructions that
have been constructed and inspected in compliance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code are issued Certificates
of Authorization. It is the aim of the Society to maintain the standing of the ASME Single Certification Mark for the
benefit of the users, the enforcement jurisdictions, and the holders of the ASME Single Certification Mark who comply
with all requirements.
Based on these objectives, the following policy has been established on the usage in advertising of facsimiles of the
ASME Single Certification Mark, Certificates of Authorization, and reference to Code construction. The American Society
of Mechanical Engineers does not “approve,” “certify,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, or activity and there
shall be no statements or implications that might so indicate. An organization holding the ASME Single Certification Mark
and/or a Certificate of Authorization may state in advertising literature that items, constructions, or activities “are built
(produced or performed) or activities conducted in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code,” or “meet the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.”An ASME corporate logo shall not
be used by any organization other than ASME.
The ASME Single Certification Mark shall be used only for stamping and nameplates as specifically provided in the
Code. However, facsimiles may be used for the purpose of fostering the use of such construction. Such usage may be
by an association or a society, or by a holder of the ASME Single Certification Mark who may also use the facsimile
in advertising to show that clearly specified items will carry the ASME Single Certification Mark.
STATEMENT OF POLICY ON THE USE OF ASME MARKING TO
IDENTIFY MANUFACTURED ITEMS
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code provides rules for the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, and nuclear
components. This includes requirements for materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, and stamping. Items
constructed in accordance with all of the applicable rules of the Code are identified with the ASME Single Certification
Mark described in the governing Section of the Code.
Markings such as “ASME,” “ASME Standard,” or any other marking including “ASME” or the ASME Single Certification
Mark shall not be used on any item that is not constructed in accordance with all of the applicable requirements of the
Code.
Items shall not be described on ASME Data Report Forms nor on similar forms referring to ASME that tend to imply
that all Code requirements have been met when, in fact, they have not been. Data Report Forms covering items not fully
complying with ASME requirements should not refer to ASME or they should clearly identify all exceptions to the ASME
requirements.
ð19Þ SUBMITTAL OF TECHNICAL INQUIRIES TO THE BOILER AND
PRESSURE VESSEL STANDARDS COMMITTEES
1 INTRODUCTION
(a) The following information provides guidance to Code users for submitting technical inquiries to the applicable
Boiler and Pressure Vessel (BPV) Standards Committee (hereinafter referred to as the Committee). See the guidelines
on approval of new materials under the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code in Section II, Part D for requirements for
requests that involve adding new materials to the Code. See the guidelines on approval of new welding and brazing materials
in Section II, Part C for requirements for requests that involve adding new welding and brazing materials (“consumables”)
to the Code.
Technical inquiries can include requests for revisions or additions to the Code requirements, requests for Code Cases,
or requests for Code Interpretations, as described below:
(1) Code Revisions. Code revisions are considered to accommodate technological developments, to address administrative
requirements, to incorporate Code Cases, or to clarify Code intent.
(2) Code Cases. Code Cases represent alternatives or additions to existing Code requirements. Code Cases are written
as a Question and Reply, and are usually intended to be incorporated into the Code at a later date. When used, Code
Cases prescribe mandatory requirements in the same sense as the text of the Code. However, users are cautioned that
not all regulators, jurisdictions, or Owners automatically accept Code Cases. The most common applications for Code
Cases are as follows:
(-a) to permit early implementation of an approved Code revision based on an urgent need
(-b) to permit use of a new material for Code construction
(-c) to gain experience with new materials or alternative requirements prior to incorporation directly into the
Code
(3) Code Interpretations
(-a) Code Interpretations provide clarification of the meaning of existing requirements in the Code and are presented
in Inquiry and Reply format. Interpretations do not introduce new requirements.
(-b) If existing Code text does not fully convey the meaning that was intended, or conveys conflicting requirements,
and revision of the requirements is required to support the Interpretation, an Intent Interpretation will be issued
in parallel with a revision to the Code.
(b) Code requirements, Code Cases, and Code Interpretations established by the Committee are not to be considered
as approving, recommending, certifying, or endorsing any proprietary or specific design, or as limiting in any way the
freedom of manufacturers, constructors, or Owners to choose any method of design or any form of construction that
conforms to the Code requirements.
(c) Inquiries that do not comply with the following guidance or that do not provide sufficient information for the Committee’s
full understanding may result in the request being returned to the Inquirer with no action.
2 INQUIRY FORMAT
Submittals to the Committee should include the following information:
(a) Purpose. Specify one of the following:
(1) request for revision of present Code requirements
(2) request for new or additional Code requirements
(3) request for Code Case
(4) request for Code Interpretation
(b) Background. The Inquirer should provide the information needed for the Committee’s understanding of the Inquiry,
being sure to include reference to the applicable Code Section, Division, Edition, Addenda (if applicable), paragraphs,
figures, and tables. Preferably, the Inquirer should provide a copy of, or relevant extracts from, the specific
referenced portions of the Code.
(c) Presentations. The Inquirer may desire to attend or be asked to attend a meeting of the Committee to make a formal
presentation or to answer questions from the Committee members with regard to the Inquiry. Attendance at a BPV
Standards Committee meeting shall be at the expense of the Inquirer. The Inquirer’s attendance or lack of attendance at
a meeting will not be used by the Committee as a basis for acceptance or rejection of the Inquiry by the Committee. However,
if the Inquirer’s request is unclear, attendance by the Inquirer or a representative may be necessary for the Committee
to understand the request sufficiently to be able to provide an Interpretation. If the Inquirer desires to make a
presentation at a Committee meeting, the Inquirer should provide advance notice to the Committee Secretary, to ensure
time will be allotted for the presentation in the meeting agenda. The Inquirer should consider the need for additional
audiovisual equipment that might not otherwise be provided by the Committee. With sufficient advance notice to the
Committee Secretary, such equipment may be made available.
3 CODE REVISIONS OR ADDITIONS
Requests for Code revisions or additions should include the following information:
(a) Requested Revisions or Additions. For requested revisions, the Inquirer should identify those requirements of the
Code that they believe should be revised, and should submit a copy of, or relevant extracts from, the appropriate requirements
as they appear in the Code, marked up with the requested revision. For requested additions to the Code, the Inquirer
should provide the recommended wording and should clearly indicate where they believe the additions should be
located in the Code requirements.
(b) Statement of Need. The Inquirer should provide a brief explanation of the need for the revision or addition.
(c) Background Information. The Inquirer should provide background information to support the revision or addition,
including any data or changes in technology that form the basis for the request, that will allow the Committee to adequately
evaluate the requested revision or addition. Sketches, tables, figures, and graphs should be submitted, as appropriate.
The Inquirer should identify any pertinent portions of the Code that would be affected by the revision or addition
and any portions of the Code that reference the requested revised or added paragraphs.
4 CODE CASES
Requests for Code Cases should be accompanied by a statement of need and background information similar to that
described in 3(b) and 3(c), respectively, for Code revisions or additions. The urgency of the Code Case (e.g., project underway
or imminent, new procedure) should be described. In addition, it is important that the request is in connection
with equipment that will bear the ASME Single Certification Mark, with the exception of Section XI applications. The proposed
Code Case should identify the Code Section and Division, and should be written as a Question and a Reply, in the
same format as existing Code Cases. Requests for Code Cases should also indicate the applicable Code Editions and Addenda
(if applicable) to which the requested Code Case applies.
5 CODE INTERPRETATIONS
(a) Requests for Code Interpretations should be accompanied by the following information:
(1) Inquiry. The Inquirer should propose a condensed and precise Inquiry, omitting superfluous background information
and, when possible, composing the Inquiry in such a way that a “yes” or a “no” Reply, with brief limitations or
conditions, if needed, can be provided by the Committee. The proposed question should be technically and editorially
correct.
(2) Reply. The Inquirer should propose a Reply that clearly and concisely answers the proposed Inquiry question.
Preferably, the Reply should be “yes” or “no,” with brief limitations or conditions, if needed.
(3) Background Information. The Inquirer should provide any need or background information, such as described in
3(b) and 3(c), respectively, for Code revisions or additions, that will assist the Committee in understanding the proposed
Inquiry and Reply.
If the Inquirer believes a revision of the Code requirements would be helpful to support the Interpretation, the Inquirer
may propose such a revision for consideration by the Committee. In most cases, such a proposal is not necessary.
(b) Requests for Code Interpretations should be limited to an Interpretation of a particular requirement in the Code or
in a Code Case. Except with regard to interpreting a specific Code requirement, the Committee is not permitted to consider
consulting-type requests such as the following:
(1) a review of calculations, design drawings, welding qualifications, or descriptions of equipment or parts to determine
compliance with Code requirements
(2) a request for assistance in performing any Code-prescribed functions relating to, but not limited to, material
selection, designs, calculations, fabrication, inspection, pressure testing, or installation
(3) a request seeking the rationale for Code requirements
6 SUBMITTALS
(a) Submittal. Requests for Code Interpretation should preferably be submitted through the online Interpretation Submittal
Form. The form is accessible at http://go.asme.org/InterpretationRequest. Upon submittal of the form, the Inquirer
will receive an automatic e-mail confirming receipt. If the Inquirer is unable to use the online form, the
Inquirer may mail the request to the following address:
Secretary
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
Two Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990
All other Inquiries should be mailed to the Secretary of the BPV Committee at the address above. Inquiries are unlikely
to receive a response if they are not written in clear, legible English. They must also include the name of the Inquirer and
the company they represent or are employed by, if applicable, and the Inquirer’s address, telephone number, fax number,
and e-mail address, if available.
(b) Response. The Secretary of the appropriate Committee will provide a written response, via letter or e-mail, as appropriate,
to the Inquirer, upon completion of the requested action by the Committee. Inquirers may track the status of
their Interpretation Request at http://go.asme.org/Interpretations.
PERSONNEL
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees,
Subgroups, and Working Groups
SPECIFICATIONS LISTED BY MATERIALS
Corrosion-Resisting and Heat-Resisting Steels
SA-182/SA-182M Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings,
and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
SA-193/SA-193M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High-Temperature or High
Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
SA-194/SA-194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature
Service, or Both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
SA-213/SA-213M Specification for Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and
Heat-Exchanger Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
SA-216/SA-216M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
SA-217/SA-217M Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing
Parts, Suitable for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
SA-234/SA-234M Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
SA-240/SA-240M Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
SA-249/SA-249M Specification for Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat-Exchanger, and Condenser
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
SA-264 Specification for Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel-Clad Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
SA-265 Specification for Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy-Clad Steel Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
SA-268/SA-268M Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
SA-312/SA-312M Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
SA-320/SA-320M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature Service . . 469
SA-336/SA-336M Specification for Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts . . . . . . . 521
SA-351/SA-351M Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-
Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
SA-358/SA-358M Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Pipe
for High-Temperature Service and General Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
SA-369/SA-369M Specification for Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for High-
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
SA-376/SA-376M Specification for Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central-Station
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
SA-403/SA-403M Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
SA-409/SA-409M Specification for Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or High-
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
SA-426/SA-426M Specification for Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service 725
SA-437/SA-437M Specification for Stainless and Alloy-Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Specially Heat Treated for
High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
SA-451/SA-451M Specification for Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . 757
SA-479/SA-479M Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure
Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
SA-484/SA-484M Specification for General Requirements for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings . . 819
SA-515/SA-515M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
SA-564/SA-564M Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and
Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
SA-638/SA-638M Specification for Precipitation Hardening Iron Base Superalloy Bars, Forgings, and Forging
Stock for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
SA-660 Specification for Centrifugally Cast Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . 1099
SA-666 Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate,
and Flat Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
SA-691/SA-691M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion-Welded for High-Pressure
Service at High Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157
SA-705/SA-705M Specification for Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
SA-789/SA-789M Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
SA-790/SA-790M Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . 1337
SA-814/SA-814M Specification for Cold-Worked Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
SA-815/SA-815M Specification for Wrought Ferritic, Ferritic/Austenitic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel
Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
SA-995 Specification for Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for Pressure-
Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499
SA/EN 10088-2 Specification for Stainless Steels Part 2: Technical Delivery Conditions for Sheet/Plate and
Strip of Corrosion Resisting Steels for General Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1587
SA/EN 10088-3 Specification for Stainless Steel Part 3: Technical Delivery Conditions for Semi-Finished
Products, Bars, Rods, Wire, Sections, and Bright Products of Corrosion Resisting Steels
for General Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589
Methods
SA-370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
SA-435/SA-435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
SA-577/SA-577M Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination of Steel Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
SA-578/SA-578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Rolled Steel Plates for Special
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
SA-745/SA-745M Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Austenitic Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
SA-751 Specification for Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel
Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
Steel Bars
SA-6/SA-6M Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes,
and Sheet Piling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SA-29/SA-29M Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought, General Requirements for 101
SA-31 Specification for Steel Rivets and Bars for Rivets, Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
SA-276 Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
SA-311/SA-311M Specification for Cold-Drawn, Stress-Relieved Carbon Steel Bars Subject to Mechanical
Property Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
SA-479/SA-479M Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure
Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
SA-484/SA-484M Specification for General Requirements for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings . . 819
SA-564/SA-564M Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and
Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
SA-638/SA-638M Specification for Precipitation Hardening Iron Base Superalloy Bars, Forgings, and Forging
Stock for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
SA-675/SA-675M Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties 1141
SA-696 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought or Cold-Finished, Special Quality, for
Pressure Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
SA-739 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought, for Elevated Temperature or Pressure-
Containing Parts, or Both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
SA/JIS G4303 Specification for Stainless Steel Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
Steel Billets and Forgings
SA-105/SA-105M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
SA-181/SA-181M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
SA-266/SA-266M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
SA-336/SA-336M Specification for Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts . . . . . . . 521
SA-350/SA-350M Specification for Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Toughness
Testing for Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
SA-372/SA-372M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Thin-Walled Pressure Vessels . . . 645
SA-484/SA-484M Specification for General Requirements for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings . . 819
SA-508/SA-508M Specification for Quenched and Tempered Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy Steel
Forgings for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
SA-541/SA-541M Specification for Quenched and Tempered Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure
Vessel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
SA-638/SA-638M Specification for Precipitation Hardening Iron Base Superalloy Bars, Forgings, and Forging
Stock for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
SA-649/SA-649M Specification for Forged Steel Rolls, Used for Corrugating Paper Machinery . . . . . . . . . . 1089
SA-705/SA-705M Specification for Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
SA-723/SA-723M Specification for Alloy Steel Forgings for High-Strength Pressure Component Application 1211
SA-745/SA-745M Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Austenitic Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
SA-765/SA-765M Specification for Carbon Steel and Low-Alloy Steel Pressure-Vessel-Component Forgings
With Mandatory Toughness Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
SA-788/SA-788M Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
SA-836/SA-836M Specification for Titanium-Stabilized Carbon Steel Forgings for Glass-Lined Piping and
Pressure Vessel Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
SA-965/SA-965M Specification for Steel Forgings, Austenitic, for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts . . 1469
SA/EN 10222-2 Specification for Steel Forgings for Pressure Purposes Part 2: Ferritic and Martensitic
Steels With Specified Elevated Temperature Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1597
Steel Bolting Materials
SA-193/SA-193M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High-Temperature or High
Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
SA-194/SA-194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature
Service, or Both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
SA-307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength . . . . . . . . . . 445
SA-320/SA-320M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature Service . . 469
SA-325 Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
SA-354 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally
Threaded Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
SA-437/SA-437M Specification for Stainless and Alloy-Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Specially Heat Treated for
High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
SA-449 Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
SA-453/SA-453M Specification for High-Temperature Bolting, With Expansion Coefficients Comparable to
Austenitic Stainless Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
SA-540/SA-540M Specification for Alloy-Steel Bolting for Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
SA-563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
SA-574 Specification for Alloy Steel Socket-Head Cap Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
SA-962/SA-962M Specification for Common Requirements for Bolting Intended for Use at any Temperature
From Cryogenic to the Creep Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
SF-568M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners . . . . . . . 1557
Steel Castings
SA-216/SA-216M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
SA-217/SA-217M Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing
Parts, Suitable for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
SA-351/SA-351M Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-
Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
SA-352/SA-352M Specification for Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts,
Suitable for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
SA-487/SA-487M Specification for Steel Castings Suitable for Pressure Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
SA-609/SA-609M Specification for Castings, Carbon, Low-Alloy, and Martensitic Stainless Steel, Ultrasonic
Examination Thereof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
SA-667/SA-667M Specification for Centrifugally Cast Dual Metal (Gray and White Cast Iron) Cylinders . . 1121
SA-703/SA-703M Specification for Steel Castings, General Requirements, for Pressure-Containing Parts . . 1179
SA-747/SA-747M Specification for Steel Castings, Stainless, Precipitation Hardening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
SA-781/SA-781M Specification for Castings, Steel and Alloy, Common Requirements, for General Industrial
Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
SA-985/SA-985M Specification for Steel Investment Castings General Requirements, for Pressure-
Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477
SA-995 Specification for Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for Pressure-
Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499
Steel Flanges, Fittings, Valves, and Parts
SA-105/SA-105M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
SA-181/SA-181M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
SA-182/SA-182M Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings,
and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
SA-216/SA-216M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
SA-217/SA-217M Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing
Parts, Suitable for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
SA-231/SA-231M Specification for Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Spring Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
SA-232/SA-232M Specification for Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Valve Spring Quality Wire . . . . . . . . . 329
SA-234/SA-234M Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
SA-350/SA-350M Specification for Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Toughness
Testing for Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
SA-351/SA-351M Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-
Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
SA-352/SA-352M Specification for Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts,
Suitable for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
SA-403/SA-403M Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
SA-420/SA-420M Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Low-
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
SA-522/SA-522M Specification for Forged or Rolled 8 and 9% Nickel Alloy Steel Flanges, Fittings, Valves,
and Parts for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
SA-592/SA-592M Specification for High-Strength Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Steel Forged Fittings
and Parts for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
SA-815/SA-815M Specification for Wrought Ferritic, Ferritic/Austenitic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel
Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
SA-905 Specification for Steel Wire, Pressure Vessel Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
SA-960/SA-960M Specification for Common Requirements for Wrought Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
SA-961/SA-961M Specification for Common Requirements for Steel Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves, and
Parts for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
SA-985/SA-985M Specification for Steel Investment Castings General Requirements, for Pressure-
Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477
SA-995 Specification for Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for Pressure-
Containing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499
Steel Pipe
SA-53/SA-53M Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless . 141
SA-106/SA-106M Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . 177
SA-134 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (ARC)-Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and Over) . . . 189
SA-135 Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
SA-312/SA-312M Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
SA-333/SA-333M Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature Service and Other
Applications With Required Notch Toughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
SA-335/SA-335M Specification for Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . 509
SA-358/SA-358M Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Pipe
for High-Temperature Service and General Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
SA-369/SA-369M Specification for Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for High-
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
SA-376/SA-376M Specification for Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central-Station
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
SA-409/SA-409M Specification for Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or High-
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
SA-426/SA-426M Specification for Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service 725
SA-451/SA-451M Specification for Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . 757
SA-524 Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures 893
SA-530/SA-530M Specification for General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe . . . 903
SA-587 Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Low-Carbon Steel Pipe for the Chemical
Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
SA-660 Specification for Centrifugally Cast Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . 1099
SA-671/SA-671M Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
SA-672/SA-672M Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service at Moderate
Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
SA-691/SA-691M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion-Welded for High-Pressure
Service at High Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157
SA-727/SA-727M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Components with Inherent Notch
Toughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
SA-731/SA-731M Specification for Seamless, Welded Ferritic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . 1229
SA-790/SA-790M Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . 1337
SA-813/SA-813M Specification for Single- or Double-Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
SA-814/SA-814M Specification for Cold-Worked Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
SA-941 Specification for Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related Alloys, and
Ferroalloys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
SA-961/SA-961M Specification for Common Requirements for Steel Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves, and
Parts for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
SA-999/SA-999M Specification for General Requirements for Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
SA-568/SA-568M Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy,
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
SA-749/SA-749M Specification for Steel, Strip, Carbon and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled, General
Requirements for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
SA/NF A 36-215 Specification for Weldable Fine Grain Steels for Transportation of Dangerous Substances 1609
Steel Plates, Sheets, and Strip for Pressure Vessels
SA-20/SA-20M Specification for General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . 65
SA-203/SA-203M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
SA-204/SA-204M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
SA-225/SA-225M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Vanadium-Nickel . . . . . 319
SA-240/SA-240M Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
SA-263 Specification for Stainless Chromium Steel-Clad Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
SA-264 Specification for Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel-Clad Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
SA-265 Specification for Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy-Clad Steel Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
SA-285/SA-285M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile
Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
SA-299/SA-299M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
SA-302/SA-302M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Molybdenum and
Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
SA-353/SA-353M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Double-Normalized and Tempered
9% Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
SA-387/SA-387M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . 665
SA-414/SA-414M Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
SA-455/SA-455M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High-Strength Manganese . . . . . . 771
SA-480/SA-480M Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel
Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
SA-515/SA-515M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
SA-516/SA-516M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
SA-517/SA-517M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, High-Strength, Quenched and
Tempered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
SA-533/SA-533M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered,
Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
SA-537/SA-537M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel 917
SA-542/SA-542M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched-and-Tempered,
Chromium-Molybdenum, and Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
SA-543/SA-543M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered, Nickel-
Chromium-Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
SA-553/SA-553M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered 7, 8, and 9%
Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
SA-562/SA-562M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Titanium for Glass or
Diffused Metallic Coatings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
SA-612/SA-612M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High Strength, for Moderate and
Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
SA-645/SA-645M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, 5% and 51
2% Nickel Alloy Steels, Specially Heat
Treated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
SA-662/SA-662M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, for Moderate
and Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
SA-666 Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate,
and Flat Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
SA-693 Specification for Precipitation-Hardening Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
SA-724/SA-724M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, Quenched and
Tempered, for Welded Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217
SA-736/SA-736M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-Copper-
Chromium-Molybdenum-Columbium (Niobium) Alloy Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
SA-737/SA-737M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
SA-738/SA-738M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel,
for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
SA-770/SA-770M Specification for Through-Thickness Tension Testing of Steel Plates for Special
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291
SA-832/SA-832M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium 1385
SA-841/SA-841M Specification for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels, Produced by Thermo-Mechanical
Control Process (TMCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
SA-1010/SA-1010M Specification for Higher-Strength Martensitic Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . 1527
SA-1017/SA-1017M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy-Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten 1553
SA/AS 1548 Specification for Fine Grained, Weldable Steel Plates for Pressure Equipment . . . . . . . . . 1569
SA/EN 10028-2 Specification for Flat Products Made of Steels for Pressure Purposes Part 2: Non-Alloy and
Alloy Steels With Specified Elevated Temperature Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575
SA/EN 10028-3 Specification for Flat Products Made of Steels For Pressure Purposes Part 3: Weldable
Fine Grain Steels, Normalized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1579
SA/EN 10028-4 Specification for Flat Products Made of Steels For Pressure Purposes Part 4: Nickel Alloy
Steels With Specified Low Temperature Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1581
SA/EN 10028-7 Specification for Flat Products Made of Steels for Pressure Purposes Part 7: Stainless
Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585
SA/GB 713 Specification for Steel Plates for Boilers and Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599
SA/JIS G3118 Specification for Carbon Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels for Intermediate and Moderate
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Steel Tubes
SA-178/SA-178M Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese Steel
Boiler and Superheater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
SA-179/SA-179M Specification for Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
SA-192/SA-192M Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Boiler Tubes for High-Pressure Service . . . . . . . 237
SA-209/SA-209M Specification for Seamless Carbon-Molybdenum Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
SA-210/SA-210M Specification for Seamless Medium-Carbon Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes . . . . . . . 279
SA-213/SA-213M Specification for Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and
Heat-Exchanger Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
SA-214/SA-214M Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
SA-249/SA-249M Specification for Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat-Exchanger, and Condenser
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
SA-250/SA-250M Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Ferritic Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
SA-268/SA-268M Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
SA-334/SA-334M Specification for Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy-Steel Tubes for Low-
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
SA-423/SA-423M Specification for Seamless and Electric-Welded Low-Alloy Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
SA-450/SA-450M Specification for General Requirements for Carbon and Low Alloy Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . 745
SA-513 Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing 849
SA-556/SA-556M Specification for Seamless Cold-Drawn Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . 953
SA-557/SA-557M Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . 961
SA-688/SA-688M Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
SA-789/SA-789M Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
SA-803/SA-803M Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes 1347
SA-941 Specification for Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related Alloys, and
Ferroalloys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
SA-1016/SA-1016M Specification for General Requirements for Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic Alloy Steel, and
Stainless Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
SA/EN 10216-2 Specification for Seamless Steel Tubes for Pressure Purposes Part 2: Technical Delivery
Conditions for Non-Alloy and Alloy Steel Tubes With Specified Elevated Temperature
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593
SA/EN 10217-1 Specification for Welded Steel Tubes for Pressure Purposes Part 1: Technical Delivery
Conditions for Non-Alloy Steel Tubes With Specified Room Temperature Properties . 1595
Structural Steel
SA-6/SA-6M Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes,
and Sheet Piling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SA-36/SA-36M Specification for Carbon Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
SA-283/SA-283M Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates . . . . . . . . . 429
SA-572/SA-572M Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel . . . . . 1033
SA-656/SA-656M Specification for Hot-Rolled Structural Steel, High-Strength Low-Alloy Plate With Improved
Formability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
SA-1008/SA-1008M Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy
and High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517
SA-1011/SA-1011M Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength
Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability, and Ultra-High-
Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531
SA/CSA-G40.21 Specification for Structural Quality Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1571
SA/EN 10025-2 Specification for Hot Rolled Products of Structural Steels Part 2: Technical Delivery
Conditions for Non-Alloy Structural Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573
SA/IS 2062 Specification for Steel for General Structural Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
Wrought Iron, Cast Iron, and Malleable Iron
SA-47/SA-47M Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
SA-278/SA-278M Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Pressure Containing Parts for Temperatures up to
650°F (350°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
SA-395/SA-395M Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated
Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
SA-476/SA-476M Specification for Ductile Iron Castings for Paper Mill Dryer Rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
SA-748/SA-748M Specification for Statically Cast Chilled White Iron-Gray Iron Dual Metal Rolls for Pressure
Vessel Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
SA-834 Specification for Common Requirements for Iron Castings for General Industrial Use . . 1391
SA-874/SA-874M Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Castings Suitable for Low-Temperature Service . . 1411
SA/JIS G5504 Specification for Heavy-Walled Ferritic Spheroidal Graphite Iron Castings for Low Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607
SPECIFICATION REMOVAL
From time to time, it becomes necessary to remove specifications from this Part of Section II. This occurs because the
sponsoring society (e.g., ASTM, AWS, CEN) has notified ASME that the specification has either been replaced with another
specification, or that there is no known use and production of a material. Removal of a specification from this Section
also results in concurrent removal of the same specification from Section IX and from all of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Construction Codes that reference the material. This action effectively prohibits further use of the material
in ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel construction.
The following specifications will be dropped from this Section in the next Edition, unless information concerning current
production and use of the material is received before December 1 of this year:
None in this Edition.
If you are currently using and purchasing new material to this specification for ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
construction, and if discontinuance of this specification would present a hardship, please notify the Secretary of the
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Errata to the BPV Code may be posted on the ASME website to provide corrections to incorrectly published items, or to
correct typographical or grammatical errors in the BPV Code. Such Errata shall be used on the date posted.
Information regarding Special Notices and Errata is published by ASME at http://go.asme.org/BPVCerrata.
Changes given below are identified on the pages by a margin note, (19), placed next to the affected area.
The Record Numbers listed below are explained in more detail in “List of Changes in Record Number Order” following
this Summary of Changes.
Page Location Change (Record Number)
xi List of Sections Updated
xiii Foreword Penultimate paragraph revised
xv Statement of Policy on the
Use of the ASME Single
Certification Mark and
Code Authorization in
Advertising
Revised
xv Statement of Policy on the
Use of ASME Marking to
Identify Manufactured
Items
Revised
xvi Submittal of Technical
Inquiries to the Boiler
and Pressure Vessel
Standards Committees
In para. 4, third sentence revised
xix Personnel Updated
xli ASTM Personnel Updated
xliii Specification Listed by
Materials
Updated
1 SA-6/SA-6M Revised (18-854)
65 SA-20/SA-20M Revised (17-3117)
177 SA-106/SA-106M Table 2 Note A “[mm2]” and “[50 mm2]” corrected by errata to
“[1 mm2]” and “[500 mm2],” respectively (12-451)
221 SA-182/SA-182M Revised (18-613)
267 SA-203/SA-203M Revised (17-2912)
271 SA-204/SA-204M Revised (17-2913)
285 SA-213/SA-213M Revised (18-614)
319 SA-225/SA-225M Revised (17-2914)
335 SA-234/SA-234M Revised (18-615)
345 SA-240/SA-240M Revised (17-1174)
361 SA-249/SA-249M Revised (17-2504)
Page Location Change (Record Number)
433 SA-285/SA-285M Revised (17-2915)
437 SA-299/SA-299M Revised (17-2916)
441 SA-302/SA-302M Revised (17-2917)
487 SA-333/SA-333M Revised (17-3107)
509 SA-335/SA-335M Revised (18-616)
521 SA-336/SA-336M Revised (18-617)
557 SA-353/SA-353M Revised (17-2918)
569 SA-358/SA-358M Revised (15-2836)
579 SA-369/SA-369M Revised (18-618)
665 SA-387/SA-387M Revised (17-2919)
703 SA-414/SA-414M Paragraph 1.3 revised (15-2400)
731 SA-435/SA-435M Withdrawn from II-A, the latest adopted edition of this specification
may be found in Section V (18-1851)
783 SA-479/SA-479M Revised (15-1406)
793 SA-480/SA-480M Revised (17-1175)
819 SA-484/SA-484M Revised (17-1177)
875 SA-515/SA-515M Revised (17-2927)
879 SA-516/SA-516M Revised (17-2928)
883 SA-517/SA-517M Revised (17-2929)
949 SA-553/SA-553M Revised (17-2930)
1033 SA-572/SA-572M Revised (18-855)
1047 SA-577/SA-577M Withdrawn from II-A, the latest adopted edition of this specification
may be found in Section V (18-1852)
1049 SA-578/SA-578M Withdrawn from II-A, the latest adopted edition of this specification
may be found in Section V (18-1853)
1105 SA-662/SA-662M Revised (17-2933)
1157 SA-691/SA-691M SA-691 redesignated as SA-691/SA-691M and revised (18-619)
1235 SA-736/SA-736M Title and spec revised (17-2934)
1239 SA-737/SA-737M Revised (17-2935)
1253 SA-745/SA-745M Withdrawn from II-A, the latest adopted edition of this specification
may be found in Section V (16-2231)
1347 SA-803/SA-803M Revised (17-3108)
1385 SA-832/SA-832M (1) Title editorially revised
(2) Revised (17-2936)
1401 SA-841/SA-841M Revised (17-2937)
1505 SA-999/SA-999M Revised (18-1620)
1541 SA-1016/SA-1016M Revised (17-2506)
1553 SA-1017/SA-1017M Revised (17-2938)
Page Location Change (Record Number)
1569 SA/AS 1548 Revised (16-437, 17-586)
1575 SA/EN 10028-2 Revised (16-437, 17-2864, 18-155, 18-1992)
1579 SA/EN 10028-3 Revised (16-437, 17-2864, 18-156)
1581 SA/EN 10028-4 Revised (16-437, 17-2864, 18-157)
1585 SA/EN 10028-7 Revised (16-437, 17-717)
1587 SA/EN 10088-2 Revised (16-437)
1589 SA/EN 10088-3 Revised (16-437)
1593 SA/EN 10216-2 Revised (16-437)
1597 SA/EN 10222-2 Revised (17-2862)
1599 SA/GB 713 Revised (16-437)
1603 SA/JIS G3118 Revised (16-437, 17-2864, 18-159)
1605 SA/JIS G4303 (1) Subtitle editorially revised
(2) Revised (16-437)
1607 SA/JIS G5504 (1) Subtitle editorially revised
(2) Revised (16-437)
1609 SA/NF A 36-215 Revised (17-2864)
1614 Table II-200-1 (1) Updated (16-437, 17-717, 17-2875)
(2) For “SA-240/SA-240M” subtitle corrected by errata (15-2376)
(3) For “SA-691” updated to dual “SA-691/SA-691M” (18-619)
1622 Table II-200-2 Updated (16-437, 15-876, 17-717, 17-2862, 17-2875, 18-155, 18-156,
18-1992)
1626 IV-100 Fourth para. revised (17-2155)
1627 Table IV-100-1 Added (17-2155)
1628 IV-600 Definitions of hot isostatically pressed component lot and powder
blend added (17-2155)
1628 IV-700 Three paragraphs added after the penultimate paragraph (17-2155)
1636 Nonmandatory
Appendix A
Revised (18-1769)
LIST OF CHANGES IN RECORD NUMBER ORDER
Record Number Change
12-451 Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
15-1406 Updated SA-479/SA-479M to later 15 version of ASTM A479/A479M.
15-2376 Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
15-2400 Editorially corrected to change the reference in SA-414/SA-414M, para. 1.3, from 5.1.4 to 5.1.3.
15-2836 Updated SA-358/SA-358M to later 15 version of ASTM A358/A358M.
16-437 Added new additional requirements for non-ASTM specifications prohibiting mechanical properties
(yield strength, tensile strength, and elongation) by agreement between the material Producer
and the Customer, and editorially revised.
16-1165 Updated SA-484/SA-484M to later 16 version of ASTM A484/A484M.
16-2231 Removed SA-745/SA-745M from Section II, Part A, and replaced with a cover page directing the
user to Section V.
17-586 SA/AS 1548 made Appendix D on interchangeability of grades not applicable.
17-717 Updated SA/EN 10028-7 to later 2016 version of EN 10028-7 as well as Table II-200-2.
17-1174 Updated SA-240/SA-240M to later 17 version of ASTM A240/A240M.
17-1175 Updated SA-480/SA-480M to later 17 version of ASTM A480/A480M.
17-1177 Updated SA-484/SA-484M to later 18 version of ASTM A484/A484M.
17-2155 Revised Mandatory Appendix IV to include provision for wrought allowable stresses to be applied
to HIP powder metallurgy material/components of the same grade in the timeindependent
range.
17-2503 Updated SA-213/SA-213M to later 17 version of ASTM A213/A213M as well as Table II-200-1.
17-2504 Updated SA-249/SA-249M to later 16a version of ASTM A249/A249M as well as Table II-200-1.
17-2505 Updated SA-999/SA-999M to later 17 version of ASTM A999/A999M as well as Table II-200-1.
17-2506 Updated SA-1016/SA-1016M to later 17a version of ASTM A1016/A1016M as well as Table
II-200-1.
17-2862 Updated SA/EN 10222-2 to later 2017 version of EN 10222-2 as well as Table II-200-2.
17-2864 Cover sheets for the following specifications:
Revised SA/JIS G3118, SA/NF A 36-215, SA/EN 10028-2, SA/EN 10028-3, and SA/EN 10028-4
to include “G” marking for “green” material in accordance with SA-20/SA-20M, para. 13.1.2 and
applicable marking as specified by the international parent material specification for subsequent
heat treatment.
17-2875 Deleted Book Section, Nuclear Code Case, and Non-nuclear Code Case columns from Tables
II-200-1 and II-200-2 in Mandatory Appendix II in Sections II-A and II-B.
17-2912 Updated SA-203/SA-203M to later 17 version of ASTM A203/A203M. Revised Scope to remove
perceived guidelines for thickness.
17-2913 Updated SA-204/SA-204M to later 17 version of ASTM A204/A240M. Revised Scope to remove
perceived guidelines for thickness. Provision to allow for tempering added to heat treatment.
17-2914 Updated SA-225/SA-225M to later 17 version of ASTM A225/A225M. Revised Scope to remove
perceived guidelines for thickness.
17-2915 Updated SA-285/SA-285M to later 17 version of ASTM A285/A285M. Revised Scope to remove
outdated thickness restrictions and Supplementary Requirements updated to include ultrasonic
standards.
17-2916 Updated SA-299/SA-299M to later 17 version of ASTM A299/A299M. Revised Scope to remove
perceived guidelines for thickness.
17-2917 Updated SA-302/SA-302M to later 17 version of ASTM A302/A302M. Revised Scope to remove
perceived guidelines for thickness. Provision to allow for tempering added to heat treatment.
Added ellipsis to Table 1 for Nickel, Grades A and B.
17-2918 Updated SA-353/SA-353M to later 17 version of ASTM A353/A353M. Revised Scope to remove
perceived guidelines for thickness.
Record Number Change
17-2919 Updated SA-387/SA-387M to later 17a version of ASTM A387/A387M. A supplementary requirement
introduced in A387/A387M-17 for restricted composition of Grade 91 was removed
and introduced into the chemical table as Type 2 with the current Grade 91 listed as Type 1 to
accommodate Code Case 2864. Removed Grades 21L and 22L as being obsolete. Introduced
niobium as equivalent to columbium where it appears.
17-2927 Updated SA-515/SA-515M to later 17 version of ASTM A515/A515M. Revised Scope to remove
perceived guidelines for thickness.
17-2928 Updated SA-516/SA-516M to later 17 version of ASTM A516/A516M. Revised Scope to remove
perceived guidelines for thickness.
17-2929 Updated SA-517/SA-517M to later 17 version of ASTM A517/A517M. Added niobium as being
equivalent to columbium where it appears.
17-2930 Updated SA-553/SA-553M to later 17 version of ASTM A553/A553M. Added niobium as being
equivalent to columbium where it appears.
17-2933 Updated SA-662/SA-662M to later 17 version of ASTM A662/A662M. Revised Scope to remove
perceived guidelines for thickness.
17-2934 Updated SA-736/SA-736M to later 17 version of ASTM A736/A736M. Revised Scope to remove
perceived guidelines for thickness. Added niobium as equivalent to columbium where it appears
including the title.
17-2935 Updated SA-737/SA-737M to later 17 version of ASTM A737/A737M. Added niobium as being
equivalent to columbium where it appears.
17-2936 Updated SA-832/SA-832M to later 17 version of ASTM A832/A832M. Revised Scope to remove
perceived guidelines for thickness. Added niobium as equivalent to columbium where it appears.
17-2937 Updated SA-841/SA-841M to later 17 version of ASTM A841/A841M. Added niobium as being
equivalent to columbium where it appears.
17-2938 Updated SA-1017/SA-1017M to later 17 version of ASTM A1017/A1017M. Added niobium as
being equivalent to columbium where it appears.
17-3107 Updated SA-333/SA-333M to later 16 version of ASTM A333/A333M as well as Table II-200-1.
17-3108 Updated SA-803/SA-803M to later 16 version of ASTM A803/A803M as well as Table II-200-1.
17-3117 Updated SA-20/SA-20M to later 18 version of ASTM A20/A20M. Added niobium as being
equivalent to columbium where it appears. Added definitions to Terminology.
18-155 Updated SA/EN 10028-2 to later 2017 version of EN 10028-2 as well as Table II-200-2.
18-156 Updated SA/EN 10028-3 to later 2017 version of EN 10028-3 as well as Table II-200-2.
18-157 Updated SA/EN 10028-4 to later 2017 version of EN 10028-4 as well as Table II-200-2.
18-159 Updated SA/JIS G3118 to later 2017 version of JIS G3118 as well as Table II-200-2.
18-613 Updated SA-182/SA-182M to later 2018 version of ASTM A182/A182M. Revised current Grade
91 to Grade 91 Type 1 and added the newly approved Type 2 to reflect the requirements of
Code Case 2864.
18-614 Updated SA-213/SA-213M to later 18 version of ASTM A213/A213M. Revised current Grade 91
to Grade 91 Type 1 and added the newly approved Type 2 to reflect the requirements of Code
Case 2864.
18-615 Updated SA-234/SA-234M to later 18 version of ASTM A234/A234M. Revised current Grade 91
to Grade 91 Type 1 and added the newly approved Type 2 to reflect the requirements of Code
Case 2864.
18-616 Updated SA-235/SA-235M to later 18 version of ASTM A235/A235M. Revised current Grade 91
to Grade 91 Type 1 and added the newly approved Type 2 to reflect the requirements of Code
Case 2864. In addition the ASTM revision in 2018 contained an error in that one approved ballot
item removed Note D in Table 2 but another approved ballot item still referred to the Note.
The proposed adoption fixed the mistake.
18-617 Updated SA-336/SA-336M to later 18 version of ASTM A336/A336M. Revised current Grade 91
to Grade 91, Type 1 and added the newly approved Type 2 to reflect the requirements of Code
Case 2864.
18-618 Updated SA-369/SA-369M to later 18 version of ASTM A369/A369M. Revised current Grade 91
to Grade 91, Type 1 and added the newly approved Type 2 to reflect the requirements of Code
Case 2864.
Record Number Change
18-619 Updated SA-691/SA-691M to later 18 version of ASTM A691/A691M. Specification
A387/A387M now includes provisions for Type 1 and Type 2 and has been added to
A691/A691M.
18-854 Updated SA-6/SA-6M to later 17a version of ASTM A6/A6M.
18-855 For SA-572/SA-572M, lowered phosphorous and sulfur to 0.03 max. in Table 2. Added Note I to
Table 2 to permit 0.04 max. phosphorous and 0.05 max sulfur for structural shapes, steel piling,
bars, and plate widths up to 15 in. Included Note for carbon and manganese relationship for
thinner plates.
18-1620 Updated SA-999/SA-999M to later 18 version of ASTM A999/A999M. Revised
SA-999/SA-999M to make test reports and certificates of compliance for the product specifications
(Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe) referenced by SA-999/SA-999M.
18-1769 Updated address for the Japanese Standards Association in Nonmandatory Appendix A.
18-1851 Removed SA-435/SA-435M from Section II, Part A, and replaced it with a cover page directing
the user to Section V.
18-1852 Removed SA-577/SA-577M from Section II, Part A, and replaced it with a cover page directing
the user to Section V.
18-1853 Removed SA-578/SA-578M from Section II, Part A, and replaced it with a cover page directing
the user to Section V.
18-1992 For SA/EN 10028-2, prohibited normalizing rolling as a replacement of normalizing for steel
plates of Grade 16Mo3.
CROSS-REFERENCING AND STYLISTIC CHANGES IN THE BOILER
AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE
There have been structural and stylistic changes to BPVC, starting with the 2011 Addenda, that should be noted to aid
navigating the contents. The following is an overview of the changes:
Subparagraph Breakdowns/Nested Lists Hierarchy
• First-level breakdowns are designated as (a), (b), (c), etc., as in the past.
• Second-level breakdowns are designated as (1), (2), (3), etc., as in the past.
• Third-level breakdowns are now designated as (-a), (-b), (-c), etc.
• Fourth-level breakdowns are now designated as (-1), (-2), (-3), etc.
• Fifth-level breakdowns are now designated as (+a), (+b), (+c), etc.
• Sixth-level breakdowns are now designated as (+1), (+2), etc.
Footnotes
With the exception of those included in the front matter (roman-numbered pages), all footnotes are treated as endnotes.
The endnotes are referenced in numeric order and appear at the end of each BPVC section/subsection.
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees has been moved to the front
matter. This information now appears in all Boiler Code Sections (except for Code Case books).
Cross-References
It is our intention to establish cross-reference link functionality in the current edition and moving forward. To facilitate
this, cross-reference style has changed. Cross-references within a subsection or subarticle will not include the designator/
identifier of that subsection/subarticle. Examples follow:
• (Sub-)Paragraph Cross-References. The cross-references to subparagraph breakdowns will follow the hierarchy of
the designators under which the breakdown appears.
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) and is referenced in X.1(c)(1), it will be referenced as (-a).
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.1(c)(2), it will be referenced as (1)(-a).
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.1(e)(1), it will be referenced as (c)(1)(-a).
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.2(c)(2), it will be referenced as X.1(c)(1)(-a).
• Equation Cross-References. The cross-references to equations will follow the same logic. For example, if eq. (1) appears
in X.1(a)(1) but is referenced in X.1(b), it will be referenced as eq. (a)(1)(1). If eq. (1) appears in X.1(a)(1) but
is referenced in a different subsection/subarticle/paragraph, it will be referenced as eq. X.1(a)(1)(1).
lviii
ð19Þ
SPECIFICATION FOR GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
ROLLED STRUCTURAL STEEL BARS, PLATES, SHAPES,
AND SHEET PILING
SA-6/SA-6M
(Identical with ASTM Specification A6/A6M-17a.)
ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
1
SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
2
Standard??Specification??for
General??Requirements??for??Rolled??Structural??Steel??Bars,
Plates,??Shapes,??and??Sheet??Piling

1. Scope
   1.1 This general requirements specification covers a group
   of common requirements that, unless otherwise specified in the
   applicable product specification, apply to rolled structural steel
   bars, plates, shapes, and sheet piling covered by each of the
   following product specifications issued by ASTM:
   ASTM
   Designation
   Title of Specification
   A36/A36M Carbon Structural Steel
   A131/A131M Structural Steel for Ships
   A242/A242M High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
   A283/A283M Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates
   A328/A328M Steel Sheet Piling
   A514/A514M High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel
   Plate, Suitable for Welding
   A529/A529M High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality
   A572/A572M High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel
   A573/A573M Structural Carbon Steel Plates of Improved Toughness
   A588/A588M High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel, up to 50 ksi [345
   MPa] Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corrosion
   Resistance
   A633/A633M Normalized High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plates
   A656/A656M Hot-Rolled Structural Steel, High-Strength Low-Alloy Plate
   with Improved Formability
   A690/A690M High-Strength Low-Alloy Nickel, Copper, Phosphorus Steel
   H-Piles and Sheet Piling with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
   for Use in Marine Environments
   A709/A709M Structural Steel for Bridges
   A710/A710M Precipitation-Strengthened Low-Carbon Nickel-Copper-
   Chromium-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Structural Steel
   Plates
   A769/A769M Carbon and High-Strength Electric Resistance Forge-
   Welded Steel Structural Shapes
   A786/A786M Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and
   Alloy Steel Floor Plates
   A827/A827M Plates, Carbon Steel, for Forging and Similar Applications
   A829/A829M Alloy Structural Steel Plates
   A830/A830M Plates, Carbon Steel, Structural Quality, Furnished to
   Chemical Composition Requirements
   A857/A857M Steel Sheet Piling, Cold Formed, Light Gage
   A871/A871M High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate With Atmospheric
   Corrosion Resistance
   A913/A913M High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural Quality,
   Produced by Quenching and Self-Tempering Process
   (QST)
   A945/A945M High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate with Low
   Carbon and Restricted Sulfur for Improved Weldability,
   Formability, and Toughness
   A950/A950M Fusion-Bonded Epoxy-Coated Structural Steel H-Piles and
   Sheet Piling
   A992/A992M Structural Steel Shapes
   A1043/A1043M Structural Steel with Low Yield to Tensile Ratio for Use in
   Buildings
   A1066/A1066M High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate Produced by
   Thermo-Mechanical Controlled Process (TMCP)
   1.2 Annex A1 lists permitted variations in dimensions and
   mass (Note 1) in SI units. The values listed are not exact
   conversions of the values in Tables 1 to 31 inclusive but are,
   instead, rounded or rationalized values. Conformance to Annex
   A1 is mandatory when the “M” specification designation is
   used.
   NOTE 1—The term “weight” is used when inch-pound units are the
   standard; however, under SI, the preferred term is “mass.”
   1.3 Annex A2 lists the dimensions of some shape profiles.
   1.4 Appendix X1 provides information on coil as a source
   of structural products.
   1.5 Appendix X2 provides information on the variability of
   tensile properties in plates and structural shapes.
   1.6 Appendix X3 provides information on weldability.
   1.7 Appendix X4 provides information on cold bending of
   plates, including suggested minimum inside radii for cold
   bending.
   1.8 This general requirements specification also covers a
   group of supplementary requirements that are applicable to
   several of the above product specifications as indicated therein.
   Such requirements are provided for use where additional
   testing or additional restrictions are required by the purchaser,
   and apply only where specified individually in the purchase
   order.
   ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
   3
   1.9 In case of any conflict in requirements, the requirements
   of the applicable product specification prevail over those of this
   general requirements specification.
   1.10 Additional requirements that are specified in the purchase
   order and accepted by the supplier are permitted,
   provided that such requirements do not negate any of the
   requirements of this general requirements specification or the
   applicable product specification.
   1.11 For purposes of determining conformance with this
   general requirements specification and the applicable product
   specification, values are to be rounded to the nearest unit in the
   right-hand place of figures used in expressing the limiting
   values in accordance with the rounding method of Practice
   E29.
   1.12 The text of this general requirements specification
   contains notes or footnotes, or both, that provide explanatory
   material. Such notes and footnotes, excluding those in tables
   and figures, do not contain any mandatory requirements.
   1.13 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
   are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
   SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
   system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system is to
   be used independently of the other, without combining values
   in any way.
   1.14 This general requirements specification and the applicable
   product specification are expressed in both inch-pound
   units and SI units; however, unless the order specifies the
   applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the structural
   product is furnished to inch-pound units.
   1.15 This standard does not purport to address all of the
   safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
   responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appropriate
   safety, health, and environmental practices and determine
   the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
   1.16 This international standard was developed in accordance
   with internationally recognized principles on standardization
   established in the Decision on Principles for the
   Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
   issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
   Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
   2.1 ASTM Standards:
   A131/A131M Specification for Structural Steel for Ships
   A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
   of Steel Products
   A673/A673M Specification for Sampling Procedure for Impact
   Testing of Structural Steel
   A700 Guide for Packaging, Marking, and Loading Methods
   for Steel Products for Shipment
   A751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical
   Analysis of Steel Products
   A829/A829M Specification for Alloy Structural Steel Plates
   A941 Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related
   Alloys, and Ferroalloys
   E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
   Determine Conformance with Specifications
   E112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
   E208 Test Method for Conducting Drop-Weight Test to
   Determine Nil-Ductility Transition Temperature of Ferritic
   Steels
   2.2 American Welding Society Standards:
   A5.1/A5.1M Mild Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes
   A5.5/A5.5M Low-Alloy Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes
   A5.17/A5.17M Specification For Carbon Steel Electrodes
   And Fluxes For Submerged Arc Welding
   A5.18/A5.18M Specification For Carbon Steel Electrodes
   And Rods For Gas Shielded Arc Welding
   A5.20/A5.20M Carbon Steel Electrodes For Flux Cored Arc
   Welding
   A5.23/A5.23M Low Alloy Steel Electrodes And Fluxes For
   Submerged Arc Welding
   A5.28/A5.28M Specification For Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
   And Rods For Gas Shielded Arc Welding
   A5.29/A5.29M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
   for Flux Cored Arc Welding
   D1.1/D1.1M Structural Welding Code Steel
   2.3 U.S. Military Standards:
   MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
   MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products Preparation for Shipment
   and Storage
   2.4 U.S. Federal Standard:
   Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipments (Civil Agencies)
   2.5 American Society of Mechanical Engineers Code:
   ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX
3. Terminology
   3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
   3.1.1 Plates (other than floor plates)—Flat, hot-rolled steel,
   ordered to thickness or weight [mass] and typically width and
   length, commonly classified as follows:
   3.1.1.1 When Ordered to Thickness:
   (1) Over 8 in. [200 mm] in width and 0.230 in. [6 mm] or
   over in thickness.
   (2) Over 48 in. [1200 mm] in width and 0.180 in. [4.5 mm]
   or over in thickness.
   3.1.1.2 When Ordered to Weight [Mass]:
   (1) Over 8 in. [200 mm] in width and 9.392 lb/ft2 [47.10
   kg /m2] or heavier.
   (2) Over 48 in. [1200 mm] in width and 7.350 lb/ft2 [35.32
   kg /m2] or heavier.
   3.1.1.3 Discussion—Steel products are available in various
   thickness, width, and length combinations depending upon
   equipment and processing capabilities of various manufacturers
   and processors. Historic limitations of a product based upon
   dimensions (thickness, width, and length) do not take into
   SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
   4
   account current production and processing capabilities. To
   qualify any product to a particular product specification requires
   all appropriate and necessary tests be performed and that
   the results meet the limits prescribed in that product specification.
   If the necessary tests required by a product specification
   cannot be conducted, the product cannot be qualified to that
   specification. This general requirement standard contains permitted
   variations for the commonly available sizes. Permitted
   variations for other sizes are subject to agreement between the
   customer and the manufacturer or processor, whichever is
   applicable.
   3.1.1.4 Slabs, sheet bars, and skelp, though frequently
   falling in the foregoing size ranges, are not classed as plates.
   3.1.1.5 Coils are excluded from qualification to the applicable
   product specification until they are decoiled, leveled or
   straightened, formed (if applicable), cut to length, and, if
   required, properly tested by the processor in accordance with
   ASTM specification requirements (see Sections 9 – 15, 18, and
   19 and the applicable product specification).
   3.1.2 Shapes (Flanged Sections):
   3.1.2.1 structural-size shapes—rolled flanged sections having
   at least one dimension of the cross section 3 in. [75 mm] or
   greater.
   3.1.2.2 bar-size shapes—rolled flanged sections having a
   maximum dimension of the cross section less than 3 in. [75
   mm].
   3.1.2.3 “W” shapes—doubly-symmetric, wide-flange
   shapes with inside flange surfaces that are substantially parallel.
   3.1.2.4 “HP” shapes—are wide-flange shapes generally
   used as bearing piles whose flanges and webs are of the same
   nominal thickness and whose depth and width are essentially
   the same.
   3.1.2.5 “S” shapes—doubly-symmetric beam shapes with
   inside flange surfaces that have a slope of approximately
   162/3 %.
   3.1.2.6 “M” shapes—doubly-symmetric shapes that cannot
   be classified as “W,” “S,” or “HP” shapes.
   3.1.2.7 “C” shapes—channels with inside flange surfaces
   that have a slope of approximately 162/3 %.
   3.1.2.8 “MC” shapes—channels that cannot be classified as
   “C” shapes.
   3.1.2.9 “L” shapes—shapes having equal-leg and unequalleg
   angles.
   3.1.3 sheet piling—rolled steel sections that are capable of
   being interlocked, forming a continuous wall when individual
   pieces are driven side by side.
   3.1.4 bars—rounds, squares, and hexagons, of all sizes; flats
   13/64 in. (0.203 in.) and over [over 5 mm] in specified thickness,
   not over 6 in. [150 mm] in specified width; and flats 0.230 in.
   and over [over 6 mm] in specified thickness, over 6 to 8 in.
   [150 to 200 mm] inclusive, in specified width.
   3.1.5 exclusive—when used in relation to ranges, as for
   ranges of thickness in the tables of permissible variations in
   dimensions, is intended to exclude only the greater value of the
   range. Thus, a range from 60 to 72 in. [1500 to 1800 mm]
   exclusive includes 60 in. [1500 mm], but does not include 72
   in. [1800 mm].
   3.1.6 rimmed steel—steel containing sufficient oxygen to
   give a continuous evolution of carbon monoxide during
   solidification, resulting in a case or rim of metal virtually free
   of voids.
   3.1.7 semi-killed steel—incompletely deoxidized steel containing
   sufficient oxygen to form enough carbon monoxide
   during solidification to offset solidification shrinkage.
   3.1.8 capped steel—rimmed steel in which the rimming
   action is limited by an early capping operation. Capping is
   carried out mechanically by using a heavy metal cap on a
   bottle-top mold or chemically by an addition of aluminum or
   ferrosilicon to the top of the molten steel in an open-top mold.
   3.1.9 killed steel—steel deoxidized, either by addition of
   strong deoxidizing agents or by vacuum treatment, to reduce
   the oxygen content to such a level that no reaction occurs
   between carbon and oxygen during solidification.
   3.1.10 mill edge—the normal edge produced by rolling
   between horizontal finishing rolls. A mill edge does not
   conform to any definite contour. Mill edge plates have two mill
   edges and two trimmed edges.
   3.1.11 universal mill edge—the normal edge produced by
   rolling between horizontal and vertical finishing rolls. Universal
   mill plates, sometimes designated UM Plates, have two
   universal mill edges and two trimmed edges.
   3.1.12 sheared edge—the normal edge produced by shearing.
   Sheared edge plates are trimmed on all edges.
   3.1.13 gas cut edge—the edge produced by gas flame
   cutting.
   3.1.14 special cut edge—usually the edge produced by gas
   flame cutting involving special practices such as pre-heating or
   post-heating, or both, in order to minimize stresses, avoid
   thermal cracking and reduce the hardness of the gas cut edge.
   In special instances, special cut edge is used to designate an
   edge produced by machining.
   3.1.15 sketch—when used to describe a form of plate,
   denotes a plate other than rectangular, circular, or semicircular.
   3.1.16 normalizing—a heat treating process in which a steel
   plate is reheated to a uniform temperature above the upper
   critical temperature and then cooled in air to below the
   transformation range.
   3.1.17 plate-as-rolled—when used in relation to the location
   and number of tests, the term refers to the unit plate rolled from
   a slab or directly from an ingot. It does not refer to the
   condition of the plate.
   3.1.18 fine grain practice—a steelmaking practice that is
   intended to produce a killed steel that is capable of meeting the
   requirements for fine austenitic grain size.
   3.1.18.1 Discussion—It normally involves the addition of
   one or more austenitic grain refining elements in amounts that
   have been established by the steel producer as being sufficient.
   Austenitic grain refining elements include, but are not limited
   to, aluminum, columbium (niobium), titanium, and vanadium.
   3.1.19 structural product—a hot-rolled steel plate, shape,
   sheet piling, or bar.
   ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
   5
   3.1.20 coil—hot-rolled steel in coiled form that is intended
   to be processed into a finished structural product.
   3.1.21 manufacturer—the organization that directly controls
   the conversion of steel ingots, slabs, blooms, or billets, by
   hot-rolling, into an as-rolled structural product or into coil; and
   for structural products produced from as-rolled structural
   products, the organization that directly controls, or is responsible
   for, the operations involved in finishing the structural
   product.
   3.1.21.1 Discussion—Such finishing operations include leveling
   or straightening, hot forming or cold forming (if
   applicable), welding (if applicable), cutting to length, testing,
   inspection, conditioning, heat treatment (if applicable),
   packaging, marking, loading for shipment, and certification.
   3.1.22 processor—the organization that directly controls, or
   is responsible for, the operations involved in the processing of
   coil into a finished structural product. Such processing operations
   include decoiling, leveling or straightening, hot-forming
   or cold-forming (if applicable), welding (if applicable), cutting
   to length, testing, inspection, conditioning, heat treatment (if
   applicable), packaging, marking, loading for shipment, and
   certification.
   3.1.22.1 Discussion—The processing operations need not be
   done by the organization that did the hot rolling of the coil. If
   only one organization is involved in the hot rolling and
   processing operations, that organization is termed the manufacturer
   for the hot rolling operation and the processor for the
   processing operations. If more than one organization is involved
   in the hot rolling and processing operations, the
   organization that did the hot rolling is termed the manufacturer
   and an organization that does one or more processing operations
   is termed a processor.
   3.2 Refer to Terminology A941 for additional definitions of
   terms used in this standard.
4. Ordering Information
   4.1 Information items to be considered, if appropriate, for
   inclusion in purchase orders are as follows:
   4.1.1 ASTM product specification designation (see 1.1) and
   year-date;
   4.1.2 Name of structural product (plate, shape, bar, or sheet
   piling);
   4.1.3 Shape designation, or size and thickness or diameter;
   4.1.4 Grade, class, and type designation, if applicable;
   4.1.5 Condition (see Section 6), if other than as-rolled;
   4.1.6 Quantity (weight [mass] or number of pieces);
   4.1.7 Length;
   4.1.8 Exclusion of either structural product produced from
   coil or structural product produced from an as-rolled structural
   product (see 5.4 and Appendix X1), if applicable;
   4.1.9 Heat treatment requirements (see 6.2 and 6.3), if any;
   4.1.10 Testing for fine austenitic grain size (see 8.3.2);
   4.1.11 Mechanical property test report requirements (see
   Section 14), if any;
   4.1.12 Special packaging, marking, and loading for shipment
   requirements (see Section 19), if any;
   4.1.13 Supplementary requirements, if any, including any
   additional requirements called for in the supplementary requirements;
   4.1.14 End use, if there are any end-use-specific requirements
   (see 18.1, 11.3.4, Table 22 or Table A1.22, and Table 24
   or Table A1.24);
   4.1.15 Special requirements (see 1.10), if any; and
   4.1.16 Repair welding requirements (see 9.5), if any.
5. Materials and Manufacture
   5.1 The steel shall be made in a basic-oxygen or electric-arc
   furnace, possibly followed by additional refining in a ladle
   metallurgy furnace (LMF) or secondary melting by vacuumarc
   remelting (VAR) or electroslag remelting (ESR).
   5.2 The steel shall be killed.
   5.3 The steel shall be strand cast or cast in stationary molds.
   5.3.1 Strand Cast:
   5.3.1.1 When heats of the same nominal chemical composition
   are consecutively strand cast at one time, the heat
   number assigned to the cast product need not be changed until
   all of the steel in the cast product is from the following heat.
   5.3.1.2 When two consecutively strand cast heats have
   different nominal chemical composition ranges, the manufacturer
   shall remove the transition material by an established
   procedure that positively separates the grades.
   5.4 Structural products shall be produced from an as-rolled
   structural product or from coil.
   5.5 Where part of a heat is rolled into an as-rolled structural
   product and the balance of the heat is rolled into coil, each part
   shall be tested separately.
   5.6 Structural products produced from coil shall not contain
   splice welds, unless previously approved by the purchaser.
6. Heat Treatment
   6.1 Where the structural product is required to be heat
   treated, such heat treatment shall be performed by the
   manufacturer, the processor, or the fabricator, unless otherwise
   specified in the applicable product specification.
   NOTE 2—When no heat treatment is required, the manufacturer or
   processor has the option of heat treating the structural product by
   normalizing, stress relieving, or normalizing then stress relieving to meet
   the applicable product specification.
   6.2 Where the heat treatment is to be performed by other
   than the manufacturer, the order shall so state.
   6.2.1 Where the heat treatment is to be performed by other
   than the manufacturer, the structural products shall be accepted
   on the basis of tests made on test specimens taken from full
   thickness test coupons heat treated in accordance with the
   requirements specified in the applicable product specification
   or in the purchase order. If the heat-treatment temperatures are
   not specified, the manufacturer or processor shall heat treat the
   test coupons under conditions the manufacturer or processor
   considers appropriate, provided that the purchaser is informed
   of the procedure followed in heat treating the test coupons.
   6.3 Where the heat treatment is to be performed by the
   manufacturer or the processor, the structural product shall be
   SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
   6
   heat treated as specified in the applicable product specification,
   or as specified in the purchase order, provided that the heat
   treatment specified by the purchaser is not in conflict with the
   requirements of the applicable product specification.
   6.4 Where normalizing is to be performed by the fabricator,
   the structural product shall be either normalized or heated
   uniformly for hot forming, provided that the temperature to
   which the structural product is heated for hot forming does not
   significantly exceed the normalizing temperature.
   6.5 The use of cooling rates that are faster than those
   obtained by cooling in air to improve the toughness shall be
   subject to approval by the purchaser, and structural products so
   treated shall be tempered subsequently in the range from 1100
   to 1300°F [595 to 705°C].
7. Chemical Analysis
   7.1 Heat Analysis:
   7.1.1 Sampling for chemical analysis and methods of analysis
   shall be in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and
   Terminology A751.
   7.1.2 For each heat, the heat analysis shall include determination
   of the content of carbon, manganese, phosphorus, sulfur,
   silicon, nickel, chromium, molybdenum, copper, vanadium,
   columbium (niobium); any other element that is specified or
   restricted by the applicable product specification for the
   applicable grade, class, and type; and any austenitic grain
   refining element whose content is to be used in place of
   austenitic grain size testing of the heat (see 8.3.2). Boron shall
   be reported if intentionally added.
   NOTE 3—For steels that do not have intentional boron additions for
   hardenability, the boron content will not normally exceed 0.0008 %.
   7.1.3 Except as allowed by 7.1.4 for primary heats, heat
   analyses shall conform to the heat analysis requirements of the
   applicable product specification for the applicable grade, class,
   and type.
   7.1.4 Where vacuum-arc remelting or electroslag remelting
   is used, a remelted heat is defined as all ingots remelted from
   a single primary heat. If the heat analysis of the primary heat
   conforms to the heat analysis requirements of the applicable
   product specification for the applicable grade, class, and type,
   the heat analysis for the remelted heat shall be determined from
   one test sample taken from one remelted ingot, or the product
   of one remelted ingot, from the primary heat. If the heat
   analysis of the primary heat does not conform to the heat
   analysis requirements of the applicable product specification
   for the applicable grade, type, and class, the heat analysis for
   the remelted heat shall be determined from one test sample
   taken from each remelted ingot, or the product of each
   remelted ingot, from the primary heat.
   7.2 Product Analysis—For each heat, the purchaser shall
   have the option of analyzing representative samples taken from
   the finished structural product. Sampling for chemical analysis
   and methods of analysis shall be in accordance with Test
   Methods, Practices, and Terminology A751. The product
   analyses so determined shall conform to the heat analysis
   requirements of the applicable product specification for the
   applicable grade, class, and type, subject to the permitted
   variations in product analysis given in Table A. If a range is
   specified, the determinations of any element in a heat shall not
   vary both above and below the specified range. Rimmed or
   capped steel is characterized by a lack of homogeneity in its
   composition, especially for the elements carbon, phosphorus,
   and sulfur. Therefore, the limitations for these elements shall
   not be applicable unless misapplication is clearly indicated.
   7.3 Referee Analysis—For referee purposes, Test Methods,
   Practices, and Terminology A751 shall be used.
   7.4 Grade Substitution—Alloy steel grades that meet the
   chemical requirements of Table 1 of Specification A829/
   A829M shall not be substituted for carbon steel grades.
8. Metallurgical Structure
   8.1 Where austenitic grain size testing is required, such
   testing shall be in accordance with Test Methods E112 and at
   least 70 % of the grains in the area examined shall meet the
   specified grain size requirement.
   8.1.1 Discussion—Austenitic Grain Size—All requirements
   for austenitic grain size control in Section 8, Metallurgical
   Structure, refer to a size of austenite grains that form when and
   if the structural product is reheated to a temperature at or above
   the transformation temperature, Ac3, after the product has
   experienced the complete rolling operation and has cooled to
   ambient temperature. The requirements for austenitic grain size
   control in Section 8, including the results of the referenced
   testing methods, do not measure or control the prior austenitic
   grain size or the ferritic grain size of the structural product in
   the as-rolled condition.
   8.2 Coarse Austenitic Grain Size—Where coarse austenitic
   grain size is specified, one austenitic grain size test per heat
   shall be made and the austenitic grain size number so determined
   shall be in the range of 1 to 5 inclusive.
   8.3 Fine Austenitic Grain Size:
   8.3.1 Where fine austenitic grain size is specified, except as
   allowed in 8.3.2, one austenitic grain size test per heat shall be
   made and the austenitic grain size number so determined shall
   be 5 or higher.
   NOTE 4—Such austenitic grain size numbers may be achieved with
   lower contents of austenitic grain refining elements than 8.3.2 requires for
   austenitic grain size testing to be waived.
   8.3.2 Unless testing for fine austenitic grain size is specified
   in the purchase order, an austenitic grain size test need not be
   made for any heat that has, by heat analysis, one or more of the
   following:
   8.3.2.1 A total aluminum content of 0.020 % or more.
   8.3.2.2 An acid soluble aluminum content of 0.015 % or
   more.
   8.3.2.3 A content for an austenitic grain refining element
   that exceeds the minimum value agreed to by the purchaser as
   being sufficient for austenitic grain size testing to be waived, or
   ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
   7
   TABLE A Permitted Variations in Product Analysis
   NOTE 1—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
   Element
   Upper Limit, or
   Maximum Specified
   Value, %
   Permitted
   Variations, %
   Under
   Minimum
   Limit
   Over
   Maximum
   Limit
   Carbon to 0.15 incl 0.02 0.03
   over 0.15 to 0.40 incl 0.03 0.04
   over 0.40 to 0.75 incl 0.04 0.05
   over 0.75 0.04 0.06
   ManganeseA to 0.60 incl 0.05 0.06
   over 0.60 to 0.90 incl 0.06 0.08
   over 0.90 to 1.20 incl 0.08 0.10
   over 1.20 to 1.35 incl 0.09 0.11
   over 1.35 to 1.65 incl 0.09 0.12
   over 1.65 to 1.95 incl 0.11 0.14
   over 1.95 0.12 0.16
   Phosphorus to 0.04 incl
   over 0.04 to 0.15 incl
   …
   …
   0.010
   B
   Sulfur to 0.06 incl
   over 0.06
   …
   B
   0.010
   B
   Silicon to 0.30 incl
   over 0.30 to 0.40 incl
   over 0.40 to 2.20 incl
   0.02
   0.05
   0.06
   0.03
   0.05
   0.06
   Nickel to 1.00 incl 0.03 0.03
   over 1.00 to 2.00 incl 0.05 0.05
   over 2.00 to 3.75 incl 0.07 0.07
   over 3.75 to 5.30 incl 0.08 0.08
   over 5.30 0.10 0.10
   Chromium to 0.90 incl
   over 0.90 to 2.00 incl
   over 2.00 to 10.00 incl
   over 10.00 to 15.00 incl
   0.04
   0.06
   0.10
   0.15
   0.04
   0.06
   0.10
   0.15
   Molybdenum to 0.20 incl
   over 0.20 to 0.40 incl
   over 0.40 to 1.15 incl
   0.01
   0.03
   0.04
   0.01
   0.03
   0.04
   Copper 0.20 minimum only
   to 1.00 incl
   over 1.00 to 2.00 incl
   0.02
   0.03
   0.05
   …
   0.03
   0.05
   Titanium to 0.15 incl 0.01C 0.01
   Vanadium to 0.10 incl 0.01C 0.01
   over 0.10 to 0.25 incl 0.02 0.02
   over 0.25 0.02 0.03
   minimum only specified 0.01 …
   Boron any B B
   Columbium
   (Niobium)D
   to 0.10 incl 0.01C 0.01
   Zirconium to 0.15 incl 0.03 0.03
   Nitrogen to 0.030 incl 0.005 0.005
   A Permitted variations in manganese content for bars and bar size shapes shall be:
   to 0.90 incl ±0.03; over 0.90 to 2.20 incl ±0.06.
   B Product analysis not applicable.
   C 0.005, if the minimum of the range is 0.01 %.
   D Columbium and niobium are interchangeable names for the same element.
   Index to Tables of Permitted Variations
   Dimension
   Table
   Inch-Pound
   Units
   SI Units
   Camber
   Plates, Carbon Steel; Sheared and Gas-Cut 12 A1.12
   Plates, Carbon Steel; Universal Mill 11 A1.11
   Plates, Other than Carbon Steel; Sheared, 11 A1.11
   Gas-Cut and Universal Mill
   Shapes, Rolled; S, M, C, MC, and L 21 A1.21
   Shapes, Rolled; W and HP 24 A1.24
   Shapes, Split; L and T 25 A1.25
   Cross Section of Shapes and Bars
   Flats 26 A1.26
   Hexagons 28 A1.28
   Rounds and Squares 27 A1.27
   Shapes, Rolled; L, Bulb Angles, and Z 17 A1.17
   Shapes, Rolled; W, HP, S, M, C, and MC 16 A1.16
   Shapes, Rolled; T 18 A1.18
   Shapes, Split; L and T 25 A1.25
   Diameter
   Plates, Sheared 6 A1.6
   Plates, Other than Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut 7 A1.7
   Plates, Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut 10 A1.10
   Rounds 27 A1.27
   End Out-of-Square
   Shapes, Other than W 20 A1.20
   Shapes, W 22 A1.22
   Shapes, Milled, Other than W 23 A1.23
   Flatness
   Plates, Carbon Steel 13 A1.13
   Plates, Other than Carbon Steel 14 A1.14
   Plates, Restrictive—Carbon Steel S27.1 S27.2
   Plates, Restrictive—Other than Carbon Steel S27.3 S27.4
   Length
   Bars 30 A1.30
   Bars, Recut 31 A1.31
   Plates, Sheared and Universal Mill 3 A1.3
   Plates, Other than Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut 9 A1.9
   Plates, Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut 8 A1.8
   Plates, Mill Edge 4 A1.4
   Shapes, Rolled; Other than W 19 A1.19
   Shapes, Rolled; W and HP 22 A1.22
   Shapes, Split; L and T 25 A1.25
   Shapes, Milled 23 A1.23
   Straightness
   Bars
   Shapes, Other than W
   29
   21
   A1.29
   A1.21
   Sweep
   Shapes, W and HP 24 A1.24
   Thickness
   Flats
   Plates, Ordered to Thickness
   26
   1
   A1.26
   A1.1
   Waviness
   Plates 15 A1.15
   Weight [Mass]
   Plates, Ordered to Weight [Mass] 2 A1.2
   Width
   Flats 26 A1.26
   Plates, Sheared 3 A1.3
   Plates, Universal Mill 5 A1.5
   Plates, Other than Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut 9 A1.9
   Plates, Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut 8 A1.8
   Plates, Mill Edge 4 A1.4
   8.3.2.4 Contents for the combination of two or more austenitic
   grain refining elements that exceed the applicable minimum
   values agreed to by the purchaser as being sufficient for
   austenitic grain size testing to be waived.
9. Quality
   9.1 General—Structural products shall be free of injurious
   defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.
   SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
   8
   NOTE 5—Unless otherwise specified, structural products are normally
   furnished in the as-rolled condition and are subjected to visual inspection
   by the manufacturer or processor. Non-injurious surface or internal
   imperfections, or both, may be present in the structural product as
   delivered and the structural product may require conditioning by the
   purchaser to improve its appearance or in preparation for welding, coating,
   or other further operations.
   More restrictive requirements may be specified by invoking supplementary
   requirements or by agreement between the purchaser and the supplier.
   Structural products that exhibit injurious defects during subsequent
   fabrication are deemed not to comply with the applicable product
   specification. (See 17.2.) Fabricators should be aware that cracks may
   initiate upon bending a sheared or burned edge during the fabrication
   process; this is not considered to be a fault of the steel but is rather a
   function of the induced cold-work or the heat-affected zone.
   The conditioning requirements in 9.2, 9.3, and 9.4 limit the conditioning
   allowed to be performed by the manufacturer or processor. Conditioning
   of imperfections beyond the limits of 9.2, 9.3, and 9.4 may be
   performed by parties other than the manufacturer or processor at the
   discretion of the purchaser.
   9.2 Plate Conditioning:
   9.2.1 The grinding of plates by the manufacturer or processor
   to remove imperfections on the top or bottom surface shall
   be subject to the limitations that the area ground is well faired
   without abrupt changes in contour and the grinding does not
   reduce the thickness of the plate by (1) more than 7 % under
   the nominal thickness for plates ordered to weight per square
   foot or mass per square metre, but in no case more than 1/8 in.
   [3 mm]; or (2) below the permissible minimum thickness for
   plates ordered to thickness in inches or millimetres.
   9.2.2 The deposition of weld metal (see 9.5) following the
   removal of imperfections on the top or bottom surface of plates
   by chipping, grinding, or arc-air gouging shall be subject to the
   following limiting conditions:
   9.2.2.1 The chipped, ground, or gouged area shall not
   exceed 2 % of the area of the surface being conditioned.
   9.2.2.2 After removal of any imperfections preparatory to
   welding, the thickness of the plate at any location shall not be
   reduced by more than 30 % of the nominal thickness of the
   plate. (Specification A131/A131M restricts the reduction in
   thickness to 20 % maximum.)
   9.2.3 The deposition of weld metal (see 9.5) following the
   removal of injurious imperfections on the edges of plates by
   grinding, chipping, or arc-air gouging by the manufacturer or
   processor shall be subject to the limitation that, prior to
   welding, the depth of the depression, measured from the plate
   edge inward, is not more than the thickness of the plate or 1 in.
   [25 mm], whichever is the lesser.
   9.3 Structural Size Shapes, Bar Size Shapes, and Sheet
   Piling Conditioning:
   9.3.1 The grinding, or chipping and grinding, of structural
   size shapes, bar size shapes, and sheet piling by the manufacturer
   or processor to remove imperfections shall be subject to
   the limitations that the area ground is well faired without
   abrupt changes in contour and the depression does not extend
   below the rolled surface by more than (1) 1/32 in. [1 mm], for
   material less than 3/8 in. [10 mm] in thickness; (2) 1/16 in. [2
   mm], for material 3/8 to 2 in. [10 to 50 mm] inclusive in
   thickness; or (3) 1/8 in. [3 mm], for material over 2 in. [50 mm]
   in thickness.
   9.3.2 The deposition of weld metal (see 9.5) following
   removal of imperfections that are greater in depth than the
   limits listed in 9.3.1 shall be subject to the following limiting
   conditions:
   9.3.2.1 The total area of the chipped or ground surface of
   any piece prior to welding shall not exceed 2 % of the total
   surface area of that piece.
   9.3.2.2 The reduction of thickness of the material resulting
   from removal of imperfections prior to welding shall not
   exceed 30 % of the nominal thickness at the location of the
   imperfection, nor shall the depth of depression prior to welding
   exceed 11/4 in. [32 mm] in any case except as noted in 9.3.2.3.
   9.3.2.3 The deposition of weld metal (see 9.5) following
   grinding, chipping, or arc-air gouging of the toes of angles,
   beams, channels, and zees and the stems and toes of tees shall
   be subject to the limitation that, prior to welding, the depth of
   the depression, measured from the toe inward, is not more than
   the thickness of the material at the base of the depression or 1/2
   in. [12.5 mm], whichever is the lesser.
   9.3.2.4 The deposition of weld metal (see 9.5) and grinding
   to correct or build up the interlock of any sheet piling section
   at any location shall be subject to the limitation that the total
   surface area of the weld not exceed 2 % of the total surface
   area of the piece.
   9.4 Bar Conditioning:
   9.4.1 The conditioning of bars by the manufacturer or
   processor to remove imperfections by grinding, chipping, or
   some other means shall be subject to the limitations that the
   conditioned area is well faired and the affected sectional area is
   not reduced by more than the applicable permitted variations
   (see Section 12).
   9.4.2 The deposition of weld metal (see 9.5) following
   chipping or grinding to remove imperfections that are greater
   in depth than the limits listed in 9.4.1 shall be subject to the
   following conditions:
   9.4.2.1 The total area of the chipped or ground surface of
   any piece, prior to welding, shall not exceed 2 % of the total
   surface area of the piece.
   9.4.2.2 The reduction of sectional dimension of a round,
   square, or hexagon bar, or the reduction in thickness of a flat
   bar, resulting from removal of an imperfection, prior to
   welding, shall not exceed 5 % of the nominal dimension or
   thickness at the location of the imperfection.
   9.4.2.3 For the edges of flat bars, the depth of the conditioning
   depression prior to welding shall be measured from the
   edge inward and shall be limited to a maximum depth equal to
   the thickness of the flat bar or 1/2 in. [12.5 mm], whichever is
   less.
   9.5 Repair by Welding:
   9.5.1 General Requirements:
   9.5.1.1 Repair by welding shall be in accordance with a
   welding procedure specification (WPS) using shielded metal
   arc welding (SMAW), gas metal arc welding (GMAW), flux
   cored arc welding (FCAW), or submerged arc welding (SAW)
   processes. Shielding gases used shall be of welding quality.
   9.5.1.2 Electrodes and electrode-flux combinations shall be
   in accordance with the requirements of AWS Specifications
   A5.1/A5.1M, A5.5/A5.5M, A5.17/A5.17M, A5.18/A5.18M,
   ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
   9
   A5.20/A5.20M, A5.23/A5.23M, A5.28/A5.28M, or A5.29/
   A5.29M, whichever is applicable. For SMAW, low hydrogen
   electrodes shall be used.
   9.5.1.3 Electrodes and electrode-flux combinations shall be
   selected so that the tensile strength of the deposited weld metal
   (after any required heat treatment) is consistent with the tensile
   strength specified for the base metal being repaired.
   9.5.1.4 Welding electrodes and flux materials shall be dry
   and protected from moisture during storage and use.
   9.5.1.5 Prior to repair welding, the surface to be welded
   shall be inspected to verify that the imperfections intended to
   be removed have been removed completely. Surfaces to be
   welded and surfaces adjacent to the weld shall be dry and free
   of scale, slag, rust, moisture, grease, and other foreign material
   that would prevent proper welding.
   9.5.1.6 Welders and welding operators shall be qualified in
   accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M or
   ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, except
   that any complete joint penetration groove weld qualification
   also qualifies the welder or welding operator to do repair
   welding.
   9.5.1.7 Repair welding of structural products shall be in
   accordance with a welding procedure specification (WPS) that
   is in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M or
   ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, with the
   following exceptions or clarifications:
   (1) The WPS shall be qualified by testing a complete joint
   penetration groove weld or a surface groove weld.
   (2) The geometry of the surface groove weld need not be
   described in other than a general way.
   (3) An AWS D1.1/D1.1M prequalified complete joint
   penetration groove weld WPS is acceptable.
   (4) Any material not listed in the prequalified base
   metal-filler metal combinations of AWS D1.1/D1.1M also is
   considered to be prequalified if its chemical composition and
   mechanical properties are comparable to those for one of the
   prequalified base metals listed in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
   (5) Any material not listed in ASME Boiler and Pressure
   Vessel Code, Section IX, also is considered to be a material
   with an S-number in Section IX if its chemical composition
   and its mechanical properties are comparable to those for one
   of the materials listed in Section IX with an S-number.
   9.5.1.8 When so specified in the purchase order, the WPS
   shall include qualification by Charpy V-notch testing, with the
   test locations, test conditions, and the acceptance criteria
   meeting the requirements specified for repair welding in the
   purchase order.
   9.5.1.9 When so specified in the purchase order, the welding
   procedure specification shall be subject to approval by the
   purchaser prior to repair welding.
   9.5.2 Structural Products with a Specified Minimum Tensile
   Strength of 100 ksi [690 MPa] or Higher—Repair welding of
   structural products with a specified minimum tensile strength
   of 100 ksi [690 MPa] or higher shall be subject to the following
   additional requirements:
   9.5.2.1 When so specified in the purchase order, prior
   approval for repair by welding shall be obtained from the
   purchaser.
   9.5.2.2 The surface to be welded shall be inspected using a
   magnetic particle method or a liquid penetrant method to verify
   that the imperfections intended to be removed have been
   completely removed. When magnetic particle inspection is
   employed, the surface shall be inspected both parallel and
   perpendicular to the length of the area to be repaired.
   9.5.2.3 When weld repairs are to be post-weld heat-treated,
   special care shall be exercised in the selection of electrodes to
   avoid those compositions that embrittle as a result of such heat
   treatment.
   9.5.2.4 Repairs on structural products that are subsequently
   heat-treated at the mill shall be inspected after heat treatment;
   repairs on structural products that are not subsequently heattreated
   at the mill shall be inspected no sooner than 48 h after
   welding. Such inspection shall use a magnetic particle method
   or a liquid penetrant method; where magnetic particle inspection
   is involved, such inspection shall be both parallel to and
   perpendicular to the length of the repair.
   9.5.2.5 The location of the weld repairs shall be marked on
   the finished piece.
   9.5.3 Repair Quality—The welds and adjacent heat-affected
   zone shall be sound and free of cracks, the weld metal being
   thoroughly fused to all surfaces and edges without undercutting
   or overlap. Any visible cracks, porosity, lack of fusion, or
   undercut in any layer shall be removed prior to deposition of
   the succeeding layer.Weld metal shall project at least 1/16 in. (2
   mm) above the rolled surface after welding, and the projecting
   metal shall be removed by chipping or grinding, or both, to
   make it flush with the rolled surface, and to produce a
   workmanlike finish.
   9.5.4 Inspection of Repair—The manufacturer or processor
   shall maintain an inspection program to inspect the work to see
   that:
   9.5.4.1 Imperfections have been completely removed.
   9.5.4.2 The limitations specified above have not been exceeded.
   9.5.4.3 Established welding procedures have been followed,
   and
   9.5.4.4 Any weld deposit is of acceptable quality as defined
   above.
10. Test Methods
    10.1 All tests shall be conducted in accordance with Test
    Methods and Definitions A370.
    10.2 Yield strength shall be determined either by the 0.2 %
    offset method or by the 0.5 % extension under load method,
    unless otherwise stated in the material specification.
    10.3 Rounding Procedures—For purposes of determining
    conformance with the specification, a calculated value shall be
    rounded to the nearest 1 ksi [5 MPa] tensile and yield strength,
    and to the nearest unit in the right-hand place of figures used in
    expressing the limiting value for other values in accordance
    with the rounding method given in Practice E29.
    10.4 For full-section test specimens of angles, the crosssectional
    area used for calculating the yield and tensile
    strengths shall be a theoretical area calculated on the basis of
    the weight of the test specimen (see 12.1).
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    10
11. Tension Tests
    11.1 Condition—Test specimens for non-heat-treated structural
    products shall be taken from test coupons that are
    representative of the structural products in their delivered
    condition. Test specimens for heat-treated structural products
    shall be taken from test coupons that are representative of the
    structural products in their delivered condition, or from separate
    pieces of full thickness or full section from the same heat
    similarly heat treated.
    11.1.1 Where the plate is heat treated with a cooling rate
    faster than still-air cooling from the austenitizing temperature,
    one of the following shall apply in addition to other requirements
    specified herein:
    11.1.1.1 The gage length of the tension test specimen shall
    be taken at least 1T from any as-heat treated edge where T is
    the thickness of the plate and shall be at least 1/2 in. [12.5 mm]
    from flame cut or heat-affected-zone surfaces.
    11.1.1.2 A steel thermal buffer pad, 1 T by 1T by at least 3T,
    shall be joined to the plate edge by a partial penetration weld
    completely sealing the buffered edge prior to heat treatment.
    11.1.1.3 Thermal insulation or other thermal barriers shall
    be used during the heat treatment adjacent to the plate edge
    where specimens are to be removed. It shall be demonstrated
    that the cooling rate of the tension test specimen is no faster
    than, and not substantially slower than, that attained by the
    method described in 11.1.1.2.
    11.1.1.4 When test coupons cut from the plate but heat
    treated separately are used, the coupon dimensions shall be not
    less than 3T by 3T by T and each tension specimen cut from it
    shall meet the requirements of 11.1.1.1.
    11.1.1.5 The heat treatment of test specimens separately in
    the device shall be subject to the limitations that (1) cooling
    rate data for the plate are available; (2) cooling rate control
    devices for the test specimens are available; and, (3) the
    method has received prior approval by the purchaser.
    11.2 Orientation—For plates wider than 24 in. [600 mm],
    test specimens shall be taken such that the longitudinal axis of
    the test specimen is transverse to the final direction of rolling
    of the plate. Test specimens for all other structural products
    shall be taken such that the longitudinal axis of the test
    specimen is parallel to the final direction of rolling.
    11.3 Location:
    11.3.1 Plates—Test specimens shall be taken from a corner
    of the plate.
    11.3.2 W and HP Shapes with Flanges 6 in. [150 mm] or
    Wider—Test specimens shall be selected from a point in the
    flange 2/3 of the way from the flange centerline to the flange toe.
    11.3.3 Shapes Other Than Those in 11.3.2—Test specimens
    shall be selected from the webs of beams, channels, and zees;
    from the stems of rolled tees; and from the legs of angles and
    bulb angles, except where full-section test specimens for
    angles are used and the elongation acceptance criteria are
    increased accordingly. (See 11.6.2.)
    11.3.4 Bars:
    11.3.4.1 Test specimens for bars to be used for pins and
    rollers shall be taken so that the axis is: midway between the
    center and the surface for pins and rollers less than 3 in. [75
    mm] in diameter; 1 in. [25 mm] from the surface for pins and
    rollers 3 in. [75 mm] and over in diameter; or as specified in
    Annex A1 of Test Methods and Definitions A370 if the
    applicable foregoing requirement is not practicable.
    11.3.4.2 Test specimens for bars other than those to be used
    for pins and rollers shall be taken as specified in Annex A1 of
    Test Methods and Definitions A370.
    11.4 Test Frequency:
    11.4.1 Structural Products Produced from an As-Rolled
    Structural Product—The minimum number of pieces or platesas-
    rolled to be tested for each heat and strength gradation,
    where applicable, shall be as follows, except that it shall be
    permissible for any individual test to represent multiple
    strength gradations:
    11.4.1.1 As given in Table B, or
    11.4.1.2 One taken from the minimum thickness in the heat
    and one taken from the maximum thickness in the heat, where
    thickness means the specified thickness, diameter, or comparable
    dimension, whichever is appropriate for the applicable
    structural product rolled.
    11.4.2 Structural Products Produced from Coil and Furnished
    without Heat Treatment or with Stress Relieving Only:
    11.4.2.1 Except as allowed by 11.4.4, the minimum number
    of coils to be tested for each heat and strength gradation, where
    applicable, shall be as given in Table C, except that it shall be
    permissible for any individual coil to represent multiple
    strength gradations.
    11.4.2.2 Except as required by 11.4.2.3, two tension test
    specimens shall be taken from each coil tested, with the first
    being taken immediately prior to the first structural product to
    be qualified, and the second being taken from the approximate
    center lap.
    11.4.2.3 If, during decoiling, the amount of material decoiled
    is less than that required to reach the approximate center
    lap, the second test for the qualification of the decoiled portion
    of such a coil shall be taken from a location adjacent to the end
    of the innermost portion decoiled. For qualification of successive
    portions from such a coil, an additional test shall be taken
    adjacent to the innermost portion decoiled, until a test is
    obtained from the approximate center lap.
    11.4.3 Structural Products Produced from Coil and Furnished
    Heat Treated by other than Stress Relieving—The
    minimum number of pieces to be tested for each heat and
    strength gradation, where applicable, shall be as follows,
    except that it shall be permissible for any individual test to
    represent multiple strength gradations:
    11.4.3.1 As given in Table B, or
    11.4.3.2 One taken from the minimum thickness in the heat
    and one taken from the maximum thickness in the heat, where
    thickness means the specified thickness, diameter, or comparable
    dimension, whichever is appropriate for the applicable
    structural product rolled.
    11.4.4 Structural Products Produced from Coil and Qualified
    Using Test Specimens Heat Treated by Other than Stress
    Relieving—The minimum number of pieces to be tested for
    each heat and strength gradation, where applicable, shall be as
    follows, except that it shall be permissible for any individual
    test to represent multiple strength gradations:
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    11
    TABLE B Minimum Number of Tension Tests Required
    ThicknessA Range
    Rolled for the Heat
    ThicknessA Difference
    Between Pieces or
    Plates-as-rolled in the
    ThicknessA Range
    Minimum Number of Tension
    Tests Required
    Under 3/8 in. [10 mm] 1/16 in. [2 mm] or less TwoB tests per heat, taken from different pieces or plates-as-rolled having
    any thicknessA in the thicknessA range
    More than 1/16 in. [2 mm] TwoB tests per heat, one taken from the minimum thicknessA in the
    thicknessA range and one taken from the maximum thicknessA in the
    thicknessA range
    3/8 to 2 in. [10 to 50 mm], incl Less than 3/8 in. [10 mm] TwoB tests per heat, taken from different pieces or plates-as-rolled having
    any thicknessA in the thicknessA range
    3/8 in. [10 mm] or more TwoB tests per heat, one taken from the minimum thicknessA in the
    thicknessA range and one taken from the maximum thicknessA in the
    thicknessA range
    Over 2 in. [50 mm] Less than 1 in. [25 mm] TwoB tests per heat, taken from different pieces or plates-as-rolled having
    any thicknessA in the thicknessA range
    1 in. [25 mm] or more TwoB tests per heat, one taken from the minimum thicknessA in the
    thicknessA range and one taken from the maximum thicknessA in the
    thicknessA range
    A Thickness means the specified thickness, diameter, or comparable dimension, whichever is appropriate for the specific structural product rolled.
    B One test, if only one piece or plate-as-rolled is to be qualified.
    TABLE C Minimum Number of Coils Required to be Tension Tested
    NOTE 1—See 11.4.2.2 and 11.4.2.3 for the number of tests to be taken per coil.
    ThicknessA Difference Between Coils in the Heat Minimum Number of Coils Required to be Tension Tested
    Less than 1/16 in. [2 mm] TwoB coils per heat, at any thicknessA in the heat
    1/16 in. [2 mm] or more TwoB coils per heat, one at the minimum thicknessA in the heat and one at the maximum thicknessA in
    the heat
    A Thickness means the specified thickness, diameter, or comparable dimension, whichever is appropriate for the specific structural product rolled.
    B One coil, if the product of only one coil is to be qualified.
    11.4.4.1 As given in Table B, or
    11.4.4.2 One taken from the minimum thickness in the heat,
    where thickness means the specified thickness, diameter, or
    comparable dimension, whichever is appropriate for the applicable
    structural product rolled.
    11.5 Preparation:
    11.5.1 Plates:
    11.5.1.1 Tension test specimens for plates 3/4 in. [20 mm]
    and under in thickness shall be the full thickness of the plates.
    The test specimens shall conform to the requirements shown in
    Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions A370 for either the
    11/2-in. [40-mm] wide test specimen or the 1/2-in. [12.5-mm]
    wide test specimen.
    11.5.1.2 For plates up to 4 in. [100 mm] inclusive, in
    thickness, the use of 11/2-in. [40-mm] wide test specimens, full
    thickness of the plate and conforming to the requirements
    shown in Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions A370, shall be
    subject to the limitation that adequate testing machine capacity
    is available.
    11.5.1.3 For plates over 3/4 in. [20 mm] in thickness, except
    as permitted in 11.5.1.2, tension test specimens shall conform
    to the requirements shown in Fig. 4 of Test Methods and
    Definitions A370 for the 0.500-in. [12.5-mm] diameter test
    specimen. The axis of such test specimens shall be located
    midway between the center of thickness and the top or bottom
    surface of the plate.
    11.5.2 Shapes:
    11.5.2.1 Except where angles are tested in full section,
    tension test specimens for shapes 3/4 in. [20 mm] and under in
    thickness shall be the full thickness of the shape. Such test
    specimen shall conform to the requirements shown in Fig. 3 of
    Test Methods and Definitions A370 for either the 11/2-in.
    [40-mm] wide test specimen or the 1/2-in. [12.5-mm] wide test
    specimen.
    11.5.2.2 For shapes up to 5 in. [125 mm] inclusive, in
    thickness, the use of 11/2-in. [40-mm] wide test specimens, full
    thickness of the shape and conforming to the requirements
    shown in Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions A370, shall be
    subject to the limitation that adequate testing machine capacity
    is available.
    11.5.2.3 For shapes over 3/4 in. [20 mm] in thickness, except
    as permitted in 11.5.2.2, tension test specimens shall conform
    to the requirements shown in Fig. 4 of Test Methods and
    Definitions A370 for the 0.500-in. [12.5-mm] diameter test
    specimens. The axis of such test specimens shall be located
    midway between the center of thickness and the top or bottom
    surface of the shape.
    11.5.3 Bars:
    11.5.3.1 Except as otherwise provided below, test specimens
    for bars shall be in accordance with Annex A1 of Test
    Methods and Definitions A370.
    11.5.3.2 Except as provided in 11.5.3.5, test specimens for
    bars 3/4 in. [20 mm] and under in thickness shall conform to the
    requirements shown in Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions
    A370 for either the 11/2-in. [40-mm] wide test specimen or the
    1/2-in. [12.5-mm] wide specimen.
    11.5.3.3 Except as provided in 11.5.3.4 and 11.5.3.5, test
    specimens for bars over 3/4 in. [20 mm] in thickness or diameter
    shall conform either to the requirements for the 11/2-in.
    [40-mm] or 1/2-in. [12.5-mm] wide test specimen shown in Fig.
    3 of Test Methods and Definitions A370, or to the requirements
    for the 0.500-in. [12.5-mm] diameter test specimen shown in
    Fig. 4 of Test Methods and Definitions A370.
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    12
    11.5.3.4 For bars other than those to be used for pins and
    rollers, the manufacturer or processor shall have the option of
    using test specimens that are machined to a thickness or
    diameter of at least 3/4 in. [20 mm] for a length of at least 9 in.
    [230 mm].
    11.5.3.5 Test specimens for bars to be used for pins and
    rollers shall conform to the requirements shown in Fig. 4 of
    Test Methods and Definitions A370 for the 0.500-in. [12.5-
    mm] diameter test specimen.
    11.6 Elongation Requirement Adjustments:
    11.6.1 Due to the specimen geometry effect encountered
    when using the rectangular tension test specimen for testing
    thin material, adjustments in elongation requirements must be
    provided for thicknesses under 0.312 in. [8 mm]. Accordingly,
    the following deductions from the base elongation requirements
    shall apply:
    Nominal Thickness Range,
    in. [mm]
    Elongation
    Deduction, %
    0.299–0.311 [7.60–7.89] 0.5
    0.286–0.298 [7.30–7.59] 1.0
    0.273–0.285 [7.00–7.29] 1.5
    0.259–0.272 [6.60–6.99] 2.0
    0.246–0.258 [6.20–6.59] 2.5
    0.233–0.245 [5.90–6.19] 3.0
    0.219–0.232 [5.50–5.89] 3.5
    0.206–0.218 [5.20–5.49] 4.0
    0.193–0.205 [4.90–5.19] 4.5
    0.180–0.192 [4.60–4.89] 5.0
    0.166–0.179 [4.20–4.59] 5.5A
    0.153–0.165 [3.90–4.19] 6.0A
    0.140–0.152 [3.60–3.89] 6.5A
    0.127–0.139 [3.20–3.59] 7.0A
    < 0.127 [3.20] 7.5A
    A Elongation deductions for thicknesses less than 0.180 in. [4.60 mm] apply to
    plates and structural shapes only.
    11.6.2 Due to the specimen geometry effect encountered
    when using full-section test specimens for angles, the elongation
    requirements for structural-size angles shall be increased
    by six percentage points when full-section test specimens are
    used.
    11.6.3 Due to the inherently lower elongation that is obtainable
    in thicker structural products, adjustments in elongation
    requirements shall be provided. For structural products over
    3.5 in. [90 mm] in thickness, a deduction of 0.5 percentage
    point from the specified percentage of elongation in 2 in. [50
    mm] shall be made for each 0.5-in. [12.5-mm] increment of
    thickness over 3.5 in. [90 mm], up to a maximum deduction of
    3.0 percentage points. Accordingly, the following deductions
    from the base elongation requirements shall apply:
    Nominal Thickness Range,
    in. [mm]
    Elongation
    Deduction, %
    3.500–3.999 [90.00–102.49] 0.5
    4.000–4.499 [102.50–114.99] 1.0
    4.500–4.999 [115.00–127.49] 1.5
    5.000–5.499 [127.50–139.99] 2.0
    5.500–5.999 [140.00–152.49] 2.5
    6.000 and thicker [152.50 and thicker] 3.0
    11.6.4 The tensile property requirements tables in many of
    the product specifications covered by this general requirements
    specification specify elongation requirements in both 8-in.
    [200-mm] and 2-in. [50-mm] gage lengths. Unless otherwise
    provided in the applicable product specification, both requirements
    are not required to be applied simultaneously and the
    elongation need only be determined in the gage length appropriate
    for the test specimen used. After selection of the
    appropriate gage length, the elongation requirement for the
    alternative gage length shall be deemed not applicable.
    11.7 Yield Strength Application:
    11.7.1 When test specimens do not exhibit a well-defined
    disproportionate yield point, yield strength shall be determined
    and substituted for yield point.
    11.7.2 The manufacturer or processor shall have the option
    of substituting yield strength for yield point if the test specimen
    exhibits a well-defined disproportionate yield point.
    11.7.3 Yield strength shall be determined either by the
    0.2 % offset method or by the 0.5 % extension-under-load
    method.
    11.8 Product Tension Tests—This specification does not
    provide requirements for product tension testing subsequent to
    shipment (see 15.1). Therefore, the requirements of 11.1 – 11.7
    inclusive and Section 13 apply only for tests conducted at the
    place of manufacture prior to shipment.
    NOTE 6—Compliance to this specification and the applicable product
    specification by a manufacturer or processor does not preclude the
    possibility that product tension test results might vary outside specified
    ranges. The tensile properties will vary within the same heat or piece, be
    it as-rolled, control-rolled, or heat-treated. Tension testing according to the
    requirements of this specification does not provide assurance that all
    products of a heat will be identical in tensile properties with the products
    tested. If the purchaser wishes to have more confidence than that provided
    by this specification testing procedures, additional testing or requirements,
    such as Supplementary Requirement S4, should be imposed.
    11.8.1 Appendix X2 provides additional information on the
    variability of tensile properties in plates and structural shapes
12. Permitted Variations in Dimensions and Weight
    [Mass]
    12.1 One cubic foot of rolled steel is assumed to weigh 490
    lb. One cubic metre of rolled steel is assumed to have a mass
    of 7850 kg.
    12.2 Plates—The permitted variations for dimensions and
    weight [mass] shall not exceed the applicable limits in Tables 1
    to 15 [Annex A1, Tables A1.1 to A1.15] inclusive.
    12.3 Shapes:
    12.3.1 Annex A2 lists the designations and dimensions, in
    both inch-pound and SI units, of shapes that are most commonly
    available. Radii of fillets and toes of shape profiles vary
    with individual manufacturers and therefore are not specified.
    12.3.2 The permitted variations in dimensions shall not
    exceed the applicable limits in Tables 16 to 25 [Annex A1,
    Tables A1.16 to A1.25] inclusive. Permitted variations for
    special shapes not listed in such tables shall be as agreed upon
    between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
    NOTE 7—Permitted variations are given in Tables 16 to 25 [Annex A1,
    Tables A1.16 to A1.25] inclusive for some shapes that are not listed in
    Annex A2 (that is, bulb angles, tees, zees). Addition of such sections to
    Annex A2 will be considered by Subcommittee A01.02 when and if a need
    for such listing is shown.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    13
    12.3.3 Shapes Having One Dimension of the Cross Section
    3 in. [75 mm] or Greater (Structural-Size Shapes)—The
    cross-sectional area or weight [mass] of each shape shall not
    vary more than 2.5 % from the theoretical or specified amounts
    except for shapes with a nominal weight of less than 100 lb/ft,
    in which the variation shall range from –2.5 % to +3.0 % from
    the theoretical cross-sectional area or the specified nominal
    weight [mass].
    12.4 Sheet Piling—The weight [mass] of each steel sheet
    pile shall not vary more than 2.5 % from the theoretical or
    specified weight [mass]. The length of each steel sheet pile
    shall be not less than the specified length, and not more than 5
    in. [125 mm] over the specified length.
    12.5 Hot-Rolled Bars—The permitted variations in dimensions
    shall not exceed the applicable limits in Tables 26 to 31
    [Annex A1, Tables A1.26 to A1.31] inclusive.
    12.6 Conversion of Permitted Variations from Fractions of
    an Inch to Decimals—Permitted variations in dimensions for
    products covered by this specification are generally given as
    fractions of an inch and these remain the official permitted
    variations, where so stated. If the material is to be measured by
    equipment reporting dimensions as decimals, conversion of
    permitted variations from fractions of an inch to decimals shall
    be made to three decimal places; using the rounding method
    prescribed in Practice E29.
13. Retests
    13.1 If any test specimen shows defective machining or
    develops flaws, the manufacturer or processor shall have the
    option of discarding it and substituting another test specimen.
    13.2 If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
    specimen is less than that specified and any part of the fracture
    is more than 3/4 in. [20 mm] from the center of the gage length
    of a 2-in. [50-mm] specimen or is outside the middle half of the
    gage length of an 8-in. [200-mm] specimen, as indicated by
    scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a retest
    shall be allowed.
    13.3 Except as provided in 13.3.1, if the results from an
    original tension specimen fails to meet the specified
    requirements, but are within 2 ksi [14 MPa] of the required
    tensile strength, within 1 ksi [7 MPa] of the required yield
    strength or yield point, or within 2 percentage points of the
    required elongation, a retest shall be permitted to replace the
    failing test. A retest shall be performed for the failing original
    test, with the specimen being randomly selected from the heat.
    If the results of the retest meet the specified requirements, the
    heat or lot shall be approved.
    13.3.1 For structural products that are tested as given in
    Table C, both tests from each coil tested to qualify a heat are
    required to meet all mechanical property requirements. Should
    either test fail to do so, then that coil shall not be used to
    qualify the heat; however, the portion of that individual coil
    that is bracketed by acceptable tests (see 11.4.2.3) is considered
    to be qualified.
    13.4 Quenched and tempered steel plates shall be subject to
    any additional retest requirements contained in the applicable
    product specification.
    13.5 When the full-section option of 11.3.3 is used and the
    elongation falls below the specified requirement, the manufacturer
    or processor shall have the option of making another test
    using a test specimen permitted in 11.5.2.
14. Test Reports
    14.1 Test reports for each heat supplied are required and
    they shall report the following:
    14.1.1 The applicable product specification designation,
    including year-date and whichever of grade, class, and type are
    specified in the purchase order, to which the structural product
    is furnished.
    14.1.2 The heat number, heat analysis (see 7.1), and nominal
    sizes.
    NOTE 8—If the amount of copper, chromium, nickel, molybdenum, or
    silicon is less than 0.02 %, the heat analysis for that element may be
    reported as <0.02 %. If the amount of columbium (niobium) or vanadium
    is less than 0.008 %, the heat analysis for that element may be reported as
    <0.008 %.
    14.1.3 For structural products that are tested as given in
    Table B, two tension test results appropriate to qualify the
    shipment (see 11.4), except that only one tension test result
    need be reported if the shipment consists of a single piece or
    plate-as-rolled.
    14.1.3.1 In reporting elongation values, both the percentage
    increase and the original gage length shall be stated.
    14.1.3.2 Yield to tensile ratio when such a requirement is
    contained in the product specification.
    14.1.4 For structural products that are required to be heat
    treated, either by the applicable product specification or by the
    purchase order, all heat treatments, including temperature
    ranges and times at temperature, unless the purchaser and the
    supplier have agreed to the supply of a heat treatment procedure
    in place of the actual temperatures and times.
    14.1.4.1 Subcritical heat treatment to soften thermally cut
    edges need not be reported, except for structural products
    having a specified minimum tensile strength of 95 ksi [655
    MPa] or higher, unless such subcritical heating is accomplished
    at temperatures at least 75°F [40°C] lower than the minimum
    tempering temperature.
    14.1.5 The results of any required austenitic grain size tests
    (see 8.2 or 8.3, whichever is applicable).
    14.1.6 The results of any other test required by the applicable
    product specification, the applicable supplementary
    requirements, and the purchase order.
    14.2 The thickness of the structural product tested is not
    necessarily the same as an individual ordered thickness, given
    that it is the heat that is tested, rather than each ordered item.
    Tests from specified thicknesses in accordance with 11.4 and
    encompassing the thicknesses in a shipment shall be sufficient
    for qualifying the structural product in the shipment. Such test
    thicknesses are not required to be within previously tested and
    shipped thicknesses from the same heat.
    14.3 For structural products produced from coil that are
    supplied in the as-rolled condition or have been heat treated by
    stress relieving only, the test report shall state “Produced from
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    14
    Coil.” Both test results shall be reported for each qualifying
    coil, and the location within the coil for each test shall be
    stated.
    14.4 For structural products produced from coil, both the
    manufacturer and the processor shall be identified on the test
    report.
    14.5 When full-section test specimens have been used for
    the qualification of angles, that information shall be stated on
    the test report.
    14.6 A signature is not required on the test report; however,
    the document shall clearly identify the organization submitting
    the report. Notwithstanding the absence of a signature, the
    organization submitting the report is responsible for the content
    of the report.
    14.7 For structural products finished by other than the
    original manufacturer, the supplier of the structural product
    shall also provide the purchaser with a copy of the original
    manufacturer’s test report.
    14.8 A test report, certificate of inspection, or similar
    document printed from or used in electronic form from an
    electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission shall be regarded
    as having the same validity as a counterpart printed in
    the certifier’s facility. The content of the EDI transmitted
    document shall meet the requirements of the applicable product
    specification and shall conform to any existing EDI agreement
    between the purchaser and the supplier. Notwithstanding the
    absence of a signature, the organization submitting the EDI
    transmission shall be responsible for the content of the report.
    NOTE 9—The industry definition as invoked here is: EDI is the
    computer to computer exchange of business information in a standard
    format such as ANSI ASC X12.
15. Inspection and Testing
    15.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
    free entry, at all times, while work on the contract of the
    purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s
    works that concern the manufacture of the structural product
    ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all reasonable
    facilities to be satisfied that the structural product is
    being furnished in accordance with this general requirements
    specification, the applicable product specification, and the
    purchase order. All tests (except product analysis) and inspection
    shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to
    shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be conducted so
    as not to interfere with the operation of the manufacturer’s
    works.
    15.2 Where structural products are produced from coil, 15.1
    shall apply to the processor instead of the manufacturer, and
    the place of process shall apply instead of the place of
    manufacture. Where structural products are produced from coil
    and the processor is different from the manufacturer, the
    inspector representing the purchaser shall have free entry at all
    times while work on the contract of the purchaser is being
    performed to all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concern
    the manufacture of the structural product ordered.
16. Retreatment
    16.1 If any heat-treated structural product fails to meet the
    mechanical property requirements of the applicable product
    specification, the manufacturer or the processor shall have the
    option of heat treating the structural product again. All mechanical
    property tests shall be repeated and the structural
    product shall be reexamined for surface defects when it is
    resubmitted for inspection.
17. Rejection
    17.1 Any rejection based upon product analysis made in
    accordance with the applicable product specification shall be
    reported to the supplier and samples that represent the rejected
    structural product shall be preserved for two weeks from the
    date of notification of such rejection. In case of dissatisfaction
    with the results of the tests, the supplier shall have the option
    of making claim for a rehearing within that time.
    17.2 The purchaser shall have the option of rejecting structural
    product that exhibits injurious defects subsequent to its
    acceptance at the manufacturer’s or processor’s works, and so
    notifying the manufacturer or processor.
18. Identification of Structural Products
    18.1 Required Plate Markings:
    18.1.1 Except as allowed by 18.1.4.2 and 18.6, plates shall
    be legibly marked with the following: applicable ASTM
    designation (see 1.1) (year-date not required); “G” or “MT” if
    applicable (see 18.1.2); applicable grade; heat number; size and
    thickness; and name, brand, or trademark of the manufacturer
    (for plates produced from an as-rolled structural product) or the
    processor (for plates produced from coil).
    18.1.2 Plates that are required to be heat treated, but have
    not been so heat treated, shall be marked, by the manufacturer
    or processor, with the letter “G” (denoting green) following the
    required ASTM designation mark, except that “G” marking is
    not necessary if such plates are for shipment, for the purpose of
    obtaining the required heat treatment, to an organization under
    the manufacturer’s control. Such plates shall have been qualified
    for shipment on the basis of test specimens that have been
    so heat treated. Plates that are required to be heat treated, and
    have been so heat treated, shall be marked, by the party that
    performed the heat treatment, with the letter “MT” (denoting
    material treated) following the required ASTM designation
    mark.
    18.1.3 Except as allowed by 18.1.4.2 and 18.6, the required
    markings for plates shall be by steel die stamping, paint
    marking, or by means of permanently affixed, colorfast,
    weather-resistant labels or tags. It shall be the responsibility of
    the supplier that all required markings be intact and fully
    legible upon receipt by the purchaser.
    18.1.4 Location of Markings:
    18.1.4.1 The required markings for plates shall be in at least
    one place on each finished plate.
    18.1.4.2 For secured lifts of all sizes of plates 3/8 in. [10 mm]
    (or 5/16 in. [8 mm] for material specified for bridge construction
    end use) or under in thickness, and for secured lifts of all
    thicknesses of plates 36 in. [900 mm] or under in width, the
    manufacturer or processor shall have the option of placing such
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    15
    markings on only the top piece of each lift, or of showing such
    markings on a substantial tag attached to each lift, unless
    otherwise specified.
    18.2 Shapes:
    18.2.1 Except as allowed by 18.2.2 and 18.6, shapes shall be
    marked with the heat number, size of section, length, and mill
    identification marks on each piece. Shapes with the greatest
    cross-sectional dimension greater than 6 in. [150 mm] shall
    have the manufacturer’s name, brand, or trademark shown in
    raised letters at intervals along the length. In addition, shapes
    shall be identified with the ASTM designation (year-date not
    required) and grade, either by marking each piece individually,
    by permanently affixing a colorfast, weather-resistant label or
    tag, or, if bundled, by attaching a substantial tag to the bundle.
    18.2.2 Bundling for shipment of small shapes with the
    greatest cross-sectional dimension not greater than 6 in. [150
    mm] is permissible. Each lift or bundle shall be marked or
    substantially tagged showing the identification information
    listed in 18.2.1.
    18.2.3 It shall be permissible for the manufacturer to make
    a full size bundle at the end of a heat by adding product from
    a consecutively rolled heat of the same nominal chemical
    composition. The manufacturer shall identify a bundle consisting
    of product from two heats with the number of the first heat
    rolled or identify both heats. The manufacturer shall maintain
    records of the heats contained in each bundle.
    18.3 Steel Sheet Piling—Steel sheet piling shall be marked
    with the heat number, size of section, length, and mill identification
    marks on each piece, either by marking, or by
    permanently affixing colorfast, weather-resistant label or tag.
    The manufacturer’s name, brand, or trademark shall be shown
    in raised letters at intervals along the length.
    18.4 Bars—Bars of all sizes, when loaded for shipment,
    shall be properly identified with the name or brand of
    manufacturer, purchaser’s name and order number, the ASTM
    designation number (year-date not required), grade number
    where appropriate, size and length, weight [mass] of lift, and
    the heat number for identification. Unless otherwise specified,
    the method of marking is at the manufacturer’s option and shall
    be made by hot stamping, cold stamping, painting, or marking
    tags attached to the lifts of bars. Bars are not required to be
    die-stamped.
    18.4.1 It shall be permissible for the manufacturer to make
    a full size bundle at the end of a heat by adding product from
    a consecutively rolled heat of the same nominal chemical
    composition. The manufacturer shall identify a bundle consisting
    of product from two heats with the number of the first heat
    rolled or identify both heats. The manufacturer shall maintain
    records of the heats contained in each bundle.
    18.5 Bar Coding—In addition to the requirements of 18.1 –
    18.4 inclusive, the manufacturer or processor shall have the
    option of using bar coding as a supplementary identification
    method.
    NOTE 10—Bar coding should be consistent with AIAG Standards.
    18.6 Subdivided Material:
    18.6.1 Except as allowed by 18.6.2, pieces separated from
    a master structural product by an organization other than the
    original manufacturer shall be identified with the ASTM
    designation (year-date not required), grade, heat number, and
    the heat treatment identification, if applicable, along with the
    trademark, brand, or name of the organization subdividing the
    structural product. The identification methods shall be in
    accordance with the requirements of 18.1 – 18.4 inclusive,
    except that the raised letters method for shapes and steel sheet
    piling is not required. If the original manufacturer’s identification
    remains intact, the structural product need not be
    additionally identified by the organization supplying the structural
    product.
    18.6.2 It shall be permissible for pieces from the same heat
    of structural product to be bundled or placed in secured lifts,
    with the identification specified in 18.6.1 placed on the top
    piece of each lift or shown on a substantial tag attached to each
    bundle or lift.
19. Packaging, Marking, and Loading for Shipment
    19.1 Packaging, marking, and loading for shipment shall be
    in accordance with Practices A700.
    19.2 When Level A is specified, and when specified in the
    contract or order, and for direct procurement by or direct
    shipment to the U.S. government, preservation, packaging, and
    packing shall be in accordance with the Level A requirements
    of MIL-STD-163.
    19.3 When specified in the contract or order, and for direct
    procurement by or direct shipment to the U.S. government,
    marking for shipment, in addition to requirements specified in
    the contract or order, shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-
    129 for military agencies and with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil
    agencies.
20. Keywords
    20.1 bars; general requirements; plates; rolled; shapes; sheet
    piling; structural steel
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    16
    TABLE 1 Permitted Variations in Thickness for Rectangular, Carbon, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, and Alloy-Steel Plates, 15 in. and Under
    in Thickness When Ordered to Thickness
    NOTE 1—Tables 1-31 inclusive contain permitted variations in dimensions and weight stated in inch-pound units.
    NOTE 2—Permitted variation under specified thickness, 0.01 in. When so specified, these permitted variations may be taken all over, in which case the
    sum of these permitted variations applies.
    NOTE 3—Thickness to be measured at 3/8 to 3/4 in. from the longitudinal edge.
    NOTE 4—For thicknesses measured at any location other than that specified in Note 4, the permitted variations over specified thickness shall be 13/4
    times the amounts in this table, rounded to the nearest 0.01 in.
    NOTE 5—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
    Specified
    Thickness, in.
    Permitted Variations Over Specified Thickness for Widths Given in Inches, in.
    48 and
    under
    Over 48
    to 60,
    excl
    60 to
    72, excl
    72 to
    84, excl
    84 to
    96, excl
    96 to
    108,
    excl
    108 to
    120, excl
    120 to
    132, excl
    132 to
    144, excl
    144 to
    168, excl
    168 to
    182, excl
    182 and
    over
    To 1/4 , excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 … … …
    1/4 to 5/16, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 … … …
    5/16 to 3/8, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.05 … …
    3/8 to 7/16, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.06 …
    7/16 to 1/2, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.06 …
    1/2 to 5/8, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 …
    5/8 to 3/4, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.07
    3/4 to 1, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09
    1 to 2, excl 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.11 0.13 0.16
    2 to 3, excl 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.10 0.10 0.11 0.12 0.13 0.14 0.15 0.15 …
    3 to 4, excl 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.13 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.15 0.17 …
    4 to 6, excl 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.20 …
    6 to 10, excl 0.23 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.27 0.28 …
    10 to 12, excl 0.29 0.29 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.35 …
    12 to 15, incl 0.29 0.29 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 …
    TABLE 2 Permitted Variations in Weight for Rectangular Sheared Plates and Universal Mill Plates 613.0 lb/ft2 and Under When Ordered
    to Weight
    NOTE 1—Permitted variations in overweight for lots of circular and sketch plates shall be 11/4 times the amounts in this table.
    NOTE 2—Permitted variations in overweight for single plates shall be 11/3 times the amounts in this table.
    NOTE 3—Permitted variations in overweight for single circular and sketch plates shall be 12/3 times the amounts in this table.
    NOTE 4—The adopted standard density of rolled steel is 490 lb/ft3.
    NOTE 5—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
    Specified
    Weights,lb/ft2
    Permitted Variations in Average Weight of LotsA for Widths Given in Inches, Expressed in Percentage
    of the Specified Weights per Square Foot
    48 and
    under
    Over 48 to
    60, excl
    60 to 72,
    excl
    72 to 84,
    excl
    84 to 96,
    excl
    96 to 108,
    excl
    108 to 120,
    excl
    120 to 132,
    excl
    132 to 144,
    excl
    144 to 168,
    excl
    168 and
    over
    Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under
    To 10, excl 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 5.0 3.0 5.5 3.0 6.0 3.0 7.5 3.0 9.0 3.0 11.0 3.0 13.0 3.0 … … … …
    10 to 12.5, excl 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 4.5 3.0 5.0 3.0 5.5 3.0 6.5 3.0 7.0 3.0 8.0 3.0 9.0 3.0 12.0 3.0 … …
    12.5 to 15.0, excl 4.0 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 4.5 3.0 5.0 3.0 5.5 3.0 6.0 3.0 7.5 3.0 8.0 3.0 11.0 3.0 … …
    15 to 17.5, excl 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 4.5 3.0 5.0 3.0 5.5 3.0 6.0 3.0 7.0 3.0 9.0 3.0 10.0 3.0
    17.5 to 20, excl 3.5 2.5 3.5 2.5 3.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 4.5 3.0 5.0 3.0 5.5 3.0 6.0 3.0 8.0 3.0 9.0 3.0
    20 to 25, excl 3.5 2.5 3.5 2.5 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 5.0 3.0 5.5 3.0 7.0 3.0 8.0 3.0
    25 to 30, excl 3.0 2.5 3.5 2.5 3.5 2.5 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 5.0 3.0 6.5 3.0 7.0 3.0
    30 to 40, excl 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.5 2.0 3.5 2.5 3.5 2.5 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 6.0 3.0 6.5 3.0
    40 to 81.7, excl 2.5 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.5 2.0 3.5 2.0 3.5 2.5 3.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 5.5 3.0 6.0 3.0
    81.7 to 122.6, excl 2.5 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.5 2.0 3.5 2.0 3.5 2.5 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0
    122.6 to 163.4, excl 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 2.0 2.5 2.0 2.5 2.0 2.5 2.0 2.5 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.5 2.0
    163.4 to 245.1, excl 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 3.0 1.0 3.5 1.0
    245.1 to 409.0, excl 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 3.0 1.0
    409.0 to 490.1, excl 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0
    490.1 to 613.0, excl 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0
    A The term “lot” means all the plates of each tabular width and weight group represented in each shipment.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    17
    TABLE 3 Permitted Variations in Width and Length for Sheared Plates 11/2 in. and Under in Thickness; Length Only of Universal Mill
    Plates 21/2 in. and Under in Thickness
    Specified Dimensions, in. Permitted Variations Over Specified Width and LengthA for Thicknesses Given in Inches or Equivalent Weights Given in
    Pounds per Square Foot, in.
    Length Width
    To 3/8, excl 3/8 to 5/8 , excl 5/8 to 1, excl 1 to 2, inclB
    To 15.3, excl 15.3 to 25.5, excl 25.5 to 40.8, excl 40.8 to 81.7, incl
    Width Length Width Length Width Length Width Length
    To 120, excl To 60, excl 3/8 1/2 7/16 5/8 1/2 3/4 5/8 1
    60 to 84, excl 7/16 5/8 1/2 11/16 5/8 7/8 3/4 1
    84 to 108, excl 1/2 3/4 5/8 7/8 3/4 1 1 11/8
    108 and over 5/8 7/8 3/4 1 7/8 11/8 11/8 11/4
    120 to 240, excl To 60, excl 3/8 3/4 1/2 7/8 5/8 1 3/4 11/8
    60 to 84, excl 1/2 3/4 5/8 7/8 3/4 1 7/8 11/4
    84 to 108, excl 9/16 7/8 11/16 15/16 13/16 11/8 1 13/8
    108 and over 5/8 1 3/4 11/8 7/8 11/4 11/8 13/8
    240 to 360, excl To 60, excl 3/8 1 1/2 11/8 5/8 11/4 3/4 11/2
    60 to 84, excl 1/2 1 5/8 11/8 3/4 11/4 7/8 11/2
    84 to 108, excl 9/16 1 11/16 11/8 7/8 13/8 1 11/2
    108 and over 11/16 11/8 7/8 11/4 1 13/8 11/4 13/4
    360 to 480, excl To 60, excl 7/16 11/8 1/2 11/4 5/8 13/8 3/4 15/8
    60 to 84, excl 1/2 11/4 5/8 13/8 3/4 11/2 7/8 15/8
    84 to 108, excl 9/16 11/4 3/4 13/8 7/8 11/2 1 17/8
    108 and over 3/4 13/8 7/8 11/2 1 15/8 11/4 17/8
    480 to 600, excl To 60, excl 7/16 11/4 1/2 11/2 5/8 15/8 3/4 17/8
    60 to 84, excl 1/2 13/8 5/8 11/2 3/4 15/8 7/8 17/8
    84 to 108, excl 5/8 13/8 3/4 11/2 7/8 15/8 1 17/8
    108 and over 3/4 11/2 7/8 15/8 1 13/4 11/4 17/8
    600 to 720, excl To 60, excl 1/2 13/4 5/8 17/8 3/4 17/8 7/8 21/4
    60 to 84, excl 5/8 13/4 3/4 17/8 7/8 17/8 1 21/4
    84 to 108, excl 5/8 13/4 3/4 17/8 7/8 17/8 11/8 21/4
    108 and over 7/8 13/4 1 2 11/8 21/4 11/4 21/2
    720 and over To 60, excl 9/16 2 3/4 21/8 7/8 21/4 1 23/4
    60 to 84, excl 3/4 2 7/8 21/8 1 21/4 11/8 23/4
    84 to 108, excl 3/4 2 7/8 21/8 1 21/4 11/4 23/4
    108 and over 1 2 11/8 23/8 11/4 21/2 13/8 3
    A Permitted variation under specified width and length, 1/4 in. By agreement, these permitted variations may be taken all over, in which case the sum of the permitted
    variations applies.
    B Permitted variations in length apply also to Universal Mill plates up to 12 in. in width for thicknesses over 2 to 21/2 in., incl, except for alloy steel up to 2 in. thick.
    TABLE 4 Permitted Variations in Width for Mill Edge Carbon and
    High-Strength, Low-Alloy Plates Produced on Strip Mills (Applies
    to Plates Produced from Coil and to Plates Produced from an
    As-Rolled Structural Product)
    Specified Width, in.
    Permitted Variation Over
    Specified Width, in.A
    To 14, excl 7/16
    14 to 17, excl 1/2
    17 to 19, excl 9/16
    19 to 21, excl 5/8
    21 to 24, excl 11/16
    24 to 26, excl 13/16
    26 to 28, excl 15/16
    28 to 35, excl 11/8
    35 to 50, excl 11/4
    50 to 60, excl 11/2
    60 to 65, excl 15/8
    65 to 70, excl 13/4
    70 to 80, excl 17/8
    80 and over 2
    A No permitted variation under specified width.
    TABLE 5 Permitted Variations in Rolled Width for Universal Mill
    Plates 15 in. and Under in Thickness
    Specified Width,
    in.
    Permitted Variations Over Specified WidthA for
    Thicknesses Given in Inches or Equivalent Weights Given
    in Pounds per Square Foot, in.
    To 3/8 ,
    excl
    3/8 to
    5/8, excl
    5/8 to
    1, excl
    1 to 2,
    incl
    Over 2
    to 10,
    incl
    Over 10
    to
    15, incl
    To 15.3,
    excl
    15.3 to
    25.5,
    excl
    25.5 to
    40.8,
    excl
    40.8 to
    81.7,
    incl
    81.7 to
    409.0,
    incl
    409.0 to
    613.0,
    incl
    Over 8 to 20, excl 1/8 1/8 3/16 1/4 3/8 1/2
    20 to 36, excl 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 9/16
    36 and over 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8
    A Permitted variation under specified width, 1/8 in.
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    18
    TABLE 6 Permitted Variations in Diameter for Sheared Circular
    Plates 1 in. and Under in Thickness
    Specified Diameters, in.
    Permitted Variations Over Specified Diameter
    for Thicknesses Given in Inches, in.A
    To 3/8 ,
    excl
    3/8 to 5/8,
    excl
    5/8 to 1,
    incl
    To 32, excl 1/4 3/8 1/2
    32 to 84, excl 5/16 7/16 9/16
    84 to 108, excl 3/8 1/2 5/8
    108 to 130, excl 7/16 9/16 11/16
    130 and over 1/2 5/8 3/4
    A No permitted variation under specified diameter.
    TABLE 7 Permitted Variations in Diameter for Gas-Cut Circular
    Plates (Not Applicable to Alloy Steel)
    Specified
    Diameter, in.
    Permitted Variation Over Specified Diameter for
    Thicknesses Given in Inches, in.A
    to 1,
    excl
    1 to 2,
    excl
    2 to 4,
    excl
    4 to 6,
    excl
    6 to 8,
    excl
    8 to 15,
    incl
    To 32, excl 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 3/4
    32 to 84, excl 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8
    84 to 108, excl 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1
    108 to 130, excl 1/2 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 11/8
    130 and over 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 11/8 11/4
    A No permitted variation under specified diameter.
    TABLE 8 Permitted Variations in Width and Length for
    Rectangular Plates When Gas Cuttings is Specified or Required
    (Applies to Alloy Steel Specifications Only)
    NOTE 1—These permitted variations shall be taken all under or divided
    over and under, if so specified.
    NOTE 2—Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length
    only.
    Specified Thickness, in.
    Permitted Variation Over Specified
    Width and Length, in.
    To 2, excl 3/4
    2 to 4, excl 1
    4 to 6, excl 11/8
    6 to 8, excl 15/16
    8 to 15, incl 11/2
    TABLE 9 Permitted Variations in Width and Length for
    Rectangular Plates When Gas Cutting is Specified or Required
    (Not Applicable to Alloy Steel)
    NOTE 1—These permitted variations may be taken all under or divided
    over and under, if so specified.
    NOTE 2—Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length
    only.
    Specified Thickness, in.
    Permitted Variation Over Specified
    Width and Length, in.
    To 2, excl 1/2
    2 to 4, excl 5/8
    4 to 6, excl 3/4
    6 to 8, excl 7/8
    8 to 15, incl 1
    TABLE 10 Permitted Variations in Diameter for Gas-Cut Circular
    Plates (Applies to Alloy Steel Specifications Only)
    Specified
    Diameter, in.
    Permitted Variations Over Specified Diameter for Specified
    Thicknesses Given in Inches, in.A
    to 1, excl
    1 to 2,
    excl
    2 to 4,
    excl
    4 to 6,
    excl
    6 to 8,
    excl
    8 to 15,
    incl
    To 32, excl 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 1
    32 to 84, excl 1/2 5/8 7/8 1 11/8 11/4
    84 to 108, excl 5/8 3/4 1 11/8 11/4 13/8
    108 to 130, incl 7/8 1 11/8 11/4 13/8 11/2
    A No permitted variation under specified diameter.
    TABLE 11 Permitted CamberA for Carbon Steel, High-Strength
    Low-Alloy Steel, and Alloy Steel Universal Mill Plates and High-
    Strength Low-Alloy Steel and Alloy Steel Sheared, Special-Cut,
    or Gas-Cut Rectangular Plates
    Specified
    Thickness,
    in.
    Specified Weight,
    lb/ft2
    Specified
    Width,
    in.
    Permitted Camber, in.
    To 2, incl to 81.7, incl all 1/8 × (no. of feet of length/5)
    Over 2 to 15, 81.7 to 613.0, incl to 30, incl 3/16 × (no. of feet of
    incl length/5)
    Over 2 to 15, 81.7 to 613.0, incl over 30 1/4 × (no. of feet of
    incl length/5)
    A Camber as it relates to plates is the horizontal edge curvature in the length,
    measured over the entire length of the plate in the flat position.
    TABLE 12 Permitted CamberA for Sheared Plates and Gas-Cut
    Rectangular Plates, All Thicknesses (Applies to Carbon Steel
    Only)
    Permitted camber, in. = 1/8 × (number of feet of length/5)
    A Camber as it relates to plates is the horizontal edge curvature in the length,
    measured over the entire length of the plate in the flat position.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    19
    TABLE 13 Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Standard Flatness Carbon Steel Plates
    NOTE 1—When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 1/4 in. When the longer dimension
    is from 36 to 72 in., incl, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case
    less than 1/4 in.
    NOTE 2—These permitted variations apply to plates that have a specified minimum tensile strength of not more than 60 ksi or comparable chemical
    composition or hardness. The limits in this table are increased 50 % for plates that have a higher specified minimum tensile strength or comparable
    chemical composition or hardness.
    NOTE 3—This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum
    dimensions of such plates.
    NOTE 4—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
    NOTE 5—Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
    Specified
    Thickness, in.
    Specified Weight,
    lb/ft2
    Permitted Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Inches, in.A,B
    To 36,
    excl
    36 to 48,
    excl
    48 to
    60, excl
    60 to
    72, excl
    72 to
    84, excl
    84 to
    96, excl
    96 to
    108,
    excl
    108 to
    120,
    excl
    120 to
    144,
    excl
    144 to
    168,
    excl
    168 and
    Over
    To 1/4 , excl To 10.2, excl 9/16 3/4 15/16 11/4 13/8 11/2 15/8 13/4 17/8 … …
    1/4 to 3/8, excl 10.2 to 15.3, excl 1/2 5/8 3/4 15/16 11/8 11/4 13/8 11/2 15/8 … …
    3/8 to 1/2, excl 15.3 to 20.4, excl 1/2 9/16 5/8 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 11/8 11/4 17/8 21/8
    1/2 to 3/4, excl 20.4 to 30.6, excl 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 5/8 3/4 1 1 11/8 11/2 2
    3/4 to 1, excl 30.6 to 40.8, excl 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 13/8 13/4
    1 to 2, excl 40.8 to 81.7, excl 3/8 1/2 1/2 9/16 9/16 5/8 5/8 5/8 11/16 11/8 11/2
    2 to 4, excl 81.7 to 163.4, excl 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 9/16 5/8 7/8 11/8
    4 to 6, excl 163.4 to 245.1, excl 3/8 7/16 1/2 1/2 9/16 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 7/8 1
    6 to 8, excl 245.1 to 326.8, excl 7/16 1/2 1/2 5/8 11/16 3/4 7/8 7/8 1 1 1
    8 to 10, excl 326.8 to 409.0, excl 1/2 1/2 5/8 11/16 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 1 1
    10 to 12, excl 409.0 to 490.1, excl 1/2 5/8 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 1 1 1 1
    12 to 15, excl 490.1 to 613.0, incl 5/8 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 1 1 1 1 …
    A Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface for Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the
    length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width for plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft for longer plates.
    B Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface for Width—The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
    TABLE 14 Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Standard Flatness High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel and Alloy Steel Plates, Hot
    Rolled or Thermally Treated
    NOTE 1—When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 3/8 in. When the longer dimension
    is from 36 to 72 in. incl, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount for the specified width.
    NOTE 2—This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum
    dimensions of such plates.
    NOTE 3—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
    NOTE 4—Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
    Specified
    Thickness, in.
    Specified Weight,
    lb/ft2
    Permitted Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in.A,B
    To 36,
    excl
    36 to 48,
    excl
    48 to
    60, excl
    60 to
    72, excl
    72 to
    84, excl
    84 to
    96, excl
    96 to
    108,
    excl
    108 to
    120,
    excl
    120 to
    144,
    excl
    144 to
    168,
    excl
    168 and
    Over
    To 1/4 , excl To 10.2 excl 13/16 11/8 13/8 17/8 2 21/4 23/8 25/8 23/4 … …
    1/4 to 3/8, excl 10.2 to 15.3, excl 3/4 15/16 11/8 13/8 13/4 17/8 2 21/4 23/8 … …
    3/8 to 1/2, excl 15.3 to 20.4, excl 3/4 7/8 15/16 15/16 11/8 15/16 11/2 15/8 17/8 23/4 31/8
    1/2 to 3/4, excl 20.4 to 30.6, excl 5/8 3/4 13/16 7/8 1 11/8 11/4 13/8 15/8 21/4 3
    3/4 to 1, excl 30.6 to 40.8, excl 5/8 3/4 7/8 7/8 15/16 1 11/8 15/16 11/2 2 25/8
    1 to 2, excl 40.8 to 81.7, excl 9/16 5/8 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 1 1 15/8 21/4
    2 to 4, excl 81.7 to 163.4, excl 1/2 9/16 11/16 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 11/4 15/8
    4 to 6, excl 163.4 to 245.1, excl 9/16 11/16 3/4 3/4 7/8 7/8 15/16 11/8 11/4 11/4 11/2
    6 to 8, excl 245.1 to 326.8, excl 5/8 3/4 3/4 15/16 1 11/8 11/4 15/16 11/2 11/2 11/2
    8 to 10, excl 326.8 to 409.0, excl 3/4 13/16 15/16 1 11/8 11/4 15/16 13/8 11/2 11/2 11/2
    10 to 12, excl 409.0 to 490.1, excl 3/4 15/16 11/8 11/4 15/16 13/8 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
    12 to 15, incl 490.1 to 613.0, incl 7/8 1 13/16 15/16 13/8 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
    A Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface for Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the
    length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft for longer plates.
    B Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface for Width—The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    20
    TABLE 15 Permitted Variations in Waviness for Standard
    Flatness Plates
    NOTE 1—Waviness denotes the maximum deviation of the surface of
    the plate from a plane parallel to the surface of the point of measurement
    and contiguous to the surface of the plate at each of the two adjacent wave
    peaks, when the plate is resting on a flat horizontal surface, as measured
    in an increment of less than 12 ft of length. The permitted variation in
    waviness is a function of the permitted variation from a flat surface as
    obtained from Table 13 or Table 14, whichever is applicable.
    NOTE 2—Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when
    waviness is measured.
    Permitted
    Variation
    from a
    Flat Surface
    (from Table 13 or
    Table 14), in.
    Permitted Variation in Waviness, in., When
    Number of Waves in 12 ft is
    1 2 3 4 5 6 7
    5/16 5/16 1/4 3/16 1/8 1/8 1/16 1/16
    3/8 3/8 5/16 3/16 3/16 1/8 1/16 1/16
    7/16 7/16 5/16 1/4 3/16 1/8 1/8 1/16
    1/2 1/2 3/8 5/16 3/16 3/16 1/8 1/16
    9/16 9/16 7/16 5/16 1/4 3/16 1/8 1/8
    5/8 5/8 1/2 3/8 1/4 3/16 1/8 1/8
    11/16 11/16 1/2 3/8 5/16 3/16 3/16 1/8
    3/4 3/4 9/16 7/16 5/16 1/4 3/16 1/8
    13/16 13/16 5/8 7/16 5/16 1/4 3/16 1/8
    7/8 7/8 11/16 1/2 3/8 1/4 3/16 1/8
    15/16 15/16 11/16 1/2 3/8 5/16 1/4 3/16
    1 1 3/4 9/16 7/16 5/16 1/4 3/16
    11/8 11/8 7/8 5/8 1/2 3/8 1/4 3/16
    11/4 11/4 15/16 11/16 1/2 3/8 5/16 1/4
    13/8 13/8 11/16 3/4 9/16 7/16 5/16 1/4
    11/2 11/2 11/8 7/8 5/8 1/2 3/8 1/4
    15/8 15/8 11/4 15/16 11/16 1/2 3/8 5/16
    13/4 13/4 15/16 1 3/4 9/16 7/16 5/16
    17/8 17/8 17/16 11/16 13/16 9/16 7/16 5/16
    2 2 11/2 11/8 7/8 5/8 1/2 3/8
    21/8 21/8 15/8 13/16 7/8 11/16 1/2 3/8
    21/4 21/4 111/16 11/4 15/16 11/16 9/16 3/8
    23/8 23/8 113/16 15/16 1 3/4 9/16 7/16
    21/2 21/2 17/8 17/16 11/16 13/16 9/16 7/16
    25/8 25/8 2 11/2 11/8 13/16 5/8 7/16
    23/4 23/4 21/16 19/16 11/8 7/8 5/8 1/2
    27/8 27/8 23/16 15/8 13/16 15/16 11/16 1/2
    3 3 21/4 111/16 11/4 15/16 11/16 9/16
    31/8 31/8 23/8 13/4 15/16 1 3/4 9/16
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    21
    TABLE 16 Permitted Variations in Cross Section for W, HP, S, M, C, and MC Shapes
    NOTE 1—A is measured at center line of web for S, M, and W and HP shapes; at back of web for C and MC shapes. Measurement is overall for C
    shapes under 3 in. B is measured parallel to flange. C is measured parallel to web.
    NOTE 2—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
    Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, in.
    Shape Section Nominal Sizes, in.
    A, Depth B, Flange Width T + T’ A
    Flanges
    Out-of-
    SquareB
    E, Web
    off CenterC
    C, Maximum
    Depth at
    any Cross
    Section
    over Theoretical
    Depth, in.
    Permitted Variations
    Over or Under Theoretical
    Web Thickness for
    Thicknesses Given in
    Inches, in.
    Over
    Theoretical
    Under
    Theoretical
    Over
    Theoretical
    Under
    Theoretical
    3/16 and
    under
    Over 3/16
    W and HP Up to 12, incl
    Over 12
    1/8
    1/8
    1/8
    1/8
    1/4
    1/4
    3/16
    3/16
    1/4
    5/16
    3/16
    3/16
    1/4
    1/4
    …
    …
    …
    …
    S and M 3 to 7, incl
    Over 7 to 14, incl
    Over 14 to 24, incl
    3/32
    1/8
    3/16
    1/16
    3/32
    1/8
    1/8
    5/32
    3/16
    1/8
    5/32
    3/16
    1/32
    1/32
    1/32
    3/16
    3/16
    3/16
    …
    …
    …
    …
    …
    …
    …
    …
    …
    C and MC 11/2 and under 1/32 1/32 1/32 1/32 1/32 … … 0.010 0.015
    Over 11/2 to 3, excl 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/32 … … 0.015 0.020
    3 to 7, incl 3/32 1/16 1/8 1/8 1/32 … … … …
    Over 7 to 14, incl 1/8 3/32 1/8 5/32 1/32 … … … …
    Over 14 3/16 1/8 1/8 3/16 1/32 … … … …
    A T + T’ applies when flanges of channels are toed in or out. For channels 5/8 in. and under in depth, the permitted out-of-square is 3/64 in./in. of depth.
    B Permitted variation is per inch of flange width for S, M, C, and MC shapes.
    C Permitted variation of 5/16 in. max for sections over 426 lb/ft.
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    22
    TABLE 17 Permitted Variations in Cross Section for Angles (L Shapes), Bulb Angles, and Zees
    NOTE 1—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
    Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, in.
    Section Nominal Size, in.
    A, Depth
    B, Flange Width or
    Length of Leg T, Out-of-
    Square per
    Inch of B, in.
    Permitted Variations Over or Under Theoretical Thickness
    for Thicknesses
    Given in Inches, in.
    Over
    Theoretical
    Under
    Theoretical
    Over
    Theoretical
    Under
    Theoretical
    3/16 and
    under
    Over 3/16
    to 3/8, incl
    Over 3/8
    AnglesA 1 and under … … 1/32 1/32 3/128
    B 0.008 0.010 …
    (L Shapes) Over 1 to 2, incl … … 3/64 3/64 3/128
    B 0.010 0.010 0.012
    Over 2 to 21/2 , incl … … 1/16 1/16 3/128
    B 0.012 0.015 0.015
    Over 21/2 to 4, incl … … 1/8 3/32 3/128
    B … … …
    Over 4 to 6, incl … … 1/8 1/8 3/128
    B … … …
    Over 6 to 8, incl … … 3/16 1/8 3/128
    B … … …
    Over 8 to 10, incl … … 1/4 1/4 3/128
    B … … …
    Over 10 … … 1/4 3/8 3/128
    B … … …
    Bulb angles (Depth) 3 to 4, incl
    Over 4 to 6, incl
    Over 6
    1/8
    1/8
    1/8
    1/16
    1/16
    1/16
    1/8
    1/8
    3/16
    3/32
    1/8
    1/8
    3/128
    B
    3/128
    B
    3/128
    B
    …
    …
    …
    …
    …
    …
    …
    …
    …
    Zees 3 to 4, incl
    Over 4 to 6, incl
    1/8
    1/8
    1/16
    1/16
    1/8
    1/8
    3/32
    1/8
    3/128
    B
    3/128
    B
    …
    …
    …
    …
    …
    …
    A For unequal leg angles, longer leg determines classification.
    B 3/128 in./in. = 11/2 °.
    TABLE 18 Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions for Rolled Tees
    NOTE 1—Back of square and center line of stem are to be parallel when measuring “out-of-square.” NOTE 2—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement. Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, in. Tees Nominal Size,A A, DepthB B, WidthB T, Outof- Square per Inch of B E, Web-off- Center Stem Out-of- SquareC Thickness of Flange Thickness of Stem Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under 11/4 and under 3/64 3/64 3/64 3/64 … … 1/32 0.010 0.010 0.005 0.020 Over 11/4 to 2, incl 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 … … 1/16 0.012 0.012 0.010 0.020 Over 2 to 3, excl 3/32 3/32 3/32 3/32 … … 3/32 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.020 3 to 5, incl 3/32 1/16 1/8 1/8 1/32 3/32 … … … … … Over 5 to 7, incl 3/32 1/16 1/8 1/8 1/32 1/8 … … … … … A The longer member of an unequal tee determines the size for permitted variations. B Measurements for both depth and width are overall. C Stem-out-of-square is the permitted variation from its true position of the center line of stem, measured at the point. ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M 23 TABLE 19 Permitted Variations in Length for S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, and Bulb Angle Shapes NOTE 1—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement. Nominal Size,A in. Permitted Variations from Specified Length for Lengths Given in Feet, in. 5 to 10, excl 10 to 20,excl 20 to 30, incl Over 30 to 40, incl Over 40 to 50, incl Over 50 to 65, incl Over 65 ft Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Under 3 3 and over 5/8 1 0 0 1 11/2 0 0 11/2 13/4 0 0 2 21/4 0 0 21/2 23/4 0 0 21/2 23/4 0 0 … … … … A Greatest cross-sectional dimension. TABLE 20 Permitted Variations in End Out-Of-Square for S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, Bulb Angle, and Flat Bar Shapes Shapes Permitted Variation S, M, C, and MC 1/64 in. per inch of depth LA 3/128 in. per inch of leg length or 11/2 ° Bulb angles 3/128 in. per inch of depth or 11/2 ° Rolled TeesA 1/64 in. per inch of flange or stem Zees 3/128 in. per inch of sum of both flange lengths Flat BarsB 1/16 in. per inch of width but not less than 5/16 in. A Permitted variations in end out-of-square are determined on the longer members of the shape. B For flat bars, permitted variations in end out-of-square are determined on the width of the bar. SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 24 TABLE 21 Permitted Variations in Straightness for S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, and Bulb Angle Shapes Positions for Measuring Camber of Shapes Variable Nominal Size,A in. Permitted Variation, in. Camber Under 3 1/4 in. in any 5 ft, or 1/4 × (number of feet of total length/5) 3 and over 1/8 × (number of feet of total length/5) Sweep All Due to the extreme variations in flexibility of these shapes, permitted variations for sweep are subject to negotiations between the manufacturer and the purchaser for the individual sections involved. A Greatest cross-sectional dimension. TABLE 22 Permitted Variations in Length for W and HP Shapes Permitted Variations from Specified Length for Lengths Given in Feet, in.A, B Over Under 4 0 A For HP and W shapes specified in the order for use as bearing piles, the permitted variations in length are plus 5 in. and minus 0 in. These permitted variations in length also apply to sheet piles. B The permitted variations in end out-of-square for W and HP shapes shall be 1/64 in. per inch of depth, or per inch of flange width if the flange width is larger than the depth. ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M 25 TABLE 23 Permitted Variations in Length and End Out-of-Square, Milled Shapes Permitted Variations in Length and End Out-of-Square, in.A Nominal Depth, in. Length, ftB Milled Both EndsC Milled One-EndC Length End Out-of- Square Length End Out-of- Square (for Over Under Over Under Milled End) 6 to 36 6 to 70 1/32 1/32 1/32 1/4 1/4 1/32 A Length is measured along center line of web. Measurements are made with the steel and tape at the same temperature. B The permitted variations in length and end out-of-square are additive. C End out-of-square is measured by (a) squaring from the center line of the web and (b) squaring from the center line of the flange. The measured variation from true squareness in either plane shall not exceed the total tabular amount. TABLE 24 Permitted Variations in Straightness for W and HP Shapes Positions for Measuring Camber and Sweep of W and HP Shapes Permitted Variation in Straightness, in. Camber and sweep 1/8 × (number of feet of total length/10)A When certain sectionsB with a flange width approximately equal to depth are specified in the order for use as columns: Lengths of 45 ft and under 1/8 × (number of feet of total length/10) but not over 3/8 Lengths over 45 ft 3/8 + [1/8 × ([number of feet of total length – 45] /10)] A Sections with a flange width less than 6 in., permitted variation for sweep, in. = 1/8 × (number of feet of total length/5). B Applies only to: 8-in. deep sections 31 lb/ft and heavier, 10-in. deep sections 49 lb/ft and heavier, 12-in. deep sections 65 lb/ft and heavier, 14-in. deep sections 90 lb/ft and heavier, 16-in. deep sections 88 lb/ft and heavier, and 18-in. deep sections 135 lb/ft and heavier. For other sections specified in the order for use as columns, the permitted variation is subject to negotiation with the manufacturer. TABLE 25 Permitted Variations in Dimensions for Split Tees and Split Angles (L Shapes)A Specified Depth, in. Permitted Variation Over or Under Specified Depth,B in. To 6, excl (beams and channels) 1/8 6 to 16, excl (beams and channels) 3/16 16 to 20, excl (beams and channels) 1/4 20 to 24, excl (beams) 5/16 24 and over (beams) 3/8 A The permitted variations in length for split tees or angles are the same as those applicable to the section from which the tees or angles are split. B The above permitted variations in depth of tees or angles include the permitted variations in depth for the beams or channels before splitting. Permitted variations in dimensions and straightness, as set up for the beams or channels from which these tees or angles are cut, apply, except: straightness = 1/8 in. × (length in feet/5) SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 26 TABLE 26 Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions for Square-Edge and Round-Edge Flat Bars NOTE 1—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement. Specified Widths, in. Permitted Variations Over or Under Specified Thickness, for Thicknesses Given in Inches, in. Permitted Variations From Specified Width, in. 0.203 to 0.230, excl 0.230 to 1/4, excl 1/4 to 1/2, incl Over 1/2 to 1, incl Over 1 to 2, incl Over 2 to 3, incl Over 3 Over Under To 1, incl 0.007 0.007 0.008 0.010 … … … 1/64 1/64 Over 1 to 2, incl 0.007 0.007 0.012 0.015 1/32 … … 1/32 1/32 Over 2 to 4, incl 0.008 0.008 0.015 0.020 1/32 3/64 3/64 1/16 1/32 Over 4 to 6, incl 0.009 0.009 0.015 0.020 1/32 3/64 3/64 3/32 1/16 Over 6 to 8, incl A 0.015 0.016 0.025 1/32 3/64 1/16 1/8 B 3/32 B A Flats over 6 to 8 in., incl, in width are not available as hot-rolled carbon steel bars in thickness under 0.230 in. B For flats over 6 to 8 in., in width, and to 3 in. incl in thickness. TABLE 27 Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions for Round and Square Bars and Round-Cornered Squares Specified Size, in. Permitted Variations from Specified Size, in. Permitted Out-of- Round or Out-of-Square, Over Under in.A To 5/16 0.005 0.005 0.008 Over 5/16 to 7/16, incl 0.006 0.006 0.009 Over 7/16 to 5/8, incl 0.007 0.007 0.010 Over 5/8 to 7/8, incl 0.008 0.008 0.012 Over 7/8 to 1, incl 0.009 0.009 0.013 Over 1 to 11/8 , incl 0.010 0.010 0.015 Over 11/8 to 11/4, incl 0.011 0.011 0.016 Over 11/4 to 13/8, incl 0.012 0.012 0.018 Over 13/8 to 11/2, incl 0.014 0.014 0.021 Over 11/2 to 2, incl 1/64 1/64 0.023 Over 2 to 21/2 , incl 1/32 0 0.023 Over 21/2 to 31/2, incl 3/64 0 0.035 Over 31/2 to 41/2, incl 1/16 0 0.046 Over 41/2 to 51/2, incl 5/64 0 0.058 Over 51/2 to 61/2, incl 1/8 0 0.070 Over 61/2 to 81/4, incl 5/32 0 0.085 Over 81/4 to 91/2, incl 3/16 0 0.100 Over 91/2 to 10, incl 1/4 0 0.120 A Out-of-round is the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters of the bar, measured at the same transverse cross section. Out-of-square section is the difference in perpendicular distance between opposite faces, measured at the same transverse cross section. TABLE 28 Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions for Hexagons Specified Sizes Between Opposite Sides, in. Permitted Variations from Specified Size, in. Permitted Out-of- Hexagon Section, Three Measurements, in.A Over Under 1/2 and under 0.007 0.007 0.011 Over 1/2 to 1, incl 0.010 0.010 0.015 Over 1 to 11/2 , incl 0.021 0.013 0.025 Over 11/2 to 2, incl 1/32 1/64 1/32 Over 2 to 21/2 , incl 3/64 1/64 3/64 Over 21/2 to 31/2, incl 1/16 1/64 1/16 A Out-of-hexagon section is the greatest difference in distance between any two opposite faces measured at the same transverse cross section. ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M 27 SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS The following standardized supplementary requirements are for use when desired by the purchaser. Those that are considered suitable for use with each material specification are listed in the specification. Other tests may be performed by agreement between the supplier and the purchaser. These additional requirements shall apply only when specified in the order, in which event the specified tests shall be made by the manufacturer or processor before shipment of the material. S1. Vacuum Treatment S1.1 The steel shall be made by a process that includes vacuum degassing while molten. Unless otherwise agreed upon with the purchaser, it is the responsibility of the manufacturer to select suitable process procedures. S2. Product Analysis S2.1 Product analyses shall be made for those elements specified or restricted by the applicable product specification for the applicable grade, class, and type. Specimens for analysis shall be taken adjacent to or from the tension test specimen, or from a sample taken from the same relative location as that from which the tension test specimen was taken. S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical Test Coupons S3.1 Prior to testing, the test specimens representing the structural product for acceptance purposes for mechanical properties shall be thermally treated to simulate a post-weld heat treatment below the critical temperature (Ac3), using the heat treatment parameters (such as temperature range, time, TABLE 29 Permitted Variations in Straightness for Bars Permitted Variations in Straightness, in.A 1/4 in any 5 ft and 1/4 × (number of feet of total length/5) A Permitted variations in straightness do not apply to hot-rolled bars if any subsequent heating operation has been performed. TABLE 30 Permitted Variations in Length for Hot-Cut Steel BarsA NOTE 1—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement. Specified Sizes of Rounds, Squares, and Hexagons, in. Specified Sizes of Flats, in. Permitted Variations Over Specified Length Given in Feet, in. (No Variation Under) Thickness Width 5 to 10, excl 10 to 20, excl 20 to 30, excl 30 to 40, excl 40 to 60, incl To 1, incl To 1, incl To 3, incl 1/2 3/4 11/4 13/4 21/4 Over 1 to 2, incl Over 1 To 3, incl 5/8 1 11/2 2 21/2 Over 1 to 2, incl To 1, incl Over 3 to 6, incl 5/8 1 11/2 2 21/2 Over 2 to 5, incl Over 1 Over 3 to 6, incl 1 11/2 13/4 21/4 23/4 Over 5 to 10, incl … … 2 21/2 23/4 3 31/4 0.230 to 1, incl Over 6 to 8, incl 3/4 11/4 13/4 31/2 4 Over 1 to 3, incl Over 6 to 8, incl 11/4 13/4 2 31/2 4 Hot Sawing 2 to 5, inclB Over 5 to 10, incl 1 and over … 3 and over … B B 11/2 21/2 13/4 23/4 21/4 3 23/4 31/4 A For flats over 6 to 8 in., incl, in width and over 3 in. in thickness, consult the manufacturer for permitted variations in length. B Smaller sizes and shorter lengths are not commonly hot sawed. TABLE 31 Permitted Variations in Length for Bars Recut Both Ends After StraighteningA,B Sizes of Rounds, Squares, Hexagons, Width of Flats and Maximum Dimension of Other Sections, in. Permitted Variations from Specified Lengths Given in Feet, in. To 12, incl Over 12 Over Under Over Under To 3, incl 3/16 1/16 1/4 1/16 Over 3 to 6, incl 1/4 1/16 3/8 1/16 Over 6 to 8, incl 3/8 1/16 1/2 1/16 Rounds over 8 to 10, incl 1/2 1/16 5/8 1/16 A For flats over 6 to 8 in., incl, in width, and over 3 in. in thickness, consult the manufacturer or processor for permitted variations in length. B Permitted variations are sometimes required all over or all under the specified length, in which case the sum of the two permitted variations applies. SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 28 and cooling rates) specified in the order. The test results for such heat-treated test specimens shall meet the applicable product specification requirements. S4. Additional Tension Test S4.1 Plate—One tension test shall be made from each unit plate rolled from a slab or directly from an ingot, except that for quenched and tempered plates, a test shall be taken from each unit plate heat treated. The results obtained shall be reported on the mill test reports when such tests are required by the order. S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test S5.1 Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be conducted in accordance with Specification A673/A673M. S5.2 The frequency of testing, the test temperature to be used, and the absorbed energy requirements shall be as specified on the order. S6. Drop-Weight Test (for Material 0.625 in. [16 mm] and Over in Thickness) S6.1 Drop-weight tests shall be made in accordance with Test Method E208. The specimens shall represent the material in the final condition of heat treatment. Agreement shall be reached between the purchaser and the manufacturer or processor as to the number of pieces to be tested and whether a maximum nil-ductility transition (NDT) temperature is mandatory or if the test results are for information only. S8. Ultrasonic Examination S8.1 The material shall be ultrasonically examined in accordance with the requirements specified on the order. S15. Reduction of Area Measurement S15.1 The reduction of area, as determined on the 0.500-in. [12.5-mm] diameter round tension test specimen in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A370, shall not be less than 40 %. S18. Maximum Tensile Strength S18.1 Steel having a specified minimum tensile strength of less than 70 ksi [485 MPa] shall not exceed the minimum specified tensile strength by more than 30 ksi [205 MPa]. S18.2 Steel having a minimum specified tensile strength of 70 ksi [485 MPa] or higher shall not exceed the minimum specified tensile strength by more than 25 ksi [170 MPa]. S23. Copper-Bearing Steel (for improved atmospheric corrosion resistance) S23.1 The copper content shall be a minimum of 0.20 % on heat analysis, 0.18 on product analysis. S26. Subdivided Material—Marking of Individual Pieces S26.1 Subdivided pieces shall be individually identified by marking, stenciling, or die stamping the applicable product specification designation (year-date not required), grade, heat number, and the heat treatment identification, if applicable, along with the trademark, brand, or name of the organization that subdivided the structural product. As an alternative, individual subdivided pieces shall be identified by a code traceable to the original required identification, provided that the trademark, name, or brand of the organization that subdivided the structural product is also placed on the structural product and the original required identification, cross referenced on the code, is furnished with the structural product. S27. Restrictive Plate Flatness S27.1 As-rolled or normalized carbon steel plates ordered to restrictive flatness shall conform to the permitted variations from a flat surface given in Table S27.1 or Table S27.2, whichever is applicable. S27.2 As-rolled or normalized high-strength low-alloy steel plates ordered to restrictive flatness shall conform to the permitted variations from a flat surface given in Table S27.3 or Table S27.4, whichever is applicable. ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M 29 TABLE S27.1 Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for As-Rolled or Normalized Carbon Steel Plates Ordered to Half-Standard Flatness NOTE 1—Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft of longer plates. NOTE 2—Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Across the Width—The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3—When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 1/4 in. in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 in., incl, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 1/4 in. NOTE 4—The permitted variations given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 60 ksi or comparable chemistry or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness, the permitted variations are 11/2 times the amounts in this table. NOTE 5—This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates. NOTE 6—Permitted variations in waviness do not apply. NOTE 7—Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. Specified Thickness, in. Specified Weights, lb/ft2 Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Inches, in. 48 to 60, excl 60 to 72, excl 72 to 84, excl 84 to 96, excl 96 to 108, excl 108 to 120, incl To 1/4 , excl To 10.2, excl 15/32 5/8 11/16 3/4 13/16 7/8 1/4 to 3/8, excl 10.2 to 15.3, excl 3/8 15/32 9/16 5/8 11/16 3/4 3/8 to 1/2, excl 15.3 to 20.4, excl 5/16 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 1/2 to 3/4, excl 20.4 to 30.6, excl 9/32 5/16 5/16 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 to 1, excl 30.6 to 40.8, excl 9/32 5/16 5/16 5/16 3/8 7/16 1 to 2, incl 40.8 to 51.7, incl 1/4 9/32 9/32 5/16 5/16 5/16 TABLE S27.2 Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for As-Rolled or Normalized Carbon Steel Plates Ordered to Half-Standard Flatness NOTE 1—Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 3700 mm in length, or in any 3700 mm of longer plates. NOTE 2—Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Across the Width—The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3—When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 6 mm in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, incl., the permitted flatness variation should not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 6 mm. NOTE 4—The permitted variations given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 415 MPa or comparable chemistry or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness, the permitted variations are 11/2 times the amounts in this table. NOTE 5—This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates. NOTE 6—Permitted variations in waviness do not apply. NOTE 7—Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. Specified Thickness, mm Specified Weights, kg/m2 Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Millimetres, mm 1200 to 1500, excl 1500 to 1800, excl 1800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2400, excl 2400 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3000, incl To 6, excl To 47.1 excl 12 16 17 19 20 22 6 to 10, excl 47.1 to 78.5, excl. 9 12 14 16 17 19 10 to 12, excl 78.5 to 94.2, excl 8 8 9 11 12 14 12 to 20, excl 94.2 to 157.0, excl 7 8 8 9 12 12 20 to 25, excl 157.0 to 196.2, excl 7 8 8 8 9 11 25 to 50, incl 196.2 to 392.5, incl 6 7 7 8 8 8 SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 30 TABLE S27.3 Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for As-Rolled or Normalized High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Plates Ordered to Half-Standard Flatness NOTE 1—Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft of longer plates. NOTE 2—Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Across the Width—The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3—When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 3/8 in. in each direction. When the larger dimension is from 36 to 72 in., incl, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 3/8 in. NOTE 4—This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of those plates. NOTE 5—Permitted variations in waviness do not apply. NOTE 6—Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. Specified Thickness, in. Specified Weights, lb/ft2 Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Inches, in. 48 to 60, excl 60 to 72, excl 72 to 84, excl 84 to 96, excl 96 to 108, excl 108 to 120, incl To 1/4 , excl To 10.2 excl 11/16 15/16 1 11/8 13/16 15/16 1/4 to 3/8, excl 10.2 to 15.3, excl 9/16 11/16 7/8 15/16 1 11/8 3/8 to 1/2, excl 15.3 to 20.4, excl 15/32 15/32 9/16 21/32 3/4 13/16 1/2 to 3/4, excl 20.4 to 30.6, excl 13/32 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 3/4 to 1, excl 30.6 to 40.8, excl 7/16 7/16 15/32 1/2 9/16 21/32 1 to 2, incl 40.8 to 51.7, incl 3/8 13/32 7/16 15/32 1/2 1/2 TABLE S27.4 Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for As-Rolled or Normalized High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Plates Ordered to Half-Standard Flatness NOTE 1—Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 3700 mm in length, or in any 3700 mm of longer plates. NOTE 2—Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Across the Width—The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 3—When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 10 mm in each direction. When the larger dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, incl., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount for the specified width but in no case less than 10 mm. NOTE 4—This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates. NOTE 5—Permitted variations in waviness do not apply. NOTE 6—Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. Specified Thickness, mm Specified Weights, kg/m2 Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Millimetres, mm 1200 to 1500, excl 1500 to 1800, excl 1800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2400, excl 2400 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3000, incl To 6, excl To 47.1 excl 17 24 25 28 30 33 6 to 10, excl 47.1 to 78.5, excl 14 17 22 24 25 28 10 to 12, excl 78.5 to 94.2, excl 12 12 14 16 19 20 12 to 20, excl 94.2 to 157.0, excl 11 11 12 14 16 17 20 to 25, excl 157.0 to 196.2, excl 11 11 12 12 14 16 25 to 50, incl 196.2 to 392.5, incl 9 10 11 12 12 12 S28. Fine Grain Practice S28.1 The steel shall be made to fine grain practice. S29. Fine Austenitic Grain Size S29.1 The requirements for fine austenitic grain size (see 8.1 and 8.3) shall be met. S30. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test for Structural Shapes: Alternate Core Location S30.1 For shapes with a flange thickness equal to or greater than 11/2 in. [38.1 mm] that are specified in the purchase order to be tested in accordance with this supplementary requirement, Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be conducted in accordance with Specification A673/A673M, using specimens taken from the alternate core location. Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, the minimum average absorbed energy for each test shall be 20 ft·lbf [27 J] and the test temperature shall be 70°F [21°C]. S30.2 The frequency of testing shall be Frequency (H), except that, for rolled shapes produced from ingots, the frequency shall be Frequency (P) and the specimens shall be ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M 31 taken from a location representing the top of an ingot or part of an ingot used to produce the product represented by such specimens. S31. Maximum Carbon Equivalent for Weldability S31.1 Plates and shapes shall be supplied with a specific maximum carbon equivalent value as specified by the purchaser. This value shall be based upon heat analysis. The required chemical analysis as well as the carbon equivalent shall be reported. S31.2 The carbon equivalent shall be calculated using the following formula: CE5 C1Mn/61~Cr1Mo1V!/51~Ni1Cu!/15 S31.3 For additional information on the weldability of steel, see Appendix X3. S32. Single Heat Bundles S32.1 Bundles containing shapes or bars shall be from a single heat of steel. ANNEXES (Mandatory Information) A1. PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS AND MASS IN SI UNITS A1.1 Tables A1.1-A1.31 inclusive contain permitted variations in dimensions and mass stated in SI Units. SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 32 TABLE A1.1 Permitted Variations in Thickness for Rectangular Carbon, High-Strength Low Alloy, and Alloy Steel Plates, 300 mm and Under in Thickness When Ordered to Thickness NOTE 1—Permitted variation under specified thickness, 0.3 mm. When so specified, these permitted variations may be taken all over, in which case the sum of these permitted variations applies. NOTE 2—Thickness to be measured at 10 to 20 mm from the longitudinal edge. NOTE 3—For specified thicknesses not listed in this table, the permitted variations in thickness shall be as given for the next higher value of specified thickness that is listed in this table. NOTE 4—For thickness measured at any location other than that specified in Note 2, the permitted variations over specified thickness shall be 13/4 times the amounts in this table, rounded to the nearest 0.1 mm. NOTE 5—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement. Specified Thickness, mm Permitted Variations Over Specified Thickness for Widths Given in Millimetres, mm 1200 and Under Over 1200 to 1500, excl 1500 to 1800, excl 1800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2400, excl 2400 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3000, excl 3000 to 3300, excl 3300 to 3600, excl 3600 to 4200, excl 4200 and Over 5.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 … … 5.5 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 … … 6.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 … … 7.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 … 8.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 … 9.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.3 1.5 … 10.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.7 11.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.7 12.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.8 14.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.8 16.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.8 18.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.4 1.6 2.0 20.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.6 2.0 22.0 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.0 25.0 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.8 2.2 28.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.2 30.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.4 32.0 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.6 2.0 2.0 2.3 2.6 35.0 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.6 1.7 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.8 38.0 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.7 1.8 2.3 2.3 2.7 3.0 40.0 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.8 3.3 45.0 1.6 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.8 2.8 3.0 3.5 50.0 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.0 2.3 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.3 3.8 55.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.3 3.3 3.5 3.8 60.0 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.4 2.4 2.8 3.0 3.4 3.4 3.8 4.0 70.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.6 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.6 4.0 4.0 80.0 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 3.3 3.5 3.5 3.6 4.0 4.0 90.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.6 4.0 4.4 100.0 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.5 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.4 4.4 110.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.4 4.4 120.0 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.8 4.8 130.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 5.2 5.2 140.0 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 5.6 5.6 150.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.6 5.6 160.0 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 5.6 5.6 180.0 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 6.3 6.3 200.0 5.8 5.8 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 250.0 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 8.8 300.0 7.5 7.5 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M 33 TABLE A1.2 Permitted Variations in Mass for Rectangular Sheared Plates and Universal Mill Plates 2983 kg/m2 and Under When Ordered to Mass NOTE 1—Permitted variations in excess mass for lots of circular and sketch plates shall be 11/4 times the amounts in this table. NOTE 2—Permitted variations in excess mass for single plates shall be 11/3 times the amounts in this table. NOTE 3—Permitted variations in excess mass for single circular and sketch plates shall be 12/3 times the amounts in this table. NOTE 4—The adopted standard density for rolled steel is 7850 kg/m3. NOTE 5—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement. Specified Mass, kg/m2 Permitted Variations in Average Mass of LotsA for Widths Given in Millimetres, Expressed in Percentage of the Specified Masses per Square Metre 1200 and Under Over 1200 to 1500, excl 1500 to 1800, excl 1800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2400, excl 2400 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3000, excl 3000 to 3300, excl 3300 to 3600, excl 3600 to 4200, excl 4200 and Over Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under To 51.02, excl 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 5.0 3.0 5.5 3.0 6.0 3.0 7.5 3.0 9.0 3.0 … … … … … … … … 51.02 to 62.80, excl 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 5.0 3.0 5.5 3.0 6.0 3.0 6.5 3.0 7.0 3.0 8.0 3.0 9.0 3.0 … … … … 62.80 to 74.58, excl 4.0 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 5.0 3.0 5.5 3.0 5.5 3.0 6.0 3.0 7.5 3.0 8.0 3.0 11 3.0 … … 74.58 to 86.35, excl 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 5.0 3.0 5.0 3.0 5.5 3.0 6.0 3.0 7.0 3.0 9.0 3.0 10 3.0 86.35 to 102.0, excl 3.5 2.5 3.5 2.5 3.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 4.5 3.0 5.0 3.0 5.5 3.0 6.0 3.0 8.0 3.0 9.0 3.0 102.0 to 125.6, excl 3.5 2.5 3.5 2.5 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 5.0 3.0 5.5 3.0 7.0 3.0 8.0 3.0 125.6 to 149.2, excl 3.0 2.5 3.5 2.5 3.5 2.5 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 5.0 3.0 6.5 3.0 7.0 3.0 149.2 to 196.2, excl 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.5 2.0 3.5 2.5 3.5 2.5 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 6.0 3.0 6.5 3.0 196.2 to 392.5, excl 2.5 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.5 2.0 3.5 2.0 3.5 2.5 3.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 5.5 3.0 6.0 3.0 392.5 to 588.8, excl 2.5 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.5 2.0 3.5 2.0 3.5 2.5 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 588.8 to 785.0, excl 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 2.0 2.5 2.0 2.5 2.0 2.5 2.0 2.5 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.5 2.0 785.0 to 1178, excl 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 3.0 1.0 3.5 1.0 1178 to 1962, excl 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 3.0 1.0 1962 to 2355, excl 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2355 to 2983, incl 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 1.0 A The term “lot” means all the plates of each tabular width and mass group represented in each shipment. SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 34 TABLE A1.3 Permitted Variations in Width and Length for Sheared Plates 40 mm and Under in Thickness; Length Only of Universal Mill Plates 65 mm and Under in Thickness Specified Dimensions, mm Permitted Variations Over Specified Width and LengthA for Thicknesses Given in Millimetres and Equivalent Masses Given in Kilograms per Square Metre, mm Length Width To 10.5, excl 10.5 to 16, excl 16 to 25, excl 25 to 50, inclB To 78.50, excl 78.50 to 125.6, excl 125.6 to 196.2, excl 196.2 to 392.5, excl Width Length Width Length Width Length Width Length To 3000, excl To 1500, excl 10 13 11 16 13 19 16 25 1500 to 2100, excl 11 16 13 18 16 22 19 25 2100 to 2700, excl 13 19 16 22 19 25 25 29 2700 and over 16 22 19 25 22 29 29 32 3000 to 6000, excl To 1500, excl 10 19 13 22 16 25 19 29 1500 to 2100, excl 13 19 16 22 19 25 22 32 2100 to 2700, excl 14 22 18 24 21 29 25 35 2700 and over 16 25 19 29 22 32 29 35 6000 to 9000, excl To 1500, excl 10 25 13 29 16 32 19 38 1500 to 2100, excl 13 25 16 29 19 32 22 38 2100 to 2700, excl 14 25 18 32 22 35 25 38 2700 and over 18 29 22 32 25 35 32 44 9000 to 12 000, excl To 1500, excl 11 29 13 32 16 35 19 41 1500 to 2100, excl 13 32 16 35 19 38 22 41 2100 to 2700, excl 14 32 19 35 22 38 25 48 2700 and over 19 35 22 38 25 41 32 48 12 000 to 15 000, excl To 1500, excl 11 32 13 38 16 41 19 48 1500 to 2100, excl 13 35 16 38 19 41 22 48 2100 to 2700, excl 16 35 19 38 22 41 25 48 2700 and over 19 38 22 41 25 44 32 48 15 000 to 18 000, excl To 1500, excl 13 44 16 48 19 48 22 57 1500 to 2100, excl 16 44 19 48 22 48 25 57 2100 to 2700, excl 16 44 19 48 22 48 29 57 2700 and over 22 44 25 51 29 57 32 64 18 000 and over To 1500, excl 14 51 19 54 22 57 25 70 1500 to 2100, excl 19 51 22 54 25 57 29 70 2100 to 2700, excl 19 51 22 54 25 57 32 70 2700 and over 25 51 29 60 32 64 35 76 A Permitted variations under specified width and length, 6 mm. By agreement, these permitted variations may be taken all over, in which case the sum of the permitted variations applies. B Permitted variations in length apply also to Universal Mill plates up to 300 mm in width for thicknesses over 50 to 65 mm, incl, except for alloy steel up to 50 mm thick. TABLE A1.4 Permitted Variations in Width for Mill Edge Carbon and High Strength Low-Alloy Plates Produced on Strip Mills (Applies to Plates Produced from Coil and to Plates Produced from an As-Rolled Structural Product) Specified Width, mm Permitted Variation Over Specified Width, mmA To 360, excl 11 360 to 430, excl 13 430 to 480, excl 14 480 to 530, excl 16 530 to 610, excl 17 610 to 660, excl 21 660 to 710, excl 24 710 to 890, excl 29 890 to 1270, excl 32 1270 to 1520, excl 38 1520 to 1650, excl 41 1650 to 1780, excl 44 1780 to 2030, excl 47 2030 and over 51 A No permitted variation under specified width. TABLE A1.5 Permitted Variations in Rolled Width for Universal Mill Plates 380 mm and Under in Thickness Specified Width, mm Permitted Variations Over Specified WidthA for Thickness Given in Millimetres or Equivalent Masses Given in Kilograms per Square Metre, mm To 10, excl 10 to 16, excl 16 to 25, incl 25 to 50, incl Over 50 to 250, incl Over 250 to 400, incl To 78.50, excl 78.50 to 125.6, excl 125.6 to 196.2, excl 196.2 to 392.5, incl Over 392.5 to 1962, incl Over 1962 to 3140, incl Over 200 to 500, excl 3 3 5 6 10 13 500 to 900, excl 5 6 8 10 11 14 900 and over 8 10 11 13 14 16 A Permitted variation under specified width, 3 mm. ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M 35 TABLE A1.6 Permitted Variations in Diameter for Sheared Circular Plates 25 mm and Under in Thickness Specified Diameters, mm Permitted Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given in Millimetres, mmA To 10, excl 10 to 16, excl 16 to 25, incl To 800, excl 6 10 13 800 to 2100, excl 8 11 14 2100 to 2700, excl 10 13 16 2700 to 3300, excl 11 14 17 3300 and over 13 16 19 A No permitted variation under specified diameter. TABLE A1.7 Permitted Variations in Diameter for Gas-Cut Circular Plates (Not Applicable to Alloy Steel) Specified Diameters, mm Permitted Variation Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given, mmA To 25, excl 25 to 50, excl 50 to 100, excl 100 to 150, excl 150 to 200, excl 200 to 400, incl To 800, excl 10 10 13 13 16 19 800 to 2100, excl 10 13 13 16 19 22 2100 to 2700, excl 13 14 16 19 22 25 2700 to 3300, excl 13 14 17 22 25 29 3300 and over 16 19 22 25 29 32 A No permitted variations under specified diameter. TABLE A1.8 Permitted Variations in Width and Length for Rectangular Plates When Gas Cutting is Specified or Required (Applies to Alloy Steel Specifications Only) NOTE 1—Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length only. NOTE 2—These permitted variations shall be taken all under or divided over and under, if so specified. Specified Thickness, mm Permitted Variation Over Specified Width and Length, mm To 50, excl 19 50 to 100, excl 25 100 to 150, excl 29 150 to 200, excl 33 200 to 400, excl 38 TABLE A1.9 Permitted Variations in Width and Length for Rectangular Plates When Gas Cutting is Specified or Required (Not Applicable to Alloy Steel) NOTE 1—Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length only. Specified Thickness, mm Permitted Variation Over Specified Width and Length, mmA To 50, excl 13 50 to 100, excl 16 100 to 150, excl 19 150 to 200, excl 22 200 to 400, incl 25 A These permitted variations shall be taken all under or divided over and under, if so specified. SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 36 TABLE A1.10 Permitted Variations in Diameter for Gas-Cut Circular Plates (Applies to Alloy Steel Specifications Only) Specified Diameter, mm Permitted Variations Over Specified Diameter for Specified Thicknesses Given in Millimetres, mmA To 25, excl 25 to 50, excl 50 to 100, excl 100 to 150, excl 150 to 200, excl 200 to 400, incl To 800, excl 13 13 19 19 25 25 800 to 2100, excl 13 16 22 25 29 32 2100 to 2700, excl 16 19 25 29 32 35 2700 to 3300, incl 22 25 29 32 35 38 A No permitted variations under specified diameter. TABLE A1.11 Permitted CamberA for Carbon Steel, High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel, and Alloy Steel Universal Mill Plates and High- Strength Low-Alloy Steel and Alloy Steel Sheared or Gas-Cut Rectangular Plates Specified Width, mm Permitted Camber, mm To 750, incl Length in millimetres/300 Over 750 to 1500 Length in millimetres/250 A Camber as it relates to plates is the horizontal edge curvature in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the flat position. TABLE A1.12 Permitted CamberA for Sheared Plates and Gas-Cut Rectangular Plates, All Thicknesses (Applies to Carbon Steel Only) Permitted camber, mm = length in millimetres/500 A Camber as it relates to plates is the horizontal edge curvature in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the flat position. ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M 37 TABLE A1.13 Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Standard Flatness Carbon Steel Plates NOTE 1—When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 6 mm. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, incl, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 6 mm. NOTE 2—These permitted variations apply to plates that have a specified minimum tensile strength of not more than 415 MPa or comparable chemical composition or hardness. The limits in this table are increased 50 % for plates that have a higher specified minimum tensile strength or comparable chemical composition or hardness. NOTE 3—This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates. NOTE 4—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement. NOTE 5—Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. Specified Thickness, mm Specified Mass, kg/m2 Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Millimetres, mmA,B To 900, excl 900 to 1200, excl 1200 to 1500, excl 1500 to 1800, excl 1800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2400, excl 2400 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3000, excl 3000 to 3600, excl 3600 to 4200, excl 4200 and over To 6, excl To 47.1, excl 14 19 24 32 35 38 41 44 48 … … 6 to 10, excl 47.1 to 78.5, excl 13 16 19 24 29 32 35 38 41 … … 10 to 12, excl 78.5 to 94.2, excl 13 14 16 16 19 22 25 29 32 48 54 12 to 20, excl 94.2 to 157.0, excl 11 13 14 16 16 19 25 25 29 38 51 20 to 25, excl 157.0 to 196.2, excl 11 13 14 16 16 16 19 22 25 35 44 25 to 50, excl 196.2 to 392.5, excl 10 13 13 14 14 16 16 16 18 29 38 50 to 100, excl 392.5 to 785.0, excl 8 10 11 13 13 13 13 14 16 22 29 100 to 150, excl 785.0 to 1178, excl 10 11 13 13 14 14 16 19 22 22 25 150 to 200, excl 1178 to 1570, excl 11 13 13 16 18 19 22 22 25 25 25 200 to 250, excl 1570 to 1962, excl 13 13 16 18 19 21 22 24 25 25 25 250 to 300, excl 1962 to 2355, excl 13 16 19 21 22 24 25 25 25 25 25 300 to 400, incl 2355 to 3140, incl 16 19 21 22 24 25 25 25 25 25 … A Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width for plates up to 4000 mm in length, or in any 4000 mm for longer plates. B Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Across the Width—The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. TABLE A1.14 Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Standard Flatness High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel and Alloy Steel Plates, Hot Rolled or Thermally Treated NOTE 1—When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 10 mm. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, incl, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount for the specified width. NOTE 2—This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates. NOTE 3—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement. NOTE 4—Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured. Specified Thickness, mm Specified Mass, kg/m2 Permitted Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Millimetres, mmA,B To 900, excl 900 to 1200, excl 1200 to 1500, excl 1500 to 1800, excl 1800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2400, excl 2400 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3000, excl 3000 to 3600, excl 3600 to 4200, excl 4200 and over To 6, excl To 47.1, excl 21 29 35 48 51 57 60 67 70 … … 6 to 10, excl 47.1 to 78.5, excl 19 24 29 35 44 48 51 57 60 … … 10 to 12, excl 78.5 to 94.2, excl 19 22 24 24 29 33 38 41 48 70 79 12 to 20, excl 94.2 to 157.0, excl 16 19 22 22 25 29 32 35 41 57 76 20 to 25, excl 157.0 to 196.2, excl 16 19 22 22 24 25 29 33 38 51 67 25 to 50, excl 196.2 to 392.5, excl 14 16 19 21 22 24 25 25 25 41 57 50 to 100, excl 392.5 to 785.0, excl 13 14 18 19 19 19 19 22 25 32 41 100 to 150, excl 785.0 to 1178, excl 14 18 19 19 22 22 24 29 32 32 38 150 to 200, excl 1178 to 1570, excl 16 19 19 24 25 29 32 33 38 38 38 200 to 250, excl 1570 to 1962, excl 19 21 24 25 29 32 33 35 38 38 38 250 to 300, excl 1962 to 2355, excl 19 24 29 32 33 35 38 38 38 38 38 300 to 400, incl 2355 to 3140, incl 22 25 30 33 35 38 38 38 38 38 38 A Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 4000 mm in length, or in any 4000 mm for longer plates. B Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Across the Width—The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 38 TABLE A1.15 Permitted Variations in Waviness for Standard Flatness Plates NOTE 1—Waviness denotes the maximum deviation of the surface of the plate from a plane parallel to the surface of the point of measurement and contiguous to the surface of the place at each of the two adjacent wave peaks, when the plate is resting on a flat horizontal surface, as measured in an increment of less than 4000 mm of length. The permitted variation in waviness is a function of the permitted variation from a flat surface as obtained from Table A1.13 or Table A1.14, whichever is applicable. NOTE 2—Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when waviness is measured. Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface (from Table Table A1.13 or Table A1.14), mm Permitted Variations in Waviness, mm, When Number of Waves in 4000 mm is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 6 5 3 3 2 2 10 10 8 5 5 3 2 2 11 11 8 6 5 3 3 2 13 13 10 8 5 5 3 2 14 14 11 8 6 5 3 2 16 16 13 10 6 5 3 2 17 17 13 10 8 5 5 2 19 19 14 11 8 6 5 2 21 21 16 11 8 6 5 2 22 22 17 13 10 6 5 2 24 24 17 13 10 8 6 5 25 25 19 14 11 8 6 5 29 29 22 16 13 10 6 5 32 32 24 17 13 10 8 6 35 35 27 19 14 11 8 6 38 38 29 22 16 13 10 6 41 41 32 24 17 13 10 8 44 44 33 25 19 14 11 8 48 48 37 27 21 14 11 8 51 51 38 29 22 16 13 10 54 54 41 30 22 17 13 10 57 57 43 32 24 17 14 10 60 60 46 33 25 19 14 11 64 64 48 37 27 21 14 11 67 67 51 38 29 21 16 11 70 70 52 40 29 22 16 13 73 73 56 41 30 24 17 13 76 76 57 43 32 24 17 14 79 79 60 44 33 25 19 14 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M 39 TABLE A1.16 Permitted Variations in Cross Section for W, HP, S, M, C, and MC Shapes NOTE 1—A is measured at center lines of web for S, M, W, and HP shapes; at back of web for C and MC shapes. Measurement is overall for C shapes under 75 mm. B is measured parallel to flange. C is measured parallel to web. NOTE 2—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement. Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, mm Shape Section Nominal Size, mm A, Depth B, Flange Width T + T ‘A Flanges Outof- SquareB E, Web off CenterC C, Maximum Depth at any Cross Section over Theoretical Depth Permitted Variations Over or Under Theoretical Web Thickness for Thicknesses Given in Millimetres, mm Over Theoretical Under Theoretical Over Theoretical Under Theoretical 5 and Under Over 5 W and HP up to 310, incl 4 3 6 5 6 5 6 … … over 310 4 3 6 5 8 5 6 … … S and M 75 to 180, incl 2 2 3 3 0.03 5 … … … over 180 to 360, incl 3 2 4 4 0.03 5 … … … over 360 to 610, incl 5 3 5 5 0.03 5 … … … C and MC 40 and under 1 1 1 1 0.03 … … 0.2 0.4 over 40 to 75, excl 2 2 2 2 0.03 … … 0.4 0.5 75 to 180, incl 3 2 3 3 0.03 … … … … over 180 to 360, incl 3 3 3 4 0.03 … … … … over 360 5 4 3 5 0.03 … … … … A T + T’ applies when flanges of channels are toed in or out. For channels 16 mm and under in depth, the permitted out-of-square is 0.05 mm/mm of depth. The permitted variation shall be rounded to the nearest millimetre after calculation. B Permitted variation is per millimetre of flange width for S, M, C, and MC shapes. C Permitted variation of 8 mm max for sections over 634 kg/m. SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 40 TABLE A1.17 Permitted Variations in Cross Section for Angles (L Shapes), Bulb Angles, and Zees NOTE 1—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement. Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, mm Section Nominal Size, mm A, Depth B, Flange Width, or Length of Leg T, Out-of- Square per Millimetre of B Permitted Variations Over or Under Theoretical Thickness for Thicknesses Given in Millimetres, mm Over Theoretical Under Theoretical Over Theoretical Under Theoretical 5 and Under Over 5 to 10 Over 10 AnglesA (L shapes) 25 and under … … 1 1 0.026B 0.2 0.2 … Over 25 to 51, incl … … 1 1 0.026B 0.2 0.2 0.3 Over 51 to 64, incl … … 2 2 0.026B 0.3 0.4 0.4 Over 64 to 102, incl … … 3 2 0.026B … … … Over 102 to 152, incl … … 3 3 0.026B … … … Over 152 to 203, incl … … 5 3 0.026B … … … Over 203 to 254, incl … … 6 6 0.026B … … … Over 254 … … 6 10 0.026B … … … Bulb angles (depth) 76 to 102, incl 3 2 4 2 0.026B … … … Over 102 to 155, incl 3 2 4 3 0.026B … … … Over 152 3 2 5 3 0.026B … … … Zees 76 to 102, incl 3 2 4 2 0.026B … … … Over 102 to 152, incl 3 2 4 3 0.026B … … … A For unequal leg angles, longer leg determines classification. B 0.026 mm/mm = 11/2 °. The permitted variation shall be rounded to the nearest millimetre after calculation. TABLE A1.18 Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions for Rolled Tees NOTE 1—Back of square and center line of stem are to be parallel when measuring “out-of-square.”
    NOTE 2—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
    Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, mm
    Nominal SizeA
    A, DepthB B, WidthB T, Out-of-
    Square per
    Millimetre of B
    E, Web
    Off-Center,
    max
    Stem
    Out-of-
    SquareC
    Thickness of Flange Thickness of Stem
    Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under
    30 and under 1 1 1 1 … … 1 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.5
    Over 30 to 50, incl 2 2 2 2 … … 2 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.5
    Over 50 to 75, excl 2 2 2 2 … … 2 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5
    75 to 125, incl 2 2 3 3 0.03 2 … … … … …
    Over 125 to 180, incl 2 2 3 3 0.03 3 … … … … …
    A The longer member of an unequal tee determines the size for permitted variations.
    B Measurements for both depth and width are overall.
    C Stem out-of-square is the permitted variation from its true position of the center line of stem, measured at the point.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    41
    TABLE A1.19 Permitted Variations in Length for S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, and Bulb Angle Shapes
    NOTE 1—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
    Nominal
    Size,A mm
    Permitted Variations From Specified Length for Lengths Given in Metres, mm
    1.5 to 3, excl 3 to 6, excl 6 to 9, incl Over 9 to 12, incl Over 12 to 15, incl Over 15 to 20, incl Over 20 m
    Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under
    Under 75 16 0 25 0 38 0 51 0 64 0 64 0 … …
    75 and over 25 0 38 0 45 0 57 0 70 0 70 0 … …
    A Greatest cross-sectional dimension.
    TABLE A1.20 Permitted Variations in End Out-of-Square for S, M,
    C, MC, L, T, Z, Bulb Angle, and Flat Bar Shapes
    Shapes Permitted Variation
    S, M, C, and MC 0.017 mm per millimetre of depth
    LA 0.026 mm per millimetre of leg length or 11/2 °
    Bulb angles 0.026 mm per millimetre of depth or 11/2 °
    Rolled teesA 0.017 mm per millimetre of flange or stem
    Zees 0.026 mm per millimetre of sum of both flange
    lengths
    Flat BarsB 0.017 mm per millimetre of width but not less
    than 2 mm
    A Permitted variations in ends out-of-square are determined on the longer members
    of the shape.
    B For flat bars, permitted variations in end out-of-square are determined on the
    width of the bar.
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    42
    TABLE A1.21 Permitted Variations in Straightness for S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, and Bulb Angle Shapes
    Positions for Measuring Camber of Shapes
    Variable Nominal Size,A mm Permitted Variation, mm
    Camber Under 75 4 × number of metres of total length
    75 and over 2 × number of metres of total length
    Sweep All Due to the extreme variations in flexibility of these shapes, permitted variations for sweep are subject to negotiations
    between the manufacturer and the purchaser for the individual sections involved.
    A Greatest cross-sectional dimension.
    TABLE A1.22 Permitted Variations in Length for W and HP
    Shapes
    Permitted Variations from Specified Length for Lengths Given in Metres, mmA, B
    Over Under
    100 0
    A For HP and W shapes specified in the order for use as bearing piles, the
    permitted variations in length are plus 125 and minus 0 mm. These permitted
    variations in length also apply to sheet piles.
    B The permitted variations in end out-of-square for W and HP shapes shall be
    0.016 mm per millimetre of depth, or per millimetre of flange width if the flange
    width is larger than the depth. The permitted variations shall be rounded to the
    nearest millimetre after calculation.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    43
    TABLE A1.23 Permitted Variations for Length and End Out-of-Square, Milled Shapes
    Permitted Variations in Length and End Out-of-Square, mmA
    Milled Both EndsB Milled One EndB
    Nominal Depth, mm Length,C m
    Length Length
    Over Under End Outof-
    Square
    Over Under End Outof-
    Square-
    (for Milled End)
    150 to 920 2 to 21 1 1 1 6 6 1
    A The permitted variations in length and end out-of-square are additive.
    B End out-of-square is measured by (a) squaring from the center line of the web and (b) squaring from the center line of the flange. The measured variation from true
    squareness in either plane shall not exceed the total tabular amount.
    C Length is measured along center line of web. Measurements are made with the steel and tape at the same temperature.
    TABLE A1.24 Permitted Variations in Straightness for W and HP Shapes
    Positions for Measuring Camber and Sweep of W and HP Shapes
    Permitted Variation in Straightness, mm
    Camber and sweep 1 × number of metres of total lengthA
    When certain sectionsB with a flange width approximately equal to depth are
    specified in the order for use as columns:
    Lengths of 14 m and under 1 × number of metres of total length, but not over 10
    Lengths over 14 m 10 + [1 × (number of metres of total length – 14 m)]
    A Sections with a flange width less than 150 mm, permitted variation for sweep, mm = 2 × number of metres of total length.
    B Applies only to:
    200-mm deep sections—46.1 kg/m and heavier,
    250-mm deep sections—73 kg/m and heavier,
    310-mm deep sections—97 kg/m and heavier,
    360-mm deep sections—116 kg/m and heavier,
    410-mm deep sections—131 kg/m and heavier, and
    460-mm deep sections—202 kg/m and heavier.
    For other sections specified in the order for use as columns, the permitted variation is subject to negotiation with the manufacturer.
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    44
    TABLE A1.25 Permitted Variations in Dimensions for Split Tees
    and Split Angles (L Shapes)A
    Specified Depth, mm
    Permitted Variation Over or
    Under
    Specified Depth,B mm
    To 150, excl (beams and channels) 3
    150 to 410, excl (beams and channels) 5
    410 to 510, excl (beams and channels) 6
    510 to 610, excl (beams) 8
    610 and over (beams) 10
    A The permitted variations in length for split tees or angles are the same as those
    applicable to the section from which the tees or angles are split.
    B The above permitted variations in depth of tees or angles include the permitted
    variations in depth for the beams or channels before splitting. Permitted variations
    in dimensions and straightness, as set up for the beams or channels from which
    these tees or angles are cut, apply, except
    straightness = 2 mm × length in metres
    TABLE A1.26 Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions for Square-Edge and Round-Edge Flat Bars
    NOTE 1—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
    Specified Widths,
    mm
    Permitted Variations Over or Under Specified Thickness, for Thicknesses Given in Millimetres, mm
    Permitted Variations from Specified
    Width, mm
    Over 5 to 6,
    incl
    Over 6 to 12,
    incl
    Over 12 to 25,
    incl
    Over 25 to 50,
    incl
    Over
    50 to 75
    Over 75 Over Under
    To 25, incl 0.18 0.20 0.25 … … … 0.5 0.5
    Over 25 to 50, incl 0.18 0.30 0.40 0.8 … … 1.0 1.0
    Over 50 to 100, incl 0.20 0.40 0.50 0.8 1.2 1.2 1.5 1.0
    Over 100 to 150, incl 0.25 0.40 0.50 0.8 1.2 1.2 2.5 1.5
    Over 150 to 200, incl A 0.40 0.65 0.8 1.2 1.6 3.0 2.5
    A Flats over 150 to 200 mm, incl, in width are not available as hot-rolled bars in thickness 6 mm and under.
    TABLE A1.27 Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions for
    Round and Square Bars and Round-Cornered Squares
    NOTE 1—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
    Specified Sizes, mm
    Permitted Variation
    Over
    or Under Specified
    Size
    Permitted Out-of-
    Round
    or Out-of-
    Square SectionA
    mm % mm %
    Up to 7.0, incl 0.13 … 0.20 …
    Over 7.0 to 11.0, incl 0.15 … 0.22 …
    Over 11.0 to 15.0, incl 0.18 … 0.27 …
    Over 15.0 to 19.0, incl 0.20 … 0.30 …
    Over 19.0 to 250, incl … 1B … 11/2
    B
    A Out-of-round is the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters of
    the bar, measured at the same transverse cross section. Out-of-square section is
    the difference in perpendicular distance between opposite faces, measured at the
    same transverse cross section.
    B The permitted variation shall be rounded to the nearest tenth of a millimetre after
    calculation.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    45
    TABLE A1.28 Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions for
    Hexagons
    Specified Sizes Between
    Opposite Sides, mm
    Permitted Variations from
    Specified Size, mm
    Out-of-
    Hexagon
    Section,
    Over Under mmA
    To 13 incl 0.18 0.18 0.3
    Over 13 to 25 incl 0.25 0.25 0.4
    Over 25 to 40 incl 0.55 0.35 0.6
    Over 40 to 50 incl 0.8 0.40 0.8
    Over 50 to 65 incl 1.2 0.40 1.2
    Over 65 to 80 incl 1.6 1.6
    A Out-of-hexagon section is the greatest difference in distance between any two
    opposite faces, measured at the same transverse cross section.
    TABLE A1.29 Permitted Variations in Straightness for Bars
    Maximum Permitted Variation in Straightness, mmA
    6 mm in any 1500 mm and (length in millimetres/250)B
    A Permitted variations in straightness do not apply to hot-rolled bars if any
    subsequent heating operation has been performed.
    B Round to the nearest whole millimetre.
    TABLE A1.30 Permitted Variations in Length for Hot-Cut Steel BarsA
    NOTE 1—Where “…” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
    Specified Sizes of
    Rounds,
    Squares, and Hexagons,
    mm
    Specified Sizes of Flats, mm
    Permitted Variations Over Specified Lengths
    Given in Metres, mm (No Variation Under)
    Thickness Width
    1.5 to
    3, excl
    3 to
    6, excl
    6 to
    9, excl
    9 to
    12, excl
    12 to
    18, incl
    To 25, incl to 25, incl to 75, incl 15 20 35 45 60
    Over 25 to 50, incl over 25 to 75, incl 15 25 40 50 65
    to 25, incl over 75 to 150, incl 15 25 40 50 65
    Over 50 to 125, incl over 25 over 75 to 150, incl 25 40 45 60 70
    Over 125 to 250, incl … … 50 65 70 75 85
    over 6 to 25, incl over 150 to 200, incl 20 30 45 90 100
    over 25 to 75, incl over 150 to 200, incl 30 45 50 90 100
    Bar size sections … … 15 25 40 50 65
    Hot Sawing
    50 to 125, incl 25 and over 75 and over B 40 45 60 70
    Over 125 to 250, incl … … B 65 70 75 85
    A For flats over 150 to 200 mm, incl, in width and over 75 mm in thickness, consult the manufacturer for permitted variations in length.
    B Smaller sizes and shorter lengths are not commonly hot sawed.
    TABLE A1.31 Permitted Variations in Length for Bars Recut Both Ends After StraighteningA,B
    Sizes of Rounds, Squares, Hexagons,
    Widths of Flats and Maximum Dimensions
    of Other Sections, mm
    Permitted Variations Over
    Specified Length Given in Metres, mm
    (No Variation Under)
    to 3.7,
    incl
    over
    3.7
    To 75, incl 6 8
    Over 75 to 150, incl 8 11
    Over 150 to 200, incl 11 14
    Rounds over 200 to 250, incl 14 18
    A For flats over 150 to 200 mm, incl, in width, and over 75 mm in thickness, consult the manufacturer or the processor for permitted variations in length.
    B Permitted variations are sometimes required all over or all under the specified length, in which case the sum of the two permitted variations applies.
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    46
    A2. DIMENSIONS OF STANDARD SHAPE PROFILES
    A2.1 Listed herein are dimensions and weight [mass] of
    some standard shape profiles. The values stated in inch-pound
    units are independent of the values stated in SI units, and the
    values from the two systems are not to be combined in any
    way. Unless the order specifies the applicable “M” specification
    designation (SI units), the material shall be furnished to
    inch-pound units.
    TABLE A2.1 “W” Shapes
    Designation
    (Nominal
    Depth in
    Inches and
    Weight in
    Pounds per
    Linear Foot)
    Area
    A,
    in.2
    Depth
    d,
    in.
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw, in.A
    Designation
    [Nominal
    Depth in Millimetres
    and
    Mass in Kilograms
    per
    Metre]
    Area A,
    mm2
    Depth
    d,
    mm
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    mmA
    Width
    bf,
    in.
    Thickness
    tf,
    in.A
    Width
    bf,
    mm
    Thickness,
    tf,
    mmA
    W44 × 408 120.5 44.80 16.142 2.165 1.220 W1100 × 607 77 740 1 138 410 55.0 31.0
    × 368 108.9 44.41 16.024 1.969 1.102 × 548 70 250 1 128 407 50.0 28.0
    × 335 98.7 44.02 15.945 1.770 1.025 × 499 63 500 1 118 405 45.0 26.0
    × 290 85.8 43.62 15.825 1.575 0.865 × 433 55 100 1 108 402 40.0 22.0
    × 262 77.2 43.31 15.750 1.415 0.785 × 390 49 700 1 100 400 36.0 20.0
    × 230 67.9 42.91 15.750 1.220 0.710 × 343 43 600 1 090 400 31.0 18.0
    W40 × 655 192.6 43.62 16.870 3.540 1.970 W1000 × 976 124 300 1 108 428 89.9 50.0
    × 593 174.4 42.99 16.690 3.230 1.790 × 883 112 500 1 092 424 82.0 45.5
    × 503 147.8 42.05 16.415 2.755 1.535 × 748 95 300 1 068 417 70.0 39.0
    × 431 126.7 41.26 16.220 2.360 1.340 × 642 81 800 1 048 412 60.0 34.0
    × 397 117.0 40.95 16.120 2.200 1.220 × 591 75 300 1 040 409 55.9 31.0
    × 372 109.4 40.63 16.065 2.045 1.160 × 554 70 600 1 032 408 52.0 29.5
    × 362 107.0 40.55 16.020 2.010 1.120 × 539 68 700 1 030 407 51.1 28.4
    × 324 95.3 40.16 15.910 1.810 1.000 × 483 61 500 1 020 404 46.0 25.4
    × 297 87.4 39.84 15.825 1.650 0.930 × 443 56 400 1 012 402 41.9 23.6
    × 277 81.3 39.69 15.830 1.575 0.830 × 412 52 500 1 008 402 40.0 21.1
    × 249 73.3 39.38 15.750 1.420 0.750 × 371 47 300 1 000 400 36.1 19.0
    × 215 63.3 38.98 15.750 1.220 0.650 × 321 40 800 990 400 31.0 16.5
    × 199 58.4 38.67 15.750 1.065 0.650 × 296 37 700 982 400 27.1 16.5
    W40 × 392 115.3 41.57 12.360 2.520 1.415 W1000 × 584 74 400 1 056 314 64.0 36.0
    × 331 97.5 40.79 12.165 2.125 1.220 × 494 62 900 1 036 309 54.0 31.0
    × 327 95.9 40.79 12.130 2.130 1.180 × 486 61 900 1 036 308 54.1 30.0
    × 294 86.2 40.39 12.010 1.930 1.060 × 438 55 600 1 026 305 49.0 26.9
    × 278 81.9 40.16 11.970 1.810 1.025 × 415 52 800 1 020 304 46.0 26.0
    × 264 77.6 40.00 11.930 1.730 0.960 × 393 50 100 1 016 303 43.9 24.4
    × 235 68.9 39.69 11.890 1.575 0.830 × 350 44 600 1 008 302 40.0 21.1
    × 211 62.0 39.37 11.810 1.415 0.750 × 314 40 000 1 000 300 35.9 19.1
    × 183 53.7 38.98 11.810 1.200 0.650 × 272 34 600 990 300 31.0 16.5
    × 167 49.1 38.59 11.810 1.025 0.650 × 249 31 700 980 300 26.0 16.5
    × 149 43.8 38.20 11.810 0.830 0.630 × 222 28 200 970 300 21.1 16.0
    W36 × 925 271.9 43.05 18.620 4.530 3.020 W920 × 1377 175 400 1 093 473 115.1 76.7
    × 853 250.6 43.05 18.150 4.530 2.520 × 1269 161 700 1 093 461 115.1 64.0
    × 802 235.9 42.57 17.990 4.290 2.380 × 1194 152 200 1 081 457 109.0 60.5
    × 723 212.7 41.79 17.755 3.900 2.165 × 1077 137 200 1 061 451 99.1 55.0
    × 652 191.7 41.05 17.575 3.540 1.970 × 970 123 700 1 043 446 89.9 50.0
    × 529 155.6 39.79 17.220 2.910 1.610 × 787 100 400 1 011 437 73.9 40.9
    × 487 143.2 39.33 17.105 2.680 1.500 × 725 92 400 999 434 68.1 38.1
    × 441 129.7 38.85 16.965 2.440 1.360 × 656 83 700 987 431 62.0 34.5
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    47
    TABLE A2.1 Continued
    Designation
    (Nominal
    Depth in
    Inches and
    Weight in
    Pounds per
    Linear Foot)
    Area
    A,
    in.2
    Depth
    d,
    in.
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw, in.A
    Designation
    [Nominal
    Depth in Millimetres
    and
    Mass in Kilograms
    per
    Metre]
    Area A,
    mm2
    Depth
    d,
    mm
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    mmA
    Width
    bf,
    in.
    Thickness
    tf,
    in.A
    Width
    bf,
    mm
    Thickness,
    tf,
    mmA
    × 395 116.2 38.37 16.830 2.200 1.220 × 588 75 000 975 427 55.9 31.0
    × 361 106.1 37.99 16.730 2.010 1.120 × 537 68 500 965 425 51.1 28.4
    × 330 97.0 37.67 16.630 1.850 1.020 × 491 62 600 957 422 47.0 25.9
    × 302 88.8 37.33 16.655 1.680 0.945 × 449 57 600 948 423 42.7 24.0
    × 282 82.9 37.11 16.595 1.570 0.885 × 420 53 500 943 422 39.9 22.5
    × 262 77.0 36.85 16.550 1.440 0.840 × 390 49 700 936 420 36.6 21.3
    × 247 72.5 36.67 16.510 1.350 0.800 × 368 46 800 931 419 34.3 20.3
    × 231 68.0 36.49 16.470 1.260 0.760 × 344 43 900 927 418 32.0 19.3
    W36 × 387 113.6 39.09 12.677 2.559 1.421 W920 × 576 73 320 993 322 65.0 36.1
    × 350 102.9 38.62 12.559 2.319 1.299 × 521 66 370 981 319 58.9 33.0
    × 318 93.6 38.23 12.441 2.130 1.181 × 474 60 390 971 316 54.1 30.0
    × 286 84.0 37.83 12.323 1.929 1.059 × 425 54 200 961 313 49.0 26.9
    × 256 75.4 37.43 12.215 1.730 0.960 × 381 48 600 951 310 43.9 24.4
    × 232 68.1 37.12 12.120 1.570 0.870 × 345 44 000 943 308 39.9 22.1
    × 210 61.8 36.69 12.180 1.360 0.830 × 313 39 900 932 309 34.5 21.1
    × 194 57.0 36.49 12.115 1.260 0.765 × 289 36 800 927 308 32.0 19.4
    × 182 53.6 36.33 12.075 1.180 0.725 × 271 34 600 923 307 30.0 18.4
    × 170 50.0 36.17 12.030 1.100 0.680 × 253 32 300 919 306 27.9 17.3
    × 160 47.0 36.01 12.000 1.020 0.650 × 238 30 300 915 305 25.9 16.5
    × 150 44.2 35.85 11.975 0.940 0.625 × 223 28 500 911 304 23.9 15.9
    × 135 39.7 35.55 11.950 0.790 0.600 × 201 25 600 903 304 20.1 15.2
    W33 × 387 114.0 35.95 16.200 2.280 1.260 W840 × 576 73 500 913 411 57.9 32.0
    × 354 104.1 35.55 16.100 2.090 1.160 × 527 67 200 903 409 53.1 29.5
    × 318 93.5 35.16 15.985 1.890 1.040 × 473 60 300 893 406 48.0 26.4
    × 291 85.6 34.84 15.905 1.730 0.960 × 433 55 200 885 404 43.9 24.4
    × 263 77.4 34.53 15.805 1.570 0.870 × 392 49 900 877 401 39.9 22.1
    × 241 70.9 34.18 15.860 1.400 0.830 × 359 45 700 868 403 35.6 21.1
    × 221 65.0 33.93 15.805 1.275 0.775 × 329 41 900 862 401 32.4 19.7
    × 201 59.1 33.68 15.745 1.150 0.715 × 299 38 100 855 400 29.2 18.2
    W33 × 169 49.5 33.82 11.500 1.220 0.670 W840 × 251 31 900 859 292 31.0 17.0
    × 152 44.7 33.49 11.565 1.055 0.635 × 226 28 800 851 294 26.8 16.1
    × 141 41.6 33.30 11.535 0.960 0.605 × 210 26 800 846 293 24.4 15.4
    × 130 38.3 33.09 11.510 0.855 0.580 × 193 24 700 840 292 21.7 14.7
    × 118 34.7 32.86 11.480 0.740 0.550 × 176 22 400 835 292 18.8 14.0
    W30 × 391 115.0 33.19 15.590 2.440 1.360 W760 × 582 74 200 843 396 62.0 34.5
    × 357 104.8 32.80 15.470 2.240 1.240 × 531 67 600 833 393 56.9 31.5
    × 326 95.7 32.40 15.370 2.050 1.140 × 484 61 700 823 390 52.1 29.0
    × 292 85.7 32.01 15.255 1.850 1.020 × 434 55 300 813 387 47.0 25.9
    × 261 76.7 31.61 15.155 1.650 0.930 × 389 49 500 803 385 41.9 23.6
    × 235 69.0 31.30 15.055 1.500 0.830 × 350 44 500 795 382 38.1 21.1
    × 211 62.0 30.94 15.105 1.315 0.775 × 314 40 000 786 384 33.4 19.7
    × 191 56.1 30.68 15.040 1.185 0.710 × 284 36 200 779 382 30.1 18.0
    × 173 50.8 30.44 14.985 1.065 0.655 × 257 32 800 773 381 27.1 16.6
    W30 × 148 43.5 30.67 10.480 1.180 0.650 W760 × 220 28 100 779 266 30.0 16.5
    × 132 38.9 30.31 10.545 1.000 0.615 × 196 25 100 770 268 25.4 15.6
    × 124 36.5 30.17 10.515 0.930 0.585 × 185 23 500 766 267 23.6 14.9
    × 116 34.2 30.01 10.495 0.850 0.565 × 173 22 100 762 267 21.6 14.4
    × 108 31.7 29.83 10.475 0.760 0.545 × 161 20 500 758 266 19.3 13.8
    × 99 29.1 29.65 10.450 0.670 0.520 × 147 18 800 753 265 17.0 13.2
    × 90 26.4 29.53 10.400 0.610 0.470 × 134 17 000 750 264 15.5 11.9
    W27 × 539 158.4 32.52 15.255 3.540 1.970 W690 × 802 102 200 826 387 89.9 50.0
    × 368 108.1 30.39 14.665 2.480 1.380 × 548 69 800 772 372 63.0 35.1
    × 336 98.7 30.0 14.550 2.280 1.260 × 500 63 700 762 369 57.9 32.0
    × 307 90.2 29.61 14.445 2.090 1.160 × 457 58 200 752 367 53.1 29.5
    × 281 82.6 29.29 14.350 1.930 1.060 × 419 53 300 744 364 49.0 26.9
    × 258 75.7 28.98 14.270 1.770 0.980 × 384 48 900 736 362 45.0 24.9
    × 235 69.1 28.66 14.190 1.610 0.910 × 350 44 600 728 360 40.9 23.1
    × 217 63.8 28.43 14.115 1.500 0.830 × 323 41 100 722 359 38.1 21.1
    × 194 57.0 28.11 14.035 1.340 0.750 × 289 36 800 714 356 34.0 19.0
    × 178 52.3 27.81 14.085 1.190 0.725 × 265 33 700 706 358 30.2 18.4
    × 161 47.4 27.59 14.020 1.080 0.660 × 240 30 600 701 356 27.4 16.8
    × 146 42.9 27.38 13.965 0.975 0.605 × 217 27 700 695 355 24.8 15.4
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    48
    TABLE A2.1 Continued
    Designation
    (Nominal
    Depth in
    Inches and
    Weight in
    Pounds per
    Linear Foot)
    Area
    A,
    in.2
    Depth
    d,
    in.
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw, in.A
    Designation
    [Nominal
    Depth in Millimetres
    and
    Mass in Kilograms
    per
    Metre]
    Area A,
    mm2
    Depth
    d,
    mm
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    mmA
    Width
    bf,
    in.
    Thickness
    tf,
    in.A
    Width
    bf,
    mm
    Thickness,
    tf,
    mmA
    W27 × 129 37.8 27.63 10.010 1.100 0.610 W690 × 192 24 400 702 254 27.9 15.5
    × 114 33.5 27.29 10.070 0.930 0.570 × 170 21 600 693 256 23.6 14.5
    × 102 30.0 27.09 10.015 0.830 0.515 × 152 19 400 688 254 21.1 13.1
    × 94 27.7 26.92 9.990 0.745 0.490 × 140 17 900 684 254 18.9 12.4
    × 84 24.8 26.71 9.960 0.640 0.460 × 125 16 000 678 253 16.3 11.7
    W24 × 370 108.0 27.99 13.660 2.720 1.520 W610 × 551 70 200 711 347 69.1 38.6
    × 335 98.4 27.52 13.520 2.480 1.380 × 498 63 500 699 343 63.0 35.1
    × 306 89.8 27.13 13.405 2.280 1.260 × 455 57 900 689 340 57.9 32.0
    × 279 82.0 26.73 13.305 2.090 1.160 × 415 52 900 679 338 53.1 29.5
    × 250 73.5 26.34 13.185 1.890 1.040 × 372 47 400 669 335 48.0 26.4
    × 229 67.2 26.02 13.110 1.730 0.960 × 341 43 400 661 333 43.9 24.4
    × 207 60.7 25.71 13.010 1.570 0.870 × 307 39 100 653 330 39.9 22.1
    × 192 56.3 25.47 12.950 1.460 0.810 × 285 36 100 647 329 37.1 20.6
    × 176 51.7 25.24 12.890 1.340 0.750 × 262 33 300 641 327 34.0 19.0
    × 162 47.7 25.00 12.955 1.220 0.705 × 241 30 800 635 329 31.0 17.9
    × 146 43.0 24.74 12.900 1.090 0.650 × 217 27 700 628 328 27.7 16.5
    × 131 38.5 24.48 12.855 0.960 0.605 × 195 24 800 622 327 24.4 15.4
    × 117 34.4 24.26 12.800 0.850 0.550 × 174 22 200 616 325 21.6 14.0
    × 104 30.6 24.06 12.750 0.750 0.500 × 155 19 700 611 324 19.0 12.7
    W24 × 103 30.3 24.53 9.000 0.980 0.550 W610 × 153 19 600 623 229 24.9 14.0
    × 94 27.7 24.31 9.065 0.875 0.515 × 140 17 900 617 230 22.2 13.1
    × 84 24.7 24.10 9.020 0.770 0.470 × 125 15 900 612 229 19.6 11.9
    × 76 22.4 23.92 8.990 0.680 0.440 × 113 14 500 608 228 17.3 11.2
    × 68 20.1 23.73 8.965 0.585 0.415 × 101 13 000 603 228 14.9 10.5
    W24 × 62 18.2 23.74 7.040 0.590 0.430 W610 × 92 11 700 603 179 15.0 10.9
    × 55 16.2 23.57 7.005 0.505 0.395 × 82 10 500 599 178 12.8 10.0
    W21 × 275 80.9 24.13 12.890 2.190 1.220 W530 × 409 52 200 613 327 55.6 31.0
    × 248 72.9 23.74 12.775 1.990 1.100 × 369 47 000 603 324 50.5 27.9
    × 223 65.6 23.35 12.675 1.790 1.000 × 332 42 300 593 322 45.5 25.4
    × 201 59.2 23.03 12.575 1.630 0.910 × 300 38 200 585 319 41.4 23.1
    × 182 53.7 22.72 12.500 1.480 0.830 × 272 34 600 577 317 37.6 21.1
    × 166 48.9 22.48 12.420 1.360 0.750 × 248 31 500 571 315 34.5 19.0
    × 147 43.2 22.06 12.510 1.150 0.720 × 219 27 900 560 318 29.2 18.3
    × 132 38.8 21.83 12.440 1.035 0.650 × 196 25 000 554 316 26.3 16.5
    × 122 35.9 21.68 12.390 0.960 0.600 × 182 23 200 551 315 24.4 15.2
    × 111 32.7 21.51 12.340 0.875 0.550 × 165 21 100 546 313 22.2 14.0
    × 101 29.8 21.36 12.290 0.800 0.500 × 150 19 200 543 312 20.3 12.7
    W21 × 93 27.3 21.62 8.420 0.930 0.580 W530 × 138 17 600 549 214 23.6 14.7
    × 83 24.3 21.43 8.355 0.835 0.515 × 123 15 700 544 212 21.2 13.1
    × 73 21.5 21.24 8.295 0.740 0.455 × 109 13 900 539 211 18.8 11.6
    × 68 20.0 21.13 8.270 0.685 0.430 × 101 12 900 537 210 17.4 10.9
    × 62 18.3 20.99 8.240 0.615 0.400 × 92 11 800 533 209 15.6 10.2
    × 55 16.2 20.80 8.220 0.522 0.375 × 82 10 500 528 209 13.3 9.50
    × 48 14.1 20.62 8.140 0.430 0.350 × 72 9 180 524 207 10.9 9.00
    W21 × 57 16.7 21.06 6.555 0.650 0.405 W530 × 85 10 800 535 166 16.5 10.3
    × 50 14.7 20.83 6.530 0.535 0.380 × 74 9 480 529 166 13.6 9.7
    × 44 13.0 20.66 6.500 0.450 0.350 × 66 8 390 525 165 11.4 8.9
    W18 × 311 91.5 22.32 12.005 2.740 1.520 W460 × 464 59 100 567 305 69.6 38.6
    × 283 83.2 21.85 11.890 2.500 1.400 × 421 53 700 555 302 63.5 35.6
    × 258 75.9 21.46 11.770 2.300 1.280 × 384 49 000 545 299 58.4 32.5
    × 234 68.8 21.06 11.650 2.110 1.160 × 349 44 400 535 296 53.6 29.5
    × 211 62.1 20.67 11.555 1.910 1.060 × 315 40 100 525 293 48.5 26.9
    × 192 56.4 20.35 11.455 1.750 0.960 × 286 36 400 517 291 44.4 24.4
    × 175 51.3 20.04 11.375 1.590 0.890 × 260 33 100 509 289 40.4 22.6
    × 158 46.3 19.72 11.300 1.440 0.810 × 235 29 900 501 287 36.6 20.6
    × 143 42.1 19.49 11.220 1.320 0.730 × 213 27 100 495 285 33.5 18.5
    × 130 38.2 19.25 11.160 1.200 0.670 × 193 24 700 489 283 30.5 17.0
    × 119 35.1 18.97 11.265 1.060 0.655 × 177 22 600 482 286 26.9 16.6
    × 106 31.1 18.73 11.200 0.940 0.590 × 158 20 100 476 284 23.9 15.0
    × 97 28.5 18.59 11.145 0.870 0.535 × 144 18 400 472 283 22.1 13.6
    × 86 25.3 18.39 11.090 0.770 0.480 × 128 16 300 467 282 19.6 12.2
    × 76 22.3 18.21 11.035 0.680 0.425 × 113 14 400 463 280 17.3 10.8
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    49
    TABLE A2.1 Continued
    Designation
    (Nominal
    Depth in
    Inches and
    Weight in
    Pounds per
    Linear Foot)
    Area
    A,
    in.2
    Depth
    d,
    in.
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw, in.A
    Designation
    [Nominal
    Depth in Millimetres
    and
    Mass in Kilograms
    per
    Metre]
    Area A,
    mm2
    Depth
    d,
    mm
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    mmA
    Width
    bf,
    in.
    Thickness
    tf,
    in.A
    Width
    bf,
    mm
    Thickness,
    tf,
    mmA
    W18 × 71 20.8 18.47 7.635 0.810 0.495 W460 × 106 13 400 469 194 20.6 12.6
    × 65 19.1 18.35 7.590 0.750 0.450 × 97 12 300 466 193 19.0 11.4
    × 60 17.6 18.24 7.555 0.695 0.415 × 89 11 400 463 192 17.7 10.5
    × 55 16.2 18.11 7.530 0.630 0.390 × 82 10 500 460 191 16.0 9.9
    × 50 14.7 17.99 7.495 0.570 0.355 × 74 9 480 457 190 14.5 9.0
    W18 × 46 13.5 18.06 6.060 0.605 0.360 W460 × 68 8 710 459 154 15.4 9.1
    × 40 11.8 17.90 6.015 0.525 0.315 × 60 7 610 455 153 13.3 8.0
    × 35 10.3 17.70 6.000 0.425 0.300 × 52 6 650 450 152 10.8 7.6
    W16 × 100 29.4 16.97 10.425 0.985 0.585 W410 × 149 19 000 431 265 25.0 14.9
    × 89 26.2 16.75 10.365 0.875 0.525 × 132 16 900 425 263 22.2 13.3
    × 77 22.6 16.52 10.295 0.760 0.455 × 114 14 600 420 261 19.3 11.6
    × 67 19.7 16.33 10.235 0.665 0.395 × 100 12 700 415 260 16.9 10.0
    W16 × 57 16.8 16.43 7.120 0.715 0.430 W410 × 85 10 800 417 181 18.2 10.9
    × 50 14.7 16.26 7.070 0.630 0.380 × 75 9 480 413 180 16.0 9.7
    × 45 13.3 16.13 7.035 0.565 0.345 × 67 8 580 410 179 14.4 8.8
    × 40 11.8 16.01 6.995 0.505 0.305 × 60 7 610 407 178 12.8 7.7
    × 36 10.6 15.86 6.985 0.430 0.295 × 53 6 840 403 177 10.9 7.5
    W16 × 31 9.12 15.88 5.525 0.440 0.275 W410 × 46.1 5 880 403 140 11.2 7.0
    × 26 7.68 15.69 5.500 0.345 0.250 × 38.8 4 950 399 140 8.8 6.4
    W14 × 873 256.5 23.62 18.755 5.510 3.935 W360 × 1299 165 000 600 476 140.0 100.0
    × 808 237.3 22.84 18.560 5.120 3.740 × 1202 153 000 580 471 130.0 95.0
    × 730 215.0 22.42 17.890 4.910 3.070 × 1086 139 000 569 454 125.0 78.0
    × 665 196.0 21.64 17.650 4.520 2.830 × 990 126 000 550 448 115.0 71.9
    × 605 178.0 20.92 17.415 4.160 2.595 × 900 115 000 531 442 106.0 65.9
    × 550 162.0 20.24 17.200 3.820 2.380 × 818 105 000 514 437 97.0 60.5
    × 500 147.0 19.60 17.010 3.500 2.190 × 744 94 800 498 432 88.9 55.6
    × 455 134.0 19.02 16.835 3.210 2.015 × 677 86 500 483 428 81.5 51.2
    × 426 125.0 18.67 16.695 3.035 1.875 × 634 80 600 474 424 77.1 47.6
    × 398 117.0 18.29 16.590 2.845 1.770 × 592 75 500 465 421 72.3 45.0
    × 370 109.0 17.92 16.475 2.660 1.655 × 551 70 300 455 418 67.6 42.0
    × 342 101.0 17.54 16.360 2.470 1.540 × 509 65 200 446 416 62.7 39.1
    × 311 91.4 17.12 16.230 2.260 1.410 × 463 59 000 435 412 57.4 35.8
    × 283 83.3 16.74 16.110 2.070 1.290 × 421 53 700 425 409 52.6 32.8
    × 257 75.6 16.38 15.995 1.890 1.175 × 382 48 800 416 406 48.0 29.8
    × 233 68.5 16.04 15.890 1.720 1.070 × 347 44 200 407 404 43.7 27.2
    × 211 62.0 15.72 15.800 1.560 0.980 × 314 40 000 399 401 39.6 24.9
    × 193 56.8 15.48 15.710 1.440 0.890 × 287 36 600 393 399 36.6 22.6
    × 176 51.8 15.22 15.650 1.310 0.830 × 262 33 400 387 398 33.3 21.1
    × 159 46.7 14.98 15.565 1.190 0.745 × 237 30 100 380 395 30.2 18.9
    × 145 42.7 14.78 15.500 1.090 0.680 × 216 27 500 375 394 27.7 17.3
    W14 × 132 38.8 14.66 14.725 1.030 0.645 W360 × 196 25 000 372 374 26.2 16.4
    × 120 35.3 14.48 14.670 0.940 0.590 × 179 22 800 368 373 23.9 15.0
    × 109 32.0 14.32 14.605 0.860 0.525 × 162 20 600 364 371 21.8 13.3
    × 99 29.1 14.16 14.565 0.780 0.485 × 147 18 800 360 370 19.8 12.3
    × 90 26.5 14.02 14.520 0.710 0.440 × 134 17 100 356 369 18.0 11.2
    W14 × 82 24.1 14.31 10.130 0.855 0.510 W360 × 122 15 500 363 257 21.7 13.0
    × 74 21.8 14.17 10.070 0.785 0.450 × 110 14 100 360 256 19.9 11.4
    × 68 20.0 14.04 10.035 0.720 0.415 × 101 12 900 357 255 18.3 10.5
    × 61 17.9 13.89 9.995 0.645 0.375 × 91 11 500 353 254 16.4 9.5
    W14 × 53 15.6 13.92 8.060 0.660 0.370 W360 × 79 10 100 354 205 16.8 9.4
    × 48 14.1 13.79 8.030 0.595 0.340 × 72 9 100 350 204 15.1 8.6
    × 43 12.6 13.66 7.995 0.530 0.305 × 64 8 130 347 203 13.5 7.7
    W14 × 38 11.2 14.10 6.770 0.515 0.310 W360 × 58 7 230 358 172 13.1 7.9
    × 34 10.0 13.98 6.745 0.455 0.285 × 51 6 450 355 171 11.6 7.2
    × 30 8.85 13.84 6.730 0.385 0.270 × 44.6 5 710 352 171 9.8 6.9
    W14 × 26 7.69 13.91 5.025 0.420 0.255 W360 × 39.0 4 960 353 128 10.7 6.5
    × 22 6.49 13.74 5.000 0.335 0.230 × 32.9 4 190 349 127 8.5 5.8
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    50
    TABLE A2.1 Continued
    Designation
    (Nominal
    Depth in
    Inches and
    Weight in
    Pounds per
    Linear Foot)
    Area
    A,
    in.2
    Depth
    d,
    in.
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw, in.A
    Designation
    [Nominal
    Depth in Millimetres
    and
    Mass in Kilograms
    per
    Metre]
    Area A,
    mm2
    Depth
    d,
    mm
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    mmA
    Width
    bf,
    in.
    Thickness
    tf,
    in.A
    Width
    bf,
    mm
    Thickness,
    tf,
    mmA
    W12 × 336 98.8 16.82 13.385 2.955 1.775 W310 × 500 63 700 427 340 75.1 45.1
    × 305 89.6 16.32 13.235 2.705 1.625 × 454 57 800 415 336 68.7 41.3
    × 279 81.9 15.85 13.140 2.470 1.530 × 415 52 800 403 334 62.7 38.9
    × 252 74.1 15.41 13.005 2.250 1.395 × 375 47 800 391 330 57.2 35.4
    × 230 67.7 15.05 12.895 2.070 1.285 × 342 43 700 382 328 52.6 32.6
    × 210 61.8 14.71 12.790 1.900 1.180 × 313 39 900 374 325 48.3 30.0
    × 190 55.8 14.38 12.670 1.735 1.060 × 283 36 000 365 322 44.1 26.9
    × 170 50.0 14.03 12.570 1.560 0.960 × 253 32 300 356 319 39.6 24.4
    × 152 44.7 13.71 12.480 1.400 0.870 × 226 28 800 348 317 35.6 22.1
    × 136 39.9 13.41 12.400 1.250 0.790 × 202 25 700 341 315 31.8 20.1
    × 120 35.3 13.12 12.320 1.105 0.710 × 179 22 800 333 313 28.1 18.0
    × 106 31.2 12.89 12.220 0.990 0.610 × 158 20 100 327 310 25.1 15.5
    × 96 28.2 12.71 12.160 0.900 0.550 × 143 18 200 323 309 22.9 14.0
    × 87 25.6 12.53 12.125 0.810 0.515 × 129 16 500 318 308 20.6 13.1
    × 79 23.2 12.38 12.080 0.735 0.470 × 117 15 000 314 307 18.7 11.9
    × 72 21.1 12.25 12.040 0.670 0.430 × 107 13 600 311 306 17.0 10.9
    × 65 19.1 12.12 12.000 0.605 0.390 × 97 12 300 308 305 15.4 9.9
    W12 × 58 17.0 12.19 10.010 0.640 0.360 W310 × 86 11 000 310 254 16.3 9.1
    × 53 15.6 12.06 9.995 0.575 0.345 × 79 10 100 306 254 14.6 8.8
    W12 × 50 14.7 12.19 8.080 0.640 0.370 W310 × 74 9 480 310 205 16.3 9.4
    × 45 13.2 12.06 8.045 0.575 0.335 × 67 8 520 306 204 14.6 8.5
    × 40 11.8 11.94 8.005 0.515 0.295 × 60 7 610 303 203 13.1 7.5
    W12 × 35 10.3 12.50 6.560 0.520 0.300 W310 × 52 6 650 317 167 13.2 7.6
    × 30 8.79 12.34 6.520 0.440 0.260 × 44.5 5 670 313 166 11.2 6.6
    × 26 7.65 12.22 6.490 0.380 0.230 × 38.7 4 940 310 165 9.7 5.8
    W12 × 22 6.48 12.31 4.030 0.425 0.260 W310 × 32.7 4 180 313 102 10.8 6.6
    × 19 5.57 12.16 4.005 0.350 0.235 × 28.3 3 590 309 102 8.9 6.0
    × 16 4.71 11.99 3.990 0.265 0.220 × 23.8 3 040 305 101 6.7 5.6
    × 14 4.16 11.91 3.970 0.225 0.200 × 21.0 2 680 303 101 5.7 5.1
    W10 × 112 32.9 11.36 10.415 1.250 0.755 W250 × 167 21 200 289 265 31.8 19.2
    × 100 29.4 11.10 10.340 1.120 0.680 × 149 19 000 282 263 28.4 17.3
    × 88 25.9 10.84 10.265 0.990 0.605 × 131 16 700 275 261 25.1 15.4
    × 77 22.6 10.60 10.190 0.870 0.530 × 115 14 600 269 259 22.1 13.5
    × 68 20.0 10.40 10.130 0.770 0.470 × 101 12 900 264 257 19.6 11.9
    × 60 17.6 10.22 10.080 0.680 0.420 × 89 11 400 260 256 17.3 10.7
    × 54 15.8 10.09 10.030 0.615 0.370 × 80 10 200 256 255 15.6 9.4
    × 49 14.4 9.98 10.000 0.560 0.340 × 73 9 290 253 254 14.2 8.6
    W10 × 45 13.3 10.10 8.020 0.620 0.350 W250 × 67 8 580 257 204 15.7 8.9
    × 39 11.5 9.92 7.985 0.530 0.315 × 58 7 420 252 203 13.5 8.0
    × 33 9.71 9.73 7.960 0.435 0.290 × 49.1 6 260 247 202 11.0 7.4
    W10 × 30 8.84 10.47 5.810 0.510 0.300 W250 × 44.8 5 700 266 148 13.0 7.6
    × 26 7.61 10.33 5.770 0.440 0.260 × 38.5 4 910 262 147 11.2 6.6
    × 22 6.49 10.17 5.750 0.360 0.240 × 32.7 4 190 258 146 9.1 6.1
    W10 × 19 5.62 10.24 4.020 0.395 0.250 W250 × 28.4 3 630 260 102 10.0 6.4
    × 17 4.99 10.11 4.010 0.330 0.240 × 25.3 3 220 257 102 8.4 6.1
    × 15 4.41 9.99 4.000 0.270 0.230 × 22.3 2 850 254 102 6.9 5.8
    × 12 3.54 9.87 3.960 0.210 0.190 × 17.9 2 280 251 101 5.3 4.8
    W8 × 67 19.7 9.00 8.280 0.935 0.570 W200 × 100 12 700 229 210 23.7 14.5
    × 58 17.1 8.75 8.220 0.810 0.510 × 86 11 000 222 209 20.6 13.0
    × 48 14.1 8.50 8.110 0.685 0.400 × 71 9 100 216 206 17.4 10.2
    × 40 11.7 8.25 8.070 0.560 0.360 × 59 7 550 210 205 14.2 9.1
    × 35 10.3 8.12 8.020 0.495 0.310 × 52 6 650 206 204 12.6 7.9
    × 31 9.13 8.00 7.995 0.435 0.285 × 46.1 5 890 203 203 11.0 7.2
    W8 × 28 8.25 8.06 6.535 0.465 0.285 W200 × 41.7 5 320 205 166 11.8 7.2
    × 24 7.08 7.93 6.495 0.400 0.245 × 35.9 4 570 201 165 10.2 6.2
    W8 × 21 6.16 8.28 5.270 0.400 0.250 W200 × 31.3 3 970 210 134 10.2 6.4
    × 18 5.26 8.14 5.250 0.330 0.230 × 26.6 3 390 207 133 8.4 5.8
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    51
    TABLE A2.1 Continued
    Designation
    (Nominal
    Depth in
    Inches and
    Weight in
    Pounds per
    Linear Foot)
    Area
    A,
    in.2
    Depth
    d,
    in.
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw, in.A
    Designation
    [Nominal
    Depth in Millimetres
    and
    Mass in Kilograms
    per
    Metre]
    Area A,
    mm2
    Depth
    d,
    mm
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    mmA
    Width
    bf,
    in.
    Thickness
    tf,
    in.A
    Width
    bf,
    mm
    Thickness,
    tf,
    mmA
    W8 × 15 4.44 8.11 4.015 0.315 0.245 W200 × 22.5 2 860 206 102 8.0 6.2
    × 13 3.84 7.99 4.000 0.255 0.230 × 19.3 2 480 203 102 6.5 5.8
    × 10 2.96 7.89 3.940 0.205 0.170 × 15.0 1 910 200 100 5.2 4.3
    W6 × 25 7.34 6.38 6.080 0.455 0.320 W150 × 37.1 4 740 162 154 11.6 8.1
    × 20 5.87 6.20 6.020 0.365 0.260 × 29.8 3 790 157 153 9.3 6.6
    × 15 4.43 5.99 5.990 0.260 0.230 × 22.5 2 860 152 152 6.6 5.8
    W6 × 16 4.74 6.28 4.030 0.405 0.260 W150 × 24.0 3 060 160 102 10.3 6.6
    × 12 3.55 6.03 4.000 0.280 0.230 × 18.0 2 290 153 102 7.1 5.8
    × 9 2.68 5.90 3.940 0.215 0.170 × 13.5 1 730 150 100 5.5 4.3
    × 8.5 2.52 5.83 3.940 0.195 0.170 × 13.0 1 630 148 100 4.9 4.3
    W5 × 19 5.54 5.15 5.030 0.430 0.270 W130 × 28.1 3 590 131 128 10.9 6.9
    × 16 4.68 5.01 5.000 0.360 0.240 × 23.8 3 040 127 127 9.1 6.1
    W4 × 13 3.83 4.16 4.060 0.345 0.280 W100 × 19.3 2 470 106 103 8.8 7.1
    A Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed.
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    52
    TABLE A2.2 “S” Shapes
    Designation
    (Nominal
    Depth in
    Inches and
    Weight in
    Pounds per
    Linear Foot)
    Area
    A,
    in.2
    Depth
    d,
    in.
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    in.A
    Designation
    [Nominal
    Depth in Millimetres
    and
    Mass in Kilograms
    per
    Metre]
    Area A,
    mm2
    Depth
    d, mm
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    mmA
    Width
    bf, in.
    Thickness
    tf,
    in.A
    Width
    bf,
    mm
    Thickness,
    tf,
    mmA
    S 24 × 121 35.6 24.50 8.050 1.090 0.800 S 610 × 180 23 000 622 204 27.7 20.3
    × 106 31.2 24.50 7.870 1.090 0.620 × 158 20 100 622 200 27.7 15.7
    S 24 × 100 29.3 24.00 7.245 0.870 0.745 S 610 × 149 18 900 610 184 22.1 18.9
    × 90 26.5 24.00 7.125 0.870 0.625 × 134 17 100 610 181 22.1 15.9
    × 80 23.5 24.00 7.000 0.870 0.500 × 119 15 200 610 178 22.1 12.7
    S 20 × 96 28.2 20.30 7.200 0.920 0.800 S 510 × 143 18 200 516 183 23.4 20.3
    × 86 25.3 20.30 7.060 0.920 0.660 × 128 16 300 516 179 23.4 16.8
    S 20 × 75 22.0 20.00 6.385 0.795 0.635 S 510 × 112 14 200 508 162 20.2 16.1
    × 66 19.4 20.00 6.255 0.795 0.505 × 98 12 500 508 159 20.2 12.8
    S 18 × 70 20.6 18.00 6.251 0.691 0.711 S 460 × 104 13 300 457 159 17.6 18.1
    × 54.7 16.1 18.00 6.001 0.691 0.461 × 81.4 10 400 457 152 17.6 11.7
    S 15 × 50 14.7 15.00 5.640 0.622 0.550 S 380 × 74 9 480 381 143 15.8 14.0
    × 42.9 12.6 15.00 5.501 0.622 0.411 × 64 8 130 381 140 15.8 10.4
    S 12 × 50 14.7 12.00 5.477 0.659 0.687 S 310 × 74 9 480 305 139 16.7 17.4
    × 40.8 12.0 12.00 5.252 0.659 0.462 × 60.7 7 740 305 133 16.7 11.7
    S 12 × 35 10.3 12.00 5.078 0.544 0.428 S 310 × 52 6 650 305 129 13.8 10.9
    × 31.8 9.35 12.00 5.000 0.544 0.350 × 47.3 6 030 305 127 13.8 8.9
    S 10 × 35 10.3 10.00 4.944 0.491 0.594 S 250 × 52 6 650 254 126 12.5 15.1
    × 25.4 7.46 10.00 4.661 0.491 0.311 × 37.8 4 810 254 118 12.5 7.9
    S 8 × 23 6.77 8.00 4.171 0.425 0.441 S 200 × 34 4 370 203 106 10.8 11.2
    × 18.4 5.41 8.00 4.001 0.425 0.271 × 27.4 3 480 203 102 10.8 6.9
    S 6 × 17.25 5.07 6.00 3.565 0.359 0.465 S 150 × 25.7 3 270 152 91 9.1 11.8
    × 12.5 3.67 6.00 3.332 0.359 0.232 × 18.6 2 360 152 85 9.1 5.9
    S 5 × 10 2.94 5.00 3.004 0.326 0.214 S 130 × 15 1 880 127 76 8.3 5.4
    S 4 × 9.5 2.79 4.00 2.796 0.293 0.326 S 100 × 14.1 1 800 102 71 7.4 8.3
    × 7.7 2.26 4.00 2.663 0.293 0.193 × 11.5 1 450 102 68 7.4 4.9
    S 3 × 7.5 2.21 3.00 2.509 0.260 0.349 S 75 × 11.2 1 430 76 64 6.6 8.9
    × 5.7 1.67 3.00 2.330 0.260 0.170 × 8.5 1 080 76 59 6.6 4.3
    A Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    53
    TABLE A2.3 “M” Shapes
    Designation
    (Nominal
    Depth in
    Inches and
    Weight in
    Pounds per
    Linear Foot)
    AreaA,
    in.2
    Depth
    d,
    in.
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    in.A
    Designation
    [Nominal
    Depth in Millimetres
    and
    Mass in Kilograms
    per
    Metre]
    AreaA,
    mm2
    Depth
    d, mm
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    mmA
    Width
    bf, in.
    Thickness
    t f,
    in.A
    Width
    bf,
    mm
    Thickness,
    tf,
    mmA
    M 12.5 × 12.4 3.66 12.534 3.750 0.228 0.155 M 318 × 18.5 2 361 318 95 5.8 3.9
    × 11.6 3.43 12.500 3.500 0.211 0.155 × 17.3 2 213 317 89 5.4 3.9
    M 12 × 11.8 3.47 12.00 3.065 0.225 0.177 M 310 × 17.6 2 240 305 78 5.7 4.5
    × 10.8 3.18 11.97 3.065 0.210 0.160 × 16.1 2 050 304 78 5.3 4.1
    × 10.0 2.94 11.97 3.250 0.180 0.149 × 14.9 1 900 304 83 4.6 3.8
    M 10 × 9.0 2.65 10.00 2.690 0.206 0.157 M 250 × 13.4 1 710 254 68 4.6 3.6
    × 8.0 2.35 9.95 2.690 0.182 0.141 × 11.9 1 520 253 68 5.2 4.0
    × 7.5 2.21 9.99 2.688 0.173 0.130 × 11.2 1 430 253 68 4.4 3.3
    M 8 × 6.5 1.92 8.00 2.281 0.189 0.135 M 200 × 9.7 1 240 203 57 4.8 3.4
    × 6.2 1.81 8.00 2.281 0.177 0.129 × 9.2 1 170 203 58 4.5 3.3
    M 6 × 4.4 1.29 6.00 1.844 0.171 0.114 M 150 × 6.6 832 152 47 4.3 2.9
    × 3.7 1.09 5.92 2.000 0.129 0.098 × 5.5 703 150 51 3.3 2.5
    M 5 × 18.9 5.55 5.00 5.003 0.416 0.316 M 130 × 28.1 3 580 127 127 10.6 8.0
    M 4 × 6.0 1.78 3.80 3.80 0.160 0.130 M 100 × 8.9 1 150 97 97 4.1 3.3
    × 4.08 1.20 4.00 2.250 0.170 0.115 × 6.1 775 102 57 4.3 2.9
    M 3 × 2.9 0.853 3.00 2.250 0.130 0.090 M 75 × 4.3 550 76 57 3.3 2.3
    A Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed.
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    54
    TABLE A2.4 “HP” Shapes
    Designation
    (Nominal
    Depth in
    Inches and
    Weight in
    Pounds per
    Linear Foot)
    AreaA,
    in.2
    Depth d,
    in.
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    in.A
    Designation
    [Nominal
    Depth in Millimetres
    and
    Mass in Kilograms
    per
    Metre]
    AreaA,
    mm2
    Depth
    d, mm
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    mmA Width bf,
    in.
    Thickness
    t f,
    in.A
    Width bf,
    mm
    Thickness,
    tf, mmA
    HP18 × 204 60.0 18.25 18.125 1.125 1.125 HP460 × 304 38 700 464 460 28.6 28.6
    × 181 53.2 18.00 18.000 1.000 1.000 × 269 34 300 457 457 25.4 25.4
    × 157 46.2 17.74 17.870 0.870 0.870 × 234 29 800 451 454 22.1 22.1
    × 135 39.8 17.50 17.750 0.750 0.750 × 202 25 700 445 451 19.1 19.1
    HP16 × 183 53.8 16.50 16.250 1.125 1.125 HP410 × 272 34 700 419 413 28.6 28.6
    × 162 47.7 16.25 16.125 1.000 1.000 × 242 30 800 413 410 25.4 25.4
    × 141 41.7 16.00 16.000 0.875 0.875 × 211 26 900 406 406 22.2 22.2
    × 121 35.7 15.75 15.875 0.750 0.750 × 181 23 000 400 403 19.1 19.1
    × 101 29.8 15.50 15.750 0.625 0.625 × 151 19 200 394 400 15.9 15.9
    × 88 25.8 15.33 15.665 0.540 0.540 × 131 16 700 389 398 13.7 13.7
    HP14 × 117 34.4 14.21 14.885 0.805 0.805 HP360 × 174 22 200 361 378 20.4 20.4
    × 102 30.0 14.01 14.785 0.705 0.705 × 152 19 400 356 376 17.9 17.9
    × 89 26.1 13.83 14.695 0.615 0.615 × 132 16 800 351 373 15.6 15.6
    × 73 21.4 13.61 14.585 0.505 0.505 × 108 13 800 346 370 12.8 12.8
    HP12 × 89 26.2 12.35 12.330 0.720 0.720 HP310 × 132 16 900 314 313 18.3 18.3
    × 84 24.6 12.28 12.295 0.685 0.685 × 125 15 900 312 312 17.4 17.4
    × 74 21.8 12.13 12.215 0.610 0.605 × 110 14 100 308 310 15.5 15.4
    × 63 18.4 11.94 12.125 0.515 0.515 × 93 11 900 303 308 13.1 13.1
    × 53 15.5 11.78 12.045 0.435 0.435 × 79 10 000 299 306 11.0 11.0
    HP10 × 57 16.8 9.99 10.225 0.565 0.565 HP250 × 85 10 800 254 260 14.4 14.4
    × 42 12.4 9.70 10.075 0.420 0.415 × 62 8 000 246 256 10.7 10.5
    HP8 × 36 10.6 8.02 8.155 0.445 0.445 HP200 × 53 6 840 204 207 11.3 11.3
    A Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    55
    TABLE A2.5 “C” Shapes
    Designation
    (Nominal
    Depth in
    Inches and
    Weight in
    Pounds per
    Linear Foot)
    Area
    A,
    in.2
    Depth
    d,
    in.
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    in.A
    Designation
    [Nominal
    Depth in Millimetres
    in Mass
    in Kilograms
    per Metre]
    AreaA,
    mm2
    Depth
    d,
    mm
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    mmA
    Width
    bf, in.
    Thickness
    t f,
    in.A
    Width
    bf,
    mm
    Thickness
    tf,
    mmA
    C 15 × 50 14.7 15.00 3.716 0.650 0.716 C 380 × 74 9 480 381 94 16.5 18.2
    × 40 11.8 15.00 3.520 0.650 0.520 × 60 7 610 381 89 16.5 13.2
    × 33.9 9.96 15.00 3.400 0.650 0.400 × 50.4 6 430 381 86 16.5 10.2
    C 12 × 30 8.82 12.00 3.170 0.501 0.510 C 310 × 45 5 690 305 80 12.7 13.0
    × 25 7.35 12.00 3.047 0.501 0.387 × 37 4 740 305 77 12.7 9.8
    × 20.7 6.09 12.00 2.942 0.501 0.282 × 30.8 3 930 305 74 12.7 7.2
    C 10 × 30 8.82 10.00 3.033 0.436 0.673 C 250 × 45 5 690 254 76 11.1 17.1
    × 25 7.35 10.00 2.886 0.436 0.526 × 37 4 740 254 73 11.1 13.4
    × 20 5.88 10.00 2.739 0.436 0.379 × 30 3 790 254 69 11.1 9.6
    × 15.3 4.49 10.00 2.600 0.436 0.240 × 22.8 2 900 254 65 11.1 6.1
    C 9 × 20 5.88 9.00 2.648 0.413 0.448 C 230 × 30 3 790 229 67 10.5 11.4
    × 15 4.41 9.00 2.485 0.413 0.285 × 22 2 850 229 63 10.5 7.2
    × 13.4 3.94 9.00 2.433 0.413 0.233 × 19.9 2 540 229 61 10.5 5.9
    C 8 × 18.75 5.51 8.00 2.527 0.390 0.487 C 200 × 27.9 3 550 203 64 9.9 12.4
    × 13.75 4.04 8.00 2.343 0.390 0.303 × 20.5 2 610 203 59 9.9 7.7
    × 11.5 3.38 8.00 2.260 0.390 0.220 × 17.1 2 180 203 57 9.9 5.6
    C 7 × 14.75 4.33 7.00 2.299 0.366 0.419 C 180 × 22 2 790 178 58 9.3 10.6
    × 12.25 3.60 7.00 2.194 0.366 0.314 × 18.2 2 320 178 55 9.3 8.0
    × 9.8 2.87 7.00 2.090 0.366 0.210 × 14.6 1 850 178 53 9.3 5.3
    C 6 × 13 3.83 6.00 2.157 0.343 0.437 C 150 × 19.3 2 470 152 54 8.7 11.1
    × 10.5 3.09 6.00 2.034 0.343 0.314 × 15.6 1 990 152 51 8.7 8.0
    × 8.2 2.40 6.00 1.920 0.343 0.200 × 12.2 1 550 152 48 8.7 5.1
    C 5 × 9 2.64 5.00 1.885 0.320 0.325 C 130 × 13 1 700 127 47 8.1 8.3
    × 6.7 1.97 5.00 1.750 0.320 0.190 × 10.4 1 270 127 44 8.1 4.8
    C 4 × 7.25 2.13 4.00 1.721 0.296 0.321 C 100 × 10.8 1 370 102 43 7.5 8.2
    × 6.25 1.84 4.00 1.647 0.296 0.247 × 9.3 1 187 102 42 7.5 6.3
    × 5.4 1.59 4.00 1.584 0.296 0.184 × 8 1 030 102 40 7.5 4.7
    × 4.5 1.32 4.00 1.520 0.296 0.125 × 6.7 852 102 39 7.5 3.2
    C 3 × 6 1.76 3.00 1.596 0.273 0.356 C 75 × 8.9 1 130 76 40 6.9 9.0
    × 5 1.47 3.00 1.498 0.273 0.258 × 7.4 948 76 37 6.9 6.6
    × 4.1 1.21 3.00 1.410 0.273 0.170 × 6.1 781 76 35 6.9 4.3
    × 3.5 1.03 3.00 1.372 0.273 0.132 × 5.2 665 76 35 6.9 3.4
    A Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed.
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    56
    TABLE A2.6 “MC” Shapes
    Designation
    (Nominal
    Depth in
    Inches and
    Weight in
    Pounds per
    Linear Foot)
    Area
    A,
    in.2
    Depth
    d,
    in.
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    in.A
    Designation
    [Nominal Depth
    in Millimetres
    and Mass in Kilograms
    per
    Metre]
    Area A,
    mm2
    Depth
    d,
    mm
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    mmA
    Width
    bf, in.
    Thickness
    tf,
    in.A
    Width
    bf,
    mm
    Thickness
    tf,
    mmA
    MC 18 × 58 17.1 18.00 4.200 0.625 0.700 MC 460 × 86 11 000 457 107 15.9 17.8
    × 51.9 15.3 18.00 4.100 0.625 0.600 × 77.2 9 870 457 104 15.9 15.2
    × 45.8 13.5 18.00 4.000 0.625 0.500 × 68.2 8 710 457 102 15.9 12 .7
    × 42.7 12.6 18.00 3.950 0.625 0.450 × 63.5 8 130 457 100 15.9 11.4
    MC 13 × 50 14.7 13.00 4.412 0.610 0.787 MC 330 × 74 9 480 330 112 15.5 20.0
    × 40 11.8 13.00 4.185 0.610 0.560 × 60 7 610 330 106 15.5 14.2
    × 35 10.3 13.00 4.072 0.610 0.447 × 52 6 640 330 103 15.5 11.4
    × 31.8 9.35 13.00 4.000 0.610 0.375 × 47.3 6 030 330 102 15.5 9.5
    MC 12 × 50 14.7 12.00 4.135 0.700 0.835 MC 310 × 74 9 480 305 105 17.8 21.2
    × 45 13.2 12.00 4.010 0.700 0.710 × 67 8 502 305 102 17.8 18.0
    × 40 11.8 12.00 3.890 0.700 0.590 × 60 7 610 305 98 17.8 15.0
    × 35 10.3 12.00 3.765 0.700 0.465 × 52 6 620 305 96 17.8 11.8
    × 31 9.12 12.00 3.670 0.700 0.370 × 46 5 890 305 93 17.8 9.4
    MC 12 × 14.3 4.19 12.00 2.125 0.313 0.250 MC 310 × 21.3 2 700 305 54 8.0 6.4
    × 10.6 3.10 12.00 1.500 0.309 0.190 × 15.8 2 000 305 38 7.8 4.8
    MC 10 × 41.1 12.1 10.00 4.321 0.575 0.796 MC 250 × 61.2 7 810 254 110 14.6 20.2
    × 33.6 9.87 10.00 4.100 0.575 0.575 × 50 6 370 254 104 14.6 14.6
    × 28.5 8.37 10.00 3.950 0.575 0.425 × 42.4 5 400 254 100 14.6 10.8
    MC 10 × 25 7.35 10.00 3.405 0.575 0.380 MC 250 × 37 4 740 254 86 14.6 9.7
    × 22 6.45 10.00 3.315 0.575 0.290 × 33 4 160 254 84 14.6 7.4
    MC 10 × 8.4 2.46 10.00 1.500 0.280 0.170 MC 250 × 12.5 1 590 254 38 7.1 4.3
    × 6.5 1.91 10.00 1.17 0.202 0.152 × 9.7 1240 254 28 5.1 3.9
    MC 9 × 25.4 7.47 9.00 3.500 0.550 0.450 MC 230 × 37.8 4 820 229 88 14.0 11.4
    × 23.9 7.02 9.00 3.450 0.550 0.400 × 35.6 4 530 229 87 14.0 10.2
    MC 8 × 22.8 6.70 8.00 3.502 0.525 0.427 MC 200 × 33.9 4 320 203 88 13.3 10.8
    × 21.4 6.28 8.00 3.450 0.525 0.375 × 31.8 4 050 203 87 13.3 9.5
    MC 8 × 20 5.88 8.00 3.025 0.500 0.400 MC 200 × 29.8 3 790 203 76 12.7 10.2
    × 18.7 5.50 8.00 2.978 0.500 0.353 × 27.8 3 550 203 75 12.7 9.0
    MC 8 × 8.5 2.50 8.00 1.874 0.311 0.179 MC 200 × 12.6 1 610 203 47 7.9 4.5
    MC 7 × 22.7 6.67 7.00 3.603 0.500 0.503 MC 180 × 33.8 4 300 178 91 12.7 12.8
    × 19.1 5.61 7.00 3.452 0.500 0.352 × 28.4 3 620 178 87 12.7 8.9
    MC 6 × ×18 5.29 6.00 3.504 0.475 0.379 MC 150 × 26.8 3 410 152 88 12.1 9.6
    × 15.3 4.50 6.00 3.500 0.385 0.340 × 22.8 2 900 152 88 9.8 8.6
    MC 6 × 16.3 4.79 6.00 3.000 0.475 0.375 MC 150 × 24.3 3 090 152 76 12.1 9.5
    × 15.1 4.44 6.00 2.941 0.475 0.316 × 22.5 2 860 152 74 12.1 8.0
    MC 6 × 12 3.53 6.00 2.497 0.375 0.310 MC 150 × 17.9 2 280 152 63 9.5 7.9
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    57
    TABLE A2.6 Continued
    Designation
    (Nominal
    Depth in
    Inches and
    Weight in
    Pounds per
    Linear Foot)
    Area
    A,
    in.2
    Depth
    d,
    in.
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    in.A
    Designation
    [Nominal Depth
    in Millimetres
    and Mass in Kilograms
    per
    Metre]
    Area A,
    mm2
    Depth
    d,
    mm
    Flange
    Web
    Thickness
    tw,
    mmA
    Width
    bf, in.
    Thickness
    tf,
    in.A
    Width
    bf,
    mm
    Thickness
    tf,
    mmA
    MC 6 × 7.0 2.07 6.00 1.875 0.291 0.179 MC 150 × 10.4 1 341 152 48 7.4 4.5
    × 6.5 1.93 6.00 1.850 0.291 0.155 × 9.7 1 250 152 47 7.4 3.9
    MC 4 × 13.8 4.02 4.00 2.500 0.500 0.500 MC 100 × 20.5 2 594 102 64 13 13
    MC 3 × 7.1 2.09 3.00 1.938 0.351 0.312 MC 75 × 10.6 1 348 76 49 8.9 7.9
    A Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed.
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    58
    TABLE A2.7 “L” Shapes (Equal Legs)A
    Size and Thickness, in.
    Weight per
    Foot, lb
    Area, in.2 Size and Thickness, mm
    Mass per
    Metre, kg
    Area, mm2
    L12 × 12 × 13/8 105 30.9 L305 × 305 × 34.9 157 19 900
    L12 × 12 × 11/4 96.4 28.3 L305 × 305 × 31.8 143 18 300
    L12 × 12 × 11/8 87.2 25.6 L305 × 305 × 28.6 130 16 500
    L12 × 12 × 1 77.8 22.9 L305 × 305 × 25.4 116 14 700
    L10 × 10 × 13/8 87.1 25.6 L254 × 254 × 34.9 130 16 500
    L10 × 10 × 11/4 79.9 23.5 L254 × 254 × 31.8 119 15 100
    L10 × 10 × 11/8 72.3 21.2 L254 × 254 × 28.6 108 13 700
    L10 × 10 × 1 64.7 19.0 L254 × 254 × 25.4 96.2 12 300
    L10 × 10 × 7/8 56.9 16.7 L254 × 254 × 22.2 84.6 10 800
    L10 × 10 × 3/4 49.1 14.4 L254 × 254 × 19.1 73.1 9 310
    L8 × 8 × 11/8 56.9 16.7 L203 × 203 × 28.6 84.7 10 800
    L8 × 8 × 1 51.0 15.0 L203 × 203 × 25.4 75.9 9 680
    L8 × 8 × 7/8 45.0 13.2 L203 × 203 × 22.2 67.0 8 500
    L8 × 8 × 3/4 38.9 11.4 L203 × 203 × 19.0 57.9 7 360
    L8 × 8 × 5/8 32.7 9.61 L203 × 203 × 15.9 48.7 6 200
    L8 × 8 × 9/16 29.6 8.68 L203 × 203 × 14.3 44.0 5 600
    L8 × 8 × 1/2 26.4 7.75 L203 × 203 × 12.7 39.3 5 000
    L6 × 6 × 1 37.4 11.0 L152 × 152 × 25.4 55.7 7 100
    L6 × 6 × 7/8 33.1 9.73 L152 × 152 × 22.2 49.3 6 280
    L6 × 6 × 3/4 28.7 8.44 L152 × 152 × 19.0 42.7 5 450
    L6 × 6 × 5/8 24.2 7.11 L152 × 152 × 15.9 36.0 4 590
    L6 × 6 × 9/16 21.9 6.43 L152 × 152 × 14.3 32.6 4 150
    L6 × 6 × 1/2 19.6 5.75 L152 × 152 × 12.7 29.2 3 710
    L6 × 6 × 7/16 17.2 5.06 L152 × 152 × 11.1 25.6 3 270
    L6 × 6 × 3/8 14.9 4.36 L152 × 152 × 9.5 22.2 2 810
    L6 × 6 × 5/16 12.4 3.65 L152 × 152 × 7.9 18.5 2 360
    L5 × 5 × 7/8 27.2 7.98 L127 × 127 × 22.2 40.5 5 150
    L5 × 5 × 3/4 23.6 6.94 L127 × 127 × 19.0 35.1 4 480
    L5 × 5 × 5/8 20.0 5.86 L127 × 127 × 15.9 29.8 3 780
    L5 × 5 × 1/2 16.2 4.75 L127 × 127 × 12.7 24.1 3 070
    L5 × 5 × 7/16 14.3 4.18 L127 × 127 × 11.1 21.3 2 700
    L5 × 5 × 3/8 12.3 3.61 L127 × 127 × 9.5 18.3 2 330
    L5 × 5 × 5/16 10.3 3.03 L127 × 127 × 7.9 15.3 1 960
    L4 × 4 × 3/4 18.5 5.44 L102 × 102 × 19.0 27.5 3 510
    L4 × 4 × 5/8 15.7 4.61 L102 × 102 × 15.9 23.4 2 970
    L4 × 4 × 1/2 12.8 3.75 L102 × 102 × 12.7 19.0 2 420
    L4 × 4 × 7/16 11.3 3.31 L102 × 102 × 11.1 16.8 2 140
    L4 × 4 × 3/8 9.80 2.86 L102 × 102 × 9.5 14.6 1 850
    L4 × 4 × 5/16 8.20 2.40 L102 × 102 × 7.9 12.2 1 550
    L4 × 4 × 1/4 6.60 1.94 L102 × 102 × 6.4 9.8 1 250
    L31/2 × 31/2 × 1/2 11.1 3.25 L89 × 89 × 12.7 16.5 2 100
    L31/2 × 31/2 × 7/16 9.80 2.87 L89 × 89 × 11.1 14.6 1 850
    L31/2 × 31/2 × 3/8 8.50 2.48 L89 × 89 × 9.5 12.6 1 600
    L31/2 × 31/2 × 5/16 7.20 2.09 L89 × 89 × 7.9 10.7 1 350
    L31/2 × 31/2 × 1/4 5.80 1.69 L89 × 89 × 6.4 8.6 1 090
    L3 × 3 × 1/2 9.40 2.75 L76 × 76 × 12.7 14.0 1 770
    L3 × 3 × 7/16 8.30 2.43 L76 × 76 × 11.1 12.4 1 570
    L3 × 3 × 3/8 7.20 2.11 L76 × 76 × 9.5 10.7 1 360
    L3 × 3 × 5/16 6.10 1.78 L76 × 76 × 7.9 9.1 1 150
    L3 × 3 × 1/4 4.90 1.44 L76 × 76 × 6.4 7.3 929
    L3 × 3 × 3/16 3.71 1.09 L76 × 76 × 4.8 5.5 703
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    59
    TABLE A2.7 Continued
    Size and Thickness, in.
    Weight per
    Foot, lb
    Area, in.2 Size and Thickness, mm
    Mass per
    Metre, kg
    Area, mm2
    L21/2 × 21/2 × 1/2 7.70 2.25 L64 × 64 × 12.7 11.4 1 450
    L21/2 × 21/2 × 3/8 5.90 1.73 L64 × 64 × 9.5 8.7 1 120
    L21/2 × 21/2 × 5/16 5.00 1.46 L64 × 64 × 7.9 7.4 942
    L21/2 × 21/2 × 1/4 4.10 1.19 L64 × 64 × 6.4 6.1 768
    L21/2 × 21/2 × 3/16 3.07 0.90 L64 × 64 × 4.8 4.6 581
    L2 × 2 × 3/8 4.70 1.36 L51 × 51 × 9.5 7.0 877
    L2 × 2 × 5/16 3.92 1.15 L51 × 51 × 7.9 5.8 742
    L2 × 2 × 1/4 3.19 0.938 L51 × 51 × 6.4 4.7 605
    L2 × 2 × 3/16 2.44 0.715 L51 × 51 × 4.8 3.6 461
    L2 × 2 × 1/8 1.65 0.484 L51 × 51 × 3.2 2.4 312
    L13/4 × 13/4 × 1/4 2.77 0.813 L44 × 44 × 6.4 4.1 525
    L13/4 × 13/4 × 3/16 2.12 0.621 L44 × 44 × 4.8 3.1 401
    L13/4 × 13/4 × 1/8 1.44 0.422 L44 × 44 × 3.2 2.1 272
    L11/2 × 11/2 × 1/4 2.34 0.688 L38 × 38 × 6.4 3.4 444
    L11/2 × 11/2 × 3/16 1.80 0.527 L38 × 38 × 4.8 2.7 340
    L11/2 × 11/2 × 5/32 1.52 0.444 L38 × 38 × 4.0 2.2 286
    L11/2 × 11/2 × 1/8 1.23 0.359 L38 × 38 × 3.2 1.8 232
    L11/4 × 11/4 × 1/4 1.92 0.563 L32 × 32 × 6.4 2.8 363
    L11/4 × 11/4 × 3/16 1.48 0.434 L32 × 32 × 4.8 2.2 280
    L11/4 × 11/4 × 1/8 1.01 0.297 L32 × 32 × 3.2 1.5 192
    L1 × 1 × 1/4 1.49 0.438 L25 × 25 × 6.4 2.2 283
    L1 × 1 × 3/16 1.16 0.340 L25 × 25 × 4.8 1.8 219
    L1 × 1 × 1/8 0.80 0.234 L25 × 25 × 3.2 1.2 151
    L3/4 × 3/4 × 1/8 0.59 0.172 L19 × 19 × 3.2 0.9 111
    A The heel of 12 and 10-in. angles may have a rounded outside corner.
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    60
    TABLE A2.8 “L” Shapes (Unequal Legs)
    Size and Thickness, in.
    Weight per
    Foot, lb
    Area, in.2 Size and Thickness, mm
    Mass per
    Metre, kg
    Area, mm2
    L8 × 6 × 1 44.2 13.0 L203 × 152 × 25.4 65.5 8 390
    L8 × 6 × 7/8 39.1 11.5 L203 × 152 × 22.2 57.9 7 420
    L8 × 6 × 3/4 33.8 9.94 L203 × 152 × 19.0 50.1 6 410
    L8 × 6 × 5/8 28.5 8.36 L203 × 152 × 15.9 42.2 5 390
    L8 × 6 × 9/16 25.7 7.56 L203 × 152 × 14.3 38.1 4 880
    L8 × 6 × 1/2 23.0 6.75 L203 × 152 × 12.7 34.1 4 350
    L8 × 6 × 7/16 20.2 5.93 L203 × 152 × 11.1 29.9 3 830
    L8 × 4 × 1 37.4 11.0 L203 × 102 × 25.4 55.4 7 100
    L8 × 4 × 7/8 33.1 9.73 L203 × 102 × 22.2 49.3 6 280
    L8 × 4 × 3/4 28.7 8.44 L203 × 102 × 19.0 42.5 5 450
    L8 × 4 × 5/8 24.2 7.11 L203 × 102 × 15.9 36.0 4 590
    L8 × 4 × 9/16 21.9 6.43 L203 × 102 × 14.3 32.4 4 150
    L8 × 4 × 1/2 19.6 5.75 L203 × 102 × 12.7 29.0 3 710
    L8 × 4 × 7/16 17.2 5.06 L203 × 102 × 11.1 25.6 3 260
    L7 × 4 × 3/4 26.2 7.69 L178 × 102 × 19.0 38.8 4 960
    L7 × 4 × 5/8 22.1 6.48 L178 × 102 × 15.9 32.7 4 180
    L7 × 4 × 1/2 17.9 5.25 L178 × 102 × 12.7 26.5 3 390
    L7 × 4 × 7/16 15.7 4.62 L178 × 102 × 11.1 23.4 2 980
    L7 × 4 × 3/8 13.6 3.98 L178 × 102 × 9.5 20.2 2 570
    L6 × 4 × 7/8 27.2 7.98 L152 × 102 × 22.2 40.3 5 150
    L6 × 4 × 3/4 23.6 6.94 L152 × 102 × 19.0 35.0 4 480
    L6 × 4 × 5/8 20.0 5.86 L152 × 102 × 15.9 29.6 3 780
    L6 × 4 × 9/16 18.1 5.31 L152 × 102 × 14.3 26.8 3 430
    L6 × 4 × 1/2 16.2 4.75 L152 × 102 × 12.7 24.0 3 060
    L6 × 4 × 7/16 14.3 4.18 L152 × 102 × 11.1 21.2 2 700
    L6 × 4 × 3/8 12.3 3.61 L152 × 102 × 9.5 18.2 2 330
    L6 × 4 × 5/16 10.3 3.03 L152 × 102 × 7.9 15.3 1 950
    L6 × 31/2 × 1/2 15.3 4.50 L152 × 89 × 12.7 22.7 2 900
    L6 × 31/2 × 3/8 11.7 3.42 L152 × 89 × 9.5 17.3 2 210
    L6 × 31/2 × 5/16 9.80 2.87 L152 × 89 × 7.9 14.5 1 850
    L5 × 31/2 × 3/4 19.8 5.81 L127 × 89 × 19.0 29.3 3 750
    L5 × 31/2 × 5/8 16.8 4.92 L127 × 89 × 15.9 24.9 3 170
    L5 × 31/2 × 1/2 13.6 4.00 L127 × 89 × 12.7 20.2 2 580
    L5 × 31/2 × 3/8 10.4 3.05 L127 × 89 × 9.5 15.4 1 970
    L5 × 31/2 × 5/16 8.70 2.56 L127 × 89 × 7.9 12.9 1 650
    L5 × 31/2 × 1/4 7.00 2.06 L127 × 89 × 6.4 10.4 1 330
    L5 × 3 × 1/2 12.8 3.75 L127 × 76 × 12.7 19.0 2 420
    L5 × 3 × 7/16 11.3 3.31 L127 × 76 × 11.1 16.7 2 140
    L5 × 3 × 3/8 9.80 2.86 L127 × 76 × 9.5 14.5 1 850
    L5 × 3 × 5/16 8.20 2.40 L127 × 76 × 7.9 12.1 1 550
    L5 × 3 × 1/4 6.60 1.94 L127 × 76 × 6.4 9.8 1 250
    L4 × 31/2 × 1/2 11.9 3.50 L102 × 89 × 12.7 17.6 2 260
    L4 × 31/2 × 3/8 9.10 2.67 L102 × 89 × 9.5 13.5 1 720
    L4 × 31/2 × 5/16 7.70 2.25 L102 × 89 × 7.9 11.4 1 450
    L4 × 31/2 × 1/4 6.20 1.81 L102 × 89 × 6.4 9.2 1 170
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    61
    TABLE A2.8 Continued
    Size and Thickness, in.
    Weight per
    Foot, lb
    Area, in.2 Size and Thickness, mm
    Mass per
    Metre, kg
    Area, mm2
    L4 × 3 × 5/8 13.6 3.98 L102 × 76 × 15.9 20.2 2 570
    L4 × 3 × 1/2 11.1 3.25 L102 × 76 × 12.7 16.4 2 100
    L4 × 3 × 3/8 8.50 2.48 L102 × 76 × 9.5 12.6 1 600
    L4 × 3 × 5/16 7.20 2.09 L102 × 76 × 7.9 10.7 1 350
    L4 × 3 × 1/4 5.80 1.69 L102 × 76 × 6.4 8.6 1 090
    L31/2 × 3 × 1/2 10.2 3.00 L89 × 76 × 12.7 15.1 1 940
    L31/2 × 3 × 7/16 9.10 2.65 L89 × 76 × 11.1 13.5 1 710
    L31/2 × 3 × 3/8 7.90 2.30 L89 × 76 × 9.5 11.7 1 480
    L31/2 × 3 × 5/16 6.60 1.93 L89 × 76 × 7.9 9.8 1 250
    L31/2 × 3 × 1/4 5.40 1.56 L89 × 76 × 6.4 8.0 1 010
    L31/2 × 21/2 × 1/2 9.40 2.75 L89 × 64 × 12.7 13.9 1 770
    L31/2 × 21/2 × 3/8 7.20 2.11 L89 × 64 × 9.5 10.7 1 360
    L31/2 × 21/2 × 5/16 6.10 1.78 L89 × 64 × 7.9 9.0 1 150
    L31/2 × 21/2 × 1/4 4.90 1.44 L89 × 64 × 6.4 7.3 929
    L3 × 21/2 × 1/2 8.50 2.50 L76 × 64 × 12.7 12.6 1 610
    L3 × 21/2 × 7/16 7.60 2.21 L76 × 64 × 11.1 11.3 1 430
    L3 × 21/2 × 3/8 6.60 1.92 L76 × 64 × 9.5 9.8 1 240
    L3 × 21/2 × 5/16 5.60 1.62 L76 × 64 × 7.9 8.3 1 050
    L3 × 21/2 × 1/4 4.50 1.31 L76 × 64 × 6.4 6.7 845
    L3 × 21/2 × 3/16 3.39 0.996 L76 × 64 × 4.8 5.1 643
    L3 × 2 × 1/2 7.70 2.25 L76 × 51 × 12.7 11.5 1 450
    L3 × 2 × 3/8 5.90 1.73 L76 × 51 × 9.5 8.8 1 120
    L3 × 2 × 5/16 5.00 1.46 L76 × 51 × 7.9 7.4 942
    L3 × 2 × 1/4 4.10 1.19 L76 × 51 × 6.4 6.1 768
    L3 × 2 × 3/16 3.07 0.902 L76 × 51 × 4.8 4.6 582
    L21/2 × 2 × 3/8 5.30 1.55 L64 × 51 × 9.5 7.9 1 000
    L21/2 × 2 × 5/16 4.50 1.31 L64 × 51 × 7.9 6.7 845
    L21/2 × 2 × 1/4 3.62 1.06 L64 × 51 × 6.4 5.4 684
    L21/2 × 2 × 3/16 2.75 0.809 L64 × 51 × 4.8 4.2 522
    L21/2 × 11/2 × 1/4 3.19 0.938 L64 × 38 × 6.4 4.8 605
    L21/2 × 11/2 × 3/16 2.44 0.715 L64 × 38 × 4.8 3.6 461
    L2 × 11/2 × 1/4 2.77 0.813 L51 × 38 × 6.4 4.2 525
    L2 × 11/2 × 3/16 2.12 0.621 L51 × 38 × 4.8 3.1 401
    L2 × 11/2 × 1/8 1.44 0.422 L51 × 38 × 3.2 2.1 272
    APPENDIXES
    (Nonmandatory Information)
    X1. COIL AS A SOURCE OF STRUCTURAL PRODUCTS
    X1.1 Continuous wide hot strip rolling mills are normally
    equipped with coilers. Regardless of the different types of
    systems employed during or following the rolling operations, it
    is common for the steel to be reeled into the coiler at
    temperatures in the stress-relieving range. In general, such
    temperatures are higher as the steel thickness increases. The
    coils subsequently cool to ambient temperature with outer and
    inner laps cooling more rapidly than central laps. The difference
    in cooling rate can result in measurable differences in the
    mechanical properties throughout a coil. Data confirm reduced
    yield and tensile strength with increased percent elongation for
    the steel with slower cooling rates from the coiling temperature
    to ambient. Such differences are in addition to the effects on
    mechanical properties caused by differences in heat analysis
    and chemical segregation.
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    62
    X2. VARIATION OF TENSILE PROPERTIES IN PLATES AND SHAPES
    X2.1 The tension testing requirements of this specification
    are intended only to characterize the tensile properties of a heat
    of steel for determination of conformance to the requirements
    of the applicable product specification. Such testing procedures
    are not intended to define the upper or lower limits of tensile
    properties at all possible test locations within a heat of steel. It
    is well known and documented that tensile properties will vary
    within a heat or individual piece of steel as a function of
    chemical composition, processing, testing procedure and other
    factors. It is, therefore, incumbent on designers and engineers
    to use sound engineering judgement when using tension test
    results shown on mill test reports. The testing procedures of
    this specification have been found to provide structural products
    adequate for normal structural design criteria.
    X2.2 A survey of the variation to be expected in tensile
    properties obtained from plates and structural shapes was
    conducted by the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
    The results of this survey are contained in a Contributions to
    the Metallurgy of Steel entitled “The Variation of Product
    Analysis and Tensile Properties—Carbon Steel Plates and
    Wide Flange Shapes” (SU/18, SU/19 and SU/20), published in
    September 1974. The data are presented in tables of probability
    that tensile properties at other than the official location may
    differ from those of the reported test location. Another survey
    sponsored by the AISI entitled “Statistical Analysis of Structural
    Plate Mechanical Properties” was published in January
21. That survey analyzed the results of variability testing on
    more modern as-rolled steels that were generally of higher
    minimum yield strength steels and also compared those results
    statistically to the previous surveys.
    X2.3 This specification contains no requirements applicable
    to product tension tests; conformance to the applicable product
    specification is determined on the basis of tests performed at
    the place of manufacture or processing prior to shipment,
    unless otherwise specified.
    X2.4 A task group of ASTM Subcommittee A01.02 has
    determined, based on review of the earlier AISI data, that the
    variation in tensile properties of plates and structural shapes
    can be expressed as a function of specified requirements: one
    standard deviation equals approximately 4 % of required tensile
    strength, 8 % of required yield strength, and 3 percentage
    points of required elongation. The January 2003 survey resulted
    in similar findings.
    X2.5 Acceptance criteria for product testing based upon
    these values, either below the minimum or above the maximum
    allowed by the applicable product specification, are generally
    acceptable to manufacturers. Such tolerances could be considered
    by users of structural products as a reasonable basis for
    acceptance of structural products that, due to their inherent
    variability, deviate from the applicable product specification
    requirements when subjected to product tension testing.
    X3. WELDABILITY OF STEEL
    X3.1 Weldability is a term that usually refers to the relative
    ease with which a metal can be welded using conventional
    practice. Difficulties arise in steel when the cooling rates
    associated with weld thermal cycles produce microstructures
    (for example, martensite) that are susceptible to brittle fracture
    or, more commonly, hydrogen-induced (or cold) cracking.
    (Solidification or hot cracking is a relatively rare phenomenon
    that will not be addressed here. See Randall for further
    information.)
    X3.2 The relative sensitivity of steels to forming cold
    cracking microstructures is called hardenability and can be
    measured in a number of ways. Perhaps the most popular
    method of assessing this is by the carbon equivalent (CE)
    formula, which attempts to equate the relative hardening
    contributions of a steel’s constituent elements (for example,
    manganese, vanadium) to an equivalent amount of carbon,
    which is the most significant hardening agent. The most
    popular formula is the International Institute of Welding (IIW)
    equation presented in S31.2, which has been found suitable for
    predicting hardenability in a wide range of commonly used
    carbon-manganese and low alloy steels.
    X3.3 It should be noted, however, that for the current
    generation of low carbon (<0.10 %) low alloy steels that derive
    strength from a combination of microalloys and thermal
    processing methods the use of other formulae may more
    accurately assess hardenability and cold cracking sensitivity.13
    X3.4 For a vast number of common structural applications it
    is unnecessary to specify the use of CE limits. However, in
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-6/SA-6M
    63
    order to obtain a higher level of confidence in avoiding cold
    cracking, the chemistry controls in S31 are available. A
    purchaser who specifies the use of S31 should be aware that
    there are several factors involved in the judicious selection of
    a maximum CE value, such as the following:
    X3.4.1 Actual production joint restraint/base metal
    thickness(es),
    X3.4.2 Filler metal and base metal strength compatibility,
    X3.4.3 Deposited weld metal diffusible hydrogen content,
    X3.4.4 Preheat and interpass temperatures,
    X3.4.5 Filler metal and base metal cleanliness, and
    X3.4.6 Heat input.
    X3.5 Though it is widely believed that low CE steels are
    immune to weld cracking problems, failure to consider these
    factors and others have resulted in weld or base metal HAZ
    (heat affected zone) cracks in such steels.
    X3.6 It is important to note that carbon equivalence is only
    a qualitative assessment of potential welding problems, and
    should never be solely relied on to ensure weld integrity. The
    proper use of welding specifications, coupled with the knowledge
    of actual construction conditions, must also be used.
    X4. RADIUS FOR COLD BENDING
    X4.1 Suggested minimum inside bend radii for cold forming
    are referenced to Group Designations A to F inclusive as
    defined in Table X4.1. The suggested radii listed in Table X4.2
    should be used as minimums in typical shop fabrication.
    Material that does not form satisfactorily when fabricated in
    accordance with Table X4.2 may be subject to rejection
    pending negotiation with the steel supplier. When tighter bends
    are required, the manufacturer should be consulted.
    X4.2 The bend radius and the radius of the male die should
    be as liberal as the finished part will permit. The width across
    the shoulders of the female die should be at least eight times
    the plate thickness. Higher strength steels require larger die
    openings. The surface of the dies in the area of radius should
    be smooth.
    X4.2.1 Since cracks in cold bending commonly originate
    from the outside edges, shear burrs and gas cut edges should be
    removed by grinding. Sharp corners on edges and on punched
    or gas cut holes should be removed by chamfering or grinding
    to a radius.
    X4.2.2 If possible, parts should be formed such that the
    bend line is perpendicular to the direction of final rolling. If it
    is necessary to bend with the bend line parallel to the direction
    of final rolling, a more generous radius is suggested (11/2 times
    applicable value given in Table X4.2 for bend lines perpendicular
    to the direction of rolling).
    X4.3 References
    X4.3.1 Holt, G.E., et al., “Minimum Cold Bend Radii
    Project—Final Report,” Concurrent Technologies Corporation,
    January 27, 1997.
    X4.3.2 Brockenbrough, R.L., “Fabrication Guidelines for
    Cold Bending,” R.L. Brockenbrough & Associates, June 28,
    1998.
    TABLE X4.1 Group Designations for Cold Bending
    Specification Grade
    Group
    DesignationA
    A36/A36M B B
    A131/A131M A, B, D, CS and E B
    A, B, D, CS and E (all cold flanging) B
    AH32, DH32, EH32 and FH32 C
    AH36, DH36, EH36 and FH36 C
    AH40, DH40, EH40 and FH40 C
    A242/A242M B C
    A283/A283M A or B A
    C or D B
    A514/A514M any F
    A529/A529M 50 [345] or 55 [380] C
    A572/A572M 42 [290] B
    50 [345] C
    55 [380] D
    60 [415] or 65 [450] E
    A573/A573M 58 [400] or 65 [450] B
    70 [485] C
    A588/A588M any C
    A633/A633M any B
    A656/A656M 50 [345] B
    60 [415] D
    70 [485] E
    80 [550] or 100 [690] F
    A678/A678M A or B C
    C or D D
    A709/A709M 36 [250] B
    50 [345], 50W [345W] or HPS 50W
    [HPS 345W]
    C
    HPS 70W [HPS 485W] D
    HPS 100W [HPS 690W] F
    A710/A710M A F
    A808/A808M B C
    A852/A852M B D
    A871/A871M 60 [415] or 65 [450] E
    A945/A945M 50 [345] or 65 [450] B
    A Steels having a ratio of specified minimum tensile strength to specified minimum
    yield strength of 1.15 or less are in Group F; other steels are in Groups A to E
    inclusive, which are grouped on the basis of their having similar specified values
    for minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm].
    B Grade designations are not applicable for this specification.
    SA-6/SA-6M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    64
    TABLE X4.2 Suggested Minimum Inside Radii for Cold BendingA
    Group
    DesignationB
    Thickness (t), in. [mm]
    Up to 3/4 in.
    [20 mm]
    Over 3/4 in. [20
    mm] To 1 [25
    mm, incl]
    Over 1 in. [25
    mm] To 2 in. [50
    mm], incl
    Over 2 in. [50
    mm]
    A 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t
    B 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 2.0t
    C 1.5t 1.5t 2.0t 2.5t
    D 1.5t 1.5t 2.5t 3.0t
    E 1.5t 1.5t 3.0t 3.5t
    F 1.75t 2.25t 4.5t 5.5t
    A Values are for bend lines perpendicular to the direction of final rolling. These radii
    apply when the precautions listed in X4.2 are followed. If bend lines are parallel to
    the direction of final rolling, multiply values by 1.5.
    B Steel specifications included in the group designations may not include the entire
    thickness range shown in this table.
    ð19Þ
    SPECIFICATION FOR GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
    STEEL PLATES FOR PRESSURE VESSELS
    SA-20/SA-20M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A20/A20M-18.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    65
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    66
    Standard Specification for
    General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels
22. Scope
    1.1 This general requirements specification covers a group
    of common requirements that, unless otherwise specified in the
    applicable product specification, apply to rolled steel plates for
    pressure vessels covered by each of the following product
    specifications issued by ASTM:
    Title of Specification ASTM DesignationA
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel A203/A203M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum A204/A204M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-
    Vanadium-Nickel
    A225/A225M
    Stainless Chromium Steel-Clad Plate A263
    Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel-Clad Plate A264
    Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy-Clad Steel Plate A265
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and
    Intermediate-Tensile Strength
    A285/A285M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon A299/A299M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-
    Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel
    A302/A302M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Double-
    Normalized and Tempered 9 % Nickel
    A353/A353M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-
    Molybdenum
    A387/A387M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High Strength
    Manganese
    A455/A455M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediateand
    Higher-Temperature Service
    A515/A515M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Moderate- and
    Lower-Temperature Service
    A516/A516M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, High-Strength,
    Quenched and Tempered
    A517/A517M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and
    Tempered, Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-
    Molybdenum-Nickel
    A533/A533M
    Title of Specification ASTM DesignationA
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-
    Manganese-Silicon Steel
    A537/A537M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched-and-
    Tempered, Chromium-Molybdenum, and Chromium-
    Molybdenum-Vanadium
    A542/A542M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and
    Tempered Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum
    A543/A543M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and
    Tempered 7, 8, and 9 % Nickel
    A553/A553M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-
    Titanium for Glass or Diffused Metallic Coatings
    A562/A562M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High Strength, for
    Moderate and Lower Temperature Service
    A612/A612M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, 5 % and 51/2 % Nickel Alloy
    Steels, Specially Heat Treated
    A645/A645M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon
    Steel, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service
    A662/A662M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon
    Steel, Quenched and Tempered, for Welded Pressure
    Vessels
    A724/A724M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Age-Hardening
    Nickel-Copper-Chromium-Molybdenum-Columbium
    (Niobium) Alloy Steel
    A736/A736M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel A737/A737M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-
    Manganese-Silicon Steel, for Moderate and Lower
    Temperature Service
    A738/A738M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-
    Molybdenum-Vanadium
    A832/A832M
    Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels, Produced by
    Thermo-Mechanical Control Process (TMCP)
    A841/A841M
    Steel Plates, 9 % Nickel Alloy, for Pressure Vessels,
    Produced by the Direct-Quenching Process
    A844/A844M
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-
    Molybdenum-Tungsten
    A1017/A1017M
    A These designations refer to the latest issue of the respective specification which
    appears in the Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.04.
    1.1.1 This general requirements specification also covers a
    group of supplementary requirements that are applicable to
    several of the above product specifications as indicated therein.
    Such requirements are provided for use if additional testing or
    additional restrictions are required by the purchaser, and apply
    only if specified individually in the purchase order.
    1.2 Appendix X1 provides information on coil as a source
    of plates for pressure vessels.
    1.3 Appendix X2 provides information on the variability of
    tensile properties in plates for pressure vessels.
    1.4 Appendix X3 provides information on the variability of
    Charpy-V-Notch impact test properties in plates for pressure
    vessels.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    67
    1.5 Appendix X4 provides information on cold bending of
    plates, including suggested minimum inside radii for cold
    bending.
    1.6 These materials are intended to be suitable for fusion
    welding. When the steel is to be welded, it is presupposed that
    a welding procedure suitable for the grade of steel and intended
    use or service will be utilized.
    1.7 In case of any conflict in requirements, the requirements
    of the applicable product specification prevail over those of this
    general requirements specification.
    1.8 Additional requirements that are specified in the purchase
    order and accepted by the supplier are permitted,
    provided that such requirements do not negate any of the
    requirements of this general requirements specification or the
    applicable product specification.
    1.9 For purposes of determining conformance with this
    general requirements specification and the applicable product
    specification, values are to be rounded to the nearest unit in the
    right-hand place of figures used in expressing the limiting
    values in accordance with the rounding method of Practice
    E29.
    1.10 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
    each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
    system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
    values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
    with the standard.
    1.11 This general requirements specification and the applicable
    product specification are expressed in both inch-pound
    units and SI units; unless the order specifies the applicable “M”
    specification designation (SI units), the plates are to be
    furnished to inch-pound units.
    1.12 This international standard was developed in accordance
    with internationally recognized principles on standardization
    established in the Decision on Principles for the
    Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
    issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
    Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
23. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A203/A203M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy
    Steel, Nickel
    A204/A204M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy
    Steel, Molybdenum
    A225/A225M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy
    Steel, Manganese-Vanadium-Nickel
    A263 Specification for Stainless Chromium Steel-Clad Plate
    A264 Specification for Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel-
    Clad Plate
    A265 Specification for Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy-Clad
    Steel Plate
    A285/A285M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
    Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile Strength
    A299/A299M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
    Steel, Manganese-Silicon
    A302/A302M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy
    Steel, Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-
    Molybdenum-Nickel
    A353/A353M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy
    Steel, Double-Normalized and Tempered 9 % Nickel
    A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    A387/A387M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy
    Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum
    A435/A435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
    Examination of Steel Plates
    A455/A455M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
    Steel, High-Strength Manganese
    A515/A515M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
    Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service
    A516/A516M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
    Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service
    A517/A517M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy
    Steel, High-Strength, Quenched and Tempered
    A533/A533M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy
    Steel, Quenched and Tempered, Manganese-Molybdenum
    and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel
    A537/A537M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-
    Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel
    A542/A542M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy
    Steel, Quenched-and-Tempered, Chromium-
    Molybdenum, and Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium
    A543/A543M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy
    Steel, Quenched and Tempered Nickel-Chromium-
    Molybdenum
    A553/A553M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy
    Steel, Quenched and Tempered 7, 8, and 9 % Nickel
    A562/A562M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
    Steel, Manganese-Titanium for Glass or Diffused
    Metallic Coatings
    A577/A577M Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination
    of Steel Plates
    A578/A578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
    Examination of Rolled Steel Plates for Special Applications
    A612/A612M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
    Steel, High Strength, for Moderate and Lower Temperature
    Service
    A645/A645M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, 5 %
    and 51/2 % Nickel Alloy Steels, Specially Heat Treated
    A662/A662M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
    Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, for Moderate and
    Lower Temperature Service
    A700 Guide for Packaging, Marking, and Loading Methods
    for Steel Products for Shipment
    A724/A724M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
    Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, Quenched and
    Tempered, for Welded Pressure Vessels
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    68
    A736/A736M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-
    Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-Copper-Chromium-
    Molybdenum-Columbium (Niobium) Alloy Steel
    A737/A737M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, High-
    Strength, Low-Alloy Steel
    A738/A738M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-
    Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, for Moderate
    and Lower Temperature Service
    A751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical
    Analysis of Steel Products
    A770/A770M Specification for Through-Thickness Tension
    Testing of Steel Plates for Special Applications
    A832/A832M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy
    Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium
    A841/A841M Specification for Steel Plates for Pressure
    Vessels, Produced by Thermo-Mechanical Control Process
    (TMCP)
    A844/A844M Specification for Steel Plates, 9 % Nickel
    Alloy, for Pressure Vessels, Produced by the Direct-
    Quenching Process
    A941 Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related
    Alloys, and Ferroalloys
    A1017/A1017M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
    Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten
    E21 Test Methods for Elevated Temperature Tension Tests of
    Metallic Materials
    E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
    Determine Conformance with Specifications
    E112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
    E208 Test Method for Conducting Drop-Weight Test to
    Determine Nil-Ductility Transition Temperature of Ferritic
    Steels
    E709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing
    2.2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers Code:
    ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX
    2.3 U.S. Federal Standard:
    Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
    2.4 Automotive Industry Action Group Standard:
    B 1 Bar Code Symbology Standard
24. Terminology
    3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
    3.1.1 as-rolled—for plates, the condition of a plate that has
    been hot-rolled and will not be or has not yet been heat treated.
    3.1.1.1 Discussion—The term as-rolled by itself is not
    meant to refer to plates that have been hot-rolled using controlrolling
    (CR), direct quench (DQT), thermo-mechanical control
    rolling (TMCP), recrystalization control rolling (RCR), or any
    similar methods that are intended to produce a set of properties
    that are not normally achievable were they not employed. The
    term as-rolled is to be distinguished from the established term
    plate-as-rolled that does not define the actual condition of a
    plate, but defines the singular product of a slab or ingot that has
    been hot-rolled
    3.1.2 coil—hot-rolled steel in coil form for processing into
    finished plates.
    3.1.3 exclusive—when used in relation to ranges, as for
    ranges of thicknesses in the tables of permissible variations in
    dimensions, the term is intended to exclude only the greater
    value of the range. Thus, a range from 60 to 72 in. [1500 to
    1800 mm] exclusive includes 60 in. [1500 mm], but does not
    include 72 in. [1800 mm].
    3.1.4 heat treatment terms—see 3.1.10, and Terminology
    A941.
    3.1.5 hot forming—a forming operation producing permanent
    deformation, performed after the plate has been heated to
    the temperature required to produce grain refinement.
    3.1.6 hot-rolled (hot rolling)—for plates, the process described
    for a plate that has been rolled from a slab or ingot
    whose starting temperature is suitably above the recrystallization
    temperature of the metal to be rolled.
    3.1.6.1 Discussion—Hot-rolled may be used in conjunction
    with any rolling process to more effectively describe a specific
    condition, for example; hot-rolled as-rolled; hot-rolled controlrolled,
    etc.
    3.1.7 manufacturer—the organization that directly controls
    the conversion of steel ingots or slabs, by hot rolling, into
    plate-as-rolled or into coil; and for plates produced from
    plate-as-rolled, the organization that directly controls, or is
    responsible for, one or more of the operations involved in
    finishing the plates. Such finishing operations include leveling,
    cutting to length, testing, inspection, conditioning, heat treatment
    (if applicable), packaging, marking, loading for shipment,
    and certification.
    3.1.7.1 Discussion—The finishing operations need not be
    done by the organization that did the hot rolling of the plate.
    For plates produced from coil, see also 3.1.2.
    3.1.8 plate identifier—the alpha, numeric, or alphanumeric
    designation used to identify the plate.
    3.1.9 plates—flat hot-rolled steel, ordered to thickness or
    weight and typically to width and length, commonly available
    by size as follows:
    Width, in. [mm] Thickness, in. [mm]
    Over 8 [200] over 0.229 [6.0 mm and over]
    Over 48 [1200] over 0.179 [4.6 mm and over]
    3.1.9.1 Discussion—Steel plates are available in various
    thickness, width, and length combinations dependent upon
    equipment and processing capabilities of various manufacturers
    and processors. Historic limitations of a plate based upon
    dimensions (thickness, width, and length) do not take into
    account current production and processing capabilities. To
    qualify any plate to a particular product specification requires
    that all appropriate and necessary tests be performed and that
    the results meet the limits prescribed in that product specification.
    If the necessary tests required by a product specification
    can not be conducted, the plate can not be qualified to that
    specification. This general requirements specification contains
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    69
    permitted variations for the commonly available sizes. Permitted
    variations for other sizes are subject to agreement between
    the purchaser and the manufacturer or processor, whichever is
    applicable.
    3.1.10 precipitation heat treatment—a subcritical temperature
    thermal treatment performed to cause precipitation of
    submicroscopic constituents, and so forth, to result in enhancement
    of some desirable property.
    3.1.11 processor—the organization that directly controls, or
    is responsible for, operations involved in the processing of coil
    into finished plates. Such processing operations include
    decoiling, leveling, cutting to length, testing, inspection,
    conditioning, heat treatment (if applicable), packaging,
    marking, loading for shipment, and certification.
    3.1.11.1 Discussion—The processing operations need not be
    done by the organization that did the hot rolling of the coil. If
    only one organization is involved in the hot rolling and
    processing operations, that organization is termed the manufacturer
    for the hot rolling operation and the processor for the
    processing operations. If more than one organization is involved
    in the hot rolling and processing operations, the
    organization that did the hot rolling is termed the manufacturer
    and the organization that does one or more processing operations
    is termed a processor.
    3.2 Refer to Terminology A941 for additional terms used in
    this standard.
25. Ordering Information
    4.1 Orders should include the following information, as
    necessary, to adequately describe the desired product.
    4.1.1 Quantity (weight [mass] or number of plates),
    4.1.2 Dimensions,
    4.1.3 Name of product (for example, plates, carbon steel;
    plates, alloy steel),
    4.1.4 Specification designation (including type, class, and
    grade as applicable) and year-date,
    4.1.5 Condition (as-rolled, normalized, quenched and
    tempered, etc. If heat treatment of plate is to be performed by
    the fabricator, this is to be stated. Also, if purchaser specifies a
    heat-treatment cycle, this is to be stated),
    4.1.6 Impact test requirements, if any (see Section 12). (For
    Charpy V-notch test, include test specimen orientation, testing
    temperature, and acceptance criteria. For drop-weight test, give
    testing temperature),
    4.1.7 Exclusion of either plates produced from coil or plates
    produced from plate-as-rolled, if applicable. (See 5.4 and
    Appendix X1.)
    4.1.8 Limits for grain refining elements other than
    aluminum, if applicable (see 8.3.2),
    4.1.9 Paint marking (see 13.2.1),
    4.1.10 Supplementary requirements, if any (test specimen
    heat treatment, special impact test requirements, etc.), and
    4.1.11 Additional requirements, if any.
26. Materials and Manufacture
    5.1 The steel shall be made in an open-hearth, basic-oxygen,
    or electric-arc furnace, possibly followed by additional refining
    in a ladle metallurgy furnace (LMF), or by another method; or
    secondary melting by vacuum-arc remelting (VAR), electroslag
    remelting (ESR), or another method.
    5.2 The steel may be strand cast or cast in stationary molds.
    5.2.1 Strand Cast Slabs:
    5.2.1.1 If heats of the same nominal chemical composition
    are consecutively strand cast at one time, the heat number
    assigned to the cast product (slab) may remain unchanged until
    all of the steel in the slab is from the following heat.
    5.2.1.2 When two consecutively strand cast heats have
    different nominal chemical composition ranges, the manufacturer
    shall remove the transition material by any established
    procedure that positively separates the grades.
    5.3 The ratio of reduction of thickness from a strand-cast
    slab to plate shall be at least 3.0:1, except that reduction ratios
    as low as 2.0:1 are permitted if all of the following limitations
    are met:
    5.3.1 The purchaser agrees to the use of such reduction
    ratios.
    5.3.2 The applicable product specification is A299/A299M,
    A515/A515M, A516/A516M, A537/A537M, A662/A662M, or
    A737/A737M.
    5.3.3 The specified plate thickness is 3.0 in. [75 mm] or
    more.
    5.3.4 One or more of the following low hydrogen practices
    are used: vacuum degassing during steelmaking; controlled
    soaking of the slabs or plates; or controlled slow cooling of the
    slabs or plates.
    5.3.5 The sulfur content is 0.004 % or less, based upon heat
    analysis.
    5.3.6 One or more of the following practices are used:
    electromagnetic stirring during strand casting; soft reduction
    during strand casting; heavy pass reductions or other special
    practices during plate rolling; or combined forging and rolling
    during plate rolling.
    5.3.7 The plates are ultrasonically examined in accordance
    with Specification A578/A578M, Level C based on continuous
    scanning over 100 % of the plate surface.
    5.3.8 The plates are through-thickness tension tested in
    accordance with Specification A770/A770M.
    5.4 Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, plates
    shall be produced from plate-as-rolled or from coil.
    5.5 Coils are excluded from qualification to the applicable
    product specification until they are decoiled, leveled, cut to
    length, and tested by the processor in accordance with the
    specified requirements (see Sections 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
    16, and 20.)
    5.5.1 Plates produced from coil shall not contain splice
    welds, unless approved by the purchaser.
27. Heat Treatment
    6.1 If plates are required to be heat treated, the heat
    treatment shall be performed by the manufacturer, the
    processor, or the fabricator, unless otherwise specified in the
    applicable product specification.
    6.2 If the heat treatment required by the applicable product
    specification is to be performed by the purchaser or the
    purchaser’s agent, and the plates are to be supplied by the
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    70
    manufacturer or processor in a condition other than that
    required by the applicable product specification, the order shall
    so state.
    6.2.1 If plates are ordered without the heat treatment required
    by the applicable product specification, heat treatment
    of the plates to conform to the requirements of the applicable
    product specification shall be the responsibility of the purchaser.
    6.3 If heat treatment is to be performed, the plates shall be
    heat treated as specified in the applicable product specification.
    The purchaser may specify the heat treatment to be used,
    provided it is not in conflict with the requirements of the
    applicable product specification.
    6.4 If normalizing is to be performed by the fabricator, the
    plates shall be either normalized or heated uniformly for hot
    forming, provided that the temperature to which the plates are
    heated for hot forming does not significantly exceed the
    normalizing temperature.
    6.5 If no heat treatment is required, the manufacturer or
    processor shall have the option of heat treating the plates by
    normalizing, stress relieving, or normalizing and then stress
    relieving to meet the requirements of the applicable product
    specification.
    6.6 If approved by the purchaser, cooling rates faster than
    those obtained by cooling in air are permissible to achieve
    specified mechanical properties, provided that the plates are
    subsequently tempered in the temperature range from 1100 to
    1300°F [595 to 705°C].
28. Chemical Composition
    7.1 Heat Analysis:
    7.1.1 Sampling for chemical analysis and methods of analysis
    shall be in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and
    Terminology A751.
    7.1.2 For each heat, the heat analysis shall include determination
    of the content of carbon, manganese, phosphorus, sulfur,
    silicon, nickel, chromium, molybdenum, copper, vanadium,
    columbium (niobium); any other element that is specified or
    restricted by the applicable product specification for the
    applicable grade, class, and type; aluminum, if the aluminum
    content is to be used in place of austenitic grain size testing of
    the heat (see 8.3.2.1); and any other austenitic grain refining
    element for which limits are specified in the purchase order
    (see 8.3.2).
    7.1.3 Heat analyses shall conform to the heat analysis
    requirements of the applicable product specification for the
    applicable grade, class, and type. In addition, for elements that
    are listed in Table 1 but are not specified or restricted in the
    applicable product specification for the applicable grade, class,
    and type, heat analyses shall conform to the applicable heat
    analysis limits given in Table 1.
    7.2 Product Analysis:
    7.2.1 Sampling for chemical analysis and methods of analysis
    shall be in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and
    Terminology A751.
    7.2.2 For each plate-as-rolled, the purchaser shall have the
    option of chemically analyzing a broken tension test specimen
    or a sample taken from the same relative location as that from
    which the tension test specimen was obtained.
    7.2.3 For elements that are specified or restricted by the
    applicable product specification for the applicable grade, class,
    and type, product analyses shall conform to the product
    analysis requirements of the applicable product specification
    for the applicable grade, class, and type.
    7.2.4 For elements that are listed in Table 1 but are not
    specified or restricted by the applicable product specification
    for the applicable grade, class, and type, product analyses shall
    conform to the applicable product analysis limits given in
    Table 1.
    7.3 Referee Analysis—For referee purposes, Test Methods,
    Practices, and Terminology A751 shall be used.
29. Metallurgical Structure
    8.1 Where austenitic grain size testing is required, such
    testing shall be a McQuaid Ehn test in accordance with Test
    Methods E112 and at least 70 % of the grains in the area
    examined shall meet the specified grain size requirement.
    TABLE 1 Limits on Elements (see 7.1.3 and 7.2.4)
    Copper, max %A Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.40
    0.43
    Nickel, max %A Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.40
    0.43
    Chromium, max %A,B Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.30
    0.34
    Molybdenum, max %A,B Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.12
    0.13
    Vanadium, max %C Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.03
    0.04
    Columbium (Niobium),D max %E Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.02
    0.03
    Titanium, max %F Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.03
    0.04
    Boron, max % Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.0010
    0.0015
    A In addition for each heat, based upon the heat analysis, the sum of copper,
    nickel, chromium, and molybdenum shall not exceed 1.00 %, unless one or more
    of those elements are specified or restricted by the applicable product specification
    for the applicable grade, class, and type.
    B In addition for each heat, based upon the heat analysis, the sum of chromium
    and molybdenum shall not exceed 0.32 %, unless one or both of those elements
    are specified or restricted by the applicable product specification for the applicable
    grade, class, and type.
    C By agreement between the purchaser and the supplier, the heat analysis limit for
    vanadium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than 0.10 %, and the
    product analysis limit for vanadium is permitted to be increased to a value not
    higher than 0.11 %.
    D Columbium and niobium are interchangeable names for the same element and
    both names are acceptable for use in A01 specifications.
    E By agreement between the purchaser and the supplier, the heat analysis limit for
    columbium (niobium) is permitted to be increased to a value not higher that
    0.05 %, and the product analysis limit for columbium (niobium) is permitted to be
    increased to a value not higher than 0.06 %.
    F By agreement between the purchaser and the supplier, the heat analysis limit for
    titanium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than 0.04 %, and the
    product analysis limit for titanium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher
    than 0.05 %.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    71
    8.2 Coarse Austenitic Grain Size—Where coarse austenitic
    grain size is specified one austenitic grain size test per heat
    shall be made and the grain size number so determined shall be
    in the range of 1 to 5 inclusive.
    8.3 Fine Austenitic Grain Size:
    8.3.1 Except as allowed in 8.3.2, and when fine austenitic
    grain size is specified, or when the producer elects to determine
    the grain size, one McQuaid Ehn test per heat shall be made
    and the austenitic grain size number so determined shall be 5
    or higher, and the chemical requirements of 8.3.2 do not apply.
    NOTE 1—Such austenitic grain size numbers may be achieved with
    lower contents of austenitic grain refining elements than 8.3.2 requires for
    austenitic grain size testing to be waived.
    8.3.2 Unless testing for fine austenitic grain size is specified
    in the purchase order or the producer elects to test for fine
    austenitic grain size, the austenitic grain size test need not be
    made for any heat that has, by heat analysis, one or more of the
    following:
    8.3.2.1 A total aluminum content of 0.020 % or more.
    8.3.2.2 An acid soluble aluminum content of 0.015 % or
    more.
    8.3.2.3 A content for an austenitic grain refining element
    that exceeds the minimum value agreed to by the purchaser as
    being sufficient for austenitic grain size testing to be waived.
    8.3.2.4 Contents for the combination of two or more austenitic
    grain refining elements that exceed the applicable minimum
    values agreed to by the purchaser as being sufficient for
    austenitic grain size testing to be waived.
    8.3.2.5 The analysis for the elements mentioned in 8.3.2.1,
    8.3.2.2, 8.3.2.3, or 8.3.2.4 shall be included in the test report.
30. Quality
    9.1 General—Plates shall be free of injurious defects and
    shall have a workmanlike finish.
    9.2 Surface Imperfections:
    9.2.1 For plates produced from plate-as-rolled, all injurious
    surface imperfections shall be removed by the manufacturer.
    For plates produced from coil, all injurious surface imperfections
    shall be removed by the processor.
    9.2.1.1 Shallow imperfections shall be ground to sound
    metal; the ground area shall be well faired and the thickness of
    the ground plate shall not be reduced below the minimum
    thickness permitted.
    9.2.1.2 All surface imperfections, the removal of which will
    reduce the plate thickness below the minimum thickness
    permitted, shall be cause for rejection of the plate, except that,
    by agreement with the purchaser, the metal so removed may be
    replaced with weld metal (see 9.4).
    9.3 Edge Imperfections:
    9.3.1 Laminar-type discontinuities 1 in. [25 mm] and less in
    length visible to the unaided eye on an edge of a plate as
    prepared for shipment by the manufacturer or processor are
    acceptable and do not require exploration.
    9.3.2 All larger discontinuities shall be explored to determine
    their depth and extent. Discontinuities shall be considered
    continuous when located in the same plane within 5 % of the
    plate thickness and separated by a distance less than the length
    of the smaller of two adjacent discontinuities.
    9.3.3 Indications visible to the unaided eye on the cut edges
    of a plate as prepared for shipment by the manufacturer or
    processor shall not exceed the limits given in Columns 1 and 2
    of Table A1.14 [A2.14].
    9.3.4 Larger indications shall be removed by the manufacturer
    or processor by grinding, provided that the resultant
    cavity does not exceed the limits given in Columns 3 and 4 of
    Table A1.14 [A2.14].
    9.3.5 Indications of greater magnitude shall be cause for
    rejection of the plate, except that, by agreement with the
    purchaser, the defects may be removed and replaced with weld
    metal (see 9.4).
    9.3.6 Indications on the edges of a plate cut during the
    fabrication shall be cause for rejection of the plate at the
    discretion of the purchaser if the magnitude exceeds the limits
    given in Columns 5 and 6 of Table A1.14 [A2.14]. The defects
    may be removed and replaced with weld metal (see 9.4).
    9.3.7 Fabricators should be aware that edge cracks may
    initiate upon bending a sheared or burned edge during the
    fabrication process. This is not considered to be a fault of the
    steel, but is rather a function of the induced cold work or heat
    affected zone.
    9.4 Repair by Welding:
    9.4.1 Repair welding shall be permitted only with the
    approval of the purchaser.
    9.4.2 Preparation for repair welding shall include inspection
    to confirm complete removal of the defect.
    9.4.3 Repairs shall be made utilizing welding procedures
    qualified in accordance with Section IX of the
    ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and repair welding
    shall be done by welders or welding operators meeting the
    qualification requirements of Section IX.
    9.4.4 The weld metal shall have the A-number analysis
    corresponding to the equivalent ASME P-number of the plate,
    except that A-1 or A-2 analysis weld metal may be employed
    for P-1 plates. Other weld metals may be employed that are
    compatible with the plate being repaired, if so approved by the
    purchaser. Such weld metals shall be qualified in accordance
    with the requirements of Section IX of the
    ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
    9.4.5 If Charpy impact tests of the plate are required, the
    welding procedure qualification tests shall also include Charpy
    impact tests of the weld, the heat-affected zone, and the plate,
    and the test results shall be reported to the purchaser.
    9.4.6 If the plate is subjected to normalizing, quenching and
    tempering, hot forming, or post-weld heat treating, the welding
    procedure qualification test plates and the weld repaired plate
    shall be subjected to the thermal heat treatment as specified by
    the purchaser.
    9.4.7 In addition, repair welds shall meet the requirements
    of the construction code specified by the purchaser.
31. Test Methods
    10.1 All tests shall be conducted in accordance with Test
    Methods and Definitions A370.
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    72
    10.2 Yield strength shall be determined by either the 0.2 %
    offset method or the 0.5 % extension under load method, unless
    otherwise stated in the applicable product specification.
    10.3 Rounding Procedures—For purposes of determining
    conformance with the applicable product specification, a calculated
    value shall be rounded to the nearest 1 ksi [5 MPa] for
    tensile and yield strengths, and to the nearest unit in the
    right-hand place of figures used in expressing the limiting
    value for other values, in accordance with the rounding method
    given in Practice E29.
32. Tension Tests
    11.1 Number of Test Coupons:
    11.1.1 Plates Produced from As-Rolled Plates—For other
    than quenched and tempered plates, one tension test coupon
    shall be taken from each plate-as-rolled. Two tension test
    coupons shall be taken from each quenched and tempered
    plate, as heat treated. If plates are furnished by the manufacturer
    or processor in accordance with 11.4.2 and qualified by
    using test specimens taken from heat-treated test coupons
    (including normalized, normalized and tempered, and
    quenched and tempered), one tension test coupon shall be
    taken from each plate-as-rolled (see Terminology A941 for the
    definition of plate-as-rolled).
    11.1.2 Plates Produced from Coil and Furnished without
    Heat Treatment or with Stress Relieving Only—Except as
    allowed by 11.1.2.1 and 11.1.4, a minimum of three tension
    coupons shall be taken from each coil as follows:
    11.1.2.1 The first test coupon shall be taken immediately
    prior to the first plate to be qualified to the applicable product
    specification, the second test coupon shall be taken from the
    approximate center lap, and the third test coupon shall be taken
    immediately after the last plate to be qualified to the applicable
    product specification. If, during decoiling, the amount of
    material decoiled is less than that required to reach the next
    standard test location, a test for qualification of that particular
    portion of the coil shall be made from a test coupon taken from
    a location adjacent to the innermost portion decoiled.
    11.1.2.2 All plates between any two test locations that meet
    the requirements of the applicable product specification are
    acceptable.
    11.1.2.3 All plates between a test location that fails to meet
    the requirements of the applicable product specification and an
    adjacent test location that meets the requirements of the
    applicable product specification are rejectable, except that the
    processor has the option to make other tests after cutting back
    the coil in either direction.
    11.1.3 Plates Produced from Coil and Furnished Heat
    Treated by Other than Stress Relieving—For other than
    quenched and tempered plates, one tension test coupon shall be
    taken from each coil. Two tension test coupons shall be taken
    from each quenched and tempered plate, as heat treated.
    11.1.4 Plates Produced from Coil and Qualified Using Test
    Specimens Taken from Test Coupons Heat Treated by Other
    than Stress Relieving—One tension test coupon shall be taken
    from each coil.
    11.2 Orientation of Test Specimens—The longitudinal axis
    of the tension test specimens shall be transverse to the final
    rolling direction of the plate.
    11.3 Location of Test Coupons—Tension test coupons shall
    be taken from a corner of the plate. For quenched and tempered
    plates, the two tension test coupons shall be taken from
    opposite ends of the plate.
    11.4 Tests from Heat-Treated Plates:
    11.4.1 If heat treatment is performed by the manufacturer or
    processor, the test specimens shall be taken from the plate in
    the heat-treated condition or from full-thickness coupons
    simultaneously heat treated with the plate.
    11.4.2 If heat treatment is to be performed by the fabricator,
    the plates shall be accepted on the basis of tests made on test
    specimens taken from full-thickness coupons heat treated in
    accordance with the requirements specified in the applicable
    product specification or the purchase order. If the heattreatment
    temperatures are not specified, the manufacturer or
    processor shall heat treat the coupons under conditions it
    considers appropriate. The purchaser shall be informed of the
    procedure followed in heat treating the specimens.
    11.4.3 If approved by the purchaser, the procedures of
    11.4.2 may be implemented on plates heat treated by the
    manufacturer or processor, except that for plates that are
    quenched and tempered, all testing required the specification or
    the purchase order must be performed after plate heat
    treatment, in accordance with 11.1.1 and 11.4.4, and the results
    reported.
    11.4.4 For plates that are heat treated with a cooling rate
    faster than still-air cooling from the austenitizing temperature,
    one of the following shall apply in addition to other requirements
    specified herein:
    11.4.4.1 The gage length of the tension test specimen shall
    be taken at least 1T from any as-heat treated edge, where T is
    the thickness of the plate, and shall be at least 1/2 in. [12.5 mm]
    from flame-cut or heat-affected-zone surfaces.
    11.4.4.2 A steel thermal buffer pad, 1 T by 1T by at least 3T,
    shall be joined to the plate edge by a partial penetration weld
    completely sealing the buffered edge prior to heat treatment.
    11.4.4.3 Thermal insulation or other thermal barriers shall
    be used during the heat treatment adjacent to the plate edge
    where the test specimens are to be removed. It shall be
    demonstrated that the cooling rate of the tension test specimen
    is no faster than, and not substantially slower than, that attained
    by the method described in 11.4.4.2.
    11.4.4.4 When test coupons cut from the plate but heat
    treated separately are used, the coupon dimensions shall be not
    less than 3T by 3T by T and each tension test specimen cut
    from it shall meet the requirements of 11.4.4.1.
    11.4.4.5 If cooling rate data for the plate and cooling rate
    control devices for the test coupons are available, the test
    coupons may be heat treated separately in the device, provided
    that this method is approved by the purchaser.
    11.5 Test Specimen Preparation:
    11.5.1 Tension test specimens for plates 3/4 in. [20 mm] and
    under in thickness shall be the full thickness of the plates. The
    test specimens shall conform to the requirements for either the
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    73
    11/2-in. [40-mm] wide or the 1/2-in. [12.5-mm] wide rectangular
    tension test specimen of Test Methods and Definitions A370.
    The 11/2-in. [40-mm] wide test specimen may have both edges
    parallel. The 1/2-in. [12.5-mm] wide specimen may have a
    maximum nominal thickness of 3/4 in. [20 mm].
    11.5.2 For plates up to 4 in. [100 mm], inclusive, in
    thickness, tension test specimens may be the full thickness of
    the plate and conform to the requirements for the 11/2-in.
    [40-mm] wide rectangular tension test specimen of Test Methods
    and Definitions A370 if adequate testing machine capacity
    is available.
    11.5.3 For plates over 3/4 in. [20 mm] in thickness, except as
    permitted in 11.5.2, tension test specimens shall conform to the
    requirements for the 0.500-in. [12.5-mm] diameter test specimen
    of Test Methods and Definitions A370. The axis of the test
    specimen shall be located midway between the center of
    thickness and the top or bottom surface of the plate.
    11.6 Elongation Requirement Adjustments:
    11.6.1 Due to the specimen geometry effect encountered
    when using the rectangular tension test specimen for testing
    thin plate, adjustments in elongation requirements must be
    provided for thicknesses under 0.312 in. [8 mm]. Accordingly,
    the following deductions shall be made from the base elongation
    requirements in the applicable product specification:
    Plate Nominal Thickness Range, in. [mm]
    Elongation
    Deduction, %
    0.299–0.311 [7.60–7.89] 0.5
    0.286–0.298 [7.30–7.59] 1.0
    0.273–0.285 [7.00–7.29] 1.5
    0.259–0.272 [6.60–6.99] 2.0
    0.246–0.258 [6.20–6.59] 2.5
    0.233–0.245 [5.90–6.19] 3.0
    0.219–0.232 [5.50–5.89] 3.5
    0.206–0.218 [5.20–5.49] 4.0
    0.193–0.205 [4.90–5.19] 4.5
    less than 0.193 [4.90] 5.0
    11.6.2 Due to the inherently lower elongation that is obtainable
    in thicker plate, adjustments in elongation requirements in
    2-in. [50-mm] gage length shall be provided for thicknesses
    over 3.5 in. [90 mm]. Accordingly, the following deductions
    shall be made from the base elongation requirements in 2 in.
    [50 mm] prescribed in the applicable product specification:
    Plate Nominal Thickness Range, in. [mm]
    Elongation
    Deduction, %
    3.501–3.999 [90.00–102.49] 0.5
    4.000–4.499 [102.50–114.99] 1.0
    4.500–4.999 [115.00–127.49] 1.5
    5.000–5.499 [127.50–139.99] 2.0
    5.500–5.999 [140.0–152.49] 2.5
    6.000 and thicker [152.50 and thicker] 3.0
    11.6.3 A characteristic of certain types of alloy steels is a
    local disproportionate increase in the degree of necking down
    or contraction of the test specimens during the tension test,
    resulting in a decrease in the percentage of elongation as the
    gage length is increased. The effect is not so pronounced in
    thicker plates. For such material, if so stated in the applicable
    product specification for plates up to 3/4 in. [20 mm], inclusive,
    in thickness, if the percentage of elongation of an 8-in.
    [200-mm] gage length test specimen falls not more than 3
    percentage points below the amount prescribed, the elongation
    shall be considered satisfactory if the percentage of elongation
    in 2 in. [50 mm] across the break is not less than 25 %.
    11.6.4 The tensile requirements tables in many of the
    product specifications covered by this general requirements
    specification specify elongation requirements in both 8-in.
    [200-mm] and 2-in. [50-mm] gage lengths. Unless otherwise
    provided in the applicable product specification, both requirements
    are not required to be applied simultaneously, and the
    elongation need only be determined in the gage length appropriate
    for the test specimen used. After selection of the
    appropriate gage length, the elongation requirement for the
    alternative gage length shall be deemed not applicable.
    11.7 This specification does not provide requirements for
    product tension testing subsequent to shipment (see 15.1).
    Therefore, the requirements of 11.1 through 11.6 and Section
    16 apply only for tests conducted at the place of manufacture
    prior to shipment. Compliance to Specification A20/20M and
    the applicable product specification does not preclude the
    possibility that product tension test results may vary outside
    specified ranges. The tensile properties will vary within the
    same plate-as-rolled or piece, be it as-rolled, control-rolled, or
    heat-treated. The purchaser should, therefore, be aware that
    tension testing in accordance with the requirements of Specification
    A20/A20M does not provide assurance that all products
    of a plate-as-rolled will be identical in tensile properties
    with the products tested. If the purchaser wishes to have more
    confidence than that provided by Specification A20/A20M
    testing procedures, additional testing or requirements, such as
    Supplementary Requirement S4, should be imposed.
    11.8 Appendix X2 provides additional information on the
    variability of tensile properties in plates for pressure vessels.
33. Notch-Toughness Tests
    12.1 Charpy V-Notch Tests:
    12.1.1 Number of Tests—Except for quenched and tempered
    plates, and except as allowed by 12.1.1.1 and 12.1.1.2, one
    impact test (3 specimens) for each specified orientation (see
    12.1.2) shall be made from each plate-as-rolled. For quenched
    and tempered plates, one impact test shall be made from each
    plate, as heat treated.
    12.1.1.1 Plates Ordered Without the Heat Treatment Specified
    by the Applicable Product Specification—Coupons for
    Charpy V-notch tests shall be taken in accordance with the
    same requirements as given for tensile test coupons in 11.4.2
    and 11.4.3.
    12.1.1.2 Plates Produced from Coil—If Charpy V-notch
    tests are specified, the number of impact tests required shall be
    the same as the number specified for tension tests in 11.1.2 or
    11.1.3, whichever is applicable. The test coupons shall be taken
    from the material after decoiling and leveling.
    12.1.2 Orientation of Test Specimens—The long axis of the
    test specimens shall be oriented either longitudinal (parallel to
    the final direction of rolling) or transverse (transverse to the
    final direction of rolling), as specified in the applicable product
    specification or the purchase order.
    12.1.3 Location of Test Coupons—The impact test coupons
    shall be taken adjacent to the tension test coupons. The impact
    test coupons shall be subject to the same requirements as those
    specified for tension tests in 11.4, except that the provisions of
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    74
    11.4.4.1 apply to the area under the notch of the impact test
    specimen instead of to the gage length of the tension test
    specimen.
    12.1.4 Test Method—Impact testing shall be performed in
    accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A370 using
    Charpy V-notch (Type A) specimens as shown in Test Methods
    and Definitions A370. Except as allowed by 12.1.4.1, full-size
    specimens (0.394 by 0.394 in. [10 by 10 mm]) shall be used if
    the plate thickness permits, and their central axis shall correspond
    as near as practical to the 1/4 t plane in the plate thickness
    t. If the plate thickness is insufficient to obtain full-size
    specimens, the largest possible subsize specimens shall be
    used.
    12.1.4.1 For plates that normally have absorbed energy
    values in excess of 180 ft·lbf [245 J] if tested using full-size
    specimens at the specified testing temperature, subsize 0.394
    by 0.264 in. [10 by 6.7 mm] specimens may be used in lieu of
    full-size specimens; however, if this option is used, the
    acceptance value shall be 75 ft·lbf [100 J] minimum for each
    test specimen and the lateral expansion in mils [micrometres]
    shall be reported.
    12.1.5 Test Temperature—The test temperature shall be as
    specified in the purchase order, except that the manufacturer or
    processor shall have the option of using a lower test temperature.
    If a test temperature is not specified in the purchase order,
    tests shall be conducted at a temperature no higher than is
    given in Table A1.15 [A2.15] for the applicable product
    specification, grade, class, and plate thickness. The actual test
    temperature used shall be reported with the test results.
    12.1.6 Acceptance Criteria—Unless otherwise agreed upon,
    the acceptance criteria shall be as given in Table A1.15 [A2.15]
    for the applicable product specification, grade, class, and plate
    thickness.
    12.1.6.1 If the acceptance criteria is based upon energy
    absorption of a full-size specimen, the acceptance criteria for
    the various subsize specimens shall be as given in Table A1.16
    [A2.16], except as otherwise provided in 12.1.4.1.
    12.1.6.2 If the acceptance criterion is based upon lateral
    expansion opposite the notch, the acceptance value shall be the
    same for all sizes of test specimens.
    12.1.7 Marking—The letters “LTV” shall be stenciled or
    stamped on each plate following the class number, grade, etc.
    12.1.8 Variability—The impact properties of steel can vary
    within the same plate-as-rolled or piece, be it as-rolled,
    control-rolled, or heat-treated. The purchaser should, therefore,
    be aware that testing of one plate-as-rolled does not provide
    assurance that all locations within a plate-as-rolled will be
    identical in toughness with the location tested. Normalizing or
    quenching and tempering the product will reduce the degree of
    variation.
    12.1.8.1 Appendix X3 provides additional information on
    the variability of Charpy V-notch test properties in plates for
    pressure vessels.
    12.2 Drop-Weight Tests:
    12.2.1 Where specified, one drop-weight test, consisting of
    a set of two test specimens, shall be made to the same
    frequency stated in 12.1.1 in accordance with Test Method
    E208.
    12.2.2 The test coupons shall be obtained adjacent to a
    tension test coupon. For plates produced from coil, the test
    coupon locations shall be the same as for Charpy V-notch tests.
    (See 12.1.) The provisions of 12.1.3 shall also apply.
    12.2.3 The testing temperature shall be as specified in the
    applicable product specification or the purchase order.
    12.2.4 Acceptance shall be on the basis of no-break performance
    of both test specimens at the specified testing temperature.
    12.2.5 The plates shall be marked as required in 12.1.7,
    except that the letters “LTD” shall be used instead of “LTV.”
34. Identification of Plates
    13.1 Required Markings:
    13.1.1 Except as allowed by 13.4, plates shall be legibly
    marked with the following information: applicable ASTM
    designation (see 1.1) (year of issue not required); “G” or“ MT”
    if applicable (see 13.1.2); applicable grade, type, and class;
    heat number; plate identifier; and name, brand, or trademark of
    the manufacturer (for plates produced in discrete cut lengths of
    flat product) or the processor (for plates produced from coil and
    for subdivided plates (see 13.4)).
    13.1.2 Plates that are required to be heat treated, but have
    not been so heat treated, shall be marked, by the manufacturer
    or processor, with the letter “G” (denoting green) following the
    required ASTM designation mark, except that “G” marking is
    not necessary if such plates are for shipment, for the purpose of
    obtaining the required heat treatment, to an organization under
    the manufacturer’s control. Plates that are required to be heat
    treated, and have been so heat treated, shall be marked, by the
    party that performed the heat treatment, with the letters “MT”
    (denoting material treated) following the required ASTM
    designation mark.
    NOTE 2—Any stress relief of test specimens intended to simulate
    post-weld heat treatment is not included in the above heat treatment.
    13.2 Types of Marking:
    13.2.1 Except as allowed by 13.4, the required markings for
    plates over 1/4 in. [6 mm] in thickness shall be by steel die
    stamping, unless paint marking is specified in the purchase
    order.
    13.2.2 Except as allowed by 13.4, the required markings for
    plates 1/4 in. [6 mm] and under in thickness shall be by paint
    marking or by steel die stamping using low-stress (either
    round-nose or interrupted-dot) impressions.
    13.3 Location of Markings:
    13.3.1 Except as allowed by 13.4, the required markings for
    plates with a maximum lengthwise or crosswise dimension
    more than 72 in. [1800 mm] shall be in at least two places on
    each finished plate, at least 12 in. [300 mm] from the edges of
    the plate.
    13.3.2 Except as allowed by 13.4, the required markings for
    plates with a maximum lengthwise and crosswise dimension of
    72 in. [1800 mm] or less shall be in at least one place on each
    finished plate, approximately midway between the center and
    an edge of the plate.
    13.4 Subdivided Plates:
    13.4.1 By agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer
    or processor, each subdivided plate (a plate separated
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    75
    from a master plate) shall be legibly marked with the name,
    brand, or trademark of the organization that subdivided the
    plate plus a code traceable to the required markings, provided
    that the information required in 13.1, cross referenced to that
    code, is furnished with the plates.
    13.4.2 By agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer
    or processor, subdivided plates that are from the same
    master plate and placed in secured lifts shall have the information
    required in 13.1 paint marked on the top piece of each
    lift or shown on a substantial tag attached to each lift.
    13.5 Bar Coding—In addition to the requirements of 13.1 to
    13.4 inclusive, the manufacturer or processor shall have the
    option of using bar coding as a supplementary identification
    method.
    NOTE 3—Bar coding should be consistent with AIAG Standard B 1.
35. Permissible Variations in Dimensions or Mass
    14.1 One cubic foot of rolled steel shall be assumed to
    weigh 490 lb, unless otherwise stated in the applicable product
    specification. One cubic metre of rolled steel is assumed to
    have a mass of 7850 kg, unless otherwise stated in the
    applicable product specification.
    14.2 For carbon steel plates the permissible variations for
    dimensions shall not exceed the applicable limits stated in
    Annex A1, Table A1.1 to Table A1.9, and Table A1.13 [Annex
    A2, Table A2.1 to Table A2.9, and Table A2.13].
    14.3 For alloy steel plates the permissible variations for
    dimensions shall not exceed the applicable limits stated in
    Annex 1, Table A1.1 to Table A1.4, Table A1.8, and Table
    A1.10 to Table A1.13. [Annex 2, Table A2.1 to Table A2.4,
    Table A2.8 and Table A2.10 to Table A2.13].
    14.4 Conversions of Permitted Variations from Fractions of
    an Inch to Decimals—Permitted variations in dimensions for
    products covered by this specification are generally given as
    fractions of inch and these remain the official permitted
    variations, where so stated. If the material is to be measured by
    equipment reporting dimensions as decimals, conversion of
    permitted variations from fractions of an inch to decimals shall
    be made to three decimal places; using the rounding method
    prescribed in Practice E29.
36. Inspection and Testing
    15.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
    entry at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
    is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s works
    that concern the manufacture of the plate ordered. The manufacturer
    shall afford the inspector all reasonable facilities to be
    satisfied that the plate is being furnished in accordance with
    this general requirements specification, the applicable product
    specification, and the purchase order. All tests (except product
    analysis) and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture
    prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall
    be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
    operation of the manufacturer’s works.
    15.2 If plates are produced from coil, 15.1 shall apply to the
    “processor” instead of to the “manufacturer” and the “place of
    process” shall apply instead of the “place of manufacture.” If
    plates are produced from coil and the processor is different
    from the manufacturer, the inspector representing the purchaser
    shall have free entry, at all times while work on the contract of
    the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s
    works that concern the manufacture of the plate
    ordered.
37. Retests
    16.1 Tension Test—In addition to the provisions of Test
    Methods and Definitions A370, the following retest provisions
    shall apply:
    16.1.1 If any test specimen shows defective machining, or
    develops flaws, it may be discarded and another test specimen
    substituted.
    16.1.2 If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
    specimen is less than that specified, and any part of the fracture
    is more than 3/4 in. [20 mm] from the center of the gage length
    of a 2-in. [50-mm] test specimen or is outside the middle half
    of the gage length of an 8-in. [200-mm] test specimen as
    indicated by scribe marks on the test specimen before testing,
    one retest shall be allowed.
    16.1.3 If the results from an original tension test specimen
    fail to meet the specified requirements but are within 2 ksi [10
    MPa] of the required tensile strength or within 1 ksi [5 MPa]
    of the required yield strength or yield point, or within 2
    percentage points of the required elongation or reduction of
    area, one retest shall be permitted to replace the failing test.
    16.1.4 The results of the retest shall meet the specified
    requirements.
    16.2 Charpy V-Notch Tests:
    16.2.1 The retest provisions of Test Methods and Definitions
    A370 shall apply, except that the 5 ft·lbf [7 J] absolute
    minimum for an individual specimen shall not apply if two
    thirds of the specified minimum average is less than 5 ft·lbf [7
    J].
    16.2.2 If Charpy V-notch impact test lateral expansion
    values are specified, if the value of one specimen falls below
    the specified minimum value and not below 2/3 of the specified
    minimum value, and if the average of the three specimens
    equals or exceeds the specified minimum value, a retest of
    three additional specimens may be made. Each of the three
    retest specimens shall equal or exceed the specified minimum
    value.
    16.2.3 If the required values are not obtained on Charpy
    V-notch retests as specified in 16.2.1 and16.2.2, or if the values
    in the initial test are below the values required for retest, no
    further retests are permitted unless the plate is heat treated or
    reheat treated. After heat treatment or reheat treatment, a set of
    three specimens shall be tested and each shall equal or exceed
    the specified minimum value.
    16.2.4 If the option of 12.1.4.1 is used and the test result
    falls below the 75 ft·lbf [100 J] minimum specified, another test
    may be made using full-size test specimens.
38. Retreatment
    17.1 If any heat-treated plate fails to meet the mechanical
    requirements of the applicable product specification, the manufacturer
    or processor shall have have the option of heat treating
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    76
    the plate again. All mechanical-property tests shall be repeated
    and the plate surface shall be reexamined for surface defects
    when it is resubmitted for inspection.
39. Rejection
    18.1 Any rejection based upon product analysis made in
    accordance with the applicable product specification shall be
    reported to the supplier and samples that represent the rejected
    plate shall be preserved for 2 weeks from the date of notification
    of such rejection. In case of dissatisfaction with the results
    of the tests, the supplier shall have the option of making claim
    for a rehearing within that time.
    18.2 Plates that show injurious defects subsequent to their
    acceptance at the manufacturer’s or processor’s works may be
    rejected. In such cases, the manufacturer or processor shall be
    notified.
40. Test Reports
    19.1 The manufacturer or processor shall report the results
    of all tests required by the applicable product specification, the
    applicable supplementary requirements, and the purchase order.
    The heat number, the plate identifier of the plate tested, and
    the nominal plate thickness shall be shown on the test report.
    The year-date of the specification to which the plates are
    furnished shall be included in the test report.
    19.1.1 In reporting elongation values, both the percentage
    increase and the original gage length shall be stated.
    19.2 For plates rolled from a strand-cast slab with a reduction
    ratio in the range from 2.0:1 to 3.0:1, exclusive, the
    specific practices (see 5.3.4 and 5.3.6) that were used by the
    manufacturer shall be reported, and the test reports shall state
    that the limitations of 5.3 have been met.
    19.3 All heat treatment, exclusive of subcritical heating to
    soften thermally cut edges, shall be reported, including temperature
    ranges and times at temperature. This exclusion does
    not apply to those plates with specified minimum tensile
    strengths of 95 ksi [655 MPa] or higher, unless such subcritical
    heating is accomplished at temperatures at least 75°F [40°C]
    below the minimum tempering temperature. The reports shall
    state whether the plates only, the test coupons only, or both
    plates and test coupons were heat treated.
    19.4 If Charpy V-notch tests are specified, the test specimen
    size used shall be reported.
    19.5 If so specified in the purchaser order, the manufacturer
    shall also furnish a certificate of compliance stating that the
    plates have been manufactured, inspected, and tested in accordance
    with the requirements of the applicable product specification.
    For plates produced from coil, the processor shall
    furnish the required certification.
    19.6 For plates produced from coil and furnished without
    heat treatment or with stress relieving only, the results of all
    tests required by 11.1.2 shall be reported for each qualifying
    coil.
    19.7 Plates that are required to be heat treated, but have not
    been so heat treated, shall be certified by the responsible
    manufacturer on the basis of tests made on heat treated
    coupons and such tests shall be made and reported. For plates
    where the heat treatment of the coupons consists of quench and
    tempering, the manufacturer or processor responsible for the
    heat treatment of the plate shall repeat any required mechanical
    tests after plate heat treatment and they shall be the basis for
    final certification of the plate.
    19.8 A signature is not required on the test report; however,
    the document shall clearly identify the organization submitting
    the report. Notwithstanding the absence of a signature, the
    organization submitting the report is responsible for the content
    of the report.
    19.9 Copies of the original manufacturer’s test report shall
    be included with any subsequent test report.
    19.10 A test report, certificate of compliance, or similar
    document printed from or used in electronic form from an
    electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission shall be regarded
    as having the same validity as a counterpart printed in
    the certifier’s facility. The content of the EDI transmitted
    document must meet the requirements of the invoked ASTM
    standard(s) and conform to any existing EDI agreement between
    the purchaser and the supplier. Notwithstanding the
    absence of a signature, the organization submitting the EDI
    transmission is responsible for the content of the report.
41. Packaging, Marking, and Loading for Shipment
    20.1 Packaging, marking, and loading for shipment shall be
    in accordance with those procedures recommended by Guide
    A700.
    20.2 For USA Government Procurement—Marking for shipment
    of material for civil agencies shall be in accordance with
    Fed. Std. No. 123.
42. Keywords
    21.1 general delivery requirement; pressure containing
    parts; pressure vessel steels; steel plates; steel plates for
    pressure vessel applications
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    77
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    The following standardized supplementary requirements are for use if desired by the purchaser.
    Those that are considered suitable for use with a product specification are listed in the product
    specification. Other tests may be performed by agreement between the manufacturer or processor and
    the purchaser. These supplementary requirements shall apply only if specified in the purchase order,
    in which event the specified tests shall be made by the manufacturer or processor before shipment of
    the plates.
    S1. Vacuum Treatment
    S1.1 The steel shall be made by a process that includes
    vacuum degassing while molten. Unless otherwise agreed upon
    with the purchaser, it is the responsibility of the manufacturer
    to select suitable process procedures.
    S2. Product Analysis
    S2.1 A product analysis shall be made of each plate as
    rolled. The specimens for analysis shall be taken adjacent to or
    from a broken tension test specimen.
    S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical
    Test Coupons
    S3.1 Prior to testing, the test coupons representing the plate
    for acceptance purposes for mechanical properties shall be
    thermally treated to simulate a post-weld heat treatment below
    the critical temperature (Ac3), using the heat treatment parameters
    (such as temperature range, time, and cooling rates)
    specified in the purchase order. For tests using specimens taken
    from such heat treated test coupons, the test results shall meet
    the requirements of the applicable product specification.
    S4. Additional Tension Test
    S4.1 Other Than Quenched-and-Tempered Plates—In addition
    to the required single tension test, a second tension test
    shall be made using a test specimen taken from a test coupon
    taken from a corner of the plate-as-rolled on the end opposite
    the single test specimen and in a direction parallel to the single
    test specimen. The results obtained using this second test
    specimen shall meet the requirements of the applicable product
    specification.
    S4.2 Quenched-and-Tempered Plates 2 in. [50 mm] or
    Greater in Thickness—In addition to the required tension tests,
    two additional test coupons shall be taken from the bottom
    corner of the plate. One shall be taken at the center of the plate
    thickness and the other immediately beneath the surface.
    Mandatory conformance of these additional tests with the
    specified properties shall be a matter of agreement between the
    manufacturer and the purchaser.
    S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test
    S5.1 Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be conducted in
    accordance with 12.1.
    S5.2 The orientation of the test specimens, whether longitudinal
    or transverse to the direction of rolling, shall be as
    specified in the purchase order.
    S5.3 The test temperature and the required acceptance
    criteria, if other than those required in 12.1, shall be as
    specified in the purchase order.
    S5.4 The recorded results shall include test specimen
    orientation, test specimen size, test temperature, absorbed
    energy values, and, if specified in the purchase order for other
    than Class VI plates, lateral expansion opposite the notch. The
    percent shear fracture appearance shall also be recorded if
    specified in the purchase order.
    S6. Drop-Weight Test (for Plates 0.625 in. [16 mm] and
    Over in Thickness)
    S6.1 Drop-weight tests shall be made in accordance with the
    requirements of Test Method E208. The specimens shall
    represent the plates in the final condition of heat treatment.
    Agreement shall be reached between the purchaser and the
    manufacturer or processor as to the number of plates to be
    tested and whether a maximum NDT temperature is mandatory
    or if the test results are for information only.
    S7. High-Temperature Tension Tests
    S7.1 A short-time elevated temperature tension test shall be
    made to represent each plate or each heat of steel as indicated
    by the purchaser. The specimens for testing shall be obtained as
    required for the room temperature tension tests specified in the
    body of this general requirements specification. The hightemperature
    tests shall be made in accordance with the requirements
    of Test Methods E21. Mandatory conformance of such
    additional tests with the specified properties shall be a matter
    for agreement between the manufacturer or processor and the
    purchaser.
    S8. Ultrasonic Examination in Accordance with A435/
    A435M
    S8.1 All plates shall be ultrasonically examined in accordance
    with the requirements of Specification A435/A435M.
    S9. Magnetic Particle Examination
    S9.1 All plate edges shall be examined by magnetic particles
    in accordance with the procedures covered in Guide
    E709. The acceptability of defects revealed by this examination
    shall be judged in accordance with the requirements for
    quality in 9.3.
    S10. Charpy V-Notch Impact Transition Curve
    S10.1 Sufficient impact tests of the same specimen size shall
    be made from the plate test material to establish a transition
    curve. The test temperature range shall be wide enough to
    establish the upper and lower shelf energies, with sufficient
    testing at intermediate temperatures to permit plotting a reasonable
    smooth curve. A plot of the data is not required. The
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    78
    manufacturer shall report the specimen orientation, test
    temperature, and absorbed energy for each specimen tested.
    Lateral expansion and percent shear shall also be reported
    when specified in the purchase order. The number of plates
    tested and the specimen orientation shall be the same as in 12.1
    unless otherwise specified in the purchase order.
    S11. Ultrasonic Examination in Accordance with A577/
    A577M
    S11.1 All plates shall be ultrasonically examined in accordance
    with the requirements of Specification A577/A577M.
    S12. Ultrasonic Examination in Accordance with A578/
    A578M
    S12.1 All plates shall be ultrasonically examined in accordance
    with the requirements of Specification A578/A578M.
    The acceptance level shall be as specified in the purchase order.
    S13. NDT Temperature Determination
    S13.1 The NDT temperature shall be established in accordance
    with Test Method E208 using coupons from a single
    plate. The number of plates to be so tested shall be subject to
    agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer or
    processor.
    S15. Reduction of Area Measurement
    S15.1 A reduction of area measurement shall be taken while
    making the required tension test. Reduction of area shall be
    determined only on the 0.500-in. [12.5-mm] round specimen as
    shown in Fig. 5 of Test Methods and Definitions A370. The
    minimum acceptance limit shall be 40 %.
    S16. Thermal Stress Relief of Mechanical Test Coupons
    S16.1 Test coupons representing the plates shall be thermally
    stress relieved by gradually and uniformly heating them
    to a temperature between 1100 and 1200°F [595 and 650°C], or
    a temperature range otherwise agreed upon between the
    manufacturer or processor and the purchaser, holding at temperature
    for at least 1 h/in. [2.4 min/mm] of thickness and
    cooling in still air to a temperature not exceeding 600°F
    [315°C].
    S17. Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel
    S17.1 Material shall be vacuum carbon-deoxidized, in
    which case the silicon content at the time of vacuum deoxidizing
    shall be 0.12 % maximum, and the content of deoxidizers
    such as aluminum, zirconium, and titanium should be kept
    low enough to allow deoxidation by carbon. The test report
    shall indicate that the steel was vacuum carbon-deoxidized.
    The minimum heat analysis and product analysis requirements
    for silicon do not apply to vacuum carbon-deoxidized steel.
    S19. Restricted Chemical Requirements
    S19.1 Restricted heat analysis and product analysis limits
    are applicable, as specified in the purchase order.
    S20. Maximum Carbon Equivalent for Weldability
    S20.1 Plates shall be supplied with a specific maximum
    carbon equivalent value. This value shall be based upon the
    heat analysis. The required chemical analysis as well as the
    carbon equivalent shall be reported.
    S20.2 The carbon equivalent shall be calculated using the
    following formula:
    CE5 C1Mn/61~Cr1Mo1V!/51~Ni1Cu!/15
    S20.3 The maximum value of the carbon equivalent for
    carbon steels (including C-Mn, C-Mn-Si, C-Mn-Si-Al steels),
    are given in Table S20.1.
    S21. Restricted Limits on Elements
    For each heat, based upon the heat analysis, the content shall
    not exceed 0.35 % for copper, 0.25 % for nickel, 0.25 % for
    chromium, 0.08 % for molybdenum, or 0.70 % for the sum of
    those four elements.
    S22. Through-Thickness Tension Tests
    S22.1 Through-thickness tension tests shall be made in
    accordance with the requirements of Specification A770/
    A770M. (See Ordering Information in Specification A770/
    A770M for the additional information that may be needed.)
    S24. Strain Age Test
    S24.1 Test coupons shall be given a strain age treatment
    designated by the purchaser. Charpy V-notch tests shall be
    conducted on the strain aged specimens. Heat treatment, strain
    aging, test temperature, and acceptance criteria shall be as
    agreed upon between the manufacturer or processor and the
    purchaser.
    S25. Weldability
    S25.1 Weldability tests shall
    be conducted. The type of test and the acceptance criteria
    shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer or processor
    and the purchaser.
    S26. Low-Sulfur Steels
    S26.1 The steel shall be made to 0.010 % sulfur maximum.
    Lower sulfur levels and sulfide shape control practices can be
    specified by agreement between the manufacturer or processor
    and the purchaser.
    TABLE S20.1 Maximum Carbon Equivalent for Weldability
    Specified Minimum UTS Maximum Carbon Equivalent Value
    ksi [MPa] Thickness up to 2 in.
    [50 mm] incl
    Thickness over 2 in.
    [50 mm]
    60 # UTS < 70
    [415 # UTS < 485]
    0.45 0.46
    70 # UTS < 80
    [485 # UTS < 550]
    0.47 0.48A
    UTS $ 80
    [UTS $ 550]
    0.48A,B . . .
    A If simulated PWHT of the test coupons is specified (S3), the maximum carbon
    equivalent value may be increased up to 0.50 upon agreement between purchaser
    and supplier.
    B Applicable to quenched-and-tempered material; for other conditions, maximum
    carbon equivalent shall be by agreement between purchaser and supplier.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    79
    S27. Restrictive Plate Flatness
    S27.1 Carbon steel plates, as-rolled or normalized, shall
    conform to the permissible restrictive variations from flatness
    given in Table S27.1 or Table S27.2.
    S27.2 High-strength low-alloy steel plates, as-rolled or
    normalized, shall conform to the permissible restrictive variations
    from flatness given in Table S27.3 or Table S27.4.
    S28. Heat Treatment in the Working Zone of a Surveyed
    Furnace
    S28.1 Plates shall be heat treated in the working zone of a
    furnace that has been surveyed in accordance with Test Method
    A991/A991M, provided that such working zone was established
    using a variation of 25°F [15°C] or less from the furnace
    set point.
    S28.2 The test report shall indicate that S28 applies.
    TABLE S27.1 Permissible Variations from Flatness for Carbon Steel Plates As-Rolled or Normalized Ordered to Restrictive Flatness
    NOTE 1—Flatness Variations for Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the length shall not
    exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft of longer plates.
    NOTE 2—Flatness Variations for Width—The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
    NOTE 3—When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 1/4 in. in each
    direction. When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 in., inclusive, the permissible flatness variation shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount for
    the specified width, but in no case less than 1/4 in.
    NOTE 4—The variations given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 60 ksi or comparable chemistry or
    hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or comparable chemistry or hardness, the permissible variations are 11/2 times the
    amounts shown in the table below.
    NOTE 5—This table and these notes cover the flatness variations of circular and sketch plates based on the maximum dimensions of those plates.
    NOTE 6—Waviness tolerances for rectangular plates, universal mill plates, and circular and sketch plates do not apply.
    NOTE 7—A “Z” indicates that there is no published restricted value for the size.
    NOTE 8—Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
    Specified
    Thickness, in.
    Permissible Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in.
    48 to 60, excl 60 to 72, excl 72 to 84, excl 84 to 96, excl 96 to 108, excl 108 to 120, incl
    To 1/4 , excl 3/4 15/16 Z Z Z Z
    1/4 to 3/8, excl 9/16 3/4 7/8 15/16 1-1/16 1-1/8
    3/8 to 1/2, excl 5/16 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16
    1/2 to 3/4, excl 5/16 5/16 5/16 3/8 1/2 1/2
    3/4 to 1, excl 5/16 5/16 5/16 5/16 3/8 7/16
    1 to 2, incl 1/4 5/16 5/16 5/16 5/16 3/8
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    80
    TABLE S27.2 Permissible Variations from Flatness for Carbon Steel Plates As-Rolled or Normalized Ordered to Restrictive Flatness
    NOTE 1—Flatness Variations for Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the length shall not
    exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 3700 mm in length, or in any 3700 mm of longer plates.
    NOTE 2—Flatness Variations for Width—The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
    NOTE 3—When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 6 mm in each
    direction. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, inclusive, the permissible flatness variation shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount
    for the specified width, but in no case less than 6 mm.
    NOTE 4—The variations given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 415 MPa or comparable chemistry
    or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or comparable chemistry or hardness, the permissible variations are 11/2 times the
    amounts shown in the table below.
    NOTE 5—This table and these notes cover the flatness variations of circular and sketch plates based on the maximum dimensions of those plates.
    NOTE 6—Waviness tolerances for rectangular plates, universal mill plates, and circular and sketch plates do not apply.
    NOTE 7—A “Z” indicates that there is no published restricted value for the size.
    NOTE 8—Plates shall be in horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
    Specified
    Thickness, mm
    Permissible Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, mm
    1200 to 1500, excl 1500 to 1800, excl 1800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2400, excl 2400 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3000, incl
    To 6, excl 18 24 Z Z Z Z
    6 to 10, excl 15 18 22 24 27 29
    10 to 12, excl 8 8 10 11 13 15
    12 to 20, excl 7 8 8 10 13 13
    20 to 25, excl 7 8 8 8 10 11
    25 to 50, excl 7 7 7 8 8 8
    TABLE S27.3 Permissible Variations from Flatness for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Plates As-Rolled or Normalized Ordered to
    Restrictive Flatness
    NOTE 1—Flatness Variations for Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the length shall not
    exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft of longer plates.
    NOTE 2—Flatness Variations for Width—The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
    NOTE 3—When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 3/8 in. in each
    direction. When the larger dimension is from 36 to 72 in., inclusive, the permissible flatness variation shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount for
    the specified width but in no case less than 3/8 in.
    NOTE 4—This table and these notes cover the flatness variations of circular and sketch plates based on the maximum dimensions of those plates.
    NOTE 5—Waviness tolerances for rectangular plates, universal mill plates, and circular and sketch plates do not apply.
    NOTE 6—A “Z” indicates that there is no published restricted value for the size.
    NOTE 7—Plates shall be in horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
    Specified
    Thickness, in.
    Permissible Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in.
    48 to 60, excl 60 to 72, excl 72 to 84, excl 84 to 96, excl 96 to 108, excl 108 to 120, incl
    To 1/4 , excl 11/16 17/16 Z Z Z Z
    1/4 to 3/8, excl 7/8 11/16 15/16 17/16 11/2 111/16
    3/8 to 1/2, excl 1/2 1/2 9/16 11/16 3/4 13/16
    1/2 to 3/4, excl 7/16 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16
    3/4 to 1, excl 7/16 7/16 1/2 1/2 9/16 11/16
    1 to 2, incl 3/8 7/16 7/16 1/2 1/2 1/2
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    81
    ANNEXES
    (Mandatory Information)
    A1. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS, ETC.—INCH-POUND UNITS
    A1.1 Listed below are permissible variations in dimensions,
    and notch toughness information, expressed in inch-pound
    units of measurement.
    TABLE S27.4 Permissible Variations from Flatness for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Plates As-Rolled or Normalized Ordered to
    Restrictive Flatness
    NOTE 1—Flatness Variations for Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the length shall not
    exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 3700 mm in length, or in any 3700 mm of longer plates.
    NOTE 2—Flatness Variations for Width—The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
    NOTE 3—When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 10 mm in each
    direction. When the larger dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, inclusive, the permissible flatness variation shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount
    for the specified width, but in no case less than 10 mm.
    NOTE 4—This table and these notes cover the variations for flatness of circular and sketch plates based on the maximum dimensions of those plates.
    NOTE 5—Waviness tolerances for rectangular plates, universal mill plates, and circular and sketch plates do not apply.
    NOTE 6—A “Z” indicates that there is no published restricted value for the size.
    NOTE 7—Plates shall in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
    Specified
    Thickness, mm
    Permissible Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, mm
    1200 to 1500, excl 1500 to 1800, excl 1800 to 2100, excl 2100 to 2400, excl 2400 to 2700, excl 2700 to 3000, incl
    To 6, excl 27 36 Z Z Z Z
    6 to 10, excl 22 27 33 36 39 43
    10 to 12, excl 12 12 15 17 19 21
    12 to 20, excl 11 11 13 15 16 18
    20 to 25, excl 11 11 12 13 15 17
    25 to 50, excl 10 11 11 12 13 13
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    82
    TABLE A1.1 Permissible Variations in Thickness for Rectangular Plates
    NOTE 1—Permissible variation under specified thickness, 0.01 in. When so specified, these permitted variations may be taken all over, in which case
    the sum of these permitted variations applies.
    NOTE 2—Thickness to be measured at 3/8 to 3/4 in. from the longitudinal edge.
    NOTE 3—For thickness measured at any location other than that specified in Note 2, the permissible maximum over-tolerance shall be increased by
    75 %, rounded to the nearest 0.01 in.
    Specified
    Thickness,
    in.
    Tolerance Over Specified Thickness for Widths Given, in.
    48
    and
    under
    Over 48
    to 60,
    excl
    60 to
    72,
    excl
    72 to
    84,
    excl
    84 to
    96,
    excl
    96 to
    108,
    excl
    108 to
    120,
    excl
    120 to
    132,
    excl
    132 to
    144,
    excl
    144 to
    168,
    excl
    168 to
    182,
    excl
    182
    and
    over
    To 1/4 , excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 … … …
    1/4 to 5/16, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 … … …
    5/16 to 3/8, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.05 … …
    3/8 to 7/16, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.06 …
    7/16 to 1/2, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.06 …
    1/2 to 5/8, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 …
    5/8 to 3/4, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.07
    3/4 to 1, excl 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09
    1 to 2, excl 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.11 0.13 0.16
    2 to 3, excl 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.10 0.10 0.11 0.12 0.13 0.14 0.15 0.15 …
    3 to 4, excl 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.13 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.15 0.17 …
    4 to 6, excl 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.20 …
    6 to 10, excl 0.23 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.27 0.28 …
    10 to 12, excl 0.29 0.29 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.35 …
    12 to 15, incl 0.29 0.29 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 …
    TABLE A1.2 Permissible Variations in Width and Length for Sheared Plates 11/2 in. and Under in Thickness; Length Only for Universal
    Mill Plates 21/2 in. and Under in Thickness
    Specified Dimensions, in. Permissible Variations over Specified Width and LengthA for Thicknesses Given in inches, in.
    Length Width
    To 3/8,excl 3/8 to 5/8 , excl 5/8 to 1, excl 1 to 2, inclB
    Width Length Width Length Width Length Width Length
    To 120, excl over 8 to 60, excl 3/8 1/2 7/16 5/8 1/2 3/4 5/8 1
    60 to 84, excl 7/16 5/8 1/2 11/16 5/8 7/8 3/4 1
    84 to 108, excl 1/2 3/4 5/8 7/8 3/4 1 1 11/8
    108 and over 5/8 7/8 3/4 1 7/8 11/8 11/8 11/4
    120 to 240, excl over 8 to 60, excl 3/8 3/4 1/2 7/8 5/8 1 3/4 11/8
    60 to 84, excl 1/2 3/4 5/8 7/8 3/4 1 7/8 11/4
    84 to 108, excl 9/16 7/8 11/16 15/16 13/16 11/8 1 13/8
    108 and over 5/8 1 3/4 11/8 7/8 11/4 11/8 13/8
    240 to 360, excl over 8 to 60, excl 3/8 1 1/2 11/8 5/8 11/4 3/4 11/2
    60 to 84, excl 1/2 1 5/8 11/8 3/4 11/4 7/8 11/2
    84 to 108, excl 9/16 1 11/16 11/8 7/8 13/8 1 11/2
    108 and over 11/16 11/8 7/8 11/4 1 13/8 11/4 13/4
    360 to 480, excl over 8 to 60, excl 7/16 11/8 1/2 11/4 5/8 13/8 3/4 15/8
    60 to 84, excl 1/2 11/4 5/8 13/8 3/4 11/2 7/8 15/8
    84 to 108, excl 9/16 11/4 3/4 13/8 7/8 11/2 1 17/8
    108 and over 3/4 13/8 7/8 11/2 1 15/8 11/4 17/8
    480 to 600, excl over 8 to 60, excl 7/16 11/4 1/2 11/2 5/8 15/8 3/4 17/8
    60 to 84, excl 1/2 13/8 5/8 11/2 3/4 15/8 7/8 17/8
    84 to 108, excl 5/8 13/8 3/4 11/2 7/8 15/8 1 17/8
    108 and over 3/4 11/2 7/8 15/8 1 13/4 11/4 17/8
    600 to 720, excl over 8 to 60, excl 1/2 13/4 5/8 17/8 3/4 17/8 7/8 21/4
    60 to 84, excl 5/8 13/4 3/4 17/8 7/8 17/8 1 21/4
    84 to 108, excl 5/8 13/4 3/4 17/8 7/8 17/8 11/8 21/4
    108 and over 7/8 13/4 1 2 11/8 21/4 11/4 21/2
    720 and over over 8 to 60, excl 9/16 2 3/4 21/8 7/8 21/4 1 23/4
    60 to 84, excl 3/4 2 7/8 21/8 1 21/4 11/8 23/4
    84 to 108, excl 3/4 2 7/8 21/8 1 21/4 11/4 23/4
    108 and over 1 2 11/8 23/8 11/4 21/2 13/8 3
    A Permissible variation under specified width and length: 1/4 in. By agreement, these permitted variations may be taken all over, in which case the sum of these permitted
    variations applies.
    B Permissible variations in length apply also to Universal Mill plates up to 12 in. in width for thicknesses over 2 to 21/2 in., incl, except for alloy steel up to 2 in. thick.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    83
    TABLE A1.3 Permissible Variations in Rolled Width for Universal
    Mill Carbon Steel, High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel, and Alloy-Steel
    Plates 15 in. and under in Thickness
    NOTE 1—Permissible variation under specified width shall be 1/8 in.
    Specified Width, in.
    Variations Over Specified Width for
    Thicknesses Given, in.
    To 3/8 ,
    excl
    3/8 to 5/8,
    excl
    5/8 to 1,
    excl
    1 to 2,
    incl
    Over 2
    to 10,
    incl
    Over 10
    to 15,
    incl
    Over 8 to 20, excl 1/8 1/8 3/16 1/4 3/8 1/2
    20 to 36, excl 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 9/16
    36 and over 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8
    TABLE A1.4 Permissible Variations in Diameter for Sheared
    Circular Carbon Steel, High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel, and Alloy
    Steel Plates 1 in. and under in Thickness
    NOTE 1—No permissible variations under specified diameter.
    Specified
    Diameter, in.
    Permissible Variations Over Specified Diameter
    for Thicknesses Given, in.
    To 3/8 ,
    excl
    3/8 to 5/8,
    excl
    5/8 to 1,
    incl
    To 32, excl 1/4 3/8 1/2
    32 to 84, excl 5/16 7/16 9/16
    84 to 108, excl 3/8 1/2 5/8
    108 to 130, incl 7/16 9/16 11/16
    TABLE A1.5 Permissible Variations in Width and Length for
    Rectangular Carbon Steel and High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel
    Plates when Gas Cutting is Specified or Required
    NOTE 1—These variations may be taken all under or divided over and
    under, if so specified.
    NOTE 2—Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length
    only.
    Specified Thickness, in.
    Variations Over for All Specified
    Widths or Lengths, in.
    To 2, excl 1/2
    2 to 4, excl 5/8
    4 to 6, excl 3/4
    6 to 8, excl 7/8
    8 to 15, incl 1
    TABLE A1.6 Permissible Variations in Diameter for Gas-Cut
    Circular Carbon Steel and High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Plates
    NOTE 1—No permissible variations under specified diameter
    Specified
    Diameter, in.
    Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given, in.
    To 1,
    excl
    1 to 2,
    excl
    2 to 4,
    excl
    4 to 6,
    excl
    6 to 8,
    excl
    8 to 15,
    incl
    To 32, excl 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 3/4
    32 to 84, excl 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8
    84 to 108, excl 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1
    108 to 130, excl 1/2 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 11/8
    130 and over 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 11/8 11/4
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    84
    TABLE A1.7 Permissible Camber for Carbon Steel Sheared or
    Gas-Cut Rectangular Plates all Thicknesses
    NOTE 1—Camber, as it relates to plates, is the horizontal edge curvature
    in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the flat
    position.
    Maximum permissible camber, in. = 1/8 in. × (number of feet of length/5)
    TABLE A1.8 Permissible Camber for Carbon Steel, High-Strength
    Low-Alloy Steel, and Alloy Steel Universal Mill Plates and High-
    Strength Low-Alloy Steel and Alloy Steel Sheared or Gas-Cut
    Rectangular Plates
    Dimension, in. Camber for Thickness
    Thickness Width and Widths Given
    To 2, incl all 1/8 in. × (number of feet of length/5)
    Over 2 to 15, incl to 30, incl 3/16 in. × (number of feet of length/5)
    Over 2 to 15, incl over 30 1/4 in. × (number of feet of length/5)
    TABLE A1.9 Permissible Variations from Flatness for Carbon Steel Plates
    NOTE 1—Flatness Variations for Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the length shall not
    exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft of longer plates.
    NOTE 2—Flatness Variations for Width—The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
    NOTE 3—When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 1/4 in. in each
    direction. When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 in., inclusive, the flatness variation shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount for the specified
    width, but in no case less than 1/4 in.
    NOTE 4—The tolerances given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 60 ksi or comparable chemistry or
    hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or comparable chemistry or hardness, the limits given in the table are increased to
    11/2 times the amounts in the above table.
    NOTE 5—This table and notes cover the flatness tolerances of circular and sketch plates, based on the maximum dimensions of those plates.
    NOTE 6—Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
    Specified
    Thickness, in.
    Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in.
    Over 8
    to 36,
    excl
    36 to 48,
    excl
    48 to 60,
    excl
    60 to 72,
    excl
    72 to 84,
    excl
    84 to 96,
    excl
    96 to 108,
    excl
    108 to 120,
    excl
    120 to 144,
    excl
    144 to 168,
    excl
    168 and
    over
    To 1/4 , excl 9/16 3/4 15/16 11/4 13/8 11/2 15/8 13/4 17/8 … …
    1/4 to 3/8, excl 1/2 5/8 3/4 15/16 11/8 11/4 13/8 11/2 15/8 … …
    3/8 to 1/2, excl 1/2 9/16 5/8 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 11/8 11/4 17/8 21/8
    1/2 to 3/4, excl 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 5/8 3/4 1 1 11/8 11/2 2
    3/4 to 1, excl 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 13/8 13/4
    1 to 2, excl 3/8 1/2 1/2 9/16 9/16 5/8 5/8 5/8 11/16 11/8 11/2
    2 to 4 excl 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 9/16 5/8 7/8 11/8
    4 to 6, excl 3/8 7/16 1/2 1/2 9/16 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 7/8 1
    6 to 8, excl 7/16 1/2 1/2 5/8 11/16 3/4 7/8 7/8 1 1 1
    8 to 10 excl 1/2 1/2 5/8 11/16 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 1 1
    10 to 12, excl 1/2 5/8 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 1 1 1 1
    12 to 15, incl 5/8 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 1 1 1 1 …
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    85
    TABLE A1.10 Permissible Variations in Width and Length for
    Rectangular Alloy Steel Plates when Gas Cutting is Specified or
    Required
    NOTE 1—These variations may be taken all under or divided over and
    under, if so specified.
    NOTE 2— Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length
    only.
    Specified Thickness, in. Variations Over for All Specified
    Widths and Lengths, in.
    To 2, excl 3/4
    2 to 4, excl 1
    4 to 6, excl 11/8
    6 to 8, excl 15/16
    8 to 15, incl 11/2
    TABLE A1.11 Permissible Variations in Diameter for Gas-Cut
    Circular Alloy Steel Plates
    NOTE 1—No permissible variations under specified diameter.
    Specified
    Diameter, in.
    Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given,
    in.
    To 1,
    excl
    1 to 2,
    excl
    2 to 4,
    excl
    4 to
    6,
    excl
    6 to
    8,
    excl
    8 to
    15
    incl
    To 32, excl 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1
    32 to 84, excl 1/2 5/8 7/8 1 11/8 11/4
    84 to 108, excl 5/8 3/4 1 11/8 11/4 13/8
    108 to 130, incl 7/8 1 11/8 11/4 13/8 11/2
    TABLE A1.12 Permissible Variations from Flatness for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel and Alloy Steel Plates
    NOTE 1—Flatness Tolerances for Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length and variations from a flat surface along the length
    shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft of longer plates.
    NOTE 2—Flatness Tolerances for Width—The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
    NOTE 3—When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the variation shall not exceed 3/8 in. When the larger dimension is from 36 to 72 in., incl, the
    variation shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount for the specified width.
    NOTE 4—This table and notes cover the tolerances for flatness of circular and sketch plates, based on the maximum dimensions of those plates.
    NOTE 5—Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
    Specified
    Thickness, in.
    Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in.
    Over 8
    to 36,
    excl
    36 to
    48, excl
    48 to
    60, excl
    60 to
    72, excl
    72 to
    84, excl
    84 to
    96, excl
    96 to
    108, excl
    108 to
    120, excl
    120 to
    144, excl
    144 to
    168, excl
    168 and
    Over
    To 1/4 , excl 13/16 11/8 13/8 17/8 2 21/4 23/8 25/8 23/4 … …
    1/4 to 3/8, excl 3/4 15/16 11/8 13/8 13/4 17/8 2 21/4 23/8 … …
    3/8 to 1/2, excl 3/4 7/8 15/16 15/16 11/8 15/16 11/2 15/8 17/8 23/4 31/8
    1/2 to 3/4, excl 5/8 3/4 13/16 7/8 1 11/8 11/4 13/8 15/8 21/4 3
    3/4 to 1, excl 5/8 3/4 7/8 7/8 15/16 1 11/8 15/16 11/2 2 25/8
    1 to 2, excl 9/16 5/8 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 1 1 15/8 21/4
    2 to 4, excl 1/2 9/16 11/16 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 11/4 15/8
    4 to 6, excl 9/16 11/16 3/4 3/4 7/8 7/8 15/16 11/8 11/4 11/4 11/2
    6 to 8, excl 5/8 3/4 3/4 15/16 1 11/8 11/4 15/16 11/2 11/2 11/2
    8 to 10, excl 3/4 13/16 15/16 1 11/8 11/4 15/16 13/8 11/2 11/2 11/2
    10 to 12, excl 3/4 15/16 11/8 11/4 15/16 13/8 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
    12 to 15, incl 7/8 1 13/16 15/16 13/8 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    86
    TABLE A1.13 Waviness Tolerances for Rectangular Plates, Universal Mill Plates, Circular Plates, and Sketch Plates
    NOTE 1—Waviness denotes the deviation of the top or bottom surface from a horizontal line, when the plate is resting on a flat surface, as measured
    in an increment of less than 12 ft of length. The waviness tolerance is a function of the flatness tolerance as obtained from Tables A1.9 and A1.12.
    Flatness
    Tolerance
    from Tables
    A1.9 and
    A1.12
    When Number of Waves in 12 ft is:
    1 2 3 4 5 6 7
    5/16 5/16 1/4 3/16 1/8 1/8 1/16 1/16
    3/8 3/8 5/16 3/16 3/16 1/8 1/16 1/16
    7/16 7/16 5/16 1/4 3/16 1/8 1/8 1/16
    1/2 1/2 3/8 5/16 3/16 3/16 1/8 1/16
    9/16 9/16 7/16 5/16 1/4 3/16 1/8 1/8
    5/8 5/8 1/2 3/8 1/4 3/16 1/8 1/8
    11/16 11/16 1/2 3/8 5/16 3/16 3/16 1/8
    3/4 3/4 9/16 7/16 5/16 1/4 3/16 1/8
    13/16 13/16 5/8 7/16 5/16 1/4 3/16 1/8
    7/8 7/8 11/16 1/2 3/8 1/4 3/16 1/8
    15/16 15/16 11/16 1/2 3/8 5/16 1/4 3/16
    1 1 3/4 9/16 7/16 5/16 1/4 3/16
    11/8 11/8 7/8 5/8 1/2 3/8 1/4 3/16
    11/4 11/4 15/16 11/16 1/2 3/8 5/16 1/4
    13/8 13/8 11/16 3/4 9/16 7/16 5/16 1/4
    11/2 11/2 11/8 7/8 5/8 1/2 3/8 1/4
    15/8 15/8 11/4 15/16 11/16 1/2 3/8 5/16
    13/4 13/4 15/16 1 3/4 9/16 7/16 5/16
    17/8 17/8 17/16 11/16 13/16 9/16 7/16 5/16
    2 2 11/2 11/8 7/8 5/8 1/2 3/8
    21/8 21/8 15/8 13/16 7/8 11/16 1/2 3/8
    21/4 21/4 111/16 11/4 15/16 11/16 9/16 3/8
    23/8 23/8 113/16 1 5/16 1 3/4 9/16 7/16
    21/2 21/2 17/8 17/16 11/16 13/16 9/16 7/16
    25/8 25/8 2 11/2 11/8 13/16 5/8 7/16
    23/4 23/4 21/16 19/16 11/8 7/8 5/8 1/2
    27/8 27/8 23/16 15/8 13/16 15/16 11/16 1/2
    3 3 21/4 111/16 11/4 15/16 11/16 9/16
    31/8 31/8 23/8 13/4 15/16 1 3/4 9/16
    TABLE A1.14 Visible Edge Indications Extending Approximately Parallel to Rolled Surfaces
    Plate Specification
    and Thickness
    Acceptable Remove by Grinding Acceptable on Edges
    Cut in Fabrication
    Depth LengthA Depth LengthA Depth LengthA
    Column 1 2 3 4 5 6
    Other than killed,B to 2 in., incl 1/8 in. max any over 1/8 in. to 1/4 in., incl over 1 in. 1/4 in. max any
    Killed,C to 6 in., incl 1/16 in. max any over 1/16 in. to 1/8 in., incl over 1 in. 1/8 in. max any
    Killed,C over 6 in. 1/8 in. max any over 1/8 in. to 1/2 in., incl over 1 in. 1/2 in. max any
    A Laminar-type discontinuities 1 in. and less in length are acceptable and do not require exploration.
    B Specifications: A285; A433; A442 in thicknesses to 1 in., incl; or A455.
    C The specification in 1.1 of this standard, other than those listed in the above Footnote B.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    87
    TABLE A1.15 Generally Available Grade-Thickness-Minimum Test Temperature Combinations Meeting Charpy V-Notch Requirements
    Indicated (Normalized or Quenched and Tempered Condition)
    NOTE 1—The minimum temperatures listed are for longitudinal tests. For transverse tests, the available minimum temperature may be somewhat higher.
    Acceptance Criteria Charpy V-Notch
    Specification and GradeA
    Test Temperature, °F for Plate Thicknesses (Unless
    Otherwise Agreed Upon)
    Energy Absorption
    1 in. and Under
    Over 1 in. to 2 in.,
    incl.
    Over 2 in. to 3 in.,
    incl.
    Over 3 in. to 5 in.,
    ClassB incl.
    MinimumAverage
    For 3
    SpecimensC
    ft·lbf
    Minimum For
    1 SpecimenC
    ft·lbf
    I 10 7 A285 Grade A +40 +60 . . . . . .
    A285 Grade B +50 +70 . . . . . .
    A285 Grade C +60 +80 . . . . . .
    II 13 10 A455 +25 . . . . . . . . .
    III 13 10 A203 Grade A -90 -90 -75 . . .
    A203 Grade D -150 -150 -125 . . .
    A442 Grade 55 (11/2 in. max thickness . . . -20 . . . . . .
    A442 Grade 60 (11/2 in. max thickness) . . . -15 . . . . . .
    A516 Grade 55 -60 -60 -50 -50
    A516 Grade 60 -60 -50 -50 -50
    A516 Grade 65 -60 -50 -40 -25
    A537 Class 1
    (Over 21/2 –4 in.)
    . . . . . . -75 -50
    A662 Grade A -75 -75 . . . . . .
    A662 Grade B -60 -60 . . . . . .
    IV 15 12 A203 Grade B -90 -90 -75 . . .
    A203 Grade E -150 -150 -125 . . .
    A203 Grade F (4 in. max) . . . . . . -160 -160
    A299 +20 +30 +30 +40
    A516 Grade 70 -50 -40 -30 -20
    A537 Class 1 (21/2 in. max) -80 -75 -75 . . .
    A537 Class 2 (Over
    21/2 –4 in.)
    . . . . . . -75 -50
    A662 Grade C -50 -50 . . . . . .
    V 20 15 A203 Grade F -160 -160 . . . . . .
    A537 Class 2 (21/2 in. max) -90 -90 -90 . . .
    A612 -50 . . . . . . . . .
    A724 Grade A -50 . . . . . . . . .
    Lateral Expansion
    Mils. Minimum
    Each Specimen
    Transverse Test
    VI 15 A353 -320 -320 . . . . . .
    A553 Type I -320 -320 . . . . . .
    A553 Type II -275 -275 . . . . . .
    A645 -275 -275 . . . . . .
    A517 all (21/2 in. max thickness) A A . . . . . .
    A724 Grade B -50 . . . . . . . . .
    A Testing temperature as specified in the purchase order, but no higher than 32°F.
    B Class I is Other Than Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi or lower.
    Class II is Other Than Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 65 ksi to 75 ksi.
    Class III is Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi or lower.
    Class IV is Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 65 ksi to 75 ksi.
    Class V is Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 75 ksi to but not including 95 ksi.
    Class VI is Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 95 ksi or over.
    C Full size (10 by 10 mm) specimens.
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    88
    A2. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS, ETC.—SI UNITS
    A2.1 Listed herein are permissible variations in dimensions,
    and notch toughness information, expressed in SI units.
    TABLE A1.16 Charpy V-Notch Test Acceptance Criteria for Various Subsize SpecimensA
    Full Size, 10 by
    10 mm
    3/4 Size, 10 by
    7.5 mm
    2/3 Size, 10 by
    6.7 mm
    1/2 Size, 10 by 5
    mm
    1/3 Size, 10 by
    3.3 mm
    1/4 Size, 10 by
    2.5 mm
    ft·lbf [J] ft·lbf [J] ft·lbf [J] ft·lbf [J] ft·lbf [J] ft·lbf [J]
    40 [54] 30 [41] 27 [37] 20 [27] 13 [18] 10 [14]
    35 [48] 26 [35] 23 [31] 18 [24] 12 [16] 9 [12]
    30 [41] 22 [30] 20 [27] 15 [20] 10 [14] 8 [11]
    25 [34] 19 [26] 17 [23] 12 [16] 8 [11] 6 [8]
    20 [27] 15 [20] 13 [18] 10 [14] 7 [10] 5 [7]
    16 [22] 12 [16] 11 [15] 8 [11] 5 [7] 4 [5]
    15 [20] 11 [15] 10 [14] 8 [11] 5 [7] 4 [5]
    13 [18] 10 [14] 9 [12] 6 [8] 4 [5] 3 [4]
    12 [16] 9 [12] 8 [11] 6 [8] 4 [5] 3 [4]
    10 [14] 8 [11] 7 [10] 5 [7] 3 [4] 2 [3]
    7 [10] 5 [7] 5 [7] 4 [5] 2 [3] 2 [3]
    A Interpolation shall be made for specimens with widths intermediate of those listed. Interpolated values shall be rounded to the nearest whole number as prescribed in
    Practice E29.
    TABLE A1.17 Permissible Variations in Width for Mill Edge
    Carbon Steel and High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Plates Produced
    on Strip Mills
    NOTE 1—Applies to plates produced from coil and plates produced
    from plate-as-rolled.
    Specified Width, in. Variations
    over SpecifiedWidth, inA
    To 14, excl 7/16
    14 to 17, excl 1/2
    17 to 19, excl 9/16
    19 to 21, excl 5/8
    21 to 24, excl 11/16
    24 to 26, excl 13/16
    26 to 28, excl 15/16
    28 to 35, excl 11/8
    35 to 50, excl 11/4
    50 to 60, excl 11/2
    60 to 65, excl 15/8
    65 to 70, excl 13/4
    70 to 80, excl 17/8
    80 and over 2
    A No permissible variation under specified width.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    89
    TABLE A2.1 Permissible Variations in Thickness for Rectangular Plates
    NOTE 1—Permissible variation under specified thickness, 0.3 mm. When so specified, these permitted variations may be taken all over, in which case
    the sum of these permitted variations applies.
    NOTE 2—Thickness shall be measured 10 to 20 mm from the longitudinal edge.
    NOTE 3—For specified thicknesses other than those shown, the tolerances for the next higher thickness shall apply.
    NOTE 4—For thickness measured at any location other than that specified in Note 2, the permissible maximum over tolerance shall be increased by
    75 %, rounded to the nearest 0.1 mm.
    Specified
    Thickness,
    mm
    Tolerance Over Specified Thickness for Widths Given in Millimetres, mm
    1200 and
    Under
    Over 1200 to
    1500, excl
    1500 to
    1800,
    excl
    1800 to
    2100,
    excl
    2100 to
    2400,
    excl
    2400 to
    2700,
    excl
    2700 to
    3000,
    excl
    3000 to
    3300,
    excl
    3300 to
    3600,
    excl
    3600 to
    4200,
    excl
    4200 and
    Over
    5.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0
    5.5 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0
    6.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1
    7.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4
    8.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4
    9.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.3 1.5
    10.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.7
    11.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.7
    12.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.8
    14.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.8
    16.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.8
    18.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.4 1.6 2.0
    20.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.6 2.0
    22.0 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.0
    25.0 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.8 2.2
    28.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.2
    30.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.4
    32.0 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.6 2.0 2.0 2.3 2.6
    35.0 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.6 1.7 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.8
    38.0 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.7 1.8 2.3 2.3 2.7 3.0
    40.0 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.8 3.3
    45.0 1.6 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.8 2.8 3.0 3.5
    50.0 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.0 2.3 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.3 3.8
    55.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.3 3.3 3.5 3.8
    60.0 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.4 2.4 2.8 3.0 3.4 3.4 3.8 4.0
    70.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.6 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.6 4.0 4.0
    80.0 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 3.3 3.5 3.5 3.6 4.0 4.0
    90.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.6 4.0 4.4
    100.0 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.5 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.4 4.4
    110.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.4 4.4
    120.0 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.8 4.8
    130.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 5.2 5.2
    140.0 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 5.6 5.6
    150.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.6 5.6
    160.0 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 5.6 5.6
    180.0 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 6.3 6.3
    200.0 5.8 5.8 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 7.0 7.0
    250.0 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 8.8
    300.0 7.5 7.5 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    90
    TABLE A2.2 Permissible Variations in Width and Length for Sheared Plates 40 mm and Under in Thickness; Length only for Universal
    Mill Plates 65 mm and Under in Thickness
    Specified Dimensions, mm Permissible Variations over Specified Width and LengthA for
    Thicknesses Given in millimetres, mm
    Length Width To 10, excl 10 to 16, excl 16 to 25, excl 25 to 50, inclB
    Width Length Width Length Width Length Width Length
    To 3 000 excl to 1500 excl 10 13 11 16 13 19 16 25
    1500 to 2100 excl 11 16 13 17 16 22 19 25
    2100 to 2700 excl 13 19 16 22 19 25 25 29
    2700 and over 16 22 19 25 22 29 29 32
    3 000 to 6 000 excl to 1500 excl 10 19 13 22 16 25 19 29
    1500 to 2100 excl 13 19 16 22 19 25 22 32
    2100 to 2700 excl 14 22 17 24 21 29 25 35
    2700 and over 16 25 19 29 22 32 29 35
    6 000 to 9 000 excl to 1500 excl 10 25 13 29 16 32 19 38
    1500 to 2100 excl 13 25 16 29 19 32 22 38
    2100 to 2700 excl 14 25 17 32 22 35 25 38
    2700 and over 17 29 22 32 25 35 32 44
    9 000 to 12 000 excl to 1500 excl 11 29 13 32 16 35 19 41
    1500 to 2100 excl 13 32 16 35 19 38 22 41
    2100 to 2700 excl 14 32 19 35 22 38 25 48
    2700 and over 19 35 22 38 25 41 32 48
    12 000 to 15 000 excl to 1500 excl 11 32 13 38 16 41 19 48
    1500 to 2100 excl 13 35 16 38 19 41 22 48
    2100 to 2700 excl 16 35 19 38 22 41 25 48
    2700 and over 19 38 22 41 25 44 32 48
    15 000 to 18 000 excl to 1500 excl 13 44 16 48 19 48 22 57
    1500 to 2100 excl 16 44 19 48 22 48 25 57
    2100 to 2700 excl 16 44 19 48 22 48 29 57
    2700 and over 22 44 25 51 29 57 32 64
    18 000 and over to 1500 excl 14 51 19 54 22 57 25 70
    1500 to 2100 excl 19 51 22 54 25 57 29 70
    2100 to 2700 excl 19 51 22 54 25 57 32 70
    2700 and over 25 51 29 60 32 64 35 76
    A Permissible variation under specified width and length: 6 mm. By agreement, these permitted variations may be taken all over, in which case the sum of these permitted
    variations applies.
    B Permissible variations in length apply also to Universal Mill plates up to 300 mm in width for thicknesses over 50 to 65 mm, incl, except for alloy steel up to 50 mm thick.
    TABLE A2.3 Permissible Variations in Rolled Width for Universal
    Mill Carbon Steel, High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Plates, and
    Alloy Steel Plates 400 mm and under in Thickness
    NOTE 1—Permissible variation under specified width shall be 3 mm.
    Specified Width,
    mm
    Variations Over Specified Width for Thickness Given, mm
    To 10,
    excl
    10 to
    16,
    excl
    16 to
    25,
    excl
    25 to
    50,
    excl
    Over
    50 to
    250,
    incl
    Over
    250 to
    400,
    incl
    Over 200 to 500, 3 3 5 6 10 13
    excl
    500 to 900, excl 5 6 8 10 11 14
    900 and over 8 10 11 13 14 16
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    91
    TABLE A2.4 Permissible Variations in Diameter for Sheared
    Circular Carbon Steel, High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel, and Alloy
    Steel Plates 25 mm and under in Thickness
    NOTE 1—No permissible variations under specified diameter.
    Specified
    Diameters, mm
    Permissible Variations
    Over Specified Diameter
    for Thicknesses Given, mm
    To 10,
    excl
    10 to
    16, excl
    16 to 25,
    incl
    To 800, excl 6 10 13
    800 to 2100, excl 8 11 14
    2100 to 2700, excl 10 13 16
    2700 to 3300, excl 11 14 17
    3300 and over 13 16 19
    TABLE A2.5 Permissible Variations in Width and Length for
    Rectangular Carbon Steel and High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel
    Plates when Gas Cutting is Specified or Required
    NOTE 1—These variations may be taken all under or divided over and
    under, if so specified.
    NOTE 2—Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length
    only.
    Specified Thickness, mm Variations Over for All Specified
    Widths or Lengths, mm
    To 50, excl 13
    50 to 100, excl 16
    100 to 150, excl 19
    150 to 200, excl 22
    200 to 400, incl 25
    TABLE A2.6 Permissible Variations in Diameter for Gas-Cut
    Circular Carbon Steel and High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Plates
    NOTE 1—No permissible variations under specified diameter.
    Specified
    Diameters,
    mm
    Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses
    Given, mm
    To 25,
    excl
    25 to
    50,
    excl
    50 to
    100,
    excl
    100 to
    150,
    excl
    150 to
    200,
    excl
    200 to
    400,
    excl
    To 800, excl 10 10 13 13 16 19
    800 to 2100, 10 13 13 16 19 22
    excl
    2100 to 2700, 13 14 16 19 22 25
    excl
    2700 to 3300, 13 14 17 22 25 29
    excl
    3300 and over 16 19 22 25 29 32
    TABLE A2.7 Permissible Camber for Carbon Steel Sheared or
    Gas-Cut Rectangular Plates all Thicknesses
    NOTE 1—Camber, as it relates to plates, is the horizontal edge curvature
    in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the flat
    position.
    Maximum permissible camber, mm = length in millimetres/500
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    92
    TABLE A2.8 Permissible Camber for Carbon Steel, High-Strength
    Low-Alloy Steel, and Alloy Steel Universal Mill Plates and High-
    Strength Low-Alloy Steel and Alloy Steel Sheared or Gas-Cut
    Rectangular Plates
    NOTE 1—Camber, as it relates to plates, is the horizontal edge curvature
    in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the flat
    position.
    Width, mm Camber for Width Given, mm
    To 750, incl
    Over 750 to 1500
    Length/300
    Length/250
    TABLE A2.9 Permissible Variations from Flatness for Carbon Steel Plates
    NOTE 1—Flatness Variations for Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the length shall not
    exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 4000 mm in length, or in any 4000 mm of longer plates.
    NOTE 2—Flatness Variations for Width—The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
    NOTE 3—When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 6 mm in each
    direction. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, inclusive, the flatness variation shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount for the
    specified width, but in no case less than 6 mm.
    NOTE 4—The tolerances given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 415 MPa or comparable chemistry
    or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or comparable chemistry or hardness, the limits given in the table are increased
    to 11/2 times the amounts in the above table.
    NOTE 5—This table and notes cover the flatness tolerances of circular and sketch plates, based on the maximum dimensions of those plates.
    NOTE 6—Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
    Specified Thickness,
    mm
    Permissible Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, mm
    To 900,
    excl
    900 to
    1200
    1200 to
    1500
    1500 to
    1800
    1800 to
    2100
    2100 to
    2400
    2400 to
    2700
    2700 to
    3000
    3000 to
    3600
    3600 to
    4200
    4200 and
    0ver
    To 6, excl 14 19 24 32 35 38 41 44 48 . . . . . .
    6 to 10, excl 13 16 19 24 29 32 35 38 41 . . . . . .
    10 to 12, excl 13 14 16 16 19 22 25 29 32 48 54
    12 to 20, excl 11 13 14 16 16 19 25 25 29 38 51
    20 to 25, excl 11 13 14 16 16 16 19 22 25 35 44
    25 to 50, excl 10 13 13 14 14 16 16 16 18 29 38
    50 to 100, excl 8 10 11 13 13 13 13 14 16 22 29
    100 to 150, excl 10 11 13 13 14 14 16 19 22 22 25
    150 to 200, excl 11 13 13 16 18 19 22 22 25 25 25
    200 to 250, excl 13 13 16 18 19 21 22 24 25 25 25
    250 to 300, excl 13 16 19 21 22 24 25 25 25 25 25
    300 to 400, incl 16 19 21 22 24 25 25 25 25 25 . . .
    TABLE A2.10 Permissible Variations in Width and Length for
    Rectangular Alloy Steel Plates when Gas Cutting is Specified or
    Required
    NOTE 1—These variations may be taken all under or divided over and
    under, if so specified.
    NOTE 2—Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to length
    only.
    Specified Thickness, mm Variations Over for All Specified
    Widths and Lengths, mm
    To 50, excl 19
    50 to 100, excl 25
    100 to 150, excl 29
    150 to 200, excl 33
    200 to 400, incl 38
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    93
    TABLE A2.11 Permissible Variations in Diameter for Gas Cut
    Circular Alloy Steel Plates
    NOTE 1—No permissible variations under specified diameter.
    Specified
    Diameter, mm
    Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses
    Given, mm
    To 25,
    excl
    25 to
    50,
    excl
    50 to
    100,
    excl
    100 to
    150,
    excl
    150 to
    200,
    excl
    200 to
    400,
    incl
    To 800, excl 13 13 19 19 25 25
    800 to 2100, excl 13 16 22 25 29 32
    2100 to 2700, excl 16 19 25 29 32 35
    2700 to 3300, incl 22 25 29 32 35 38
    TABLE A2.12 Permissible Variations from Flatness for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel and Alloy Steel Plates
    NOTE 1—Flatness Tolerances for Length—The longer dimension specified is considered the length and variations from a flat surface along the length
    shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 4000 mm in length, or in any 4000 mm of longer plates.
    NOTE 2—Flatness Tolerances for Width—The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
    NOTE 3—When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the variation shall not exceed 10 mm. When the larger dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm,
    incl, the variation shall not exceed 75 % of the tabular amount for the specified width.
    NOTE 4—This table and notes cover the tolerances for flatness of circular and sketch plates, based on the maximum dimensions of those plates.
    NOTE 5—Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
    Specified Thickness,
    mm
    Flatness Tolerances for Specified Widths, mm
    To 900,
    excl
    900 to
    1200
    1200 to
    1500
    1500 to
    1800
    1800 to
    2100
    2100 to
    2400
    2400 to
    2700
    2700 to
    3000
    3000 to
    3600
    3600 to
    4200
    4200 and
    over
    To 6, excl 21 29 35 48 51 57 60 67 70 . . . . . .
    6 to 10, excl 19 24 29 35 44 48 51 57 60 . . . . . .
    10 to 12, excl 19 22 24 24 29 33 38 41 48 70 79
    12 to 20, excl 16 19 21 22 25 29 32 35 41 57 76
    20 to 25, excl 16 19 22 22 24 25 29 33 38 51 67
    25 to 50, excl 14 16 19 21 22 24 25 25 25 41 57
    50 to 100, excl 13 14 18 19 19 19 19 22 25 32 41
    100 to 150, excl 14 18 19 19 22 22 24 29 32 32 38
    150 to 200, excl 16 19 19 24 25 29 32 33 38 38 38
    200 to 250, excl 19 21 24 25 29 32 33 35 38 38 38
    250 to 300, excl 19 24 29 32 33 35 38 38 38 38 38
    300 to 400, incl 22 25 30 33 35 38 38 38 38 38 38
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    94
    TABLE A2.13 Waviness Tolerances for Rectangular Plates, Universal Mill Plates, Circular Plates, and Sketch Plates
    NOTE 1—Waviness denotes the deviation of the top or bottom surface from a horizontal line, when the plate is resting on a flat surface, as measured
    in an increment of less than 4000 mm of length. The waviness tolerance is a function of the flatness tolerance as obtained from Tables A 2.9 and A 2.12.
    Flatness
    Tolerance
    from Tables
    A2.9 and
    A2.12
    When Number of Waves in 4000 mm is:
    1 2 3 4 5 6
    7
    8 8 6 5 3 3 2 2
    10 10 8 5 5 3 2 2
    11 11 8 6 5 3 3 2
    13 13 10 8 5 5 3 2
    14 14 11 8 6 5 3 2
    16 16 13 10 6 5 3 2
    17 17 13 10 8 5 5 2
    19 19 14 11 8 6 5 2
    21 21 16 11 8 6 5 2
    22 22 17 13 10 6 5 2
    24 24 17 13 10 8 6 5
    25 25 19 14 11 8 6 5
    29 29 22 16 13 10 6 5
    32 32 24 17 13 10 8 6
    35 35 27 19 14 11 8 6
    38 38 29 22 16 13 10 6
    41 41 32 24 17 13 10 8
    44 44 33 25 19 14 11 8
    48 48 37 27 21 14 11 8
    51 51 38 29 22 16 13 10
    54 54 41 30 22 17 13 10
    57 57 43 32 24 17 14 10
    60 60 46 33 25 19 14 11
    64 64 48 37 27 21 14 11
    67 67 51 38 29 21 16 11
    70 70 52 40 29 22 16 13
    73 73 56 41 30 24 17 13
    76 76 57 43 32 24 17 14
    79 79 60 44 33 25 19 14
    TABLE A2.14 Visible Edge Indications Extending Approximately Parallel to Rolled Surfaces
    Plate Specification
    and Thickness
    Acceptable Remove by Grinding
    Acceptable on Edges
    Cut in Fabrication
    Depth LengthA Depth LengthA Depth LengthA
    Column 1 2 3 4 5 6
    Other than killed,B to 50 mm, incl 3 mm, max any over 3 to 6 over 25 mm 6 mm max any
    mm, incl
    Killed,C to 150 mm, incl 2 mm, max any over 2 to 3 over 25 mm 3 mm max any
    mm, incl
    Killed,C over 150 mm 3 mm, max any over 3 to 13 over 25 mm 13 mm max any
    mm, incl
    A Laminar-type discontinuities 25 mm and less in length are acceptable and do not require exploration.
    B Specifications: A285; A433; A442 in thicknesses to 25 mm, incl; or A455.
    C The specifications in 1.1 of this standard, other than those listed in the above Table Footnote B.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    95
    TABLE A2.15 Generally Available Grade-Thickness-Minimum Test Temperature Combinations Meeting Charpy V-Notch Requirements
    Indicated (Normalized or Quenched and Tempered Condition)
    NOTE 1—The minimum temperatures listed are for longitudinal tests. For transverse tests, the available minimum temperature may be somewhat higher.
    Acceptance Criteria Charpy V-Notch
    Energy Absorption
    Specification and Grade
    Test Temperature, °C for Plate Thicknesses
    (Unless Otherwise Agreed Upon)
    ClassA
    Minimum Average
    For 3
    SpecimensB ,
    J
    Minimum
    For 1
    SpecimenB ,
    J
    25 mm and
    Under
    Over 25
    mm to 50
    mm, incl.
    Over 50
    mm to 75
    mm, incl.
    Over 75
    mm to 125
    mm, incl.
    I 14 10 A285 Grade A +4 +16 . . . . . .
    A285 Grade B +10 +21 . . . . . .
    A285 Grade C +16 +27 . . . . . .
    II 18 14 A455 -4 . . . . . . . . .
    III 18 14 A203 Grade A -68 -68 -60 . . .
    A203 Grade D -101 -101 -87 . . .
    A442 Grade 55 (38 mm max thickness)
    . . . -29 . . . . . .
    A442 Grade 60 (38 mm max thickness)
    . . . -26 . . . . . .
    A516 Grade 55 -51 -51 -46 -46
    A516 Grade 60 -51 -46 -46 -46
    A516 Grade 65 -51 -46 -40 -32
    A537 Class 1 (Over 64–100 mm) . . . . . . -60 -46
    A662 Grade A -60 -60 . . . . . .
    A662 Grade B -51 -51 . . . . . .
    IV 20 16 A203 Grade B -68 -68 -60 . . .
    A203 Grade E -101 -101 -87 . . .
    A203 Grade F (100 mm max) . . . . . . -107 -107
    A299 -7 -1 -1 +4
    A516 Grade 70 -46 -40 -35 -29
    A537 Class 1 (64 mm max) -62 -60 -60 . . .
    A537 Class 2 (Over 64–100 mm) . . . . . . -60 -46
    A662 Grade C -46 -46 . . . . . .
    V 27 20 A203 Grade F -107 -107 . . . . . .
    A537 Class 2 (64 mm max) -68 -68 -68 . . .
    A612 -46 . . . . . . . . .
    A724 Grade A -46 . . . . . . . . .
    Lateral Expansion mm, Minimum
    Each Specimen Transverse Test
    VI 0.38 A353 -196 -196 . . . . . .
    A553 Type I -196 -196 . . . . . .
    A553 Type II -170 -170 . . . . . .
    A645 -170 -170 . . . . . .
    A517 all (64 mm max thickness) C C . . . . . .
    A724 Grade B -46 . . . . . . . . .
    A Class I is Other Than Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 450 MPa or lower.
    Class II is Other Than Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 450 to 520 MPa, incl.
    Class III is Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 450 MPa or lower.
    Class IV is Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 450 to 520 MPa, incl.
    Class V is Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 520 MPa to but not including 655 MPa.
    Class VI is Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 655 MPa or over.
    B Full size (10 by 10 mm) specimens.
    C Testing temperature as specified in the purchase order, but no higher than 0°C.
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    96
    A3. REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INTRODUCTION OF NEW MATERIALS
    A3.1 Proposals for the introduction of new plate materials
    to be covered by the general requirements in this specification,
    either by the addition of new grades within existing
    specifications, or by the creation of a new specification shall be
    subject to the following conditions:
    A3.1.1 The application for the addition of a new grade to a
    specification or a new specification shall be made to the chair
    of the subcommittee. Applications for new specifications
    remain subject to the approval of Committee A01. Revisions to
    existing specifications for such reasons as chemistry or thickness
    limitation are not subject to this annex.
    A3.1.2 The application shall contain documentation citing
    the requisite need for the new material and its intended use as
    outlined in Form and Style for ASTM Standards, B5. Scope.3
    That documentation may be in the form of a letter from a user,
    fabricator, another standards development organization, or
    producer stating the purpose and intended use for said new
    material. The Subcommittee may consider other evidence of
    need for the proposal. Additional background information as
    may be pertinent to the introduction of the new material may
    also be presented with the proposal.
    A3.1.3 The application shall be accompanied by test data as
    required by the applicable specification. Test data from a
    minimum of three test lots, as defined by the specification, each
    from a different heat, shall be furnished and shall include:
    A3.1.3.1 Chemical data reflecting a suitable representation
    of the required chemistry range requested.
    A3.1.3.2 Mechanical property data representing the proposed
    requirements in the delivered condition from each of the
    heats supplied.
    NOTE A3.1—To assist the balloting process, data from plates representing
    the maximum proposed thickness should be provided recognizing that
    in some cases the standard may be “limited only by the capacity of the
    composition to meet the specified mechanical property requirements.”
    A3.1.3.3 Mechanical property data in the simulated Post-
    Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) condition if the product specification
    lists Supplementary Requirement S3.
    A3.1.3.4 Evidence of weldability if the material is intended
    for welded construction as may be referenced in the Scope
    section of the new or existing standard.
    NOTE A3.2—Such evidence is at the discretion of the submitter.
    Common methodology may include but not be limited to a single ASME
    Section IX qualification such as is referenced in 9.4 of this specification.
    A3.1.4 Other properties that are not specification requirements
    that further describe the material, including physical
    properties, are not mandatory. However, to the extent that such
    information may assist the Subcommittee in evaluating the
    proposal they may be included. Omission of such non-essential
    documentation shall not be a cause for rejection of the
    application by the subcommittee.
    A3.1.5 The application shall state whether or not a patent
    covers the new material.
    TABLE A2.16 Permissible Variations in Width for Mill Edge
    Carbon Steel and High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Plates Produced
    on Strip Mills
    NOTE 1—Applies to plates produced from coil and plates produced
    from plate-as-rolled.
    Specified Width,
    mm
    Variations Over
    Specified Width,
    mmA
    To 360, excl 11
    360 to 430, excl 13
    430 to 480, excl 14
    480 to 530, excl 16
    530 to 610, excl 17
    610 to 660, excl 21
    660 to 710, excl 24
    710 to 890, excl 29
    890 to 1270, excl 32
    1270 to 1520, excl 38
    1520 to 1650, excl 41
    1650 to 1780, excl 44
    1780 to 2030, excl 47
    2030 and over 51
    A No permissible variation under specified width.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    97
    APPENDIXES
    (Nonmandatory Information)
    X1. COILED STEEL
    X1.1 Continuous wide hot strip rolling mills are normally
    equipped with coilers. Regardless of the different types of
    systems employed during or following the rolling operations, it
    is common for the steel to be reeled into the coiler at
    temperatures in the stress-relieving range. In general, such
    temperatures are higher as the steel thickness increases. The
    coils subsequently cool to ambient temperature with outer and
    inner laps cooling more rapidly than central laps. The difference
    in cooling rate can result in measurable differences in the
    mechanical properties throughout a coil. Data confirm reduced
    yield and tensile strength, and increased percent elongation, for
    the product with slower cooling rates from the coiling temperature
    to ambient. Such differences are in addition to the
    effects on mechanical properties caused by differences in heat
    analysis and chemical segregation.
    X2. VARIATION OF TENSILE PROPERTIES IN PLATE-AS-ROLLED
    X2.1 The tension requirements of this general requirements
    specification are intended only to characterize the tensile
    properties of a plate-as-rolled for determination of conformance
    to the requirements of the applicable product specifications.
    Such testing procedures are not intended to define the
    upper or lower limits of tensile properties at all possible test
    locations within a plate-as-rolled. It is well known and documented
    that tensile properties vary within a plate-as-rolled or
    individual piece of steel as a function of chemical composition,
    processing, testing procedure, and other factors. It is, therefore,
    incumbent on designers and engineers to use sound engineering
    judgement when using tension test results shown on mill
    test reports. The testing procedures of this general requirements
    specification have been found to provide plate adequate
    for normal pressure vessel design criteria.
    X2.2 A survey of the variation to be expected in tensile
    properties obtained from plates and structural shapes was
    conducted by the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).7
    The results of this survey are contained in a Contributions to
    the Metallurgy of Steel entitled “The Variation of Product
    Analysis and Tensile Properties—Carbon Steel Plates, and
    Wide Flange Shapes” (SU/18, SU/19, and SU/20), published in
    September 1974. The data are presented in tables of probability
    that tensile properties at other than the official location may
    differ from those of the reported test location.
    X2.3 This general requirements specification contains no
    requirements applicable to product tension tests; conformance
    to the applicable product specification is determined on the
    basis of tests performed at the place of manufacture or
    processing prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified.
    X2.4 A Task Group of ASTM Subcommittee A01.11 has
    determined, based on review of the AISI data (SU20), that the
    variation in tensile properties within a plate-as-rolled can be
    expressed as a function of specified requirements; one standard
    deviation equals approximately 3 % of required tensile
    strength, 5 % of required yield strength, and 3 percentage
    points of required elongation.
    X3. VARIATION IN CHARPY V-NOTCH TESTS
    X3.1 A survey of the variation to be expected in Charpy
    V-Notch test results obtained from three common fine grain
    plate steels was conducted by the American Iron and Steel
    Institute (AISI). The results of the survey are contained in a
    Contributions to the Metallurgy of Steel entitled, “The Variations
    of Charpy V-Notch Impact Test Properties in Steel
    Plates,” (SU/24), published January 1979. The survey data
    consists of test values obtained from six locations in addition to
    the locations specified in 12.1.3 of this specification. The plate
    conditions tested involved as-rolled, normalized, and quench
    and tempered. Sufficient full-size specimens were taken from
    each sample so that three longitudinal and three transverse
    specimens could be broken at three test temperatures defined
    for each grade. The data is presented in tables of probability
    that impact properties at other than the official location which
    may differ from those of the reported test location. Additional
    data of the same type, but utilizing samples from thicker plates,
    was published by AISI as SU/27.
    SA-20/SA-20M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    98
    X4. RADIUS FOR COLD BENDING
    X4.1 Suggested minimum inside bend radii for cold forming
    are referenced to group Designations A through F as
    defined in Table X4.1. The suggested radii listed in Table X4.2
    should be used as minimums in typical shop fabrication.
    Material that does not form satisfactorily when fabricated in
    accordance with Table X4.2 may be subject to rejection
    pending negotiation with the steel supplier. When tighter bends
    are required, the manufacturer should be consulted.
    X4.2 The bend radius and the radius of the male die should
    be as liberal as the finished part will permit. The width across
    the shoulders of the female die should be at least 8 times the
    plate thickness. Higher strength steels require larger die openings.
    The surface of the dies in the area of radius should be
    smooth.
    X4.3 Since cracks in cold bending commonly originate
    from the outside edges, shear burrs and gas cut edges should be
    removed by grinding. Sharp corners on edges and on punched
    or gas cut holes should be removed by chamfering or grinding
    to a radius.
    X4.4 If possible, parts should be formed such that the bend
    line is perpendicular to the direction of final rolling. If it is
    necessary to bend with the bend line parallel to the direction of
    final rolling, a more generous radius is suggested (11/2 times
    applicable value given in Table X4.2 for bend lines perpendicular
    to the direction of rolling).
    X4.5 References
    X4.5.1 Both of these references are available from American
    Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):7
    Holt, G. E., et al. “Minimum Cold Bend Radii Project – Final
    Report,” Concurrent Technologies Corporation, January 27,
    1997.
    Brockenbrough, R. L., “Fabrication Guidelines for Cold
    Bending,” R. L. Brockenbrough & Associates, June 28, 1998.
    TABLE X4.1 Group Designations for Cold Bending
    Specification
    Class Where
    Applicable
    Grade Where Applicable
    Group
    DesignationA
    A203/A203M A, D B
    B, E C
    F D
    A204/A204M A B
    B C
    C D
    A225/A225M C, D D
    A285/A285M A, B, C A
    A299/A299M A, B D
    A302/A302M A, C, D D
    B E
    A353/A353M D
    A387/A387M 1, 2 2, 11, 12 C
    1 5, 9, 21, 21L, 22, 22L E
    2 5, 9, 21, 22, 91 E
    A455/A455M C
    A515/A515M 60 or 65 B
    70 C
    A516/A516M 55 A
    60, 65 B
    70 C
    A517/A517M A, B, E, F, H, P, Q, S F
    A533/A533M 1, 2, 3 A, B, C, D, E E
    A537/A537M 1, 2B , 3B C
    2C , 3C D
    A542/A542MD 1, 2 F
    3, 4 D
    4a E
    A543/A543M 1, 2, 3 B, C F
    A553/A553MD D
    A562/A562M A
    A612/A612M C
    A645/A645M D
    A662/A662M A, B B
    C C
    A724/A724M A, C D
    B E
    A736/A736M 1, 2, 3 A, C D
    A737/A737M B, C B
    A738/A738M A, B D
    CB C
    CC D
    A832/A832M 21V, 22V, 23V E
    A841/A841M 1, 2 A, B, C C
    3 D F
    A844/A844M D
    A1017/A1017M 23, 122 D
    92, 911 E
    A Steels in Groups A to E inclusive are grouped on the basis of similar specified
    values for minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm]; Group F includes steels that have
    a specified minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] of 16 or less, and steels that have
    a ratio of specified minimum tensile strength to specified minimum yield strength of
    1.15 or less.
    B For thicknesses of 4 in. [100 mm] and less.
    C For thicknesses over 4 in. [100 mm].
    D For any type.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-20/SA-20M
    99
    TABLE X4.2 Suggested Minimum Inside Radii for Cold BendingA
    Group
    DesignationB
    Thickness (t), in. [mm]
    Up to 3/4 in.
    [20 mm]
    Over 3/4 in. [20 mm]
    to 1 in. [25 mm],
    incl
    Over 1 in. [25 mm]
    to 2 in. [50 mm],
    incl
    Over 2 in.
    [50 mm]
    A 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t
    B 1.5t 1.5t 1.5t 2.0t
    C 1.5t 1.5t 2.0t 2.5t
    D 1.5t 1.5t 2.5t 3.0t
    E 1.5t 1.5t 3.0t 3.5t
    F 1.75t 2.25t 4.5t 5.5t
    A Values are for bend lines perpendicular to the direction of final rolling. These radii
    apply when the precautions listed in X4.2 are followed. If bend lines are parallel to
    the direction of final rolling, multiply values by 1.5.
    B Steels specifications included in the group designations may not include the
    entire thickness range shown in this table.
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL BARS, CARBON AND
    ALLOY, HOT-WROUGHT, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
    FOR
    SA-29/SA-29M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A29/A29M-05.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-29/SA-29M
    101
    SA-29/SA-29M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    102
    SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL BARS, CARBON
    AND ALLOY, HOT-WROUGHT,
    GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
    SA-29/SA-29M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A 29/A 29M-05.)
43. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers a group of common
    requirements which, unless otherwise specified in the purchase
    order or in an individual specification, shall apply
    to carbon and alloy steel bars under each of the following
    ASTM specifications (or under any other ASTM specification
    which invokes this specification or portions thereof):
    ASTM
    Title of Specification DesignationA
    Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars:
    Steel Bars, Carbon, Quenched and Tempered A 321
    Steel Bars and Shapes, Carbon Rolled from “T”
    Rails A 499
    Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades A 575
    Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special
    Quality A 576
    Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, Mechanical
    Properties A 663/A 663M
    Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality,
    Mechanical Properties A 675/A 675M
    Steel Bars for Springs, Carbon and Alloy A 689
    Cold-Finished Carbon Steel Bars:
    Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished A 108
    Cold-Drawn Stress-Relieved Carbon Steel Bars
    Subject to Mechanical Property Requirements A 311/A 311M
    Hot-Rolled Alloy Steel Bars:
    Steel Bars, Alloy, Standard Grades A 322
    Carbon and Alloy Steel Bars Subject to End-
    Quench Hardenability Requirements A 304
    Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought or Cold-Finished,
    Quenched and Tempered A 434
    Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought, for Elevated
    Temperature or Pressure-Containing Parts, or
    Both A 739
    Cold-Finished Alloy Steel Bars:
    Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Rolled or Cold-Finished,
    Quenched and Tempered A 434
    ASTM
    Title of Specification DesignationA
    Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought or Cold-Finished,
    Special Quality, for Pressure Piping Components
    A 696
    AThese designations refer to the latest issue of the respective specifications,
    which appear either in the Annual Book of ASTM Standards,
    Vol 01.05, or as reprints obtainable from ASTM.
    1.2 In case of any conflict in requirements, the requirements
    of the purchase order, the individual material specification,
    and this general specification shall prevail in the
    sequence named.
    1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units or SI units
    are to be regarded as the standard. Within the text, the SI
    units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system
    must be used independently of the other. Combining values
    from the two systems may result in nonconformance with
    the specification.
    1.4 For purposes of determining conformance to this
    specification and the various material specifications referenced
    in 1.1, dimensional values shall be rounded to the
    nearest unit in the right-hand place of figures used in
    expressing the limiting values in accordance with the
    rounding method of Practice E 29.
    NOTE 1 — Specification A 29 previously listed dimensional tolerances
    for cold-finished bars; these are now found in Specification A 108.
44. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A 108 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy,
    Cold-Finished
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-29/SA-29M
    103
    A 304 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Bars Subject
    to End-Quench Hardenability Requirements
    A 311 /A 311M Specification for Cold-Drawn, Stress-
    Relieved Carbon Steel Bars Subject to Mechanical Property
    Requirements
    A 321 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Quenched and
    Tempered
    A 322 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Standard Grades
    A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    A 434 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought or
    Cold-Finished, Quenched and Tempered
    A 499 Specification for Steel Bars and Shapes, Carbon
    Rolled from “T” Rails
    A 575 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant
    Quality, M-Grades
    A 576 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought,
    Special Quality
    A 663/A 663M Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant
    Quality, Mechanical Properties
    A 675/A 675M Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-
    Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties
    A 689 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Bars for
    Springs
    A 696 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought
    or Cold-Finished, Special Quality for Pressure Piping
    Components
    A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading
    Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment
    A 739 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought,
    for Elevated Temperature or Pressure-Containing Parts,
    or Both
    A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
    Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
    E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
    Determine Conformance with Specifications
    E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
    2.2 Federal Standards:
    Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
    Fed. Std. No. 183 Continuous Identification Marking of
    Iron and Steel Products
    2.3 Military Standard:
    MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products—Preparation for Shipment
    and Storage
    2.4 Other Standards:
    AIAG B-1 Bar Code Symbology Standard for 3-of-9 Bar
    Codes
    AIAG B-5 02.00 Primary Metals Tag Application Standard
45. Terminology
    3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
    3.1.1 Hot-Wrought Steel Bars — Steel bars produced
    by hot forming ingots, blooms, billets, or other semifinished
    forms to yield straight lengths (or coils, depending upon
    size, section, and mill equipment) in sections that are uniform
    throughout their length, and in the following sections
    and sizes:
    3.1.1.1 Rounds — 7/32 to 10.0 in. [5.5 to 250 mm],
    inclusive,
    3.1.1.2 Squares — 7/32 to 6.0 in. [6 to 160 mm],
    inclusive,
    3.1.1.3 Round-Cornered Squares — 7/32 to 8.0 in.
    [6 to 200 mm], inclusive,
    3.1.1.4 Flats — 1/4 to 8 in. inclusive, in width:
    13/64 in. in minimum thickness up to 6 in. in width; and
    0.230 in. in minimum thickness for over 6 to 8 in. in width,
    inclusive [over 5 mm in thickness up to 150 mm in width;
    and over 6 mm in thickness for over 150 mm through
    200 mm in width]. Maximum thickness for all widths is
    4 in. [100 mm].
    3.1.1.5 Hexagons and Octagons — 1/4 to 41/16 in. [6
    to 103 mm], inclusive, between parallel surfaces,
    3.1.1.6 Bar Size Shapes — Angles, channels, tees,
    zees, when their greatest cross-sectional dimension is under
    3 in. [75 mm], and
    3.1.1.7 Special Bar Sections—Half-rounds, ovals,
    half-ovals, other special bar size sections.
    3.1.2 Cold-Finished Steel Bars — Steel bars produced
    by cold finishing previously hot-wrought bars by
    means of cold drawing, cold forming, turning, grinding,
    or polishing (singly or in combination) to yield straight
    lengths or coils in sections that are uniform throughout
    their length and in the following sections and sizes:
    3.1.2.1 Rounds — 9 in. [230 mm] and under in
    diameter,
    3.1.2.2 Squares — 6 in. [150 mm] and under
    between parallel surfaces,
    3.1.2.3 Hexagons — 4 in. [100 mm] and under
    between parallel surfaces,
    3.1.2.4 Flats — 1/8 in. [3 mm] and over in thickness
    and not over 12 in. [300 mm] in width, and
    3.1.2.5 Special Bar Sections:
    3.1.3 Lot—Unless otherwise specified in the contract
    or order, a lot shall consist of all bars submitted for inspection
    at the same time of the same heat, condition, finish,
    size, or shape. For bars specified in the quenched and
    tempered condition, when heat treated in batch-type furnaces,
    a lot shall consist of all bars from the same heat,
    of the same prior condition, the same size, and subjected
    to the same heat treatment in one tempering charge. For
    bars specified in the quenched and tempered condition,
    when heat treated without interruption in a continuoustype
    furnace, a lot shall consist of all bars from the same
    SA-29/SA-29M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    104
    heat, of the same prior condition, of the same size, and
    subjected to the same heat treatment.
46. Chemical Composition
    4.1 Limits:
    4.1.1 The chemical composition shall conform to
    the requirements specified in the purchase order or the
    individual product specifications. For convenience the
    grades commonly specified for carbon steel bars are shown
    in Tables 1 and 2. Bars may be ordered to these grade
    designations and when so ordered shall conform to the
    specified limits by heat analysis.
    4.1.2 When compositions other than those shown in
    Tables 1 and 2 are required, the composition limits shall
    be prepared using the ranges and limits shown in Table 3
    for carbon steel and Table 4 for alloy steel.
    4.2 Heat or Cast Analysis:
    4.2.1 The chemical composition of each heat or cast
    shall be determined by the manufacturer in accordance
    with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751.
    4.2.2 The heat or cast analysis shall conform to the
    requirements specified in the product specification or purchase
    order. These can be the heat chemical range and
    limit for a grade designated in Tables 1 and 2, or another
    range and limit in accordance with 4.1.2, or with requirements
    of the product specification.
    NOTE 2—Heat analysis for lead is not determinable since lead is added
    to the ladle stream while each ingot is poured. When specified as an
    added element to a standard steel, the percentage of lead is reported as
    0.15 to 0.35 incl, which is the range commonly specified for this element.
    4.2.3 If requested or required, the heat analysis shall
    be reported to the purchaser or his representative.
    4.2.4 Reporting of significant figures and rounding
    shall be in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and
    Terminology A 751.
    4.3 Product Analysis:
    4.3.1 Merchant quality carbon bar steel is not subject
    to rejection for product analysis unless misapplication of
    a heat is clearly indicated.
    4.3.2 Analyses may be made by the purchaser from
    finished bars other than merchant quality representing each
    heat of open-hearth, basic-oxygen, or electric-furnace steel.
    The chemical composition thus determined shall not vary
    from the limits specified in the applicable specification by
    more than the amounts prescribed in Table 5 and Table 6,
    but the several determinations of any element, excluding
    lead, in a heat may not vary both above and below the
    specified range. Rimmed or capped steel is characterized
    by a lack of homogeneity in its composition, especially
    for the elements carbon, phosphorus, and sulfur; therefore,
    when rimmed or capped steel is specified or required,
    the limitations for these elements shall not be applicable.
    Because of the degree to which phosphorus and sulfur
    segregate, the limitations for these elements shall not be
    applicable to rephosphorized or resulfurized steels.
    4.3.3 Samples for product analysis shall be taken by
    one of the following methods:
    4.3.3.1 Applicable to small sections whose crosssectional
    area does not exceed 0.75 in.2 [500 mm2] such
    as rounds, squares, hexagons, and the like. Chips are taken
    by milling or machining the full cross section of the piece.
    Drilling is not a feasible method for sampling sizes 0.75 in.2
    and smaller.
    4.3.3.2 Applicable to products where the width of
    the cross section greatly exceeds the thickness, such as bar
    size shapes and light flat bars. Chips are taken by drilling
    entirely through the steel at a point midway between the
    edge and the middle of the section, or by milling or machining
    the entire cross section.
    4.3.3.3 Applicable to large rounds, squares semifinished,
    etc. Chips are taken at any point midway between
    the outside and the center of the piece by drilling parallel
    to the axis or by milling or machining the full cross section.
    In cases where these methods are not practicable, the piece
    may be drilled on the side, but chips are not taken until
    they represent the portion midway between the outside and
    the center.
    4.3.3.4 When the steel is subject to tension test
    requirements, the tension test specimen can also be used
    for product analysis. In that case, chips for product analysis
    can be taken by drilling entirely through the tension test
    specimens or by the method described in 4.3.3.1.
    4.3.4 When chips are taken by drilling, the diameter
    of the drill used shall conform to the following:
    Area of Sample Cross Approximate Drill
    Section, in.2 (cm2) Diameter, in. (mm)
    16 [100] or less 1/2 [12.5]
    Over 16 [100] 1 [25.0]
    4.3.5 The minimum number of samples to be taken
    from material representing the same heat or lot before
    rejection by the purchaser shall be as follows:
    Minimum Number of
    Samples
    15 tons [15 Mg] and under 4
    Over 15 tons [15 Mg] 6
    4.3.6 In case the number of pieces in a heat is less
    than the number of samples required, one sample from
    each piece shall be considered sufficient.
    4.3.7 In the event that product analysis determinations
    are outside the permissible limits as prescribed in
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-29/SA-29M
    105
    4.3.2, additional samples shall be analyzed and the acceptability
    of the heat negotiated between the purchaser and
    the producer.
    4.4 Referee Analysis — In case a referee analysis is
    required and agreed upon to resolve a dispute concerning the
    results of a chemical analysis, the referee analysis shall be
    performed in accordance with the latest issue of Test Methods,
    Practices, and Terminology A 751, unless otherwise agreed
    upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
47. Grain Size Requirement
    5.1 Austenitic Grain Size:
    5.1.1 When a coarse austenitic grain size is specified,
    the steel shall have a grain size number of 1 to 5 exclusive
    as determined in accordance with Test Methods E 112.
    Conformance to this grain size of 70% of the grains in the
    area examined shall constitute the basis of acceptance. One
    test per heat shall be made.
    5.1.2 When a fine austenitic grain size is specified,
    the steel shall have a grain size number of 5 or higher
    as determined in accordance with Test Methods E 112.
    Conformance to this grain size of 70% of the area examined
    shall constitute the basis of acceptance. One test per heat
    shall be made unless the provisions of 5.1.2.1 or 5.1.2.2
    are exercised.
    5.1.2.1 When aluminum is used as the grain refining
    element, the fine austenitic grain size requirement shall
    be deemed to be fulfilled if, on heat analysis, the aluminum
    content is not less than 0.020% total aluminum or, alternately,
    0.015% acid soluble aluminum. The aluminum content
    shall be reported. The grain size test specified in 5.1.2
    shall be the referee test.
    5.1.2.2 By agreement between purchaser and supplier,
    columbium or vanadium or both may be used for
    grain refining instead of or with aluminum. When columbium
    or vanadium is used as a grain refining element, the
    fine austenitic grain size requirement shall be deemed to
    be fulfilled if, on heat analysis, the columbium or vanadium
    content is as follows (the content of the elements shall be
    reported with the heat analysis):
    Steels having 0.25% carbon or less:
    Cb 0.025 min
    V 0.05 min
    Steels having over 0.25% carbon:
    Cb 0.015 min
    V 0.02 min
    The maximum contents shall be:
    Cb 0.05 max
    V 0.08 max
    Cb + V 0.06 max
    5.1.2.3 When provisions of 5.1.2.1 or 5.1.2.2 are
    exercised, a grain size test is not required unless specified
    by the purchaser. Unless otherwise specified, fine austenitic
    grain size shall be certified using the analysis of grain
    refining element(s).
    5.1.2.4 Referee Test — In the event that the chemical
    analysis of columbium or vanadium does not meet the
    requirements of 5.1.2.2, the grain size test shown in 5.1.2
    shall be the referee test unless an alternative test method
    is agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
48. Mechanical Property Requirements
    6.1 Test Specimens:
    6.1.1 Selection — Test specimens shall be selected in
    accordance with the requirements of the applicable product
    specification or in accordance with Supplement I of the
    latest issue of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, in the
    sequence named.
    6.1.2 Preparation — Unless otherwise specified in
    the applicable product specification, test specimens shall
    be prepared in accordance with the latest issue of Test
    Methods and DefinitionsA 370, and especially Supplement
    I thereof.
    6.2 Methods of Mechanical Testing — All mechanical
    tests shall be conducted in accordance with the latest issue
    of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, and especially
    Supplement I thereof, on steel bar products.
    6.3 Retests:
    6.3.1 If any test specimen shows defective machining
    or develops flaws, the specimen may be discarded and
    another substituted.
    6.3.2 If the percentage elongation of any tension
    specimen is less than that specified and any part of the
    fracture is more than 3/4 in. [20 mm] from the center of a
    2 in. [50 mm] specimen, or is outside the middle half of
    the gage length of an 8 in. [200 mm] specimen as indicated
    by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing,
    a retest shall be allowed.
    6.3.3 For “as-wrought” material, if the results for
    any original tension specimen are within 2000 psi [14 MPa]
    of the required tensile strength, within 1000 psi [7 MPa]
    of the required yield point, or within 2% of the required
    elongation, retesting shall be permitted. If the original testing
    required only one test, the retest shall consist of two
    random tests from the heat or lot involved. If the original
    testing required two tests of which one failed by the
    amounts listed in this paragraph, the retest shall be made
    on one random test from the heat or lot. If the results
    on the retest specimen or specimens meet the specified
    requirements, the heat or test lot will be accepted. If the
    results of one retest specimen do not meet the specified
    requirements, the material is subject to rejection.
    SA-29/SA-29M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    106
    6.3.4 For thermally treated bars, if the results of
    the mechanical tests do not conform to the requirements
    specified, two more tests may be selected for each bar
    failing, and each of these retests shall conform to the
    requirements of the product specification.
    6.3.5 If a bend specimen fails, due to conditions of
    bending more severe than required by the specification, a
    retest shall be permitted from the heat or test lot involved
    for which one random specimen for each original specimen
    showing failure shall be used. If the results on the retest
    specimen meet the requirements of the specification, the
    heat or test lot will be accepted.
49. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations
    7.1 Hot-Wrought Bars—The permissible variations for
    dimensions of hot-wrought carbon and alloy steel bars shall
    not exceed the applicable limits stated in Annex A1 for
    inch-pound values and Annex A2 for metric values.
50. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
    8.1 The material shall be free of injurious defects and
    shall have a workmanlike finish.
51. Rework and Retreatment
    9.1 For thermally treated bars only, the manufacturer
    may retreat a lot one or more times, and retests shall be
    made in the same manner as the original tests. Each such
    retest shall conform to the requirements specified.
52. Inspection
    10.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall
    have entry, at all times while work on the contract of the
    purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s
    works that concern the manufacture of the material
    ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all
    reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being
    furnished in accordance with this specification. All tests
    (except product analysis) and inspection shall be made at
    the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise
    specified, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere
    unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
    10.2 All required tests and inspection shall be made
    by the manufacturer prior to shipment.
53. Rejection
    11.1 Unless otherwise specified, any rejection because
    of noncompliance to the requirements of the specification
    shall be reported by the purchaser to the manufacturer
    within 30 working days after receipt of samples.
    11.2 Material that shows imperfections capable of
    adversely affecting processibility subsequent to its acceptance
    at the purchaser’s works will be rejected, and the
    manufacturer shall be notified.
54. Rehearing
    12.1 Samples that represent rejected material shall be
    preserved for two weeks from the date rejection is reported
    to the manufacturer. In case of dissatisfaction with the
    results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for
    a rehearing within that time.
55. Product Marking
    13.1 Civilian Procurement — Bars of all sizes, when
    loaded for shipment, shall be properly identified with the
    name or brand of manufacturer, purchaser’s name and order
    number, the ASTM designation (year date is not required),
    grade number where appropriate, size and length, weight
    of lift, and the heat number for identification. Unless otherwise
    specified, the method of marking is at the manufacturer’s
    option and may be made by hot stamping, cold
    stamping, painting, or marking tags attached to the lifts
    of bars.
    13.1.1 Bar code marking may be used as an auxiliary
    method of identification. Such bar-code markings shall be
    of the 3-of-9 type and shall conform to AIAG B1. When
    barcoded tags are used, they shall conform to AIAG B5.
    13.2 Government Procurement:
    13.2.1 Marking for shipment shall be in accordance
    with the requirements specified in the contract or order
    and shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-163 for military
    agencies and in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for
    civil agencies.
    13.2.2 For government procurement by the Defense
    Supply Agency, the bars shall be continuously marked for
    identification in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 183.
56. Packaging
    14.1 Civilian Procurement — Unless otherwise specified,
    the bars shall be packaged and loaded in accordance
    with Practices A 700.
    14.2 Government Procurement — MIL-STD-163 shall
    apply when packaging is specified in the contract or order,
    or when Level A for preservation, packaging, and packing
    is specified for direct procurement by or direct shipment
    to the government.
57. Keywords
    15.1 alloy steel bars; carbon steel bars; cold finished
    steel bars; general delivery requirements; hot wrought steel
    bars; steel bars
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-29/SA-29M
    107
    TABLE 1
    GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND CHEMICAL
    COMPOSITIONS OF CARBON STEEL BARS
    Heat Chemical Ranges and Limits, %
    Grade Phosphorus, Sulfur,
    Designation Carbon Manganese max maxA
    Nonresulfurized Carbon SteelsB,C,D,E,F
    1005 0.06 max 0.35 max 0.040 0.050
    1006 0.08 max 0.25–0.40 0.040 0.050
    1008 0.10 max 0.30–0.50 0.040 0.050
    1010 0.08–0.13 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.050
    1011 0.08–0.13 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1012 0.10–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.050
    1013 0.11–0.16 0.50–0.80 0.040 0.050
    1015 0.13–0.18 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.050
    1016 0.13–0.18 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1017 0.15–0.20 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.050
    1018 0.15–0.20 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1019 0.15–0.20 0.70–1.00 0.040 0.050
    1020 0.18–0.23 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.050
    1021 0.18–0.23 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1022 0.18–0.23 0.70–1.00 0.040 0.050
    1023 0.20–0.25 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.050
    1025 0.22–0.28 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.050
    1026 0.22–0.28 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1029 0.25–0.31 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1030 0.28–0.34 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1034 0.32–0.38 0.50–0.80 0.040 0.050
    1035 0.32–0.38 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1037 0.32–0.38 0.70–1.00 0.040 0.050
    1038 0.35–0.42 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1039 0.37–0.44 0.70–1.00 0.040 0.050
    1040 0.37–0.44 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1042 0.40–0.47 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1043 0.40–0.47 0.70–1.00 0.040 0.050
    1044 0.43–0.50 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.050
    1045 0.43–0.50 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1046 0.43–0.50 0.70–1.00 0.040 0.050
    1049 0.46–0.53 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1050 0.48–0.55 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1053 0.48–0.55 0.70–1.00 0.040 0.050
    1055 0.50–0.60 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1059 0.55–0.65 0.50–0.80 0.040 0.050
    1060 0.55–0.65 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1064 0.60–0.70 0.50–0.80 0.040 0.050
    1065 0.60–0.70 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1069 0.65–0.75 0.40–0.70 0.040 0.050
    1070 0.65–0.75 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1071 0.65–0.70 0.75–1.05 0.040 0.050
    1074 0.70–0.80 0.50–0.80 0.040 0.050
    1075 0.70–0.80 0.40–0.70 0.040 0.050
    1078 0.72–0.85 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.050
    1080 0.75–0.88 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1084 0.80–0.93 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1086 0.80–0.93 0.30–0.50 0.040 0.050
    1090 0.85–0.98 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050
    1095 0.90–1.03 0.30–0.50 0.040 0.050
    TABLE 1
    GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND CHEMICAL
    COMPOSITIONS OF CARBON STEEL BARS (CONT’D)
    Heat Chemical Ranges and Limits, %
    Grade Phosphorus, Sulfur,
    Designation Carbon Manganese max maxA
    Resulfurized Carbon SteelsB,D,F
    1108 0.08–0.13 0.60–0.80 0.040 0.08–0.13
    1109 0.08–0.13 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.08–0.13
    1110 0.08–0.13 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.08–0.13
    1116 0.14–0.20 1.10–1.40 0.040 0.16–0.23
    1117 0.14–0.20 1.00–1.30 0.040 0.08–0.13
    1118 0.14–0.20 1.30–1.60 0.040 0.08–0.13
    1119 0.14–0.20 1.00–1.30 0.040 0.24–0.33
    1132 0.27–0.34 1.35–1.65 0.040 0.08–0.13
    1137 0.32–0.39 1.35–1.65 0.040 0.08–0.13
    1139 0.35–0.43 1.35–1.65 0.040 0.13–0.20
    1140 0.37–0.44 0.70–1.00 0.040 0.08–0.13
    1141 0.37–0.45 1.35–1.65 0.040 0.08–0.13
    1144 0.40–0.48 1.35–1.65 0.040 0.24–0.33
    1145 0.42–0.49 0.70–1.00 0.040 0.04–0.07
    1146 0.42–0.49 0.70–1.00 0.040 0.08–0.13
    1151 0.48–0.55 0.70–1.00 0.040 0.08–0.13
    Grade Rephosphorized and Resulfurized Carbon SteelsD,F
    Designation
    Carbon Manganese Phosphorus Sulfur Lead
    1211 0.13 max 0.60–0.90 0.07–0.12 0.10–0.15 . . .
    1212 0.13 max 0.70–1.00 0.07–0.12 0.16–0.23 . . .
    1213 0.13 max 0.70–1.00 0.07–0.12 0.24–0.33 . . .
    1215 0.09 max 0.75–1.05 0.04–0.09 0.26–0.35 . . .
    12L13 0.13 max 0.70–1.00 0.07–0.12 0.24–0.33 0.15–0.35
    12L14 0.15 max 0.85–1.15 0.04–0.09 0.26–0.35 0.15–0.35
    12L15 0.09 max 0.75–1.05 0.04–0.09 0.26–0.35 0.15–0.35
    High-Manganese Carbon SteelsB,C,D,E,F
    Grade
    Desig- Former Phosphorus, Sulfur,
    nation Designation Carbon Manganese max max
    1513 . . . 0.10–0.16 1.10–1.40 0.040 0.050
    1518 . . . 0.15–0.21 1.10–1.40 0.040 0.050
    1522 . . . 0.18–0.24 1.10–1.40 0.040 0.050
    1524 1024 0.19–0.25 1.35–1.65 0.040 0.050
    1525 . . . 0.23–0.29 0.80–1.10 0.040 0.050
    1526 . . . 0.22–0.29 1.10–1.40 0.040 0.050
    1527 1027 0.22–0.29 1.20–1.50 0.040 0.050
    1536 1036 0.30–0.37 1.20–1.50 0.040 0.050
    1541 1041 0.36–0.44 1.35–1.65 0.040 0.050
    1547 . . . 0.43–0.51 1.35–1.65 0.040 0.050
    1548 1048 0.44–0.52 1.10–1.40 0.040 0.050
    1551 1051 0.45–0.56 0.85–1.15 0.040 0.050
    1552 1052 0.47–0.55 1.20–1.50 0.040 0.050
    1561 1061 0.55–0.65 0.75–1.05 0.040 0.050
    1566 1066 0.60–0.71 0.85–1.15 0.040 0.050
    1572 1072 0.65–0.76 1.00–1.30 0.040 0.050
    SA-29/SA-29M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    108
    TABLE 1
    GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND CHEMICAL
    COMPOSITIONS OF CARBON STEEL BARS (CONT’D)
    Heat Chemical Ranges and Limits, percent
    Grade Merchant Quality M Series Carbon Steel Bars
    Desig- Phosphorus, Sulfur,
    nation Carbon ManganeseG max max
    M 1008 0.10 max 0.25–0.60 0.04 0.05
    M 1010 0.07–0.14 0.25–0.60 0.04 0.05
    M 1012 0.09–0.16 0.25–0.60 0.04 0.05
    M 1015 0.12–0.19 0.25–0.60 0.04 0.05
    M 1017 0.14–0.21 0.25–0.60 0.04 0.05
    M 1020 0.17–0.24 0.25–0.60 0.04 0.05
    M 1023 0.19–0.27 0.25–0.60 0.04 0.05
    M 1025 0.20–0.30 0.25–0.60 0.04 0.05
    M 1031 0.26–0.36 0.25–0.60 0.04 0.05
    M 1044 0.40–0.50 0.25–0.60 0.04 0.05
    A Maximum unless otherwise indicated.
    B When silicon is required, the following ranges and limits are commonly
    specified: 0.10%, max, 0.10% to 0.20%, 0.15% to 0.35%, 0.20% to
    0.40%, or 0.30% to 0.60%.
    C Copper can be specified when required as 0.20% minimum.
    D When lead is required as an added element to a standard steel, a range of
    0.15 to 0.35% inclusive is specified. Such a steel is identified by inserting the
    letter “L” between the second and third numerals of the grade designation, for
    example, 10 L 45. A cast or heat analysis is not determinable when lead is
    added to the ladle stream.
    E When boron treatment for killed steels is specified, the steels can be
    expected to contain 0.0005 to 0.003% boron. If the usual titanium additive is
    not permitted, the steels can be expected to contain up to 0.005% boron.
    F The elements bismuth, calcium, selenium, or tellurium may be added as
    agreed upon between purchaser and supplier.
    G Unless prohibited by the purchaser, the manganese content may exceed
    0.60% on heat analysis to a maximum of 0.75%, provided the carbon range
    on heat analysis has the minimum and maximum reduced by 0.01% for each
    0.05% manganese over 0.60%.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-29/SA-29M
    109
    TABLE 2
    GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND CHEMICAL COMPOSITIONS OF ALLOY STEEL BARS
    Heat Chemical Ranges Grade and Limits, %
    Designation Carbon Manganese Phosphorus, max Sulfur, max SiliconA Nickel Chromium Molybdenum
    1330 0.28–0.33 1.60–1.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . . . .
    1335 0.33–0.38 1.60–1.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . . . .
    1340 0.38–0.43 1.60–1.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . . . .
    1345 0.43–0.48 1.60–1.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . . . .
    4012 0.09–0.14 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . 0.15–0.25
    4023 0.20–0.25 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . 0.20–0.30
    4024 0.20–0.25 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.035–0.050 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . 0.20–0.30
    4027 0.25–0.30 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . 0.20–0.30
    4028 0.25–0.30 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.035–0.050 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . 0.20–0.30
    4032 0.30–0.35 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . 0.20–0.30
    4037 0.35–0.40 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . 0.20–0.30
    4042 0.40–0.45 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . 0.20–0.30
    4047 0.45–0.50 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . 0.20–0.30
    4118 0.18–0.23 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.40–0.60 0.08–0.15
    4120 0.18–0.23 0.90–1.20 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.40–0.60 0.13–0.20
    4121 0.18–0.23 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.45–0.65 0.20–0.30
    4130 0.28–0.33 0.40–0.60 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.80–1.10 0.15–0.25
    4135 0.33–0.38 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.80–1.10 0.15–0.25
    4137 0.35–0.40 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.80–1.10 0.15–0.25
    4140 0.38–0.43 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.80–1.10 0.15–0.25
    4142 0.40–0.45 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.80–1.10 0.15–0.25
    4145 0.43–0.48 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.80–1.10 0.15–0.25
    4147 0.45–0.50 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.80–1.10 0.15–0.25
    4150 0.48–0.53 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.80–1.10 0.15–0.25
    4161 0.56–0.64 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.70–0.90 0.25–0.35
    4320 0.17–0.22 0.45–0.65 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 1.65–2.00 0.40–0.60 0.20–0.30
    4340 0.38–0.43 0.60–0.80 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 1.65–2.00 0.70–0.90 0.20–0.30
    E4340 0.38–0.43 0.65–0.85 0.025 0.025 0.15 to 0.35 1.65–2.00 0.70–0.90 0.20–0.30
    4419 0.18–0.23 0.45–0.65 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . 0.45–0.60
    4422 0.20–0.25 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . 0.35–0.45
    4427 0.24–0.29 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . . . . 0.35–0.45
    4615 0.13–0.18 0.45–0.65 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 1.65–2.00 . . . 0.20–0.30
    4620 0.17–0.22 0.45–0.65 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 1.65–2.00 . . . 0.20–0.30
    4621 0.18–0.23 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 1.65–2.00 . . . 0.20–0.30
    4626 0.24–0.29 0.45–0.65 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.70–1.00 . . . 0.15–0.25
    4715 0.13–0.18 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.70–1.00 0.45–0.65 0.45–0.60
    4718 0.16–0.21 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.90–1.20 0.35–0.55 0.30–0.40
    4720 0.17–0.22 0.50–0.70 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.90–1.20 0.35–0.55 0.15–0.25
    4815 0.13–0.18 0.40–0.60 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 3.25–3.75 . . . 0.20–0.30
    4817 0.15–0.20 0.40–0.60 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 3.25–3.75 . . . 0.20–0.30
    4820 0.18–0.23 0.50–0.70 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 3.25–3.75 . . . 0.20–0.30
    5015 0.12–0.17 0.30–0.50 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.30–0.50 . . .
    5046 0.43–0.48 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.20–0.35 . . .
    5115 0.13–0.18 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.70–0.90 . . .
    5120 0.17–0.22 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.70–0.90 . . .
    5130 0.28–0.33 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.80–1.10 . . .
    5132 0.30–0.35 0.60–0.80 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.75–1.00 . . .
    5135 0.33–0.38 0.60–0.80 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.80–1.05 . . .
    5140 0.38–0.43 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.70–0.90 . . .
    5145 0.43–0.48 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.70–0.90 . . .
    5147 0.46–0.51 0.70–0.95 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.85–1.15 . . .
    5150 0.48–0.53 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.70–0.90 . . .
    5155 0.51–0.59 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.70–0.90 . . .
    5160 0.56–0.61 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.70–0.90 . . .
    SA-29/SA-29M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    110
    TABLE 2
    GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND CHEMICAL COMPOSITIONS OF ALLOY STEEL BARS (CONT’D)
    Grade Heat Chemical Ranges and Limits, %
    Designation Carbon Manganese Phosphorus, max Sulfur, max SiliconA Nickel Chromium Molybdenum
    E50100 0.98–1.10 0.25–0.45 0.025 0.025 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.40–0.60 . . .
    E51100 0.98–1.10 0.25–0.45 0.025 0.025 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.90–1.15 . . .
    E52100 0.98–1.10 0.25–0.45 0.025 0.025 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 1.30–1.60 . . .
    52100B 0.93–1.05 0.25–0.45 0.025 0.015 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 1.35–1.60 . . .
    6118 0.16–0.21 0.50–0.70 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.50–0.70 (0.10–0.15 V)
    6150 0.48–0.53 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.80–1.10 (0.15 min V)
    8115 0.13–0.18 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.20–0.40 0.30–0.50 0.08–0.15
    8615 0.13–0.18 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.15–0.25
    8617 0.15–0.20 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.15–0.25
    8620 0.18–0.23 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.15–0.25
    8622 0.20–0.25 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.15–0.25
    8625 0.23–0.28 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.15–0.25
    8627 0.25–0.30 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.15–0.25
    8630 0.28–0.33 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.15–0.25
    8637 0.35–0.40 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.15–0.25
    8640 0.38–0.43 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.15–0.25
    8642 0.40–0.45 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.15–0.25
    8645 0.43–0.48 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.15–0.25
    8650 0.48–0.53 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.15–0.25
    8655 0.51–0.59 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.15–0.25
    8660 0.56–0.64 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.15–0.25
    8720 0.18–0.23 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.20–0.30
    8740 0.38–0.43 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.20–0.30
    8822 0.20–0.25 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.60 0.30–0.40
    9254 0.51–0.59 0.60–0.80 0.035 0.040 1.20–1.60 . . . 0.60–0.80 . . .
    9255 0.51–0.59 0.70–0.95 0.035 0.040 1.80–2.20 . . . . . . . . .
    9259 0.56–0.64 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.70–1.10 . . . 0.45–0.65 . . .
    9260 0.56–0.64 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 1.80–2.20 . . . . . . . . .
    E9310 0.08–0.13 0.45–0.65 0.025 0.025 0.15 to 0.30 3.00–3.50 1.00–1.40 0.08–0.15
    Standard Boron SteelsC
    50B44 0.43–0.48 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.20–0.60 . . .
    50B46 0.44–0.49 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.20–0.35 . . .
    50B50 0.48–0.53 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.40–0.60 . . .
    50B60 0.56–0.64 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.40–0.60 . . .
    51B60 0.56–0.64 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 . . . 0.70–0.90 . . .
    81B45 0.43–0.48 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.20–0.40 0.35–0.55 0.08–0.15
    94B17 0.15–0.20 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.50 0.08–0.15
    94B30 0.28–0.33 0.75–1.00 0.035 0.040 0.15 to 0.35 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.50 0.08–0.15
    A Silicon may be specified by the purchaser as 0.10% maximum. The need for 0.10% maximum generally relates to severe cold-formed
    parts.
    B The purchaser may also require the following maximums: copper 0.30%; aluminum 0.050%; oxygen 0.0015%.
    C These steels can be expected to contain 0.0005 to 0.003% boron. If the usual titanium additive is not permitted, the steels can be
    expected to contain up to 0.005% boron.
    Note 1 — Small quantities of certain elements are present in alloy steels, which are not specified or required. These elements are considered
    as incidental and may be present to the following maximum amounts: copper, 0.35%; nickel, 0.25%; chromium, 0.20%; and molybdenum,
    0.06%.
    Note 2 — Where minimum and maximum sulfur content is shown it is indicative of resulfurized steel.
    Note 3 — The chemical ranges and limits shown in Table 2 are produced to product analysis tolerances shown in Table 6.
    Note 4 — Standard alloy steels can be produced with a lead range of 0.15–0.35%. Such steels are identified by inserting the letter “L”
    between the second and third numerals of the AISI number, for example, 41 L 40. A cast or heat analysis is not determinable when lead is
    added to the ladle stream.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-29/SA-29M
    111
    TABLE 3
    HEAT ANALYSIS CHEMICAL RANGES AND LIMITS OF
    CARBON STEEL BARS
    Chemical Ranges and Limits, %
    When Maximum of Specified Lowest
    Element Elements is: Range Maximum
    CarbonA . . . . . . 0.06
    to 0.12, incl . . . . . .
    over 0.12 to 0.25, incl 0.05 . . .
    over 0.25 to 0.40, incl 0.06 . . .
    over 0.40 to 0.55, incl 0.07 . . .
    over 0.55 to 0.80, incl 0.10 . . .
    over 0.80 0.13 . . .
    Manganese . . . . . . 0.35
    to 0.40, incl 0.15 . . .
    over 0.40 to 0.50, incl 0.20 . . .
    over 0.50 to 1.65, incl 0.30 . . .
    Phosphorus to 0.040, incl . . . 0.040B
    over 0.040 to 0.08, incl 0.03 . . .
    over 0.08 to 0.13, incl 0.05 . . .
    Sulfur to 0.050, incl . . . 0.050B
    over 0.050 to 0.09, incl 0.03 . . .
    over 0.09 to 0.15, incl 0.05 . . .
    over 0.15 to 0.23, incl 0.07 . . .
    over 0.23 to 0.50, incl 0.09 . . .
    SiliconC . . . . . . 0.10
    to 0.10, incl . . . . . .
    over 0.10 to 0.15, incl 0.08 . . .
    over 0.15 to 0.20, incl 0.10 . . .
    over 0.20 to 0.30, incl 0.15 . . .
    over 0.30 to 0.60, incl 0.20 . . .
    Copper When copper is required 0.20
    min is generally used
    LeadD When lead is required, a range
    of 0.15 to 0.35 is specified
    BismuthE
    CalciumE
    SeleniumE
    TelluriumE
    A The carbon ranges shown in the column headed “Range” apply
    when the specified maximum limit for manganese does not exceed
    1.10%. When the maximum manganese limit exceeds 1.10%, add
    0.01 to the carbon ranges shown above.
    B For steels produced in merchant quality the phosphorus maximum
    is 0.04% and the sulfur maximum is 0.05%.
    C It is not common practice to produce a rephosphorized and resulfurized
    carbon steel to specified limits for silicon because of its
    adverse effect on machinability.
    D A cast or heat analysis is not determinable when lead is added to
    the ladle stream.
    E Element specification range as agreed upon between purchaser
    and supplier.
    TABLE 4
    HEAT ANALYSIS CHEMICAL RANGES AND LIMITS OF
    ALLOY STEEL BARS
    Chemical Ranges and Limits, %
    Open- Maxi-
    Hearth or Electric mum
    When Maximum of Basic- Furnace Limit,
    Element Specified Element is: Oxygen Steel Steel %A
    Carbon To 0.55, incl 0.05 0.05
    Over 0.55–0.70, incl 0.08 0.07
    Over 0.70 to 0.80, incl 0.10 0.09
    Over 0.80–0.95, incl 0.12 0.11
    Over 0.95–1.35, incl 0.13 0.12
    Manganese To 0.60, incl 0.20 0.15
    Over 0.60–0.90, incl 0.20 0.20
    Over 0.90–1.05, incl 0.25 0.25
    Over 1.05–1.90, incl 0.30 0.30
    Over 1.90–2.10, incl 0.40 0.35
    Phosphorus Basic open-hearth or basicoxygen
    steel 0.035
    Acid open-hearth steel 0.050
    Basic electric-furnace steel 0.025
    Acid electric-furnace steel 0.050
    Sulfur To 0.050, incl 0.015 0.015
    Over 0.050–0.07, incl 0.02 0.02
    Over 0.07–0.10, incl 0.04 0.04
    Over 0.10–0.14, incl 0.05 0.05
    Basic open-hearth or basicoxygen
    steel 0.040
    Acid open-hearth steel 0.050
    Basic electric-furnace steel 0.025
    Acid electric-furnace steel 0.050
    Silicon To 0.20, incl 0.08 0.08
    Over 0.20–0.30, incl 0.15 0.15
    Over 0.30–0.60, incl 0.20 0.20
    Over 0.60–1.00, incl 0.30 0.30
    Over 1.00–2.20, incl 0.40 0.35
    Acid steelsB
    Nickel To 0.50, incl 0.20 0.20
    Over 0.50–1.50, incl 0.30 0.30
    Over 1.50–2.00, incl 0.35 0.35
    Over 2.00–3.00, incl 0.40 0.40
    Over 3.00–5.30, incl 0.50 0.50
    Over 5.30–10.00, incl 1.00 1.00
    Chromium To 0.40, incl 0.15 0.15
    Over 0.40–0.90, incl 0.20 0.20
    Over 0.90–1.05, incl 0.25 0.25
    Over 1.05–1.60, incl 0.30 0.30
    Over 1.60–1.75, incl C 0.35
    Over 1.75–2.10, incl C 0.40
    Over 2.10–3.99, incl C 0.50
    Molybdenum To 0.10, incl 0.05 0.05
    Over 0.10–0.20, incl 0.07 0.07
    Over 0.20–0.50, incl 0.10 0.10
    Over 0.50–0.80, incl 0.15 0.15
    Over 0.80–1.15, incl 0.20 0.20
    Tungsten To 0.50, incl 0.20 0.20
    Over 0.50–1.00, incl 0.30 0.30
    Over 1.00–2.00, incl 0.50 0.50
    Over 2.00–4.00, incl 0.60 0.60
    SA-29/SA-29M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    112
    TABLE 4
    HEAT ANALYSIS CHEMICAL RANGES AND LIMITS OF
    ALLOY STEEL BARS (CONT’D)
    Chemical Ranges and Limits, %
    Open- Maxi-
    Hearth or Electric mum
    When Maximum of Basic- Furnace Limit,
    Element Specified Element is: Oxygen Steel Steel %A
    Vanadium To 0.25, incl 0.05 0.05
    Over 0.25–0.50, incl 0.10 0.10
    Aluminum Up to 0.10, incl 0.05 0.05
    Over 0.10–0.20, incl 0.10 0.10
    Over 0.20–0.30, incl 0.15 0.15
    Over 0.30–0.80, incl 0.25 0.25
    Over 0.80–1.30, incl 0.35 0.35
    Over 1.30–1.80, incl 0.45 0.45
    Copper To 0.60, incl 0.20 0.20
    Over 0.60–1.50, incl 0.30 0.30
    Over 1.50–2.00, incl 0.35 0.35
    Note 1 — Boron steels can be expected to have 0.0005% minimum boron
    content.
    Note 2 — Alloy steels can be produced with a lead range of 0.15–0.35%. A
    cast or heat analysis is not determinable when lead is added to the ladle
    stream.
    A Applies to only nonrephosphorized and nonresulfurized steels.
    B Minimum silicon limit for acid open-hearth or acid electric-furnace alloy
    steels is 0.15%.
    C Not normally produced in open-hearth.
    TABLE 5
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FOR PRODUCT ANALYSIS
    OF CARBON STEEL
    Over Under
    Limit, or Maximum of Maximum Minimum
    Element Specified Range, % Limit, % Limit, %
    CarbonA 0.25 and under 0.02 0.02
    over 0.25 to 0.55, incl 0.03 0.03
    over 0.55 0.04 0.04
    Manganese 0.90 and under 0.03 0.03
    over 0.90 to 1.65, incl 0.06 0.06
    PhosphorusA,B basic steels 0.008 . . .
    acid bessemer steel 0.01 0.01
    SulfurA,B 0.008 . . .
    Silicon 0.35 and under 0.02 0.02
    over 0.35 to 0.60, incl 0.05 0.05
    Copper under minimum only . . . 0.02
    LeadC 0.15 to 0.35, incl 0.03 0.03
    A Rimmed and capped steels are not subject to rejection on product
    analysis unless misapplication is clearly indicated.
    B Resulfurized or rephosphorized steels are not subject to rejection
    on product analysis for these elements unless misapplication is
    clearly indicated.
    C Product analysis tolerance for lead applies both over and under
    to a specified range of 0.15 to 0.35%.
    TABLE 6
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FOR PRODUCT ANALYSIS
    OF ALLOY STEEL
    Permissible Variations
    Limit, or Maximum of Over Maximum Limit or
    Elements Specified Range, % Under Minimum Limit, %
    Carbon 0.30 and under 0.01
    over 0.30 to 0.75, incl 0.02
    over 0.75 0.03
    Manganese 0.90 and under 0.03
    over 0.90 to 2.10, incl 0.04
    Phosphorus over maximum only 0.005
    Sulfur 0.060 and under 0.005
    Silicon 0.40 and under 0.02
    over 0.40 to 2.20, incl 0.05
    Nickel 1.00 and under 0.03
    over 1.00 to 2.00, incl 0.05
    over 2.00 to 5.30, incl 0.07
    over 5.30 to 10.00, 0.10
    incl
    Chromium 0.90 and under 0.03
    over 0.90 to 2.10, incl 0.05
    over 2.10 to 3.99, incl 0.10
    Molybdenum 0.20 and under 0.01
    over 0.20 to 0.40, incl 0.02
    over 0.40 to 1.15, incl 0.03
    Vanadium 0.10 and under 0.01
    over 0.10 to 0.25, incl 0.02
    over 0.25 to 0.50, incl 0.03
    minimum value 0.01
    specified, under
    minimum limit only
    Tungsten 1.00 and under 0.04
    over 1.00 to 4.00, incl 0.08
    Aluminum 0.10 and under 0.03
    over 0.10 to 0.20, incl 0.04
    over 0.20 to 0.30, incl 0.05
    over 0.30 to 0.80, incl 0.07
    over 0.80 to 1.80, incl 0.10
    LeadA 0.15 to 0.35, incl 0.03
    Copper to 1.00 incl 0.03
    over 1.00 to 2.00, incl 0.05
    A Product analysis tolerance for lead applies both over and under
    to a specified range of 0.15 to 0.35%.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-29/SA-29M
    113
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser
    in the contract or order.
    S1. Flat Bar Thickness Tolerances
    S1.1 When flat bars are specified in metric units to a thickness under tolerance of 0.3 mm, the thickness tolerance
    of Table S1.1 shall apply.
    TABLE S1.1
    THICKNESS AND WIDTH TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT SQUARE-EDGE AND ROUND-EDGE FLAT BARS
    ORDERED TO 0.3 MM UNDER TOLERANCEA
    Tolerance
    from
    Specified
    Tolerances over Specified Thickness for Thickness Given, mm Width, mm
    Specified Width, mm Over 6 to 12, incl Over 12 to 25, incl Over 25 to 50, incl Over 50 to 75, incl Over 75 Over Under
    To 25, incl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 0.5
    Over 25 to 50, incl . . . 0.5 1.3 . . . . . . 1.0 1.0
    Over 50 to 100, incl 0.5 0.7 1.3 2.1 2.1 1.5 1.0
    Over 100 to 150, incl 0.5 0.7 1.3 2.1 2.1 2.5 1.5
    Over 150 to 200, incl 0.5 1.0 1.3 2.1 2.9 3.0 2.5
    Note — Tolerance under specified thickness 0.3 mm.
    A When a square is held against a face and an edge of a square-edge flat bar, the edge shall not deviate by more than 3° or 5% of the
    thickness.
    SA-29/SA-29M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    114
    ANNEXES
    (Mandatory Information)
    A1. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS, ETC. — INCH-POUND UNITS
    A1.1 Listed below are permissible variations in dimensions expressed in inch-pound units of measurement.
    TABLE A1.1
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN CROSS SECTION FOR
    HOT-WROUGHT ROUND, SQUARE, AND ROUNDCORNERED
    SQUARE BARS OF STEEL
    Permissible
    Variation from
    Specified Size, Out-of-Round or
    in.A
    Out-of-Square,
    Specified Size, in. Over Under in.B
    To 5/16, incl 0.005 0.005 0.008
    Over 5/16 to 7/16, incl 0.006 0.006 0.009
    Over 7/16 to 5/8, incl 0.007 0.007 0.010
    Over 5/8 to 7/8, incl 0.008 0.008 0.012
    Over 7/8 to 1, incl 0.009 0.009 0.013
    Over 1 to 11/8, incl 0.010 0.010 0.015
    Over 11/8 to 11/4, incl 0.011 0.011 0.016
    Over 11/4 to 13/8, incl 0.012 0.012 0.018
    Over 13/8 to 11/2, incl 0.014 0.014 0.021
    Over 11/2 to 2, incl 1/64
    1/64 0.023
    Over 2 to 21/2, incl 1/32 0 0.023
    Over 21/2 to 31/2, incl 3/64 0 0.035
    Over 31/2 to 41/2, incl 1/16 0 0.046
    Over 41/2 to 51/2, incl 5/64 0 0.058
    Over 51/2 to 61/2, incl 1/8 0 0.070
    Over 61/2 to 81/4, incl 5/32 0 0.085
    Over 81/4 to 91/2, incl 3/16 0 0.100
    Over 91/2 to 10, incl 1/4 0 0.120
    A Steel bars are regularly cut to length by shearing or hot sawing,
    which can cause end distortion resulting in those portions of the bar
    being outside the applicable size tolerance. When this end condition
    is objectionable, a machine cut end should be considered.
    B Out-of-round is the difference between the maximum and minimum
    diameters of the bar, measured at the same cross section. Outof-
    square is the difference in the two dimensions at the same cross
    section of a square bar between opposite faces.
    TABLE A1.2
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN CROSS SECTION FOR
    HOT-WROUGHT HEXAGONAL BARS OF STEEL
    Permissible Out-of-Hexagon
    Variations (Carbon Steel and
    Specified Sizes from Specified Alloy Steel) or
    Size, in.A
    Between Out-of-Octagon
    Opposite Sides, in. Over Under (Alloy Steel), in.B
    To 1/2, incl 0.007 0.007 0.011
    Over 1/2 to 1, incl 0.010 0.010 0.015
    Over 1 to 11/2, incl 0.021 0.013 0.025
    Over 11/2 to 2, incl 1/32
    1/64
    1/32
    Over 2 to 21/2, incl 3/64
    1/64
    3/64
    Over 21/2 to 31/2, incl 1/16
    1/64
    1/16
    Over 31/2 to 41/16, incl 5/64
    1/64
    5/64
    A Steel bars are regularly cut to length by shearing or hot sawing,
    which can cause end distortion resulting in those portions of the bar
    being outside the applicable size tolerance. When this end condition
    is objectionable, a machine cut end should be considered.
    B Out-of-hexagon or out-of-octagon is the greatest difference
    between any two dimensions at the same cross section between opposite
    faces.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-29/SA-29M
    115
    TABLE A1.3
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN THICKNESS AND WIDTH FOR HOT-WROUGHT SQUARE EDGE AND ROUND EDGE
    FLAT BARSA
    Permissible Variations in Thickness, for Thickness Given, Permissible
    Over and Under, in.B Variations
    0.203 to 0.230 to 1/4 to Over 1/2 to Over 1 to Over 2 to in Width, in.
    Specified Width, in. 0.230, excl 1/4, excl 1/2, incl 1, incl 2, incl 3, incl Over 3 Over Under
    To 1, incl 0.007 0.007 0.008 0.010 . . . . . . . . . 1/64
    1/64
    Over 1 to 2, incl 0.007 0.007 0.012 0.015 1/32 . . . . . . 1/32
    1/32
    Over 2 to 4, incl 0.008 0.008 0.015 0.020 1/32
    3/64
    3/64
    1/16
    1/32
    Over 4 to 6, incl 0.009 0.009 0.015 0.020 1/32
    3/64
    3/64
    3/32
    1/16
    Over 6 to 8, incl C 0.015 0.016 0.025 1/32
    3/64
    1/16
    1/8
    3/32
    A When a square is held against a face and an edge of a square edge flat bar, the edge shall not deviate by more than 3° or 5% of the
    thickness.
    B Steel bars are regularly cut to length by shearing or hot sawing, which can cause end distortion resulting in those portions of the bar being
    outside the applicable size tolerance. When this end condition is objectionable, a machine cut end should be considered.
    C Flats over 6 to 8 in., incl, in width, are not available as hot-wrought steel bars in thickness under 0.230 in.
    TABLE A1.4
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN THICKNESS, LENGTH,
    AND OUT-OF-SQUARE FOR HOT-WROUGHT BAR SIZE
    ANGLES OF CARBON STEEL
    Permissible Variations in Permissible
    Thickness, for Thicknesses Given, Variations
    Over and Under, in. for Length
    of Leg,
    Specified Length Over 3/16 Over and
    of Leg, in.A To 3/16, incl to 3/8, incl Over 3/8 Under, in.
    To 1, incl 0.008 0.010 . . . 1/32
    Over 1 to 2, incl 0.010 0.010 0.012 3/64
    Over 2 to 3, excl 0.012 0.015 0.015 1/16
    A The longer leg of an unequal angle determines the size for tolerance.
    The out-of-square tolerance in either direction is 11/2°.
    TABLE A1.5
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS FOR
    HOT-WROUGHT BAR SIZE CHANNELS OF CARBON
    STEEL
    Permissible Variations in Size,
    Over and Under, in. Out-of-
    SquareA
    Thickness of if Either
    Web for Flange,
    Specified Depth Width Thickness Given in./in. of
    Size of of of To 3/16, Over Flange
    Channel, in. SectionB FlangesB incl 3/16 Width
    To 11/2, incl 1/32
    1/32 0.010 0.015 1/32
    Over 11/2 to 3, excl 1/16
    1/16 0.015 0.020 1/32
    A For channels 5/8 in. and under in depth, the out-of-square tolerance
    is 3/64 in./in. of depth.
    B Measurements for depth of section and width of flanges are
    overall.
    TABLE A1.6
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS FOR
    HOT-WROUGHT BAR SIZE TEES OF CARBON STEEL
    Permissible Variations in Size, in.
    Stem
    Width or Thickness Thickness out-
    Specified Size DepthB of Flange of Stem ofof
    Tee, in.A Over Under Over Under Over Under SquareC
    To 11/4, incl 3/64
    3/64 0.010 0.010 0.005 0.020 1/32
    Over 11/4 to 2, incl 1/16
    1/16 0.012 0.012 0.010 0.020 1/16
    Over 2 to 3, excl 3/32
    3/32 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.020 3/32
    A The longer member of the unequal tee determines the size for tolerances.
    B Measurements for both width and depth are overall.
    C Stem out-of-square is the variation from its true position of the
    center line of the stem measured at the point.
    TABLE A1.7
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS FOR
    HALF-ROUNDS, OVALS, HALF-OVALS, AND OTHER
    SPECIAL BAR SIZE SECTIONS
    Due to mill facilities, tolerances on half-rounds, ovals, half-ovals,
    and other special bar size sections vary among the manufacturers
    and such tolerances should be negotiated between the
    manufacturer and the purchaser.
    SA-29/SA-29M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    116
    TABLE A1.8
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR HOT-WROUGHT ROUNDS, SQUARES, HEXAGONS, FLATS, AND BAR
    SIZE SECTIONS OF STEEL
    Permissible Variations Over Specified Length, in.A
    Specified Size of Rounds, Squares, Specified Size of Flats, in. 5 to 10 ft, 10 to 20 ft, 20 to 30 ft, 30 to 40 ft, 40 to 60 ft,
    and Hexagons, in. Thickness Width excl excl excl excl excl
    Mill Shearing
    To 1, incl to 1, incl to 3, incl 1/2
    3/4 11/4 13/4 21/4
    Over 1 to 2, incl over 1 to 3, incl 5/8 1 11/2 2 21/2
    to 1, incl over 3 to 6, incl 5/8 1 11/2 2 21/2
    Over 2 to 5, incl over 1 over 3 to 6, incl 1 11/2 13/4 21/4 23/4
    Over 5 to 10, incl . . . . . . 2 21/2 23/4 3 31/4
    0.230 to 1, incl over 6 to 8, incl 3/4 11/4 13/4 31/2 4
    over 1 to 3, incl over 6 to 8, incl 11/4 13/4 2 31/2 4
    Bar Size Sections . . . . . . 5/8 1 11/2 2 21/2
    Hot Sawing
    2 to 31/2, incl 1 and over 3 and over B 11/2 13/4 21/4 23/4
    Over 31/2 to 5, incl 2 21/4 25/8 3
    Over 5 to 10, incl . . . . . . B 21/2 23/4 3 31/4
    A No permissible variations under.
    B Smaller sizes and shorter lengths are not hot sawed.
    TABLE A1.9
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR
    RECUTTING OF BARS MEETING SPECIAL
    STRAIGHTNESS TOLERANCES
    Sizes of Rounds, Squares, Tolerances Over Specified
    Hexagons, Width of Flats Length, in.A
    and Maximum Dimension of
    Other Sections, in.A To 12 ft, incl Over 12 ft
    To 3, incl 1/4
    5/16
    Over 3 to 6, incl 5/16
    7/16
    Over 6 to 8, incl 7/16
    9/16
    Rounds over 8 to 10, incl 9/16
    11/16
    A No tolerance under.
    TABLE A1.10
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN STRAIGHTNESS FOR
    HOT-WROUGHT BARS AND BAR SIZE SECTIONS OF
    STEELA
    Standard tolerances 1/4 in. in any 5 ft and (1/4 in.  length in ft)/5
    Special tolerances 1/8 in. in any 5 ft and (1/8 in.  length in ft)/5
    A Because of warpage, straightness tolerances do not apply to bars
    if any subsequent heating operation or controlled cooling has been
    performed.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-29/SA-29M
    117
    A2. DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES — SI UNITS
    A2.1 Listed below are permissible variations in dimensions expressed in SI units of measurement.
    TABLE A2.1
    TOLERANCES IN SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR
    ROUND AND SQUARE BARS AND ROUND-CORNERED
    SQUARE BARS
    Tolerance from
    Specified Size, Out-of-Round, or
    Over and Out-of-Square
    Under, Section,B
    Size, mm mm or %A mm or %A
    To 7, incl 0.13 mm 0.20 mm
    Over 7 to 11, incl 0.15 mm 0.22 mm
    Over 11 to 15, incl 0.18 mm 0.27 mm
    Over 15 to 19, incl 0.20 mm 0.30 mm
    Over 19 to 250, incl 1% 1.5%
    A The tolerance shall be rounded to the nearest tenth of a millimetre
    after calculation.
    B Out-of-round is the difference between the maximum and the minimum
    diameters of the bar, measured at the same cross section. Outof-
    square is the difference in the two dimensions at the same cross
    section of a square bar between opposite faces.
    TABLE A2.3
    THICKNESS AND WIDTH TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT SQUARE-EDGE AND ROUND-EDGE FLAT BARSA,B
    Tolerances from
    Tolerances from Specified Thickness for Thickness Given Over Specified
    and Under, mm Width, mm
    Over 5 to Over 6 to Over 12 to Over 25 to Over 50
    Specified Width, mm 6, incl 12, incl 25, incl 50, incl to 75 Over 75 Over Under
    To 25, incl 0.18 0.20 0.25 . . . . . . . . . 0.5 0.5
    Over 25 to 50, incl 0.18 0.30 0.40 0.8 . . . . . . 1.0 1.0
    Over 50 to 100, incl 0.20 0.40 0.50 0.8 1.2 1.2 1.5 1.0
    Over 100 to 150, incl 0.25 0.40 0.50 0.8 1.2 1.2 2.5 1.5
    Over 150 to 200, incl A 0.40 0.65 0.8 1.2 1.6 3.0 2.5
    A When a square is held against a face and an edge of a square edge flat bar, the edge shall not deviate by more than 3° or 5% of the
    thickness.
    B Flats over 150 to 200 mm, incl in width are not available as hot-wrought bars in thickness 6 mm and under.
    TABLE A2.2
    TOLERANCES IN CROSS SECTION FOR HOT-WROUGHT
    HEXAGONAL AND OCTAGONAL STEEL BARS
    Tolerance from
    Specified Size, Out of Hexagon
    Specified Size Between mm or Out of
    Opposite Sides, mm Over Under Octagon, mmA
    To 13, incl 0.18 0.18 0.3
    Over 13 to 25, incl 0.25 0.25 0.4
    Over 25 to 40, incl 0.55 0.35 0.6
    Over 40 to 50, incl 0.8 0.40 0.8
    Over 50 to 65, incl 1.2 0.40 1.2
    Over 65 to 80, incl 1.6 0.40 1.6
    Over 80 to 100, incl 2.0 0.40 2.0
    A Out of hexagon or out of octagon is the greatest difference
    between any two dimensions at the cross section between opposite
    faces.
    SA-29/SA-29M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    118
    TABLE A2.4
    THICKNESS, LENGTH, AND OUT-OF-SQUARE
    TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT BAR SIZE ANGLES
    Tolerances in Thickness for
    Thickness Given, Over and Tolerances
    Under, mm for Length of
    Specified Length of Over 5 to Leg Over and
    Leg, mmA,B To 5, incl 10, incl Over 10 Under, mm
    To 50, incl 0.2 0.2 0.3 1
    Over 50 to 75, excl 0.3 0.4 0.4 2
    A The longer leg of an unequal angle determines the size for tolerance.
    B Out of square tolerances in either direction is 11/2° p 0.026
    mm/mm.
    TABLE A2.5
    DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT BAR
    SIZE CHANNELS
    Tolerances in Size, Over and Under, mm
    Out of
    Square of
    Either
    Thickness of Flange per
    Web mm of
    Specified Size of Depth of Width of To 5, Flange
    Channel, mm SectionA FlangesA incl Over 5 Width,B mm
    To 40, incl 1 1 0.2 0.4 0.03
    Over 40 to 75, excl 2 2 0.4 0.5 0.03
    A Measurements for depth of section and width of flanges are
    overall.
    B For channels 16 mm and under in depth, out of square tolerance
    is 0.05 mm/mm.
    TABLE A2.6
    DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT BAR
    SIZE TEES
    Tolerances in Size, mm
    Width or Thickness Thickness Stem Out
    Specified Size of Depth,B of Flange of Stem of
    Tee,A mm Over Under Over Under Over Under SquareC
    To 30, incl 1 1 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.5 1
    Over 30 to 50, incl 2 2 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.5 2
    Over 50 to 75, excl 2 2 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 2
    A The longer member of the unequal tee determines the size for tolerances.
    B Measurements for width and depth are overall.
    C Stem out of square is the tolerance from its true position of the
    center line of the stem measured at the point.
    TABLE A2.7
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS FOR
    HALF-ROUNDS, OVALS, HALF-OVALS, AND OTHER
    SPECIAL BAR SIZE SECTIONS
    Due to mill facilities, tolerances on half-rounds, ovals, and other
    special bar size sections vary among the manufacturers and such
    tolerances should be negotiated between the manufacturer and the
    purchaser.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-29/SA-29M
    119
    TABLE A2.8
    LENGTH TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT ROUNDS, SQUARES, HEXAGONS, OCTAGONS, FLATS,
    AND BAR SIZE SECTIONS
    Specified Size of Flats, mm Tolerances over Specified Length, mmA
    Specified Size of Rounds,
    Squares, Hexagons and 1500 to 3000 to 6000 to 9000 to 12 000 to
    Octagons, mm Thickness Width 3000, excl 6000, excl 9000, excl 12 000, excl 18 000, excl
    Hot Shearing
    To 25, incl to 25, incl to 75, incl 15 20 35 45 60
    Over 25 to 50, incl over 25 to 75, incl 15 25 40 50 65
    to 25, incl over 75 to 150, incl 15 25 40 50 65
    Over 50 to 125, incl over 25 over 75 to 150, incl 25 40 45 60 70
    Over 125 to 250, incl . . . . . . 50 65 70 75 85
    Bar Size Sections over 6 to 25, incl over 150 to 200, incl 20 30 45 90 100
    over 25 to 75, incl over 150 to 200, incl 30 45 50 90 100
    . . . . . . 15 25 40 50 65
    Hot Sawing
    50 to 90, incl 25 and over 75 and over B 40 45 60 70
    Over 90 to 125, incl 50 60 65 75
    Over 125 to 250, incl . . . . . . B 65 70 75 85
    A No tolerance under.
    B Smaller sizes and shorter lengths are not hot sawed.
    TABLE A2.9
    LENGTH TOLERANCES FOR RECUTTING OF BARS
    MEETING SPECIAL STRAIGHTNESS TOLERANCES
    Sizes of Rounds, Squares, Tolerances over Specified
    Hexagons, Octagons, Widths Length, mmA
    of Flats and Maximum
    Dimensions of Other To 3700 mm, Over
    Sections, mm incl 3700 mm
    To 75, incl 6 8
    Over 75 to 150, incl 8 11
    Over 150 to 200, incl 11 14
    Rounds over 200 to 250, incl 14 18
    A No tolerance under.
    TABLE A2.10
    STRAIGHTNESS TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT
    BARS AND
    BAR SIZE SECTIONSA
    Standard tolerances 6 mm in any 1500 mm and (length in
    mm/250)B
    Special tolerances 3 mm in any 1500 mm and (length in
    mm/500)B
    A Because of warpage, straightness tolerances do not apply to bars
    if any subsequent heating operation or controlled cooling has been
    performed.
    B Round to the nearest whole millimetre.
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL RIVETS AND BARS FOR
    RIVETS, PRESSURE VESSELS
    SA-31
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A31-14 except that 3.1.7 has been deleted, Note 1 has been revised for ASME and
    certification is mandatory in 14.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-31
    121
    SA-31 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    122
    SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL RIVETS AND BARS FOR
    RIVETS, PRESSURE VESSELS
    SA-31
58. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers steel rivets for use in
    boilers and pressure vessels and steel bars for use in the
    manufacture of rivets.
    1.2 Two grades are covered:
    1.2.1 Grade A — Bars having a yield point of
    23 000 psi (160 MPa) minimum with no controls on carbon
    content.
    1.2.2 Grade B — Bars having a yield point of
    29 000 psi (200 MPa) minimum with carbon 0.28%
    maximum.
    1.2.3 Rivets are manufactured from the applicable
    bar grade.
    1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be
    regarded as the standard. The values given in parentheses
    are for information only.
59. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A 29 /A 29M Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and
    Alloy, Hot-Wrought, General Requirements for
    A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
    Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
    F 1470 Guide for Fastener Sampling for Specified Mechanical
    Properties and Performance Inspection
    2.2 ASME Standards:
    B18.1.1 Small Solid Rivets 7/16 Inch Nominal Diameter and
    Smaller
    B18.1.2 Large Rivets 1/2 Inch Nominal Diameter and Larger
    B18.24 Part Identifying Number (PIN) Code System Standard
    for B18 Fastener Products
60. Ordering Information
    3.1 Orders for rivets and bars under this specification
    shall include:
    3.1.1 Specification designation and date of issue,
    3.1.2 Quantity — Number of pieces for rivets and
    weight for bars,
    3.1.3 Name of product and grade (A or B),
    3.1.4 Size (diameter and length),
    3.1.5 Rivet head type,
    3.1.6 If inspection at point of manufacture is
    required,
    3.1.7 DELETED
    3.1.8 Additional testing or special requirements, if
    required.
    3.1.9 For establishment of a part identifying system,
    see ASME B18.24.
    NOTE 1 — A typical ordering description is: ASME SA-31, 2015 edition,
61. Materials and Manufacture
    4.1 The steel shall be made by any of the following
    processes: open-hearth, electric-furnace, or basic-oxygen.
    4.2 Rivets shall be manufactured from rivet bars conforming
    to the applicable grade ordered.
    4.3 Rivets shall be manufactured by hot- or coldheading.
    4.4 Bars shall be furnished as rolled and not pickled,
    blast cleaned, or oiled. At producer’s option, bars may be
    cleaned for inspection or cold drawn.
62. Chemical Composition
    5.1 The steel shall conform to chemical composition
    prescribed in Table 1.
    10 000 pieces, steel rivets Grade A, button head.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-31
    123
    5.2 Heat Analysis — An analysis of each heat of steel
    shall be made by the bar manufacturer to determine for
    Grades A and B the percentages of carbon, manganese,
    phosphorus, and sulfur. This analysis shall be made from
    a test ingot taken during the pouring of the heat. The
    chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to
    the purchaser or his representative and shall conform to the
    requirements for heat analysis in accordance with Table 1.
    5.3 Product Analysis — An analysis may be made by
    the purchaser from finished materials representing each
    heat. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform
    to the requirements for product analysis prescribed
    in Table 1.
    5.4 Application of heats of steel to which bismuth,
    selenium, tellurium, or lead has been intentionally added
    shall not be permitted.
    5.5 Chemical analyses shall be performed in accordance
    with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology
    A 751.
63. Mechanical Properties
    6.1 Rivet Bend Tests:
    6.1.1 The rivet shank of Grade A steel shall stand
    being bent cold through 180° flat on itself, as shown in
    Fig. 1, without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
    6.1.2 The rivet shank of Grade B steel shall stand
    being bent cold through 180° without cracking on the
    outside of the bent portion in accordance with Table 2.
    6.2 Rivet Flattening Tests — The rivet head shall stand
    being flattened, while hot, to a diameter 21/2 times the
    diameter of the shank, as shown in Fig. 2, without cracking
    at the edges.
    6.3 Bar Tensile Properties — Bars shall conform to the
    tensile requirements in accordance with Table 3.
    6.4 Bar Bend Tests:
    6.4.1 The test specimen for Grade A steel bars shall
    stand being bent cold through 180° flat on itself without
    cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
    6.4.2 The test specimen for Grade B steel bars shall
    stand being bent cold through 180° without cracking on
    the outside of the bent portion to an inside diameter which
    shall have a relation to the diameter of the specimen in
    accordance with Table 4.
64. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations
    7.1 Rivets:
    7.1.1 The dimensions of rivets shall conform to
    B18.1.2 for nominal diameters in. and larger and B18.1.1
    for nominal diameters 7/16 in. and less.
    7.1.2 Snap gage measurement shall be made at the
    point of minimum diameter, but it is not required that the
    rivet shall turn completely in the gage. Measurements of
    the maximum tolerance shall be made with a ring gage,
    all rivets to slip full to the head in the gage of the required
    size for the various diameters.
    7.2 Bars — The diameter of hot-finished rivet bars shall
    not vary from the size specified by more than the amounts
    in accordance with Table 5.
65. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
    8.1 Rivets — The finished rivets shall be true to form,
    concentric, and free of injurious defects.
    8.2 Bars:
    8.2.1 Bars shall be free of visible pipe, undue segregation,
    and injurious surface imperfections.
    8.2.2 Surface Finish—The bars shall have a commercial
    hot-wrought finish obtained by conventional hot rolling.
    See 4.4 for producer’s descaling option.
66. Number of Tests and Retests
    9.1 Rivets—Sampling for rivet bend and rivet flattening
    tests shall be in accordance with Guide F 1470, detection
    process.
    9.2 Bars:
    9.2.1 Two tension tests shall be made from each
    heat, unless the finished material from a heat is less than
    50 tons (45 Mg), when one tension test will be sufficient.
    However, for material 2 in. (51 mm) and under in thickness,
    when the material from one heat differs 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) or
    more in thickness, one tension test shall be made from
    both the thickest and the thinnest material rolled regardless
    of the weight represented. Each test shall conform to the
    specified requirements.
    9.2.2 Retests on bars may be made in accordance
    with Specification A 29/A 29M.
67. Specimen Preparation
    10.1 Rivets — Rivets shall be tested in their full-size
    finished condition.
    10.2 Bars:
    10.2.1 Test specimen selection and preparation shall
    be in accordance with Specification A 29/A 29M and Test
    Methods and Definitions A 370.
    10.2.2 Tension and bend test specimens for rivet
    bars which have been cold drawn shall be normalized
    before testing.
    SA-31 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    124
68. Test Methods
    11.1 Rivets — Rivet bend and flattening tests shall be
    in accordance with the manufacturers standard test procedures.
    11.2 Bars — Tension and bend tests shall be conducted
    in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370,
    and especially Supplement I thereof, on steel bar products.
69. Inspection
    12.1 If the testing described in Section 9 is required
    by the purchaser, it shall be specified in the inquiry and
    contract or order.
    12.2 The inspector representing the purchaser shall
    have free entry at all times, while work on the contract
    of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the
    manufacturer’s works that concern the manufacture of the
    material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector
    all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy him
    that the material is being furnished in accordance with
    this specification. All tests (except product analysis) and
    inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior
    to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so
    conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation
    of the works.
70. Rejection and Rehearing
    13.1 Rivets — Rivets that fail to conform to the requirements
    of this specification may be rejected. Rejection
    should be reported to the producer or supplier promptly
    and in writing. In case of dissatisfaction with the results
    of the test, the producer or supplier may make claim for
    a rehearing.
    13.2 Bars — Rejection and rehearing shall be in accordance
    with Specification A 29/A 29M.
71. Certification
    14.1 The manufacturer shall furnish certification that
    the material was manufactured and tested in accordance
    with this specification together with a report of the heat
    analysis (5.2) and mechanical property test results (Section
    6) as applicable to the product ordered. The report shall
    include the manufacturer’s name, ASTM designation,
    grade, heat number (bars only), and authorized signature.
72. Responsibility
    15.1 The party responsible for the fastener shall be the
    organization that supplies the fastener to the purchaser.
73. Packaging and Package Marking
    16.1 Rivets — Rivets shall be properly packed and
    marked to prevent damage and loss during shipment.
    16.2 Bars — Bars shall be packed and marked in accordance
    with Specification A 29/A 29M.
74. Keywords
    17.1 bars; carbon steel; pressure vessel rivets; rivets;
    steel
    FIG. 1 BEND TEST OF RIVET
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-31
    125
    FIG. 2 FLATTENING TEST OF RIVET
    TABLE 1
    CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
    Grade A Grade B
    Heat Product Heat Product
    Analysis Analysis Analysis Analysis
    Carbon, max., % . . . . . . 0.28 0.31
    Manganese, % 0.30–0.60 0.27–0.63 0.30–0.80 0.27–0.83
    Phosphorus, max., % 0.040 0.048 0.040 0.048
    Sulfur, max., % 0.050 0.058 0.050 0.058
    TABLE 2
    BEND REQUIREMENTS, RIVETS
    Ratio of Bend Diameter to
    Diameter Diameter of of Rivet Shank
    Rivet Shank, in. Grade A Grade B
    3/4 and under flat 1
    Over 3/4 flat 11/2
    TABLE 3
    TENSILE REQUIREMENTS, BARS
    Grade A Grade B
    Tensile strength, psi (MPa) 45 000-55 000 58 000-68 000
    (310-380) (400-470)
    Yield point, min., psi (MPa) 23 000 (160) 29 000 (200)
    Elongation in 8 in. or 27 22
    200 mm, min., %
    Elongation in 2 in. or 33 25
    50 mm, min., %
    TABLE 4
    BEND REQUIREMENTS, BARS
    Ratio of Bend Diameter to
    Specimen Diameter of Specimen
    Diameter, in. Grade A Grade B
    3/4 and under flat 1/2
    Over 3/4 flat 1
    TABLE 5
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN THE SIZE OF
    HOT-ROLLED ROUNDS
    Variations from
    Size, in. Out-of-
    Specified Size, in. Over Under Round,A in.
    5/16 and under 0.005 0.005 0.008
    Over 5/16 to 7/16, incl 0.006 0.006 0.009
    Over 7/16 to 5/8, incl 0.007 0.007 0.010
    Over 5/8 to 7/8, incl 0.008 0.008 0.012
    Over 7/8 to 1, incl 0.009 0.009 0.013
    Over 1 to 11/8, incl 0.010 0.010 0.015
    Over 11/8 to 11/4, incl 0.011 0.011 0.016
    Over 11/4 to 13/8, incl 0.012 0.012 0.018
    Over 13/8 to 11/2, incl 0.014 0.014 0.021
    A Out-of-round is the difference between the maximum and minimum
    diameters of the bar, measured at the same cross-section.
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STRUCTURAL STEEL
    SA-36/SA-36M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A36/A36M-14.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-36/SA-36M
    127
    SA-36/SA-36M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    128
    Standard Specification for
    Carbon Structural Steel
75. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers carbon steel shapes, plates,
    and bars of structural quality for use in riveted, bolted, or
    welded construction of bridges and buildings, and for general
    structural purposes.
    1.2 Supplementary requirements are provided for use where
    additional testing or additional restrictions are required by the
    purchaser. Such requirements apply only when specified in the
    purchase order.
    1.3 When the steel is to be welded, a welding procedure
    suitable for the grade of steel and intended use or service is to
    be utilized. See Appendix X3 of Specification A6/A6M for
    information on weldability.
    1.4 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system is to
    be used independently of the other, without combining values
    in any way.
    1.5 The text of this specification contains notes or footnotes,
    or both, that provide explanatory material. Such notes and
    footnotes, excluding those in tables and figures, do not contain
    any mandatory requirements.
    1.6 For structural products produced from coil and furnished
    without heat treatment or with stress relieving only, the
    additional requirements, including additional testing requirements
    and the reporting of additional test results, of A6/A6M
    apply.
76. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A6/A6M Specification for General Requirements for Rolled
    Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
    A27/A27M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for
    General Application
    A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
    Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength
    A325 Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
    120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
    A325M Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat
    Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric)
    A500 Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
    Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
    A501 Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless
    Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
    A502 Specification for Rivets, Steel, Structural
    A563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
    A563M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric)
    A668/A668M Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and
    Alloy, for General Industrial Use
    A1011/A1011M Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
    Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-
    Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
    Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
    A1018/A1018M Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
    Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
    Commercial, Drawing, Structural, High-Strength Low-
    Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
    Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
    F568M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-36/SA-36M
    129
    Threaded Metric Fasteners (Metric) (Withdrawn 2012)
    F1554 Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and
    105-ksi Yield Strength
77. Appurtenant Materials
    3.1 When components of a steel structure are identified with
    this ASTM designation but the product form is not listed in the
    scope of this specification, the material shall conform to one of
    the standards listed in Table 1 unless otherwise specified by the
    purchaser.
78. General Requirements for Delivery
    4.1 Structural products furnished under this specification
    shall conform to the requirements of the current edition of
    Specification A6/A6M, for the specific structural product
    ordered, unless a conflict exists in which case this specification
    shall prevail.
    4.2 Coils are excluded from qualification to this specification
    until they are processed into a finished structural product.
    Structural products produced from coil means structural products
    that have been cut to individual lengths from a coil. The
    processor directly controls, or is responsible for, the operations
    involved in the processing of a coil into a finished structural
    product. Such operations include decoiling, leveling or
    straightening, hot-forming or cold-forming (if applicable),
    cutting to length, testing, inspection, conditioning, heat treatment
    (if applicable), packaging, marking, loading for shipment,
    and certification.
    NOTE 1—For structural products produced from coil and furnished
    without heat treatment or with stress relieving only, two test results are to
    be reported for each qualifying coil. Additional requirements regarding
    structural products produced from coil are described in Specification
    A6/A6M.
79. Bearing Plates
    5.1 Unless otherwise specified, plates used as bearing plates
    for bridges shall be subjected to mechanical tests and shall
    conform to the tensile requirements of Section 8.
    5.2 Unless otherwise specified, mechanical tests shall not be
    required for plates over 11/2 in. [40 mm] in thickness used as
    bearing plates in structures other than bridges, subject to the
    requirement that they shall contain 0.20 to 0.33 % carbon by
    heat analysis, that the chemical composition shall conform to
    the requirements ofTable 3 in phosphorus and sulfur content,
    and that a sufficient discard shall be made to secure sound
    plates.
80. Materials and Manufacture
    6.1 The steel shall be killed
81. Chemical Composition
    7.1 The heat analysis shall conform to the requirements
    prescribed in Table 3, except as specified in 5.2.
    7.2 The steel shall conform on product analysis to the
    requirements prescribed in Table 3, subject to the product
    analysis tolerances in Specification A6/A6M.
82. Tension Test
    8.1 The material as represented by the test specimen, except
    as specified in 5.2 and 8.2, shall conform to the requirements as
    to the tensile properties prescribed in Table 2.
    8.2 Shapes less than 1 in.2 [645 mm2] in cross section and
    bars, other than flats, less than 1/2 in. [12.5 mm] in thickness or
    diameter need not be subjected to tension tests by the
    manufacturer, provided that the chemical composition used is
    appropriate for obtaining the tensile properties in Table 2.
83. Keywords
    9.1 bars; bolted construction; bridges; buildings; carbon;
    plates; riveted construction; shapes; steel; structural steel;
    welded construction
    TABLE 1 Appurtenant Material Specifications
    NOTE 1—The specifier should be satisfied of the suitability of these
    materials for the intended application. Chemical composition or mechanical
    properties, or both, may be different than specified in A36/A36M.
    Material ASTM Designation
    Steel rivets A502, Grade 1
    Bolts A307, Grade A or F568M, Class 4.6
    High-strength bolts A325 or A325M
    Steel nuts A563 or A563M
    Cast steel A27/A27M, Grade 65–35 [450–240]
    Forgings (carbon steel) A668/A668M, Class D
    Hot-rolled sheets and strip A1011/A1011M, SS Grade 36 [250] Type
    1 or Type 2 or A1018/A1018M, SS Grade
    36 [250]
    Cold-formed tubing A500, Grade B
    Hot-formed tubing A501
    Anchor bolts F1554, Grade 36
    TABLE 2 Tensile RequirementsA
    Plates, Shapes,B and Bars:
    Tensile strength, ksi [MPa] 58–80 [400–550]
    Yield point, min, ksi [MPa] 36 [250]C
    Plates and Bars:D,E
    Elongation in 8 in. [200 mm], min, % 20
    Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min, % 23
    Shapes:
    Elongation in 8 in. [200 mm], min, % 20
    Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min, % 21B
    A See the Orientation subsection in the Tension Tests section of Specification
    A6/A6M.
    B For wide flange shapes with flange thickness over 3 in. [75 mm], the 80 ksi [550
    MPa] maximum tensile strength does not apply and a minimum elongation in 2 in.
    [50 mm] of 19 % applies.
    C Yield point 32 ksi [220 MPa] for plates over 8 in. [200 mm] in thickness.
    D Elongation not required to be determined for floor plate.
    E For plates wider than 24 in. [600 mm], the elongation requirement is reduced two
    percentage points. See the Elongation Requirement Adjustments subsection
    under the Tension Tests section of Specification A6/A6M.
    SA-36/SA-36M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    130
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    These requirements shall not apply unless specified in the order.
    Standardized supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser are listed in
    Specification A6/A6M. Those that are considered suitable for use with this specification are listed by
    title:
    S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test.
    S30. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test for Structural Shapes:
    Alternate Core Location
    S32. Single Heat Bundles
    S32.1 Bundles containing shapes or bars shall be from a
    single heat of steel.
    TABLE 3 Chemical Requirements
    NOTE 1—Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement. The heat analysis for manganese shall be determined and reported as described
    in the heat analysis section of Specification A6/A6M.
    Product ShapesA Plates > 15-in. [380 mm] WidthB Bars; Plates # 15-in. [380 mm] WidthB
    Thickness, in. [mm] All
    To 3/4
    [20],
    incl
    Over 3/4
    to 11/2
    [20 to 40],
    incl
    Over 11/2
    to 21/2
    [40 to 65],
    incl
    Over 21/2
    to 4
    [65 to 100],
    incl
    Over 4
    [100]
    To 3/4
    [20],
    incl
    Over 3/4
    to 11/2
    [20 to 40],
    incl
    Over 11/2
    to 4
    [100],
    incl
    Over 4
    [100]
    Carbon, max, % 0.26 0.25 0.25 0.26 0.27 0.29 0.26 0.27 0.28 0.29
    Manganese, % … … 0.80–1.20 0.80–1.20 0.85–1.20 0.85–1.20 … 0.60–0.90 0.60–0.90 0.60–0.90
    Phosphorus, max, % 0.04 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
    Sulfur, max, % 0.05 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
    Silicon, % 0.40 max 0.40 max 0.40 max 0.15–0.40 0.15–0.40 0.15–0.40 0.40 max 0.40 max 0.40 max 0.40 max
    Copper, min, % when
    cop per steel is specified
    0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
    A Manganese content of 0.85–1.35 % and silicon content of 0.15–0.40 % is required for shapes with flange thickness over 3 in. [75 mm].
    B For each reduction of 0.01 percentage point below the specified carbon maximum, an increase of 0.06 percentage point manganese above the specified maximum will
    be permitted, up to the maximum of 1.35 %.
    SPECIFICATION FOR FERRITIC MALLEABLE IRON
    CASTINGS
    SA-47/SA-47M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A47/A47M-99(R14) except for the deletion of welded repair references in 11.2 and
    11.3, and mandatory certification in 14.1.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-47/SA-47M
    131
    SA-47/SA-47M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    132
    SPECIFICATION FOR FERRITIC MALLEABLE IRON
    CASTINGS
    SA-47/SA-47M
    [Identical with ASTM Specification A 47/A 47M-99(R14), except for the deletion of welded repair references in 11.2 and 11.3, and mandatory
    certification in 14.1.]
84. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers ferritic malleable castings
    for general engineering usage at temperatures from normal
    ambient to approximately 400°C (750°F).
    1.2 No precise quantitative relationship can be stated
    between the properties of the iron in various locations of
    the same casting and those of a test specimen cast from
    the same iron (see Appendix X1).
    1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
    units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
    text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
    in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
    system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
    values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
    with the specification.
85. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A 153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron
    and Steel Hardware
    A 247 Test Method for Evaluating the Microstructure of
    Graphite in Iron Castings
    A 644 Terminology Relating to Iron Castings
    E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
    E 10 Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials
    E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
    Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials
    E 140 Hardness Conversion Tables for Metals
    2.2 Military Standard:
    MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
    2.3 Federal Standard:
    Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Domestic Shipment (Civilian
    Agencies)
86. Terminology
    3.1 Definitions — Definitions for many terms common
    to iron are found in Terminology A 644.
87. Classification
    4.1 Castings ordered and produced under this specification
    are classified under the following grades based on
    tests on separately cast test bars. Separately cast test bars
    shall be poured from the same lot of iron as the castings
    they represent and shall be heat treated with those castings
    except as provided in 7.2.3.
    4.1.1 Grade 32510 [Grade 22010]:
    4.1.1.1 The first three digits of the grade designation
    indicate the minimum yield strength (100 psi [MPa])
    and the last two digits indicate the minimum elongation
    (% in 2 in. [50 mm]).
88. Ordering Information
    5.1 The purchase order for castings ordered under this
    specification shall state the specification designation, the
    year in which the specification was issued, and the grade
    of malleable iron to be supplied. Any option or special
    additions to the basic requirements of this specification
    shall be clearly and fully stipulated.
89. Chemical Composition
    6.1 The chemical composition of the iron shall be such
    as to produce the structural and mechanical properties
    required by this specification.
90. Mechanical Properties
    7.1 Factors influencing the properties of castings and
    their relationship to those of test specimens and separate
    test castings are discussed in Appendix X1.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-47/SA-47M
    133
    7.2 Tension Test Specimens:
    7.2.1 The tension test specimens shall be cast to the
    form and dimensions shown in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2, in the same
    kind of molding material used for the production castings.
    At least three such specimens shall be cast from a representative
    ladle of iron either from each batch-melted heat or,
    in continuous melting, from each 4 h pour period during
    which the purchaser’s castings were poured, or as otherwise
    agreed upon between manufacturer and purchaser.
    7.2.2 All test specimens shall be suitably identified
    with the designation of either the batch-melted heat or the
    pour period of a continuous heat.
    7.2.3 All test specimens shall be heat treated in the
    same production furnaces and in the same cycles as the
    castings they represent. However, in those instances
    wherein the critical sections of the production castings
    differ appreciably from that of the central portion of the
    test specimens, the time cycle for tempering the test specimens
    may be altered from that of the production lot in
    order to obtain similar microstructures or hardness, or both,
    in both specimen and castings. In such cases the hardness
    of the specimens shall be tested and reported along with
    the tensile test results.
    7.2.4 The tension test is usually performed on unmachined
    specimens. However, for referee work, the specimen
    may be machined from the standard cast bar to the
    dimensions shown in Fig. 3.
    7.3 Tension Test Method:
    7.3.1 The gage length of the standard tension specimen
    shall be 2.00 ± 0.01 in. [50.0 ± 0.3 mm].
    7.3.2 The diameter used to compute the cross-sectional
    area shall be the average between the largest and
    smallest diameters in that section of the 2 in. [50 mm]
    gage length having the smallest diameter and shall be measured
    to the nearest 0.001 in. [0.2 mm]. No cast bar having
    a mean diameter less than 0.590 in. [15.0 mm] shall be
    accepted for test.
    7.3.3 After reaching a stress equivalent to approximately
    half of the anticipated yield stress, the speed of the
    moving head of the testing machine shall not exceed
    0.50 in./min [12.5 mm/min] through the breaking load.
    7.3.4 While the values for yield point and yield
    strength are not identical, they are sufficiently close for
    most applications of ferritic malleable irons to be used
    interchangeably. They may be determined by any of the
    approved techniques described in the paragraphs on Determination
    of Yield Strength and Yield Point of Test Methods
    E 8. If determined as yield strength, that stress producing
    an extension under load of 0.01 in. [0.25 mm] over the
    2 in. [50 mm] gage length (for example, 0.5% extension)
    or an offset of 0.2% shall be taken as the yield stress,
    which shall be converted to yield strength by dividing by
    the original cross-sectional area of the gage length found
    in accordance with 7.3.2. It shall be reported to the nearest
    100 psi [MPa]. In referee work, yield strength shall be
    determined as the stress that produces an extension under
    load of 0.5% of the gage length.
    7.3.5 The tensile strength shall be the maximum load
    carried by the specimen during the test divided by the
    original cross-sectional area of the gage length, as found
    in accordance with 7.3.2. It shall be reported to the nearest
    100 psi [MPa].
    7.3.6 The elongation is the increase in gage length
    after fracture of a tensile specimen, measured to the nearest
    0.01 in. [0.25 mm], expressed as a percentage of the original
    gage length. It shall be reported to the nearest 0.5%.
    7.4 Retesting:
    7.4.1 If, after testing, a specimen shows evidence of
    a defect, another tension test may be made on a companion
    specimen. Also, a retest shall be permitted whenever fracture
    occurs outside the central 50% of the gage length.
    7.4.2 If the results of a valid test fail to conform to
    the requirements of this specification, two retests shall be
    made. If either retest fails to meet the specification, the
    castings represented by these test specimens shall be
    rejected. A valid test is one wherein the test specimen has
    been properly prepared and appears to be sound and on
    which the approved test procedure has been followed.
    7.4.3 If sufficient companion test bars are unavailable,
    the manufacturer shall have the option of testing a
    specimen cut from a representative casting. Therefore, as
    stated in X1.3, the mechanical properties of such tension
    test specimen removed from a production casting will not
    necessarily correspond to those of a standard separately
    cast test specimen, the values in Table 1 do not apply.
    Instead, the mechanical properties of the test specimen
    from the casting must equal or exceed the average of those
    from similar test specimens removed from the same location
    from two castings of the same design where separately
    cast test bars meet the requirements of Table 1.
    7.4.4 If the first test results indicate that a reheat
    treatment is needed to meet the test requirements, the entire
    lot of castings and the representative test specimens shall
    be reheat treated together. Testing shall then be repeated
    in accordance with 7.4.1–7.4.3.
    7.4.5 The results of all tests, including retests, shall
    be posted in permanent record, which shall state any abnormalities
    observed during the test and in the fractured ends.
    Such records shall be kept for at least 1 year after shipment
    of the production castings and shall be available for examination
    by the purchaser or by his authorized representative.
    7.4.6 If not covered in the purchase agreement, the
    frequency of tension testing shall be in accordance with
    7.2.1 and sufficiently often to ensure uniformity of product
    and compliance with minimum test requirements.
    SA-47/SA-47M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    134
    7.4.7 Tension test results, obtained in accordance
    with the above subsections, must conform to the values of
    Table 1 for acceptance under this specification except as
    provided in 7.4.3.
    7.4.8 When agreed upon between manufacturer and
    purchaser, tested specimens or unbroken test bars shall be
    preserved by the manufacturer for a period of three months
    after the date of the test report.
    7.5 Hardness Test—If the purchase agreement requires
    hardness testing, the acceptable hardness range shall be
    stated and a test location clearly shown on the covering
    drawing(s).
    7.5.1 Hardness Test Method — The Brinell method
    of hardness testing in accordance with Test Method E 10
    shall be employed whenever possible.
    7.5.2 For castings of such size or shape that do not
    permit Brinell testing with the standard 3000-kgf load, the
    500 kgf may be employed, the hardness number being
    reported as HB 10/500/15. In very unusual cases where it
    is impossible to use the Brinell method, the Rockwell
    test may be substituted, using Test Methods E 18 with
    an appropriate Rockwell scale. Conversions of hardness
    values from one method to another according to Standard
    E 140, which does not specifically cover cast irons, are
    approximate only and, therefore, are generally inadvisable.
    7.5.3 Sufficient material shall be removed from the
    cast surface to ensure that the measured surface is representative.
    7.5.4 Sampling procedures and the frequency of
    hardness testing shall be fully detailed on the purchase
    agreement. Otherwise, hardness tests shall be performed
    at the discretion of the producer.
    7.5.5 Castings failing to conform to the required
    hardness range may be reheat treated and retested. If after
    reheat treating they still fail the hardness requirements,
    they shall be rejected.
    7.5.6 Typical hardness maximums for this grade of
    malleable iron are listed in Table 2.
91. Microstructure Requirements
    8.1 The microstructure of the malleable iron shall consist
    of temper carbon nodules distributed through a ferritic
    matrix and shall be free of excessive pearlite, massive
    carbides, and primary graphite.
    8.2 When agreed upon by the purchaser and producer,
    the maximum decarburization at any as-cast surface after
    heat treatment may be stipulated in writing, as measured
    by visual depletion of combined carbon after polishing,
    etching in nital, and viewing at 100.
    8.3 In reference work, the metallographic practice recommended
    in Test Method A 247 shall be followed.
92. Soundness Requirements
    9.1 All castings, on visual examination, shall be sound
    and free of obvious shrinkage and porosity.
    9.2 If the purchaser requires soundness tests to be performed,
    it shall be so stated in the purchase agreement, and
    the method and soundness requirements shall be detailed.
93. Dimensional Requirements
    10.1 The castings shall conform to the dimensions
    given on drawings furnished by the purchaser, or to the
    dimensions established by the pattern equipment supplied
    by the purchaser, or as agreed upon in specific cases to
    gages supplied by the purchaser. Variations in any solid
    dimensions will be permitted, as shown in Table 3, unless
    otherwise agreed upon by the foundry and purchaser.
94. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
    11.1 The surface of the casting shall be inspected visually,
    particularly in critical areas, for such surface defects
    as cracks, hot tears, adhering sand and scale, cold shuts,
    and gas holes.
    11.2 No repairing or plugging of any kind shall be
    permitted unless written permission is granted by the purchaser.
    Welding or brazing is not permitted under any
    circumstances.
    11.3 DELETED
95. Responsibility for Inspection
    12.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
    order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for carrying
    out all the tests and inspections required by this
    specification, using his own or other reliable facilities, and
    he shall maintain complete records of all such tests and
    inspections. Such records shall be available for review by
    the purchaser.
    12.2 The purchaser reserves the right to perform any
    inspection set forth in the specification where such inspections
    are deemed necessary to ensure that supplies and
    services conform to the prescribed requirements.
96. Rejection and Rehearing
    13.1 Any casting or lot of castings failing to comply
    with the requirements of this specification may, where
    possible, be reprocessed, retested, and reinspected. If the
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-47/SA-47M
    135
    tests and inspections on the reprocessed casting(s) show
    compliance with this specification, the castings shall be
    acceptable; if they do not, they shall be rejected.
    13.2 If the purchaser should find that a casting or lot
    of castings fails to comply with this specification subsequent
    to receipt at his facility, he shall so notify the manufacturer
    promptly and in no case later than six weeks after
    receipt of the shipment, stating clearly his basis for rejection.
    In case of dissatisfaction with the purchaser’s claim,
    the manufacturer may apply for a hearing before final
    rejection of the shipment.
97. Certification
    14.1 A manufacturer’s certification or compliance
    statement that the casting or lot of castings was made,
    sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification,
    including a report of test results signed by an
    authorized agent of the manufacturer, shall be furnished at
    the time of shipment, and such certification or compliance
    statement shall be the basis for acceptance of the casting
    or lot of castings.
    TABLE 1
    TENSION TEST REQUIREMENTS
    Inch-Pound Grades
    Tensile Yield
    English Strength, Strength, Elongation in
    Grade min, psi min, psi 2 in., min, %
    32510 50 000 32 500 10
    Metric Grades
    Tensile Yield
    Metric Strength, Strength, Elongation in
    Grade min, MPa min, MPa 50 mm, min, %
    22010 340 220 10
98. Product Marking
    15.1 When the size of the casting permits, each casting
    shall bear the identifying mark of the manufacturer and
    the part or pattern number at a location shown on the
    covering drawing and, if not shown on the drawing, at
    such a location at the discretion of the producer that the
    identification will not interfere with subsequent processing
    and service of the casting.
99. Packaging and Package Marking
    16.1 Unless otherwise stated in the contract or order,
    the cleaning, preservation, and packing of castings for shipment
    shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s commercial
    practice. Packaging and marking shall also be
    adequate to identify the contents and to ensure acceptance
    and safe delivery by the carrier for the mode of transportation
    employed.
    16.2 U.S. Government Procurement — When specified
    in the contract or purchase order, marking for shipment
    shall be in accordance with the requirements of Fed. Std.
    No. 123 and MIL-STD-129.
    TABLE 2
    TYPICAL HARDNESS
    Hardness,
    Inch-Pound Grade Maximum Indentation Value
    [Metric Grade] HB Diameters, mm
    325 10 [22010] 156 4.8
    TABLE 3
    PERMISSIBLE VARIATION IN ANY
    SOLID DIMENSION
    Size, in. [mm] Tolerance, ± in. [mm]
    Up to 1 [Up to 25] 0.03 [0.8]
    1 to 6 [25 to 150] 0.06 [1.6]
    6 to 12 [151 to 300] 0.12 [3.2]
    12 to 18 [301 to 460] 0.15 [3.8]
    18 to 24 [461 to 600] 0.19 [4.8]
    24 to 36 [601 to 900] 0.22 [5.6]
    SA-47/SA-47M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    136
    FIG. 1 TENSION TEST SPECIMEN
    71/2 in. (195 mm)
    21/2 in. (65 mm) 21/2 in. (65 mm) 21/2 in. (65 mm)
    3/4 in.
    (20 mm)
    3/4 in.
    (20 mm)
    5/16 in. R
    (8 mm)
    3/16 in. R
    (5 mm)
    5/8 in.
    (16 mm)
    FIG. 2 ALTERNATIVE UNMACHINED TENSION TEST SPECIMEN
    53/4 in. (146 mm)
    31/2 in. (90 mm)
    21/8 in. (56 mm)
    (28 mm)
    11/8 in.
    (28 mm)
    11/8 in.
    11/8 in.
    (28 mm)
    11/8 in.
    (28 mm)
    5/8 in. (6 mm) normal
    21/2 in. (64 mm)
    (13 mm)
    19/32 in. (15 mm) min.
    (13 mm)
    0.7 in.
    (18 mm)
    0.7 in.
    (18 mm)
    5/16 in. rad.
    (8 mm)
    5/16 in. rad.
    (8 mm)
    (17 mm)
    3/32 in. rad.
    (2 mm)
    3/32 in. rad.
    (2 mm)
    11/16 in.
    (17 mm)
    11/16 in.
    1/2 in. 1/2 in.
    NOTE 1 — Modifications may be made in the dimensions indicated above for those details of the specimen outside of the gage length as
    required by testing procedure and equipment.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-47/SA-47M
    137
    FIG. 3 MACHINED TENSION TEST SPECIMEN
    Minimum radius recommended 3/8 in. (10 mm),
    but not less than 1/8 in. (3 mm) permitted.
    21/4 in.
    (57.0 mm)
    (50 mm ± 0.13 mm)
    Gage length
    Parallel section
    0.50 in. ± 0.01 in.
    (12.5 mm ± 0.25 mm)
    2 in. ± 0.005 in.
    NOTE 1 — The gage length and fillets shall be as shown, but the ends may be of any shape to fit the holders of the testing machine in such
    a way that the load shall be axial. The reduced section shall have a gradual taper from the ends toward the center, with the ends 0.003 to
    0.005 in. [0.08 to 0.13 mm] larger in diameter than the center.
    SA-47/SA-47M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    138
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    S1. Special Conditions
    S1.1 If agreed upon in writing by the foundry and
    purchaser, the malleable iron castings may be required to
    meet special conditions, hardness or other property dimensions,
    surface quality, or a combination of conditions.
    S2. Test Lugs
    S2.1 If requested in writing or if included on the pattern(
    s) or pattern drawing(s), test lugs may be cast on all
    castings of sufficient size to permit their incorporation.
    The size of such lugs shall be proportional to the thickness
    of the casting. On castings over 24 in. [600 mm] in length,
    a test lug shall be cast near each end such as not to interfere
    with any subsequent processing of the castings. The purchase
    order shall stipulate whether the foundry’s inspector
    or the purchaser’s inspector shall break, inspect, and pass
    judgment on the fracture quality of these test lugs.
    S3. Destructive Tests
    S3.1 At the option of the purchaser or his representative,
    a casting of each design ordered may be tested to
    destruction, or otherwise broken up, to determine the presence
    of any manufacturing condition that might be detrimental
    to the serviceability of the casting.
    S4. Special Tension Specimens
    S4.1 If tension specimens are to be machined from
    castings, their location in the casting, the specimen dimensions,
    and the required properties shall be agreed upon in
    writing by the foundry and purchaser.
    S5. Zinc-Coated Castings
    S5.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
    castings shall be zinc-coated by the hot-dip process in
    accordance with Specification A 153. Castings shall be of
    a composition that will preclude the possibility of galvanizing
    embrittlement, or shall be either cooled from the anneal
    or subsequently heat treated so as to be immunized against
    such embrittlement. If regalvanizing is required, procedures
    for regalvanizing castings and determining the effect
    on the casting performance must be agreed upon between
    the purchaser and the seller.
    S6. Marking of Casting for Government
    Procurement
    S6.1 When castings are specified for government procurement,
    the location of the permanent markings specified
    in 15.1, as well as any special marking for mechanical or
    physical properties (either permanent or temporary), shall
    be as indicated on the government drawings or sketches.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-47/SA-47M
    139
    APPENDIX
    (Nonmandatory Information)
    X1. MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF
    CASTINGS
    X1.1 The mechanical properties of malleable iron castings
    are influenced by a number of factors, including the
    cooling rate during solidification, chemical composition,
    the heat treatment, the design of the casting, section thickness,
    and the location and effectiveness of gates, risers,
    and chills.
    X1.2 Because of the complexity of these factors in
    influencing the properties of the final product, no precise
    quantitative relationship can be stated between the properties
    of the iron in various locations of the same casting or
    between the properties of a casting and those of a test
    specimen cast from the same iron. When such a relationship
    is important and must be known for a specific application,
    it may be determined by appropriate experimentation.
    X1.3 The specimen specified in 7.2.1 as the standard
    tensile test bar for malleable iron has a 5/8 in. [16 mm]
    diameter test section that reasonably represents a typical
    section of the general run of malleable iron castings. Furthermore,
    the initial freezing of malleable irons as homogeneous
    white iron, together with the heat treatment that is
    inherent in the manufacture of malleable iron, tends to
    reduce the section-sensitivity effect. Therefore, where
    experimentation into precise properties within a given casting
    would be infeasible, this standard test bar, made like
    any typical casting, should provide a practical approximation
    of the properties that can be expected in average sound
    malleable iron casting.
    X1.4 If malleable iron castings are welded, the microstructure
    of the iron is markedly affected, particularly in
    the heat-affected zone. Therefore, since this may adversely
    affect the properties of the casting, the welding of malleable
    iron castings should be done under strict metallurgical
    control, followed by appropriate post-weld heat treatment,
    to minimize the substantial reductions in ductility, impact
    resistance, and machinability that could result, particularly
    in the vicinity of the weldment. Nevertheless, it is generally
    considered inadvisable to join castings to similar castings
    or to other materials, by fusion welding out in the field,
    or in manufactured assemblies, without fully testing the
    entire completed part.
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    SPECIFICATION FOR PIPE, STEEL, BLACK AND
    HOT-DIPPED, ZINC-COATED, WELDED AND SEAMLESS
    SA-53/SA-53M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A53/A53M-01 except for the insertion of test practices in 11.1.1, and editorial
    correction to Table X4.1.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-53/SA-53M
    141
    SA-53/SA-53M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    142
    SPECIFICATION FOR PIPE, STEEL, BLACK AND HOTDIPPED,
    ZINC-COATED, WELDED AND SEAMLESS
    SA-53/SA-53M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A 53/A 53M-01 except for the insertion of test practices in 11.1.1, and editorial correction to Table X4.1.)
100. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers seamless and welded
     black and hot-dipped galvanized steel pipe in NPS 1/8 to
     NPS 26 [DN 6 toDN650] (Note 1), inclusive, with nominal
     wall thickness (Note 2) as given in Table X2.2 and Table
     X2.3. It shall be permissible to furnish pipe having other
     dimensions (Note 2) provided such pipe complies with all
     other requirements of this specification.
     NOTE 1—The dimensionless designators NPS (nominal pipe size) [DN
     (diameter nominal)] have been substituted in this specification for such
     traditional terms as “nominal diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.”
     NOTE 2 — The term nominal wall thickness has been assigned for the
     purpose of convenient designation, existing in name only, and is used to
     distinguish it from the actual wall thickness, which may vary over or
     under the nominal wall thickness.
     1.2 This specification covers the following types and
     grades:
     1.2.1 Type F — Furnace-butt welded, continuous
     welded Grade A,
     1.2.2 Type E — Electric-resistance welded, Grades
     A and B, and
     1.2.3 Type S — Seamless, Grades A and B.
     NOTE 3 — See Appendix X1 for definitions of types of pipe.
     1.3 Pipe ordered under this specification is intended
     for mechanical and pressure applications and is also acceptable
     for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas, and air lines. It
     is suitable for welding, and suitable for forming operations
     involving coiling, bending, and flanging, subject to the
     following qualifications:
     1.3.1 Type F is not intended for flanging.
     1.3.2 When Types S and E are required for close
     coiling or cold bending, Grade A is the preferred grade.
     This provision is not intended to prohibit the cold bending
     of Grade B pipe.
     1.3.3 Type E is furnished either nonexpanded or cold
     expanded at the option of the manufacturer.
     1.4 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound
     units are to be regarded separately as standard. The values
     stated in each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore,
     each system shall be used independently of the other.
     Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
     with the standard.
     1.5 The following precautionary caveat pertains only
     to the test method portion, Sections 9, 10, 11, 15, 16, and
     17 of this specification: This standard does not purport to
     address all of the safety concerns, if any, associated with
     its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard
     to establish appropriate safety and health practices and
     determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior
     to use.
     1.6 The text of this specification contains notes or
     footnotes, or both, that provide explanatory material. Such
     notes and footnotes, excluding those in tables and figures,
     do not contain any mandatory requirements.
101. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A 90/A 90M Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on
     Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings
     A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
     of Steel Products
     A 530/A 530M Specification for General Requirements
     for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe
     A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading
     Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment
     A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
     Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
     A 865 Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black
     or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for
     Use in Steel Pipe Joints
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-53/SA-53M
     143
     B 6 Specification for Zinc
     E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
     Determine Conformance with Specifications
     E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
     and Tubing
     E 309 Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel
     Tubular Products Using Magnetic Saturation
     E 570 Practice for Flux Leakage Examination of Ferromagnetic
     Steel Tubular Products
     E 1806 Practice for Sampling Steel and Iron for Determination
     of Chemical Composition
     2.2 ANSI Standards:
     ASC X12
     B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose
     2.3 ASME Standard:
     B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
     2.4 Military Standards:
     MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
     MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products Preparation for Shipment
     and Storage
     2.5 Federal Standards:
     Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
     Fed. Std. No. 183 Continuous Identification Marking of
     Iron and Steel Products
     2.6 API Standard:
     5L Specification for Line Pipe
102. Ordering Information
     3.1 Information items to be considered, if appropriate,
     for inclusion in the purchase order are as follows:
     3.1.1 Specification designation (A 53 or A 53M,
     including year of issue),
     3.1.2 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
     3.1.3 Grade (see Table 1),
     3.1.4 Type (see 1.2 and Table 2),
     3.1.5 Finish (black or galvanized),
     3.1.6 Size (either nominal (NPS) [DN] and weight
     class or schedule number, or both; or outside diameter and
     nominal wall thickness, Table X2.2 and Table X2.3),
     3.1.7 Length (specific or random, Section 18),
     3.1.8 End finish (plain end or threaded, Section 13),
     3.1.8.1 Threaded and coupled, if desired,
     3.1.8.2 Threads only (no couplings), if desired,
     3.1.8.3 Plain end, if desired,
     3.1.8.4 Couplings power tight, if desired,
     3.1.8.5 Taper tapped couplings for NPS 2 [DN 50]
     and smaller, if desired,
     3.1.9 Close coiling, if required (see 8.2),
     3.1.10 Skelp for tension tests, if permitted (see 17.2),
     3.1.11 Certification (see Section 22),
     3.1.12 End use of material,
     3.1.13 Special requirements, and
     3.1.14 Selection of applicable level of preservation
     and packaging and level of packing required, if other than
     as specified or if MIL-STD-163 applies (see 21.2).
103. Materials and Manufacture
     4.1 The steel for both seamless and welded pipe shall
     be made by one or more of the following processes: openhearth,
     electric-furnace, or basic-oxygen.
     4.2 When steels of different grades are sequentially
     strand cast, identification of the resultant transition material
     is required. The producer shall remove the transition material
     by any established procedure that positively separates
     the grades.
     4.3 The weld seam of electric-resistance welded pipe
     in Grade B shall be heat treated after welding to a minimum
     of 1000°F [540°C] so that no untempered martensite
     remains, or otherwise processed in such a manner that no
     untempered martensite remains.
     4.4 When pipe is cold expanded, the amount of expansion
     shall not exceed 11/2%of the outside diameter pipe size.
104. Chemical Composition
     5.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
     chemical composition in Table 1 and the chemical analysis
     shall be in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and
     Terminology A 751.
105. Product Analysis
     6.1 The purchaser is permitted to perform an analysis
     of two pipes from each lot of 500 lengths, or fraction
     thereof. Samples for chemical analysis, except for spectrographic
     analysis, shall be taken in accordance with Practice
     E 1806. The chemical composition thus determined shall
     conform to the requirements specified in Table 1.
     6.2 If the analysis of either pipe does not conform to
     the requirements specified in Table 1, analyses shall be
     made on additional pipes of double the original number
     from the same lot, each of which shall conform to the
     requirements specified.
106. Tensile Requirements
     7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as
     to tensile properties prescribed in Table 2.
     SA-53/SA-53M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     144
     7.2 The yield strength corresponding to a permanent
     offset of 0.2% of the gage length of the specimen or to a
     total extension of 0.5% of the gage length under load shall
     be determined.
     7.3 The test specimen taken across the weld shall show
     a tensile strength not less than the minimum tensile strength
     specified for the grade of pipe ordered. This test will not
     be required for pipe under NPS 8 [DN 200].
     7.4 Transverse tension test specimens for electricwelded
     pipe NPS 8 [DN 200] and larger shall be taken
     opposite the weld. All transverse test specimens shall be
     approximately 11/2 in. [40 mm] wide in the gage length,
     and shall represent the full wall thickness of the pipe from
     which the specimen was cut. This test is required for NPS 8
     [DN 200] and larger.
107. Bending Requirements
     8.1 For pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and under, a sufficient
     length of pipe shall be capable of being bent cold through
     90° around a cylindrical mandrel, the diameter of which
     is twelve times the outside diameter of the pipe, without
     developing cracks at any portion and without opening
     the weld.
     8.2 When ordered for close coiling, the pipe shall stand
     being bent cold through 180° around a cylindrical mandrel,
     the diameter of which is eight times the outside diameter
     of the pipe, without failure.
     8.3 Double-extra-strong pipe over NPS 11/4 [DN 32]
     need not be subjected to the bend test.
108. Flattening Test
     9.1 The flattening test shall be made on pipe over NPS
     2 [DN 50] with all thicknesses extra strong and lighter.
     9.2 Seamless Pipe:
     9.2.1 For seamless pipe, a test specimen at least
     21/2 in. [60 mm] in length shall be flattened cold between
     parallel plates in two steps. During the first step, which is
     a test for ductility, no cracks or breaks on the inside,
     outside, or end surfaces, except as provided for in 9.7,
     shall occur until the distance between the plates is less
     than the value of H calculated as follows:
     H p (1 + e) t/(e + t/D)
     where:
     H p distance between flattening plates, in. [mm]
     (Note 4),
     e p deformation per unit length (constant for a given
     grade of steel, 0.09 for Grade A, and 0.07 for
     Grade B),
     t p nominal wall thickness, in. [mm], and
     D p specified outside diameter, in. [mm]
     9.2.2 During the second step, which is a test for
     soundness, the flattening shall be continued until the test
     specimen breaks or the opposite sides of the pipe meet.
     Evidence of laminated or unsound material that is revealed
     during the entire flattening test shall be cause for rejection.
     NOTE 4 — The H values have been calculated for standard and extraheavy
     weight sizes from NPS 21/2 to NPS 24 [DN 65 to DN 600], inclusive,
     and are shown in Table X2.1.
     9.3 Electric-Resistance-Welded Pipe—Atest specimen
     at least 4 in. [100 mm] in length shall be flattened cold
     between parallel plates in three steps, with the weld located
     either 0° or 90° from the line of direction of force as
     required in 9.3.1 or 9.3.2, whichever is applicable. During
     the first step, which is a test for ductility of the weld, no
     cracks or breaks on the inside or outside surfaces at the
     weld shall occur until the distance between the plates is
     less than two thirds of the specified diameter of the pipe.
     As a second step, the flattening shall be continued as a test
     for ductility away from the weld. During the second step,
     no cracks or breaks on the inside or outside surfaces away
     from the weld, except as provided for in 9.7, shall occur
     until the distance between the plates is less than one third
     of the specified outside diameter of the pipe but is not less
     than five times the wall thickness of the pipe. During the
     third step, which is a test for soundness, the flattening shall
     be continued until the test specimen breaks or the opposite
     walls of the pipe meet. Evidence of laminated or unsound
     material or of incomplete weld that is revealed by the
     flattening test shall be cause for rejection.
     9.3.1 For pipe produced in single lengths, the flattening
     test specified in 9.3 shall be made using a test
     specimen taken from each end of each length of pipe. The
     tests from each end shall be made alternately with the weld
     at 0° and at 90° from the line of direction of force.
     9.3.2 For pipe produced in multiple lengths, the flattening
     test specified in 9.3 shall be made as follows:
     9.3.2.1 Test specimens taken from, and representative
     of, the front end of the first pipe intended to be supplied
     from each coil, the back end of the last pipe intended to
     be supplied from each coil, and each side of any intermediate
     weld stop location shall be flattened with the weld
     located at 90° from the line of direction of force.
     9.3.2.2 Test specimens taken from pipe at any two
     locations intermediate to the front end of the first pipe and
     the back end of the last pipe intended to be supplied from
     each coil shall be flattened with the weld located at 0°
     from the line of direction of force.
     9.3.3 For pipe that is to be subsequently reheated
     throughout its cross section and hot formed by a reducing
     process, the manufacturer shall have the option of obtaining
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-53/SA-53M
     145
     the flattening test specimens required by 9.3.1 or 9.3.2,
     whichever is applicable, either prior to or after such hot
     reducing.
     9.4 Continuous-Welded Pipe—A test specimen at least
     4 in. [100 mm] in length shall be flattened cold between
     parallel plates in three steps. The weld shall be located at
     90° from the line of direction of force. During the first
     step, which is a test for ductility of the weld, no cracks or
     breaks on the inside, outside, or end surfaces at the weld
     shall occur until the distance between the plates is less
     than three fourths of the specified diameter of the pipe. As
     a second step, the flattening shall be continued as a test
     for ductility away from the weld. During the second step,
     no cracks or breaks on the inside, outside, or end surfaces
     away from the weld, except as provided for in 9.7, shall
     occur until the distance between the plates is less than 60%
     of the specified outside diameter of the pipe. During the
     third step, which is a test for soundness, the flattening shall
     be continued until the test specimen breaks or the opposite
     walls of the pipe meet. Evidence of laminated or unsound
     material or of incomplete weld that is revealed by the
     flattening test shall be cause for rejection.
     9.5 Surface imperfections in the test specimen before
     flattening, but revealed during the first step of the flattening
     test, shall be judged in accordance with the finish requirements
     in Section 14.
     9.6 Superficial ruptures as a result of surface imperfections
     shall not be cause for rejection.
     9.7 When low D-to-t ratio tubulars are tested, because
     the strain imposed due to geometry is unreasonably high
     on the inside surface at the 6 and 12 o’clock locations,
     cracks at these locations shall not be cause for rejection if
     the D-to-t ratio is less than 10.
109. Hydrostatic Test
     10.1 The hydrostatic test shall be applied, without leakage
     through the pipe wall, to each length of pipe except
     as provided in 11.2 for seamless pipe.
     10.2 Each length of plain-end pipe shall be hydrostatically
     tested to the pressures prescribed in Table X2.2, and
     each threaded-and-coupled length shall be hydrostatically
     tested to the pressures prescribed in Table X2.3. It shall
     be permissible, at the discretion of the manufacturer, to
     perform the hydrostatic test on pipe with plain ends, with
     threads only, or with threads and couplings and also shall be
     permissible to test pipe in either single lengths or multiple
     lengths.
     NOTE 5 — The hydrostatic test pressures given herein are inspection
     test pressures, are not intended as a basis for design, and do not have
     any direct relationship to working pressures.
     10.3 The minimum hydrostatic test pressure required
     to satisfy these requirements need not exceed 2500 psi
     [17 200 kPa] for NPS 3 [DN 80] and under, nor 2800 psi
     [19 300 kPa] for all sizes over NPS 3 [DN 80]. This does not
     prohibit testing at a higher pressure at the manufacturer’s
     option. The hydrostatic pressure shall be maintained for
     not less than 5 s for all sizes of seamless and electricwelded
     pipe.
110. Nondestructive Electric Test
     11.1 Type E Pipe:
     11.1.1 The weld seam of each length of ERW pipe
     NPS 2 [DN 50] and larger shall be tested with a nondestructive
     electric test in accordance with Practice E 213, E 309,
     or E 570 as follows:
     11.1.2 Ultrasonic and Electromagnetic Inspection —
     Any equipment utilizing the ultrasonic or electromagnetic
     principles and capable of continuous and uninterrupted
     inspection of the weld seam shall be used. The equipment
     shall be checked with an applicable reference standard as
     described in 11.1.3 at least once every working turn or not
     more than 8 h to demonstrate its effectiveness and the
     inspection procedures. The equipment shall be adjusted
     to produce well-defined indications when the reference
     standard is scanned by the inspection unit in a manner
     simulating the inspection of the product.
     11.1.3 Reference Standards — The length of the reference
     standards shall be determined by the pipe manufacturer,
     and they shall have the same specified diameter
     and thickness as the product being inspected. Reference
     standards shall contain machined notches, one on the inside
     surface and one on the outside surface, or a drilled hole,
     as shown in Fig. 1, at the option of the pipe manufacturer.
     The notches shall be parallel to the weld seam, and shall
     be separated by a distance sufficient to produce two separate
     and distinguishable signals. The 1/8-in. [3.2-mm] hole
     shall be drilled through the wall and perpendicular to the
     surface of the reference standard as shown in Fig. 1. Care
     shall be taken in the preparation of the reference standard
     to ensure freedom from fins or other edge roughness, or
     distortion of the pipe.
     NOTE 6 — The calibration standards defined in 11.1.3 are convenient
     standards for calibration of nondestructive testing equipment. The dimensions
     of such standards are not to be construed as the minimum sizes of
     imperfections detectable by such equipment.
     11.1.4 Acceptance Limits — Table 3 gives the height
     of acceptance limit signals in percent of the height of
     signals produced by reference standards. Imperfections in
     the weld seam that produce a signal greater than the acceptance
     limit signal given in Table 3 shall be considered a
     defect unless the pipe manufacturer can demonstrate that
     SA-53/SA-53M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     146
     the imperfection does not reduce the effective wall thickness
     beyond 121/2% of the specified wall thickness.
     11.2 Seamless Pipe — As an alternative to the hydrostatic
     test, and when specified by the purchaser, the full
     body of each seamless pipe shall be tested with a nondestructive
     electric test in accordance with Practices E 213,
     E 309, or E 570. In this case each length so furnished
     shall include the mandatory marking of the letters “NDE.”
     Except as provided in 11.2.6.2 it is the intent of this test
     to reject pipe with imperfections which produce test signals
     equal to or greater than that of the calibration standard.
     11.2.1 When the nondestructive electric test is performed,
     the lengths shall be marked with the letters “NDE.”
     The certification, when required, shall state Nondestructive
     Electric Tested and shall indicate which of the tests was
     applied. Also, the letters NDE shall be appended to the
     product specification number and material grade shown on
     the certification.
     11.2.2 The following information is intended to facilitate
     the use of this specification.
     11.2.2.1 The calibration standards defined in
     11.2.3 through 11.2.5 are convenient standards for calibration
     of nondestructive testing equipment. The dimensions
     of such standards are not to be construed as the minimum
     sizes of imperfections detectable by such equipment.
     11.2.2.2 The ultrasonic testing referred to in this
     specification is capable of detecting the presence and location
     of significant longitudinally or circumferentially oriented
     imperfections; however, different techniques need
     to be employed for the detection of differently oriented
     imperfections. Ultrasonic testing is not necessarily capable
     of detecting short, deep imperfections.
     11.2.2.3 The eddy current examination referenced
     in this specification has the capability of detecting significant
     discontinuities, especially of the short abrupt type.
     11.2.2.4 The flux leakage examination referred to
     in this specification is capable of detecting the presence
     and location of significant longitudinally or transversely
     oriented discontinuities. The provisions of this specification
     only require longitudinal calibration for flux leakage.
     Different techniques need to be employed for the detection
     of differently oriented imperfections.
     11.2.2.5 The hydrostatic test referred to in 10.2
     has the capability of finding imperfections of a size permitting
     the test fluid to leak through the tube wall and may
     be either visually seen or detected by a loss of pressure.
     Hydrostatic testing is not necessarily capable of detecting
     very tight through-the-wall imperfections or imperfections
     that extend an appreciable distance into the wall without
     complete penetration.
     11.2.2.6 A purchaser interested in ascertaining the
     nature (type, size, location, and orientation) of imperfections
     that are capable of being detected in the specific
     application of these examinations is directed to discuss this
     with the manufacturer of the tubular product.
     11.2.3 For ultrasonic testing, the calibration reference
     notches shall be at the option of the producer, and
     shall be any one of the three common notch shapes shown
     in Practice E 213. The depth of notch shall not exceed
     12.5% of the specified wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004 in.
     [0.1 mm], whichever is greater.
     11.2.4 For eddy current testing, the calibration pipe
     shall contain, at the option of the producer, any one of the
     following calibration standards to establish a minimum
     sensitivity level for rejection.
     11.2.4.1 Drilled Hole — Depending upon the pipe
     diameter the calibration pipe shall contain three holes
     spaced 120° apart or four holes spaced 90° apart and sufficiently
     separated longitudinally to ensure separately distinguishable
     responses. The holes shall be drilled radially and
     completely through the pipe wall, care being taken to avoid
     distortion of the pipe while drilling. Depending upon the
     pipe diameter the calibration pipe shall contain the following
     hole:
     NPS DN Diameter of Drilled Hole
     = 1/2 = 15 0.039 in. (1 mm)

1/2 = 11/4 > 15 = 32 0.055 in. (1.4 mm)
11/4 = 2 > 32 = 50 0.071 in. (1.8 mm)
2 = 5 > 50 = 125 0.087 in. (2.2 mm)
5 > 125 0.106 in. (2.7 mm)
11.2.4.2 Transverse Tangential Notch — Using a
round tool or file with a 1/4 in. [6 mm] diameter, a notch shall
be filed or milled tangential to the surface and transverse to
the longitudinal axis of the pipe. The notch shall have a
depth not exceeding 12.5% of the specified wall thickness
of the pipe or 0.012 in. [0.3 mm], whichever is greater.
11.2.4.3 Longitudinal Notch — A notch 0.031 in.
[0.8 mm] or less in width shall be machined in a radial
plane parallel to the tube axis on the outside surface of the
pipe, to have a depth not exceeding 12.5% of the specified
wall thickness of the tube or 0.012 in. [0.3 mm], whichever
is greater. The length of the notch shall be compatible with
the testing method.
11.2.4.4 Compatibility — The discontinuity in the
calibration pipe shall be compatible with the testing equipment
and the method being used.
11.2.5 For flux leakage testing, the longitudinal calibration
reference notches shall be straight sided notches
machined in a radial plane parallel to the pipe axis. For
wall thickness under 0.500 in. [12.7 mm], outside and
inside notches shall be used. For wall thickness equal and
above 0.500 in. [12.7 mm], only an outside notch shall be
ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-53/SA-53M
147
used. Notch depth shall not exceed 12.5% of the specified
wall thickness, or 0.012 in. [0.3 mm], whichever is greater.
Notch length shall not exceed 1 in. [25 mm], and the width
shall not exceed the depth. Outside diameter and inside
diameter notches shall be located sufficiently apart to allow
separation and identification of the signals.
11.2.6 Pipe containing one or more imperfections
that produce a signal equal to or greater than the signal
produced by the calibration standard shall be rejected or
the area producing the signal shall be rejected.
11.2.6.1 Test signals produced by imperfections
that cannot be identified, or produced by cracks or cracklike
imperfections, shall result in rejection of the pipe,
unless it is repaired and retested. To be accepted, the pipe
must pass the same specification test to which it was originally
subjected, provided that the remaining wall thickness
is not decreased below that permitted by the specification.
It shall be permissible to reduce the outside diameter at
the point of grinding by the amount so removed.
11.2.6.2 It shall be permissible to evaluate test
signals produced by visual imperfections in accordance
with provisions of Section 14. A few examples of these
imperfections would be straightener marks, cutting chips,
scratches, steel die stamps, stop marks, or pipe reducer
ripple.
11.2.7 The test methods described in this section are
not necessarily capable of inspecting the end portion of
pipes. This condition is referred to as end effect. The length
of the end effect shall be determined by the manufacturer
and, when specified in the purchase order, reported to the
purchaser.

12. Permissible Variations in Weight and
    Dimensions
    12.1 Weight — The weight of the pipe as specified in
    Table X2.2 and Table X2.3 or as calculated from the relevant
    equation in ASME B36.10M shall not vary by more
    than ±10%.
    NOTE 7 — The weight tolerance is determined from the weights of the
    customary lifts of pipe as produced for shipment by the mill, divided by
    the number of feet of pipe in the lift. On pipe sizes over NPS 4 [DN 100],
    where individual lengths are weighed, the weight tolerance is applicable to
    the individual length.
    12.2 Diameter — For pipe NPS 11/2 [DN 40] and under,
    the outside diameter at any point shall not vary more than
    ± 1/64 in. [0.4 mm] from the standard specified. For pipe
    NPS 2 [DN 50] and over, the outside diameter shall not
    vary more than ±1% from the standard specified.
    12.3 Thickness — The minimum wall thickness at any
    point shall be not more than 12.5% under the nominal
    wall thickness specified. The minimum wall thickness on
    inspection shall conform to the requirements in Table
    X2.4.
13. End Finish
    13.1 When ordered with plain ends, the pipe shall be
    furnished to the following practice, unless otherwise specified.
    13.1.1 NPS 11/2 [DN 40] and Smaller—Unless otherwise
    specified on the purchase order, end finish shall be
    at the option of the manufacturer.
    13.1.2 NPS 2 [DN 50] and Larger:
    13.1.2.1 Pipe of standard or extra strong weights,
    or in wall thickness less than 0.500 in. [12.7 mm], other
    than double extra strong pipe, shall be plain-end beveled
    with ends beveled to an angle of 30°, +5°, -0°, measured
    from a line drawn perpendicular to the axis of the pipe,
    and with a root face of 1/16 in. ± 1/32 in. [1.6 mm ± 0.8 mm].
    13.1.2.2 Pipe with wall thicknesses over 0.500 in.
    [12.7 mm], and all double extra strong, shall be plain-end
    square cut.
    13.2 When ordered with threaded ends, the pipe ends
    shall be provided with a thread in accordance with the
    gaging practice and tolerances of ANSI B1.20.1. For standard-
    weight pipe NPS 6 [DN 150] and smaller, refer to
    Table X3.1 for threading data. For standard-weight pipe
    NPS 8 [DN 200] and larger and all sizes of extra-strong
    weight and double extra-strong weight, refer to Table X3.2
    for threading data. Threaded pipe NPS 4 [DN 100] and
    larger shall have thread protectors on the ends not protected
    by a coupling.
    13.3 When ordered with couplings, one end of each
    length of pipe shall be provided with a coupling manufactured
    in accordance with Specification A 865. The coupling
    threads shall be in accordance with the gaging practice of
    ANSI B1.20.1. The coupling shall be applied handlingtight,
    unless power-tight is specified on the order. Couplings
    are to be made of steel. Taper-tapped couplings
    shall be furnished on all weights of threaded pipe sizes
    NPS 21/2 [DN 65] and larger. For pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and
    smaller, it is regular practice to furnish straight-tapped
    couplings for standard-weight pipe and taper-tapped couplings
    for extra-strong and double extra-strong pipe. If
    taper-tapped couplings are required for pipe NPS 2 [DN 50]
    and smaller on standard-weight pipe, it is recommended
    that line pipe threads in accordance with API Specification
    5L be ordered. The taper-tapped couplings provided on line
    pipe in these sizes may be used on mill-threaded standardweight
    pipe of the same size.
    SA-53/SA-53M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    148
14. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
    14.1 The pipe manufacturer shall explore a sufficient
    number of visual surface imperfections to provide reasonable
    assurance that they have been properly evaluated with
    respect to depth.
    14.2 Surface imperfections that penetrate more than
    121/2% of the nominal wall thickness or encroach on the
    minimum wall thickness shall be considered defects. Pipe
    with defects shall be given one of the following dispositions:
    14.2.1 The defect shall be removed by grinding,
    provided that the remaining wall thickness is within specified
    limits,
    14.2.2 Type S pipe and the parent metal of Type E
    pipe, except within 1/2 in. [13 mm] of the fusion line of the
    electric resistance seam, are permitted to be repaired in
    accordance with the welding provisions of 14.5. Repair
    welding of Type F pipe and the weld seam of Type E is
    prohibited.
    14.2.3 The section of pipe containing the defect may
    be cut off within the limits of requirement on length, or
    14.2.4 Rejected.
    14.3 At the purchaser’s discretion, pipe shall be subjected
    to rejection if surface defects repaired in accordance
    with 14.2 are not scattered, but appear over a large area
    in excess of what is considered a workmanlike finish. Disposition
    of such pipe shall be a matter of agreement
    between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
    14.4 When imperfections or defects are removed by
    grinding, a smooth curved surface shall be maintained,
    and the wall thickness shall not be decreased below that
    permitted by this specification. It shall be permissible to
    reduce the outside diameter at the point of grinding by the
    amount so removed.
    14.4.1 Wall thickness measurements shall be made
    with a mechanical caliper or with a properly calibrated
    nondestructive testing device of appropriate accuracy. In
    the case of a dispute, the measurement determined by use
    of the mechanical caliper shall govern.
    14.5 Weld repair shall be permitted only subject to
    approval of the purchaser and in accordance with Specification
    A 530/A 530M.
    14.6 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight.
    14.7 The pipe shall contain no dents greater than 10%
    of the pipe diameter or 1/4 in. [6 mm], whichever is smaller,
    measured as a gap between the lowest point of the dent
    and a prolongation of the original contour of the pipe.
    Cold-formed dents deeper than 1/8 in. [3 mm] shall be free
    of sharp bottom gouges; it shall be permissible to remove
    the gouges by grinding, provided that the remaining wall
    thickness is within specified limits. The length of the dent
    in any direction shall not exceed one half the pipe diameter.
15. Number of Tests
    15.1 Except as required by 15.2, one of each of the
    tests specified in Section 7, 8.2, and Section 9 shall be
    made on test specimens taken from one length of pipe
    from each lot of each pipe size. For continuous-welded
    pipe, a lot shall contain no more than 25 tons [23 Mg] of
    pipe for pipe sizes NPS 11/2 [DN 40] and smaller, and no
    more than 50 tons [45 Mg] of pipe for pipe sizes NPS 2
    [DN 50] and larger. For seamless and electric-resistancewelded
    pipe, a lot shall contain no more than one heat,
    and at the option of the manufacturer shall contain no more
    than 500 lengths of pipe (as initially cut after the final
    pipe-forming operation, prior to any further cutting to the
    required ordered lengths) or 50 tons [45 Mg] of pipe.
    15.2 The number of flattening tests for electric-resistance-
    welded pipe shall be in accordance with 9.3.1 or 9.3.2,
    whichever is applicable.
    15.3 Except as allowed by 11.2, each length of pipe
    shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test specified in Section
    10.
16. Retests
    16.1 If the results of the mechanical tests of any lot
    do not conform to the requirements specified in Sections
    7, 8, and 9, retests are permitted to be made on additional
    pipe of double the original number from the same lot, each
    of which shall conform to the requirements specified.
    16.2 For pipe produced in single lengths, if any section
    of the pipe fails to comply with the requirements of 9.3,
    it shall be permissible to cut other sections from the same
    end of the same length until satisfactory tests are obtained,
    except that the finished pipe shall not be shorter than 80%
    of its length after the original cropping; otherwise the
    length shall be rejected. For pipe produced in multiple
    lengths, it shall be permissible to cut retests from each end
    of each individual length in the multiple. Such tests shall
    be made with the weld alternately 0° and 90° from the line
    of direction of force.
17. Test Methods
    17.1 The test specimens and the tests required by this
    specification shall conform to those described in the latest
    issue of Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
    17.2 The longitudinal tension test specimen shall be
    taken from the end of the pipe or, for continuous-welded
    pipe, it shall be permissible to be taken from the skelp, at
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-53/SA-53M
    149
    a point approximately 90° from the weld, and shall not be
    flattened between gage marks. The sides of each specimen
    shall be parallel between gage marks. If desired, the tension
    tests are permitted to be made on the full section of pipe.
    When impracticable to pull a test specimen in full section,
    the standard 2-in. [50-mm] gage length tension test specimen
    shown in Fig. A2.3 of Test Methods and Definitions
    A 370 is acceptable.
    17.3 Transverse weld test specimens from electricresistance-
    welded pipe shall be taken with the weld at the
    center of the specimen. All transverse test specimens shall
    be approximately 11/2 in. [40 mm] wide in the gage length
    and shall represent the full wall thickness of the pipe from
    which the specimen was cut.
    17.4 Test specimens for the bend and flattening tests
    shall be taken from pipe. Test specimens for the flattening
    test shall be smooth on the ends and free from burrs.
    17.5 All specimens shall be tested at room temperature.
18. Lengths
    18.1 Unless otherwise specified, pipe lengths shall be
    in accordance with the following regular practice.
    18.1.1 Pipe of weights lighter than extra strong shall
    be in single-random lengths of 16 to 22 ft [4.88 to 6.71 m],
    but not more than 5% of the total number of threaded
    lengths are permitted to be jointers (two pieces coupled
    together). When ordered with plain ends, 5% are permitted
    to be in lengths of 12 to 16 ft [3.66 to 4.88 m].
    18.1.2 Pipe of extra-strong and heavier weights shall
    be in random lengths of 12 to 22 ft [3.66 to 6.71 m]. Five
    percent are permitted to be in lengths of 6 to 12 ft [1.83
    to 3.66 m].
    18.1.3 When extra-strong or lighter pipe is ordered
    in double-random lengths, the minimum lengths shall be
    not less than 22 ft [6.71 m], with a minimum average for
    the order of 35 ft [10.67 m].
    18.1.4 When lengths longer than single random are
    required for wall thicknesses heavier than extra-strong, the
    length shall be subject to negotiation.
    18.1.5 When pipe is furnished with threads and couplings,
    the length shall be measured to the outer face of
    the coupling.
19. Galvanized Pipe
    19.1 Galvanized pipe ordered under this specification
    shall be coated with zinc inside and outside by the hot-dip
    process. The zinc used for the coating shall be any grade
    of zinc conforming to Specification B 6.
    19.2 Weight of Coating — The weight of zinc coating
    shall be not less than 1.8 oz/ft2 [0.55 kg/m2] as determined
    from the average results of the two specimens taken for
    test in the manner prescribed in 19.5 and not less than
    1.6 oz/ft2 [0.49 kg/m2] for either of these specimens. The
    weight of coating expressed in ounces per square foot shall
    be calculated by dividing the total weight of zinc, inside
    plus outside, by the total area, inside plus outside, of the
    surface coated. Each specimen shall have not less than
    1.3 oz/ft2 [0.40 kg/m2] of zinc coating on each surface,
    calculated by dividing the total weight of zinc on the given
    surface (outside or inside) by the area of the surface coated
    (outside or inside).
    19.3 Weight of Coating Test — The weight of zinc
    coating shall be determined by a stripping test in accordance
    with Test Method A 90/A 90M. The total zinc on
    each specimen shall be determined in a single stripping
    operation.
    19.4 Test Specimens — Test specimens for determination
    of weight of coating shall be cut approximately 4 in.
    [100 mm] in length.
    19.5 Number of Tests — Two test specimens for the
    determination of weight of coating shall be taken, one
    from each end of one length of galvanized pipe selected
    at random from each lot of 500 lengths or fraction thereof,
    of each size.
    19.6 Retests — If the weight of coating of any lot does
    not conform to the requirements specified in 19.2, retests
    of two additional pipes from the same lot shall be made,
    each of which shall conform to the requirements specified.
    19.7 When pipe ordered under this specification is to
    be galvanized, the tension, flattening, and bend tests shall
    be made on the base material before galvanizing. When
    specified, results of the mechanical tests on the base material
    shall be reported to the purchaser. If it is impracticable
    to make the mechanical tests on the base material before
    galvanizing, it shall be permissible to make such tests on
    galvanized samples, and any flaking or cracking of the
    zinc coating shall not be considered cause for rejection.
    When galvanized pipe is bent or otherwise fabricated to a
    degree that causes the zinc coating to stretch or compress
    beyond the limit of elasticity, some flaking of the coating
    is acceptable.
20. Inspection
    20.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall
    have entry, at all times while work on the contract of the
    purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s
    works that concern the manufacture of the material
    ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all
    reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being
    furnished in accordance with this specification. All tests
    (except product analysis) and inspection shall be made at
    SA-53/SA-53M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    150
    the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise
    specified, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere
    unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
21. Rejection
    21.1 The purchaser is permitted to inspect each length
    of pipe received from the manufacturer and, if it does not
    meet the requirements of this specification based on the
    inspection and test method as outlined in the specification,
    the length shall be rejected and the manufacturer shall be
    notified. Disposition of rejected pipe shall be a matter of
    agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
    21.2 Pipe found in fabrication or in installation to be
    unsuitable for the intended use, under the scope and
    requirements of this specification, shall be set aside and
    the manufacturer notified. Such pipe shall be subject to
    mutual investigation as to the nature and severity of the
    deficiency and the forming or installation, or both, conditions
    involved. Disposition shall be a matter for agreement.
22. Certification
    22.1 The producer or supplier shall, upon request, furnish
    to the purchaser a certificate of inspection stating that
    the material has been manufactured, sampled, tested, and
    inspected in accordance with this specification (including
    year of issue), and has been found to meet the requirements.
    22.2 Report — For Types E and S, the producer or
    supplier shall furnish to the purchaser a chemical analysis
    report for the elements specified in Table 1.
    22.3 EDI—A certificate of inspection or chemical analysis
    report printed from or used in electronic form from
    an electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission shall be
    regarded as having the same validity as a counterpart
    printed in the certifier’s facility. The use and format of
    the EDI document are subject to agreement between the
    purchaser and the supplier.
    NOTE 8 — EDI is the computer to computer exchange of business
    information in a standard format such as ANSI ASC X12.
    22.4 Notwithstanding the absence of a signature, the
    organization submitting the certificate of inspection or
    chemical analysis report is responsible for its content.
23. Product Marking
    23.1 Except as allowed by 23.5 and 23.6, each length
    of pipe shall be legibly marked in the following sequence
    by rolling, stamping, or stenciling to show:
    23.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or mark,
    23.1.2 Specification number (year of issue not
    required),
    NOTE 9 — Pipe that complies with multiple compatible specifications
    may be marked with the appropriate designation for each specification.
    23.1.3 Size (NPS and weight class, schedule number,
    or nominal wall thickness; or specified outside diameter
    and nominal wall thickness),
    23.1.4 Grade (A or B),
    23.1.5 Type of pipe (F, E, or S),
    23.1.6 Test pressure, seamless pipe only (if applicable,
    in accordance with Table 4),
    23.1.7 Nondestructive electric test, seamless pipe
    only (if applicable, in accordance with Table 4),
    23.2 Unless another marking format is specified in the
    purchase order, length shall be marked in feet and tenths
    of a foot, or metres to two decimal places, dependent upon
    the units to which the pipe was ordered. The location of
    such marking shall be at the option of the manufacturer.
    23.3 Heat number, lot number, run number, or a combination
    thereof shall be marked at the option of the manufacturer,
    unless specific marking is specified in the purchase
    order. The location of such marking shall be at the option
    of the manufacturer.
    23.4 Any additional information desired by the manufacturer
    or specified in the purchase order.
    23.5 For pipe NPS 11/2 [DN 40] and smaller that is
    bundled, it shall be permissible to mark this information
    on a tag securely attached to each bundle.
    23.6 When pipe sections are cut into shorter lengths
    by a subsequent producer for resale as material, the processor
    shall transfer complete identification including the
    name or brand of the manufacturer, to each unmarked cut
    length, or to metal tags securely attached to unmarked pipe
    bundled in accordance with the requirements of 23.5. The
    same material designation shall be included with the information
    transferred, and the processor’s name, trademark,
    or brand shall be added.
    23.7 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements in
    23.1, 23.5, and 23.6, bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary
    identification method. It is recommended that bar
    coding be consistent with the Automotive Industry Action
    Group (AIAG) standard prepared by the Primary Metals
    Subcommittee of the AIAG Bar Code Project Team.
24. Government Procurement
    24.1 When specified in the contract, material shall be
    preserved, packaged, and packed in accordance with the
    requirements of MIL-STD-163. The applicable levels shall
    be as specified in the contract. Marking for shipment of
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-53/SA-53M
    151
    such material shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123
    for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 or Federal Std. No.
    183 if continuous marking is required, for military
    agencies.
    24.2 Inspection — Unless otherwise specified in the
    contract, the producer is responsible for the performance
    of all inspection and test requirements specified herein.
    Except as otherwise specified in the contract, the manufacturer
    shall use its own or any other suitable facilities for
    performing the inspection and test requirements specified
    herein, unless otherwise disapproved by the purchaser in
    the contract or purchase order. The purchaser shall have
    the right to perform any of the inspections and tests set forth
    in this specification where deemed necessary to ensure that
    the material conforms to prescribed requirements.
25. Packaging and Package Marking
    25.1 When specified on the purchase order, packaging,
    marking, and loading or shipment shall be in accordance
    with those procedures recommended by Practices A 700.
26. Keywords
    26.1 black steel pipe; seamless steel pipe; steel pipe;
    welded steel pipe; zinc coated steel pipe
    SA-53/SA-53M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    152
    FIG. 1 CALIBRATION STANDARDS
    1/8 in.
    [3.2 mm]
    0.04 in.
    [1 mm] max.
    Depth N10 Depth
    10% t, 15%
    with min. of
    0.012, 0.002 in.
    [0.3 0.5 mm]
    Length
    For eddy current – 1.5 in. [38 mm] max.
    Total Length
    For diverted flux
    and ultrasonic – 2 in. [50 mm] min.
    at full depth
    N10 Notch
    P (Parallel Sided) Notch Drilled Hole
    V10 Notch
    10% t
    or less
    Area of each side, 0.006 sq. in. [3.9 mm2] max.
    B (Buttress) Notch
    121/2% t
    or less
    30 deg
    max.
    60 deg
    max.
    20% t
    or less
    TABLE 1
    CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
    Composition, max, %
    Carbon Manganese Phosphorus Sulfur CopperA NickelA ChromiumA MolybdenumA VanadiumA
    Type S (seamless pipe)
    Open-hearth, electric-furnace,
    or basic-oxygen:
    Grade A 0.25 0.95 0.05 0.045 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.15 0.08
    Grade B 0.30 1.20 0.05 0.045 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.15 0.08
    Type E (electric-resistance-welded)
    Open-hearth, electric-furnace,
    or basic-oxygen:
    Grade A 0.25 0.95 0.05 0.045 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.15 0.08
    Grade B 0.30 1.20 0.05 0.045 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.15 0.08
    Type F (furnace-welded pipe)
    Open-hearth, electric-furnace,
    or basic oxygen
    Grade A 0.30 1.20 0.05 0.045 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.15 0.08
    A The combination of these five elements shall not exceed 1.00%.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-53/SA-53M
    153
    TABLE 2
    TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
    Type F Types E and S
    Open-Hearth,
    Basic Oxygen,
    or Electric-
    Furnace,
    Grade A Grade A Grade B
    Tensile strength, 48 000 [330] 48 000 [330] 60 000 [415]
    min, psi [MPa]
    Yield strength, 30 000 [205] 30 000 [205] 35 000 [240]
    min, psi [MPa]
    Elongation in 2 in. A,B A,B A,B
    [50 mm]
    A The minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] shall be that determined
    by the following equation:
    e p 625 000 [1940] A0.2/U0.9
    where:
    e p minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] in percent rounded
    to the nearest percent
    A p cross-sectional area of the tension specimen, rounded to
    the nearest 0.01 in.2 [1 mm2], based on the specified outside
    diameter or the nominal specimen width and specified
    wall thickness. If the area calculated is equal to or
    greater than 0.75 in.2 [500 mm2], then the value 0.75
    in.2 [500 mm2] shall be used, and
    U p specified tensile strength, psi [MPa]
    B See Table X4.1 or Table X4.2, whichever is applicable, for minimum
    elongation values for various size tension specimens and
    grades.
    TABLE 3
    ACCEPTANCE LIMITS
    Size of Hole Acceptance
    Limit
    Type Notch in. mm Signal, %
    N10, V10 1/8 3.2 100
    B.P. . . . . . . 80
    TABLE 4
    MARKING OF SEAMLESS PIPE
    Hydro NDE Marking
    Yes No Test pressure
    No Yes NDE
    Yes Yes Test pressure/NDE
    SA-53/SA-53M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    154
    APPENDICES
    (Nonmandatory Information)
    X1. DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF PIPE
    X1.1 Type F, Furnace-Butt-Welded Pipe, Continuous-
    Welded—Pipe produced in continuous lengths from coiled
    skelp and subsequently cut into individual lengths, having
    its longitudinal butt joint forge welded by the mechanical
    pressure developed in rolling the hot-formed skelp through
    a set of round pass welding rolls.
    X1.2 Type E, Electric-Resistance-Welded Pipe — Pipe
    produced in individual lengths or in continuous lengths
    from coiled skelp and subsequently cut into individual
    lengths, having a longitudinal butt joint wherein coalescence
    is produced by the heat obtained from resistance of
    the pipe to the flow of electric current in a circuit of which
    the pipe is a part, and by the application of pressure.
    X1.3 Type S, Wrought Steel Seamless Pipe — Wrought
    steel seamless pipe is a tubular product made without a
    welded seam. It is manufactured by hot working steel and,
    if necessary, by subsequently cold finishing the hot-worked
    tubular product to produce the desired shape, dimensions,
    and properties.
    X2. TABLES FOR DIMENSIONAL AND
    CERTAIN MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
    X2.1 Tables X2.1–X2.4 address dimensional and certain
    mechanical requirements.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-53/SA-53M
    155
    TABLE X2.1
    CALCULATED H VALUES FOR SEAMLESS PIPE
    Distance, in. [mm],
    Between Outside Nominal Wall Plates “H” by
    NPS DN Diameter, in. Thickness, in. Formula: H p (1 + e)t /(e + t/D)
    Designator Designator [mm] [mm] Grade A Grade B
    21/2 65 2.875 [73.0] 0.203 [5.16] 1.378 [35.0] 1.545 [39.2]
    0.276 [7.01] 1.618 [41.1] 1.779 [45.2]
    3 80 3.500 [88.9] 0.216 [5.49] 1.552 [39.4] 1.755 [44.6]
    0.300 [7.62] 1.861 [47.3] 2.062 [52.4]
    31/2 90 4.000 [101.6] 0.226 [5.74] 1.682 [42.7] 1.912 [48.6]
    0.318 [8.08] 2.045 [51.9] 2.276 [57.8]
    4 100 4.500 [114.3] 0.237 [6.02] 1.811 [46.0] 2.067 [52.5]
    0.337 [8.56] 2.228 [56.6] 2.489 [63.2]
    5 125 5.563 [141.3] 0.258 [6.55] 2.062 [52.4] 2.372 [60.2]
    0.375 [9.52] 2.597 [66.0] 2.920 [74.2]
    6 150 6.625 [168.3] 0.280 [7.11] 2.308 [58.6] 2.669 [67.8]
    0.432 [10.97] 3.034 [77.1] 3.419 [86.8]
    8 200 8.625 [219.1] 0.277 [7.04] 2.473 [62.8] 2.902 [73.7]
    0.322 [8.18] 2.757 [70.0] 3.210 [81.5]
    0.500 [12.70] 3.683 [93.5] 4.181 [106.2]
    10 250 10.750 [273.0] 0.279 [7.09]A 2.623 [66.6] 3.111 [79.0]
    0.307 [7.80] 2.823 [71.7] 3.333 [84.7]
    0.365 [9.27] 3.210 [81.5] 3.757 [95.4]
    0.500 [12.70] 3.993 [101.4] 4.592 [116.6]
    12 300 12.750 [323.8] 0.300 [7.62] 3.105 [78.9] 3.683 [93.5]
    0.375 [9.52] 3.423 [86.9] 4.037 [102.5]
    0.500 [12.70] 4.218 [107.1] 4.899 [124.4]
    14 350 14.000 [355.6] 0.375 [9.52] 3.500 [88.9] 4.146 [105.3]
    0.500 [12.70] 4.336 [110.1] 5.061 [128.5]
    16 400 16.000 [406.4] 0.375 [9.52] 3.603 [91.5] 4.294 [109.1]
    0.500 [12.70] 4.494 [114.1] 5.284 [134.2]
    18 450 18.000 [457] 0.375 [9.52] 3.688 [93.7] 4.417 [112.2]
    0.500 [12.70] 4.628 [117.6] 5.472 [139.0]
    20 500 20.000 [508] 0.375 [9.52] 3.758 [95.5] 4.521 [114.8]
    0.500 [12.70] 4.740 [120.4] 5.632 [143.1]
    24 600 24.000 [610] 0.375 [9.52] 3.869 [98.3] 4.686 [119.0]
    0.500 [12.70] 4.918 [124.9] 5.890 [149.6]
    A Special order only.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-53/SA-53M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    156
    TABLE X2.2
    DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE
    Outside Nominal Wall Nominal Weight [Mass] Test Pressure,A psi [kPa]
    NPS DN Diameter, Thickness, per Unit Length, Weight Schedule
    Designator Designator in. [mm] in. [mm] Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m] Class No. Grade A Grade B
    1/8 6 0.405 [10.3] 0.068 [1.73] 0.24 [0.37] STD 40 700 [4800] 700 [4800]
    0.095 [2.41] 0.31 [0.47] XS 80 850 [5900] 850 [5900]
    1/4 8 0.540 [13.7] 0.088 [2.24] 0.43 [0.63] STD 40 700 [4800] 700 [4800]
    0.119 [3.02] 0.54 [0.80] XS 80 850 [5900] 850 [5900]
    3/8 10 0.675 [17.1] 0.091 [2.31] 0.57 [0.84] STD 40 700 [4800] 700 [4800]
    0.126 [3.20] 0.74 [1.10] XS 80 850 [5900] 850 [5900]
    1/2 15 0.840 [21.3] 0.109 [2.77] 0.85 [1.27] STD 40 700 [4800] 700 [4800]
    0.147 [3.73] 1.09 [1.62] XS 80 850 [5900] 850 [5900]
    0.188 [4.78] 1.31 [1.95] . . . 160 900 [6200] 900 [6200]
    0.294 [7.47] 1.72 [2.55] XXS . . . 1000 [6900] 1000 [6900]
    3/4 20 1.050 [26.7] 0.113 [2.87] 1.13 [1.69] STD 40 700 [4800] 700 [4800]
    0.154 [3.91] 1.48 [2.20] XS 80 850 [5900] 850 [5900]
    0.219 [5.56] 1.95 [2.90] . . . 160 950 [6500] 950 [6500]
    0.308 [7.82] 2.44 [3.64] XXS . . . 1000 [6900] 1000 [6900]
    1 25 1.315 [33.4] 0.133 [3.38] 1.68 [2.50] STD 40 700 [4800] 700 [4800]
    0.179 [4.55] 2.17 [3.24] XS 80 850 [5900] 850 [5900]
    0.250 [6.35] 2.85 [4.24] . . . 160 950 [6500] 950 [6500]
    0.358 [9.09] 3.66 [5.45] XXS . . . 1000 [6900] 1000 [6900]
    11/4 32 1.660 [42.2] 0.140 [3.56] 2.27 [3.39] STD 40 1200 [8300] 1300 [9000]
    0.191 [4.85] 3.00 [4.47] XS 80 1800 [12 400] 1900 [13 100]
    0.250 [6.35] 3.77 [5.61] . . . 160 1900 [13 100] 2000 [13 800]
    0.382 [9.70] 5.22 [7.77] XXS . . . 2200 [15 200] 2300 [15 900]
    11/2 40 1.900 [48.3] 0.145 [3.68] 2.72 [4.05] STD 40 1200 [8300] 1300 [9000]
    0.200 [5.08] 3.63 [5.41] XS 80 1800 [12 400] 1900 [13 100]
    0.281 [7.14] 4.86 [7.25] . . . 160 1950 [13 400] 2050 [14 100]
    0.400 [10.16] 6.41 [9.56] XXS . . . 2200 [15 200] 2300 [15 900]
    2 50 2.375 [60.3] 0.154 [3.91] 3.66 [5.44] STD 40 2300 [15 900] 2500 [17 200]
    0.218 [5.54] 5.03 [7.48] XS 80 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.344 [8.74] 7.47 [11.11] . . . 160 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.436 [11.07] 9.04 [13.44] XXS . . . 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    21/2 65 2.875 [73.0] 0.203 [5.16] 5.80 [8.63] STD 40 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.276 [7.01] 7.67 [11.41] XS 80 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.375 [9.52] 10.02 [14.90] . . . 160 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.552 [14.02] 13.71 [20.39] XXS . . . 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    3 80 3.500 [88.9] 0.125 [3.18] 4.51 [6.72] . . . . . . 1290 [8900] 1500 [1000]
    0.156 [3.96] 5.58 [8.29] . . . . . . 1600 [11 000] 1870 [12 900]
    0.188 [4.78] 6.66 [9.92] . . . . . . 1930 [13 330] 2260 [15 600]
    0.216 [5.49] 7.58 [11.29] STD 40 2220 [15 300] 2500 [17 200]
    0.250 [6.35] 8.69 [12.93] . . . . . . 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.281 [7.14] 9.67 [14.40] . . . . . . 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.300 [7.62] 10.26 [15.27] XS 80 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.438 [11.13] 14.34 [21.35] . . . 160 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.600 [15.24] 18.60 [27.68] XXS . . . 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    31/2 90 4.000 [101.6] 0.125 [3.18] 5.18 [7.72] . . . . . . 1120 [7700] 1310 [19 000]
    0.156 [3.96] 6.41 [9.53] . . . . . . 1400 [6700] 1640 [11 300]
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-53/SA-53M
    157
    TABLE X2.2
    DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE (CONT’D)
    Outside Nominal Wall Nominal Weight [Mass] Test Pressure,A psi [kPa]
    NPS DN Diameter, Thickness, per Unit Length, Weight Schedule
    Designator Designator in. [mm] in. [mm] Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m] Class No. Grade A Grade B
    0.188 [4.78] 7.66 [11.41] . . . . . . 1690 [11 700] 1970 [13 600]
    0.226 [5.74] 9.12 [13.57] STD 40 2030 [14 000] 2370 [16 300]
    0.250 [6.35] 10.02 [14.92] . . . . . . 2250 [15 500] 2500 [17 200]
    0.281 [7.14] 11.17 [16.63] . . . . . . 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.318 [8.08] 12.52 [18.63] XS 80 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    4 100 4.500 [114.3] 0.125 [3.18] 5.85 [8.71] . . . . . . 1000 [6900] 1170 [8100]
    0.156 [3.96] 7.24 [10.78] . . . . . . 1250 [8600] 1460 [10 100]
    0.188 [4.78] 8.67 [12.91] . . . . . . 1500 [10 300] 1750 [12 100]
    0.219 [5.56] 10.02 [14.91] . . . . . . 1750 [12 100] 2040 [14 100]
    0.237 [6.02] 10.80 [16.07] STD 40 1900 [13 100] 2210 [15 200]
    0.250 [6.35] 11.36 [16.90] . . . . . . 2000 [13 800] 2330 [16 100]
    0.281 [7.14] 12.67 [18.87] . . . . . . 2250 [15 100] 2620 [18 100]
    0.312 [7.92] 13.97 [20.78] . . . . . . 2500 [17 200] 2800 [19 300]
    0.337 [8.56] 15.00 [22.32] XS 80 2700 [18 600] 2800 [19 300]
    0.438 [11.13] 19.02 [28.32] . . . 120 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    0.531 [13.49] 22.53 [33.54] . . . 160 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    0.674 [17.12] 27.57 [41.03] XXS . . . 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    5 125 5.563 [141.3] 0.156 [3.96] 9.02 [13.41] . . . . . . 1010 [7000] 1180 [8100]
    0.188 [4.78] 10.80 [16.09] . . . . . . 1220 [8400] 1420 [9800]
    0.219 [5.56] 12.51 [18.61] . . . . . . 1420 [9800] 1650 [11 400]
    0.258 [6.55] 14.63 [21.77] STD 40 1670 [11 500] 1950 [13 400]
    0.281 [7.14] 15.87 [23.62] . . . . . . 1820 [12 500] 2120 [14 600]
    0.312 [7.92] 17.51 [26.05] . . . . . . 2020 [13 900] 2360 [16 300]
    0.344 [8.74] 19.19 [28.57] . . . . . . 2230 [15 400] 2600 [17 900]
    0.375 [9.52] 20.80 [30.94] XS 80 2430 [16 800] 2800 [19 300]
    0.500 [12.70] 27.06 [40.28] . . . 120 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    0.625 [15.88] 32.99 [49.11] . . . 160 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    0.750 [19.05] 38.59 [57.43] XXS . . . 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    6 150 6.625 [168.3] 0.188 [4.78] 12.94 [19.27] . . . . . . 1020 [7000] 1190 [8200]
    0.219 [5.56] 15.00 [22.31] . . . . . . 1190 [8200] 1390 [9600]
    0.250 [6.35] 17.04 [25.36] . . . . . . 1360 [9400] 1580 [10 900]
    0.280 [7.11] 18.99 [28.26] STD 40 1520 [10 500] 1780 [12 300]
    0.312 [7.92] 21.06 [31.32] . . . . . . 1700 [11 700] 1980 [13 700]
    0.344 [8.74] 23.10 [34.39] . . . . . . 1870 [12 900] 2180 [15 000]
    0.375 [9.52] 25.05 [37.28] . . . . . . 2040 [14 100] 2380 [16 400]
    0.432 [10.97] 28.60 [42.56] XS 80 2350 [16 200] 2740 [18 900]
    0.562 [14.27] 36.43 [54.20] . . . 120 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    0.719 [18.26] 45.39 [67.56] . . . 160 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    0.864 [21.95] 53.21 [79.22] XXS . . . 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    8 200 8.625 [219.1] 0.188 [4.78] 16.96 [25.26] . . . . . . 780 [5400] 920 [6300]
    0.203 [5.16] 18.28 [27.22] . . . . . . 850 [5900] 1000 [6900]
    0.219 [5.56] 19.68 [29.28] . . . . . . 910 [6300] 1070 [7400]
    0.250 [6.35] 22.38 [33.31] . . . 20 1040 [7200] 1220 [8400]
    0.277 [7.04] 24.72 [36.31] . . . 30 1160 [7800] 1350 [9300]
    0.312 [7.92] 27.73 [41.24] . . . . . . 1300 [9000] 1520 [10 500]
    0.322 [8.18] 28.58 [42.55] STD 40 1340 [9200] 1570 [10 800]
    0.344 [8.74] 30.45 [45.34] . . . . . . 1440 [9900] 1680 [11 600]
    0.375 [9.52] 33.07 [49.20] . . . . . . 1570 [10 800] 1830 [12 600]
    0.406 [10.31] 35.67 [53.08] . . . 60 1700 [11 700] 2000 [13 800]
    0.438 [11.13] 38.33 [57.08] . . . . . . 1830 [12 600] 2130 [14 700]
    0.500 [12.70] 43.43 [64.64] XS 80 2090 [14 400] 2430 [16 800]
    0.594 [15.09] 51.00 [75.92] . . . 100 2500 [17 200] 2800 [19 300]
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-53/SA-53M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    158
    TABLE X2.2
    DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE (CONT’D)
    Outside Nominal Wall Nominal Weight [Mass] Test Pressure,A psi [kPa]
    NPS DN Diameter, Thickness, per Unit Length, Weight Schedule
    Designator Designator in. [mm] in. [mm] Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m] Class No. Grade A Grade B
    0.719 [18.26] 60.77 [90.44] . . . 120 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    0.812 [20.62] 67.82 [100.92] . . . 140 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    0.875 [22.22] 72.49 [107.88] XXS . . . 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    0.906 [23.01] 74.76 [111.27] . . . 160 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    10 250 10.750 [273.0] 0.188 [4.78] 21.23 [31.62] . . . . . . 630 [4300] 730 [5000]
    0.203 [5.16] 22.89 [34.08] . . . . . . 680 [4700] 800 [5500]
    0.219 [5.56] 24.65 [36.67] . . . . . . 730 [5000] 860 [5900]
    0.250 [6.35] 28.06 [41.75] . . . 20 840 [5800] 980 [6800]
    0.279 [7.09] 31.23 [46.49] . . . . . . 930 [6400] 1090 [7500]
    0.307 [7.80] 34.27 [51.01] . . . 30 1030 [7100] 1200 [8300]
    0.344 [8.74] 38.27 [56.96] . . . . . . 1150 [7900] 1340 [9200]
    0.365 [9.27] 40.52 [60.29] STD 40 1220 [8400] 1430 [9900]
    0.438 [11.13] 48.28 [71.87] . . . . . . 1470 [10 100] 1710 [11 800]
    0.500 [12.70] 54.79 [81.52] XS 60 1670 [11 500] 1950 [13 400]
    0.594 [15.09] 64.49 [95.97] . . . 80 1990 [13 700] 2320 [16 000]
    0.719 [18.26] 77.10 [114.70] . . . 100 2410 [16 600] 2800 [19 300]
    0.844 [21.44] 89.38 [133.00] . . . 120 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    1.000 [25.40] 104.23 [155.09] XXS 140 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    1.125 [28.57] 115.75 [172.21] . . . 160 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    12 300 12.750 [323.8] 0.203 [5.16] 27.23 [40.55] . . . . . . 570 [3900] 670 [4600]
    0.219 [5.56] 29.34 [43.63] . . . . . . 620 [4300] 720 [5000]
    0.250 [6.35] 33.41 [49.71] . . . 20 710 [4900] 820 [5700]
    0.281 [7.14] 37.46 [55.75] . . . . . . 790 [5400] 930 [6400]
    0.312 [7.92] 41.48 [61.69] . . . . . . 880 [6100] 1030 [7100]
    0.330 [8.38] 43.81 [65.18] . . . 30 930 [6400] 1090 [7500]
    0.344 [8.74] 45.62 [67.90] . . . . . . 970 [6700] 1130 [7800]
    0.375 [9.52] 49.61 [73.78] STD . . . 1060 [7300] 1240 [8500]
    0.406 [10.31] 53.57 [79.70] . . . 40 1150 [7900] 1340 [9200]
    0.438 [11.13] 57.65 [85.82] . . . . . . 1240 [8500] 1440 [9900]
    0.500 [12.70] 65.48 [97.43] XS . . . 1410 [9700] 1650 [11 400]
    0.562 [14.27] 73.22 [108.92] . . . 60 1590 [11 000] 1850 [12 800]
    0.688 [17.48] 88.71 [132.04] . . . 80 1940 [13 400] 2270 [15 700]
    0.844 [21.44] 107.42 [159.86] . . . 100 2390 [16 500] 2780 [19 200]
    1.000 [25.40] 125.61 [186.91] XXS 120 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    1.125 [28.57] 139.81 [208.00] . . . 140 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    1.312 [33.32] 160.42 [238.68] . . . 160 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    14 350 14.000 [355.6] 0.210 [5.33] 30.96 [46.04] . . . . . . 540 [3700] 630 [4300]
    0.219 [5.56] 32.26 [47.99] . . . . . . 560 [3900] 660 [4500]
    0.250 [6.35] 36.75 [54.69] . . . 10 640 [4400] 750 [5200]
    0.281 [7.14] 41.21 [61.35] . . . . . . 720 [5000] 840 [5800]
    0.312 [7.92] 45.65 [67.90] . . . 20 800 [5500] 940 [6500]
    0.344 [8.74] 50.22 [74.76] . . . . . . 880 [6100] 1030 [7100]
    0.375 [9.52] 54.62 [81.25] STD 30 960 [6600] 1120 [7700]
    0.438 [11.13] 63.50 [94.55] . . . 40 1130 [7800] 1310 [9000]
    0.469 [11.91] 67.84 [100.94] . . . . . . 1210 [8300] 1410 [9700]
    0.500 [12.70] 72.16 [107.39] XS . . . 1290 [8900] 1500 [10 300]
    0.594 [15.09] 85.13 [126.71] . . . 60 1530 [10 500] 1790 [12 300]
    0.750 [19.05] 106.23 [158.10] . . . 80 1930 [13 300] 2250 [15 500]
    0.938 [23.83] 130.98 [194.96] . . . 100 2410 [16 600] 2800 [19 300]
    1.094 [27.79] 150.93 [224.65] . . . 120 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    1.250 [31.75] 170.37 [253.56] . . . 140 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    1.406 [35.71] 189.29 [281.70] . . . 160 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    2.000 [50.80] 256.56 [381.83] . . . . . . 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-53/SA-53M
    159
    TABLE X2.2
    DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE (CONT’D)
    Outside Nominal Wall Nominal Weight [Mass] Test Pressure,A psi [kPa]
    NPS DN Diameter, Thickness, per Unit Length, Weight Schedule
    Designator Designator in. [mm] in. [mm] Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m] Class No. Grade A Grade B
    2.125 [53.97] 269.76 [401.44] . . . . . . 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    2.200 [55.88] 277.51 [413.01] . . . . . . 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    2.500 [63.50] 307.34 [457.40] . . . . . . 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    16 400 16.000 [406.4] 0.219 [5.56] 36.95 [54.96] . . . . . . 490 [3400] 570 [3900]
    0.250 [6.35] 42.09 [62.64] . . . 10 560 [3900] 660 [4500]
    0.281 [7.14] 47.22 [70.30] . . . . . . 630 [4300] 740 [5100]
    0.312 [7.92] 52.32 [77.83] . . . 20 700 [4800] 820 [5700]
    0.344 [8.74] 57.57 [85.71] . . . . . . 770 [5300] 900 [6200]
    0.375 [9.52] 62.64 [93.17] STD 30 840 [5800] 980 [6800]
    0.438 [11.13] 72.86 [108.49] . . . . . . 990 [6800] 1150 [7900]
    0.469 [11.91] 77.87 [115.86] . . . . . . 1060 [7300] 1230 [8500]
    0.500 [12.70] 82.85 [123.30] XS 40 1120 [7700] 1310 [9000]
    0.656 [16.66] 107.60 [160.12] . . . 60 1480 [10 200] 1720 [11 900]
    0.844 [21.44] 136.74 [203.53] . . . 80 1900 [13 100] 2220 [15 300]
    1.031 [26.19] 164.98 [245.56] . . . 100 2320 [16 000] 2710 [18 700]
    1.219 [30.96] 192.61 [286.64] . . . 120 2740 [18 900] 2800 [19 300]
    1.438 [36.53] 223.85 [333.19] . . . 140 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    1.594 [40.49] 245.48 [365.35] . . . 160 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    18 450 18.000 [457] 0.250 [6.35] 47.44 [70.60] . . . 10 500 [3400] 580 [4000]
    0.281 [7.14] 53.23 [79.24] . . . . . . 560 [3900] 660 [4500]
    0.312 [7.92] 58.99 [87.75] . . . 20 620 [4300] 730 [5000]
    0.344 [8.74] 64.93 [96.66] . . . . . . 690 [4800] 800 [5500]
    0.375 [9.52] 70.65 [105.10] STD . . . 750 [5200] 880 [6100]
    0.406 [10.31] 76.36 [113.62] . . . . . . 810 [5600] 950 [6500]
    0.438 [11.13] 82.23 [122.43] . . . 30 880 [6100] 1020 [7000]
    0.469 [11.91] 87.89 [130.78] . . . . . . 940 [6500] 1090 [7500]
    0.500 [12.70] 93.54 [139.20] XS . . . 1000 [6900] 1170 [8100]
    0.562 [14.27] 104.76 [155.87] . . . 40 1120 [7700] 1310 [9000]
    0.750 [19.05] 138.30 [205.83] . . . 60 1500 [10 300] 1750 [12 100]
    0.938 [23.83] 171.08 [254.67] . . . 80 1880 [13 000] 2190 [15 100]
    1.156 [29.36] 208.15 [309.76] . . . 100 2310 [15 900] 2700 [18 600]
    1.375 [34.92] 244.37 [363.64] . . . 120 2750 [19 000] 2800 [19 300]
    1.562 [39.67] 274.48 [408.45] . . . 140 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    1.781 [45.24] 308.79 [459.59] . . . 160 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    20 500 20.000 [508] 0.250 [6.35] 52.78 [78.55] . . . 10 450 [3100] 520 [3600]
    0.281 [7.14] 59.23 [88.19] . . . . . . 510 [3500] 590 [4100]
    0.312 [7.92] 65.66 [97.67] . . . . . . 560 [3900] 660 [4500]
    0.344 [8.74] 72.28 [107.60] . . . . . . 620 [4300] 720 [5000]
    0.375 [9.52] 78.67 [117.02] STD 20 680 [4700] 790 [5400]
    0.406 [10.31] 84.04 [126.53] . . . . . . 730 [5000] 850 [5900]
    0.438 [11.13] 91.59 [136.37] . . . . . . 790 [5400] 920 [6300]
    0.469 [11.91] 97.92 [145.70] . . . . . . 850 [5900] 950 [6500]
    0.500 [12.70] 104.23 [155.12] XS 30 900 [6200] 1050 [7200]
    0.594 [15.09] 123.23 [183.42] . . . 40 1170 [8100] 1250 [8600]
    0.812 [20.62] 166.56 [247.83] . . . 60 1460 [10 100] 1710 [11 800]
    1.031 [26.19] 209.06 [311.17] . . . 80 1860 [12 800] 2170 [15 000]
    1.281 [32.54] 256.34 [381.53] . . . 100 2310 [15 900] 2690 [18 500]
    1.500 [38.10] 296.65 [441.49] . . . 120 2700 [18 600] 2800 [19 300]
    1.750 [44.45] 341.41 [508.11] . . . 140 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    1.969 [50.01] 379.53 [564.81] . . . 160 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    24 600 24.000 [610] 0.250 [6.35] 63.47 [94.46] . . . 10 380 [2600] 440 [3000]
    0.281 [7.14] 71.25 [106.08] . . . . . . 420 [2900] 490 [3400]
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-53/SA-53M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    160
    TABLE X2.2
    DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE (CONT’D)
    Outside Nominal Wall Nominal Weight [Mass] Test Pressure,A psi [kPa]
    NPS DN Diameter, Thickness, per Unit Length, Weight Schedule
    Designator Designator in. [mm] in. [mm] Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m] Class No. Grade A Grade B
    0.312 [7.92] 79.01 [117.51] . . . . . . 470 [3200] 550 [3800]
    0.344 [8.74] 86.99 [129.50] . . . . . . 520 [3600] 600 [4100]
    0.375 [9.52] 94.71 [140.88] STD 20 560 [3900] 660 [4500]
    0.406 [10.31] 102.40 [152.37] . . . . . . 610 [4200] 710 [4900]
    0.438 [11.13] 110.32 [164.26] . . . . . . 660 [4500] 770 [5300]
    0.469 [11.91] 117.98 [175.54] . . . . . . 700 [4800] 820 [5700]
    0.500 [12.70] 125.61 [186.94] XS . . . 750 [5200] 880 [6100]
    0.562 [14.27] 140.81 [209.50] . . . 30 840 [5800] 980 [6800]
    0.688 [17.48] 171.45 [255.24] . . . 40 1030 [7100] 1200 [8300]
    0.938 [23.83] 231.25 [344.23] . . . . . . 1410 [9700] 1640 [11 300]
    0.969 [24.61] 238.57 [355.02] . . . 60 1450 [10 000] 1700 [11 700]
    1.219 [30.96] 296.86 [441.78] . . . 80 1830 [12 600] 2130 [14 700]
    1.531 [38.89] 367.74 [547.33] . . . 100 2300 [15 900] 2680 [18 500]
    1.812 [46.02] 429.79 [639.58] . . . 120 2720 [18 800] 2800 [19 300]
    2.062 [52.37] 483.57 [719.63] . . . 140 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    2.344 [59.54] 542.64 [807.63] . . . 160 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    26 650 26.000 [660] 0.250 [6.35] 68.82 [102.42] . . . . . . 350 [2400] 400 [2800]
    0.281 [7.14] 77.26 [115.02] . . . . . . 390 [2700] 450 [3100]
    0.312 [7.92] 85.68 [127.43] . . . 10 430 [3000] 500 [3400]
    0.344 [8.74] 94.35 [140.45] . . . . . . 480 [3300] 560 [3900]
    0.375 [9.52] 102.72 [152.80] STD . . . 520 [3600] 610 [4200]
    0.406 [10.31] 111.08 [165.28] . . . . . . 560 [3900] 660 [4500]
    0.438 [11.13] 119.69 [178.20] . . . . . . 610 [4200] 710 [4900]
    0.469 [11.91] 128.00 [190.46] . . . . . . 650 [4500] 760 [5200]
    0.500 [12.70] 136.30 [202.85] XS 20 690 [4800] 810 [5600]
    0.562 [14.27] 152.83 [227.37] . . . . . . 780 [5400] 910 [6300]
    A The minimum test pressure for outside diameters and wall thicknesses not listed shall be computed by the formula given below. The computed
    test pressure shall be used in all cases with the following exceptions:
    (1) When the wall thickness is greater than the heaviest wall thickness shown for a given diameter, the test pressure for the heaviest wall
    listed shall be the required test pressure.
    (2) For Grades A and B in sizes under NPS 2 [DN 50], when the wall thickness is lighter than the lightest shown for a given diameter,
    use the test pressure given for the lightest wall thickness of the table for the diameter involved.
    (3) For all sizes of Grades A and B pipe smaller than NPS 2 [DN 50], the test pressure has been arbitrarily assigned. Test pressures for
    intermediate outside diameters need not exceed those for the next larger listed size.
    P p 2St/D
    where:
    P p minimum hydrostatic test pressure, psi [kPa]),
    S p 0.60 times the specified minimum yield strength, psi [kPa],
    t p nominal wall thickness, in. [mm], and
    D p specified outside diameter, in. [mm].
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-53/SA-53M
    161
    TABLE X2.3
    DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR THREADED AND COUPLED PIPE
    Outside Nominal Wall Nominal Weight [Mass]
    Test NPS DN Diameter, in. Thickness, in. per Unit Length, Threaded Weight Schedule Pressure, psi [kPa]
    Designator Designator [mm] [mm] and Coupled, lb/ft [kg/m] Class No. Grade A Grade B
    1/8 6 0.405 [10.3] 0.068 [1.73] 0.25 [0.37] STD 40 700 [4800] 700 [4800]
    0.095 [2.41] 0.32 [0.46] XS 80 850 [5900] 850 [5900]
    1/4 8 0.540 [13.7] 0.088 [2.24] 0.43 [0.63] STD 40 700 [4800] 700 [4800]
    0.119 [3.02] 0.54 [0.80] XS 80 850 [5900] 850 [5900]
    3/8 10 0.675 [17.1] 0.091 [2.31] 0.57 [0.84] STD 40 700 [4800] 700 [4800]
    0.126 [3.20] 0.74 [1.10] XS 80 850 [5900] 850 [5900]
    1/2 15 0.840 [21.3] 0.109 [2.77] 0.86 [1.27] STD 40 700 [4800] 700 [4800]
    0.147 [3.73] 1.09 [1.62] XS 80 850 [5900] 850 [5900]
    0.294 [7.47] 1.72 [2.54] XXS . . . 1000 [6900] 1000 [6900]
    3/4 20 1.050 [26.7] 0.113 [2.87] 1.14 [1.69] STD 40 700 [4800] 700 [4800]
    0.154 [3.91] 1.48 [2.21] XS 80 850 [5900] 850 [5900]
    0.308 [7.82] 2.45 [3.64] XXS . . . 1000 [6900] 1000 [6900]
    1 25 1.315 [33.4] 0.133 [3.38] 1.69 [2.50] STD 40 700 [4800] 700 [4800]
    0.179 [4.55] 2.19 [3.25] XS 80 850 [5900] 850 [5900]
    0.358 [9.09] 3.66 [5.45] XXS . . . 1000 [6900] 1000 [6900]
    11/4 32 1.660 [42.2] 0.140 [3.56] 2.28 [3.40] STD 40 1000 [6900] 1100 [7600]
    0.191 [4.85] 3.03 [4.49] XS 80 1500 [10 300] 1600 [11 000]
    0.382 [9.70] 5.23 [7.76] XXS . . . 1800 [12 400] 1900 [13 100]
    11/2 40 1.900 [48.3] 0.145 [3.68] 2.74 [4.04] STD 40 1000 [6900] 1100 [7600]
    0.200 [5.08] 3.65 [5.39] XS 80 1500 [10 300] 1600 [11 000]
    0.400 [10.16] 6.41 [9.56] XXS . . . 1800 [12 400] 1900 [13 100]
    2 50 2.375 [60.3] 0.154 [3.91] 3.68 [5.46] STD 40 2300 [15 900] 2500 [17 200]
    0.218 [5.54] 5.08 [7.55] XS 80 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.436 [11.07] 9.06 [13.44] XXS . . . 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    21/2 65 2.875 [73.0] 0.203 [5.16] 5.85 [8.67] STD 40 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.276 [7.01] 7.75 [11.52] XS 80 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.552 [14.02] 13.72 [20.39] XXS . . . 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    3 80 3.500 [88.9] 0.216 [5.49] 7.68 [11.35] STD 40 2200 [15 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.300 [7.62] 10.35 [15.39] XS 80 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    0.600 [15.24] 18.60 [27.66] XXS . . . 2500 [17 200] 2500 [17 200]
    31/2 90 4.000 [101.6] 0.226 [5.74] 9.27 [13.71] STD 40 2000 [13 800] 2400 [16 500]
    0.318 [8.08] 12.67 [18.82] XS 80 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    4 100 4.500 [114.3] 0.237 [6.02] 10.92 [16.23] STD 40 1900 [13 100] 2200 [15 200]
    0.337 [8.56] 15.20 [22.60] XS 80 2700 [18 600] 2800 [19 300]
    0.674 [17.12] 27.62 [41.09] XXS . . . 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    5 125 5.563 [141.3] 0.258 [6.55] 14.90 [22.07] STD 40 1700 [11 700] 1900 [13 100]
    0.375 [9.52] 21.04 [31.42] XS 80 2400 [16 500] 2800 [19 300]
    0.750 [19.05] 38.63 [57.53] XXS . . . 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    6 150 6.625 [168.3] 0.280 [7.11] 19.34 [28.58] STD 40 1500 [10 300] 1800 [12 400]
    0.432 [10.97] 28.88 [43.05] XS 80 2300 [15 900] 2700 [18 600]
    0.864 [21.95] 53.19 [79.18] XXS . . . 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    8 200 8.625 [219.1] 0.277 [7.04] 25.53 [38.07] . . . 30 1200 [8300] 1300 [9000]
    0.322 [8.18] 29.35 [43.73] STD 40 1300 [9000] 1600 [11 000]
    0.500 [12.70] 44.00 [65.41] XS 80 2100 [14 500] 2400 [16 500]
    0.875 [22.22] 72.69 [107.94] XXS . . . 2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
    10 250 10.750 [273.0] 0.279 [7.09] 32.33 [48.80] . . . . . . 950 [6500] 1100 [7600]
    0.307 [7.80] 35.33 [53.27] . . . 30 1000 [6900] 1200 [8300]
    0.365 [9.27] 41.49 [63.36] STD 40 1200 [8300] 1400 [9700]
    0.500 [12.70] 55.55 [83.17] XS 60 1700 [11 700] 2000 [13 800]
    12 300 12.750 [323.8] 0.330 [8.38] 45.47 [67.72] . . . 30 950 [6500] 1100 [7600]
    0.375 [9.52] 51.28 [76.21] STD . . . 1100 [7600] 1200 [8300]
    0.500 [12.70] 66.91 [99.4] XS . . . 1400 [9700] 1600 [11 000]
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-53/SA-53M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    162
    TABLE X2.4
    TABLE OF MINIMUM WALL THICKNESSES ON INSPECTION FOR NOMINAL PIPE WALL THICKNESSES
    Minimum Wall Minimum Wall Minimum Wall
    Nominal Wall Thickness Nominal Wall Thickness Nominal Wall Thickness
    Thickness on Inspection Thickness (tn), on Inspection Thickness (tn), on Inspection ™,
    (tn), in. mm, in. [mm] in. mm, in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm]
    0.068 [1.73] 0.060 [1.52] 0.294 [7.47] 0.257 [6.53] 0.750 [19.05] 0.656 [16.66]
    0.088 [2.24] 0.077 [1.96] 0.300 [7.62] 0.262 [6.65] 0.812 [20.62] 0.710 [18.03]
    0.091 [2.31] 0.080 [2.03] 0.307 [7.80] 0.269 [6.83] 0.844 [21.44] 0.739 [18.77]
    0.095 [2.41] 0.083 [2.11] 0.308 [7.82] 0.270 [6.86] 0.864 [21.94] 0.756 [19.20]
    0.109 [2.77] 0.095 [2.41] 0.312 [7.92] 0.273 [6.93] 0.875 [22.22] 0.766 [19.46]
    0.113 [2.87] 0.099 [2.51] 0.318 [8.08] 0.278 [7.06] 0.906 [23.01] 0.793 [20.14]
    0.119 [3.02] 0.104 [2.64] 0.322 [8.18] 0.282 [7.16] 0.938 [23.82] 0.821 [20.85]
    0.125 [3.18] 0.109 [2.77] 0.330 [8.38] 0.289 [7.34] 0.968 [24.59] 0.847 [21.51]
    0.126 [3.20] 0.110 [2.79] 0.337 [8.56] 0.295 [7.49] 1.000 [25.40] 0.875 [22.22]
    0.133 [3.38] 0.116 [2.95] 0.343 [8.71] 0.300 [7.62] 1.031 [26.19] 0.902 [22.91]
    0.140 [3.56] 0.122 [3.10] 0.344 [8.74] 0.301 [7.65] 1.062 [26.97] 0.929 [26.30]
    0.145 [3.68] 0.127 [3.23] 0.358 [9.09] 0.313 [7.95] 1.094 [27.79] 0.957 [24.31]
    0.147 [3.73] 0.129 [3.28] 0.365 [9.27] 0.319 [8.10] 1.125 [28.58] 0.984 [24.99]
    0.154 [3.91] 0.135 [3.43] 0.375 [9.52] 0.328 [8.33] 1.156 [29.36] 1.012 [25.70]
    0.156 [3.96] 0.136 [3.45] 0.382 [9.70] 0.334 [8.48] 1.219 [30.96] 1.067 [27.08]
    0.179 [4.55] 0.157 [3.99] 0.400 [10.16] 0.350 [8.89] 1.250 [31.75] 1.094 [27.79]
    0.187 [4.75] 0.164 [4.17] 0.406 [10.31] 0.355 [9.02] 1.281 [32.54] 1.121 [28.47]
    0.188 [4.78] 0.164 [4.17] 0.432 [10.97] 0.378 [9.60] 1.312 [33.32] 1.148 [29.16]
    0.191 [4.85] 0.167 [4.24] 0.436 [11.07] 0.382 [9.70] 1.343 [34.11] 1.175 [29.85]
    0.200 [5.08] 0.175 [4.44] 0.437 [11.10] 0.382 [9.70] 1.375 [34.92] 1.203 [30.56]
    0.203 [5.16] 0.178 [4.52] 0.438 [11.13] 0.383 [9.73] 1.406 [35.71] 1.230 [31.24]
    0.216 [5.49] 0.189 [4.80] 0.500 [12.70] 0.438 [11.13] 1.438 [36.53] 1.258 [31.95]
    0.218 [5.54] 0.191 [4.85] 0.531 [13.49] 0.465 [11.81] 1.500 [38.10] 1.312 [33.32]
    0.219 [5.56] 0.192 [4.88] 0.552 [14.02] 0.483 [12.27] 1.531 [38.89] 1.340 [34.04]
    0.226 [5.74] 0.198 [5.03] 0.562 [14.27] 0.492 [12.50] 1.562 [39.67] 1.367 [34.72]
    0.237 [6.02] 0.207 [5.26] 0.594 [15.09] 0.520 [13.21] 1.594 [40.49] 1.395 [35.43]
    0.250 [6.35] 0.219 [5.56] 0.600 [15.24] 0.525 [13.34] 1.750 [44.45] 1.531 [38.89]
    0.258 [6.55] 0.226 [5.74] 0.625 [15.88] 0.547 [13.89] 1.781 [45.24] 1.558 [39.57]
    0.276 [7.01] 0.242 [6.15] 0.656 [16.66] 0.574 [14.58] 1.812 [46.02] 1.586 [40.28]
    0.277 [7.04] 0.242 [6.15] 0.674 [17.12] 0.590 [14.99] 1.968 [49.99] 1.722 [43.74]
    0.279 [7.09] 0.244 [6.20] 0.688 [17.48] 0.602 [15.29] 2.062 [52.37] 1.804 [45.82]
    0.280 [7.11] 0.245 [6.22] 0.719 [18.26] 0.629 [15.98] 2.344 [59.54] 2.051 [52.10]
    0.281 [7.14] 0.246 [6.25]
    Note 1 — The following equation, upon which this table is based, shall be applied to calculate minimum wall thickness from nominal wall
    thickness:
    tn  0.875 p tm
    where:
    tn p nominal wall thickness, in. [mm], and
    tm p minimum wall thickness, in. [mm].
    The wall thickness is expresssed to three decimal places, the fourth decimal place being carried forward or dropped in accordance with Practice
    E 29.
    Note 2 — This table is a master table covering wall thicknesses available in the purchase of different classifications of pipe, but it is not
    meant to imply that all of the walls listed therein are obtainable under this specification.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-53/SA-53M
    163
    X3. BASIC THREADING DATA
    X3.1 Figure X3.1 is to be used with Table X3.1. Figure X3.2 is to be used with Table X3.2.
    FIG. X3.1 DIMENSIONS OF HAND TIGHT ASSEMBLY FOR USE WITH TABLE X3.1
    W
    NL
    L1 L4 D
    E1 L2
    A
    TABLE X3.1
    BASIC THREADING DATA FOR STANDARD-WEIGHT NPS 6 [DN 50] AND UNDER
    Pipe Threads Coupling
    End of
    Pipe to Pitch
    Hand Diameter at Hand Tight
    Outside Tight Effective Total Hand Tight Outside Length, Stand-Off
    NPS DN Diameter, Number Plane, Length, Length, Plane, Diameter, min., (Number of
    Desig- Desig- in. [mm] per in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] Threads)
    nator nator D inch L1 L2 L4 E1 W NL A
    1/8 6 0.405 [10.3] 27 0.1615 0.2638 0.3924 0.37360 0.563 [14.3] 3/4 [19] 4
    [4.1021] [6.7005] [9.9670] [9.48944]
    1/4 8 0.540 [13.7] 18 0.2278 0.4018 0.5946 0.49163 0.719 [18.3] 11/8 [29] 51/2
    [5.7861] [10.2057] [15.1028] [12.48740]
    3/8 10 0.675 [17.1] 18 0.240 0.4078 0.6006 0.62701 0.875 [22.2] 11/8 [29] 5
    [6.096] [10.3581] [15.2552] [15.92605]
    1/2 15 0.840 [21.3] 14 0.320 0.5337 0.7815 0.77843 1.063 [27.0] 11/2 [38] 5
    [8.128] [13.5560] [19.8501] [19.77212]
    3/4 20 1.050 [26.7] 14 0.339 0.5457 0.7935 0.98887 1.313 [33.4] 1 [40] 5
    [8.611] [13.8608] [20.1549] [25.11730]
    1 25 1.315 [33.4] 111/2 0.400 0.6828 0.9845 1.23863 1.576 [40.0] 115/16 [49] 5
    [10.160] [17.3431] [25.0063] [31.46120]
    11/4 32 1.660 [42.2] 111/2 0.420 0.7068 1.0085 1.58338 1.900 [48.3] 2 [50] 5
    [10.668] [17.9527] [25.6159] [40.21785]
    11/2 40 1.900 [48.3] 111/2 0.420 0.7235 1.0252 1.82234 2.200 [55.9] 2 [50] 51/2
    [10.668] [18.3769] [26.0401] [46.28744]
    2 50 2.375 [60.3] 111/2 0.436 0.7565 1.0582 2.29627 2.750 [69.8] 21/16 [52] 51/2
    [11.074] [19.2151] [26.8783] [58.32526]
    21/2 65 2.875 [73.0] 8 0.682 1.1376 1.5712 2.76216 3.250 [82.5] 31/16 [78] 51/2
    [17.323] [28.8950] [39.9085] [70.15886]
    3 80 3.500 [88.9] 8 0.766 1.2000 1.6337 3.38850 4.000 [101.6] 33/16 [81] 51/2
    [19.456] [30.4800] [41.4960] [86.06790]
    31/2 90 4.000 [101.6] 8 0.821 1.2500 1.6837 3.88881 4.625 [117.5] 35/16 [84] 51/2
    [20.853] [31.7500] [42.7660] [98.77577]
    4 100 4.500 [114.3] 8 0.844 1.3000 1.7337 4.38713 5.000 [127.0] 37/16 [87] 5
    [21.438] [33.0200] [44.0360] [111.43310]
    5 125 5.563 [141.3] 8 0.937 1.4063 1.8400 5.44929 6.296 [159.9] 311/16 [94] 5
    [23.800] [35.7200] [46.7360] [138.41200]
    6 150 6.625 [168.3] 8 0.958 1.5125 1.9462 6.50597 7.390 [187.7] 415/16 [125] 6
    [24.333] [38.4175] [49.4335] [165.25164]
    Note 1 — All dimensions in this table are nominal and subject to mill tolerances.
    Note 2 — The taper of threads is 3/4 in./ft [62.5 mm/m] on the diameter.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-53/SA-53M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    164
    FIG. X3.2 DIMENSIONS OF HAND TIGHT ASSEMBLY FOR USE WITH TABLE X3.2
    W
    NL
    L1 L4 D
    E1 L2
    A
    TABLE X3.2
    BASIC THREADING DATA FOR STANDARD-WEIGHT PIPE IN NPS 8 [DN 200] AND LARGER, AND ALL SIZES OF
    EXTRA-STRONG AND DOUBLE-EXTRA-STRONG WEIGHT
    Pipe Threads Coupling
    End of
    Pipe to Pitch
    Hand Diameter at Hand Tight
    Outside Tight Effective Total Hand Tight Outside Length, Stand-Off
    NPS DN Diameter, Number Plane, Length, Length, Plane, Diameter, min., (Number of
    Desig- Desig- in. [mm] per in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] Threads)
    nator nator D inch L1 L2 L4 E1 W NL A
    1/8 6 0.405 [10.3] 27 0.1615 0.2638 0.3924 0.37360 0.563 [14.3] 11/16 [27] 3
    [4.1021] [6.7005] [9.9670] [9.48944]
    1/4 8 0.540 [13.7] 18 0.2278 0.4018 0.5946 0.49163 0.719 [18.3] 15/8 [41] 3
    [5.7861] [10.2057] [15.1028] [12.48740]
    3/8 10 0.675 [17.1] 18 0.240 0.4078 0.6006 0.62701 0.875 [22.2] 15/8 [41] 3
    [6.096] [10.3581] [15.2552] [15.92605]
    1/2 15 0.840 [21.3] 14 0.320 0.5337 0.7815 0.77843 1.063 [27.0] 21/8 [54] 3
    [8.128] [13.5560] [19.8501] [19.77212]
    3/4 20 1.050 [26.7] 141/2 0.339 0.5457 0.7935 0.98887 1.313 [33.4] 21/8 [54] 3
    [8.611] [13.8608] [20.1549] [25.11730]
    1 25 1.315 [33.4] 11 0.400 0.6828 0.9845 1.23863 1.576 [40.0] 25/8 [67] 3
    [10.160] [17.3431] [25.0063] [31.46120]
    11/4 32 1.660 [42.2] 111/2 0.420 0.7068 1.0085 1.58338 2.054 [52.2] 23/4 [70] 3
    [10.668] [17.9527] [25.6159] [40.21785]
    11/2 40 1.900 [48.3] 111/2 0.420 0.7235 1.0252 1.82234 2.200 [55.9] 23/4 [70] 3
    [10.668] [18.3769] [26.0401] [46.28744]
    2 50 2.375 [60.3] 111/2 0.436 0.7565 1.0582 2.29627 2.875 [73.0] 27/8 [73] 3
    [11.074] [19.2151] [26.8783] [58.32526]
    21/2 65 2.875 [73.0] 8 0.682 1.1375 1.5712 2.76216 3.375 [85.7] 41/8 [105] 2
    [17.323] [28.8950] [39.9085] [70.15886]
    3 80 3.500 [88.9] 8 0.766 1.2000 1.6337 3.38850 4.000 [101.6] 41/4 [108] 2
    [19.456] [30.4800] [41.4960] [86.06790]
    31/2 90 4.000 [101.6] 8 0.821 1.2500 1.6837 3.88881 4.625 [117.5] 43/8 [111] 2
    [20.853] [31.7500] [42.7660] [98.77577]
    4 100 4.500 [114.3] 8 0.844 1.3000 1.7337 4.38713 5.200 [132.1] 41/2 [114] 2
    [21.438] [33.0200] [44.0360] [111.43310]
    5 125 5.563 [141.3] 8 0.937 1.4063 1.8400 5.44929 6.296 [159.9] 45/8 [117] 2
    [23.800] [35.7200] [46.7360] [138.41200]
    6 150 6.625 [168.3] 8 0.958 1.5125 1.9462 6.50597 7.390 [187.7] 47/8 [124] 2
    [24.333] [38.4175] [49.4335] [165.25164]
    8 200 8.625 [219.1] 8 1.063 1.7125 2.1462 8.50003 9.625 [244.5] 51/4 [133] 2
    [27.000] [43.4975] [54.5135] [215.90076]
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-53/SA-53M
    165
    TABLE X3.2
    BASIC THREADING DATA FOR STANDARD-WEIGHT PIPE IN NPS 8 [DN 200] AND LARGER, AND ALL SIZES OF
    EXTRA-STRONG AND DOUBLE-EXTRA-STRONG WEIGHT (CONT’D)
    Pipe Threads Coupling
    End of
    Pipe Pitch
    toHand Diameter at Hand Tight
    Outside Tight Effective Total Hand Tight Outside Length, Stand-Off
    NPS DN Diameter, Number Plane, Length, Length, Plane, Diameter, min., (Number of
    Desig- Desig- in. [mm] per in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] Threads)
    nator nator D inch L1 L2 L4 E1 W NL A
    10 250 10.750 [273.0] 8 1.210 1.9250 2.3587 10.62094 11.750 [298.4] 53/4 [146] 2
    [30.734] [48.8950] [59.9110] [269.77188]
    12 300 12.750 [323.8] 8 1.360 2.1250 2.5587 12.61781 14.000 [355.6] 61/8 [156] 2
    [34.544] [53.9750] [64.9910] [320.49237]
    14 350 14.000 [355.6] 8 1.562 2.2500 2.6837 13.87263 15.000 [381.0] 63/8 [162] 2
    [39.675] [57.1500] [68.1660] [352.36480]
    16 400 16.000 [406.4] 8 1.812 2.4500 2.8837 15.87575 17.000 [432] 63/4 [171] 2
    [46.025] [62.2300] [73.2460] [403.24405]
    18 450 18.000 [457] 8 2.000 2.6500 3.0837 17.87500 19.000 [483] 71/8 [181] 2
    [50.800] [67.3100] [78.3260] [454.02500]
    20 500 20.000 [508] 8 2.125 2.8500 3.2837 19.87031 21.000 [533] 75/8 [194] 2
    [53.975] [72.3900] [83.4060] [504.70587]
    Note 1 — The taper of threads is 3/4 in./ft [62.5 mm/m] on the diameter.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-53/SA-53M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    166
    X4. ELONGATION VALUES
    X4.1 Tabulated in Table X4.1 are the minimum elongation values calculated by the equation given in Table 2.
    TABLE X4.1
    ELONGATION VALUES
    Tension Test Specimen Elongation in 2 in., min, %
    Nominal Wall Thickness, in. Specified Tensile Strength, psi
    Area, A, 3/4 in. 1 in. 11/2 in.
    in.2 Specimen Specimen Specimen 48 000 60 000
    0.75 and 0.994 and 0.746 and 0.497 and 36 30
    greater greater greater greater
    0.74 0.980–0.993 0.735–0.745 0.490–0.496 36 29
    0.73 0.967–0.979 0.726–0.734 0.484–0.489 36 29
    0.72 0.954–0.966 0.715–0.725 0.477–0.483 36 29
    0.71 0.941–0.953 0.706–0.714 0.471–0.476 36 29
    0.70 0.927–0.940 0.695–0.705 0.464–0.470 36 29
    0.69 0.914–0.926 0.686–0.694 0.457–0.463 36 29
    0.68 0.900–0.913 0.675–0.685 0.450–0.456 35 29
    0.67 0.887–0.899 0.666–0.674 0.444–0.449 35 29
    0.66 0.874–0.886 0.655–0.665 0.437–0.443 35 29
    0.65 0.861–0.873 0.646–0.654 0.431–0.436 35 29
    0.64 0.847–0.860 0.635–0.645 0.424–0.430 35 29
    0.63 0.834–0.846 0.626–0.634 0.417–0.423 35 29
    0.62 0.820–0.833 0.615–0.625 0.410–0.416 35 28
    0.61 0.807–0.819 0.606–0.614 0.404–0.409 35 28
    0.60 0.794–0.806 0.595–0.605 0.397–0.403 35 28
    0.59 0.781–0.793 0.586–0.594 0.391–0.396 34 28
    0.58 0.767–0.780 0.575–0.585 0.384–0.390 34 28
    0.57 0.754–0.766 0.566–0.574 0.377–0.383 34 28
    0.56 0.740–0.753 0.555–0.565 0.370–0.376 34 28
    0.55 0.727–0.739 0.546–0.554 0.364–0.369 34 28
    0.54 0.714–0.726 0.535–0.545 0.357–0.363 34 28
    0.53 0.701–0.713 0.526–0.534 0.351–0.356 34 28
    0.52 0.687–0.700 0.515–0.525 0.344–0.350 34 27
    0.51 0.674–0.686 0.506–0.514 0.337–0.343 33 27
    0.50 0.660–0.673 0.495–0.505 0.330–0.336 33 27
    0.49 0.647–0.659 0.486–0.494 0.324–0.329 33 27
    0.48 0.634–0.646 0.475–0.485 0.317–0.323 33 27
    0.47 0.621–0.633 0.466–0.474 0.311–0.316 33 27
    0.46 0.607–0.620 0.455–0.465 0.304–0.310 33 27
    0.45 0.594–0.606 0.446–0.454 0.297–0.303 33 27
    0.44 0.580–0.593 0.435–0.445 0.290–0.296 32 27
    0.43 0.567–0.579 0.426–0.434 0.284–0.289 32 26
    0.42 0.554–0.566 0.415–0.425 0.277–0.283 32 26
    0.41 0.541–0.553 0.406–0.414 0.271–0.276 32 26
    0.40 0.527–0.540 0.395–0.405 0.264–0.270 32 26
    0.39 0.514–0.526 0.386–0.394 0.257–0.263 32 26
    0.38 0.500–0.513 0.375–0.385 0.250–0.256 32 26
    0.37 0.487–0.499 0.366–0.374 0.244–0.249 31 26
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-53/SA-53M
    167
    TABLE X4.1
    ELONGATION VALUES (CONT’D)
    Tension Test Specimen Elongation in 2 in., min, %
    Nominal Wall Thickness, in. Specified Tensile Strength, psi
    Area, A, 3/4 in. 1 in. 11/2 in.
    in.2 Specimen Specimen Specimen 48 000 60 000
    0.36 0.474–0.486 0.355–0.365 0.237–0.243 31 26
    0.35 0.461–0.473 0.346–0.354 0.231–0.236 31 25
    0.34 0.447–0.460 0.335–0.345 0.224–0.230 31 25
    0.33 0.434–0.446 0.326–0.334 0.217–0.223 31 25
    0.32 0.420–0.433 0.315–0.325 0.210–0.216 30 25
    0.31 0.407–0.419 0.306–0.314 0.204–0.209 30 25
    0.30 0.394–0.406 0.295–0.305 0.197–0.203 30 25
    0.29 0.381–0.393 0.286–0.294 0.191–0.196 30 24
    0.28 0.367–0.380 0.275–0.285 0.184–0.190 30 24
    0.27 0.354–0.366 0.266–0.274 0.177–0.183 29 24
    0.26 0.340–0.353 0.255–0.265 0.170–0.176 29 24
    0.25 0.327–0.339 0.246–0.254 0.164–0.169 29 24
    0.24 0.314–0.326 0.235–0.245 0.157–0.163 29 24
    0.23 0.301–0.313 0.226–0.234 0.151–0.156 29 23
    0.22 0.287–0.300 0.215–0.225 0.144–0.150 28 23
    0.21 0.274–0.286 0.206–0.214 0.137–0.143 28 23
    0.20 0.260–0.273 0.195–0.205 0.130–0.136 28 23
    0.19 0.247–0.259 0.186–0.194 0.124–0.129 27 22
    0.18 0.234–0.246 0.175–0.185 0.117–0.123 27 22
    0.17 0.221–0.233 0.166–0.174 0.111–0.116 27 22
    0.16 0.207–0.220 0.155–0.165 0.104–0.110 27 22
    0.15 0.194–0.206 0.146–0.154 0.097–0.103 26 21
    0.14 0.180–0.193 0.135–0.145 0.091–0.096 26 21
    0.13 0.167–0.179 0.126–0.134 0.084–0.090 25 21
    0.12 0.154–0.166 0.115–0.125 0.077–0.083 25 20
    0.11 0.141–0.153 0.106–0.114 0.071–0.076 25 20
    0.10 0.127–0.140 0.095–0.105 0.064–0.070 24 20
    0.09 0.114–0.126 0.086–0.094 0.057–0.063 24 19
    0.08 0.100–0.113 0.075–0.085 0.050–0.056 23 19
    0.07 0.087–0.099 0.066–0.074 0.044–0.049 22 18
    0.06 0.074–0.086 0.055–0.065 0.037–0.043 22 18
    0.05 0.061–0.073 0.046–0.054 0.031–0.036 21 17
    0.04 0.047–0.060 0.035–0.045 0.024–0.030 20 16
    0.03 0.034–0.046 0.026–0.034 0.017–0.023 19 16
    0.02 0.020–0.033 0.015–0.025 0.010–0.016 17 14
    0.01 and 0.019 and 0.014 and 0.009 and 15 12
    less less less less
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-53/SA-53M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    168
    X4.2 Tabulated in Table X4.2 are the minimum elongation values calculated by the equation given in Table 2.
    TABLE X4.2
    ELONGATION VALUES
    Tension Test Specimen Elongation in 50 mm, min, %
    Nominal Wall Thickness, mm Specified Tensile Strength, MPa
    Area, A, 19 mm 25 mm 38 mm
    mm2 Specimen Specimen Specimen 330 415
    500 and 26.3 and 20.0 and 13.2 and 36 30
    greater greater greater greater
    480–499 25.3–26.2 19.2–19.9 12.7–13.1 36 30
    460–479 24.2–25.2 18.4–19.1 12.1–12.6 36 29
    440–459 23.2–24.1 17.6–18.3 11.6–12.0 36 29
    420–439 22.1–23.1 16.8–17.5 11.1–11.5 35 29
    400–419 21.1–22.0 16.0–16.7 10.6–11.0 35 29
    380–399 20.0–21.0 15.2–15.9 10.0–10.5 35 28
    360–379 19.0–19.9 14.4–15.0 9.5–9.9 34 28
    340–359 17.9–18.9 13.6–14.3 9.0–9.4 34 28
    320–339 16.9–17.8 12.8–13.5 8.5–8.9 34 27
    300–319 15.8–16.8 12.0–12.7 7.9–8.4 33 27
    280–299 14.8–15.7 11.2–11.9 7.4–7.8 33 27
    260–279 13.7–14.7 10.4–11.1 6.9–7.3 32 26
    240–259 12.7–13.6 9.6–10.3 6.4–6.8 32 26
    220–239 11.6–12.6 8.8–9.5 5.8–6.3 31 26
    200–219 10.5–11.5 8.0–8.7 5.3–5.7 31 25
    190–199 10.0–10.4 7.6–7.9 5.0–5.2 30 25
    180–189 9.5–9.9 7.2–7.5 4.8–4.9 30 24
    170–179 9.0–9.4 6.8–7.1 4.5–4.7 30 24
    160–169 8.4–8.9 6.4–6.7 4.2–4.4 29 24
    150–159 7.9–8.3 6.0–6.3 4.0–4.1 29 24
    140–149 7.4–7.8 5.6–5.9 3.7–3.9 29 23
    130–139 6.9–7.3 5.2–5.5 3.5–3.6 28 23
    120–129 6.3–6.8 4.8–5.1 3.2–3.4 28 23
    110–119 5.8–6.2 4.4–4.7 2.9–3.1 27 22
    100–109 5.3–5.7 4.0–4.3 2.7–2.8 27 22
    90–99 4.8–5.2 3.6–3.9 2.4–2.6 26 21
    80–89 4.2–4.7 3.2–3.5 2.1–2.3 26 21
    70–79 3.7–4.1 2.8–3.1 1.9–2.0 25 21
    60–69 3.2–3.6 2.4–2.7 1.6–1.8 24 20
    50–59 2.7–3.1 2.0–2.3 . . . 24 19
    40–49 2.1–2.6 1.6–1.9 . . . 23 19
    30–39 1.6–2.0 . . . . . . 22 18
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL FORGINGS, FOR
    PIPING APPLICATIONS
    SA-105/SA-105M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A105/A105M-05.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-105/SA-105M
    169
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-105/SA-105M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    170
    SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL FORGINGS FOR
    PIPING APPLICATIONS
    SA-105/SA-105M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A 105/A 105M-05.)
27. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers forged carbon steel piping
    components for ambient- and higher-temperature service
    in pressure systems. Included are flanges, fittings, valves,
    and similar parts ordered either to dimensions specified by
    the purchaser or to dimensional standards such as the MSS,
    ASME, and API specifications referenced in Section 2.
    Forgings made to this specification are limited to a maximum
    weight of 10 000 lb [4540 kg]. Larger forgings may
    be ordered to Specification A 266/A 266M. Tubesheets
    and hollow cylindrical forgings for pressure vessel shells
    are not included within the scope of this specification.
    Although this specification covers some piping components
    machined from rolled bar and seamless tubular products
    (see 4.2), it does not cover raw material produced in
    these product forms.
    1.2 Supplementary requirements are provided for use
    when additional testing or inspection is desired. These shall
    apply only when specified individually by the purchaser
    in the order.
    1.3 Specification A 266 /A 266M covers other steel
    forgings and Specifications A 675/A 675M and A 696
    cover other steel bars.
    1.4 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound
    units and SI units. However, unless the order specifies the
    applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the
    material shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
    1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text,
    the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in
    each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system
    must be used independently of the other. Combining
    values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
    with the specification.
    NOTE 1 — The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has
    been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal
    diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.”
28. Referenced Documents
    2.1 In addition to those reference documents listed in
    Specification A 961, the following list of standards apply
    to this specification:
    2.2 ASTM Standards:
    A 266/A 266M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings
    for Pressure Vessel Components
    A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    A 675/A 675M Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-
    Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties
    A 696 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought
    or Cold-Finished, Special Quality, for Pressure Piping
    Components
    A 788 Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements
    A 961 Specification for Common Requirements for Steel
    Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves, and Parts for Piping
    Applications
    2.3 MSS Standards:
    SP 44 Standard for Steel Pipe Line Flanges
    2.4 ASME Standards:
    B16.5 Dimensional Standards for Steel Pipe Flanges and
    Flanged Fittings
    B16.9 Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings
    B16.10 Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous
    Valves
    B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Weld, and Threaded
    B16.34 Valves-Flanged, Threaded and Welding End
    B16.47 Large Diameter Steel Flanges
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-105/SA-105M
    171
    2.5 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
    Section IX Welding Qualifications
    2.6 API Standards:
    API-600 Flanged and Butt-Welding-End Steel Gate Valves
    API-602 Compact Design Carbon Steel Gate Valves for
    Refinery Use
29. Ordering Information
    3.1 See Specification A 961.
    3.1.1 Additional requirements (see 12.2).
30. General Requirements
    4.1 Product furnished to this specification shall conform
    to the requirements of Specification A 961, including any
    supplementary requirements that are indicated in the purchase
    order. Failure to comply with the requirements of
    Specification A 961 constitutes nonconformance with this
    specification. In case of a conflict between the requirements
    of this specification and Specification A 961, this specification
    shall prevail.
    4.2 Except as permitted by Section 6 in Specification
    A 961, the finished product shall be a forging as defined
    in the Terminology Section of Specification A 788.
31. Heat Treatment
    5.1 Heat treatment is not a mandatory requirement of
    this specification except for the following piping components:
    5.1.1 Flanges above Class 300,1
    5.1.2 Flanges of special design where the design
    pressure at the design temperature exceeds the pressuretemperature
    ratings of Class 300, Group 1.1,
    5.1.3 Flanges of special design where the design
    pressure or design temperature are not known,
    5.1.4 Piping components other than flanges which
    meet both of the following criteria: (1) over NPS 4 and
    (2) above Class 300, and
    5.1.5 Piping components of Special Class2 other than
    flanges which meet both of the following criteria: (1) over
    NPS 4 and (2) when the working pressure at the operating
    temperature exceeds the tabulated values for Special Class
    300, Group 1.1.
    5.2 Heat treatment, when required by 5.1 shall be
    annealing, normalizing, or normalizing and tempering or
    1 For definition of Class 300, see ASME B16.5.
    2 For definition of special class, see ASME B16.34.
    quenching and tempering in accordance with Specification
    A 961.
32. Chemical Composition
    6.1 The steel shall conform to the chemical requirements
    specified in Table 1.
    6.2 Steels to which lead has been added shall not be
    used.
33. Mechanical Properties
    7.1 The material shall conform to the mechanical property
    requirements prescribed in Table 2 and Table 3.
    7.2 For normalized, normalized and tempered, or
    quenched and tempered forgings, the central axis of the
    test specimen shall correspond to the 1/4 T plane or deeper
    position, where T is the maximum heat-treated thickness
    of the represented forging. In addition, for quenched and
    tempered forgings, the midlength of the test specimen shall
    be at least T from any second heat-treated surface. When
    section thickness does not permit this positioning, the test
    specimen shall be positioned as near as possible to the
    prescribed location.
    7.3 Tension Tests:
    7.3.1 One tension test shall be made for each heat
    of as-forged components.
    7.3.2 One tension test shall be made from each heattreating
    charge. If more than one heat is included in such
    a charge, each heat shall be tested.
    7.3.2.1 When the heat-treating temperatures are
    the same and the furnaces (either batch or continuous type),
    are controlled within ±25°F [±14°C] and equipped with
    recording pyrometers so that complete records of heat treatment
    are available, then one tension test from each heat
    is required instead of one test from each heat in each
    heat-treatment charge. The test specimen material shall be
    included with a furnace charge.
    7.3.3 Testing shall be performed in accordance with
    Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The largest feasible
    round specimen as described in Test Methods and Definitions
    A 370 shall be used except when hollow cylindrically
    shaped parts are machined from seamless tubulars. The
    gage length for measuring elongation shall be four times
    the diameter of the test section. When hollow cylindrically
    shaped parts are machined from seamless tubular materials,
    strip tests may be used.
    7.3.4 Forgings too small to permit obtaining a subsize
    specimen of 0.250 in. [6.35 mm] diameter or larger
    (see Test Methods and Definitions A 370) parallel to the
    dimension of maximum working, and produced in equipment
    unsuitable for the production of a separately forged
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-105/SA-105M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    172
    test bar such as an automatic or semi-automatic press, may
    be accepted on the basis of hardness only. One percent of
    the forgings per lot (see Note 2), or ten forgings, whichever
    is the lesser number, shall be selected at random, prepared,
    and tested using the standard Brinell test in Test Methods
    and Definitions A 370. The locations of the indentations
    shall be at the option of the manufacturer but shall be
    selected to be representative of the forging as a whole.
    One indentation per forging shall be required but additional
    indentations may be made to establish the representative
    hardness. The hardness of all forgings so tested shall be
    137 to 187 HB inclusive.
    NOTE 2 — A lot is defined as the product from a mill heat or if heat
    treated, the product of a mill heat per furnace charge.
    7.4 Hardness Tests — Except when only one forging
    is produced, a minimum of two forgings shall be hardness
    tested per batch or continuous run as defined in 7.3.2.1 to
    ensure that forgings are within the hardness limits given
    in Table 2. When only one forging is produced, it shall be
    hardness tested as defined in 7.3.2.1 to ensure it is within
    the hardness limits given in Table 2. Testing shall be in
    accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The
    purchaser may verify that the requirement has been met
    by testing at any location on the forging, provided such
    testing does not render the forging useless.
34. Hydrostatic Tests
    8.1 Such tests shall be conducted by the forging manufacturer
    only when Supplementary Requirement S8 in
    Specification A 961 is specified.
35. Retreatment
    9.1 If the results of the mechanical tests do not conform
    to the requirement specified, the manufacturer may heat
    treat or reheat treat the forgings as applicable and repeat
    the test specified in Section 7.
36. Repair by Welding
    10.1 Repair of defects by the manufacturer is permissible
    for forgings made to dimensional standards such as
    those of ASME or for other parts made for stock by the
    manufacturer. Prior approval of the purchaser is required
    to repair-weld special forgings made to the purchaser’s
    requirements.
    10.2 Weld repairs shall be made by a process that does
    not produce undesirably high levels of hydrogen in the
    welded areas.
    10.3 All forgings repaired by welding shall be postweld
    heat treated between 1100°F [593°C] and the lower
    transformation temperature for a minimum of 1/2 h/in.
    [1/2 h/25.4 mm] of maximum section thickness, or alternatively
    annealed, normalized and tempered, or quenched and
    tempered. If the forging was not previously heat treated,
    the original tempering temperature was exceeded, or the
    forging was fully heat treated in the post weld cycle, then
    the forging shall be tested in accordance with Section 7
    on completion of the cycle.
    10.4 The mechanical properties of the procedure-qualification
    weldment shall, when tested in accordance with
    Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
    conform with the requirements listed in Table 2 for the
    thermal condition of repair-welded forgings.
37. Rejection and Rehearing
    11.1 Each forging that develops injurious defects during
    shop working or application shall be rejected and the
    manufacturer notified.
38. Certification
    12.1 Identification Marking — For forgings made to
    specified dimensions, when agreed upon by the purchaser,
    and for forgings made to dimensional standards, application
    of identification marks as required in Specification
    A 961 shall be the certification that the forgings have been
    furnished in accordance with the requirements of this specification.
    The specification designation included on test
    reports shall include year date and revision letter, if any.
    12.2 Test Reports — When test reports are required,
    the manufacturer shall also provide the following, where
    applicable:
    12.2.1 Type heat treatment, Section 5,
    12.2.2 Tensile property results, Section 7 (Table 2),
    report the yield strength and ultimate strength, in ksi [MPa],
    elongation and reduction in area, in percent; and, if longitudinal
    strip tension specimens are used, report the width of
    the gage length,
    12.2.3 Chemical analysis results, Section 6 (Table 1).
    When the amount of an unspecified element is less than
    0.02%, then the analysis for that element may be reported
    as “< 0.02%,”
    12.2.4 Hardness results, Section 7 (Table 2), and
    12.2.5 Any supplementary testing required by the
    purchase order.
39. Product Marking
    13.1 If the forgings have been quenched and tempered,
    the letters “QT” shall be stamped on the forgings following
    this specification number.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-105/SA-105M
    173
    13.2 Forgings repaired by welding shall be marked
    with the letter “W” following this specification number.
    13.3 When test reports are required for larger products,
    the markings shall consist of the manufacturer’s symbol
    or name, this specification number, and such other markings
    as necessary to identify the part with the test report
    (13.1 and 13.2 shall apply). The specification number
    marked on the forgings need not include specification year
    date and revision letter.
    13.4 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements in
    Specification A 961 and 13.3, bar coding is acceptable as
    a supplemental identification method. The purchaser may
    TABLE 1
    CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
    Element Composition, %
    Carbon 0.35 max.
    Manganese 0.60–1.05
    Phosphorus 0.035 max.
    Sulfur 0.040 max.
    Silicon 0.10–0.35
    Copper 0.40 max. [Note (1)]
    Nickel 0.40 max. [Note (1)]
    Chromium 0.30 max. [Notes (1), (2)]
    Molybdenum 0.12 max. [Notes (1), (2)]
    Vanadium 0.08 max.
    GENERAL NOTE: For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified
    carbon maximum (0.35%), an increase of 0.06% manganese above
    the specified maximum (1.05%) will be permitted up to a maximum
    of 1.35%.
    NOTES:
    (1) The sum of copper, nickel, chromium, molybdenum and vanadium
    shall not exceed 1.00%.
    (2) The sum of chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed 0.32%.
    specify in the order a specific bar coding system to be
    used. The bar coding system, if applied at the discretion of
    the supplier, should be consistent with one of the published
    industry standards for bar coding. If used on small parts,
    the bar code may be applied to the box or a substantially
    applied tag.
40. Keywords
    14.1 pipe fittings, steel; piping applications; pressure
    containing parts; steel flanges; steel forgings, carbon; steel
    valves; temperature service applications, elevated; temperature
    service applications, high
    TABLE 2
    MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS [NOTE (1)]
    Tensile strength, min., psi [MPa] 70 000 [485]
    Yield strength, min., psi [MPa] [Note (2)] 36 000 [250]
    Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min., %:
    Basic minimum elongation for walls 5/16 in. 30
    [7.9 mm] and over in thickness, strip tests.
    When standard round 2 in. or 50 mm gage 22
    length or smaller proportionally sized specimen
    with the gage length equal to 4D is
    used
    For strip tests, a deduction for each 1/32 in. 1.50 [Note (3)]
    [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickness below
    5/16 in. [7.9 mm] from the basic minimum
    elongation of the percentage points of
    Table 3
    Reduction of area, min., % [Note (4)] 30
    Hardness, HB, max. 187
    NOTES:
    (1) For small forgings, see 7.3.4.
    (2) Determined by either the 0.2% offset method or the 0.5% extension-
    under-load method.
    (3) See Table 3 for computed minimum values.
    (4) For round specimens only.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-105/SA-105M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    174
    TABLE 3
    COMPUTED MINIMUM VALUES
    Wall Thickness Elongation in 2 in. or
    in. mm 50 mm, min., %
    5/16 (0.312) 7.9 30.00
    9/32 (0.281) 7.1 28.50
    1/4 (0.250) 6.4 27.00
    7/32 (0.219) 5.6 25.50
    3/16 (0.188) 4.8 24.00
    5/32 (0.156) 4.0 22.50
    1/8 (0.125) 3.2 21.00
    3/32 (0.094) 2.4 19.50
    1/16 (0.062) 1.6 18.00
    GENERAL NOTE: The above table gives the computed minimum elongation
    values for each 1/32 in. [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickness.
    Where the wall thickness lies between two values shown above, the
    minimum elongation value is determined by the following equation:
    E p 48T + 15.00
    where:
    E p elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, %, and
    T p actual thickness of specimen, in. [mm]
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-105/SA-105M
    175
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser
    in the inquiry, contract, and order.
    S1. Hardness
    S1.1 The purchaser may check the hardness of any or
    all forgings supplied at any location on the forging and
    the hardness shall be 137 to 187 HB. All forgings not
    within the specified hardness range shall be rejected.
    S2. Heat Treatment
    S2.1 All forgings shall be heat treated as specified by
    the purchaser.
    S2.2 When forgings not requiring heat treatment by
    5.1 are supplied heat treated by purchaser request, the basis
    for determining conformance with Table 2 and Table 3
    shall be hardness testing per 7.4 and either (1) tensile
    testing of heat treated forgings per 7.2, or (2) tensile tests
    from as-forged forgings or separately forged test blanks,
    as agreed upon between the supplier and purchaser.
    S2.3 When test reports are required, and tensile test
    results were obtained from as-forged forgings or as-forged
    test blanks, it shall be so indicated on the test report.
    S2.4 In addition to the marking required by Section
    13, this specification shall be followed by the letter: A
    for annealed, N for normalized, NT for normalized and
    tempered, or QT for quenched and tempered, as appropriate.
    S3. Marking Small Forgings
    S3.1 For small products where the space for marking
    is less than 1 in. [25 mm] in any direction, test reports are
    mandatory and marking may be restricted to only such
    symbols or codes as are necessary to identify the parts
    with the test reports.
    S3.2 When the configuration or size does not permit
    marking directly on the forging, the marking method shall
    be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer and
    the purchaser.
    S4. Carbon Equivalent
    S4.1 The maximum carbon equivalent, based on heat
    analysis, shall be 0.47 for forgings with a maximum section
    thickness of 2 in. or less, and 0.48 for forgings with a
    maximum section thickness of greater than 2 in.
    S4.2 Determine the carbon equivalent (CE) as follows:
    CE p C+ Mn/6 + (Cr + Mo + V)/5 + (Ni + Cu)/15
    S4.3 A lower maximum carbon equivalent may be
    agreed upon between the supplier and the purchaser.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ð19Þ
    SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL PIPE
    FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
    SA-106/SA-106M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A106/A106M-08.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-106/SA-106M
    177
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-106/SA-106M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    178
    SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL PIPE
    FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
    SA-106/SA-106M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A 106/A 106M-08)
41. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers seamless carbon steel pipe
    for high-temperature service (Note 1) in NPS 1/8 to NPS 48
    [DN 6 to DN 1200] (Note 2) inclusive, with nominal (average)
    wall thickness as given in ASME B36.10M. It shall
    be permissible to furnish pipe having other dimensions
    provided such pipe complies with all other requirements
    of this specification. Pipe ordered under this specification
    shall be suitable for bending, flanging, and similar forming
    operations, and for welding. When the steel is to be welded,
    it is presupposed that a welding procedure suitable to the
    grade of steel and intended use or service will be utilized.
    NOTE 1 — It is suggested, consideration be given to possible graphitization.
    NOTE 2 — The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) [DN
    (diameter nominal)] has been substituted in this standard for such traditional
    terms as “nominal diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.”
    1.2 Supplementary requirements of an optional nature
    are provided for seamless pipe intended for use in applications
    where a superior grade of pipe is required. These
    supplementary requirements call for additional tests to be
    made and when desired shall be so stated in the order.
    1.3 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound
    units are to be regarded separately as standard. The values
    stated in each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore,
    each system shall be used independently of the other.
    Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
    with the standard.
    1.4 The following precautionary caveat pertains only
    to the test method portion, Sections 11, 12, and 13 of this
    specification: This standard does not purport to address
    all of the safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It
    is the responsibility of the user of this standard to establish
    appropriate safety and health practices and determine the
    applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
42. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A 530/A 530M Specification for General Requirements for
    Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe
    E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
    and Tubing
    E 309 Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel
    Tubular Products Using Magnetic Saturation
    E 381 Method of Macroetch Testing Steel Bars, Billets,
    Blooms, and Forgings
    E 570 Practice for Flux Leakage Examination of Ferromagnetic
    Steel Tubular Products
    2.2 ASME Standard:
    ASMEB36.10M Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
    2.3 Military Standards:
    MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
    MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products, Preparation for
    Shipment and Storage
    2.4 Federal Standard:
    Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipments (Civil Agencies)
    Fed. Std. No. 183 Continuous Identification Marking of
    Iron and Steel Products
    2.5 Other Standards:
    SSPC-SP 6 Surface Preparation Specification No. 6
43. Ordering Information
    3.1 The inclusion of the following, as required will
    describe the desired material adequately, when ordered
    under this specification:
    3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
    3.1.2 Name of material (seamless carbon steel pipe),
    3.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
    3.1.4 Manufacture (hot-finished or cold-drawn),
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-106/SA-106M
    179
    3.1.5 Size (NPS [DN] and weight class or schedule
    number, or both; outside diameter and nominal wall thickness;
    or inside diameter and nominal wall thickness),
    3.1.6 Special outside diameter tolerance pipe
    (16.2.2),
    3.1.7 Inside diameter tolerance pipe, over 10 in.
    [250 mm] ID (16.2.3),
    3.1.8 Length (specific or random, Section 17),
    3.1.9 Optional requirements (Section 9 and S1 to S8),
    3.1.10 Test report required (Section on Certification
    of Specification A 530/A 530M),
    3.1.11 Specification designation (A 106 or A 106M,
    including year-date),
    3.1.12 End use of material,
    3.1.13 Hydrostatic test in accordance with Specification
    A 530/A 530M or 13.3 of this specification, or NDE
    in accordance with Section 14 of this specification.
    3.1.14 Special requirements.
44. Process
    4.1 The steel shall be killed steel, with the primary
    melting process being open-hearth, basic-oxygen, or electric-
    furnace, possibly combined with separate degassing or
    refining. If secondary melting, using electroslag remelting
    or vacuum-arc remelting is subsequently employed, the
    heat shall be defined as all of the ingots remelted from a
    single primary heat.
    4.2 Steel cast in ingots or strand cast is permissible.
    When steels of different grades are sequentially strand cast,
    identification of the resultant transition material is required.
    The producer shall remove the transition material by any
    established procedure that positively separates the grades.
    4.3 For pipe NPS 11/2 [DN 40] and under, it shall be
    permissible to furnish hot finished or cold drawn.
    4.4 Unless otherwise specified, pipe NPS 2 [DN 50]
    and over shall be furnished hot finished. When agreed
    upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser, it is
    permissible to furnish cold-drawn pipe.
45. Heat Treatment
    5.1 Hot-finished pipe need not be heat treated. Colddrawn
    pipe shall be heat treated after the final cold draw
    pass at a temperature of 1200°F (650°C) or higher.
46. General Requirements
    6.1 Material furnished to this specification shall conform
    to the applicable requirements of the current edition
    of Specification A 530/A 530M unless otherwise provided
    herein.
47. Chemical Composition
    7.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
    chemical composition prescribed in Table 1.
48. Heat Analysis
    8.1 An analysis of each heat of steel shall be made by
    the steel manufacturer to determine the percentages of the
    elements specified in Section 7. If the secondary melting
    processes of 5.1 are employed, the heat analysis shall be
    obtained from one remelted ingot or the product of one
    remelted ingot of each primary melt. The chemical composition
    thus determined, or that determined from a product
    analysis made by the manufacturer, if the latter has not
    manufactured the steel, shall be reported to the purchaser
    or the purchaser’s representative, and shall conform to the
    requirements specified in Section 7.
49. Product Analysis
    9.1 At the request of the purchaser, analyses of two
    pipes from each lot (see 20.1) shall be made by the manufacturer
    from the finished pipe. The results of these analyses
    shall be reported to the purchaser or the purchaser’s representative
    and shall conform to the requirements specified
    in Section 7.
    9.2 If the analysis of one of the tests specified in 9.1
    does not conform to the requirements specified in Section 7,
    analyses shall be made on additional pipes of double the
    original number from the same lot, each of which shall
    conform to requirements specified.
50. Tensile Requirements
    10.1 The material shall conform to the requirements
    as to tensile properties given in Table 2.
51. Bending Requirements
    11.1 For pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and under, a sufficient
    length of pipe shall stand being bent cold through 90°
    around a cylindrical mandrel, the diameter of which is
    twelve times the outside diameter (as shown in ASME
    B36.10M) of the pipe, without developing cracks. When
    ordered for close coiling, the pipe shall stand being bent
    cold through 180° around a cylindrical mandrel, the diameter
    of which is eight times the outside diameter (as shown
    in ASME B36.10M) of the pipe, without failure.
    11.2 For pipe whose diameter exceeds 25 in. [635 mm]
    and whose diameter to wall thickness ratio, where the
    SA-106/SA-106M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    180
    diameter to wall thickness ratio is the specified outside
    diameter divided by the nominal wall thickness, is 7.0 or
    less, the bend test shall be conducted. The bend test specimens
    shall be bent at room temperature through 180° with
    the inside diameter of the bend being 1 in. [25 mm] without
    cracking on the outside portion of the bent portion.
    Example: For 28 in. [711 mm] diameter 5.000 in.
    [127 mm] thick pipe the diameter to wall thickness
    ratio p 28/5 p 5.6 [711/127 p 5.6].
52. Flattening Tests
    12.1 Although testing is not required, pipe shall be
    capable of meeting the flattening test requirements of Supplementary
    Requirement S3, if tested.
53. Hydrostatic Test
    13.1 Except as allowed by 13.2, 13.3, and 13.4, each
    length of pipe shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test
    without leakage through the pipe wall.
    13.2 As an alternative to the hydrostatic test at the
    option of the manufacturer or where specified in the purchase
    order, it shall be permissible for the full body of
    each pipe to be tested with a nondestructive electric test
    described in Section 14.
    13.3 Where specified in the purchase order, it shall be
    permissible for pipe to be furnished without the hydrostatic
    test and without the nondestructive electric test in
    Section 14; in this case, each length so furnished shall
    include the mandatory marking of the letters “NH.” It shall
    be permissible for pipe meeting the requirements of 13.1
    or 13.2 to be furnished where pipe without either the hydrostatic
    or nondestructive electric test has been specified in
    the purchase order; in this case, such pipe need not be
    marked with the letters “NH.” Pipe that has failed either
    the hydrostatic test of 13.1 or the nondestructive electric
    test of 13.2 shall not be furnished as “NH” pipe.
    13.4 Where the hydrostatic test and the nondestructive
    electric test are omitted and the lengths marked with the
    letters “NH,” the certification, where required, shall clearly
    state “Not Hydrostatically Tested,” and the letters “NH”
    shall be appended to the product specification number and
    material grade shown on the certification.
    14 Nondestructive Electric Test
    14.1 As an alternative to the hydrostatic test at the
    option of the manufacturer or where specified in the purchase
    order as an alternative or addition to the hydrostatic
    test, the full body of each pipe shall be tested with a
    nondestructive electric test in accordance with Practice
    E 213, E 309, or E 570. In such cases, the marking of each
    length of pipe so furnished shall include the letters “NDE.”
    It is the intent of this nondestructive electric test to reject
    pipe with imperfections that produce test signals equal to
    or greater than that produced by the applicable calibration
    standard.
    14.2 Where the nondestructive electric test is performed,
    the lengths shall be marked with the letters “NDE.”
    The certification, where required, shall state “Nondestructive
    Electric Tested” and shall indicate which of the tests
    was applied. Also, the letters “NDE” shall be appended to
    the product specification number and material grade shown
    on the certification.
    14.3 The following information is for the benefit of
    the user of this specification:
    14.3.1 The reference standards defined in 14.4
    through 14.6 are convenient standards for calibration of
    nondestructive testing equipment. The dimensions of such
    standards are not to be construed as the minimum sizes of
    imperfections detectable by such equipment.
    14.3.2 The ultrasonic testing referred to in this specification
    is capable of detecting the presence and location
    of significant longitudinally or circumferentially oriented
    imperfections: however, different techniques need to be
    employed for the detection of such differently oriented
    imperfections. Ultrasonic testing is not necessarily capable
    of detecting short, deep imperfections.
    14.3.3 The eddy current examination referenced in
    this specification has the capability of detecting significant
    imperfections, especially of the short abrupt type.
    14.3.4 The flux leakage examination referred to in
    this specification is capable of detecting the presence and
    location of significant longitudinally or transversely oriented
    imperfections: however, different techniques need to
    be employed for the detection of such differently oriented
    imperfections.
    14.3.5 The hydrostatic test referred to in Section 13
    has the capability of finding defects of a size permitting
    the test fluid to leak through the tube wall and may be either
    visually seen or detected by a loss of pressure. Hydrostatic
    testing is not necessarily capable of detecting very tight,
    through-the-wall imperfections or imperfections that
    extend an appreciable distance into the wall without complete
    penetration.
    14.3.6 A purchaser interested in ascertaining the
    nature (type, size, location, and orientation) of discontinuities
    that can be detected in the specific applications of
    these examinations is directed to discuss this with the manufacturer
    of the tubular product.
    14.4 For ultrasonic testing, the calibration reference
    notches shall be, at the option of the producer, any one of
    the three common notch shapes shown in Practice E 213.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-106/SA-106M
    181
    The depth of notch shall not exceed 121/2% of the specified
    wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004 in. [0.1 mm], whichever
    is greater.
    14.5 For eddy current testing, the calibration pipe shall
    contain, at the option of the producer, any one of the
    following discontinuities to establish a minimum sensitivity
    level for rejection:
    14.5.1 Drilled Hole—The calibration pipe shall contain
    depending upon the pipe diameter three holes spaced
    120° apart or four holes spaced 90° apart and sufficiently
    separated longitudinally to ensure separately distinguishable
    responses. The holes shall be drilled radially and completely
    through the pipe wall, care being taken to avoid
    distortion of the pipe while drilling. Depending upon the
    pipe diameter the calibration pipe shall contain the following
    hole:
    Diameter of
    NPS DN Drilled Hole
    = 1/2 = 15 0.039 in. (1 mm)
    1/2 = 11/4 > 15 = 32 0.055 in. (1.4 mm)
    11/4 = 2 > 32 = 50 0.071 in. (1.8 mm)
    2 = 5 > 50 = 125 0.087 in. (2.2 mm)
    5 > 125 0.106 in. (2.7 mm)
    14.5.2 Transverse Tangential Notch—Using a round
    tool or file with a 1/4 in. [6 mm] diameter, a notch shall be
    filed or milled tangential to the surface and transverse to
    the longitudinal axis of the pipe. The notch shall have a
    depth not exceeding 121/2% of the specified wall thickness
    of the pipe or 0.004 in. [0.1 mm], whichever is greater.
    14.5.3 Longitudinal Notch — A notch 0.031 in.
    [0.8 mm] or less in width shall be machined in a radial
    plane parallel to the tube axis on the outside surface of the
    pipe, to have a depth not exceeding 121/2% of the specified
    wall thickness of the tube or 0.004 in. [0.1 mm], whichever
    is greater. The length of the notch shall be compatible with
    the testing method.
    14.5.4 Compatibility — The discontinuity in the calibration
    pipe shall be compatible with the testing equipment
    and the method being used.
    14.6 For flux leakage testing, the longitudinal calibration
    reference notches shall be straight-sided notches
    machined in a radial plane parallel to the pipe axis. For
    wall thicknesses under 1/2 in. [12.7 mm], outside and inside
    notches shall be used; for wall thicknesses equal to and
    above 1/2 in. [12.7 mm], only an outside notch shall be
    used. Notch depth shall not exceed 121/2% of the specified
    wall thickness, or 0.004 in. [0.1 mm], whichever is greater.
    notch length shall not exceed 1 in. [25 mm], and the width
    shall not exceed the depth. Outside diameter and inside
    diameter notches shall be located sufficiently apart to allow
    separation and identification of the signals.
    14.7 Pipe containing one or more imperfections that
    produce a signal equal to or greater than the signal produced
    by the calibration standard shall be rejected or the area
    producing the signal shall be reexamined.
    14.7.1 Test signals produced by imperfections which
    cannot be identified, or produced by cracks or crack-like
    imperfections shall result in rejection of the pipe, unless
    it is repaired and retested. To be accepted, the pipe must
    pass the same specification test to which it was originally
    subjected, provided that the remaining wall thickness is
    not decreased below that permitted by this specification.
    The OD at the point of grinding may be reduced by the
    amount so reduced.
    14.7.2 Test signals produced by visual imperfections
    such as those listed below may be evaluated in accordance
    with the provisions of Section 18:
    14.7.2.1 Dinges,
    14.7.2.2 Straightener marks,
    14.7.2.3 Cutting chips,
    14.7.2.4 Scratches,
    14.7.2.5 Steel die stamps,
    14.7.2.6 Stop marks, or
    14.7.2.7 Pipe reducer ripple.
    14.8 The test methods described in this section are not
    necessarily capable of inspecting the end portion of pipes,
    a condition referred to as “end effect.” The length of such
    end effect shall be determined by the manufacturer and,
    when specified in the purchase order, reported to the purchaser.
54. Nipples
    15.1 Nipples shall be cut from pipe of the same dimensions
    and quality described in this specification.
55. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations
    16.1 Mass — The mass of any length of pipe shall not
    vary more than 10% over and 3.5% under that specified.
    Unless otherwise agreed upon between the manufacturer
    and the purchaser, pipe in NPS 4 [DN 100] and smaller
    may be weighed in convenient lots; pipe larger than NPS 4
    [DN 100] shall be weighed separately.
    16.2 Diameter — Except as provided for thin-wall pipe
    in paragraph 11.2 of Specification A 530/A 530M, the tolerances
    for diameter shall be in accordance with the following:
    16.2.1 Except for pipe ordered as special outside
    diameter tolerance pipe or as inside diameter tolerance
    pipe, variations in outside diameter shall not exceed those
    given in Table 3.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-106/SA-106M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    182
    16.2.2 For pipe over 10 in. [250 mm] OD ordered
    as special outside diameter tolerance pipe, the outside
    diameter shall not vary more than 1% over or 1% under
    the specified outside diameter.
    16.2.3 For pipe over 10 in. [250 mm] ID ordered as
    inside diameter tolerance pipe, the inside diameter shall
    not vary more than 1% over or 1% under the specified
    inside diameter.
    16.3 Thickness — The minimum wall thickness at any
    point shall not be more than 12.5% under the specified
    wall thickness.
56. Lengths
    17.1 Pipe lengths shall be in accordance with the following
    regular practice:
    17.1.1 The lengths required shall be specified in the
    order, and
    17.1.2 No jointers are permitted unless otherwise
    specified.
    17.1.3 If definite lengths are not required, pipe may
    be ordered in single random lengths of 16 to 22 ft [4.8 to
    6.7 m] with 5% 12 to 16 ft [3.7 to 4.8 m], or in double
    random lengths with a minimum average of 35 ft [10.7 m]
    and a minimum length of 22 ft [6.7 m] with 5% 16 to 22 ft
    [4.8 to 6.7 m].
57. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
    18.1 The pipe manufacturer shall explore a sufficient
    number of visual surface imperfections to provide reasonable
    assurance that they have been properly evaluated with
    respect to depth. Exploration of all surface imperfections
    is not required but consideration should be given to the
    necessity of exploring all surface imperfections to assure
    compliance with 18.2.
    18.2 Surface imperfections that penetrate more than
    121/2% of the nominal wall thickness or encroach on the
    minimum wall thickness shall be considered defects. Pipe
    with such defects shall be given one of the following dispositions:
    18.2.1 The defect shall be removed by grinding,
    provided that the remaining wall thickness is within the
    limits specified in 16.3.
    18.2.2 Repaired in accordance with the repair welding
    provisions of 18.6.
    18.2.3 The section of pipe containing the defect may
    be cut off within the limits of requirements on length.
    18.2.4 Rejected.
    18.3 To provide a workmanlike finish and basis for
    evaluating conformance with 18.2 the pipe manufacturer
    shall remove by grinding the following noninjurious imperfections:
    18.3.1 Mechanical marks and abrasions — such as
    cable marks, dinges, guide marks, roll marks, ball
    scratches, scores, and die marks—and pits, any of which
    imperfections are deeper than 1/16 in. [1.6 mm].
    18.3.2 Visual imperfections commonly referred to
    as scabs, seams, laps, tears, or slivers found by exploration
    in accordance with 18.1 to be deeper than 5% of the nominal
    wall thickness.
    18.4 At the purchaser’s discretion, pipe shall be subjected
    to rejection if surface imperfections acceptable under
    18.2 are not scattered, but appear over a large area in excess
    of what is considered a workmanlike finish. Disposition of
    such pipe shall be a matter of agreement between the
    manufacturer and the purchaser.
    18.5 When imperfections or defects are removed by
    grinding, a smooth curved surface shall be maintained,
    and the wall thickness shall not be decreased below that
    permitted by this specification. The outside diameter at the
    point of grinding is permitted to be reduced by the amount
    so removed.
    18.5.1 Wall thickness measurements shall be made
    with a mechanical caliper or with a properly calibrated
    nondestructive testing device of appropriate accuracy. In
    case of dispute, the measurement determined by use of the
    mechanical caliper shall govern.
    18.6 Weld repair shall be permitted only subject to the
    approval of the purchaser and in accordance with Specification
    A 530/A 530M.
    18.7 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight.
58. End Finish
    19.1 The Pipe shall be furnished to the following practice,
    unless otherwise specified.
    19.1.1 NPS 11/2 [DN 40] and Smaller — All walls
    shall be either plain-end square cut, or plain-end beveled
    at the option of the manufacturer.
    19.1.2 NPS 2 [DN 50] and Larger — Walls through
    extra strong weights, shall be plain-end-beveled.
    19.1.3 NPS 2 [DN 50] and Larger — Walls over
    extra strong weights, shall be plain-end square cut.
    19.2 Plain-end beveled pipe shall be plain-end pipe
    having a bevel angle of 30°, + 5° or ± 0°, as measured
    from a line drawn perpendicular to the axis of the pipe
    with a root face of 1/16 ± 1/32 in. [1.6 ± 0.8 mm]. Other
    bevel angles may be specified by agreement between the
    purchaser and the manufacturer.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-106/SA-106M
    183
59. Sampling
    20.1 For product analysis (see 9.1) and tensile tests
    (see 21.1), a lot is the number of lengths of the same size
    and wall thickness from any one heat of steel; of 400
    lengths or fraction thereof, of each size up to, but not
    including, NPS 6 [DN 150]; and of 200 lengths or fraction
    thereof of each size NPS 6 [DN 150] and over.
    20.2 For bend tests (see 21.2), a lot is the number of
    lengths of the same size and wall thickness from any one
    heat of steel, of 400 lengths or fraction thereof, of each size.
    20.3 For flattening tests, a lot is the number of lengths
    of the same size and wall thickness from any one heat of
    steel, of 400 lengths or fraction thereof of each size over
    NPS 2 [DN 50], up to but not including NPS 6 [DN 150],
    and of 200 lengths or fraction thereof, of each size NPS 6
    [DN 150] and over.
60. Number of Tests
    21.1 The tensile requirements specified in Section 10
    shall be determined on one length of pipe from each lot
    (see 20.1).
    21.2 For pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and under, the bend test
    specified in 11.1 shall be made on one pipe from each lot
    (see 20.2). The bend test, where used as required by 11.2,
    shall be made on one end of 5% of the pipe from each lot.
    For small lots, at least one pipe shall be tested.
    21.3 If any test specimen shows flaws or defective
    machining, it shall be permissible to discard it and substitute
    another test specimen.
61. Retests
    22.1 If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
    specimen is less than that given in Table 1 and any part
    of the fracture is more than 3/4 in. [19 mm] from the center
    of the gage length of a 2 in. [50 mm] specimen as indicated
    by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing,
    a retest shall be allowed. If a specimen breaks in an inside
    or outside surface flaw, a retest shall be allowed.
62. Test Specimens and Test Methods
    23.1 On NPS 8 [DN 200] and larger, specimens cut
    either longitudinally or transversely shall be acceptable for
    the tension test. On sizes smaller than NPS 8 [DN 200],
    the longitudinal test only shall be used.
    23.2 When round tension test specimens are used for
    pipe wall thicknesses over 1.0 in. [25.4 mm], the
    mid—length of the longitudinal axis of such test specimens
    shall be from a location midway between the inside and
    outside surfaces of the pipe.
    23.3 Test specimens for the bend test specified in
    Section 11 and for the flattening tests shall consist of sections
    cut from a pipe. Specimens for flattening tests shall
    be smooth on the ends and free from burrs, except when
    made on crop ends.
    23.4 Test specimens for the bend test specified in 11.2
    shall be cut from one end of the pipe and, unless otherwise
    specified, shall be taken in a transverse direction. One test
    specimen shall be taken as close to the outer surface as
    possible and another from as close to the inner surface as
    possible. The specimens shall be either 1/2 by 1/2 in. [12.5
    by 12.5 mm] in section or 1 by 1/2 in. [25 by 12.5 mm] in
    section with the corners rounded to a radius not over 1/16 in.
    [1.6 mm] and need not exceed 6 in. [150 mm] in length.
    The side of the samples placed in tension during the bend
    shall be the side closest to the inner and outer surface of
    the pipe respectively.
    23.5 All routine check tests shall be made at room
    temperature.
63. Certification
    24.1 When test reports are requested, in addition to the
    requirements of Specification A 530/A 530M, the producer
    or supplier shall furnish to the purchaser a chemical
    analysis report for the elements specified in Table 1.
64. Product Marking
    25.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
    A 530/A 530M, the marking shall include heat number,
    the information as per Table 4, an additional symbol
    “S” if one or more of the supplementary requirements
    apply; the length, OD 1%, if ordered as special outside
    diameter tolerance pipe; ID 1%, if ordered as special inside
    diameter tolerance pipe; the schedule number, weight class,
    or nominal wall thickness; and, for sizes larger than NPS 4
    [DN 100], the weight. Length shall be marked in feet and
    tenths of a foot [metres to two decimal places], depending
    on the units to which the material was ordered, or other
    marking subject to agreement. For sizes NPS 11/2 , 11/4, 1,
    and 3/4 [DN 40, 32, 25, and 20], each length shall be marked
    as prescribed in Specification A 530/A 530M. These sizes
    shall be bundled in accordance with standard mill practice
    and the total bundle footage marked on the bundle tag;
    individual lengths of pipe need not be marked with footage.
    For sizes less than NPS 3/4 [DN 20], all the required markings
    shall be on the bundle tag or on each length of pipe
    and shall include the total footage; individual lengths of
    pipe need not be marked with footage. If not marked on
    the bundle tag, all required marking shall be on each length.
    25.2 When pipe sections are cut into shorter lengths by
    a subsequent processor for resale as material, the processor
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-106/SA-106M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    184
    shall transfer complete identifying information, including
    the name or brand of the manufacturer to each unmarked
    cut length, or to metal tags securely attached to bundles
    of unmarked small diameter pipe. The same material designation
    shall be included with the information transferred,
    and the processor’s name, trademark, or brand shall be
    added.
    25.3 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements in
    25.1 and 25.2, bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary
    identification method. The purchaser may specify in the
    order a specific bar coding system to be used.
65. Government Procurement
    26.1 When specified in the contract, material shall be
    preserved, packaged, and packed in accordance with the
    requirements of MIL-STD-163. The applicable levels shall
    be as specified in the contract. Marking for the shipment
    TABLE 1
    CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
    Composition, %
    Grade A Grade B Grade C
    Carbon, maxA 0.25 0.30 0.35
    Manganese 0.27–0.93 0.29–1.06 0.29–1.06
    Phosphorus, max 0.035 0.035 0.035
    Sulfur, max 0.035 0.035 0.035
    Silicon, min 0.10 0.10 0.10
    Chrome, maxB 0.40 0.40 0.40
    Copper, maxB 0.40 0.40 0.40
    Molybdenum,
    maxB 0.15 0.15 0.15
    Nickel, maxB 0.40 0.40 0.40
    Vanadium, maxB 0.08 0.08 0.08
    A For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum,
    an increase of 0.06% manganese above the specified maximum
    will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%.
    B These five elements combined shall not exceed 1%.
    of such material shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No.
    123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 or Fed. Std. No.
    183 if continuous marking is required for military agencies.
    26.2 Inspection — Unless otherwise specified in the
    contract, the producer is responsible for the performance
    of all inspection and test requirements specified herein.
    Except as otherwise specified in the contract, the producer
    shall use his own, or any other suitable facilities for the
    performance of the inspection and test requirements specified
    herein, unless disapproved by the purchaser. The purchaser
    shall have the right to perform any of the inspections
    and tests set forth in this specification where such inspections
    are deemed necessary to ensure that the material
    conforms to the prescribed requirements.
66. Keywords
    27.1 carbon steel pipe; seamless steel pipe; steel pipe
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-106/SA-106M
    185
    TABLE 2
    TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
    Grade A Grade B Grade C
    Tensile strength, min, psi (MPa) 48 000 [330] 60 000 [415] 70 000 [485]
    Yield strength, min, psi (MPa) 30 000 [205] 35 000 [240] 40 000 [275]
    Longitu- Longitu- Longitudinal
    Transverse dinal Transverse dinal Transverse
    Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min, %:
    Basic minimum elongation transverse strip tests, and for all small
    sizes tested in full section 35 25 30 16.5 30 16.5
    When standard round 2 in. [50 mm] gage length test specimen is
    used 28 20 22 12 20 12
    For longitudinal strip tests A A A
    For transverse strip tests, a deduction for each 1/32 in. [0.8 mm]
    decrease in wall thickness below 5/16 in. [7.9 mm] from the basic
    minimum elongation of the following percentage shall be made 1.25 1.00 1.00
    A The minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] shall be determined by the following equation:
    e p 625 000A0.2/U0.9
    for inch-pound units, and
    e p 1 940A0.2/U0.9
    for SI units,
    where:
    e p minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], %, rounded to the nearest 0.5%.
    A p cross-sectional area of the tension test specimen, in.2 [mm2], based upon specified outside diameter or nominal specimen width and
    specified wall thickness rounded to the nearest 0.01 in. [ mm ]. If the area thus calculated is greater than 0.75 in. [500 mm 2 2 2 2],
    then the value 0.75 in.2 [500mm2] shall be used, and
    U p specified tensile strength, psi [MPa].
    1
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-106/SA-106M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    186
    TABLE 3
    VARIATIONS IN OUTSIDE DIAMETER
    Permissible Variations in Outside Diameter
    Over Under
    NPS [DN Designator] in. mm in. mm
    1/8 to 11/2 [6 to 40], incl 1/64 (0.015) 0.4 1/64 (0.015) 0.4
    Over 11/2 to 4 [40 to 100], incl 1/32 (0.031) 0.8 1/32 (0.031) 0.8
    Over 4 to 8 [100 to 200], incl 1/16 (0.062) 1.6 1/32 (0.031) 0.8
    Over 8 to 18 [200 to 450], incl 3/32 (0.093) 2.4 1/32 (0.031) 0.8
    Over 18 to 26 [450 to 650], incl 1/8 (0.125) 3.2 1/32 (0.031) 0.8
    Over 26 to 34 [650 to 850], incl 5/32 (0.156) 4.0 1/32 (0.031) 0.8
    Over 34 to 48 [850 to 1200], incl 3/16 (0.187) 4.8 1/32 (0.031) 0.8
    TABLE 4
    MARKING
    Hydro NDE Marking
    Yes No Test Pressure
    No Yes NDE
    No No NH
    Yes Yes Test Pressure/NDE
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-106/SA-106M
    187
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified
    in the purchase order. The purchaser may specify a different frequency of test or analysis
    than is provided in the supplementary requirement. Subject to agreement between the
    purchaser and manufacturer, retest and retreatment provisions of these supplementary
    requirements may also be modified.
    S1. Product Analysis
    S1.1 Product analysis shall be made on each length of
    pipe. Individual lengths failing to conform to the chemical
    composition requirements shall be rejected.
    S2. Transverse Tension Test
    S2.1 A transverse tension test shall be made on a specimen
    from one end or both ends of each pipe NPS 8
    [DN 200] and over. If this supplementary requirement is
    specified, the number of tests per pipe shall also be specified.
    If a specimen from any length fails to meet the required
    tensile properties (tensile, yield, and elongation), that
    length shall be rejected subject to retreatment in accordance
    with Specification A 530/A 530M and satisfactory retest.
    S3. Flattening Test, Standard
    S3.1 For pipe over NPS 2 [DN 50], a section of pipe
    not less than 21/2 in. [63.5 mm] in length shall be flattened
    cold between parallel plates until the opposite walls of the
    pipe meet. Flattening tests shall be in accordance with
    Specification A 530/A 530M, except that in the formula
    used to calculate the “H” value, the following “e” constants
    shall be used:
    0.08 for Grade A
    0.07 for Grades B and C
    S3.2 When low D-to-t ratio tubulars are tested, because
    the strain imposed due to geometry is unreasonably high
    on the inside surface at the six and twelve o’clock locations,
    cracks at these locations shall not be cause for rejection if
    the D-to-t ratio is less than ten.
    S3.3 The flattening test shall be made on one length
    of pipe from each lot of 400 lengths or fraction thereof of
    each size over NPS 2 [DN 50], up to but not including
    NPS 6 [DN 150], and from each lot of 200 lengths or
    fraction thereof, of each size NPS 6 [DN 150] and over.
    S3.4 Should a crop end of a finished pipe fail in the
    flattening test, one retest is permitted to be made from the
    failed end. Pipe shall be normalized either before or after
    the first test, but pipe shall be subjected to only two normalizing
    treatments.
    S4. Flattening Test, Enhanced
    S4.1 The flattening test of SpecificationA 530/A 530M
    shall be made on a specimen from one end or both ends
    of each pipe. Crop ends may be used. If this supplementary
    requirement is specified, the number of tests per pipe shall
    also be specified. If a specimen from any length fails
    because of lack of ductility prior to satisfactory completion
    of the first step of the flattening test requirement, that pipe
    shall be rejected subject to retreatment in accordance with
    Specification A 530/A 530M and satisfactory retest. If a
    specimen from any length of pipe fails because of a lack of
    soundness, that length shall be rejected, unless subsequent
    retesting indicates that the remaining length is sound.
    S5. Metal Structure and Etching Test
    S5.1 The steel shall be homogeneous as shown by
    etching tests conducted in accordance with the appropriate
    sections of Method E 381. Etching tests shall be made on
    a cross section from one end or both ends of each pipe
    and shall show sound and reasonably uniform material free
    from injurious laminations, cracks, and similar objectionable
    defects. If this supplementary requirement is specified,
    the number of tests per pipe required shall also be specified.
    If a specimen from any length shows objectionable defects,
    the length shall be rejected, subject to removal of the
    defective end and subsequent retests indicating the remainder
    of the length to be sound and reasonably uniform
    material.
    S6. Carbon Equivalent
    S6.1 The steel shall conform to a carbon equivalent
    (CE) of 0.50 maximum as determined by the following
    formula:
    CE p %C +
    %Mn
    6
    +
    %Cr + %Mo + %V
    5
    +
    %Ni + %Cu
    15
    S6.2 A lower CE maximum may be agreed upon
    between the purchaser and the producer.
    S6.3 The CE shall be reported on the test report.
    S7. Heat Treated Test Specimens
    S7.1 At the request of the purchaser, one tensile test
    shall be performed by the manufacturer on a test specimen
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-106/SA-106M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    188
    from each heat of steel furnished which has been either
    stress relieved at 1250°F or normalized at 1650°F, as specified
    by the purchaser. Other stress relief or annealing temperatures,
    as appropriate to the analysis, may be specified
    by agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
    The results of this test shall meet the requirements of
    Table 1.
    S8. Internal Cleanliness–Government Orders
    S8.1 The internal surface of hot finished ferritic steel
    pipe and tube shall be manufactured to a free of scale
    condition equivalent to the visual standard listed in SSPCSP
67. Cleaning shall be performed in accordance with a
    written procedure that has been shown to be effective. This
    procedure shall be available for audit.
    S9. Requirements for Carbon Steel Pipe for
    Hydrofluoric Acid Alkylation Service
    S9.1 Pipe shall be provided in the normalized heattreated
    condition.
    S9.2 The carbon equivalent (CE), based upon heat analysis,
    shall not exceed 0.43% if the specified wall thickness
    is equal to or less than 1 in. [25.4 mm] or 0.45% if the
    specified wall thickness is greater than 1 in. [25.4 mm].
    S9.3 The carbon equivalent (CE) shall be determined
    using the following formula:
    CE p C + Mn/6 + (Cr + Mo + V)/5 + (Ni + Cu)/15
    S9.4 Based upon heat analysis in mass percent, the
    vanadium content shall not exceed 0.02%, the niobium
    content shall not exceed 0.02%, and the sum of the vanadium
    and niobium contents shall not exceed 0.03%.
    S9.5 Based upon heat analysis in mass percent, the
    sum of the nickel and copper contents shall not exceed
    0.15%.
    S9.6 Based upon heat analysis in mass percent, the
    carbon content shall not be less than 0.18%.
    S9.7 Welding consumables of repair welds shall be of
    low hydrogen type. E60XX electrodes shall not be used
    and the resultant weld chemical composition shall meet the
    chemical composition requirements specified for the pipe.
    S9.8 The designation “HF-N” shall be stamped or
    marked on each pipe to signify that the pipe complies with
    this supplementary requirement.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR PIPE, STEEL, ELECTRIC-FUSION
    (ARC)-WELDED (SIZES NPS 16 AND OVER)
    SA-134
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A134-96(R12) except that the following additional requirement applies.)
    All products furnished under this SA specification are intended for application under the rules for ASME Section III for
    Class III piping. Furnishing of such products is limited to manufacturers who hold the appropriate ASME Certification
    Mark. Weld procedures, welder, and welding machine operators shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and
    Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. The product shall meet all applicable requirements of Class III Piping including those
    requirements pertaining to heat treatment and butt welds. The plate used to fabricate the pipe shall conform to SA-283 or
    SA-285. Authorized inspection at the point of manufacture, and application of the appropriate Certification Mark is
    required.
    The applicable ASME Partial Data Report Form, signed by an Authorized Inspector, and a certified mill test report shall
    be furnished for each lot of pipe. The term “lot” applies to all pipe of the same mill heat of material and wall thickness
    which is heat treated in one furnace charge. For pipe which is not heat treated, or which is heat treated in a continuous
    furnace, a lot shall consist of each 200 ft (61 m) or fraction thereof of all pipe of the same mill heat of material and wall
    thickness, subjected to the same heat treatment. For pipe which is heat treated in a batch-type furnace which is automatically
    controlled within a 50°F range and equipped with recording pyrometers so that the heating records are available,
    a lot may be defined the same as for continuous furnaces. Each length of pipe shall be marked in such a manner as to
    identify each such piece with the lot and the certified mill test report.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-134
    189
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-134 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    190
    Standard Specification for
    Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and
    Over)
68. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers electric-fusion (arc)-welded
    straight seam or spiral seam steel pipe NPS 16 and over in
    diameter (inside or outside as specified by purchaser), with
    wall thicknesses up to 3/4 in. (19.0 mm), inclusive. Pipe having
    other dimensions may be furnished provided such pipe complies
    with all other requirements of this specification.
    NOTE 1—Acceptability for many services may be controlled by codes
    or standards such as those published by the American National Standards
    Institute and American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
    NOTE 2—For testing methods not specifically covered in this
    specification, reference can be made to Test Methods and Definitions
    A370, with particular reference to Annex A2 on Steel Tubular Products.
    NOTE 3—A comprehensive listing of standardized pipe dimensions is
    contained in ANSI B 36.10.
    1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
    as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
    conversions to SI units that are provided for information only
    and are not considered standard.
    NOTE 4—The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has
    been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal
    diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.”
    1.3 The following caveat pertains specifically to Section 5
    of this specification. This standard does not purport to address
    all of the safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is
    the responsibility of the user of this standard to establish
    appropriate safety and health practices and determine the
    applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
69. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A36/A36M Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
    A283/A283M Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile
    Strength Carbon Steel Plates
    A285/A285M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
    Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile Strength
    A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    A570/A570M Specification for Structural Steel, Sheet and
    Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled (Withdrawn 2000)
    2.2 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
    Section IX Welding Qualifications
    2.3 American National Standards Institute Standard:
    B 16.25 Buttwelding Ends
    B 36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
70. Ordering Information
    3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
    include the following, as required, to describe the desired
    material adequately:
    3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
    3.1.2 Name of material (electric-fusion (arc)-welded pipe),
    3.1.3 Grade (Section 4),
    3.1.4 Size (inside or outside diameter and nominal wall
    thickness),
    3.1.5 Length (specified or random),
    3.1.6 Specific straightness requirements (see 12.3),
    3.1.7 End finish (Section 15),
    3.1.8 Hydrostatic test pressure (Section 11),
    3.1.9 ASTM designation, and
    3.1.10 End use of material.
71. Material
    4.1 The steel from which the pipe is made shall conform to
    Specifications A283/A283M, A285/A285M, A570/A570M, or
    A36/A36M or to other ASTM specifications for equally
    suitable weldable material, as specified. For purposes of
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-134
    191
    marking and certification, when required, the pipe grade of
    material shall be established by the A xxx plate specification
    designation and plate grade, when applicable.
72. Manufacture
    5.1 The longitudinal edges of the steel shall be shaped to
    give the most satisfactory results by the particular welding
    process employed. The steel shall then be properly formed and
    may be tacked preparatory to welding. The weld shall be made
    by automatic means (except tack welds) and shall be of
    reasonably uniform width and height for the entire length of the
    pipe. By agreement between the purchaser and the
    manufacturer, manual welding by qualified procedure and
    welders may be used as an equal alternate under this specification.
    5.2 All longitudinal seams, spiral seams, and shop girth
    seams shall be butt-welded.
73. Number of Production Weld Tests
    6.1 One weld test specimen specified in Section 8 shall be
    made from each lot of 3000 ft (900 m) of pipe or fraction
    thereof of each size and wall thickness.
    6.2 If any test specimen shows defective machining or
    develops flaws not associated with the welding, it may be
    discarded and another specimen substituted.
    6.3 Each length of pipe shall be subjected to the hydrostatic
    test specified in Section 11, unless otherwise specified in 11.3.
74. Retests
    7.1 If any specimen tested in accordance with Section 10
    fails to meet the requirements, retests of two additional
    specimens from the same lot of pipe shall be made, each of
    which shall meet the requirements specified. If any of the
    retests fail to conform to the requirements, test specimens may
    be taken from each untested pipe length at the manufacturer’s
    option. Each specimen shall meet the requirements specified,
    or that pipe shall be rejected.
75. Test Specimens of Production Welds
    8.1 The weld-test specimens for the reduced-section tension
    test shall be taken perpendicularly across the weld and from the
    end of the pipe or, alternatively, from flat test pieces of material
    conforming to the requirements in the specifications used in the
    manufacture of the pipe. The alternative weld-test specimens
    shall be welded with the same procedure and by the same
    operator and equipment, and in sequence with the welding of
    the longitudinal joints in the pipe. The test pieces shall have the
    weld approximately in the middle of the specimen. The
    specimens shall be straightened cold, and shall be tested at
    room temperature.
    8.2 Reduced-section tension-test specimens shall be prepared
    in accordance with Fig. 21 of Test Methods and
    Definitions A370.
76. Qualification of Welding Procedure
    9.1 The welding procedure shall be qualified in accordance
    with the American Welding Society Standard Qualification
    Procedure or ASME Section IX of the Boiler and Pressure
    Vessel Code as agreed to between the manufacturer and the
    purchaser using the tests and test values specified in 9.2 and
    9.3. Thicknesses less than 3/8 in. (10 mm) shall be qualified for
    each wall thickness of pipe manufactured. Thicknesses 3/8 to 3/4
    in. (10 mm to 19.0 mm), inclusive, shall be qualified in 3/8-in.
    (10-mm) thickness.
    9.2 Two reduced-section tension specimens (transverse
    weld) made in accordance with Fig. 21 of Test Methods and
    Definitions A370, with the weld reinforcement removed, shall
    show a tensile strength not less than 100 % of the minimum
    specified tensile strength of the base material used.
    9.3 Two face-bend test specimens shall be prepared in
    accordance with Fig. 2(a) of Test Methods and Definitions
    A370 and shall withstand being bent 180° in a jig substantially
    in accordance with Fig. 30 of Test Methods and Definitions
    A370. The bend test shall be acceptable if no cracks or other
    defects exceeding 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) in any direction be present in
    the weld metal or between the weld and the pipe metal after
    bending. Cracks that originate along the edges of the specimens
    during testing and that are less than 1/4 in. (6.3 mm) in
    any direction, shall not be considered.
77. Tensile Properties of Production Welds
    10.1 Reduced-section tension test specimens required in
    Section 8, taken perpendicularly across the weld with the weld
    reinforcement removed, shall show a tensile strength not less
    than 95 % of the specified minimum strength of the steel. At
    the manufacturer’s option, the test may be made without
    removing the weld reinforcement, in which case the tensile
    strength shall be not less than the specified minimum tensile
    strength for the grade of steel used.
78. Hydrostatic Test (Note 5)
    11.1 Each length of pipe shall be tested by the manufacturer
    to a hydrostatic pressure that will produce in the pipe wall a
    stress of 60 % of the specified minimum yield point of the steel
    used at room temperature. The pressure shall be determined by
    the following equation:
    P 5 2St/D
    where:
    P = minimum hydrostatic test pressure, psi (Note 6) (not to
    exceed 2800 psi (19 MPa)),
    S = 0.60 times the minimum specified yield point of the
    steel used, psi (MPa),
    t = specified wall thickness, in. (mm), and
    D = specified outside diameter, in. (mm).
    NOTE 5—A hydrostatic sizing operation is not to be considered a
    hydrostatic test or a substitute for it.
    NOTE 6—When the diameter and wall thickness of pipe are such that the
    capacity limits of testing equipment are exceeded by these requirements,
    the test pressures may be reduced by agreement between the purchaser and
    the manufacturer.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-134 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    192
    11.2 Test pressure shall be held for not less than 5 s, or for
    a longer time as agreed upon between the purchaser and the
    manufacturer.
    NOTE 7—When agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer
    and so stated on the order, pipe may be tested to one and one half
    times the specified working pressure, except that the maximum test
    pressure shall not exceed 2800 psi (19 MPa) nor shall the maximum fiber
    stress exceed 85 % of specified minimum yield point of steel or to a fiber
    stress that does not exceed 85 % of the specified minimum yield point of
    the steel or 2800-psi (19-MPa) test pressure.
    11.3 When specified in the order, pipe may be furnished
    without hydrostatic testing and each length so furnished shall
    include the mandatory marking of the letters “NH.”
    Additionally, the certification, when required, shall state “Not
    Hydrostatically Tested” and the specification number and
    material grade, as shown on the certification, shall be followed
    by the letters “NH.”
79. Permissible Variations in Weights and Dimensions
    12.1 Thickness and Weight—The wall thickness and weight
    for welded pipe under this specification shall be governed by
    the requirements of the specifications to which the steel was
    ordered.
    12.2 Circumference—The outside circumference of the pipe
    shall not vary more than 60.5 % from the nominal outside
    circumference based upon the diameter specified, except that
    the circumference at ends shall be sized, if necessary, to meet
    the requirements of Section 14.
    12.3 Straightness—Finished pipe shall be commercially
    straight. When specific straightness requirements are desired,
    the order should so state, and the tolerances shall be a matter of
    agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
    12.4 Ovality—Out-of-roundness—The difference between
    major and minor outside diameter shall not exceed 1 %. Closer
    tolerances may be established by agreement between the
    manufacturer and the purchaser. Where the D/T (outside
    diameter/wall thickness) is over 120, internal bracing should be
    utilized to achieve sizing of ends and ovality shall be by
    agreement between the manufacturer and purchaser.
80. Lengths
    13.1 Pipe lengths shall be supplied in accordance with the
    following regular practice:
    13.1.1 The lengths shall be as specified on the order with a
    tolerance of 61/2 in. (13 mm), except that the shorter lengths
    from which test coupons have been cut may also be shipped.
    13.1.2 When random lengths are specified, pipe shall be
    furnished in lengths having a minimum average of 29 ft (9 m)
    with a minimum length of 20 ft (6 m), but not more than 5 %
    may be under 25 ft (8 m).
    13.2 Pipe lengths containing circumferentially welded joints
    (Note 8) shall be permitted by agreement between the manufacturer
    and the purchaser. Tests of these welded joints shall be
    made in accordance with the procedure tests specified in
    Section 9 and the production weld tests specified in Section 10.
    The number of production weld tests shall be one per each lot
    of 100 joints or fraction thereof, but not less than one for each
    welder or welding operator.
    NOTE 8—Joints are defined for the purpose of this specification as a
    circumferential welded seam lying in one plane, used to join lengths of
    straight pipe.
81. Ends
    14.1 Pipe shall be furnished with a plain right-angle cut or
    with bevel ends as specified. All burrs at the ends of pipe shall
    be removed.
    14.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, pipe with beveled ends
    shall meet the requirements of ANSI B 16.25.
    14.2 Unless otherwise specified, the outside circumference
    of pipe ends for a distance of not less than 4 in. (100 mm) shall
    not vary more than 660 % of the nominal wall thickness of the
    pipe from the nominal outside circumference based on the
    diameter specified, except that the tolerance shall not be less
    than 63/16 in. (5 mm).
    14.3 By agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser
    the ends of the pipe may be sized within agreed-upon
    tolerances if necessary to meet the requirements of special
    installations.
82. Finish
    15.1 Repair by Welding—The welding of injurious defects
    in the pipe wall, provided their depth does not exceed one third
    the specified wall thickness, will be permitted. Defects in the
    welds, such as sweats or leaks, shall be repaired or the piece
    rejected at the option of the manufacturer. Repairs of this
    nature shall be made by completely removing the defect,
    cleaning the cavity, and then welding.
    15.2 All repaired pipe shall be tested hydrostatically in
    accordance with Section 11, unless otherwise specified in 11.3.
83. Inspection
    16.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
    entry at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
    is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s works
    that concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The
    manufacturer shall afford the inspector all reasonable facilities
    to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
    with this specification. All tests and inspection shall be made at
    the place of manufacture prior to shipment and unless otherwise
    specified, shall be so conducted as not to interfere
    unnecessarily with the operation of the works. If agreed upon,
    the manufacturer shall notify the purchaser in time so that he
    may have his inspector present to witness any part of the
    manufacture or tests that may be desired. The certification shall
    include reference to this specification and the pipe grade
    (ASTM plate specification designation and plate grade, when
    applicable).
    16.2 Certification—Upon request of the purchaser in the
    contract or order, a manufacturer’s certification that the material
    was manufactured and tested in accordance with this
    specification together with a report of the chemical and tensile
    tests shall be furnished. When hydrostatic test is omitted, the
    certificate shall include the letters “NH.”
84. Rejection
    17.1 Each length of pipe received from the manufacturer
    may be inspected by the purchaser and, if it does not meet the
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-134
    193
    requirements of this specification based on the inspection and
    test method as outlined in the specification, the length may be
    rejected, and the manufacturer shall be notified. Disposition of
    rejected pipe shall be a matter of agreement between the
    manufacturer and the purchaser.
    17.2 Pipe found in fabrication or in installation to be
    unsuitable for the intended use, under the scope and requirements
    of this specification, may be set aside and the manufacturer
    notified. Such pipe shall be subject to mutual investigation
    as to the nature and severity of the deficiency and the
    forming or installation, or both, conditions involved. Disposition
    shall be a matter of agreement between the purchaser and
    the manufacturer.
85. Certification
    18.1 Upon request of the purchaser in the contract or order,
    a manufacturer’s certification that the material was manufactured
    and tested in accordance with this specification, including
    year date, together with a report of the chemical and tensile
    tests shall be furnished. The pipe grade shall be identified by
    the plate specification designation (year date not required) and
    the plate grade (where applicable).
86. Product Marking
    19.1 Each section of pipe shall be marked with the manufacturer’s
    distinguishing marking, this specification number,
    and the pipe grade. The marking need not include the year date
    of the pipe or plate specification.
    19.2 Bar Coding—In addition to the requirements in 19.1,
    bar coding is acceptable as a supplemental identification
    method. The purchaser may specify in the order a specific bar
    coding system to be used.
87. Protective Coating
    20.1 If agreed upon between the purchaser and the
    manufacturer, the pipe shall be given a protective coating of the
    kind and in the manner specified by the purchaser.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE-WELDED
    STEEL PIPE
    SA-135
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A135-01.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-135
    195
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-135 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    196
    SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-RESISTANCEWELDED
    STEEL PIPE
    SA-135
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A 135-01.)
88. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers two grades of electricresistance-
    welded steel pipe in NPS 2 to NPS 30 inclusive,
    with nominal (average) wall thickness up to 0.500 in.
    (12.70 mm), inclusive, and in nominal sizes NPS 3/4 to
    NPS 5 inclusive with nominal (average) wall thickness
    0.083 in. (2.11 mm) to 0.134 in. (3.40 mm), depending
    on size. Pipe having other dimensions (Note 1) may be
    furnished provided such pipe complies with all other
    requirements of this specification. The pipe is intended for
    conveying gas, vapor, water or other liquid; only Grade A
    is adapted for flanging and bending (Note 2). The suitability
    of pipe for various purposes is somewhat dependent upon
    its dimensions, properties, and conditions of service, so
    that the purpose for which the pipe is intended should
    be stated in the order. The pipe may be furnished either
    nonexpanded or cold expanded at the option of the manufacturer.
    When pipe is cold expanded, the amount of expansion
    shall not exceed 1.5% of the outside diameter pipe size.
    NOTE 1 — A comprehensive listing of standardized pipe dimensions is
    contained in ASME B36.10.
    NOTE 2 — This provision is not intended to prohibit the cold bending
    of Grade B pipe.
    1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be
    regarded as the standard. The SI values, given in parentheses,
    are for information only.
89. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading
    Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment
    A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
    Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
    A 865 Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black
    and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for
    Use in Steel Pipe Joints
    A 941 Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel,
    Related Alloys, and Ferroalloys
    E 6 Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical
    Testing
    E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
    Determine Conformance with Specifications
    E 59 Practice for Sampling Steel and Iron for Determination
    of Chemical Composition
    E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
    and Tubing
    E 273 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Longitudinal
    Welded Pipe and Tubing
    E 309 Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel
    Tubular Products Using Magnetic Saturation
    2.2 ANSI Standard:
    B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose
    2.3 Federal Standards:
    Fed. STD No. 123 Marking for Shipments (Civil Agencies)
    Fed. STD No. 183 Continuous Identification Marking of
    Iron and Steel Products
    2.4 Military Standards:
    MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
    MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products, Preparation for Shipment
    and Storage
    2.5 ASME Standard:
    B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
90. Terminology
    3.1 For definitions of terms relating to steel manufacturing
    and properties, refer to Terminology A 941.
    3.2 For definitions of terms relating to mechanical testing,
    refer to Terminology E 6.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-135
    197
    3.3 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
    3.3.1 burr, n — a rough or sharp edge left on pipe
    ends by cutting or sawing.
    3.3.2 lot, n—all pipe of the same size, wall thickness
    and rolled length that is produced from the same heat of
    steel and subject to the same heat treatment.
    3.3.3 black thread, n — a thread crease exhibiting
    the original pipe surface after machining.
91. Ordering Information
    4.1 Orders for material under this specification should
    include the following, as required, to describe the desired
    material adequately:
    4.1.1 Quantity (feet or number of lengths),
    4.1.2 Name of material (electric-resistance-welded
    pipe),
    4.1.3 Specification designation and year of issue,
    4.1.4 Grade (see Table 1),
    4.1.5 Size (nominal size, or outside diameter; and
    nominal wall thickness),
    4.1.6 Length (specific or random, see 12.4),
    4.1.7 End finish (plain or threaded, see 13.2),
    4.1.7.1 Threaded and coupled, if specified,
    4.1.7.2 Threads only, if specified,
    4.1.7.3 Plain end, if specified,
    4.1.8 Alternative electric test (see Section 11),
    4.1.9 Tension test specimen (see Section 15),
    4.1.10 Heat analysis, if required (see 6.1),
    4.1.11 Certificate of compliance, if required (see
    Section 19), and
    4.1.12 Special requirements.
92. Manufacture
    5.1 The steel shall be made by either or both of the
    following processes: basic-oxygen or electric-furnace.
    5.2 Steel may be cast in ingots or may be strand cast.
    When steels of different grades are sequentially strand cast,
    identification of the resultant transition material is required.
    The producer shall remove the transition material by any
    established procedure that positively separates the grades.
    5.3 The pipe shall be manufactured from flat rolled steel
    in individual lengths or in continuous length by electricresistance
    or electric-induction welding without the addition
    of extraneous material.
    5.4 The weld seam of electric-resistance welded pipe
    to Grade B pipe shall be heat treated after welding to a
    minimum temperature of 1000 °F (540 °C) or processed
    in such a manner that no untempered martensite remains.
93. Chemical Composition
    6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements prescribed
    in Table 2, based on the heat analysis. When specified
    in the order, the heat analyses shall be reported to the
    purchaser or a representative of the purchaser.
94. Product Analysis
    7.1 An analysis may be made by the purchaser on
    samples of pipe selected at random and shall conform to the
    requirements specified in Table 2. Methods and Practices
    relating to chemical analysis shall be in accordance with
    Test Method, Practices, and Terminology A 751.
95. Mechanical Properties Requirements
    8.1 Tensile Properties:
    8.1.1 The material shall conform to the requirements
    as to tensile properties prescribed in Table 1.
    8.1.2 The yield strength shall be determined by the
    offset method utilizing 0.2% of the gage length or by the
    total extension under load method using 0.5% of the gage
    length.
    8.1.3 Longitudinal test specimens shall be full-size
    longitudinal test specimens (see Figure A2.1 of Test Methods
    and Definitions A 370) or longitudinal strip test specimens
    (see Specimen No. 4 in Fig. A2.3 of Test Methods
    and Definitions A 370).
    8.2 The test specimen taken across the weld shall show
    a tensile strength not less than the minimum tensile strength
    specified for the grade of pipe ordered. This test will not
    be required for pipe under NPS 8.
96. Flattening Test
    9.1 A specimen at least 4 in. (102 mm) in length shall
    be flattened cold between parallel plates in three steps with
    the weld located either 0° or 90° from the line of direction
    of force as required in 9.2. During the first step, which is
    a test for ductility of the weld, no cracks or breaks on the
    inside or outside surfaces shall occur until the distance
    between the plates is less than two thirds of the original
    outside diameter of the pipe. As a second step, the flattening
    shall be continued. During the second step, which is a test
    for ductility exclusive of the weld, no cracks or breaks on
    the inside or outside surfaces shall occur until the distance
    between the plates is less than one third of the original
    outside diameter of the pipe but is not less than five times
    the wall thickness of the pipe. During the third step, which
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-135 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    198
    is a test for soundness, the flattening shall be continued
    until the specimen breaks or the opposite walls of the pipe
    meet. Evidence of laminated or unsound material or of
    incomplete weld that is revealed during the entire flattening
    test shall be cause for rejection.
    9.2 For pipe produced in single lengths, the flattening
    test specified in 9.1 shall be made on both crop ends cut
    from each length of pipe. The tests from each end shall
    be made alternately with the weld at 0° and at 90° from
    the line of direction of force. For pipe produced in multiple
    lengths, the flattening test shall be made on crop ends
    representing the front and back of each coil with the weld
    at 90° from the line of direction of force, and on two
    intermediate rings representing each coil with the weld 0°
    from the line of direction of force.
    9.3 Surface imperfections in the test specimen before
    flattening, but revealed during the first step of the flattening
    test, shall be judged in accordance with the finish requirements
    in Section 13.
    9.4 Superficial cracks as a result of surface imperfections
    shall not be cause for rejection.
97. Hydrostatic Test
    10.1 Except as provided for in 10.3, each length of
    pipe shall be hydrostatically tested at the mill, without
    leakage through the wall, to a pressure calculated from the
    following eq. 1:
    P p 2St/D (1)
    where:
    P p minimum hydrostatic test pressure, psi (MPa).
    The test pressure need not exceed 2500 psi (17.24
    MPa),
    S p allowable fiber stress 18 000 psi (124 MPa) for
    Grade A and 21 000 psi (144 MPa) for Grade B.
    This does not prohibit testing at higher pressure
    at the manufacturer’s option,
    t p specified wall thickness, in., and
    D p specified outside diameter, in.
    Plain end pipe may be tested at the discretion of the
    manufacturer in single lengths or in multiple lengths.
    10.2 The hydrostatic pressure shall be maintained for
    not less than 5 s.
    10.3 When specified in the order, pipe may be furnished
    without hydrostatic testing, and each length so furnished
    shall include with the mandatory marking the letters “NH.”
    NOTE 3—This provision is not intended to apply to light wall (Schedule
    10) pipe listed in Table X1.1.
    10.4 When certification is required by the purchaser
    and the hydrostatic test has been omitted, the certification
    shall clearly state “Not Hydrostatically Tested.” The specification
    number and material grade, as shown on the certification,
    shall be followed by the letters “NH.”
98. Nondestructive Examination Requirements
    11.1 As an alternate to the hydrostatic test for Schedule
    10 pipe in sizes NPS 3/4 to NPS 5 inclusive, and when
    accepted by the purchaser, each pipe shall be tested with
    a nondestructive electric test in accordance with Practice
    E 213, Practice E 273, or Practice E 309. It is the intent
    of this test to reject pipe containing defects.
    11.2 Recognized methods for meeting this test are electromagnetic
    (eddy current) or ultrasonic.
    11.3 The following information is for the benefit of
    the user of this specification:
    11.3.1 The ultrasonic examination referred to in this
    specification is intended to detect longitudinal imperfections
    having a reflective area similar to or larger than the
    reference notch. The examination may not detect circumferentially
    oriented imperfections of short, deep imperfections.
    11.3.2 The eddy-current examination referenced in
    this specification has the capability of detecting significant
    imperfections, especially of the short, abrupt type.
    11.3.3 The hydrostatic test referred to in Section 10
    is a test method provided for in many product specifications.
    This test has the capability of finding imperfections
    of a size permitting the test fluid to leak through the tube
    wall and may be either visually seen or detected by a loss
    of pressure. This test may not detect very tight, throughthe-
    wall imperfections or imperfections that extend an
    appreciable distance into the wall without complete penetration.
    11.3.4 A purchaser interested in ascertaining the
    nature (type, size, location, and orientation) of imperfections
    that can be detected in the specific application of these
    examinations should discuss this with the manufacturer of
    the tubular product.
    11.4 In order to accommodate the various types of
    nondestructive electric testing equipment and techniques
    in use, the calibration pipe shall contain, at the option of
    the producer, any one or more of the following discontinuities
    to establish a minimum sensitivity level for rejection:
    11.4.1 Drilled Hole — A hole not larger than 0.031-
    in. (0.8-mm) diameter shall be drilled radially and completely
    through pipe wall, preferably in the weld area, care
    being taken to avoid distortion of the pipe while drilling.
    11.4.2 Transverse Tangential Notch — A notch shall
    be filed or milled tangential to the surface and transverse
    to the longitudinal axis of the pipe preferably in the weld
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-135
    199
    area. Said notch shall have a depth not exceeding 12.5%
    of the nominal wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004 in.
    (0.10 mm), whichever is greater.
    11.4.3 Longitudinal Notch — A notch 0.031 in.
    (0.8 mm) or less in width shall be machined in a radial
    plane parallel to the pipe axis on the outside surface of
    the pipe preferably in the weld area, to have a depth not
    exceeding 12.5% of the nominal wall thickness of the pipe
    or 0.004 in. (0.10 mm), whichever is greater.
    11.5 Pipe producing a signal equal to or greater than
    the calibration imperfection shall be rejected.
99. Dimensions, Weight, and Permissible Variations
    12.1 Weight — The weight of any length of pipe other
    than Schedule 10 shall not vary more than 3.5% under or
    10% over that specified, but the carload weight shall be
    not more than 1.75% under the nominal weight. The weight
    of pipe furnished to Schedule 10 shall not vary more than
    ±10% from that calculated using the weight (mass) per
    unit length prescribed in Appendix Table X1.1. The weight
    of the pipe shall be calculated from the relevant equation
    in ASME B36.10 and with a constant of 10.69 rather than
    10.68.
    NOTE 4 — A system of standard pipe sizes has been approved by the
    American National Standards Institute as American National Standard
    for Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe (ASME B36.10).
    12.2 Diameter — The outside diameter shall not vary
    more than ±1% from the nominal size specified.
    12.3 Minimum Wall Thickness — The minimum wall
    thickness at any point shall be not more than 12.5% under
    the specified wall thickness.
    NOTE 5—The minimum wall thickness on inspection is shown in Table
    X1.2 of the Appendix.
    12.4 Lengths:
    12.4.1 Except as allowed in 12.4.2, pipe shall be
    furnished in lengths averaging 38 ft (11.6 m) or over, with
    a minimum length of 20 ft (6.1 m), but no more than 5%
    may be under 32 ft (9.8 m). Jointers made by welding are
    permissible. When threaded pipe is ordered, jointers shall
    be made by threaded connections and shall not exceed 5%
    of the order.
    12.4.2 Unless otherwise specified, Schedule 10 pipe
    shall be between 16 and 22 ft (4.9 and 6.7 m) for a minimum
    of 90% of the footage furnished, with any balance being
    shorter lengths at least 8 ft (2.4 m) long.
100. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
     13.1 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight and
     free of defects. Surface imperfections in excess of 12.5%
     of the nominal wall thickness shall be considered defects.
     13.2 End Finish:
     13.2.1 Schedule 10 Pipe — Pipe furnished to Schedule
     10 shall be plain end only. All inside and outside cutting
     burrs shall be removed. This generally involves breaking
     the corners.
     13.2.2 Ends, Plain End Pipe — Unless otherwise
     specified, plain end pipe for use with the Dresser or Dayton
     type coupling shall be reamed both outside and inside
     sufficiently to remove all burrs. Plain end pipe for welding
     shall be beveled on the outside to an angle of 30° with a
     tolerance of + 5° and – 0° and with a width of flat at the
     end of the pipe of 1/16 +/- 1/32 in. (1.6 +/- 0.8 mm). When
     material is ordered beveled to any other than a 30° angle,
     it should be understood that the angle is to be measured
     from a line drawn perpendicular to the axis of the pipe.
     This means that a greater amount of material is removed
     with a 60° angle than with a 30° angle. Pipe shall be
     sufficiently free from indentations, projections, or roll
     marks for a distance of 8 in. (203 mm) from the end of
     the pipe to make a tight joint with the rubber gasket type
     of coupling. All plain end pipe intended for Dresser or
     Dayton type joints or for welding, sizes NPS 10 and smaller
     in outside diameter specified, shall be not more than 1/32 in.
     (0.8 mm) smaller than the outside diameter specified for
     a distance of 8 in. (203 mm) from the ends of the pipe
     and shall permit the passing for a distance of 8 in. (203 mm)
     of a ring gage that has a bore 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) larger than
     the outside diameter specified of the pipe. Sizes larger than
     NPS 10 shall be not more than 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) smaller
     than the nominal outside diameter for a distance of 8 in.
     (203 mm) from the end of the pipe and shall permit the
     passing for a distance of 8 in. (203 mm) of a ring gage
     which has a bore 3/32 in. (2.4 mm) larger than the nominal
     outside diameter of the pipe.
     13.2.3 Ends, Threaded Pipe — Each end of threaded
     pipe shall be reamed to remove all burrs. All threads shall
     be in accordance with the American National Standard
     Pipe Threads (Note 6) and cut so as to make a tight joint
     when the pipe is tested at the mill to the specified internal
     hydrostatic pressure. The variation from the standard, when
     tested with the standard working gage, shall not exceed
     one and one-half turns either way. Pipe shall not be rounded
     by hammering in order to get a full thread. There shall be
     not more than two black threads for 3/4-in. (19.0-mm) taper
     among the perfect threads. Black threads should not be
     confused with imperfect threads, such as those torn, shaven,
     or broken.
     NOTE 6 — A complete description of the American National Standard
     Pipe Threads applicable to pipe, valves, and fittings is contained in the
     American National Standard for Pipe Threads (ANSI B1.20.1); also
     “Screw-Thread Standards for Federal Services, 1942,” National Bureau
     of Standards Handbook H 28, January, 1942, the pertinent data in both
     sources being identical.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-135 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     200
     13.3 Couplings — Each length of threaded pipe shall
     be provided with one coupling manufactured in accordance
     with Specification A 865 except that the coupling may be
     wrought iron (Note 7). Threads shall be cut so as to make
     a tight joint. Taper-tapped couplings shall be furnished on
     all weights of threaded pipe NPS 21/2 and larger.
     NOTE 7 — For sizes NPS 2 and smaller, it is commercial practice to
     furnish straight-tapped couplings for standard-weight (Schedule 40) pipe
     and taper-tapped couplings for extra-strong (Schedule 80) and doubleextra-
     strong pipe. If taper-tapped couplings are required for sizes NPS
     2 and smaller on standard weight (Schedule 40) pipe, line pipe in accordance
     with Specification 5L of the American Petroleum Institute should
     be ordered, thread lengths to be in accordance with the American National
     Standard for Pipe Threads (ANSI B1.20.1). Taper-tapped couplings for
     sizes NPS 2 and smaller in standard weight may be used on mill-threaded
     standard weight type of the same size.
     13.4 Protective Coating:
     13.4.1 After the pipe has been subjected to the hydrostatic
     test, and if required by the purchaser, it shall be
     thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, oil, grease, loose scale, and
     rust; then dried, and given a protective coating of the
     kind and in the manner specified by the purchaser. Pipe
     furnished to Schedule 10 shall be normally shipped with
     a light coating of processing oil. If so specified, the pipe
     can be given a mill coating or a special coating.
101. Weld Repair
     14.1 Welding Repair:
     14.2 Defects in the pipe wall, provided their depth does
     not exceed one third the specified wall thickness, shall be
     repaired by electric welding. Defects in the welds such as
     sweats or leaks, unless otherwise specified, shall be
     repaired or the piece rejected at the option of the manufacturer.
     Repairs of this nature shall be made by completely
     removing the defect, cleaning the cavity, and then electric
     welding.
     14.3 All repaired pipe shall be retested hydrostatically
     in accordance with Section 10.
102. Sampling
     15.1 Chemical Analysis:
     15.1.1 Samples for chemical analysis, except for
     spectrochemical analysis, shall be taken in accordance with
     Practice E 59. The number of samples shall be determined
     as follows:
     NPS Numbers of Samples Selected
     Under 6 2 from each lot of 400 pipes or fraction thereof
     6 to 20, incl 2 from each lot of 200 pipes or fraction thereof
     Over 20 to 30, incl 2 from each lot of 100 pipes or fraction thereof
     15.2 Tension Test:
     15.2.1 One longitudinal tension test shall be made
     on length (Note 8) from each lot of 400 lengths or fraction
     thereof of each size under NPS 8 and one transverse body
     and one transverse weld tension test on one length from
     each lot of 200 lengths or fraction thereof of each size
     NPS 8 to NPS 20 and on one length from each lot of 100
     lengths or fraction thereof of each size over NPS 20 to
     NPS 30. When taken from the skelp, the number of tests
     shall be determined in the same manner as when taken
     from the finished pipe.
     NOTE 8 — Length is defined as the length as ordered, except that in
     the case of orders for cut lengths shorter than double random, which is
     defined as the length as rolled, prior to cutting to the required short
     lengths.
     15.3 Flattening Test:
     15.3.1 The flattening test specified in 9.1 shall be
     made on both crop ends cut from each length of pipe.
     When pipe is produced in multiple lengths, flattening tests
     are required on the crop ends from the front and back ends
     of each coil and on two intermediate rings representing
     each coil.
     15.4 Hydrostatic Test:
     15.4.1 Each length of pipe shall be subjected to the
     hydrostatic test specified in Section 10.
103. Test, Retest, and Resampling
     16.1 Chemical Analysis:
     16.1.1 If the results of the analysis of either length
     of pipe do not conform to the requirements specified in
     Section 7, analyses of two additional lengths from the same
     lot shall be made, each of which shall conform to the
     requirements specified.
     16.2 Tension Test:
     16.2.1 The test specimens and the tests required by
     this specification shall conform to those described in Test
     Methods and Definitions A 370, except that all specimens
     shall be tested at room temperature.
     16.2.2 The longitudinal tension test specimen shall
     be taken from the end of the pipe, or by agreement between
     the manufacturer and the purchaser may be taken from the
     skelp, at a point approximately 90° from the weld, and
     shall not be flattened between gage marks. The sides of
     each specimen shall be parallel between gage marks. At
     the manufacturer option, the tension test may be made on
     full section of pipe.
     16.2.3 Transverse weld test specimens shall be taken
     with the weld at the center of the specimen. Transverse
     body test specimens shall be taken opposite to the weld.
     All transverse test specimens shall be approximately 11/2 in.
     (38.1 mm) wide in the gage length and shall represent the
     full wall thickness of the pipe from which the specimen
     was cut.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-135
     201
     16.2.4 If any test specimen shows defective machining
     or develops flaws not associated with the quality of
     the steel or the welding, it may be discarded and another
     specimen substituted.
     16.2.5 If the results of the tension tests of any lot
     do not conform to the requirements specified in 9.1, retests
     of two additional lengths from the same lot shall be made,
     each of which shall conform to the requirements specified.
     16.2.6 If the percentage of elongation of any tension
     test specimen is less than that specified in 8.1, and any
     part of the fracture is more than 3/4 in. (19.0 mm) from the
     center of the gage length as indicated by scribe scratches
     marked on the specimen before testing, the specimen may
     be discarded and another substituted.
     16.3 Flattening Test:
     16.3.1 Specimens for flattening tests shall be smooth
     at the ends and free from burrs.
     16.3.2 If any section of the pipe fails to comply with
     the requirements of 9.1, for pipe produced in single lengths,
     other sections may be cut from the same end of the same
     length until satisfactory tests are obtained, except that the
     finished pipe shall not be shorter than 80% of its length
     after the initial cropping; otherwise, the length shall be
     rejected. For pipe produced in multiple lengths, retests may
     be cut from each end of each individual length in the
     multiple; such tests shall be made with the weld alternately
     0° and 90° from the line of direction of force.
     16.4 All specimens shall be tested at room temperature.
104. Inspection
     17.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall
     have free entry, at all times while work on the contract
     of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the
     manufacturer’s works that concern the manufacture of the
     material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector,
     without charge, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him
     that the material is being furnished in accordance with
     this specification. All tests (except check analysis) and
     inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior
     to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so
     conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the manufacturer’s
     operation.
105. Rejection
     18.1 Each length of pipe received from the manufacturer
     may be inspected by the purchaser and, if it does not
     meet the requirements of this specification based on the
     inspection and test method as outlined in the specification,
     the length may be rejected and the manufacturer shall be
     notified. Disposition of rejected pipe shall be a matter of
     agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
     18.2 Pipe found in fabrication or in installation to be
     unsuitable for the intended use, under the scope and
     requirements of this specification, may be set aside and
     the manufacturer notified. Such pipe shall be subject to
     mutual investigation as to the nature and severity of the
     deficiency and the forming or installation, or both, conditions
     involved. Disposition shall be a matter for agreement.
106. Certificate of Compliance
     19.1 When specified in the purchase order, the producer
     or supplier shall furnish to the purchaser a certificate of
     compliance stating that the pipe has been manufactured,
     sampled, tested and inspected in accordance with this specification
     (including the year of issue) and has been found
     to meet the requirements.
107. Identification of Material
     20.1 Each length of pipe shall be legibly marked with
     appropriate symbols by stenciling, stamping, or rolling to
     show the manufacturer’s name, the size, the specification
     designation, the grade, and the hydrostatic test pressure
     when tested, or the letters “NH” when not tested.
     20.2 In addition to the requirements in 20.1, bar coding
     is acceptable as a supplemental identification method. The
     purchaser may specify in the order a specific bar coding
     system to be used.
108. Packaging, Marking, and Loading for Shipment
     21.1 When specified on the purchase order, packaging,
     marking, and loading for shipment shall be in accordance
     with Practices A 700.
     21.2 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
     the material shall be preserved, packaged, and packed in
     accordance with MIL-STD 163. The applicable levels shall
     be as specified in the contract. Marking for shipment of
     such material shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123
     for civil agencies and MIL-STD 129 or Fed. Std. No. 183
     if continuous marking is required for military agencies.
109. Keywords
     22.1 eddy current testing; electric resistance welded
     pipe; hydrostatic testing; plain end pipe; Schedule 10 pipe;
     threaded pipe
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-135 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     202
     TABLE 1
     TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
     Grade A Grade B
     Tensile strength, min, ksi (MPa) 48 (331) 60 (414)
     Yield strength, min, ksi (MPa) 30 (207) 35 (241)
     Elongation in 2 in. (50 mm), min, %:
     For pipe having a specified wall thickness of 5/16 in. (7.9 mm) or more, if tested using a longitudinal strip test 35 30
     specimen.
     For pipe having a specified wall thickness of less than 5/16 in. (7.9 mm), if tested using a longitudinal strip test A B
     specimen.
     For pipe of any size, if tested using a full-size longitudinal test specimen. 35 30
     A The minimum elongation shall be determined by the following equation, with the calculated value rounded to the nearest percent:
     E p 56t + 16.5
     where:
     E p elongation in 2 in. (50 mm), min, %, and
     t p specified wall thickness, in.
     B The minimum elongation shall be determined by the following equation, with the calculated value rounded to the nearest percent:
     E p 48t + 14.00
     where:
     E p elongation in 2 in. (50 mm), min, %, and
     t p specified wall thickness, in.
     TABLE 2
     CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
     Composition, max, %
     Element Grade A Grade B
     Carbon 0.25 0.30
     Manganese 0.95 1.20
     Phosphorus 0.035 0.035
     Sulfur 0.035 0.035
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-135
     203
     APPENDIX
     (Nonmandatory Information)
     X1. ADDITIONAL DATA
     X1.1 Additional data on dimensions nominal weights and test pressures is provided in Table X1.1.
     X1.2 Additional data on wall thicknesses are provided in Table X1.2.
     TABLE X1.1
     DIMENSIONS, NOMINAL WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR LIGHT WALL STEEL PIPE
     Schedule 10 Test Pressure, psi (MPa)A
     Specified Wall Weight (Mass) per
     Outside Diameter, ThicknessA in. Unit Length, lb/ft
     NPS in. (mm) (mm) (kg/m) Grade A Grade B
     3/4 1.050 (26.7) 0.083 (2.11) 0.86 (1.28) 2500 (17.24) 2500 (17.24)
     1 1.315 (33.4) 0.109 (2.77) 1.40 (2.09) 2500 (17.24) 2500 (17.24)
     11/4 1.660 (42.2) 0.109 (2.77) 1.81 (2.69) 2400 (16.55) 2500 (17.24)
     11/2 1.900 (48.3) 0.109 (2.77) 2.09 (3.11) 2100 (14.48) 2400 (16.55)
     2 2.375 (60.3) 0.109 (2.77) 2.64 (3.93) 1700 (11.72) 1900 (13.10)
     21/2 2.875 (73.0) 0.120 (3.05) 3.53 (5.26) 1500 (10.34) 1700 (11.72)
     3 3.500 (88.9) 0.120 (3.05) 4.34 (6.46) 1200 (8.27) 1400 (9.65)
     31/2 4.000 (101.6) 0.120 (3.05) 4.98 (7.41) 1000 (6.89) 1200 (8.27)
     4 4.500 (114.3) 0.120 (3.05) 5.62 (8.37) 900 (6.21) 1100 (7.58)
     5 5.563 (141.3) 0.134 (3.40) 7.78 (11.58) 850 (5.86) 1000 (6.89)
     A The test pressures are calculated by the following equation (but need not exceed 2500 psi or 17.24 MPa):
     P p 2St/D
     where:
     P p pressure, psi (MPa)
     S p fiber stress, 60% of the specified minimum yield strength, psi (MPa),
     t p specified wall thickness, in. (mm), and
     D p specified outside diameter, in. (mm).
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-135 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     204
     TABLE X1.2
     MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE WALL THICKNESS ON INSPECTION
     Specified Wall Minimum Permissible Specified Wall Minimum Permissible Specified Wall Minimum Permissible
     Thickness (t), Wall Thickness ™, Thickness (t), Wall Thickness ™, Thickness (t), Wall Thickness ™,
     in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
     0.068 (1.73) 0.060 (1.52) 0.294 (7.47) 0.257 (6.53) 0.750 (19.05) 0.656 (16.66)
     0.088 (2.24) 0.077 (1.96) 0.300 (7.62) 0.262 (6.65) 0.812 (20.62) 0.710 (18.03)
     0.091 (2.31) 0.080 (2.03) 0.307 (7.80) 0.269 (6.83) 0.843 (21.41) 0.738 (18.75)
     0.095 (2.41) 0.083 (2.11) 0.308 (7.82) 0.270 (6.86) 0.864 (21.95) 0.756 (19.20)
     0.113 (2.87) 0.099 (2.51) 0.312 (7.92) 0.273 (6.93) 0.875 (22.23) 0.766 (19.46)
     0.119 (3.02) 0.104 (2.64) 0.318 (8.08) 0.278 (7.06) 0.906 (23.01) 0.793 (20.14)
     0.125 (3.18) 0.109 (2.77) 0.322 (8.18) 0.282 (7.16) 0.937 (23.80) 0.820 (20.83)
     0.126 (3.20) 0.110 (2.79) 0.330 (8.38) 0.289 (7.34) 0.968 (24.59) 0.847 (21.51)
     0.133 (3.38) 0.116 (2.95) 0.337 (8.56) 0.295 (7.49) 1.000 (25.40) 0.875 (22.23)
     0.140 (3.56) 0.122 (3.10) 0.343 (8.71) 0.300 (7.62) 1.031 (26.19) 0.902 (22.91)
     0.145 (3.68) 0.127 (3.23) 0.344 (8.74) 0.301 (7.65) 1.062 (26.97) 0.929 (23.60)
     0.147 (3.73) 0.129 (3.28) 0.358 (9.09) 0.313 (7.95) 1.093 (27.76) 0.956 (24.28)
     0.154 (3.91) 0.135 (3.43) 0.365 (9.27) 0.319 (8.10) 1.125 (28.58) 0.984 (24.99)
     0.156 (3.96) 0.136 (3.45) 0.375 (9.53) 0.328 (8.33) 1.156 (29.36) 1.012 (25.70)
     0.179 (4.55) 0.157 (3.99) 0.382 (9.70) 0.334 (8.48) 1.218 (30.94) 1.066 (27.08)
     0.187 (4.75) 0.164 (4.17) 0.400 (10.16) 0.350 (8.89) 1.250 (31.75) 1.094 (27.79)
     0.188 (4.78) 0.164 (4.17) 0.406 (10.31) 0.355 (9.02) 1.281 (32.54) 1.121 (28.47)
     0.191 (4.85) 0.167 (4.24) 0.432 (10.97) 0.378 (9.60) 1.312 (33.33) 1.148 (29.16)
     0.200 (5.08) 0.175 (4.45) 0.436 (11.07) 0.382 (9.70) 1.343 (34.11) 1.175 (29.85)
     0.203 (5.16) 0.178 (4.52) 0.437 (11.10) 0.382 (9.70) 1.375 (34.93) 1.203 (30.56)
     0.216 (5.49) 0.189 (4.80) 0.438 (11.13) 0.383 (9.73) 1.406 (35.71) 1.230 (31.24)
     0.218 (5.54) 0.191 (4.85) 0.500 (12.70) 0.438 (11.13) 1.437 (36.53) 1.258 (31.95)
     0.219 (5.56) 0.192 (4.88) 0.531 (13.49) 0.465 (11.81) 1.500 (38.10) 1.312 (33.33)
     0.226 (5.74) 0.198 (5.03) 0.552 (14.02) 0.483 (12.27) 1.531 (38.89) 1.340 (34.04)
     0.237 (6.02) 0.207 (5.26) 0.562 (14.27) 0.492 (12.50) 1.562 (39.68) 1.367 (34.72)
     0.250 (6.35) 0.219 (5.56) 0.593 (15.06) 0.519 (13.18) 1.593 (40.46) 1.394 (35.41)
     0.258 (6.55) 0.226 (5.74) 0.600 (15.24) 0.525 (13.34) 1.750 (44.45) 1.531 (38.89)
     0.276 (7.01) 0.242 (6.15) 0.625 (15.88) 0.547 (13.89) 1.781 (45.24) 1.558 (39.57)
     0.277 (7.04) 0.242 (6.15) 0.656 (16.66) 0.574 (14.58) 1.812 (46.03) 1.586 (40.28)
     0.279 (7.09) 0.244 (6.20) 0.674 (17.12) 0.590 (14.99) 1.968 (49.99) 1.722 (43.74)
     0.280 (7.11) 0.245 (6.22) 0.687 (17.45) 0.601 (15.27) 2.062 (52.38) 1.804 (45.82)
     0.281 (7.14) 0.246 (6.25) 0.719 (18.24) 0.629 (15.98) 2.343 (59.51) 2.050 (52.07)
     NOTE 1 — The following equation, upon which this table is based, is used to derive the minimum permissible wall thickness values from the
     specified wall thickness values, with the calculated values rounded to three decimal places in accordance with the rounding method of Practice
     E 29:
     tm  0.875 p t
     where:
     tm p minimum permissible wall thickness, in.
     t p specified wall thickness, in.
     NOTE 2 — This table is a master table covering wall thicknesses available in the purchase of different classifications of pipe, but it is not
     meant to imply that all of the walls listed therein are obtainable under this specification.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE-WELDED
     CARBON STEEL AND CARBON-MANGANESE STEEL
     BOILER AND SUPERHEATER TUBES
     SA-178/SA-178M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A178/A178M-95.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-178/SA-178M
     205
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-178/SA-178M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     206
     SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-RESISTANCEWELDED
     CARBON STEEL AND CARBON-MANGANESE
     STEEL BOILER AND SUPERHEATER TUBES
     SA-178/SA-178M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A 178/A 178M-95.)
110. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers minimum-wall-thickness,
     electric-resistance-welded tubes made of carbon steel and
     carbon-manganese steel intended for use as boiler tubes,
     boiler flues, superheater flues, and safe ends.
     NOTE 1 — Type C and D tubes are not suitable for safe-ending for
     forge welding.
     1.2 The tubing sizes and thicknesses usually furnished
     to this specification are 1/2 to 5 in. [12.7 to 127 mm] in
     outside diameter and 0.035 to 0.320 in. [0.9 to 9.1 mm],
     inclusive, in minimum wall thickness. Tubing having other
     dimensions may be furnished, provided such tubes comply
     with all other requirements of this specification.
     1.3 Mechanical property requirements do not apply to
     tubing smaller than 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in inside diameter or
     0.015 in. [0.4 mm] in thickness.
     1.4 When these products are to be used in applications
     conforming to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction,
     the requirements of Specification A 520 shall supplement
     and supersede the requirements of this specification.
     1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
     units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
     text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
     in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
     system must be used independently of the other. Combining
     values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
     with the specification. The inch-pound units shall apply
     unless the “M” designation of this specification is specified
     in the order.
111. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A 226/A 226M Specification for Electric-Resistance-
     Welded Carbon Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes for
     High-Pressure Service
     A 450/A 450M Specification for General Requirements
     for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel
     Tubes
     A 520 Specification for Supplementary Requirements for
     Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel
     Tubular Products for High-Temperature Service Conforming
     to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction.
     E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
     and Tubing
     E 273 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Longitudinal
     Welded Pipe and Tubing
112. Ordering Information
     3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
     include the following, as required, to describe the desired
     material adequately:
     3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
     3.1.2 Name of material (electric-resistance-welded
     tubes),
     3.1.3 Grade (A, C, or D, Table 1),
     3.1.4 Size (outside diameter and minimum wall
     thickness),
     3.1.5 Length (specific or random),
     3.1.6 Optional requirements (product analysis, Section
     7; crush test, Section 10; hydrostatic or nondestructive
     electric test, 11.6),
     3.1.7 Test report required (Certification Section of
     Specification A 450/A 450M),
     3.1.8 Specification, and designation,
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-178/SA-178M
     207
     3.1.9 Individual supplementary requirements, if
     required, and
     3.1.10 Special requirements.
113. Manufacture
     4.1 The steel for Grade D shall be killed.
     4.2 Tubes shall be made by electric-resistance welding.
114. Heat Treatment
     5.1 After welding, all tubes shall be heat treated at a
     temperature of 1650°F [900°C] or higher and followed by
     cooling in air or in the cooling chamber of a controlledatmosphere
     furnace. Cold-drawn tubes shall be heat treated
     after the final cold-draw pass at a temperature of 1200°
     [650°C] or higher.
115. Chemical Composition
     6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
     chemical composition prescribed in Table 1.
     6.2 When a grade is ordered under this specification,
     supplying an alloy grade that specifically requires the addition
     of any element other than those listed in Table 1 is
     not permitted.
116. Product Analysis
     7.1 When requested on the purchase order, a product
     analysis shall be made by the manufacturer or supplier
     from one tube per 100 pieces for sizes over 3 in. [76.2
     mm] and one tube per 250 pieces for sizes 3 in. [76.2 mm]
     and under; or when tubes are identified by heat, one tube
     per heat shall be analyzed. The chemical composition thus
     determined shall conform to the requirements specified.
     7.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests
     of two additional lengths of flat-rolled stock or tubes shall
     be made. Both retests, for the elements in question, shall
     meet the requirements of the specification; otherwise all
     remaining material in the heat or lot (Note 2) shall be
     rejected or, at the option of the producer, each length of
     flat-rolled stock or tube may be individually tested for
     acceptance. Lengths of flat-rolled stock or tubes which do
     not meet the requirements of the specifications shall be
     rejected.
     NOTE 2 — A lot consists of 250 tubes for sizes 3 in. [76.2 mm] and
     under and of 100 tubes for sizes over 3 in. [76.2 mm], prior to cutting
     to length.
117. General Requirements
     8.1 Material furnished under this specification shall
     conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition
     of Specification A 450/A 450M unless otherwise provided
     herein.
118. Tensile Requirements
     9.1 Grade C and D tubes shall conform to the requirements
     as to tensile properties prescribed in Table 2.
     NOTE 3: Explanatory Note — For purposes of design the following
     tensile properties may be assumed for Grade A tubes:
     Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa] 47 [325]
     Yield Strength, min, ksi [MPa] 26 [180]
     Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % 35
119. Crush Test
     10.1 When required by the purchaser, crushing tests
     shall be made on sections of tube 21/2 in. [63 mm] in length
     which shall stand crushing longitudinally without cracking,
     splitting, or opening at the weld, as follows:
     Height of Crushed Section, in. [mm]
     Wall Thickness
     of Tubes, Grade C
     in. [mm] Grade A Tubes and D Tubes
     0.135 [3.43] and 3/4 [19] or until Crush tests not
     under outside folds are required
     in contact
     Over 0.135 [3.43] 11/4 [32] . . .
     10.2 Table 3 gives the computed minimum elongation
     values for each 1/32 in. [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickness.
     Where the wall thickness lies between two values shown
     above, the minimum elongation value shall be determined
     by the following equation:
     E p 48t + 15.00 [E p 1.87t + 15.00]
     where:
     E p elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, %, and,
     t p actual thickness of specimen, in. [mm].
     10.3 For tubing less than 1 in. [25.4 mm] in outside
     diameter, the length of the specimen shall be 21/2 times the
     outside diameter of the tube. Slight surface checks shall
     not be cause for rejection.
120. Mechanical Tests Required
     11.1 Flattening Test:
     11.1.1 For Grade A, one flattening test shall be made
     on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note 2)
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-178/SA-178M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     208
     or fraction thereof, and from each 2000 ft [600 m] or
     fraction thereof of safe-end material.
     11.1.2 For Grades C and D, one flattening test shall
     be made on specimens from each of two tubes from each
     lot (Note 2) or fraction thereof.
     11.2 Flange Test:
     11.2.1 For Grade A, one flange test shall be made
     on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note 2)
     or fraction thereof, and from each 2000 ft [600 m] or
     fraction thereof of safe-end material.
     11.2.2 For Grades C and D, one flange test shall be
     made on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot
     (Note 2) or fraction thereof. The width of the flange shall
     not be less than 75% of that specified in Specification
     A 450/A 450M.
     11.3 Crush Test — For Grade A, when required by the
     purchaser, one crush test shall be made on specimens from
     each of two tubes from each lot (Note 2) or fraction thereof,
     and from each 2000 ft [600 m] or fraction thereof of safeend
     material.
     11.4 Tension Test — For Grades C and D, one tension
     test shall be made on specimens from each of two tubes
     from each lot. The term lot for tension test requirements
     applies to all tubes prior to cutting, of the same nominal
     diameter and wall thickness, which are produced from the
     same heat of steel. When final heat treatment is in a batchtype
     furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes of the
     same size and the same heat which are heat treated in the
     same furnace charge. When the final heat treatment is in
     a continuous furnace, a lot shall include all tubes of the
     same size and heat, heat treated in the same furnace, at
     the same temperature, time at heat, and furnace speed.
     11.5 Reverse Flattening Test — One reverse flattening
     test shall be made on each 1500 ft [450 m] of finished
     tubing.
     11.6 Hydrostatic or Nondestructive Electric Test —
     Each tube shall be subjected to either the hydrostatic or
     the nondestructive electric test. The purchaser may specify
     which test is to be used.
121. Forming Operations
     12.1 When inserted in the boiler, tubes shall withstand
     expanding and beading without showing cracks or flaws,
     or opening at the weld. When properly manipulated, superheater
     tubes shall withstand all forging, welding, and bending
     operations necessary for application without
     developing defects.
122. Product Marking
     13.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
     A 450/A 450M, the letters “ERW” shall be legibly
     stenciled on each tube, or marked on a tag attached to the
     bundle or box in which the tubes are shipped.
     13.2 The manufacturer’s name or symbol may be
     placed permanently on each tube by rolling or light stamping
     before normalizing. If a single stamp is placed on the
     tube by hand, this mark should not be less than 8 in.
     [200 mm] from one end of the tube.
123. Keywords
     14.1 boiler tube; resistance welded steel tube; steel
     tube, carbon; welded steel tube
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-178/SA-178M
     209
     TABLE 1
     CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
     Composition, %
     Grade A, Grade C, Grade D,
     Low-Carbon Medium- Carbon-Manganese
     Element Steel Carbon Steel Steel
     Carbon 0.06–0.18 0.35 max 0.27 max
     Manganese 0.27–0.63 0.80 max 1.00–1.50
     Phosphorus, max 0.035 0.035 0.030
     Sulfur, max 0.035 0.035 0.015
     Silicon . . . . . . 0.10 min
     TABLE 2
     TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
     Grade C Grade D
     Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa] 60 [415] 70 [485]
     Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa] 37 [255] 40 [275]
     Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % 30 30
     For longitudinal strip tests a deduction for each 1/32 in. [0.8 mm] decrease in 1.50A 1.50A
     wall thickness below 5/16 in. [8 mm] from the basic minimum elongation of
     the following percentage points shall be made.
     A See Table 3 for the computed minimum values:
     TABLE 3
     MINIMUM ELONGATION VALUES
     Wall Thickness Elongation in 2 in. or 50
     in. mm mm, min, %A
     5/16 (0.312) 8 30
     9/32 (0.281) 7.2 29
     1/4 (0.250) 6.4 27
     7/32 (0.219) 5.6 26
     3/16 (0.188) 4.8 24
     5/32 (0.156) 4 22
     1/8 (0.125) 3.2 21
     3/32 (0.094) 2.4 20
     1/16 (0.062) 1.6 18
     A Calculated elongation requirements shall be rounded to the nearest whole number.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-178/SA-178M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     210
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     The following supplementary requirements may become a part of the specification when
     specified in the inquiry or invitation to bid, and production order or contract. These requirements
     shall not be considered, unless specified in the order and the necessary tests shall
     be made at the mill.
     S1. Additional Testing of Welded Tubing for
     ASME Requirements
     S1.1 The weld seam of each tube shall be subjected to
     an ultrasonic inspection employing Practices E 273 or E
     213 with the rejection criteria referenced in Specification
     A 450/A 450M.
     S1.2 If Practice E 273 is employed, a 100% volumetric
     inspection of the entire length of each tube shall also be
     performed using one of the nondestructive electric tests
     permitted by Specification A 450/A 450M.
     S1.3 The test methods described in the supplement may
     not be capable of inspecting the end portions of tubes. This
     condition is referred to as end effect. This portion, as
     determined by the manufacturer, shall be removed and
     discarded.
     S1.4 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
     A 450/A 450M, “S1” shall be added after the grade
     designation.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS COLD-DRAWN
     LOW-CARBON STEEL HEAT-EXCHANGER AND
     CONDENSER TUBES
     SA-179/SA-179M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A179/A179M-90a(R12).)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-179/SA-179M
     211
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-179/SA-179M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     212
     Standard Specification for
     Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger
     and Condenser Tubes
124. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers minimum-wall-thickness,
     seamless cold-drawn low-carbon steel tubes for tubular heat
     exchangers, condensers, and similar heat transfer apparatus.
     1.2 This specification covers tubes 1/8 to 3 in. [3.2 to 76.2
     mm], inclusive, in outside diameter.
     NOTE 1—Tubing smaller in outside diameter and having a thinner wall
     than indicated in this specification is available. Mechanical property
     requirements do not apply to tubing smaller than 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in
     outside diameter or with a wall thickness under 0.015 in. [0.4 mm].
     1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
     SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
     system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must
     be used independently of the other. Combining values from the
     two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification.
     The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M”
     designation of this specification is specified in the order.
125. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A450/A450M Specification for General Requirements for
     Carbon and Low Alloy Steel Tubes
126. Ordering Information
     3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
     include the following, as required, to describe the desired
     material adequately:
     3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
     3.1.2 Name of material (seamless tubes),
     3.1.3 Manufacture (cold-drawn),
     3.1.4 Size (outside diameter and minimum wall thickness),
     3.1.5 Length (specific or random),
     3.1.6 Optional requirements (product analysis, Section 9,
     flange test, 11.3),
     3.1.7 Test report required (Certification Section of Specification
     A450/A450M),
     3.1.8 Specification number, and
     3.1.9 Special requirements.
127. General Requirements
     4.1 Material furnished under this specification shall conform
     to the applicable requirements of the current edition of
     Specification A450/A450M, unless otherwise provided herein.
128. Manufacture
     5.1 Tubes shall be made by the seamless process and shall
     be cold drawn.
129. Heat Treatment
     6.1 Tubes shall be heat treated after the final cold draw pass
     at a temperature of 1200°F [650°C] or higher.
130. Surface Condition
     7.1 Finished tubes shall be free of scale. A slight amount of
     oxidation will not be considered as scale.
131. Chemical Composition
     8.1 The steel shall conform to the following requirements as
     to chemical composition:
     Carbon, % 0.06–0.18
     Manganese, % 0.27–0.63
     Phosphorus, max, % 0.035
     Sulfur, max, % 0.035
     8.2 Supplying an alloy grade that specifically requires the
     addition of any element other than those listed in 8.1 is not
     permitted.
132. Product Analysis
     9.1 When requested on the purchase order, a product analysis
     shall be made by the supplier from 1 tube per 250 pieces or
     when tubes are identified by heat, one tube per heat shall be
     analyzed. The chemical composition thus determined shall
     conform to the requirements specified.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-179/SA-179M
     213
     9.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests of
     two additional billets or tubes shall be made. Both retests, for
     the elements in question, shall meet the requirements of the
     specification; otherwise all remaining material in the heat or lot
     (Note 2) shall be rejected or, at the option of the producer, each
     billet or tube may be individually tested for acceptance. Billets
     or tubes which do not meet the requirements of the specification
     shall be rejected.
     NOTE 2—A lot consists of 250 tubes.
133. Hardness Requirements
     10.1 The tubes shall have a hardness number not exceeding
     72 HRB.
134. Mechanical Tests Required
     11.1 Flattening Test—One flattening test shall be made on
     specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note 2) or
     fraction thereof.
     11.2 Flaring Test—One flaring test shall be made on specimens
     from each of two tubes from each lot (Note 2) or fraction
     thereof.
     11.3 Flange Test—When specified as a substitute for the
     flaring test, for tubes having a wall thickness (actual mean
     wall) less than 10 % of the outside diameter, one test shall be
     made on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note
     2) or fraction thereof. For tubes other than specified above, the
     flange test shall not be required.
     11.4 Hardness Test—Rockwell hardness tests shall be made
     on specimens from two tubes from each lot. The term lot
     applies to all tubes, prior to cutting, of the same nominal
     diameter and wall thickness which are produced from the same
     heat of steel. When final heat treatment is in a batch-type
     furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes of the same size
     and the same heat which are heat treated in the same furnace
     charge. When the final heat treatment is in a continuous
     furnace, a lot shall include all tubes of the same size and heat,
     heat treated in the same furnace at the same temperature, time
     at heat, and furnace speed.
     11.5 Hydrostatic Test—Each tube shall be subjected to the
     hydrostatic test, or, instead of this test, a nondestructive electric
     test may be used when specified by the purchaser.
135. Product Marking
     12.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
     A450/A450M, the marking shall include the name and order
     number of the purchaser.
136. Keywords
     13.1 cold drawn tube; condenser tubes; heat exchanger
     tubes; low carbon steel; seamless tube
     EXPLANATORY NOTES
     NOTE 1—For purposes of design, the following tensile properties may
     be assumed:
     Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa] 47 [325]
     Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa] 26 [180]
     Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % 35
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL FORGINGS, FOR
     GENERAL-PURPOSE PIPING
     SA-181/SA-181M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A181/A181M-06.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-181/SA-181M
     215
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-181/SA-181M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     216
     SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL FORGINGS, FOR
     GENERAL-PURPOSE PIPING
     SA-181/SA-181M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A 181/A 181M-06)
137. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers nonstandard as-forged fittings,
     valve components, and parts for general service.
     Forgings made to this specification are limited to a maximum
     weight of 10 000 lb [4540 kg]. Larger forgings may
     be ordered to Specification A 266/A 266M.
     1.2 Two classes of material are covered, designated
     as Classes 60 and 70, respectively, and are classified in
     accordance with their mechanical properties as specified
     in 6.1.
     1.3 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound
     units and SI units. However, unless the order specifies the
     applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the
     material shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
     1.4 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
     units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
     text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
     in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
     system must be used independently of the other. Combining
     values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
     with the specification.
138. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A 266/A 266M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings
     for Pressure Vessel Components
     A 788/A 788M Specification for Steel Forgings, General
     Requirements
     A 961/A 961M Specification for Common Requirements
     for Steel Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves, and Parts for
     Piping Applications
139. General Requirements and Ordering
     Information
     3.1 Product furnished to this specification shall conform
     to the requirements of Specification A 961 /A 961M,
     including any supplementary requirements that are indicated
     in the purchase order. Failure to comply with the
     requirements of Specification A 961/A 961M constitutes
     non-conformance with this specification.
     3.2 It is the purchaser’s responsibility to specify in
     the purchase order all ordering information necessary to
     purchase the needed material. Examples of such information
     include but are not limited to the ordering information
     in Specification A 961/A 961M and the following:
     3.2.1 Supplementary requirements, and
     3.2.2 Additional requirements (See 4.3, 9.1, 10.2,
     12.1, and 12.2).
     3.3 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
     with the requirements of SpecificationA 961/A 961M,
     the requirements of this specification shall prevail.
140. Materials and Manufacture
     4.1 Except for flanges of all types, hollow, cylindrically
     shaped parts may be machined from hot-rolled or forged
     bar, provided that the axial length of the part is approximately
     parallel to the metal flow lines of the stock. Other
     parts, excluding flanges of all types, up to and including
     NPS 4 may be machined from hot-rolled or forged bar.
     Elbows, return bends, tees, and header tees shall not be
     machined directly from bar stock.
     4.2 Except as permitted in 4.1, the finished product
     shall be a forging as defined in the Terminology section
     (exclusively) of Specification A 788/A 788M.
     4.3 When specified in the order, the manufacturer shall
     submit for approval of the purchaser a sketch showing the
     shape of the rough forging before machining.
     4.4 Forgings shall be protected against sudden or too
     rapid cooling from the rolling or forging while passing
     through the critical range.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-181/SA-181M
     217
     4.5 Heat treatment is neither required nor prohibited,
     but when applied, heat treatment shall consist of tempering,
     annealing, normalizing, or normalizing and tempering.
141. Chemical Composition
     5.1 An analysis of each heat shall be made by the
     manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements
     specified in Table 1. The chemical composition thus determined
     shall conform to the requirements in Table 1.
142. Mechanical Properties
     6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as
     to tensile properties prescribed in Table 2.
143. Number of Tests
     7.1 One tension test shall be made from each heat.
     7.2 If any test specimen is defectively machined, it
     may be discarded and another specimen substituted.
144. Retests
     8.1 When one or more representative test specimens
     do not conform to specification requirements for the tested
     characteristic, only a single retest for each nonconforming
     characteristic may be performed to establish product
     acceptability. Retests shall be performed on twice the number
     of representative specimens that were originally nonconforming.
     When any retest specimen does not conform
     to specification requirements for the characteristic in question,
     the lot represented by that specimen shall be rejected,
     heat-treated or reheat-treated in accordance with 4.5, and
     tested in accordance with Sections 6 and 7.
145. Reports of Testing
     9.1 Upon request of the purchaser in the contract or
     order, a report of the test results and chemical analyses
     shall be furnished. The specification designation included
     on reports of testing shall include year of issue and revision
     letter, if any.
146. Repair by Welding
     10.1 Repair welding, by the manufacturer, is permissible
     for parts made to dimensional standards such as those
     of ANSI or equivalent standards.
     10.2 Prior approval of the purchaser shall be required
     to weld repair special parts made to the purchaser’s requirements.
     10.3 The composition of the weld deposits shall be
     similar to the base metal and in accordance with the procedure
     qualification for the applicable material. Welding shall
     be accomplished with a weld procedure designed to produce
     low hydrogen in the weldment. Short-circuit gas metal
     arc welding is permissible only with the approval of the
     purchaser.
147. Marking of Forgings
     11.1 Identification marks consisting of the manufacturer’s
     symbol or name, designation of service rating, Specification
     number, class, and size shall be legibly forged or
     stamped on each forging, and in such a position as not to
     injure the usefulness of the forgings.
     11.2 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements in
     11.1, bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary identification
     method. The purchaser may specify in the order a
     specific bar coding system to be used. The bar coding
     system, if applied at the discretion of the supplier, should
     be consistent with one of the published industry standards
     for bar coding. If used on small parts the bar code may be
     applied to the box or a substantially applied tag.
148. Certificate of Compliance
     12.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract,
     a producer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to
     the purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled,
     tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification
     and has been found to meet the requirements. The specification
     designation included on certificates of compliance
     shall include year of issue and revision letter, if any.
     12.2 When specified in the purchase order or contract,
     a report of the test results shall be furnished.
149. Keywords
     13.1 pipe fittings, steel; piping applications; pressure
     containing parts; steel forgings, carbon; steel valves
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-181/SA-181M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     218
     TABLE 1
     CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
     Composition, %
     Element Classes 60 and 70
     Carbon, max. 0.35
     Manganese, max. 1.10A
     Phosphorus, max. 0.05
     Silicon 0.10–0.35
     Sulfur, max. 0.05
     A Manganese may be increased to 1.35% max. provided the carbon
     is reduced 0.01% for each 0.06% increase in manganese over
     the limit shown in the table.
     TABLE 2
     TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
     Class 60 Class 70
     Tensile strength, min., ksi [MPa] 60 [415] 70 [485]
     Yield strength,A min., ksi [MPa] 30 [205] 36 [250]
     Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min., % 22 18
     Reduction of area, min., % 35 24
     A Determined by either the 0.2% offset method or the 0.5%
     extension-under-load method.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-181/SA-181M
     219
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     S1. Carbon Equivalent
     S1.1 The maximum carbon equivalent based on heat
     analysis shall be as follows:
     Maximum Carbon Equivalent Value
     Maximum Section Thickness Maximum Section Thickness
     Class Less Than or Equal to 2 in. Greater Than 2 in.
     60 0.45 0.46
     70 0.47 0.48
     S1.2 Determine the carbon equivalent (CE) as follows:
     CE p C + Mn/6 + (Cr + Mo + V)/5 + (Ni + Cu)/15
     S1.3 A lower maximum carbon equivalent may be
     agreed upon between the supplier and the purchaser.
     S1.4 When this Supplementary Requirement is
     invoked, all elements in the carbon equivalent formula
     shall be analyzed and the amounts reported.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ð19Þ
     SPECIFICATION FOR FORGED OR ROLLED ALLOY AND
     STAINLESS STEEL PIPE FLANGES, FORGED FITTINGS,
     AND VALVES AND PARTS FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE
     SERVICE
     SA-182/SA-182M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A182/A182M-18 except for the inclusion of Grade F316Ti in para. 7.3.1, and the
     removal of reduced strength levels for thicker sections of Grade F53 in Table 3 and note G.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-182/SA-182M
     221
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-182/SA-182M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     222
     Standard Specification for
     Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges,
     Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature
     Service
150. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers forged low alloy and stainless
     steel piping components for use in pressure systems. Included
     are flanges, fittings, valves, and similar parts to specified
     dimensions or to dimensional standards, such as the ASME
     specifications that are referenced in Section 2.
     1.2 For bars and products machined directly from bar (other
     than those directly addressed by this specification; see 6.4),
     refer to Specifications A479/A479M and A739 for the similar
     grades available in those specifications. Products made to this
     specification are limited to a maximum weight of 10 000 lb
     [4540 kg]. For larger products and products for other
     applications, refer to Specifications A336/A336M and A965/
     A965M for the similar ferritic and austenitic grades,
     respectively, available in those specifications.
     1.3 Several grades of low alloy steels and ferritic,
     martensitic, austenitic, and ferritic-austenitic stainless steels
     are included in this specification. Selection will depend upon
     design and service requirements. Several of the ferritic/
     austenitic (duplex) grades are also found in Specification
     A1049/A1049M.
     1.4 Supplementary requirements are provided for use when
     additional testing or inspection is desired. These shall apply
     only when specified individually by the purchaser in the order.
     1.5 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound units
     and in SI units. However, unless the order specifies the
     applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the material
     shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
     1.6 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
     are to be regarded separately as the standard. Within the text,
     the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
     system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
     shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
     from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the
     standard.
     1.7 This international standard was developed in accordance
     with internationally recognized principles on standardization
     established in the Decision on Principles for the
     Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
     issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
     Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
151. Referenced Documents
     2.1 In addition to the referenced documents listed in Specification
     A961/A961M, the following list of standards apply to
     this specification.
     2.2 ASTM Standards:
     A262 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular
     Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels
     A275/A275M Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination of
     Steel Forgings
     A336/A336M Specification for Alloy Steel Forgings for
     Pressure and High-Temperature Parts
     A388/A388M Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Steel
     Forgings
     A479/A479M Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and
     Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels
     A484/A484M Specification for General Requirements for
     Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings
     A739 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought, for
     Elevated Temperature or Pressure-Containing Parts, or
     Both
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-182/SA-182M
     223
     A763 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular
     Attack in Ferritic Stainless Steels
     A788/A788M Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements
     A923 Test Methods for Detecting Detrimental Intermetallic
     Phase in Duplex Austenitic/Ferritic Stainless Steels
     A961/A961M Specification for Common Requirements for
     Steel Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves, and Parts for
     Piping Applications
     A965/A965M Specification for Steel Forgings, Austenitic,
     for Pressure and High Temperature Parts
     A1049/A1049M Specification for Stainless Steel Forgings,
     Ferritic/Austenitic (Duplex), for Pressure Vessels and
     Related Components
     A1084 Test Method for Detecting Detrimental Phases in
     Lean Duplex Austenitic/Ferritic Stainless Steels
     E92 Test Methods for Vickers Hardness and Knoop Hardness
     of Metallic Materials
     E112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
     E165/E165M Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for
     General Industry
     E340 Practice for Macroetching Metals and Alloys
     2.3 ASME Standards:
     B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, SocketWelding, and Threaded
     2.4 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
     Section IX
     2.5 AWS Specifications
     A5.4/A5.4M Specification for Stainless Steel Electrodes for
     Shielded Metal Arc Welding
     A5.5/A5.5M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
     for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
     A5.9/A5.9M Specification for Bare Stainless Steel Welding
     Electrodes and Rods
     A5.11/A5.11M Specification for Nickel and Nickel-Alloy
     Welding Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
     A5.14/A5.14M Specification for Nickel and Nickel-Alloy
     Bare Welding Electrodes and Rods
     A5.23/A5.23M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
     and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
     A5.28/A5.28M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
     for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
     A5.29/A5.29M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored
     Arc Welding
152. Terminology
     3.1 Definitions—For definitions of terms used in this
     specification, refer to Specification A961/A961M.
     3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
     3.2.1 hardened condition, n—for F23, the metallurgical
     condition achieved after normalizing and cooling to room
     temperature but prior to tempering.
153. Ordering Information
     4.1 It is the purchaser’s responsibility to specify in the
     purchase order information necessary to purchase the needed
     material. In addition to the ordering information guidelines in
     Specification A961/A961M, orders should include the following
     information:
     4.1.1 Additional requirements (see 7.2.1, Table 2 footnotes,
     9.3, and 19.2), and
     4.1.2 Requirement, if any, that manufacturer shall submit
     drawings for approval showing the shape of the rough forging
     before machining and the exact location of test specimen
     material (see 9.3.1).
154. General Requirements
     5.1 Product furnished to this specification shall conform to
     the requirements of Specification A961/A961M, including any
     supplementary requirements that are indicated in the purchase
     order. Failure to comply with the general requirements of
     Specification A961/A961M constitutes nonconformance with
     this specification. In case of conflict between the requirements
     of this specification and Specification A961/A961M, this
     specification shall prevail.
155. Manufacture
     6.1 The low-alloy ferritic steels shall be made by the
     open-hearth, electric-furnace, or basic-oxygen process with the
     option of separate degassing and refining processes in each
     case.
     6.2 The stainless steels shall be melted by one of the
     following processes: (a) electric-furnace (with the option of
     separate degassing and refining processes); (b) vacuumfurnace;
     or (c) one of the former followed by vacuum or
     electroslag-consumable remelting. Grade F XM-27Cb may be
     produced by electron-beam melting.
     6.3 A sufficient discard shall be made to secure freedom
     from injurious piping and undue segregation.
     6.4 The material shall be forged as close as practicable to
     the specified shape and size.
     6.4.1 Flanges of any type, elbows, return bends, tees, and
     header tees shall not be machined directly from bar stock.
     6.4.2 Cylindrically-shaped parts may be machined from
     forged or rolled solution-annealed austenitic stainless steel bar
     without additional hot working.
     6.4.3 Cylindrically-shaped low alloy, martensitic stainless,
     ferritic stainless, and ferritic-austenitic stainless steel parts,
     NPS-4 [DN 100] and under, may be machined from forged or
     rolled bar, without additional hot working.
     6.5 Except as provided for in 6.4, the finished product shall
     be a forging as defined in the Terminology section of Specification
     A788/A788M.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-182/SA-182M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     224
156. Heat Treatment 8. Chemical Composition
     8.1 A chemical heat analysis in accordance with Specification
     A961/A961M shall be made and conform to the chemical
     composition prescribed in Table 2.
     8.2 Grades to which lead, selenium, or other elements are
     added for the purpose of rendering the material free-machining
     shall not be used.
     8.3 Starting material produced to a specification that specifically
     requires the addition of any element beyond those
     listed in Table 2 for the applicable grade of material is not
     permitted.
     8.4 Steel grades covered in this specification shall not
     contain an unspecified element, other than nitrogen in stainless
     steels, for the ordered grade to the extent that the steel
     conforms to the requirements of another grade for which that
     element is a specified element having a required minimum
     content. For this requirement, a grade is defined as an alloy
     described individually and identified by its own UNS designation
     or Grade designation and identification symbol in Table 2.
     8.5 Product Analysis—The purchaser may make a product
     analysis on products supplied to this specification in accordance
     with Specification A961/A961M.
157. Mechanical Properties
     9.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
     mechanical properties for the grade ordered as listed in Table 3.
     9.2 Mechanical test specimens shall be obtained from production
     forgings, or from separately forged test blanks prepared
     from the stock used to make the finished product. In
     either case, mechanical test specimens shall not be removed
     until after all heat treatment is complete. If repair welding is
     required, test specimens shall not be removed until after
     post-weld heat treatment is complete, except for ferritic grades
     when the post-weld heat treatment is conducted at least 50 °F
     [30 °C] below the actual tempering temperature. When test
     blanks are used, they shall receive approximately the same
     working as the finished product. The test blanks shall be heat
     treated with the finished product and shall approximate the
     maximum cross section of the forgings they represent.
     9.3 For normalized and tempered, or quenched and tempered
     forgings, the central axis of the test specimen shall be
     taken at least 1/4 T from the nearest surface as-heat-treated,
     where T is the maximum heat-treated thickness of the represented
     forging. In addition, for quenched and tempered
     forgings, the mid-length of the test specimen shall be at least T
     from all other surfaces as-heat-treated, exclusive of the T
     dimension surfaces. When the section thickness does not
     permit this positioning, the test specimen shall be positioned as
     near as possible to the prescribed location, as agreed to by the
     purchaser and the supplier.
     9.3.1 With prior purchase approval, the test specimen for
     ferritic steel forgings may be taken at a depth (t) corresponding
     to the distance from the area of significant stress to the nearest
     heat-treated surface and at least twice this distance (2 t) from
     any second surface. However, the test depth shall not be nearer
     to one treated surface than 3/4 in. [19 mm] and to the second
     7.1 After hot working, forgings shall be cooled to a temperature
     below 1000 °F [538 °C] prior to heat treating in
     accordance with the requirements of Table 1.
     7.2 Low Alloy Steels and Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless
     Steels—The low alloy steels and ferritic and martensitic
     stainless steels shall be heat treated in accordance with the
     requirements of 7.1 and Table 1. When more than one heat
     treatment option is listed for a Grade in Table 1, any one of the
     heat treatments listed shall be performed. The selection of the
     heat treatment shall be at the manufacturer’s option, unless
     otherwise stated in the purchase order.
     7.2.1 Liquid Quenching—Except as permitted in 7.2.2, for
     F 1, F 2, and F 3, and when agreed to by the purchaser, liquid
     quenching followed by tempering shall be permitted provided
     the temperatures in Table 1 for each grade are used.
     7.2.1.1 Marking—Parts that are liquid quenched and tempered
     shall be marked “QT.”
     7.2.2 Alternatively, Grade F 1, F 2, and F 12, Classes 1 and
     2 may be given a heat treatment of 1200 °F [650 °C] minimum
     after final hot or cold forming.
     7.3 Austenitic and Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels—
     Except as permitted by 7.5, the austenitic and ferritic-austenitic
     stainless steels shall be heat treated and liquid-quenched in
     accordance with the requirements of 7.1 and Table 1.
     .
     7.3.2 See Supplementary Requirement S8 if a particular
     heat treatment method is to be employed.
     7.4 Time of Heat Treatment—Heat treatment of forgings
     may be performed before machining.
     7.5 Forged or Rolled Bar—Forged or rolled austenitic
     stainless bar from which cylindrically shaped parts are to be
     machined, as permitted by 6.4, and the parts machined from
     such bar, without heat treatment after machining, shall be
     furnished to the annealing and quenching or rapid-cooling
     requirements of Specification A484/A484M or this
     specification, with subsequent light cold drawing and straightening
     permitted (see Supplementary Requirement S3 if annealing
     must be the final operation).
     7.3.1 Alternatively, immediately following hot working,
     while the temperature of the forging is not less than the
     minimum solution annealing temperature specified in Table 1,
     forgings made from austenitic grades (except grades F 304H, F
     309H, F 310, F 310H, F 316H, F316Ti, F 321, F 321H, F 347,
     F 347H, F 348, F 348H, F 45, and F 56) may be individually
     rapidly quenched in accordance with the requirements of Table
158. Ferritic-austenitic grades may be solution annealed without
     cooling below 1000 °F by being re-heated to the solution
     annealing temperature required in Table 1, held for a time
     sufficient to dissolve phases and precipitates which may cause
     a reduction in corrosion or mechanical properties, and
     quenched in accordance with Table 1.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-182/SA-182M
     225
     TABLE 1 Heat Treating Requirements
     Grade Heat Treat Type Austenitizing/Solutioning
     Temperature, Minimum
     or Range, °F [°C]A
     Cooling
     Media
     Quenching Cool
     Below °F [°C]
     Tempering Temperature,
     Minimum or
     Range, °F [°C]
     Low Alloy Steels
     F 1 anneal 1650 [900] furnace cool B B
     normalize and temper 1650 [900] air cool B 1150 [620]
     F 2 anneal 1650 [900] furnace cool B B
     normalize and temper 1650 [900] air cool B 1150 [620]
     F 5, F 5a anneal 1750 [955] furnace cool B B
     normalize and temper 1750 [955] air cool B 1250 [675]
     F 9 anneal 1750 [955] furnace cool B B
     normalize and temper 1750 [955] air cool B 1250 [675]
     F 10 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquid 500 [260] B
     F 91 Types 1 and 2 normalize and temper or
     quench and temper
     1900–1975 [1040–1080] air cool accelerated air
     cool or liquid
     B 1350–1470 [730–800]
     F 92 normalize and temper 1900–1975 [1040–1080] air cool B 1350–1470 [730–800]
     F 93 normalize and temper 1960–2140 [1070–1170] air cool 385 [200] 1380–1455 [750–790]
     F 122 normalize and temper 1900–1975 [1040–1080] air cool B 1350–1470 [730–800]
     F 911 normalize and temper 1900–1975 [1040–1080] air cool or liquid B 1365–1435 [740–780]
     F 11, Class 1, 2, 3 anneal 1650 [900] furnace cool B B
     normalize and temper 1650 [900] air cool B 1150 [620]
     F 12, Class 1, 2 anneal 1650 [900] furnace cool B B
     normalize and temper 1650 [900] air cool B 1150 [620]
     F 21, F 3V, and F
     3VCb
     anneal 1750 [955] furnace cool B B
     normalize and temper 1750 [955] air cool B 1250 [675]
     F 22, Class 1, 3 anneal 1650 [900] furnace cool B B
     normalize and temper 1650 [900] air cool B 1250 [675]
     F 22V normalize and temper or
     quench and temper
     1650 [900] air cool or liquid B 1250 [675]
     F 23 normalize and temper 1900–1975 [1040–1080] air cool
     accelerated cool
     B 1350–1470 [730–800]
     F 24 normalize and temper 1800–1975 [980–1080] air cool
     or liquid
     B 1350–1470 [730–800]
     FR anneal 1750 [955] furnace cool B B
     normalize 1750 [955] air cool B B
     normalize and temper 1750 [955] air cool B 1250 [675]
     F 36, Class 1 normalize and temper 1650 [900] air cool B 1100 [595]
     F 36, Class 2 normalize and temper or
     quench and temper
     1650 [900]
     1650 [900]
     air cool
     accelerated air cool
     or liquid
     B 1100 [595]
     1100 [595]
     Martensitic Stainless Steels
     F 6a Class 1 anneal not specified furnace cool B B
     normalize and temper not specified air cool 400 [205] 1325 [725]
     temper not required B B 1325 [725]
     F 6a Class 2 anneal not specified furnace cool B B
     normalize and temper not specified air cool 400 [205] 1250 [675]
     temper not required B B 1250 [675]
     F 6a Class 3 anneal not specified furnace cool B B
     normalize and temper not specified air cool 400 [205] 1100 [595]
     F 6a Class 4 anneal not specified furnace cool B B
     normalize and temper not specified air cool 400 [205] 1000 [540]
     F 6b anneal 1750 [955] furnace cool B B
     normalize and temper 1750 [955] air cool 400 [205] 1150 [620]
     F 6NM normalize and temper 1850 [1010] air cool 200 [95] 1040–1120 [560–600]
     Ferritic Stainless Steels
     F XM-27 Cb anneal 1850 [1010] furnace cool B B
     F 429 anneal 1850 [1010] furnace cool B B
     F 430 anneal not specified furnace cool B B
     Austenitic Stainless Steels
     F 304 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 304H solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 304L solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 304N solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 304LN solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 309H solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 310 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 310H solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 310MoLN solution treat and quench 1900–2010 [1050–1100] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 316 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 316H solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 316L solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 316N solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 316LN solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 316Ti solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 317 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-182/SA-182M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     226
     treated surface than 11/2 in. [38 mm]. This method of test
     specimen location would normally apply to contour-forged
     parts, or parts with thick cross-sectional areas where 1/4 T × T
     testing (see 9.3) is not practical. Sketches showing the exact
     test locations shall be approved by the purchaser when this
     method is used.
     9.3.2 Metal Buffers—The required distances from heattreated
     surfaces may be obtained with metal buffers instead of
     integral extensions. Buffer material may be carbon or low-alloy
     steel, and shall be joined to the forging with a partial
     penetration weld that seals the buffered surface. Specimens
     shall be located at 1/2-in. [13-mm] minimum from the buffered
     surface of the forging. Buffers shall be removed and the welded
     areas subjected to magnetic particle test to ensure freedom
     from cracks unless the welded areas are completely removed
     by subsequent machining.
     9.4 For annealed low alloy steels, ferritic stainless steels,
     and martensitic stainless steels, and also for austenitic and
     ferritic-austenitic stainless steels, the test specimen may be
     taken from any convenient location.
     9.5 Tension Tests:
     9.5.1 Low Alloy Steels and Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless
     Steels—One tension test shall be made for each heat in
     each heat treatment charge.
     9.5.1.1 When the heat-treating cycles are the same and the
     furnaces (either batch or continuous type) are controlled within
     625 °F [614 °C] and equipped with recording pyrometers so
     that complete records of heat treatment are available, then only
     one tension test from each heat of each forging type (see Note
     1) and section size is required, instead of one test from each
     heat in each heat-treatment charge.
     TABLE 1 Continued
     Grade Heat Treat Type Austenitizing/Solutioning
     Temperature, Minimum
     or Range, °F [°C]A
     Cooling
     Media
     Quenching Cool
     Below °F [°C]
     Tempering Temperature,
     Minimum or
     Range, °F [°C]
     F 317L solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 72 solution treat and quench 1975–2155 [1080–1180] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 73 solution treat and quench 1975–2155 [1080–1180] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 347 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 347H solution treat and quench 2000 [1095] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 347LN solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 348 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 348H solution treat and quench 2000 [1095] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 321 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 321H solution treat and quench 2000 [1095] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F XM-11 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F XM-19 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 20 solution treat and quench 1700-1850 [925-1010] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 44 solution treat and quench 2100 [1150] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 45 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 46 solution treat and quench 2010-2140 [1100-1140] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 47 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 48 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 49 solution treat and quench 2050 [1120] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 56 solution treat and quench 2050-2160 [1120-1180] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 58 solution treat and quench 2085 [1140] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 62 solution treat and quench 2025 [1105] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 63 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 64 solution treat and quench 2010-2140 [1100-1170] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 904L solution treat and quench 1920-2100 [1050-1150] liquidE 500 [260] B
     F 70 solution treat and quench 1900 [1040] liquidD 500 [260] B
     Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels
     F 50 solution treat and quench 1925 [1050] liquid 500 [260] B
     F 51 solution treat and quench 1870 [1020] liquid 500 [260] B
     F 52C liquid 500 [260] B
     F 53 solution treat and quench 1880 [1025] liquid 500 [260] B
     F 54 solution treat and quench 1920-2060 [1050-1125] liquid 500 [260] B
     F 55 solution treat and quench 2010-2085 [1100-1140] liquid 500 [260] B
     F 57 solution treat and quench 1940 [1060] liquid 175 [80] B
     F 59 solution treat and quench 1975-2050 [1080-1120] liquid 500 [260] B
     F 60 solution treat and quench 1870 [1020] liquid 500 [260] B
     F 61 solution treat and quench 1920-2060 [1050-1125] liquid 500 [260] B
     F 65 solution treat and quench 1830-2100 [1000-1150] liquidD 500 [260] B
     F 66 solution treat and quench 1870–1975 [1020–1080] liquid 500 [260] B
     F 67 solution treat and quench 1870–2050 [1020–1120] liquid 500 [260] B
     F 68 solution treat and quench 1700–1920 [925–1050] liquid 500 [260] B
     F 69 solution treat and quench 1870 [1020] liquid 500 [260] B
     F 71 solution treat and quench 1925–2100 [1050–1150] liquid 500 [260] B
     A Minimum unless temperature range is listed.
     B Not applicable.
     C Grade F 52 shall be solution treated at 1825 to 1875 °F [995 to 1025 °C] 30 min/in. of thickness and water quenched.
     DThe cooling media for Grades F 65 and F 70 shall be quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means.
     EForged or rolled bar meeting the requirements of 7.5 shall be liquid quenched or rapid-cooled by other means in accordance with Specification A484/A484M.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-182/SA-182M
     227
     TABLE 2 Chemical RequirementsA
     Grade/Identification
     Symbol
     UNS
     Designation
     Composition, %
     Carbon Manganese
     Phosphorus
     Sulfur Silicon Nickel Chromium Molybdenum
     Columbium
     Titanium
     Other
     Elements
     Low Alloy Steels
     F 1 K12822 0.28 0.60–0.90 0.045 0.045 0.15–0.35 … … 0.44–0.65 … … …
     F 2B K12122 0.05–0.21 0.30–0.80 0.040 0.040 0.10–0.60 … 0.50–0.81 0.44–0.65 … … …
     F 5C K41545 0.15 0.30–0.60 0.030 0.030 0.50 0.50 4.0–6.0 0.44–0.65 … … …
     F 5aC K42544 0.25 0.60 0.040 0.030 0.50 0.50 4.0–6.0 0.44–0.65 … … …
     F 9 K90941 0.15 0.30–0.60 0.030 0.030 0.50–1.00 … 8.0–10.0 0.90–1.10 … … …
     F 10 S33100 0.10–0.20 0.50–0.80 0.040 0.030 1.00–1.40 19.0–22.0 7.0–9.0 … … … …
     F 91 Type 1 K90901 0.08–0.12 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.010 0.20–0.50 0.40 8.0–9.5 0.85–1.05 0.06–0.10 … N 0.03–0.07
     Al 0.02D
     V 0.18–0.25
     Ti 0.01D
     Zr 0.01D
     F 91 Type 2 K90901
     Heat 0.08–0.12 0.30–0.50D 0.020D 0.005D 0.20–0.40D 0.20D 8.0–9.5D 0.85–1.05 0.06–0.10 0.01D N 0.035–0.070D
     Al 0.020D
     N/Al ratio, min
     4.0
     V Heat
     0.18–0.25
     V Prod
     0.16–0.27
     Zr 0.01D
     B 0.001D
     Cu 0.10D
     W 0.05D
     Sn 0.010D
     As 0.010D
     Sb 0.003D
     Product 0.07–0.13 0.80–1.05 0.05–0.11
     F 92 K92460 0.07–0.13 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.010 0.50 0.40 8.50–9.50 0.30–0.60 0.04–0.09 … V 0.15–0.25
     N
     0.030–0.070
     Al 0.02D
     W 1.50–2.00
     B
     0.001–0.006
     Ti 0.01D
     Zr 0.01D
     F 93 K91350 0.05–0.10 0.20–0.70 0.020 0.008 0.05–0.50 0.20 8.50–9.50 … … … V 0.15–0.30
     B 0.007–0.015
     Al 0.030
     W 2.5–3.5
     Co 2.5–3.5
     N 0.005–0.015
     Cb + Ta
     0.05–0.12
     Nd 0.010–0.06
     O 0.0050
     F 122 K91271 0.07–0.14 0.70 0.020 0.010 0.50 0.50 10.00–11.50 0.25–0.60 0.04–
     0.10
     … V 0.15–0.30
     B 0.005
     N 0.040–0.100
     Al 0.02D
     Cu 0.30–1.70
     W 1.50–2.50
     Ti 0.01D
     Zr 0.01D
     F 911 K91061 0.09–0.13 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.010 0.10–0.50 0.40 8.5–9.5 0.90–1.10 0.060–0.10 … W 0.90–1.10
     Al 0.02D
     N 0.04–0.09
     V 0.18–0.25
     B 0.0003–
     0.006
     Ti 0.01D
     Zr 0.01D
     F 11
     Class 1
     K11597 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.030 0.030 0.50–1.00 … 1.00–1.50 0.44–0.65 … … …
     F 11
     Class 2
     K11572 0.10–0.20 0.30–0.80 0.040 0.040 0.50–1.00 … 1.00–1.50 0.44–0.65 … … …
     F 11
     Class 3
     K11572 0.10–0.20 0.30–0.80 0.040 0.040 0.50–1.00 … 1.00–1.50 0.44–0.65 … … …
     F 12
     Class 1
     K11562 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.045 0.045 0.50 max … 0.80–1.25 0.44–0.65 … … …
     F 12
     Class 2
     K11564 0.10–0.20 0.30–0.80 0.040 0.040 0.10–0.60 … 0.80–1.25 0.44–0.65 … … …
     F 21 K31545 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.040 0.50 max … 2.7–3.3 0.80–1.06 … … …
     F 3V K31830 0.05–0.18 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.020 0.10 … 2.8–3.2 0.90–1.10 … 0.015–
     0.035
     V 0.20–0.30
     B
     0.001–0.003
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-182/SA-182M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     228
     TABLE 2 Continued
     Grade/Identification
     Symbol
     UNS
     Designation
     Composition, %
     Carbon Manganese
     Phosphorus
     Sulfur Silicon Nickel Chromium Molybdenum
     Columbium
     Titanium
     Other
     Elements
     F 3VCb K31390 0.10–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.010 0.10 0.25 2.7–3.3 0.90–1.10 0.015–0.0700.015 V 0.20–0.30
     Cu 0.25
     Ca 0.0005–
     0.0150
     F 22 K21590 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.040 0.50 … 2.00–2.50 0.87–1.13 … … …
     Class 1 …
     F 22 K21590 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.040 0.50 … 2.00–2.50 0.87–1.13 … … …
     Class 3
     F 22V K31835 0.11–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.015 0.010 0.10 0.25 2.00–2.50 0.90–1.10 0.07 0.030 Cu 0.20
     V 0.25–0.35
     B 0.002
     Ca 0.015E
     F 23 K41650 0.04–0.10 0.10–0.60 0.030 0.010 0.50 0.40 1.90–2.60 0.05–0.30 0.02–
     0.08
     0.005–
     0.060F
     V 0.20–0.30
     B 0.0010–
     0.006
     N 0.015F
     Al 0.030
     W 1.45–1.75
     F 24 K30736 0.05–0.10 0.30–0.70 0.020 0.010 0.15–0.45 … 2.20–2.60 0.90–1.10 … 0.06-0.10 V 0.20–0.30
     N 0.12
     Al 0.020
     B 0.0015–
     0.0070
     FR K22035 0.20 0.40–1.06 0.045 0.050 … 1.60–2.24 … … … … Cu 0.75–1.25
     F 36 K21001 0.10–0.17 0.80–1.20 0.030 0.025 0.25–0.50 1.00–1.30 0.30 0.25–0.50 0.015–0.045 N 0.020
     Al 0.050
     Cu 0.50–0.80
     V 0.02
     Martensitic Stainless Steels
     F 6a S41000 0.15 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 0.50 11.5–13.5 … … … …
     F 6b S41026 0.15 1.00 0.020 0.020 1.00 1.00–2.00 11.5–13.5 0.40–0.60 … … Cu 0.50
     F 6NM S41500 0.05 0.50–1.00 0.030 0.030 0.60 3.5–5.5 11.5–14.0 0.50–1.00 … … …
     Ferritic Stainless Steels
     F XM-
     27Cb
     S44627 0.010G 0.40 0.020 0.020 0.40 0.50G 25.0–27.5 0.75–1.50 0.05–0.20 … N 0.015G
     Cu 0.20G
     F 429 S42900 0.12 1.00 0.040 0.030 0.75 0.50 14.0–16.0 … … … …
     F 430 S43000 0.12 1.00 0.040 0.030 0.75 0.50 16.0–18.0 … … … …
     Austenitic Stainless Steels
     F 304 S30400 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 8.0–11.0 18.0–20.0 … … … N 0.10
     F 304H S30409 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 8.0–11.0 18.0–20.0 … … … …
     F 304L S30403 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 8.0–13.0 18.0–20.0 … … … N 0.10
     F 304N S30451 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 8.0–10.5 18.0–20.0 … … … N 0.10–0.16
     F 304LN S30453 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 8.0–10.5 18.0–20.0 … … … N 0.10–0.16
     F 309H S30909 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 12.0–15.0 22.0–24.0 … … … …
     F 310 S31000 0.25 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 19.0–22.0 24.0–26.0 … … … …
     F 310H S31009 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 19.0–22.0 24.0–26.0 … … … …
     F 310MoLN S31050 0.030 2.00 0.030 0.015 0.40 21.0–23.0 24.0–26.0 2.00–3.00 … … N 0.10–0.16
     F 316 S31600 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 10.0–14.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 … … N 0.10
     F 316H S31609 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 10.0–14.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 … … …
     F 316L S31603 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 10.0–15.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 … … N 0.10
     F 316N S31651 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 11.0–14.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 … … N 0.10–0.16
     F 316LN S31653 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 11.0–14.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 … … N 0.10–0.16
     F 316Ti S31635 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 10.0–14.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 … H N 0.10 max
     F 317 S31700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 11.0–15.0 18.0–20.0 3.0–4.0 … … …
     F 317L S31703 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 11.0–15.0 18.0–20.0 3.0–4.0 … … …
     F 72 S31727 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.030 1.00 14.5–16.5 17.5–19.0 3.8–4.5 … … Cu 2.8–4.0
     N 0.15–0.21
     F 70 S31730 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.010 1.00 15–16.5 17.0–19.0 3.0–4.0 … … Cu 4.0–5.0
     N 0.045
     F 73 S32053 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.010 1.00 24.0–28.0 22.0–24.0 5.0–6.0 … … N 0.17–0.22
     F 321 S32100 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–12.0 17.0–19.0 … … I …
     F 321H S32109 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–12.0 17.0–19.0 … … J …
     F 347 S34700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–13.0 17.0–20.0 … K … …
     F 347H S34709 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–13.0 17.0–20.0 … L … …
     F347LN S34751 0.005–0.020 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–13.0 17.0–19.0 … 0.20–0.50M … N 0.06–0.10
     F 348 S34800 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–13.0 17.0–20.0 … K … Co 0.20
     Ta 0.10
     F 348H S34809 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–13.0 17.0–20.0 … L … Co 0.20
     Ta 0.10
     F XM-11 S21904 0.040 8.0–10.0 0.060 0.030 1.00 5.5–7.5 19.0–21.5 … … … N 0.15–0.40
     F XM-19 S20910 0.06 4.0–6.0 0.040 0.030 1.00 11.5–13.5 20.5–23.5 1.50–3.00 0.10–
     0.30
     … N 0.20–0.40
     V 0.10–0.30
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-182/SA-182M
     229
     TABLE 2 Continued
     Grade/Identification
     Symbol
     UNS
     Designation
     Composition, %
     Carbon Manganese
     Phosphorus
     Sulfur Silicon Nickel Chromium Molybdenum
     Columbium
     Titanium
     Other
     Elements
     F 20 N08020 .07 2.00 0.045 0.035 1.00 32.0–38.0 19.0–21.0 2.00–3.00 8xCmin
     –1.00
     … Cu 3.0–4.0
     F 44 S31254 0.020 1.00 0.030 0.010 0.80 17.5–18.5 19.5–20.5 6.0–6.5 … … Cu 0.50–1.00
     N 0.18–0.25
     F 45 S30815 0.05–0.10 0.80 0.040 0.030 1.40–2.00 10.0–12.0 20.0–22.0 … … … N 0.14–0.20
     Ce 0.03–0.08
     F 46 S30600 0.018 2.00 0.020 0.020 3.7–4.3 14.0–15.5 17.0–18.5 0.20 … … Cu 0.50
     F 47 S31725 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 13.0–17.5 18.0–20.0 4.0–5.0 … … N 0.10
     F 48 S31726 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 13.5–17.5 17.0–20.0 4.0–5.0 … … N 0.10–0.20
     F 49 S34565 0.030 5.0–7.0 0.030 0.010 1.00 16.0–18.0 23.0–25.0 4.0–5.0 0.10 … N 0.40–0.60
     F 56 S33228 0.04–0.08 1.00 0.020 0.015 0.30 31.0–33.0 26.0–28.0 … 0.6–1.0 … Ce 0.05–0.10
     Al 0.025
     F 58 S31266 0.030 2.0–4.0 0.035 0.020 1.00 21.0–24.0 23.0–25.0 5.2–6.2 … … N 0.35–0.60
     Cu 1.00–2.50
     W 1.50–2.50
     F 62 N08367 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 23.5–25.5 20.0–22.0 6.0–7.0 … … N 0.18–0.25
     Cu 0.75
     F 63 S32615 0.07 2.00 0.045 0.030 4.8–6.0 19.0-22.0 16.5–19.5 0.30–1.50 … … Cu 1.50–2.50
     F 64 S30601 0.015 0.50–0.80 0.030 0.013 5.0–5.6 17.0–18.0 17.0–18.0 0.20 … … Cu 0.35, N 0.05
     F 904L N08904 0.020 2.0 0.040 0.030 1.00 23.0–28.0 19.0–23.0 4.0–5.0 … … Cu 1.00–2.00
     N 0.10
     Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels
     F 50 S31200 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 5.5–6.5 24.0–26.0 1.20–2.00 … … N 0.14–0.20
     F 51 S31803 0.030 2.00 0.030 0.020 1.00 4.5–6.5 21.0–23.0 2.5–3.5 … … N 0.08–0.20
     F 69 S32101 0.040 4.00–6.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 1.35–1.70 21.0–22.0 0.10–0.80 … … N 0.20–0.25
     Cu 0.10–0.80
     F 52 S32950 0.030 2.00 0.035 0.010 0.60 3.5–5.2 26.0–29.0 1.00–2.50 … … N 0.15–0.35
     F 53 S32750 0.030 1.20 0.035 0.020 0.80 6.0–8.0 24.0–26.0 3.0–5.0 … … N 0.24–0.32
     Cu 0.50
     F 54 S39274 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.020 0.80 6.0–8.0 24.0–26.0 2.5–3.5 … … N 0.24–0.32
     Cu 0.20–0.80
     W 1.50–2.50
     F 55 S32760 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.010 1.00 6.0–8.0 24.0–26.0 3.0–4.0 … … N 0.20–0.30
     Cu 0.50–1.00
     W 0.50–1.00N
     F 57 S39277 0.025 0.80 0.025 0.002 0.80 6.5–8.0 24.0–26.0 3.0–4.0 … … Cu 1.20–2.00
     W 0.80–1.20
     N 0.23–0.33
     F 59 S32520 0.030 1.50 0.035 0.020 0.80 5.5–8.0 24.0–26.0 3.0–5.0 … … N 0.20–0.35
     Cu 0.50–3.00
     F 60 S32205 0.030 2.00 0.030 0.020 1.00 4.5–6.5 22.0–23.0 3.0–3.5 … … N 0.14–0.20
     F 61 S32550 0.040 1.50 0.040 0.030 1.00 4.5–6.5 24.0–27.0 2.9–3.9 … … Cu 1.50–2.50
     N 0.10–0.25
     F 65 S32906 0.030 0.80–1.50 0.030 0.030 0.80 5.8–7.5 28.0–30.0 1.5–2.6 … … Cu 0.80
     N 0.30–0.40
     F 66 S32202 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.010 1.00 1.00–2.80 21.5–24.0 0.45 … … N 0.18–0.26
     F 67 S32506 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.015 0.90 5.5–7.2 24.0–26.0 3.0–3.5 … … N 0.08–0.20
     W 0.05–0.30
     F 68 S32304 0.030 2.50 0.040 0.030 1.00 3.0–5.5 21.5–24.5 0.05–0.60 … … N 0.05–0.20
     Cu 0.05–0.60
     F 71 S32808 0.030 1.10 0.030 0.010 0.50 7.0–8.2 27.0–27.9 0.80–1.2 … … N 0.30–0.40
     W 2.10–2.50
     AAll values are maximum unless otherwise stated. Where ellipses (…) appear in this table, there is no requirement and analysis for the element need not be determined
     or reported.
     BGrade F 2 was formerly assigned to the 1 % chromium, 0.5 % molybdenum grade which is now Grade F 12.
     CThe present grade F 5a (0.25 max carbon) previous to 1955 was assigned the identification symbol F 5. Identification symbol F 5 in 1955 was assigned to the 0.15 max
     carbon grade to be consistent with ASTM specifications for other products such as pipe, tubing, bolting, welding fittings, and the like.
     DApplies to both heat and product analyses.
     EFor Grade F22V, rare earth metals (REM) may be added in place of calcium, subject to agreement between the producer and the purchaser. In that case the total amount
     of REM shall be determined and reported.
     FThe ratio of Titanium to Nitrogen shall be $ 3.5. Alternatively, in lieu of this ratio limit, Grade F23 shall have a minimum hardness of 275 HV (26 HRC, 258 HBW) in the
     hardened condition (see 3.2.1). Hardness testing shall be performed in accordance with 9.6.3, and the hardness testing results shall be reported on the material test report
     (see 18.2.5).
     GGrade F XM-27Cb shall have a nickel plus copper content of 0.50 max %. Product analysis tolerance over the maximum specified limit for carbon and nitrogen shall be
     0.002 %.
     HGrade F 316Ti shall have a titanium content not less than five times the carbon plus nitrogen content and not more than 0.70 %.
     IGrade F 321 shall have a titanium content of not less than five times the carbon content and not more than 0.70 %.
     JGrade F 321H shall have a titanium content of not less than four times the carbon content and not more than 0.70 %.
     KGrades F 347 and F 348 shall have a columbium content of not less than ten times the carbon content and not more than 1.10 %.
     LGrades F 347H and F 348H shall have a columbium content of not less than eight times the carbon content and not more than 1.10 %.
     MGrade F347LN shall have a columbium content of not less than 15 times the carbon content.
     N% Cr + 3.3 × % Mo + 16 × % N = 40 min.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-182/SA-182M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     230
     NOTE 1—“Type” in this case is used to describe the forging shape such
     as a flange, ell, tee, and the like.
     9.5.2 Austenitic and Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steel
     Grades—One tension test shall be made for each heat.
     9.5.2.1 When heat treated in accordance with 7.1, the test
     blank or forging used to provide the test specimen shall be heat
     treated with a finished forged product.
     9.5.2.2 When the alternative method in 7.3.1 is used, the test
     blank or forging used to provide the test specimen shall be
     forged and quenched under the same processing conditions as
     the forgings they represent.
     9.5.3 Testing shall be performed as specified in Specification
     A961/A961M using the largest feasible of the round
     specimens.
     9.6 Hardness Tests:
     9.6.1 Except when only one forging is produced, a minimum
     of two pieces per batch or continuous run as defined in
     9.6.2 shall be hardness tested as specified in Specification
     A961/A961M to ensure that the forgings are within the
     hardness limits given for each grade in Table 3. The purchaser
     may verify that the requirement has been met by testing at any
     location on the forging provided such testing does not render
     the forging useless.
     9.6.2 When the reduced number of tension tests permitted
     by 9.5.1.1 is applied, additional hardness tests shall be made on
     forgings or samples, as defined in 9.2, scattered throughout the
     load (see Note 2). At least eight samples shall be checked from
     each batch load, and at least one check per hour shall be made
     from a continuous run. When the furnace batch is less than
     eight forgings, each forging shall be checked. If any check falls
     outside the prescribed limits, the entire lot of forgings shall be
     reheat treated and the requirements of 9.5.1 shall apply.
     NOTE 2—The tension test required in 9.5.1 is used to determine material
     capability and conformance in addition to verifying the adequacy of the
     heat-treatment cycle. Additional hardness tests in accordance with 9.6.2
     are required when 9.5.1.1 is applied to ensure the prescribed heat-treating
     cycle and uniformity throughout the load.
     9.6.3 When the alternative to the Ti/N ratio limit for F23 is
     applied, (see Note P in Table 2), a minimum of two pieces per
     batch or continuous run as defined in 9.6.2 shall be hardness
     tested, in the hardened condition (see 3.2.1), to ensure that the
     forgings are within the hardness limit given for F23 in Note P
     of Table 2. The test samples shall be taken at the mid thickness
     of the thickest section of the product. Testing shall be performed
     in accordance with the Test Method E92 or as specified
     in Specification A961/A961M.
     9.7 Notch Toughness Requirements—Grades F 3V, F 3VCb,
     and F 22V.
     9.7.1 Impact test specimens shall be Charpy V-notch Type.
     The usage of subsize specimens due to material limitations
     must have prior purchaser approval.
     9.7.2 The Charpy V-notch test specimens shall be obtained
     as required for tension tests in 9.2, 9.3, and 9.5. One set of three
     Charpy V-notch specimens shall be taken from each tensile
     specimen location.
     9.7.3 The longitudinal axis and mid-length of impact specimen
     shall be located similarly to the longitudinal axis of the
     tension test specimens. The axis of the notch shall be normal to
     the nearest heat-treated surface of the forging.
     9.7.4 The Charpy V-notch tests shall meet a minimum
     energy absorption value of 40 ft-lbf [54 J] average of three
     specimens. One specimen only in one set may be below 40
     ft-lbf [54 J], and it shall meet a minimum value of 35 ft-lbf [48
     J].
     9.7.5 The impact test temperature shall be 0 °F [-18 °C].
159. Grain Size for Austenitic Grades
     10.1 All H grades and grade F 63 shall be tested for average
     grain size by Test Methods E112.
     10.1.1 Grades F 304H, F 309H, F 310H, and F 316H shall
     have a grain size of ASTM No. 6 or coarser.
     10.1.2 Grades F 321H, F 347H, and F 348H shall have a
     grain size of ASTM No. 7 or coarser.
     10.1.3 Grade F 63 shall have a grain size of ASTM No. 3 or
     finer.
160. Corrosion Testing for Austenitic Grades and
     Detrimental Phase Detection in Austenitic/Ferritic
     Stainless Grades
     11.1 Corrosion testing is not required by this specification
     nor is detrimental phase detection.
     11.2 Austenitic grades shall be capable of meeting the
     intergranular corrosion test requirements described in Supplementary
     Requirement S4.
     11.3 Austenitic/Ferritic Stainless grades shall be capable of
     meeting the requirements described in Supplementary Requirement
     S12 if the subject grade is included in the specifications
     listed in Supplementary Requirement S12.
161. Retreatment
     12.1 If the results of the mechanical tests do not conform to
     the requirements specified, the manufacturer may reheat treat
     the forgings and repeat the tests specified in Section 9.
162. Nondestructive Test Requirements
     13.1 Hollow forgings of Grades F 91 Types 1 and 2, F 92,
     F 122, and F 911, NPS 4 [DIN 100] and larger, whose internal
     surfaces are not accessible to magnetic particle or liquid
     penetrant examination, shall be examined by an ultrasonic test
     in accordance with Practice A388/A388M.
     13.2 Hollow forgings of Grades F 91 Types 1 and 2, F 92,
     F 122, and F 911, NPS 4 [DIN 100] and larger, whose internal
     surfaces are accessible to magnetic particle or liquid penetrant
     examination, shall be examined on their internal surfaces by
     either a magnetic particle test in accordance with Practice
     A275/A275M, or by a liquid penetrant examination in accordance
     with Test Method E165/E165M, as applicable.
     13.3 Time of Examination:
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-182/SA-182M
     231
     TABLE 3 Tensile and Hardness RequirementsA
     Grade Symbol Tensile Strength,
     min, ksi [MPa]
     Yield Strength, min,
     ksi [MPa]B
     Elongation in 2 in.
     [50 mm] or 4D,
     min, %
     Reduction of
     Area, min, %
     Brinell Hardness
     Number, HBW,
     unless otherwise
     indicated
     Low Alloy Steels
     F 1 70 [485] 40 [275] 20 30 143–192
     F 2 70 [485] 40 [275] 20 30 143–192
     F 5 70 [485] 40 [275] 20 35 143–217
     F 5a 90 [620] 65 [450] 22 50 187–248
     F 9 85 [585] 55 [380] 20 40 179–217
     F 10 80 [550] 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 91 Types 1 and 2 90 [620] 60 [415] 20 40 190–248
     F 92 90 [620] 64 [440] 20 45 269 max
     F 93 90 [620] 64 [440] 19 40 250 max
     F 122 90 [620] 58 [400] 20 40 250 max
     F 911 90 [620] 64 [440] 18 40 187–248
     F 11 Class 1 60 [415] 30 [205] 20 45 121–174
     F 11 Class 2 70 [485] 40 [275] 20 30 143–207
     F 11 Class 3 75 [515] 45 [310] 20 30 156–207
     F 12 Class 1 60 [415] 32 [220] 20 45 121–174
     F 12 Class 2 70 [485] 40 [275] 20 30 143–207
     F 21 75 [515] 45 [310] 20 30 156–207
     F 3V, and F 3VCb 85–110 [585–760] 60 [415] 18 45 174–237
     F 22 Class 1 60 [415] 30 [205] 20 35 170 max
     F 22 Class 3 75 [515] 45 [310] 20 30 156–207
     F 22V 85–110 [585–780] 60 [415] 18 45 174–237
     F 23 74 [510] 58 [400] 20 40 220 max
     F 24 85 [585] 60 [415] 20 40 248 max
     FR 63 [435] 46 [315] 25 38 197 max
     F 36, Class 1 90 [620] 64 [440] 15 . . . 252 max
     F 36, Class 2 95.5 [660] 66.5 [460] 15 . . . 252 max
     Martensitic Stainless Steels
     F 6a Class 1 70 [485] 40 [275] 18 35 143–207
     F 6a Class 2 85 [585] 55 [380] 18 35 167–229
     F 6a Class 3 110 [760] 85 [585] 15 35 235–302
     F 6a Class 4 130 [895] 110 [760] 12 35 263–321
     F 6b 110–135 [760–930] 90 [620] 16 45 235–285
     F 6NM 115 [790] 90 [620] 15 45 295 max
     Ferritic Stainless Steels
     F XM-27Cb 60 [415] 35 [240] 20 45 190 max
     F 429 60 [415] 35 [240] 20 45 190 max
     F 430 60 [415] 35 [240] 20 45 190 max
     Austenitic Stainless Steels
     F 304 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 304H 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 304L 70 [485]D 25 [170] 30 50 . . .
     F 304N 80 [550] 35 [240] 30E 50F . . .
     F 304LN 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 309H 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 310 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 310MoLN 78 [540] 37 [255] 25 40 . . .
     F 310H 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 316 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 316H 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 316L 70 [485]D 25 [170] 30 50 . . .
     F 316N 80 [550] 35 [240] 30E 50F . . .
     F 316LN 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 316Ti 75 [515] 30 [205] 30 40 . . .
     F 317 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 317L 70 [485]D 25 [170] 30 50 . . .
     F 72 80 [550] 36 [245] 35 50 217
     F 73 93 [640] 43 [295] 40 50 217
     F 347 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 347H 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 347LN 75 [515] 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 348 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 348H 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 321 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F 321H 75 [515]C 30 [205] 30 50 . . .
     F XM-11 90 [620] 50 [345] 45 60 . . .
     F XM-19 100 [690] 55 [380] 35 55 . . .
     F 20 80 [550] 35 [240] 30 50 . . .
     F 44 94 [650] 44 [300] 35 50 . . .
     F 45 87 [600] 45 [310] 40 50 . . .
     F 46 78 [540] 35 [240] 40 50 . . .
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-182/SA-182M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     232
     13.3.1 Examination by one of the methods in 13.1 or 13.2,
     for specification acceptance, shall be performed after all
     mechanical processing and heat treatment. This requirement
     does not preclude additional testing at earlier stages in the
     processing.
     13.4 Evaluation of Imperfections Found by Ultrasonic Examination:
     13.4.1 Forgings producing a signal equal to or greater than
     the lowest signal produced by the reference discontinuities
     shall be identified and separated from the acceptable forgings.
     The area producing the signal may be reexamined.
     13.4.2 Such forgings shall be rejected if the test signals were
     produced by imperfections that cannot be identified or were
     produced by cracks or crack-like imperfections. Such forgings
     may be repaired. To be accepted, a repaired forging shall pass
     the same nondestructive test by which it was rejected, and it
     shall meet the minimum wall thickness requirements of this
     specification and the purchase order.
     13.4.3 If the test signals were produced by visual imperfections
     such as scratches, surface roughness, dings, tooling
     marks, cutting chips, steel die stamps, or stop marks, the
     forging is permitted to be accepted based upon visual examination
     provided that the depth of the imperfection is less than
     0.004 in. [0.1 mm] or 12.5 % of the specified wall thickness,
     whichever is the greater.
     13.5 Treatment of Imperfections Found by Magnetic Particle
     or Liquid Penetrant Examination:
     13.5.1 Defects shall be completely removed prior to weld
     repair by chipping or grinding to sound metal. Removal of
     these defects shall be verified by magnetic particle inspection
     in accordance with Test Method A275/A275M or by liquid
     penetrant inspection in accordance with Test Method E165/
     E165M.
     13.5.2 Rejected forgings may be reconditioned and retested,
     provided that the wall thickness is not decreased to less than
     that required by this specification and the purchase order. The
     outside diameter at the point of grinding may be reduced by the
     amount so removed. To be accepted, retested forgings shall
     meet the test requirement.
     13.5.3 If the imperfection is explored to the extent that it can
     be identified as non-rejectable, the forging may be accepted
     without further test provided that the imperfection does not
     encroach on the minimum required wall thickness.
     TABLE 3 Continued
     Grade Symbol Tensile Strength,
     min, ksi [MPa]
     Yield Strength, min,
     ksi [MPa]B
     Elongation in 2 in.
     [50 mm] or 4D,
     min, %
     Reduction of
     Area, min, %
     Brinell Hardness
     Number, HBW,
     unless otherwise
     indicated
     F 47 75 [525] 30 [205] 40 50 . . .
     F 48 80 [550] 35 [240] 40 50 . . .
     F 49 115 [795] 60 [415] 35 40 . . .
     F 56 73 [500] 27 [185] 30 35 . . .
     F 58 109 [750] 61 [420] 35 50 . . .
     F 62 95 [655] 45 [310] 30 50 . . .
     F 63 80 [550] 32 [220] 25 . . . 192 max
     F 64 90 [620] 40 [275] 35 50 217 max
     F70 70 [480] 25 [175] 35 . . . HRB 90 max
     F 904L 71 [490] 31 [215] 35 . . . . . .
     Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels
     F 50 100–130
     [690–900]
     65 [450] 25 50 . . .
     F 51 90 [620] 65 [450] 25 45 . . .
     F 52 100 [690] 70 [485] 15 . . . . . .
     F 53 116 [800] 80 [550] 15 . . . 310 max
     F 54 116 [800] 80 [550] 15 30 310 max
     F 55 109–130
     [750–895]
     80 [550] 25 45 . . .
     F 57 118 [820] 85 [585] 25 50 . . .
     F 59 112 [770] 80 [550] 25 40 . . .
     F 60 95 [655] 65 [450] 25 45 . . .
     F 61 109 [750] 80 [550] 25 50 . . .
     F 65 109 [750] 80 [550] 25 . . . . . .
     F 66 94 [650] 65 [450] 30 . . . 290 max
     F 67 90 [620] 65 [450] 18 . . . 302
     F 68 87 [600] 58 [400] 25 . . . 290 max
     F 69 94 [650] 65 [450] 30 . . . . . .
     F 71 101 [700] 72 [500] 15 . . . 321
     AWhere ellipses appear in this table, there is no requirement and the test for the value need neither be performed nor a value reported.
     B Determined by the 0.2 % offset method. For ferritic steels only, the 0.5 % extension-under-load method may also be used.
     C For sections over 5 in. [130 mm] in thickness, the minimum tensile strength shall be 70 ksi [485 MPa].
     D For sections over 5 in. [130 mm] in thickness, the minimum tensile strength shall be 65 ksi [450 MPa].
     E Longitudinal. The transverse elongation shall be 25 % in 2 in. or 50 mm, min.
     F Longitudinal. The transverse reduction of area shall be 45 % min.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-182/SA-182M
     233
163. Surface Finish, Appearance, and Corrosion
     Protection
     14.1 Forgings and finished parts shall conform to the
     requirements of Specification A961/A961M.
     14.2 The forgings and finished parts shall be free of scale,
     machining burrs which might hinder fit-up, and other injurious
     imperfections as defined herein. The forgings and finished parts
     shall have a workmanlike finish, and machined surfaces (other
     than surfaces having special requirements) shall have a surface
     finish not to exceed 250 AA (arithmetic average) roughness
     height.
164. Repair by Welding
     15.1 Weld repairs shall be permitted (see Supplementary
     Requirement S58 of Specification A961/A961M) at the discretion
     of the manufacturer with the following limitations and
     requirements:
     15.1.1 The welding procedure and welders shall be qualified
     in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and
     Pressure Vessel Code.
     15.1.2 The weld metal shall be deposited using the electrodes
     specified in Table 4 except as otherwise provided in
     Supplementary Requirement S5. The electrodes shall be purchased
     in accordance with AWS Specifications A5.4/A5.4M,
     A5.5/A5.5M, A5.9/A5.9M, A5.11/A5.11M, A5.14/A5.14M,
     A5.23/A5.23M, A5.28/A5.28M, or A5.29/A5.29M. The submerged
     arc process with neutral flux, the gas metal-arc process,
     the gas tungsten-arc process, and gas shielded processes using
     flux-core consumables, may be used.
     15.1.3 Defects shall be completely removed prior to welding
     by chipping or grinding to sound metal as verified by
     magnetic-particle inspection in accordance with Test Method
     A275/A275M for the low alloy steels and ferritic, martensitic,
     or ferritic-austenitic stainless steels, or by liquid-penetrant
     inspection in accordance with Test Method E165/E165M for
     all grades.
     15.1.4 After repair welding, the welded area shall be ground
     smooth to the original contour and shall be completely free of
     defects as verified by magnetic-particle or liquid-penetrant
     inspection, as applicable.
     15.1.5 The preheat, interpass temperature, and post-weld
     heat treatment requirements given in Table 4 shall be met.
     Austenitic stainless steel forgings may be repair-welded without
     the post-weld heat treatment of Table 4, provided purchaser
     approval is obtained prior to repair.
     15.1.6 Repair by welding shall not exceed 10 % of the
     surface area of the forging nor 331/3 % of the wall thickness of
     the finished forging or 3/8 in. [9.5 mm], whichever is less,
     without prior approval of the purchaser.
     15.1.7 When approval of the purchaser is obtained, the
     limitations set forth in 15.1.6 may be exceeded, but all other
     requirements of Section 15 shall apply.
     15.1.8 No weld repairs are permitted for F 6a Classes 3 and
     4.
     15.1.9 Post-weld heat treatment times for F 36 are: for Class
     1, up to 2 in. [50 mm] in thickness, 1 h per in. [25 mm], 15
     minutes minimum, and over 2 in. [50 mm], 15 minutes for each
     additional in. of thickness or fraction thereof; for Class 2, 1 h
     per in. [25 mm], 1/2 h minimum.
165. Inspection
     16.1 Inspection provisions of Specification A961/A961M
     apply.
166. Rejection and Rehearing
     17.1 The purchaser shall comply with the provisions of
     Specification A961/A961M.
167. Certification
     18.1 In addition to the certification requirements of Specification
     A961/A961M, test reports shall be furnished to the
     purchaser or his representative.
     18.2 Test reports shall provide the following where applicable:
     18.2.1 Type heat treatment, Section 7,
     18.2.2 Product analysis results, Section 8 of Specification
     A961/A961M,
     18.2.3 Tensile property results, Section 9 (Table 3), report
     the yield strength and tensile strength, in ksi [MPa], elongation
     and reduction in area, in percent,
     18.2.4 Chemical analysis results, Section 8 (Table 2), reported
     results shall be to the same number of significant figures
     as the limits specified in Table 2 for that element,
     18.2.5 Hardness results, Section 9 (Table 3, and for F23,
     Tables 2 and 3),
     18.2.6 Grain size results, Section 10, and
     18.2.7 Any supplementary testing required by the purchase
     order.
168. Product Marking
     19.1 In addition to the marking requirements of Specification
     A961/A961M, the following additional marking requirements
     shall apply:
     19.1.1 Quenched and tempered low alloy or martensitic
     stainless forgings shall be stamped with the letters QT following
     the specification designation.
     19.1.2 Forgings repaired by welding shall be marked with
     the letter “W” following the Specification designation. When
     repair-welded austenitic stainless steel forgings have not been
     postweld heat treated in accordance with Table 4, the letters
     “WNS” shall be marked following the specification designation.
     19.1.3 Parts meeting all requirements for more than one
     class or grade may be marked with more than one class or
     grade designation such as F 304/F 304H, F 304/F 304L, and the
     like.
     19.1.4 Plugs and bushings furnished to ASME B16.11
     requirements are not required to be marked.
     19.1.5 When agreed upon between the purchaser and
     manufacturer, and specified in the order, the markings shall be
     painted or stenciled on the fitting or stamped on a metal or
     plastic tag which shall be securely attached to the fitting.
     19.1.6 Grade F 91 shall be additionally marked with the
     appropriate Type.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-182/SA-182M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     234
     TABLE 4 Repair Welding Requirements
     Grade Symbol ElectrodesA Recommended Preheat and
     Interpass Temperature
     Range, °F [°C]
     Post Weld Heat-Treatment
     Temperature, Minimum or
     Range, °F [°C]
     Low Alloy Steels
     F 1 E 7018-A 1 200–400 [95–205] 1150 [620]
     F 2 E 8018-B 1 300–600 [150–315] 1150 [620]
     F 5 E80XX-B6, where XX can be
     15, 16, or 18
     400–700 [205–370] 1250 [675]
     F 5a E80XX-B6, where XX can be
     15, 16, or 18
     400–700 [205–370] 1250 [675]
     F 9 E80XX-B8, where XX can be
     15, 16, or 18
     400–700 [205–370] 1250 [675]
     F 10B . . . . . . . . .
     F 91 Types 1 and 2 . . .C 400–700 [205–370] 1350–1470 [730–800]
     F 92 . . .D 400–700 [205–370] 1350–1470 [730–800]
     F 93 . . .D 400–700 [205–370] 1350–1455 [730–790]
     F 122 . . .D 400–700 [205–370] 1350–1470 [730–800]
     F 911 . . .D 400–700 [205–370] 1365–1435 [740–780]
     F 11, Class 1, 2,
     and 3
     E 8018-B 2 300–600 [150–315] 1150 [620]
     F 12, Class 1 and 2 E 8018-B 2 300–600 [150–315] 1150 [620]
     F 21 E 9018-B 3 300–600 [150–315] 1250 [675]
     F 3V, and F 3VCb 3 % Cr, 1 % Mo, 1/4 % V-Ti 300–600 [150–315] 1250 [675]
     F 22 Class 1 E 9018-B 3 300–600 [150–315] 1250 [675]
     F 22 Class 3 E 9018-B 3 300–600 [150–315] 1250 [675]
     F 22V 2.25 % Cr, 1 % Mo, 0.25 %
     V-Cb
     300–600 [150–315] 1250 [675]
     F 23 2.25 % Cr, 1.6 % W, 0.25 %
     V-Mo-Cb-B
     300-600 [150–315] 1350–1470 [730–800]
     F 24 2.25 % Cr, 1 % Mo, 0.25 % V 200–400 [95–205]E 1350–1470 [730–800]E
     F 36, Class 1 1.15 Ni, 0.65 Cu, Mo, Cb 400–700 [205–370] 1100–1200 [595–650]
     F 36, Class 2 1.15 Ni, 0.65 Cu, Mo, Cb 400–700 [205–370] 1000–1150 [540–620]
     Martensitic Stainless Steels
     F 6a, Class 1 E 410-15 or 16 400–700 [205–370] 1250 [675]
     F 6a, Class 2 E 410-15 or 16 400–700 [205–370] 1250 [675]
     F 6b 13% Cr, 11/2% Ni, 1/2 % Mo 400–700 [205–370] 1150 [620]
     F 6NM 13 % Cr, 4 % Ni 300–700 [150–370] 1050 [565]
     Ferritic Stainless Steels
     F XM-27Cb 26 % Cr, 1 % Mo NRF NR
     F 429 E 430-16 400–700 [205–370] 1400 [760]
     F 430 E 430-16 NR 1400 [760]
     FR E 8018-C2 NR NR
     Austenitic Stainless Steels
     F 304 E 308-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQG
     F 304L E 308L-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 304H E 308-15 or 16H or E308H-XX NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 304N E 308-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 304LN E 308L-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 309H E 309-15 or 16H or E309H-XX NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 310 E 310-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 310H E 310-15 or 16H NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 310MoLN E 310Mo-15 or 16 NR 1920–2010 [1050–1100] + WQ
     F 316 E 316-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 316L E 316L-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 316H E 316-15 or 16H or E316H-XX NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 316N E 316-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 316LN E 316L-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 316Ti E 316-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 317 E 317-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 317L E 317L-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 72 . . . NR . . .
     F 73 . . . NR . . .
     F 321B E 347-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 321HB E 347-15 or 16H NR 1925 [1050] + WQ
     F 347 E 347-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 347H E 347-15 or 16H NR 1925 [1050] + WQ
     F 347LNI E 347-15 or 16 NR . . .
     E 348 E 347-15 or 16 NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 348H E 347-15 or 16H NR 1925 [1050] + WQ
     F XM-11 XM-10W NR NR
     F XM-19 XM-19W NR NR
     F 20 E/ER-320, 320LR NR 1700–1850 [925–1010] + WQ
     F 44 E NiCrMo-3 NR 2100 [1150] + WQ
     F 45B . . . . . . . . .
     F 46 . . . . . . . . .
     F 47 . . .J . . . 2100 [1150] + WQ
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-182/SA-182M
     235
     19.2 Bar Coding—In addition to the requirements in 19.1,
     bar coding is acceptable as a supplemental identification
     method. The purchaser may specify in the order a specific bar
     coding system to be used. The bar coding system, if applied at
     the discretion of the supplier, should be consistent with one of
     the published industry standards for bar coding. If used on
     small parts, the bar code may be applied to the box or a
     substantially applied tag.
169. Keywords
     20.1 austenitic stainless steel; chromium alloy steel;
     chromium-molybdenum steel; ferritic/austenitic stainless steel;
     ferritic stainless steel; martensitic stainless steel; nickel alloy
     steel; notch toughness requirements; pipe fittings; piping applications;
     pressure containing parts; stainless steel fittings;
     stainless steel forgings; steel; steel flanges; steel forgings,
     alloy; steel valves; temperature service applications, elevated;
     temperature service applications, high; wrought material
     TABLE 4 Continued
     Grade Symbol ElectrodesA Recommended Preheat and
     Interpass Temperature
     Range, °F [°C]
     Post Weld Heat-Treatment
     Temperature, Minimum or
     Range, °F [°C]
     F 48 . . .J . . . 2100 [1150] + WQ
     F 49 . . .J . . . 2100 [1150] + WQ
     F 58 E NiCrMo-10 . . . 2100 [1150] + WQ
     F 62 E NiCrMo-3 NR 2025 [1105] + WQ
     F 70 ERNiCr-3, or ERNiCrMo-3, or
     ERNiCrMo-4
     NR 1900 [1040] + WQ
     F 904L E NiCrMo-3 NR 1920–2100 [1050–1150] + WQ
     Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels
     F 50 25 % Cr, 6 % Ni, 1.7 % Mo NR NR
     F 51 22 % Cr, 5.5 % Ni, 3 % Mo NR NR
     F 52 26 % Cr, 8 % Ni, 2 % Mo NR NR
     F 53 25 % Cr, 7 % Ni, 4 % Mo NR NR
     F 54 25 % Cr, 7 % Ni, 3 % Mo,
     W
     NR NR
     F 55 25 % Cr, 7 % Ni, 3.5 % Mo NR NR
     F 57 25 % Cr, 7 % Ni, 3 % Mo, 1.5 %
     Cu, 1 % W
     NR NR
     F 59 E Ni CrMo-10 NR NR
     F 60 22 % Cr, 5.5 % Ni, 3 % Mo NR NR
     F 61 26 % Cr, 9 % Ni, 3.5 % Mo NR NR
     F 65 29 % Cr, 6.5 % Ni, 2 % Mo NR NR
     F 66 22 % Cr, 2 % Ni, 0.25 % Mo NR NR
     F 67 . . . NR NR
     F 68 . . . NR NR
     F 69 . . . NR NR
     F 71 27.5 Cr, 7.6 Ni, 1 Mo, 2.3 W NR NR
     A Except for Grades F 91 Types 1 and 2, F 92, F 93, F 911, F 122, F 47, F 48, and F 49, electrodes shall comply with AWS Specifications A5.4/A5.4M, A5.5/A5.5M,
     A5.9/A5.9M, A5.11/A5.11M, A5.14/A5.14M, A5.23/A5.23M, or A5.28/A5.28M.
     B Purchaser approval required.
     C All repairs in F 91 Types 1 and 2 shall be made with one of the following welding processes and consumables: SMAW, A5.5/A5.5M E90XX-B9; SAW, A5.23/A5.23M EB9

• flux; GTAW, A5.28/A5.28M ER90S-B9; and FCAW, A5.29/A5.29M E91T1-B9. In addition, the sum of the Ni+Mn content of all welding consumables shall not exceed
  1.0 %.
  D All repairs in F 92, F 93, F 911, and F 122, shall be made using welding consumables meeting the chemical requirements for the grade in Table 2.
  E Preheat and PWHT are not required for this grade for forgings whose section thickness does not exceed 0.500 in. [12.7 mm].
  F NR = not required.
  G WQ = water quench.
  H Filler metal shall additionally have 0.04 % minimum carbon.
  IMatching filler metal is available.
  J Match filler metal is available. Fabricators have also used AWS A5.14/A5.14M, Classification ERNiCrMo-3 and AWS A5.11/A5.11M, Class E, ENiCrMo-3 filler metals.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-182/SA-182M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  236
  SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
  In addition to any of the supplementary requirements of Specification A961/A961M, the following
  supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the order.
  S1. Macroetch Test
  S1.1 A sample forging shall be sectioned and etched to
  show flow lines and internal imperfections. The test shall be
  conducted according to Test Method E340. Details of the test
  shall be agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
  purchaser.
  S2. Heat Treatment Details
  S2.1 The manufacturer shall furnish a detailed test report
  containing the information required in 18.2 and shall include
  all pertinent details of the heat-treating cycle given the forgings.
  S3. Material for Optimum Resistance to Stress-Corrosion
  Cracking
  S3.1 Austenitic stainless steel shall be furnished in the
  solution-annealed condition as a final operation with no subsequent
  cold working permitted, except, unless specifically
  prohibited by the purchaser, straightening of bars from which
  parts are machined is permitted to meet the requirements of
  Specification A484/A484M.
  S4. Corrosion Tests
  S4.1 All austenitic stainless steels shall pass intergranular
  corrosion tests performed in accordance with Practice E of
  Practices A262.
  S4.2 Intergranular corrosion tests shall be performed on
  specimens of ferritic stainless steels as described in Practices
  A763.
  S4.3 For both the austenitic and ferritic stainless steels,
  details concerning the number of specimens and their source
  and location are to be a matter of agreement between the
  manufacturer and the purchaser.
  S5. Special Filler Metal
  S5.1 In repair-welded F 316, F 316L, F 316H, and F 316N
  forgings, the deposited weld metal shall conform to E 308
  composition wire. Forgings repair welded with E 308 weld
  metal shall be marked F __ W 308.
  S6. Hardness Test
  S6.1 Each forging shall be hardness tested and shall meet
  the requirements of Table 3.
  S8. Heat Treatment of Austenitic Forgings
  S8.1 The purchaser shall specify the heat-treatment method
  (in 7.1 or in 7.3.1) that shall be employed.
  S8.2 The manufacturer shall provide a test report containing
  the information required in 18.2 and shall include a statement
  of the heat-treatment method employed.
  S9. Grain Size for Austenitic Grades
  S9.1 Forgings made from austenitic grades other than H
  grades shall be tested for average grain size by Test Method
  E112. Details of the test shall be agreed upon between the
  manufacturer and the purchaser.
  S10. Stabilizing Treatment
  S10.1 Subsequent to the solution anneal for Grades F 321, F
  321H, F 347, F 347H, F 348, and F 348H, these grades shall be
  given a stabilizing treatment at 1500 to 1600 °F [815 to 870
  °C] for a minimum of 2 h/in. [4.7 min/mm] of thickness and
  then cooling in the furnace or in air. In addition to the marking
  required in Section 19, the grade designation symbol shall be
  followed by the symbol “S10.”
  S11. Grain Size Requirements for Non-H-Grade Austenitic
  Steels Used Above 1000 °F [540 °C]
  S11.1 Non-H grades of austenitic stainless steels shall have
  a grain size of No. 7 or coarser as determined in accordance
  with Test Methods E112. The grain size so determined shall be
  on a certified test report.
  S12. Detection of Detrimental Phases in Austenitic/Ferritic
  Stainless Steels
  S12.1 All austenitic/ferritic stainless steels that are included
  in Test Methods A923 shall meet the requirements of those test
  methods.
  S12.2 All austenitic/ferritic stainless steels that are included
  in Test Method A1084 shall meet the requirements of that test
  method.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL
  BOILER TUBES FOR HIGH-PRESSURE SERVICE
  SA-192/SA-192M
  (Identical with ASTM Specification A192/A192M-91.)
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-192/SA-192M
  237
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-192/SA-192M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  238
  SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL
  BOILER TUBES FOR HIGH-PRESSURE SERVICE
  SA-192/SA-192M
  (Identical with ASTM Specification A 192/A 192M-91.)

12. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers minimum-wall thickness,
    seamless carbon steel boiler and superheater tubes for highpressure
    service.
    1.2 The tubing sizes and thicknesses usually furnished
    to this specification are 1/2 in. to 7 in. [12.7 to 177.8 mm]
    outside diameter and 0.085 to 1.000 in. [2.2 to 25.4 mm],
    inclusive, in minimum wall thickness. Tubing having other
    dimensions may be furnished, provided such tubes comply
    with all other requirements of this specification.
    1.3 Mechanical property requirements do not apply to
    tubing smaller than 1/8 in [3.2 mm] inside diameter or
    0.015 in. [0.4 mm] thickness.
    1.4 When these products are to be used in applications
    conforming to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction,
    the requirements of Specification A 520 shall supplement
    and supersede the requirements of this specification.
    1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
    units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
    text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
    in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
    system must be used independently of the other. Combining
    values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
    with the specification. The inch-pound units shall apply
    unless the “M” designation of this specification is specified
    in the order.
13. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A 450/A 450M Specification for General Requirements
    for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel
    Tubes
    A 520 Specification for Supplementary Requirements for
    Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel
    Tubular Products for High-Temperature Service Conforming
    to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction
14. General Requirements
    3.1 Material furnished under this specification shall
    conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition
    of Specification A 450/A 450M, unless otherwise provided
    herein.
15. Ordering Information
    4.1 Orders for material under this specification should
    include the following, as required, to described the desired
    material adequately:
    4.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
    4.1.2 Name of material (seamless tubes),
    4.1.3 Manufacture (hot-finished or cold-drawn),
    4.1.4 Size (outside diameter and minimum wall
    thickness),
    4.1.5 Length (specific or random),
    4.1.6 Optional Requirements (Section 8),
    4.1.7 Test report required (see section on Certification
    of Specification A 450/A 450M),
    4.1.8 Specification designation, and
    4.1.9 Special requirements.
16. Manufacture
    5.1 Tubes shall be made by the seamless process and
    shall be either hot-finished or cold-finished, as specified.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-192/SA-192M
    239
17. Heat Treatment
    6.1 Hot-finished tubes need not be heat treated. Coldfinished
    tubes shall be heat treated after the final coldfinished
    at a temperature of 1200°F [650°C] or higher.
18. Chemical Composition
    7.1 The steel shall conform to the following requirements
    as to chemical composition:
    Carbon, % 0.06–0.18
    Manganese, % 0.27–0.63
    Phosphorus, max 0.035
    Sulfur, max, % 0.035
    Silicon, max, % 0.25
    7.2 Supplying an alloy grade of steel that specifically
    requires the addition of any element other than those listed
    in 7.1 is not permitted.
19. Product Analysis
    8.1 When requested on the purchase order, a product
    analysis shall be made by the supplier from one tube per
    100 pieces for sizes over 3 in. [76.2 mm] and one tube
    per 250 pieces for sizes 3 in. [76.2 mm] and under; or
    when tubes are identified by heat, one tube per heat shall
    be analyzed. The chemical composition thus determined
    shall conform to the requirements specified.
    8.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests
    of two additional billets or tubes shall be made. Both
    retests, for the elements in question shall meet the requirements
    of the specification; otherwise all remaining material
    in the heat or lot (see Note) shall be rejected or, at the
    option of the producer, each billet or tube may be individually
    tested for acceptance. Billets or tubes which do not
    meet the requirements of the specification shall be rejected.
    NOTE —A lot consists of 250 tubes for sizes 3 in. [76.2 mm] and under
    and of 100 tubes for sizes over 3 in. [76.2 mm], prior to cutting to length.
20. Hardness Requirements
    9.1 The tubes shall have a hardness number not
    exceeding the following:
    Brinell Hardness Number Rockwell Hardness
    (Tubes 0.200 in. [5.1 Number (Tubes less than
    mm] and over in wall 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] in
    thickness) wall thickness)
    137 HB 77 HRB
21. Mechanical Tests Required
    10.1 Flattening Test—One flattening test shall be made
    on specimens from each of two tubes selected from each
    lot (see Note) or fraction thereof.
    10.2 Flaring Test — One flaring test shall be made on
    specimens from each end of two tubes selected from each
    lot (see Note) or fraction thereof. These tubes shall be
    selected apart from those used for the flattening test.
    10.3 Hardness Test — Brinell or Rockwell hardness
    tests shall be made on specimens from two tubes from
    each lot. The term lot applies to all tubes prior to cutting,
    of the same nominal diameter and wall thickness which
    are produced from the same heat of steel. When final heat
    treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot shall include
    only those tubes of the same size and the same heat which
    are heat treated in the same furnace charge. When the final
    heat treatment is in a continuous furnace, a lot shall include
    all tubes of the same size and heat, heat treated in the same
    furnace at the same temperature, time at heat, and furnace
    speed.
    10.4 Hydrostatic Test — Each tube shall be subjected
    to the hydrostatic pressure test, or instead of this test, a
    nondestructive test may be used when specified by the
    purchaser.
22. Forming Operations
    11.1 Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand
    expanding and beading without showing cracks or flaws.
    Superheater tubes when properly manipulated shall stand
    all forging, welding, and bending operations necessary for
    application without developing defects.
23. Product Marking
    12.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
    A 450/A 450M, the marking shall indicate whether
    the tube is hot finished or cold finished.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-192/SA-192M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    240
    EXPLANATORY NOTE
    NOTE — For purposes of design, the following tensile properties may be assumed:
    Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa] 47 [325]
    Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa] 26 [180]
    Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % 35
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR ALLOY-STEEL AND STAINLESS
    STEEL BOLTING FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE OR HIGH
    PRESSURE SERVICE AND OTHER SPECIAL PURPOSE
    APPLICATIONS
    SA-193/SA-193M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A193/A193M-12b.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-193/SA-193M
    241
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-193/SA-193M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    242
    Standard Specification for
    Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature
    or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose
    Applications
24. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers alloy and stainless steel bolting
    for pressure vessels, valves, flanges, and fittings for high
    temperature or high pressure service, or other special purpose
    applications. See Specification A962/A962M for the definition
    of bolting. Bars and wire shall be hot-wrought and may be
    further processed by centerless grinding or by cold drawing.
    Austenitic stainless steel may be carbide solution treated or
    carbide solution treated and strain-hardened. When strain
    hardened austenitic steel is ordered, the purchaser should take
    special care to ensure that Appendix X1 is thoroughly understood.
    1.2 Several grades are covered, including ferritic steels and
    austenitic stainless steels designated B5, B8, and so forth.
    Selection will depend upon design, service conditions, mechanical
    properties, and high temperature characteristics.
    1.3 The following referenced general requirements are indispensable
    for application of this specification: Specification
    A962/A962M.
    NOTE 1—The committee formulating this specification has included
    several steel types that have been rather extensively used for the present
    purpose. Other compositions will be considered for inclusion by the
    committee from time to time as the need becomes apparent.
    NOTE 2—For grades of alloy-steel bolting suitable for use at the lower
    range of high temperature applications, reference should be made to
    Specification A354.
    NOTE 3—For grades of alloy-steel bolting suitable for use in low
    temperature applications, reference should be made to Specification
    A320/A320M.
    1.4 Nuts for use with bolting are covered in Section 13.
    1.5 Supplementary Requirements are provided for use at the
    option of the purchaser. The supplementary requirements shall
    apply only when specified in the purchase order or contract.
    1.6 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound units
    and in SI units; however, unless the purchase order or contract
    specifies the applicable M specification designation (SI units),
    the inch-pound units shall apply.
    1.7 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
    shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
    from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the
    standard.
25. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A153/A153M Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on
    Iron and Steel Hardware
    A194/A194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
    for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service,
    or Both
    A320/A320M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless
    Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature Service
    A354 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel
    Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners
    A788/A788M Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements
    A962/A962M Specification for Common Requirements for
    Bolting Intended for Use at Any Temperature from Cryogenic
    to the Creep Range
    B633 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on
    Iron and Steel
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-193/SA-193M
    243
    B695 Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited
    on Iron and Steel
    B696 Specification for Coatings of Cadmium Mechanically
    Deposited
    B766 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium
    E18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness of Metallic Materials
    E21 Test Methods for Elevated Temperature Tension Tests of
    Metallic Materials
    E112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
    E139 Test Methods for Conducting Creep, Creep-Rupture,
    and Stress-Rupture Tests of Metallic Materials
    E150 Recommended Practice for Conducting Creep and
    Creep-Rupture Tension Tests of Metallic Materials Under
    Conditions of Rapid Heating and Short Times (Withdrawn
    1984)
    E151 Recommended Practice for Tension Tests of Metallic
    Materials at Elevated Temperatures with Rapid Heating
    and Conventional or Rapid Strain Rates (Withdrawn
    1984)
    E292 Test Methods for Conducting Time-for-Rupture Notch
    Tension Tests of Materials
    E328 Test Methods for Stress Relaxation for Materials and
    Structures
    E566 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Sorting
    of Ferrous Metals
    E709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing
    F606 Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical Properties
    of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners,
    Washers, Direct Tension Indicators, and Rivets
    F1940 Test Method for Process Control Verification to
    Prevent Hydrogen Embrittlement in Plated or Coated
    Fasteners
    F1941 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings on
    Threaded Fasteners (Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN/
    UNR))
    F2329 Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements
    for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts,
    Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners
    2.2 ASME Standards:
    B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws
    B18.2.3.3M Metric Heavy Hex Screws
    B18.3 Hexagon Socket and Spline Socket Screws
    B18.3.1M Metric Socket Head Cap Screws
    2.3 AIAG Standard:
    AIAG B-5 02.00 Primary Metals Identification Tag Application
    Standard
26. General Requirements and Ordering Information
    3.1 The inquiry and orders shall include the following, as
    required, to describe the desired material adequately:
    3.1.1 Heat-treated condition (that is carbide solution treated
    (Class 1), carbide solution treated after finishing (Class 1A),
    and carbide solution treated and strain-hardened (Classes 2, 2B
    and 2C), for the austenitic stainless steels; Classes 1B and 1C
    apply to the carbide solution-treated nitrogen-bearing stainless
    steels; Class 1D applies to material carbide solution treated by
    cooling rapidly from the rolling temperature),
    3.1.2 Description of items required (that is, bars, bolts,
    screws, or studs),
    3.1.3 Nuts, if required by purchaser, in accordance with
    13.1,
    3.1.4 Supplementary requirements, if any, and
    3.1.5 Special requirements, in accordance with 6.1.5.1,
    6.2.6, 8.1, and 13.1.
    3.2 Coatings—Coatings are prohibited unless specified by
    the purchaser (See Supplementary Requirements S13 and S14).
    When coated fasteners are ordered the purchaser should take
    special care to ensure that Appendix X2 is thoroughly understood.
27. Common Requirements
    4.1 Bolting supplied to this specification shall conform to
    the requirements of Specification A962/A962M. These requirements
    include test methods, finish, thread dimensions,
    macroetch (alloy steels only), marking, certification, optional
    supplementary requirements, and others. Failure to comply
    with the requirements of Specification A962/A962M constitutes
    nonconformance with this specification. In case of conflict
    between this specification and Specification A962/
    A962M, this specification shall prevail.
28. Manufacture (Process)
    5.1 The steel shall be produced by any of the following
    processes: open-hearth, basic-oxygen, electric-furnace, or
    vacuum-induction melting (VIM). The molten steel may be
    vacuum-treated prior to or during pouring of the ingot or strand
    casting.
    5.2 Quality—See Specification A962/A962M for requirements.
29. Heat Treatment
    6.1 Ferritic Steels
    6.1.1 Ferritic steels shall be allowed to cool to a temperature
    below the cooling transformation range immediately after
    rolling or forging. Materials shall then be uniformly reheated to
    the proper temperature to refine the grain (a group thus
    reheated being known as a quenching charge), quenched in a
    liquid medium under substantially uniform conditions for each
    quenching charge, and tempered. The minimum tempering
    temperature shall be as specified in Tables 2 and 3.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-193/SA-193M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    244
    TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements (Composition, percent)A
    Type . . . . . . . . . Ferritic Steels
    Grade . . . . . . . . B5 B6 and B6X
    Description. . . . . . . . 5% Chromium 12 % Chromium
    UNS Designation . . . . . . . . S41000 (410)
    Range Product Variation, Range Product Variation
    Over or UnderB Over or UnderB
    Carbon 0.10 min 0.01 under 0.08–0.15 0.01 over
    Manganese, max 1.00 0.03 over 1.00 0.03 over
    Phosphorus, max 0.040 0.005 over 0.040 0.005 over
    Sulfur, max 0.030 0.005 over 0.030 0.005 over
    Silicon 1.00 max 0.05 over 1.00 max 0.05 over
    Chromium 4.0–6.0 0.10 11.5–13.5 0.15
    Molybdenum 0.40–0.65 0.05 . . . . . .
    Type . . . . . . . . . . Ferritic Steels
    Grade . . . . . . B7, B7M B16
    Description . . . . . . . . . Chromium-MolybdenumC Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium
    Product Variation, Product Variation,
    Range Over or UnderB Range Over or UnderB
    Carbon 0.37–0.49D 0.02 0.36–0.47 0.02
    Manganese 0.65–1.10 0.04 0.45–0.70 0.03
    Phosphorus, max 0.035 0.005 over 0.035 0.005 over
    Sulfur, max 0.040 0.005 over 0.040 0.005 over
    Silicon 0.15–0.35 0.02 0.15–0.35 0.02
    Chromium 0.75–1.20 0.05 0.80–1.15 0.05
    Molybdenum 0.15–0.25 0.02 0.50–0.65 0.03
    Vanadium . . . . . . 0.25–0.35 0.03
    Aluminum, max %E . . . . . . 0.015 . . .
    Type Austenitic Steels,F Classes 1, 1A, 1D, and 2†
    Grade . . B8, B8A B8C, B8CA B8M, B8MA, B8M2, B8M3 B8P, B8PA
    UNS Designation . . . . . . S30400 (304) S34700 (347) S31600 (316) S30500
    Range
    Product Variation,
    Over or UnderB Range
    Product Variation,
    Over or UnderB Range
    Product Variation,
    Over or UnderB Range
    Product Variation,
    Over or UnderB
    Carbon, max 0.08 0.01 over 0.08 0.01 over 0.08 0.01 over 0.12 0.01 over
    Manganese, max 2.00 0.04 over 2.00 0.04 over 2.00 0.04 over 2.00 0.04 over
    Phosphorus, max 0.045 0.010 over 0.045 0.010 over 0.045 0.010 over 0.045 0.010 over
    Sulfur, max 0.030 0.005 over 0.030 0.005 over 0.030 0.005 over 0.030 0.005 over
    Silicon, max 1.00 0.05 over 1.00 0.05 over 1.00 0.05 over 1.00 0.05 over
    Chromium 18.0–20.0 0.20 17.0–19.0 0.20 16.0–18.0 0.20 17.0–19.0 0.20
    Nickel 8.0–11.0 0.15 9.0–12.0 0.15 10.0–14.0 0.15 11.0–13.0 0.15
    Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.00–3.00 0.10 . . . . . .
    Columbium + . . . . . . 10 x carbon 0.05 under . . . . . . . . . . . .
    tantalum content, min;
    1.10 max
    Type . . . . . . . . . . Austenitic Steels,F Classes 1A, 1B, 1D, and 2
    Grade . . . . . B8N, B8NA B8MN, B8MNA B8MLCuN, B8MLCuNA
    UNS Designation . .
    . . . . . . . .
    S30451 (304N) S31651 (316N) S31254
    Range
    Product
    Variation,
    Over or UnderB
    Range
    Product Variation,
    Over or UnderB
    Range Product Variation,
    Over or UnderB
    Carbon, max 0.08 0.01 over 0.08 0.01 over 0.020 0.005 over
    Manganese, max 2.00 0.04 over 2.00 0.04 over 1.00 0.03 over
    Phosphorus, max 0.045 0.010 over 0.045 0.010 over 0.030 0.005 over
    Sulfur, max 0.030 0.005 over 0.030 0.005 over 0.010 0.002 over
    Silicon, max 1.00 0.05 over 1.00 0.05 over 0.80 0.05 over
    Chromium 18.0–20.0 0.20 16.0–18.0 0.20 19.5–20.5 0.20
    Nickel 8.0–11.0 0.15 10.0–13.0 0.15 17.5–18.5 0.15
    Molybdenum . . . . . . 2.00–3.00 0.10 6.0–6.5 0.10
    Nitrogen 0.10–0.16 0.01 0.10–0.16 0.01 0.18–0.22 0.02
    Copper . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.50–1.00 . . .
    Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Austenitic SteelsF , Classes 1, 1A, and 2
    Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B8T, B8TA
    UNS Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S32100 (321)
    Range
    Product Variation,
    Over or UnderB
    Carbon, max 0.08 0.01 over
    Manganese, max 2.00 0.04 over
    Phosphorus, max 0.045 0.010 over
    Sulfur, max 0.030 0.005 over
    Silicon, max 1.00 0.05 over
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-193/SA-193M
    245
    TABLE 1 Continued
    Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Austenitic SteelsF , Classes 1, 1A, and 2
    Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B8T, B8TA
    UNS Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S32100 (321)
    Range
    Product Variation,
    Over or UnderB
    Chromium 17.0–19.0 0.20
    Nickel 9.0–12.0 0.15
    Titanium 5 x (C + N) min, 0.70 max 0.05 under
    Nitrogen 0.10 max . . .
    Type Austenitic SteelsF , Classes 1C and 1D
    Grade B8R, B8RA B8S, B8SA
    UNS Designation S20910 S21800
    Range
    Product Variation,
    Over or UnderB Range
    Product Variation,
    Over or UnderB
    Carbon, max 0.06 0.01 over 0.10 0.01 over
    Manganese 4.0–6.0 0.05 7.0–9.0 0.06
    Phosphorus, max 0.045 0.005 over 0.060 0.005 over
    Sulfur, max 0.030 0.005 over 0.030 0.005 over
    Silicon 1.00 max 0.05 over 3.5–4.5 0.15
    Chromium 20.5–23.5 0.25 16.0–18.0 0.20
    Nickel 11.5–13.5 0.15 8.0–9.0 0.10
    Molybdenum 1.50–3.00 0.10 . . . . . .
    Nitrogen 0.20–0.40 0.02 0.08–0.18 0.01
    Columbium + tantalum 0.10–0.30 0.05 . . . . . .
    Vanadium 0.10–0.30 0.02 . . . . . .
    Type Austenitic SteelsF , Classes 1, 1A and 1D
    Grade B8LN, B8LNA B8MLN, B8MLNA
    UNS Designation S30453 S31653
    Range
    Product Variation,
    Over or UnderB Range
    Product Variation,
    Over or UnderB
    Carbon, max 0.030 0.005 over 0.030 0.005 over
    Manganese 2.00 0.04 over 2.00 0.04 over
    Phosphorus, max 0.045 0.010 over 0.045 0.010 over
    Sulfur, max 0.030 0.005 over 0.030 0.005 over
    Silicon 1.00 0.05 over 1.00 0.05 over
    Chromium 18.0–20.0 0.20 16.0–18.0 0.20
    Nickel 8.0–11.0 0.15 10.0–13.0 0.15
    Molybdenum . . . . . . 2.00–3.00 0.10
    Nitrogen 0.10–0.16 0.01 0.10–0.16 0.01
    Type Austenitic SteelsF , Classes 1, 1A and 1D
    Grade B8CLN, B8CLNA
    UNS Designation S34751 (347LN)
    Range
    Product Variation,
    Over or UnderB
    Carbon, max 0.005–0.020 0.002 under,
    0.005 over
    Manganese, max 2.00 0.04 over
    Phosphorus, max 0.045 0.01 over
    Sulfur, max 0.030 0.005 over
    Silicon, max 1.00 0.05 over
    Chromium 17.0–19.0 0.20
    Nickel 9.0–13.0 0.15
    Columbium 0.20–0.50,
    15 x carbon content, min
    0.05
    Nitrogen 0.06–0.10 0.01
    A The intentional addition of Bi, Se, Te, and Pb is not permitted.
    B Product analysis—Individual determinations sometimes vary from the specified limits on ranges as shown in the tables. The several determinations of any individual
    element in a heat may not vary both above and below the specified range.
    C Typical steel compositions used for this grade include 4140, 4142, 4145, 4140H, 4142H, and 4145H.
    D For bar sizes over 31/2 in. [90 mm], inclusive, the carbon content may be 0.50 %, max. For the B7M grade, a minimum carbon content of 0.28 % is permitted, provided
    that the required tensile properties are met in the section sizes involved; the use of AISI 4130 or 4130H is allowed.
    E Total of soluble and insoluble.
    F Classes 1 and 1D are solution treated. Classes 1, 1B, and some 1C (B8R and B8S) products are made from solution treated material. Class 1A (B8A, B8CA, B8CLN,
    B8MA, B8PA, B8TA, B8LNA, B8MLNA, B8NA, and B8MNA) and some Class 1C (B9RA and B8SA) products are solution treated in the finished condition. Class 2 products
    are solution treated and strain hardened.
    † Editorially corrected.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-193/SA-193M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    246
    TABLE 2 Mechanical Requirements — Inch Products
    Grade Diameter, in.
    Minimum
    Tempering
    Temperature,
    °F
    Tensile
    Strength,
    min, ksi
    Yield Strength,
    min, 0.2 %
    offset,
    ksi
    Elongation
    in 4D,
    min, %
    Reduction
    of Area,
    min, %
    Hardness,
    max
    Ferritic Steels
    B5
    4 to 6 % chromium up to 4, incl 1100 100 80 16 50 . . .
    B6
    13 % chromium up to 4, incl 1100 110 85 15 50 . . .
    B6X
    13 % chromium up to 4, incl 1100 90 70 16 50 26 HRC
    B7
    Chromium-molybdenum 21/2 and under 1100 125 105 16 50 321 HBW or
    35 HRC
    over 21/2 to 4 1100 115 95 16 50 321 HBW or
    35 HRC
    over 4 to 7 1100 100 75 18 50 321 HBW or
    35 HRC
    B7MA Chromium-molybdenum 4 and under 1150 100 80 18 50 235 HBW or
    99 HRB
    over 4 to 7 1150 100 75 18 50 235 HBW or
    99 HRB
    B16
    Chromium-molybdenum-vanadium 21/2 and under 1200 125 105 18 50 321 HBW or
    35 HRC
    over 21/2 to 4 1200 110 95 17 45 321 HBW or
    35 HRC
    over 4 to 8 1200 100 85 16 45 321 HBW or
    35 HRC
    Grade, Diameter, in. Heat TreatmentB
    Tensile
    Strength,
    min, ksi
    Yield
    Strength,
    min, 0.2
    % offset,
    ksi
    Elongation
    in 4 D,
    min %
    Reduction
    of Area,
    min %
    Hardness,
    max
    Austenitic Steels
    Classes 1 and 1D; B8, B8M, B8P,
    B8LN, B8MLN, B8CLN, all
    diameters
    carbide solution treated 75 30 30 50 223 HBW or 96
    HRBC
    Class 1: B8C, B8T, all diameters carbide solution treated 75 30 30 50 223 HBW or
    96HRBC
    Class 1A: B8A, B8CA, B8CLNA,
    B8MA, B8PA, B8TA, B8LNA,
    B8MLNA, B8NA, B8MNA,
    B8MLCuNA, all diameters
    carbide solution treated in the finished
    condition
    75 30 30 50 192 HBW or 90
    HRB
    Classes 1B and 1D: B8N, B8MN,
    B8MLCuN, all diameters
    carbide solution treated 80 35 30 40 223 HBW or 96
    HRBC
    Classes 1C and 1D: B8R, all
    diameters
    carbide solution treated 100 55 35 55 271 HBW or 28
    HRC
    Class 1C: B8RA, all diameters carbide solution treated in the finished
    condition
    100 55 35 55 271 HBW or 28
    HRC
    Classes 1C and 1D: B8S, all
    diameters
    carbide solution treated 95 50 35 55 271 HBW or 28
    HRC
    Classes 1C: B8SA, all diameters carbide solution treated in the finished
    condition
    95 50 35 55 271 HBW or 28
    HRC
    Class 2: B8, B8C, B8P, B8T,
    B8N,D3/4 and under
    carbide solution treated and strain
    hardened
    125 100 12 35 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over 3/4 to 1, incl 115 80 15 35 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over 1 to 11/4, incl 105 65 20 35 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over 11/4 to 11/2, incl 100 50 28 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    Class 2: B8M, B8MN,
    B8MLCuND3/4 and under
    carbide solution treated and strain
    hardened
    110 95 15 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over 3/4 to 1 incl 100 80 20 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    Over 1 to 11/4, incl 95 65 25 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-193/SA-193M
    247
    TABLE 2 Continued
    Grade, Diameter, in. Heat TreatmentB
    Tensile
    Strength,
    min, ksi
    Yield
    Strength,
    min, 0.2
    % offset,
    ksi
    Elongation
    in 4 D,
    min %
    Reduction
    of Area,
    min %
    Hardness,
    max
    Austenitic Steels
    over 11/4 to 11/2, incl 90 50 30 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    Class 2B: B8, B8M2D
    2 and under
    carbide solution treated and strain
    hardened
    95 75 25 40 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over 2 to 21/2 incl 90 65 30 40 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over 21/2 to 3 incl 80 55 30 40 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    Class 2C: B8M3D
    2 and under
    carbide solution treated and strain
    hardened
    85 65 30 60 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over 2 85 60 30 60 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    A To meet the tensile requirements, the Brinell hardness shall be over 200 HBW (93 HRB).
    B Class 1 is solution treated. Class 1A is solution treated in the finished condition for corrosion resistance; heat treatment is critical due to physical property requirement.
    Class 2 is solution treated and strain hardened. Austenitic steels in the strain-hardened condition may not show uniform properties throughout the section particularly in
    sizes over 3/4 in. in diameter.
    C For sizes 3/4 in. in diameter and smaller, a maximum hardness of 241 HBW (100 HRB) is permitted.
    D For diameters 11/2 and over, center (core) properties may be lower than indicated by test reports which are based on values determined at 1/2 radius.
    TABLE 3 Mechanical Requirements—Metric Products
    Class Diameter, [mm]
    Minimum
    Tempering
    Temperature,
    °C
    Tensile
    Strength,
    min,
    MPa
    Yield Strength,
    min, 0.2 %
    offset,
    MPa
    Elongation
    in 4D,
    min, %
    Reduction
    of Area,
    min, %
    Hardness,
    max
    Ferritic Steels
    B5
    4 to 6 % chromium up to M100, incl 593 690 550 16 50 . . .
    B6
    13 % chromium up to M100, incl 593 760 585 15 50 . . .
    B6X
    13 % chromium up to M100, incl 593 620 485 16 50 26 HRC
    B7
    Chromium-molybdenum M64 and under 593 860 720 16 50 321 HBW or
    35 HRC
    over M64 to M100 593 795 655 16 50 321 HBW or
    35 HRC
    over M100 to M180 593 690 515 18 50 321 HBW or
    35 HRC
    B7MA Chromium-molybdenum M100 and under 620 690 550 18 50 235 HBW or
    99 HRB
    over M100 to M180 620 690 515 18 50 235 HBW or
    99 HRB
    B16
    Chromium-molybdenum-vanadium M64 and under 650 860 725 18 50 321 HBW or
    35 HRC
    over M64 to M100 650 760 655 17 45 321 HBW or
    35 HRC
    over M100 to M180 650 690 585 16 45 321 HBW or
    35 HRC
    Class Diameter, mm Heat TreatmentB
    Tensile
    Strength,
    min,
    MPa
    Yield
    Strength,
    min, 0.2
    % offset,
    MPa
    Elongation
    in 4 D,
    min %
    Reduction
    of Area,
    min %
    Hardness,
    max
    Austenitic Steels
    Classes 1 and 1D; B8, B8M, B8P, B8LN,
    B8MLN, B8CLN, all diameters
    carbide solution treated 515 205 30 50 223 HBW or 96
    HRBC
    Class 1: B8C, B8T, all diameters carbide solution treated 515 205 30 50 223 HBW or
    96HRBC
    Class 1A: B8A, B8CA, B8CLNA, B8MA,
    B8PA, B8TA, B8LNA, B8MLNA, B8NA,
    B8MNA, B8MLCuNA, all diameters
    carbide solution treated in the finished
    condition
    515 205 30 50 192 HBW or 90
    HRB
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-193/SA-193M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    248
    TABLE 3 Continued
    Class Diameter, mm Heat TreatmentB
    Tensile
    Strength,
    min,
    MPa
    Yield
    Strength,
    min, 0.2
    % offset,
    MPa
    Elongation
    in 4 D,
    min %
    Reduction
    of Area,
    min %
    Hardness,
    max
    Austenitic Steels
    Classes 1B and 1D: B8N, B8MN,
    B8MLCuN, all diameters
    carbide solution treated 550 240 30 40 223 HBW or 96
    HRBC
    Classes 1C and 1D: B8R, all diameters carbide solution treated 690 380 35 55 271 HBW or 28
    HRC
    Class 1C: B8RA, all diameters carbide solution treated in the finished
    condition
    690 380 35 55 271 HBW or 28
    HRC
    Classes 1C and 1D: B8S, all diameters carbide solution treated 655 345 35 55 271 HBW or 28
    HRC
    Classes 1C: B8SA, all diameters carbide solution treated in the finished
    condition
    655 345 35 55 271 HBW or 28
    HRC
    Class 2: B8, B8C, B8P, B8T, B8N,D
    M20 and under
    carbide solution treated and strain
    hardened
    860 690 12 35 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over M20 to M24, incl 795 550 15 35 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over M24 to M30, incl 725 450 20 35 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over M30 to M36, incl 690 345 28 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    Class 2: B8M, B8MN, B8MLCuN,D
    M20 and under
    carbide solution treated and strain
    hardened
    760 655 15 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over M20 to M24, incl 690 550 20 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over M24 to M30, incl 655 450 25 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over M30 to M36, incl 620 345 30 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    Class 2B: B8, B8M2,D
    M48 and under
    carbide solution treated and strain
    hardened
    655 515 25 40 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over M48 to M64, incl 620 450 30 40 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over M64 to M72, incl 550 380 30 40 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    Class 2C: B8M3,D
    M48 and under
    carbide solution treated and strain
    hardened
    585 450 30 60 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over M48 585 415 30 60 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    A To meet the tensile requirements, the Brinell hardness shall be over 200 HBW (93 HRB).
    B Class 1 is solution treated. Class 1A is solution treated in the finished condition for corrosion resistance; heat treatment is critical due to physical property requirement.
    Class 2 is solution treated and strain hardened. Austenitic steels in the strain-hardened condition may not show uniform properties throughout the section particularly in
    sizes over M20 mm in diameter
    C For sizes M20 mm in diameter and smaller, a maximum hardness of 241 HBW (100 HRB) is permitted.
    D For diameters M38 and over, center (core) properties may be lower than indicated by test reports which are based on values determined at 1/2 radius.
    6.1.2 Use of water quenching is prohibited for any ferritic
    grade when heat treatment is performed after heading or
    threading.
    6.1.3 Except as permitted below for B6X; material that is
    subsequently cold drawn for dimensional control shall be
    stress-relieved after cold drawing. The minimum stress-relief
    temperature shall be 100 °F [55 °C] below the tempering
    temperature. Tests for mechanical properties shall be performed
    after stress relieving.
    6.1.4 B6 and B6X shall be held at the tempering temperature
    for a minimum time of 1 h. B6X material may be furnished
    in the as-rolled-and-tempered condition. Cold working after
    heat treatment is permitted for B6X material provided the final
    hardness meets the requirements of Tables 2 and 3.
    6.1.5 B7 and B7M shall be heat treated by quenching in a
    liquid medium and tempering. For B7M fasteners, the final
    heat treatment, which may be the tempering operation if
    conducted at 1150 °F [620 °C] minimum, shall be done after all
    machining and forming operations, including thread rolling
    and any type of cutting. Surface preparation for hardness
    testing, nondestructive evaluation, or ultrasonic bolt tensioning
    is permitted.
    6.1.5.1 Unless otherwise specified, material for Grade B7
    may be heat treated by the Furnace, the Induction or the
    Electrical Resistance method.
    NOTE 4—Stress-relaxation properties may vary from heat lot to heat lot
    or these properties may vary from one heat-treating method to another.
    The purchaser may specify Supplementary Requirement S8, when stressrelaxation
    testing is desired.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-193/SA-193M
    249
    6.1.6 Material Grade B16 shall be heated to a temperature
    range from 1700 to 1750 °F [925 to 955 °C] and oil quenched.
    The minimum tempering temperature shall be as specified in
    Tables 2 and 3.
    6.2 Austenitic Stainless Steels
    6.2.1 All austenitic stainless steels shall receive a carbide
    solution treatment (see 6.2.2-6.2.5 for specific requirements for
    each class). Classes 1, 1B, 1C (Grades B8R and B8S only), 2,
    2B, and 2C can apply to bar, wire, and finished fasteners. Class
    1A (all grades) and Class 1C (grades B8RA and B8SA only)
    can apply to finished fasteners. Class 1D applies only to bar
    and wire and finished fasteners that are machined directly from
    Class 1D bar or wire without any subsequent hot or cold
    working.
    6.2.2 Classes 1 and 1B, and Class 1C Grades B8R and
    B8S—After rolling of the bar, forging, or heading, whether
    done hot or cold, the material shall be heated from ambient
    temperature and held a sufficient time at a temperature at which
    the chromium carbide will go into solution and then shall be
    cooled at a rate sufficient to prevent the precipitation of the
    carbide.
    6.2.3 Class 1D—Rolled or forged Grades B8, B8M, B8P,
    B8LN, B8MLN, B8N, B8MN, B8R, and B8S bar shall be
    cooled rapidly immediately following hot working while the
    temperature is above 1750 °F [955 °C] so that grain boundary
    carbides remain in solution. Class 1D shall be restricted to
    applications at temperatures less than 850 °F [455 °C].
    6.2.4 Class 1A and Class 1C Grades B8RA and B8SA—
    Finished fasteners shall be carbide solution treated after all
    rolling, forging, heading, and threading operations are complete.
    This designation does not apply to starting material such
    as bar. Fasteners shall be heated from ambient temperature and
    held a sufficient time at a temperature at which the chromium
    carbide will go into solution and then shall be cooled at a rate
    sufficient to prevent the precipitation of the carbide.
    6.2.5 Classes 2, 2B, and 2C—Material shall be carbide
    solution treated by heating from ambient temperature and
    holding a sufficient time at a temperature at which the
    chromium carbide will go into solution and then cooling at a
    rate sufficient to prevent the precipitation of the carbide.
    Following this treatment the material shall then be strain
    hardened to achieve the required properties.
    NOTE 5—Heat treatment following operations performed on a limited
    portion of the product, such as heading, may result in non-uniform grain
    size and mechanical properties through the section affected.
    6.2.6 If a scale-free bright finish is required; this shall be
    specified in the purchase order.
30. Chemical Composition
    7.1 Each alloy shall conform to the chemical composition
    requirements prescribed in Table 1.
31. Heat Analysis
    8.1 An analysis of each heat of steel shall be made by the
    manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements
    specified in Section 7. The chemical composition thus determined
    shall be reported to the purchaser or the purchaser’s
    representative, and shall conform to the requirements specified
    in Section 7. Should the purchaser deem it necessary to have
    the transition zone of two heats sequentially cast discarded, the
    purchaser shall invoke Supplementary Requirement S3 of
    Specification A788/A788M.
32. Mechanical Properties
    9.1 Tensile Properties:
    9.1.1 Requirements—The material as represented by the
    tension specimens shall conform to the requirements prescribed
    in Tables 2 and 3 at room temperature after heat
    treatment. Alternatively, stainless strain hardened fasteners
    (Class 2, 2B, and 2C) shall be tested full size after strain
    hardening to determine tensile strength and yield strength and
    shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Tables 2 and 3.
    Should the results of full size tests conflict with results of
    tension specimen tests, full size test results shall prevail.
    9.1.2 Full Size Fasteners, Wedge Tensile Testing—When
    applicable, see 12.1.3, headed fasteners shall be wedge tested
    full size. The minimum full size load applied (lbf or kN) for
    individual sizes shall be as follows:
    W 5 Ts 3At (1)
    where:
    W = minimum wedge tensile load without fracture,
    Ts = tensile strength specified in ksi or MPa in Tables 2 and
    3, and
    At = stress area of the thread section, square inches or square
    milimetres, as shown in the Cone Proof Load Tables in
    Specification A962/A962M.
    9.2 Hardness Requirements:
    9.2.1 The hardness shall conform to the requirements prescribed
    in Tables 2 and 3. Hardness testing shall be performed
    in accordance with either Specification A962/A962M or with
    Test Methods F606.
    9.2.2 Grade B7M—The maximum hardness of the grade
    shall be 235 HBW or 99 HRB. The minimum hardness shall
    not be less than 200 HBW or 93 HRB. Conformance to this
    hardness shall be ensured by testing the hardness of each stud
    or bolt by Brinell or Rockwell B methods in accordance with
    9.2.1. The use of 100 % electromagnetic testing for hardness as
    an alternative to 100 % indentation hardness testing is permissible
    when qualified by sampling using indentation hardness
    testing. Each lot tested for hardness electromagnetically shall
    be 100 % examined in accordance with Practice E566. Following
    electromagnetic testing for hardness a random sample of a
    minimum of 100 pieces of each heat of steel in each lot (as
    defined in 12.1.1) shall be tested by indentation hardness
    methods. All samples must meet hardness requirements to
    permit acceptance of the lot. If any one sample is outside of the
    specified maximum or minimum hardness, the lot shall be
    rejected and either reprocessed and resampled or tested 100 %
    by indentation hardness methods.
    9.2.2.1 Surface preparation for indentation hardness testing
    shall be in accordance with Test Methods E18. Hardness tests
    shall be performed on the end of the bolt or stud. When this is
    impractical, the hardness test shall be performed elsewhere.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-193/SA-193M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    250
33. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
    10.1 Bolts, screws, studs, and stud bolts shall be pointed and
    shall have a workmanlike finish. Points shall be flat and
    chamfered or rounded at option of the manufacturer. Length of
    point on studs and stud bolts shall be not less than one nor more
    than two complete threads as measured from the extreme end
    parallel to the axis. Length of studs and stud bolts shall be
    measured from first thread to first thread.
    10.2 Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, bolt
    heads shall be in accordance with the dimensions of ASME
    B18.2.1 or ASME B18.2.3.3M. Unless otherwise specified in
    the purchase order, the Heavy Hex Screws Series should be
    used for nominal body diameters of 11/4 in [30 mm] and less.
    For larger sizes, the Heavy Hex Screw Series should be used,
    except the maximum body diameter and radius of fillet may be
    the same as for the Heavy Hex Bolt Series. The body diameter
    and head fillet radius for sizes of Heavy Hex Cap Screws and
    Bolts that are not shown in their respective tables in ASME
    B18.2.1 or ASME B18.2.3.3M may be that shown in the
    corresponding Hex Cap Screw and Bolt Tables respectively.
    Socket head fasteners shall be in accordance withASME B18.3
    or ASME B18.3.1M.
34. Retests
    11.1 If the results of the mechanical tests of any test lot do
    not conform to the requirements specified, the manufacturer
    may retreat such lot not more than twice, in which case two
    additional tension tests shall be made from such lot, all of
    which shall conform to the requirements specified.
35. Test Specimens
    12.1 Number of Tests—For heat-treated bars, one tension
    test shall be made for each diameter of each heat represented in
    each tempering charge. When heat treated without interruption
    in continuous furnaces, the material in a lot shall be the same
    heat, same prior condition, same size, and subjected to the
    same heat treatment. Not fewer than two tension tests are
    required for each lot containing 20 000 lb [9000 kg] or less.
    Every additional 10 000 lb [4500 kg] or fraction thereof
    requires one additional test.
    12.1.1 For studs, bolts, screws, and so forth, one tension test
    shall be made for each diameter of each heat involved in the
    lot. Each lot shall consist of the following:
    Diameter, in. [mm] Lot Size
    11/8 [30] and under 1500 lb [780 kg] or fraction thereof
    Over 11/8 [30] to 13/4 [42], incl 4500 lb [2000 kg] or fraction thereof
    Over 13/4 [42] to 21/2 [64], incl 6000 lb [2700 kg] or fraction thereof
    Over 21/2 [64] 100 pieces or fraction thereof
    12.1.2 Tension tests are not required to be made on bolts,
    screws, studs, or stud bolts that are fabricated from heat-treated
    bars furnished in accordance with the requirements of this
    specification and tested in accordance with 12.1, provided they
    are not given a subsequent heat treatment.
    12.1.3 Full Size Specimens, Headed Fasteners—Headed
    fasteners 11/2 in. in body diameter and smaller, with body
    length three times the diameter or longer, and that are produced
    by upsetting or forging (hot or cold) shall be subjected to full
    size testing in accordance with 9.1.2. This testing shall be in
    addition to tensile testing as specified in 9.1.1. Wedge tensile
    testing shall be limited to product with socket head cap screw,
    hexagon, square, hex flange, or twelve point flange heads. The
    lot size shall be as shown in 12.1.1. Failure shall occur in the
    body or threaded section with no failure, or indications of
    failure, such as cracks, at the junction of the head and shank.
    Wedge tensile testing is not required for flat countersunk head
    or socket button products.
36. Nuts
    13.1 Bolts, studs, and stud bolts shall be furnished with
    nuts, when specified in the purchase order. Nuts shall conform
    to Specification A194/A194M.
37. Certification
    14.1 Certification is required. In addition to the requirements
    of Specification A962/A962M the report shall include
    results of the chemical analysis, macroetch examination (Carbon
    and Alloy Steels Only), and mechanical tests, and state the
    method of heat treatment employed.
38. Product Marking
    15.1 See Specification A962/A962M. The grade symbol
    shall be as shown in Table 4 and Table 5. Grade B7M shall be
    100 % evaluated in conformance with the specification and
    shall have a line under the grade symbol.
39. Keywords
    16.1 alloy steel bars; alloy steel bolting; fasteners; hardness;
    heat treatment ; stainless steel bolting
    TABLE 4 Marking of Ferritic Steels
    Grade Grade Symbol
    B5 B5
    B6 B6
    B6X B6X
    B7 B7
    B7M B7M
    B16 B16
    B16 +
    Supplement S12
    B16R
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-193/SA-193M
    251
    TABLE 5 Marking of Austenitic Steels
    Class Grade Grade Symbol
    Class 1 B8 B8
    B8C B8C
    B8M B8M
    B8P B8P
    B8T B8T
    B8LN B8F or B8LN
    B8MLN B8G or B8MLN
    B8CLN B8Y or B8CLN
    Class 1A B8A B8A
    B8CA B8B or B8CA
    B8MA B8D or B8MA
    B8PA B8H or B8PA
    B8TA B8J or B8TA
    B8LNA B8L or B8LNA
    B8MLNA B8K or B8MLNA
    B8NA B8V or B8MA
    B8MNA B8W or B8MNA
    B8MLCuNA B9K or B8MLCuNA
    B8CLNA B8Z or B8CLNA
    Class 1B B8N
    B8MN
    B8MLCuN
    B8N
    B8Y or B8MN
    B9J or B8MLCuN
    Class 1C B8R B9A or B8R
    B8RA B9B or B8RA
    B8S B9D or B8S
    B8SA B9F or B8SA
    Class 1D B8 B94
    B8M B95
    B8P B96
    B8LN B97
    B8MLN B98
    B8N B99
    B8MN B100
    B8R B101
    B8S B102
    B8CLN B103
    Class 2 B8 B8SH
    B8C B8CSH
    B8P B8PSH
    B8T B8TSH
    B8N B8NSH
    B8M B8MSH
    B8MN B8YSH
    B8MLCuN B0JSH
    Class 2B B8M2
    B8
    B9G or B8M2
    B9
    Class 2C B8M3 B9H or B8M3
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-193/SA-193M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    252
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    These requirements shall not apply unless specified in the order and in the Ordering Information,
    in which event the specified tests shall be made before shipment of the product.
    S1. High Temperature Tests
    S1.1 Tests to determine high temperature properties shall be
    made in accordance with Test Methods E21, E139, and E292,
    and Practices E150 and E151.
    S2. Charpy Impact Tests
    S2.1 Charpy impact tests based on the requirements of
    Specification A320/A320M, Sections 6 and 7, shall be made as
    agreed between the manufacturer and the purchaser. When
    testing temperatures are as low as those specified in Specification
    A320/A320M, bolting should be ordered to that specification
    in preference to this specification.
    S3. 100 % Hardness Testing of Grade B7M
    S3.1 Each Grade B7M bolt or stud shall be tested for
    hardness by indentation method and shall meet the requirements
    specified in Tables 2 and 3.
    S4. Hardness Testing of Grade B16
    S4.1 For bolts or studs 21/2 in. [65 mm] or smaller, the
    hardness for Grade B16 shall be measured on or near the end
    of each bolt or stud using one of the methods prescribed in
    9.2.1 for the Brinell or Rockwell C test. The hardness shall be
    in the range 253–319 HBW or 25–34 HRC.
    S5. Product Marking
    S5.1 Grade and manufacturer’s identification symbols shall
    be applied to one end of studs and to the heads of bolts of all
    sizes. (If the available area is inadequate, the grade symbol
    may be marked on one end and the manufacturer’s identification
    symbol marked on the other end.) For bolts smaller than 1/4
    in. [6 mm] in diameter and studs smaller than 3/8 in. [10 mm]
    in diameter and for 1/4 in. [6 mm] in diameter studs requiring
    more than a total of three symbols, the marking shall be a
    matter of agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
    S6. Stress Relieving
    S6.1 A stress-relieving operation shall follow straightening
    after heat treatment.
    S6.2 The minimum stress-relieving temperature shall be
    100 °F [55 °C] below the tempering temperature. Tests for
    mechanical properties shall be performed after stress relieving.
    S7. Magnetic Particle Inspection
    S7.1 Bars shall be magnetic particle examined in accordance
    with Guide E709. Bars with indications of cracks or
    seams are subject to rejection if the indications extend more
    than 3 % of the diameter into the bar.
    S8. Stress-Relaxation Testing
    S8.1 Stress-Relaxation Testing, when required, shall be
    done in accordance with Test Methods E328. The test shall be
    performed at 850 °F [454 °C] for a period of 100 h. The initial
    stress shall be 50 M psi [345 MPa]. The residual stress at 100
    h shall be 17 M psi [117 MPa] minimum.
    S9. Grain Size Requirements for Non H Grade Austenitic
    Steels Used Above 1000 °F
    S9.1 For design metal temperatures above 1000 °F [540
    °C], the material shall have a grain size of No. 7 or coarser as
    determined in accordance with Test Methods E112. The grain
    size so determined shall be reported on the Certificate of Test.
    S10. Hardness Testing of Class 2 Bolting for ASME
    Applications
    S10.1 The maximum hardness shall be Rockwell C35 immediately
    under the thread roots. The hardness shall be taken
    on a flat area at least 1/8 in. [3 mm] across, prepared by
    removing threads, and no more material than necessary shall be
    removed to prepare the flat areas. Hardness determinations
    shall be made at the same frequency as tensile tests.
    S11. Thread Forming
    S11.1 Threads shall be formed after heat treatment. Application
    of this supplemental requirement to grade B7M or the
    grades listed in 6.2.4 is prohibited.
    S12. Stress Rupture Testing of Grade B16
    S12.1 One test shall be made for each heat treat lot. Testing
    shall be conducted using a combination test bar in accordance
    with Test Methods E292. Rupture shall occur in the smooth
    section of each test specimen. The test shall be conducted at
    1100 °F [595 °C] and 20 ksi [140 MPa]. The test shall be
    continued until the sample ruptures. Rupture life shall be 25 h
    minimum. Testing is not required on material less than 1/2 in.
    [12 mm] thick.
    S12.2 When a purchase order for fasteners invokes S12, the
    grade symbol applied shall be “B16R.”
    S13. Coatings on Fasteners
    S13.1 It is the purchaser’s responsibility to specify in the
    purchase order all information required by the coating facility.
    Examples of such information may include but are not limited
    to the following:
    S13.1.1 Reference to the appropriate coating specification
    and type, thickness, location, modification to dimensions, and
    hydrogen embrittlement relief.
    S13.1.2 Reference to Specifications A153/A153M, B633,
    B695, B696, B766, or F1941, F2329, or Test Method F1940, or
    other standards.
    S14. Marking Coated Fasteners
    S14.1 Material coated with zinc shall have ZN marked after
    the grade symbol. Material coated with cadmium shall have
    CD marked after the grade symbol.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-193/SA-193M
    253
    NOTE S14.1—As an example, the marking for zinc-coated B7 will now
    be B7ZN rather than B7.
    APPENDIXES
    (Nonmandatory Information)
    X1. STRAIN HARDENING OF AUSTENITIC STEELS
    X1.1 Strain hardening is the increase in strength and hardness
    that results from plastic deformation below the recrystallization
    temperature (cold work). This effect is produced in
    austenitic stainless steels by reducing oversized bars or wire to
    the desired final size by cold drawing or other process. The
    degree of strain hardening achievable in any alloy is limited by
    its strain hardening characteristics. In addition, the amount of
    strain hardening that can be produced is further limited by the
    variables of the process, such as the total amount of crosssection
    reduction, die angle, and bar size. In large diameter
    bars, for example, plastic deformation will occur principally in
    the outer regions of the bar so that the increased strength and
    hardness due to strain hardening is achieved predominantly
    near the surface of the bar. That is, the smaller the bar, the
    greater the penetration of strain hardening.
    X1.2 Thus, the mechanical properties of a given strain
    hardened fastener are dependent not just on the alloy, but also
    on the size of bar from which it is machined. The minimum bar
    size that can be used, however, is established by the configuration
    of the fastener so that the configuration can affect the
    strength of the fastener.
    X1.3 For example, a stud of a particular alloy and size may
    be machined from a smaller diameter bar than a bolt of the
    same alloy and size because a larger diameter bar is required to
    accommodate the head of the bolt. The stud, therefore, is likely
    to be stronger than the same size bolt in a given alloy.
    X2. COATINGS AND APPLICATION LIMITS
    X2.1 Use of coated fasteners at temperatures above approximately
    one-half the melting point (Fahrenheit or Celsius) of the
    coating is not recommended unless consideration is given to
    the potential for liquid and solid metal embrittlement, or both.
    The melting point of elemental zinc is approximately 780 °F
    [415 °C]. Therefore, application of zinc-coated fasteners
    should be limited to temperatures less than 390 °F [210 °C].
    The melting point of cadmium is approximately 600 °F [320
    °C]. Therefore, application of cadmium-coated fasteners
    should be limited to temperatures less than 300 °F [160 °C].
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON AND ALLOY STEEL NUTS
    FOR BOLTS FOR HIGH PRESSURE OR HIGH
    TEMPERATURE SERVICE, OR BOTH
    SA-194/SA-194M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A194/A194M-12.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-194/SA-194M
    255
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-194/SA-194M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    256
    Standard Specification for
    Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or
    High Temperature Service, or Both
40. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers a variety of carbon, alloy, and
    martensitic stainless steel nuts in the size range 1/4 through 4
    in. and metric M6 through M100 nominal. It also covers
    austenitic stainless steel nuts in the size range 1/4 in. and M6
    nominal and above. These nuts are intended for high-pressure
    or high-temperature service, or both. Grade substitutions without
    the purchaser’s permission are not allowed.
    1.2 Bars from which the nuts are made shall be hot-wrought.
    The material may be further processed by centerless grinding
    or by cold drawing. Austenitic stainless steel may be solution
    annealed or annealed and strain-hardened. When annealed and
    strain hardened austenitic stainless steel is ordered in accordance
    with Supplementary Requirement S1, the purchaser
    should take special care to ensure that 8.2.2, Supplementary
    Requirement S1, and Appendix X1 are thoroughly understood.
    1.3 Supplementary requirements of an optional nature are
    provided. These shall apply only when specified in the inquiry,
    contract, and order.
    1.4 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound units
    and in SI units. However, unless the order specifies the
    applicable“ M” specification designation (SI units), the material
    shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
    1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
    each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
    system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
    values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
    with the standard. Within the text, the SI units are shown in
    brackets.
41. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A153/A153M Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on
    Iron and Steel Hardware
    A276 Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
    A320/A320M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless
    Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature Service
    A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    A962/A962M Specification for Common Requirements for
    Bolting Intended for Use at Any Temperature from Cryogenic
    to the Creep Range
    B633 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on
    Iron and Steel
    B695 Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited
    on Iron and Steel
    B696 Specification for Coatings of Cadmium Mechanically
    Deposited
    B766 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium
    E112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
    F1940 Test Method for Process Control Verification to
    Prevent Hydrogen Embrittlement in Plated or Coated
    Fasteners
    F1941 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings on
    Threaded Fasteners (Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN/
    UNR))
    F2329 Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements
    for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts,
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-194/SA-194M
    257
    Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners
    2.2 ASME Standards:
    B 1.1 Unified Screw Threads
    B 1.2 Gages and Gaging for Unified Inch Screw Threads
    B 1.13M Metric Screw Threads
    B 18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts
    B 18.2.4.6M Metric Heavy Hex Nuts
42. Terminology
    3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
    3.1.1 Austenitic Grades—All grades with a prefix of “8” or
    “9.”
    3.1.2 Ferritic Grades—Grades 1, 2, 2H, 2HM, 3, 4, 6, 6F, 7,
    7M, and 16.
    3.1.3 Lot—Unless otherwise specified (see Discussion
    below), a lot is the quantity of nuts of a single nominal size and
    grade produced by the same manufacturing process.
    3.1.3.1 Discussion—When Supplementary Requirement S5
    is invoked on the purchase order, the following definitions of a
    lot shall apply:
    3.1.3.2 For Grade 8 Nuts—The quantity of all the nuts of a
    single nominal diameter and grade made from the same heat of
    steel and made by the same manufacturing process.
    3.1.3.3 For All Other Grade Nuts— (see 8.2 and
    8.1.2.1)—All the nuts of a single nominal diameter and grade
    made from the same heat number and heat treated in the same
    batch if batch-type heat treating equipment is used or heat
    treated in the same continuous run of not more than 8 h under
    the same conditions if continuous-type heat treating equipment
    is used.
    3.1.4 Type
    3.1.4.1 For Grade 8 Nuts—Variations within the grade
    designated by a letter and differentiated by chemistry and by
    manufacturing process.
    3.1.4.2 For Grade 6 Nuts—Variations within the grade
    designated by the letter F as differentiated by chemical additions
    made for machineability.
    3.1.5 Series—The dimensional relationship and geometry of
    the nuts as described in ASME B 18.2.2 or B 18.2.4.6M.
43. Ordering Information
    4.1 The inquiry and order for material under this specification
    shall include the following as required to describe the
    material adequately:
    4.1.1 Specification designation, year date, and grade, issue
    date and revision letter,
    4.1.2 Quantity, number of pieces,
    4.1.3 Dimensions (see Section 9),
    4.1.4 Options in accordance with 8.2.2.1, 9.1, 9.2, 10.3, and
    12, and
    4.1.5 Supplementary Requirements, if any.
    4.2 Coatings—Coatings are prohibited unless specified by
    the purchaser (see Supplementary Requirements S7 and S8).
    When coated nuts are ordered, the purchaser should take
    special care to ensure that Appendix X2 is thoroughly understood.
    4.3 See Supplementary Requirement S3 for nuts to be used
    in low temperature applications (Specification A320/A320M).
    4.4 Proof Load Testing—See Supplementary Requirement
    S9 for proof load testing of nuts manufactured to dimensions
    and configurations other than those covered in Tables 3 and 4.
44. Common Requirements
    5.1 Material and fasteners supplied to this specification shall
    conform to the requirements of Specification A962/A962M.
    These requirements include test methods, finish, thread
    dimensions, marking, certification, optional supplementary
    requirements, and others. Failure to comply with the requirements
    of Specification A962/A962M constitutes nonconformance
    with this specification. In case of conflict between the
    requirements of this specification and Specification A962/
    A962M, this specification shall prevail.
45. Manufacture (Process)
    6.1 Stainless steels for all types of Grade 6 and 8 nuts shall
    be made by one of the following processes:
    6.1.1 Electric-furnace (with separate degassing and refining
    optional),
    6.1.2 Vacuum induction furnace, or
    6.1.3 Either of the above followed by electroslag remelting,
    or consumable-arc remelting.
    6.2 The steel producer shall exercise adequate control to
    eliminate excessive unhomogeneity, nonmetallics, pipe,
    porosity, and other defects.
    6.3 Grades 1 and 2 nuts shall be hot or cold forged, or shall
    be machined from hot-forged, hot-rolled, or cold-drawn bars.
    6.3.1 All Grade 1 and 2 nuts shall be stress-relief annealed
    at a temperature of at least 1000 °F [538 °C] after forming or
    machining from bar with the following exceptions:
    6.3.1.1 Nuts made by hot forging.
    6.3.1.2 Nuts machined from hot-forged or hot-rolled bar.
    6.3.1.3 Nuts machined from hot-forged/hot-rolled and coldfinished
    (max 10 % reduction in area) bar.
    6.3.1.4 Nuts machined from cold-drawn and annealed (min
    1000 °F [538 °C]) bar.
    6.3.2 Grade 1 and 2 nuts made by hot forging or by
    machining from hot-forged or hot-rolled bars need not be given
    any stress relief annealing treatment.
    6.4 Grades 2H, 2HM, 3, 4, 6, 6F, 7, 7M, and 16 nuts shall
    be hot- or cold-forged or shall be machined from hot-forged,
    hot-rolled, or cold-drawn bars and shall be heat treated to meet
    the required mechanical properties. These grades shall be
    uniformly reheated to the proper austenitizing temperature (a
    group thus reheated being known as a quenching charge) and
    quenched under substantially uniform conditions for each
    quenching charge and tempered as shown below. Grades 2H,
    2HM, 3, 4, 7, and 7M shall be liquid quenched. Grades 6 and
    6F shall be quenched in liquid or inert gas. Grade 16 shall be
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-194/SA-194M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    258
    TABLE 1 Chemical RequirementsA,B,C,D
    Grade
    Symbol
    Material
    UNS
    Number
    Carbon,
    %
    Manganese,
    %
    Phosphorus,
    %
    Sulfur,E
    %
    Silicon,
    %
    Chromium,
    %
    Nickel,
    %
    Molybdenum,
    %
    Titanium,
    %
    Columbium
    and
    Tantalum,
    %
    Nitrogen,
    %
    Other
    Elements,
    %
    1 carbon 0.15 min 1.00 0.040 0.050 0.40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    2, 2HM,
    and 2H
    carbon 0.40 min 1.00 0.040 0.050 0.40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    4 carbon,
    molybdenum
    0.40–0.50 0.70–0.90 0.035 0.040 0.15–0.35 . . . . . . 0.20–0.30 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    3 Type 501 0.10 min 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 4.0–6.0 . . . 0.40–0.65 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    6 Type 410 S41000 0.15 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 11.5–13.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    6F Type 416 S41600 0.15 1.25 0.060 0.15 min 1.00 12.0–14.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    6F Type
    416Se
    S41623 0.15 1.25 0.060 0.060 1.00 12.0–14.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . Selenium,
    0.15 min
    7, 7M Type
    4140/
    4142/
    4145,
    4140H,
    4142H,
    4145H
    0.37–0.49 0.65–1.10 0.035 0.04 0.15–0.35 0.75–1.20 . . . 0.15–0.25 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    8, 8A Type 304 S30400 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 8.0–11.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    8C, 8CA Type 347 S34700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–12.0 . . . . . . 10 x
    carbon
    content,
    min
    . . . . . .
    8CLN,
    8CLNA
    Type
    347LN
    S34751 0.005-
    0.020
    2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–13.0 . . . . . . 0.20–0.50,
    15 x
    carbon
    content,
    min
    0.06–0.10 . . .
    8M, 8MA Type 316 S31600 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 10.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    8T, 8TA Type 321 S32100 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–12.0 . . . 5 x
    (C+N)
    min –
    0.70
    max
    . . . 0.10 . . .
    8F, 8FA Type 303 S30300 0.15 2.00 0.20 0.15 min 1.00 17.0–19.0 8.0–10.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    8F, 8FA Type
    303Se
    S30323 0.15 2.00 0.20 0.06 1.00 17.0–19.0 8.0–10.0 . . . . . . . . . Selenium,
    0.15 min
    8P, 8PA Type 305
    with
    restricted
    carbon
    S30500 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 11.0–13.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    8N, 8NA Type
    304N
    S30451 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 8.0–11.0 . . . . . . . . . 0.10–0.16
    8LN,
    8LNA
    Type
    304LN
    S30453 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 8.0–11.0 . . . . . . . . . 0.10–0.16
    8MN,
    8MNA
    Type
    316N
    S31651 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 10.0–13.0 2.00–3.00 . . . . . . 0.10–0.16
    8MLN,
    8MLNA
    Type
    316LN
    S31653 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 10.0–13.0 2.00–3.00 . . . . . . 0.10–0.16
    8R, 8RAF XM19 S20910 0.06 4.0–6.0 0.045 0.030 1.00 20.5–23.5 11.5–13.5 1.50–3.00 . . . 0.10–0.30 0.20–0.40 Vanadium,
    0.10–0.30
    8S, 8SA S21800 0.10 7.0–9.0 0.060 0.030 3.5–4.5 16.0–18.0 8.0–9.0 . . . . . . . . . 0.08–0.18
    8MLCuN,
    8MLCuNA
    S31254 S31254 0.020 1.00 0.030 0.010 0.80 19.5–20.5 17.5–18.5 6.0–6.5 . . . . . . 0.18–0.22 Copper,
    0.50–1.00
    9C, 9CA N08367 N08367 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 20.0-22.0 23.5- 25.5 6.0-7.0 0.18-0.25 Copper
    0.75
    16 Chromium
    Molybdenum
    Vanadium
    0.36–0.47 0.45–0.70 0.035 0.040 0.15–0.35 0.80–1.15 . . . 0.50–0.65 . . . . . . . . . Vanadium,
    0.25–0.35
    AluminumB
    0.015
    A The intentional addition of Bi, Se, Te, and Pb is not permitted except for Grades 6F, 8F, and 8FA, in which Se is specified and required.
    B Total aluminum, soluble and insoluble.
    C Maximum, unless minimum or range is indicated.
    D Where ellipses ({) appear in this table there is no requirement.
    E Because of the degree to which sulfur segregates, product analysis for sulfur over 0.060 % max is not technologically appropriate.
    F As described in Specification A276.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-194/SA-194M
    259
    TABLE 2 Hardness RequirementsA
    Grade and Type
    Completed Nuts Sample Nut after Treatment as in 8.1.5
    Brinell
    Hardness
    Rockwell Hardness Brinell
    Hardness,
    min
    Rockwell
    Hardness B
    C Scale B Scale Scale, min
    1 121 min … 70 min 121 70
    2 159 to 352 … 84 min 159 84
    2H to 11/2 in. or M36, incl 248 to 327 24 to 35 … 179 89
    2H over 11/2 in. or M36 212 to 327 35 max 95 min 147 79
    2HM and 7M 159 to 235 … 84 to 99 159 84
    3, 4, 7, and 16 248 to 327 24 to 35 … 201 94
    6 and 6F 228 to 271 20 to 28 … … …
    8, 8C, 8CLN, 8M, 8T, 8F, 8P,
    8N,
    8MN, 8LN, 8MLN,
    8MLCuN, and 9C
    126 to 300 32 max 60 min … …
    8A, 8CA, 8CLNA, 8MA, 8TA,
    8FA, 8PA, 8NA, 8MNA,
    8LNA, 8MLNA,
    8MLCuNA, and 9CA
    126 to 192 … 60 to 90 … …
    8R, 8RA, 8S, and 8SA 183 to 271 25 max 88 min … …
    A Where ellipses ({) appear in this table there is no requirement.
    TABLE 3 Proof Load Using Threaded Mandrel — Inch Series
    NOTE 1—Proof loads are not design loads.
    Nominal
    Size, in.
    Threads
    per Inch
    Stress Area
    in.2
    Proof Load, lbfA
    Grade 1 Grades 2, 2HM, 6, 6F, 7M Grades 2H, 3, 4, 7, 16
    Heavy HexB HexC Heavy HexD HexE Heavy HexF HexG
    1/4 20 0.0316 4 130 3 820 4 770 4 300 5 570 4 770
    5/16 18 0.0524 6 810 6 290 7 860 7 070 9 170 7 860
    3/8 16 0.0774 10 080 9 300 11 620 10 460 13 560 11 620
    7/16 14 0.1063 13 820 12 760 15 940 14 350 18 600 15 940
    1/2 13 0.1419 18 450 17 030 21 280 19 160 24 830 21 280
    9/16 12 0.182 23 660 21 840 27 300 24 570 31 850 27 300
    5/8 11 0.226 29 380 27 120 33 900 30 510 39 550 33 900
    3/4 10 0.334 43 420 40 080 50 100 45 090 58 450 50 100
    7/8 9 0.462 60 060 55 440 69 300 62 370 80 850 69 300
    1 8 0.606 78 780 72 720 90 900 81 810 106 000 90 900
    11/8 8 0.790 102 700 94 800 118 500 106 700 138 200 118 500
    11/4 8 1.000 130 000 120 000 150 000 135 000 175 000 150 000
    13/8 8 1.233 160 200 148 000 185 000 166 500 215 800 185 000
    11/2 8 1.492 194 000 170 040 223 800 201 400 261 100 223 800
    All Types of Grade 8, Grades 9C and 9CA
    Heavy HexH HexI
    1/4 20 0.0316 2 540 2 380
    5/16 18 0.0524 4 190 3 930
    3/8 16 0.0774 6 200 5 810
    7/16 14 0.1063 8 500 7 970
    1/2 13 0.1419 11 350 10 640
    9/16 12 0.182 14 560 13 650
    5/8 11 0.226 18 080 16 950
    3/4 10 0.334 26 720 25 050
    7/8 9 0.462 36 960 34 650
    1 8 0.606 48 480 45 450
    11/8 8 0.790 63 200 59 250
    11/4 8 1.000 80 000 75 000
    13/8 8 1.233 98 640 92 450
    11/2 8 1.492 119 360 111 900
    A See limit for proof load test in 8.2.2.1. The proof load for jam nuts shall be 46 % of the tabulated load.
    B Based on proof stress of 130 000 psi.
    C Based on proof stress of 120 000 psi.
    D Based on proof stress of 150 000 psi.
    E Based on proof stress of 135 000 psi.
    F Based on proof stress of 175 000 psi.
    G Based on proof stress of 150 000 psi.
    H Based on proof stress of 80 000 psi.
    I Based on proof stress of 75 000 psi.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-194/SA-194M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    260
    heated to a temperature range from 1700 to 1750 °F (925 to
    955 °C) and oil quenched.
    Grade
    Minimum Tempering Temperature, °F
    [°C]
    2H 850 [455]
    2HM 1150 [620]
    3 1050 [565]
    4 1100 [595]
    6 and 6F 1100 [595]
    7 1100 [595]
    7M 1150 [620]
    16 1200 [650]
    Nuts machined from bar heat treated in accordance with this
    specification need not be reheat-treated. For Grade 2HM and
    7M nuts, a final stress relief shall be done at or above the
    minimum tempering temperature after all forming, machining,
    and tapping operations. This final stress relief may be the
    tempering operation.
    6.4.1 Grade 6 and 6F nuts shall be tempered for a minimum
    of 1 h at the temperature.
    6.5 Grades 8, 8C, 8CLN, 8M, 8T, 8F, 8P, 8N, 8MN, 8R, 8S,
    8LN, 8MLN, 8MLCuN, and 9C nuts shall be hot or cold
    forged, or shall be machined from hot-forged, hot-rolled or
    cold-drawn bars.
    6.6 Grades 8A, 8CA, 8CLNA, 8MA, 8TA, 8FA, 8PA, 8NA,
    8MNA, 8RA, 8SA, 8LNA, 8MLNA, 8MLCuNA, and 9CA
    nuts shall be hot- or cold-forged or shall be machined from
    hot-forged, hot-rolled, or cold-drawn bars and the nuts shall
    subsequently be carbide-solution treated by heating them for a
    sufficient time at a temperature to dissolve chromium carbides
    followed by cooling at a rate sufficient to prevent reprecipitation
    of the carbides.
46. Chemical Composition
    7.1 Each alloy shall conform to the chemical composition
    requirements prescribed in Table 1.
47. Mechanical Requirements
    8.1 Hardness Test:
    8.1.1 Requirements:
    8.1.1.1 All nuts shall meet the hardness requirements specified
    in Table 2.
    8.1.1.2 Sample nuts of Grades 1, 2, 2H, 2HM, 3, 4, 7, 7M,
    and 16 which have been given the treatment described in 8.1.5
    shall meet the minimum hardness specified in Table 2.
    TABLE 4 Proof Load Using Threaded Mandrel — Metric
    NOTE 1—Proof loads are not design loads.
    Nominal
    Size,
    mm
    Threads
    Pitch
    Stress Area
    mm2
    Proof Load, kNA
    Grade 1 Grades 2, 2HM, 6, 6F, 7M Grades 2H, 3, 4, 7, 16
    Heavy HexB HexC Heavy HexD HexE Heavy HexF HexG
    M6 1.0 20.1 18.0 16.6 20.8 18.7 29.2 20.8
    M8 1.25 36.6 32.8 30.2 37.9 34.0 44.1 37.9
    M10 1.50 58.0 51.9 47.9 60.0 53.9 69.9 60.0
    M12 1.75 84.3 75.5 69.5 87.3 78.4 101.6 87.3
    M14 2.0 115.0 102.9 94.9 119.0 107.0 138.6 119.0
    M16 2.0 157.0 140.5 129.5 162.5 146.0 189.2 162.5
    M20 2.5 245.0 219.3 202.1 253.6 227.8 295.2 253.6
    M22 2.5 303.0 271.2 249.9 313.6 281.8 365.1 313.6
    M24 3.0 353.0 315.9 291.2 365.4 328.3 425.4 365.4
    M27 3.0 459.0 411.0 378.7 475.1 426.9 553.4 475.1
    M30 3.5 561.0 502.1 462.8 580.6 521.7 676.0 580.6
    M36 4.0 817.0 731.2 674.0 845.6 759.8 984.5 845.6
    All Types of Grade 8, and
    Grades 9C and 9CA
    Nominal Size, mm Thread Pitch Stress
    Area,
    mm 2
    Heavy HexH HexI
    M6 1.0 20.1 11.1 10.4
    M8 1.25 36.6 20.1 18.8
    M10 1.50 58.0 31.9 29.9
    M12 1.75 84.3 46.4 43.4
    M14 2.0 115.0 63.3 59.2
    M16 2.0 157.0 86.4 80.9
    M20 2.5 245.0 134.8 126.2
    M22 2.5 303.0 166.7 156.0
    M24 3.0 353.0 194.2 181.8
    M27 3.0 459.0 252.5 236.4
    M30 3.5 561.0 308.6 288.9
    M36 4.0 817.0 449.4 420.8
    A See limit for proof load test in 8.2.2.1. The proof load for jam nuts shall be 46 % of the tabulated load.
    B Based on proof stress of 895 MPa.
    C Based on proof stress of 825 MPa.
    D Based on proof stress of 1035 MPa.
    E Based on proof stress of 930 MPa.
    F Based on proof stress of 1205 MPa.
    G Based on proof stress of 1035 MPa.
    H Based on proof stress of 550 MPa.
    I Based on proof stress of 515 MPa.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-194/SA-194M
    261
    8.1.2 Number of Tests— (Grades 1, 2, 2H, 3, 4, 7, and 16
    and all types of Grade 6):
    8.1.2.1 Tests on the number of sample nuts in accordance
    with the following table shall be performed by the manufacturer
    following all production heat treatments:
    Lot Size Samples
    Up to 800 1
    801 to 8000 2
    8001 to 22 000 3
    Over 22 000 5
    8.1.2.2 In addition, a hardness test shall be performed by the
    manufacturer in accordance with 8.1.5 on one sample nut
    selected from each nominal diameter and series from each
    grade and heat number following completion of all production
    heat treatments.
    8.1.3 Number of Tests, Grades 2HM and 7M:
    8.1.3.1 Each nut shall be tested by Brinell or Rockwell
    methods to ensure product conformance.
    8.1.3.2 In addition, 8.1.2.2 shall be met.
    8.1.4 Number of Tests, All Types of Grade 8—Tests on the
    number of sample nuts in accordance with 8.1.2.1 shall be
    performed by the manufacturer.
    8.1.5 Test 2—In addition to the testing required by 8.1.2.1
    the manufacturer shall also perform hardness tests on sample
    nuts after the following test heat treatment. After completion of
    all production heat treatments heat the specimen nuts to the
    temperatures indicated below for 24 h, then slow cool. Test at
    room temperature.
    GradeA
    Temperature,
    °F [°C]
    1 850 [455]
    2, 2H, 2HM 1000 [540]
    3, 4, 7, 7M 1100 [590]
    16 1200 [650]
    ANuts intended to be coated with zinc or cadmium (marked in accordance with the
    requirements of Supplementary Requirement S8) are not subjected to the requirements
    of 8.1.5 (See Appendix X2).
    8.1.5.1 Special Requirement, Grades 2HM and 7M—
    Preparation of Grades 2HM and 7M nuts for hardness test and
    the hardness test itself shall be performed with consideration to
    (1) protect legibility of markings; (2) minimize exterior dimensional
    changes; and (3) maintain thread fit.
    8.2 Proof Load Test:
    8.2.1 Requirements—The nuts listed in Tables 3 and 4 shall
    be capable of withstanding the proof loads specifin therein.
    Proof load testing of nuts manufactured to dimensions and
    configurations other than those covered in Table 3 or Table 4 is
    only required when S9 is specified in the order or inquiry.
    8.2.2 Number of Tests:
    8.2.2.1 The manufacturer shall test the number of nuts
    specified in 8.1.2.1 following all production heat treatments.
    Nuts that would require a proof load in excess of 160 000 lb/f
    or 705 kN shall, unless Supplementary Requirements S1 or S4
    are invoked in the purchase order or contract, be proof load
    tested per Section 8 or cross sectional hardness tested per
    Annex A3 of Test Methods and Definitions A370. Proof Load
    tests prevail over hardness tests in the event a conflict exists
    relative to minimum strength.
    8.2.3 Test Method—The test shall be run using a threaded
    mandrel or a test bolt in accordance with Specification A962/
    A962M.
    8.3 Cone Proof Load Test:
    8.3.1 Requirements—This test shall be performed only
    when visible surface discontinuities become a matter of issue
    between the manufacturer and the purchaser. Nuts in the size
    range 1/4 to 11/2 in. inclusive and M6 to M36 inclusive shall be
    proof load tested. Nuts not in this size range and all types of
    Grade 8 nuts are not subject to this test. Also, nuts manufactured
    to dimensions and configurations other than those covered
    by Specification A962/A962M, ASME B 1.1, ASME B
    1.13M, ASME B 18.2.2, and ASME B 18.2.4.6M are not
    subject to the cone proof load test. The cone proof load applied
    shall be determined in accordance with the Cone Proof Load
    requirements in Specification A962/A962M (tables or formulae
    or both) based upon the proof stresses shown in Table 5 and
    Table 6 of Specification A194/A194M.
    8.3.2 Number of Tests—The manufacturer shall sample and
    test the number of nuts specified in 8.1.2.1. The lot shall be
    considered acceptable if the sample nut(s) withstand(s) application
    of the cone proof load without failure.
48. Dimensions
    9.1 Nuts shall be hexagonal in shape, and in accordance
    with the dimensions for the hex or heavy hex series, as
    required, by ASME B 18.2.2 and ASME B 18.2.4.6M. Unless
    otherwise specified, the American National Standard Heavy
    Hex Series shall be used and nuts shall be either double
    chamfered or have a machined or forged washer face, at the
    option of the manufacturer, and, conform to the angularity
    requirements of ASME B 18.2.2 and ASME B 18.2.4.6M.
    9.2 Unless otherwise specified, threads shall be in accordance
    withASME B 1.1 orASME B 1.13M, and shall be gaged
    in accordance with ASME B 1.2 and ASME B 1.13M as
    described in 9.2.1 and 9.2.2.
    9.2.1 Nuts up to and including 1 in. nominal size shall be
    UNC Series Class 2B fit. Metric nuts up to and including M24
    nominal size shall be coarse thread series tolerance 6H.
    TABLE 5 Proof Stress Using 120° Hardened Steel Cone — Inch
    Proof Stress – psi, Minimum
    Type Grade 1 Grades 2,
    2HM, 6,
    6F & 7M
    Grades 2H
    3, 4, 7, & 16
    Hex 120 000 135 000 150 000
    Heavy Hex 130 000 150 000 175 000
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-194/SA-194M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    262
    9.2.2 Nuts over 1 in. nominal size shall be either UNC
    Series Class 2B fit or 8 UN Series Class 2B fit. Unless
    otherwise specified, the 8 UN series shall be furnished. Metric
    nuts over M24 nominal size shall be coarse thread series
    tolerance 6H.
49. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
    10.1 Nuts shall be free of defects and shall be good
    commercial finish.
    10.2 If visible surface imperfections in size 1/4 through 11/2
    in. and M6 through M36 and in any grade other than Grade 8
    become a matter of issue between the manufacturer and the
    purchaser, the cone proof load test described in 8.3 shall be
    employed.
    10.3 If a scale-free bright finish is required, this shall be
    specified on the purchase order.
50. Retests
    11.1 Provisions for retests by the purchaser and his representative
    are specified in Supplementary Requirement S2.
51. Certification
    12.1 In addition to the requirements of Specification A962/
    A962M, the certification shall include the results of the
    chemical analysis, macroetch examination (Carbon and Alloy
    Steels Only), mechanical tests, and the minimum tempering
    temperature for nuts of Grades 2H, 2HM, 3, 4, 6, 6F, 7, and
    7M.
52. Product Marking
    13.1 In addition to the requirements of Specification A962/
    A962M, nuts shall be legibly marked on one face with the
    grade symbol representing the grade, type and applicable
    manufacturing process shown in Table 7. Marking of wrench
    flats or bearing surfaces is not permitted unless agreed upon
    between manufacturer and purchaser.
53. Keywords
    14.1 bolting; chemical analysis; coated; marking on fasteners;
    plated
    TABLE 6 Proof Stress Using 120° Hardened Steel Cone — Metric
    Proof Stress – MPa, Minimum
    Type Grade 1 Grades 2,
    2HM, 6,
    6F & 7M
    Grades 2H
    3, 4, 7, & 16
    Hex 825 930 1035
    Heavy Hex 895 1035 1205
    TABLE 7 Grade Symbol Marking of NutsA
    Grade and
    Type
    Nuts Hot-
    Forged or
    Cold-
    Punched
    Nuts Machined
    from Bar
    Stock
    Nuts Manufactured
    in
    Accordance
    with 6.6
    1 1 1B …
    2 2 2B …
    2HB 2H 2HB …
    2HMB,C 2HM 2HMB …
    3 3 3B …
    4 4 4B …
    4LD 4L 4BL . . .
    6 6 6B . . .
    6F 6F 6FB …
    7 7 7B …
    7LD 7L 7BL …
    7MB,C 7M 7MB …
    7MLB,D 7ML 7MLB
    8 8 8B 8A
    8C 8C 8CB 8CA
    8CLN 8CLN 8CLNB 8CLNA
    8M 8M 8MB 8MA
    8T 8T 8TB 8TA
    8F 8F 8FB 8FA
    8P 8P 8PB 8PA
    8N 8N 8NB 8NA
    8MN 8MN 8MNB 8MNA
    8R 8R 8RB 8RA
    8S 8S 8SB 8SA
    8LN 8LN 8LNB 8LNA
    8MLN 8MLN 8MLNB 8MLNA
    8MLCuN 8MLCuN 8MLCuNB 8MLCuNA
    9C 9C 9CB 9CA
    16 16 16B
    A Where ellipses ({) appear in this table there is no requirement.
    B The letters H and M indicate heat-treated nuts (see Section 6).
    CAn underline as a marking requirement for grades 2HM and 7M has been
    removed but is permitted.
    D See Supplementary Requirement S3.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-194/SA-194M
    263
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall be applied only when specified by
    the purchaser in the inquiry, contract, or order. Details of these supplementary requirements shall be
    agreed upon in writing by the manufacturer and purchaser. Supplementary requirements shall in no
    way negate any requirement of the specification itself.
    S1. Strain-Hardened Austenitic Steel Nuts
    S1.1 Strain hardened Grades 8, 8C, 8T, 8M, 8F, 8P, 8N, or
    8MN nuts may be specified. When Supplementary Requirement
    S1 is invoked in the order, nuts shall be machined from
    cold drawn bars or shall be cold forged to shape. No subsequent
    heat treatment shall be performed on the nuts. Nuts made
    in accordance with this requirement shall be proof load tested
    in accordance with 8.2.2.1 and shall withstand the proof load
    specified in Table S1.1 and Table S1.2. Testing nuts requiring
    proof loads over 160 000 lbf or 705 kN is only required when
    Supplementary Requirement S4 is invoked. The hardness
    limits of Table 2 do not apply to strain hardened nuts. Nuts
    made in accordance with this requirement shall be marked with
    the Grade symbol underlined.
    S2. Retests by Purchaser’s Representative
    S2.1 The purchaser’s representative may select two nuts per
    keg (200-lb unit [90-kg]) for sizes 5/8 in. and M16 and smaller,
    one nut per keg for sizes over 5/8 in. and M16 up to and
    including 11/2 in. and M36, and one nut per every two kegs for
    sizes larger than 11/2 in. and M36, which shall be subjected to
    the tests specified in Section 8.
    S3. Low-Temperature Requirements for Grade 4, Grade 7
    or Grade 7M Nuts
    S3.1 When low-temperature requirements are specified for
    Grade 4 or Grade 7 nuts, the Charpy test procedures and
    requirements as defined in Specification A320/A320M for
    Grade L7 shall apply. When low-temperature requirements are
    specified for Grade 7M nuts, the Charpy test procedures and
    requirements as defined in Specification A320/A320M for
    Grade L7M shall apply. Depending on the size of nuts, separate
    test samples of the same heat may be required and shall be
    processed through heat treatment with the nuts for which the
    test is to apply. Impact testing is not required when the bar
    stock or nut is smaller than 5/8 in. [16 mm] in diameter.
    S3.2 An“ L” shall be added to the marking, as shown in
    Table 7, for nuts so tested.
    S4. Proof Load Tests of Large Nuts
    S4.1 Proof load testing of nuts requiring proof loads of over
    160 000 lbf or 705 kN is required. Testing shall be performed
    in accordance with 8.2 to the loads required in Table S4.1 and
    Table S4.2. The maximum load will be based entirely on the
    equipment available.
    S5. Control of Product by Heat Number
    S5.1 When control of nuts by actual heat analysis is
    required and this supplementary requirement is specified, the
    manufacturer shall identify the completed nuts in each shipment
    by the actual heat number. When this supplementary
    requirement is specified, a certificate including the results of
    the actual production tests of each test lot together with the heat
    chemical analysis shall be furnished by the manufacturer.
    TABLE S1.1 Proof Load Testing of Strain Hardened Nuts Using Threaded Mandrel — Inch Series
    NOTE 1—Proof loads are not design loads.
    Proof Load, lbfA
    Nominal
    Size, in.
    Threads
    per in.
    Stress Area,
    in.2
    Grade 8M
    (strain hardened)
    Grade 8M
    (strain hardened)
    All Other Types
    of Grade 8
    (strain hardened)
    All Other Types
    of Grade 8
    (strain hardened)
    Heavy HexB HexC Heavy HexD HexB
    1/4 20 0.0316 3 480 3 160 3 950 3 480
    5/16 18 0.0523 5 760 5 240 6 550 5 760
    3/8 16 0.0774 8 510 7 740 9 675 8 510
    7/16 14 0.1063 11 690 10 630 13 290 11 690
    1/2 13 0.1419 15 610 14 190 17 740 15 610
    9/16 12 0.182 20 020 18 200 22 750 20 020
    5/8 11 0.226 24 860 22 600 28 250 24 860
    3/4 10 0.334 36 740 33 400 41 750 36 740
    7/8 9 0.462 46 200 41 580 53 130 46 200
    1 8 0.606 60 600 54 540 69 690 60 600
    11/8 8 0.790 75 050 67 150 82 950 75 050
    11/4 8 1.000 95 000 85 000 105 000 95 000
    13/8 8 1.233 110 970 98 640 123 300 110 970
    11/2 8 1.492 134 280 119 360 149 200 134 280
    A The proof load for jam nuts shall be 46 % of the tabulated value.
    B Based on proof stress of 110 000 psi up to 3/4 in.; 100 000 psi 7/8 to 1 in.; 95 000 psi 11/8 to 11/4 in.; 90 000 psi 13/8 to 11/2 in.
    C Based on proof stress of 100 000 psi up to 3/4 in.; 90 000 psi 7/8 to 1 in.; 85 000 psi 11/8 to 11/4 in.; 80 000 psi 13/8 to 11/2 in.
    D Based on proof stress of 125 000 psi up to 3/4 in.; 115 000 psi 7/8 to 1 in.; 105 000 psi 11/8 to 11/4 in.; 100 000 psi 13/8 to 11/2 in.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-194/SA-194M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    264
    S6. Grain Size Requirements for Non H Grade Austenitic
    Steels Used Above 1000 °F
    S6.1 For design metal temperatures above 1000 °F [540
    °C], the material shall have a grain size of No. 7 or coarser as
    determined in accordance with Test Methods E112. The grain
    size so determined shall be reported on the Certificate of Test.
    S7. Coating on Nuts
    S7.1 It is the purchaser’s responsibility to specify in the
    purchase order all information required by the coating facility.
    Examples of such information may include but are not limited
    to the following:
    S7.1.1 Reference to the appropriate coating specification
    and type, thickness, location, modification to dimensions, and
    hydrogen embrittlement relief.
    NOTE S7.1—Modification of thread dimensions may result in loss of
    load carrying ability.
    S7.1.2 Reference to Specifications A153/A153M, B633,
    B695, B696, B766, F1941, F2329, or Test Method F1940, or
    other standards.
    TABLE S1.2 Proof Load Testing of Strain Hardened Nuts Using Threaded Mandrel — Metric
    NOTE 1—Proof loads are not design loads.
    Proof Load, kNA
    Nominal
    Size, mm
    Thread
    Pitch
    Stress Area,
    mm2
    Grade 8M
    (strain hardened)
    Grade 8M
    (strain hardened)
    All Other Types
    of Grade 8
    (strain hardened)
    All Other Types
    of Grade 8
    (strain hardened)
    Heavy HexB HexC Heavy HexD HexB
    M6 1.0 20.1 15.3 13.9 17.3 15.3
    M8 1.25 36.6 27.8 25.3 31.3 27.8
    M10 1.50 58.0 44.1 40.0 49.9 44.1
    M12 1.75 84.3 64.1 58.2 72.5 64.1
    M14 2.0 115.0 87.4 79.4 98.9 87.4
    M16 2.0 157.0 119.3 108.3 135.0 119.3
    M20 2.5 245.0 186.2 169.0 210.9 186.2
    M22 2.5 303.0 209.0 187.9 240.9 209.0
    M24 3.0 353.0 243.5 218.9 280.6 243.5
    M27 3.0 459.0 300.6 268.5 332.7 300.6
    M30 3.5 561.0 367.5 328.2 406.7 367.5
    M36 4.0 817.0 506.5 449.4 563.7 506.5
    A The proof load for jam nuts shall be 46 % of the tabulated value.
    B Based on proof stress of 760 MPa up to M20 mm; 690 MPa M22 to M24 mm; 655 MPa M27 to M30; and 620 MPa for M36.
    C Based on proof stress of 690 MPa up to M20 mm; 620 MPa M22 to M24 mm; 585 MPa M27 to M30; and 550 MPa for M36.
    D Based on proof stress of 860 MPa up to M20 mm; 795 MPa M22 to M24 mm; 725 MPa M27 to M30 mm; and 690 MPa for M36.
    TABLE S4.1 Proof Load for Large Heavy Hex Nuts — InchA
    Nominal
    Size, in.
    Threads
    per in.
    Stress Area,
    in. 2
    Proof Load, lbfB
    Grade 1 Heavy Hex
    Grades 2, 2HM, 6, 6F, 7M
    Heavy Hex
    Grades 2H, 3, 4, 7, 16
    Heavy Hex
    15/8 8 1.78 231 400 267 000 311 500
    13/4 8 2.08 270 400 312 000 364 000
    17/8 8 2.41 313 300 361 500 421 800
    2 8 2.77 360 100 415 500 484 800
    21/4 8 3.56 462 800 534 000 623 000
    21/2 8 4.44 577 200 666 000 777 000
    23/4 8 5.43 705 900 814 500 950 250
    A ASME B18.2.2 in the size range over 11/2 in. provides dimensions only for heavy hex nuts. Refer to 8.3.1.
    B Proof loads for nuts of larger dimensions or other thread series may be calculated by multiplying the thread stress area times the proof stress in the notes to Table 3
    or Table S1.1. The proof load for jam nuts shall be 46 % of the tabulated load.
    TABLE S4.2 Proof Load for Large Heavy Hex Nuts — MetricA
    Nominal
    Size,
    mm
    Thread
    Pitch
    Stress Area,
    mm 2
    Proof Load, kNB
    Grade 1 Heavy Hex
    Grades 2, 2HM, 6, 6F, 7M
    Heavy Hex
    Grades 2H, 3, 4, 7, 16
    Heavy Hex
    M42 4.5 1120 1002.4 1159.2 1349.6
    M48 5 1470 1315.7 1521.4 1771.4
    M56 5.5 2030 1816.9 2101.0 2446.2
    M64 6 2680 2398.6 2773.8 3229.4
    M72 6 3460 3096.7 3581.1 4169.3
    A ASME B 18.2.4.6M in the size range over M36 provides dimensions only for heavy hex nuts. Refer to 7.3.1.
    B Proof loads for nuts of larger dimensions or other thread series may be calculated by multiplying the thread stress area times the proof stress in the notes to Table 4
    or Table S1.2. The proof load for jam nuts shall be 46 % of the tabulated load.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-194/SA-194M
    265
    S8. Marking Coated Nuts
    S8.1 Nuts coated with zinc shall have ZN marked after the
    grade symbol. Nuts coated with cadmium shall have CD
    marked after the grade symbol.
    NOTE S8.1—As an example, the marking for zinc-coated 2H fasteners
    will now be 2HZN rather than 2H*.
    S9. Proof Load Testing
    S9.1 Proof load tests of nuts made to dimensions, thread
    pitch, and configurations other than those covered in Table 3 or
    Table 4 shall be made using loads agreed upon between the
    manufacturer and the purchaser.
    APPENDIXES
    (Nonmandatory Information)
    X1. STRAIN HARDENING OF AUSTENITIC STEELS
    X1.1 Strain hardening is the increase in strength and hardness
    that results from plastic deformation below the recrystallization
    temperature (cold work). This effect is produced in
    austenitic stainless steels by reducing oversized bars to the
    desired final size by cold drawing or other process. The degree
    of strain hardening achievable in any alloy is limited by its
    strain hardening characteristics. In addition, the amount of
    strain hardening that can be produced is further limited by the
    variables of the process, such as the total amount of crosssection
    reduction, die angle and bar size. In large diameter bars,
    for example, plastic deformation will occur principally in the
    outer regions of the bar, so that the increased strength and
    hardness due to strain hardening is achieved predominantly
    near the surface of the bar. That is, the smaller the bar, the
    greater the penetration of strain hardening. Thus, the mechanical
    properties of a given strain hardened fastener are dependent
    not just on the alloy, but also on the size of bar from which it
    is machined.
    X2. COATINGS AND APPLICATION LIMITS
    X2.1 Use of coated fasteners at temperatures above approximately
    one-half the melting point (Fahrenheit or Celsius) of the
    coating is not recommended unless consideration is given to
    the potential for liquid and solid metal embrittlement, or both.
    The melting point of elemental zinc is approximately 780 °F
    [415 °C]. Therefore, application of zinc coated fasteners should
    be limited to temperatures less than 390 °F [210 °C]. The
    melting point of cadmium is approximately 600 °F [320 °C].
    Therefore, application of cadmium coated fasteners should be
    limited to temperatures less than 300 °F [160 °C].
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ð19Þ
    SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES,
    ALLOY STEEL, NICKEL
    SA-203/SA-203M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A203/A203M-17.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-203/SA-203M
    267
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-203/SA-203M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    268
    Standard Specification for
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel
54. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers nickel-alloy steel plates intended
    primarily for welded pressure vessels.
    1.2 Plates under this specification are available with four
    strength levels and two nickel compositions as follows:
    Grade
    Nominal Nickel
    Content %
    Yield Strength, min,
    ksi [MPa]
    Tensile Strength,
    min, ksi [MPa]
    A 2.25 37 [255] 65 [450]
    B 2.25 40 [275] 70 [485]
    D 3.50 37 [255] 65 [450]
    E 3.50 40 [275] 70 [485]
    F 3.50
    2 in. [50 mm] and under 55 [380] 80 [550]
    Over 2 in. [50 mm] 50 [345] 75 [515]
    1.3 The maximum thickness of plates is limited only by the
    capacity of the composition to meet the specified mechanical
    property requirements.
    1.4 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system are not exact equivalents. Therefore, each system must
    be used independently of the other. Combining values from the
    two systems may result in nonconformance with this specification.
    1.5 This international standard was developed in accordance
    with internationally recognized principles on standardization
    established in the Decision on Principles for the
    Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
    issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
    Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
55. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A20/A20M Specification for General Requirements for Steel
    Plates for Pressure Vessels
    A435/A435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
    Examination of Steel Plates
    A577/A577M Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination
    of Steel Plates
    A578/A578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
    Examination of Rolled Steel Plates for Special Applications
56. General Requirements and Ordering Information
    3.1 Material supplied to this material specification shall
    conform to Specification A20/A20M. These requirements outline
    the testing and retesting methods and procedures, permitted
    variations in dimensions, and mass, quality and repair of
    defects, marking, loading, and ordering information.
    3.2 In addition to the basic requirements of this
    specification, certain supplementary requirements are available
    when additional control, testing, or examination is required to
    meet end use requirements. The purchaser is referred to the
    listed supplementary requirements in this specification and to
    the detailed requirements in Specification A20/A20M.
    3.3 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
    with the requirements of Specification A20/A20M, the requirements
    of this specification shall prevail.
57. Materials and Manufacture
    4.1 Steelmaking Practice—The steel shall be killed and
    shall conform to the fine grain size requirement of Specification
    A20/A20M.
58. Heat Treatment
    5.1 All plates shall be thermally treated as follows:
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-203/SA-203M
    269
    5.1.1 All plates of Grades A, B, D, and E shall be normalized
    except as permitted by 5.1.1.1.
    5.1.1.1 If approved by the purchaser for Grades A, B, D, and
    E, cooling rates faster than air cooling are permissible for
    improvement of the toughness, provided the plates are subsequently
    tempered at not less than 1100°F [595°C] for not less
    than 1/2 h.
    5.1.2 All plates of Grade F shall be heat treated by heating
    into the austenitic range, quenching in water, and tempering at
    not less than 1100°F [595°C] for not less than 1/2 h.
59. Chemical Composition
    6.1 The steel shall conform to the chemical requirements
    shown in Table 1 unless otherwise modified in accordance with
    Supplementary Requirement S17, Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized
    Steel, in Specification A20/A20M.
60. Mechanical Properties
    7.1 Tension Test Requirements—The material as represented
    by the tension test specimens shall conform to the requirements
    shown in Table 2.
    7.1.1 For plates that have been heat treated in accordance
    with 5.1.1.1 or 5.1.2 and have a nominal thickness of 3/4 in. [20
    mm] and under, the 11/2-in. (40-mm) wide rectangular specimen
    may be used for the tension test, and the elongation may
    be determined in a 2-in. [50-mm] gage length that includes the
    fracture and that shows the greatest elongation. When this
    specimen is used, the elongation shall be not less than 23 %.
    7.2 Impact Test Requirements:
    7.2.1 Plates of Grades A, B, D, and E that have been heat
    treated in accordance with 5.1.1.1 shall be Charpy V-notch
    impact tested. The impact test shall meet 20 ft · lbf [27 J]. The
    test temperature and orientation shall be a matter of agreement
    between the purchaser and supplier.
    7.2.2 Grade F plates shall be impact tested in accordance
    with Supplementary Requirement S5 in Specification A20/
    A20M.
61. Keywords
    8.1 alloy steel plate; nickel alloy steel; pressure containing
    parts; pressure vessel steels; steel plates; steel plates for
    pressure vessel applications
    TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
    Elements
    Composition, %
    Grade A Grade B Grade D Grades E and F
    Carbon, max:A
    Up to 2 in. [50 mm] in thickness 0.17 0.21 0.17 0.20
    Over 2 in. to 4 in. [100 mm] incl. in thickness 0.20 0.24 0.20 0.23
    Over 4 in. [100 mm] in thickness 0.23 0.25 … …
    Manganese, max:
    Heat analysis:
    2 in. [50 mm] and under 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70
    Over 2 in. [50 mm] 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80
    Product analysis:
    2 in. [50 mm] and under 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78
    Over 2 in. [50 mm] 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88
    Phosphorus, maxA 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
    Sulfur, maxA 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
    Silicon:
    Heat analysis 0.15–0.40 0.15–0.40 0.15–0.40 0.15–0.40
    Product analysis 0.13–0.45 0.13–0.45 0.13–0.45 0.13–0.45
    Nickel:
    Heat analysis 2.10–2.50 2.10–2.50 3.25–3.75 3.25–3.75
    Product analysis 2.03–2.57 2.03–2.57 3.18–3.82 3.18–3.82
    A Applies to both heat and product analyses.
    TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
    Grades A and D Grades B and E Grade F
    ksi [MPa] ksi [MPa] ksi [MPa]
    Tensile strength
    2 in. [50 mm] and under 65–85 [450–585] 70–90 [485–620] 80–100 [550–690]
    Over 2 in. [50 mm] 65–85 [450–585] 70–90 [485–620] 75–95 [515–655]
    Yield strength, min
    2 in. [50 mm] and under 37 [255] 40 [275] 55 [380]
    Over 2 in. [50 mm] 37 [255] 40 [275] 50 [345]
    Elongation in 8 in. [200 mm] min, %A 19 17 …
    Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] min, %A,B 23 21 20
    A See Specification A20/A20M for elongation adjustments.
    B See 7.1.1.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-203/SA-203M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    270
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    Supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified in the order.
    Alist of standardized supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser are included
    in Specification A20/A20M. Those which are considered suitable for use with this specification are
    listed below by title.
    S1. Vacuum Treatment,
    S2. Product Analysis,
    S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical
    Test Coupons,
    S4.1 Additional Tension Test,
    S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test,
    S6. Drop Weight Test (for Material 0.625 in. [16 mm] and
    over in Thickness),
    S7. High-Temperature Tension Test,
    S8. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A435/A435M,
    S9. Magnetic Particle Examination,
    S11. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A577/A577M,
    S12. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A578/A578M, and
    S17. Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ð19Þ
    SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES,
    ALLOY STEEL, MOLYBDENUM
    SA-204/SA-204M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A204/A204M-18.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-204/SA-204M
    271
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-204/SA-204M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    272
    Standard Specification for
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum
62. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers molybdenum-alloy steel
    plates, intended particularly for welded boilers and other
    pressure vessels.
    1.2 Plates under this specification are available in three
    grades having different strength levels as follows:
    Grade Tensile Strength, ksi [MPa]
    A 65–85 [450–585]
    B 70–90 [485–620]
    C 75–95 [515–655]
    1.3 The maximum thickness of plates is limited only by the
    capacity of the composition to meet the specified mechanical
    property requirements.
    1.4 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must
    be used independently of the other. Combining values from the
    two systems may result in nonconformance with this specification.
    1.5 This international standard was developed in accordance
    with internationally recognized principles on standardization
    established in the Decision on Principles for the
    Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
    issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
    Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
63. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A20/A20M Specification for General Requirements for Steel
    Plates for Pressure Vessels
    A435/A435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
    Examination of Steel Plates
    A577/A577M Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination
    of Steel Plates
    A578/A578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
    Examination of Rolled Steel Plates for Special Applications
64. General Requirements and Ordering Information
    3.1 Material supplied to this material specification shall
    conform to Specification A20/A20M. These requirements outline
    the testing and retesting methods and procedures, permitted
    variations in dimensions, and mass, quality and repair of
    defects, marking, loading, and ordering information.
    3.2 In addition to the basic requirements of this
    specification, certain supplementary requirements are available
    when additional control, testing, or examination is required to
    meet end use requirements. The purchaser is referred to the
    listed supplementary requirements in this specification and to
    the detailed requirements in Specification A20/A20M.
    3.3 Coils are excluded from qualification to this specification
    until they are processed into finished plates. Plates
    produced from coil means plates that have been cut to
    individual lengths from coil. The processor directly controls, or
    is responsible for, the operations involved in the processing of
    coils into finished plates. Such operations include decoiling,
    leveling, cutting to length, testing, inspection, conditioning,
    heat treatment (if applicable), packaging, marking, loading for
    shipment, and certification.
    NOTE 1—For plates produced from coil and furnished without heat
    treatment or with stress relieving only, three test results are reported for
    each qualifying coil. Additional requirements regarding plates from coil
    are described in Specification A20/A20M.
    3.4 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
    with the requirements of Specification A20/A20M, the requirements
    of this specification shall prevail.
65. Materials and Manufacture
    4.1 Steelmaking Practice—The steel shall be killed.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-204/SA-204M
    273
66. Heat Treatment
    5.1 Plates 11/2 in. [40 mm] and under in thickness are
    normally supplied in the as-rolled condition. The plates may be
    ordered normalized, normalized and tempered, or stress relieved.
    5.2 Plates over 11/2 in. [40 mm] in thickness shall be
    normalized or normalized and tempered.
67. Chemical Requirements
    6.1 The steel shall conform to the chemical requirements
    given in Table 1 unless otherwise modified in accordance with
    Supplementary Requirement S17, Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized
    Steel, in Specification A20/A20M.
68. Mechanical Requirements
    7.1 Tension Test Requirements—The plates, as represented
    by the tension-test specimens, shall conform to the requirements
    given in Table 2.
69. Keywords
    8.1 alloy steel plate; molybdenum-alloy; pressure containing
    parts; pressure vessel steel plate
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    Supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified in the purchase order.
    A list of standardized supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser is included
    in Specification A20/A20M. Those that are considered suitable for use with this specification are listed
    in this section by title.
    S1. Vacuum Treatment,
    S2. Product Analysis,
    S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical
    Test Coupons,
    S4.1 Additional Tension Test,
    S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test,
    S6. Drop Weight Test (for Material 0.625 in. [16 mm] and
    over in Thickness),
    TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
    Element
    Composition, %
    Grade A Grade B Grade C
    Carbon, max:A
    Up to 1 in. [25 mm]
    incl, in thickness
    0.18 0.20 0.23
    Over 1 in. to 2 in. [50 mm]
    incl, in thickness
    0.21 0.23 0.26
    Over 2 in. to 4 in. [100 mm]
    incl, in thickness
    0.23 0.25 0.28
    Over 4 in. [100 mm]
    in thickness
    0.25 0.27 0.28
    Manganese, max:
    Heat analysis 0.90 0.90 0.90
    Product analysis 0.98 0.98 0.98
    Phosphorous, maxA 0.025 0.025 0.025
    Sulfur, maxA 0.025 0.025 0.025
    Silicon:
    Heat analysis 0.15–0.40 0.15–0.40 0.15–0.40
    Product analysis 0.13–0.45 0.13–0.45 0.13–0.45
    Molybdenum:
    Heat analysis 0.45–0.60 0.45–0.60 0.45–0.60
    Product analysis 0.41–0.64 0.41–0.64 0.41–0.64
    A Applies to both heat and product analyses.
    TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
    Grade A Grade B Grade C
    ksi [MPa] ksi [MPa] ksi [MPa]
    Tensile strength 65–85 [450–585] 70–90 [485–620] 75–95 [515–655]
    Yield strength, minA 37 [255] 40 [275] 43 [295]
    Elongation in 8 in. [200 mm], min, %B 19 17 16
    Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min, %B 23 21 20
    A Determined by either the 0.2 % offset method or the 0.5 % extension-under-load method.
    B See Specification A20/A20M for elongation adjustment.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-204/SA-204M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    274
    S7. High-Temperature Tension Test,
    S8. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A435/A435M,
    S9. Magnetic Particle Examination,
    S11. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A577/A577M,
    S12. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A578/A578M, and
    S17. Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS
    CARBON-MOLYBDENUM ALLOY-STEEL BOILER AND
    SUPERHEATER TUBES
    SA-209/SA-209M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A209/A209M-03(R12).)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-209/SA-209M
    275
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-209/SA-209M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    276
    Standard Specification for
    Seamless Carbon-Molybdenum Alloy-Steel Boiler and
    Superheater Tubes
70. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers several grades of minimumwall-
    thickness, seamless, carbon-molybdenum alloy-steel,
    boiler and superheater tubes.
    1.2 This specification covers tubes 1/2 to 5 in. [12.7 to 127
    mm] inclusive, in outside diameter and 0.035 to 0.500 in. [0.9
    to 12.7 mm], inclusive, in minimum wall thickness.
    1.3 An optional supplementary requirement is provided and,
    when desired, shall be so stated in the order.
    1.4 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must
    be used independently of the other. Combining values from the
    two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification.
    The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M”
    designation of this specification is specified in the order.
71. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A1016/A1016M Specification for General Requirements for
    Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic Alloy Steel, and Stainless
    Steel Tubes
72. General Requirements
    3.1 Product furnished under this specification shall conform
    to the requirements of Specification A1016/A1016M, including
    any supplementary requirements that are indicated in the
    purchase order. Failure to comply with the general requirements
    of Specification A1016/A1016M constitutes nonconformance
    with this specification. In case of conflict with the
    requirements of this specification and Specification A1016/
    A1016M, this specification shall prevail.
73. Materials and Manufacture
    4.1 Steelmaking Practice—The steel shall be killed.
    4.2 The tubes shall be made by the seamless process and
    shall be either hot-finished or cold-finished, as specified.
    4.3 Heat Treatment—Hot-finished tubes shall be heat treated
    at a temperature of 1200 °F [650 °C] or higher. Cold-finished
    tubes shall, after the final cold finishing, be heat treated at a
    temperature of 1200 °F [650 °C] or higher, or tubing may be
    furnished in the full-annealed, isothermal annealed, or normalized
    and tempered condition. If furnished in the normalized
    and tempered condition, the minimum tempering temperature
    shall be 1200 °F [650 °C].
74. Chemical Composition
    5.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements given in
    Table 1.
    5.2 Product Analysis
    5.2.1 An analysis shall be made by the manufacturer of one
    billet or one tube from each heat. The chemical composition
    thus determined, shall conform to the requirements given in
    Table 1.
    5.2.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests of
    two additional billets or tubes shall be made. Both retests for
    the elements in question shall meet the requirements of the
    specification; otherwise all remaining material in the heat or lot
    (See 7.1) shall be rejected or, at the option of the producer, each
    billet or tube may be individually tested for acceptance. Billets
    or tubes that do not meet the requirements of the specification
    shall be rejected.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-209/SA-209M
    277
75. Mechanical Properties
    6.1 Tensile Requirements
    6.1.1 The material shall conform to the requirements given
    in Table 2.
    6.1.2 Table 3 gives the computed minimum elongation
    values for each 1/32-in. [0.8-mm] decrease in wall thickness.
    Where the wall thickness lies between two values shown
    above, the minimum elongation value shall be determined by
    the following equation:
    E 5 48t115.00 @E 5 1.87t115.00# (1)
    where:
    E = elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], %, and,
    t = actual thickness of specimen, in. [mm].
    6.2 Hardness Requirements—The tubes shall have a hardness
    not exceeding the values given in Table 4.
    6.3 Number of Tests
    6.3.1 Tension Test—One tension test shall be made on a
    specimen for lots of not more than 50 tubes. Tension tests shall
    be made on specimens from two tubes for lots of more than 50
    tubes (See 7.2)
    6.3.2 Flattening Test—One flattening test shall be made on
    specimens from each end of one finished tube, not the one used
    for the flaring test, from each lot (See 7.1)
    6.3.3 Flaring Test—One flaring test shall be made on
    specimens from each end of one finished tube, not the one used
    for the flattening test, from each lot (See 7.1)
    6.3.4 Hardness Test—Brinell or Rockwell hardness tests
    shall be made on specimens from two tubes from each lot (See
    7.2)
76. Sampling
    7.1 Flattening, Flaring, and Product Analysis—For
    flattening, flaring, and product analysis requirements, the term
    lot applies to all tubes prior to cutting of the same nominal size
    and wall thickness that are produced from the same heat of
    steel. When final heat treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot
    shall include only those tubes of the same size and from the
    same heat that are heat treated in the same furnace charge.
    When the final heat treatment is in a continuous furnace, the
    number of tubes of the same size and from the same heat in a
    lot shall be determined from the size of the tubes given in Table
    5.
    7.2 Tension and Hardness Tests—For tension and hardness
    tests, the term lot applies to all tubes prior to cutting, of the
    same nominal diameter and wall thickness that are produced
    from the same heat of steel. When final heat treatment is in a
    batch-type furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes of the
    same size and the same heat that are heat treated in the same
    furnace charge. When the final heat treatment is in a continuous
    furnace, a lot shall include all tubes of the same size and heat,
    heat treated in the same furnace at the same temperature, time
    at heat, and furnace speed.
    TABLE 1 Chemical Composition Requirements
    Element Composition, %
    Grade T1 Grade T1a Grade T1b
    Carbon 0.10–0.20 0.15–0.25 0.14 max
    Manganese 0.30–0.80 0.30–0.80 0.30–0.80
    Phosphorus, max 0.025 0.025 0.025
    Sulfur, max 0.025 0.025 0.025
    Silicon 0.10–0.50 0.10–0.50 0.10–0.50
    Molybdenum 0.44–0.65 0.44–0.65 0.44–0.65
    TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
    Grade
    T1
    Grade
    T1b
    Grade
    T1a
    Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa] 55 [380] 53 [365] 60 [415]
    Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa] 30 [205] 28 [195] 32 [220]
    Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % 30 30 30
    For longitudinal strip tests a deduction
    shall be made for each 1/32-in.
    [0.8- mm] decrease in wall thickness
    below 5/16 in. [8 mm] from the
    basic minimum elongation of the
    following percentage
    1.50A 1.50A 1.50A
    When standard round 2-in. or 50-mm
    gage length or smaller proportionally
    sized specimen with the gage
    length equal to 4D (four times the
    diameter) is used
    22 22 22
    ATable 3 gives the computed minimum values.
    TABLE 3 Computed Minimum Values
    Wall Thickness Elongation in 2 in. or 50
    mm, min, %A
    in. mm
    5/16 (0.312) 8 30
    9/32 (0.281) 7.2 29
    1/4 (0.250) 6.4 27
    7/32 (0.219) 5.6 26
    3/16 (0.188) 4.8 24
    5/32 (0.156) 4 22
    1/8 (0.125) 3.2 21
    3/32 (0.094) 2.4 20
    1/16 (0.062) 1.6 18
    ACalculated elongation requirements shall be rounded to the nearest whole
    number.
    TABLE 4 Hardness Requirements
    Brinell Hardness
    Number (Tubes 0.200
    in. [5.1 mm] and over in
    Wall Thickness), HBW
    Rockwell Hardness
    Number (Tubes less than
    0.200 in. [5.1 mm] in
    Wall Thickness), HRB
    Grade T 1 146 80
    Grade T 1a 153 81
    Grade T 1b 137 77
    TABLE 5 Number of Tubes in a Lot Heat Treated by the
    Continuous Process
    Size of Tube Size of Lot
    2 in. [50.8 mm] and over in outside diameter and
    0.200 in. [5.1 mm] and over in wall thickness
    not more than 50 tubes
    2 in. [50.8 mm] and over in outside diameter and
    under 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] in wall thickness
    not more than 75 tubes
    Less than 2 in. [50.8 mm] but over 1 in. [25.4 mm]
    in outside diameter
    not more than 75 tubes
    1 in. [25.4 mm] or less in outside diameter not more than 125 tubes
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-209/SA-209M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    278
77. Forming Operations
    8.1 Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand expanding
    and beading without showing cracks or flaws. Superheater
    tubes when properly manipulated shall stand all forging,
    welding, and bending operations necessary for application
    without developing defects.
78. Product Marking
    9.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
    A1016/A1016M, the marking shall include whether the tube is
    hot-finished or cold-finished.
79. Keywords
    10.1 boiler tubes; carbon-molybdenum; seamless steel
    tube; steel tube; superheater tubes
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    The following supplementary requirement shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
    inquiry, contract, or order.
    S1. Surface Condition
    S1.1 If pickling or shot blasting, or both, are required, this
    shall be specifically stated in the order. Details of this supplemental
    requirement shall be agreed upon between the manufacturer
    and the purchaser.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS MEDIUM-CARBON
    STEEL BOILER AND SUPERHEATER TUBES
    SA-210/SA-210M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A210/A210M-95 except for editorial differences in Table 2.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-210/SA-210M
    279
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-210/SA-210M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    280
    SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS MEDIUM-CARBON
    STEEL BOILER AND SUPERHEATER TUBES
    SA-210/SA-210M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A 210/A 210M-95 except for editorial differences in Table 2.)
80. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers minimum-wall-thickness,
    seamless medium-carbon steel, boiler tubes and boiler
    flues, including safe ends (Note 1), arch and stay tubes,
    and superheater tubes.
    NOTE 1 — This type is not suitable for safe ending by forge welding.
    1.2 The tubing sizes and thicknesses usually furnished
    to this specification are 1/2 in. to 5 in. [12.7 to 127 mm]
    in outside diameter and 0.035 to 0.500 in. [0.9 to 12.7 mm],
    inclusive, in minimum wall thickness. Tubing having other
    dimensions may be furnished, provided such tubes comply
    with all other requirements of this specification.
    1.3 Mechanical property requirements do not apply to
    tubing smaller than 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in inside diameter or
    0.015 in. [0.4 mm] in thickness.
    1.4 When these products are to be used in applications
    conforming to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction,
    the requirements of Specification A 520, shall supplement
    and supersede the requirements of this specification.
    1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
    units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
    text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
    in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
    system must be used independently of the other. Combining
    values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
    with the specification. The inch-pound units shall apply
    unless the “M” designation of this specification is specified
    in the order.
81. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A 450/A 450M Specification for General Requirements
    for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel
    Tubes
    A 520 Specification for Supplementary Requirements for
    Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel
    Tubular Products for High-Temperature Service Conforming
    to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction
82. Ordering Information
    3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
    include the following, as required, to describe the desired
    material adequately:
    3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
    3.1.2 Name of material (seamless tubes),
    3.1.3 Grade,
    3.1.4 Manufacture (hot-finished or cold-finished),
    3.1.5 Size (outside diameter and minimum wall
    thickness),
    3.1.6 Length (specific or random),
    3.1.7 Optional requirements (Sections 7 and 10),
    3.1.8 Test report required (see Certification Specification
    of Specification A 450/A 450M),
    3.1.9 Specification designation, and
    3.1.10 Special requirements
83. General Requirements
    4.1 Material furnished under this specification shall
    conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition
    of Specification A 450/A 450M, unless otherwise provided
    herein.
84. Manufacture
    5.1 Steelmaking Practice — The steel shall be killed.
    5.2 The tubes shall be made by the seamless process and
    shall be either hot-finished or cold-finished, as specified.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-210/SA-210M
    281
85. Heat Treatment
    6.1 Hot-finished tubes need not be heat treated. Coldfinished
    tubes shall be given a subcritical anneal, a full
    anneal, or a normalizing heat treatment after the final coldfinishing
    process.
86. Surface Condition
    7.1 If pickling or shot blasting or both are required,
    this shall be specifically stated in the order.
87. Chemical Composition
    8.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
    chemical composition prescribed in Table 1.
    8.2 When a grade is ordered under this specification,
    supplying an alloy grade that specifically requires the addition
    of any element other than those listed for the ordered
    grade in Table 1 is not permitted.
88. Product Analysis
    9.1 When requested on the purchase order, a product
    analysis shall be made by the supplier from one tube or
    billet per heat. The chemical composition thus determined
    shall conform to the requirements specified.
    9.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests
    of two additional billets or tubes shall be made. Both retests
    for the elements in question shall meet the requirements
    of the specification; otherwise, all remaining material in
    the heat or lot (Note 2) shall be rejected or, at the option
    of the producer, each billet or tube may be individually
    tested for acceptance. Billets or tubes which do not meet
    the requirements of the specification shall be rejected.
    NOTE 2—For flattening and flaring requirements, the term “lot” applies
    to all tubes prior to cutting of the same nominal size and wall thickness
    which are produced from the same heat of steel. When final heat treatment
    is in a batch-type furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes of the same
    size and from the same heat which are heat treated in the same furnace
    charge. When the final heat treatment is in a continuous furnace, the
    number of tubes of the same size and from the same heat in a lot shall
    be determined from the size of the tubes as prescribed in Table 2.
    NOTE 3 — For tensile and hardness test requirements, the term “lot”
    applies to all tubes prior to cutting, of the same nominal diameter and
    wall thickness which are produced from the same heat of steel. When
    final heat treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot shall include only
    those tubes of the same size and the same heat which are heat treated in
    the same furnace charge. When the final heat treatment is in a continuous
    furnace, a lot shall include all tubes of the same size and heat, heat
    treated in the same furnace at the same temperature, time at heat, and
    furnace speed.
89. Tensile Requiremnts
    10.1 The material shall conform to the requirements
    as to tensile properties prescribed in Table 3.
    10.2 Table 4 gives the computed minimum elongation
    values for each 1/32 in. [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickness.
    Where the wall thickness lies between two values shown
    above, the minimum elongation value shall be determined
    by the following equation:
    E p 48t + 15.00 [E p 1.87t + 15.00]
    where:
    E p elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, %, and
    t p actual thickness of specimen, in. [mm].
90. Hardness Requirements
    11.1 The tubes shall have a hardness not exceeding the
    following: 79 HRB or 143 HB for Grade A-1, 89 HRB or
    179 HB for Grade C.
91. Mechanical Tests Required
    12.1 Tension Test — One tension test shall be made on
    a specimen for lots of not more than 50 tubes. Tension
    tests shall be made on specimens from two tubes for lots
    of more than 50 tubes (Note 3).
    12.2 Flattening Test—One flattening test shall be made
    on specimens from each end of one finished tube from
    each lot (Note 2), but not the one used for the flaring test.
    Tears or breaks occurring at the 12 or 6 o’clock positions
    on Grade C tubing with sizes of 2.375 in. [60.3 mm] in
    outside diameter and smaller shall not be considered a
    basis for rejection.
    12.3 Flaring Test — One flaring test shall be made on
    specimens from each end of the one finished tube from
    each lot (Note 2,) but not the one used for the flattening test.
    12.4 Hardness Test—Brinell or Rockwell hardness test
    shall be made on specimens from two tubes from each lot
    (Note 3).
    12.5 Hydrostatic or Nondestructive Electric Test —
    Each tube shall be subjected to the hydrostatic, or, instead
    of this test, a nondestructive electric test may be used when
    specified by the purchaser.
92. Forming Operations
    13.1 When inserted in the boiler, tubes shall stand
    expanding and beading without showing cracks or flaws.
    When properly manipulated, superheater tubes shall stand
    all forging, welding and bending operations necessary for
    application without developing defects.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-210/SA-210M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    282
93. Product Marking
    14.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
    A 450/A 450M, the marking shall indicate whether
    the tube is hot-finished or cold-finished.
    TABLE 1
    CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
    Composition, %
    Element Grade A-1 Grade C
    CarbonA, max 0.27 0.35
    Manganese 0.93 max 0.29–1.06
    Phosphorus, max 0.035 0.035
    Sulfur, max 0.035 0.035
    Silicon, min 0.10 0.10
    A For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum,
    an increase of 0.06% manganese above the specified maximum
    will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%.
    TABLE 3
    TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
    Grade A-1 Grade C
    Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa] 60 [415] 70 [485]
    Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa] 37 [255] 40 [275]
    Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % 30 30
    For longitudinal strip tests, a deduction shall be made for each 1/32 in. [0.8 1.50A 1.50A
    mm] decrease in wall thickness under 5/16 in. [8 mm] from the basic minimum
    elongation of the following percentage points
    When standard round 2 in. or 50 mm gage length or smaller proportionally 22 20
    sized specimen with the gage length equal to 4D (four times the diameter)
    is used
    A See Table 4 for the computed minimum values.
94. Keywords
    15.1 boiler tubes; carbon; seamless steel tube; steel
    tube; superheater tubes
    TABLE 2
    NUMBER OF TUBES IN A LOT HEAT TREATED BY THE
    CONTINUOUS PROCESS
    Size of Tube Size of Lot
    2 in. (50.8 mm) and over in diameter not more than 50 tubes
    and 0.200 in. (5.1 mm) and over in
    wall thickness
    2 in. (50.8 mm) and over in outside not more than 75 tubes
    diameter and under 0.200 in. (5.1
    mm) in wall thickness
    Less than 2 in. (50.8 mm) but over 1 not more than 75 tubes
    in. (25.4 mm) in outside diameter or
    over 1 in. in outside diameter and
    under 0.200 in. (5.08 mm) in wall
    thickness
    1 in. (25.4 mm) or less in outside not more than 125 tubes
    diameter
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-210/SA-210M
    283
    TABLE 4
    COMPUTED MINIMUM ELONGATION VALUESA
    Elongation in 2 in. or
    Wall Thickness, in. [mm] 50 mm, min, %
    5/16 (0.312) [8] 30
    9/32 (0.281) [7.2] 28
    1/4 (0.250) [6.4] 27
    7/32 (0.219) [5.6] 26
    3/16 (0.188) [4.8] 24
    5/32 (0.156) [4] 22
    1/8 (0.125) [3.2] 21
    3/32 (0.094) [2.4] 20
    1/16 (0.062) [1.6] 18
    0.062 to 0.035 [1.6 to 0.9], excl 17
    0.035 to 0.022 [0.9 to 0.6], excl 16
    0.022 to 0.015 [0.6 to 0.4], incl 16
    A Calculated elongation requirements shall be rounded to the nearest whole number.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ð19Þ
    SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS FERRITIC AND
    AUSTENITIC ALLOY-STEEL BOILER, SUPERHEATER,
    AND HEAT-EXCHANGER TUBES
    SA-213/SA-213M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A213/A213M-18 except for the additional H Grade requirements in 6.2.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-213/SA-213M
    285
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-213/SA-213M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    286
    Standard Specification for
    Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler,
    Superheater, and Heat-Exchanger Tubes
95. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers seamless ferritic and austenitic
    steel boiler, superheater, and heat-exchanger tubes, designated
    Grades T5, TP304, etc. These steels are listed in Tables
    1 and 2.
    1.2 Grades containing the letter, H, in their designation,
    have requirements different from those of similar grades not
    containing the letter, H. These different requirements provide
    higher creep-rupture strength than normally achievable in
    similar grades without these different requirements.
    1.3 The tubing sizes and thicknesses usually furnished to
    this specification are 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in inside diameter to 5 in.
    [127 mm] in outside diameter and 0.015 to 0.500 in. [0.4 to
    12.7 mm], inclusive, in minimum wall thickness or, if specified
    in the order, average wall thickness. Tubing having other
    diameters may be furnished, provided such tubes comply with
    all other requirements of this specification.
    1.4 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
    shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
    from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the
    standard. The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M”
    designation of this specification is specified in the order.
    1.5 This international standard was developed in accordance
    with internationally recognized principles on standardization
    established in the Decision on Principles for the
    Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
    issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
    Barriers Trade (TBT) Committee.
96. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A262 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular
    Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels
    A941 Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related
    Alloys, and Ferroalloys
    A1016/A1016M Specification for General Requirements for
    Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic Alloy Steel, and Stainless
    Steel Tubes
    E112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
    2.2 AWS Specifications
    A5.5/A5.5M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
    for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
    A5.23/A5.23M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
    and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
    A5.28/A5.28M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
    for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
    A5.29/A5.29M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored
    Arc Welding
97. Terminology
    3.1 Definitions—For definitions of terms used in this
    specification, refer to Terminology A941.
98. Ordering Information
    4.1 It shall be the responsibility of the purchaser to specify
    all requirements that are necessary for products under this
    specification. Such requirements to be considered include, but
    are not limited to, the following:
    4.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
    4.1.2 Name of material (seamless tubes),
    4.1.3 Grade (Tables 1 and 2),
    4.1.4 Condition (hot finished or cold finished),
    4.1.5 Heat treatment type (Table 3).
    4.1.6 Controlled structural characteristics (see 6.3),
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-213/SA-213M
    287
    TABLE 1 Chemical Composition Limits, %A , for Low Alloy Steel
    Grade
    UNS
    Designation
    Composition, %
    Carbon Manganese
    Phosphorus
    Sulfur
    Silicon Nickel Chromium Molybdenum Vanadium
    Boron NiobiumE Nitrogen Aluminum Tungsten Other
    Elements
    T2 K11547 0.10–0.20 0.30–0.61 0.025 0.025B 0.10–0.30 … 0.50–0.81 0.44–0.65 … … … … … … …
    T5 K41545 0.15 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 … 4.00–6.00 0.45–0.65 … … … … … … …
    T5b K51545 0.15 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 1.00–2.00 … 4.00–6.00 0.45–0.65 … … … … … … …
    T5c K41245 0.12 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 … 4.00–6.00 0.45–0.65 … … … … … … Ti
    4xC–0.70
    T9 K90941 0.15 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.25–1.00 … 8.00–10.00 0.90–1.10 … … … … … … …
    T11 K11597 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50–1.00 … 1.00–1.50 0.44–0.65 … … … … … … …
    T12 K11562 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.61 0.025 0.025B 0.50 … 0.80–1.25 0.44–0.65 … … … … … … …
    T17 K12047 0.15–0.25 0.30–0.61 0.025 0.025 0.15–0.35 … 0.80–1.25 … 0.15 … … … … … …
    T21 K31545 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50–1.00 … 2.65–3.35 0.80–1.06 … … … … … … …
    T22 K21590 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 … 1.90–2.60 0.87–1.13 … … … … … … …
    T23 K40712 0.04–0.10 0.10–0.60 0.030 0.010 0.50 0.40 1.90–2.60 0.05–0.30 0.20–0.30 0.0010–
    0.006
    0.02–0.08 0.015 0.030 1.45–1.75 Ti
    0.005–0.060
    Ti/N $
    3.5C
    T24 K30736 0.05–0.10 0.30–0.70 0.020 0.010 0.15–0.45 … 2.20–2.60 0.90–1.10 0.20–0.30 0.0015–
    0.007
    … 0.012 0.02 … Ti
    0.06–0.10
    T36 K21001 0.10–0.17 0.80–1.20 0.030 0.025 0.25–0.50 1.00–1.30 0.30 0.25–0.50 0.02 … 0.015–0.045 0.02 0.050 … Cu
    0.50–0.80
    T91 Type 1 K90901 0.07–0.14 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.010 0.20–0.50 0.40 8.0–9.5 0.85–1.05 0.18–0.25 … 0.06–0.10 0.030–
    0.070
    0.02 … Ti 0.01
    Zr 0.01
    T91 Type 2 K90901
    Heat 0.08–0.12 0.30–0.50D 0.020D 0.005D 0.20–0.40D 0.20D 8.0–9.5D 0.85–1.05 0.18–0.25 0.001D 0.06–0.10 0.035–
    0.070D
    0.020D 0.05D Ti 0.01D
    Zr 0.01D
    Cu 0.10D
    Sb
    0.003D
    Sn
    0.010D
    As
    0.010D
    N/Al 4.0
    min
    Product 0.07–0.13 0.80–1.05 0.16–0.27 0.05–0.11
    T92 K92460 0.07–0.13 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.010 0.50 0.40 8.5–9.5 0.30–0.60 0.15–0.25 0.001–
    0.006
    0.04–0.09 0.030–
    0.070
    0.02 1.5–2.00 Ti 0.01
    Zr 0.01
    T115 K91060 0.08–0.13 0.20–0.50 0.020 0.010 0.15–0.45 0.25 10.0–11.5 0.40–0.60 0.18–0.25 0.001 0.02–0.06 0.030–0.070 0.02 … Ti 0.01
    Zr 0.01
    T122 K91271 0.07–0.14 0.70 0.020 0.010 0.50 0.50 10.0–11.5 0.25–0.60 0.15–0.30 0.0005–
    0.005
    0.04–0.10 0.040–
    0.100
    0.02 1.50–2.50 Cu
    0.30–1.70
    Ti 0.01
    Zr 0.01
    T911 K91061 0.09–0.13 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.010 0.10–0.50 0.40 8.5–9.5 0.90–1.10 0.18–0.25 0.0003–
    0.006
    0.06–0.10 0.040–
    0.090
    0.02 0.90–1.10 Ti 0.01
    Zr 0.01
    A Maximum, unless range or minimum is indicated. Where ellipses (…) appear in this table, there is no requirement, and analysis for the element need not be determined or reported.
    B It is permissible to order T2 and T12 with a sulfur content of 0.045 max. See 16.3.
    CAlternatively, in lieu of this ratio minimum, the material shall have a minimum hardness of 275 HV in the hardened condition, defined as after austenitizing and cooling to room temperature but prior to tempering. Hardness
    testing shall be performed at mid-thickness of the product. Hardness test frequency shall be two samples of product per heat treatment lot and the hardness testing results shall be reported on the material test report.
    DApplies to both heat and product analyses.
    EThe terms Niobium (Nb) and Columbium (Cb) are alternate names for the same element.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    SA-213/SA-213M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    288
    TABLE 2 Chemical Composition Limits, %A , for Austenitic and Ferritic Stainless Steel
    Grade
    UNS
    Designation
    Composition
    Carbon
    Manganese
    Phosphorus
    Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum NitrogenB NiobiumN Titanium
    Other
    Elements
    TP201 S20100 0.15 5.5–7.5 0.060 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 3.5–5.5 … 0.25 … … …
    TP202 S20200 0.15 7.5–10.0 0.060 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 4.0–6.0 … 0.25 … … …
    XM-19 S20910 0.06 4.0–6.0 0.045 0.030 1.00 20.5–23.5 11.5–13.5 1.50–3.00 0.20–0.40 0.10–0.30 … V 0.10–0.30
    C S21500 0.06–0.15 5.5–7.0 0.045 0.030 0.20–1.00 14.0–16.0 9.0–11.0 0.80–1.20 … 0.75–1.25 … B 0.003–
    0.009,
    V 0.15–0.40
    C S25700 0.02 2.00 0.025 0.010 6.5–8.0 8.0–11.5 22.0–25.0 0.50 … … … …
    TP304 S30400 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 8.0–11.0 … … … … …
    TP304L S30403 0.035D 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 8.0–12.0 … … … … …
    TP304H S30409 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 8.0–11.0 … … … … …
    C S30432 0.07–0.13 1.00 0.040 0.010 0.30 17.0–19.0 7.5–10.5 … 0.05–0.12 0.30–0.60 … Al 0.003–
    0.030,
    B 0.001–
    0.010,
    Cu 2.5–3.5
    C S30434 0.07–0.14 2.00 0.040 0.010 1.00 17.5–19.5 9.0–12.0 … … 0.10–0.40E 0.10–0.25E B 0.001–
    0.004
    Cu 2.50–
    3.50
    TP304N S30451 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 8.0–11.0 … 0.10–0.16 … … …
    TP304LN S30453 0.035D 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 8.0–11.0 … 0.10–0.16 … … …
    C S30615 0.016–0.24 2.00 0.030 0.030 3.2–4.0 17.0–19.5 13.5–16.0 … … … … Al 0.8–1.5
    C S30815 0.05–0.10 0.80 0.040 0.030 1.40–2.00 20.0–22.0 10.0–12.0 … 0.14–0.20 … … Ce 0.03–0.08
    TP309S S30908 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.0–24.0 12.0–15.0 … … … … …
    TP309H S30909 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.0–24.0 12.0–15.0 … … … … …
    TP309LMoN S30925 0.025 2.00 0.040 0.030 0.70 23.0–26.0 13.0–16.0 0.5–1.2 0.25–0.40 … … …
    TP309Cb S30940 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.0–24.0 12.0–16.0 … … 10xC–1.10 … …
    TP309HCb S30941 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.0–24.0 12.0–16.0 … … 10xC-1.10 … …
    … S30942 0.03–0.10 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 21.0–23.0 14.5–16.5 0.10–0.20 0.50–0.80 B=0.001–0.005
    C S31002 0.02 2.00 0.020 0.015 0.15 24.0–26.0 19.0–22.0 0.10 0.10 … … …
    TP310S S31008 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0–26.0 19.0–22.0 … … … … …
    TP310H S31009 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0–26.0 19.0–22.0 … … … … …
    TP310MoCbN S31025 0.10 1.50 0.030 0.030 1.00 19.5–23.0 23.0–26.0 1.0–2.0 0.10–0.25 0.10–0.40 0.20 B 0.002–
    0.010
    S31035 0.04–0.10 0.60 0.025 0.015 0.40 21.5–23.5 23.5–26.5 … 0.20–0.30 0.40–0.60 … W 3.0–4.0
    Co 1.0–2.0
    Cu 2.5–3.5
    B 0.002–
    0.008
    TP310Cb S31040 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0–26.0 19.0–22.0 … … 10xC-1.10 … …
    TP310HCb S31041 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0–26.0 19.0–22.0 … … 10xC-1.10 … …
    TP310HCbN S31042 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0–26.0 19.0–22.0 … 0.15–0.35 0.20–0.60 … …
    TP310MoLN S31050 0.025 2.00 0.020 0.030 0.40 24.0–26.0 21.0–23.0 2.00–3.00 0.10–0.16 … … …
    C S31060 0.05–0.10 1.00 0.040 0.030 0.50 22.0–24.0 10.0–12.5 … 0.18–0.25 … … Ce + La
    0.025–0.070
    B 0.001–0.010
    C S31254 0.020 1.00 0.030 0.010 0.80 19.5–20.5 17.5–18.5 6.0–6.5 0.18–0.22 … … Cu 0.50–1.00
    … S31266 0.030 2.00–4.00 0.035 0.020 1.00 23.0–25.0 21.0–24.0 5.2–6.2 0.35–0.60 … … Cu 1.00–2.00
    W 1.50–2.50
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-213/SA-213M
    289
    TABLE 2 Continued
    Grade
    UNS
    Designation
    Composition
    Carbon
    Manganese
    Phosphorus
    Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum NitrogenB NiobiumN Titanium
    Other
    Elements
    C S31272 0.08–0.12 1.50–2.00 0.030 0.015 0.30–0.70 14.0–16.0 14.0–16.0 1.00–1.40 … … 0.30–0.60 B 0.004–
    0.008
    C S31277 0.020 3.00 0.030 0.010 0.50 20.5–23.0 26.0–28.0 6.5–8.0 0.30–0.40 … … Cu 0.50–1.50
    TP316 S31600 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 10.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 … … … …
    TP316L S31603 0.035D 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 10.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 … … … …
    TP316H S31609 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 11.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 … … … …
    TP316Ti S31635 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 16.0–18.0 10.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 0.10 … 5X
    (C + N)–
    0.70
    …
    TP316N S31651 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 10.0–13.0 2.00–3.00 0.10–0.16 … … …
    TP316LN S31653 0.035D 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 10.0–13.0 2.00–3.00 0.10–0.16 … … …
    TP317 S31700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 11.0–15.0 3.0–4.0 … … … …
    TP317L S31703 0.035 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 11.0–15.0 3.0–4.0 … … … …
    TP317LM S31725 0.03 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 13.5–17.5 4.0–5.0 0.20 … … Cu 0.75
    TP317LMN S31726 0.03 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–20.0 13.5–17.5 4.0–5.0 0.10–0.20 … … Cu 0.75
    C S31730 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.010 1.00 17.0–19.0 15.0–16.5 3.0–4.0 0.045 … … Cu 4.0–5.0
    C S32050 0.030 1.50 0.035 0.020 1.00 22.0–24.0 20.0–23.0 6.0–6.8 0.21–0.32 … … Cu 0.40
    TP321 S32100 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–12.0 … … … 5(C + N)–
    0.70
    …
    TP321H S32109 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–12.0 … … … 4(C + N)–
    0.70
    …
    C S32615 0.07 2.00 0.045 0.030 4.8–6.0 16.5–19.5 19.0–22.0 0.30–1.50 … … … Cu 1.50–
    2.50
    C S33228 0.04–0.08 1.00 0.020 0.015 0.30 26.0–28.0 31.0–33.0 … … 0.60–1.00 … Ce 0.05–
    0.10,
    Al 0.025
    C S34565 0.030 5.0–7.0 0.030 0.010 1.00 23.0–25.0 16.0–18.0 4.0–5.0 0.40–0.60 0.10 … …
    TP347 S34700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–20.0 9.0–13.0 … … 10xC–1.10 … …
    TP347W S34705 0.05 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 17.0–20.0 8.00–11.0 … 0.10–0.25 0.25–0.50 … V 0.20–0.50
    W 1.50–2.60
    TP347H S34709 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–13.0 … … 8xC–1.10 … …
    TP347HFG S34710 0.06–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–13.0 … … 8xC–1.10 … …
    TP347LN S34751 0.005–0.020 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–13.0 … 0.06–0.10 0.20–0.50F … …
    TP348 S34800 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–13.0 … … G … Co 0.20, Ta
    0.10
    TP348H S34809 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–13.0 … … H … Co 0.20, Ta
    0.10
    … S35045 0.06–0.10 1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 25.0–29.0 32.0–37.0 … … … 0.15–0.60 Al 0.15–0.60
    Cu 0.75
    XM-15 S38100 0.08 2.00 0.030 0.030 1.50–2.50 17.0–19.0 17.5–18.5 … … … … …
    … S38815 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.020 5.5–6.5 13.0–15.0 15.0–17.0 0.75–1.50 … … … Cu 0.75–1.50
    Al 0.30
    Alloy 20 N08020 0.070 2.00 0.045 0.035 1.00 19.0-21.0 32.0-38.0 2.00-3.00 … M … Cu 3.00-4.00
    N08028 0.030 2.50 0.030 0.030 1.0 26.0-28.0 30.0-34.0 3.0-4.0 Cu 0.6-1.4
    N08029 0.020 2.0 0.025 0.015 0.6 26.0-28.0 30.0-34.0 4.0-5.0 Cu 0.6-1.4
    C N08367 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 20.0-22.0 23.5-25.5 6.00-7.00 0.18-0.25 … … Cu 0.75
    800 N08800 0.10 1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 19.0–23.0 30.0–35.0 … … Cu 0.75
    Al 0.15–0.60
    Ti 0.15–0.60
    FeI 39.5 min
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    SA-213/SA-213M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    290
    TABLE 2 Continued
    Grade
    UNS
    Designation
    Composition
    Carbon
    Manganese
    Phosphorus
    Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum NitrogenB NiobiumN Titanium
    Other
    Elements
    800H N08810 0.05–0.10 1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 19.0–23.0 30.0–35.0 … … Cu 0.75
    Al 0.15–0.60
    Ti 0.15–0.60
    FeI 39.5 min
    … N08811 0.06–0.10 1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 19.0–23.0 30.0–35.0 … … Cu 0.75
    Al 0.15–0.60J
    Ti 0.15–0.60J
    FeI 39.5 min
    N08904 0.020 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 19.0–23.0 23.0–28.0 4.0–5.0 0.10 Cu 1.00–2.00
    … N08925 0.020 1.00 0.045 0.030 0.50 19.0–21.0 24.0–26.0 6.0–7.0 0.10–0.20 … … Cu 0.80–1.50
    … N08926 0.020 2.00 0.030 0.010 0.50 19.0–21.0 24.0–26.0 6.0–7.0 0.15–0.25 … … Cu 0.50–1.50
    TP444 S44400 0.03 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 17.5–19.5 K 1.75–2.50 0.035 … L …
    AMaximum, unless a range or minimum is indicated. Where ellipses (…) appear in this table, there is no minimum and analysis for the element need not be determined or reported.
    BThe method of analysis for Nitrogen shall be a matter of agreement between the purchaser and the producer.
    CFor these alloys, there is no common grade designation. The UNS number uniquely identifies these alloys.
    DFor small diameter or thin walls, or both, where many drawing passes are required, a carbon maximum of 0.040 % is necessary in Grades TP304L, TP304LN, TP316L, and TP316LN.
    EGrade S30434 shall have (Ti + 1/2 Nb) of not less than 2 times and not more than 4 times the carbon content.
    FGrade TP347LN shall have an Nb content of not less than 15 times the carbon content.
    GGrade TP348 shall have an Nb + Ta content of not less than 10 times the carbon content and not more than 1.10 %.
    HGrade TP348H shall have an Nb + Ta content of not less than 8 times the carbon content and not more than 1.10 %.
    IIron shall be determined arithmetically by difference of 100 minus the sum of the other specified elements.
    JAl + Ti shall be 0.85 % min; 1.20 % max.
    KGrade TP444 shall have Ni + Cu = 1.00 max.
    LGrade TP444 shall have Ti + Nb content not less than 0.20 + 4(C+N) and not more than 0.80 %.
    MN08020 shall have an Nb + Ta content of not less than 8 times the carbon content and not more than 1.00%.
    NThe terms Niobium (Nb) and Columbium (Cb) are alternate names for the same element.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-213/SA-213M
    291
    TABLE 3 Heat Treatment and Grain Size RequirementsA
    Grade
    UNS
    Number
    Heat Treat Type
    Austenitizing/
    Solutioning/
    Stabilizing
    Temperature,
    min or range °F [°C]
    Cooling Media
    Subcritical Annealing
    or Tempering
    Temperature,
    min or range °F [°C]
    ASTM
    Grain Size No.B
    Ferritic Alloy Steels
    T2 K11547 full or isothermal
    anneal; or
    { { { {
    normalize and
    temper; or
    { { { {
    subcritical anneal { { 1200 to 1350
    [650 to 730]
    {
    T5 K41545 full or isothermal
    anneal; or
    { { { {
    normalize and
    temper
    { { 1250 [675] {
    T5b K51545 full or isothermal
    anneal; or
    { { { {
    normalize and
    temper
    { { 1250 [675] {
    T5c K41245 subcritical anneal { air or furnace 1350 [730]C {
    T9 S50400 full or isothermal
    anneal; or
    { { { {
    normalize and
    temper
    { { 1250 [675] {
    T11 K11597 full or isothermal
    anneal; or
    { { { {
    normalize and
    temper
    { { 1200 [650] {
    T12 K11562 full or isothermal
    anneal; or
    { { { {
    normalize and
    temper; or
    { { { {
    subcritical anneal { { 1200 to 1350
    [650 to 730]
    {
    T17 K12047 full or isothermal
    anneal; or
    { { { {
    normalize and
    temper
    { { 1200 [650] {
    T21 K31545 full or isothermal
    anneal; or
    { { { {
    normalize and
    temper
    { { 1250 [675] {
    T22 K21590 full or isothermal
    anneal; or
    { { { {
    normalize and
    temper
    { { 1250 [675] {
    T23 K40712 normalize and
    temper
    1900–1975
    [1040–1080]
    { 1350–1470 [730–800] {
    T24 K30736 normalize and
    temper
    1800–1870
    [980–1020]
    D 1350–1420 [730–770] {
    T36 K21001 normalize and
    temper
    1650 [900] E 1100 [595] {
    T91 Types 1 and 2 K90901 normalize and
    temper
    1900–1975
    [1040–1080]
    { 1350–1470 [730–800] {
    T92 K92460 normalize and
    temper
    1900–1975
    [1040–1080]
    { 1350–1470 [730–800] {
    T115 K91060 normalize and
    temper
    1920–2010
    [1050–1100]
    … 1380–1455
    [750–790]
    …
    T122 K91261 normalize and
    temper
    1900–1975
    [1040–1080]
    { 1350–1470 [730–800] {
    T911 K91061 normalize and
    temper
    1900–1975
    [1040–1080]
    D 1365–1435
    [740–780]
    {
    Austenitic Stainless Steels
    TP201 S20100 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP202 S20200 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    XM-19 S20910 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    S21500 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F,G water or other rapid cool { {
    S25700 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP304 S30400 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP304L S30403 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP304H S30409 solution treatment 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool { 7
    S30432 solution treatment 2000 [1100]F water or other rapid cool { {
    S30434 solution treatment 2120 [1160] water or other rapid cool { {
    TP304N S30451 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP304LN S30453 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-213/SA-213M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    292
    TABLE 3 Continued
    Grade
    UNS
    Number
    Heat Treat Type
    Austenitizing/
    Solutioning/
    Stabilizing
    Temperature,
    min or range °F [°C]
    Cooling Media
    Subcritical Annealing
    or Tempering
    Temperature,
    min or range °F [°C]
    ASTM
    Grain Size No.B
    S30615 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    S30815 solution treatment 1920 [1050] water or other rapid cool { {
    TP309S S30908 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP309H S30909 solution treatment 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool { 7
    TP309LMoN S30925 solution treatment 1920 [1050] water or other rapid cool { 7
    TP309Cb S30940 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP309HCb S30941 solution treatment 1900 [1040]H water or other rapid cool { 7
    S30942 solution treatment 2120 [1160] water or other rapid cool 6
    S31002 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP310S S31008 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP310H S31009 solution treatment 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool { 7
    TP310MoCbN S31025 solution treatment 2100 [1150] water or other rapid cool { 7
    S31035 solution treatment 2160–2280
    [1180–1250]
    water or other rapid cool { 7
    TP310Cb S31040 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP310HCb S31041 solution treatment 1900 [1040]H water or other rapid cool { 7
    TP310HCbN S31042 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F,H water or other rapid cool { 7
    TP310MoLN S31050 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    S31060 solution treatment 1975–2160
    [1080–1180]F
    water or other rapid cool { 7
    S31254 solution treatment 2100 [1150] water or other rapid cool { {
    S31266 solution treatment 2100 [1150] water or other rapid cool { {
    S31272 solution treatment 1920 [1050] water or other rapid cool { {
    S31277 solution treatment 2050 [1120]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP316 S31600 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP316L S31603 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP316H S31609 solution treatment 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool { 7
    TP316Ti S31635 solution treatment 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool { {
    TP316N S31651 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP316LN S31653 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP317 S31700 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP317L S31703 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    S31725 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    S31730 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    S32050 solution treatment 2100 [1150]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP321 S32100 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F,H water or other rapid cool { {
    TP321H S32109 solution treatment cold worked:
    2000 [1090]
    hot rolled:
    1925 [1050]H
    water or other rapid cool { 7
    S32615 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { 3 or finer
    S32716 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    S33228 solution treatment 2050 [1120] water or other rapid cool { {
    S34565 solution treatment 2050–2140
    [1120–1170]
    water or other rapid cool { {
    TP347 S34700 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F,H water or other rapid cool { {
    TP347W S34705 solution treatment 2000 [1100] water or other rapid cool { 7-10
    TP347H S34709 solution treatment cold worked:
    2000 [1100]
    hot rolled:
    1925 [1050]H
    water or other rapid cool { 7
    TP347HFG S34710 solution treatment,I 2150 [1175]F water or other rapid cool { 7-10
    TP347LN S34751 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    TP348 S34800 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F,H water or other rapid cool { {
    TP348H S34809 solution treatment cold worked:
    2000 [1100]
    hot rolled:
    1925 [1050]H
    water or other rapid cool { 7
    S35045 solution treatment 2000 [1100]F still air cool or faster { {
    XM-15 S38100 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    S38815 solution treatment 1950 [1065]F water or other rapid cool { {
    Alloy 20 N08020 stabilization
    treatment
    1700-1850F [925-
    1010]
    water or other rapid cool { {
    N08028 solution treatment 2000F [1100] water or other rapid cool { {
    N08029 solution treatment 2000F [1100] water or other rapid cool { {
    N08367 solution treatment 2025 [1105]F water or other rapid cool { {
    800 N08800 solution treatment 1900 [1040]F water or other rapid cool { {
    800H N08810 solution treatment 2050 [1120]F water or other rapid cool { 5
    N08811 solution treatment 2100 [1150]F water or other rapid cool { 5
    N08904 solution treatment 2000 [1100]F water or other rapid cool { {
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-213/SA-213M
    293
    4.1.7 Size (outside diameter and minimum wall thickness,
    unless average wall thickness is specified),
    4.1.8 Length (specific or random),
    4.1.9 Hydrostatic Test or Nondestructive Electric Test (see
    10.1),
    4.1.10 Specification designation and year of issue,
    4.1.11 Increased sulfur (for machinability, see Note B, Table
    1, and 16.3), and
    4.1.12 Special requirements and any supplementary requirements
    selected.
99. General Requirements
    5.1 Product furnished to this specification shall conform to
    the requirements of Specification A1016/A1016M, including
    any supplementary requirements that are indicated in the
    purchase order. Failure to comply with the general requirements
    of Specification A1016/A1016M constitutes nonconformance
    with this specification. In case of conflict between the
    requirements of this specification and Specification A1016/
    A1016M, this specification shall prevail.
100. Materials and Manufacture
     6.1 Manufacture and Condition—Tubes shall be made by
     the seamless process and shall be either hot finished or cold
     finished, as specified. Grade TP347HFG shall be cold finished.
     6.2 Heat Treatment:
     6.2.1 Ferritic Alloy and Ferritic Stainless Steels—The ferritic
     alloy and ferritic stainless steels shall be reheated for heat
     treatment in accordance with the requirements of Table 3. Heat
     treatment shall be carried out separately and in addition to
     heating for hot forming.
     6.2.2 Austenitic Stainless Steels—All austenitic tubes shall
     be furnished in the heat-treated condition, and shall be heat
     treated in accordance with the requirements of Table 3.
     6.3 If any controlled structural characteristics are required,
     these shall be so specified in the order as to be a guide as to the
     most suitable heat treatment.
101. Chemical Composition
     7.1 Composition Requirements:
     7.1.1 The alloy steels shall conform to the chemical requirements
     given in Table 1.
     7.1.2 The stainless steels shall conform to the chemical
     requirements given in Table 2.
     7.2 Product Analysis:
     7.2.1 An analysis of either one billet or one tube shall be
     made from each heat. The chemical composition thus determined
     shall conform to the requirements specified.
     7.2.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests of
     two additional billets or tubes shall be made. Both retests, for
     the elements in question, shall meet the requirements of the
     specification; otherwise all remaining material in the heat shall
     be rejected or, at the option of the producer, each billet or tube
     may be individually tested for acceptance. Billets or tubes that
     do not meet the requirements of the specification shall be
     rejected.
102. Grain Size
     8.1 Grain size shall be as given in Table 3, as determined in
     accordance with Test Methods E112.
     8.2 Grain size determinations, to demonstrate compliance
     with 8.1, shall be made on one end of one finished tube from
     each lot. See 15.1.
     TABLE 3 Continued
     Grade
     UNS
     Number
     Heat Treat Type
     Austenitizing/
     Solutioning/
     Stabilizing
     Temperature,
     min or range °F [°C]
     Cooling Media
     Subcritical Annealing
     or Tempering
     Temperature,
     min or range °F [°C]
     ASTM
     Grain Size No.B
     N08925 solution treatment 2010–2100
     [1100–1150]
     water or other rapid cool  
     N08926 solution treatment 2010–2100
     [1100–1150]
     water or other rapid cool  
     Ferritic Stainless Steels
     TP444 S44400 subcritical anneal   1400 [760] 
     A Where ellipses () appear in this table there is no requirement.
     B ASTM Grain Size No. listed, or coarser, unless otherwise indicated.
     C Approximately, to achieve properties.
     D Accelerated cooling from the normalizing temperature shall be permitted for section thicknesses greater than 3 in. [75 mm].
     EAccelerated air cooling or liquid quenching shall be permitted for Class 2.
     F Quenched in water or rapidly cooled by other means, at a rate sufficient to prevent re-precipitation of carbides, as demonstrable by the capability of tubes, heat treated
     by either separate solution annealing or by direct quenching, passing Practices A262, Practice E. The manufacturer is not required to run the test unless it is specified on
     the purchase order (see Supplementary Requirement S4). Note that Practices A262 requires the test to be performed on sensitized specimens in the low-carbon and
     stabilized types and on specimens representative of the as-shipped condition for other types. In the case of low-carbon types containing 3 % or more molybdenum, the
     applicability of the sensitizing treatment prior to testing shall be a matter for negotiation between the seller and the purchaser.
     G A maximum solution treating temperature of 2100 °F [1150 °C] is recommended for UNS S21500.
     H A solution treating temperature above 1950 °F [1065 °C] may impair resistance to intergranular corrosion after subsequent exposure to sensitizing conditions in the
     indicated grades. When specified by the purchaser, a lower temperature stabilization or resolution anneal shall be used subsequent to the higher-temperature solution
     anneal prescribed in this table.
     I Solution treatment shall be preceded by a softening heat treatment prior to cold-working. The softening temperature shall be at least 90 °F [50 °C] higher than the solution
     heat treatment temperature, which shall be at 2150 °F [1180 °C] minimum.
     Other than for Grades S30815, S30942, S31272, S33228, and H
     Grades, seamless tubing immediately following hot forming
     may be individually quenched in the water or rapidly cooled by
     other means, provided that the temperature of the tubes after hot
     forming is not less than the minimum specified solution
     temperature (direct quenched). For H grades, as well as Grades
     S30815, S30942, S31272, S33228, and S30432, the tubes shall
     be reheated to the specified solution treatment temperature for
     the required time before quenching.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-213/SA-213M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     294
103. Mechanical Properties
     9.1 Tensile Requirements:
     9.1.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
     tensile properties given in Table 4.
     9.1.2 Table 5 gives the computed minimum elongation
     values for each 1/32-in. [0.8-mm] decrease in wall thickness.
     Where the wall thickness lies between two values shown in
     Table 5, the minimum elongation value shall be determined by
     the following equations. For Grades T23, T24, T91, T92, T115,
     T122, T911, and S44400: E = 32t + 10.00 [E = 1.25t + 10.00].
     For Grade T36: E = 32t + 5.0 [E = 1.25t + 5.0]. For all other
     ferritic alloy grades: E = 48t + 15.00 [ E = 1.87t + 15.00].
     where:
     E = elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], %, and
     t = actual thickness of specimen, in. [mm].
     9.1.3 One tension test shall be made on a specimen from one
     tube for lots of not more than 50 tubes. Tension tests shall be
     made on specimens from two tubes for lots of more than 50
     tubes. See 15.2.
     9.2 Hardness Requirements:
     9.2.1 The material shall conform to the hardness requirements
     given in Table 4. See 15.2.
     9.2.2 Brinell, Vickers, or Rockwell hardness tests shall be
     made on specimens from two tubes from each lot. See 15.2.
     9.3 Flattening Test—One flattening test shall be made on
     specimens from each end of one finished tube, not the one used
     for the flaring test, from each lot. See 15.1.
     9.4 Flaring Test—One flaring test shall be made on specimens
     from each end of one finished tube, not the one used for
     the flattening test, from each lot. See 15.1.
     9.5 Mechanical property requirements do not apply to
     tubing smaller than 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in inside diameter or
     thinner than 0.015 in. [0.4 mm] in thickness.
104. Hydrostatic or Nondestructive Electric Test
     10.1 Each tube shall be subjected to the nondestructive
     electric test or the hydrostatic test. The type of test to be used
     shall be at the option of the manufacturer, unless otherwise
     specified in the purchase order.
105. Forming Operations
     11.1 Tubes, when inserted in a boiler or tube sheet, shall
     stand expanding and beading without showing cracks or flaws.
     Superheater tubes when properly manipulated shall stand all
     forging, welding, and bending operations necessary for application
     without developing defects. See Note 1.
     NOTE 1—Certain of the ferritic steels covered by this specification will
     harden if cooled rapidly from above their critical temperature. Some will
     air harden, that is, become hardened to an undesirable degree when cooled
     in air from high temperatures, particularly chromium-containing steels
     with chromium of 4 % and higher. Therefore, operations that involve
     heating such steels above their critical temperatures, such as welding,
     flanging, and hot bending, should be followed by suitable heat treatment.
106. Repair by Welding
     12.1 Repair welding shall be performed in conformance
     with Specification A1016/A1016M.
     12.2 All repair welds in T91 shall be made with one of the
     following welding processes and consumables: SMAW, A5.5/
     A5.5M E90XX-B9; SAW, A5.23/A5.23M EB9 + neutral flux;
     GTAW, A5.28/A5.28M ER90S-B9; and FCAWA5.29/A5.29M
     E91T1-B9. In addition, the sum of the Ni+Mn content of all
     welding consumables used to weld repair T91 Types 1 and 2
     shall not exceed 1.0 %.
     12.3 All repair welds in T92, T911, and T122, shall be made
     using welding consumables meeting the chemical requirements
     for the grade in Table 1.
107. Permissible Variations from the Specified Wall
     Thickness
     13.1 Permissible variations from the specified minimum
     wall thickness shall be in accordance with Specification
     A1016/A1016M.
     13.2 Permissible variations from the specified average wall
     thickness shall be 6 10 % of the specified average wall
     thickness for cold formed tubes and, unless otherwise specified
     by the purchaser, shall be in accordance with Table 6 for hot
     formed tubes.
108. Surface Condition
     14.1 Ferritic alloy cold-finished steel tubes shall be free of
     scale and suitable for inspection. A slight amount of oxidation
     is not considered scale.
     14.2 Ferritic alloy hot-finished steel tubes shall be free of
     loose scale and suitable for inspection.
     14.3 Stainless steel tubes shall be pickled free of scale.
     When bright annealing is used, pickling is not necessary.
     14.4 Any special finish requirement shall be subject to
     agreement between the supplier and the purchaser.
109. Sampling
     15.1 For flattening, flaring, and grain size requirements, the
     term lot applies to all tubes, prior to cutting, of the same size
     (see 4.1.7) that are produced from the same heat of steel. When
     final heat treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot shall
     include only those tubes of the same size and from the same
     heat that are heat treated in the same furnace charge. When the
     final heat treatment is in a continuous furnace or when the
     heat-treated condition is obtained directly by quenching after
     hot forming, the number of tubes of the same size and from the
     same heat in a lot shall be determined from the size of the tubes
     as prescribed in Table 7.
     15.2 For tensile and hardness test requirements, the term lot
     applies to all tubes prior to cutting, of the same size (see 4.1.7)
     that are produced from the same heat of steel. When final heat
     treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot shall include only
     those tubes of the same size and the same heat that are heat
     treated in the same furnace charge. When the final heat
     treatment is in a continuous furnace, or when the heat-treated
     condition is obtained directly by quenching after hot forming,
     a lot shall include all tubes of the same size and heat, heat
     treated in the same furnace at the same temperature, time at
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-213/SA-213M
     295
     TABLE 4 Tensile and Hardness Requirements
     HardnessA
     Grade
     UNS
     Designation
     Tensile
     Strength,
     min, ksi
     [MPa]
     Yield
     Strength,
     min, ksi
     [MPa]
     Elongation
     in 2 in. or
     50 mm,
     min, %B,C
     Brinell/Vickers Rockwell
     Low Alloy Steels:
     T5b K51545 60 [415] 30 [205] 30 179 HBW/
     190HV
     89 HRB
     T9 K90941 60 [415] 30 [205] 30 179 HBW/
     190HV
     89 HRB
     T12 K11562 60 [415] 32 [220] 30 163 HBW/
     170 HV
     85 HRB
     T23 K40712 74 [510] 58 [400] 20 220 HBW/
     230 HV
     97 HRB
     T24 K30736 85 [585] 60 [415] 20 250 HBW/
     265 HV
     25 HRC
     T36 Class 1 K21001 90 [620] 64 [440] 15 250 HBW/
     265 HV
     25 HRC
     T36 Class 2 K21001 95.5 [660] 66.5 [460] 15 250 HBW/
     265 HV
     25 HRC
     T91 Types 1 and 2 K90901 85 [585] 60 [415] 20 190 to 250 HBW/
     196 to 265 HV
     90 HRB to 25
     HRC
     T92 K92460 90 [620] 64 [440] 20 250 HBW/
     265 HV
     25 HRC
     T115 K91060 90 [620] 65 [450] 20 190 to 250 HWB/
     196 to 265 HV
     90 HRB to 25
     HRC
     T122 K91271 90 [620] 58 [400] 20 250 HBW/
     265 HV
     25 HRC
     T911 K91061 90 [620] 64 [440] 20 250 HBW/
     265 HV
     25 HRC
     All other low alloy
     grades
     60 [415] 30 [205] 30 163 HBW/
     170 HV
     85 HRB
     Austenitic Stainless
     Steels:
     TP201 S20100 95 [655] 38 [260] 35 219 HBW/
     230 HV
     95 HRB
     TP202 S20200 90 [620] 45 [310] 35 219 HBW/
     230 HV
     95 HRB
     XM-19 S20910 100 [690] 55 [380] 35 250 HBW/
     265 HV
     25 HRC
     … S21500 78 [540] 33 [230] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … S25700 78 [540] 35 [240] 50 217 HBW 95 HRB
     TP304 S30400 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP304L S30403 70 [485] 25 [170] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP304H S30409 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … S30432 86 [590] 34 [235] 35 219 HBW/
     230 HV
     95 HRB
     … S30434 73 [500] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP304N S30451 80 [550] 35 [240] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP304LN S30453 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … S30615 90 [620] 40 [275] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … S30815 87 [600] 45 [310] 40 217 HBW 95 HRB
     TP309S S30908 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP309H S30909 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP309LMoN S30925 93 [640] 38 [260] 30 256 HBW/270 HV 100 HRB
     TP309Cb S30940 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP309HCb S30941 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … S30942 86 [590] 34 [235] 35 219 HBW/
     230 HV
     95 HRB
     … S31002 73 [500] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-213/SA-213M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     296
     TABLE 4 Continued
     HardnessA
     Grade
     UNS
     Designation
     Tensile
     Strength,
     min, ksi
     [MPa]
     Yield
     Strength,
     min, ksi
     [MPa]
     Elongation
     in 2 in. or
     50 mm,
     min, %B,C
     Brinell/Vickers Rockwell
     TP310S S31008 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP310H S31009 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP310MoCbN S31025 93 [640] 39 [270] 30 256 HBW/
     270 HV
     100 HRB
     S31035 95 [655] 45 [310] 40 220 HBW/
     230 HV
     96 HRB
     TP310Cb S31040 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP310HCb S31041 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP310HCbN S31042 95 [655] 43 [295] 30 256 HBW 100 HRB
     TP310MoLN S31050
     T # 0.25 in. [6 mm] 84 [580] 39 [270] 25 217 HBW 95 HRB
     t > 0.25 in. [6 mm] 78 [540] 37 [255] 25 217 HBW 95 HRB
     … S31060 87 [600] 41 [280] 40 217 HBW 95 HRB
     … S31254
     T # 0.187 in. [5 mm] 98 [675] 45 [310] 35 220 HBW/
     230 HV
     96 HRB
     T > 0.187 in. [5 mm] 95 [655] 45 [310] 35 220 HBW/
     230 HV
     96 HRB
     … S31266 109 [750] 61 [420] 35 … B100
     … S31272 65 [450] 29 [200] 35 217 HBW 95 HRB
     … S31277 112 [770] 52 [360] 40 241 HBW 100 HRB
     TP316 S31600 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP316L S31603 70 [485] 25 [170] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP316H S31609 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP316Ti S31635 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP316N S31651 80 [550] 35 [240] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP317 S31700 75 [515] 30 [205] 34 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP317L S31703 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … S31725 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … S31730 70 [480] 25 [175] 35 … 90 HRB
     … S32050 98 [675] 48 [330] 40 256 HBW 100 HRB
     TP321 S32100 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP321H S32109 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … S32615 80 [550] 32 [220] 25 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … S32716 80 [550] 35 [240] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … S33228 73 [500] 27 [185] 30 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … S34565 115 [790] 60 [415] 35 241 HBW 100 HRB
     TP347 S34700 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP347W S34705 90 [620] 38 [260] 30 219 HBW/
     230 HV
     95 HRB
     TP347H S34709 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP347HFG S34710 80 [550] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP347LN S34751 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP348 S34800 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     TP348H S34809 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … S35045 70 [485] 25 [170] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-213/SA-213M
     297
     TABLE 4 Continued
     HardnessA
     Grade
     UNS
     Designation
     Tensile
     Strength,
     min, ksi
     [MPa]
     Yield
     Strength,
     min, ksi
     [MPa]
     Elongation
     in 2 in. or
     50 mm,
     min, %B,C
     Brinell/Vickers Rockwell
     XM-15 S38100 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … S38815 78 [540] 37 [255] 30 256 HBW 100 HRB
     Alloy 20 N08020 80 [550] 35 [240] 30 217 HBW 95 HRB
     N08028 73 [500] 31 [214] 40 … …
     N08029 73 [500] 31 [214] 40 … …
     … N08367 … … … … …
     … #3/16 in. wall 100 [690] 45 [310] 30 … 100 HRB
     … >3/16 in. wall 95 [655] 45 [310] 30 241 HBW …
     800 N08800
     … cold-worked
     annealed
     75 [515] 30 [205] 30 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … hot-finished
     annealed
     65 [450] 25 [170] 30 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     800H N08810 65 [450] 25 [170] 30 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … N08811 65 [450] 25 [170] 30 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     N08904 71 [490] 31 [215] 35 192 HBW/
     200 HV
     90 HRB
     … N08925 87 [600] 43 [295] 40 217 HBW 95 HRB
     … N08926 94 [650] 43 [295] 35 256 HBW 100 HRB
     Ferritic Stainless Steels
     TP444 S44400 60[415] 40[275] 20 217 HBW/ 230 HV 96 HRB
     AMax, unless a range or a minimum is specified.
     B When standard round 2 in. or 50 mm gauge length or smaller proportionally sized specimens with gauge length equal to 4D (4 times the diameter) is used, the minimum
     elongation shall be 22 % for all low alloy grades except T23, T24, T91, T92, T115, T122, and T911; and except for TP444.
     C For longitudinal strip tests, a deduction from the basic minimum elongation values of 1.00 % for TP444, T23, T24, T91, T92, T115, T122, and T911, and of 1.50 % for
     all other low alloy grades for each 1/32-in. [0.8-mm] decrease in wall thickness below 5/16 in. [8 mm] shall be made.
     TABLE 5 Computed Minimum ValuesA
     Wall Thickness
     Elongation in 2 in.
     or 50 mm, min, %
     in. mm
     S44400,
     T23, T24, T91
     Types 1 and 2,
     T92, T115,
     T122, and T911
     T 36
     All Other
     Ferritic Grades
     5/16 [0.312] 8 20 15 30
     9/32 [0.281] 7.2 19 14 29
     1/4 [0.250] 6.4 18 13 27
     7/32 [0.219] 5.6 17 12 26
     3/16 [0.188] 4.8 16 11 24
     5/32 [0.156] 4 15 10 23
     1/8 [0.125] 3.2 14 9 21
     3/32 [0.094] 2.4 13 8 20
     1/16 [0.062] 1.6 12 7 18
     0.062 to 0.035, excl 1.6 to 0.9 12 7 17
     0.035 to 0.022, excl 0.9 to 0.6 11 6 17
     0.022 to 0.015 incl 0.6 to 0.4 11 6 16
     A Calculated elongation requirements shall be rounded to the nearest whole
     number.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-213/SA-213M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     298
     heat, and furnace speed; or all tubes of the same size and heat,
     hot formed and quenched in the same production run, except as
     prescribed in 9.1.3.
110. Product Marking
     16.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
     A1016/A1016M, the marking shall include: the condition, hot
     finished or cold finished; and the wall designation, minimum
     wall or average wall.
     16.2 For the austenitic stainless steels having a grain size
     requirement (see Table 3) the marking shall also include the
     heat number and heat-treatment lot identification.
     16.3 When either T2 or T12 are ordered with higher sulfur
     contents as permitted by Note B of Table 1, the marking shall
     include the letter, S, following the grade designation: T2S or
     T12S.
     16.4 For T91, the marking shall also include the type.
111. Keywords
     17.1 alloy steel tubes; austenitic stainless steel; boiler tubes;
     ferritic stainless steel; heat exchanger tubes; high-temperature
     applications; seamless steel tubes; steel tubes; superheater
     tubes; temperature service applications-high
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
     inquiry, contract, or order.
     S1. Stress-Relieved Annealed Tubes
     S1.1 For use in certain corrosives, particularly chlorides
     where stress corrosion may occur, tubes in Grades TP304L,
     TP316L, TP321, TP347, and TP348 may be specified in the
     stress-relieved annealed condition.
     S1.2 When stress-relieved tubes are specified, tubes shall be
     given a heat treatment at 1500 to 1650 °F [815 to 900 °C] after
     roll straightening. Cooling from this temperature range may be
     either in air or by slow cooling. No mechanical straightening is
     permitted after the stress-relief treatment.
     S1.3 Straightness of the tubes shall be a matter of negotiation
     between the purchaser and supplier.
     S2. Stabilizing Heat Treatment
     S2.1 Subsequent to the solution anneal required in Section
     6, Grades TP309HCb, TP310HCb, TP310HCbN, TP321,
     TP321H, TP347, TP347H, TP348, and TP348H shall be given
     a stabilization heat treatment at a temperature lower than that
     used for the initial solution annealing heat treatment. The
     temperature of stabilization heat treatment shall be at a
     temperature as agreed upon between the purchaser and vendor.
     S3. Unstraightened Tubes
     S3.1 When the purchaser specifies tubes unstraightened
     after final heat treatment (such as coils), the minimum yield
     strength of Table 4 shall be reduced by 5 ksi [35 MPa].
     TABLE 6 Permitted Variations in Average Wall Thickness for Hot
     Formed Tubes
     Tolerance in %, from specified
     NPS [DN] Designator Over Under
     1/8 to 21/2 [6 to 65] incl,
     all t/D ratiosA
     20 12.5
     Above 21/2 [65], t/D #
     5 %A
     22.5 12.5
     Above 21/2 [65], t/D >
     5 %A
     15 12.5
     A t = specified wall thickness D = specified outside diameter
     TABLE 7 Number of Tubes in a Lot Heat Treated by the
     Continuous Process or by Direct Quench After Hot Forming
     Size of Tube Size of Lot
     2 in. [50.8 mm] and over in outside
     diameter and 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] and over
     in wall thickness
     not more than 50 tubes
     2 in. [50.8 mm] and over in outside
     diameter and
     under 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] in wall thickness
     not more than 75 tubes
     Less than 2 in. [50.8 mm] but over 1 in.
     [25.4 mm] in outside diameter
     not more than 75 tubes
     1 in. [25.4 mm] or less in outside diameter not more than 125 tubes
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-213/SA-213M
     299
     S3.2 On the certification, and wherever the grade designation
     for unstraightened tubing appears, it shall be identified
     with the suffix letter “U” (for example, 304-U, 321-U, etc.).
     S4. Intergranular Corrosion Test
     S4.1 When specified, material shall pass intergranular corrosion
     tests conducted by the manufacturer in accordance with
     Practices A262, Practice E.
     NOTE S4.1—Practice E requires testing on the sensitized condition for
     low carbon or stabilized grades, and on the as-shipped condition for other
     grades.
     S4.2 A stabilization heat treatment in accordance with
     Supplementary Requirement S2 may be necessary and is
     permitted in order to meet this requirement for the grades
     containing titanium or columbium, particularly in their H
     versions.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE-WELDED
     CARBON STEEL HEAT-EXCHANGER AND CONDENSER
     TUBES
     SA-214/SA-214M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A214/A214M-90a except for editorial differences in 7.2.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-214/SA-214M
     301
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-214/SA-214M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     302
     SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-RESISTANCEWELDED
     CARBON STEEL HEAT-EXCHANGER AND
     CONDENSER TUBES
     SA-214/SA-214M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A 214/A 214M-90a except for editorial differences in 7.2.)
112. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers minimum-wall-thickness,
     electric-resistance-welded, carbon steel tubes to be used
     for heat exchangers, condensers, and similar heat-transfer
     apparatus.
     1.2 The tubing sizes usually furnished to this specification
     are to 3 in. [76.2 mm] in outside diameter, inclusive.
     Tubing having other dimensions may be furnished, provided
     such tubes comply with all other requirements of
     this specification.
     1.3 Mechanical property requirements do not apply to
     tubing smaller than 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in inside diameter or
     0.015 in. [0.4 mm] in thickness.
     1.4 The purchaser shall specify in the order the outside
     diameter and minimum wall thickness. The inside diameter
     shall not be specified.
     1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
     units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
     text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
     in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
     system must be used independently of the other. Combining
     values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
     with the specification. The inch-pound units shall apply
     unless the “M” designation of this specification is specified
     in the order.
113. Referenced Document
     2.1 ASTM Standard:
     A 450/A 450M Specification for General Requirements
     for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel
     Tubes
114. General Requirements
     3.1 Material furnished under this specification shall
     conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition
     of Specification A 450/A 450M, unless otherwise provided
     herein.
115. Ordering Information
     4.1 Orders for material under this specification should
     include the following, as required, to describe the desired
     material adequately:
     4.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
     4.1.2 Name of material (electric-resistance-welded
     tubes),
     4.1.3 Size (outside diameter and minimum wall
     thickness),
     4.1.4 Length (specific or random),
     4.1.5 Optional requirements (Section 8 and 10.5),
     4.1.6 Test report required (see Certification Section
     of Specification A 450/A 450M),
     4.1.7 Specification designation, and
     4.1.8 Special requirements.
116. Manufacture
     5.1 Tubes shall be made by electric-resistance welding.
117. Heat Treatment
     6.1 After welding, all tubes shall be heat treated at a
     temperature of 1650°F [900°C] or higher and followed by
     cooling in air or in the cooling chamber of a controlled
     atmosphere furnace. Cold drawn tubes shall be heat treated
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-214/SA-214M
     303
     after the final cold-draw pass at a temperature of 1200°F
     [650°C] or higher.
118. Chemical Composition
     7.1 The steel shall conform to the following requirements
     as to chemical composition:
     Carbon, max, % 0.18
     Manganese, % 0.27–0.63
     Phosphorus, max, % 0.035
     Sulfur, max, % 0.035
     7.2 Supplying an alloy grade of steel that specifically
     requires the addition of any element other than those listed
     in 7.1 is not permitted.
119. Product Analysis
     8.1 When requested on the purchase order, a product
     analysis shall be made by the supplier from one tube per
     250 pieces; or when tubes are identified by heat, one tube
     per heat shall be analyzed. The chemical composition thus
     determined shall conform to the requirements specified.
     8.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests
     of two additional lengths of flat-rolled stock, or tubes shall
     be made. Both retests, for the elements in question shall
     meet the requirements of the specification; otherwise all
     remaining material in the heat or lot (Note) shall be rejected
     or, at the option of the producer, each length of flat-rolled
     stock or tube may be individually tested for acceptance.
     Lengths of flat-rolled stock or tubes which do not meet
     the requirements of the specification shall be rejected.
     NOTE — A lot consists of 250 tubes.
120. Hardness Requirements
     9.1 The tubes shall have a hardness number not
     exceeding 72 HRB.
121. Mechanical Tests Required
     10.1 Flattening Test—One flattening test shall be made
     on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note)
     or fraction thereof.
     10.2 Flange Test — One flange test shall be made on
     specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note) or
     fraction thereof.
     10.3 Reverse Flattening Test — One reverse flattening
     test shall be made on a specimen from each 1500 ft [450 m]
     of finished tubing.
     10.4 Hardness Test — Brinell or Rockwell hardness
     tests shall be made on specimens from two tubes from
     each lot. The term lot applies to all tubes prior to cutting,
     of the same nominal diameter and wall thickness which
     are produced from the same heat of steel. When final heat
     treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot shall include
     only those tubes of the same size and the same heat which
     are heat treated in the same furnace charge. When final
     heat treatment is in a continuous furnace, a lot shall include
     all tubes of the same size and heat, heat treated in the same
     furnace at the same temperature, time at heat, and furnace
     speed.
     10.5 Hydrostatic or Nondestructive Electric Test —
     Each tube shall be subjected to either the hydrostatic or
     the nondestructive electric test. The purchaser may specify
     which test is to be used.
122. Surface Condition
     11.1 The finished tubes shall be free of scale. A slight
     amount of oxidation shall not be considered as scale.
123. Product Marking
     12.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
     A 450/A 450M, the letters “ERW” shall be legibly
     stenciled on each tube, or marked on a tag attached to the
     bundle or box in which the tubes are shipped.
     12.2 The manufacturer’s name or symbol may be
     placed permanently on each tube by rolling or light stamping
     before normalizing. If a single stamp is placed on the
     tube by hand, this mark should not be less than 8 in.
     [200 mm] from one end of the tube.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS, CARBON,
     SUITABLE FOR FUSION WELDING FOR
     HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
     SA-216/SA-216M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A216/A216M-07 except for the addition of 2.3 and editorial differences in 2.1 and
     10.1.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-216/SA-216M
     305
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-216/SA-216M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     306
     SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS, CARBON,
     SUITABLE FOR FUSION WELDING FOR
     HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
     SA-216/SA-216M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A 216/A 216M-07 except for the addition of 2.3 and editorial differences in 2.1 and 10.1.)
124. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers carbon steel castings for
     valves, flanges, fittings, or other pressure-containing parts
     for high-temperature service and of quality suitable for
     assembly with other castings or wrought-steel parts by
     fusion welding.
     1.2 Three grades, WCA, WCB, and WCC, are covered
     in this specification. Selection will depend upon design
     and service conditions, mechanical properties, and the high
     temperature characteristics.
     1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
     units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
     text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
     in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
     system must be used independently of the other. Combining
     values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
     with the specification.
125. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A 703/A 703M Specification for Steel Castings, General
     Requirements, for Pressure-Containing Parts
     A 985/A 985M Specification for Steel Investment Castings
     General Requirements, for Pressure-Containing
     Parts
     E 165 Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination
     E 709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination
     2.2 Manufacturers’ Standardization Society of the
     Valve and Fittings Industry Standard:
     SP 55 Steel Castings for Valve, Flanges, and Fittings, and
     Other Components (Visual Method)
     2.3 ASME Standard:
     ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding
     and Brazing Qualifications
126. General Conditions for Delivery
     3.1 Except for investment castings, castings furnished
     to this specification shall conform to the requirements of
     Specification A 703/A 703M, including any supplementary
     requirements that are indicated in the purchase order.
     Failure to comply with the general requirements of Specification
     A 703/A 703M constitutes nonconformance with
     this specification. In case of conflict between the requirements
     of this specification and Specification
     A 703/A 703M, this specification shall prevail.
     3.2 Steel investment castings furnished to this specification
     shall conform to the requirements of Specification
     A 985 /A 985M, including any supplementary requirements
     that are indicated in the purchase order. Failure
     to comply with the general requirements of Specification
     A 985 /A 985M constitutes nonconformance with this
     specification. In case of conflict between the requirements
     of this specification and Specification A 985/A 985M,
     Specification A 985/A 985M shall prevail.
127. Ordering Information
     4.1 The inquiry and order should include or indicate
     the following:
     4.1.1 A description of the casting by pattern number
     or drawing (dimensional tolerances shall be included on
     the casting drawing),
     4.1.2 Grade of steel,
     4.1.3 Options in the specification,
     4.1.4 Whether the castings are to be produced using
     the investment casting process, and
     4.1.5 The supplementary requirements desired
     including the standards of acceptance.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-216/SA-216M
     307
128. Heat Treatment
     5.1 All castings shall receive a heat treatment proper
     to their design and chemical composition.
     5.2 Castings shall be furnished in the annealed, or
     normalized, or normalized and tempered condition unless
     Supplementary Requirement S15 is specified.
     5.3 Heat treatment shall be performed after castings
     have been allowed to cool below the transformation range.
129. Temperature Control
     6.1 Furnace temperatures for heat treating shall be
     effectively controlled by pyrometer.
130. Chemical Composition
     7.1 The steel shall be in accordance with the requirements
     as to chemical composition prescribed in Table 1.
131. Tensile Requirements
     8.1 Steel used for the castings shall be in accordance
     with the requirements as to tensile properties prescribed
     in Table 2.
132. Quality
     9.1 The surface of the casting shall be examined visually
     and shall be free of adhering sand, scale, cracks, and
     hot tears. Other surface discontinuities shall meet the visual
     acceptance standards specified in the order. Visual Method
     SP-55 or other visual standards may be used to define
     acceptable surface discontinuities and finish. Unacceptable
     visual surface discontinuities shall be removed and their
     removal verified by visual examination of the resultant
     cavities.
     9.2 When additional inspection is desired, Supplementary
     Requirements S4, S5, and S10 may be ordered.
     9.3 The castings shall not be peened, plugged, or
     impregnated to stop leaks.
133. Repair by Welding
     10.1 Repairs shall be made using procedures and welders
     qualified under ASME Section IX.
     10.2 Weld repairs shall be inspected to the same quality
     standards that are used to inspect the castings. When castings
     are produced with Supplementary Requirement S4
     specified, weld repairs shall be inspected by magnetic particle
     examination to the same standards that are used to
     inspect the castings. When castings are produced with Supplementary
     Requirement S5 specified, weld repairs on castings
     that have leaked on hydrostatic test, or on castings in
     which the depth of any cavity prepared for repair welding
     exceeds 20% of the wall thickness or 1 in. [25 mm], whichever
     is smaller, or on castings in which any cavity prepared
     for welding is greater than approximately 10 in.2 [65 cm2],
     shall be radiographed to the same standards that are used
     to inspect the castings.
     10.3 Castings containing any repair weld that exceeds
     20% of the wall thickness or 1 in. [25 mm], whichever is
     smaller, or that exceeds approximately 10 in.2 [65 cm2] in
     area, or that was made to correct hydrostatic test defects,
     shall be stress relieved or heat treated after welding. This
     mandatory stress relief or heat treatment shall be in accordance
     with the procedure qualification used.
134. Keywords
     11.1 carbon steel; high temperature; pressure-containing
     parts; steel castings
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-216/SA-216M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     308
     TABLE 1
     CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
     Composition, %
     Grade WCA Grade WCB Grade WCC
     Element UNS J02502 UNS J03002 UNS J02503
     Carbon, max 0.25A 0.30B 0.25C
     Manganese, max 0.70A 1.00B 1.20C
     Phosphorus, max 0.04 0.04 0.04
     Sulfur, max 0.045 0.045 0.045
     Silicon, max 0.60 0.60 0.60
     Specified residual elements:
     Copper, max 0.30 0.30 0.30
     Nickel, max 0.50 0.50 0.50
     Chromium, max 0.50 0.50 0.50
     Molybdenum, max 0.20 0.20 0.20
     Vanadium, max 0.03 0.03 0.03
     Total of these specified residual 1.00 1.00 1.00
     elements, maxD
     A For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified maximum carbon content, an increase of 0.04%
     manganese above the specified maximum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.10%.
     B For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified maximum carbon content, an increase of 0.04% Mn
     above the specified maximum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.28%.
     C For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified maximum carbon content, an increase of 0.04%
     manganese above the specified maximum will be permitted to a maximum of 1.40%.
     D Not applicable when Supplementary Requirement S11 is specified.
     TABLE 2
     TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
     Grade WCA Grade WCB Grade WCC
     Tensile strength, ksi [MPa] 60 to 85 [415 to 585] 70 to 95 [485 to 655] 70 to 95 [485 to 655]
     Yield strength,A min, 30 [205] 36 [250] 40 [275]
     ksi [MPa]
     Elongation in 2 in. 24 22 22
     [50 mm], min, %B
     Reduction of area, min, % 35 35 35
     A Determine by either 0.2% offset method or 0.5% extension-under-load method.
     B When ICI test bars are used in tensile testing as provided for in Specification A 703/A 703M, the
     gage length to reduced section diameter ratio shall be 4 to 1.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-216/SA-216M
     309
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     The following supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified in the purchase
     order. A list of standardized supplementary requirements for use at the option of the
     purchaser is included in Specification A 703/A 703M. Those which are ordinarily considered
     suitable for use with this specification are given below. Others enumerated in Specification
     A 703/A 703M may be used with this specification upon agreement between the
     manufacturer and purchaser.
     S1. Unspecified Elements
     S2. Destruction Tests
     S3. Bend Test
     S4. Magnetic Particle Inspection
     S5. Radiographic Inspection
     S10. Examination of Weld Preparation
     S10.1 The method of performing the magnetic particle
     or liquid penetrant test shall be in accordance with Guide
     E 709 or Test Method E 165.
     S11. Carbon Equivalent
     S11.1 When specified on the order, the maximum carbon
     equivalent shall be:
     Grade Carbon Equivalent, max
     WCA 0.50
     WCB 0.50
     WCC 0.55
     S11.2 Carbon equivalent (CE) shall be determined as
     follows:
     CE p C +
     Mn
     6
     +
     Cr + Mo + V
     5
     +
     Ni + Cu
     15
     S15. Quench and Temper Heat-Treatment
     S16. Requirements for Carbon Steel Castings for
     Hydrofluoric Acid Alkylation Service
     S16.1 Castings shall be provided in the normalized or
     normalized and tempered heat-treated condition.
     S16.2 The maximum carbon equivalent shall be as
     follows:
     CE maximum
     Maximum specified section thickness less
     than or equal to 1 in. [25 mm] 0.43
     Maximum specified section thickness
     greater than 1 in. [25 mm] 0.45
     S16.3 Determine the carbon equivalent (CE) as follows:
     CE p C +
     Mn
     6
     +
     (Cr + Mo + V)
     5
     +
     (Ni + Cu)
     15
     S16.4 Vanadium and niobium maximum content based
     upon heat analysis shall be:
     NOTE 1 — Niobium p columbium
     Maximum vanadium 0.02 wt%
     Maximum niobium 0.02 wt%
     Maximum vanadium plus niobium 0.03 wt%
     S16.5 The sum of the nickel and copper contents, based
     upon heat analysis, shall not exceed 0.15 wt%.
     S16.6 The minimum carbon content shall be 0.18 wt%.
     The maximum carbon content shall be as required for the
     appropriate grade.
     S16.7 Welding consumables for repair welds shall be
     of the low-hydrogen type. E60XX electrodes shall not be
     used and the resulting weld chemistry shall meet the same
     chemistry requirements as the base metal.
     S16.8 In addition to the requirements for product marking
     in the specification, an “HF-N” stamp or marking shall
     be provided on each casting to identify that the casting
     complies with this supplementary requirement.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS, MARTENSITIC
     STAINLESS AND ALLOY, FOR PRESSURE-CONTAINING
     PARTS, SUITABLE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
     SA-217/SA-217M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A217/A217M-07.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-217/SA-217M
     311
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-217/SA-217M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     312
     SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS,
     MARTENSITIC STAINLESS AND ALLOY, FOR
     PRESSURE-CONTAINING PARTS, SUITABLE FOR
     HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
     SA-217/SA-217M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A 217/A 217M-07.)
135. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers martensitic stainless steel
     and alloy steel castings for valves, flanges, fittings, and
     other pressure-containing parts (Note 1) intended primarily
     for high-temperature and corrosive service (Note 2).
     1.2 One grade of martensitic stainless steel and nine
     grades of ferritic alloy steel are covered. Selection will
     depend on design and service conditions, mechanical properties,
     and the high-temperature and corrosion-resistant
     characteristics (Note 3).
     NOTE 1—Carbon steel castings for pressure-containing parts are covered
     by Specification A 216/A 216M. Low alloy quench-and-tempered grades
     equivalent to Specification A 217/A 217M grades may be found in both
     Specifications A 352/A 352M and A 487/A 487M.
     NOTE 2 — The grades covered by this specification represent materials
     that are generally suitable for assembly with other castings or wrought
     steel parts by fusion welding. It is not intended to imply that these grades
     possess equal degrees of weldability; therefore, it is the responsibility of
     the purchaser to establish for himself a suitable welding technique. Since
     these grades possess varying degrees of suitability for high-temperature
     and corrosion-resistant service, it is also the responsibility of the purchaser
     to determine which grade shall be furnished, due consideration being
     given to the requirements of the applicable construction codes.
     NOTE 3 — The committee formulating this specification has included
     nine grades of materials that are considered to represent basic types of
     ferritic alloy steels suitable for valves, flanges, fittings, and other pressurecontaining
     parts. Additional alloy steels that may better fulfill certain
     types of service will be considered for inclusion in this specification by
     the committee as the need becomes apparent.
     1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
     units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
     text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
     in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
     system must be used independently of the other. Combining
     values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
     with the specification. Inch-pound units are applicable for
     material ordered to Specification A 217 and SI units for
     materials ordered to Specification A 217M.
136. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A 216/A 216M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon,
     Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature
     Service
     A 352/A 352M Specification for Steel Castings, Ferritic
     and Martensitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts, Suitable
     for Low-Temperature Service
     A 487/A 487M Specification for Steel Castings Suitable
     for Pressure Service
     A 488/A 488M Practice for Steel Castings, Welding, Qualifications
     of Procedures and Personnel
     A 703/A 703M Specification for Steel Castings, General
     Requirements, for Pressure-Containing Parts
     A 802 /A 802M Practice for Steel Castings, Surface
     Acceptance Standards, Visual Examination
     A 985/A 985M Specification for Steel Investment Castings
     General Requirements, for Pressure-Containing
     Parts
     E 165 Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination
     E 709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination
137. General Conditions for Delivery
     3.1 Except for investment castings, castings furnished
     to this specification shall conform to the requirements of
     Specification A 703/A 703M including any supplementary
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-217/SA-217M
     313
     requirements that are indicated in the purchase order. Failure
     to comply with the general requirements of Specification
     A 703/A 703M constitutes nonconformance with this
     specification. In case of conflict between the requirements
     of this specification and Specification A 703/A 703M, this
     specification shall prevail.
     3.2 Steel investment castings furnished to this specification
     shall conform to the requirements of Specification
     A 985 /A 985M, including any supplementary requirements
     that are indicated in the purchase order. Failure
     to comply with the general requirements of Specification
     A 985 /A 985M constitutes nonconformance with this
     specification. In case of conflict between the requirements
     of this specification and Specification A 985/A 985M,
     Specification A 985/A 985M shall prevail.
138. Ordering Information
     4.1 The inquiry and order should include or indicate
     the following:
     4.1.1 A description of the casting by pattern number
     or drawing (dimensional tolerances shall be included on
     the casting drawing),
     4.1.2 Grade of steel,
     4.1.3 Options in the specification,
     4.1.4 Whether the castings are to be produced using
     the investment casting process, and
     4.1.5 The supplementary requirements desired
     including the standards of acceptance.
139. Heat Treatment
     5.1 All castings shall receive a heat treatment proper
     to their design and chemical composition.
     5.2 Castings shall be furnished in the normalized and
     tempered conditions; Grades WC1, WC4, WC5, WC6, and
     CA15 shall be tempered at 1100°F [595°C] min; Grades
     WC9, C5, C12, and WC11 shall be tempered at 1250°F
     [675°C] min; Grade C12A shall be normalized at 1900-
     1975°F [1040–1080°C] and tempered at 1350–1470°F
     [730–800°C].
     5.3 Heat treatment shall be performed after castings
     have been allowed to cool below the transformation range.
140. Chemical Composition
     6.1 The steel shall be in accordance with the requirements
     as to chemical composition prescribed in Table 1
     (Note 4).
     NOTE 4 — The role of alloying elements in the development of Grade
     C12A has been extensively investigated. V and Cb contribute to precipitation
     strengthening by forming fine and coherent precipitation of M(C,N)X
     carbo-nitrides in the ferrite matrix. V also precipitates as VN during
     tempering or during creep. The two elements are more effective in combination.
     Therefore, the addition of strong nitride-forming elements, those
     with a stronger affinity for nitrogen than Cb and V, as deoxidation agents,
     interferes with these high-temperature strengthening mechanisms.
141. Tensile Requirements
     7.1 Steel used for the castings shall be in accordance
     with the requirements as to tensile properties prescribed
     in Table 2.
142. Quality
     8.1 The surface of the casting shall be examined visually
     and shall be free of adhering sand, scale, cracks, and
     hot tears. Other surface discontinuities shall meet the visual
     acceptance standards specified in the order. Practice
     A 802/A 802M or other visual standards may be used to
     define acceptable surface discontinuities and finish. Unacceptable
     visual surface discontinuities shall be removed
     and their removal verified by visual examination of the
     resultant cavities. When methods involving high temperature
     are used in the removal of discontinuities, castings
     shall be preheated to at least the minimum temperatures
     in Table 3.
     8.2 When additional inspection is desired, Supplementary
     Requirements S4, S5, and S10 may be ordered.
     8.3 The castings shall not be peened, plugged, or
     impregnated to stop leaks.
143. Repair by Welding
     9.1 Repairs shall be made using procedures and welders
     qualified under Practice A 488/A 488M.
     9.2 Weld repaired Grade C12A castings shall be postweld
     heat treated at 1350-1470°F [730-800°C].
     9.3 Weld repairs shall be inspected to the same quality
     standards that are used to inspect the castings. When castings
     are produced with Supplementary Requirement S4
     specified, weld repairs shall be inspected by magnetic particle
     examination to the same standards that are used to
     inspect the castings. When castings are produced with Supplementary
     Requirement S5 specified, weld repairs on castings
     that have leaked on hydrostatic test, or on castings in
     which the depth of any cavity prepared for repair welding
     exceeds 20% of the wall thickness or 1 in. [25 mm], whichever
     is smaller, or on castings in which any cavity prepared
     for welding is greater than approximately 10 in.2 [65 cm2],
     shall be radiographed to the same standards that are used
     to inspect the castings.
     9.4 Weld repairs shall be considered major in the case
     of a casting that has leaked on hydrostatic test, or when
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-217/SA-217M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     314
     the depth of the cavity prepared for welding exceeds 20%
     of the wall thickness or 1 in. [25 mm], whichever is smaller,
     or when the extent of the cavity exceeds approximately
     10 in.2 [65 cm2]. All castings with major repair welds shall
     be thermally stress relieved or completely reheat-treated.
     This mandatory stress relief or reheat-treatment shall be
     in accordance with the qualified procedure used. Major
     repairs shall be inspected to the same quality standards
     that are used to inspect the castings.
144. Keywords
     10.1 alloy steel; high temperature; martensitic stainless
     steel; pressure containing; steel castings
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-217/SA-217M
     315
     TABLE 1
     CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
     Composition, %
     Carbon
     Molybdenum
     Nickel
     Chromium
     Molybdenum
     Nickel
     Chromium
     Molybdenum
     Chromium
     Molybdenum
     Chromium
     Molybdenum
     Chromium
     Molybdenum
     Chromium
     Molybdenum
     Chromium
     Molybdenum
     Chromium
     Molybdenum
     Vanadium Chromium
     Grade Identification
     Symbol
     UNS Number
     WC1
     J12524
     WC4
     J12082
     WC5
     J22000
     WC6
     J12072
     WC9
     J21890
     WC11
     J11872
     C5
     J42045
     C12
     J82090
     C12A
     J84090
     CA15
     J91150
     Carbon 0.25 0.05–0.20 0.05–0.20 0.05–0.20 0.05–0.18 0.15–0.21 0.20 0.20 0.08–0.12 0.15
     Manganese 0.50–0.80 0.50–0.80 0.40–0.70 0.50–0.80 0.40–0.70 0.50–0.80 0.40–0.70 0.35–0.65 0.30–0.60 1.00
     Phosphorus 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.020 0.04 0.04 0.030 0.040
     Sulfur 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.015 0.045 0.045 0.010 0.040
     Silicon 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.30–0.60 0.75 1.00 0.20–0.50 1.50
     Nickel . . . 0.70–1.10 0.60–1.00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.40 1.00
     Chromium . . . 0.50–0.80 0.50–0.90 1.00–1.50 2.00–2.75 1.00–1.50 4.00–6.50 8.00–10.00 8.0–9.5 11.5–14.0
     Molybdenum 0.45–0.65 0.45–0.65 0.90–1.20 0.45–0.65 0.90–1.20 0.45–0.65 0.45–0.65 0.90–1.20 0.85–1.05 0.50
     Columbium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.060–0.10 . . .
     Nitrogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.030–0.070 . . .
     Vanadium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.18–0.25 . . .
     Specified Residual Elements
     Aluminum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.01 . . . . . . 0.02 . . .
     Copper 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.35 0.50 0.50 . . . . . .
     Nickel 0.50 . . . . . . 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 . . . . . .
     Chromium 0.35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Titanium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.01 . . .
     Tungsten 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 . . . 0.10 0.10 . . . . . .
     Vanadium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.03 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Zirconium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.01 . . .
     Total content of these
     residual elements
     1.00 0.60 0.60 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
     NOTE — All values are maximum unless otherwise indicated.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     SA-217/SA-217M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     316
     TABLE 2
     TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
     Tensile Yield Elongation
     Strength, Strength,A in 2 in. Reduction
     ksi min, ksi [50 mm], of Area,
     Grade [MPa] [MPa] min, %B min, %
     WC1 65 [450] to 90 [620] 35 [240] 24 35
     WC4, WC5, WC6, WC9 70 [485] to 95 [655] 40 [275] 20 35
     WC11 80 [550] to 105 [725] 50 [345] 18 45
     C5, C12 90 [620] to 115 [795] 60 [415] 18 35
     C12A 85 [585] to 110 [760] 60 [415] 18 45
     CA15 90 [620] to 115 [795] 65 [450] 18 30
     A Determine by either 0.2% offset method or 0.5% extension-under-load method.
     B When ICI test bars are used in tensile testing as provided for in Specification A 703/A 703M, the
     gage length to reduced section diameter ratio shall be 4 to 1.
     TABLE 3
     MINIMUM PREHEAT TEMPERATURES
     Minimum
     Preheat
     Temperature,
     Grade Thickness, in. [mm] °F [°C]
     WC1 5/8 and under 50 [10]
     Over 5/8 [15.9] 250 [120]
     WC4 All 300 [150]
     WC5 All 300 [150]
     WC6 All 300 [150]
     WC9 All 400 [200]
     WC11 All 300 [150]
     C5 All 400 [200]
     C12 All 400 [200]
     C12A All 400 [200]
     CA15 All 400 [200]
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-217/SA-217M
     317
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     The following supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified in the purchase order. A list of standardized
     supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser is included in Specification A 703/A 703M. Those
     which are ordinarily considered suitable for use with this specification are given below. Others enumerated in
     Specification A 703/A 703M may be used with this specification upon agreement between the manufacturer and
     purchaser.
     S1. Unspecified Elements
     S2. Destruction Tests
     S3. Bend Tests
     S4. Magnetic Particle Inspection
     S5. Radiographic Inspection
     S10. Examination of Weld Preparation
     S10.1 The method of performing the magnetic particle
     or liquid penetrant test shall be in accordance with Test
     Method E 165 or Guide E 709.
     S13. Hardness Test
     S21. Heat Treatment Furnace Record
     S22. Heat Treatment
     S51. Mandatory Postweld Heat Treatment
     S51.1 All castings with repair welds shall receive a
     mandatory thermal stress relief or complete reheat treatment
     in accordance with the qualified procedure after all
     weld repairs.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ð19Þ
     SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES,
     ALLOY STEEL, MANGANESE-VANADIUM-NICKEL
     SA-225/SA-225M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A225/A225M-17.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-225/SA-225M
     319
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-225/SA-225M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     320
     Standard Specification for
     Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Vanadium-
     Nickel
145. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers manganese-vanadium-nickel
     alloy steel plates intended primarily for welded layered pressure
     vessels.
     1.2 Plates under this specification are available in two
     grades having different strength levels as follows:
     Grade Tensile Strength, ksi [MPa]
     C 105–135 [725–930]
     D
     3 in. [75 mm] and under 80–105 [550–725]
     Over 3 in. [75 mm] 75–100 [515–690]
     1.3 The maximum thickness of plates is limited only by the
     capacity of the chemical composition to meet the specified
     mechanical property requirements.
     1.4 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
     SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
     system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must
     be used independently of the other. Combining values from the
     two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification.
     1.5 This international standard was developed in accordance
     with internationally recognized principles on standardization
     established in the Decision on Principles for the
     Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
     issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
     Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
146. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A20/A20M Specification for General Requirements for Steel
     Plates for Pressure Vessels
     A435/A435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
     Examination of Steel Plates
     A577/A577M Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination
     of Steel Plates
     A578/A578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
     Examination of Rolled Steel Plates for Special Applications
147. General Requirements and Ordering Information
     3.1 Material supplied to this material specification shall
     conform to Specification A20/A20M. These requirements outline
     the testing and retesting methods and procedures, permitted
     variations in dimensions, and mass, quality and repair of
     defects, marking, loading, and ordering information.
     3.2 In addition to the basic requirements of this
     specification, certain supplementary requirements are available
     when additional control, testing, or examination is required to
     meet end use requirements. The purchaser is referred to the
     listed supplementary requirements in this specification and to
     the detailed requirements in Specification A20/A20M.
     3.3 Coils are excluded from qualification to this specification
     until they are processed into finished plates. Plates
     produced from coil means plates that have been cut to
     individual lengths from coil. The processor directly controls, or
     is responsible for, the operations involved in the processing of
     coils into finished plates. Such operations include decoiling,
     leveling, cutting to length, testing, inspection, conditioning,
     heat treatment (if applicable), packaging, marking, loading for
     shipment, and certification.
     NOTE 1—For plates produced from coil and furnished without heat
     treatment or with stress relieving only, three test results are reported for
     each qualifying coil. Additional requirements regarding plates from coil
     are described in Specification A20/A20M.
     3.4 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
     with the requirements of Specification A20/A20M, the requirements
     of this specification shall prevail.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-225/SA-225M
     321
148. Materials and Manufacture
     4.1 Steelmaking Practice—The steel shall be killed and
     shall conform to the fine austenitic grain size requirement of
     Specification A20/A20M.
149. Heat Treatment
     5.1 Grade D plates of all thicknesses and Grade C plates of
     thicknesses over 2 in. [50 mm] shall be normalized.
     5.2 Grade C plates 2 in. [50 mm] and under in thickness are
     usually supplied in the as-rolled condition. The plates may be
     ordered normalized or stress-relieved, or both.
150. Chemical Composition
     6.1 The steel shall conform to the chemical requirements
     given in Table 1, unless otherwise modified in accordance with
     Supplementary Requirement S17, Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized
     Steel, in Specification A20/A20M.
151. Mechanical Properties
     7.1 Tension Test—The plates, as represented by the tension
     test specimens, shall conform to the requirements given in
     Table 2.
     7.2 For plates with a nominal thickness of 3/4 in. [20 mm]
     and under, the 11/2-in. [40-mm] wide rectangular specimen may
     be used and the elongation determined in a 2-in. [50-mm] gage
     length that includes the fracture and that shows the greatest
     elongation.
152. Keywords
     8.1 alloy steel plates; manganese-vanadium-nickel steel
     plate; plate for pressure vessels; pressure containing parts
     TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
     Elements
     Composition, %
     Grade C Grade D
     Carbon, maxA 0.25 0.20
     Manganese, max:
     Heat analysis 1.60 1.70
     Product analysis 1.72 1.84
     Phosphorus, maxA 0.025 0.025
     Sulfur, maxA 0.025 0.025
     Silicon:
     Heat analysis 0.15–0.40 0.10–0.50
     Product analysis 0.13–0.45 0.08–0.56
     Vanadium:
     Heat analysis 0.13–0.18 0.10–0.18
     Product analysis 0.11–0.20 0.08–0.20
     Nickel:
     Heat analysis 0.40–0.70 0.40–0.70
     Product analysis 0.37–0.73 0.37–0.73
     A Applies to both heat and product analyses.
     TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
     Grade C Grade D
     ksi [MPa] ksi [MPa]
     Tensile strength:
     All thicknesses 105–135 [725–930]
     3 in. [75 mm] and under 80–105 [550–725]
     Over 3 in. [75 mm] 75–100 [515–690]
     Yield strength, min:A
     All thicknesses 70 [485]
     3 in. [75 mm] and under 60 [415]
     Over 3 in. [75 mm] 55 [380]
     Elongation in 8 in. [200 mm], min, %B …
     Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min, %B 20 19
     Elongation in 5D, min, %B 17
     A Determined by either the 0.2 % offset method or the 0.5 % extension-under-load method.
     B See Specification A20/A20M for elongation adjustment.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-225/SA-225M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     322
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     Supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified in the purchase order.
     A list of standardized supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser is included
     in Specification A20/A20M. Those that are considered suitable for use with this specification are listed
     below by title.
     S1. Vacuum Treatment,
     S2. Product Analysis,
     S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical
     Test Coupons,
     S4.1 Additional Tension Test,
     S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test,
     S6. Drop Weight Test (for Material 0.625 in. [16 mm] and
     over in Thickness),
     S7. High-Temperature Tension Test,
     S8. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
     A435/A435M,
     S9. Magnetic Particle Examination,
     S11. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
     A577/A577M,
     S12. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
     A578/A578M, and
     S17. Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR CHROMIUM-VANADIUM ALLOY
     STEEL SPRING WIRE
     SA-231/SA-231M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A231/A231M-96 except that certification requirements in para. 13.1 are
     mandatory.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-231/SA-231M
     323
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-231/SA-231M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     324
     SPECIFICATION FOR CHROMIUM-VANADIUM ALLOY
     STEEL SPRING WIRE
     SA-231/SA-231M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A 231/A 231M-96 except that certification requirements in para. 13.1 are mandatory.)
153. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers round chromium-vanadium
     alloy steel spring wire having properties and quality
     intended for the manufacture of springs used at moderately
     elevated temperatures. This wire shall be either in the
     annealed and cold-drawn or oil-tempered condition as specified
     by the purchaser.
     1.2 The values stated in either SI (metric) units or inchpound
     units are to be regarded separately as standard. The
     values stated in each system are not exact equivalents;
     therefore, each system must be used independent of the
     other.
154. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
     of Steel Products
     A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading
     Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment
     A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
     Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
     A 752 Specification for General Requirements for Wire
     Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Alloy Steel
     E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
     Determine Conformance with Specifications
     2.2 ANSI Standard:
     B 32.4M Preferred Metric Sizes for Round, Square, Rectangle,
     and Hexagon Metal Products
     2.3 Military Standard:
     MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products, Preparation for Shipment
     and Storage
     2.4 Federal Standard:
     Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
     2.5 AIAG Standard:
     AIAGB-5 02.00 Primary Metals Identification Tag Application
     Standard
155. Ordering Information
     3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
     include the following information for each ordered item:
     3.1.1 Quantity (mass);
     3.1.2 Name of material (chromium-vanadium alloy
     steel wire);
     3.1.3 Wire diameter (Table 1 and Table 2);
     3.1.4 Packaging (Section 14);
     3.1.5 Cast or heat analysis report (if requested) (5.2);
     3.1.6 Certification and test report (Section 13); and
     3.1.7 ASTM designation and date of issue.
     NOTE 1 — A typical ordering description is as follows: 20,000 kg oiltempered
     chromium-vanadium alloy steel wire, size 6.00 mm in 150 kg
     coils to ASTM A 231M dated_________, or for inch-pound units,
     40 000 lb oil-tempered chromium-vanadium alloy steel spring wire, size
     0.250 in. in 350 lb coils to ASTM A 231 dated_________.
156. Materials and Manufacture
     4.1 The steel may be made by any commercially
     accepted steel-making process. The steel may be either
     ingot cast or strand cast.
     4.2 The finished wire shall be free from detrimental
     pipe and undue segregation.
157. Chemical Composition
     5.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
     chemical composition specified in Table 3.
     5.2 Cast or Heat Analysis — Each cast or heat of steel
     shall be analyzed by the manufacturer to determine the
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-231/SA-231M
     325
     percentage of elements prescribed in Table 3. This analysis
     shall be made from a test specimen preferably taken during
     the pouring of the cast or heat. When requested, this shall
     be reported to the purchaser and shall conform to the
     requirements of Table 3.
     5.3 Product Analysis (formerly Check Analysis) — An
     analysis may be made by the purchaser from finished wire
     representing each cast or heat of steel. The chemical composition
     thus determined, as to elements required or
     restricted, shall conform to the product (check) analysis
     requirements specified in Table 5 of Specification A 752.
     5.4 For referee purposes, Test Methods, Practices, and
     Terminology A 751 shall be used.
158. Mechanical Properties
     6.1 Annealed and Cold Drawn — When purchased in
     the annealed and cold-drawn condition, the wire shall have
     been given a sufficient amount of cold working to meet the
     purchaser’s coiling requirements and shall be in a suitable
     condition to respond properly to heat treatment. In special
     cases the hardness, if desired, shall be stated in the purchase
     order.
     6.2 Oil Tempered — When purchased in the oil-tempered
     condition, the tensile strength and minimum percent
     reduction of area, sizes 2.50 mm or 0.105 in. and coarser,
     of the wire shall conform to the requirements as shown in
     Table 1 or Table 2.
     6.2.1 Number of Tests — One test specimen shall be
     taken for each ten coils, or fraction thereof, in a lot. Each
     cast or heat in a given lot shall be tested.
     6.2.2 Location of Tests — Test specimens shall be
     taken from either end of the coil.
     6.2.3 Test Method — The tension test shall be made
     in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
     6.3 Wrap Test:
     6.3.1 Oil tempered or cold drawn wire 4.00 mm or
     0.162 in. and smaller in diameter shall wind on itself as
     an arbor without breakage. Larger diameter wire up to and
     including 8.00 mm or 0.312 in. in diameter shall wrap
     without breakage on a mandrel twice the wire diameter.
     The wrap test is not applicable to wire over 8.00 mm or
     0.312 in. in diameter.
     6.3.2 Number of Tests — One test specimen shall be
     taken for each ten coils, or fraction thereof, in a lot. Each
     cast or heat in a given lot shall be tested.
     6.3.3 Location of Test — Test specimens shall be
     taken from either end of the coil.
     6.3.4 Test Method — The wrap test shall be made
     in accordance with Supplement IV of Test Methods and
     Definitions A 370.
159. Metallurgical Properties
     7.1 Surface Condition:
     7.1.1 The surface of the wire as received shall be
     free of rust and excessive scale. No serious die marks,
     scratches, or seams may be present. Based upon examination
     of etched end specimen, seams shall not exceed 3.5%
     of the wire diameter, or 0.25 mm or 0.010 in., whichever
     is the smaller as measured on a transverse section.
     7.1.2 Number of Tests — One test specimen shall be
     taken for each ten coils, or fraction thereof, in a lot. Each
     cast or heat in a given lot shall be tested.
     7.1.3 Location of Test — Test specimens shall be
     taken from either or both ends of the coil.
     7.1.4 Test Method — The surface shall be examined
     after etching in a solution of equal parts of hydrochloric
     acid and water that has been heated to approximately 80° C.
     Test ends shall be examined using 10magnification. Any
     specimen which shows questionable seams of borderline
     depth shall have a transverse section taken from the
     unetched area, properly mounted and polished and examined
     to measure the depth of the seam.
160. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
     8.1 The permissible variations in the diameter of the
     wire shall be as specified in Table 4 or Table 5.
161. Workmanship and Appearance
     9.1 Annealed and Cold Drawn —The wire shall not be
     kinked or improperly cast. To test for cast, a few convolutions
     of wire shall be cut loose from the coil and placed
     on a flat surface. The wire shall lie flat on itself and not
     spring up nor show a wavy condition.
     9.2 Oil Tempered—The wire shall be uniform in quality
     and temper and shall not be wavy or crooked.
     9.3 Each coil shall be one continuous length of wire
     properly coiled. Welds made prior to cold drawing are
     permitted. If unmarked welds are unacceptable to the purchaser,
     special arrangements should be made with the manufacturer
     at the time of the purchase.
     9.4 Appearance—The surface shall be smooth and free
     of defects such as seams, pits, die marks, and other defects
     tending to impair the use of the wire for springs. Any
     additional surface requirements must be negotiated at the
     time of entry of the order.
162. Retests
     10.1 If any test specimen exhibits obvious defects or
     shows the presence of a weld, it may be discarded and
     another specimen substituted.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-231/SA-231M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     326
163. Inspection
     11.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
     order, the manufacturer is responsible for the performance
     of all inspection and test requirements specified
     in this specification. Except as otherwise specified in the
     contract or purchase order, the manufacturer may use his
     own or any other suitable facilities for the performance of
     the inspection and test requirements unless disapproved by
     the purchaser at the time the order is placed. The purchaser
     shall have the right to perform any of the inspections and
     tests set forth in this specification when such inspections
     and tests are deemed necessary to assure that the material
     conforms to prescribed requirements.
164. Rejection and Rehearing
     12.1 Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based
     on tests made in accordance with this specification shall
     be reported to the manufacturer as soon as possible so that
     an investigation may be initiated.
     12.2 The material must be adequately protected and
     correctly identified in order that the manufacturer may
     make a proper investigation.
165. Certification
     13.1 A manufacturer’s or supplier’s certification shall
     be furnished to the purchaser that the material was manufactured,
     sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with
     this specification and has been found to meet the requirements.
     A report of the test results shall be furnished.
     13.2 The certification shall include the specification
     number, year date of issue, and revision letter, if any.
166. Packaging, Marking, and Loading for Shipment
     14.1 The coil mass, dimensions, and the method of
     packaging shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer
     and purchaser.
     14.2 The size of the wire, purchaser’s order number,
     ASTM Specification number, heat number, and name or
     mark of the manufacturer shall be marked on a tag securely
     attached to each coil of wire.
     14.3 Unless otherwise specified in the purchaser’s
     order, packing, marking, and loading for shipments shall
     be in accordance with those procedures recommended by
     Practices A 700.
     14.4 For Government Procurement:
     14.4.1 Packaging, packing, and marking of material
     for military procurement shall be in accordance with the
     requirements of MIL-STD-163, Level A, Level C, or commercial
     as specified in the contract or purchase order. Marking
     for shipment of material for civil agencies shall be in
     accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123.
     14.5 Bar Coding—In addition to the previously-stated
     identification requirements, bar coding is acceptable as a
     supplementary identification method. Bar coding should
     be consistent with AIAG B-5 02.00, Primary Metals Identification
     Tag Application. The bar code may be applied to
     a substantially affixed tag.
167. Keywords
     15.1 alloy; chromium-vanadium; spring; wire
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-231/SA-231M
     327
     TABLE 1
     TENSILE REQUIREMENTS, SI UNITS A
     Tensile Strength,
     MPa Reduction of Areas,
     Diameter,B mm Min. Max. Min., %
     0.50 2060 2260 C
     0.55 2050 2240 C
     0.60 2030 2220 C
     0.65 2010 2200 C
     0.70 2000 2160 C
     0.80 1980 2140 C
     0.90 1960 2120 C
     1.00 1940 2100 C
     1.10 1920 2080 C
     1.20 1900 2060 C
     1.40 1860 2020 C
     1.60 1820 1980 C
     1.80 1800 1960 C
     2.00 1780 1930 C
     2.20 1750 1900 C
     2.50 1720 1860 45
     2.80 1680 1830 45
     3.00 1660 1800 45
     3.50 1620 1760 45
     4.00 1580 1720 40
     4.50 1560 1680 40
     5.00 1520 1640 40
     5.50 1480 1620 40
     6.00 1460 1600 40
     6.50 1440 1580 40
     7.00 1420 1560 40
     8.00 1400 1540 40
     9.00 1380 1520 40
     10.00 1360 1500 40
     11.00 1340 1480 40
     12.00 1320 1460 40
     A Tensile strength values for intermediate diameters may be interpolated.
     B Preferred sizes. For a complete list, refer to ANSI B 32.4M,
     Preferred Metric Sizes for Round, Square, Rectangle, and Hexagon
     Metal Products.
     C The reduction of area test is not applicable to wire diameters
     under 2.34 mm.
     TABLE 2
     TENSILE REQUIREMENTS, INCH-POUND UNITS A
     Tensile Strength,
     ksi Reduction of Areas,
     Diameter,B in. Min. Max. Min., %
     0.020 300 325 C
     0.032 290 315 C
     0.041 280 305 C
     0.054 270 295 C
     0.062 265 290 C
     0.080 255 275 C
     0.105 245 265 45
     0.135 235 255 45
     0.162 225 245 40
     0.192 220 240 40
     0.244 210 230 40
     0.283 205 225 40
     0.312 203 223 40
     0.375 200 220 40
     0.438 195 215 40
     0.500 190 210 40
     A Tensile strength values for intermediate diameters may be interpolated.
     B Preferred sizes. For a complete list, refer to ANSI B 32.4M,
     Preferred Metric Sizes for Round, Square, Rectangle, and Hexagon
     Metal Products.
     C The reduction of area test is not applicable to wire diameters
     under 0.092 in.
     TABLE 3
     CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
     Element Analysis, %
     Carbon 0.48-0.53
     Manganese 0.70-0.90
     Phosphorus 0.040 max.
     Sulfur 0.040 max.
     Silicon 0.15-0.35
     Chromium 0.80-1.10
     Vanadium 0.15 min.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-231/SA-231M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     328
     TABLE 4
     PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIRE DIAMETER,
     SI UNITS A
     Permissible
     Variations, plus and Permissible Out-
     Diameter, mm Minus, mm of Round, mm
     To 0.70, incl. 0.02 0.02
     Over 0.70 to 2.00, incl. 0.03 0.03
     Over 2.00 to 9.00, incl. 0.05 0.05
     Over 9.00 0.08 0.08
     A For purposes of determining conformance with this specification,
     all specified limits are absolute as defined in Practice E 29.
     TABLE 5
     PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIRE DIAMETER,
     INCH-POUND UNITS A
     Permissible
     Variations, Plus Permissible Out-
     Diameter, in. and Minus, mm of Round, mm
     0.020 to 0.028, incl. 0.0008 0.0008
     Over 0.028 to 0.075, incl. 0.001 0.001
     Over 0.075 to 0.375, incl. 0.002 0.002
     Over 0.375 to 0.500, incl. 0.003 0.003
     A For purposes of determining conformance with this specification,
     all specified limits are absolute as defined in Practice E 29.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR CHROMIUM-VANADIUM ALLOY
     STEEL VALVE SPRING QUALITY WIRE
     SA-232/SA-232M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A232/A232M-91.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-232/SA-232M
     329
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-232/SA-232M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     330
     SPECIFICATION FOR CHROMIUM-VANADIUM ALLOY
     STEEL VALVE SPRING QUALITY WIRE
     SA-232/SA-232M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A 232/A 232M-91.)
168. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers the highest quality of
     round chromium-vanadium alloy steel valve spring wire,
     uniform in quality and temper, intended for the manufacture
     of valve springs and other springs requiring highfatigue
     properties when used at moderately elevated temperatures.
     This wire shall be either in the annealed and
     cold-drawn or oil-tempered condition as specified by the
     purchaser.
     1.2 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound
     units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
     text, the inch-pound units are shown in brackets. The values
     stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore,
     each system must be used independent of the other.
169. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
     of Steel Products
     A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading
     Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment
     A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
     Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
     E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
     Determine Conformance with Specifications
     2.2 ANSI Standard:
     B32.4 Preferred Metric Sizes for Round, Square, Rectangle,
     and Hexagon Metal Products
     2.3 Federal Standard:
     Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
     2.4 Military Standard:
     MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products, Preparation for Shipment
     and Storage
170. Ordering Information
     3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
     include the following information for each ordered item:
     3.1.1 Quantity (mass),
     3.1.2 Name of material (chromium-vanadium alloy
     steel valve spring quality wire),
     3.1.3 Dimensions (Table 1 and Section 8),
     3.1.4 Condition (Section 6),
     3.1.5 Packaging (Section 14),
     3.1.6 Heat analysis report, if requested (Section 5.2),
     3.1.7 Certification or test report, or both, if specified
     (Section 13), and
     3.1.8 ASTM designation and year of issue.
     NOTE 1 — A typical ordering description is as follows: 20 000 kg oiltempered
     chromium-vanadium alloy steel valve spring quality wire, size
     6.00 mm in 150 kg coils to ASTM A 232/A 232M dated
     , or for inch-pound units, 40 000 lb oil-tempered
     chromium-vanadium alloy steel valve spring quality wire, size
     0.250 in. in 350-lb coils to ASTM A 232/A 232M
     dated .
171. Materials and Manufacture
     4.1 The steel may be made by any commercially
     accepted steel making process. The steel may be either
     ingot cast or strand cast.
     4.2 The finished wire shall be free from detrimental
     pipe and undue segregation.
172. Chemical Requirements
     5.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements for
     chemical composition specified in Table 2.
     5.2 Heat Analysis—Each heat of steel shall be analyzed
     by the manufacturer to determine the percentage of elements
     prescribed in Table 2. This analysis shall be made
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-232/SA-232M
     331
     from a test specimen preferably taken during the pouring
     of the heat. When requested, this shall be reported to the
     purchaser and shall conform to the requirement of Table 2.
     5.3 Product Analysis — An analysis may be made by
     the purchaser from finished wire representing each heat of
     steel. The average of all the separate determinations made
     shall be within the limits specified in the analysis column.
     Individual determinations may vary to the extent shown
     in the product analysis tolerance column, except that the
     several determinations of a single element in any one heat
     shall not vary both above and below the specified range.
     5.4 For referee purposes, Test Methods, Practices and
     Terminology A 751 shall be used.
173. Mechanical Requirements
     6.1 Annealed and Cold Drawn — When purchased in
     the annealed and cold-drawn condition, the wire shall have
     been given a sufficient amount of cold working to meet the
     purchaser’s coiling requirements and shall be in a suitable
     condition to respond properly to heat treatment. In special
     cases the hardness, if desired, shall be stated in the purchase
     order.
     6.2 Oil Tempered — When purchased in the oil-tempered
     condition, the tensile strength and minimum percent
     reduction of area, sizes 2.50 mm [0.105 in.] and coarser,
     of the wire shall conform to the requirements prescribed
     in Table 1.
     6.2.1 Number of Tests — One test specimen shall be
     taken for each five coils, or fraction thereof, in a lot. Each
     heat in a given lot shall be tested.
     6.2.2 Location of Tests — Test specimens shall be
     taken from either end of the coil.
     6.2.3 Test Method — The tension test shall be made
     in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
     6.3 Wrap Test:
     6.3.1 Oil-tempered or cold-drawn wire 4.00 mm
     [0.162 in.] and smaller in diameter shall wind on itself as
     an arbor without breakage. Larger diameter wire up to
     and including 8.00 mm [0.312 in.] in diameter shall wrap
     without breakage on a mandrel twice the wire diameter.
     The wrap test is not applicable to wire over 8.00 mm
     [0.312 in.] in diameter.
     6.3.2 Number of Tests — One test specimen shall be
     taken for each five coils or fraction thereof, in a lot. Each
     heat in a given lot shall be tested.
     6.3.3 Location of Test — Test specimens shall be
     taken from either end of the coil.
     6.3.4 Test Method — The wrap test shall be made in
     accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
174. Metallurgical Requirements
     7.1 Surface Condition:
     7.1.1 The surface of the wire as received shall be
     free of imperfections such as pits, die marks, scratches,
     seams, and other defects tending to impair the fatigue value
     of the springs.
     7.1.2 Number of Tests — One test specimen shall be
     taken from each end of every coil.
     7.1.3 Test Method — The surface shall be examined
     after etching in a solution of equal parts of hydrochloric
     acid and water that has been heated to approximately 80°C
     for a sufficient length of time to remove up to approximately
     1% of the diameter of the wire. Test ends shall be
     examined using 10 magnification.
     7.2 Decarburization:
     7.2.1 Transverse sections of the wire properly
     mounted, polished, and etched shall show no completely
     decarburized (carbon-free) areas when examined at a magnification
     of 100 diameters. Partial decarburization shall
     not exceed a depth of 0.025 mm [0.001 in.] on wire
     5.00 mm [0.192 in.] and smaller or 0.038 mm [0.0015 in.]
     on larger than 5.00 mm [0.192 in.].
     7.2.2 To reveal the decarburization more accurately
     in the untempered wire, the specimen shall be hardened
     and tempered before microscopical examination. Prior to
     hardening, the specimen shall be filed flat on one side
     enough to reduce the diameter at least 20%. The subsequent
     mounted specimen shall show the flattened section, as well
     as the original wire edge. Any decarburization on this
     flattened section shall necessitate a new specimen for examination.
     7.2.3 Number of Tests — One test specimen shall be
     taken for each five coils, or fraction thereof, in a lot. Each
     in a given lot shall be tested.
     7.2.4 Location of Tests — Test specimens may be
     taken from either end of the coil.
175. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
     8.1 The permissible variations in the diameter of the
     wire shall be specified in Table 3.
     8.2 Number of Tests—One test specimen shall be taken
     from each end of every coil.
176. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
     9.1 Annealed and Cold Drawn — The wire shall not be
     kinked or improperly cast. To test for cast, a few convolutions
     of wire shall be cut loose from the coil and placed
     on a flat surface. The wire shall lie substantially flat on
     itself and not spring up nor show a wavy condition.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-232/SA-232M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     332
     9.2 Oil Tempered—The wire shall be uniform in quality
     and temper and shall not be wavy or crooked.
     9.3 Each coil shall be one continuous length of wire
     properly coiled and firmly tied.
     9.4 No welds are permitted in the finished product and
     any welds made during processing must be removed.
177. Retests
     10.1 If any test specimen exhibits obvious defects it
     may be discarded and another specimen substituted.
178. Inspection
     11.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
     order, the manufacturer is responsible for the performance
     of all inspection and test requirements specified
     in this specification. Except as otherwise specified in the
     contract or purchase order, the manufacturer may use his
     own or any other suitable facilities for the performance of
     the inspection and test requirements unless disapproved by
     the purchaser at the time the order is placed. The purchaser
     shall have the right to perform any of the inspections and
     tests set forth in this specification when such inspections
     and tests are deemed necessary to assure that the material
     conforms to prescribed requirements.
179. Rejection and Rehearing
     12.1 Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based
     on tests made in accordance with these specifications shall
     be reported to the manufacturer as soon as possible so that
     an investigation may be initiated.
     12.2 The material must be adequately protected and
     correctly identified in order that the manufacturer may
     make a proper investigation.
180. Certification
     13.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract,
     a manufacturer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished
     to the purchaser that the material was manufactured,
     sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification
     and has been found to meet the requirements.
     When specified in the purchase order or contract, a report
     of the test results shall be furnished.
     13.2 The certification shall include the specification
     number, year date of issue, and revision letter, if any.
181. Packaging, Marking, and Loading for Shipment
     14.1 The coil mass, dimensions, and the method of
     packaging shall be agreed upon between the manufacturer
     and purchaser.
     14.2 The size of the wire, purchaser’s order number,
     ASTM specification number, heat number, and name or
     mark of the manufacturer shall be marked on a tag securely
     attached to each coil of wire.
     14.3 Unless otherwise specified in the purchaser’s
     order, packaging, marking, and loading for shipments shall
     be in accordance with those procedures recommended by
     Practice A 700.
     14.4 For Government Procurement—Packaging, packing,
     and marking of material for military procurement shall
     be in accordance with the requirements of MIL-STD-163,
     Level A, Level C, or commercial as specified in the contract
     or purchase order. Marking for shipment of material for
     civil agencies shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-232/SA-232M
     333
     TABLE 1
     TENSILE REQUIREMENTSA
     SI Units
     Reduction
     DiameterB of Area,
     mm MPa, min MPa, max min, %
     0.50 2060 2260 C
     0.55 2050 2240 C
     0.60 2030 2220 C
     0.65 2010 2200 C
     0.70 2000 2160 C
     0.80 1980 2140 C
     0.90 1960 2120 C
     1.00 1940 2100 C
     1.10 1920 2080 C
     1.20 1900 2060 C
     1.40 1860 2020 C
     1.60 1820 1980 C
     1.80 1800 1960 C
     2.00 1780 1930 C
     2.20 1750 1900 C
     2.50 1720 1860 45
     2.80 1680 1830 45
     3.00 1660 1800 45
     3.50 1620 1760 45
     4.00 1580 1720 40
     4.50 1560 1680 40
     5.00 1520 1640 40
     5.50 1480 1620 40
     6.00 1460 1600 40
     6.50 1440 1580 40
     7.00 1420 1560 40
     8.00 1400 1540 40
     9.00 1380 1520 40
     10.00 1360 1500 40
     11.00 1340 1480 40
     12.00 1320 1460 40
     Inch-Pound Units
     Reduction
     Diameter, of Area,
     in. ksi, min ksi, max min, %
     0.020 300 325 C
     0.032 290 315 C
     0.041 280 305 C
     0.054 270 295 C
     0.062 265 290 C
     0.080 255 275 C
     0.105 245 265 45
     0.135 235 255 45
     0.162 225 245 40
     0.192 220 240 40
     0.244 210 230 40
     0.283 205 225 40
     0.312 203 223 40
     0.375 200 220 40
     0.438 195 215 40
     0.500 190 210 40
     A Tensile strength values for intermediate diameters may be interpolated.
     B Preferred sizes. For a complete list, refer to ANSI B32.4.
     C The reduction of area test is not applicable to wire under 2.50
     mm [0.105 in.] in diameter.
     TABLE 2
     CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
     Product
     Analysis
     Analysis, % Tolerance, %
     Carbon 0.48–0.53 ±0.02
     Manganese 0.70–0.90 ±0.03
     Phosphorus 0.020 max +0.005
     Sulfur 0.035 max +0.005
     Silicon 0.15–0.35 ±0.02
     Chromium 0.80–1.10 ±0.05
     Vanadium 0.15 min -0.01
     TABLE 3
     PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIRE DIAMETERA
     SI Units
     Permissible
     Variations, Permissible
     plus and Out-of-Round,
     Diameter, mm minus, mm mm
     to 2.0, incl 0.02 0.02
     Over 2.0 to 4.00, incl 0.03 0.03
     Over 4.00 to 9.00, incl 0.04 0.04
     Over 9.00 0.05 0.05
     Inch-Pound
     Permissible
     Variations, Permissible
     plus and Out-of-Round,
     Diameter, in. minus, in. in.
     0.020 to 0.075, incl 0.0008 0.0008
     Over 0.075 to 0.148, incl 0.001 0.001
     Over 0.148 to 0.375, incl 0.0015 0.0015
     Over 0.375 to 0.500, incl 0.002 0.002
     A For purposes of determining conformance with this specification,
     all specified limits are absolute as defined in Practice E 29.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ð19Þ
     SPECIFICATION FOR PIPING FITTINGS OF WROUGHT
     CARBON STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL FOR MODERATE
     AND HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
     SA-234/SA-234M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A234/A234M-18.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-234/SA-234M
     335
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-234/SA-234M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     336
     Standard Specification for
     Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
     Moderate and High Temperature Service
182. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers wrought carbon steel and
     alloy steel fittings of seamless and welded construction covered
     by the latest revision of ASME B16.9, B16.11, MSS-SP-79,
     MSS-SP-83, MSS-SP-95, and MSS-SP-97. These fittings are
     for use in pressure piping and in pressure vessel fabrication for
     service at moderate and elevated temperatures. Fittings differing
     from these ASME and MSS standards shall be furnished in
     accordance with Supplementary Requirement S58 of Specification
     A960/A960M.
     1.2 Optional supplementary requirements are provided for
     fittings where a greater degree of examination is desired. When
     desired, one or more of these supplementary requirements may
     be specified in the order.
     1.3 This specification does not cover cast welding fittings or
     fittings machined from castings. Cast steel welding fittings are
     governed by Specifications A216/A216M and A217/A217M.
     1.4 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound units
     and in SI units. However, unless the order specifies the
     applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the material
     shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
     1.5 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
     SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
     system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
     shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
     from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the
     standard.
     1.6 This international standard was developed in accordance
     with internationally recognized principles on standardization
     established in the Decision on Principles for the
     Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
     issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
     Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
183. Referenced Documents
     2.1 In addition to those reference documents listed in
     Specification A960/A960M, the following list of standards
     apply to this specification.
     2.2 ASTM Standards:
     A105/A105M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for
     Piping Applications
     A216/A216M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable
     for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service
     A217/A217M Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic
     Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing Parts, Suitable
     for High-Temperature Service
     A960/A960M Specification for Common Requirements for
     Wrought Steel Piping Fittings
     2.3 ASME Standards:4
     B16.9 Steel Butt-Welding Fittings
     B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded
     2.4 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
     Section V
     Section VIII, Division 1
     Section IX
     2.5 MSS Standards:
     MSS-SP-25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings,
     Flanges, and Unions
     MSS-SP-79 Socket Welding Reducer Inserts
     MSS-SP-83 Steel Pipe Unions, Socket-Welding and
     Threaded
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-234/SA-234M
     337
     MSS-SP-95 Swage(d) Nipples and Bull Plugs
     MSS-SP-97 Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet
     Fittings—Socket Welding, Threaded and Buttwelding
     Ends
     2.6 ASNT Standard:
     SNT-TC-1A Recommended Practice for Nondestructive
     Testing Personnel Qualification and Certification
     2.7 AWS Specifications
     A5.5/A5.5M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
     for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
     A5.23/A5.23M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
     and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
     A5.28/A5.28M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
     for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
     A5.29/A5.29M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored
     Arc Welding
184. Ordering Information
     3.1 See Specification A960/A960M.
185. General Requirements
     4.1 Product furnished to this specification shall conform to
     the requirements of Specification A960/A960M, including any
     supplementary requirements that are indicated in the purchase
     order. Failure to comply with the requirements of Specification
     A960/A960M constitutes non-conformance with this specification.
     In case of a conflict between the requirements of this
     specification and Specification A960/A960M, this specification
     shall prevail.
186. Materials
     5.1 The starting material for fittings shall be fully killed
     steel, consisting of forgings, bars, plates, sheet, and seamless or
     fusion-welded tubular products with filler metal added and
     shall conform to the chemical requirements of Table 1. Unless
     otherwise specified for carbon steel plates and sheet, the steel
     may be made to either coarse grain or fine grain practice. Grade
     WP9 shall be made to fine grain practice.
     5.2 A starting material specification that specifically requires
     the addition of any element beyond those listed for the
     materials in Table 1 for the applicable grade of material is not
     permitted. This does not preclude the use of deoxidizers or the
     judicious use of elements for grain size control.
187. Manufacture
     6.1 Forging or shaping operations may be performed by
     hammering, pressing, piercing, extruding, upsetting, rolling,
     bending, fusion welding, machining, or by a combination of
     two or more of these operations. The forming procedure shall
     be so applied that it will not produce injurious imperfections in
     the fittings.
     6.2 Fittings NPS-4 and under may be machined from
     hot-forged or rolled, cold-sized, and straightened bar stock
     having the chemical composition of the Grade in Table 1 and
     the mechanical properties of the Grade in Table 2. Heat
     treatment shall be in accordance with Section 7. All caps
     machined from bar stock shall be examined by liquid penetrant
     or magnetic particle in accordance with S52 or S53 in
     Specification A960/A960M.
     6.3 All welds including welds in tubular products from
     which fittings are made shall be (1) made by welders, welding
     operators, and welding procedures qualified under the provisions
     of ASME Section IX, (2) heat treated in accordance with
     Section 7 of this specification, and (3) radiographically examined
     throughout the entire length of each weld in accordance
     with Article 2, ASME Section V with acceptance limits in
     accordance with Paragraph UW-51 of ASME Section VIII,
     Division 1 of the ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code. In
     place of radiographic examination, welds may be ultrasonically
     examined in accordance with Appendix 12 of Section VIII. The
     NDE of welds in Grades WPB, WPC, WP1, WP11 Class 1,
     WP11 Class 2, WP11 Class 3, WP12 Class 1, WP12 Class 2,
     and WPR may be performed either prior to or after forming.
     NDE of welds in Grades WP5, WP9, WP91 Types 1 and 2,
     WP911, WP92, WP22 Class 1, WP22 Class 3, and WP24 shall
     be done after forming.
     6.3.1 All welds in WP91 Types 1 and 2 shall be made with
     one of the following welding processes and consumables:
     SMAW, A5.5/A5.5M E90XX-B9; SAW, A5.23/A5.23M EB9 +
     flux; GTAW, A5.28/A5.28M ER90S-B9; and FCAW A5.29/
     A5.29M E91T1-B9. In addition, the Ni+Mn content of all
     welding consumables used to fabricate WP91 Type 1 and Type
     2 fittings shall not exceed 1.0 %.
     6.3.2 All welds in WP92 and WP911 shall be made using
     welding consumables meeting the chemical requirements for
     the grade in Table 1.
     6.4 Personnel performing NDE examinations shall be qualified
     in accordance with SNT-TC-1A.
     6.5 The welded joints of the fittings shall be finished in
     accordance with the requirements of Paragraph UW-35 (a) of
     ASME Section VIII, Division 1.
     6.6 All butt-weld tees manufactured by cold-forming method(
     s) shall be liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examined
     by one of the methods specified in Supplementary Requirement
     S52 or S53 in Specification A960/A960M. This examination
     shall be performed after final heat treat. Only the side wall area
     of the tees need be examined. This area is defined by a circle
     that covers the area from the weld bevel of the branch outlet to
     the center line of the body or run. Internal and external surfaces
     shall be examined when size permits accessibility. No cracks
     shall be permitted. Other imperfections shall be treated in
     accordance with Section 14 on Surface Quality. After the
     removal of any crack, the tee(s) shall be re-examined by the
     original method. Acceptable tees shall be marked with the
     symbol PT or MT, as applicable, to indicate compliance.
     6.7 Stubends may be produced with the entire lap added by
     the welding of a ring, made from plate or bar of the same alloy
     grade and composition, to the outside of a straight section of
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-234/SA-234M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     338
     pipe, provided the weld is double welded, is a full penetration
     TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
     NOTE 1—All requirements are maximum unless otherwise indicated.
     NOTE 2—Where an ellipsis (…) appears in this table, there is no requirement and analysis for the element need not be determined or reported.
     Grade and
     Marking
     SymbolA
     Composition, %
     Carbon Manganese
     Phosphorus
     Sulfur Silicon Chromium Molybdenum Nickel Copper Others
     WPBB,C,D,E, 0.30 0.29–1.06 0.050 0.058 0.10 min 0.40 0.15 max 0.40 0.40 Vanadium 0.08
     WPCC,D,E, 0.35 0.29–1.06 0.050 0.058 0.10 min 0.40 0.15 max 0.40 0.40 Vanadium 0.08
     WP1 0.28 0.30–0.90 0.045 0.045 0.10–0.50 . . . 0.44–0.65 . . . . . . . . .
     WP12 CL1, 0.05–0.20 0.30–0.80 0.045 0.045 0.60 0.80–1.25 0.44–0.65 . . . . . . . . .
     WP12 CL2 . . .
     WP11 CL1 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.030 0.030 0.50–1.00 1.00–1.50 0.44–0.65 . . . . . . . . .
     WP11 CL2, 0.05–0.20 0.30–0.80 0.040 0.040 0.50–1.00 1.00–1.50 0.44–0.65 . . . . . . . . .
     WP11 CL3 . . .
     WP22 CL1, 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.040 0.50 1.90–2.60 0.87–1.13 . . . . . . . . .
     WP22 CL3 . . .
     WP24 0.05–0.10 0.30–0.70 0.020 0.010 0.15–0.45 2.20–2.60 0.90–1.10 . . . 0.75–1.25 Aluminum 0.020
     Boron 0.0015–0.0070
     Nitrogen 0.12
     Titanium 0.06–0.10
     Vanadium 0.20–0.30
     WP5 CL1, 0.15 0.30–0.60 0.040 0.030 0.50 4.0–6.0 0.44–0.65 . . . . . . . . .
     WP5 CL3 . . .
     WP9 CL1,
     WP9 CL3
     0.15 0.30–0.60 0.030 0.030 1.00 8.0–10.0 0.90–1.10 . . . . . . . . .
     WPR 0.20 0.40–1.06 0.045 0.050 . . . . . . . . . 1.60–2.24 0.75–1.25 . . .
     WP91 Type 1 0.08–0.12 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.010 0.20–0.50 8.0–9.5 0.85–1.05 0.40 . . . Vanadium 0.18–0.25
     ColumbiumG 0.06–0.10
     Nitrogen 0.03–0.07
     Aluminum 0.02F
     Titanium 0.01F
     Zirconium 0.01F
     WP91 Type 2 0.08–0.12 0.30–0.50F 0.020F 0.005F 0.20–0.40F 8.0–9.5F 0.85–1.05 0.20F 0.10F Vanadium 0.18–0.25
     ColumbiumG 0.06–0.10
     Nitrogen 0.035–0.070F
     Aluminum 0.020F
     N/Al ratio $4.0
     Boron 0.001F
     Zirconium 0.01F
     Titanium 0.01F
     Arsenic 0.010F
     Tin 0.010F
     Antimony 0.003F
     Tungsten 0.05F
     WP911 0.09–0.13 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.010 0.10–0.50 8.5–9.5 0.90–1.10 0.40 . . . Vanadium 0.18–0.25
     ColumbiumG 0.060–0.10
     Nitrogen 0.04–0.09
     Aluminum 0.02 maxF
     Boron 0.0003–0.006
     Tungsten 0.90–1.10
     Titanium 0.01 maxF
     Zirconium 0.01 maxF
     WP92 0.07–0.13 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.010 0.50 8.50–9.50 0.30–0.60 0.40 . . . Aluminum 0.02F
     Boron 0.001–0.006
     ColumbiumG 0.04–0.09
     Nitrogen 0.030–0.070
     Titanium 0.01F
     Tungsten 1.50–2.00
     Vanadium 0.15–0.25
     Zirconium 0.01F
     A When fittings are of welded construction, the grade and marking symbol shown above shall be supplemented by letter “W”.
     B Fittings made from bar or plate may have 0.35 max carbon.
     C Fittings made from forgings may have 0.35 max carbon and 0.35 max silicon with no minimum.
     D For each reduction of 0.01 % below the specified carbon maximum, an increase of 0.06 % manganese above the specified maximum will be permitted, up to a maximum
     of 1.65 %.
     E The sum of Copper, Nickel, Chromium, and Molybdenum shall not exceed 1.00 %.
     FApplies both to heat and product analyses.
     GColumbium (Cb) and Niobium (Nb) are alternate names for element 41 in the Periodic Table of the Elements.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-234/SA-234M
     339
     TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
     NOTE 1—Where an ellipsis (…) appears in this table, there is no requirement.
     Grade and Marking Symbol WPB
     WPC,
     WP11 CL2,
     WP12 CL2
     WP1
     WP11 CL1,
     WP22 CL1,
     WP5 CL1
     WP9 CL1
     WPR
     WP11 CL3,
     WP22 CL3
     WP5 CL3
     WP9 CL3
     WP24
     WP91
     Types 1 and 2
     WP92
     WP911
     WP12 CL1
     Tensile strength, minimum unless
     a range is given ksi [MPa]
     60 [415] 70 [485] 55–80
     [380–550]
     60 [415] 63–88
     [435–605]
     75 [520] 85 [585] 90 [620] 90–120
     [620–840]
     60 [415]
     Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa]
     (0.2 % offset or 0.5 %
     extensionunder-
     load)
     35 [240] 40 [275] 30 [205] 30 [205] 46 [315] 45 [310] 60 [415] 60 [415] 64 [440] 32 [220]
     Elongation Requirements
     Grades
     All Grades except WPR,
     WP91 Type 1 and Type 2, and
     WP911
     WPR and WP24
     WP91 Types 1 and 2
     WP92
     WP911
     Longitudinal
     Transverse
     Longitudinal
     Transverse
     Longitudinal
     Transverse
     Elongation:
     Standard round specimen, or small proportional specimen, min % in 4 D 22 14 20 . . . 20 13
     Rectangular specimen for wall thickness 5/16 in. [7.94 mm] and over,
     and for all small sizes tested in full section; min % in 2 in. [50 mm]
     30 20A 28 . . . . . . . . .
     Rectangular specimen for wall thickness less than 5/16 in. [7.94 mm];
     min % in 2 in. [50 mm] (1/2-in. [12.7-mm] wide specimen)
     B B B . . . . . . . . .
     A WPB and WPC fittings manufactured from plate shall have a minimum elongation of 17 %.
     B For each 1/32 in. [0.79 mm] decrease in wall thickness below 5/16 in. [7.94 mm], a deduction of 1.5 % for longitudinal and 1.0 % for transverse from the values shown above is permitted. The following table gives the
     minimum value for various wall thicknesses.
     Wall Thickness
     Grades
     All Grades except WPR, WP91 Type 1 and Type 2 and
     WP911
     WPR
     WP91 Types 1 and 2,
     WP92, and WP911
     in. [mm] Longitudinal Transverse Longitudinal Longitudinal
     5/16 (0.312) 7.94 30.0 20.0 28.0 20
     9/32 (0.281) 7.14 28.5 19.0 26.5 19
     1/4 (0.250) 6.35 27.0 18.0 25.0 18
     7/32 (0.219) 5.56 25.5 . . . 23.5 17
     3/16 (0.188) 4.76 24.0 . . . 22.0 16
     5/32 (0.156) 3.97 22.5 . . . 20.5 15
     1/8 (0.125) 3.17 21.0 . . . 19.0 14
     3/32 (0.094) 2.38 19.5 . . . 17.5 13
     1/16 (0.062) 1.59 18.0 . . . 16.0 12
     Note—This table gives the computed minimum % elongation value for each 1/32 in. [0.79 mm] decrease in wall thickness. Where the wall thickness lies between two values above, the minimum elongation value is
     determined by the following equations:
     Direction of Test Equation
     Longitudinal E = 48t + 15.00
     Transverse E = 32t + 10.00
     where:
     E = elongation in 2 in. or [50 mm], %, and
     t = actual thickness of specimen, in. [mm].
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     SA-234/SA-234M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     340
     joint, satisfies the requirements of 6.3 for qualifications and
     7.3.4 for post weld heat treatment.
188. Heat Treatment
     7.1 Heat Treatment Procedures—Fittings, after forming at
     an elevated temperature, shall be cooled to a temperature
     below the critical range under suitable conditions to prevent
     injurious defects caused by too rapid cooling, but in no case
     more rapidly than the cooling rate in still air. Heat treatment
     temperatures specified are metal (part) temperatures. Heattreated
     fittings shall be treated according to Section 7 in
     Specification A960/A960M.
     7.2 WPB, WPC, and WPR Fittings:
     7.2.1 Hot-formed WPB, WPC, and WPR fittings upon
     which the final forming operation is completed at a temperature
     above 1150 °F [620 °C] and below 1800 °F [980 °C] need not
     be heat treated provided they are cooled in still air.
     7.2.2 Hot-formed or forged WPB, WPC, and WPR fittings
     finished at temperature in excess of 1800 °F [980 °C] shall
     subsequently be annealed, normalized, or normalized and
     tempered. Hot-forged fittings NPS 4 or smaller need not be
     heat treated.
     7.2.3 WPB, WPC, and WPR fittings over NPS 12, produced
     by locally heating a portion of the fitting stock to any
     temperature for forming, shall be subsequently annealed,
     normalized, or normalized and tempered. Fittings such as
     elbows, tees, header tees, reducers and lap joint stub ends with
     a carbon content less than 0.26 %, NPS 12 and under, shall not
     require heat treatment after forming a locally heated portion of
     the fitting.
     7.2.4 Cold-formed WPB, WPC, and WPR fittings, upon
     which the final forming operation is completed at a temperature
     below 1150 °F [620 °C], shall be normalized, or shall be stress
     relieved at 1100 to 1275 °F [595 to 690 °C].
     7.2.5 WPB, WPC, and WPR fittings produced by fusion
     welding and having a nominal wall thickness at the welded
     joint of 3/4 in. [19 mm] or greater shall be post-weld heat treated
     at 1100 to 1250 °F [595 to 675 °C], or in accordance with 7.2.6.
     7.2.6 At the option of the manufacturer, WPB and WPC
     fittings produced by any of the methods in Section 6 may be
     annealed, normalized, or normalized and tempered.
     7.3 Fittings Other than WPB, WPC, and WPR:
     7.3.1 Fittings of Grades WP1, WP11 Class 1, WP11 Class 2,
     WP11 Class 3, WP12 Class 1, WP12 Class 2, WP22 Class 1,
     WP22 Class 3, WP5, and WP9 shall be furnished in the
     annealed, isothermal-annealed, or normalized and tempered
     condition. If normalized and tempered, the tempering temperature
     for WP11 Class 1, WP11 Class 2, WP11 Class 3, WP12
     Class 1, and WP12 Class 2 shall not be less than 1150 °F [620
     °C]; for Grades WP5, WP9, WP22 Class 1, and WP22 Class 3
     the tempering temperature shall not be less than 1250 °F [675
     °C].
     7.3.2 Fittings of Grades WP1, WP12 Class 1, or WP12
     Class 2 either hot formed or cold formed may be given a final
     heat treatment at 1200 °F [650 °C] instead of the heat treatment
     specified in 7.3.1.
     7.3.3 Fittings of WP24 either hot formed or cold formed
     shall be furnished in the normalized and tempered condition.
     The normalizing temperature range shall be 1800 to 1975 °F
     [980 to 1080 °C]. The tempering temperature range shall be
     1350 to 1470 °F [730 to 800 °C].
     7.3.4 Fittings in all thicknesses produced by fusion welding
     after the heat treatment specified in 7.3.1 shall be post-weld
     heat treated at a temperature not less than prescribed above for
     tempering except that Grade WP1 Type 1 and Type 2 are
     required to be post-weld heat treated only when the nominal
     wall thickness at the welded joint is 1/2 in. [13 mm] or greater,
     and except that preheat and post weld heat treatment are not
     required for WP24 fittings whose section thickness does not
     exceed 0.500 in. [12.7 mm].
     7.3.5 Except when Supplementary Requirement S1 is specified
     by the purchaser, Grade WP91 Type 1 and Type 2 shall be
     normalized at 1900 °F [1040 °C] minimum, and 1975 °F [1080
     °C] maximum, and tempered in the temperature range of 1350
     °F [730 °C] to 1470 °F [800 °C] as a final heat treatment.
     7.3.6 Grade WP911 shall be normalized in the temperature
     range of 1900 to 1975 °F [1040 to 1080 °C], and tempered in
     the temperature range of 1365 to 1435 °F [740 to 780 °C] as a
     final heat treatment.
     7.3.7 Grade WP92 shall be normalized at 1900 °F [1040 °C]
     minimum, and 1975 °F [1080 °C] maximum, and tempered in
     the temperature range of 1350 °F [730 °C] to 1470 °F [800 °C]
     as a final heat treatment.
     7.4 WPB and WPC Fittings Made from Bar—Cold-finished
     bars reduced in cross-sectional area more than 10 % by cold
     drawing or cold rolling are not acceptable for use in the
     manufacture of these fittings unless the bars have been either
     stress relieved in the temperature range of 1100 to 1250 °F
     [595 to 675 °C], normalized, normalized and tempered, or
     annealed. Mechanical testing must be performed subsequent to
     the final heat-treating operation.
     7.5 Liquid quenching followed by tempering shall be permitted
     for all grades when approved by the purchaser. Minimum
     tempering temperature shall be 1100 °F [595 °C] for
     WPB, WPC, and WPR, 1150 °F [620 °C] for Grades WP1 Type
     1 and Type 2, WP11 Class 1, WP11 Class 2, WP 12 Class 1,
     and WP12 Class 2 and 1250 °F [675 °C] for Grades WP5,
     WP9, WP22 Class 1, and 1350 °F [730 °C] for Grade WP91
     Type 1 and Type 2 and WP911. The tempering temperature
     range for WP24 shall be as in 7.3.3.
     7.5.1 Liquid quenching followed by tempering for grades
     WP11 Class 3 and WP22 Class 3 shall be permitted at the
     manufacturer’s option unless otherwise provided in the purchase
     order. The minimum tempering temperature for WP11
     Class 3 shall be 1150 °F [620 °C] and for WP22 Class 3 shall
     be 1250 °F [675 °C].
189. Chemical Composition
     8.1 The chemical composition of each cast or heat used
     shall be determined and shall conform to the requirements of
     the chemical composition for the respective materials listed in
     Table 1. The ranges as shown have been expanded to include
     variations of the chemical analysis requirements that are listed
     in the various specifications for the starting materials (pipe,
     tube, plate, bar, and forgings) normally used in the manufacturing
     of fittings to this specification.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-234/SA-234M
     341
     8.2 The steel shall not contain any unspecified elements for
     the ordered grade to the extent that it conforms to the
     requirements of another grade for which that element is a
     specified element having a required minimum content.
     8.3 Weld metal used in the construction of carbon-steel
     fittings shall be mild steel analysis No. A1 of Table QW-442,
     Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, No.
     A2 may be used for Grade WPCW.
     8.4 The molybdenum and chromium content of the deposited
     weld metal of alloy steel fittings shall be within the same
     percentage range as permitted for the base metal.
     8.5 Weld metal used in the construction of WP24 fittings
     shall be of the composition: 2.25 % Cr, 1 % Mo, 0.25 % V.
190. Tensile Requirements
     9.1 The tensile properties of the fitting material shall conform
     to the requirements listed in Table 2.
     9.1.1 Longitudinal or transverse specimens cut from either a
     fitting or from the starting plate or pipe they were manufactured
     from shall be acceptable for the tension test. For fittings
     made from forgings, the test specimen shall meet the requirements
     of Specification A105/A105M for the tension test.
     9.1.2 While Table 2 specifies elongation requirements for
     both longitudinal and transverse specimens, it is not the intent
     that both requirements apply simultaneously. Instead, it is
     intended that only the elongation requirement that is appropriate
     for the specimen used be applicable.
     9.2 One tension test shall be made on each heat of material
     and in the same condition of heat treatment as the finished
     fittings it represents. Where plate or pipe is used for the test
     specimen, the specimen thickness tested shall represent all
     fittings made from the same heat of material in the same heat
     treat condition in any thickness up to and including the tested
     thickness.
     9.3 When cold-formed fittings are furnished, samples of the
     raw material shall be normalized or stress relieved as required
     in 7.2.4. Tension tests conducted on these heat-treated samples
     shall be considered to be the tensile properties of the coldformed
     fittings.
     9.4 Records of the tension tests shall be certification that the
     material of the fitting meets the tensile requirements of this
     specification provided the heat treatments are the same. If the
     raw material was not tested, or the fitting is not in the same
     condition of heat treatment, the fitting manufacturer shall
     perform the required test on material representative of the
     finished fitting from each heat of starting material.
191. Hardness
     10.1 Except when only one fitting is produced, and except
     for Grade WP91 Type 1 and Type 2, a minimum of two pieces
     per batch or continuous run shall be hardness tested to ensure
     the fittings are within the following limits for each grade in
     Table 2. The purchaser may verify that the requirement has
     been met by testing at any location on the fitting provided such
     testing does not render the fitting useless.
     10.1.1 Fittings of Grades WP5, WP9, and WPR—217 HBW
     maximum.
     10.1.2 Fittings of Grade WP24 and WP911—248 HBW
     maximum.
     10.1.3 Fittings of Grade WP92—269 HBW maximum.
     10.1.4 Fittings of all other grades—197 HBW maximum.
     10.2 All fittings of Grade WP91 Type 1 and Type 2 shall be
     hardness tested and shall have a hardness of 190 HBW-250
     HBW.
     10.3 When additional hardness testing of the fittings is
     required, see Supplementary Requirement S57 in Specification
     A960/A960M.
192. Hydrostatic Tests
     11.1 See Specification A960/A960M.
193. Nondestructive Examination
     12.1 For WP91 Type 1 and Type 2 and WP92 fittings, one of
     the following examinations, as found in the Supplementary
     Requirements of Specification A960/A960M, shall be performed:
     S52 Liquid Penetrant Examination, S53 Magnetic
     Particle Examination, S62 Ultrasonic Test, or S72 Nondestructive
     Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Test.
194. Dimensions
     13.1 Butt-welding fittings and butt-welding short radius
     elbows and returns purchased in accordance with this specification
     shall conform to the dimensions and tolerances given in
     the latest revision of ASME B16.9. Steel socket-welding and
     threaded fittings purchased in accordance with this specification
     shall conform to the sizes, shapes, dimensions, and
     tolerances specified in the latest revision of ASME B16.11,
     MSS-SP-79, or MSS-SP-83. Swage(d) Nipples, Bull Plugs,
     and Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings purchased
     in accordance with this specification shall conform to
     the sizes, shapes, dimensions, and tolerances specified in the
     latest revision of MSS-SP-95 or MSS-SP-97.
     13.2 Fittings of size or shape differing from these standards,
     but meeting all other requirements of this specification may be
     furnished in accordance with Supplementary Requirement S58
     in Specification A960/A960M.
195. Surface Finish, Appearance, and Corrosion
     Protection
     14.1 The requirements of Specification A960/A960M apply.
196. Repair by Welding
     15.1 See Specification A960/A960M.
     15.2 In addition to the requirements for weld repair of
     Specification A960/A960M, weld repairs to WP91 Type 1 and
     Type 2 fittings shall meet the requirements of 6.3.1.
     15.3 In addition to the requirements for weld repair of
     Specification A960/A960M, weld repairs to WP24 fittings
     shall meet the requirements of 8.5. The recommended preheat
     and interpass temperature ranges are 200 to 400 °F [95 to 205
     °C]. Weld repairs to WP24 fittings shall be post weld heat
     treated at 1350 to 1470 °F [730 to 800 °C], except that preheat
     and post weld heat treatment are not required for WP24 fittings
     whose section thickness does not exceed 0.500 in. [12.7 mm].
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-234/SA-234M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     342
197. Inspection
     16.1 See Specification A960/A960M.
     16.2 Other tests, when required by agreement, shall be made
     from material of the lots covered in the order.
198. Rejection and Rehearing
     17.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
     this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
     to the producer or supplier promptly in writing. In case of
     dissatisfaction with the results of the tests, the producer or
     supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
     17.2 Fittings that develop defects in shopworking or application
     operations may be rejected. Upon rejection, the manufacturer
     shall be notified promptly in writing.
199. Certification
     18.1 Test reports are required for all fittings covered by this
     specification. Each test report shall meet the requirements for
     certification in A960/A960M as well as include the following
     information specific to this specification:
     18.1.1 Chemical analysis results, Section 8 (Table 1), reported
     results shall be to the same number of significant figures
     as the limits specified in Table 1 for that element.
     18.1.2 Tensile property results, Section 9 (Table 2), report
     the yield strength and tensile strength in ksi [MPa] and
     elongation in percent,
     18.1.3 Hardness results, Section 10,
     18.1.4 Type heat treatment, if any, Section 7,
     18.1.5 Seamless or welded,
     18.1.6 Starting material, specifically pipe, plate, etc.,
     18.1.7 Statement regarding radiographic or ultrasonic
     examination, Section 6.3, and
     18.1.8 Any supplementary testing required by the purchase
     order.
200. Product Marking
     19.1 In addition to marking requirements of A960/A960M,
     the following marking requirements shall apply:
     19.1.1 Butt-welding fittings shall be marked with the fitting
     designation for marking in accordance with Annex A1.
     19.1.2 Butt-welding fittings containing welds that have been
     ultrasonically examined instead of radiography shall be marked
     U after heat identity.
     19.1.3 Threaded or socket-welding fittings shall be marked
     with the pressure class and fitting designation for marking in
     accordance with Annex A1. Plugs and bushings furnished to
     ASME B16.11 requirements are not required to be marked.
     19.1.4 When agreed upon between the purchaser and
     manufacturer, and specified in the order, the markings shall be
     painted or stenciled on the fitting or stamped on a metal or
     plastic tag which shall be securely attached to the fitting.
     19.1.5 WP91 material shall additionally be marked with the
     appropriate Type.
     19.2 Bar Coding—In addition to the requirements in 19.1,
     bar coding is acceptable as a supplemental identification
     method. The purchaser may specify in the order a specific bar
     coding system to be used. The bar coding system, if applied at
     the discretion of the supplier, should be consistent with one of
     the published industry standards for bar coding. If used on
     small fittings, the bar code may be applied to the box or a
     substantially applied tag.
201. Keywords
     20.1 pipe fittings—steel; piping applications; pressure containing
     parts; pressure vessel service; temperature service
     applications—elevated
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     These requirements shall not be considered unless specified in the order, in which event, the
     supplementary requirements specified shall be made at the place of manufacture, unless otherwise
     agreed upon, at the purchaser’s expense. The test specified shall be witnessed by the purchaser’s
     inspector before shipment of material, if so specified in the order.
     S1. Alternative Heat Treatment—Grade WP91 Type 1 and
     Type 2
     S1.1 Grade WP91 Type 1 and Type 2 shall be normalized in
     accordance with 7.3.5 and tempered at a temperature, to be
     specified by the purchaser, less than 1350 °F [730 °C]. It shall
     be the purchaser’s responsibility to subsequently temper the
     entire fitting in the temperature range of 1350 °F [730 °C] to
     1470 °F [800 °C] as a final heat treatment. All mechanical tests
     shall be made on material heat treated in accordance with 7.3.5.
     The certification shall reference this supplementary requirement
     indicating the actual tempering temperature applied. The
     notation “S1” shall be included with the required marking of
     the fitting.
     S2. Restricted Vanadium Content
     S2.1 The vanadium content of the fittings shall not exceed
     0.03 %.
     S3. Carbon Equivalent
     S3.1 For grades WPB and WPC, the maximum carbon
     equivalent (C.E.), based on heat analysis and the following
     formula, shall be 0.50.
     C.E. 5 C1
     Mn
     6 1
     Cr1Mo1V
     5 1
     Ni1Cu
     15
     S3.2 A lower maximum carbon equivalent may be agreed
     upon between the purchaser and the supplier.
     S3.3 The C.E. shall be reported on the test report.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-234/SA-234M
     343
     ANNEX
     (Mandatory Information)
     A1. FITTING DESIGNATION FOR MARKING PURPOSES
     TABLE A1.1 Fitting Designation for Marking Purposes
     Grade Class Construction Mandatory Marking
     WPB W (Welded construction) WPBWA
     S (Seamless construction) WPB
     WPC W (Welded construction) WPCWA
     S (Seamless construction) WPC
     WP1 W (Welded construction) WP1WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP1
     WP12 CL1 W (Welded construction) WP12 CL1WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP12 CL1
     CL2 W (Welded construction) WP12 CL2WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP12 CL2
     WP11 CL1 W (Welded construction) WP11 CL1WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP11 CL1
     CL2 W (Welded construction) WP11 CL2WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP11 CL2
     CL3 W (Welded construction) WP11 CL3WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP11 CL3
     WP22 CL1 W (Welded construction) WP22 CL1WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP22 CL1
     CL3 W (Welded construction) WP22 CL3WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP22 CL3
     WP5 CL1 W (Welded construction) WP5 CL1WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP5 CL1
     CL3 W (Welded construction) WP5 CL3 WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP5 CL3
     WP9 CL1 W (Welded construction) WP9 CL1 WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP9 CL1
     CL3 W (Welded construction) WP9 CL3 WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP9 CL3
     WPR W (Welded construction) WPR WA
     S (Seamless construction) WPR
     WP91 Type 1 W (Welded construction) WP91T1WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP91T1
     WP91 Type 2 W (Welded construction) WP91T2WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP91T2
     WP92 W (Welded construction) WP92WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP92
     WP911 W (Welded construction) WP911WA
     S (Seamless construction) WP911
     A Add “U” to marking if welds are ultrasonic inspected in lieu of radiography.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ð19Þ
     SPECIFICATION FOR CHROMIUM AND
     CHROMIUM-NICKEL STAINLESS STEEL PLATE, SHEET,
     AND STRIP FOR PRESSURE VESSELS AND FOR
     GENERAL APPLICATIONS
     SA-240/SA-240M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A240/A240M-17.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-240/SA-240M
     345
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-240/SA-240M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     346
     Standard Specification for
     Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,
     Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
     Applications
202. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers chromium, chromium-nickel,
     and chromium-manganese-nickel stainless steel plate, sheet,
     and strip for pressure vessels and for general applications
     including architectural, building, construction, and aesthetic
     applications.
     1.2 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
     each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
     system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
     values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
     with the standard.
     1.3 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound and
     SI units. However, unless the order specifies the applicable
     “M” specification designation (SI units), the material shall be
     furnished in inch-pound units.
     1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
     safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
     responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appropriate
     safety, health, and environmental practices and determine
     the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
     1.5 This international standard was developed in accordance
     with internationally recognized principles on standardization
     established in the Decision on Principles for the
     Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
     issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
     Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
203. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
     of Steel Products
     A480/A480M Specification for General Requirements for
     Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate,
     Sheet, and Strip
     A923 Test Methods for Detecting Detrimental Intermetallic
     Phase in Duplex Austenitic/Ferritic Stainless Steels
     E112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
     E140 Hardness Conversion Tables for Metals Relationship
     Among Brinell Hardness, Vickers Hardness, Rockwell
     Hardness, Superficial Hardness, Knoop Hardness, Scleroscope
     Hardness, and Leeb Hardness
     E527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys in the
     Unified Numbering System (UNS)
     2.2 SAE Standard:
     J 1086 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)
204. General Requirements
     3.1 The following requirements for orders for material
     furnished under this specification shall conform to the applicable
     requirements of the current edition of Specification
     A480/A480M.
     3.1.1 Definitions;
     3.1.2 General requirements for delivery;
     3.1.3 Ordering information;
     3.1.4 Process;
     3.1.5 Special tests;
     3.1.6 Heat treatment;
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-240/SA-240M
     347
     3.1.7 Dimensions and permissible variations;
     3.1.8 Workmanship, finish and appearance;
     3.1.9 Number of tests/test methods;
     3.1.10 Specimen preparation;
     3.1.11 Retreatment;
     3.1.12 Inspection;
     3.1.13 Rejection and rehearing;
     3.1.14 Material test report;
     3.1.15 Certification; and
     3.1.16 Packaging, marking, and loading.
205. Chemical Composition
     4.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
     chemical composition specified in Table 1 and shall conform to
     applicable requirements specified in Specification A480/
     A480M.
206. Mechanical Properties
     5.1 The material shall conform to the mechanical properties
     specified in Table 2.
     5.2 When specified by the purchaser, Charpy impact tests
     shall be performed in accordance with Supplementary Requirement
     S1.
     5.3 When specified by the purchaser, 1 % offset yield
     strength shall be measured and reported in accordance with
     Supplementary Requirement S3.
207. Materials for High-Temperature Service
     6.1 The austenitic H Types shall conform to an average
     grain size of ASTM No. 7 or coarser as measured by Test
     Methods E112.
     6.2 Supplementary Requirement S2 shall be invoked when
     non-H grade austenitic stainless steels are ordered for ASME
     Code applications for service above 1000°F [540°C].
     6.3 Grade S31060, unless otherwise specified in the purchase
     order, shall conform to an average grain size of ASTM
     No. 7 or coarser, as measured by Test Methods E112.
208. Keywords
     7.1 architectural; building; chromium; chromium-nickel
     stainless steel; chromium-manganese-nickel stainless steel;
     construction; pressure vessels
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-240/SA-240M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     348
     TABLE 1 Chemical Composition Requirements, %A
     UNS
     DesignationB TypeC CarbonD Manganese
     Phosphorus
     Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Nitrogen Copper
     Other
     ElementsE, F
     Austenitic (Chromium-Nickel) (Chromium-Manganese-Nickel)
     N08020 . . . 0.07 2.00 0.045 0.035 1.00 19.0–21.0 32.0–38.0 2.00–3.00 . . . 3.00–4.00 Cb 8×C min,
     1.00 max
     N08367 . . . 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 20.0–22.0 23.5–25.5 6.0–7.0 0.18–0.25 0.75 . . .
     N08700 . . . 0.04 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 19.0–23.0 24.0–26.0 4.3–5.0 . . . 0.50 Cb 8×C min
     0.40 max
     N08800 800G 0.10 1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 19.0–23.0 30.0–35.0 . . . . . . 0.75 FeH 39.5 min
     Al 0.15–0.60
     Ti 0.15–0.60
     N08810 800HG 0.05–0.10 1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 19.0–23.0 30.0–35.0 . . . . . . 0.75 FeH 39.5 min
     Al 0.15–0.60
     Ti 0.15–0.60
     N08811 . . . 0.06–0.10 1.50 0.040 0.015 1.00 19.0–23.0 30.0–35.0 . . . . . . 0.75 FeH 39.5 min
     TiI 0.25–0.60
     AlI 0.25–0.60
     N08904 904LG 0.020 2.00 0.045 0.035 1.00 19.0–23.0 23.0–28.0 4.00–5.00 0.10 1.00–2.00 . . .
     N08925 . . . 0.020 1.00 0.045 0.030 0.50 19.0–21.0 24.0–26.0 6.00–7.00 0.10–0.20 0.80–1.50 . . .
     N08926 . . . 0.020 2.00 0.030 0.010 0.50 19.0–21.0 24.0–26.0 6.00–7.00 0.15–0.25 0.50–1.50 . . .
     S20100 201 0.15 5.50–7.50 0.060 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 3.5–5.5 . . . 0.25 . . . . . .
     S20103 . . . 0.03 5.50–7.50 0.045 0.030 0.75 16.0–18.0 3.5–5.5 . . . 0.25 . . . . . .
     S20153 . . . 0.03 6.40–7.50 0.045 0.015 0.75 16.0–17.5 4.0–5.0 . . . 0.10–0.25 1.00 . . .
     S20161 . . . 0.15 4.00–6.00 0.040 0.040 3.00–4.00 15.0–18.0 4.0–6.0 . . . 0.08–0.20 . . . . . .
     S20200 202 0.15 7.50–10.00 0.060 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 4.0–6.0 . . . 0.25 . . . . . .
     S20400 . . . 0.030 7.00–9.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 15.0–17.0 1.50–3.00 . . . 0.15–0.30 . . . . . .
     S20431 . . . 0.12 5.00–7.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–18.0 2.0–4.0 . . . 0.10–0.25 1.50–3.50 . . .
     S20432 . . . 0.08 3.00–5.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–18.0 4.0–6.0 . . . 0.05–0.20 2.00–3.00 . . .
     S20433 . . . 0.08 5.50–7.50 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–18.0 3.5–5.5 . . . 0.10–0.25 1.50–3.50 . . .
     S20910 XM-19J 0.06 4.00–6.00 0.040 0.030 0.75 20.5–23.5 11.5–13.5 1.50–3.00 0.20–0.40 . . . Cb 0.10–0.30
     V 0.10–0.30
     S21400 XM-31J 0.12 14.00–16.00 0.045 0.030 0.30–1.00 17.0–18.5 1.00 . . . 0.35 min . . . . . .
     S21600 XM-17J 0.08 7.50–9.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 17.5–22.0 5.0–7.0 2.00–3.00 0.25–0.50 . . . . . .
     S21603 XM-18J 0.03 7.50–9.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 17.5–22.0 5.0–7.0 2.00–3.00 0.25–0.50 . . . . . .
     S21640 . . . 0.08 3.50–6.50 0.060 0.030 1.00 17.5–19.5 4.0–6.5 0.50–2.00 0.08–0.30 . . . Cb 0.10–1.00
     S21800 . . . 0.10 7.00–9.00 0.060 0.030 3.5–4.5 16.0–18.0 8.0–9.0 . . . 0.08–0.18 . . . . . .
     S21904 XM-11J 0.04 8.00–10.00 0.060 0.030 0.75 19.0–21.5 5.5–7.5 . . . 0.15–0.40 . . . . . .
     S24000 XM-29J 0.08 11.50–14.50 0.060 0.030 0.75 17.0–19.0 2.3–3.7 . . . 0.20–0.40 . . . . . .
     S30100 301 0.15 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 6.0–8.0 . . . 0.10 . . . . . .
     S30103 301LG 0.03 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 6.0–8.0 . . . 0.20 . . . . . .
     S30153 301LNG 0.03 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 6.0–8.0 . . . 0.07–0.20 . . . . . .
     S30200 302 0.15 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 17.0–19.0 8.0–10.0 . . . 0.10 . . . . . .
     S30400 304 0.07 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 17.5–19.5 8.0–10.5 . . . 0.10 . . . . . .
     S30403 304L 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 17.5–19.5 8.0–12.0 . . . 0.10 . . . . . .
     S30409 304H 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 18.0–20.0 8.0–10.5 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     S30415 . . . 0.04–0.06 0.80 0.045 0.030 1.00–2.00 18.0–19.0 9.0–10.0 . . . 0.12–0.18 . . . Ce 0.03–0.08
     S30435 . . . 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 7.0–9.0 . . . . . . 1.50–3.00 . . .
     S30441 . . . 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.0–2.0 17.5–19.5 8.0–10.5 . . . 0.10 1.5–2.5 Cb 0.1–0.5
     W 0.2–0.8
     S30451 304N 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 18.0–20.0 8.0–10.5 . . . 0.10–0.16 . . . . . .
     S30452 XM-21J 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 18.0–20.0 8.0–10.5 . . . 0.16–0.30 . . . . . .
     S30453 304LN 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 18.0–20.0 8.0–12.0 . . . 0.10–0.16 . . . . . .
     S30500 305 0.12 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 17.0–19.0 10.5–13.0 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     S30530 . . . 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.50–2.50 17.0–20.5 8.5–11.5 0.75–1.50 . . . 0.75–3.50 . . .
     S30600 . . . 0.018 2.00 0.020 0.020 3.7–4.3 17.0–18.5 14.0–15.5 0.20 . . . 0.50 . . .
     S30616 . . . 0.020 1.50 0.030 0.015 3.9-4.7 16.5-18.5 13.0-15.5 0.50 . . . 0.40 Cb. 0.30–0.70
     S30601 . . . 0.015 0.50–0.80 0.030 0.013 5.0–5.6 17.0–18.0 17.0–18.0 0.20 0.05 0.35 . . .
     S30615 . . . 0.16–0.24 2.00 0.030 0.030 3.2–4.0 17.0–19.5 13.5–16.0 . . . . . . . . . Al 0.80–1.50
     S30815 . . . 0.05–0.10 0.80 0.040 0.030 1.40–2.00 20.0–22.0 10.0–12.0 . . . 0.14–0.20 . . . Ce 0.03–0.08
     S30908 309S 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 22.0–24.0 12.0–15.0 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-240/SA-240M
     349
     TABLE 1 Continued
     UNS
     DesignationB TypeC CarbonD Manganese
     Phosphorus
     Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Nitrogen Copper
     Other
     ElementsE, F
     S30909 309HG 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 22.0–24.0 12.0–15.0 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     S30940 309CbG 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 22.0–24.0 12.0–16.0 . . . . . . . . . Cb 10×C min,
     1.10 max
     S30941 309HCbG 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 22.0–24.0 12.0–16.0 . . . . . . . . . Cb 10×C min,
     1.10 max
     S31008 310S 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.50 24.0–26.0 19.0–22.0 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     S31009 310HG 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 24.0–26.0 19.0–22.0 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     S31040 310CbG 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.50 24.0–26.0 19.0–22.0 . . . . . . . . . Cb 10×C min,
     1.10 max
     S31041 310HCbG 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 24.0–26.0 19.0–22.0 . . . . . . . . . Cb 10×C min,
     1.10 max
     S31050 310 MoLNG 0.020 2.00 0.030 0.010 0.50 24.0–26.0 20.5–23.5 1.60–2.60 0.09–0.15 . . . . . .
     S31060 . . . 0.05–0.10 1.00 0.040 0.030 0.50 22.0–24.0 10.0–12.5 . . . 0.18–0.25 . . . Ce + La
     0.025–0.070
     B 0.001–0.010
     S31254 . . . 0.020 1.00 0.030 0.010 0.80 19.5–20.5 17.5–18.5 6.0–6.5 0.18–0.25 0.50–1.00 . . .
     S31266 . . . 0.030 2.00–4.00 0.035 0.020 1.00 23.0–25.0 21.0–24.0 5.2–6.2 0.35–0.60 1.00–2.50 W 1.50–2.50
     S31277 . . . 0.020 3.00 0.030 0.010 0.50 20.5–23.0 26.0–28.0 6.5–8.0 0.30–0.40 0.50–1.50 . . .
     S31600 316 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 16.0–18.0 10.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 0.10 . . . . . .
     S31603 316L 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 16.0–18.0 10.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 0.10 . . . . . .
     S31609 316H 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 16.0–18.0 10.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 . . . . . . . . .
     S31635 316TiG 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 16.0–18.0 10.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 0.10 . . . Ti 5 × (C + N)
     min, 0.70 max
     S31640 316CbG 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 16.0–18.0 10.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 0.10 . . . Cb 10 × C
     min, 1.10 max
     S31651 316N 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 16.0–18.0 10.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 0.10–0.16 . . . . . .
     S31653 316LN 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 16.0–18.0 10.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 0.10–0.16 . . . . . .
     S31655 . . . 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.015 1.00 19.5–21.5 8.0–9.5 0.50–1.50 0.14–0.25 1.00 . . .
     S31700 317 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 18.0–20.0 11.0–15.0 3.0–4.0 0.10 . . . . . .
     S31703 317L 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 18.0–20.0 11.0–15.0 3.0–4.0 0.10 . . . . . .
     S31725 317LMG 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 18.0–20.0 13.5–17.5 4.0–5.0 0.20 . . . . . .
     S31726 317LMNG 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 17.0–20.0 13.5–17.5 4.0–5.0 0.10–0.20 . . . . . .
     S31727 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.030 1.00 17.5–19.0 14.5–16.5 3.8–4.5 0.15–0.21 2.80–4.00 . . .
     S31730 . . . 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.010 1.00 17.0–19.0 15.0–16.5 3.0–4.0 0.045 4.0–5.0 . . .
     S31753 317LNG 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 18.0–20.0 11.0–15.0 3.0–4.0 0.10–0.22 . . . . . .
     S32050 . . . 0.030 1.50 0.035 0.020 1.00 22.0–24.0 20.0–23.0 6.0–6.8 0.21–0.32 0.40 . . .
     S32053 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.010 1.00 22.0–24.0 24.0–26.0 5.0–6.0 0.17–0.22 . . . . . .
     S32100 321 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 17.0–19.0 9.0–12.0 . . . 0.10 . . . Ti 5 × (C + N)
     min, 0.70 max
     S32109 321H 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 17.0–19.0 9.0–12.0 . . . . . . . . . Ti 4 × (C + N)
     min, 0.70 max
     S32615 . . . 0.07 2.00 0.045 0.030 4.80–6.00 16.5–19.5 19.0–22.0 0.30–1.50 . . . 1.50–2.50 . . .
     S32654 . . . 0.020 2.00–4.00 0.030 0.005 0.50 24.0–25.0 21.0–23.0 7.0–8.0 0.45–0.55 0.30–0.60 . . .
     S33228 . . . 0.04–0.08 1.00 0.020 0.015 0.30 26.0–28.0 31.0–33.0 . . . . . . . . . Ce 0.05–0.10
     Cb 0.6–1.0
     Al 0.025
     S33400 334G 0.08 1.00 0.030 0.015 1.00 18.0–20.0 19.0–21.0 . . . . . . . . . Al 0.15–0.60
     Ti 0.15–0.60
     S33425 . . . 0.08 1.50 0.045 0.020 1.00 21.0–23.0 20.0–23.0 2.00–3.00 . . . . . . Al 0.15–0.60
     Ti 0.15–0.60
     S33550 . . . 0.04–0.10 1.50 0.040 0.030 1.00 25.0–28.0 16.5–20.0 . . . 0.18–0.25 . . . Cb 0.05–0.15
     La + Ce
     0.025–0.070
     S34565 . . . 0.030 5.00–7.00 0.030 0.010 1.00 23.0–25.0 16.0–18.0 4.0–5.0 0.40–0.60 . . . Cb 0.10
     S34700 347 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 17.0–19.0 9.0–13.0 . . . . . . . . . Cb 10 × C min,
     1.00 max
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     SA-240/SA-240M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     350
     TABLE 1 Continued
     UNS
     DesignationB TypeC CarbonD Manganese
     Phosphorus
     Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Nitrogen Copper
     Other
     ElementsE, F
     S34709 347H 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 17.0–19.0 9.0–13.0 . . . . . . . . . Cb 8 × C min,
     1.00 max
     S34751 347LN 0.005–0.020 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–13.0 . . . 0.06–0.10 . . . Cb 0.20–0.50,
     15 × C min
     S34800 348 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 17.0–19.0 9.0–13.0 . . . . . . . . . (Cb + Ta) 10×C
     min, 1.00 max
     Ta 0.10
     Co 0.20
     S34809 348H 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 17.0–19.0 9.0–13.0 . . . . . . . . . (Cb + Ta) 8×C
     min, 1.00 max
     Ta 0.10
     Co 0.20
     S35045 . . . 0.06–0.10 1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 25.0–29.0 32.0–37.0 . . . . . . 0.75 Al 0.15–0.60
     Ti 0.15–0.60
     S35115 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.045 0.015 0.50–1.50 23.0–25.0 19.0–22.0 1.50–2.50 0.20–0.30 . . . . . .
     S35125 . . . 0.10 1.00–1.50 0.045 0.015 0.50 20.0–23.0 31.0–35.0 2.00–3.00 . . . . . . Cb 0.25–0.60
     S35135 . . . 0.08 1.00 0.045 0.015 0.60–1.00 20.0–25.0 30.0–38.0 4.0–4.8 . . . 0.75 Ti 0.40–1.00
     S35140 . . . 0.10 1.00–3.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 20.0–22.0 25.0–27.0 1.00–2.00 0.08–0.20 . . . Cb 0.25–0.75
     S35315 . . . 0.04–0.08 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.20–2.00 24.0–26.0 34.0–36.0 . . . 0.12–0.18 . . . Ce 0.03–0.10
     S38100 XM-15J 0.08 2.00 0.030 0.030 1.50–2.50 17.0–19.0 17.5–18.5 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     S38815 . . . 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.020 5.50–6.50 13.0–15.0 15.0–17.0 0.75–1.50 . . . 0.75–1.50 Al 0.30
     Duplex (Austenitic-Ferritic)
     S31200 . . . 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0–26.0 5.5–6.5 1.20–2.00 0.14–0.20 . . . . . .
     S31260 . . . 0.03 1.00 0.030 0.030 0.75 24.0–26.0 5.5–7.5 2.5–3.5 0.10–0.30 0.20–0.80 W 0.10–0.50
     S31803 . . . 0.030 2.00 0.030 0.020 1.00 21.0–23.0 4.5–6.5 2.5–3.5 0.08–0.20 . . . . . .
     S32001 . . . 0.030 4.00–6.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 19.5–21.5 1.00–3.00 0.60 0.05–0.17 1.00 . . .
     S32003 . . . 0.030 2.00 0.030 0.020 1.00 19.5–22.5 3.0–4.0 1.50–2.00 0.14–0.20 . . . . . .
     S32101 . . . 0.040 4.00–6.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 21.0–22.0 1.35–1.70 0.10–0.80 0.20–0.25 0.10–0.80 . . .
     S32202 . . . 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.010 1.00 21.5–24.0 1.00–2.80 0.45 0.18–0.26 . . . . . .
     S32205 2205G 0.030 2.00 0.030 0.020 1.00 22.0–23.0 4.5–6.5 3.0–3.5 0.14–0.20 . . . . . .
     S32304 2304G 0.030 2.50 0.040 0.030 1.00 21.5–24.5 3.0–5.5 0.05–0.60 0.05–0.20 0.05–0.60
     S32506 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.015 0.90 24.0–26.0 5.5–7.2 3.0–3.5 0.08–0.20 . . . W 0.05–0.30
     S32520 . . . 0.030 1.50 0.035 0.020 0.80 24.0–26.0 5.5–8.0 3.0–4.0 0.20–0.35 0.50–2.00 . . .
     S32550 255G 0.04 1.50 0.040 0.030 1.00 24.0–27.0 4.5–6.5 2.9–3.9 0.10–0.25 1.50–2.50 . . .
     S32750 2507G,O 0.030 1.20 0.035 0.020 0.80 24.0–26.0 6.0–8.0 3.0–5.0 0.24–0.32 0.50 . . .
     S32760K . . . 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.010 1.00 24.0–26.0 6.0–8.0 3.0–4.0 0.20–0.30 0.50–1.00 W 0.50–1.00
     S32808 . . . 0.030 1.10 0.030 0.010 0.50 27.0–27.9 7.0–8.2 0.80–1.2 0.30–0.40 . . . W 2.10–2.50
     S32900 329 0.08 1.00 0.040 0.030 0.75 23.0–28.0 2.0–5.00 1.00–2.00 . . . . . . . . .
     S32906 . . . 0.030 0.80–1.50 0.030 0.030 0.80 28.0–30.0 5.8–7.5 1.50–2.60 0.30–0.40 0.80 . . .
     S32950 . . . 0.030 2.00 0.035 0.010 0.60 26.0–29.0 3.5–5.2 1.00–2.50 0.15–0.35 . . . . . .
     S39274 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.020 0.80 24.0–26.0 6.0–8.0 2.5–3.5 0.24–0.32 0.20–0.80 W 1.50–2.50
     S81921 . . . 0.030 2.00–4.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 19.0–22.0 2.0–4.0 1.00–2.00 0.14–0.20 . . . . . .
     S82011 . . . 0.030 2.00–3.00 0.040 0.020 1.00 20.5–23.5 1.0–2.0 0.10–1.00 0.15–0.27 0.50 . . .
     S82012 . . . 0.05 2.00–4.00 0.040 0.005 0.80 19.0–20.5 0.8–1.5 0.10–0.60 0.16–0.26 1.00 . . .
     S82013 . . . 0.060 2.50–3.50 0.040 0.030 0.90 19.5–22.0 0.5–1.5 . . . 0.20–0.30 0.20–1.20 . . .
     S82031 . . . 0.05 2.50 0.040 0.005 0.80 19.0–22.0 2.0–4.0 0.60–1.40 0.14–0.24 1.00 . . .
     S82121 . . . 0.035 1.00–2.50 0.040 0.010 1.00 21.0–23.0 2.0–4.0 0.30–1.30 0.15–0.25 0.20–1.20 . . .
     S82122 . . . 0.030 2.0–4.0 0.040 0.020 0.75 20.5–21.5 1.5–2.5 0.60 0.15–0.20 0.50–1.50 . . .
     S82441 . . . 0.030 2.50–4.00 0.035 0.005 0.70 23.0–25.0 3.0–4.5 1.00–2.00 0.20–0.30 0.10–0.80 . . .
     Ferritic or Martensitic (Chromium)
     S32803 . . . 0.015 0.50 0.020 0.0035 0.55 28.0–29.0 3.0–4.0 1.80–2.50 0.020
     (C+N) 0.030
     . . . Cb 12×(C+N)
     min,
     0.15–0.50
     S40300 403 0.15 1.00 0.040 0.030 0.50 11.5–13.0 0.60 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     S40500 405 0.08 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 11.5–14.5 0.60 . . . . . . . . . Al 0.10–0.30
     S40900L 409L
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-240/SA-240M
     351
     TABLE 1 Continued
     UNS
     DesignationB TypeC CarbonD Manganese
     Phosphorus
     Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Nitrogen Copper
     Other
     ElementsE, F
     S40910 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.020 1.00 10.5–11.7 0.50 . . . 0.030 . . . Ti 6×(C+N) min,
     0.50 max; Cb
     0.17
     S40920 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.020 1.00 10.5–11.7 0.50 . . . 0.030 . . . Ti 8×(C+N) min,
     Ti 0.15–0.50; Cb
     0.10
     S40930 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.020 1.00 10.5–11.7 0.50 . . . 0.030 . . . (Ti+Cb) [0.08+8
     ×(C+N)] min,
     0.75 max;
     Ti 0.05 min
     S40945 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 10.5–11.7 0.50 . . . 0.030 . . . Cb 0.18–0.40
     Ti 0.05–0.20
     S40975 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 10.5–11.7 0.50–1.00 . . . 0.030 . . . Ti 6×(C+N) min,
     0.75 max
     S40977 . . . 0.030 1.50 0.040 0.015 1.00 10.5–12.5 0.30–1.00 . . . 0.030 . . . . . .
     S41000 410 0.08–0.15 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 11.5–13.5 0.75 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     S41003 . . . 0.030 1.50 0.040 0.030 1.00 10.5–12.5 1.50 . . . 0.030 . . . . . .
     S41008
     S41045
     410S
     . . .
     0.08
     0.030
     1.00
     1.00
     0.040
     0.040
     0.030
     0.030
     1.00
     1.00
     11.5–13.5
     12.0–13.0
     0.60
     0.50
     . . .
     . . .
     . . .
     0.030
     . . .
     . . .
     . . .
     Cb 9×(C+N) min,
     0.60 max
     S41050 . . . 0.04 1.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 10.5–12.5 0.60–1.10 . . . 0.10 . . . . . .
     S41500M . . . 0.05 0.50–1.00 0.030 0.030 0.60 11.5–14.0 3.5–5.5 0.50–1.00 . . . . . . . . .
     S42000 420 0.15 min 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 12.0-14.0 0.75 0.50 . . . . . . . . .
     S42035 . . . 0.08 1.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 13.5–15.5 1.0–2.5 0.2–1.2 . . . . . . Ti 0.30–0.50
     S42200 422 0.20–0.25 0.50–1.00 0.025 0.025 0.50 11.0–12.5 0.50–1.00 0.90–1.25 . . . . . . V 0.20-0.30,
     W 0.90-1.25
     S42900 429G 0.12 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 14.0–16.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     S43000 430 0.12 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 0.75 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     S43035 439 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 0.50 . . . 0.030 . . . Ti [0.20+4(C+N)]
     min, 1.10 max; Al
     0.15
     S43037 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 16.0–19.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . Ti 0.10–1.00
     S43100 431 0.20 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 15.0–17.0 1.25–2.50 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     S43400 434 0.12 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 . . . 0.75–1.25 . . . . . . . . .
     S43600 436 0.12 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 . . . 0.75–1.25 . . . . . . Cb 5×C min,
     0.80 max
     S43932 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 0.50 . . . 0.030 . . . (Ti+Cb)
     [0.20+4(C+N)]
     min, 0.75 max;
     Al 0.15
     S43940 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.015 1.00 17.5–18.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . Ti 0.10–0.60 Cb
     [0.30+(3×C)] min
     S44100 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 17.5–19.5 1.00 . . . 0.030 . . . Ti 0.1–0.5
     Cb [0.3 + (9× C)]
     min,
     0.90 max
     S44200 442 0.20 1.00 0.040 0.040 1.00 18.0–23.0 0.60 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     S44330 . . . 0.025 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 20.0–23.0 . . . . . . 0.025 0.30–0.80 (Ti+Cb)
     8×(C+N) min,
     0.80 max
     S44400 444 0.025 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 17.5–19.5 1.00 1.75–2.50 0.035 . . . (Ti+Cb)[0.20+4(C+N)]
     min, 0.80 max
     S44500 . . . 0.020 1.00 0.040 0.012 1.00 19.0–21.0 0.60 . . . 0.03 0.30–0.60 Cb 10×(C+N)
     min, 0.80 max
     S44535 . . . 0.030 0.30–0.80 0.050 0.020 0.50 20.0–24.0 . . . . . . . . . 0.50 La 0.04–0.20
     Ti 0.03–0.20
     Al 0.50
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     SA-240/SA-240M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     352
     TABLE 1 Continued
     UNS
     DesignationB TypeC CarbonD Manganese
     Phosphorus
     Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Nitrogen Copper
     Other
     ElementsE, F
     S44536 . . . 0.015 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 20.0–23.0 0.5 . . . 0.015 . . . (Ti+Cb)
     8X(C+N)–0.8, Cb
     min 0.05
     S44537 . . . 0.030 0.8 0.050 0.006 0.1–0.6 20.0–24.0 0.5 . . . 0.04 0.5 Al 0.1
     W 1.0–3.0
     Cb 0.2–1.0
     Ti 0.02–0.20
     La 0.04–0.20
     S44626 XM-33J 0.06 0.75 0.040 0.020 0.75 25.0–27.0 0.50 0.75–1.50 0.04 0.20 Ti 0.20–1.00;
     Ti 7(C+N) min
     S44627 XM-27J 0.010N 0.40 0.020 0.020 0.40 25.0–27.5 0.50 0.75–1.50 0.015N 0.20 Cb 0.05–0.20
     (Ni + Cu) 0.50
     S44635 . . . 0.025 1.00 0.040 0.030 0.75 24.5–26.0 3.5–4.5 3.5–4.5 0.035 . . . (Ti+Cb) [0.20+4
     (C+N)] min, 0.80
     max
     S44600 446 0.20 1.50 0.040 0.030 1.00 23.0–27.0 0.75 . . . 0.25 . . . . . .
     S44660 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 25.0–28.0 1.0–3.5 3.0–4.0 0.040 . . . (Ti+Cb) 0.20 –
     1.00, Ti + Cb
     6×(C+N) min
     S44700 . . . 0.010 0.30 0.025 0.020 0.20 28.0–30.0 0.15 3.5–4.2 0.020 0.15 (C+N) 0.025
     S44725 . . . 0.015 0.40 0.040 0.020 0.040 25.0–28.5 0.30 1.5–2.5 0.018 . . . (Ti+Cb)
     $8×(C+N)
     S44735 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 28.0–30.0 1.00 3.6–4.2 0.045 . . . (Ti+Cb)
     0.20–1.00,
     (Ti+Cb) 6× (C+N)
     min
     S44800 . . . 0.010 0.30 0.025 0.020 0.20 28.0–30.0 2.00–2.50 3.5–4.2 0.020 0.15 (C+N) 0.025
     S46800 . . . 0.030 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 0.50 . . . 0.030 . . . Ti 0.07–0.30
     Cb 0.10–0.60
     (Ti+Cb) [0.20+4
     (C+N)] min, 0.80
     max
     A Maximum, unless range or minimum is indicated. Where ellipses (. . .) appear in this table, there is no requirement and the element need not be determined or reported.
     B Designation established in accordance with Practice E527 and SAE J 1086.
     C Unless otherwise indicated, a grade designation originally assigned by the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
     D Carbon analysis shall be reported to nearest 0.01 % except for the low-carbon types, which shall be reported to nearest 0.001 %.
     E The terms Columbium (Cb) and Niobium (Nb) both relate to the same element.
     F When two minimums or two maximums are listed for a single type, as in the case of both a value from a formula and an absolute value, the higher minimum or lower maximum shall apply.
     G Common name, not a trademark, widely used, not associated with any one producer.
     H Iron shall be determined arithmetically by difference of 100 minus the sum of the other specified elements.
     I (Al + Ti) 0.85–1.20.
     J Naming system developed and applied by ASTM.
     K Cr + 3.3 Mo + 16 N = 40 min.
     L S40900 (Type 409) has been replaced by S40910, S40920, and S40930. Unless otherwise specified in the ordering information, an order specifying S40900 or Type 409 shall be satisfied by any one of S40910, S40920,
     or S40930 at the option of the seller. Material meeting the requirements of S40910, S40920, or S40930, may at the option of the manufacturer be certified as S40900.
     M Plate version of CA-6NM.
     N Product (check or verification) analysis tolerance over the maximum limit for C and N in XM-27 shall be 0.002 %.
     O Cr + 3.3 Mo + 16 N = 41 min.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-240/SA-240M
     353
     TABLE 2 Mechanical Test Requirements
     UNS Designation TypeA
     Tensile Strength, min Yield Strength,B min Elongation
     in
     2 in. or
     50 mm,
     min, %
     Hardness, maxC
     Cold Bend°D
     ksi MPa ksi MPa
     Brinell.
     HBW
     Rockwell
     Austenitic (Chromium-Nickel) (Chromium-Manganese-Nickel)
     N08020 . . . 80 550 35 240 30E 217 95 HRBW not required
     N08367
     Sheet and Strip 100 690 45 310 30 . . . 100 HRBW not required
     Plate 95 655 45 310 30 241 . . . not required
     N08700 . . . 80 550 35 240 30 192 90 HRBW not required
     N08800 800F 75 520 30G 205G 30H . . . . . . not required
     N08810 800HF 65 450 25G 170G 30 . . . . . . not required
     N08811 . . . 65 450 25 170 30 . . . . . . not required
     N08904 904LF 71 490 31 220 35 . . . 90 HRBW not required
     N08925 . . . 87 600 43 295 40 . . . . . . not required
     N08926 . . . 94 650 43 295 35 . . . . . . not required
     S20100 201-1I 75 515 38 260 40 217 95 HRBW . . .
     S20100 201-2I 95 655 45 310 40 241 100 HRBW . . .
     S20103 201LF 95 655 38 260 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S20153 201LNF 95 655 45 310 45 241 100 HRBW not required
     S20161 . . . 125 860 50 345 40 255 25 HRC not required
     S20200 202 90 620 38 260 40 241 . . . . . .
     S20400 . . . 95 655 48 330 35 241 100 HRBW not required
     S20431 . . . 90 620 45 310 40 241 100 HRBW not required
     S20432 . . . 75 515 30 205 40 201 92 HRBW not required
     S20433 . . . 80 550 35 240 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S20910 XM-19J
     Sheet and Strip
     Plate
     105
     100
     725
     690
     60
     55
     415
     380
     30
     35
     241
     241
     100 HRBW
     100 HRBW
     not required
     not required
     S21600 XM-17J
     Sheet and Strip
     Plate
     100
     90
     690
     620
     60
     50
     415
     345
     40
     40
     241
     241
     100 HRBW
     100 HRBW
     not required
     not required
     S21603 XM-18J
     Sheet and Strip
     Plate
     100
     90
     690
     620
     60
     50
     415
     345
     40
     40
     241
     241
     100 HRBW
     100 HRBW
     not required
     not required
     S21640 . . . 95 650 45 310 40 . . . . . . not required
     S21800 . . . 95 655 50 345 35 241 100 HRBW not required
     S21904 XM-11J
     Sheet and Strip
     Plate
     100
     90
     690
     620
     60
     50
     415
     345
     40
     45
     241
     241
     100 HRBW
     100 HRBW
     not required
     not required
     S24000 XM-29J
     Sheet and Strip
     Plate
     100
     100
     690
     690
     60
     55
     415
     380
     40
     40
     241
     241
     100 HRBW
     100 HRBW
     not required
     not required
     S30100 301 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S30103 301LF 80 550 32 220 45 241 100 HRBW not required
     S30153 301LNF 80 550 35 240 45 241 100 HRBW not required
     S30200 302 75 515 30 205 40 201 92 HRBW not required
     S30400 304 75 515 30 205 40 201 92 HRBW not required
     S30403 304L 70 485 25 170 40 201 92 HRBW not required
     S30409 304H 75 515 30 205 40 201 92 HRBW not required
     S30415 . . . 87 600 42 290 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S30435 . . . 65 450 23 155 45 187 90 HRBW . . .
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     SA-240/SA-240M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     354
     TABLE 2 Continued
     UNS Designation TypeA
     Tensile Strength, min Yield Strength,B min Elongation
     in
     2 in. or
     50 mm,
     min, %
     Hardness, maxC
     Cold Bend°D
     ksi MPa ksi MPa
     Brinell.
     HBW
     Rockwell
     S30441 . . . 75 515 30 205 40 201 92 HRBW not required
     S30451 304N 80 550 35 240 30 217 95 HRBW not required
     S30452 XM-21J
     Sheet and Strip
     Plate
     90
     85
     620
     585
     50
     40
     345
     275
     30
     30
     241
     241
     100 HRBW
     100 HRBW
     not required
     not required
     S30453 304LN 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S30500 305 70 485 25 170 40 183 88 HRBW not required
     S30530 . . . 75 515 30 205 40 201 92 HRBW not required
     S30600 . . . 78 540 35 240 40 . . . . . . . . .
     S30616 . . . 86 590 36 245 40 241 100 HRBW not required
     S30601 . . . 78 540 37 255 30 . . . . . . not required
     S30615 . . . 90 620 40 275 35 217 95 HRBW not required
     S30815 . . . 87 600 45 310 40 217 95 HRBW . . .
     S30908 309S 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S30909 309HF 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S30940 309CbF 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S30941 309HCbF 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31008 310S 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31009 310HF 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31040 310CbF 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31041 310HCbF 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31050 310 MoLNF
     t # 0.25 in. 84 580 39 270 25 217 95 HRBW not required
     t > 0.25 in. 78 540 37 255 25 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31060 . . . 87 600 41 280 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31254
     Sheet and Strip 100 690 45 310 35 223 96 HRBW not required
     Plate 95 655 45 310 35 223 96 HRBW not required
     S31266 . . . 109 750 61 420 35 . . . . . . not required
     S31277 . . . 112 770 52 360 40 . . . . . . not required
     S31600 316 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31603 316L 70 485 25 170 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31609 316H 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31635 316TiF 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31640 316CbF 75 515 30 205 30 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31651 316N 80 550 35 240 35 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31653 316LN 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31655 . . . 92 635 45 310 35 241 100 HRBW not required
     S31700 317 75 515 30 205 35 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31703 317L 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31725 317LMF 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S31726 317LMNF 80 550 35 240 40 223 96 HRBW not required
     S31727 . . . 80 550 36 245 35 217 96 HRBW not required
     S31730 . . . 70 480 25 175 35 . . . 90 HRBW not required
     S31753 317LN 80 550 35 240 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S32050 . . . 98 675 48 330 40 250 . . . not required
     S32053 . . . 93 640 43 295 40 217 96 HRBW not required
     S32100 321 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S32109 321H 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S32615K . . . 80 550 32 220 25 . . . . . . not required
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-240/SA-240M
     355
     TABLE 2 Continued
     UNS Designation TypeA
     Tensile Strength, min Yield Strength,B min Elongation
     in
     2 in. or
     50 mm,
     min, %
     Hardness, maxC
     Cold Bend°D
     ksi MPa ksi MPa
     Brinell.
     HBW
     Rockwell
     S32654 . . . 109 750 62 430 40 250 . . . not required
     S33228 . . . 73 500 27 185 30 217 95 HRBW not required
     S33400 334F 70 485 25 170 30 . . . 92 HRBW not required
     S33425 . . . 75 515 30 205 40 . . . . . . not required
     S33550 . . . 87 600 41 280 35 217 95 HRBW not required
     S34565 . . . 115 795 60 415 35 241 100 HRBW not required
     S34700 347 75 515 30 205 40 201 92 HRBW not required
     S34709 347H 75 515 30 205 40 201 92 HRBW not required
     S34751 347LN 75 515 30 205 40 201 92 HRBW not required
     S34800 348 75 515 30 205 40 201 92 HRBW not required
     S34809 348H 75 515 30 205 40 201 92 HRBW not required
     S35045 . . . 70 485 25 170 35 . . . . . . not required
     S35115 . . . 85 585 40 275 40 241 100 HRBW not required
     S35125 . . . 70 485 30 205 35 . . . . . . not required
     S35135
     Sheet and Strip . . . 80 550 30 205 30 . . . . . . not required
     Plate . . . 75 515 30 205 30 . . . . . . not required
     S35140 . . . 90 620 40 275 30 241 100 HRBW not required
     S35315 . . . 94 650 39 270 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S38100 XM-15J 75 515 30 205 40 217 95 HRBW not required
     S38815 . . . 78 540 37 255 30 . . . . . . not required
     Duplex (Austenitic-Ferritic)
     S31200 . . . 100 690 65 450 25 293 31 HRC not required
     S31260 . . . 100 690 70 485 20 290 . . . . . .
     S31803 . . . 90 620 65 450 25 293 31 HRC not required
     S32001 . . . 90 620 65 450 25 . . . 25 HRC not required
     S32003 . . .
     t # 0.187 in.
     [5.00 mm]
     100 690 70 485 25 293 31 HRC not required
     t > 0.187 in.
     [5.00 mm]
     95 655 65 450 25 293 31 HRC not required
     S32101 . . .
     t # 0.187 in.
     [5.00 mm]
     101 700 77 530 30 290 31 HRC not required
     t > 0.187 in.
     [5.00 mm]
     94 650 65 450 30 290 31 HRC not required
     S32202 . . . 94 650 65 450 30 290 31 HRC not required
     S32205 2205F 95 655 65 450 25 293 31 HRC not required
     S32304 2304F 87 600 58 400 25 290 32 HRC not required
     S32506 . . . 90 620 65 450 18 302 32 HRC not required
     S32520 . . . 112 770 80 550 25 310 32 HRC not required
     S32550 255F 110 760 80 550 15 302 32 HRC not required
     S32750 2507F 116 795 80 550 15 310 32 HRC not required
     S32760 . . . 108 750 80 550 25 310 32 HRCR not required
     S32808 . . . 101 700 72 500 15 310 32 HRC not required
     S32900 329 90 620 70 485 15 269 28 HRC not required
     S32906 . . .
     t < 0.4 in. [10.0 mm] 116 800 94 650 25.0 310 32 HRC not required t $ 0.4 in. [10.0 mm] 109 750 80 550 25.0 310 32 HRC not required Manufacture Stockholder No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT Distributor SA-240/SA-240M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 356 TABLE 2 Continued UNS Designation TypeA Tensile Strength, min Yield Strength,B min Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % Hardness, maxC Cold Bend°D ksi MPa ksi MPa Brinell. HBW Rockwell S32950L . . . 100 690 70 485 15 293 32 HRC not required S39274 . . . 116 800 80 550 15 310 32 HRC not required S81921 . . . 90 620 65 450 25 293 31 HRC not required S82011 . . . t # 0.187 in. [5.00 mm] 101 700 75 515 30 293 31 HRC not required t > 0.187 in.
     [5.00 mm]
     95 655 65 450 30 293 31 HRC not required
     S82012 t >0.187 in.
     [5.00 mm]
     94 650 58 400 35 290
     t #0.187 in.
     [5.00 mm]
     102 700 73 500 35 31 HRC not required
     S82013 . . . 90 620 65 450 30 293 31J not required
     S82031 t>0.187 in.
     [5.00 mm]
     94 650 58 400 35 290 not required
     t#0.187 in.
     [5.00 mm]
     102 700 73 500 35 31 HRC not required
     S82121 . . . 94 650 65 450 25 286 30 HRC not required
     S82122 t<0.118 in.
     [3.00 mm]
     101 700 72 500 25 290 32 HRC not required
     t$0.118 in.
     [3.00 mm]
     87 600 58 400 30 290 32 HRC not required
     S82441 . . .
     t < 0.4 in. [10.0
     mm]
     107 740 78 540 25 290 31 HRC not required
     t $ 0.4 in. [10.0
     mm]
     99 680 70 480 25 290 31 HRC not required
     Ferritic or Martensitic (Chromium)
     S32803 . . . 87 600 72 500 16 241 100 HRBW not required
     S40300 403 70 485 30 205 25N 217 96 HRBW 180
     S40500 405 60 415 25 170 20 179 88 HRBW 180
     S40900M 409M
     S40910 . . . 55 380 25 170 20 179 88 HRBW 180
     S40920 . . . 55 380 25 170 20 179 88 HRBW 180
     S40930 . . . 55 380 25 170 20 179 88 HRBW 180
     S40945 . . . 55 380 30 205 22 . . . 80 HRBW 180
     S40975 . . . 60 415 40 275 20 197 92 HRBW 180
     S40977 . . . 65 450 41 280 18 180 88 HRBW not required
     S41000 410 65 450 30 205 20 217 96 HRBW 180
     S41003 . . . 66 455 40 275 18 223 20 HRC not required
     S41008 410S 60 415 30 205 22N 183 89 HRBW 180
     S41045 . . . 55 380 30 205 22 . . . 80 HRBW 180
     S41050 . . . 60 415 30 205 22 183 89 HRBW 180
     S41500 . . . 115 795 90 620 15 302 32 HRC not required
     S42000 420 100Q 690Q . . . . . . 15 217 96 HRBW not required
     S42035 . . . 80 550 55 380 16 180 88 HRBW not required
     S42200 422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 24 HRC not required
     S42900 429F 65 450 30 205 22N 183 89 HRBW 180
     S43000 430 65 450 30 205 22N 183 89 HRBW 180
     S43035 439 60 415 30 205 22 183 89 HRBW 180
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-240/SA-240M
     357
     TABLE 2 Continued
     UNS Designation TypeA
     Tensile Strength, min Yield Strength,B min Elongation
     in
     2 in. or
     50 mm,
     min, %
     Hardness, maxC
     Cold Bend°D
     ksi MPa ksi MPa
     Brinell.
     HBW
     Rockwell
     S43037 . . . 50 360 30 205 22 183 89 180
     S43100 431 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 29 HRC not required
     S43400 434 65 450 35 240 22 . . . 89 HRBW 180
     S43600 436 65 450 35 240 22 . . . 89 HRBW 180
     S43932 . . . 60 415 30 205 22 183 89 HRBW 180
     S43940 . . . 62 430 36 250 18 180 88 HRBW not required
     S44330 . . . 56 390 30 205 22 187 90 HRBW not required
     S44100 . . . 60 414 35 241 20 190 90 HRBW not required
     S44200 442 65 515 40 275 20 217 96 HRBW 180
     S44400 . . . 60 415 40 275 20 217 96 HRBW 180
     S44500 . . . 62 427 30 205 22 . . . 83 HRBW 180
     S44535 . . . 58 400 36 250 25E . . . 90O HRBW not required
     S44536 . . . 60 410 35 245 20 192 90 HRBW 180
     S44537 . . . 65 450 46 320 18P 200 93 HRBW 180
     S44600 446 65 515 40 275 20 217 96 HRBW 135
     S44626 XM-33J 68 470 45 310 20 217 96 HRBW 180
     S44627 XM-27J 65 450 40 275 22 187 90 HRBW 180
     S44635 . . . 90 620 75 515 20 269 28 HRC 180
     S44660 . . . 85 585 65 450 18 241 100 HRBW 180
     S44700 . . . 80 550 60 415 20 223 20 HRC 180
     S44725 . . . 65 450 40 275 20 210 95 HRBW 180
     S44735 . . . 80 550 60 415 18 255 25 HRC 180
     S44800 . . . 80 550 60 415 20 223 20 HRC 180
     S46800 . . . 60 415 30 205 22 . . . 90 HRBW 180
     A Unless otherwise indicated, a grade designation originally assigned by the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
     B Yield strength shall be determined by the offset method at 0.2 % in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A370. Unless otherwise specified (see Specification A480/A480M, paragraph 4.1.11, Ordering
     Information), an alternative method of determining yield strength may be based on total extension under load of 0.5 %.
     C Either Brinell or denoted Rockwell Hardness scale is permissible. For thin materials, see Specification A480/A480M (17.2.1) and Test Methods A370 (18.1.2) on superficial testing.
     D Bend tests are not required for chromium steels (ferritic or martensitic) thicker than 1 in. [25 mm] or for any austenitic or duplex (austenitic-ferritic) stainless steels regardless of thickness.
     E Elongation for thickness, less than 0.015 in. [0.38 mm] shall be 20 % minimum, in 1 in. [25.4 mm].
     F Common name, not a trademark, widely used, not associated with any one producer.
     G Yield strength requirements shall not apply to material under 0.020 in [0.50 mm] in thickness.
     H Not applicable for thicknesses under 0.010 in. [0.25 mm].
     I Type 201 is generally produced with a chemical composition balanced for rich side (Type 201-1) or lean side (Type 201-2) austenite stability depending on the properties required for specific applications.
     J Naming system developed and applied by ASTM.
     K For S32615, the grain size as determined in accordance with the Test Methods E112, Comparison Method, Plate II, shall be No. 3 or finer.
     L Prior to Specification A240 – 89b, the tensile value for S32950 was 90 ksi.
     M S40900 (Type 409) has been replaced by S40910, S40920, and S40930. Unless otherwise specified in the ordering information, an order specifying S40900 or Type 409 shall be satisfied by any one of S40910, S40920,
     or S40930 at the option of the seller. Material meeting the requirements of S40910, S40920, or S40930, may at the option of the manufacturer be certified as S40900.
     N Material 0.050 in [1.27 mm] and under in thickness shall have a minimum elongation of 20 %.
     O Hardness is required to be provided for information only, but is not required to meet a particular requirement.
     P The minimum elongation for plates thicker than 0.630 in. (16 mm) shall be 8 %.
     Q Maximum. Type 420 is usually used in the heat-treated condition (quenched and tempered to a specific range of hardness or tensile strength).
     R Hardness conversion tables for superduplex stainless steels do not exist in ASTM E140. The conversion value from HBW to HRC has been added to maintain consistency with other ASTM standards for these
     superduplex stainless steels.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     SA-240/SA-240M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     358
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     A supplementary requirement shall apply only when specified in the purchase order.
     S1. Charpy Impact Testing of Plate
     S1.1 Charpy impact tests shall be conducted in accordance
     with Test Methods and Definitions A370.
     S1.2 Number of Tests—One impact test (three specimens)
     shall be made from one plate per heat treatment lot in the final
     heat treated condition.
     S1.3 Orientation of Test Specimens—Unless specified as
     transverse specimens (long axis of the specimen transverse to
     the final rolling direction, root of the notch perpendicular to the
     rolling face) on the purchase order, the orientation of the
     specimens shall be longitudinal (long axis of the specimen
     parallel to the final rolling direction, root of the notch perpendicular
     to the rolling face). The manufacturer is permitted to
     test transverse specimens provided that such tests meet the
     acceptance criteria applicable to longitudinal specimens. Unless
     otherwise specified on the purchase order, the specimens
     shall be taken so as to include the mid-thickness of the product.
     S1.4 Test Temperature—The purchaser shall specify the
     test temperature. The manufacturer is permitted to test specimens
     at a temperature lower than that specified by the
     purchaser, provided that such tests shall meet the acceptance
     criteria applicable to specimens tested at the specified temperature
     (see the note below).
     NOTE S1.1—Test Methods A923, Method B, applicable to some duplex
     (austenitic-ferritic) stainless steels as listed in Test Methods A923, uses a
     Charpy impact test for the purpose of determining the absence of
     detrimental intermetallic phases. Method B specifies a test temperature
     and acceptance criterion, expressed as impact energy, for each type of
     steel covered. It may be economical for the Charpy impact tests performed
     on duplex stainless steels covered in both Specification A240 and Test
     Methods A923 to be performed at the lower of the temperatures specified
     by this supplementary requirement and Test Methods A923 Method B,
     with measurement of both lateral expansion and impact energy.
     S1.5 Acceptance Limit —Unless otherwise specified on the
     purchase order, each of the three specimens tested shall show
     a lateral expansion opposite the notch of not less than 0.015 in.
     [0.38 mm].
     S1.6 Records—The recorded results shall include the
     specimen orientation, specimen size, test temperature, absorbed
     energy values (if required), and lateral expansion
     opposite the notch.
     S2. Materials for High-Temperature Service
     S2.1 Unless an H grade has been ordered, this supplementary
     requirement shall be specified for ASME Code applications
     for service above 1000°F [540°C].
     S2.2 The user is permitted to use an austenitic stainless
     steel as the corresponding H grade when the material meets all
     requirements of the H grade including chemistry, annealing
     temperature, and grain size (see Section 6).
     S2.3 The user is permitted to use an L grade austenitic
     stainless steel for service above 1000°F [540°C], subject to the
     applicable allowable stress table of the ASME Code, when the
     material meets all requirements of this specification and the
     grain size is ASTM No. 7 or coarser as determined in
     accordance with Test Methods E112. The grain size shall be
     reported on a Certified Test Report.
     S3. One Percent Offset Yield Strength
     S3.1 If reporting of 1 % offset yield strength is specified on
     the purchase order; the material shall meet the strength
     requirements shown in Table S3.1.
     S3.2 The mechanical properties, including 1 % offset yield
     strength and all other required properties shall be reported on
     a Material Test Report.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-240/SA-240M
     359
     TABLE S3.1 Tensile and Yield Strength Requirements
     NOTE 1—These values apply only for material of 1.5 inches (38 mm)
     nominal thickness or less.
     UNS Grade
     Tensile
     Strength,
     min., Ksi
     [MPa]
     0.2 % Offset
     Yield
     Strength,
     Min., Ksi
     [MPa]
     1 % Offset
     Yield
     Strength,
     Min., Ksi
     [MPa]
     S31603 316L 70 [485] 25 [170] 38 [260]
     S31600 316 75 [515] 30 [205] 38 [260]
     S31653 316LN 75 [515] 30 [205] 46 [320]
     S30403 304L 70 [485] 25 [170] 35 [240]
     S30400 304 75 [515] 30 [205] 36 [250]
     S30453 304LN 75 [515] 30 [205] 45 [310]
     S30451 304N 80 [550] 35 [240] 45 [310]
     S32100 321 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 [240]
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ð19Þ
     SPECIFICATION FOR WELDED AUSTENITIC STEEL
     BOILER, SUPERHEATER, HEAT-EXCHANGER, AND
     CONDENSER TUBES
     SA-249/SA-249M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A249/A249M-16a except for deletion of S5, which allows lower mechanical properties,
     and for Section I only, S9 is mandatory when 100% joint efficiency is required.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-249/SA-249M
     361
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-249/SA-249M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     362
     Standard Specification for
     Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat-
     Exchanger, and Condenser Tubes
209. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers nominal-wall-thickness
     welded tubes and heavily cold worked welded tubes made from
     the austenitic steels listed in Table 1, with various grades
     intended for such use as boiler, superheater, heat exchanger, or
     condenser tubes.
     1.2 Grades TP304H, TP309H, TP309HCb, TP310H,
     TP310HCb, TP316H, TP321H, TP347H, and TP348H are
     modifications of Grades TP304, TP309S, TP309Cb, TP310S,
     TP310Cb, TP316, TP321, TP347, and TP348, and are intended
     for high-temperature service such as for superheaters and
     reheaters.
     1.3 The tubing sizes and thicknesses usually furnished to
     this specification are 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in inside diameter to 12 in.
     [304.8 mm] in outside diameter and 0.015 to 0.320 in. [0.4 to
     8.1 mm], inclusive, in wall thickness. Tubing having other
     dimensions may be furnished, provided such tubes comply
     with all other requirements of this specification.
     1.4 Mechanical property requirements do not apply to
     tubing smaller than 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in inside diameter or 0.015
     in. [0.4 mm] in thickness.
     1.5 Optional supplementary requirements are provided and,
     when one or more of these are desired, each shall be so stated
     in the order.
     1.6 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
     SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
     system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
     shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
     from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the
     standard. The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M”
     designation of this specification is specified in the order.
     1.7 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
     test method described in the Supplementary Requirements of
     this specification. This standard does not purport to address all
     of the safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
     responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appropriate
     safety and health practices and determine the applicability
     of regulatory limitations prior to use. A specific warning
     statement is given in Supplementary Requirement S7, Note
     S7.1.
210. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A262 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular
     Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels
     A480/A480M Specification for General Requirements for
     Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate,
     Sheet, and Strip
     A1016/A1016M Specification for General Requirements for
     Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic Alloy Steel, and Stainless
     Steel Tubes
     E112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
     E213 Practice for Ultrasonic Testing of Metal Pipe and
     Tubing
     E273 Practice for Ultrasonic Testing of the Weld Zone of
     Welded Pipe and Tubing
     E527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys in the
     Unified Numbering System (UNS)
     2.2 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
     Section VIII
     2.3 Other Standard:
     SAE J1086 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys
     (UNS)
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-249/SA-249M
     363
     TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements, %A
     Grade
     Composition, %
     UNS
     DesignationB
     Carbon Manganese Phosphorous Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum NitrogenC Copper Other
     TP 201 S20100 0.15 5.50–7.5 0.060 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 3.5–5.5 … 0.25 … …
     TP 201LN S20153 0.03 6.4–7.5 0.045 0.015 0.75 16.0–17.5 4.0–5.0 … 0.10–0.25 1.00 …
     TP 202 S20200 0.15 7.5–10.0 0.060 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 4.0–6.0 … 0.25 … …
     TPXM-19 S20910 0.06 4.0–6.0 0.045 0.030 1.00 20.5–23.5 11.5–13.5 1.50–3.00 0.20–0.40 … NbG 0.10–0.30
     V 0.10–0.30
     TPXM-29 S24000 0.08 11.5–14.5 0.060 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 2.3–3.7 … 0.20–0.40 … …
     TP304 S30400 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 8.0–11.0 … … … …
     TP304LD S30403 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 8.0–12.0 … … … …
     TP304H S30409 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 8.0–11.0 … … … …
     … S30415 0.04–0.06 0.80 0.045 0.030 1.00–2.00 18.0–19.0 9.0–10. … 0.12–0.18 … Ce
     0.03–0.08
     TP304N S30451 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 8.0–11.0 … 0.10–0.16 … …
     TP304LND S30453 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 8.0–11.0 … 0.10–0.16 … …
     TP305 S30500 0.12 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 11.0–13.0 … … … …
     … S30615 0.16–0.24 2.00 0.030 0.030 3.2–4.0 17.0–19.5 13.5–16.0 … … … …
     … S30815 0.05–0.10 0.80 0.040 0.030 1.40–2.00 20.0–22.0 10.0–12.0 … 0.14–0.20 … Ce
     0.03–0.08
     TP309S S30908 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.0–24.0 12.0–15.0 … … … …
     TP309H S30909 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.0–24.0 12.0–15.0 … … … …
     Grade
     Composition, %
     UNS
     DesignationB
     Carbon Manganese Phosphorous Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum NitrogenC Copper Other
     … S30601 0.015 0.50–0.80 0.030 0.013 5.0–5.6 17.0–18.0 17.0–18.0 0.20 0.05 0.35 …
     TP309Cb S30940 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.0–24.0 12.0–16.0 … … … Nb 10x
     C-1.10
     TP309HCb S30941 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.0–24.0 12.0–16.0 … … … Nb 10x
     C-1.10
     TP310S S31008 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0–26.0 19.0–22.0 … … … …
     TP310H S31009 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0–26.0 19.0–22.0 … … … …
     TP310Cb S31040 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0–26.0 18.0–22.0 … … … Nb 10x
     C-1.10
     TP310HCb S31041 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0–26.0 19.0–22.0 … … … Nb 10x
     C-1.10
     … S31050 0.030 2.00 0.030 0.015 0.40 24.0–26.0 21.0–23.0 2.00–3.00 0.10–0.16 … …
     … S31254 0.020 1.00 0.030 0.010 0.80 19.5–20.5 17.5–18.5 6.0–6.5 0.18–0.25 0.50–1.00 …
     … S31266 0.030 2.00–4.00 0.035 0.020 1.00 23.0–25.0 21.0–24.0 5.2–6.2 0.35–0.60 1.00–2.50 W
     1.50–2.50
     … S31277 0.020 3.00 0.030 0.010 0.50 20.5–23.0 26.0–28.0 6.5–8.0 0.30–0.40 0.50–1.50 …
     TP316 S31600 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 10.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 … … …
     TP316LD S31603 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 10.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 … … …
     TP316H S31609 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 10.0–14.0 2.00–3.00 … … …
     TP316N S31651 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 10.0–13.0 2.00–3.00 0.10–0.16 … …
     TP316LND S31653 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–18.0 10.0–13.0 2.00–3.00 0.10–0.16 … …
     S31655 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.015 1.00 19.5–21.5 8.0–9.5 0.50–1.50 0.14–0.25 1.00 …
     TP317 S31700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 11.0–15.0 3.0–4.0 … … …
     TP317L S31703 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 11.0–15.0 3.0–4.0 … … …
     Grade
     Composition, %
     UNS
     DesignationB
     Carbon Manganese Phosphorous Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum NitrogenC Copper Other
     … S31725 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–20.0 13.5–17.5 4.0–5.0 0.20 … …
     … S31726 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–20.0 14.5–17.5 4.0–5.0 0.10–0.20 … …
     … S31727 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.030 1.00 17.5–19.0 14.5–16.5 3.8–4.5 0.15–0.21 2.8–4.0 …
     … S32050 0.030 1.50 0.035 0.020 1.00 22.0–24.0 20.0–23.0 6.0–6.8 0.21–0.32 0.40 …
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     SA-249/SA-249M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     364
     TABLE 1 Continued
     … S32053 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.010 1.00 22.0–24.0 24.0–26.0 5.0–6.0 0.17–0.22 … …
     TP321 S32100 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–12.0 … 0.10 … Ti 5(C+N)-
     0.70
     TP321H S32109 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–12.0 … 0.10 … Ti 5(C+N)-
     0.70
     … S32615 0.07 2.00 0.045 0.030 4.80–6.00 16.5–19.5 19.0–22.0 0.30–1.50 … 1.50–2.50 …
     … S32654 0.020 2.0–4.0 0.030 0.005 0.50 24.0–25.0 21.0–23.0 7.0–8.0 0.45–0.55 0.30–0.60 …
     … S33228 0.04–0.08 1.00 0.020 0.015 0.30 26.0–28.0 31.0–333.0 … … … Nb
     0.60–1.00
     Ce
     0.05–0.10
     Al0.025
     … S34565 0.030 5.0–7.0 0.030 0.010 1.00 23.0–25.0 16.0–18.0 4.0–5.0 0.40–0.60 … Nb 0.10
     TP347 S34700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–12.0 … … … Nb 10xC-
     1.10
     TP347H S34709 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–12.0 … … … Nb 8xC-
     1.10
     TP348 S34800 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–12.0 … … … (Nb+Ta)
     10xC-1.10
     Ta 0.10
     Co 0.20
     TP348H S34809 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–19.0 9.0–12.0 … … … (Nb+Ta)
     8xC-1.10
     Ta 0.10
     Co 0.20
     … S35045 0.06–0.10 1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 25.0–29.0 32.0–37.0 … … 0.75 Al
     0.15–0.60
     Ti
     0.15–0.60
     TPXM-15 S38100 0.08 2.00 0.030 0.030 1.50–2.50 17.0–19.0 17.5–18.5 … … … …
     … S38815 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.020 5.5–6.5 13.0–15.0 15.0–17.0 0.75–1.50 … 0.75–1.50 Al 0.30
     max
     Alloy 20 N08020 0.070 2.00 0.045 0.035 1.00 19.0–21.0 32.0–38.0 2.00–3.00 … 3.00–4.00 Nb 8 × C
     min. to
     1.00 max
     … N08367 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 20.0–22.0 23.5–25.5 6.0–7.0 0.18–0.25 0.75 …
     800 N08800 0.10 1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 19.0–23.0 30.0–35.0 … … 0.75 Al
     0.15–0.60
     Ti
     0.15–0.60
     FeE 39.5
     min
     800H N08810 0.05–0.10 1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 19.0–23.0 30.0–35.0 … … 0.75 Al
     0.15–0.60
     Ti
     0.15–0.60
     FeE 39.5
     min
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-249/SA-249M
     365
     TABLE 1 Continued
     … N08811 0.05–0.10 1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 19.0–23.0 30.0–35.0 … … 0.75 Al
     0.25–0.60F
     Ti
     0.25–0.60F
     FeE 39.5
     min
     … N08926 0.020 2.00 0.030 0.010 0.50 19.0–21.0 24.0–26.0 6.0–7.0 0.15–0.25 0.50–1.50 …
     … N08904 0.020 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 19.0–23.0 23.0–28.0 4.0–5.0 0.10 1.00–2.00 …
     A Maximum, unless otherwise indicated.
     B New designation established in accordance with Practice E527 and SAE J1086.
     C The method of analysis for nitrogen shall be a matter of agreement between the purchaser and manufacturer.
     D For small diameter or thin walls, or both, where many drawing passes are required, a carbon maximum of 0.040 % is necessary in Grades TP 304L and TP 316L. Small outside diameter tubes are defined as those
     less than 0.500 in. [12.7 mm] in outside diameter and light wall are those less than 0.049 in. [1.2 mm] in minimum wall thickness.
     EIron shall be determined arithmetically by difference of 100 minus the sum of the other specified elements.
     F(Al + Ti) = 0.85 to 1.20.
     GThe term Niobium (Nb) and Columbium (Cb) are alternate names for the same element.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     SA-249/SA-249M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     366
211. Ordering Information
     3.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
     requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this
     specification. Such requirements may include, but are not
     limited to, the following:
     3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
     3.1.2 Name of material welded tubes (WLD) or heavily cold
     worked tubes (HCW),
     3.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
     3.1.4 Size (outside diameter and nominal wall thickness),
     3.1.5 Length (specific or random),
     3.1.6 Optional requirements (13.6),
     3.1.7 Test report required (see Certification Section of
     Specification A1016/A1016M),
     3.1.8 Specification designation, and
     3.1.9 Special requirements and any supplementary requirements
     selected.
     3.1.9.1 If Supplementary Requirement S7 is specified, include
     weld decay ratio per S11.1.1.
212. General Requirements
     4.1 Material furnished under this specification shall conform
     to the applicable requirements of the current edition of
     Specification A1016/A1016M, unless otherwise provided
     herein.
213. Manufacture
     5.1 The welded (WLD) tubes shall be made from flat-rolled
     steel by an automatic welding process with no addition of filler
     metal.
     5.1.1 Subsequent to welding and prior to final heat
     treatment, the tubes shall be cold worked either in both weld
     and base metal or in weld metal only. The method of cold
     working may be specified by the purchaser. When cold drawn,
     the purchaser may specify the minimum amount of reduction in
     cross-sectional area or wall thickness, or both.
     5.1.2 Heavily cold worked (HCW) tubes shall be made by
     applying cold working of not less than 35 % reduction in both
     wall and weld to a welded tube prior to the final anneal. No
     filler metal shall be used in the making of the weld. Prior to
     cold working, the weld shall be 100 % radiographically inspected
     in accordance with the requirements of ASME Boiler
     and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, latest
     revision, Paragraph UW 51.
214. Heat Treatment
     6.1 All material shall be furnished in the heat-treated
     condition in accordance with the requirements of Table 2.
     6.2 A solution annealing temperature above 1950 °F [1065
     °C] may impair the resistance to intergranular corrosion after
     subsequent exposure to sensitizing conditions in TP309HCb,
     TP310HCb, TP321, TP321H, TP347, TP347H, TP348, and
     TP348H. When specified by the purchaser, a lower temperature
     stabilization or re-solution anneal shall be used subsequent to
     the initial high temperature solution anneal (see Supplementary
     Requirement S4).
     6.3 N08020 shall be supplied in the stabilization treatment
     condition.
215. Chemical Composition
     7.1 The heat analysis shall conform to the requirements as
     to chemical composition given in Table 1.
216. Product Analysis
     8.1 An analysis of either one length of flat-rolled stock or
     one tube shall be made for each heat. The chemical composition
     thus determined shall conform to the requirements given in
     Section 7.
     8.2 A product analysis tolerance of Table A1.1 in Specification
     A480/A480M shall apply. The product analysis tolerance
     is not applicable to the carbon content for material with a
     specified maximum carbon of 0.04 % or less.
     8.3 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests of
     two additional lengths of flat-rolled stock or tubes shall be
     made. Both retests for the elements in question shall meet the
     requirements of the specification; otherwise all remaining
     material in the heat or lot (See 13.9.1) shall be rejected or, at
     the option of the producer, each length of flat-rolled stock or
     tube may be individually tested for acceptance. Lengths of
     flat-rolled stock or tubes that do not meet the requirements of
     the specification shall be rejected.
217. Tensile Requirements
     9.1 The material shall conform to the tensile properties
     prescribed in Table 3.
218. Hardness Requirements
     10.1 The tubes shall have a Rockwell hardness number not
     exceeding the values specified in Table 3.
219. Reverse-Bend Test Requirement
     11.1 A section 4 in. [100 mm] minimum in length shall be
     split longitudinally 90° on each side of the weld. The sample
     shall then be opened and bent around a mandrel with a
     maximum thickness of four times the wall thickness, with the
     mandrel parallel to the weld and against the original outside
     surface of the tube. The weld shall be at the point of maximum
     bend. There shall be no evidence of cracks, or of overlaps
     resulting from the reduction in thickness of the weld areas by
     cold working. When the geometry or size of the tubing make it
     difficult to test the sample as a single piece, the sample may be
     sectioned into smaller pieces provided a minimum of 4 in. of
     weld is subjected to reverse bending.
     NOTE 1—The reverse bend test is not applicable when the specified wall
     is 10 % or more of the specified outside diameter, or the wall thickness is
     0.134 in. [3.4 mm] or greater, or the outside diameter size is less than
     0.375 in. [9.5 mm]. Under these conditions the reverse flattening test of
     Specification A1016/A1016M shall apply.
220. Grain Size Requirement
     12.1 The grain size of Grades TP309H, TP309HCb,
     TP310H and TP310HCb, as determined in accordance with
     Test Methods E112, shall be No. 6 or coarser.
     12.2 The grain size of Grades TP304H, TP316H, TP321H,
     TP347H and TP348H, as determined in accordance with Test
     Methods E112, shall be No. 7 or coarser.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-249/SA-249M
     367
     12.3 The grain size of Grade UNS S32615, as determined in
     accordance with Test Methods E112, shall be No. 3 or finer.
     12.4 The grain size of N08810 and N08811, as determined
     in accordance with Test Methods E112, shall be 5 or coarser.
221. Mechanical Tests and Grain Size Determinations
     Required
     13.1 Tension Test—One tension test shall be made on a
     specimen for lots of not more than 50 tubes. Tension tests shall
     be made on specimens from two tubes for lots of more than 50
     tubes (See 13.9.2).
     13.2 Flattening Test—One flattening test shall be made on
     specimens from each end of one finished tube, not the one used
     for the flange test, from each lot (See 13.9.1).
     13.3 Flange Test—One flange test shall be made on specimens
     from each end of one finished tube, not the one used for
     the flattening test, from each lot (See 13.9.1).
     13.4 Reverse-Bend Test—One reverse-bend test shall be
     made on a specimen from each 1500 ft [450 m] of finished
     tubing.
     13.5 Hardness Test—Brinell or Rockwell hardness tests
     shall be made on specimens from two tubes from each lot (See
     13.9.2).
     13.6 Hydrostatic or Nondestructive Electric Test—Each
     tube shall be subjected to either the hydrostatic or the nondestructive
     electric test. The purchaser may specify which test is
     to be used.
     13.7 Grain Size—Grain size determinations on grades
     TP309H, TP309HCb, TP310H and TP310HCb shall be made
     on the same number of tubes as prescribed for the flattening
     test.
     13.8 Heavily cold worked tubes (HCW) shall be capable of
     passing the weld decay test listed in Supplementary S7 with a
     weld metal to base metal loss ratio of 0.90 to 1.10. The test is
     not required unless S7 is specified in the purchase order.
     13.9 Lot Definitions:
     13.9.1 For flattening and flange requirements, the term lot
     applies to all tubes prior to cutting of the same nominal size
     and wall thickness which are produced from the same heat of
     steel. When final heat treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot
     TABLE 2 Heat Treatment Requirements
     Grade UNS Number Solutioning Temperature, min or range Quenching Method
     All grades not
     individually listed
     below
     1900 °F [1040 °C] A
     … S30601 2010 to 2140 °F [1100 to 1170 °C] B
     … S30815 1920 °F [1050 °C] B
     TP309HCb S30941 1900 °F [1040 °C]C B
     TP310H S31009 1900 °F [1040 °C] B
     TP310HCb S31041 1900 °F [1040 °C]C B
     … S31254 2100 °F [1150 °C] B
     … S31266 2100 °F [1150 °C] B
     … S31277 2050 °F [1120 °C] B
     TP316H S31609 1900 °F [1040 °C] B
     … S31727 1975 °F [1080 °C]– B
     2155 °F [1180 °C] B
     … S32053 1975 °F [1080 °C]– B
     2155 °F [1180 °C] B
     TP321 S32100 1900 °F [1040 °C]C B
     TP321H S32109 2000 °F [1100 °C]C B
     … S32654 2100 °F [1150 °C] B
     … S33228 2050 °F [1120 °C] B
     … S34565 2050 °F [1120 °C]– B
     2140 °F [1170 °C] B
     TP347 S34700 1900 °F [1040 °C]C B
     TP347H S34709 2000 °F [1100 °C]C B
     TP348 S34800 1900 °F [1040 °C]C B
     TP348H S34809 2000 °F [1100 °C]C B
     … S35045 2000 °F [1100 °C] D
     … S38815 1950 °F [1065 °C] B
     Alloy 20 N08020 1700–1850 °F [925–1010 °C] stabilization treatment B
     … N08367 2025 °F [1110 °C] B
     800 N08800 1900 °F [1040 °C] B
     800H N08810 2050 °F [1120 °C] B
     … N08811 2100 °F [1150 °C] B
     … N08904 2000 °F [1100 °C] B
     … N08926 2010 °F [1105 °C] B
     A Quenched in water or rapidly cooled by other methods, at a rate sufficient to prevent reprecipitation of chromium carbides, as demonstrated by the capability of passing
     Practices A262, Practice E. The manufacturer is not required to run the test unless it is specified on the purchase order (See Supplementary Requirement S6). Note that
     Practices A262 requires the test to be performed on sensitized specimens in the low carbon and stabilized types and on specimens representative of the as-shipped
     condition of the other types. In the case of low-carbon types containing 3 % or more molybdenum, the applicability of the sensitizing treatment prior to testing shall be a
     matter for negotiation between the seller and purchaser.
     B Quenched in water or rapidly cooled by other methods.
     C A solution treating temperature above 1950 °F [1065 °C] may impair resistance to intergranular corrosion after subsequent exposure to sensitizing conditions in the
     indicated grades. When specified by the purchaser, a lower temperature stabilization or re-solution anneal shall be used subsequent to the higher-temperature solution
     anneal prescribed in this table (See Supplementary Requirement S4).
     DCooled in still air, or faster.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-249/SA-249M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     368
     shall include only those tubes of the same size and from the
     same heat which are heat treated in the same furnace charge.
     When the final heat treatment is in a continuous furnace, the
     number of tubes of the same size and from the same heat in a
     lot shall be determined from the size of the tubes as prescribed
     in Table 4.
     13.9.2 For tension and hardness test requirements, the term
     lot applies to all tubes prior to cutting, of the same nominal
     diameter and wall thickness which are produced from the same
     heat of steel. When final heat treatment is in a batch-type
     furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes of the same size
     and the same heat which are heat treated in the same furnace
     charge. When the final heat treatment is in a continuous
     furnace, a lot shall include all tubes of the same size and heat,
     annealed in the same furnace at the same temperature, time at
     heat, and furnace speed.
222. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
     14.1 Dimensional tolerances other than wall thickness tolerances
     shall be in accordance with Specification A1016/
     A1016M.Wall thickness tolerances shall be 610 % of nominal
     wall for all tubing sizes.
     14.2 The wall thickness of the weld shall not exceed the
     wall thickness measured 90° from the weld by more than 6 %
     of the specified wall thickness or 0.004 in. [0.1 mm], whichever
     is greater.
     14.2.1 Requirements of 14.2 are not applicable when any of
     the following apply:
     14.2.1.1 When the specified wall thickness exceeds 12 % of
     the specified outside diameter;
     14.2.1.2 When the specified wall thickness exceeds 0.165
     in. [4.2 mm];
     14.2.1.3 When the specified OD exceeds 3 in. [76.2 mm]; or
     14.2.1.4 When the specified minimum yield strength given
     in Table 3 for the specified grade is 35 ksi [240 MPa] or greater.
223. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
     15.1 Finished tubes shall have smooth ends free of burrs and
     shall not deviate from straightness by more than 0.030 in. [0.8
     mm] in 3 ft [900 mm] of length.
224. Surface Condition
     16.1 The tubes, after final heat treatment, shall be chemically
     descaled or pickled free of scale. When bright annealing
     is used, pickling or chemical descaling is not necessary.
     TABLE 3 Tensile and Hardness RequirementsA
     Grade UNS
     Designation
     Tensile
     Strength,
     min, ksi
     [MPa]
     Yield
     Strength,
     min, ksi
     [MPa]
     Elongation
     in 2 in. or
     50 mm,
     min, %
     Rockwell
     Hardness
     Number,
     max
     TP201 S20100 95 [655] 38 [260] 35 B95
     TP 201LN S20153 95 [655] 45 [310] 45 B100
     TP202 S20200 90 [620] 38 [260] 35 B95
     TPXM-19 S20910 100 [690] 55 [380] 35 C25
     TPXM-29 S24000 100 [690] 55 [380] 35 B100
     TP304 S30400 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP304L S30403 70 [485] 25 [170] 35 B90
     TP304H S30409 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     . . . S30415 87 [600] 42 [290] 35 B96
     TP304N S30451 80 [550] 35 [240] 35 B90
     TP304LN S30453 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP305 S30500 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     … S30601 78 [540] 37 [255] 30 B100
     … S32615 80 [550] 32 [220] 25 B100
     … S30615 90 [620] 40 [275] 35 B95
     … S30815 87 [600] 45 [310] 35 B95
     TP309S S30908 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP309H S30909 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP309Cb S30940 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP309HCb S30941 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP310S S31008 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP310H S31009 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP310Cb S31040 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP310HCb S31041 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     … S31050:
     t # 0.25 in. 84 [580] 39 [270] 25 B95
     t > 0.25 in. 78 [540] 37 [255] 25 B95
     … S31254:
     t # 0.187 in.
     [5.00 mm]
     98 [675] 45 [310] 35 B100
     t > 0.187 in.
     [5.00 mm]
     95 [655] 45 [300] 35 B100
     … S31266 109 [750] 61 [420] 35 B100
     … S31277 112 [770] 52 [360] 40 B100
     TP316 S31600 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP316L S31603 70 [485] 25 [170] 35 B90
     TP316H S31609 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP316N S31651 80 [550] 35 [240] 35 B90
     TP316LN S31653 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     S31655 92 [635] 45 [310] 35 B100
     TP317 S31700 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP317L S31703 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     … S31725 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     … S31726 80 [550] 35 [240] 35 B90
     … S31727 80 [550] 36 [245] 35 B96
     … S32050 98 [675] 48 [330] 40
     … S32053 93 [640] 43 [295] 40 B96
     TP321 S32100 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP321H S32109 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     . . . S32654 109 [750] 62 [430] 35 B100
     … S33228 73 [500] 27 [185] 30 B90
     . . . S34565 115 [795] 60 [415] 35 B100
     TP347 S34700 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP347H S34709 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP348 S34800 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     TP348H S34809 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     … S35045 70 [485] 25 [170] 35 B90
     TPXM-15 S38100 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 B90
     … S38815 78 [540] 37 [255] 30 B100
     Alloy 20 N08020 80 [550] 35 [240] 30 B95
     … N08367
     t # 0.187 100 [690] 45 [310] 30 B100
     t > 0.187 95 [655] 45 [310] 30 B100
     800 N08800 75 [515] 30 [205] 30 90
     800H N08810 65 [450] 25 [170] 30 90
     … N08811 65 [450] 25 [170] 30 90
     . . . N08904 71 [490] 31 [215] 35 B90
     . . . N08926 94 [650] 43 [295] 35 B100
     A Not applicable to tubes less than 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in outside diameter or having
     wall thickness below 0.015 in. [0.4 mm], or both. The tensile properties of such
     small diameter or thin wall tubes shall be a matter of agreement between the
     manufacturer and the purchaser.
     TABLE 4 Number of Tubes in a Lot Heat Treated by the
     Continuous Process
     Size of Tube Size of Lot
     2 in. [50.8 mm] and over in outside
     diameter and 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] and over
     in wall thickness
     not more than 50 tubes
     Less than 2 in. [50.8 mm] but over 1 in.
     [25.4 mm] in outside diameter or over 1 in.
     [25.4 mm] in outside diameter and under
     0.200 in. [5.1 mm] in wall thickness
     not more than 75 tubes
     1 in. [25.4 mm] or less in outside diameter not more than 125
     tubes
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-249/SA-249M
     369
225. Forming Operations
     17.1 Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand expanding
     and beading without showing cracks or flaws. All tubes, when
     properly manipulated, shall be able to stand expanding and
     beading without showing cracks and flaws, and also shall stand
     all forging, welding, and bending operations necessary for
     application without developing defects.
226. Product Marking
     18.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
     A1016/A1016M, the marking for Grades TP304H, TP309H,
     TP309HCb, TP310H, TP310HCb, TP316H, TP321H, TP347H,
     TP348H, N08810, and N08811 shall also include the heat
     number and the heat-treatment lot identification.
227. Keywords
     19.1 austenitic stainless steel; boiler tubes; condenser tube;
     heat exchanger tube; high temperature applications; N08800;
     N08810; N08811; steel tube; superheater tubes; temperature
     service applications, high; welded steel tube and heavily cold
     worked (HCW) tubes
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
     inquiry, contract, or order.
     S1. Stress-Relieved Annealed Tubes
     S1.1 For use in certain corrosives, particularly chlorides
     where stress corrosion may occur, tubes in Grades TP304L,
     TP316L, TP321, TP347, and TP348 may be specified in the
     stress-relieved annealed condition. Details of these supplemental
     requirements shall be agreed upon by the manufacturer and
     the purchaser.
     S1.2 When stress-relieved tubes are specified, tubes shall be
     given a heat treatment at 1550 to 1650 °F [845 to 900 °C] after
     roll straightening. Cooling from this temperature range may be
     either in air or by slow cooling. No mechanical straightening is
     permitted after the stress-relief treatment.
     S1.3 Straightness of the tubes shall be a matter of negotiation
     between the purchaser and manufacturer.
     S2. Minimum Wall Tubes
     S2.1 When specified by the purchaser, tubes shall be furnished
     on a minimum wall basis. Such tubes shall satisfy the
     minimum wall thickness requirements of Specification A1016/
     A1016M rather than the nominal wall requirements of this
     specification. In addition to the marking required by Section
     18, the tubing shall be marked S2.
     S3. Pneumatic Test
     S3.1 The tubing shall be examined by a pneumatic test
     (either air under water or pneumatic leak test) in accordance
     with Specification A1016/A1016M.
     S4. Stabilizing Heat Treatment
     S4.1 Subsequent to the solution anneal required in Section
     6, Grades TP309HCb, TP310HCb, TP321, TP321H, TP347,
     TP347H, TP348, and TP348H shall be given a stabilization
     heat treatment at a temperature lower than that used for the
     initial solution annealing heat treatment. The temperature of
     stabilization heat treatment shall be at a temperature as agreed
     upon between the purchaser and vendor.
     S6. Intergranular Corrosion Test
     S6.1 When specified, material shall pass intergranular corrosion
     tests conducted by the manufacturer in accordance with
     Practices A262, Practice E.
     NOTE S6.1—Practice E requires testing on the sensitized condition for
     low carbon or stabilized grades, and on the as-shipped condition for other
     grades.
     S6.2 A stabilization heat treatment in accordance with
     Supplementary Requirement S4 may be necessary and is
     permitted in order to meet this requirement for the grades
     containing titanium or columbium, particularly in their H
     versions.
     S7. Weld Decay Test
     S7.1 This test is not applicable to alloys with a nickel
     content = 19.0 % or a molybdenum content = 4.00 %, or both.
     NOTE S7.1—The weld decay test is sensitive for the presence of delta
     ferrite in the weld material. Increasing amounts of delta ferrite will result
     in a higher ratio as defined in S7.10. Alloys with the high nickel or
     molybdenum content of S7.1 may not form delta ferrite and therefore may
     not be sensitive to this test.
     S7.2 When specified by the purchase order, one sample
     from each lot of tubing (See 13.9.2) shall be subjected to
     testing in a boiling mixture of 50 % reagent grade hydrochloric
     acid and 50 % water.
     S7.3 Approximately 2-in. long samples shall be prepared
     from a production length of tubing. Shorter, 1-in. samples may
     be used for small diameter (1/2-in. and below) tubing. Split the
     sample longitudinally to allow for easy micrometer measurements.
     The sample may be one piece which contains the weld
     and at least 90° of base-metal to one side of the weld.
     S5. DELETED
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-249/SA-249M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     370
     Alternately, the sample may be two separate pieces with one
     containing the weld and a similar size section from the balance
     of the tube opposite the weld consisting of 100 % base metal.
     Remove all burrs and sharp edges by lightly grinding. Remove
     dust and grease by cleaning with soap and water or other
     suitable solvents. Then, place sample(s) in the flask. It is not
     recommended to test more than four samples together, or to
     mix alloy types.
     S7.4 Prepare the hydrochloric acid solution by slowly adding
     reagent grade (approximately 37 %) hydrochloric acid to
     an equal volume of distilled water. (Warning—Protect eyes
     and use rubber gloves when handling acid. Mixing shall be
     done under a hood and testing shall be run under a hood.)
     S7.5 The test container shall be a 1-L Erlenmeyer flask
     equipped with ground-glass joints and an Ahlin condenser. The
     volume of the solution shall be approximately 700 mL.
     S7.6 Measure the thickness of the tube at five locations
     along the weld area and at five locations along the base-metal
     section. In both cases, take measurements at approximately
     equal longitudinal intervals along the section lengths. Make
     these measurements with a sharp pointed micrometer accurate
     to at least 0.001 in. The micrometer must be suitable for
     measuring the small features in the surface after testing.
     Typical pin micrometers have tapered anvils with a tip radius
     of less than 0.015 in.
     S7.7 Immerse the samples into the solution. Add boiling
     chips and bring to a boil. Allow the chips to remain boiling
     throughout the test. The time of testing shall be that which is
     required to remove 40 to 60 % of the original base-metal
     thickness (usually 2 h or less). If more than 60 % of the
     base-metal thickness remains, the sample may be removed
     after 24 h.
     S7.8 At the end of the test period, remove the samples from
     the solution, rinse with distilled water, and dry.
     S7.9 After exposure to the test solution, repeat the tubethickness
     measurement as in S7.6. If the thinning is not
     uniform across the width of the weld, then two sets of
     weld-metal measurement are required. One set of measurements
     is to be taken along the centerline of the weld. The
     second set of measurements is to be taken in the thinnest area
     of the weld.
     S7.10 Calculate the corrosion ratio, R, for both sections of
     the weld as follows in Eq 1:
     R5
     Wo 2 W
     Bo 2 B
     (1)
     where:
     Wo = average weld-metal thickness before the test,
     W = average weld-metal thickness after the test,
     Bo = average base-metal thickness before the test, and
     B = average base-metal thickness after the test.
     S7.11 Acceptance Criteria:
     S7.11.1 The ratio of the thinnest section of the weld and
     adjacent heat affected zone versus the base metal shall be
     determined. The following ratios or alternatives are commonly
     specified:
     S7.11.1.1 A corrosion ratio of 1.25 or less. If not specified
     by the purchase order, this is the default criteria.
     S7.11.1.2 A corrosion ratio of 1.00 or less.
     S7.11.1.3 Alternative ratios may be agreed between the
     purchaser and supplier.
     S8. Special Applications
     S8.1 For special applications, such as hydraulic expansion
     of tubes into tube sheets, there shall be no dimensional
     indication of the weld. Tubes ordered to this requirement shall
     bear the additional marking of NB.
     S9. Additional Testing of Welded Tubing per ASME Request
     (see Note S9.1)
     S9.1. When this supplement is specified in the purchase
     order, in certain ASME applications it is permissible to use
     100 % joint efficiency for longitudinal weld, provided the
     following additional requirements are met:
     S9.1.1 Each tube shall be subjected to an ultrasonic inspection
     employing Practices E273 or E213 with the rejection
     criteria referenced in Specification A1016/A1016M.
     S9.1.2 If Practice E273 is employed, a 100 % volumetric
     inspection of the entire length of each tube shall also be
     performed using one of the nondestructive electric tests permitted
     by Specification A1016/A1016M.
     S9.1.3 The test methods described in the supplement may
     not be capable of inspecting the end portions of tubes. This
     condition is referred to as end effect. This portion, as determined
     by the manufacturer, shall be removed and discarded.
     S9.1.4 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
     A1016/A1016M, “S9” shall be added after the grade designation.
     NOTE S9.1—When specified, the special testing in this supplement is
     intended for special ASME applications. It is not mandatory for all ASME
     applications.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE-WELDED
     FERRITIC ALLOY-STEEL BOILER AND SUPERHEATER
     TUBES
     SA-250/SA-250M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A250/A250M-05(R14) except that Supplementary Requirement S1 is mandatory
     when 100% weld joint efficiency is required.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-250/SA-250M
     371
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-250/SA-250M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     372
     Standard Specification for
     Electric-Resistance-Welded Ferritic Alloy-Steel Boiler and
     Superheater Tubes
228. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers several grades, designated T1,
     T1a, T1b, T2, T11, T12 and T22, of minimum-wall-thickness,
     electric-resistance-welded, carbon-molybdenum and
     chromium-molybdenum alloy-steel, boiler and superheater
     tubes.
     1.2 The tubing sizes and thicknesses usually furnished to
     this specification are 1/2 to 5 in. [12.7 to 127 mm] in outside
     diameter and 0.035 to 0.320 in. [0.9 to 8.1 mm], inclusive, in
     minimum wall thickness. Tubing having other dimensions may
     be furnished, provided such tubes comply with all other
     requirements of this specification.
     1.3 Mechanical property requirements do not apply to
     tubing smaller than 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in inside diameter or 0.015
     in. [0.4 mm] in thickness.
     1.4 An optional supplementary requirement is provided for
     non-destructive examination for certain ASME applications.
     1.5 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
     are to be reaagrded separately as standard. The values stated in
     each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
     system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
     values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
     with the standard.
     1.5.1 Within the text, the SI units are shown in brackets.
     1.5.2 The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M”
     designation of this specification is specified in the order.
229. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A1016/A1016M Specification for General Requirements for
     Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic Alloy Steel, and Stainless
     Steel Tubes
     E213 Practice for Ultrasonic Testing of Metal Pipe and
     Tubing
     E273 Practice for Ultrasonic Testing of the Weld Zone of
     Welded Pipe and Tubing
230. Ordering Information
     3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
     include the following, as required, to describe the desired
     material adequately:
     3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
     3.1.2 Name of material (electric-resistance-welded tubes),
     3.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
     3.1.4 Size (outside diameter or minimum wall thickness),
     3.1.5 Length (specific or random),
     3.1.6 Optional requirement (7.3.6),
     3.1.7 Test report required (see Certification Section of
     Specification A1016/A1016M),
     3.1.8 Specification designation, and
     3.1.9 Special requirements and any supplementary requirements
     selected.
231. General Requirements
     4.1 Product furnished under this specification shall conform
     to the applicable requirements of Specification A1016/
     A1016M, including any supplementary requirements that are
     indicated in the purchase order. Failure to comply with the
     general requirements of Specification A1016/A1016M constitutes
     nonconformance with this specification. In case of conflicts
     with the requirements of this specification and Specification
     A1016/A1016M, this specification shall prevail.
232. Materials and Manufacture
     5.1 The steel shall be killed.
     5.2 The tubes shall be made by electric-resistance welding.
     5.3 Heat Treatment
     5.3.1 After welding, or when cold finished, after the final
     cold-drawing pass, all tubes shall be heat treated and, except as
     provided in 5.3.2, furnished in the full annealed, isothermal
     annealed, normalized, or normalized and tempered condition at
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-250/SA-250M
     373
     the option of the manufacturer. If furnished in the normalized
     and tempered condition, the minimum tempering temperature
     shall be 1200 °F [650 °C], except T22 shall be tempered at
     1250 °F [676 °C] minimum.
     5.3.2 When grades T1, T1a, T1b, and T2 are cold finished,
     the tubes may, at the option of the manufacturer, be heat treated
     after the final cold-drawing pass at a temperature of 1200 °F or
     higher, provided one of the heat treatments specified in 5.3.1
     was applied after welding.
233. Chemical Composition
     6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements given in
     Table 1.
     6.2 Product Analysis
     6.2.1 An analysis of either one length of flat-rolled stock or
     one tube shall be made on each heat. The chemical composition
     thus determined shall conform to the requirements given in
     Table 1.
     6.2.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests of
     two additional lengths of flat-rolled stock or tubes shall be
     made. Both retests for the elements in question shall meet the
     requirements of the specification; otherwise all remaining
     material in the heat or lot (See 8.1) shall be rejected or, at the
     option of the producer, each length of flat-rolled stock or tube
     may be individually tested for acceptance. Lengths of flatrolled
     stock or tubes that do not meet the requirements of the
     specification shall be rejected.
234. Mechanical Requirements
     7.1 Tensile Requirements
     7.1.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
     tensile properties given in Table 2.
     7.1.2 Table 3 gives the computed minimum elongation
     values for each 1/32-in. [0.8-mm] decrease in wall thickness.
     Where the wall thickness lies between two values given in
     Table 3, the minimum elongation value shall be determined by
     the following equation:
     E 5 48t115.00 @E 5 1.87t115.00#
     where:
     E = elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] %, and
     t = actual thickness of specimen, in.[mm].
     7.2 Hardness Requirements—The tubes shall have a hardness
     not exceeding the values given in Table 4.
     7.3 Mechanical Tests Required
     7.3.1 Tension Test—One tension test shall be made on a
     specimen for lots of not more than 50 tubes. Tension tests shall
     be made on specimens from two tubes for lots of more than 50
     tubes (See 8.2).
     7.3.2 Flattening Test—One flattening test shall be made on
     specimens from each end of one finished tube, not the one used
     for the flange test, from each lot (See 8.1).
     7.3.3 Flange Test—One flange test shall be made on specimens
     from each end of one finished tube, not the one used for
     the flattening test, from each lot (See 8.1).
     7.3.4 Reverse Flattening Test—One reverse flattening test
     shall be made on a specimen from each 1500 ft [450 m] of
     finished tubing.
     7.3.5 Hardness Test—Brinell and Rockwell hardness tests
     shall be made on specimens from two tubes from each lot (See
     8.2).
     7.3.6 Hydrostatic or Nondestructive Electric Tests—Each
     tube shall be subjected to either the hydrostatic or the nondestructive
     electric test. The purchaser may specify which is to be
     used.
235. Sampling
     8.1 For flattening and flange requirements, the term lot
     applies to all tubes prior to cutting of the same specified outside
     diameter and specified wall thickness that are produced from
     the same heat of steel. When final heat treatment is in a
     batch-type furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes of the
     same size and from the same heat that are heat treated in the
     same furnace charge. When the final heat treatment is in a
     TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
     Element Composition, %
     Grade
     T1
     Grade
     T1a
     Grade
     T1b
     Grade
     T2
     Grade
     T11
     Grade
     T12
     Grade
     T22
     Carbon 0.10–0.20 0.15–0.25 0.14 max 0.10–0.20 0.05–0.15 0.05–0.15 0.15 max
     Manganese 0.30–0.80 0.30–0.80 0.30–0.80 0.30–0.61 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.61 0.30–0.60
     Phosphorus, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.030 0.025
     Sulfur, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020
     Silicon 0.10–0.50 0.10–0.50 0.10–0.50 0.10–0.30 0.50–1.00 0.50 max 0.50 max
     Molybdenum 0.44–0.65 0.44–0.65 0.44–0.65 0.44–0.65 0.44–0.65 0.44–0.65 0.87–1.13
     Chromium . . . . . . . . . 0.50–0.81 1.00–1.50 0.80–1.25 1.90–2.60
     TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
     Grade T1 T1a T1b T2 T11 T12 T22
     Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa] 55 [380] 60 [415] 53 [365] 60 [415] 60 [415] 60 [415] 60 [415]
     Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa] 30 [205] 32 [220] 28 [195] 30 [205] 30 [205] 32 [220] 30 [205]
     Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
     For longitudinal strip tests a deduction shall be made for each
     1/32-in. [0.8-mm] decrease in wall thickness below 5/16 in.
     [8 mm] from the basic minimum elongation of the following
     percentage points
     1.50A 1.50A 1.50A 1.50A 1.50A 1.50A 1.50A
     A See Table 3 for the computed minimum values.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-250/SA-250M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     374
     continuous furnace, the number of tubes of the same size and
     from the same heat in a lot shall be determined from the size
     of the tubes given in Table 5.
     8.2 For tensile and hardness test requirements, the term lot
     applies to all tubes prior to cutting, of the same specified
     outside diameter and specified wall thickness that are produced
     from the same heat of steel. When final heat treatment is in a
     batch-type furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes of the
     same size and the same heat that are heat treated in the same
     furnace charge. When the final heat treatment is in a continuous
     furnace, a lot shall include all tubes of the same size and heat,
     heat treated in the same furnace at the same temperature, time
     at heat, and furnace speed.
236. Forming Operations
     9.1 Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand expanding
     and beading without showing cracks or flaws. Superheater
     tubes when properly manipulated shall stand all forging,
     welding, and bending operations necessary for application
     without developing defects.
237. Product Marking
     10.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
     A1016/A1016M, the marking shall include the words “Electric
     Resistance-Welded Steel.”
238. Keywords
     11.1 boiler tube; resistance welded steel tube; steel tube,
     alloy; superheater tube; welded steel tube
     TABLE 3 Minimum Elongation Values
     Wall Thickness Elongation in 2 in. or
     50 mm, min,%A
     in. mm Grades T1, T1a, T1b,
     T2, T11, T12, and T22
     5/16 (0.312) 8 30
     9/32 (0.281) 7.2 29
     1/4 (0.250) 6.4 27
     7/32 (0.219) 5.6 26
     3/16 (0.188) 4.8 24
     5/32 (0.156) 4 22
     1/8 (0.125) 3.2 21
     3/32 (0.094) 2.4 20
     1/16 (0.062) 1.6 18
     A Calculated elongation requirements shall be rounded to the nearest whole number.
     TABLE 4 Hardness Requirements
     Grade Brinell Hardness
     Number (Tubes 0.200
     in. [5.1 mm] and over
     in wall thickness), HBW
     Rockwell Hardness
     Number (Tubes less
     than 0.200 in. [5.1 mm]
     in wall thickness), HRB
     T1 146 80
     T1a 153 81
     T1b 137 77
     T2 163 85
     T11 163 85
     T12 163 85
     T22 163 85
     TABLE 5 Number of Tubes in a Lot Heat Treated by the
     Continuous Process
     Size of Tube Size of Lot
     2 in. [50.8 mm] and over in outside diameter and
     0.200 in. [5.1 mm] and over in wall thickness
     not more than 50
     tubes
     Less than 2 in. [50.8 mm] but over 1 in. [25.4 mm]
     in outside diameter or over 1 in. [25.4 mm] in
     outside diameter and under 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] in
     wall thickness
     not more than 75
     tubes
     1 in. [25.4 mm] or less in outside diameter not more than 125
     tubes
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-250/SA-250M
     375
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     The following supplementary requirements may become a part of the specification when specified
     in the inquiry or invitation to bid, and purchase order or contract. These requirements shall not be
     considered, unless specified in the order and the necessary tests shall be made at the mill.
     S1. Additional Testing of Welded Tubing for 100 % Joint
     Efficiency in Certain ASME Applications
     S1.1 Where this supplement is specified in the purchase
     order, in certain ASME applications it is permissible to use
     100 % joint efficiency for the longitudinal weld, provided the
     following additional requirements are met:
     S1.1.1 Each tube shall be subjected to an ultrasonic inspection
     employing Practices E273 or E213E273E213 with the
     rejection criteria referenced in Specification A1016/A1016M.
     S1.1.2 If Practice E273 is employed, a 100 % volumetric
     inspection of the entire length of each tube shall also be
     performed using one of the non-destructive electric tests
     permitted by Specification A1016/A1016M.
     S1.1.3 The test methods described in the supplement may
     not be capable of inspecting the end portions of tubes. This
     condition is referred to as end effect. This portion, as determined
     by the manufacturer, shall be removed and discarded.
     S1.1.4 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
     A1016/A1016M, “S1” shall be added after the grade designation.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR STAINLESS CHROMIUM
     STEEL-CLAD PLATE
     SA-263
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A263-12.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-263
     377
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-263 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     378
     Standard Specification for
     Stainless Chromium Steel-Clad Plate
239. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers plate of a carbon steel or
     low-alloy steel base to which is integrally and continuously
     bonded on one or both sides a layer of stainless chromium
     steel. The material is generally intended for pressure vessel
     use.
     1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
     as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
     conversions to SI units that are provided for information only
     and are not considered standard.
240. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A6/A6M Specification for General Requirements for Rolled
     Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
     A20/A20M Specification for General Requirements for Steel
     Plates for Pressure Vessels
     A240/A240M Specification for Chromium and Chromium-
     Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure
     Vessels and for General Applications
     A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
     of Steel Products
     A480/A480M Specification for General Requirements for
     Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate,
     Sheet, and Strip
     A578/A578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
     Examination of Rolled Steel Plates for Special Applications
     A751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical
     Analysis of Steel Products
     2.2 Other Standards:
     ASME Code Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX,
     Welding Qualifications
241. Terminology
     3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
     3.1.1 This material is considered as single-clad or doubleclad
     stainless chromium-steel plate, depending on whether one
     or both sides are covered.
     3.1.2 alloy cladding—the stainless chromium steel component
     of the composite plate.
     3.1.3 base metal (backing steel)—component to which the
     alloy cladding is applied, usually the greater percentage of the
     composite plate.
     3.1.4 integrally and continuously bonded—a condition in
     which the alloy cladding and base metal are brought together to
     form a metallurgical bond at essentially the entire interface of
     the two metals by means other than those processes that do not
     produce a homogeneous composite plate.
242. Ordering Information
     4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
     requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this
     specification. Such requirements may include, but are not
     limited to, the following:
     4.1.1 Quantity (weight or number of pieces).
     4.1.2 Cladding alloy specification (UNS or ASTM Specification
     A240/A240M) and whether cladding is for corrosion
     allowance only.
     4.1.3 Base metal specification.
     4.1.4 Bond integrity Class (1, 3, or 5; see Section 13).
     4.1.5 Dimensions including the minimum or nominal thicknesses
     of the cladding alloy and the backing steel, or of the
     total composite and if more or less restrictive thickness
     tolerances apply.
     4.1.6 Product analysis, if required (see Section 10). Specify
     whether applicable to the cladding alloy, backing steel, or both.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-263
     379
     4.1.7 Mechanical properties including shear test if required
     (see Sections 7, 8, and 9).
     4.1.8 Finish (see Section 12).
     4.1.9 Restrictions, if required, on repair by welding (see
     Section 14).
     4.1.10 Additions to the specification or special requirements
     such as any applicable construction code rules.
     4.1.11 Notification when the cladding alloy is to be used for
     inclusion in the design strength calculations for an applicable
     construction code.
     NOTE 1—Construction codes may dictate certain fabrication requirements
     when the cladding is used in the design calculations that may be
     different than if the cladding is used for corrosion resistance only. This
     may be particularly important when the alloy cladding involves the use of
     welded components in the explosion bonded clad manufacturing process.
     It is incumbent on the purchaser to make the clad manufacturer aware of
     any such restrictions or applications at time of order.
     4.2 In addition to the basic requirements of this specification
     and the backing steel specification, certain supplementary
     requirements are available when additional control, testing, or
     examination is required to meet end use requirements. The
     purchaser is referred to the listed supplementary requirements
     in this specification and to the detailed requirements in
     Specification A20/A20M.
     4.3 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
     with the requirements of Specification A20/A20M, the requirements
     of this specification shall prevail.
243. Materials and Manufacture
     5.1 Process:
     5.1.1 The steel shall be made by the open-hearth, electricfurnace,
     or basic-oxygen processes, or by secondary processes
     whereby steel made from these primary processes is remelted
     using, but not limited to electroslag remelting or vacuum-arc
     remelting processes.
     5.1.2 The alloy-cladding metal may be metallurgically
     bonded to the base metal by any method that will produce a
     clad steel that will conform to the requirements of this
     specification.
     5.1.3 For explosively bonded products, the alloy cladding
     metal may be comprised of two or more separate alloy plates
     or sheets completely welded together to form a single fabricated
     component.
     5.2 Heat Treatment—Unless otherwise specified or agreed
     upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer, all plates
     shall be furnished in the normalized, tempered, normalized and
     tempered, or quenched and tempered condition as permitted by
     the backing steel specification. Stress relieving of the composite
     plate by heating subcritically is permitted, provided the
     temperature is 75°F (40°C) or more below the minimum
     tempering temperature (when tempered).
244. Chemical Composition
     6.1 The composite plate shall conform to any desired
     combination of alloy-cladding metal and base metal as described
     in 6.2 and 6.3 and as agreed upon between the
     purchaser and the manufacturer.
     6.2 Alloy Cladding Metal—The alloy-cladding metal specified
     shall conform to the requirements as to chemical composition
     prescribed for the respective chromium steel in Specification
     A240/A240M.
     6.3 Base Metal—The base metal shall be carbon steel or
     low-alloy steel conforming to the ASTM specifications for
     steels for pressure vessels or other as agreed by the purchaser
     and the manufacturer. The base metal shall conform to the
     chemical requirements of the specification to which it is
     ordered.
245. Mechanical Properties
     7.1 Tensile Requirements:
     7.1.1 The tensile properties shall be determined by a tension
     test of the composite plate for clad plates that meet all of the
     following conditions.
     (1) The nominal composite gage is less than or equal to
     11/2 in. (38 mm).
     (2) The specified minimum tensile strength of the base
     steel is less than or equal to 70 000 psi (485 MPa).
     (3) The specified minimum yield strength of the base steel
     is less than or equal to 40 000 psi (275 MPa).
     The tensile properties thus determined shall be not less than
     the minimum and not more than 5000 psi (35 MPa) over the
     maximum prescribed in the specification for the base steel
     used. All other tensile test requirements of the specification for
     the base steel shall be met.
     7.1.2 The tensile properties shall be determined by a tension
     test of the base steel only for clad plates that meet one of the
     following conditions. The properties thus determined shall
     meet all of the tensile test requirements for the base steel.
     (1) The composite gage is greater than 11/2 in. (38 mm).
     (2) The specified minimum tensile strength of the base
     steel is greater than 70 000 psi (485 MPa).
     (3) The specified minimum yield strength of the base steel
     is greater than 40 000 psi (275 MPa).
     7.1.3 If the cladding is for corrosion allowance only, the
     cladding need not be included in the tensile test. The tensile
     properties thus determined shall meet the base steel requirements.
     7.2 Tests for strength of the bond, when required, must be
     specified by the purchaser and shall consist of one of the
     following.
     7.2.1 Shear Strength—When required by the purchaser, the
     minimum shear strength of the alloy cladding and base metals
     shall be 20 000 psi (140 MPa). The shear test, when specified,
     shall be made in the manner indicated in Fig. 1. The minimum
     cladding thickness for shear testing shall be 0.075 in. (1.9 mm)
     exclusive as ordered. Testing for shear strength for clad plates
     with minimum cladding thickness of 0.075 in. (1.9 mm) or less
     shall be permitted upon agreement between the purchaser and
     the manufacturer.
     7.2.2 Bond Strength—As an alternative to the shear strength
     test provided in 7.2.1, or when agreed upon by the purchaser
     and the manufacturer, or both, three bend tests shall be made
     with the alloy cladding in compression to determine the quality
     of the bond. These bend tests shall be made in the manner of
     the tension tests indicated in Fig. 2 and shall be bent through an
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-263 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     380
     angle of 180° to the bend diameters provided for in either
     Specification A6/A6M or Specification A20/A20M, Appendix
     X4 or equivalent, as applicable. At least two of the three tests
     shall show not more than 50 % separation on both edges of the
     bent portion. Greater separation shall be cause for rejection.
     7.3 Methods and practices relating to mechanical testing
     required by this specification shall be in accordance with the
     Test Methods and Definitions of A370.
246. Number of Tests and Retests
     8.1 One or more tension tests, as required by the specifications
     for the base metal and, when specified, one shear test or
     three bond bend tests shall be made representing each plate as
     rolled. Each specimen shall be in the final condition of heat
     treatment required for the plate, including any SPWHT if
     required.
     8.2 If any test specimen shows defective machining or
     develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
     substituted.
247. Test Specimens
     9.1 The tension test specimens from plate shall conform to
     the requirements prescribed in the specifications for the base
     metal.
     9.2 Bend test specimens for the alternative bond strength
     tests shall be taken at right angles to longitudinal axis of the
     plate.
     9.3 When required by the purchaser, the shear test specimen
     should be taken near a corner of the plate, parallel to its
     longitudinal axis, or other location that is representative of the
     final product.
     9.4 For plates 11/2 in. (38 mm) and under in thickness
     tension test specimens shall be full thickness of the material
     except as specified in 7.1.2 and 7.1.3.
     9.5 For plates over 11/2 in. (38 mm) in thickness, tension
     tests shall be of the form shown in Fig. 3 and shall be of all
     base steel conforming to the requirements of the specification
     for the base steel.
     9.6 The bend test specimen used for bond strength determination
     shall be 11/2 in. (38 mm) wide by not more than 3/4 in.
     (19 mm) in thickness and shall be machined to the form and
     dimensions shown in Fig. 2, or may be machined with both
     Metric Equivalents
     in. mm in. mm
     0.005 0.127 1 25.4
     1/8 3.18 2 1/2 64.5
     3/4 19.1 3 76.2
     FIG. 1 Test Specimen and Method of Making Shear Test of Clad
     Plate
     NOTE 1—When necessary, it is permissible to use a narrower specimen,
     but in such a case the reduced portion shall be not less than 1 in. in width.
     NOTE 2—Punch marks for measuring elongation after fracture shall be
     made on the flat or on the edge of the specimen and within the parallel
     section; either a set of nine punch marks 1 in. apart, or one or more sets
     of 8-in. punch marks may be used.
     NOTE 3—The dimension t is the thickness of the test specimen as
     provided for in the applicable material specifications.
     FIG. 2 Standard Rectangular Tension Test Specimen with 8-in.
     Gage Length
     NOTE 1—The gage length and fillets shall be as shown, but the ends
     may be of any shape to fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way
     that the load shall be axial. The reduced section shall have a gradual taper
     from the ends toward the center, with the ends 0.003 to 0.005 in. larger in
     diameter than the center.
     FIG. 3 Standard Round Tension Test Specimen with 2-in. Gage
     Length
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-263
     381
     edges parallel. In reducing the thickness of the specimen, both
     the alloy cladding and the base steel shall be machined so as to
     maintain the same ratio of clad metal to base steel as is
     maintained in the plate, except that the thickness of the clad
     metal need not be reduced below 1/8 in. (3.1 mm). The sides of
     the bend test specimen used for bond strength determination
     may have the corners rounded to a radius not over 1/16 in. (1.6
     mm) for plates, 2 in. (50 mm) and under in thickness, and not
     over 1/8 in. (3.1 mm) for plates over 2 in. (50 mm) in thickness.
248. Product Analysis
     10.1 Product analysis may be required for the cladding alloy
     on the finished product. Chemical analysis may be accomplished
     by wet chemical or instrumental procedures. If wet
     chemical procedures are used, millings may be taken only
     when the composite plate thickness is sufficient to permit
     obtaining millings without danger of contamination from the
     adjacent layer. If spectrometric procedures are used, the sample
     shall be exposed on the center line of the cladding when there
     is sufficient cladding thickness available so that there is no
     contamination from the adjacent base metal.
     10.2 If product analysis is specified by the purchaser for the
     cladding alloy, it shall be made from drillings or millings taken
     from the final piece or a broken test specimen. For wet
     chemical analysis, in order to avoid contamination by the base
     plate metal, millings of cladding samples shall be taken from
     the test coupon by removal and discard of all the base metal
     plate material, plus 40 % of the cladding thickness from the
     bonded side, not to exceed 1/16 in. (1.6 mm). The material shall
     be chemically cleaned and sufficient millings shall be taken to
     represent the full cross-section of the remainder. If there is
     insufficient cladding thickness available to spectrographically
     expose on the center line of the cladding without
     contamination, 50 % of the cladding shall be removed and the
     sample exposed on this surface.
     10.3 Methods and practices relating to chemical analysis
     required by this specification shall be in accordance with the
     Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology of A751.
     10.4 Results of the product analysis shall conform to the
     requirements of Section 7 of Specification A480/A480M.
     10.5 Results of the product analysis for the backing steel
     when required shall conform to the requirements of Section 7
     of Specification A20/A20M.
249. Permissible Variations
     11.1 Permissible variations except for thickness shall be in
     accordance with Specification A20/A20M.
     11.2 Minimum thickness of the alloy cladding metal and of
     the backing steel, or of the total composite plate shall be as
     required by purchase order documents when ordered to minimum
     thicknesses.
     11.3 Permissible variation in thickness when ordered to
     nominal thicknesses shall be 0.01 in. (0.3 mm) under each for
     backing steel or total composite, and 0.03 in. (0.8 mm) under
     for the alloy cladding.
     11.4 Permissible variations for excess thickness of the total
     composite shall be the greater of 0.125 in. (3 mm) or 10 % of
     the total composite thickness ordered and may occur in either
     backing steel, cladding, or both, provided the minimum for
     each is met.
     11.5 More restrictive or less restrictive permissible variations
     may be agreed upon by the purchaser and the manufacturer.
250. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
     12.1 The material shall be free of injurious defects, shall
     have a workmanlike appearance, and shall conform to the
     designated finish.
     12.2 Plate alloy surfaces shall be blasted (descaled by
     means such as sand or stainless grit, shot or wire, or
     equivalent), pickled, blast-cleaned and pickled, or 100 %
     conditioned.
251. Bond Quality
     13.1 The cladding metal shall be integrally and continuously
     bonded to the base metal.
     13.2 Inspection:
     13.2.1 Clad plates less than 3/8 in. (10 mm) total minimum
     composite thickness shall be visually inspected for bond
     integrity prior to shipment.
     13.2.2 Clad plates 3/8 in. (10 mm) and thicker total minimum
     composite thickness, and when specified by the purchaser, clad
     plates less than 3/8 in. (10 mm) total minimum composite
     thickness, shall be ultrasonically inspected for bond integrity
     prior to shipment in accordance with the Procedures and
     Methods of Specification A578/A578M.
     13.2.3 Areas of non-bond detected visually shall be explored
     ultrasonically to determine the extent of the condition in
     accordance with 13.2.2. For purposes of defining non-bond, the
     cladding shall be interpreted to be unbonded when there is
     complete loss of back reflection accompanied by an echo
     indication from the plane of the interface of the clad and
     backing steel. Areas within 1 in. (25 mm) of a cut edge on the
     plate that contain indications exceeding 50 % of the back
     reflection at the bond interface shall be considered to be
     unbonded.
     13.2.4 Extent of ultrasonic examination shall be at the
     discretion of the manufacturer and sufficient enough to provide
     the quality level required by the purchaser. Plates may be
     ordered with 100 % coverage (Supplementary Requirements
     S12).
     13.3 Quality Levels:
     13.3.1 Class 1—No single unbonded area exceeding 1 in.
     (25 mm) in its longest dimension with total unbonded area not
     to exceed 1 % of the total cladded surface area.
     13.3.2 Class 3—No single unbonded area exceeding 3 in.
     (75 mm) in its longest dimension with total unbonded area not
     to exceed 3 % of the total cladded surface area.
     13.3.3 Class 5—No single unbonded area exceeding 9 in.2
     (58 cm2) with total unbonded area not to exceed 5 % of the
     total cladded surface area.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-263 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     382
     13.3.4 The class to be supplied should be listed on the
     purchase order. When none has been specified, plates shall be
     furnished as Class 5 at the option of the manufacturer.
252. Welding
     14.1 All welding which is a part of the delivered product,
     including any made in the fabrication of the cladding alloy
     component, shall be performed with a procedure and welders
     or welding operators that are qualified in accordance with
     Section IX of the ASME Code.
     14.2 The material manufacturer may repair defects in cladding
     by welding provided the following requirements are met:
     14.2.1 When specified in the purchase order, prior approval
     shall be obtained from the purchaser.
     14.2.2 The defective area shall be removed and the area
     prepared for repair shall be examined by a magnetic particle
     method or a liquid penetrant method to ensure all defective
     area has been removed. Method of test and acceptance standard
     shall be as agreed upon between the purchaser and the
     manufacturer.
     14.2.3 The repair weld shall be deposited in accordance
     with a welding procedure and welding materials suitable for
     the cladding material. The surface condition of the repaired
     area shall be restored to a condition similar to the rest of the
     cladding.
     14.2.4 The repaired area shall be examined by a liquid
     penetrant method.
     14.2.5 The location and extent of the weld repairs together
     with the repair procedure and examination results shall be
     transmitted as a part of the certification.
     14.3 All repairs in Alloy Type 410 and any repairs to Type
     410S penetrating into the backing steel shall be stress relieved
     to eliminate residual stresses unless otherwise agreed upon.
253. General Requirements for Delivery
     15.1 Material furnished under this specification shall conform
     to the applicable requirements of Specification A20/
     A20M.
254. Certification
     16.1 The chemical analysis of the base metal and the alloy
     cladding shall be certified to the purchaser by the clad plate
     manufacturer.
     16.2 The results of the tests in Section 7 and any other tests
     required by the purchase order shall be reported to the
     purchaser.
     16.3 Compliance with the clad quality level of 13.3 shall be
     certified. Reports shall include the results of ultrasonic inspection
     when Supplementary Requirement S12 is specified.
     16.4 Compliance with any applicable construction code
     shall be certified and the appropriate documentation provided
     when appropriate in the case of explosively bonded clad
     produced using welded alloy cladding components (see 4.1.10
     and 4.1.11).
255. Product Marking
     17.1 Except as specified in 17.2, plates shall be marked in
     accordance with the requirements of Specification A20/A20M
     for the backing steel and the type number of the alloy cladding
     metal and this specification number.
     17.2 For double-clad material or for material under 1/4 in.
     (6.35 mm) in thickness, the marking shall be legibly stenciled
     instead of stamped.
256. Keywords
     18.1 alloy cladding; backing steel; bond strength; carbon
     steel; clad steel plate; low-alloy steel; pressure vessel; shear
     strength; stainless chromium steel
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     Supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified on the order. A list of standardized
     supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser are included in Specification
     A20/A20M. Several of those considered suitable for use with this specification are listed below by
     title. Other tests may be performed by agreement between the supplier and the purchaser.
     S2. Product Analysis
     S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical
     Test Coupons
     S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test
     S12. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
     A578/A578M
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR STAINLESS CHROMIUM-NICKEL
     STEEL-CLAD PLATE
     SA-264
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A264-12.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-264
     383
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-264 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     384
     Standard Specification for
     Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel-Clad Plate
257. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers plate of a carbon steel or
     low-alloy steel base to which is integrally and continuously
     bonded on one or both sides a layer of stainless chromiumnickel
     steel. The material is generally intended for pressure
     vessel use.
     1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
     as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
     conversions to SI units that are provided for information only
     and are not considered standard.
258. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A6/A6M Specification for General Requirements for Rolled
     Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
     A20/A20M Specification for General Requirements for Steel
     Plates for Pressure Vessels
     A240/A240M Specification for Chromium and Chromium-
     Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure
     Vessels and for General Applications
     A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
     of Steel Products
     A480/A480M Specification for General Requirements for
     Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate,
     Sheet, and Strip
     A578/A578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
     Examination of Rolled Steel Plates for Special Applications
     A751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical
     Analysis of Steel Products
     2.2 Other Standards:
     ASME Code Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX,
     Welding Qualifications
259. Terminology
     3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
     3.1.1 This material is considered as single-clad or doubleclad
     corrosion-resisting chromium-nickel steel plate, depending
     on whether one or both sides are covered.
     3.1.2 alloy cladding—the stainless chromium-nickel steel
     component of the composite plate.
     3.1.3 base metal (backing steel)—component to which the
     alloy cladding is applied, usually the greater percentage of the
     composite plate and usually consisting of carbon or low-alloy
     steel.
     3.1.4 integrally and continuously bonded—the process by
     which the alloy cladding and base metal are brought together to
     form a metallurgical bond at essentially the entire interface of
     the two metals by means other than those processes that do not
     produce a homogeneous composite plate.
260. Ordering Information
     4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
     requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this
     specification. Such requirements may include, but are not
     limited to, the following:
     4.1.1 Quantity (weight or number of pieces).
     4.1.2 Cladding alloy specification, (UNS or ASTM Specification
     A240/A240M and whether cladding is for corrosion
     allowance only),
     4.1.3 Base metal specification.
     4.1.4 Bond integrity Class (1, 3, or 5).
     4.1.5 Dimensions including the minimum or nominal thickness
     of the cladding alloy, and the backing steel, or of the total
     composite plate and if more or less restrictive thickness
     tolerances apply.
     4.1.6 Product analysis, if required (see Section 10). Specify
     whether applicable to the cladding alloy, backing steel or both.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-264
     385
     4.1.7 Mechanical properties, including shear test if required.
     4.1.8 Finish (see Section 12).
     4.1.9 Restrictions, if required, on repair by welding (see
     Section 14).
     4.1.10 Additions to the specification or special requirements
     such as any applicable construction code rules.
     4.1.11 Corrosion testing if applicable.
     4.1.12 Notification when the cladding alloy is to be used for
     inclusion in the design strength calculations for an applicable
     construction code.
     NOTE 1—Construction codes may dictate certain fabrication requirements
     when the cladding is used in the design calculations that may be
     different than if the cladding is used for corrosion resistance only. This
     may be particularly important when the alloy cladding involves the use of
     welded components in the explosion bonded clad manufacturing process.
     It is incumbent on the purchaser to make the clad manufacturer aware of
     any such restrictions or applications at time of order.
     4.2 In addition to the basic requirements of this specification
     and the backing steel specification, certain supplementary
     requirements are available when additional control, testing, or
     examination is required to meet end use requirements. The
     purchaser is referred to the listed supplementary requirements
     in this specification and to the detailed requirements in
     Specification A20/A20M.
     4.3 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
     with the requirements of Specification A20/A20M, the requirements
     of this specification shall prevail.
     4.4 Special tests.
261. Materials and Manufacture
     5.1 Process:
     5.1.1 The steel shall be made by the open-hearth, electricfurnace,
     or basic-oxygen processes, or by secondary processes
     whereby steel made from these primary processes is remelted
     using, but not limited to electroslag remelting or vacuum-arc
     remelting processes.
     5.1.2 The alloy-cladding metal may be metallurgically
     bonded to the base metal by any method that will produce a
     clad steel that will conform to the requirements of this
     specification.
     5.1.3 For explosively bonded products, the alloy cladding
     metal may be comprised of two or more separate alloy plates
     or sheets completely welded together to form a single fabricated
     component.
     5.2 Heat Treatment:
     5.2.1 Unless otherwise specified or agreed upon between
     the purchaser and the manufacturer, all austenitic stainless steel
     clad plates shall be given a heat treatment consisting of heating
     to the proper temperature for the solution of the chromium
     carbides in the cladding followed by individual air cooling. For
     base metals of air-hardening low-alloy steels the above heat
     treatment shall be followed by a tempering treatment. In the
     case of clad plate manufactured without hot rolling, the base
     metal and alloy cladding components may be heat treated
     separately as appropriate prior to bonding.
     5.2.2 Duplex stainless steel clad plates shall be provided in
     a heat treated condition as agreed upon between the purchaser
     and the manufacturer.
     5.2.3 When plates are to be cold formed, or when otherwise
     required by the base metal specification, the purchaser may
     specify that such plates, following solution annealing, be heat
     treated for grain refinement of the base metal by normalizing
     and either air cooled or water quenched as appropriate.
262. Chemical Composition
     6.1 The composite plate may conform to any desired combination
     of alloy-cladding metal and base metal as described in
     6.2 and 6.3 and as agreed upon between the purchaser and the
     manufacturer.
     6.2 Alloy Cladding Metal—The alloy-cladding metal specified
     shall conform to the requirements as to chemical composition
     prescribed for the respective chromium-nickel or duplex
     steel in Specification A240/A240M.
     6.3 Base Metal—The base metal shall be carbon steel or
     low-alloy steel conforming to the ASTM specifications for
     steel for pressure vessels, or other, as agreed by the purchaser
     and the manufacturer. The base metal shall conform to the
     chemical requirements of the specification to which it is
     ordered.
263. Mechanical Properties
     7.1 Tensile Requirements:
     7.1.1 The tensile properties shall be determined by a
     tension test of the composite plate for clad plates that meet all
     of the following conditions.
     (1) The composite gage is less than or equal to 11/2 in. (38
     mm).
     (2) The specified minimum tensile strength of the base
     steel is less than or equal to 70 000 psi (485 MPa)
     (3) The specified minimum yield strength of the base steel
     is less than or equal to 40 000 psi (275 MPa).
     (4) The tensile properties thus determined shall be not less
     than the minimum and not more than 5000 psi (35 MPa) over
     the maximum prescribed in the specification for the base steel
     used. All other tensile test requirements of the specification for
     the base steel shall be met.
     7.1.2 The tensile properties shall be determined by a
     tension test of the base steel only for clad plates that meet one
     of the following conditions. The properties thus determined
     shall meet all of the tensile test requirements for the base steel.
     (1) The composite gage is greater than 11/2 in. (38 mm).
     (2) The specified minimum tensile strength of the base
     steel is greater than 70 000 psi (485 MPa).
     (3) The specified minimum yield strength of the base steel
     is greater than 40 000 psi (275 MPa).
     7.1.3 If the cladding is for corrosion allowance only, the
     cladding need not be included in the tensile test. The tensile
     properties thus determined shall meet the base steel requirements.
     7.2 Tests for strength of the bond, when required, must be
     specified by the purchaser and shall consist of one of the
     following.
     7.2.1 Shear Strength—When required by the purchaser, the
     minimum shear strength of the alloy cladding and base metals
     shall be 20 000 psi (140 MPa). The shear test, when specified,
     shall be made in the manner indicated in Fig. 1. The minimum
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-264 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     386
     cladding thickness for shear testing shall be 0.075 in. (1.9 mm),
     exclusive as ordered. Testing for shear strength for clad plates
     with minimum cladding thickness of 0.075 in. (1.9 mm) or less
     shall be permitted upon agreement between the purchaser and
     the manufacturer.
     7.2.2 Bond Strength—As an alternative to the shear strength
     test provided in 7.2.1, or when agreed upon by the purchaser
     and the manufacturer, or both, three bend tests shall be made
     with the alloy cladding in compression to determine the quality
     of the bond. These bend tests shall be made in the manner of
     the tension tests indicated in Fig. 2 and shall be bent through an
     angle of 180° to the bend diameters provided for in either
     Specification A6/A6M or Specification A20/A20M, Appendix
     X4 or equivalent, as applicable. At least two of the three tests
     shall show not more than 50 % separation on both edges of the
     bent portion. Greater separation shall be cause for rejection.
     7.3 Methods and practices relating to mechanical testing
     required by this specification shall be in accordance with the
     Test Methods and Definitions of A370.
264. Number of Tests and Retests
     8.1 One or more tension tests, as required by the specifications
     for the base metal and when specified, one shear test or
     three bond bend tests shall be made, representing each plate as
     rolled. Each specimen shall be in the final condition of heat
     treatment required for the plate, including any SPWHT if
     required.
     8.2 If any test specimen shows defective machining or
     develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
     substituted.
265. Test Specimens
     9.1 The tension test specimens from plate shall conform to
     the requirements prescribed in the specifications for the base
     metal.
     9.2 Bend test specimens for the alternative bond strength
     tests, shall be taken at right angles to its longitudinal axis.
     9.3 When required by the purchaser, the shear test specimen
     should be taken near a top or bottom corner of the plate as
     rolled, parallel to its longitudinal axis, or other location that is
     representative of the final product.
     9.4 For plates 11/2 in. (38 mm) and under in thickness,
     tension test specimens shall be the full thickness of the
     material, except as specified in 7.1.2 and 7.1.3.
     9.5 For plates over 11/2 in. (38 mm) in thickness, tension
     tests shall be of the form shown in Fig. 3 and shall be of all
     base steel conforming to the requirements of the specification
     for the base steel.
     9.6 The bend test specimen used for bond strength determination
     shall be 11/2 in. (38 mm) wide by not more than 3/4 in.
     (19 mm) in thickness and shall be machined to the form and
     dimensions shown in Fig. 2, or may be machined with both
     edges parallel. In reducing the thickness of the specimen, both
     the alloy cladding and the base steel shall be machined so as to
     maintain the same ratio of clad metal to base steel as is
     maintained in the plate, except that the thickness of the clad
     metal need not be reduced below 1/8 in. (3.1 mm). The sides of
     the bend test specimen used for bond strength determination
     may have the corners rounded to a radius not over 1/16 in. (1.6
     mm) for plates, 2 in. (50 mm) and under in thickness, and not
     over 1/8 in. (3.1 mm) for plates over 2 in. (50 mm) in thickness.
266. Product Analysis
     10.1 Product analysis may be required for the cladding alloy
     on finished product. Chemical analysis may be accomplished
     by wet chemical or instrumental procedures. If wet chemical
     procedures are used, millings may be taken only when the
     composite plate thickness is sufficient to permit obtaining
     Metric Equivalents
     in. mm in. mm
     0.005 0.127 1 25.4
     1/8 3.18 21/2 64.5
     3/4 19.1 3 76.2
     FIG. 1 Test Specimen and Method of Making Shear Test of Clad
     Plate
     Metric Equivalents
     in. mm in. mm
     0.01 0.254 11/2 38.1
     1/8 3.17 2 50.8
     1/4 6.35 3 76.2
     1 25.4 8 203.2
     NOTE 1—When necessary, it is permissible to use a narrower specimen,
     but in such a case the reduced portion shall be not less than 1 in. in width.
     NOTE 2—Punch marks for measuring elongation after fracture shall be
     made on the flat or on the edge of the specimen and within the parallel
     section; either a set of nine punch marks 1 in. apart, or one or more sets
     of 8-in. punch marks may be used.
     NOTE 3—The dimension t is the thickness of the test specimen as
     provided for in the applicable material specifications.
     FIG. 2 Standard Rectangular Tension Test Specimen with 8-in.
     Gage Length
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-264
     387
     millings without danger of contamination from the adjacent
     layer. If spectrometric procedures are used, the sample shall be
     exposed on the center line of the cladding when there is
     sufficient cladding thickness available so that there is no
     contamination from the adjacent base metal.
     10.2 If product analysis is specified by the purchaser for the
     cladding alloy, it shall be made on a sample taken from the
     finished product or a broken test specimen. For wet chemical
     analysis, in order to avoid contamination by the base plate
     metal, millings of cladding samples shall be taken from the test
     coupon by removal and discard of all the base metal plus 40 %
     of the cladding thickness from the bonded side, not to exceed
     1/16 in. (1.6 mm). The material shall be cleaned and sufficient
     millings taken to represent the full cross-section of the remainder.
     If there is insufficient cladding thickness available to
     spectrographically expose on the center line of the cladding
     without contamination, 50 % of the cladding shall be removed
     and the sample exposed on this surface.
     10.3 The results of the product analysis shall conform to the
     requirements of Section 7 of Specification A480/A480M.
     10.4 Methods and practices relating to chemical analysis
     required by this specification shall be in accordance with the
     Test Methods, Practices, and Definitions of A751.
     10.5 Results of the product analysis for the backing steel
     when required shall conform to the requirements of Section 7
     of Specification A20/A20M.
267. Permissible Variations
     11.1 Permissible variations except for thickness shall be in
     accordance with Specification A20/A20M.
     11.2 Minimum thickness of the alloy cladding metal and of
     the backing steel, or of the total composite plate shall be as
     required by purchase order documents when ordered to minimum
     thicknesses.
     11.3 Permissible variation in thickness when ordered to
     nominal thicknesses shall be 0.01 in. (0.3 mm) under each for
     backing steel or total composite, and 0.03 in. (0.8 mm) under
     for the alloy cladding.
     11.4 Permissible variations for excess thickness of the total
     composite shall be the greater of 0.125 in. (3 mm) or 10 % of
     the total composite thickness ordered and may occur in either
     backing steel, cladding, or both, provided the minimum for
     each is met.
     11.5 More restrictive or less restrictive permissible variations
     may be agreed upon by the purchaser and the manufacturer.
268. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
     12.1 The material shall be free of injurious defects, shall
     have a workmanlike appearance, and shall conform to the
     designated finish.
     12.2 Plate alloy surfaces shall be blasted (descaled by
     means of sand or stainless grit, shot, or wire), pickled,
     blast-cleaned and pickled, or 100 % conditioned.
269. Bond Quality
     13.1 The cladding metal shall be integrally and continuously
     bonded to the base metal.
     13.2 Inspection:
     13.2.1 Clad plates less than 3/8 in. (10 mm) total minimum
     composite thickness shall be visually inspected for bond
     integrity prior to shipment.
     13.2.2 Clad plates 3/8 in. (10 mm) and thicker total minimum
     composite thickness, and when specified by the purchaser, clad
     plates less than 3/8 in. (10 mm) total minimum composite
     thickness, shall be ultrasonically inspected for bond integrity
     prior to shipment in accordance with the Procedures and
     Methods of Specification A578/A578M.
     13.2.3 Areas of non-bond detected visually shall be explored
     ultrasonically to determine the extent of the condition in
     accordance with 13.2.2. For purposes of defining non-bond, the
     cladding shall be interpreted to be unbonded when there is
     complete loss of back reflection accompanied by an echo
     indication from the plane of the interface of the clad and
     backing steel. Areas within 1 in. (25 mm) of a cut edge on the
     plate that contain indications exceeding 50 % of the back
     reflection at the bond interface shall be considered to be
     unbonded.
     13.2.4 Extent of ultrasonic examination shall be at the
     discretion of the manufacturer and sufficient enough to provide
     the quality level required by the purchaser. Plates may be
     ordered with 100 % coverage (Supplementary Requirement
     S12).
     13.3 Quality Levels:
     13.3.1 Class 1—No single unbonded area exceeding 1 in.
     (25 mm) in its longest dimension with total unbonded area not
     to exceed 1 % of the total cladded surface area.
     13.3.2 Class 3—No single unbonded area exceeding 3 in.
     (75 mm) in its longest dimension with total unbonded area not
     to exceed 3 % of the total cladded surface area.
     Metric Equivalents
     in. mm in. mm
     0.003 0.076 3/8 9.53
     0.005 0.127 0.50 12.7
     0.01 0.254 2 50.8
     1/8 3.18 21/4 64.5
     NOTE 1—The gage length and fillets shall be as shown, but the ends
     may be of any shape to fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way
     that the load shall be axial. The reduced section shall be a gradual taper
     from the ends toward the center, with the ends 0.003 to 0.005 in. larger in
     diameter than the center.
     FIG. 3 Standard Round Tension Test Specimen with 2-in. Gage
     Length
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-264 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     388
     13.3.3 Class 5—No single unbonded area exceeding 9 in.2
     (58 cm2) with total unbonded area not to exceed 5 % of the
     total cladded surface area.
     13.3.4 The class to be supplied should be listed on the
     purchase order. When none has been specified, plates shall be
     furnished as Class 5 at the option of the manufacturer.
270. Welding
     14.1 All welding which is part of the delivered product,
     including any made in the fabrication of the cladding alloy
     component, shall be performed with a procedure and welders
     or welding operators that are qualified in accordance with
     Section IX of the ASME Code.
     14.2 The material manufacturer may repair defects in cladding
     by welding provided the following requirements are met:
     14.2.1 When specified in the purchase order, prior approval
     shall be obtained from the purchaser.
     14.2.2 The defective area shall be removed and the area
     prepared for repair shall be examined by a liquid penetrant
     method to ensure that all of the defective area has been
     removed. Method of test and acceptance standard shall be as
     agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
     14.2.3 The repair weld shall be deposited in accordance
     with a welding procedure and welding materials suitable for
     the cladding material. The surface condition of the repaired
     area shall be restored to a condition similar to the rest of the
     cladding.
     14.2.4 The repaired area shall be examined by a liquid
     penetrant method.
     14.2.5 The location and extent of the weld repairs together
     with the repair procedure and examination results shall be
     transmitted as a part of the certification.
271. General Requirements for Delivery
     15.1 Material furnished under this specification shall conform
     to the applicable requirements of Specification A20/
     A20M.
272. Certification
     16.1 The chemical analysis of the base metal and the alloy
     cladding shall be certified to the purchaser by the clad plate
     manufacturer.
     16.2 The results of the tests in Section 7 and any other tests
     required by the purchase order shall be reported to the
     purchaser.
     16.3 Compliance with the clad quality level of 13.3 shall be
     certified. Reports shall include the results of ultrasonic inspection
     when Supplementary Requirement S12 is specified.
     16.4 Compliance with any applicable construction code
     shall be certified and the appropriate documentation provided
     when appropriate in the case of explosively bonded clad
     produced using welded alloy cladding components (see 4.1.10
     and 4.1.12).
273. Product Marking
     17.1 Except as specified in 17.2, plates shall be marked in
     accordance with the requirements of Specification A20/A20M
     for the backing steel and the type number of the alloy cladding
     metal and this specification number.
     17.2 For double-clad material or for material under 1/4 in.
     (6.35 mm) in thickness, the marking specified in 17.1 shall be
     legibly stenciled instead of stamped.
274. Keywords
     18.1 alloy cladding; backing steel; bond strength; carbon
     steel; clad steel plate; low-alloy steel; pressure vessel; shear
     strength; stainless chromium-nickel steel
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     Supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified on the order. A list of standardized
     supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser are included in Specification
     A20/A20M. Several of those considered suitable for use with this specification are listed below by
     title. Other tests may be performed by agreement between the supplier and the purchaser.
     S2. Product Analysis
     S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical
     Test Coupons
     S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test
     S12. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
     A578/A578M
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR NICKEL AND NICKEL-BASE
     ALLOY-CLAD STEEL PLATE
     SA-265
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A265-12.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-265
     389
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-265 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     390
     Standard Specification for
     Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy-Clad Steel Plate
275. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers plate of a carbon steel or
     low-alloy steel base to which is integrally and continuously
     bonded on one or both sides a layer of nickel or nickel-base
     alloy. The material is generally intended for pressure vessel use
     but may be used in other structural applications where corrosion
     resistance of the alloy is of prime importance.
     1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
     as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
     conversions to SI units that are provided for information only
     and are not considered standard.
276. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A6/A6M Specification for General Requirements for Rolled
     Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
     A20/A20M Specification for General Requirements for Steel
     Plates for Pressure Vessels
     A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
     of Steel Products
     A578/A578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
     Examination of Rolled Steel Plates for Special Applications
     A751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical
     Analysis of Steel Products
     B127 Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy (UNS N04400)
     Plate, Sheet, and Strip
     B162 Specification for Nickel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
     B168 Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Iron Alloys (UNS
     N06600, N06601, N06603, N06690, N06693, N06025,
     N06045, and N06696), Nickel-Chromium-Cobalt-
     Molybdenum Alloy (UNS N06617), and Nickel-Iron-
     Chromium-Tungsten Alloy (UNS N06674) Plate, Sheet,
     and Strip
     B333 Specification for Nickel-Molybdenum Alloy Plate,
     Sheet, and Strip
     B409 Specification for Nickel-Iron-Chromium Alloy Plate,
     Sheet, and Strip
     B424 Specification for Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu Alloy (UNS
     N08825, UNS N08221, and UNS N06845) Plate, Sheet,
     and Strip
     B443 Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-
     Columbium Alloy(UNS N06625) and Nickel-Chromium-
     Molybdenum-SiliconAlloy (UNS N06219) Plate, Sheet,
     and Strip
     B463 Specification for UNS N08020 Alloy Plate, Sheet, and
     Strip
     B575 Specification for Low-Carbon Nickel-Chromium-
     Molybdenum, Low-Carbon Nickel-Chromium-
     Molybdenum-Copper, Low-Carbon Nickel-Chromium-
     Molybdenum-Tantalum, and Low-Carbon Nickel-
     Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten Alloy Plate, Sheet,
     and Strip
     B582 Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Iron-
     Molybdenum-Copper Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip
     B625 Specification for UNS N08925, UNS N08031, UNS
     N08932, UNS N08926, UNS N08354, and UNS R20033
     Plate, Sheet, and Strip
     2.2 Other Standards:
     ASME Code Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX,
     Welding Qualifications
277. Terminology
     3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
     3.1.1 This material is considered as single-clad or doubleclad
     nickel or nickel-base alloy clad steel plate, depending on
     whether one or both sides are covered.
     3.1.2 The term plate as used in this specification applies to
     material 3/16 in. (2.73 mm) and over in thickness, and over 10
     in. (254 mm) in width.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-265
     391
     3.1.3 alloy cladding—the nickel or nickel-base alloy component
     of the composite plate.
     3.1.4 base metal (backing steel)—component to which the
     alloy cladding is applied, usually the greater percentage of the
     composite plate and usually consisting of carbon or low-alloy
     steel.
     3.1.5 integrally and continuously bonded—the process by
     which the alloy cladding and base metal are brought together to
     form a metallurgical bond at essentially the entire interface of
     the two metals by means other than those processes that do not
     produce a homogeneous composite plate.
278. Ordering Information
     4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
     requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this
     specification. Such requirements may include, but are not
     limited to the following:
     4.1.1 Quantity (weight or number of pieces).
     4.1.2 Heat treatment, if required (see Section 5).
     4.1.3 Dimensions, including the thickness of the cladding
     alloy and the backing steel, or of the total composite plate and
     if more or less restrictive thickness tolerances apply.
     4.1.4 Cladding alloy specification (see Section 6).
     4.1.5 Base metal specification (see Section 6).
     4.1.6 Product analysis, if required. Specify whether applicable
     to the cladding alloy, backing steel, or both (see Section
     10).
     4.1.7 Mechanical Properties (see Sections 7, 13, and 14).
     4.1.8 Restrictions, if required, on repair by welding (see
     Section 14).
     4.1.9 Additions to the specification or special requirements
     such as applicable construction code rules.
     4.1.10 Corrosions tests, if required.
     4.1.11 Notification when the cladding alloy is to be used for
     inclusion in the design strength calculations for an applicable
     construction code.
     NOTE 1—Construction codes may dictate certain fabrication requirements
     when the cladding is used in the design calculations that may be
     different than if the cladding is used for corrosion resistance only. This
     may be particularly important when the alloy cladding involves the use of
     welded components in the explosion bonded clad manufacturing process.
     It is incumbent on the purchaser to make the clad manufacturer aware of
     any such restrictions or applications at time of order.
     4.2 In addition to the basic requirements of this specification
     and the backing steel specification, certain supplementary
     requirements are available when additional control, testing, or
     examination is required to meet end use requirements. The
     purchaser is referred to the listed supplementary requirements
     in this specification and to the detailed requirements in
     Specification A20/A20M.
     4.2.1 Nondestructive examination,
     4.2.2 Impact testing, and
     4.2.3 Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical
     Test Coupons (SPWHT).
     4.3 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
     with the requirements of Specification A20/A20M, the requirements
     of this specification shall prevail.
     4.4 Special tests.
279. Materials and Manufacture
     5.1 Process:
     5.1.1 The steel shall be made by the open-hearth, electricfurnace
     (with separate degassing and refining optional), or
     basic-oxygen processes, or by secondary processes whereby
     steel made from these primary processes is remelted using, but
     not limited to electroslag remelting or vacuum arc remelting
     processes.
     5.1.2 The cladding metal may be metallurgically bonded to
     the base metal by any method that will produce a clad steel that
     will conform to the requirements of this specification.
     5.1.3 For explosively bonded products, the alloy cladding
     metal may be comprised of two or more separate alloy plates
     or sheets completely welded together to form a single fabricated
     component.
     5.2 Heat Treatment—Unless a specific heat treatment is
     required by the cladding material or base steel specification, or
     unless otherwise agreed upon by the purchaser and
     manufacturer, the clad plate shall be furnished in a condition
     that is appropriate for the cladding alloy, base metal, or both.
280. Chemical Composition
     6.1 The composite plate may conform to any desired combination
     cladding metal and base metal as described in 6.2 and
     6.3, and as agreed upon between the purchaser and the
     manufacturer.
     6.2 Cladding Metal—The nickel or nickel-base alloy cladding
     metal specified shall conform to the requirements as to
     chemical composition prescribed for the respective metal in
     Specifications B127, B162, B168, B333, B409, B424, B443,
     B463, B575, B582, and B625, or other nickel-base alloy as
     agreed upon by the purchaser and manufacturer.
     6.3 Base Metal—The base metal shall be carbon steel or
     low-alloy steel conforming to the ASTM specifications for
     steels for either pressure vessels or general structural
     applications, or other, as agreed upon by the purchaser and
     manufacturer. The base metal shall conform to the chemical
     requirements of the specification to which it is ordered.
281. Mechanical Properties
     7.1 Tensile Requirements:
     7.1.1 The tensile properties shall be determined by a tension
     test of the composite plate for clad plates that meet all of the
     following conditions.
     (1) The nominal composite gage is less than or equal to 11/2
     in (38 mm).
     TABLE 1 Weights for Component Materials
     Density Weight per Square
     Foot for Material
     1 in. (25.4 mm)
     lb/in.3 g/cm3 in Thickness, lb
     Steel 0.283 7.83 40.80
     Nickel 0.321 8.88 46.22
     Nickel-copper alloy 0.319 8.83 45.94
     Nickel-chromium-iron
     alloy
     0.307 8.49 44.21
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-265 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     392
     (2) The specified minimum tensile strength of the base
     steel is less than or equal to 70 000 psi (485 MPa).
     (3) The specified minimum yield strength of the base steel
     is less than or equal to 40 000 psi (275 MPa).
     (4) The tensile properties thus determined shall not be less
     than the minimum and not more than 5000 psi (35 MPa) over
     the maximum prescribed in the specification for the base steel
     used. All other tensile test requirements of the specification for
     the base steel shall be met.
     7.1.2 The tensile properties shall be determined by a
     tension test of the base steel only for clad plates that meet one
     of the following conditions. The properties thus determined
     shall meet all of the tensile test requirements for the base steel.
     (1) The composite gage is greater than 11/2 in. (38 mm).
     (2) The specified minimum tensile strength of the base
     steel is greater than 70 000 psi (485 MPa).
     (3) The specified minimum yield strength of the base steel
     is greater than 40 000 psi (275 MPa).
     7.1.3 If the cladding is for corrosion allowance only, the
     cladding need not be included in the tensile test. The tensile
     properties thus determined shall meet the base steel requirements.
     7.2 Test for strength of the bond, when required, must be
     specified by the purchaser and shall consist of one of the
     following.
     7.2.1 Shear Strength—When required by the purchaser, the
     minimum shear strength of the alloy cladding and base metals
     shall be 20 000 psi (140 MPa). The shear test, when specified,
     shall be made in the manner indicated in Fig. 1. The minimum
     cladding thickness for shear testing shall be 0.075 in. (1.9 mm)
     exclusive as ordered. Testing for shear strength for clad plates
     with minimum cladding thickness of 0.075 in (1.9 mm) or less
     shall be permitted upon agreement between the purchaser and
     the manufacturer.
     7.2.2 Bond Strength—As an alternative to the shear strength
     test provided in 7.2.1 or when agreed upon by the purchaser
     and the manufacturer, or both, three bend tests shall be made
     with the alloy cladding in compression to determine the quality
     of the bond. These bend tests shall be made in the manner of
     the tension tests indicated in Fig. 2 and shall be bent through an
     angle of 180° to the bend diameters provided for in either
     Specification A6/A6M or Specification A20/A20M (Appendix
     X4, or equivalent), as applicable. At least two of the three tests
     shall show not more than 50 % separation on both edges of the
     bent portion. Greater separation shall be cause for rejection.
     7.3 Methods and practices relating to mechanical testing
     required by this specification shall be in accordance with the
     Test Methods and Definitions of A370.
282. Number of Tests and Retests
     8.1 One or more tension tests, as required by the specifications
     for the base metal and when specified, one shear test or
     three bond bend tests shall be made, representing each plate as
     rolled. Each specimen shall be in the final condition of heat
     treatment required for the plate, including any SPWHT if
     required.
     8.2 If any test specimen shows defective machining or
     develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
     substituted.
283. Test Specimens
     9.1 The tension test specimens shall conform to the requirements
     prescribed in the specifications for the base metal.
     9.2 Bend test specimens for the alternative bond strength
     tests shall be taken at right angles to its longitudinal axis.
     Metric Equivalents
     in. mm in. mm
     0.005 0.127 1 25.4
     1/8 3.17 21/2 64.5
     3/4 19.1 3 76.2
     FIG. 1 Test Specimen and Method of Making Shear Test of Clad
     Plate
     Metric Equivalents
     in. mm in. mm
     0.01 0.254 11/2 38.1
     1/8 3.17 2 50.8
     1/4 6.35 3 76.2
     1 25.4 8 203.2
     NOTE 1—When necessary, it is permissible to use a narrower specimen,
     but in such a case the reduced portion shall be not less than 1 in. in width.
     NOTE 2—Punch marks for measuring elongation after fracture shall be
     made on the flat or on the edge of the specimen and within the parallel
     section; either a set of nine punch marks 1 in. apart, or one or more sets
     of 8-in. punch marks may be used.
     NOTE 3—The dimension t is the thickness of the test specimen as
     provided for in the applicable material specifications.
     FIG. 2 Standard Rectangular Test Specimens with 8-in. Gage
     Length
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-265
     393
     9.3 When required by the purchaser, the shear test specimen
     shall be taken near a top or bottom corner of the plate as rolled,
     parallel to its longitudinal axis, or other location that is
     representative of the final product.
     9.4 For plates 11/2 in. (38 mm) and under in thickness,
     tension test specimens shall be the full thickness of the
     material, except as specified in 7.1.2 and 7.1.3.
     9.5 For plates over 11/2 in. (38 mm) in thickness, tension
     tests shall be of the form shown in Fig. 3 and shall be of all
     base steel conforming to the requirements of the specification
     for the base steel.
     9.6 The bend test specimen used for bond strength determination
     shall be 11/2 in. (38 mm) by not more than 3/4 in. (19 mm)
     in thickness and shall be machined to the form and dimensions
     shown in Fig. 2, or may be machined with both edges parallel.
     In reducing the thickness of the specimen, both the alloy
     cladding and the base steel shall be machined so as to maintain
     the same ratio of clad metal to base steel as is maintained in the
     plate, except that the thickness of the clad material need not be
     reduced below 1/8 in. (3.1 mm). The sides of the bend test
     specimen used for bond strength determination may have the
     corners rounded to a radius not over 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) for plates,
     2 in. (50 mm) and under in thickness, and not over 1/8 in. (3.1
     mm) for plates over 2 in. (50 mm) in thickness.
284. Product Analysis
     10.1 Product analysis may be required for the cladding alloy
     on finished product. Chemical analysis may be accomplished
     by wet chemical or instrumental procedures. If wet chemical
     procedures are used, millings may be taken only when the
     composite plate thickness is sufficient to permit obtaining
     millings without danger of contamination from the adjacent
     layer. If spectrometric procedures are used, the sample shall be
     exposed on the center line of the cladding when there is
     sufficient cladding thickness available so that there is no
     contamination from the adjacent base metal.
     10.2 If product analysis is specified by the purchaser for the
     cladding alloy, it shall be made on a sample taken from the
     finished product or a broken test specimen. For wet chemical
     analysis, in order to avoid contamination by the base plate
     metal, millings of cladding samples shall be taken from the test
     coupon by removal and discard of all the base metal plus 40 %
     of the cladding thickness from the bonded side, not to exceed
     1/16 in. (1.6 mm). The material shall be cleaned and sufficient
     millings taken to represent the full cross-section of the remainder.
     If there is insufficient cladding thickness available to
     spectrographically expose on the center line of the cladding
     without contamination, 50 % of the cladding shall be removed
     and the sample exposed on this surface.
     10.3 The results of the product analysis shall conform to the
     requirements of standards referenced in Section 2.
     10.4 Methods and practices relating to chemical analysis
     required by this specification shall be in accordance with the
     Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology of A751.
     10.5 Results of the product analysis for the backing steel
     when required shall conform to the requirements of Section 7
     of Specification A20/A20M or A6/A6M, as applicable.
285. Permissible Variations
     11.1 Permissible variations except for thickness shall be in
     accordance with Specification A20/A20M or A6/A6M as
     applicable based on the backing specification.
     11.2 Minimum thickness of the alloy cladding metal and of
     the backing steel, or of the total composite plate shall be as
     required by purchase order documents when ordered to minimum
     thickness.
     11.3 Permissible variation in thickness when ordered to
     nominal thicknesses shall be 0.01 in. (0.3 mm) under each for
     backing steel or total composite, and 0.03 in. (0.8 mm) under
     for the alloy cladding.
     11.4 Permissible variations for excess thickness of the total
     composite shall be the greater of 0.125 in. (3 mm) or 10 % of
     the total composite thickness ordered and may occur in either
     backing steel, cladding, or both, provided the minimum for
     each is met.
     11.5 More restrictive or less restrictive permissible variations
     may be agreed upon by the purchaser and the manufacturer.
286. Workmanship Finish, and Appearance
     12.1 The material shall be free of injurious defects and shall
     have a workmanlike appearance.
     12.2 Unless otherwise specified, the clad surface may be
     supplied as-rolled, blasted (descaled by means of sand, grit,
     shot or wire followed by pickling), or 100 % conditioned.
287. Bond Quality
     13.1 The cladding metal shall be integrally and continuously
     bonded to the base metal.
     Metric Equivalents
     in. mm in. mm
     0.003 0.076 3/8 9.53
     0.005 0.127 0.50 12.7
     0.01 0.254 2 50.8
     1/8 3.18 21/4 64.5
     NOTE 1—The gage length and fillets shall be as shown, but the ends
     may be of any shape to fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way
     that the load shall be axial. The reduced section shall have a gradual taper
     from the ends toward the center, with the ends 0.003 to 0.005 in. larger in
     diameter than the center.
     FIG. 3 Standard Round Tension Tests Specimen with 2-in. Gage
     Length
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-265 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     394
     13.2 Inspection:
     13.2.1 Clad plates less than 3/8 in. (10 mm) total minimum
     composite thickness shall be visually inspected for bond
     integrity prior to shipment.
     13.2.2 Clad plates 3/8 in. (10 mm) and thicker total minimum
     composite thickness, and when specified by the purchaser, clad
     plates less than 3/8 in. (10 mm) total minimum composite
     thickness, shall be ultrasonically inspected for bond integrity
     prior to shipment in accordance with the Procedures and
     Methods of Specification A578/A578M.
     13.2.3 Areas of non-bond detected visually shall be explored
     ultrasonically to determine the extent of the condition in
     accordance with 13.2.2. For purposes of defining non-bond, the
     cladding shall be interpreted to be unbonded when there is
     complete loss of back reflection accompanied by an echo
     indication from the plane of the interface of the clad and
     backing steel. Areas within 1 in. (25 mm) of a cut edge on the
     plate that contain indications exceeding 50 % of the back
     reflection at the bond interface shall be considered to be
     unbonded.
     13.2.4 Extent of ultrasonic examination shall be at the
     discretion of the manufacturer and sufficient enough to provide
     the quality level required by the purchaser. Plates may be
     ordered with 100 % coverage (see Supplementary Requirement
     S12).
     13.3 Quality Levels:
     13.3.1 Class 1—No single unbonded area exceeding 1 in.
     (25 mm) in its longest dimension with total unbonded area not
     to exceed 1 % of the total cladded surface area.
     13.3.2 Class 3—No single unbonded area exceeding 3 in.
     (75 mm) in its longest dimension with total unbonded area not
     to exceed 3 % of the total cladded surface area.
     13.3.3 Class 5—No single unbonded area exceeding 9 in.2
     (58 cm2) with total unbonded area not to exceed 5 % of the
     total cladded surface area.
     13.3.4 The class to be supplied shall be listed on the
     purchase order. When none has been specified, plates shall be
     furnished as Class 5 at the option of the manufacturer.
288. Welding
     14.1 All welding which is a part of the delivered product,
     including any made in the fabrication of the cladding alloy
     component, shall be performed with a procedure and welders
     or welding operators that are qualified in accordance with
     Section IX of the ASME Code.
     14.2 The material manufacturer may repair defects in cladding
     by welding provided the following requirements are met:
     14.2.1 When specified in the purchase order, prior approval
     shall be obtained from the purchaser.
     14.2.2 The defective area shall be removed and the area
     prepared for repair shall be examined by a liquid penetrant
     method to ensure all defective area has been removed. Method
     of test and acceptance standard shall be as agreed upon
     between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
     14.2.3 The repair weld shall be deposited in accordance
     with a welding procedure and welding materials suitable for
     the cladding material. The surface condition of the repaired
     area shall be restored to a condition similar to the rest of the
     cladding.
     14.2.4 The repaired area shall be examined by a liquid
     penetrant method in accordance with 14.2.2.
     14.2.5 The location and extent of the weld repairs together
     with the repair procedure and examination results shall be
     transmitted as a part of the certification.
289. General Requirements for Delivery
     15.1 Material furnished under this specification shall conform
     to the applicable requirements of Specification A6/A6M
     or A20/A20M as appropriate for the backing metal.
     15.2 In the event of conflicts between this specification and
     the general delivery requirement specification for the backing
     steel, this specification shall apply.
290. Certification
     16.1 The chemical analysis of the base metal and the alloy
     cladding shall be certified to the purchaser by the clad plate
     manufacturer.
     16.2 The results of the tests in Section 7 and any other tests
     required by the purchase order shall be reported to the
     purchaser.
     16.3 Compliance with the clad quality level of 13.3 shall be
     certified. Reports shall include the results of ultrasonic inspection
     when Supplementary Requirement S12 is specified.
     16.4 Compliance with any applicable construction code
     shall be certified and the appropriate documentation provided
     when appropriate in the case of explosively bonded clad
     produced using welded alloy cladding components (see 4.1.9
     and 4.1.11).
291. Product Marking
     17.1 Except as specified in 17.2, plates shall be marked in
     accordance with the requirements of Specification A6/A6M or
     A20/A20M for the backing steel as applicable, the cladding
     alloy designation, and this specification number.
     17.2 For double-clad material or for material under 3/8 in.
     (6.35 mm) nominal in thickness or for clad plates provided
     with conditioned surfaces, the marking specified in 17.1 shall
     be legibly stenciled instead of stamped when the material is
     shipped with the alloy surface up.
292. Keywords
     18.1 alloy cladding; bond strength; carbon steel; clad steel
     plate; low-alloy steel; nickel; nickel-base alloy
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-265
     395
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     Supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified on the order. A list of standardized
     supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser are included in Specification
     A20/A20M. Several of those considered suitable for use with this specification are listed below by
     title. Other tests may be performed by agreement between the supplier and the purchaser.
     S2. Product Analysis
     S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical
     Test Coupons
     S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test
     S12. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
     A578/A578M
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL FORGINGS FOR
     PRESSURE VESSEL COMPONENTS
     SA-266/SA-266M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A266/A266M-13.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-266/SA-266M
     397
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-266/SA-266M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     398
     Standard Specification for
     Carbon Steel Forgings for Pressure Vessel Components
293. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers four grades of carbon steel
     forgings for boilers, pressure vessels, and associated equipment.
     NOTE 1—Designations have been changed as follows:
     Current Formerly
     Grade 1 Class 1
     Grade 2 Class 2
     Grade 3 Class 3
     Grade 4 Class 4
     1.2 Supplementary requirements are provided for use when
     additional testing or inspection is desired. These shall apply
     only when specified individually by the purchaser in the order.
     1.3 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
     each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
     system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
     values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
     with the standard.
     1.4 Unless the order specifies the applicable “M” specification
     designation, the material shall be furnished to the inchpound
     units.
294. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A275/A275M Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination of
     Steel Forgings
     A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
     of Steel Products
     A788/A788M Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements
     A1058 Test Methods for Mechanical Testing of Steel
     Products—Metric
     E112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
     E165/E165M Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for
     General Industry
     E381 Method of Macroetch Testing Steel Bars, Billets,
     Blooms, and Forgings
     2.2 Other Standard:
     ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX
295. Ordering Information and General Requirements
     3.1 In addition to the ordering information required by
     Specification A788/A788M, the purchaser shall include with
     the inquiry and order a detailed drawing, sketch, or written
     description of the forging.
     3.2 Material supplied to this specification shall conform to
     the requirements of Specification A788/A788M, which outlines
     additional ordering information, manufacturing
     requirements, testing and retesting methods and procedures,
     marking, certification, product analysis variations, and additional
     supplementary requirements.
     3.3 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
     with the requirements of Specification A788/A788M, the
     requirements of this specification shall prevail.
     3.4 For hubbed flat heads and tube sheets ordered for ASME
     Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code application, Supplementary
     Requirement S12 of Specification A788/A788M shall be
     specified in addition to Supplementary Requirement S8 of this
     specification.
296. Materials and Manufacture
     4.1 The steel shall be made in accordance with the Melting
     Process Section of Specification A788/A788M. A sufficient
     discard shall be made to secure freedom from injurious pipe
     and undue segregation.
     4.2 The material shall be forged as close as practical to the
     specified shape and size.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-266/SA-266M
     399
     4.3 The finished product shall be a hot-worked forging as
     defined by Specification A788/A788M.
297. Machining
     5.1 Surfaces shall be machined as designated by the purchaser.
     Unmachined surfaces shall be sufficiently free of scale
     to permit inspection.
     5.2 Machining may be performed either prior to or after heat
     treatment at the option of the manufacturer unless specified in
     accordance with Supplementary Requirement S1.
298. Heat Treatment
     6.1 After forging and before reheating for heat treatment,
     the forgings shall be cooled in such a manner as to prevent
     injury and to accomplish transformation.
     6.2 All forgings shall be annealed, normalized, or normalized
     and tempered, but alternatively may be liquid quenched
     and tempered when mutually agreed upon between the manufacturer
     and the purchaser. When tempering is performed, it
     shall be at a subcritical temperature, but no less than 1100°F
     [595°C].
     6.3 A multiple stage austenitizing procedure may be used
     whereby the forging is first fully austenitized and liquid
     quenched, followed by reheating within the intercritical temperature
     range to partially reaustenitize, and again liquid
     quenched. On completion of the austenitizing/quenching
     cycles, tempering at a temperature between 1100°F [595°C]
     and the lower critical temperature shall follow.
     NOTE 2—Although liquid quenching from the austenitizing temperatures
     is more effective in enhancing impact properties, air cooling from the
     austenitizing temperatures is also beneficial and may be used instead of
     the normalizing procedure in 6.2.
299. Chemical Composition
     7.1 Heat Analysis—The heat analysis obtained from sampling
     in accordance with Specification A788/A788M shall
     comply with Table 1 except that the additional features of
     Supplementary Requirements S11 and S12 shall also apply as
     individually specified in the ordering information.
     7.2 Product Analysis—The purchaser may use the product
     analysis provision of Specification A788/A788M to obtain a
     product analysis from a forging representing each heat or
     multiple heat.
300. Mechanical Properties
     8.1 General Requirements—Except when otherwise specified
     in accordance with Supplementary Requirement S2, the
     material shall conform to the requirements for mechanical
     properties prescribed in Table 2 when tested in accordance with
     the latest issue of Test Methods and Definitions A370 or Test
     Methods A1058 when the M suffix standard has been specified.
     The largest obtainable tension test specimen as specified in Test
     Methods and Definitions A370 or Test Methods A1058, as
     applicable, shall be used.
     8.1.1 Except when otherwise specified in accordance with
     Supplementary Requirement S2, the longitudinal axis of the
     specimens shall be parallel to the direction of major working of
     the forging. For upset-disc forgings, the longitudinal axis of the
     test specimen shall be in the tangential direction.
     8.1.1.1 The longitudinal axis of the specimen shall be
     located midway between the parallel surfaces of the test
     extension if added to the periphery of disks or midway between
     the center and surface of solid forgings. For hollow forgings,
     the longitudinal axis of the specimens shall be located midway
     between the center and outer surfaces of the wall. When
     separately forged test blocks are employed as defined in 8.1.3,
     the tension test specimens shall be taken from a location that
     represents the midwall of the heaviest section of the production
     forgings. When specimens are required from opposite ends,
     they shall be taken from the diagonal corners of an axial plane.
     8.1.2 Except as specified herein, tests for acceptance shall
     be made after heat treatment has been completed. When the
     ends of the cylindrical forgings are closed in by reforging, the
     cylindrical forgings may be annealed, normalized, or normalized
     and tempered and tested prior to reforging. After
     reforging, the entire forging shall be reheat-treated in the same
     manner and at the same temperature range as employed when
     the forging was heat-treated prior to certification testing.
     8.1.3 When mutually agreed upon between manufacturer
     and purchaser, test specimens may be machined from a
     specially forged block suitably worked and heat treated with
     the production forgings. Such a special block shall be obtained
     from an ingot, slab, or billet from the same heat used to make
     the forgings it represents. This block shall receive essentially
     the same type of hot working and forging reduction as the
     production forgings; however, a longitudinally forged bar with
     dimensions not less than T by T by 3T may be used to represent
     a ring forging. The dimension T shall be representative of the
     heaviest effective cross section of the forging. For quenched
     and tempered forgings for which tests are required at both ends
     by 8.2.2.3 and 8.2.2.4, separately forged test blocks are not
     allowed.
     NOTE 3—In using separately forged test blocks, attention is drawn to the
     effect of mass differences between the production forgings and the test
     blocks.
     TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
     Composition, %
     Grades 1 and 2 Grade 3 Grade 4
     Carbon, max 0.30 0.35 0.30
     Manganese 0.40–1.05 0.80–1.35 0.80–1.35
     Phosphorus, max 0.025 0.025 0.025
     Sulfur, max 0.025 0.025 0.025
     Silicon 0.15–0.35 0.15–0.35 0.15–0.35
     TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
     Grade 1 Grades
     2 and 4
     Grade 3
     Tensile strength, min, ksi
     [MPa]
     60–85
     [415–585]
     70–95
     [485–655]
     75–100
     [515–690]
     Yield strength (0.2 % offset),
     min, ksi [MPa]
     30
     [205]
     36
     [250]
     37.5
     [260]
     Elongation in 2 in. [62.5
     mm], min, %
     23
     [21]
     20
     [18]
     19
     [17]
     Reduction of area, min, % 38 33 30
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-266/SA-266M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     400
     8.2 Specific Requirements—The number and location of
     tests are based on forging length, weight, and heat treatment,
     and shall be as prescribed below. The length and weight to be
     used for this purpose shall be the shipped length and weight of
     forgings produced individually or the aggregate shipped length
     and weight of all pieces cut from a multiple forging.
     8.2.1 Annealed, Normalized, or Normalized and Tempered
     Steel Forgings:
     8.2.1.1 For forgings weighing 5000 lb [2250 kg] or less at
     the time of heat treatment, one tension test shall be taken from
     one forging per heat in each heat–treatment charge. When heat
     treatment is performed in continuous-type furnaces with suitable
     temperature controls and equipped with recording pyrometers
     so that complete heat-treatment records are available, a
     tempering charge may be considered as any continuous run not
     exceeding an 8-h period.
     8.2.1.2 For forgings and forged bars weighing over 5000 lb
     [2250 kg] at the time of heat treatment, one tension test shall be
     taken from each forging.
     8.2.2 Quenched and Tempered Forgings:
     8.2.2.1 For quenched and tempered forgings weighing 5000
     lb [2250 kg] or less at the time of heat treatment, but not
     exceeding 12 ft [3.7 m] in length, one tension test shall be
     taken from one forging per heat in each heat–treatment charge.
     When heat treatment is performed in continuous-type furnaces
     with suitable temperature controls and equipped with recording
     pyrometers so that complete heat-treatment records are
     available, a tempering charge may be considered as any
     continuous run not exceeding an 8-h period.
     8.2.2.2 For quenched and tempered forgings and forged bars
     weighing over 5000 lb [2250 kg] to 10 000 lb [4500 kg] at the
     time of heat treatment, but not exceeding 12 ft [3.7 m] in
     length, one tension test shall be taken from each forging.
     8.2.2.3 For quenched and tempered forgings and forged bars
     that exceed 12 ft [3.7 m] in length, one tension test shall be
     taken from each end of each forging.
     8.2.2.4 For quenched and tempered forgings and forged bars
     weighing more than 10 000 lb [4500 kg] at the time of heat
     treatment, two tension test specimens shall be taken from each
     forging. These shall be offset 180° from each other except that
     if the length of the forging, excluding test prolongations,
     exceeds 12 ft [3.7 m], then one specimen shall be taken from
     each end of the forging.
301. Repair Welding
     9.1 Repair welding of forgings is permissible only at the
     option of the purchaser. If repair welding is performed, welders
     and weld procedures shall be qualified in accordance with
     Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
302. Certification
     10.1 In addition to the mandatory certification requirements
     of Specification A788/A788M, the heat treatment cycle data
     shall be included.
303. Product Marking
     11.1 Each forging shall be identified in accordance with the
     Marking Section of Specification A788/A788M. In addition,
     the forging shall be marked following the grade designation by
     the letter “A” for annealed, “N” for normalized, “NT” for
     normalized and tempered, and “S” for liquid quenched and
     tempered, as applicable.
304. Keywords
     12.1 pressure vessel service; steel forgings—carbon
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the
     purchaser in the inquiry, contract, or order. Details of these supplementary requirements shall be
     agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
     S1. Rough Turning and Boring
     S1.1 The position of the rough turning and boring in the
     sequence of manufacturing operations shall be as specified by
     the purchaser.
     S2. Alternative Tension Test Orientation
     S2.1 In lieu of the requirements of Section 8, the longitudinal
     axis of the test specimens shall be transverse to the
     direction of major working of the forging. The results shall
     conform with requirements of Table 2, with the exception of
     the ductility limits that shall be as follows:
     Grade 1 2 and 4 3
     Elongation in 2 in. [62.5 mm], min, % 20 [18] 19 [17] 18 [16]
     Reduction of area, min, % 30 25 25
     S3. Hydrostatic Test
     S3.1 A hydrostatic pressure test shall be applied. The details
     of the test, including its position in the sequence of manufacturing
     operations, shall be specified.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-266/SA-266M
     401
     S4. Magnetic Particle Examination
     S4.1 All accessible surfaces of the finished forging shall be
     examined by a magnetic particle method. The method shall be
     in accordance with Practice A275/A275M. Acceptance limits
     shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
     purchaser.
     S5. Liquid Penetrant Examination
     S5.1 After forgings have been heat treated by liquid quenching
     and tempering, all accessible surfaces shall be inspected for
     quench cracks by the liquid penetrant method in accordance
     with Test Method E165/E165M as an alternative to magnetic
     particle examination.
     S6. Macroetch Test
     S6.1 A sample forging shall be sectioned and etched to
     show flow lines and internal imperfections. The test shall be
     conducted in accordance with Method E381. Details of the test
     shall be agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
     purchaser.
     S7. Product Analysis
     S7.1 A product analysis in accordance with Section 7 shall
     be made from one randomly selected forging representing each
     size and shape of forging on the order. If the analysis fails to
     comply, each forging shall be checked or the lot rejected. All
     results shall be reported to the purchaser.
     S8. Specimen Location on Forged Hubs
     S8.1 Forged hubs to be butt-welded to shells shall be forged
     in such a manner as to provide in the hub the full minimum
     tensile strength and elongation specified for the material, in a
     direction parallel to the axis of the vessel. A tension specimen
     (subsize if necessary) shall be taken in this direction and as
     close to the finished hub outside diameter as practical.
     S9. Hardness
     S9.1 The purchaser may check the Brinell hardness of the
     forging at any location on the surface of the forging, and the
     hardness shall be within the following limits:
     Grade Brinell Hardness Range HBW
     1 121 to 170
     2 and 4 137 to 197
     3 156 to 207
     S10. Grain Size
     S10.1 The austenitic grain size of the steel shall be 1 to 5 as
     determined using Test Methods E112.
     S11. Restriction on Residual Elements (Applicable to Heat
     Analysis)
     S11.1 Nickel, chromium, and molybdenum shall be determined
     and shall not exceed the following limits:
     Nickel 0.25 % max
     Chromium 0.20 % max
     Molybdenum 0.08 % max
     S12. Restriction on Carbon (Applicable to Grade I)
     S12.1 The carbon content shall be 0.30 % max.
     S13. Impact Tests
     S13.1 Charpy impact tests shall be made. The number and
     location of the tests, minimum properties, and test temperatures
     shall be specified.
     S13.2 The specimens shall be machined and tested in
     accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A370.
     S13.3 Retests may be conducted in accordance with Section
     10 of Specification A788/A788M.
     S14. Individual Forging
     S14.1 Forgings, whether identical or not, shall be produced
     individually. They shall not be forged in multiples and separated
     prior to or after heat treatment.
     S14.2 The shape and size of individual forgings shall be
     agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser by
     means of a forging drawing or the purchase order.
     S15. Carbon Equivalancy
     S15.1 The heat analysis including the residual element
     restrictions of S1 in Specification A788/A788M shall be
     limited such that the carbon equivalent shall not exceed 0.45
     for Grade 1 or 0.50 for Grade 2 or 4 when calculated in
     accordance with the following formula:
     CE5 %C1
     %Mn
     6 1
     %Cr1%Mo1%V
     5 1
     %Ni1%Cu
     15
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS AND WELDED
     FERRITIC AND MARTENSITIC STAINLESS STEEL
     TUBING FOR GENERAL SERVICE
     SA-268/SA-268M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A268/A268M-10.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-268/SA-268M
     403
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-268/SA-268M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     404
     Standard Specification for
     Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless
     Steel Tubing for General Service
305. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers a number of grades of
     nominal-wall-thickness, stainless steel tubing for general
     corrosion-resisting and high-temperature service. Most of these
     grades are commonly known as the “straight-chromium” types
     and are characterized by being ferromagnetic. Two of these
     grades, TP410 and UNS S 41500 (Table 1), are amenable to
     hardening by heat treatment, and the high-chromium, ferritic
     alloys are sensitive to notch-brittleness on slow cooling to
     ordinary temperatures. These features should be recognized in
     the use of these materials. Grade TP439 is used primarily for
     hot-water tank service and does not require post-weld heat
     treatment to prevent attack of the heat affected zone.
     1.2 An optional supplementary requirement is provided, and
     when desired, shall be so stated in the order.
     1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
     SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
     system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
     shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
     from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the
     standard. The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M”
     designation of this specification is specified in the order.
306. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A480/A480M Specification for General Requirements for
     Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate,
     Sheet, and Strip
     A763 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular
     Attack in Ferritic Stainless Steels
     A1016/A1016M Specification for General Requirements for
     Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic Alloy Steel, and Stainless
     Steel Tubes
     E213 Practice for Ultrasonic Testing of Metal Pipe and
     Tubing
     E273 Practice for Ultrasonic Testing of the Weld Zone of
     Welded Pipe and Tubing
307. Terminology
     3.1 Lot Definitions:
     3.1.1 For flange and flaring requirements, the term lot
     applies to all tubes, prior to cutting, of the same nominal size
     and wall thickness that are produced from the same heat of
     steel. If final heat treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot
     shall include only those tubes of the same size and from the
     same heat that are heat treated in the same furnace charge. If
     the final heat treatment is in a continuous furnace, the number
     of tubes of the same size and from the same heat in a lot shall
     be determined from the size of the tubes as given in Table 2.
     3.1.2 For tensile and hardness test requirements, the term lot
     applies to all tubes, prior to cutting, of the same nominal
     diameter and wall thickness that are produced from the same
     heat of steel. If final heat treatment is in a batch-type furnace,
     a lot shall include only those tubes of the same size and the
     same heat that are heat treated in the same furnace charge. If
     the final heat treatment is in a continuous furnace, a lot shall
     include all tubes of the same size and heat, heat treated in the
     same furnace at the same temperature, time at heat, and furnace
     speed.
308. Ordering Information
     4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
     requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this
     specification. Such requirements may include, but are not
     limited to, the following:
     4.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
     4.1.2 Name of material (seamless or welded tubes),
     4.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
     4.1.4 Size (outside diameter and nominal wall thickness),
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-268/SA-268M
     405
     TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
     Grade TP405 TP410 TP429 TP430 TP443 TP446–1 TP446–2A . . . TP409
     UNS
     Designation S40500 S41000 S42900 S43000 S44300 S44600 S44600 S40800 S40900
     Element Composition, %
     C, max 0.08 0.15 0.12 0.12 0.20 0.20 0.12 0.08 0.08
     Mn, max 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.50 1.50 1.00 1.00
     P, max 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.045 0.045
     S, max 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.045 0.030
     Si, max 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
     Ni 0.50 max . . . . . . . . . 0.75 max 0.75 max 0.50 max 0.80 max 0.50 max
     Cr 11.5–14.5 11.5–13.5 14.0–16.0 16.0–18.0 18.0–23.0 23.0–27.0 23.0–27.0 11.5–13.0 10.5–11.7
     Mo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Al 0.10–0.30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Cu . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.90–1.25 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.25 0.25 . . . . . .
     Ti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 × C min; 6 × C min;
     1.10 max 0.75 max
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     SA-268/SA-268M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     406
     TABLE 1 Continued
     Grade TP439 . . . . . . TP430 Ti
     TP
     XM-27
     TP
     XM-33A
     18Cr-
     2Mo 29-4 29-4-2 26-3-3 25-4-4 … . . . . . . . . . . . . TP468
     UNS
     Designation
     S43035 S43932 S41500B S43036 S44627 S44626 S44400 S44700 S44800 S44660 S44635 S44735 S32803 S40977 S43940 S42035 S46800
     Element Composition, %
     C, max 0.07 0.030 0.05 0.10 0.01A 0.06 0.025 0.010 0.010 0.030 0.025 0.030 0.015C 0.03 0.03 0.08 0.030
     Mn, max 1.00 1.00 0.5–1.0 1.00 0.40 0.75 1.00 0.30 0.30 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.5 1.50 1.00 1.00 1.00
     P, max 0.040 0.040 0.03 0.040 0.02 0.040 0.040 0.025 0.025 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.020 0.040 0.040 0.045 0.040
     S, max 0.030 0.030 0.03 0.030 0.02 0.020 0.030 0.020 0.020 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.005 0.015 0.015 0.030 0.030
     Si, max 1.00 1.00 0.60 1.00 0.40 0.75 1.00 0.20 0.20 1.00 0.75 1.00 0.50 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
     Ni 0.50 max 0.50 3.5–5.5 0.75 max 0.5D max 0.50 max 1.00 max 0.15 max 2.0–2.5 1.0–3.50 3.5–4.5 1.00 max 3.0–4.0 0.30–1.00 . . . 1.0–2.5 0.50
     Cr 17.00– 17.0–19.0 11.5–14.0 16.00– 25.0–27.5 25.0–27.0 17.5–19.5 28.0–30.0 28.0–30.0 25.0–28.0 24.5–26.0 28.00– 28.0–29.010.50–12.5017.50–18.50 13.5–15.518.00–20.00
     19.00 19.50 30.00
     Mo … … 0.5–1.0 … 0.75–1.50 0.75–1.50 1.75–2.50 3.5–4.2 3.5–4.2 3.0–4.0 3.5–4.5 3.60–4.20 1.8–2.5 . . . . . . 0.2–1.2 . . .
     Al, max 0.15 0.15 . . . … … … … … … … … … . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Cu, max … … . . . … 0.2 0.20 … 0.15 0.15 … … … . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     N, max 0.04 0.030 (Ti

• Cb)
  {0.20 + 4
  (C + N)}
  min.;
  0.75 max
  . . . … 0.015 0.040 0.035 0.020E 0.020E 0.040 0.035 0.045 0.020 0.030 . . . . . . 0.030
  Ti 0.20 + 4
  (C
  . . . 5 × C
  min;
  … 7 × (C +
  N)

(Ti + Cb) … … (Ti + Cb)

(Ti + Cb)

(Ti + Cb)

. . . . . . 0.10–0.60 0.30–0.50 0.07–0.30

• N)
  min;
  0.75
  max
  but no less 0.20 + 4 0.20–1.00 0.20 + 4 0.20–1.00
  1.10
  max
  than
  0.20
  (C + N) and 6 × (C + N) and 6 ×
  min;
  1.00
  min;
  0.80
  (C + N) min to (C+ N)
  max max min 0.80
  max
  min
  Cb … . . . … 0.05–0.20 … … … … … … … 0.15–0.50F . . . (3 × %C
• 0.30)
  min
  . . . 0.10–0.60

(Ti + Cb)

0.20
+4(C+N)
min;0.80
max
A For small diameter or thin walls, or both, tubing, where many drawing passes are required, a carbon maximum of 0.015 % is necessary. Small outside diameter tubes are defined as those less than 0.500 in. [12.7 mm]
in outside diameter and light wall tubes as those less than 0.049 in. [1.2 mm] in average wall thickness (0.040 in. [1 mm] in minimum wall thickness).
B Plate version of CA6NM.
C Carbon plus nitrogen = 0.30 max.
D Nickel plus copper.
E Carbon plus nitrogen = 0.025 % max.
F Cb / (C + N) = 12 min.
Manufacture
Stockholder
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
Distributor
ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-268/SA-268M
407
4.1.5 Length (specific or random),
4.1.6 Optional requirements (hydrostatic or nondestructive
electric test, Section 16),
4.1.7 Test report required (Certification Section of Specification
A1016/A1016M),
4.1.8 Specification designation,
4.1.9 Intergranular corrosion test, and
4.1.10 Special requirements.

5. General Requirements
   5.1 Material furnished under this specification shall conform
   to the applicable requirements of Specification A1016/
   A1016M unless otherwise provided herein.
6. Manufacture
   6.1 The tubes shall be made by the seamless or welded
   process with no filler metal added.
7. Heat Treatment
   7.1 As a final heat treatment, tubes shall be reheated to a
   temperature of 1200 °F [650 °C] or higher and cooled (as
   appropriate for the grade) to meet the requirements of this
   specification.
   7.2 The martensitic grade UNS S 41500 shall be reheated to
   a temperature of 950 °F [510 °C] or higher and cooled as
   appropriate to meet the requirements of this specification.
8. Chemical Composition
   8.1 The steel shall conform to the chemical requirements
   prescribed in Table 1.
9. Product Analysis
   9.1 An analysis of either one billet or one length of flatrolled
   stock or one tube shall be made from each heat. The chemical
   composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements
   specified.
   9.2 The product analysis tolerance of the Chemical Requirements
   Table of A480/A480M shall apply. The product analysis
   tolerance is not applicable to the carbon content for material
   with a specified maximum carbon of 0.04 % or less.
   9.3 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests of
   two additional billets, lengths of flat-rolled stock or tubes shall
   be made. Both retests for the elements in question shall meet
   the requirements of the specification; otherwise all remaining
   material in the heat or lot shall be rejected or, at the option of
   the producer, each billet or tube may be individually tested for
   acceptance. Billets, lengths of flat-rolled stock or tubes which
   do not meet the requirements of the specification shall be
   rejected.
10. Tensile Requirements
    10.1 The material shall conform to the tensile properties
    prescribed in Tables 3 and 4.
11. Hardness Requirements
    11.1 The tubes shall have a hardness number not to exceed
    those prescribed in Table 5.
    TABLE 2 Number of Tubes in a Lot Heat Treated by the
    Continuous Process
    Size of Tube
    Size of Lot
    2 in. [50.8 mm] and over in outside diameter and
    0.200 in. [5.1 mm] and over in wall thickness
    not more than 50 tubes
    Less than 2 in. [50.8 mm] but over 1 in. [25.4 mm]
    in outside diameter or over 1 in. [25.4 mm] in
    outside diameter and under 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] in
    wall thickness
    not more than 75 tubes
    1 in. [25.4 mm] or less in outside diameter not more than 125 tubes
    TABLE 3 Tensile Requirements
    Grade and UNS Designation
    Tensile
    strength,
    min,
    ksi [MPa]
    Yield
    strength,
    min,
    ksi [MPa]
    ElongationA
    ,
    B
    in 2 in. or
    50 mm,
    min, %
    TP405
    S40500
    60 [415] 30 [205] 20
    . . .
    S40800
    55 [380] 30 [205] 20
    TP410
    S41000
    60 [415] 30 [205] 20
    TP429, TP430, and TP430 Ti
    S429000, S 43000, and S 43036
    60 [415] 35 [240] 20
    TP443
    S44300
    70 [485] 40 [275] 20
    TP446-1
    S44600
    70 [485] 40 [275] 18
    TP446-2
    S44600
    65 [450] 40 [275] 20
    TP409
    S40900
    55 [380] 25 [170] 20
    TP439
    S43035
    60 [415] 30 [205] 20
    S43932 60 [415] 30 [205] 20
    . . .
    S41500
    115 [795] 90 [620] 15
    TPXM-27
    S44627
    65 [450] 40 [275] 20
    TPXM-33
    S44626
    68 [470] 45 [310] 20
    18Cr-2Mo
    S44400
    60 [415] 40 [275] 20
    29-4 and 29-4-2
    S44700 and S44800
    80 [550] 60 [415] 20
    26-3-3
    S44660
    85 [585] 65 [450] 20
    25-4-4
    S44635
    90 [620] 75 [515] 20
    . . .
    S44735
    75 [515] 60 [415] 18
    28-2-3.5
    S32803 87 [600] 72 [500] 16
    S40977 65 [450] 41 [280] 18
    S43940 62 [430] 36 [250] 18
    S42035 80 [550] 55 [380] 16
    TP468
    S46800
    60 [415] 30 [205] 22
    A For tubing smaller than 1/2 in. [12.7 mm] in outside diameter, the elongation
    values given for strip specimens in Table 2 shall apply. Mechanical property
    requirements do not apply to tubing smaller than 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in outside
    diameter or with walls thinner than 0.015 in. [0.4 mm].
    B For longitudinal strip tests a deduction of 0.90 % for TP446–1 and S44735 and
    1.00 % for all other grades shall be made from the basic minimum elongation for
    each 1/32 in. [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickness below 5/16 in. [8 mm]. The
    following table gives the computed minimum values:
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-268/SA-268M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    408
12. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
    12.1 Variations in outside diameter, wall thickness, and
    length from those specified shall not exceed the amounts
    prescribed in Table 6.
    12.2 The permissible variations in outside diameter given in
    Table 6 are not sufficient to provide for ovality in thin-walled
    tubes, as defined in the Table. In such tubes, the maximum and
    minimum diameters at any cross section shall deviate from the
    nominal diameter by no more than twice the permissible
    variation in outside diameter given in Table 6; however, the
    mean diameter at that cross section must still be within the
    given permissible variation.
    12.3 When the specified wall is 2 % or less of the specified
    outside diameter, the method of measurement is in accordance
    with the agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer
    (see Note 1).
    NOTE 1—Very thin wall tubing may not be stiff enough for the outside
    diameter to be accurately measured with a point contact test method, such
    as with the use of a micrometer or caliper. When very thin walls are
    specified, “go”–“no go” ring gages are commonly used to measure
    diameters of 11/2 in. [38.1 mm] or less. A0.002-in. [0.05-mm] additional
    tolerance is usually added on the “go” ring gage to allow clearance for
    sliding. On larger diameters, measurement is commonly performed with a
    pi tape. Other test methods such as optical test methods may also be
    considered.
13. Surface Condition
    13.1 All tubes shall be free of excessive mill scale, suitable
    for inspection. A slight amount of oxidation will not be
    considered as scale. Any special finish requirements shall be
    subject to agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
14. Mechanical Tests Required
    14.1 Tension Tests—One tension test shall be made on a
    specimen for lots of not more than 50 tubes. Tension tests shall
    be made on specimens from two tubes for lots of more than 50
    tubes.
    14.2 Flaring Test (for Seamless Tubes)— One test shall be
    made on specimens from one end of one tube from each lot of
    finished tubes. The minimum expansion of the inside diameter
    shall be 10 %. For tubes over 8 in. [203.2 mm] in outside
    diameter, or tubes with wall thickness 3/8 in. [9.52 mm] and
    over, the flattening test may be performed instead of the flaring
    test unless the flaring test is specified in the purchase order.
    14.3 Flange Test (for Welded Tubes)— One test shall be
    made on specimens from one end of one tube from each lot of
    finished tubes. For tubes over 8 in. [203.2 mm] in outside
    diameter, or tubes with wall thickness 3/8 in. [9.52 mm] and
    over, the flattening test may be performed instead of the flange
    test unless the flange test is specified in the purchase order.
    14.4 Hardness Test—Brinell or Rockwell hardness tests
    shall be made on specimens from two tubes from each lot.
    14.5 When more than one heat is involved, the tension,
    flaring, flanging, and hardness test requirements shall apply to
    each heat.
    14.6 Reverse Flattening Test—For welded tubes, one reverse
    flattening test shall be made on a specimen from each
    1500 ft [450 m] of finished tubing.
15. Intergranular Corrosion Test
    15.1 If intergranular corrosion testing is specified in the
    purchase order, the test shall be made in accordance with
    TABLE 4 Minimum Elongation Values
    Wall Thickness
    ElongationA in 2 in.
    or 50 mm, min, %
    in. mm
    TP446–1
    and
    S44735 S41500
    All Other
    Grades
    5/16 [0.312] 8 18 15 20
    9/32 [0.281] 7.2 17 14 19
    1/4 [0.250] 6.4 16 14 18
    7/32 [0.219] 5.6 15 13 17
    3/16 [0.188] 4.8 14 12 16
    5/32 [0.156] 4 13 11 15
    1/8 [0.125] 3.2 13 11 14
    3/32 [0.094] 2.4 12 10 13
    1/16 [0.062] 1.6 11 9 12
    0.062–0.035, excl 1.6–0.9 10 8 12
    0.035–0.022, excl 0.9–0.6 10 8 11
    0.022–0.015, incl 0.6–0.4 10 8 11
    ACalculated elongation requirements shall be rounded to the nearest whole
    number.
    Note—The above table gives the computed minimum values for each 1/32 in. [0.8
    mm] decrease in wall thickness. Where the wall thickness lies between two values
    shown above, the minimum elongation value shall be determined by the following
    equation:
    Grade Equation
    TP446–1 and S44735 E = 28.8t + 9.00 [E = 1.13t + 9.00]
    S41500 E = 24t + 7.5
    All other grades E = 32t + 10.00 [E = 1.25t + 10.00]
    where:
    E = elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, %.
    t = actual thickness of specimen, in. [mm].
    TABLE 5 Hardness Requirements.
    Grade UNS Designation
    Brinell
    Hardness,
    max
    Rockwell
    Hardness,
    B Scale, max
    TP405 S40500 207 95
    . . . S40800 207 95
    TP410 S41000 207 95
    TP429, TP430, and
    TP430 TI
    S42900, S 43000,
    and S 43036
    190 90
    TP443 S44300 207 95
    TP446-1 and
    TP446-2
    S44600 207 95
    TP409 S40900 207 95
    TP439 S43035A 190 90
    S43932 190 90
    . . . S41500 295B 32
    TPXM-33 and
    TPXM-27
    S44626 and
    S44627
    241 100
    18CR-2Mo S44400 217 95
    29-4 and 29-4-2 S44700 and
    S44800
    207 100
    26-3-3 S44660 265 25B
    25-4-4 S44635 270 27B
    . . . S44735 . . . 100
    28-2-3.5 S32803 240 100
    . . . S40977 180 88
    . . . S43940 180 88
    . . . S42035 180 88
    A Editorially corrected October 2000.
    B Rockwell hardness, C scale.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-268/SA-268M
    409
    Practices A763, using samples prepared as agreed upon between
    the seller and the purchaser.
16. Hydrostatic or Nondestructive Electric Test
    16.1 Each tube, seamless or welded, shall be subjected to
    the nondestructive electric test or the hydrostatic test. The type
    of test to be used shall be at the option of the manufacturer,
    unless otherwise specified in the purchase order.
17. Product Marking
    17.1 In addition to the marking described in Specification
    A1016/A1016M, the marking shall indicate whether the tubing
    is seamless or welded.
18. Keywords
    18.1 ferritic stainless steel; seamless steel tube; stainless
    steel tube; steel tube; welded steel tube
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
    inquiry, contract, or order.
    S1. Pneumatic Test
    S1.1 The tubing shall be examined by a pneumatic test
    (either air under water or pneumatic leak test) in accordance
    with Specification A1016/A1016M.
    S2. Additional Testing of Welded Tubing for 100 % Joint
    Efficiency in Certain ASME Applications (see Note
    S2.1)
    NOTE S2.1—When specified, the special testing in this supplement is
    intended for special ASME applications. It is not mandatory for all ASME
    applications.
    S2.1 Where this supplement is specified in the purchase
    order, in certain ASME applications it is permissible to use
    100 % joint efficiency for the longitudinal weld, provided the
    following additional requirements are met:
    S2.1.1 Each tube shall be subjected to an ultrasonic inspection
    employing Practices E273 or E213 with the rejection
    criteria referenced in Specification A1016/A1016M.
    S2.1.2 If Practice E273 is employed, a 100 % volumetric
    inspection of the entire length of each tube shall also be
    performed using one of the non-destructive electric tests
    permitted by Specification A1016/A1016M.
    S2.1.3 The test methods described in the supplement may
    not be capable of inspecting the end portions of tubes. This
    condition is referred to as end effect. This portion, as determined
    by the manufacturer, shall be removed and discarded.
    S2.1.4 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
    A1016/A1016M,“ S2” shall be added after the grade designation.
    TABLE 6 Permissible Variations in Dimensions
    Group
    Size, Outside
    Diameter, in.
    [mm]
    Permissible Variations
    in Outside
    Diameter,
    in. [mm]
    Permissible
    Variations in Wall
    Thickness,A %
    Permissible Variations in Cut
    Length, in.B [mm]
    Thin-Walled Over Under TubesC
    1 Up to 1/2 [12.7], excl ±0.005 [0.13] ±15 1/8 [3] 0 . . .
    2 1/2 to 11/2 [12.7 to 38.1], excl ±0.005 [0.13] ±10 1/8 [3] 0 less than 0.065 in. [1.6 mm]
    nominal
    3
    11/2 to 31/2 [38.1 to 88.9],
    excl
    ±0.010 [0.25] ±10 3/16 [5] 0 less than 0.095 in. [2.4 mm]
    nominal
    4
    31/2 to 51/2 [88.9 to 139.7],
    excl
    ±0.015 [0.38] ±10 3/16 [5] 0 less than 0.150 in. [3.8 mm]
    nominal
    5
    51/2 to 8 [139.7 to 203.2],
    incl
    ±0.030 [0.76] ±10 3/16 [5] 0 less than 0.150 in. [3.8 mm]
    nominal
    AWhen tubes as ordered require wall thicknesses 3/4 in. [19 mm] or over, or an inside diameter 60 % or less of the outside diameter, a wider variation in wall thickness is
    required. On such sizes a variation in wall thickness of 12.5 % over or under will be permitted.
    For tubes less than 1/2 in. [12.7 mm] in inside diameter which cannot be successfully drawn over a mandrel, the wall thickness may vary ±15 % from that specified.
    B These tolerances apply to cut lengths up to and including 24 ft [7.3 m]. For lengths greater than 24 ft [7.3 m], the above over tolerances shall be increased by 1/8 in. [3
    mm] for each 10 ft [3 m] or fraction thereof over 24 ft, or 1/2 in. [13 mm], whichever is lesser.
    C Ovality provisions of 12.2 apply.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR STAINLESS STEEL BARS AND
    SHAPES
    SA-276
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A276-97.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-276
    411
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-276 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    412
    SPECIFICATION FOR STAINLESS STEEL BARS AND
    SHAPES
    SA-276
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A 276-97.)
19. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers hot-finished or cold-finished
    bars except bars for reforging (Note 1). It includes
    rounds, squares, and hexagons, and hot-rolled or extruded
    shapes, such as angles, tees, and channels in the more
    commonly used types of stainless steels. The free-machining
    types (Note 2), for general corrosion resistance and
    high-temperature service, are covered in a separate specification.
    NOTE 1 —For bars for reforging, see Specification A 314.
    NOTE 2 —For free-machining stainless bars designed especially for
    optimum machinability, see Specification A 582/A 582M.
    NOTE 3 —There are standards covering high nickel, chromium, austenitic
    corrosion, and heat resisting alloy materials. These standards are under
    the jurisdiction of ASTM Subcommittee B02.07 and may be found in
    Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 02.04.
    1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be
    regarded as the standard.
20. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A 314 Specification for Stainless Steel Billets and Bars for
    Forging
    A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    A 484/A 484M Specification for General Requirements
    for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings
    A 582/A 582M Specification for Free-Machining Stainless
    Steel Bars
    A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
    Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
    E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)
    2.2 Other Document:
    SAE J1086 Recommended Practice for Numbering Metals
    and Alloys
21. Ordering Information
    3.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify
    all requirements that are necessary for material ordered
    under this specification. Such requirements may include
    but are not limited to the following:
    3.1.1 Quantity (weight or number of pieces);
    3.1.2 Name of material: stainless steel;
    3.1.3 Form (bars, angles, etc.);
    3.1.4 Condition (Section 5.1);
    3.1.5 Finish (Section 4 of Specification
    A 484/A 484M);
    3.1.6 Surface preparation of shapes (Section 4 of
    Specification A 484/A 484M);
    3.1.7 Applicable dimensions including size, thickness,
    width, and length;
    3.1.8 Cross section (round, square, etc.);
    3.1.9 Type or UNS designation (Table 1);
    3.1.10 ASTM designation and date of issue; and
    3.1.11 Whether bars are to be rolled as bars or cut
    from strip or plate.
    3.1.12 Test for magnetic permeability when specified
    by customer purchase order when ordering Types 201
    and 205.
    3.1.13 Special requirements.
    NOTE 4—Atypical ordering description is as follows: 5,000 lb (2268 kg)
    Stainless Steel Bars, Annealed and Centerless Ground, 11/2 in. (38.10 mm)
    Round, 10 to 12 ft (3.05 to 3.66 m) in length, Type 304, ASTM Specification
    A 276 dated_________, End use: machined valve parts.
22. General Requirements
    4.1 In addition to the requirements of this specification,
    all requirements of the current edition of Specification
    A 484/A 484M shall apply. Failure to comply with the
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-276
    413
    general requirements of Specification A 484/A 484M constitutes
    nonconformance to this specification.
23. Manufacture
    5.1 Condition:
    5.1.1 Bars shall be furnished in one of the following
    conditions listed in the Mechanical Requirements table:
    5.1.1.1 Condition A — Annealed.
    5.1.1.2 Condition H — Hardened and tempered at
    a relatively low temperature.
    5.1.1.3 Condition T — Hardened and tempered at
    a relatively high temperature.
    5.1.1.4 Condition S—Strain Hardened–Relatively
    light cold work.
    5.1.1.5 Condition B — Relatively severe cold
    work.
24. Chemical Composition
    6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements for
    chemical composition specified in Table 1.
    6.2 Methods and practices relating to chemical analysis
    required by this specification shall be in accordance with
    Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751.
25. Mechanical Properties Requirements
    7.1 The material shall conform to the mechanical test
    requirements specified in Table 2.
    7.2 The martensitic grades shall be capable of meeting
    the hardness requirements after heat treating as specified
    in Table 3.
    7.3 Hardness measurements, when required, shall be
    made at a location midway between the surface and the
    center of the cross section.
26. Magnetic Permeability
    8.1 When required by the purchase order, the magnetic
    permeability of Types 201 and 205 in the annealed condition
    shall not exceed 1.2 as tested by a Severn-type indicator.
27. Certification
    9.1 Upon request of the purchaser in the contract or
    order, the producer’s certification that the material was
    manufactured and tested in accordance with this specification,
    together with a certified report of the test results shall
    be furnished at the time of the shipment.
28. Keywords
    10.1 austenitic stainless steel; austenitic-ferritic duplex
    stainless steel; ferritic stainless steel; martensitic stainless
    steel; stainless steel bars; stainless steel shapes.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-276 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    414
    TABLE 1
    CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTSA
    UNS
    DesignationB Type
    Composition, %
    Carbon Manganese Phosphorous Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Nitrogen Other Elements
    Austenitic Grades
    S20100 201 0.15 5.50–7.50 0.060 0.030 1.00 16.00–18.00 3.50–5.50 . . . 0.25 . . .
    S20161 . . . 0.15 4.00–6.00 0.040 0.040 3.00–4.00 15.00–18.00 4.00–6.00 . . . 0.08–0.20 . . .
    S20200 202 0.15 7.50–10.00 0.060 0.030 1.00 17.00–19.00 4.00–6.00 . . . 0.25 . . .
    S20500 205 0.12–25 14.00–15.50 0.060 0.030 1.00 16.50–18.00 1.00–1.70 . . . 0.32–0.40 . . .
    S20910 XM–19 0.06 4.00–6.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 20.50–23.50 11.50–13.50 1.50–3.00 0.20–0.40 Cb 0.10–0.30,
    V 0.10–0.30
    S21800 . . . 0.10 7.00–9.00 0.060 0.030 3.50–4.50 16.00–18.00 8.00–9.00 . . . 0.08–0.18 . . .
    S21900 XM–10 0.08 8.00–10.00 0.060 0.030 1.00 19.00–21.50 5.50–7.50 . . . 0.15–0.40 . . .
    S21904 XM–11 0.04 8.00–10.00 0.060 0.030 1.00 19.00–21.50 5.50–7.50 . . . 0.15–0.40 . . .
    S24000 XM–29 0.08 11.50–14.50 0.060 0.030 1.00 17.00–19.00 2.25–3.75 . . . 0.20–0.40 . . .
    S24100 XM–28 0.15 11.00–14.00 0.060 0.030 1.00 16.50–19.00 0.50–2.50 . . . 0.20–0.45 . . .
    S24565 . . . 0.030 5.0–7.0 0.030 0.010 1.00 23.00–25.00 16.0–18.0 4.0–5.0 0.4–0.6 Cb 0.10
    S28200 . . . 0.15 17.00–19.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.00–19.00 . . . 0.75–1.25 0.40–0.60 Cu 0.75–1.25
    S30200 302 0.15 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.00–19.00 8.00–10.00 . . . 0.10 . . .
    S30215 302B 0.15 2.00 0.045 0.030 2.00–3.00 17.00–19.00 8.00–10.00 . . . . . . . . .
    S30400 304 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.00–20.00 8.00–10.50 . . . 0.10 . . .
    S30403 304Lc 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.00–20.00 8.00–12.00 . . . 0.10 . . .
    S30451 304N 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.00–20.00 8.00–10.50 . . . 0.10–0.16 . . .
    S30452 XM-21 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.00–20.00 8.00–10.50 . . . 0.16–0.30 . . .
    S30453 304LN 0.03 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.00–20.00 8.00–12.00 . . . 0.10–0.16 . . .
    S30454 . . . 0.03 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.00–20.00 8.00–12.00 . . . 0.16–0.30 . . .
    S30500 305 0.12 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.00–19.00 10.50–13.00 . . . . . . . . .
    S30800 308 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 19.00–21.00 10.00–12.00 . . . . . . . . .
    S30815 . . . 0.10 0.80 0.040 0.030 1.40–2.00 20.00–22.00 10.00–12.00 . . . 0.14–0.20 Ce 0.03–0.08
    S30900 309 0.20 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.00–24.00 12.00–15.00 . . . . . . . . .
    S30908 309S 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.00–24.00 12.00–15.00 . . . . . . . . .
    S30940 309Cb 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.00–24.00 12.00–16.00 . . . 0.10 Cb+Ta 10C-1.10
    S31000 310 0.25 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.50 24.00–26.00 19.00–22.00 . . . . . . . . .
    S31008 310S 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.50 24.00–26.00 19.00–22.00 . . . . . . . . .
    S31040 310Cb 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.50 24.00–26.00 19.00–22.00 . . . 0.10 Cb+Ta 10C-1.10
    S31254 . . . 0.020 1.00 0.030 0.010 0.80 19.50–20.50 17.50–18.50 6.00–6.50 0.18–0.22 Cu 0.50–1.00
    S31400 314 0.25 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.50–3.00 23.00–26.00 19.00–22.00 . . . . . . . . .
    S31600 316 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.00–18.00 10.00–14.00 2.00–3.00 0.10 . . .
    S31603 316LC 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.00–18.00 10.00–14.00 2.00–3.00 0.10 . . .
    S31635 316Ti 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.00–18.00 10.00–14.00 2.00–3.00 0.10 Ti 5(C+N)-0.70
    S31640 316Cb 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.00–18.00 10.00–14.00 2.00–3.00 0.10 Cb+Ta 10C-1.10
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-276
    415
    TABLE 1
    CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTSA (CONT’D)
    UNS
    DesignationB Type
    Composition, %
    Carbon Manganese Phosphorous Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Nitrogen Other Elements
    Austenitic-Ferritic Grades
    S31651 316N 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.00–18.00 10.00–14.00 2.00–3.00 0.10–0.16 . . .
    S31653 316LN 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.00–18.00 10.00–14.00 2.00–3.00 0.10–0.16 Cu 0.16–0.30
    S31654 . . . 0.03 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.00–18.00 10.00–14.00 2.00–3.00 . . . . . .
    S31700 317 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.00–20.00 11.00–15.00 3.00–4.00 0.10 . . .
    S31725 . . . 0.03 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.00–20.00 13.50–17.50 4.0–5.0 0.10 Cu 0.75
    S31726 . . . 0.03 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.00–20.00 13.50–17.50 4.0–5.0 0.10–0.20 Cu 0.75
    S32100 321 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.00–19.00 9.00–12.00 . . . . . . Ti 5(C+N)-0.70D
    S32550 . . . 0.04 1.50 0.040 0.030 1.00 24.0–27.0 4.50–6.50 2.9–3.9 0.10–0.25 Cu 1.50-2.50
    S34700 347 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.00–19.00 9.00–13.00 . . . . . . Cb+Ta 10C min
    S34800 348 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.00–19.00 9.00–13.00 . . . . . . Cb+Ta 10C min,
    Ta 0.10 Co 0.20
    S31100 XM-26 0.06 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 25.00–27.00 6.00–7.00 . . . . . . Ti 0.25
    S31803 . . . 0.030 2.00 0.030 0.020 1.00 21.00–23.00 4.50–6.50 2.50–3.50 0.08–0.20 . . .
    S32304 . . . 0.030 2.50 0.040 0.030 1.00 21.50–24.50 3.00–5.50 0.05–0.60 0.05–0.20 Cu 0.05–0.60
    S32760E . . . 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.010 1.00 24.00–26.00 6.00–8.00 3.00–4.00 0.20–0.30 Cu 0.05–1.00
    W 0.50–1.00
    Ferritic Grades
    S40500 405 0.08 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 11.50–14.50 . . . . . . . . . Al 0.10–0.30
    S42900 429 0.12 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 14.00–16.00 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    S43000 430 0.12 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 16.00–18.00 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    S44400 . . . 0.025 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 17.5–19.5 1.00 1.75–2.50 0.035 Ti+Cb 0.20+4
    (C+N)-0.80
    S44600 446 0.20 1.50 0.040 0.030 1.00 23.00–27.00 . . . . . . 0.25 . . .
    S44627 XM-27F 0.010G 0.40 0.020 0.020 0.40 25.00–27.50 0.50 max. 0.75–1.50 0.015G Cu 0.20
    Cb 0.05–0.20
    S44700 . . . 0.010 0.30 0.025 0.020 0.20 28.00–30.00 0.15 max. 3.50–4.20 0.020 C+N 0.025
    Cu 0.15
    S44800 . . . 0.010 0.30 0.025 0.020 0.20 28.00–30.00 2.00–2.50 3.50–4.20 0.020 C+N 0.25
    Cu 0.15
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    SA-276 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    416
    TABLE 1
    CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTSA (CONT’D)
    UNS
    DesignationB Type
    Composition, %
    Carbon Manganese Phosphorous Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Nitrogen Other Elements
    Martensitic Grades
    S40300 403 0.15 1.00 0.040 0.030 0.50 11.50–13.00 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    S41000 410 0.15 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 11.50–13.50 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    S41040 XM-30 0.18 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 11.50–13.50 . . . . . . . . . Cb 0.05–0.30
    S41400 414 0.15 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 11.50–13.50 1.25–2.50 . . . . . . . . .
    S41500 H 0.05 0.50–1.00 0.030 0.030 0.60 11.50–14.00 3.50–5.50 0.50–1.00 . . . . . .
    S42000 420 over 0.15 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 12.00–14.00 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    S42010 . . . 0.15–0.30 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 13.50–15.00 0.35–0.85 0.40–0.85 . . . . . .
    S43100 431 0.20 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 15.00–17.00 1.25–2.50 . . . . . . . . .
    S44002 440A 0.60–0.75 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 16.00–18.00 . . . 0.75 . . . . . .
    S44003 440B 0.75–0.95 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 16.00–18.00 . . . 0.75 . . . . . .
    S44004 440C 0.95–1.20 1.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 16.00–18.00 . . . 0.75 . . . . . .
    S50400 9 0.15 0.30–0.60 0.030 0.030 0.75–1.00 8.00–10.00 . . . 0.90–1.10 . . . . . .
    NOTES
    A Maximum, unless range or minimum is indicated.
    B Designations established in accordance with Practice E 527 and SAE J1086.
    C For some applications, the substitution of Type 304L for Type 304, or Type 316L for Type 316 may be undesirable because of design, fabrication, or service requirements. In such cases,
    the purchaser should so indicate on the order.
    D Nitrogen content is to be reported for this grade.
    E % Cr + 3.3  % Mo + 16  % N = 40.
    F Nickel plus copper shall be 0.50 % max.
    G Product analysis tolerance over the maximum limit for carbon and nitrogen shall be 0.002 %.
    H Wrought version of CA 6NM.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-276
    417
    TABLE 2
    MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
    Type Condition Finish Diameter or Thickness, in. (mm)
    Tensile
    Strength, Min.
    ksi MPa
    Yield
    Strength,A
    Min.
    ksi MPa
    Elongation in
    2 in.
    (50 mm),B
    or 4D Min.B %
    Reduction
    of Area,C
    Min., %
    Brinell
    Hardness,D
    Max.
    Austenitic Grades
    201, 202 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 75 515 40 275 40 45 . . .
    S20161 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 125 860 50 345 40 40 255
    205 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 100 690 60 414 40 50 . . .
    XM-19 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 100 690 55 380 35 55 . . .
    As hotrolled
    hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    up to 2 (50.8), incl. 135 930 105 725 20 50 . . .
    over 2 to 3 (50.8 to 76.2), incl. 115 795 75 515 25 50 . . .
    over 3 to 8 (76.2 to 203.2), incl. 100 690 60 415 30 50 . . .
    S21800 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 95 655 50 345 35 55 241
    XM-10, XM-11 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 90 620 50 345 45 60 . . .
    XM-29 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 100 690 55 380 30 50 . . .
    XM-28 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 100 690 55 380 30 50 . . .
    S24565 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 115 795 60 415 35 40 . . .
    S28200 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 110 760 60 410 35 55 . . .
    302, 302B, 304, 304LN,
    305, 308, 309, 309S,
    309Cb, 310, 310S,
    310Cb, 314, 316,
    316LN, 316Cb, 316Ti,
    317, 321, 347, 348
    A hot-finished
    cold-finished
    all
    up to 1/2 (12.70) incl.
    over 1/2 (12.70)
    75E
    90
    75E
    515
    620
    515
    30E
    45
    30E
    205
    310
    205
    40G
    30
    30
    50
    40
    40
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    304L, 316L A hot-finished
    cold-finished
    all
    up to 1/2 (12.70) incl.
    over 1/2 (12.70)
    70
    90
    70
    485
    620
    485
    25
    45
    25
    170
    310
    170
    40G
    30
    30
    50
    40
    40
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    SA-276 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    418
    TABLE 2
    MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D)
    Type Condition Finish Diameter or Thickness, in. (mm)
    Tensile
    Strength, Min.
    ksi MPa
    Yield
    Strength,A
    Min.
    ksi MPa
    Elongation in
    2 in.
    (50 mm),B
    or 4D Min.B %
    Reduction
    of Area,C
    Min., %
    Brinell
    Hardness,D
    Max.
    Austenitic Grades (Cont’d)
    304N, 316N A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 80 550 35 240 30 . . . . . .
    202, 302, 304, 304N,
    316, 316N
    B cold-finished up to 3/4 (19.05) incl. 125 860 100 690 12 35 . . .
    over 3/4 (19.05) to 1 (25.40) 115 795 80 550 15 35 . . .
    over 1 (25.40) to 11/4 (31.75) 105 725 65 450 20 35 . . .
    over 11/4 (31.75) to 11/2 (38.10) 100 690 50 345 24 45 . . .
    over 11/2 (38.10) to 13/4 (44.45) 95 655 45 310 28 45 . . .
    304, 304N, 316, 316N S cold-finished up to 2 (50.8) incl.
    over 2 to 21/2 (50.8 to 63.5) incl.
    over 21/2 to 3 (63.5 to 76.2) incl.
    95
    90
    80
    650
    620
    550
    75
    65
    55
    515
    450
    380
    25
    30
    30
    40
    40
    40
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    XM-21, S30454, S31654 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 90 620 50 345 30 50 . . .
    XM-21, S30454, S31654 B cold finished up to 1 (25.40) incl. 145 1000 125 860 15 45 . . .
    over 1 (25.40) to 11/4 (31.75) 135 930 115 795 16 45 . . .
    over 11/4 (31.75) to 11/2 (38.10) 135 895 105 725 17 45 . . .
    over 11/2 (38.10) to 13/4 (44.45) 125 860 100 690 18 45 . . .
    S30815 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 87 600 45 310 40 50 . . .
    S31254 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 95 650 44 300 35 50 . . .
    S31725 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 75 515 30 205 40 . . . . . .
    S31726 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 80 550 35 240 40 . . . . . .
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-276
    419
    TABLE 2
    MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D)
    Type Condition Finish Diameter or Thickness, in. (mm)
    Tensile
    Strength, Min.
    ksi MPa
    Yield
    Strength,A
    Min.
    ksi MPa
    Elongation in
    2 in.
    (50 mm),B
    or 4D Min.B %
    Reduction
    of Area,C
    Min., %
    Brinell
    Hardness,D
    Max.
    Austenitic-Ferritic Grades
    XM-26 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 90 620 65 450 20 55 . . .
    S31803 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 90 620 65 448 25 . . . 290
    S32304 A hot-finished
    cold-finished
    all 87 600 58 400 25 . . . 290
    S32550 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 110 760 80 550 15 . . . 302
    S32760 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 109 750 80 550 25 . . . 290
    S32760 S cold-finished all 125 860 105 720 16 . . . 335
    Ferritic Grades
    405F
    429
    430
    A
    A
    A
    hot-finished
    cold-finished
    hot-finished
    cold-finished
    hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all
    all
    all
    all
    all
    . . .
    . . .
    70
    70
    60
    . . .
    . . .
    480
    480
    415
    . . .
    . . .
    40
    40
    30
    . . .
    . . .
    275
    275
    207
    . . .
    . . .
    20
    16
    20
    . . .
    . . .
    45
    45
    45
    207
    217
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    S44400
    446, XM-27
    S44700
    S44800
    A
    A
    A
    A
    hot-finished
    cold-finished
    hot-finished
    cold-finished
    hot-finished
    cold-finished
    hot-finished
    cold-finished
    all
    all
    all
    all
    all
    all
    all
    all
    60
    60
    65
    65
    70
    75
    70
    75
    415
    415
    450
    450
    480
    520
    480
    520
    45
    45
    40
    40
    55
    60
    55
    60
    310
    310
    275
    275
    380
    415
    380
    415
    20
    16
    20
    16
    20
    15
    20
    15
    45
    45
    45
    45
    40
    30
    40
    30
    217
    217
    219
    219
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    SA-276 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    420
    TABLE 2
    MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D)
    Type Condition Finish Diameter or Thickness, in. (mm)
    Tensile
    Strength, Min.
    ksi MPa
    Yield
    Strength,A
    Min.
    ksi MPa
    Elongation in
    2 in.
    (50 mm),B
    or 4D Min.B %
    Reduction
    of Area,C
    Min., %
    Brinell
    Hardness,D
    Max.
    Martensitic Grades
    403, 410
    403, 410
    XM-30
    403, 410
    XM-30
    414
    A
    T
    T
    H
    A
    A
    hot-finished
    cold-finished
    hot-finished
    cold-finished
    hot-finished
    cold-finished
    hot-finished
    cold-finished
    hot-finished
    cold-finished
    hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all
    all
    all
    all
    all
    all
    all
    all (rounds only)
    all
    all
    all
    70
    70
    100
    100
    125
    125
    120
    120
    70
    70
    . . .
    480
    480
    690
    690
    860
    860
    830
    830
    480
    480
    . . .
    40
    40
    80
    80
    100
    100
    90
    90
    40
    40
    . . .
    275
    275
    550
    550
    690
    690
    620
    620
    275
    275
    . . .
    20
    16
    15
    12
    13
    12
    12
    12
    13
    12
    . . .
    45
    45
    45
    40
    45
    35
    40
    40
    45
    35
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    302
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    235
    . . .
    298
    414 T hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 115 790 90 620 15 45 . . .
    S41500 T hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 115 795 90 620 15 45 295
    420
    S42010
    A
    A
    hot-finished
    cold-finished
    hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all
    all
    all
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    241
    255
    235
    . . . cold-finished all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
    431 A hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    . . .
    285
    . . .
    440A, 440B, and 440C
    9 (S50400)
    A
    A
    hot-finished
    cold-finished
    hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all
    all
    all
    . . .
    . . .
    60
    . . .
    . . .
    415
    . . .
    . . .
    30
    . . .
    . . .
    207
    . . .
    . . .
    30
    . . .
    . . .
    45
    269
    285
    179
    T hot-finished or
    cold-finished
    all 100 690 80 550 14 35 241
    NOTES
    A Yield strength shall be determined by the 0.2% offset in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370. An alternative method of determining yield strength may be used based on
    total extension under load of 0.5%.
    B For some specific products, it may not be practicable to use a 2 in. or 50 mm gage length. The use of sub-size test specimens, when necessary, is permissible in accordance with Test Methods
    and Definitions A 370.
    C Reduction of area does not apply on flat bars 3/16 in. (4.76 mm) and under in thickness as this determination is not generally made in this product size.
    D Or equivalent Rockwell hardness.
    E For extruded shapes of all Cr-Ni grades of Condition A, the yield strength shall be 25 ksi (170 MPa) min., and tensile strength shall be 70 ksi (480 MPa) min.
    F Material shall be capable of being heat treated to a maximum Brinell hardness of 250 when oil quenched from 1750°F (953°C).
    G For shapes having section thickness of 1/2 in. (12.5 mm) or less, 30% min., elongation is acceptable.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-276
    421
    TABLE 3 RESPONSE TO HEAT TREATMENT
    Heat Treatment Hardness
    TemperatureB HRC,
    TypeA °F (°C), Min. Quenchant Min.
    403 1750 (955) Air 35
    410 1750 (955) Air 35
    414 1750 (955) Oil 42
    420 1825 (995) Air 50
    S42010 1850 (1010) Oil 48
    431 1875 (1020) Oil 40
    440A 1875 (1020) Air 55
    440B 1875 (1020) Oil 56
    440C 1875 (1020) Air 58
    NOTES
    A Samples for testing shall be in the form of a section not
    exceeding 3/8 in. (9.50 mm) in thickness.
    B Temperature tolerance is ±25°F (14°C).
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR GRAY IRON CASTINGS FOR
    PRESSURE CONTAINING PARTS FOR TEMPERATURES
    UP TO 650°F (350°C)
    SA-278/SA-278M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A278/A278M-01(R11) except for an editorial change to 5.1.1 and a change to 16.1
    making certification mandatory.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-278/SA-278M
    423
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-278/SA-278M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    424
    Standard Specification for
    Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts for
    Temperatures Up to 650°F (350°C)
29. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers gray iron for castings suitable
    for pressure-containing parts for use at temperatures up to
    650°F (350°C).
    1.2 Classes of Iron:
    1.2.1 Castings of all classes are suitable for use up to 450°F
    (230°C). For temperatures above 450°F and up to 650°F, only
    Class 40, 45, 50, 55, and 60 castings are suitable.
    1.2.2 Castings of all classes are suitable for use up to 230°C.
    For temperatures above 230°C and up to 350°C, only Class
    275, 300, 325, 350, 380, and 415 castings are suitable.
    1.3 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
    each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
    system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
    values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
    with the standard.
30. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A644 Terminology Relating to Iron Castings
    E8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
31. Terminology
    3.1 Definitions of many terms common to gray iron castings
    may be found in Terminology A644.
32. Classification
    4.1 Classification by tensile strength.
    4.1.1 Castings ordered to this specification are classified
    based upon the minimum tensile strength of the iron in ksi, in
    English units. Class 25 has a minimum specified tensile
    strength of 25 ksi.
    4.1.2 Castings ordered to this specification are classified
    based upon the minimum tensile strength of the iron in MPa, in
    Metric units. Class 150 has a minimum specified tensile
    strength of 150 MPa.
33. Ordering Information
    5.1 Orders for material in this specification should include
    the following information:
    5.1.1 ASTM designation and year date,
    5.1.2 Class of iron required and service temperature,
    5.1.3 Quantity,
    5.1.4 Heat Treatment:
    5.1.4.1 Whether or not heat treatment is required for Class
    40, 45, 50, 55, and 60 castings to be used at temperatures at
    450°F or less (see 6.2),
    5.1.4.2 Whether or not heat treatment is required for Class
    275, 300, 325, 350, 380, and 415 castings to be used at
    temperatures at 230°C or less (see 6.2),
    5.1.5 The size of separately cast test bar to be poured (see
    Section 9 and Table 1),
    5.1.6 The size of test specimen to be machined from test
    bars C or S, and
    5.1.7 Special requirements.
34. Materials and Manufacture
    6.1 Castings intended for use above 450°F (230°C) shall be
    stress-relieved by placing them in a suitable furnace at a
    temperature not exceeding 400°F (200°C) and heating them
    uniformly to the temperatures and for the times specified in
    Table 2. The heating and cooling rates shall be uniform and
    shall not be more than 400°F/h (250°C/h) for castings of 1-in.
    (25-mm) maximum section. For heavier sections the maximum
    heating and cooling rates in degrees Fahrenheit per hour shall
    be 400 divided by the maximum section thickness.
    6.2 Heat Treatment and Cooling Rate:
    6.2.1 Castings of Class Nos. 45, 50, 55, and 60, which are to
    be used at temperatures below 450°F, may be heat treated in
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-278/SA-278M
    425
    accordance with 6.1 or they shall be cooled in the mold to
    500°F at an average rate of not more than 100°F/h for castings
    up to 1 in. in section. For heavier sections the maximum
    cooling rate in degrees Fahrenheit per hour shall be 100
    divided by the maximum section thickness.
    6.2.2 Castings of Class Nos. 275, 300, 325, 350, 380, and
    415, which are to be used at temperatures below 230°C, may be
    heat treated in accordance with 6.1 or they shall be cooled in
    the mold to 250°C at an average rate of not more than 50°C/h
    for castings up to 25-mm in section. For heavier sections the
    maximum cooling rate in degrees Celsius per hour shall be
    1250 divided by the maximum section thickness.
35. Chemical Composition
    7.1 Carbon Equivalent:
    7.1.1 Class 40, 45, 50, 55, and 60 castings intended for
    service above 450°F (230°C) shall have a maximum carbon
    equivalent of 3.8 % as calculated from the equation CE = %C

• 0.3 (%Si + %P). The maximum phosphorus and sulfur
  contents shall be 0.25 % and 0.12 %, respectively.
  7.1.2 Class 275, 300, 325, 350, 380, and 415 castings
  intended for service above 230°C shall have a maximum
  carbon equivalent of 3.8 % as calculated from the equation CE
  = %C + 0.3 (%Si + %P). The maximum phosphorus and sulfur
  contents shall be 0.25 % and 0.12 %, respectively.
  7.2 The chemical analysis for total carbon shall be made on
  either chilled cast pencil-type specimens or thin wafers approximately
  1/32 in. thick cut from test coupons. Drillings shall
  not be used because of attendant loss of graphite.

5. Tensile Requirements
   8.1 Iron used in supplying castings to this specification shall
   conform to the tensile requirements prescribed in Table 3 and
   Table 4.
6. Test Bars
   9.1 Separately cast test bars having the dimensions shown in
   Table 1 shall be poured from the same lot as the castings
   represented. The size of the test bar to be poured shall be
   selected by the purchaser using Table 5. In the event no choice
   is made, the selection will be made by the manufacturer.
   9.2 Separately cast test bars shall be heat treated in the same
   furnace together with the castings represented.
   9.3 At the option of the manufacturer, test coupons may be
   removed from the casting at a location agreed upon between
   the manufacturer and purchaser.
   9.4 Castings weighing in excess of 2000 lb may be represented
   either by separately cast test bars (9.1) or by integrally
   cast test bars having a cooling rate closely approximating that
   of the controlling section of the casting.
   9.5 For castings weighing in excess of 10 000 lb or having
   a controlling section greater than 2 in., test bars may be
   removed from the casting or integral projections having a cross
   section no less than the controlling section. The minimum
   tensile strength requirement for tension tests performed on
   either of these test bars shall be 80 % of the specified class.
7. Molding and Pouring Test Bars
   10.1 The test bars shall be cast in dried siliceous sand molds
   maintained at approximately room temperature. A suitable
   design for a mold is shown in Fig. 1.
   TABLE 1 Diameters and Lengths of Cast Test Bars
   Test
   Bar
   As-Cast Diameter, in. (mm) Length, in. (mm)
   Minimum
   (Bottom)
   Maximum
   (Top)
   Minimum
   (Specified)
   Maximum
   (Recommended)
   A 0.88 (23) 0.85 (22) 0.96 (25) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (1.50)
   B 1.20 (33) 1.14 (32) 1.32 (36) 7.0 (150) 9.0 (230)
   C 2.00 (54) 1.90 (53) 2.10 (58) 6.0 (175) 10.0 (255)
   SA
   A All dimensions of Test Bar S shall be agreed upon by the manufacturer and the
   purchaser.
   TABLE 2 Stress Relieving Requirements
   Class Metal Temperature, °F
   (°C)
   Holding Time, hA
   40, 45, 50, 55, 60 1050 to 1200 2 12
   (275, 300, 325, 350,
   380, 415)
   (565 to 650) (2 min)B (12 max)B
   A In no case shall the holding time be less than 1 h/in. of maximum metal
   section, or in excess of 12 h max, dependent upon which governs.
   B In no case shall the holding time be less than 1 h for every 25-mm metal
   section, or in excess of 12 h max, depending upon which governs.
   TABLE 3 Tensile Requirements
   Class Tensile Strength,
   min, ksi
   No. 20 20
   No. 25 25
   No. 30 30
   No. 35 35
   No. 40 40
   No. 45 45
   No. 50 50
   No. 55 55
   No. 60 60
   TABLE 4 Tensile Requirements (SI)
   Class Tensile Strength,
   min, MPa
   No. 150 150
   No. 175 175
   No. 200 200
   No. 225 225
   No. 250 250
   No. 275 275
   No. 300 300
   No. 325 325
   No. 350 350
   No. 380 380
   No. 415 415
   TABLE 5 Separately Cast Test Bars for Use When a Specific
   Correlation Has Not Been Established Between the Test Bar and
   the Casting
   Thickness of the Wall of the Controlling
   Section of the Casting, in. (mm)
   Test Bar
   Under 0.25 (6) S
   0.25 to 0.50 (6 to 12) A
   0.51 to 1.00 (13 to 25) B
   1.01 to 2 (26 to 50) C
   Over 2 (50) S
   Manufacture
   Stockholder
   Distributor
   SA-278/SA-278M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
   426
8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
   11.1 All castings shall be made in a workmanlike manner
   and shall conform to the dimensions on drawings furnished by
   the purchaser. If the pattern is supplied by the purchaser
   without drawings, the dimensions of the casting shall be as
   predicted by the pattern.
   11.2 The surface of the casting shall be free of adhering
   sand, scale, cracks, and hot tears as determined by visual
   examination. Other surface discontinuities shall meet the visual
   acceptance standards specified in the order.
9. Sampling
   12.1 A lot shall consist of one of the following:
   12.1.1 All the metal poured from a single heating in a batch
   type melting furnace,
   12.1.2 All the metal from two or more batch type melting
   furnaces poured into a single ladle or single casting, or
   12.1.3 All the metal poured from a continuous melting
   furnace for a given period of time between changes in charge,
   processing conditions, or aim-for chemistry or 4 h, whichever
   is the shorter period.
   12.1.3.1 The purchaser may agree to extend the 4-h time
   period to 8 h if the manufacturer can demonstrate sufficient
   process control to warrant such an extension.
10. Tension Test Specimens
    13.1 Tension test specimens A and B in Fig. 2 shall be
    machined from test bars A and B in Table 1, respectively.
    13.2 The purchaser shall specify whether test specimen B or
    C is to be machined from test bar C. If no choice is made, the
    manufacturer shall make the selection.
    13.3 The size of the test specimen to be machined from test
    bar S shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and
    purchaser.
11. Number of Tests and Retests
    14.1 One tension test shall be performed on each lot in
    accordance with Test Method E8 and conform to the tensile
    requirements specified.
    14.2 If the results of a valid test fail to conform to the
    requirements of this specification, two retests shall be made. If
    either retest fails to meet the specification requirements, the
    castings represented by these test specimens shall be rejected.
    14.3 If, after testing, a test specimen shows evidence of a
    defect, the results of the test may be invalidated and another
    made on a specimen from the same lot.
12. Repair
    15.1 Any repairs performed on castings produced to this
    specification shall be agreed upon between the manufacturer
    and purchaser.
13. Certification
    16.1 When requested by the purchaser, the manufacturer
    shall furnish his certification stating that the material was
    manufactured, sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance
    with this specification including the year date. The certification
    shall also include the results of all tests performed.
    16.2 A signature is not required on the certification. However,
    the document shall clearly identify the organization
    submitting the certification and the authorized agent of the
    manufacturer who certified the test results. Notwithstanding
    the absence of a signature, the organization submitting the
    certification is responsible for its content.
14. Inspection
    17.1 All tests and inspections required by this specification
    shall be performed by the manufacturer or other reliable
    sources whose services have been contracted for by the
    Number of test bars in a single mold-2 suggested. P—2 in. (50-mm) suggested
    L—see Table 1. N—5/16 in. (8-mm) in diameter, suggested
    D—see Table 1. M—1.5 N, suggested
    W—not less than diameter, D.
    FIG. 1 Suitable Design and Dimensions for Mold for Separately Cast Cylindrical Test Bars for Gray Iron
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-278/SA-278M
    427
    manufacturer. Complete records of all tests and inspections
    shall be maintained by the manufacturer and shall be available
    for review by the purchaser.
15. Rejection and Rehearing
    18.1 Castings which fail to conform to the requirements
    specified when inspected or tested by the purchaser or his agent
    may be rejected. Rejection shall be reported to the manufacturer
    or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of dissatisfaction
    with the test results, the manufacturer or supplier may
    make claim for a rehearing.
16. Product Marking
    19.1 Castings shall have the name of the manufacturer, or
    his recognized trademark, and the class of iron to which it
    conforms, cast or indelibly stamped on a surface indicated by
    the purchaser or in such a position as not to injure the
    usefulness of the casting.
17. Keywords
    20.1 elevated temperature service; gray iron castings; pressure
    containing parts
    Dimensions, in. (mm) Tension Test
    Specimen A
    Tension Test
    Specimen B
    Tension Test
    Specimen C
    G— Length of parallel, min 0.50 (13) 0.75 (20) 1.25 (32)
    D— Diameter 0.500 ± 0.010 (13 ± 0.25) 0.750 ± 0.015 (20 ± 0.4) 1.25 ± 0.025 (32 ± 0.5)
    R— Radius of fillet, min 1 (25) 1 (25) 2 (50)
    A— Length of reduced section, min 11/4 (32) 11/2 (38) 21/4 (57)
    L— Overall length, min 33/4 (95) 4 (100) 63/8 (160)
    C— Diameter of end section, approximate 7/8 (22) 11/4 (32) 17/8 (47)
    E— Length of shoulder, min 1/4 (6) 1/4 (6) 5/16 (8)
    F— Diameter of shoulder 5/8 ± 1/64 (16 ± 0.5) 15/16 ± 1/64 (25 ± 0.5) 17/16 ± 1/64 (36 ± 0.5)
    B— Length of end section A A A
    A Optional to fit holders on testing machine. If threaded, root diameter shall not be less than dimension F.
    FIG. 2 Tension-Test Specimens
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR LOW AND INTERMEDIATE
    TENSILE STRENGTH CARBON STEEL PLATES
    SA-283/SA-283M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A283/A283M-03(R07).)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-283/SA-283M
    429
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-283/SA-283M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    430
    SPECIFICATION FOR LOW AND INTERMEDIATE
    TENSILE STRENGTH CARBON STEEL PLATES
    SA-283/SA-283M
    [Identical with ASTM Specification A 283/A 283M-03(R07).]
18. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers four grades (A, B, C, and
    D) of carbon steel plates of structural quality for general
    application.
    1.2 When the steel is to be welded, a welding procedure
    suitable for the grade of steel and intended use or service
    is to be utilized. See Appendix X3 of Specification
    A 6/A 6M for information on weldability.
    1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
    units are to be regarded separately as the standard. Within
    the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values
    stated in each system are not exactly equivalents, therefore
    each system is to be used independently of the other, without
    combining values in any way.
    1.4 For plate produced from coil and furnished without
    heat treatment or with stress relieving only, the additional
    requirements, including additional testing requirements
    and the reporting of additional test results, of Specification
    A 6/A 6M apply.
    1.5 This specification contains notes or footnotes, or
    both, that provide explanatory material. Such notes and
    footnotes, excluding those in tables and figures do not
    contain any mandatory requirements.
19. Referenced Document
    2.1 ASTM Standard:
    A 6/A 6M Specification for General Requirements for
    Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet
    Piling
20. General Requirements for Delivery
    3.1 Plates furnished under this specification shall conform
    to the requirements of the current edition of Specification
    A 6/A 6M, for the specific date ordered, unless a
    conflict exists in which case this specification shall prevail.
    3.2 Coils are excluded from qualification to this specification
    until they are processed into finished plates. Plates
    produced from coil means plates that have been cut to
    individual lengths from a coil. The processor directly controls,
    or is responsible for, the operation involded in the
    processing of a coil into finished plates. Such operations
    include decoiling, leveling, cutting to length, testing,
    inspection, conditioning, heat treatment (if applicable),
    packaging, marking, loading for shipment, and certification.
    NOTE 1 — For plates produced from coil and furnished without heat
    treatment or with stress relieving only, two test results are to be reported
    for each qualifying coil. Additional requirements regarding plate produced
    from coil are described in Specification A 6/A 6M.
21. Process
    4.1 The steel shall be made by one or more of the
    following processes: open-hearth, basic-oxygen, or electric-
    furnace.
22. Chemical Requirements
    5.1 The heat analysis shall conform to the requirements
    prescribed in Table 1.
    5.2 The steel shall conform on product analysis to the
    requirements prescribed in Table 1, subject to the product
    analysis tolerances in Specification A 6/A 6M.
23. Tensile Requirements
    6.1 Material as represented by the test specimens shall
    conform to the requirements as to tensile properties prescribed
    in Table 2.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-283/SA-283M
    431
    TABLE 1
    CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
    Heat Analysis, %
    Elements Grade A Grade B Grade C Grade D
    Carbon, max 0.14 0.17 0.24 0.27
    Manganese, max 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90
    Phosphorus, max 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035
    Sulfur, max 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
    Silicon
    Plates 11/2 in. [40 mm] and under, max 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40
    Plates over 11/2 in. [40 mm] 0.15–0.40 0.15–0.40 0.15–0.40 0.15–0.40
    Copper, min % when copper is specified 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
    TABLE 2
    TENSILE REQUIREMENTSA
    Grade A Grade B Grade C Grade D
    Tensile strength, ksi [MPa] 45–60 [310–415] 50–65 [345–450] 55–75 [380–515] 60–80 [415–550]
    Yield point, min, ksi [MPa] 24 [165] 27 [185] 30 [205] 33 [230]
    Elongation in 8 in. [200 mm], min, %B 27 25 22 20
    Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min, %B 30 28 25 23
    A See Specimen Orientation under the Tension Tests section of Specification A6/A 6M.
    B For plates wider than 24 in. [600 mm], the elongation requirement is reduced two percentage points. See elongation requirement adjustments
    in the Tension Tests section of Specification A 6/A 6M.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-283/SA-283M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    432
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    Supplementary requirement shall not apply unless specified in the order or contract. Standardized
    supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser are listed in
    Specification A 6/A 6M. Those that are considered suitable for use with this specification
    are listed by title:
    S2. Product Analysis,
    S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of
    Mechanical Test Coupons,
    S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test,
    S6. Drop Weight Test,
    S8. Ultrasonic Examination, and
    S15. Reduction of Area
    S97. Limitation on Rimmed or Capped Steel
    S97.1 The steel shall be other than rimmed or capped.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ð19Þ
    SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES,
    CARBON STEEL, LOW- AND INTERMEDIATE-TENSILE
    STRENGTH
    SA-285/SA-285M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A285/A285M-17.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-285/SA-285M
    433
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-285/SA-285M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    434
    Standard Specification for
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and
    Intermediate-Tensile Strength
24. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers carbon steel plates of lowand
    intermediate-tensile strengths which may be killed or
    semi-killed at the producer’s option. These plates are intended
    for fusion-welded pressure vessels.
    1.2 Plates under this specification are available in three
    grades having different strength levels as follows:
    Grade Tensile Strength, ksi [MPa]
    A 45–65 [310–450]
    B 50–70 [345–485]
    C 55–75 [380–515]
    1.3 The maximum thickness of plates is limited by the
    capacity of the composition to meet the specified mechanical
    property requirements.
    NOTE 1—For killed carbon steels only, refer to the following ASTM
    specifications:
    A299/A299M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel,
    Manganese-Silicon
    A515/A515M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel,
    for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service
    A516/A516M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel,
    for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service
    1.4 For plates produced from coil and furnished without
    heat treatment or with stress relieving only, the additional
    requirements, including additional testing requirements and the
    reporting of additional test results, of Specification A20/A20M
    apply.
    1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must
    be used independently of the other. Combining values from the
    two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification.
    1.6 This international standard was developed in accordance
    with internationally recognized principles on standardization
    established in the Decision on Principles for the
    Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
    issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
    Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
25. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A20/A20M Specification for General Requirements for Steel
    Plates for Pressure Vessels
    A299/A299M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
    Steel, Manganese-Silicon
    A435/A435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
    Examination of Steel Plates
    A515/A515M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
    Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service
    A516/A516M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
    Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service
    A577/A577M Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination
    of Steel Plates
    A578/A578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
    Examination of Rolled Steel Plates for Special Applications
26. General Requirements and Ordering Information
    3.1 Material supplied to this material specification shall
    conform to Specification A20/A20M. These requirements outline
    the testing and retesting methods and procedures, permitted
    variations in dimensions, and mass, quality and repair of
    defects, marking, loading, and ordering information.
    3.2 In addition to the basic requirements of this
    specification, certain supplementary requirements are available
    when additional control, testing, or examination is required to
    meet end use requirements. The purchaser is referred to the
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-285/SA-285M
    435
    listed Supplementary requirements in this specification and to
    the detailed requirements in Specification A20/A20M.
    3.3 Coils are excluded from qualification to this specification
    until they are processed into finished plate. Plates produced
    from coil means plates that have been cut to individual
    lengths from coil. The processor directly controls, or is
    responsible for, the operations involved in the processing of
    coils into finished plates. Such operations include decoiling,
    leveling, cutting to length, testing, inspection, conditioning,
    heat treatment (if applicable), packaging, marking, loading for
    shipment, and certification.
    NOTE 2—For plates produced from coil and furnished without heat
    treatment or with stress relieving only, three test results are reported for
    each qualifying coil. Additional requirements regarding plate produced
    from coil are described in Specification A20/A20M.
    3.4 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
    with the requirements of Specification A20/A20M, the requirements
    of this specification shall prevail.
27. Heat Treatment
    4.1 Plates are normally supplied in the as-rolled condition.
    The plates may be ordered normalized or stress relieved, or
    both.
28. Chemical Composition
    5.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
    chemical composition as given in Table 1.
29. Mechanical Properties
    6.1 Tension Test—The plates, as represented by the tension
    test specimens, shall conform to the requirements given in
    Table 2.
30. Keywords
    7.1 carbon steel plate; low-and-intermediate strength steel
    plate for pressure vessels; steel plate for pressure vessels
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    Supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified in the purchase order.
    A list of standardized supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser is included
    in Specification A20/A20M. Those that are considered suitable for use with this specification are listed
    below by title.
    S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical
    Test Coupons,
    S4. Additional Tension Test,
    S8. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A435/A435M,
    S11. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A577/A577M, and
    S12. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A578/A578M.
    TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
    Elements
    Composition, %
    Grade A Grade B Grade C
    Carbon, maxA 0.17 0.22 0.28
    Manganese, max:
    Heat analysis 0.90 0.90 0.90
    Product analysis 0.98 0.98 0.98
    Phosphorus, maxA 0.025 0.025 0.025
    Sulfur, maxA 0.025 0.025 0.025
    A Applies to both heat and product analyses.
    TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
    Grade A Grade B Grade C
    ksi [MPa] ksi [MPa] ksi [MPa]
    Tensile strength 45–65 [310–450] 50–70 [345–485] 55–75 [380–515]
    Yield strength, minA 24 [165] 27 [185] 30 [205]
    Elongation in 8 in. or [200 mm], min, %B 27 25 23
    Elongation in 2 in. or [50 mm], min, %B 30 28 27
    A Determined by either the 0.2 % offset method or the 0.5 % extension-under-load method.
    B See Specification A20/A20M for elongation adjustment.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-285/SA-285M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    436
    ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    Also listed below are additional optional supplementary requirements suitable for this specification:
    S57. Copper-Bearing
    S57.1 The copper content, by heat analysis shall be
    0.20–0.35 % and by product analysis 0.18–0.37 %.
    S58. Restricted Copper
    S58.1 The maximum incidental copper content by heat
    analysis shall not exceed 0.25 %.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ð19Þ
    SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES,
    CARBON STEEL, MANGANESE-SILICON
    SA-299/SA-299M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A299/A299M-17.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-299/SA-299M
    437
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-299/SA-299M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    438
    Standard Specification for
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon
31. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers manganese-silicon carbon
    steel plates for use in welded boilers and other pressure vessels.
    1.2 Plates under this specification are produced in two
    grades. The specified minimum yield strength decreases for
    thicknesses over 1 in. [25 mm].
    1.3 The maximum thickness of plates is limited only by the
    capacity of the composition to meet the specified mechanical
    property requirements.
    1.4 For plates produced from coil and furnished without
    heat treatment or with stress relieving only, the additional
    requirements, including additional testing requirements and the
    reporting of additional test results, of Specification A20/A20M
    apply.
    1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must
    be used independently of the other. Combining values from the
    two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification.
    1.6 This international standard was developed in accordance
    with internationally recognized principles on standardization
    established in the Decision on Principles for the
    Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
    issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
    Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
32. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A20/A20M Specification for General Requirements for Steel
    Plates for Pressure Vessels
    A435/A435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
    Examination of Steel Plates
    A577/A577M Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination
    of Steel Plates
    A578/A578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
    Examination of Rolled Steel Plates for Special Applications
33. General Requirements and Ordering Information
    3.1 Plates supplied to this product specification shall conform
    to Specification A20/A20M, which outlines the testing
    and retesting methods and procedures, permitted variations in
    dimensions and mass, quality and repair of defects, marking,
    loading, and ordering information.
    3.2 In addition to the basic requirements of this
    specification, certain supplementary requirements are available
    where additional control, testing, or examination is required to
    meet end use requirements. The purchaser is referred to the
    listed supplementary requirements in this specification and to
    the detailed requirements in Specification A20/A20M.
    3.3 Coils are excluded from qualification to this specification
    until they are processed into finished plates. Plates
    produced from coil means plates that have been cut to
    individual lengths from coil. The processor directly controls, or
    is responsible for, the operations involved in the processing of
    coils into finished plates. Such operations include decoiling,
    leveling, cutting to length, testing, inspection, conditioning,
    heat treatment (if applicable), packaging, marking, loading for
    shipment, and certification.
    NOTE 1—For plates produced from coil and furnished without heat
    treatment or with stress relieving only, three test results are reported for
    each qualifying coil. Additional requirements regarding plates from coil
    are described in Specification A20/A20M.
    3.4 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
    with the requirements of Specification A20/A20M, the requirements
    of this specification shall prevail.
34. Materials and Manufacture
    4.1 Steelmaking Practice—The steel shall be killed and
    shall conform to the fine austenitic grain size requirement of
    Specification A20/A20M.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-299/SA-299M
    439
35. Heat Treatment
    5.1 Plates 2 in. [50 mm] and under in thickness are normally
    supplied in the as-rolled condition. Plates may be ordered
    normalized or stress relieved, or both.
    5.2 Plates over 2 in. [50 mm] in thickness shall be normalized.
36. Chemical Composition
    6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements given in
    Table 1.
37. Mechanical Properties
    7.1 Tension Test Requirements—The plates, as represented
    by the tension test specimens, shall conform to the requirements
    given in Table 2.
38. Keywords
    8.1 carbon steel plate; pressure containing parts; pressure
    vessel steels; steel plates; steel plates for pressure vessel
    applications
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    Supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified in the purchase order.
    A list of standardized supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser is included
    in Specification A20/A20M. Those that are considered suitable for use with this specification are listed
    below by title.
    S1. Vacuum Treatment,
    S2. Product Analysis,
    S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical
    Test Coupons,
    S4. Additional Tension Test,
    S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test,
    S6. Drop Weight Test (for Material 0.625 in. [16 mm] and
    over in Thickness),
    S7. High-Temperature Tension Test,
    S8. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A435/A435M,
    S9. Magnetic Particle Examination,
    S11. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A577/A577M,
    S12. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A578/A578M.
    TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
    Elements Composition, %
    Carbon, max:A
    1 in. [25 mm] and under
    Grade A 0.26
    Grade B 0.28
    Over 1 in. [25 mm]
    Grade A 0.28
    Grade B 0.30
    Manganese:
    1 in. [25 mm] and under
    Heat analysis 0.90 to 1.40
    Product analysis 0.84 to 1.52
    Over 1 in. [25 mm]
    Heat analysis 0.90 to 1.50
    Product analysis 0.84 to 1.62
    Phosphorus, maxA 0.025
    Sulfur, maxA 0.025
    Silicon:
    Heat analysis 0.15 to 0.40
    Product analysis 0.13 to 0.45
    A Applies to both heat and product analyses.
    TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
    Grade A Grade B
    Tensile strength, ksi [MPa] 75–95 [515–655] 80–100 [550–690]
    Yield strength, min,A ksi [MPa]:
    1 in. [25 mm] and under 42 [290] 47 [325]
    Over 1 in. [25 mm] 40 [275] 45 [310]
    Elongation in 8 in. [200 mm], min, %B 16 16
    Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min, %B 19 19
    A Determined by either the 0.2 % offset method or the 0.5 % extension-under-load
    method.
    B See the Elongation Requirement Adjustments subsection in the Tension Tests
    section of Specification A20/A20M.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ð19Þ
    SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES,
    ALLOY STEEL, MANGANESE-MOLYBDENUM AND
    MANGANESE-MOLYBDENUM-NICKEL
    SA-302/SA-302M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A302/A302M-17.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-302/SA-302M
    441
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-302/SA-302M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    442
    Standard Specification for
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-
    Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel
39. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers manganese-molybdenum and
    manganese-molybdenum-nickel alloy steel plates intended particularly
    for welded boilers and other pressure vessels.
    1.2 Plates under this specification are available in four
    grades having different strength levels as follows:
    Grade
    Tensile Strength,
    ksi [MPa]
    Type
    A 75–95 [515–655] manganese-molybdenum
    B 80–100 [550–690] manganese-molybdenum
    C 80–100 [550–690] manganese-molybdenum-nickel
    D 80–100 [550–690] manganese-molybdenum-nickel
    1.3 The maximum thickness of plates is limited only by the
    capacity of the chemical composition to meet the specified
    mechanical property requirements.
    1.4 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must
    be used independently of the other. Combining values from the
    two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification.
    1.5 This international standard was developed in accordance
    with internationally recognized principles on standardization
    established in the Decision on Principles for the
    Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
    issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
    Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
40. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A20/A20M Specification for General Requirements for Steel
    Plates for Pressure Vessels
    A435/A435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
    Examination of Steel Plates
    A577/A577M Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination
    of Steel Plates
    A578/A578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
    Examination of Rolled Steel Plates for Special Applications
41. General Requirements and Ordering Information
    3.1 Material supplied to this material specification shall
    conform to Specification A20/A20M. These requirements outline
    the testing and retesting methods and procedures, permitted
    variations in dimensions, and mass, quality and repair of
    defects, marking, loading, and ordering information.
    3.2 In addition to the basic requirements of this
    specification, certain supplementary requirements are available
    when additional control, testing, or examination is required to
    meet end use requirements. The purchaser is referred to the
    listed supplementary requirements in this specification and to
    the detailed requirements in Specification A20/A20M.
    3.3 Coils are excluded from qualification to this specification
    until they are processed into finished plates. Plates
    produced from coil means plates that have been cut to
    individual lengths from coil. The processor directly controls, or
    is responsible for, the operations involved in the processing of
    coils into finished plates. Such operations include decoiling,
    leveling, cutting to length, testing, inspection, conditioning,
    heat treatment (if applicable), packaging, marking, loading for
    shipment, and certification.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-302/SA-302M
    443
    NOTE 1—For plates produced from coil and furnished without heat
    treatment or with stress relieving only, three test results are reported for
    each qualifying coil. Additional requirements regarding plates from coil
    are described in Specification A20/A20M.
    3.4 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
    with the requirements of Specification A20/A20M, the requirements
    of this specification shall prevail.
42. Materials and Manufacture
    4.1 Steelmaking Practice—The steel shall be killed and
    shall conform to the fine grain size requirement of Specification
    A20/A20M.
43. Heat Treatment
    5.1 Plates 2 in. [50 mm] and under in thickness are normally
    supplied in the as-rolled condition. Plates may be ordered
    normalized, normalized and tempered, or stress relieved.
    5.2 Plates over 2 in. [50 mm] in thickness shall be normalized
    or normalized and tempered.
    5.3 When normalizing plates 4 in. [100 mm] or over in
    thickness, the cooling rate may be accelerated by air blasting or
    liquid quenching followed by tempering in the temperature
    range from 1100 to 1300°F [595 to 705°C] to obtain mechanical
    properties comparable to those developed by normalizing
    plates in the lesser thicknesses.
    5.4 If approved by the purchaser, for plates less than 4 in.
    [100 mm] in thickness, cooling rates faster than those obtained
    by cooling in air are permissible for improvement of
    toughness, provided the plates are subsequently tempered in
    the temperature range from 1100 to 1300°F [595 to 705°C].
44. Chemical Composition
    6.1 The steel shall conform to the chemical requirements
    shown in Table 1 unless otherwise modified in accordance with
    Supplementary Requirement S17, Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized
    Steel, in Specification A20/A20M.
45. Mechanical Properties
    7.1 Tension Test Requirements—The plates, as represented
    by the tension test specimens, shall conform to the requirements
    given in Table 2.
    7.1.1 For accelerated cooled plates with a nominal thickness
    of 3/4 in. [20 mm] or less, the 11/2-in. [40-mm] wide rectangular
    specimen may be used for the tension test, and the elongation
    may be determined in a 2-in. [50-mm] gage length that
    includes the fracture and that shows the greatest elongation.
46. Keywords
    8.1 alloy steel plate; pressure containing parts; pressure
    vessel steels; steel plates; steel plates for pressure vessel
    applications
    TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
    NOTE 1—Where “…” appears, there is no requirement.
    Elements
    Composition, %
    Grade A Grade B Grade C Grade D
    Carbon, max:A
    Up to 1 in. [25 mm], incl, in thickness 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
    Over 1 to 2 in. [50 mm], incl 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23
    Over 2 in. [50 mm] in thickness 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
    Manganese:
    Heat analysis 0.95–1.30 1.15–1.50 1.15–1.50 1.15–1.50
    Product analysis 0.87–1.41 1.07–1.62 1.07–1.62 1.07–1.62
    Phosphorus, maxA 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
    Sulfur, maxA 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
    Silicon:
    Heat analysis 0.15–0.40 0.15–0.40 0.15–0.40 0.15–0.40
    Product analysis 0.13–0.45 0.13–0.45 0.13–0.45 0.13–0.45
    Molybdenum:
    Heat analysis 0.45–0.60 0.45–0.60 0.45–0.60 0.45–0.60
    Product analysis 0.41–0.64 0.41–0.64 0.41–0.64 0.41–0.64
    Nickel:
    Heat analysis … … 0.40–0.70 0.70–1.00
    Product analysis … … 0.37–0.73 0.67–1.03
    A Applies to both heat and product analyses.
    TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
    Grade A Grade B Grade C Grade D
    Tensile strength, ksi [MPa] 75–95 [515–655] 80–100 [550–690] 80–100 [550–690] 80–100 [550–690]
    Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa] 45 [310] 50 [345] 50 [345] 50 [345]
    Elongation in 8 in. [200 mm], min, %A 15 15 17 17
    Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min, %A 19 18 20 20
    A See Specification A20/A20M for elongation adjustment.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-302/SA-302M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    444
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    Supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified in the purchase order. A list of
    standardized supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser is included in
    Specification A20/A20M. Those that are considered suitable for use with this specification are listed
    below by title.
    S1. Vacuum Treatment,
    S2. Product Analysis,
    S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical
    Test Coupons,
    S4.1 Additional Tension Test,
    S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test,
    S6. Drop Weight Test (for Material 0.625 in. [16 mm] and
    over in Thickness),
    S7. High-Temperature Tension Test,
    S8. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A435/A435M,
    S9. Magnetic Particle Examination,
    S11. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A577/A577M,
    S12. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A578/A578M, and
    S17. Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL BOLTS AND
    STUDS, 60 000 PSI TENSILE STRENGTH
    SA-307
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A307-10 except for the deletion of “private label distributor” and “as appropriate”in
    para. 13.1.1.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-307
    445
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-307 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    446
    Standard Specification for
    Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength
47. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers the chemical and mechanical
    requirements of three grades of carbon steel bolts and studs in
    sizes 1/4 in. through 4 in. The fasteners are designated by
    “Grade” denoting tensile strength and intended use, as follows:
    Grade Description
    Grade A Bolts and studs having a
    minimum tensile strength of
    60 ksi and intended for
    general applications,
    Grade B Bolts and studs having a
    tensile strength of 60 to 100
    ksi and intended for flanged
    joints in piping systems with
    cast iron flanges, and
    Grade C Replaced by Specification
    F1554 Gr.36
    1.1.1 The term studs includes stud stock, sometimes referred
    to as threaded rod.
    1.2 This specification does not cover requirements for
    machine screws, thread cutting/forming screws, mechanical
    expansion anchors or similar externally threaded fasteners.
    1.3 Suitable nuts are covered in Specification A563. Unless
    otherwise specified, the grade and style of nut for each grade of
    fastener, of all surface finishes, shall be as follows:
    Fastener Grade and Size Nut Grade and StyleA
    A 1/4 to 11/2 in. A, hex
    A over 11/2 to 4 in. A, heavy hex
    B, 1/4 to 4 in. A, heavy hex
    A Nuts of other grades and styles having specified proof load stresses (Specification
    A563, Table 3) greater than the specified grade and style of nut are also
    suitable.
    1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
    as the standard.
    1.5 Supplementary Requirement S1 of an optional nature is
    provided, which describes additional restrictions to be applied
    when bolts are to be welded. It shall apply only when specified
    in the inquiry, order, and contract.
    1.6 Terms used in this specification are defined in Terminology
    F1789 unless otherwise defined herein.
48. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
    A706/A706M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed
    and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
    A751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical
    Analysis of Steel Products
    B695 Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited
    on Iron and Steel
    D3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging
    F606 Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical Properties
    of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners,
    Washers, Direct Tension Indicators, and Rivets
    F1470 Practice for Fastener Sampling for Specified Mechanical
    Properties and Performance Inspection
    F1554 Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and
    105-ksi Yield Strength
    F1789 Terminology for F16 Mechanical Fasteners
    F2329 Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements
    for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts,
    Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners
    2.2 ASME Standards:
    B 1.1 Unified Screw Threads
    B 18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws
    B 18.24 Part Identifying Number (PIN) Code System
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-307
    447
    2.3 SAE Standard:
    J429 Mechanical and Material Requirements For Externally
    Threaded Fasteners
49. Ordering Information
    3.1 Orders for externally threaded fasteners (including nuts
    and accessories) under this specification shall include the
    following:
    3.1.1 ASTM designation and year of issue,
    3.1.2 Name of product, bolts or studs; and bolt head style,
    that is, hex or heavy hex,
    3.1.3 Grade, that is, A, or B. If no grade is specified, Grade
    A is furnished.
    3.1.4 Quantities (number of pieces by size including nuts),
    3.1.5 Fastener size and length,
    3.1.6 Washers—Quantity and size (separate from bolts),
    3.1.7 Zinc Coating—Specify the zinc-coating process required,
    for example, hot-dip, mechanically deposited, or no
    preference (see 4.5).
    3.1.8 Other Finishes—Specify other protective finish, if
    required.
    3.1.9 Specify if inspection at point of manufacture is required,
    3.1.10 Specify if certified test report is required (see 8.2),
    and
    3.1.11 Specify additional testing (8.3) or special requirements.
    3.1.12 For establishment of a part identifying system, see
    ASME B18.24.
50. Materials and Manufacture
    4.1 Steel for bolts and studs shall be made by the openhearth,
    basic-oxygen, or electric-furnace process.
    4.2 Bolts shall be produced by hot or cold forging of the
    heads or machining from bar stock.
    4.3 Heat Treatment:
    4.3.1 Cold headed fasteners with head configurations other
    than hex having a minimum head height less than or equal to
    .5 D (D is nominal diameter) shall be stress relief annealed at
    a minimum temperature of 875°F.
    4.3.2 Stress relieving of hex head fasteners and those with
    minimum head heights greater than .5 D shall be at the
    manufacturer’s option.
    4.4 Bolt and stud threads shall be rolled or cut.
    4.5 Zinc Coatings, Hot-Dip and Mechanically Deposited:
    4.5.1 When zinc-coated fasteners are required, the purchaser
    shall specify the zinc-coating process, for example hot
    dip, mechanically deposited, or no preference.
    4.5.2 When hot-dip is specified, the fasteners shall be
    zinc-coated by the hot-dip process in accordance with the
    requirements of Specification F2329.
    4.5.3 When mechanically deposited is specified, the fasteners
    shall be zinc-coated by the mechanical-deposition process
    in accordance with the requirements of Class 55 of Specification
    B695.
    4.5.4 When no preference is specified, the supplier may
    furnish either a hot-dip zinc coating in accordance with
    Specification F2329, or a mechanically deposited zinc coating
    in accordance with Specification B695, Class 55. Threaded
    components (bolts and nuts) shall be coated by the same
    zinc-coating process and the supplier’s option is limited to one
    process per item with no mixed processes in a lot.
51. Chemical Composition
    5.1 Grade A and B bolts and studs shall have a heat analysis
    conforming to the requirements specified in Table 1 based on
    the steel producer’s heat analysis.
    5.2 The purchaser shall have the option of conducting
    product analyses on finished bolts in each lot, which shall
    conform to the product analysis specified in Table 1.
    5.3 In case of conflict or for referee purposes, the product
    analysis shall take precedence.
    5.4 Bolts and studs are customarily furnished from stock, in
    which case individual heats of steel cannot be identified.
    5.5 Application of heats of steel to which bismuth, selenium,
    tellurium, or lead has been intentionally added shall not
    be permitted for Grade B bolts and studs.
    5.6 Chemical analyses shall be performed in accordance
    with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A751.
52. Mechanical Properties
    6.1 Grades A and B bolts and studs shall conform to the
    hardness specified in Table 2.
    6.2 GradeAand B bolts and studs 1½ in. in diameter or less,
    other than those excepted in 6.4, shall be tested full size and
    shall conform to the requirements for tensile strength specified
    in Table 3.
    6.3 Grade A and B bolts and studs larger than 1½ in. in
    diameter, other than those excepted in 6.4, shall preferably be
    tested full size and when equipment of sufficient capacity is
    available and shall conform to the requirements for tensile
    strength specified in Table 3. When equipment of sufficient
    capacity for full-size bolt testing is not available, or when the
    length of the bolt makes full-size testing impractical, machined
    specimens shall be tested and shall conform to the requirements
    specified in Table 4.
    TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements for Grades A and B Bolts and
    Studs
    Heat Analysis Product Analysis
    Carbon, max 0.29 0.33
    Manganese, max 1.20 1.25
    Phosphorus, max 0.04 0.041
    Sulfur, max
    Grade A 0.15 A
    Grade B 0.05 0.051
    A Resulfurized steel is not subject to rejection based on product analysis for
    sulfur.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-307 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    448
    6.4 Grades A and B bolts and studs less than three diameters
    in length or bolts with drilled or undersize heads are not subject
    to tensile tests.
    6.5 In the event that bolts are tested by both full size and by
    machine test specimen methods, the full-size test shall govern
    if a controversy between the two methods exists.
    6.6 For bolts and studs on which both hardness and tension
    tests are performed, acceptance based on tensile requirements
    shall take precedence in the event that there is controversy over
    low readings of hardness tests.
53. Dimensions
    7.1 Unless otherwise specified, threads shall be the Coarse
    Thread Series as specified in the latest issue of ASME B1.1,
    and shall have a Class 2A tolerance.
    7.2 Unless otherwise specified, Grade A bolts shall be hex
    bolts with dimensions as given in the latest issue of ASME
    B18.2.1. Unless otherwise specified, Grade B bolts shall be
    heavy hex bolts with dimensions as given in the latest issue of
    ASME B18.2.1.
    7.3 Unless otherwise specified, bolts and studs to be used
    with nuts or tapped holes which have been tapped oversize, in
    accordance with Specification A563, shall have Class 2A
    threads before hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating.
    After zinc coating the maximum limit of pitch and major
    diameter shall not exceed the Class 2A maximum limit by more
    than the following amounts:
    Diameter, in. Oversize Limit, in. (mm)A
    1/4 0.016
    5/16, 3/8 0.017
    7/16, 1/2 0.018
    9/16 to 3 /4, incl 0.020
    7/8 0.022
    1.0 to 11/4, incl 0.024
    13/8, 11 /2 0.027
    13/4 to 4.0, incl 0.050
    A These values are the same as the overtapping required for zinc-coated nuts in
    Specification A563.
    7.4 The gaging limit for bolts and studs shall be verified
    during manufacture or use by assembly of a nut tapped as
    nearly as practical to the amount oversize shown above. In case
    of dispute, a calibrated thread ring gage of that same size
    (Class X tolerance, gage tolerance plus) shall be used. Assembly
    of the gage, or the nut described above, must be possible
    with hand effort following application of light machine oil to
    prevent galling and damage to the gage. These inspections,
    when performed to resolve disputes, shall be performed at the
    frequency and quality described in Table 5.
54. Number of Tests and Retests
    8.1 The requirements of this specification shall be met in
    continuous mass production for stock, and the manufacturer
    shall make sample inspections to ensure that the product
    conforms to the specified requirements. Additional tests of
    TABLE 2 Hardness Requirements for Bolts and Studs
    Grade Length, in. HardnessA
    Brinell Rockwell B
    min max min max
    A Less than 3 × diaB 121 241 69 100
    3 × dia and longer . . . 241 . . . 100
    B Less than 3 × diaB 121 212 69 95
    3 × dia and longer . . . 212 . . . 95
    A As measured anywhere on the surface or through the cross section.
    B Also bolts with drilled or undersize heads. These sizes and bolts with modified
    heads shall meet the minimum and maximum hardness as hardness is the only
    requirement.
    TABLE 3 Tensile Requirements for Full-Size Bolts and Studs
    Bolt
    Size,
    in.
    Threads
    per inch
    Stress
    Area,A
    in.2
    Tensile Strength, lbfB
    Grade
    A, min C
    Grade B
    minD maxD
    1/4 20 0.0318 1 900 1 900 3 180
    5/16 18 0.0524 3 100 3 100 5 240
    3/8 16 0.0775 4 650 4 650 7 750
    7/16 14 0.1063 6 350 6 350 10 630
    1/2 13 0.1419 8 500 8 500 14 190
    9/16 12 0.182 11 000 11 000 18 200
    5/8 11 0.226 13 550 13 550 22 600
    3/4 10 0.334 20 050 20 050 33 400
    7/8 9 0.462 27 700 27 700 46 200
    1 8 0.606 36 350 36 350 60 600
    11/8 7 0.763 45 800 45 800 76 300
    11/4 7 0.969 58 150 58 150 96 900
    13/8 6 1.155 69 300 69 300 115 500
    11/2 6 1.405 84 300 84 300 140 500
    13/4 5 1.90 114 000 114 000 190 000
    2 4½ 2.50 150 000 150 000 250 000
    21/4 4½ 3.25 195 000 195 000 325 000
    21/2 4 4.00 240 000 240 000 400 000
    23/4 4 4.93 295 800 295 800 493 000
    3 4 5.97 358 200 358 200 597 000
    31/4 4 7.10 426 000 426 000 710 000
    31/2 4 8.33 499 800 499 800 833 000
    33/4 4 9.66 579 600 579 600 966 000
    4 4 11.08 664 800 664 800 1 108 000
    A Area calculated from the equation:
    As = 0.7854 [D – (0.9743/n)] 2
    where:
    As = stress area,
    D = nominal diameter of bolt, and
    n = threads per inch.
    B 1 lbf = 4.448 N.
    C Based on 60 ksi (414 MPa).
    D Based on 60–100 ksi (414–690 MPa).
    TABLE 4 Tensile Requirements for Machined Specimens
    Grade A Grade B
    Tensile strength, ksi 60 min 60–100
    Yield point, min ksi . . . . . .
    Elongation in 2 in.,
    min, %
    18 18
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-307
    449
    individual shipments of material are not ordinarily contemplated.
    Individual heats of steel are not identified in the finished
    product.
    8.2 When specified in the order, the manufacturer shall
    furnish a test report certified to be the last completed set of
    mechanical tests for each stock size in each shipment.
    8.3 When additional tests are specified on the purchase
    order, a lot, for purposes of selecting test samples, shall consist
    of all material offered for inspection at one time that has the
    following common characteristics:
    8.3.1 One type of item,
    8.3.2 One nominal size, and
    8.3.3 One nominal length of bolts and studs.
    8.4 From each lot, the number of tests for each requirement
    shall be as follows:
    Number of Pieces in Lot Number of Samples
    800 and under 1
    801 to 8 000 2
    8 001 to 22 000 3
    Over 22 000 5
    8.5 If any machined test specimen shows defective machining
    it shall be discarded and another specimen substituted.
    8.6 Should any sample fail to meet the requirements of a
    specified test, double the number of samples from the same lot
    shall be tested, in which case all of the additional samples shall
    meet the specification.
55. Test Methods
    9.1 Grades A and B bolts and studs shall be tested in
    accordance with Test Methods F606.
    9.2 Standard square and hex head bolts only shall be tested
    by the wedge tension method except as noted in 6.4. Fracture
    shall be in the body or threads of the bolt without any fracture
    at the junction of the head and body. Other headed bolts shall
    be tested by the axial tension method.
    9.3 Speed of testing as determined with a free running
    crosshead shall be a maximum of 1 in./min for the tensile
    strength tests of bolts.
56. Inspection
    10.1 If the inspection described in 10.2 is required by the
    purchaser it shall be specified in the inquiry, order, or contract.
    10.2 The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
    free entry to all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concern
    the manufacture of the material ordered. The manufacturer
    shall afford the inspector all reasonable facilities to satisfy him
    that the material is being furnished in accordance with this
    specification. All tests and inspections required by the specification
    that are requested by the purchaser’s representative shall
    be made before shipment, and shall be conducted as not to
    interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
57. Responsibility
    11.1 The party responsible for the fastener shall be the
    organization that supplies the fastener to the purchaser.
58. Rejection and Rehearing
    12.1 Disposition of nonconforming lots shall be in accordance
    with Guide F1470, specifically sections on disposition of
    nonconforming lots, suppliers option, and purchasers option.
59. Product Marking
    13.1 Grades A and B Bolts and Studs:
    13.1.1 Bolt heads and one end of studs shall be marked with
    a unique identifier by the manufacturer to identify the manufacturer.
    Additional marking required by the manufacturer for
    his own use shall be at the option of the manufacturer.
    13.1.2 In addition to the requirements of 13.1, all bolt heads,
    one end of studs ” in. and larger, and whenever feasible studs
    less than ” in. shall be marked with a grade marking as
    follows:
    Grade Marking
    A
    B
    307A
    307B
    13.1.3 All markings shall be located on the top of the bolt
    head or stud end and shall be raised or depressed at the option
    of the manufacturer.
60. Packaging and Package Marking
    14.1 Packaging:
    14.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, packaging shall be in
    accordance with Practice D3951.
    14.1.2 When special packaging requirements are required,
    they shall be defined at the time of the inquiry and order.
    14.2 Package Marking:
    14.2.1 Each shipping unit shall include or be plainly marked
    with the following information:
    14.2.1.1 ASTM designation and grade,
    14.2.1.2 Size,
    14.2.1.3 Name and brand or trademark of the manufacturer,
    14.2.1.4 Number of pieces,
    14.2.1.5 Purchase order number,
    14.2.1.6 Country of origin.
61. Keywords
    15.1 bolts; carbon steel; steel; studs
    TABLE 5 Sample Sizes and Acceptance Numbers for Inspection
    of Hot-Dip or Mechanically Deposited Zinc-Coated Threads
    Lot Size Sample SizeA Acceptance Number
    2 to 90 13 1
    91 to 150 20 2
    151 to 280 32 3
    281 to 500 50 5
    501 to 1 200 80 7
    1 201 to 3 200 125 10
    3 201 to 10 000 200 14
    10 001 and over 315 21
    A Inspect all bolts in the lot if the lot size is less than the sample size.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-307 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    450
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    The following supplementary requirement shall apply only when specified in the purchase order or
    contract:
    S1. Bolts Suitable for Welding
    S1.1 The material described in this section is intended for
    welding. This supplemental section, by additional chemical
    composition restrictions and by a carbon equivalent formula,
    provides assurance of weldability by chemical composition
    control.
    S1.2 Welding technique is of fundamental importance when
    bolts produced to this supplementary section are welded. It is
    presupposed that suitable welding procedures for the steel
    being welded and the intended service will be selected.
    S1.3 All of the requirements of this supplemental section
    apply in addition to all of the chemical, mechanical, and other
    requirements of the base specification, Specification A307 for
    Grade B.
    S1.4 Because of the embrittling effects of welding temperatures
    on cold-forged steel, this supplemental section is limited
    to hot-forged bolts, or, if not forged, then to bolts produced
    from hot-rolled bars without forging or threaded bars, bars
    studs, or stud bolts produced from hot-rolled bars without
    forging. Cold-forged bolts, or cold-drawn threaded bars, if they
    are given a thermal treatment by heating to a temperature of not
    less than 1500°F (815°C) and air-cooled are also suitable.
    S1.5 Chemical Requirements:
    S1.5.1 Heat Chemical Analysis—Material conforming to
    the following additional analysis limitations shall be used to
    manufacture the product described in this supplementary
    requirement.
    Carbon 0.30 %, max
    Manganese 1.00 %, max
    Phosphorus 0.04 %, max
    Sulfur 0.05 %, max
    Silicon 0.50 %, max
    S1.5.2 Carbon Equivalent (Source—Specification A706/
    A706M)—In addition to the heat chemical analysis requirements
    in S1.5.1, the heat analysis shall be such as to provide a
    carbon equivalent (CE) not exceeding 0.55 when calculated as
    follows:
    CE5% C1
    % Mn
    6 1
    % Cu
    40 1
    % Ni
    20 1
    % Cr
    10 2
    % Mo
    50 2
    % V
    10
    S1.6 Analysis Reports—If requested on the order or contract,
    the chemical composition of each heat of steel used and
    the calculated carbon equivalent for each heat shall be reported
    to the purchaser.
    S1.7 Product (Check) Verification Analysis—Chemical
    analyses when made by the purchaser or a representative on
    bolts from each heat of steel, shall not exceed the values
    specified in S1.5.2 by more than the following amounts:
    %
    Carbon +0.03
    Manganese +0.06
    Phosphorus +0.008
    Sulfur +0.008
    Silicon +0.05
    S2. Permanent Manufacturer’s Identification
    S2.1 Replaced by Specification F1554.
    S3. Permanent Grade Identification
    S3.1 Replaced by Specification F1554.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR COLD-DRAWN, STRESS-RELIEVED
    CARBON STEEL BARS SUBJECT TO MECHANICAL
    PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS
    SA-311/SA-311M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A311/A311M-04(R10) except for deletion of 5.1.11, revision of Note A to Table 1 and
    an editorial change to 5.1.9. Certification has been made mandatory in 11.1.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-311/SA-311M
    451
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-311/SA-311M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    452
    SPECIFICATION FOR COLD-DRAWN, STRESSRELIEVED
    CARBON STEEL BARS SUBJECT TO
    MECHANICAL PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS
    SA-311/SA-311M
    [Identical to ASTM Specification A 311/A 311M-04(R10) except for deletion of 5.1.11, revision of Note A to Table 1 and an editorial change to
    5.1.9. Certification has been made mandatory in 11.1.]
62. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers two classes, nine grades,
    and four conditions of stress-relieved cold-drawn carbon
    steel bars produced to mechanical property requirements.
    One class, B, is cold drawn with higher than normal (heavy)
    drafts to provide higher strength levels, and four grades
    provide improved machinability.
    1.2 Supplementary Requirements, S1 through S6, of
    an optional nature are provided.
    1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units or SI units
    are to be regarded as the standard. Within the text, the SI
    units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system are not exact equivalents, therefore, each system
    must be used independently of the other. Combining values
    from the two systems may result in nonconformance with
    the specification.
63. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A 29 /A 29M Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and
    Alloy, Hot-Wrought and Cold-Finished, General
    Requirements for
    A 108 Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-
    Finished
    A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)
64. Terminology
    3.1 Definitions:
    3.1.1 stress relieving—heating to a suitable temperature,
    holding long enough to reduce residual stresses, and
    then cooling slowly enough to minimize the development
    of new residual stresses.
    3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
    3.2.1 heavy draft — Using higher than normal drafts
    (approximately 10% through 35% reduction), followed by
    stress relieving, produces higher tensile and yield strengths
    provided an appropriate composition is used; for example,
    medium carbon with normal or higher manganese content.
65. Classification
    4.1 The bars are furnished in the following classes and
    grades, and in the conditions shown in 6.4.
    4.1.1 Class A —Normal-draft cold-drawn and stressrelieved
    rounds, squares, hexagons, and flats in the following
    grades:
    Grades UNS Designations
    1018 G10180
    1035 G10350
    1045 G10450
    1050 G10500
    1541 G15410
    1117 G11170
    1137 G11370
    1141 G11410
    1144 G11440
    4.1.2 Class B — Heavy-draft cold-drawn and stressrelieved
    rounds and hexagons in the following grades:
    Grades UNS Designations
    1045 G10450
    1050 G10500
    1541 G15410
    1141 G11410
    1144 G11440
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-311/SA-311M
    453
66. Ordering Information
    5.1 Orders for material under this specification should
    include the following information as required to adequately
    describe the desired material:
    5.1.1 Quantity (weight [mass] or number of pieces),
    5.1.2 Name of material (carbon steel bars, cold
    drawn, stress relieved),
    5.1.3 Condition 8.3,
    5.1.4 Cross-sectional shape,
    5.1.5 Size,
    5.1.6 Length,
    5.1.7 Class and grade,
    5.1.8 Report of heat analysis, tensile properties Section
    11,
    5.1.9 Specification designation A 311 or A 311M,
    5.1.10 Application,
    5.1.11 DELETED
    5.1.12 Supplementary requirements, if any, and
    5.1.13 Additional requirements, if any.
    NOTE 1— A typical ordering description is as follows: 10000 lb carbon
    steel bars, cold drawn, stress relieved turned and polished, round 2.0 in.
    (50.8 mm) Diameter, 10 to 12 ft (3048 to 3658 mm) long, Class B,
    Grade 1050, (UNS G10500), fine grain, test reports required, ASTM
    A 311/A 311M dated , hydraulic cylinder piston rods. [5000 kg
    carbon steel bars, cold drawn, stress relieved turned and polished round
    50 mm diameter, 3050 to 3650 mm long, Class B, Grade 1050 (UNS
    G10500), fine grain, test reports required, ASTM A 311M dated ,
    hydraulic cylinder piston rods.]
67. Materials and Manufacture
    6.1 Melting Practice — The steel shall be made by one
    or more of the following primary processes: open-hearth,
    basic-oxygen, or electric-furnace. The primary melting
    may incorporate separate degassing or refining and may
    be followed by secondary melting using electroslag remelting
    or vacuum arc remelting. Where secondary melting is
    employed, the heat shall be defined as all of the ingots
    remelted from a single primary heat.
    6.2 Cold Working:
    6.2.1 Class A bars shall be cold drawn using normal
    drafting practices.
    6.2.2 Class B bars shall be cold drawn using heavy
    (higher than normal) drafting practices.
    6.3 Thermal Treatment — After cold drawing, the bars
    shall be stress relieved at a temperature of not less than
    550°F [288°C] to meet the mechanical requirements specified
    in Table 2.
    6.4 Condition — The bars shall be furnished in the
    following cold finish conditions, as specified:
    6.4.1 Cold drawn, stress relieved;
    6.4.2 Cold drawn, stress relieved, turned, and polished;
    6.4.3 Cold drawn, stress relieved, turned, ground,
    and polished; and
    6.4.4 Cold drawn, stress relieved, ground, and polished.
    NOTE 2 — When turned bars are specified, turning may be performed
    prior to cold-drawing.
68. Chemical Composition
    7.1 Composition — The cast or heat analysis shall conform
    to the chemical composition requirements specified
    in Table 1 for the grade ordered.
69. Mechanical Properties
    8.1 Requirements — The bars shall conform to the
    requirements listed in Table 2.
    8.2 Number of Tests — At least one tension test shall
    be made on each lot. A lot shall consist of bars of the same
    size from the same heat which have been stress relieved
    in the same stationary furnace charge. For continuous type
    of treatment, a lot shall consist of 25 tons [25 Mg] or less
    of the same size of each heat, treated in the same cycle.
    8.3 Specimens — Tension test specimens shall be taken
    longitudinally in accordance with and from the locations
    specified in Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
    8.4 Test Methods — Tension tests shall be made in
    accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The
    yield strength shall be determined at 0.2% offset or at
    0.005 in./in. [0.005 mm/mm] of gage length, total extension
    under load.
70. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
    9.1 Surface Finish — Unless otherwise specified, the
    bars shall have a commercial bright smooth surface finish
    consistent with the cold finishing operations specified in
    6.4.
    9.2 Bars that are thermal treated after cold finishing
    may have a discolored or oxidized surface.
    9.3 Oiling — The bars shall be given a surface coating
    of oil or other rust inhibitor to protect against rust during
    shipment.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-311/SA-311M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    454
    9.4 Workmanship — The bars shall be free of pipe,
    cracks, and flakes. Within the limits of good manufacturing
    and inspection practices, the bars shall be free of injurious
    seams, laps, segregation, or other imperfections that, due
    to their nature, degree, or extent, will interfere with the use
    of the material in machining or fabrication of suitable parts.
71. General Requirements
    10.1 Material furnished under this specification shall
    conform to the requirements of the current edition of Specification
    A 29/A 29M and/or Specification A 108 unless
    otherwise stated.
    TABLE 1
    CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
    (CAST OR HEAT ANALYSIS)A
    UNS
    Designation Grade Carbon, % Manganese, % Phosphorus, max % Sulfur, %
    G10180 1018 0.15–0.20 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050 max
    G10350 1035 0.32–0.38 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050 max
    G10450 1045 0.43–0.50 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050 max
    G10500 1050 0.48–0.55 0.60–0.90 0.040 0.050 max
    G15410 1541 0.36–0.44 1.35–1.65 0.040 0.050 max
    G11170 1117 0.14–0.20 1.00–1.30 0.040 0.08–0.13
    G11370 1137 0.32–0.39 1.35–1.65 0.040 0.08–0.13
    G11410 1141 0.37–0.45 1.35–1.65 0.040 0.08–0.13
    G11440 1144 0.40–0.48 1.35–1.65 0.040 0.24–0.33
    A The intentional addition of Bi, Se, Te, and Pb is not permitted.
72. Certification and Test Reports
    11.1 A manufacturer’s certification that the material
    was manufactured and tested in accordance with this specification
    together with a report of the heat analysis and
    tension test results shall be furnished at the time of shipment.
    The report shall include the name of the manufacturer,
    ASTM designation and year date and revision letter,
    if any, class and grade, heat number, size, and grain size
    (if requested).
73. Keywords
    12.1 carbon steel bars; cold finished steel bars; steel
    bars
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-311/SA-311M
    455
    TABLE 2
    MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
    Yield Strength, Elongation in Reduction
    UNS Grade Diameter, Thickness, or Distance Between Tensile Strength, min., ksi 2 in. [50 mm], of Area,
    No. Designation Parallel Faces, in. [mm] min., ksi [MPa] [MPa] min., % min., %
    Class A — Normal Draft Cold Drawn and Stress Relieved Annealed
    G10180 1018 Up to 7/8 [20], incl 70 [485] 60 [415] 18 40
    Over 7/8 [20] to 11/4 [30], incl 65 [450] 55 [380] 16 40
    Over 11/4 [30] to 2 [50], incl 60 [415] 50 [345] 15 35
    Over 2 [50] to 3 [75], incl 55 [380] 45 [310] 15 35
    G10350 1035 Up to 7/8 [20], incl 85 [590] 75 [520] 13 35
    Over 7/8 [20] to 11/4 [30], incl 80 [550] 70 [485] 12 35
    Over 11/4 [30] to 2 [50], incl 75 [520] 65 [450] 12 35
    Over 2 [50] to 3 [75], incl 70 [485] 60 [415] 10 30
    G10450 1045 Up to 7/8 [20], incl 95 [655] 85 [585] 12 35
    Over 7/8 [20] to 11/4 [30], incl 90 [620] 80 [550] 11 30
    Over 11/4 [30] to 2 [50], incl 85 [585] 75 [520] 10 30
    Over 2 [50] to 3 [75], incl 80 [550] 70 [485] 10 30
    G10500 1050 Up to 7/8 [20], incl 100 [690] 90 [620] 11 35
    and and Over 7/8 [20] to 11/4 [30], incl 95 [655] 85 [585] 11 30
    G15410 G1541 Over 11/4 [30] to 2 [50], incl 90 [620] 80 [550] 10 30
    Over 2 [50] to 3 [75], incl 85 [585] 75 [520] 10 30
    G11170 1117 Up to 7/8 [20], incl 75 [520] 65 [450] 15 40
    Over 7/8 [20] to 11/4 [30], incl 70 [485] 60 [415] 15 40
    Over 11/4 [30] to 2 [50], incl 65 [450] 55 [380] 13 35
    Over 2 [50] to 3 [75], incl 60 [415] 50 [345] 12 30
    G11370 1137 Up to 7/8 [20], incl 95 [655] 90 [620] 11 35
    and and Over 7/8 [20] to 11/4 [30], incl 90 [620] 85 [585] 11 30
    G11410 1141 Over 11/4 [30] to 2 [50], incl 85 [585] 80 [550] 10 30
    Over 2 [50] to 3 [70], incl 80 [550] 75 [520] 10 30
    G11440 1144 Up to 7/8 [20], incl 105 [725] 95 [655] 10 30
    Over 7/8 [20] to 11/4 [30], incl 100 [690] 90 [620] 10 30
    Over 11/4 [30] to 2 [50], incl 95 [655] 85 [585] 10 25
    Over 2 [50] to 3 [70], incl 90 [620] 80 [550] 10 20
    Over 3 [70] to 41/2 [115], incl 85 [585] 75 [520] 10 20
    Class B — Heavy Draft Cold Drawn and Stress Relieved Annealed
    Yield Strength, Elongation in Reduction
    UNS Grade Tensile Strength, min., ksi 2 in. [50 mm], of Area,
    No. Designation In. [mm], Round or HexagonA min., ksi [MPa] [MPa] min., % min., %
    G10450 1045 Up to 7/8 [20] incl 115 [795] 100 [690] 10 25
    Over 7/8 [20] to 11/4 [30], incl 115 [795] 100 [690] 10 25
    Over 11/4 [30] to 2 [50], incl 115 [795] 100 [690] 10 25
    Over 2 [50] to 3 [75], incl 115 [795] 100 [690] 9 25
    Over 3 [75] to 4 [102], incl 105 [725] 90 [620] 7 20
    G10500 1050 Up to 7/8 [20], incl 115 [795] 100 [690] 8 25
    G15410 1541 Over 7/8 [20] to 11/4 [30], incl 115 [795] 100 [690] 8 25
    G11410 1141 Over 11/4 [30] to 2 [50], incl 115 [795] 100 [690] 8 25
    and and Over 2 [50] to 3 [75], incl 115 [795] 100 [690] 8 20
    G11440 1144 Over 3 [75] to 41/2 [115], incl 115 [795] 100 [690] 7 20
    A Maximum size for hexagons is 11/2 in. [40 mm].
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-311/SA-311M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    456
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified
    by the purchaser in the inquiry or order. Details of these requirements shall be agreed upon
    between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
    S1. Special Surface
    S1.1 When inspection standards more restrictive than
    visual inspection are required, special surface may be specified.
    S2. Restricted Cast or Heat Analysis
    S2.1 When required, the purchaser may specify restrictive
    cast or heat analysis limits on one or more elements.
    The degree of restriction and the number of elements so
    restricted are both subject to agreement between the manufacturer
    and the purchaser.
    S3. Restricted Decarburization
    S3.1 The purchaser may specify a maximum affected
    depth of decarburization when required for special applications,
    subject to agreement between the manufacturer and
    the purchaser.
    S4. Nonmetallic Inclusion Requirements
    (Microscopical)
    S4.1 When nonmetallic inclusion requirements are
    specified, the samples for testing shall be taken on a longitudinal
    direction midway between the center and the surface
    of the material. The area of the sample to be examined
    should be agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer,
    and the test specimen should be hardened by
    heating and quenched before being polished to avoid pits.
    The rating of the inclusion count should also be agreed
    upon and be based upon examination at a magnification
    of 100 diameters. Resulfurized steels are not subject to
    inclusion ratings.
    S5. Restricted Incidental Elements
    S5.1 The purchaser may specify limiting maximum
    requirements for copper, nickel, chromium, or molybdenum
    subject to agreement between the manufacturer and
    the purchaser.
    S6. Grain Size
    S6.1 The steel shall conform to either the coarse austenitic
    grain size (except as stated in S6.2), or the fine austenitic
    grain size requirement of Specification A 29/A 29M.
    S6.2 Certain elements, or combinations of elements,
    such as manganese, sulfur, and lead tend to produce grain
    refinement and it is technically inappropriate to ensure
    coarse grain size as measured by the McQuaid-Ehn test
    on high manganese, high sulfur, and leaded steels such as
    1144, 1151, and 11L41.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS, WELDED, AND
    HEAVILY COLD WORKED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS
    STEEL PIPES
    SA-312/SA-312M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A312/A312M-15 except for the revision to 6.2 to add “H” grade heat treatment
    requirements.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-312/SA-312M
    457
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-312/SA-312M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    458
    Standard Specification for
    Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic
    Stainless Steel Pipes
74. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers seamless, straight-seam
    welded, and heavily cold worked welded austenitic stainless
    steel pipe intended for high-temperature and general corrosive
    service.
    NOTE 1—When the impact test criterion for a low-temperature service
    would be 15 ft·lbf [20 J] energy absorption or 15 mils [0.38 mm] lateral
    expansion, some of the austenitic stainless steel grades covered by this
    specification are accepted by certain pressure vessel or piping codes
    without the necessity of making the actual test. For example, Grades
    TP304, TP304L, and TP347 are accepted by the ASME Pressure Vessel
    Code, Section VIII Division 1, and by the Chemical Plant and Refinery
    Piping Code, ANSI B31.3, for service at temperatures as low as -425 °F
    [-250 °C] without qualification by impact tests. Other AISI stainless steel
    grades are usually accepted for service temperatures as low as -325 °F
    [-200 °C] without impact testing. Impact testing may, under certain
    circumstances, be required. For example, materials with chromium or
    nickel content outside the AISI ranges, and for material with carbon
    content exceeding 0.10 %, are required to be impact tested under the rules
    of ASME Section VIII Division 1 when service temperatures are lower
    than -50 °F [-45 °C].
    1.2 Grades TP304H, TP309H, TP309HCb, TP310H,
    TP310HCb, TP316H, TP321H, TP347H, and TP348H are
    modifications of Grades TP304, TP309Cb, TP309S, TP310Cb,
    TP310S, TP316, TP321, TP347, and TP348, and are intended
    for service at temperatures where creep and stress rupture
    properties are important.
    1.3 Optional supplementary requirements are provided for
    pipe where a greater degree of testing is desired. These
    supplementary requirements call for additional tests to be made
    and, when desired, it is permitted to specify in the order one or
    more of these supplementary requirements.
    1.4 Table X1.1 lists the standardized dimensions of welded
    and seamless stainless steel pipe as shown in ANSI B36.19.
    These dimensions are also applicable to heavily cold worked
    pipe. Pipe having other dimensions is permitted to be ordered
    and furnished provided such pipe complies with all other
    requirements of this specification.
    1.5 Grades TP321 and TP321H have lower strength requirements
    for pipe manufactured by the seamless process in
    nominal wall thicknesses greater than 3/8 in. [9.5 mm].
    1.6 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
    shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
    from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the
    standard. The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M”
    designation of this specification is specified in the order.
    NOTE 2—The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has
    been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal
    diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.”
75. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A262 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular
    Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels
    A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    A941 Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related
    Alloys, and Ferroalloys
    A999/A999M Specification for General Requirements for
    Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe
    A1016/A1016M Specification for General Requirements for
    Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic Alloy Steel, and Stainless
    Steel Tubes
    E112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
    E381 Method of Macroetch Testing Steel Bars, Billets,
    Blooms, and Forgings
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-312/SA-312M
    459
    E527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys in the
    Unified Numbering System (UNS)
    2.2 ANSI Standards:
    B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose
    B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
    B36.19 Stainless Steel Pipe
    2.3 ASME Standard:
    ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code : Section VIII
    2.4 AWS Standard:
    A5.9 Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel
    Steel Welding Rods and Electrodes
    2.5 Other Standard:
    SAE J1086 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys
    (UNS)
76. Terminology
    3.1 Definitions:
    3.1.1 The definitions in Specification A999/A999M and
    Terminology A941 are applicable to this specification.
77. Ordering Information
    4.1 Orders for material to this specification shall conform to
    the requirements of the current edition of Specification A999/
    A999M.
78. General Requirements
    5.1 Material furnished under this specification shall conform
    to the applicable requirements of the current edition of
    Specification A999/A999M unless otherwise provided herein.
79. Materials and Manufacture
    6.1 Manufacture:
    6.1.1 The pipe shall be manufactured by one of the following
    processes:
    6.1.2 Seamless (SML) pipe shall be made by a process that
    does not involve welding at any stage of production.
    6.1.3 Welded (WLD) pipe shall be made using an automatic
    welding process with no addition of filler metal during the
    welding process.
    6.1.4 Heavily cold-worked (HCW) pipe shall be made by
    applying cold working of not less than 35 % reduction in
    thickness of both wall and weld to a welded pipe prior to the
    final anneal. No filler shall be used in making the weld. Prior
    to cold working, the weld shall be 100 % radiographically
    inspected in accordance with the requirements of ASME Boiler
    and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, latest
    revision, Paragraph UW-51.
    6.1.5 Welded pipe and HCW pipe of NPS 14 and smaller
    shall have a single longitudinal weld. Welded pipe and HCW
    pipe of a size larger than NPS 14 shall have a single
    longitudinal weld or shall be produced by forming and welding
    two longitudinal sections of flat stock when approved by the
    purchaser. All weld tests, examinations, inspections, or treatments
    shall be performed on each weld seam.
    6.1.6 At the option of the manufacturer, pipe shall be either
    hot finished or cold finished.
    6.1.7 The pipe shall be free of scale and contaminating
    exogenous iron particles. Pickling, blasting, or surface finishing
    is not mandatory when pipe is bright annealed. The
    purchaser is permitted to require that a passivating treatment be
    applied to the finished pipe.
    6.2 Heat Treatment—All pipe shall be furnished in the
    heat-treated condition in accordance with the requirements of
    Table 2. Other than for Grades S33228, S30815, S31272, and
80. Chemical Composition
    7.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
    chemical composition prescribed in Table 1.
81. Product Analysis
    8.1 At the request of the purchaser, an analysis of one billet
    or one length of flat-rolled stock from each heat, or two pipes
    from each lot shall be made by the manufacturer. A lot of pipe
    shall consist of the following number of lengths of the same
    size and wall thickness from any one heat of steel:
    NPS Designator Lengths of Pipe in Lot
    Under 2 400 or fraction thereof
    2 to 5 200 or fraction thereof
    6 and over 100 or fraction thereof
    8.2 The results of these analyses shall be reported to the
    purchaser or the purchaser’s representative, and shall conform
    to the requirements specified in Section 7.
    8.3 If the analysis of one of the tests specified in 8.1 does
    not conform to the requirements specified in Section 7, an
    analysis of each billet or pipe from the same heat or lot may be
    made, and all billets or pipe conforming to the requirements
    shall be accepted.
82. Permitted Variations in Wall Thickness
    9.1 In addition to the implicit limitation of wall thickness
    for seamless pipe imposed by the limitation on weight in
    Specification A999/A999M, the wall thickness for seamless
    and welded pipe at any point shall be within the tolerances
    specified in Table 3, except that for welded pipe the weld area
    shall not be limited by the “Over” tolerance. The wall thickness
    and outside diameter for inspection for compliance with this
    requirement for pipe ordered by NPS and schedule number is
    shown in Table X1.1.
83. Tensile Requirements
    10.1 The tensile properties of the material shall conform to
    the requirements prescribed in Table 4.
    the H Grades, seamless pipe immediately following hot forming
    may be individually quenched by water or rapidly
    cooled by other means, provided that the temperature of
    the pipes after hot forming is not less than the minimum
    specified solution treatment temperature in Table 2. For H
    Grades, as well as Grades S33228, S30815, and S31272, the
    pipes shall be reheated to the specified solution treatment
    temperature for the required time before quenching.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-312/SA-312M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    460
    TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
    Grade
    UNS
    DesignationA
    Composition, %B
    Carbon
    Manganese
    Phosphorus
    Sulfur Silicon
    Chromium
    Nickel
    Molybdenum
    Titanium
    Columbium
    Tantalum,
    max
    NitrogenC
    Vanadium
    Copper Cerium Boron
    Aluminum
    Other
    TP201 S20100 0.15 5.5–
    7.5
    0.060 0.030 1.00 16.0–
    18.0
    3.5–
    5.5
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP201LN S20153 0.03 6.4–
    7.5
    0.045 0.015 0.75 16.0–
    17.5
    4.0–
    5.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.10–
    0.25
    . . . 1.00 . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S20400 0.030 7.0–
    9.0
    0.045 0.030 1.00 15.0–
    17.0
    1.50–
    3.00
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.15–
    0.30
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TPXM-19 S20910 0.06 4.0–
    6.0
    0.045 0.030 1.00 20.5–
    23.5
    11.5–
    13.5
    1.50–
    3.00
    . . . 0.10–
    0.30
    . . . 0.20–
    0.40
    0.10–
    0.30
    . . . . . .
    TPXM-10 S21900 0.08 8.0–
    10.0
    0.045 0.030 1.00 19.0–
    21.5
    5.5–
    7.5
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.15–
    0.40
    . . . . . . . . .
    TPXM-11 S21904 0.04 8.0–
    10.0
    0.045 0.030 1.00 19.0–
    21.5
    5.5–
    7.5
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.15–
    0.40
    . . . . . . . . .
    TPXM-29 S24000 0.08 11.5–
    14.5
    0.060 0.030 1.00 17.0–
    19.0
    2.3–
    3.7
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.20–
    0.40
    . . . . . . . . .
    TP304 S30400 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–
    20.0
    8.0–
    11.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP304L S30403 0.035D 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–
    20.0
    8.0–
    13.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP304H S30409 0.04–
    0.10
    2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–
    20.0
    8.0–
    11.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S30415 0.04–
    0.06
    0.80 0.045 0.030 1.00–
    2.00
    18.0–
    19.0
    9.0–
    10.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.12–
    0.18
    . . . . . . 0.03–
    0.08
    TP304N S30451 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–
    20.0
    8.0–
    11.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.10–
    0.16
    . . . . . . . . .
    TP304LN S30453 0.035 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–
    20.0
    8.0–
    12.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.10–
    0.16
    . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S30600 0.018 2.00 0.02 0.02 3.7–
    4.3
    17.0–
    18.5
    14.0–
    15.5
    0.20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.50
    max
    . . .
    . . . S30601 0.015 0.50–
    0.80
    0.030 0.013 5.0–
    5.6
    17.0–
    18.0
    17.0–
    18.0
    0.20 . . . . . . . . . 0.05 . . . 0.35 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S30615 0.16–
    0.24
    2.00 0.030 0.03 3.2–
    4.0
    17.0–
    19.5
    13.5–
    16.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.80–
    1.50
    . . . S30815 0.05–
    0.10
    0.80 0.040 0.030 1.40–
    2.00
    20.0–
    22.0
    10.0–
    12.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.14–
    0.20
    . . . . . . 0.03–
    0.08
    TP309S S30908 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.0–
    24.0
    12.0–
    15.0
    0.75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP309H S30909 0.04–
    0.10
    2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.0–
    24.0
    12.0–
    15.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP309Cb S30940 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.0–
    24.0
    12.0–
    16.0
    0.75 . . . 10 × C
    min,
    1.10 max
    . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP309HCb S30941 0.04–
    0.10
    2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.0–
    24.0
    12.0–
    16.0
    0.75 . . . 10 × C
    min,
    1.10 max
    . . . . . . . . .
    S31002 0.015 2.00 0.020 0.015 0.15 24.0–
    26.0
    19.0–
    22.0
    0.10 . . . . . . . . . 0.10 . . .
    TP310S S31008 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0–
    26.0
    19.0–
    22.0
    0.75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP310H S31009 0.04–
    0.10
    2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0–
    26.0
    19.0–
    22.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    S31035 0.04–
    0.10
    0.60 0.025 0.015 0.40 21.5–
    23.5
    23.5–
    26.5
    0.40–
    0.60
    0.20–
    0.30
    2.5–
    3.5
    0.002–
    0.008
    W 3.0–
    4.0
    Co 1.0–
    2.0
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-312/SA-312M
    461
    TABLE 1 Continued
    Grade
    UNS
    DesignationA
    Composition, %B
    Carbon
    Manganese
    Phosphorus
    Sulfur Silicon
    Chromium
    Nickel
    Molybdenum
    Titanium
    Columbium
    Tantalum,
    max
    NitrogenC
    Vanadium
    Copper Cerium Boron
    Aluminum
    Other
    TP310Cb S31040 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0–
    26.0
    19.0–
    22.0
    0.75 . . . 10 × C
    min,
    1.10 max
    . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP310HCb S31041 0.04–
    0.10
    2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0–
    26.0
    19.0–
    22.0
    0.75 . . . 10 × C
    min,
    1.10 max
    . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S31050 0.025 2.00 0.020 0.015 0.4 24.0–
    26.0
    20.5–
    23.5
    1.6–
    2.6
    . . . . . . . . . 0.09–
    0.15
    . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S31254 0.020 1.00 0.030 0.010 0.80 19.5–
    20.5
    17.5–
    18.5
    6.0–
    6.5
    . . . . . . . . . 0.18–
    0.25
    . . . 0.50–
    1.00
    . . .
    . . . S31266 0.030 2.00–
    4.00
    0.035 0.020 1.00 23.0–
    25.0
    21.0–
    24.0
    5.2–
    6.2
    0.35–
    0.60
    1.00–
    2.50
    W 1.50–
    2.50
    S31272 0.08–
    012
    1.5–
    2.00
    0.030 0.015 0.25–
    0.75
    14.0–
    16.0
    14.0–
    16.0
    1.00–
    1.40
    0.30–
    0.60
    0.004–
    0.008
    S31277 0.020 3.00 0.030 0.010 0.50 20.5–
    23.0
    26.0–
    28.0
    6.5–
    8.0
    0.30–
    0.40
    0.50–
    1.50
    TP316 S31600 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–
    18.0
    11.0–
    14.0E
    2.00–
    3.00
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP316L S31603 0.035D 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–
    18.0
    10.0–
    14.0
    2.00–
    3.00
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP316H S31609 0.04–
    0.10
    2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–
    18.0
    11.0–
    14.0E
    2.00–
    3.00
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP316Ti S31635 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 16.0–
    18.0
    10.0–
    14.0
    2.00–
    3.00
    5×
    (C+N)
    –0.70
    . . . . . . 0.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP316N S31651 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–
    18.0
    11.0–
    14.0E
    2.00–
    3.00
    0.10–
    0.16
    . . . . . . . . .
    TP316LN S31653 0.035 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0–
    18.0
    11.0–
    14.0E
    2.00–
    3.00
    . . . . . . . . . 0.10–
    0.16
    . . . . . . . . .
    TP317 S31700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–
    20.0
    11.0–
    15.0
    3.0–
    4.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP317L S31703 0.035 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0–
    20.0
    11.0–
    15.0
    3.0–
    4.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S31725 0.03 2.00 0.040F 0.030 1.00 18.0–
    20.0
    13.5–
    17.5
    4.0–
    5.0
    . . . . . . . . . 0.10 . . . 0.75 . . .
    . . . S31726 0.03 2.00 0.040F 0.030 1.00 17.0–
    20.0
    13.5–
    17.5
    4.0–
    5.0
    . . . . . . . . . 0.10–
    0.20
    . . . 0.75 . . .
    . . . S31727 0.03 1.00 0.030 0.030 1.00 17.5–
    19.0
    14.5–
    16.5
    3.8–
    4.5
    . . . . . . . . . 0.15–
    0.21
    . . . 2.8–
    4.0
    . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S31730 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.010 1.00 17.0–
    19.0
    15.0–
    16.5
    3.0–
    4.0
    . . . . . . . . . 0.045 . . . 4.0–
    5.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S32053 0.03 1.00 0.030 0.010 1.00 22.0–
    24.0
    24.0–
    26.0
    5.0–
    6.0
    . . . . . . . . . 0.17–
    0.22
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP321 S32100 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–
    19.0
    9.0–
    12.0
    . . . G . . . . . . 0.10 . . . . . . . . .
    TP321H S32109 0.04–
    0.10
    2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–
    19.0
    9.0–
    12.0
    . . . 4(C+N)
    min;
    0.70
    max
    . . . . . . 0.10 . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S32615 0.07 2.00 0.045 0.030 4.8–
    6.0
    16.5–
    19.5
    19.0–
    22.0
    0.30–
    1.50
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.50–
    2.50
    . . .
    . . . S32654 0.020 2.0–
    4.0
    0.030 0.005 0.50 24.0–
    25.0
    21.0–
    23.0
    7.0–
    8.0
    . . . . . . . . . 0.45–
    0.55
    . . . 0.30–
    0.60
    . . .
    . . . S33228 0.04–
    0.08
    1.00 0.020 0.015 0.30 26.0–
    28.0
    31.0–
    33.0
    . . . . . . 0.60–
    1.00
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05–
    0.10
    . . . 0.025
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    SA-312/SA-312M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    462
    TABLE 1 Continued
    Grade
    UNS
    DesignationA
    Composition, %B
    Carbon
    Manganese
    Phosphorus
    Sulfur Silicon
    Chromium
    Nickel
    Molybdenum
    Titanium
    Columbium
    Tantalum,
    max
    NitrogenC
    Vanadium
    Copper Cerium Boron
    Aluminum
    Other
    . . . S34565 0.03 5.0–
    7.0
    0.030 0.010 1.00 23.0–
    25.0
    16.0–
    18.0
    4.0–
    5.0
    . . . 0.10 0.40–
    0.60
    . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP347 S34700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–
    19.0
    9.0–
    13.0
    . . . . . . H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP347H S34709 0.04–
    0.10
    2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–
    19.0
    9.0–
    13.0
    . . . . . . I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP347LN S34751 0.005–
    0.020
    2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–
    19.0
    9.0–
    13.0
    . . . . . . 0.20–
    0.50J
    . . . 0.06–
    0.10
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP348 S34800 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–
    19.0
    9.0–
    13.0
    . . . . . . H 0.10 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP348H S34809 0.04–
    0.10
    2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0–
    19.0
    9.0–
    13.0
    . . . . . . I 0.10 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S35045 0.06–
    0.10
    1.50 . . . 0.015 1.00 25.0–
    29.0
    32.0–
    37.0
    . . . 0.15–
    0.60
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.75 . . . . . . 0.15–
    0.60
    . . . S35315 0.04–
    0.08
    2.00 0.040 0.030 1.20–
    2.00
    24.0–
    26.0
    34.0–
    36.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.12–
    0.18
    . . . . . . 0.03–
    0.08
    . . . . . .
    TPXM-15 S38100 0.08 2.00 0.030 0.030 1.50–
    2.50
    17.0–
    19.0
    17.5–
    18.5
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S38815 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.020 5.5–
    6.5
    13.0–
    15.0
    15.0–
    17.0
    0.75–
    1.50
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.75–
    1.50
    . . . . . . 0.30
    Alloy 20 N08020 0.07 2.00 0.045 0.035 1.00 19.0–
    21.0
    32.0–
    38.0
    2.0–
    3.0
    . . . M M . . . . . . 3.0–
    4.0
    . . . . . . . . .
    . . . N08367 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 20.0–
    22.0
    23.5–
    25.5
    6.0–
    7.0
    . . . . . . . . . 0.18–
    0.25
    . . . 0.75 . . . . . . . . .
    800 N08800 0.10 1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 19.0–
    23.0
    30.0–
    35.0
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.75 . . . . . . 0.15–
    0.60
    FeK
    39.5 min.
    800H N08810 0.05–
    0.10
    1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 19.0–
    23.0
    30.0–
    35.0
    . . . 0.15–
    0.60
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.75 . . . . . . 0.15–
    0.60
    FeK
    39.5 min.
    N08811 0.06–
    0.10
    1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 19.0–
    23.0
    30.0–
    35.0
    . . . 0.15–
    0.60L
    . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.75 . . . . . . 0.15–
    0.60L
    FeK
    39.5 min.
    . . . N08904 0.020 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 19.0–
    23.0
    23.0–
    28.0
    4.0–
    5.0
    . . . . . . . . . 0.10 . . . 1.00–
    2.00
    . . . . . . . . .
    . . . N08925 0.020 1.00 0.045 0.030 0.50 19.0–
    21.0
    24.0–
    26.0
    6.0–
    7.0
    . . . . . . . . . 0.10–
    0.20
    . . . 0.80–
    1.50
    . . . . . . . . .
    . . . N08926 0.020 2.00 0.030 0.010 0.50 19.0–
    21.0
    24.0–
    26.0
    6.0–
    7.0
    . . . . . . . . . 0.15–
    0.25
    . . . 0.50–
    1.50
    . . . . . . . . .
    A New designation established in accordance with Practice E527 and SAE J1086.
    B Maximum, unless otherwise indicated. Where elipses (…) appear in this table, there is no requirement and analysis for the element need not be determined or reported.
    C The method of analysis for nitrogen shall be a matter of agreement between the purchaser and manufacturer.
    D For small diameter or thin walls or both, where many drawing passes are required, a carbon maximum of 0.040 % is necessary in grades TP304L and TP316L. Small outside diameter tubes are defined as those less
    than 0.500 in. [12.7 mm] in outside diameter and light wall tubes as those less than 0.049 in. [1.20 mm] in average wall thickness (0.044 in. [1.10 mm] in minimum wall thickness).
    E For welded TP316, TP316N, TP316LN, and TP316H pipe, the nickel range shall be 10.0–14.0 %.
    F For welded pipe, the phosphorus maximum shall be 0.045 %.
    GTi 5 × (C+N) min, 0.70 max.
    H The columbium content shall be not less than ten times the carbon content and not more than 1.00 %.
    I The columbium content shall be not less than eight times the carbon content and not more than 1.0 %.
    J Grade S34751 shall have a columbium (niobium) content of not less than 15 times the carbon content.
    KIron shall be determined arithmetically by difference of 100 minus the sum of the other specified elements.
    L(Al + Ti) 0.85 – 1.20.
    MColumbium (Nb) + Tantalum = 8 × Carbon min, 1.00 max.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-312/SA-312M
    463
    TABLE 2 Annealing Requirements
    Grade or UNS DesignationA Heat Treating
    TemperatureB
    Cooling/Testing
    Requirements
    All grades not individually listed
    below:
    1900 °F [1040 °C] C
    TP321H, TP347H, TP348H
    Cold finished 2000 °F [1100 °C] D
    Hot finished 1925 °F [1050 °C] D
    TP304H, TP316H
    Cold finished 1900 °F [1040 °C] D
    Hot finished 1900 °F [1040 °C] D
    TP309H, TP309HCb, TP310H,
    TP310HCb
    1900 °F [1040 °C] D
    S30600 2010–2140 °F
    [1100–1170 °C]
    D
    S30601 2010–2140 °F
    [1100–1170 °C]
    D
    S30815, S31272 1920 °F [1050 °C] D
    S31035 2160–2280 °F
    [1180–1250 °C]
    D
    S31254, S32654 2100 °F [1150 °C] D
    S31266 2100 °F [1150 °C] D
    S31277 2050 °F [1120 °C] D
    S31727, S32053 1975–2155 °F
    [1080–1180 °C]
    D
    S33228 2050–2160 °F
    [1120–1180 °C]
    D
    S34565 2050–2140 °F
    [1120–1170 °C]
    D
    S35315 2010 °F [1100 °C] D
    S38815 1950 °F [1065 °C] D
    N08367 2025 °F [1110 °C] D
    N08020 1700–1850 °F
    [925–1010 °C]
    D
    N08810 2050 °F [1120 °C] D
    N08811 2100 °F [1150 °C] D
    N08904 2000 °F [1100 °C] D
    N08925, N08926 2010–2100 °F
    [1100–1150 °C]
    D
    A New designation established in accordance with Practice E527 and SAE J1086.
    B Minimum, unless otherwise stated.
    C Quenched in water or rapidly cooled by other means, at a rate sufficient to
    prevent re-precipitation of carbides, as demonstrable by the capability of pipes,
    heat treated by either separate solution annealing or by direct quenching, of
    passing Practices A262, Practice E. The manufacturer is not required to run the
    test unless it is specified on the purchase order (see Supplementary Requirement
    S7). Note that Practices A262 requires the test to be performed on sensitized
    specimens in the low-carbon and stabilized types and on specimens representative
    of the as-shipped condition for other types. In the case of low-carbon types
    containing 3 % or more molybdenum, the applicability of the sensitizing treatment
    prior to testing shall be a matter for negotiation between the seller and the
    purchaser.
    D Quenched in water or rapidly cooled by other means.
    TABLE 3 Permitted Variations in Wall Thickness
    Tolerance, % from Nominal
    NPS Designator Over Under
    1/8 to 21/2 incl., all t/D
    ratios
    20.0 12.5
    3 to 18 incl., t/D up to
    5 % incl.
    22.5 12.5
    3 to 18 incl., t/D > 5% 15.0 12.5
    20 and larger, welded,
    all t/D ratios
    17.5 12.5
    20 and larger,
    seamless, t/D up to
    5 % incl.
    22.5 12.5
    20 and larger,
    seamless, t/D > 5 %
    15.0 12.5
    where:
    t = Nominal Wall Thickness
    D = Ordered Outside Diameter
    TABLE 4 Tensile Requirements
    Grade UNS
    Designation
    Tensile
    Strength, min
    ksi [MPa]
    Yield
    Strength, min
    ksi [MPa]
    TP201 S20100 75 [515] 38 [260]
    TP201LN S20153 95 [655] 45 [310]
    . . . S20400 95 [635] 48 [330]
    TPXM-19 S20910 100 [690] 55 [380]
    TPXM-10 S21900 90 [620] 50 [345]
    TPXM-11 S21904 90 [620] 50 [345]
    TPXM-29 S24000 100 [690] 55 [380]
    TP304 S30400 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP304L S30403 70 [485] 25 [170]
    TP304H S30409 75 [515] 30 [205]
    . . . S30415 87 [600] 42 [290]
    TP304N S30451 80 [550] 35 [240]
    TP304LN S30453 75 [515] 30 [205]
    . . . S30600 78 [540] 35 [240]
    . . . S30601 78 [540] 37 [255]
    . . . S30615 90 [620] 40 [275]
    . . . S30815 87 [600] 45 [310]
    TP309S S30908 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP309H S30909 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP309Cb S30940 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP309HCb S30941 75 [515] 30 [205]
    . . . S31002 73 [500] 30 [205]
    TP310S S31008 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP310H S31009 75 [515] 30 [205]
    S31035 95 [655] 45 [310]
    TP310Cb S31040 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP310HCb S31041 75 [515] 30 [205]
    . . . S31050:
    t # 0.25 in. 84 [580] 39 [270]
    t > 0.25 in. 78 [540] 37 [255]
    . . . S31254:
    t # 0.187 in. [5.00 mm] 98 [675] 45 [310]
    t > 0.187 in. [5.00 mm] 95 [655] 45 [310]
    . . . S31266 109 [750] 61 [420]
    . . . S31272 65 [450] 29 [200]
    . . . S31277 112 [770] 52 [360]
    TP316 S31600 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP316L S31603 70 [485] 25 [170]
    TP316H S31609 75 [515] 30 [205]
    . . . S31635 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP316N S31651 80 [550] 35 [240]
    TP316LN S31653 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP317 S31700 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP317L S31703 75 [515] 30 [205]
    . . . S31725 75 [515] 30 [205]
    . . . S31726 80 [550] 35 [240]
    . . . S31727 80 [550] 36 [245]
    . . . S31730 70 [480] 25 [175]
    . . . S32053 93 [640] 43 [295]
    TP321 S32100:
    Welded
    Seamless:
    75 [515] 30 [205]

3/8 in. 75 [515] 30 [205]

3/8 in. 70 [485] 25 [170]
TP321H S32109:
Welded
Seamless:
75 [515] 30 [205]

3/8 in. 75 [515] 30 [205]

3/8 in. 70 [480] 25 [170]
. . . S32615 80 [550] 32 [220]
. . . S32654 109 [750] 62 [430]
. . . S33228 73 [500] 27 [185]
. . . S34565 115 [795] 60 [415]
TP347 S34700 75 [515] 30 [205]
TP347H S34709 75 [515] 30 [205]
TP347LN S34751 75 [515] 30 [205]
TP348 S34800 75 [515] 30 [205]
TP348H S34809 75 [515] 30 [205]
. . . S35045 70 [485] 25 [170]
. . . S35315
Welded 94 [650] 39 [270]
Seamless 87 [600] 38 [260]
TPXM-15 S38100 75 [515] 30 [205]
Manufacture
Stockholder
Distributor
SA-312/SA-312M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
464

11. Mechanical Tests, Grain Size Determinations, and
    Weld Decay Tests Required
    11.1 Mechanical Testing Lot Definition—The term lot for
    mechanical tests shall be as follows:
    11.1.1 Where the final heat treated condition is obtained,
    consistent with the requirements of 6.2, in a continuous
    furnace, by quenching after hot forming or in a batch-type
    furnace equipped with recording pyrometers and automatically
    controlled within a 50 °F [30 °C] or lesser range, the term lot
    for mechanical tests shall apply to all pipes of the same
    specified outside diameter and specified wall thickness (or
    schedule) that are produced from the same heat of steel and
    subjected to the same finishing treatment within the same
    operating period.
    11.1.2 Where the final heat treated condition is obtained,
    consistent with the requirements of 6.2, in a batch-type furnace
    not equipped with recording pyrometers and automatically
    controlled within a 50 °F [30 °C] or lesser range, the term lot
    shall apply to the larger of: (a) each 200 ft [60 m] or fraction
    thereof and (b) those pipes heat treated in the same furnace
    batch charge for pipes of the same specified outside diameter
    and specified wall thickness (or schedule) that are produced
    from the same heat of steel and are subjected to the same
    finishing temperature within the same operating period.
    11.2 Transverse or Longitudinal Tension Test—One tension
    test shall be made on a specimen for lots of not more than 100
    pipes. Tension tests shall be made on specimens from two tubes
    for lots of more than 100 pipes.
    11.3 Flattening Test—For material heat treated in a continuous
    furnace, by quenching after hot forming or in a batch-type
    furnace equipped with recording pyrometers and automatically
    controlled within a 50 °F [30 °C] or lesser range, flattening
    tests shall be made on a sufficient number of pipe to constitute
    5 % of the lot, but in no case less than 2 lengths of pipe. For
    material heat treated in a batch-type furnace not equipped with
    recording pyrometers and automatically controlled within a 50
    °F [30 °C] or lesser range, flattening tests shall be made on 5 %
    of the pipe from each heat treated lot.
    11.3.1 For welded pipe a transverse-guided face bend test of
    the weld may be conducted instead of a flattening test in
    accordance with the method outlined in the steel tubular
    product supplement of Test Methods and Definitions A370. For
    welded pipe with a specified wall thickness over 3/8 in., two
    side bend tests may be made instead of the face bend test. The
    ductility of the weld shall be considered acceptable when there
    is no evidence of cracks in the weld or between the weld and
    the base metal after bending. Test specimens from 5 % of the
    lot shall be taken from the pipe or test plates of the same
    material as the pipe, the test plates being attached to the end of
    the cylinder and welded as a prolongation of the pipe longitudinal
    seam.
    11.4 Grain Size—Grain size determinations, in accordance
    with Test Methods E112, shall be made on the grades listed in
    Table 5. Grain size determinations shall be made on each heat
    treatment lot, as defined in 11.1, for the same number of pipes
    as prescribed for the flattening test in 11.3. The grain size
    results shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 5.
    11.5 HCW pipe shall be capable of passing the weld decay
    tests listed in Supplementary S9 with a weld metal to base
    metal loss ratio of 0.90 to 1.1. The test is not required to be
    performed unless S9 is specified in the purchase order.
12. Hydrostatic or Nondestructive Electric Test
    12.1 Each pipe shall be subjected to the nondestructive
    electric test or the hydrostatic test. The type of test to be used
    shall be at the option of the manufacturer, unless otherwise
    specified in the purchase order.
    12.2 The hydrostatic test shall be in accordance with Specification
    A999/A999M, unless specifically exempted under the
    provisions of 12.3.
    12.3 For pipe whose dimensions equal or exceed NPS10,
    the purchaser, with the agreement of the manufacturer, is
    permitted to waive the hydrostatic test requirement when in
    lieu of such test the purchaser performs a system test. Each
    TABLE 4 Continued
    Grade UNS
    Designation
    Tensile
    Strength, min
    ksi [MPa]
    Yield
    Strength, min
    ksi [MPa]
    . . . S38815 78 [540] 37 [255]
    Alloy 20 N08020 80 [550] 35 [240]
    . . . N08367:
    t # 0.187 100 [690] 45 [310]
    t > 0.187 95 [655] 45 [310]
    800 N08800
    cold-worked
    annealed
    75 [515] 30 [205]
    hot finished annealed 65 [450] 25 [170]
    800H N08810 65 [450] 25 [170]
    N08811 65 [450] 25 [170]
    . . . N08904 71 [490] 31 [215]
    . . . N08925 87 [600] 43 [295]
    . . . N08926 94 [650] 43 [295]
    Elongation in 2 in. or
    50 mm (or 4D), min, %
    Longitudinal
    Transverse
    All Grades except S31050 and S32615 35 25
    S32615, S31050 25 . . .
    S31277, N08925 40 . . .
    N08367, N08020,
    N08800, N08810,
    N08811
    30 . . .
    TABLE 5 Grain Size Requirements
    Grade UNS Designation Grain Size
    . . . N08810 5 or coarser
    . . . N08811 5 or coarser
    TP304H S30409 7 or coarser
    TP309H S30909 6 or coarser
    TP309HCb S30940 6 or coarser
    TP310H S31009 6 or coarser
    . . . S31035 7 or coarser
    TP310HCb S31041 6 or coarser
    TP316H S31609 7 or coarser
    TP321H S32109 7 or coarser
    . . . S32615 3 or finer
    TP347H S34709 7 or coarser
    TP348H S34809 7 or coarser
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-312/SA-312M
    465
    length of pipe furnished without the completed manufacturer’s
    hydrostatic test shall include with the mandatory markings the
    letters “NH.”
    12.4 The nondestructive electric test shall be in accordance
    with Specification A999/A999M.
13. Lengths
    13.1 Pipe lengths shall be in accordance with the following
    regular practice:
    13.1.1 Unless otherwise agreed upon, all sizes from NPS
    1/8 to and including NPS 8 are available in a length up to 24 ft
    with the permitted range of 15 to 24 ft. Short lengths are
    acceptable and the number and minimum length shall be
    agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
    13.1.2 If definite cut lengths are desired, the lengths required
    shall be specified in the order. No pipe shall be under the
    specified length and no pipe shall be more than 1/4 in. [6 mm]
    over the specified length.
    13.1.3 No jointers are permitted unless otherwise specified.
14. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
    14.1 The finished pipes shall be reasonably straight and
    shall have a workmanlike finish. Removal of imperfections by
    grinding is permitted, provided the wall thicknesses are not
    decreased to less than that permitted in Section 9 of Specification
    A999/A999M.
15. Repair by Welding
    15.1 For welded pipe whose diameter equals or exceeds
    NPS 6, and whose nominal wall thickness equals or exceeds
    0.200, it is permitted to make weld repairs to the weld seam
    with the addition of compatible filler metal using the same
    procedures specified for plate defects in the section on Repair
    by Welding of Specification A999/A999M.
    15.2 Weld repairs of the weld seam shall not exceed 20 % of
    the seam length.
    15.3 Weld repairs shall be made only with the gas tungstenarc
    welding process using the same classification of bare filler
    rod qualified to the most currentAWS Specification A5.9 as the
    grade of stainless steel pipe being repaired and as shown in
    Table 6. Alternatively, subject to approval by the purchaser,
    weld repairs shall be made only with the gas tungsten-arc
    welding process using a filler metal more highly alloyed than
    the base metal when needed for corrosion resistance or other
    properties.
    15.4 Pipes that have had weld seam repairs with filler metal
    shall be uniquely identified and shall be so stated and identified
    on the certificate of tests. When filler metal other than that
    listed in Table 6 is used, the filler metal shall be identified on
    the certificate of tests.
16. Certification
    16.1 In addition to the information required by Specification
    A999/A999M, the certification shall state whether or not the
    material was hydrostatically tested. If the material was nondestructively
    tested, the certification shall so state and shall state
    which standard practice was followed and what reference
    discontinuities were used.
17. Marking
    17.1 In addition to the marking specified in Specification
    A999/A999M, the marking shall include the NPS (nominal
    pipe size) or outside diameter and schedule number or average
    wall thickness, heat number, and NH when hydrotesting is not
    performed and ET when eddy-current testing is performed or
    UT when ultrasonic testing is performed. The marking shall
    also include the manufacturer’s private identifying mark, the
    marking requirement of 12.3, if applicable, and whether
    seamless (SML), welded (WLD), or heavily cold-worked
    (HCW). For Grades TP304H, TP316H, TP321H, TP347H,
    TP348H, and S30815, the marking shall also include the heat
    number and heat-treatment lot identification. If specified in the
    purchase order, the marking for pipe larger than NPS 4 shall
    include the weight.
18. Government Procurement
    18.1 Scale Free Pipe for Government Procurement:
    TABLE 6 Pipe and Filler Metal Specification
    Pipe Filler Metal
    Grade
    UNS
    Designation
    AWS A5.9
    Class
    UNS Designation
    TP201 S20100 . . . . . . . . .
    TP201LN S20153 . . . . . . . . .
    TP304 S30400 ER308 S30800, W30840
    TP304L S30403 ER308L S30883, W30843
    TP304N S30451 ER308 S30880, W30840
    TP304LN S30453 ER308L S30883, W30843
    TP304H S30409 ER308 S30880, W30840
    . . . S30601 . . . . . .
    TP309Cb S30940 . . . . . . . . .
    TP309S S30908 . . . . . . . . .
    TP310Cb S31040 . . . . . . . . .
    TP310S S31008 . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S31266 ERNiCrMo-4 N10276
    ERNiCrMo-10 N06022
    ERNiCrMo-13 N06059
    ERNiCrMo-14 N06686
    ERNiCrMo-17 N06200
    S31272 . . . . . . . . .
    TP316 S31600 ER316 S31680, W31640
    TP316L S31603 ER316L S31683, W31643
    TP316N S31651 ER316 S31680, W31640
    TP316LN S31653 ER316L S31683, W31643
    TP316H S31609 ER316H S31680, W31640
    . . . S31730 ERNiCr-3, or
    ERNiCrMo-3,
    or
    ERNiCrMo-4
    N06082, N06625, N10276
    TP321 S32100 ER321
    ER347
    S32180, W32140
    S34780, W34740
    TP347 S34700 ER347 S34780, W34740
    TP348 S34800 ER347 S34780, W34740
    TPXM-19 S22100 ER209 S20980, W32240
    TPXM-29 S28300 ER240 S23980, W32440
    . . . N08367 . . . N06625
    Alloy 20 N08020 ER320 N08021
    ER320LR N08022
    . . . S20400 ER209 S20980, W32240
    800 N08800 ERNiCr-3A N06082
    800H N08810 ERNiCr-3A N06082
    N08811 ERNiCr-3A N06082
    . . . N08925 . . . N06625
    . . . N08926 . . . N06625
    AAWS A5.14 Class.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-312/SA-312M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    466
    18.1.1 When specified in the contract or order, the following
    requirements shall be considered in the inquiry, contract or
    order, for agencies of the U.S. Government where scale free
    pipe or tube is required. These requirements shall take precedence
    if there is a conflict between these requirements and the
    product specifications.
    18.1.2 The requirements of Specification A999/A999M for
    pipe and Specification A1016/A1016M for tubes shall be
    applicable when pipe or tube is ordered to this specification.
    18.1.3 Pipe and tube shall be one of the following grades as
    specified herein:
    Grade UNS Designation
    TP304 S30400
    TP304L S30403
    TP304N S30451
    TP316 S31600
    TP316L S31603
    TP316N S31651
    TP317 S31700
    TP317L S31703
    TP321 S32100
    TP347 S34700
    18.1.4 Part Number:
    Example: ASTM A312/A312MPipe 304 NPS 12 SCH 40S
    SMLS
    Specification Number ASTM A312
    Pipe P
    Grade 304
    NPS 12
    Wall 0.375
    SMLS OR WELDED SML
    18.1.4.1
    Specification Number ASTM A312
    Tube T
    Grade 304
    Outside Diameter 0.250
    Wall 0.035
    SMLS OR WELDED WLD
    18.1.5 Ordering Information—Orders for material under
    this specification shall include the following in addition to the
    requirements of Section 4:
    18.1.5.1 Pipe or tube,
    18.1.5.2 Part number,
    18.1.5.3 Ultrasonic inspection, if required,
    18.1.5.4 If shear wave test is to be conducted in two
    opposite circumferential directions,
    18.1.5.5 Intergranular corrosion test, and
    18.1.5.6 Level of preservation and packing required.
19. Keywords
    19.1 austenitic stainless steel; seamless steel pipe; stainless
    steel pipe; steel pipe; welded steel pipe
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified in the
    purchase order. The purchaser may specify a different frequency of test or analysis than is provided
    in the supplementary requirement. Subject to agreement between the purchaser and manufacturer,
    retest and retreatment provisions of these supplementary requirements may also be modified.
    S1. Product Analysis
    S1.1 For all pipe NPS 5 and larger in nominal size there shall
    be one product analysis made of a representative sample from
    one piece for each ten lengths or fraction thereof from each
    heat of steel.
    S1.2 For pipe smaller than NPS 5 there shall be one product
    analysis made from ten lengths per heat of steel or from 10 %
    of the number of lengths per heat of steel, whichever number
    is smaller.
    S1.3 Individual lengths failing to conform to the chemical
    requirements specified in Section 7 shall be rejected.
    S2. Transverse Tension Tests
    S2.1 There shall be one transverse tension test made from
    one end of 10 % of the lengths furnished per heat of steel. This
    requirement is applicable only to pipe NPS 8 and larger.
    S2.2 If a specimen from any length fails to conform to the
    tensile properties specified that length shall be rejected.
    S3. Flattening Test
    S3.1 The flattening test of Specification A999/A999M shall
    be made on a specimen from one end or both ends of each pipe.
    Crop ends may be used. If this supplementary requirement is
    specified, the number of tests per pipe shall also be specified.
    If a specimen from any length fails because of lack of ductility
    prior to satisfactory completion of the first step of the flattening
    test requirement, that pipe shall be rejected subject to retreatment
    in accordance with Specification A999/A999M and
    satisfactory retest. If a specimen from any length of pipe fails
    because of a lack of soundness that length shall be rejected,
    unless subsequent retesting indicates that the remaining length
    is sound.
    S4. Etching Tests
    S4.1 The steel shall be homogeneous as shown by etching
    tests conducted in accordance with the appropriate portions of
    Method E381. Etching tests shall be made on a cross section
    from one end or both ends of each pipe and shall show sound
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-312/SA-312M
    467
    and reasonably uniform material free of injurious laminations,
    cracks, and similar objectionable defects. If this supplementary
    requirement is specified, the number of tests per pipe required
    shall also be specified. If a specimen from any length shows
    objectionable defects, the length shall be rejected, subject to
    removal of the defective end and subsequent retests indicating
    the remainder of the length to be sound and reasonably uniform
    material.
    S5. Radiographic Examination
    S5.1 The entire length of weld in each double welded pipe
    shall be radiographically examined, using X-radiation, in
    accordance with Paragraph UW-51 of Section VIII Division 1
    of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. In addition to
    the marking required by Section 13 each pipe shall be marked
    “RT” after the specification and grade. Requirements of S5
    shall be required in the certification.
    S6. Stabilizing Heat Treatment
    S6.1 Subsequent to the solution anneal required in 6.2,
    Grades TP309HCb, TP310HCb, TP321, TP321H, TP347,
    TP347H, TP348, and TP348H shall be given a stabilization
    heat treatment at a temperature lower than that used for the
    initial solution annealing heat treatment. The temperature of
    stabilization heat treatment shall be as agreed upon between the
    purchaser and vendor.
    S7. Intergranular Corrosion Test
    S7.1 When specified, material shall pass intergranular corrosion
    tests conducted by the manufacturer in accordance with
    Practices A262, Practice E.
    S7.1.1 Practice E requires testing on the sensitized condition
    for low carbon or stabilized grades, and on the as-shipped
    condition for other grades. The applicability of this test and the
    preparation of the sample for testing for grades containing
    greater than 3 % molybdenum shall be as agreed by the
    purchaser and manufacturer.
    NOTE S7.1—Practice E requires testing on the sensitized condition for
    low carbon or stabilized grades, and on the as-shipped condition for other
    grades.
    S7.2 A stabilization heat treatment in accordance with
    Supplementary Requirement S6 may be necessary and is
    permitted in order to meet this requirement for the grades
    containing titanium or columbium, particularly in their H
    versions.
    S8. Minimum Wall Pipe
    S8.1 When specified by the purchaser, pipe shall be furnished
    on a minimum wall basis. The wall of such pipe shall
    not fall below the thickness specified. In addition to the
    marking required by Section 17, the pipe shall be marked S8.
    S9. Weld Decay Test
    S9.1 When specified in the purchase order, one sample from
    each lot of pipe shall be subject to testing in a boiling solution
    of 50 % reagent grade hydrochloric acid and 50 % water.
    S9.2 The sample, of approximately 2–in. [50–mm] length,
    shall be prepared from a production length of pipe. Depending
    on the size of the pipe, it is permitted to section the sample
    longitudinally to allow it to fit in the Erlenmeyer flask. As a
    minimum, the tested sample shall include the entire weld and
    adjacent area and the full length of base metal 180° across from
    the weld. All burrs and sharp edges shall be removed by light
    grinding. Dust and grease shall be removed by cleaning with
    soap and water or other suitable solvents.
    S9.3 The hydrochloric acid solution shall be prepared by
    slowly adding reagent grade (approximately 37 %) hydrochloric
    acid to an equal volume of distilled water.
    Warning—Protect eyes and use rubber gloves when handling
    acid. Mixing and testing shall be performed in a
    protective enclosure.
    S9.4 The test container shall be a 1–L Erlenmeyer flask
    equipped with ground-glass joints and an Ahline condenser.
    The volume of the solution shall be approximately 700 mL.
    S9.5 The thickness of the weld and the base metal 180°
    from the weld shall be measured near both ends of the sample.
    These measurements shall be made with a micrometer with an
    anvil shape suitable for measuring the thickness with an
    accuracy to at least 0.001 in. [0.025 mm].
    S9.6 The sample sections, both weld and base metal, shall
    be immersed in the flask containing the solution. Boiling chips
    shall be added and the solution brought to a boil. Boiling shall
    be maintained through the duration of the test. The time of
    testing shall be that which is required to remove 40 to 60 % of
    the original base metal thickness (usually 2 h or less). If more
    than 60 % of the base metal thickness remains, it is permitted
    to terminate the test after 24 h.
    S9.7 At the end of the test period, the samples shall be
    removed from the solution, rinsed with distilled water, and
    dried.
    S9.8 The thickness measurements as in S9.5 shall be repeated.
    The anvil shape of the micrometer used shall be
    suitable for measuring the minimum remaining thickness with
    an accuracy to at least 0.001 in. [0.025 mm].
    S9.9 The corrosion ratio, R, shall be calculated as follows:
    R 5 ~W0 2 W!/~B0 2 B!
    where:
    W0 = average weld-metal thickness before the test,
    W = average weld-metal thickness after the test,
    B0 = average base-metal thickness before the test, and
    B = average base-metal thickness after the test,
    S9.9.1 The corrosion ratio for HCW pipe shall be as
    specified in 11.5.
    S9.9.2 The corrosion ratio shall be 1.25 or less, or as further
    restricted in the purchase order, when the weld decay test is
    specified for welded (WLD) pipe.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-312/SA-312M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    468
    APPENDIX
    (Nonmandatory Information)
    X1. DIMENSIONS OF WELDED AND SEAMLESS STAINLESS STEEL PIPE
    X1.1 Table X1.1 is based on Table number 1 of the
    American National Standard for stainless steel pipe (ANSI
    B36.19).
    TABLE X1.1 Dimensions of Welded and Seamless Stainless Steel Pipe
    NOTE 1—The decimal thickness listed for the respective pipe sizes represents their nominal or average wall dimensions.
    NPS
    Designator
    Outside Diameter Nominal Wall Thickness
    in. mm Schedule 5SA Schedule 10SA Schedule 40S Schedule 80S
    in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
    1/8 0.405 10.29 … … 0.049 1.24 0.068 1.73 0.095 2.41
    1/4 0.540 13.72 … … 0.065 1.65 0.088 2.24 0.119 3.02
    3/8 0.675 17.15 … … 0.065 1.65 0.091 2.31 0.126 3.20
    1/2 0.840 21.34 0.065 1.65 0.083 2.11 0.109 2.77 0.147 3.73
    3/4 1.050 26.67 0.065 1.65 0.083 2.11 0.113 2.87 0.154 3.91
    1.0 1.315 33.40 0.065 1.65 0.109 2.77 0.133 3.38 0.179 4.55
    11/4 1.660 42.16 0.065 1.65 0.109 2.77 0.140 3.56 0.191 4.85
    11/2 1.900 48.26 0.065 1.65 0.109 2.77 0.145 3.68 0.200 5.08
    2 2.375 60.33 0.065 1.65 0.109 2.77 0.154 3.91 0.218 5.54
    21/2 2.875 73.03 0.083 2.11 0.120 3.05 0.203 5.16 0.276 7.01
    3 3.500 88.90 0.083 2.11 0.120 3.05 0.216 5.49 0.300 7.62
    31/2 4.000 101.60 0.083 2.11 0.120 3.05 0.226 5.74 0.318 8.08
    4 4.500 114.30 0.083 2.11 0.120 3.05 0.237 6.02 0.337 8.56
    5 5.563 141.30 0.109 2.77 0.134 3.40 0.258 6.55 0.375 9.52
    6 6.625 168.28 0.109 2.77 0.134 3.40 0.280 7.11 0.432 10.97
    8 8.625 219.08 0.109 2.77 0.148 3.76 0.322 8.18 0.500 12.70
    10 10.750 273.05 0.134 3.40 0.165 4.19 0.365 9.27 0.500B 12.70B
    12 12.750 323.85 0.156 3.96 0.180 4.57 0.375B 9.52B 0.500B 12.70B
    14 14.000 355.60 0.156 3.96 0.188B 4.78B … … … …
    16 16.000 406.40 0.165 4.19 0.188B 4.78B … … … …
    18 18.000 457.20 0.165 4.19 0.188B 4.78B … … … …
    20 20.000 508.00 0.188 4.78 0.218B 5.54B … … … …
    22 22.000 558.80 0.188 4.78 0.218B 5.54B … … … …
    24 24.000 609.60 0.218 5.54 0.250 6.35 … … … …
    30 30.000 762.00 0.250 6.35 0.312 7.92 … … … …
    A Schedules 5S and 10S wall thicknesses do not permit threading in accordance with the American National Standard for Pipe Threads (ANSI B1.20.1).
    B These do not conform to the American National Standard for Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe (ANSI B36.10–1979).
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR ALLOY-STEEL AND STAINLESS
    STEEL BOLTING FOR LOW-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
    SA-320/SA-320M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A320/A320M-11a.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-320/SA-320M
    469
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-320/SA-320M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    470
    Standard Specification for
    Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature
    Service
20. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers alloy steel bolting for pressure
    vessels, valves, flanges, and fittings for low-temperature
    service. See Specification A962/A962M for the definition of
    bolting. The bars shall be hot-wrought and may be further
    processed by centerless grinding or by cold drawing. Austenitic
    stainless steel may be solution annealed or annealed and
    strain-hardened. When strain hardened austenitic stainless steel
    is ordered, the purchaser should take special care to ensure that
    Appendix X1 is thoroughly understood.
    1.2 Several grades are covered, including both ferritic and
    austenitic steels designated L7, B8, etc. Selection will depend
    on design, service conditions, mechanical properties, and
    low-temperature characteristics. The mechanical requirements
    of Table 1 indicate the diameters for which the minimum
    mechanical properties apply to the various grades and classes,
    and Table 2 stipulates the requirements for Charpy impact
    energy absorption. The manufacturer should determine that the
    material can conform to these requirements before parts are
    manufactured. For example, when Grade L43 is specified to
    meet the Table 2 impact energy values at -150 °F [-101 °C],
    additional restrictions (such as procuring a steel with lower P
    and S contents than might normally be supplied) in the
    chemical composition for AISI 4340 are likely to be required.
    NOTE 1—The committee formulating this specification has included
    several grades of material that have been rather extensively used for the
    present purpose. Other compositions will be considered for inclusion by
    the committee from time to time as the need becomes apparent. Users
    should note that hardenability of some of the grades mentioned may
    restrict the maximum size at which the required mechanical properties are
    obtainable.
    1.3 The following referenced general requirements are indispensable
    for application of this specification: Specification
    A962/A962M.
    1.4 Nuts for use with bolting are covered in Section 10 and
    the nut material shall be impact tested.
    1.5 Supplementary Requirements are provided for use at the
    option of the purchaser. The supplementary requirements shall
    apply only when specified in the purchase order or contract.
    1.6 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound units
    and SI units; however, unless the purchase order or contract
    specifies the applicable M specification designation (SI) units,
    the inch-pound units shall apply.
    1.7 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
    each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
    system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
    values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
    with the standard.
21. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A194/A194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
    for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service,
    or Both
    A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    A962/A962M Specification for Common Requirements for
    Bolting Intended for Use at Any Temperature from Cryogenic
    to the Creep Range
    E566 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Sorting
    of Ferrous Metals
    F436 Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
    F606 Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical Properties
    of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners,
    Washers, Direct Tension Indicators, and Rivets
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-320/SA-320M
    471
    2.2 ASME Standards:
    B1.1 Screw Threads
    B18.22.1 Plain Washers
22. Ordering Information
    3.1 It is the purchaser’s responsibility to specify in the
    purchase order all information necessary to purchase the
    needed materials. Examples of such information include, but
    are not limited to, the following:
    3.1.1 Quantity and size,
    3.1.2 Heat-treated condition, that is, for the austenitic stainless
    steels, solution-treated (Class 1); solution-treated after
    finishing (Class 1A); and annealed and strain-hardened (Class
    2),
    3.1.3 Description of items required (bars, bolts, screws, or
    studs),
    3.1.4 Nuts and washers, if required by the purchaser, in
    accordance with Section 10, and
    3.1.5 Special requirements, in accordance with 5.1.1, 5.1.2,
    5.1.3, and 13.1.
23. Common Requirements
    4.1 Bolting supplied to this specification shall conform to
    the requirements of Specification A962/A962M. These requirements
    include test methods, finish, thread dimensions,
    macroetch (carbon and alloy steels only) marking, certification,
    optional supplementary requirements, and others. Failure to
    comply with the requirements of Specification A962/A962M
    constitutes nonconformance with this specification. In case of
    conflict between the requirements in this specification and
    Specification A962/A962M, this specification shall prevail.
    4.2 For L7M bolting, the final heat treatment, which may be
    the tempering operation if conducted at 1150 °F [620 °C]
    minimum, shall be done after machining and forming operations,
    including thread rolling and any type of cutting.
24. Materials and Manufacture
    5.1 Heat Treatment:
    5.1.1 Bolting shall be allowed to cool to room temperature
    after rolling or forging. Grades L7, L7A, L7B, L7C, L7M, L43,
    L1, L70, L71, L72, and L73 shall be reheated to above the
    upper critical temperature and liquid quenched and tempered.
    Grades B8, B8C, B8M, B8T, B8F, B8P, B8LN, and B8MLN
    shall receive a carbide solution treatment. Products made from
    such material are described as Class 1. This shall consist of
    holding the material for a sufficient time at a temperature at
    which the chromium carbide will go into solution and then
    cooling in air or in a liquid medium at a rate sufficient to
    prevent reprecipitation of the carbide. Material thus treated is
    described as Class 1. If specified in the purchase order, material
    shall be solution treated in the finished condition; material so
    treated is described as Class 1A.
    5.1.2 When increased mechanical properties are desired,
    austenitic bolting shall be solution annealed and strain hardened
    if specified in the purchase order; material so treated is
    identified as Class 2.
    5.1.3 If scale-free bright finish is required, this shall be
    specified in the purchase order.
    5.1.4 For L7M bolting, the final heat treatment, which may
    be the tempering or stress-relieving operation conducted at
    1150 °F [620 °C] minimum, shall be done after machining or
    rolling of the threads and any type of cutting.
25. Mechanical Requirements
    6.1 Tensile Properties:
    6.1.1 The material as represented by the tension specimens
    shall conform to the requirements as to tensile properties
    prescribed in Table 1 at room temperature after heat treatment
    (see 5.1.1). Alternatively, Class 2 Strain Hardened Headed
    Fasteners shall be tested full size after strain hardening to
    determine tensile strength and yield strength and shall conform
    to the requirements prescribed in Table 1. Should the results of
    full size tests conflict with results of tension specimen tests,
    full size test results shall prevail.
    6.1.2 Number of Tests:
    6.1.2.1 For heat-treated bars, one tension test and one
    impact test consisting of three specimens shall be made for
    each diameter of each heat represented in each tempering
    charge. When heat treated without interruption in continuous
    furnaces, the material in a lot shall be the same heat, same prior
    condition, same size, and subjected to the same heat treatment.
    Not fewer than two tensile tests and two impact tests are
    required for each lot containing 20 000 lbs [9000 kg] or less.
    Every additional 10 000 lbs [4500 kg] or fraction thereof
    requires an additional tensile test and impact test.
    6.1.2.2 For studs, bolts, screws, etc., one tension test and
    one set of three impact specimens shall be made for each
    diameter of each heat involved in the lot. Each lot shall consist
    of the following:
    Diameter, in. [mm] Lot Size, lb [kg]
    11/8 [30] and under 1500 [680] or fraction thereof
    Over 11/8 [30] to 13/4 [45],
    incl
    4500 [2040] or fraction
    thereof
    Over 13/4 [45] to 21/2 [65],
    incl
    6000 [2700] or fraction
    thereof
    Over 21/2 [65] 100 pieces or fraction thereof
    6.1.2.3 Full Size Specimens, Headed Fasteners—Headed
    fasteners 1 1/2 in. in body diameter and smaller, with body
    length three times the diameter or longer, and which are
    produced by upsetting or forging (hot or cold) shall be
    subjected to full size testing in accordance with 6.1.3. This
    testing shall be in addition to tensile testing as specified in
    6.1.1. The lot size shall be shown in 6.1.2.2. Failure shall occur
    in the body or threaded sections with no failure, or indications
    of failure, such as cracks, at the junction of the head and shank.
    6.1.3 Full Size Fasteners, Wedge Tensile Testing—When
    applicable, see 6.1.2.3. Headed fasteners shall be wedge tested
    full size in accordance with Annex A3 of Test Methods and
    Definitions A370 and shall conform to the tensile strength
    shown in Table 1. The minimum full size breaking strength
    (lbf) for individual sizes shall be as follows:
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-320/SA-320M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    472
    TABLE 1 Mechanical Requirements
    Class and Grade, Diameter, in [mm] Heat Treatment
    Minimum
    Tempering
    Temperature
    °F [°C]
    Tensile
    Strength,
    min, ksi
    [MPa]
    Yield Strength,
    min, ksi
    [MPa] (0.2 %
    offset)
    Elongation
    in 2 in.
    or 50
    mm min, %
    Reduction
    of Area,
    min, %
    Hardness
    max
    Ferritic Steels
    L7, L7A, L7B, L7C, L70, L71, L72, L73 125 105 16 50 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    21/2 [65] and underA quenched and tempered 1100
    [593]
    [860] [725]
    L43 125 105 16 50 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    4 [100] and underA quenched and tempered 1100
    [593]
    [860] [725]
    L7M 100 80 18 50 235 HBWB or
    99 HRB
    21/2 [65] and underA quenched and tempered 1150
    [620]
    [690] [550]
    L1 125 105 16 50 . . .
    1 [25] and underA quenched and tempered [860] [725]
    Austenitic SteelsC
    Class 1: B8, B8C, B8M, B8P,
    B8F, B8T, B8LN, B8MLN, all diameters
    carbide solution treated 75
    [515]
    30
    [205]
    30 50 223 HBWD or
    96 HRB
    Class 1A: B8A, B8CA, B8MA, B8PA,
    B8FA, B8TA, B8LNA,
    B8MLNA, all diameters
    carbide solution treated in the
    finished condition
    75
    [515]
    30
    [205]
    30 50 192 HBW or 90
    HRB
    Class 2: B8, B8C, B8P, B8F, B8T: carbide solution treated and strain
    hardened
    3/4 [20] and under 125
    [860]
    100
    [690]
    12 35 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over 3/4 to 1 [20 to 25], incl 115
    [795]
    80
    [550]
    15 30 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over 1 to 11/4 [25 to 32], incl 105
    [725]
    65
    [450]
    20 35 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over 11/4 to 11/2 [32 to 40], inclA 100
    [690]
    50
    [345]
    28 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    Class 2: B8M: carbide solution treated and strain
    hardened
    3/4 [20] and under 110
    [760]
    95
    [655]
    15 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over 3/4 to 1 [20 to 25], incl 100
    [690]
    80
    [550]
    20 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over 1 to 11/4 [25 to 32], incl 95
    [655]
    65
    [450]
    25 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    over 11/4 to 11/2 [32 to 40], inclA 90
    [620]
    50
    [345]
    30 45 321 HBW or 35
    HRC
    A These upper diameter limits were established on the basis that these were the largest sizes commonly available that consistently met specification property limits. They are not intended as absolute limits beyond
    which bolting materials could no longer be certified to the specification.
    B To meet the tensile requirements, the Brinell hardness shall not be less than 200 HBW or 93 HRB.
    C Class 1 products are made from solution-treated material. Class 1A products are solution treated in the finished condition for corrosion resistance; heat treatment is critical for enhancing this physical property and
    meeting the mechanical property requirements. Class 2 products are made from solution-treated material that has been strain hardened. Austenitic steels in the strain-hardened condition may not show uniform properties
    throughout the cross section, particularly in sizes over 3/4 in. [20 mm] in diameter.
    D For sizes 3/4 in. [20 mm] in diameter and smaller, a maximum hardness of 241 HBW (100 HRB) is permitted.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-320/SA-320M
    473
    Ts5 UTS3As (1)
    where:
    Ts = Wedge tensile strength
    UTS = Tensile strength specified in Table 1, and
    As = Stress area, square inches, as shown in ASME B1.1
    or calculated as follows:
    As5 0.785 ~D 2 ~0.974/n!!2 (2)
    where:
    D = Nominal thread size, and
    n = The number of threads per inch.
    6.2 Impact Properties:
    6.2.1 Requirements:
    6.2.1.1 Impact tests are required for the grades shown in
    Table 3. Class 1, 1A, and 2 austenitic steels for temperatures
    above -325 °F [-200 °C]; Class 1 and 1A austenitic Grades B8,
    B8A, B8P, B8PA, B8C, B8CA, B8LN, and B8LNA above -425
    °F [-255 °C]; and ferritic or austenitic bolting 1/2 in. (12.5 mm)
    and smaller, are exempt from impact testing, unless Supplementary
    Requirement S1 is specified in the purchase order (see
    1.4). All other material furnished under this specification shall
    be tested. Material of Grades L7, L7A, L7B, L7C, L7M, L43,
    L70, L71, L72, and L73 shall show a minimum impact energy
    absorption of 20 ft · lbf [27 J] and of Grade L1 a minimum
    impact energy absorption of 40 ft · lbf [54 J] at the test
    temperature when tested by the procedure specified in the
    applicable portions of Sections 19 to 28 of Test Methods and
    Definitions A370. The temperature of the coolant used for
    chilling the test specimens shall be controlled within 63 °F
    [1.5 °C]. Test temperatures for ferritic grades are listed in Table
26. Exceptions to this requirement are permissible, and the
    impact tests may be made at specified temperatures different
    than those shown in Table 4, provided the test temperature is at
    least as low as the intended service temperature and the bolting
    is suitably marked to identify the reported test temperature.
    When impact testing is required for austenitic grades, test
    criteria shall be agreed upon between the supplier and purchaser.
    6.2.1.2 The impact test requirements for standard and subsize
    Charpy test specimens are prescribed in Table 2.
    6.2.2 Number of Tests:
    6.2.2.1 The test requirements for heat-treated bars are given
    in 6.1.2.1.
    6.2.2.2 For test requirements on studs, bolts, screws, etc.,
    see 6.1.2.2.
    6.2.2.3 Impact tests are not required to be made on heattreated
    bars, bolts, screws, studs, and stud bolts 1/2 in. [12.5
    mm] and under in diameter.
    6.2.3 Test Specimens—For sections 1 in. [25 mm] or less in
    diameter, test specimens shall be taken at the axis; for sections
    over 1 in. [25 mm] in diameter, midway between the axis and
    the surface.
    6.3 Hardness Requirements:
    6.3.1 The hardness shall conform to the requirements prescribed
    in Table 1. Hardness testing shall be performed in
    accordance with either Specification A962/A962M or with Test
    Methods F606.
    6.3.2 The maximum hardness of Grade L7M shall be 235
    HBW or 99 HRB (conversion in accordance with Table
    Number 2B of Test Methods and Definitions A370). Minimum
    hardness shall not be less than 200 HBW or 93 HRB.
    Conformance to this hardness shall be ensured by testing each
    bolt or stud by Brinell or Rockwell B methods in accordance
    with 6.3.1.
    6.3.2.1 The use of 100 % electromagnetic testing for hardness
    as an alternative to 100 % indentation hardness testing is
    permissible when qualified by sampling using indentation
    hardness testing. Each lot tested for hardness electromagnetically
    shall be 100 % examined in accordance with Practice
    E566. Following electromagnetic testing for hardness, a random
    sample of a minimum of 100 pieces in each purchase lot
    (as defined in 6.1.2.2) shall be tested by indentation hardness
    methods. All samples must meet hardness requirements to
    permit acceptance of the lot. If any one sample is outside of the
    specified maximum or minimum hardness, the lot shall be
    rejected and either reprocessed and resampled, or tested 100 %
    by indentation hardness methods.
    6.3.2.2 In the event a controversy exists relative to minimum
    strength, tension tests shall prevail over hardness readings.
    Products which have been tested and found acceptable
    shall have a line under the grade symbol.
27. Chemical Composition
    7.1 Each alloy shall conform to the chemical composition
    requirements prescribed in Table 3.
28. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
    8.1 Bolts, screws, studs, and stud bolts shall be pointed and
    shall have a workmanlike finish.
29. Retests
    9.1 If the results of the mechanical tests of any test lot do
    not conform to the requirements specified, the manufacturer
    may retreat such lot not more than twice, in which case two
    additional tension tests and one additional impact test consisting
    of three specimens shall be made from such lot, all of
    which shall conform to the requirements specified.
30. Nuts and Washers
    10.1 Bolts, studs, and stud bolts of Grades L7, L7A, L7B,
    L7C, L43, L1, L70, L71, L72, and L73 shall be equipped with
    TABLE 2 Impact Energy Absorption Requirements
    Size of
    Specimen, mm
    Minimum Impact Value
    Required for Average
    of Each Set of Three
    Specimens, ft·lbf [J]
    Minimum Impact
    Value Permitted for
    One Specimen Only
    of a Set, ft·lbf [J]
    All Grades Except L1A
    10 by 10
    10 by 7.5
    20 [27]
    16 [22]
    15 [20]
    12 [16]
    Grade L1
    10 by 10
    10 by 7.5
    40 [54]
    32 [44]
    30 [41]
    24 [32]
    A See 6.2.1.1 for permitted exemptions.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-320/SA-320M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    474
    TABLE 3 Chemical Requirements (Composition, %)A
    Type . . . . . . Ferritic
    Steels
    Grade
    Symbol . . . . .
    L7, L7M, L70 L7A, L71 L7B, L72 L7C, L73 L43 L1
    Description . . . Chromium-MolybdenumB
    Carbon-
    Molybdenum
    (AISI 4037)
    Chromium-
    Molybdenum
    (AISI 4137)
    Nickel-Chromium-
    Molybdenum
    (AISI 8740)
    Nickel-Chromium-
    Molybdenum
    (AISI 4340) Low-Carbon Boron
    Range,
    %
    Product
    Variation,
    %
    Range,
    %
    Product
    Variation,
    %
    Range,
    %
    Product
    Variation,
    %
    Range,
    %
    Product
    Variation,
    %
    Range,
    %
    Product
    Variation,
    %
    Range,
    %
    Product
    Variation,
    %
    Over or
    Under
    Over or
    Under
    Over or
    Under
    Over or
    Under
    Over or
    Under
    Over or
    Under
    Carbon 0.38–
    0.48C
    0.02 0.35–
    0.40
    0.02 0.35–
    0.40
    0.02 0.38–
    0.43
    0.02 0.38–
    0.43
    0.02 0.17–
    0.24
    0.01
    Manganese 0.75–
    1.00
    0.04 0.70–
    0.90
    0.03 0.70–
    0.90
    0.03 0.75–
    1.00
    0.04 0.60–
    0.85
    0.03 0.70–
    1.40
    0.04
    Phosphorus
    max
    0.035 0.005
    over
    0.035 0.005
    over
    0.035 0.005
    over
    0.035 0.005
    over
    0.035 0.005
    over
    0.035 0.005
    over
    Sulfur, max 0.040 0.005
    over
    0.040 0.005
    over
    0.040 0.005
    over
    0.040 0.005
    over
    0.040 0.005
    over
    0.050 0.005
    over
    Silicon 0.15–
    0.35
    0.02 0.15–
    0.35
    0.02 0.15–
    0.35
    0.02 0.15–
    0.35
    0.02 0.15–
    0.35
    0.02 0.15–
    0.30
    0.02
    Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.40–
    0.70
    0.03 1.65–
    2.00
    0.05 . . . . . .
    Chromium 0.80–
    1.10
    0.05 . . . . . . 0.80–
    1.10
    0.05 0.40–
    0.60
    0.03 0.70–
    0.90
    0.03 . . . . . .
    Molybdenum 0.15–
    0.25
    0.02 0.20–
    0.30
    0.02 0.15–
    0.25
    0.02 0.20–
    0.30
    0.02 0.20–
    0.30
    0.02 . . . . . .
    Boron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.001–
    0.003
    . . .
    Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Austenitic Steels, Classes 1, 1A, and 2D
    Grade Symbol . . . . . . . B8, B8A B8C, B8CA
    UNS Designation. . . . . . . . . . . S 30400(304) S 34700(347)
    Range, %
    Product Variation, %
    Range, %
    Product Variation, %
    Over or Under Over or Under
    Carbon, max 0.08 0.01 over 0.08 0.01 over
    Manganese, max 2.00 0.04 over 2.00 0.04 over
    Phosphorus, max 0.045 0.010 over 0.045 0.010 over
    Sulfur, max 0.030 0.005 over 0.030 0.005 over
    Silicon, max 1.00 0.05 over 1.00 0.05 over
    Nickel 8.0–11.0 0.15 9.0–12.0 0.15
    Chromium 18.0–20.0 0.20 17.0–19.0 0.20
    Columbium + Tantalum . . . . . . 10 × carbon
    content, min. –1.10
    max
    0.05 under
    Type. . . . . . . . Austenitic Steels, Classes 1, 1A, and 2D
    Grade Symbol . . . . . . B8T, B8TA B8P, B8PA B8F, B8FA B8M, B8MA
    UNS Designation . . . . S 32100(321) S 30500 S 30300(303) S 30323(303Se) S 31600(316)
    Range, %
    Product
    Variation, %
    Range, %
    Product
    Variation, %
    Range, %
    Product
    Variation, %
    Range, %
    Product
    Variation, %
    Range, %
    Product
    Variation, %
    Over or
    Under
    Over or
    Under
    Over or
    Under
    Over or
    Under
    Over or
    Under
    Carbon, max 0.08 0.01 over 0.08 0.01 over 0.15 0.01 over 0.15 0.01 over 0.08 0.01 over
    Manganese, max 2.00 0.04 over 2.00 0.04 over 2.00 0.04 over 2.00 0.04 over 2.00 0.04 over
    Phosphorus, max 0.045 0.010 over 0.045 0.010 over 0.20 0.010 over 0.20 0.010 over 0.045 0.010 over
    Sulfur 0.030, max 0.005 over 0.030, max 0.005 over 0.15, min 0.020 0.06, max 0.010 over 0.030, max 0.005 over
    Silicon, max 1.00 0.05 over 1.00 0.05 over 1.00 0.05 over 1.00 0.05 over 1.00 0.05 over
    Nickel
    9.0–
    12.0
    0.15
    10.5–
    13.0
    0.15
    8.0–
    10.0
    0.10
    8.0–
    10.0
    0.10
    10.0–
    14.0
    0.15
    Chromium
    17.0–
    19.0
    0.20
    17.0–
    19.0
    0.20
    17.0–
    19.0
    0.20
    17.0–
    19.0
    0.20
    16.0–
    18.0
    0.20
    Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    2.00–
    3.00
    0.10
    Selenium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    0.15–
    0.35
    0.03 under . . . . . .
    Titanium 5 × carbon
    content,
    min
    0.05 under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    Nitrogen 0.10, max 0.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Austenitic Steels, Classes 1 and 1A
    Grade Symbol . . . . . . . B8LN, B8LNA B8MLN, B8MLNA
    UNS Designation . . . . . . . . . . . S 30453 S 31653
    Range, %
    Product Variation, %
    Range, %
    Product Variation, %
    Over or Under Over or Under
    Carbon, max 0.030 0.005 over 0.030 0.005 over
    Manganese, max 2.00 0.04 over 2.00 0.04 over
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-320/SA-320M
    475
    ferritic alloy nuts conforming to Grade 4 or Grade 7 of
    Specification A194/A194M or a grade of steel similar to the
    studs. Grade 7M nuts at a hardness not exceeding 235 HBW (or
    equivalent) shall be used with Grade L7M bolts, studs, and stud
    bolts. All nut materials, including those which may be supplied
    under Specification A194/A194M, shall be subject to the
    impact requirements of this specification in the following
    manner: impact tests shall be made on test specimens taken
    from the bar or plate from the heat of steel used for manufacturing
    the nuts, and heat treated with the nut blanks.
    10.2 Bolts, studs, and stud bolts of Grades B8, B8C, B8T,
    B8P, B8F, B8M, B8LN, and B8MLN shall be equipped with
    austenitic alloy nuts conforming to Grades 8, 8C, 8T, 8F, 8M,
    8LN, and 8MLN for Specification A194/A194M. Impact tests
    are not required for Grades 8F, 8M, 8T, and 8MLN for
    temperatures above -325 °F [-200 °C] and for Grades 8, 8P,
    8C, and 8LN above -425 °F [-255 °C].
    10.3 If the purchaser requires nuts with a Charpy impact
    energy absorption of not less than 20 ft · lbf [27 J] at
    temperatures below -150 °F [-100 °C], he may require that the
    nuts conform to Grades 8, 8C, 8M, 8P, 8T, 8F, 8LN, or 8MLN
    of Specification A194/A194M.
    10.4 Washers for use with ferritic steel bolting shall conform
    to Specification F436.
    10.5 Washers for use with austenitic steel bolting shall be
    made of austenitic steel as agreed upon between the manufacturer
    and purchaser.
    10.6 Washer dimensions shall be in accordance with requirements
    of ASME B18.22.1, unless otherwise specified in
    the purchase order.
31. Threads
    11.1 Where practical, all threads shall be formed after heat
    treatment. Class 1A, Grades B8A, B8CA, B8MA, B8PA,
    B8FA, B8TA, B8LNA, and B8MLNA are to be solutiontreated
    in the finished condition.
32. Certification
    12.1 Certification is required. See Specification A962/
    A962M.
33. Product Marking
    13.1 In addition to the requirements of Specification A962/
    A962M, the grade symbol marked shall be as shown in Table
34. In the case of Class 2, Grades B8, B8C, B8M, B8P, B8F, and
    B8T strain hardened as provided in Table 1, a line shall be
    stamped under the grade symbol in order to distinguish it from
    Class 1 and Class 1A bolting which has not been strain
    hardened. In the case of Class 1A, the marking B8A, B8CA,
    B8MA, B8PA, B8FA, B8TA, B8LNA, and B8MLNA identifies
    the material as being in the solution-treated condition in the
    finished state. Grade L7M shall be 100 % evaluated in conformance
    with this specification and shall have a line under the
    grade symbol.
    13.2 Nuts from materials that have been impact tested shall
    be marked with the letter “L.”
35. Keywords
    14.1 additional elements; austenitic stainless steel; bolts—
    steel; chromium-molybdenum steel; fasteners—steel; markings
    on fittings; nickel-chromium-molybdenum alloy steel;
    pressure vessel service; stainless steel bolting; starting material;
    steel bars—alloy; steel bolting; steel flanges; steel valves;
    temperature service applications—low
    TABLE 3 Continued
    Phosphorus, max 0.045 0.010 over 0.045 0.010 over
    Sulfur, max 0.030 0.005 over 0.030 0.005 over
    Silicon, max 1.00 0.05 over 1.00 0.05 over
    Nickel 8.0–10.5 0.15 10.0–14.0 0.15
    Chromium 18.0–20.0 0.20 16.0–18.0 0.20
    Molybdenum . . . . . . 2.00–3.00 0.10
    Nitrogen 0.10–0.16 0.01 0.10–0.16 0.01
    A The intentional addition of Bi, Se, Te, and Pb is not permitted except for Grade B8F, in which selenium is specified and required.
    B Typical steel compositions used for this grade include 4140, 4142, 4145, 4140H, 4142H, and 4145H.
    C For the L7M grade, a minimum carbon content of 0.28 % is permitted provided that the required tensile properties are met in the section sizes involved; the use of
    AISI 4130 or 4130H is allowed.
    D Class 1 are made from solution-treated material. Class 1A products (B8A, B8CA, B8MA, B8PA, B8FA, and B8TA) are solution-treated in the finished condition. Class
    2 products are solution-treated and strain-hardened.
    TABLE 4 Recommended Test Temperature for Stock Parts
    Grade
    Test Temperature
    °F °C
    L7M, L70, L71, L72, L73 -100 -73
    L7, L7A, L7B, L7C -150 -101
    L43 -150 -101
    L1 -100 -73
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-320/SA-320M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    476
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
    inquiry, contract, and order.
    S1. Impact Properties
    S1.1 When impact properties are desired for austenitic steel
    grades exempt from testing under 6.2.1, test shall be made as
    agreed between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
    S2. Lateral Expansion
    S2.1 When lateral expansion measurements for ferritic
    steels are required in addition to the energy absorption requirements
    of 6.2.1.1, the minimum value for each specimen of a set
    must be .015 in. [0.38 mm]. The test temperature shall be
    specified by the purchaser and agreed upon by the producer.
    NOTE S2.1—Grades L7, L7A, L7B will generally have difficulty
    meeting the minimum value at -150 °F [-101 °C]. Grade L43 may be
    preferred.
    S3. Hardness Testing of Class 2 Bolting for ASME Applications
    S3.1 The maximum hardness shall be Rockwell C35 immediately
    under the thread roots. The hardness shall be taken on
    a flat area at least 1/8 in. [3 mm] across, prepared by removing
    threads. No more material than necessary shall be removed to
    prepare the flat area. Hardness determinations shall be made at
    the same frequency as tensile tests.
    S4. Restriction to Use Only Ingot Cast Steel
    S4.1 The starting material must be ingot cast. Use of
    continuous cast material is not permitted.
    APPENDIX
    (Nonmandatory Information)
    X1. STRAIN HARDENING OF AUSTENITIC STEELS
    X1.1 Strain hardening is the increase in strength and hardness
    that results from plastic deformation below the recrystallization
    temperature (cold work). This effect is produced in
    austenitic stainless steels by reducing oversized bars or wire to
    the desired final size by cold drawing or other process. The
    degree of strain hardening achievable in any alloy is limited by
    its strain hardening characteristics. In addition, the amount of
    strain hardening that can be produced is further limited by the
    variables of the process, such as the total amount of crosssection
    reduction, die angle, and bar size. In large diameter
    bars, for example, plastic deformation will occur principally in
    the outer regions of the bar, so that the increased strength and
    hardness due to strain hardening is achieved predominantly
    near the surface of the bar. That is, the smaller the bar, the
    greater the penetration of strain hardening.
    X1.2 Thus, the mechanical properties of a given strain
    hardened fastener are dependent not just on the alloy, but also
    on the size of bar from which it is machined. The minimum bar
    size that can be used, however, is established by the configuration
    of the fastener, so that the configuration can affect the
    strength of the fastener.
    X1.3 For example, a stud of a particular alloy and size may
    be machined from a smaller diameter bar than a bolt of the
    same alloy and size because a larger diameter bar is required to
    accommodate the head of the bolt. The stud, therefore, is likely
    to be stronger than the same size bolt in a given alloy.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL BOLTS, STEEL,
    HEAT TREATED, 120/105 ksi MINIMUM TENSILE
    STRENGTH
    SA-325
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A325-10 except for the deletion of the term “private label distributor” in 15.1 and
    15.5.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-325
    477
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-325 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    478
    Standard Specification for
    Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum
    Tensile Strength
36. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers two types of quenched and
    tempered steel heavy hex structural bolts having a minimum
    tensile strength of 120 ksi for sizes 1.0 in. and less and 105 ksi
    for sizes over 1.0 to 11/2 in., inclusive.
    1.2 The bolts are intended for use in structural connections.
    These connections are covered under the requirements of the
    Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490
    Bolts, approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections,
    endorsed by the American Institute of Steel Construction
    and by the Industrial Fastener Institute.
    1.3 The bolts are furnished in sizes 1/2 to 11/2 in., inclusive.
    They are designated by type, denoting chemical composition as
    follows:
    Type Description
    Type 1 Medium carbon, carbon boron, or medium carbon alloy steel.
    Type 2 Withdrawn in November 1991.
    Type 3 Weathering steel.
    NOTE 1—Bolts for general applications, including anchor bolts, are
    covered by Specification A449. Also refer to Specification A449 for
    quenched and tempered steel bolts and studs with diameters greater than
    11/2 in. but with similar mechanical properties.
    1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
    as standard. No other units of measurement are included in this
    standard.
    NOTE 2—A complete metric companion to Specification A325 has been
    developed, Specification A325M; therefore, no metric equivalents are
    presented in this specification.
    1.5 This specification is applicable to heavy hex structural
    bolts only. For bolts of other configurations and thread lengths
    with similar mechanical properties, see Specification A449.
    1.6 Terms used in this specification are defined in Terminology
    F1789.
    1.7 The following safety hazard caveat pertains only to the
    test methods portion, Section 10, of this specification:This
    standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
    if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
    of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
    practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations
    prior to use.
37. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A194/A194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
    for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service,
    or Both
    A325M Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat
    Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric)
    A449 Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs,
    Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile
    Strength, General Use
    A490 Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat
    Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
    A563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
    A751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical
    Analysis of Steel Products
    B695 Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited
    on Iron and Steel
    D3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging
    F436 Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
    F606 Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical Properties
    of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners,
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-325
    479
    Washers, Direct Tension Indicators, and Rivets
    F788/F788M Specification for Surface Discontinuities of
    Bolts, Screws, and Studs, Inch and Metric Series
    F959 Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct
    Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners
    F1136 Specification for Zinc/Aluminum Corrosion Protective
    Coatings for Fasteners
    F1470 Practice for Fastener Sampling for Specified Mechanical
    Properties and Performance Inspection
    F1789 Terminology for F16 Mechanical Fasteners
    F2329 Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements
    for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts,
    Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners
    G101 Guide for Estimating the Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
    of Low-Alloy Steels
    2.2 ASME Standards:
    B 1.1 Unified Screw Threads
    B 18.2.6 Fasteners for Use in Structural Applications
    B 18.24 Part Identification Number (PIN) Code System
    Standard for B18 Fastener Products
38. Ordering Information
    3.1 Orders for heavy hex structural bolts under this specification
    shall include the following:
    3.1.1 Quantity (number of pieces of bolts and accessories).
    3.1.2 Size, including nominal bolt diameter, thread pitch,
    and bolt length.
    3.1.3 Name of product, heavy hex structural bolts.
    3.1.4 When bolts threaded full length are required, Supplementary
    Requirement S1 shall be specified.
    3.1.5 Type of bolt: Type 1 or 3. When type is not specified,
    either Type 1 or Type 3 shall be furnished at the supplier’s
    option.
    3.1.6 ASTM designation and year of issue.
    3.1.7 Other components such as nuts, washers, and compressible
    washer-type direct-tension indicators, if required.
    3.1.7.1 When such other components are specified to be
    furnished, also state “Nuts, washers, and direct tension indicators,
    or combination thereof, shall be furnished by lot number.”
    3.1.8 Zinc Coating—Specify the zinc coating process required,
    for example, hot dip, mechanically deposited, Zinc/
    Aluminum Corrosion Protective Coating or no preference (see
    4.3).
    3.1.9 Other Finishes—Specify other protective finish, if
    required.
    3.1.10 Test reports, if required (see Section 13).
    3.1.11 Supplementary or special requirements, if required.
    3.1.12 For establishment of a part identifying system, see
    ASME B18.24.
    NOTE 3—A typical ordering description follows: 1000 pieces 11/8-7
    UNC in. dia × 4 in. long heavy hex structural bolt, Type 1 ASTM A325–02,
    each with one hardened washer, ASTM F436 Type 1, and one heavy hex
    nut, ASTM A563 Grade DH. Each component hot-dip zinc-coated. Nuts
    lubricated.
    3.2 Recommended Nuts:
    3.2.1 Nuts conforming to the requirements of Specification
    A563 are the recommended nuts for use with Specification
    A325 heavy hex structural bolts. The nuts shall be of the class
    and have a surface finish for each type of bolt as follows:
    Bolt Type and Finish Nut Class and Finish
    1, plain (noncoated) A563-C, C3, D, DH, DH3,
    plain
    1, zinc coated A563-DH, zinc coated
    1, coated in accordance with
    Specification F1136, Grade
    3
    A563–DH coated in accordance
    with Specification
    F1136, Grade 5
    3, plain A563-C3, DH3, plain
    3.2.2 Alternatively, nuts conforming to Specification A194/
    A194M Gr. 2H are considered a suitable substitute for use with
    Specification A325 Type 1 heavy hex structural bolts.
    3.2.3 When Specification A194/A194M Gr. 2H zinc-coated
    nuts are supplied, the zinc coating, overtapping, lubrication,
    and rotational capacity testing shall be in accordance with
    Specification A563.
    3.3 Recommended Washers:
    3.3.1 Washers conforming to Specification F436 are the
    recommended washers for use with Specification A325 heavy
    hex structural bolts. The washers shall have a surface finish for
    each type of bolt as follows:
    Bolt Type and Finish Washer Finish
    1, plain (uncoated) plain (uncoated)
    1, zinc coated zinc coated
    1, coated in accordance with
    Specification F1136, Grade 3
    coated in accordance with Specification
    F1136, Grade 3
    3, plain weathering steel, plain
    3.4 Other Accessories:
    3.4.1 When compressible washer type direct tension indicators
    are specified to be used with these bolts, they shall
    conform to Specification F959, Type 325.
39. Materials and Manufacture
    4.1 Heat Treatment:
    4.1.1 Type 1 bolts produced from medium carbon steel shall
    be quenched in a liquid medium from the austenitizing
    temperature. Type 1 bolts produced from medium carbon steel
    to which chromium, nickel, molybdenum, or boron were
    intentionally added shall be quenched only in oil from the
    austenitizing temperature.
    4.1.2 Type 3 bolts shall be quenched only in oil from the
    austenitizing temperature.
    4.1.3 Type 1 bolts, regardless of the steel used, and Type 3
    bolts shall be tempered by reheating to not less than 800°F.
    4.2 Threading—Threads shall be cut or rolled.
    4.3 Zinc Coatings, Hot-Dip and Mechanically Deposited,
    Zinc/Aluminum Corrosion Protective Coating:
    4.3.1 When zinc-coated fasteners are required, the purchaser
    shall specify the zinc coating process, for example, hot
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-325 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    480
    dip, mechanically deposited, Zinc/Aluminum Corrosion Protective
    Coating, or no preference.
    4.3.2 When hot-dip is specified, the fasteners shall be
    zinc-coated by the hot-dip process and the coating shall
    conform to the coating weight/thickness and performance
    requirements of Specification F2329.
    4.3.3 When mechanically deposited is specified, the fasteners
    shall be zinc-coated by the mechanical deposition process
    and the coating shall conform to the coating weight/thickness
    and performance requirements of Class 55 of Specification
    B695.
    4.3.4 When Zinc/Aluminum Corrosion Protective Coating
    is specified, the coating shall conform to the coating weight/
    thickness and performance requirements of Grade 3 of Specification
    F1136.
    4.3.5 When no preference is specified, the supplier shall
    furnish either a hot-dip zinc coating in accordance with
    Specification F2329, a mechanically deposited zinc coating in
    accordance with Specification B695, Class 55, or a Zinc/
    Aluminum Corrosion Protective Coating in accordance with
    Specification F1136, Grade 3. Threaded components (bolts and
    nuts) shall be coated by the same zinc-coating process and the
    supplier’s option is limited to one process per item with no
    mixed processes in a lot.
    4.4 Lubrication—When zinc-coated nuts are ordered with
    the bolts, the nuts shall be lubricated in accordance with
    Specification A563, Supplementary Requirement S1, to minimize
    galling.
    4.5 Secondary Processing:
    4.5.1 If any processing, which can affect the mechanical
    properties or performance of the bolts, is performed after the
    initial testing, the bolts shall be retested for all specified
    mechanical properties and performance requirements affected
    by the reprocessing.
    4.5.2 When the secondary process is heat treatment, the
    bolts shall be tested for all specified mechanical properties. Hot
    dip zinc-coated bolts shall be tested for all specified mechanical
    properties and rotational capacity. If zinc-coated nuts are
    relubricated after the initial rotational capacity tests, the
    assemblies shall be retested for rotational capacity.
40. Chemical Composition
    5.1 Type 1 bolts shall be plain carbon steel, carbon boron
    steel, alloy steel or alloy boron steel at the manufacturer’s
    option, conforming to the chemical composition specified in
    Table 1.
    5.2 Type 3 bolts shall be weathering steel and shall conform
    to one of the chemical compositions specified in Table 2. The
    selection of the chemical composition, A, B, C, D, E, or F, shall
    be at the option of the bolt manufacturer. See Guide G101 for
    methods of estimating the atmospheric corrosion resistance of
    low alloy steels.
    5.3 Product analyses made on finished bolts representing
    each lot shall conform to the product analysis requirements
    specified in Tables 1 and 2, as applicable.
    5.4 Heats of steel to which bismuth, selenium, tellurium, or
    lead has been intentionally added shall not be permitted for
    bolts.
    5.5 Compliance with 5.4 shall be based on certification that
    heats of steel having any of the listed elements intentionally
    added were not used to produce the bolts.
    5.6 Chemical analyses shall be performed in accordance
    with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A751.
41. Mechanical Properties
    6.1 Hardness—The bolts shall conform to the hardness
    specified in Table 3.
    6.2 Tensile Properties:
    6.2.1 Except as permitted in 6.2.1.1 for long bolts and
    6.2.1.2 for short bolts, sizes 1.00 in. and smaller having a
    nominal length of 21/4D and longer, and sizes larger than 1.00
    TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements for Type 1 Bolts
    Element
    Carbon Steel
    Heat
    Analysis
    Product
    Analysis
    Carbon 0.30–0.52 0.28–0.55
    Manganese, min 0.60 0.57
    Phosphorus, max 0.040 0.048
    Sulfur, max 0.050 0.058
    Silicon 0.15–0.30 0.13–0.32
    Element
    Carbon Boron Steel
    Heat
    Analysis
    Product
    Analysis
    Carbon 0.30–0.52 0.28–0.55
    Manganese, min 0.60 0.57
    Phosphorus, max 0.040 0.048
    Sulfur, max 0.050 0.058
    Silicon 0.10–0.30 0.08–0.32
    Boron 0.0005–0.003 0.0005–0.003
    Element
    Alloy Steel
    Heat
    Analysis
    Product
    Analysis
    Carbon 0.30–0.52 0.28–0.55
    Manganese, min 0.60 0.57
    Phosphorus, max 0.035 0.040
    Sulfur, max 0.040 0.045
    Silicon 0.15–0.35 0.13–0.37
    Alloying Elements A A
    Alloy Boron Steel
    Heat
    Analysis
    Product
    Analysis
    Carbon 0.30–0.52 0.28–0.55
    Manganese, min 0.60 0.57
    Phosphorus, max 0.035 0.040
    Sulfur, max 0.040 0.045
    Silicon 0.15–0.35 0.13–0.37
    Boron 0.0005–0.003 0.0005–0.003
    Alloying Elements A A
    A Steel, as defined by the American Iron and Steel Institute, shall be considered
    to be alloy when the maximum of the range given for the content of alloying
    elements exceeds one or more of the following limits: Manganese, 1.65 %; silicon,
    0.60 %; copper, 0.60 % or in which a definite range or a definite minimum quantity
    of any of the following elements is specified or required within the limits of the
    recognized field of constructional alloy steels: aluminum, chromium up to 3.99 %,
    cobalt, columbium, molybdenum, nickel, titanium, tungsten, vanadium, zirconium,
    or any other alloying elements added to obtain a desired alloying effect.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-325
    481
    in. having a nominal length of 3D and longer, shall be wedge
    tested full size and shall conform to the minimum wedge
    tensile load and proof load or alternative proof load specified in
    Table 4. The load achieved during proof load testing shall be
    equal to or greater than the specified proof load.
    6.2.1.1 When the length of the bolt makes full-size testing
    impractical, machined specimens shall be tested and shall
    conform to the requirements specified in Table 5. When bolts
    are tested by both full-size and machined specimen methods,
    the full-size test shall take precedence.
    6.2.1.2 Sizes 1.00 in. and smaller having a nominal length
    shorter than 21/4D down to 2D, inclusive, that cannot be wedge
    tensile tested shall be axially tension tested full size and shall
    conform to the minimum tensile load and proof load or
    alternate proof load specified in Table 4. Sizes 1.00 in. and
    smaller having a nominal length shorter than 2D and sizes
    larger than 1.00 in. with nominal lengths shorter than 3D that
    cannot be axially tensile tested shall be qualified on the basis of
    hardness.
    6.2.2 For bolts on which both hardness and tension tests are
    performed, acceptance based on tensile requirements shall take
    precedence in the event of low hardness readings.
    6.3 Rotational Capacity Test:
    TABLE 2 Chemical Requirements for Type 3 Heavy Hex Structural BoltsA
    Element
    Composition, %
    Type 3 BoltsA
    A B C D E F
    Carbon:
    Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.33–0.40
    0.31–0.42
    0.38–0.48
    0.36–0.50
    0.15–0.25
    0.14–0.26
    0.15–0.25
    0.14–0.26
    0.20–0.25
    0.18–0.27
    0.20–0.25
    0.19–0.26
    Manganese:
    Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.90–1.20
    0.86–1.24
    0.70–0.90
    0.67–0.93
    0.80–1.35
    0.76–1.39
    0.40–1.20
    0.36–1.24
    0.60–1.00
    0.56–1.04
    0.90–1.20
    0.86–1.24
    Phosphorus:
    Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.035 max
    0.040 max
    0.06–0.12
    0.06–0.125
    0.035 max
    0.040 max
    0.035 max
    0.040 max
    0.035 max
    0.040 max
    0.035 max
    0.040 max
    Sulfur:
    Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.040 max
    0.045 max
    0.040 max
    0.045 max
    0.040 max
    0.045 max
    0.040 max
    0.045 max
    0.040 max
    0.045 max
    0.040 max
    0.045 max
    Silicon:
    Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.15–0.35
    0.13–0.37
    0.30–0.50
    0.25–0.55
    0.15–0.35
    0.13–0.37
    0.25–0.50
    0.20–0.55
    0.15–0.35
    0.13–0.37
    0.15–0.35
    0.13–0.37
    Copper:
    Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.25–0.45
    0.22–0.48
    0.20–0.40
    0.17–0.43
    0.20–0.50
    0.17–0.53
    0.30–0.50
    0.27–0.53
    0.30–0.60
    0.27–0.63
    0.20–0.40
    0.17–0.43
    Nickel:
    Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.25–0.45
    0.22–0.48
    0.50–0.80
    0.47–0.83
    0.25–0.50
    0.22–0.53
    0.50–0.80
    0.47–0.83
    0.30–0.60
    0.27–0.63
    0.20–0.40
    0.17–0.43
    Chromium:
    Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    0.45–0.65
    0.42–0.68
    0.50–0.75
    0.47–0.83
    0.30–0.50
    0.27–0.53
    0.50–1.00
    0.45–1.05
    0.60–0.90
    0.55–0.95
    0.45–0.65
    0.42–0.68
    Vanadium:
    Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    B
    B
    B
    B
    0.020 min
    0.010 min
    B
    B
    B
    B
    B
    B
    Molybdenum:
    Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    B
    B
    0.06 max
    0.07 max
    B
    B
    0.10 max
    0.11 max
    B
    B
    B
    B
    Titanium:
    Heat analysis
    Product analysis
    B
    B
    B
    B
    B
    B
    0.05 max
    0.06 max
    B
    B
    B
    B
    A A, B, C, D, E, and F are classes of material used for Type 3 bolts. Selection of a class shall be at the option of the bolt manufacturer.
    B These elements are not specified or required.
    TABLE 3 Hardness Requirements for Bolts
    Bolt
    Size
    in.
    Nominal
    Length
    in. Brinell Rockwell C
    Min Max Min Max
    1/2 to 1, incl Less than
    2D
    253 319 25 34
    2D and
    over
    . . . 319 . . . 34
    11/8 to 11/2,
    incl
    Less than
    3D
    223 286 19 30
    3D and
    over
    . . . 286 . . . 30
    D = Nominal diameter or thread size.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-325 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    482
    6.3.1 Definition—The rotational capacity test is intended to
    evaluate the presence of a lubricant, the efficiency of the
    lubricant, and the compatibility of assemblies as represented by
    the components selected for testing.
    6.3.2 Requirement—Zinc-coated bolts, zinc-coated washers,
    and zinc-coated and lubricated nuts tested full size in an
    assembled joint or tension measuring device, in accordance
    with 10.2, shall not show signs of failure when subjected to the
    nut rotation in Table 6. The test shall be performed by the
    responsible party (see Section 14) prior to shipment after zinc
    coating and lubrication of nuts (see 10.2 and Note 4).
    6.3.3 Acceptance Criterion—The bolt and nut assembly
    shall be considered as non-conforming if the assembly fails to
    pass any one of the following specified requirements:
    6.3.3.1 Inability to install the assembly to the nut rotation in
    Table 6.
    6.3.3.2 Inability to remove the nut after installing to the
    rotation specified in Table 6.
    6.3.3.3 Shear failure of the threads as determined by visual
    examination of bolt and nut threads following removal.
    6.3.3.4 Torsional or torsional/tension failure of the bolt.
    Elongation of the bolt, in the threads between the nut and bolt
    head, is to be expected at the required rotation and is not to be
    classified as a failure.
42. Dimensions
    7.1 Head and Body:
    7.1.1 The bolts shall conform to the dimensions for heavy
    hex structural bolts specified in ASME B18.2.6.
    7.1.2 The thread length shall not be changed except as
    provided in Supplementary Requirement S1. Bolts with thread
    lengths other than those required by this specification shall be
    ordered under Specification A449.
    7.2 Threads:
    7.2.1 Uncoated—Threads shall be the Unified Coarse
    Thread Series as specified in ASME B1.1, and shall have Class
    2A tolerances.
    7.2.2 Coated—Unless otherwise specified, zinc-coated bolts
    to be used with zinc-coated nuts or tapped holes that are tapped
    oversize, in accordance with Specification A563, shall have
    Class 2A threads before hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc
    coating. After zinc coating, the maximum limits of pitch and
    major diameter shall not exceed the Class 2A limit by more
    than the following amounts:
    Nominal Bolt
    Diameter (in.)
    Oversize Limit, in.A
    Hot-Dip
    Zinc
    Mechanical
    Zinc
    1/2 0.018 0.012
    9/16 , 5/8, 3/4 0.020 0.013
    7/8 0.022 0.015
    1 to 11/4 0.024 0.016
    13/8 , 11/2 0.027 0.018
    A Hot-dip zinc nuts are tapped oversize after coating, and mechanical zinccoated
    nuts are tapped oversize before coating.
    7.2.3 The gaging limit for bolts shall be verified during
    manufacture. In case of dispute, a calibrated thread ring gage of
    the same size as the oversize limit in 7.2.2 (Class X tolerance,
    gage tolerance plus) shall be used to verify compliance. The
    gage shall assemble with hand effort following application of
    light machine oil to prevent galling and damage to the gage.
    These inspections, when performed to resolve controversy,
    shall be conducted at the frequency specified in the quality
    assurance provisions of ASME B18.2.6.
43. Workmanship
    8.1 The allowable limits, inspection, and evaluation of the
    surface discontinuities, quench cracks, forging cracks, head
    bursts, shear bursts, seams, folds, thread laps, voids, tool
    marks, nicks, and gouges shall be in accordance with Specification
    F788/F788M.
44. Number of Tests and Retests
    9.1 Testing Responsibility:
    9.1.1 Each lot shall be tested by the manufacturer prior to
    shipment in accordance with the lot identification control
    quality assurance plan in 9.2 through 9.5.
    9.1.2 When bolts are furnished by a source other than the
    manufacturer, the Responsible Party as defined in 14 shall be
    responsible for assuring all tests have been performed and the
    bolts comply with the requirements of this specification (see
    4.5).
    9.2 Purpose of Lot Inspection—The purpose of a lot inspection
    program is to ensure that each lot conforms to the
    requirements of this specification. For such a plan to be fully
    effective it is essential that secondary processors, distributors,
    TABLE 4 Tensile Load Requirements for Bolts Tested Full-Size
    Bolt Size, Threads per
    Inch, and Series
    Designation
    Stress Area,A
    in. 2 Tensile Load,B
    min, lbf
    Proof Load,B
    Length
    Measurement
    Method
    Alternative
    Proof
    Load,B Yield
    Strength
    Method
    Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5
    1/2 –13 UNC 0.142 17 050 12 050 13 050
    5/8 –11 UNC 0.226 27 100 19 200 20 800
    3/4 –10 UNC 0.334 40 100 28 400 30 700
    7/8 –9 UNC 0.462 55 450 39 250 42 500
    1–8 UNC 0.606 72 700 51 500 55 750
    11/8 –7 UNC 0.763 80 100 56 450 61 800
    11/4 –7 UNC 0.969 101 700 71 700 78 500
    13/8 –6 UNC 1.155 121 300 85 450 93 550
    11/2 –6 UNC 1.405 147 500 104 000 113 800
    A The stress area is calculated as follows:
    As5 0.7854 fD 2 s0.9743/ndg2
    where:
    As = stress area, in.2,
    D = nominal bolt size, and
    n = threads per inch.
    B Loads tabulated are based on the following:
    Bolt Size, in. Column 3 Column 4 Column 5
    1/2 to 1, incl
    11/8 to 11/2, incl
    120 000 psi
    105 000 psi
    85 000 psi
    74 000 psi
    92 000 psi
    81 000 psi
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-325
    483
    and purchasers maintain the identification and integrity of each
    lot until the product is installed.
    9.3 Lot Method—All bolts shall be processed in accordance
    with a lot identification-control quality assurance plan. The
    manufacturer, secondary processors, and distributors shall
    identify and maintain the integrity of each production lot of
    bolts from raw-material selection through all processing operations
    and treatments to final packing and shipment. Each lot
    shall be assigned its own lot-identification number, each lot
    shall be tested, and the inspection test reports for each lot shall
    be retained.
    9.4 Lot Definition—A lot shall be a quantity of uniquely
    identified heavy hex structural bolts of the same nominal size
    and length produced consecutively at the initial operation from
    a single mill heat of material and processed at one time, by the
    same process, in the same manner so that statistical sampling is
    valid. The identity of the lot and lot integrity shall be
    maintained throughout all subsequent operations and packaging.
    9.5 Number of Tests—The minimum number of tests from
    each lot for the tests specified below shall be as follows:
    Tests Number of Tests
    in Accordance With
    Hardness, tensile
    strength, proof load,
    and rotational capacity
    Practice F1470
    Coating weight/
    thickness
    The referenced coating
    specificationA
    Surface discontinuities Specification F788/F788M
    Dimensions and
    thread fit
    ASME B18.2.6
    A Practice F1470 applies if the coating specification does not specify a testing
    frequency.
45. Test Methods
    10.1 Tensile, Proof Load, and Hardness:
    10.1.1 Tensile, proof load, and hardness tests shall be
    conducted in accordance with Test Methods F606.
    10.1.2 Tensile strength shall be determined using theWedge
    or Axial Tension Testing Method of Full Size Product Method
    or the Machined Test Specimens Method depending on size
    and nominal length as specified in 6.2.1-6.2.2. Fracture on
    full-size tests shall be in the body or threads of the bolt without
    a fracture at the junction of the head and body.
    10.1.3 Proof load shall be determined using Method 1,
    Length Measurement, or Method 2, Yield Strength, at the
    option of the manufacturer.
    10.2 Rotational Capacity—The zinc-coated bolt shall be
    placed in a steel joint or tension measuring device and
    assembled with a zinc-coated washer and a zinc-coated and
    lubricated nut with which the bolt is intended to be used (see
    Note 4). The nut shall have been provided with the lubricant
    described in the last paragraph of the Manufacturing Processes
    section of Specification A563. The joint shall be one or more
    flat structural steel plates or fixture stack up with a total
    thickness, including the washer, such that 3 to 5 full threads of
    the bolt are located between the bearing surfaces of the bolt
    head and nut. The hole in the joint shall have the same nominal
    diameter as the hole in the washer. The initial tightening of the
    nut shall produce a load in the bolt not less than 10 % of the
    specified proof load. After initial tightening, the nut position
    shall be marked relative to the bolt, and the rotation shown in
    Table 6 shall be applied. During rotation, the bolt head shall be
    restrained from turning. After the tightening rotation has been
    applied, the assembly shall be taken apart and examined for
    compliance with 6.3.3.
    NOTE 4—Rotational capacity tests shall apply only to matched assembly
    lots that contain one A325 bolt, one A563 lubricated nut, and one F436
    washer that have been zinc coated in accordance with either Specifications
    F2329 or B695. Both the bolt and nut components of the matched
    assembly shall be zinc coated using the same process.
46. Inspection
    11.1 If the inspection described in 11.2 is required by the
    purchaser, it shall be specified in the inquiry and contract or
    order.
    11.2 The purchaser’s representative shall have free entry to
    all parts of the manufacturer’s works, or supplier’s place of
    business, that concern the manufacture or supply of the
    material ordered. The manufacturer or supplier shall afford the
    purchaser’s representative all reasonable facilities to satisfy
    him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this
    specification. All tests and inspections required by the specification
    that are requested by the purchaser’s representative shall
    be made before shipment, and shall be conducted as not to
    TABLE 5 Tensile Strength Requirements for Specimens Machined from Bolts
    Bolt Diameter, in. Tensile Strength, min, psi (MPa) Yield Strength, min, psi (MPa) Elongation, in 4D, min, % Reduction of Area, min, %
    1/2 to 1, incl. 120 000 (825) 92 000 (635) 14 35
    Over 1 to 11/2 105 000 (725) 81 000 (560) 14 35†
    † Table alignment was editorially corrected in March 2010
    TABLE 6 Rotational Capacity Test for Zinc-Coated Bolts
    Nominal
    Length
    in.
    Nominal Nut Rotation, degrees
    (turn)
    Up to and including 4 × dia 240 (2/3 )
    Over 4 × dia, but not
    exceeding 8 × dia
    360 (1)
    Over 8 × dia, but not
    exceeding 12 × dia
    420 (11/6)
    Over 12 × dia. Test not applicable
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-325 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    484
    interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the manufacturer’s
    works or supplier’s place of business.
47. Rejection and Rehearing
    12.1 Disposition of nonconforming bolts shall be in accordance
    with the Practice F1470 section titled “Disposition of
    Nonconforming Lots.”
48. Certification
    13.1 When specified on the purchase order, the manufacturer
    or supplier, whichever is the responsible party as defined
    in Section 14, shall furnish the purchaser a test reports that
    includes the following:
    13.1.1 Heat analysis, heat number, and a statement certifying
    that heats having the elements listed in 5.4 intentionally
    added were not used to produce the bolts,
    13.1.2 Results of hardness, tensile, and proof load tests,
    13.1.3 Results of rotational capacity tests. This shall include
    the test method used (solid plate or tension measuring device);
    and the statement “ Nuts lubricated” for zinc-coated nuts when
    shipped with zinc-coated bolts,
    13.1.4 Zinc coating measured coating weight/thickness for
    coated bolts,
    13.1.5 Statement of compliance of visual inspection for
    surface discontinuities (Section 8),
    13.1.6 Statement of compliance with dimensional and
    thread fit requirements,
    13.1.7 Lot number and purchase order number,
    13.1.8 Complete mailing address of responsible party, and
    13.1.9 Title and signature of the individual assigned certification
    responsibility by the company officers.
    13.2 Failure to include all the required information on the
    test report shall be cause for rejection.
49. Responsibility
    14.1 The party responsible for the fastener shall be the
    organization that supplies the fastener to the purchaser.
50. Product Marking
    15.1 Manufacturer’s Identification—All Type 1 and 3 bolts
    shall be marked by the manufacturer with a unique identifier to
    identify the manufacturer.
    15.2 Grade Identification:
    15.2.1 Type 1 bolts shall be marked “A325.”
    15.2.2 Type 3 bolts shall be marked “A325” with the
    “A325” underlined. The use of additional distinguishing marks
    to indicate that the bolts are weathering steel shall be at the
    manufacturer’s option.
    15.3 Marking Location and Methods—All marking shall be
    located on the top of the bolt head and shall be either raised or
    depressed at the manufacturer’s option.
    15.4 Acceptance Criteria—Bolts which are not marked in
    accordance with these provisions shall be considered nonconforming
    and subject to rejection.
    15.5 Type and manufacturer’s identification shall
    shall be separate and distinct. The two identifications
    shall preferably be in different locations and, when on
    the same level, shall be separated by at least two spaces.
51. Packaging and Package Marking
    16.1 Packaging:
    16.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, packaging shall be in
    accordance with Practice D3951.
    16.1.2 When zinc coated nuts are included on the same
    order as zinc coated bolts, the bolts and nuts shall be shipped
    in the same container.
    16.1.3 When special packaging requirements are required,
    they shall be defined at the time of the inquiry and order.
    16.2 Package Marking:
    16.2.1 Each shipping unit shall include or be plainly marked
    with the following information:
    16.2.1.1 ASTM designation and type,
    16.2.1.2 Size,
    16.2.1.3 Name and brand or trademark of the manufacturer,
    16.2.1.4 Number of pieces,
    16.2.1.5 Lot number; when nuts, washers or direct tension
    indicators, or combination thereof, are ordered with A325
    heavy hex structural bolts, the shipping unit shall be marked
    with the lot number in addition to the marking required by the
    applicable product specification,
    16.2.1.6 Purchase order number, and
    16.2.1.7 Country of origin.
52. Keywords
    17.1 bolts; carbon steel; steel; structural; weathering steel
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
    contract or order. Details of these supplementary requirements shall be agreed upon in writing between
    the manufacturer and purchaser. Supplementary requirements shall in no way negate any requirement
    of the specification itself.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-325
    485
    S1. Bolts Threaded Full Length
    S1.1 Bolts with nominal lengths equal to or shorter than
    four times the nominal bolt diameter shall be threaded full
    length. Bolts need not have a shoulder, and the distance from
    the underhead bearing surface to the first complete (full form)
    thread, as measured with a GO thread ring gage, assembled by
    hand as far as the thread will permit, shall not exceed the length
    of 21/2 threads for bolt sizes 1 in. and smaller, and 31/2 threads
    for bolt sizes larger than 1 in.
    S1.2 Bolts shall be marked in accordance with Section 15,
    except that the symbol shall be “ A325 T” instead of “A325.”
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ð19Þ
    SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS AND WELDED STEEL
    PIPE FOR LOW-TEMPERATURE SERVICE AND OTHER
    APPLICATIONS WITH REQUIRED NOTCH TOUGHNESS
    SA-333/SA-333M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A333/A333M-16.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-333/SA-333M
    487
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-333/SA-333M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    488
    Standard Specification for
    Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature
    Service and Other Applications with Required Notch
    Toughness
53. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers nominal (average) wall seamless
    and welded carbon and alloy steel pipe intended for use at
    low temperatures and in other applications requiring notch
    toughness. Several grades of ferritic steel are included as listed
    in Table 1. Some product sizes may not be available under this
    specification because heavier wall thicknesses have an adverse
    effect on impact properties.
    1.2 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
    shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
    from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the
    standard. The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M”
    designation of this specification is specified in the order.
    NOTE 1—The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has
    been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal
    diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.”
54. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    A999/A999M Specification for General Requirements for
    Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe
    A671 Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe
    for Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures
    E23 Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic
    Materials
    E165 Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General
    Industry
    E709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing
    2.2 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
    Section VIII
    Section IX
55. Ordering Information
    3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
    include the following, as required, to describe the material
    adequately:
    3.1.1 Quantity (feet, centimetres, or number of lengths),
    3.1.2 Name of material (seamless or welded pipe),
    3.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
    3.1.4 Size (NPS or outside diameter and schedule number of
    average wall thickness),
    3.1.5 Lengths (specific or random) (Section 9), (see the
    Permissible Variations in Length section of Specification
    A999/A999M),
    3.1.6 End finish (see the Ends section of Specification
    A999/A999M),
    3.1.7 Optional requirements, (see the Heat Analysis requirement
    in the Chemical Composition section of A999/A999M,
    the Repair by Welding section, and the section on Nondestructive
    Test Requirements),
    3.1.8 Test report required, (see the Certification section of
    Specification A999/A999M),
    3.1.9 Specification designation, and
    3.1.10 Special requirements or exceptions to this specification.
    3.1.11 Supplementary requirements, if any (subsize impact
    specimens, pipe for hydrofluoric acid alkylation service).
56. Materials and Manufacture
    4.1 Manufacture—Except as provided in paragraph 4.2, the
    pipe shall be made by the seamless or welding process with the
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-333/SA-333M
    489
    addition of no filler metal in the welding operation. Grade 4
    shall be made by the seamless process.
    NOTE 2—For electric-fusion-welded pipe, with filler metal added,
    fabricated of pressure vessel quality plates, see Specification A671.
    4.2 Grade 11 pipe may be produced by welding with or
    without the addition of filler metal. The following requirements
    shall apply for Grade 11 welded with the addition of filler
    metal.
    4.2.1 The joints shall be full-penetration, full fusion doublewelded
    or single-welded butt joints employing fusion welding
    processes as defined in “Definitions,” ASME Boiler and
    Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. This specification makes no
    provision for any difference in weld quality requirements
    regardless of the weld joint type employed (single or double) in
    making the weld. Where backing strips are employed, the ring
    or strip material shall be the same as the plate being joined.
    Backing rings or strips shall be completely removed after
    welding, prior to any required radiography, and the exposed
    weld surface shall be examined visually for conformance to the
    requirements of 4.2.2. Welds made by procedures employing
    backing strips or rings which remain in place are prohibited.
    Welding procedures and welding operators shall be qualified in
    accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
    Section IX.
    4.2.2 The weld surface on either side of the weld may be
    flush with the base plate or may have a reasonably uniform
    crown, not to exceed 1/8 in. [3 mm]. Any weld reinforcement
    may be removed at the manufacturer’s option or by agreement
    between the manufacturer and purchaser. The contour of the
    reinforcement shall be reasonably smooth and free from
    irregularities. The deposited metal shall be fused uniformly
    into the plate surface. No concavity of contour is permitted
    unless the resulting thickness of weld metal is equal to or
    greater than the minimum thickness of the adjacent base metal.
    4.2.3 Radiographic Examination—All welded joints shall
    be fully radiographed in accordance with the requirements of
    the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII,
    Division 1, latest edition, paragraph UW-51.
    4.2.3.1 As an alternative, the welded joints may be ultrasonically
    examined in accordance with Appendix 12 of the
    ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division
    1.
    4.2.4 Repair Welding—Weld metal defects shall be repaired
    by removal to sound metal and repair welding if approved by
    the purchaser.
    4.2.4.1 The repair shall be blended smoothly into the
    surrounding base metal surface and examined by the magnetic
    particle examination in accordance with Practice E709, or by
    the liquid penetrant method in accordance with Practice E165.
    4.2.4.2 Each repair weld of a cavity where the cavity, before
    repair welding, has a depth exceeding the lesser of 3/8 in. [9.5
    mm] or 10.5 % of the nominal thickness shall be radiographically
    examined as required for the original welds.
    4.2.5 Transverse Tension Test—One test shall be made to
    represent each lot (Note 3) of finished pipe. The test specimens
    shall be taken across the welded joint. The tension test results
    of the welded joints shall conform to the tensile properties for
    Grade 11 in Table 2.
    4.2.5.1 The test specimens shall be taken from the end of the
    finished pipe. As an alternative, the tension test specimens may
    be taken from a welded prolongation of the same material as
    the pipe, which is attached to the end of the pipe and welded as
    a prolongation of the pipe longitudinal seam.
    4.2.5.2 The test specimens shall be in accordance with
    Section IX, Part QW, paragraph QW-150 of the ASME Boiler
    and Pressure Vessel Code and shall be one of the types shown
    in QW-462.1 of that code. The tension test specimen may be
    flattened cold before final machining to size.
    4.2.6 Transverse Guided-Bend Weld Test—One transverse
    guided bend test (two specimens) shall be made to represent
    each lot (Note 3) of finished pipe.
    4.2.6.1 The two bend test specimens shall be taken from the
    weld at the end of the finished pipe. As an alternative, by
    agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer, the test
    specimens may be taken from a test plate of the same material
    TABLE 1 Chemical RequirementsB
    Element
    Composition, %
    Grade 1 Grade 3 Grade 4 Grade 6 Grade 7 Grade 8 Grade 9 Grade 10 Grade 11
    Carbon, max 0.30 0.19 0.12 0.30 0.19 0.13 0.20 0.20 0.10
    Manganese 0.40–1.06A 0.31–0.64 0.50–1.05 0.29–1.06A 0.90 max 0.90 max 0.40–1.06 1.15–1.50 0.60 max
    Phosphorus,
    max
    0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.035 0.025
    Sulfur, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.015 0.025
    Silicon … 0.18–0.37 0.08–0.37 0.10 min 0.13–0.32 0.13–0.32 … 0.10–0.35 0.35 max
    Nickel … 3.18–3.82 0.47–0.98 0.40 max 2.03–2.57 8.40–9.60 1.60–2.24 0.25 max 35.0–37.0
    Chromium … … 0.44–1.01 0.30 max … … … 0.15 max 0.50 max
    Copper … … 0.40–0.75 0.40 max … … 0.75–1.25 0.15 max …
    Aluminum … … 0.04–0.30 … … … … 0.06 max …
    Vanadium, max … … … 0.08 … … … 0.12 …
    Columbium,
    max
    … … … 0.02C … … … 0.05 …
    Molybdenum,
    max
    … … … 0.12 … … … 0.05 0.50 max
    Cobalt … … … … … … … … 0.50 max
    A For each reduction of 0.01 % carbon below 0.30 %, an increase of 0.05 % manganese above 1.06 % would be permitted to a maximum of 1.35 % manganese.
    B Where an ellipsis (…) appears in this table, there is no requirement and analysis for the element need not to be determined or reported.
    C By agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser, the limit for columbium may be increased up to 0.05 % on heat analysis and 0.06 % on product analysis.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-333/SA-333M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    490
    as the pipe, the test plate being attached to the end of the pipe
    and welded as a prolongation of the pipe longitudinal seam.
    4.2.6.2 The bend test shall be in accordance with QW-160
    of Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
    4.2.7 Charpy V-notch Impact Tests—Impact tests on welded
    joints shall include tests on weld metal and heat affected zones
    and shall meet the same requirements as the base metal. (See
    Tables 3 and 4).
    TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
    Grade 1 Grade 3 Grade 4 Grade 6 Grade 7 Grade 8 Grade 9 Grade 10 Grade 11
    psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa
    Tensile strength, min
    Yield strength, min
    55 000
    30 000
    380
    205
    65 000
    35 000
    450
    240
    60 000
    35 000
    415
    240
    60 000
    35 000
    415
    240
    65 000
    35 000
    450
    240
    100 000
    75 000
    690
    515
    63 000
    46 000
    435
    315
    80 000
    65 000
    550
    450
    65 000
    35 000
    450
    240
    Longitudinal
    Transverse
    Longitudinal
    Transverse
    Longitudinal
    Transverse
    Longitudinal
    Transverse
    Longitudinal
    Transverse
    Longitudinal
    Transverse
    Longitudinal
    Transverse
    Longitudinal
    Transverse
    Longitudinal
    Elongation in 2 in. or 50
    mm, (or 4D), min, %:
    Basic minimum
    elongation for walls 5/16
    in. [8 mm] and over in
    thickness, strip tests,
    and for all small sizes
    tested in full section
    35 25 30 20 30 16.5 30 16.5 30 22 22 … 28 … 22 … 18A
    When standard round
    2-in. or 50-mm gage
    length or proportionally
    smaller size test
    specimen with the gage
    length equal to 4D (4
    times the diameter) is
    used
    28 20 22 14 22 12 22 12 22 14 16 … … … 16 … …
    For strip tests, a
    deduction for each 1/32
    in. [0.8 mm] decrease in
    wall thickness below 5/16
    in. [8 mm] from the
    basic minimum
    elongation of the
    following percentage
    1.75B 1.25B 1.50B 1.00B 1.50B 1.00B 1.50B 1.00B 1.50B 1.00B 1.25B … 1.50B … 1.25B … …
    Wall Thickness
    Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, %C
    Grade 1 Grade 3 Grade 4 Grade 6 Grade 7 Grade 8 Grade 9 Grade 10
    in. mm Longi- Trans- Longi- Trans- Longi- Trans- Longi- Trans- Longi- Trans- Longi- Trans- Longi- Trans- Longi- Transtudinal
    verse tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse
    5/16 (0.312) 8 35 25 30 20 30 16 30 16 30 22 22 … 28 … 22 …
    9/32 (0.281) 7.2 33 24 28 19 28 15 28 15 28 21 21 … 26 … 21 …
    1/4 (0.250) 6.4 32 23 27 18 27 15 27 15 27 20 20 … 25 … 20 …
    7/32 (0.219) 5.6 30 … 26 … 26 … 26 … 26 … 18 … 24 … 18 …
    3/16 (0.188) 4.8 28 … 24 … 24 … 24 … 24 … 17 … 22 … 17 …
    5/32 (0.156) 4 26 … 22 … 22 … 22 … 22 … 16 … 20 … 16 …
    1/8 (0.125) 3.2 25 … 21 … 21 … 21 … 21 … 15 … 19 … 15 …
    3/32 (0.094) 2.4 23 … 20 … 20 … 20 … 20 … 13 … 18 … 13 …
    1/16 (0.062) 1.6 21 … 18 … 18 … 18 … 18 … 12 … 16 … 12 …
    A Elongation of Grade 11 is for all walls and small sizes tested in full section.
    B The following table gives the calculated minimum values.
    C Calculated elongation requirements shall be rounded to the nearest whole number.
    Note—The preceding table gives the computed minimum elongation values for each 1/32-in. [0.80-mm] decrease in wall thickness. Where the wall thickness lies between
    two values shown above, the minimum elongation value is determined by the following equation:
    Grade Direction of Test Equation
    1 Longitudinal E = 56 t + 17.50 [E = 2.19t + 17.50]
    Transverse E = 40 t + 12.50 [E = 1.56t + 12.50]
    3 Longitudinal E = 48 t + 15.00 [E = 1.87t + 15.00]
    Transverse E = 32 t + 10.00 [E = 1.25t + 10.00]
    4 Longitudinal E = 48 t + 15.00 [E = 1.87t + 15.00]
    Transverse E = 32 t+ 6.50[ E = 1.25 t+ 6.50]
    6 Longitudinal E = 48 t + 15.00 [E = 1.87t + 15.00]
    Transverse E = 32 t+ 6.50[ E = 1.25 t + 6.50]
    7 Longitudinal E = 48 t + 15.00 [E = 1.87t + 15.00]
    Transverse E = 32 t + 11.00 [E = 1.25t + 11.00]
    8 and 10 Longitudinal E = 40 t+ 9.50[ E = 1.56t + 9.50]
    9 Longitudinal E = 48 t + 13.00 [E = 1.87 t + 13.00]
    where:
    E = elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, in %, and
    t = actual thickness of specimen, in. [mm].
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-333/SA-333M
    491
    4.2.7.1 Each set of weld metal impact test specimens shall
    be taken across the weld with the notch in the weld metal. Each
    test specimen shall be oriented so that the notch is normal to
    the surface of the material and one face of the specimen shall
    be within 1/16 in. [1.5 mm] of the surface of the material.
    4.2.7.2 Each set of heat affected zone impact test specimens
    shall be taken across the weld and of sufficient length to locate,
    after etching, the notch in the heat affected zone. The notch
    shall be cut approximately normal to the surface of the material
    in such a manner as to include as much heat affected zone
    material as possible in the resulting fracture.
    NOTE 3—The term “lot” applies to all pipe (may include more than one
    heat of steel) within a 3/16 in. [4.7 mm] range of thickness and welded to
    the weld procedure, and when heat treated, done to the same heat-treating
    procedure and in the same furnace. The maximum lot size shall be 200
    linear ft [60 m] of pipe.
    4.3 Heat Treatment:
    4.3.1 All seamless and welded pipe, other than Grades 8 and
    11, shall be treated to control their microstructure in accordance
    with one of the following methods:
    4.3.1.1 Normalize by heating to a uniform temperature of
    not less than 1500 °F [815 °C] and cool in air or in the cooling
    chamber of an atmosphere controlled furnace.
    4.3.1.2 Normalize as in 4.3.1.1, and, at the discretion of the
    manufacturer, reheat to a suitable tempering temperature.
    4.3.1.3 For the seamless process only, reheat and control hot
    working and the temperature of the hot-finishing operation to a
    finishing temperature range from 1550 to 1750 °F [845 to 945
    °C] and cool in air or in a controlled atmosphere furnace from
    an initial temperature of not less than 1550 °F [845 °C].
    4.3.1.4 Treat as in 4.3.1.3 and, at the discretion of the
    manufacturer, reheat to a suitable tempering temperature.
    4.3.1.5 Seamless pipe of Grades 1, 6, and 10 may be heat
    treated by heating to a uniform temperature of not less than
    1500 °F [815 °C], followed by quenching in liquid and
    reheating to a suitable tempering temperature, in place of any
    of the other heat treatments provided for in 4.3.1.
    4.3.2 Grade 8 pipe shall be heat treated by the manufacturer
    by either of the following methods:
    4.3.2.1 Quenched and Tempered—Heat to a uniform temperature
    of 1475 6 25 °F [800 6 15 °C]; hold at this
    temperature for a minimum time in the ratio of 1 h/in. [2
    min/mm] of thickness, but in no case less than 15 min; quench
    by immersion in circulating water. Reheat until the pipe attains
    a uniform temperature within the range from 1050 to 1125 °F
    [565 to 605 °C]; hold at this temperature for a minimum time
    in the ratio of 1 h/in. [2 min/mm] of thickness, but in no case
    less than 15 min; cool in air or water quench at a rate no less
    than 300 °F [165 °C]/h.
    4.3.2.2 Double Normalized and Tempered—Heat to a uniform
    temperature of 1650 6 25 °F [900 6 15 °C]; hold at this
    temperature for a minimum time in the ratio of 1 h/in. [2
    min/mm] of thickness, but in no case less than 15 min; cool in
    air. Reheat until the pipe attains a uniform temperature of 1450
    6 25 °F [790 6 15 °C]; hold at this temperature for a
    minimum time in the ratio of 1 h/in. [2 min/mm] of thickness,
    but in no case less than 15 min; cool in air. Reheat to a uniform
    temperature within the range from 1050 to 1125 °F [565 to 605
    °C]; hold at this temperature for a minimum time of 1 h/in. [2
    min/mm] of thickness but in no case less than 15 min; cool in
    air or water quench at a rate not less than 300 °F [165 °C]/h.
    4.3.3 Whether to anneal Grade 11 pipe is per agreement
    between purchaser and supplier. When Grade 11 pipe is
    annealed, it shall be normalized in the range of 1400 to 1600 °F
    [760 to 870 °C].
    4.3.4 Material from which test specimens are obtained shall
    be in the same condition of heat treatment as the pipe
    furnished. Material from which specimens are to be taken shall
    be heat treated prior to preparation of the specimens.
    4.3.5 When specified in the order the test specimens shall be
    taken from full thickness test pieces which have been stress
    relieved after having been removed from the heat-treated pipe.
    The test pieces shall be gradually and uniformly heated to the
    prescribed temperature, held at that temperature for a period of
    time in accordance with Table 5, and then furnace cooled at a
    temperature not exceeding 600 °F [315 °C]. Grade 8 shall be
    TABLE 3 Impact Requirements for Grades 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, and
    11
    Size of
    Specimen, mm
    Minimum Average Notched
    Bar Impact Value of
    Each Set of Three
    SpecimensA
    Minimum Notched Bar
    Impact Value of One
    Specimen Only of
    a SetA
    ft·lbf J ft·lbf J
    10 by 10 13 18 10 14
    10 by 7.5 10 14 8 11
    10 by 6.67 9 12 7 9
    10 by 5 7 9 5 7
    10 by 3.33 5 7 3 4
    10 by 2.5 4 5 3 4
    A Straight line interpolation for intermediate values is permitted.
    TABLE 4 Impact Temperature
    Grade
    Minimum Impact Test Temperature
    °F °C
    1 -50 -45
    3 -150 -100
    4 -150 -100
    6 -50 -45
    7 -100 -75
    8 -320 -195
    9 -100 -75
    10 -75 -60
    11 –320 –195
    TABLE 5 Stress Relieving of Test Pieces
    Metal TemperatureA,B Minimum Holding
    Time,
    h/in. [min/mm]
    of Thickness
    Grades 1, 3, 6, 7, and 10 Grade 4C
    °F °C °F °C
    1100 600 1150 620 1 [2.4]
    1050 565 1100 600 2 [4.7]
    1000 540 1050 565 3 [7.1]
    A For intermediate temperatures, the holding time shall be determined by straightline
    interpolation.
    B Grade 8 shall be stress relieved at 1025 to 1085 °F, [550 to 585 °C], held for a
    minimum time of 2 h for thickness up to 1.0 in. [25.4 mm], plus a minimum of 1 h
    for each additional inch [25.4 mm] of thickness and cooled at a minimum rate of
    300 °F [165 °C]/h in air or water to a temperature not exceeding 600 °F [315 °C].
    C Unless otherwise specified, Grade 4 shall be stress relieved at 1150 °F [620 °C].
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-333/SA-333M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    492
    cooled at a minimum rate of 300 °F [165 °C]/h in air or water
    to a temperature not exceeding 600 °F [315 °C].
57. Chemical Composition
    5.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
    chemical composition prescribed in Table 1.
    5.2 When Grades 1, 6, or 10 are ordered under this
    specification, supplying an alloy grade that specifically requires
    the addition of any element other than those listed for
    the ordered grade in Table 1 is not permitted. However, the
    addition of elements required for the deoxidation of the steel is
    permitted.
58. Product Analysis
    6.1 At the request of the purchaser, an analysis of one billet
    or two samples of flat-rolled stock from each heat or of two
    pipes from each lot shall be made by the manufacturer. A lot of
    pipe shall consist of the following:
    NPS Designator Length of Pipe in Lot
    Under 2 400 or fraction thereof
    2 to 6 200 or fraction thereof
    Over 6 100 or fraction thereof
    6.2 The results of these analyses shall be reported to the
    purchaser or the purchaser’s representative and shall conform
    to the requirements specified.
    6.3 If the analysis of one of the tests specified in 6.1 does
    not conform to the requirements specified, an analysis of each
    billet or pipe from the same heat or lot may be made, and all
    billets or pipe conforming to the requirements shall be accepted.
59. Tensile Requirements
    7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
    tensile properties prescribed in Table 2.
60. Impact Requirements
    8.1 For Grades 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, and 11, the notched-bar
    impact properties of each set of three impact specimens,
    including specimens for the welded joint in welded pipe with
    wall thicknesses of 0.120 in. [3 mm] and larger, when tested at
    temperatures in conformance with 14.1 shall be not less than
    the values prescribed in Table 3.
    8.1.1 If the impact value of one specimen is below the
    minimum value, or the impact values of two specimens are less
    than the minimum average value but not below the minimum
    value permitted on a single specimen, a retest shall be allowed.
    The retest shall consist of breaking three additional specimens
    and each specimen must equal or exceed the required average
    value. When an erratic result is caused by a defective
    specimen, or there is uncertainty in test procedures, a retest will
    be allowed.
    8.2 For Grade 8 each of the notched bar impact specimens
    shall display a lateral expansion opposite the notch of not less
    than 0.015 in. [0.38 mm].
    8.2.1 When the average lateral expansion value for the three
    impact specimens equals or exceeds 0.015 in. [0.38 mm] and
    the value for one specimen is below 0.015 in. [0.38 mm] but
    not below 0.010 in. [0.25 mm], a retest of three additional
    specimens may be made. The lateral expansion of each of the
    retest specimens must equal or exceed 0.015 in. [0.38 mm].
    8.2.2 Lateral expansion values shall be determined by the
    procedure in Test Methods and Definitions A370.
    8.2.3 The values of absorbed energy in foot-pounds and the
    fracture appearance in percentage shear shall be recorded for
    information. A record of these values shall be retained for a
    period of at least 2 years.
61. Lengths
    9.1 If definite lengths are not required, pipe may be ordered
    either in single random lengths of 16 to 22 ft (Note 4) with
    maximum 5 % of the lengths between 12 and 16 ft (Note 4), or
    in double random lengths with a minimum average of 35 ft
    (Note 4) and an absolute minimum length of 22 ft (Note 4) with
    maximum 5 % of the lengths between 16 and 22 ft (Note 4).
    NOTE 4—This value(s) applies when the inch-pound designation of this
    specification is the basis of purchase. When the “M” designation of this
    specification is the basis of purchase, the corresponding metric value(s)
    shall be agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser.
62. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
    10.1 The pipe manufacturer shall explore a sufficient number
    of visual surface imperfections to provide reasonable
    assurance that they have been properly evaluated with respect
    to depth. Exploration of all surface imperfections is not
    required but may be necessary to ensure compliance with 10.2.
    10.2 Surface imperfections that penetrate more than 12½ %
    of the nominal wall thickness or encroach on the minimum
    wall thickness shall be considered defects. Pipe with such
    defects shall be given one of the following dispositions:
    10.2.1 The defect may be removed by grinding provided
    that the remaining wall thickness is within specified limits.
    10.2.2 Repaired in accordance with the repair welding
    provisions of 10.5.
    10.2.3 The section of pipe containing the defect may be cut
    off within the limits of requirements on length.
    10.2.4 The defective pipe may be rejected.
    10.3 To provide a workmanlike finish and basis for evaluating
    conformance with 10.2, the pipe manufacturer shall
    remove by grinding the following:
    10.3.1 Mechanical marks, abrasions and pits, any of which
    imperfections are deeper than 1/16 in. [1.6 mm], and
    10.3.2 Visual imperfections commonly referred to as scabs,
    seams, laps, tears, or slivers found by exploration in accordance
    with 10.1 to be deeper than 5 % of the nominal wall
    thickness.
    10.4 At the purchaser’s discretion, pipe shall be subject to
    rejection if surface imperfections acceptable under 10.2 are not
    scattered, but appear over a large area in excess of what is
    considered a workmanlike finish. Disposition of such pipe shall
    be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the
    purchaser.
    10.5 When imperfections or defects are removed by
    grinding, a smooth curved surface shall be maintained, and the
    wall thickness shall not be decreased below that permitted by
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-333/SA-333M
    493
    this specification. The outside diameter at the point of grinding
    may be reduced by the amount so removed.
    10.5.1 Wall thickness measurements shall be made with a
    mechanical caliper or with a properly calibrated nondestructive
    testing device of appropriate accuracy. In case of dispute, the
    measurement determined by use of the mechanical caliper shall
    govern.
    10.6 Weld repair shall be permitted only subject to the
    approval of the purchaser and in accordance with Specification
    A999/A999M.
    10.7 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight.
63. General Requirements
    11.1 Material furnished to this specification shall conform to
    the applicable requirements of the current edition of Specification
    A999/A999M unless otherwise provided herein.
64. Mechanical Testing
    12.1 Sampling—For mechanical testing, the term “lot” applies
    to all pipe of the same nominal size and wall thickness (or
    schedule) that is produced from the same heat of steel and
    subjected to the same finishing treatment in a continuous
    furnace. If the final heat treatment is in a batch-type furnace,
    the lot shall include only those pipes that are heat treated in the
    same furnace charge.
    12.2 Transverse or Longitudinal Tensile Test and Flattening
    Test—For material heat treated in a batch-type furnace, tests
    shall be made on 5 % of the pipe from each lot. If heat treated
    by the continuous process, tests shall be made on a sufficient
    number of pipe to constitute 5 % of the lot, but in no case less
    than 2 pipes.
    12.3 Impact Test—One notched bar impact test, consisting
    of breaking three specimens, shall be made from each heat
    represented in a heat-treatment load on specimens taken from
    the finished pipe. This test shall represent only pipe from the
    same heat and the same heat-treatment load, the wall thicknesses
    of which do not exceed by more than 1/4 in. [6.3 mm] the
    wall thicknesses of the pipe from which the test specimens are
    taken. If heat treatment is performed in continuous or batchtype
    furnaces controlled within a 50 °F [30 °C] range and
    equipped with recording pyrometers so that complete records
    of heat treatment are available, then one test from each heat in
    a continuous run only shall be required instead of one test from
    each heat in each heat-treatment load.
    12.4 Impact Tests (Welded Pipe)—On welded pipe, additional
    impact tests of the same number as required in 12.3 shall
    be made to test the weld.
    12.5 Specimens showing defects while being machined or
    prior to testing may be discarded and replacements shall be
    considered as original specimens.
    12.6 Results obtained from these tests shall be reported to
    the purchaser or his representative.
65. Specimens for Impact Test
    13.1 Notched bar impact specimens shall be of the simple
    beam, Charpy-type, in accordance with Test Methods E23,
    Type A with a V notch. Standard specimens 10 by 10 mm in
    cross section shall be used unless the material to be tested is of
    insufficient thickness, in which case the largest obtainable
    subsize specimens shall be used. Charpy specimens of width
    along the notch larger than 0.394 in. [10 mm] or smaller than
    0.099 in. [2.5 mm] are not provided for in this specification.
    13.2 Test specimens shall be obtained so that the longitudinal
    axis of the specimen is parallel to the longitudinal axis of
    the pipe while the axis of the notch shall be perpendicular to
    the surface. On wall thicknesses of 1 in. [25 mm] or less, the
    specimens shall be obtained with their axial plane located at the
    midpoint; on wall thicknesses over 1 in. [25 mm], the specimens
    shall be obtained with their axial plane located 1/2 in.
    [12.5 mm] from the outer surface.
    13.3 When testing welds the specimen shall be, whenever
    diameter and thickness permit, transverse to the longitudinal
    axis of the pipe with the notch of the specimen in the welded
    joint and perpendicular to the surface. When diameter and
    thickness do not permit obtaining transverse specimens, longitudinal
    specimens in accordance with 13.2 shall be obtained;
    the bottom of the notch shall be located at the weld joint.
66. Impact Test
    14.1 Except when the size of the finished pipe is insufficient
    to permit obtaining subsize impact specimens, all material
    furnished to this specification and marked in accordance with
    Section 16 shall be tested for impact resistance at the minimum
    temperature for the respective grades as shown in Table 4.
    14.1.1 Special impact tests on individual lots of material
    may be made at other temperatures as agreed upon between the
    manufacturer and the purchaser.
    14.1.2 When subsize Charpy impact specimens are used and
    the width along the notch is less than 80 % of the actual wall
    thickness of the original material, the specified Charpy impact
    test temperature for Grades 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, and 11 shall be
    lower than the minimum temperature shown in Table 4 for the
    respective grade. Under these circumstances the temperature
    reduction values shall be by an amount equal to the difference
    (as shown in Table 6) between the temperature reduction
    corresponding to the actual material thickness and the temperature
    reduction corresponding to the Charpy specimen width
    TABLE 6 Impact Temperature Reduction
    Specimen Width Along Notch or Actual
    Material Thickness
    Temperature Reduction,
    Degrees ColderA
    in. mm °F °C
    0.394 10 (standard size) 0 0
    0.354 9 0 0
    0.315 8 0 0
    0.295 7.5 (3/4 std. size) 5 3
    0.276 7 8 4
    0.262 6.67 (2/3 std. size) 10 5
    0.236 6 15 8
    0.197 5 (1/2 std. size) 20 11
    0.158 4 30 17
    0.131 3.33 (1/3 std. size) 35 19
    0.118 3 40 22
    0.099 2.5 (1/4 std. size) 50 28
    A Straight line interpolation for intermediate values is permitted.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-333/SA-333M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    494
    actually tested. Appendix X1 shows some examples of how the
    temperature reductions are determined.
    14.2 The notched bar impact test shall be made in accordance
    with the procedure for the simple beam, Charpy-type test
    of Test Methods E23.
    14.3 Impact tests specified for temperatures lower than 70
    °F [20 °C] should be made with the following precautions. The
    impact test specimens as well as the handling tongs shall be
    cooled a sufficient time in a suitable container so that both
    reach the desired temperature. The temperature shall be measured
    with thermocouples, thermometers, or any other suitable
    devices and shall be controlled within 3 °F [2 °C]. The
    specimens shall be quickly transferred from the cooling device
    to the anvil of the Charpy impact testing machine and broken
    with a time lapse of not more than 5 s.
67. Hydrostatic or Nondestructive Electric Test
    15.1 Each pipe shall be subjected to the nondestructive
    electric test or the hydrostatic test. The type of test to be used
    shall be at the option of the manufacturer, unless otherwise
    specified in the purchase order.
    15.2 The hydrostatic test shall be in accordance with Specification
    A999/A999M.
    15.3 Nondestructive Electric Test—Nondestructive electric
    tests shall be in accordance with Specification A999/A999M,
    with the following addition:
    15.3.1 If the test signals were produced by visual imperfections
    (listed in 15.3.2), the pipe may be accepted based on
    visual examination, provided the imperfection is less than
    0.004 in. (0.1 mm) or 12½ % of the specified wall thickness
    (whichever is greater).
    15.3.2 Visual Imperfections:
    15.3.2.1 Scratches,
    15.3.2.2 Surface roughness,
    15.3.2.3 Dings,
    15.3.2.4 Straightener marks,
    15.3.2.5 Cutting chips,
    15.3.2.6 Steel die stamps,
    15.3.2.7 Stop marks, or
    15.3.2.8 Pipe reducer ripple.
68. Product Marking
    16.1 Except as modified in 16.1.1, in addition to the
    marking prescribed in Specification A999/A999M, the marking
    shall include whether hot finished, cold drawn, seamless or
    welded, the schedule number and the letters “LT” followed by
    the temperature at which the impact tests were made, except
    when a lower test temperature is required because of reduced
    specimen size, in which case, the higher impact test temperature
    applicable to a full-size specimen should be marked.
    16.1.1 When the size of the finished pipe is insufficient to
    obtain subsize impact specimens, the marking shall not include
    the letters “LT” followed by an indicated test temperature
    unless Supplementary Requirement S1 is specified.
    16.1.2 When the pipe is furnished in the quenched and
    tempered condition, the marking shall include the letters “QT,”
    and the heat treatment condition shall be reported to the
    purchaser or his representative.
69. Keywords
    17.1 low; low temperature service; seamless steel pipe;
    stainless steel pipe; steel pipe; temperature service applications
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    The following supplementary requirement shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
    contract or order.
    S1. Subsize Impact Specimens
    S1.1 When the size of the finished pipe is insufficient to
    permit obtaining subsize impact specimens, testing shall be a
    matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
    S2. Requirements for Pipe for Hydrofluoric Acid Alkylation
    Service
    S2.1 The carbon equivalent (CE), based on heat analysis,
    shall not exceed 0.43 % if the specified wall thickness is equal
    to or less than 1 in. [25.4 mm] or 0.45 % if the specified wall
    thickness is greater than 1 in. [25.4 mm].
    S2.2 The carbon equivalent shall be determined using the
    following formula:
    CE = C + Mn/6 + (Cr + Mo + V)/5 + (Ni + Cu)/15
    S2.3 Based upon heat analysis in mass percent, the vanadium
    content shall not exceed 0.02 %, the niobium content
    shall not exceed 0.02 % and the sum of the vanadium and
    niobium contents shall not exceed 0.03 %.
    S2.4 Based upon heat analysis in mass percent, the sum of
    the nickel and copper contents shall not exceed 0.15 %.
    S2.5 Based upon heat analysis in mass percent, the carbon
    content shall not be less than 0.18 %.
    S2.6 Welding consumables for repair welds shall be of low
    hydrogen type. E60XX electrodes shall not be used, and the
    resultant weld chemistry shall meet the chemical composition
    requirements specified for the pipe.
    S2.7 The designation “HF” shall be stamped or marked on
    each pipe to signify that the pipe complies with this supplementary
    requirement.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-333/SA-333M
    495
    APPENDIX
    (Nonmandatory Information)
    X1. DETERMINATION OF TEMPERATURE REDUCTIONS
    X1.1 Under the circumstances stated in 14.1.2, the impact
    test temperatures specified in Table 4 must be lowered. The
    following examples are offered to describe the application of
    the provisions of 14.1.2.
    X1.1.1 When subsize specimens are used (see 10.1) and the
    width along the notch of the subsize specimen in 80 % or
    greater of the actual wall thickness of the original material, the
    provisions of 14.1.2 do not apply.
    X1.1.1.1 For example, if the actual wall thickness of pipe
    was 0.200 in. [5.0 mm] and the width along the notch of the
    largest subsize specimen obtainable is 0.160 in. [4 mm] or
    greater, no reduction in test temperature is required.
    X1.1.2 When the width along the subsize specimen notch is
    less than 80 % of the actual wall thickness of the pipe, the
    required reduction in test temperature is computed by taking
    the difference between the temperature reduction values shown
    in Table 6 for the actual pipe thickness and the specimen width
    used.
    X1.1.2.1 For example, if the pipe were 0.262 in. [6.67 mm]
    thick and the width along the Charpy specimen notch was 3.33
    mm (1/3 standard size), the test temperature would have to be
    lowered by 25 °F [14 °C]. That is, the temperature reduction
    corresponding to the subsize specimen is 35 °F [19 °C]; the
    temperature reduction corresponding to the actual pipe thickness
    is 10 °F [5 °C]; the difference between these two values is
    the required reduction in test temperature.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS AND WELDED CARBON
    AND ALLOY-STEEL TUBES FOR LOW-TEMPERATURE
    SERVICE
    SA-334/SA-334M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A334/A334M-04a(R10).)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-334/SA-334M
    497
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-334/SA-334M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    498
    SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS AND WELDED
    CARBON AND ALLOY-STEEL TUBES FOR LOWTEMPERATURE
    SERVICE
    SA-334/SA-334M
    [Identical with ASTM Specification A 334/A 334M-04a(R10).]
70. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers several grades of minimum-
    wall-thickness, seamless and welded, carbon and
    alloy-steel tubes intended for use at low temperatures.
    Some product sizes may not be available under this specification
    because heavier wall thicknesses have an adverse
    affect on low-temperature impact properties.
    1.2 Supplementary Requirement S1 of an optional
    nature is provided. This shall apply only when specified
    by the purchaser.
    NOTE 1 — For tubing smaller than 1/2 in. [12.7 mm] in outside diameter,
    the elongation values given for strip specimens in Table 1 shall apply.
    Mechanical property requirements do not apply to tubing smaller than 1/8
    in. [3.2 mm] in outside diameter and with a wall thickness under 0.015
    in. [0.4 mm].
    1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
    units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
    text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
    in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
    system must be used independently of the other. Combining
    values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
    with the specification. The inch-pound units shall apply
    unless the “M” designation of this specification is specified
    in the order.
71. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    A 1016/A 1016M Specification for General Requirements
    for Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic Alloy Steel, and
    Stainless Steel Tubes
    E 23 Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of
    Metallic Materials
72. Ordering Information
    3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
    include the following, as required to describe the desired
    material adequately:
    3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
    3.1.2 Name of material (seamless or welded tubes),
    3.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
    3.1.4 Size (outside diameter and minimum wall
    thickness),
    3.1.5 Length (specific or random),
    3.1.6 Optional requirements (other temperatures,
    Section 14; hydrostatic or electric test, Section 16),
    3.1.7 Test report required, (Certification Section of
    Specification A 1016/A 1016M),
    3.1.8 Specification designation, and
    3.1.9 Special requirements and any supplementary
    requirements selected.
73. General Requirements
    4.1 Material furnished under this specification shall
    conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition
    of Specification A 1016/A 1016M, unless otherwise
    provided herein.
74. Materials and Manufacture
    5.1 The tubes shall be made by the seamless or automatic
    welding process with no addition of filler metal in
    the welding operation.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-334/SA-334M
    499
75. Heat Treatment
    6.1 All seamless and welded tubes, other than Grades
    8 and 11, shall be treated to control their microstructure
    in accordance with one of the following methods:
    6.1.1 Normalize by heating to a uniform temperature
    of not less than 1550°F [845°C] and cool in air or in the
    cooling chamber of an atmosphere controlled furnace.
    6.1.2 Normalize as in 10.1.1, and, at the discretion
    of the manufacturer, reheat to a suitable tempering temperature.
    6.1.3 For the seamless process only, reheat and control
    hot working and the temperature of the hot-finishing
    operation to a finishing temperature range from 1550 to
    1750°F [845 to 955°C] and cool in a controlled atmosphere
    furnace from an initial temperature of not less than 1550°F
    [845°C].
    6.1.4 Treat as in 6.1.3 and, at the discretion of the
    manufacturer, reheat to a suitable tempering temperature.
    6.2 Grade 8 tubes shall be heat treated by the manufacturer
    by either of the following methods.
    6.2.1 Quenched and Tempered — Heat to a uniform
    temperature of 1475 ± 25°F [800 ± 15°C]; hold at this
    temperature for a minimum time in the ratio of 1 h/in.
    [2 min/mm] of thickness, but in no case less than 15 min;
    quench by immersion in circulating water. Reheat until the
    pipe attains a uniform temperature within the range from
    1050 to 1125°F [565 to 605°C]; hold at this temperature
    for a minimum time in the ratio of 1 h/in. [2 min/mm] of
    thickness, but in no case less than 15 min; cool in air or
    water quench at a rate no less than 300°F [165°C]/h.
    6.2.2 Double Normalized and Tempered — Heat to
    a uniform temperature of 1650 ± 25°F [900 ± 15°C]; hold
    at this temperature for a minimum time in the ratio of 1
    h/in. [2 min/mm] of thickness, but in no case less than
    15 min; cool in air. Reheat until the pipe attains a uniform
    temperature of 1450 ± 25°F [790 ± 15°C]; hold at this
    temperature for a minimum time in the ratio of 1 h/in.
    [2 min/mm] of thickness, but in no case less than 15 min;
    cool in air. Reheat to a uniform temperature within the
    range from 1050 to 1125°F [565 to 605°C]; hold at this
    temperature for a minimum time of 1 h/in. [2 min/mm] of
    thickness but in no case less than 15 min; cool in air or
    water quench at a rate not less than 300°F [165°C]/h.
    6.3 Material from which impact specimens are obtained
    shall be in the same condition of heat treatment as the
    finished tubes.
    6.4 Whether to anneal Grade 11 tubes is per agreement
    between purchaser and supplier. When Grade 11 tubes are
    annealed they shall be normalized in the range of 1400 to
    1600°F [760 to 870°C].
76. Chemical Composition
    7.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
    chemical composition prescribed in Table 1.
    7.2 When Grades 1 or 6 are ordered under this specification,
    supplying an alloy grade that specifically requires
    the addition of any element other than those listed for the
    ordered grade in Table 1 is not permitted. However, the
    addition of elements required for the deoxidation of the
    steel is permitted.
77. Product Analysis
    8.1 An analysis of either one billet or one length of
    flat-rolled stock or one tube shall be made for each heat.
    The chemical composition thus determined shall conform
    to the requirements specified.
    8.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests
    of two additional billets, lengths of flat-rolled stock, or
    tubes shall be made. Both retests, for the elements in question,
    shall meet the requirements of the specification; otherwise
    all remaining material in the heat or lot shall be
    rejected or, at the option of the manufacturer, each billet,
    length of flat-rolled stock, or tube may be individually
    tested for acceptance. Billets, lengths of flat-rolled stock,
    or tubes which do not meet the requirements of the specification
    shall be rejected.
    9 Sampling
    9.1 For flattening, flare, and flange requirements, the
    term lot applies to all tubes prior to cutting of the same
    nominal size and wall thickness which are produced from
    the same heat of steel. When final heat treatment is in a
    batch-type furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes of
    the same size and from the same heat which are heat treated
    in the same furnace charge. When the final heat treatment
    is in a continuous furnace, the number of tubes of the same
    size and from the same heat in a lot shall be determined
    from the size of the tubes as prescribed in Table 2.
    9.2 For tensile and hardness test requirements, the term
    lot applies to all tubes prior to cutting, of the same nominal
    diameter and wall thickness which are produced from the
    same heat of steel. When final heat treatment is in a batchtype
    furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes of the
    same size and the same heat which are heat treated in the
    same furnace charge. When the final heat treatment is in
    a continuous furnace, a lot shall include all tubes of the
    same size and heat, heat treated in the same furnace at the
    same temperature, time at heat and furnace speed.
78. Tensile Requirements
    10.1 The material shall conform to the requirements
    as to tensile properties prescribed in Table 3.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-334/SA-334M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    500
79. Hardness Requirements
    11.1 The tubes shall have a hardness number not
    exceeding those prescribed in Table 4.
80. Impact Requirements
    12.1 For Grades 1, 3, 6, 7 and 9, the notched-bar impact
    properties of each set of three impact specimens, including
    specimens for the welded joint in welded pipe with wall
    thicknesses of 0.120 in. [3 mm] and larger, when tested at
    temperatures in conformance with 14.1 shall be not less
    than the values prescribed in Table 5. The impact test is
    not required for Grade 11.
    12.1.1 If the impact value of one specimen is below
    the minimum value, or the impact values of two specimens
    are less than the minimum average value but not below
    the minimum value permitted on a single specimen, a retest
    shall be allowed. The retest shall consist of breaking three
    additional specimens and each specimen must equal or
    exceed the required average value. When an erratic result
    is caused by a defective specimen, or there is uncertainty
    in test procedures, a retest will be allowed.
    12.2 For Grade 8 each of the notched bar impact specimens
    shall display a lateral expansion opposite the notch
    not less than 0.015 in. [0.38 mm].
    12.2.1 When the average lateral expansion value for
    the three impact specimens equals or exceeds 0.015 in.
    [0.38 mm] and the value for one specimen is below
    0.015 in. [0.38 mm] but not below 0.010 in. [0.25 mm],
    a retest of three additional specimens may be made. The
    lateral expansion of each of the retest specimens must equal
    or exceed 0.015 in. [0.38 mm].
    12.2.2 Lateral expansion values shall be determined
    in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
    12.2.3 The values of absorbed energy in foot-pounds
    and the fracture appearance in percentage shear shall be
    recorded for information. A record of these values shall
    be retained for a period of at least 2 years.
81. Mechanical Tests
    13.1 Tension Test — One tension test shall be made on
    a specimen for lots of not more than 50 tubes. Tension
    tests shall be made on specimens from two tubes for lots
    of more than 50 tubes.
    13.2 Flattening Test—One flattening test shall be made
    on specimens from each end of one finished tube of each
    lot but not the one used for the flare or flange test.
    13.3 Flare Test (Seamless Tubes) — One flare test shall
    be made on specimens from each end of one finished tube
    of each lot, but not the one used for the flattening test.
    13.4 Flange Test (Welded Tubes) — One flange test
    shall be made on specimens from each end of one finished
    tube of each lot, but not the one used for the flattening test.
    13.5 Reverse Flattening Test — For welded tubes, one
    reverse flattening test shall be made on a specimen from
    each 1500 ft [460 m] of finished tubing.
    13.6 Hardness Test — Brinell or Rockwell hardness
    tests shall be made on specimens from two tubes from
    each lot.
    13.7 Impact Tests — One notched-bar impact test, consisting
    of breaking three specimens, shall be made from
    each heat represented in a heat-treatment load on specimens
    taken from the finished tube. This test shall represent only
    tubes from the same heat, which have wall thicknesses not
    exceeding by more than 1/4 in. [6.3 mm] the wall thicknesses
    of the tube from which the test specimens are taken. If
    heat treatment is performed in continuous or batch-type
    furnaces controlled within a 50°F [30°C] range and
    equipped with recording pyrometers which yield complete
    heat-treatment records, then one test from each heat in a
    continuous run only shall be required instead of one test
    from each heat in each heat-treatment load.
    13.8 Impact Tests (Welded Tubes) — On welded tube,
    additional impact tests of the same number as required in
    13.7 shall be made to test the weld.
    13.9 Specimens showing defects while being machined
    or prior to testing may be discarded and replacements shall
    be considered as original specimens.
82. Specimens for Impact Test
    14.1 Notched-bar impact specimens shall be of the
    simple beam, Charpy-type, in accordance with Test Methods
    E 23, Type A, with a V notch. Standard specimens 10
    by 10 mm in cross section shall be used unless the material
    to be tested is of insufficient thickness, in which case the
    largest obtainable subsize specimens shall be used. Charpy
    specimens of width along the notch larger than 0.394 in.
    [10 mm] or smaller than 0.099 in. [2.5 mm] are not provided
    for in this specification.
    14.2 Test specimens shall be obtained so that the longitudinal
    axis of the specimen is parallel to the longitudinal
    axis of the tube while the axis of the notch shall be perpendicular
    to the surface. On wall thicknesses of 1 in. [25 mm]
    or less, the specimens shall be obtained with their axial
    plane located at the midpoint; on wall thicknesses over 1
    in. [25 mm], the specimens shall be obtained with their
    axial plane located 1/2 in. [12.5 mm] from the outer surface.
    14.3 When testing welds the specimen shall be, whenever
    diameter and thickness permits, transverse to the longitudinal
    axis of the tube with the notch of the specimen
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-334/SA-334M
    501
    in the welded joint and perpendicular to the surface. When
    diameter and thickness does not permit obtaining transverse
    specimens, longitudinal specimens in accordance
    with 14.2 shall be obtained. The bottom of the notch shall
    be located at the weld joint.
83. Impact Test
    15.1 Except when the size of the finished tube is insufficient
    to permit obtaining subsize impact specimens, all
    material furnished under this specification and marked in
    accordance with Section 17 shall be tested for impact resistance
    at the temperature for the respective grades as prescribed
    in Table 6.
    15.1.1 Special impact tests on individual lots of
    material may be made at other temperatures if agreed upon
    between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
    15.2 The notched-bar impact test shall be made in
    accordance with the procedure for the simple beam,
    Charpy-type of test of Test Methods E 23.
    15.3 Impact tests specified for temperatures lower than
    +70°F [20°C] should be made with the following precautions.
    The impact test specimens as well as the handling
    tongs shall be cooled a sufficient time in a suitable container
    so that both reach the desired temperature. The temperature
    shall be measured with thermocouples, thermometers, or
    any other suitable devices and shall be controlled within
    ±3°F [2°C]. The specimens shall be quickly transferred
    from the cooling device to the anvil of the Charpy impact
    testing machine and broken with a time lapse of not more
    than 5 s.
    15.4 When subsize Charpy impact specimens are used
    and the width along the notch is less than 80% of the actual
    wall thickness of the original material, the specified Charpy
    impact test temperature for Grades 1, 3, 6, 7, and 9 shall
    be lower than the minimum temperature shown in Table
    6 for the respective grade. Under these circumstances the
    temperature reduction values shall be by an amount equal
    to the difference (as shown in Table 7) between the temperature
    reduction corresponding to the actual material thickness
    and the temperature reduction corresponding to
    Charpy specimen width actually tested. The appendix
    shows some examples of how the temperature reductions
    are determined.
84. Hydrostatic or Nondestructive Electric Test
    16.1 Each tube shall be subjected to the nondestructive
    electric test or the hydrostatic test in accordance with Specification
    A 1016/A 1016M. The type of test to be used shall
    be at the option of the manufacturer, unless otherwise
    specified in the purchase order.
85. Product Marking
    17.1 Except as modified in 16.1.1, in addition to the
    marking prescribed in Specification A 1016/A 1016M, the
    marking shall include whether hot-finished, cold-drawn,
    seamless, or welded, and the letters “LT” followed by the
    temperature at which the impact tests were made, except
    when a lower test temperature is required because of
    reduced specimen size, in which case, the higher impact
    test temperature applicable to a full-size specimen should
    be marked.
    17.1.1 When the size of the finished tube is insufficient
    to obtain subsize impact specimens, the marking shall
    not include the letters LT followed by an indicated test
    temperature unless Supplementary Requirement S1 is specified.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-334/SA-334M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    502
    TABLE 1
    CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
    Composition, %
    Grade 1 Grade 6
    Element [Note (1)] Grade 3 [Note (1)] Grade 7 Grade 8 Grade 9 Grade 11
    Carbon, max 0.30 0.19 0.30 0.19 0.13 0.20 0.10
    Manganese 0.40–1.06 0.31–0.64 0.29–1.06 0.90 max 0.90 max 0.40–1.06 0.60 max
    Phosphorus, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
    Sulfur, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
    Silicon . . . 0.18–0.37 0.10 min 0.13–0.32 0.13–0.32 . . . 0.35 max
    Nickel . . . 3.18–3.82 . . . 2.03–2.57 8.40–9.60 1.60–2.24 35.0–37.0
    Chromium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.50 max
    Copper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.75–1.25 . . .
    Cobalt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.50 max
    Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.50 max
    NOTE:
    (1) For each reduction of 0.01% carbon below 0.30%, an increase of 0.05% manganese above 1.06% will be permitted to a maximum of 1.35%
    manganese.
    TABLE 2
    HEAT-TREATMENT LOT
    Size of Tube Size of Lot
    2 in. [50.8 mm] and over in outside not more than 50 tubes
    diameter and 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] and
    over in wall thickness
    Under 2 in. [50.8 mm] but over 1 in. not more than 75 tubes
    [25.4 mm] in outside diameter, or
    over 1 in. [25.4 mm] in outside diameter
    and under 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] in
    thickness
    1 in. [25.4 mm] or under in outside not more than 125 tubes
    diameter
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-334/SA-334M
    503
    TABLE 3
    TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
    Grade 1 Grade 3 Grade 6 Grade 7 Grade 8 Grade 9 Grade 11
    ksi MPa ksi MPa ksi MPa ksi MPa ksi MPa ksi MPa ksi MPa
    Tensile Strength, min 55 380 65 450 60 415 65 450 100 690 63 435 65 450
    Yield Strength, min 30 205 35 240 35 240 35 240 75 520 46 315 35 240
    Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm (or 4D),
    min, %:
    Basic minimum elongation for walls 5/16 35 30 30 30 22 28 18 [Note (1)]
    in. [8 mm] and over in thickness, strip
    tests, and for all small sizes tested in
    full section
    When standard round 2 in. or 50 mm 28 22 22 22 16 . . . . . .
    gage length or proportionally smaller
    size specimen with the gage length
    equal to 4D (4 times the diameter)
    is used
    For strip tests, a deduction for each 1/32 1.75 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.25 1.50 . . .
    in. [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thick- [Note (2)] [Note (2)] [Note (2)] [Note (2)] [Note (2)] [Note (2)]
    ness below 5/16 in. [8 mm] from the
    basic minimum elongation of the following
    percentage points
    NOTES:
    (1) Elongation of Grade 11 is for all walls and for small sizes tested in full section.
    (2) The following table gives the calculated minimum values:
    Wall Thickness Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min % [Note (1)]
    in. mm Grade 1 Grade 3 Grade 6 Grade 7 Grade 8 Grade 9
    5/16 (0.312) 8 35 30 30 30 22 28
    9/32 (0.281) 7.2 33 28 28 28 21 26
    1/4 (0.250) 6.4 32 27 27 27 20 25
    7/32 (0.219) 5.6 30 26 26 26 18 24
    3/16 (0.188) 4.8 28 24 24 24 17 22
    5/32 (0.156) 4 26 22 22 22 16 20
    1/8 (0.125) 3.2 25 21 21 21 15 19
    3/32 (0.094) 2.4 23 20 20 20 13 18
    1/16 (0.062) 1.6 21 18 18 18 12 16
    NOTE:
    (1) Calculated elongation requirements shall be rounded to the nearest whole number.
    NOTE: The above table gives the computed minimum elongation values for each 1/32 in. [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickness. Where the wall
    thickness lies between two values shown above, the minimum elongation value is determined by the following equations.
    Grade Equation [Note (3)]
    1 E p 56t + 17.50 [E p 2.19t + 17.50]
    3 E p 48t + 15.00 [E p 1.87t + 15.00]
    6 E p 48t + 15.00 [E p 1.87t + 15.00]
    7 E p 48t + 15.00 [E p 1.87t + 15.00]
    8 E p 40t + 9.50 [E p 1.56t + 9.50]
    9 E p 48t + 13.00 [E p 1.87t + 13.00]
    where:
    E p elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, %, and
    t p actual thickness of specimen, in. [mm ].
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-334/SA-334M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    504
    TABLE 4
    MAXIMUM HARDNESS NUMBER
    Grade Rockwell Brinell
    1 B 85 163
    3 B 90 190
    6 B 90 190
    7 B 90 190
    8 . . . . . .
    11 B 90 190
    TABLE 5
    IMPACT REQUIREMENTS FOR GRADES 1, 3, 6, 7, AND 9
    Minimum Average Notched Minimum Notched Bar Impact
    Bar Impact Value of Each Set Value of One Specimen Only
    Size of of Three Specimens [Note (1)] of a Set [Note (1)]
    Specimen, mm ft·lbf J ft·lbf J
    10 by 10 13 18 10 14
    10 by 7.5 10 14 8 11
    10 by 6.67 9 12 7 9
    10 by 5 7 9 5 7
    10 by 3.33 5 7 3 4
    10 by 2.5 4 5 3 4
    NOTE:
    (1) Straight line interpolation for intermediate values is permitted.
    TABLE 6
    IMPACT TEMPERATURE
    Impact Test Temperature
    Grade °F °C
    1 -50 -45
    3 -150 -100
    6 -50 -45
    7 -100 -75
    8 -320 -195
    9 -100 -75
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-334/SA-334M
    505
    TABLE 7
    IMPACT TEMPERATURE REDUCTION
    Specimen Width Along Notch or Actual Temperature Reduction,
    Material Thickness [Note (1)] Degrees Colder
    Inches Millimeters °F °C
    0.394 10 (standard size) 0 0
    0.354 9 0 0
    0.315 8 0 0
    0.295 7.5 (3/4 standard size) 5 3
    0.276 7 8 4
    0.262 6.67 (2/3 standard size) 10 5
    0.236 6 15 8
    0.197 5 (1/2 standard size) 20 11
    0.158 4 30 17
    0.131 3.33 (1/3 standard size) 35 19
    0.118 3 40 22
    0.099 2.5 (1/4 standard size) 50 28
    NOTE:
    (1) Straight line interpolation for intermediate values is permitted.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-334/SA-334M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    506
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    The following supplementary requirement shall apply only when specified by the purchaser
    in the inquiry, contract, or order.
    S1. Nonstandard Test Specimens
    S1.1 When the size of the finished tube is insufficient to permit obtaining subsize impact specimens, testing shall
    be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-334/SA-334M
    507
    APPENDIX
    (Nonmandatory Information)
    X1. DETERMINATION OF TEMPERATURE
    REDUCTIONS
    X1.1 Under the circumstances stated in 15.4, the impact
    test temperatures specified in Table 6 must be lowered.
    The following examples are offered to describe the application
    of the provisions of 15.4.
    X1.1.1 When subsize specimens are used (see 14.1)
    and the width along the notch of the subsize specimen is
    80% or greater of the actual wall thickness of the original
    material, the provisions of 15.4 do not apply.
    X1.1.1.1 For example, if the actual wall thickness
    of pipe was 0.200 in. [5.0 mm] and the width along the
    notch of the largest subsize specimen obtainable is 0.160
    in. [4 mm] or greater, no reduction in test temperature is
    required.
    X1.1.2 When the width along the subsize specimen
    notch is less than 80% of the actual wall thickness of the
    pipe, the required reduction in test temperature is computed
    by taking the difference between the temperature reduction
    values shown in Table 7 for the actual pipe thickness and
    the specimen width used.
    X1.1.2.1 For example, if the pipe were 0.262 in.
    [6.67 mm] thick and the width along the Charpy specimen
    notch was 3.33 mm (1/3 standard size), the test temperature
    would have to be lowered by 25°F [14°C] (that is, the
    temperature reduction corresponding to the subsize specimen
    is 35°F [19°C], the temperature reduction corresponding
    to the actual pipe thickness is 10°F [5°C]; the difference
    between these two values is the required reduction in test
    temperature).
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ð19Þ
    SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS FERRITIC
    ALLOY-STEEL PIPE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
    SA-335/SA-335M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A335/A335M-18 except for the revision to 9.5 to replace the words “as agreed upon
    in accordance with Note D in Table 2” with “performed”.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-335/SA-335M
    509
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-335/SA-335M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    510
    Standard Specification for
    Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
    Service
86. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers nominal wall and minimum
    wall seamless ferritic alloy-steel pipe intended for hightemperature
    service. Pipe ordered to this specification shall be
    suitable for bending, flanging (vanstoning), and similar forming
    operations, and for fusion welding. Selection will depend
    upon design, service conditions, mechanical properties, and
    high-temperature characteristics.
    1.2 Several grades of ferritic steels (see Note 1) are covered.
    Their compositions are given in Table 1.
    NOTE 1—Ferritic steels in this specification are defined as low- and
    intermediate-alloy steels containing up to and including 10 % chromium.
    1.3 Supplementary requirements (S1 to S8) of an optional
    nature are provided. Supplementary requirements S1 through
    S6 call for additional tests to be made, and when desired, shall
    be so stated in the order together with the number of such tests
    required.
    1.4 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
    shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
    from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the
    standard. The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M”
    designation of this specification is specified in the order.
    NOTE 2—The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has
    been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal
    diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.”
    1.5 This international standard was developed in accordance
    with internationally recognized principles on standardization
    established in the Decision on Principles for the
    Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
    issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
    Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
87. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A999/A999M Specification for General Requirements for
    Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe
    E92 Test Methods for Vickers Hardness and Knoop Hardness
    of Metallic Materials
    E213 Practice for Ultrasonic Testing of Metal Pipe and
    Tubing
    E309 Practice for Eddy Current Examination of Steel Tubular
    Products Using Magnetic Saturation
    E381 Method of Macroetch Testing Steel Bars, Billets,
    Blooms, and Forgings
    E527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys in the
    Unified Numbering System (UNS)
    E570 Practice for Flux Leakage Examination of Ferromagnetic
    Steel Tubular Products
    2.2 ASME Standard:
    B36.10M Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
    2.3 AWS Specifications
    A5.5/A5.5M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
    for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
    A5.23/A5.23M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
    and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
    A5.28/A5.28M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
    for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-335/SA-335M
    511
    TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
    Grade
    UNS
    DesignationA
    Composition, %
    Carbon
    Manganese
    Phosphorus,
    max
    Sulfur,
    max
    Silicon Chromium
    Molybdenum
    Others
    P1 K11522 0.10–0.20 0.30–0.80 0.025 0.025 0.10–0.50 . . . 0.44–0.65 . . .
    P2 K11547 0.10–0.20 0.30–0.61 0.025 0.025 0.10–0.30 0.50–0.81 0.44–0.65 . . .
    P5 K41545 0.15 max 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 max 4.00–6.00 0.45–0.65 . . .
    P5b K51545 0.15 max 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 1.00–2.00 4.00–6.00 0.45–0.65 . . .
    P5c K41245 0.12 max 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 max 4.00–6.00 0.45–0.65 . . .B
    P9 K90941 0.15 max 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.25–1.00 8.00–10.00 0.90–1.10 . . .
    P11 K11597 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50–1.00 1.00–1.50 0.44–0.65 . . .
    P12 K11562 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.61 0.025 0.025 0.50 max 0.80–1.25 0.44–0.65 . . .
    P15 K11578 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 1.15–1.65 . . . 0.44–0.65 . . .
    P21 K31545 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 max 2.65–3.35 0.80–1.06 . . .
    P22 K21590 0.05–0.15 0.30–0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 max 1.90–2.60 0.87–1.13 . . .
    P23 K41650 0.04–0.10 0.10–0.60 0.030 max 0.010 max 0.50 max 1.90–2.60 0.05–0.30 V 0.20–0.30
    Cb 0.02–0.08
    B 0.0010–0.006
    N 0.015 max
    Al 0.030 max
    W 1.45–1.75
    Ni 0.40 max
    Ti 0.005–0.060
    Ti/N $ 3.5C
    P24 K30736 0.05–0.10 0.30–0.70 0.020 0.010 0.15–0.45 2.20–2.60 0.90–1.10 V 0.20–0.30
    Ti 0.06–0.10
    N 0.012 max
    Al 0.02 max
    B 0.0015–0.007
    P36 K21001 0.10–0.17 0.80–1.20 0.030 max 0.025 max 0.25–0.50 0.30 max 0.25–0.50 Ni 1.00-1.30
    Cu 0.50-0.80
    Cb 0.015-0.045
    V 0.02 max
    N 0.02 max
    Al 0.050 max
    P91
    Type 1
    K91560 0.08–0.12 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.010 0.20–0.50 8.00–9.50 0.85–1.05
    V 0.18–0.25
    N 0.030–0.070
    Ni 0.40 max
    Al 0.02 max
    Cb 0.06–0.10
    Ti 0.01 max
    Zr 0.01 max
    P91
    Type 2
    K91560
    V
    Heat 0.08–0.12 0.30–0.50D 0.020D 0.005D 0.20–0.40D 8.00–9.50D 0.85–1.05 Heat 0.18–0.25
    Product 0.07–0.13 0.80–1.05 Product 0.16–0.27
    Ni 0.20 maxD
    Al 0.020 maxD
    N 0.035–0.070D
    N/Al ratio $4.0
    Cb
    Heat 0.06–0.10
    Product 0.05–0.11
    Ti 0.01 maxD
    Zr 0.01 maxD
    Sn 0.010 maxD
    Sb 0.003 maxD
    As 0.010 maxD
    B 0.001 maxD
    W 0.05 maxD
    Cu 0.10 maxD
    P92 K92460 0.07–0.13 0.30–0.60 0.020 0.010 0.50 max 8.50–9.50 0.30–0.60 V 0.15–0.25
    N 0.03–0.07
    Ni 0.40 max
    Al 0.02 max
    Cb 0.04–0.09
    W 1.5–2.00
    B 0.001–0.006
    Ti 0.01 max
    Zr 0.01 max
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-335/SA-335M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    512
    A5.29/A5.29M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored
    Arc Welding
    2.4 Other Documents:
    SNT-TC-1A Recommended Practice for Nondestructive Personnel
    Qualification and Certification
    SAE J 1086 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys
    (UNS)
88. Ordering Information
    3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
    include the following, as required, to describe the desired
    material adequately:
    3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
    3.1.2 Name of material (seamless alloy steel pipe),
    3.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
    3.1.4 Manufacture (hot-finished or cold-drawn),
    3.1.5 Size using one of the following:
    3.1.5.1 NPS and schedule number,
    3.1.5.2 Outside diameter and nominal wall thickness,
    3.1.5.3 Outside diameter and minimum wall thickness,
    3.1.5.4 Inside diameter and nominal wall thickness, and
    3.1.5.5 Inside diameter and minimum wall thickness.
    3.1.6 Length (specific or random),
    3.1.7 End finish (Ends Section of Specification A999/
    A999M),
    3.1.8 Optional requirements (Section 8, 12, and 13 of this
    specification. See the Sections on Hydrostatic Test Requirements
    and Permissible Variation inWeight for Seamless Pipe in
    Specification A999/A999M),
    3.1.9 Specification designation, and
    3.1.10 Special requirements or any supplementary requirements
    selected, or both.
    3.1.11 The flattening or bend test shall be performed on 5 %
    of the pipe (or fewer in accordance with 14.2) unless Supplementary
    Requirement S3 is specified.
89. General Requirements
    4.1 Material furnished to this specification shall conform to
    the applicable requirements of the current edition of Specification
    A999/A999M, unless otherwise provided herein.
90. Materials and Manufacture
    5.1 Pipe may be either hot finished or cold drawn with the
    finishing treatment as required in 5.2.
    5.2 Heat Treatment:
    5.2.1 All pipe shall be reheated for heat treatment and heat
    treated in accordance with the requirements of Table 2.
    NOTE 3—It is recommended that the temperature for tempering should
    be at least 100 °F [50 °C] above the intended service temperature;
    consequently, the purchaser should advise the manufacturer if the service
    temperature is to be over 1100 °F [600 °C].
    NOTE 4—Certain of the ferritic steels covered by this specification will
    harden if cooled rapidly from above their critical temperature. Some will
    air harden, that is, become hardened to an undesirable degree when cooled
    in air from high temperatures. Therefore, operations involving heating
    such steels above their critical temperatures, such as welding, flanging,
    and hot bending, should be followed by suitable heat treatment.
    TABLE 1 Continued
    Grade
    UNS
    DesignationA
    Composition, %
    Carbon
    Manganese
    Phosphorus,
    max
    Sulfur,
    max
    Silicon Chromium
    Molybdenum
    Others
    P122 K92930 0.07–0.14 0.70 max 0.020 0.010 0.50 max 10.00–11.50 0.25–0.60 V 0.15–0.30
    W 1.50–2.50
    Cu 0.30–1.70
    Cb 0.04–0.10
    B 0.0005–0.005
    N 0.040–0.100
    Ni 0.50 max
    Al 0.020 max
    Ti 0.01 max
    Zr 0.01 max
    P911 K91061 0.09–0.13 0.30–0.60 0.020 max 0.010 max 0.10–0.50 8.5–9.5 0.90–1.10 V 0.18–0.25
    Ni 0.40 max
    Cb 0.060–0.10
    B 0.0003–0.006
    N 0.04–0.09
    Al 0.02 max
    W 0.90–1.10
    Ti 0.01 max
    Zr 0.01 max
    A New designation established in accordance with Practice E527 and SAE J1086, Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
    B Grade P5c shall have a titanium content of not less than 4 times the carbon content and not more than 0.70 %; or a columbium content of 8 to 10 times the carbon content.
    CAlternatively, in lieu of this ratio minimum, the material shall have a minimum hardness of 275 HV in the hardened condition, defined as after austenitizing and cooling
    to room temperature but prior to tempering. Hardness testing shall be performed at mid-thickness of the product. Hardness test frequency shall be two samples of product
    per heat treatment lot and the hardness testing results shall be reported on the material test report.
    DApplies to both heat and product analyses.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-335/SA-335M
    513
91. Chemical Composition
    6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
    chemical composition prescribed in Table 1.
92. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
    7.1 The pipe manufacturer shall explore a sufficient number
    of visual surface imperfections to provide reasonable assurance
    that they have been properly evaluated with respect to depth.
    Exploration of all surface imperfections is not required but may
    be necessary to ensure compliance with 7.2.
    7.2 Surface imperfections that penetrate more than 121/2 %
    of the nominal wall thickness or encroach on the minimum
    wall thickness shall be considered defects. Pipe with such
    defects shall be given one of the following dispositions:
    7.2.1 The defect may be removed by grinding provided that
    the remaining wall thickness is within specified limits.
    7.2.2 Repaired in accordance with the repair welding provisions
    of 7.6.
    7.2.3 The section of pipe containing the defect may be cut
    off within the limits of requirements on length.
    7.2.4 Rejected.
    7.3 To provide a workmanlike finish and basis for evaluating
    conformance with 7.2, the pipe manufacturer shall remove
    by grinding the following:
    7.3.1 Mechanical marks, abrasions (see Note 5) and pits,
    any of which imperfections are deeper than 1/16 in. [1.6 mm].
    NOTE 5—Marks and abrasions are defined as cable marks, dinges, guide
    marks, roll marks, ball scratches, scores, die marks, and the like.
    7.3.2 Visual imperfections, commonly referred to as scabs,
    seams, laps, tears, or slivers, found by exploration in accordance
    with 7.1 to be deeper than 5 % of the nominal wall
    thickness.
    7.4 At the purchaser’s discretion, pipe shall be subject to
    rejection if surface imperfections acceptable under 7.2 are not
    scattered, but appear over a large area in excess of what is
    TABLE 2 Heat Treatment RequirementsA
    Grade Heat Treat Type Normalizing
    Temperature,
    min or range
    °F [°C]
    Cooling Media Subcritical
    Annealing or
    Tempering
    Temperature,
    min or range
    °F [°C]
    P1 full or isothermal anneal or . . . . . . . . .
    normalize and temper or . . . . . . 1200 [650]
    subcritical anneal . . . . . . 1200–1300 [650–705]
    P2 full or isothermal anneal or . . . . . . . . .
    normalize and temper or . . . . . . 1250 [675]
    subcritical anneal . . . . . . 1200–1300 [650–705]
    P5 full or isothermal anneal or . . . . . . . . .
    normalize and temper . . . . . . 1250 [675]
    P5b full or isothermal anneal or . . . . . . . . .
    normalize and temper . . . . . . 1250 [675]
    P5c subcritical anneal . . . . . . 1325–1375 [715–745]
    P9 full or isothermal anneal or . . . . . . . . .
    normalize and temper . . . . . . 1250 [675]
    P11 full or isothermal anneal or . . . . . . . . .
    normalize and temper . . . . . . 1200 [650]
    P12 full or isothermal anneal or . . . . . . . . .
    normalize and temper or . . . . . . 1200 [650]
    subcritical anneal . . . . . . 1200–1300 [650–705]
    P15 full or isothermal anneal or . . . . . . . . .
    normalize and temper . . . . . . 1200 [650]
    P21 full or isothermal anneal or . . . . . . . . .
    normalize and temper . . . . . . 1250 [675]
    P22 full or isothermal anneal or . . . . . . . . .
    normalize and temper . . . . . . 1250 [675]
    P23 normalize and temper 1900–1975 [1040–1080] air or
    accelerated
    cooling
    1350–1470 [730–800]
    P24 normalize and temper 1800–1870 [980–1020] air or
    accelerated
    cooling
    1350–1420 [730–770]
    P36 normalize and temperB 1650 [900] . . . 1100 [595]
    P91 Type 1 and Type 2 normalize and temper or 1900–1975 [1040–1080] . . . 1350–1470 [730–800]C
    quench and temper 1900–1975 [1040–1080] . . . 1350–1470 [730–800]
    P92 normalize and temper 1900–1975 [1040–1080] D 1350–1470 [730–800]
    P122 normalize and temper 1900–1975 [1040–1080] . . . 1350–1470 [730–800]
    P911 normalize and temper 1900–1975 [1040–1080] D 1365–1435 [740–780]
    AWhere ellipses ({) appear in this table there is no requirement.
    BAlternatively, Grade P36, Class 2 shall be cooled from the austenitizing temperature by accelerated cooling in air or by liquid quenching.
    CExcept when Supplementary Requirement S7 is specified by the purchaser.
    D Accelerated cooling from the normalizing temperature shall be permitted for section thicknesses greater than 3 in. [75 mm].
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-335/SA-335M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    514
    considered a workmanlike finish. Disposition of such pipe shall
    be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the
    purchaser.
    7.5 When imperfections or defects are removed by grinding,
    a smooth curved surface shall be maintained, and the wall
    thickness shall not be decreased below that permitted by this
    specification. The outside diameter at the point of grinding may
    be reduced by the amount so removed.
    7.5.1 Wall thickness measurements shall be made with a
    mechanical caliper or with a properly calibrated nondestructive
    testing device of appropriate accuracy. In case of dispute, the
    measurement determined by use of the mechanical caliper shall
    govern.
    7.6 Weld repair shall be permitted only subject to the
    approval of the purchaser and in accordance with Specification
    A999/A999M.
    7.6.1 All repair welds in P91 shall be made with one of the
    following welding processes and consumables: SMAW, A5.5/
    A5.5M E90XX-B9; SAW, A5.23/A5.23M EB9 + neutral flux;
    GTAW, A5.28/A5.28M ER90S-B9; and FCAWA5.29/A5.29M
    E91T1-B9. In addition, the sum of the Ni+Mn content of all
    welding consumables used to weld repair P91 Type 1 and Type
    2 shall not exceed 1.0 %.
    7.6.2 All repair welds in P92, P911, and P122, shall be made
    using welding consumables meeting the chemical requirements
    for the grade in Table 1.
    7.6.3 After weld repair, Grades P23, P91 Type 1 and Type 2,
    P92, and P122 shall be heat treated at 1350–1470 °F [730–800
    °C].
    7.6.4 After weld repair, Grade P911 shall be heat treated at
    1365–1435 °F[740–780 °C].
    7.6.5 After weld repair, Grade P24 shall be heat treated at
    1350–1420 °F [730–770 °C].
    7.7 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight.
93. Product Analysis
    8.1 At the request of the purchaser, an analysis of two pipes
    from each lot as defined hereafter shall be made by the
    manufacturer. A lot is all pipe of the same nominal size and
    wall thickness (schedule) which is produced from the same
    heat of steel and shall be limited as follows:
    NPS Designator Maximum Number of
    Lengths in a Lot
    Under 2 400
    2 to 5 200
    6 and over 100
    8.2 The results of these analyses shall be reported to the
    purchaser or the purchaser’s representative, and shall conform
    to the requirements specified in Table 1.
    8.3 For grade P91 Type 1 the carbon content may vary for
    the product analysis by -0.01 % and +0.02 % from the
    specified range as per Table 1.
    8.4 If the analysis of one of the tests specified in 8.1 does
    not conform to the requirements specified in 6.1, an analysis of
    each billet or pipe from the same heat or lot may be made, and
    all billets or pipe conforming to the requirements shall be
    accepted.
94. Tensile and Hardness Requirements
    9.1 The tensile properties of the material shall conform to
    the requirements prescribed in Table 3.
    9.2 Table 4 lists elongation requirements.
    9.3 Pipe of Grade P91 Type 1 and Type 2 shall have a
    hardness within the range of 190 to 250 HBW or 196 to 265
    HV or 91 HRBW to 25 HRC. Pipe of Grades P24, P36, P92,
    P122, and P911 shall have a hardness not exceeding 250 HBW
    or 265 HV or 25 HRC. Pipe of grade P23 shall have a hardness
    not exceeding 220 HBW or 220 HV or 97 HRBW.
    9.4 Table 5 gives the computed minimum elongation values
    for each 1/32-in. [0.8-mm] decrease in wall thickness. Where the
    wall thickness lies between two values above, the minimum
    elongation value is determined by the following formula:
    Direction of Test Equation B
    Longitudinal, all grades except P23, P91
    Type 1 and Type 2, P92, P122, and
    P911
    E = 48t + 15.00
    [E = 1.87 t + 15.00]
    Transverse, all grades except P23, P91
    Type 1 and Type 2, P92, P122, and
    P911
    E = 32t + 10.00
    [E = 1.25 t + 10.00]
    Longitudinal, P23, P24, P91 Type 1 and
    Type 2, P92, P122, and P911
    E = 32t + 10.00
    [E = 1.25 t + 10.00]
    Longitudinal, P36 E = 32t + 5.0
    [E = 1.25 t + 5.0]
    where:
    E = elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, %, and
    t = actual thickness of specimens, in. [mm].
    TABLE 3 Tensile Requirements
    Grade
    P1, P2 P12 P23 P24
    P91
    Type 1 and
    Type 2
    P92, P911
    P36 Class 1
    P122 P36 Class 2 All Others
    Tensile strength,
    min:
    ksi
    MPa
    55
    380
    60
    415
    74
    510
    85
    585
    85
    585
    90
    620
    90
    620
    95.5
    660
    60
    415
    Yield strength,
    min:
    ksi
    MPa
    30
    205
    32
    220
    58
    400
    60
    415
    60
    415
    64
    440
    58
    400
    66.5
    460
    30
    205
    9.5 For Grade P91 Type 1 and Type 2, when quenching
    and tempering has been performed, the tensile and hardness
    properties shall be met and verified on material taken from
    the half-thickness location.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-335/SA-335M
    515
95. Permissible Variations in Diameter
    10.1 For pipe ordered to NPS [DN] or outside diameter,
    variations in outside diameter shall not exceed those specified
    in Table 6.
    10.2 For pipe ordered to inside diameter, the inside diameter
    shall not vary more than 6 1 % from the specified inside
    diameter.
96. Permissible Variations in Wall Thickness
    11.1 In addition to the implicit limitation of wall thickness
    for pipe imposed by the limitation on weight in Specification
    A999/A999M, the wall thickness for pipe at any point shall be
    within the tolerances specified in Table 7. The minimum wall
    thickness and outside diameter for inspection for compliance
    with this requirement for pipe ordered by NPS [DN] and
    schedule number is shown in ASME B36.10M.
    TABLE 4 Elongation Requirements
    Elongation Requirements
    All grades
    except P23, P36
    P91 Type 1 and
    Type 2, P92, P122,
    and P911
    P23, P24, P91
    Type 1 and Type 2,
    P92, P122, and
    P 911 P36
    Longitudinal
    Transverse
    Longitudinal
    Transverse
    Longitudinal
    Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm,
    (or 4D), min, %:
    Basic minimum elongation
    for wall 5/16 in. [8 mm] and
    over in thickness, strip tests,
    and for all small sizes tested
    in full section
    30 20 20 . . . 15
    When standard round 2-in.
    or 50-mm gage length or
    proportionally smaller size
    specimen with the gage
    length equal to 4D (4 times
    the diameter) is used
    22 14 20 13 . . .
    For strip tests a deduction
    for each 1/32-in. [0.8 mm]
    decrease in wall thickness
    below in. [8 mm] from the
    basic minimum elongation of
    the following percentage
    points shall be made
    1.50A 1.00A 1.00A . . . 1.00A
    A Table 5 gives the calculated minimum values.
    TABLE 5 Calculated Minimum Elongation Values
    Wall Thickness
    Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, %
    All grades except P23, P36,
    P91 Type 1 and Type 2,
    P92, P122, and P911
    P23, P24, P91,
    Type 1 and
    Type 2,
    P92, P122,
    and P911
    P36
    in. mm
    Longitudinal
    Transverse
    Longitudinal
    Longitudinal
    5/16 (0.312) 8 30 20 20 15
    9/32 (0.281) 7.2 28 19 19 14
    1/4 (0.250) 6.4 27 18 18 13
    7/32 (0.219) 5.6 26 . . . 17 12
    3/16 (0.188) 4.8 24 . . . 16 11
    5/32 (0.156) 4 22 . . . 15 10
    1/8 (0.125) 3.2 21 . . . 14 9
    3/32 (0.094) 2.4 20 . . . 13 8
    1/16 (0.062) 1.6 18 . . . 12 7
    TABLE 6 Permissible Variations in Outside Diameter
    Over Under
    NPS [DN] Designator in. mm in. mm
    1/8 to 11/2 [6 to 40], incl. 1/64 (0.015) 0.40 1/64 (0.015) 0.40
    Over 11/2 to 4 [40 to 100],
    incl.
    1/32 (0.031) 0.79 1/32 (0.031) 0.79
    Over 4 to 8 [100 to 200],
    incl.
    1/16 (0.062) 1.59 1/32 (0.031) 0.79
    Over 8 to 12 [200 to 300],
    incl.
    3/32 (0.093) 2.38 1/32 (0.031) 0.79
    Over 12 [300] ± 1 % of the
    specified
    outside
    diameter
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-335/SA-335M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    516
97. Hydrostatic Test
    12.1 The requirements for grades other than P91 Type 1 and
    Type 2, P92, P911, and P122 are shown in 12.1.1 – 12.1.4.
    12.1.1 Each length of pipe with outside diameter greater
    than 10 in. [250 mm] and wall thickness less than or equal to
    0.75 in. [19 mm], shall be submitted to the hydrostatic test,
    except as provided for in 12.1.4.
    12.1.2 Pipe of all other sizes shall be subjected to the
    nondestructive electric test as shown in Section 13, except as
    provided for in 12.1.3 and 12.1.4.
    12.1.3 When specified by the purchaser, pipe of all other
    sizes shall be furnished without the hydrostatic test and without
    nondestructive examination.
    12.1.4 When specified by the purchaser, pipe shall be
    furnished with both the hydrostatic test and a nondestructive
    examination having been performed.
    12.2 The requirements for grades P91 Type 1 and Type 2,
    P92, P911, and P122 are shown in 12.2.1 – 12.2.3.
    12.2.1 Each length of pipe with outside diameter greater
    than 10 in. [250 mm] and wall thickness less than or equal to
    0.75 in. [19 mm], shall be submitted to both the hydrostatic test
    and the ultrasonic test as shown in Section 13.
    12.2.2 Pipe of all other sizes shall be subjected to the
    nondestructive electric test as shown in Section 13, except as
    provided for in 12.2.3.
    12.2.3 When specified by the purchaser, pipe of all other
    sizes shall be furnished with both the hydrostatic test and a
    nondestructive examination having been performed.
98. Nondestructive Examination
    13.1 When required by 12.1.2 or 12.2 above, or when
    specified in the purchase order in addition to the hydrostatic
    test (12.2.3), each pipe shall be examined by a nondestructive
    examination method in accordance with Practice E213, Practice
    E309, or Practice E570. Except for Grades P91 Type 1 and
    Type 2, P92, P911, and P122, the type of nondestructive
    examination shall be at the option of the manufacturer, unless
    otherwise specified in the order. Grades P91 Type 1 and Type
    2, P92, P911, and P122 shall be examined by an examination
    method in accordance with Practice E213. When specified in
    the order, pipe of Grades P91 Type 1 and Type 2, P92, P911,
    and P122 shall be examined by an examination method in
    accordance with Practices E309 or E570, in addition to the
    examination method in accordance with Practice E213. The
    range of pipe sizes that may be examined by each method shall
    be subject to the limitations in the scope of the respective
    practices.
    13.2 Following conditions apply in lieu or in addition to
    those in Specification A999/A999M:
    13.2.1 The width of the notch shall not exceed the depth.
    13.2.2 If upon any standardization, the reference signal
    amplitude has decreased by more than 25 % (2 db), the test
    apparatus shall be considered out of standardization. The test
    system settings may be changed, or the transducer(s), coil(s) or
    sensor(s) adjusted, and the unit restandardized, but all pipe
    tested since the last acceptable standardization shall be retested.
    13.2.3 Pipes producing a signal equal to or greater than the
    signal produced by the reference standard shall be subject to
    one of the following four dispositions:
    13.2.3.1 The pipes may be rejected without further
    examination, at the discretion of the manufacturer.
    13.2.3.2 The pipes shall be rejected if the test signal was
    produced by imperfections which cannot be identified, or was
    produced by cracks or crack-like imperfections.
    13.2.3.3 The pipes may be repaired by grinding (in accordance
    with 7.2.1), welding (in accordance with 7.6) or sectioning
    (in accordance with 7.2.3). To be accepted, a repaired pipe
    must pass the same nondestructive examination by which it
    was rejected, and it must meet the remaining wall thickness
    requirements of this specification.
    13.2.3.4 If the test signals were produced by visual imperfections
    such as those listed below, the pipes may be evaluated
    in accordance with the provisions of Section 7:
    (a) Scratches,
    (b) Surface roughness,
    (c) Dings,
    (d) Straightener marks,
    (e) Cutting chips,
    (f) Steel die stamps,
    (g) Stop marks, or
    (h) Pipe reducer ripple.
99. Mechanical Tests Required
    14.1 Lot—For mechanical testing, a lot is all pipe of the
    same nominal size and wall thickness (or schedule) which is
    produced from the same heat of steel and subjected to the same
    finishing treatment in a continuous furnace; when final heat
    treatment is in a batch-type furnace, the lot shall include only
    that pipe which is heat treated in the same furnace charge.
    14.2 Transverse or Longitudinal Tension Test, Hardness
    Test, and Flattening or Bend Test—For material heat treated in
    a batch-type furnace, tests shall be made on 5 % of the pipe
    from each treated lot. For small lots, at least 1 pipe shall be
    tested. For material heat treated by the continuous process,
    tests shall be made on a sufficient number of pipe to constitute
    5 % of the lot, but in no case less than 2 pipe. Unless otherwise
    specified, the flattening test or bend test shall be chosen at the
    manufacturer’s option.
    14.3 Hardness Test:
    14.3.1 The Vickers hardness testing shall be made in accordance
    with Test Method E92.
    14.3.2 For pipes with wall thickness 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] or
    over, either the Brinell or Rockwell hardness test shall be used.
    When Brinell hardness testing is used, a 10-mm ball with 3000,
    1500, or 500-kg load shall be used at the option of the
    manufacturer.
    TABLE 7 Permitted Variations in Wall Thickness
    NPS [DN] Designator Tolerance, % from Specified
    Over Under
    1/8 to 21/2 [6 to 65] incl., all t/D ratiosA 20.0 12.5
    Above 21/2 [65], t/D # 5 %A 22.5 12.5
    Above 21/2 [65], t/D > 5 %A 15.0 12.5
    A t = Specified Wall Thickness; D = Specified Outside Diameter.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-335/SA-335M
    517
    14.3.3 For pipes with wall thickness 0.065 in. [1.7 mm] or
    over, but less than 0.200 in. [5.1 mm], the Rockwell hardness
    test shall be used.
    14.3.4 For pipes with wall thickness less than 0.065 in. [1.7
    mm], the hardness test shall not be required.
    14.3.5 The Brinell test shall be made, at the option of the
    manufacturer, on the outside of the pipe near the end, on the
    outside of a specimen cut from the pipe, or on the wall cross
    section of a specimen cut from the pipe. This test shall be made
    so that the center of the impression to the edge of the specimen
    is at least 2.5 times the diameter of the impression.
    14.3.6 The Rockwell hardness test shall, at the option of the
    manufacturer, be made on the inside surface, on the wall cross
    section, or on a flat of the outside surface.
    14.3.7 For pipe of Grades P23, P24, P36, P91 Type 1 and
    Type 2, P92, P122 and P911, Brinell, Vickers, or Rockwell
    hardness tests shall be made on a specimen from each lot. For
    pipe of all other grades, a hardness test is not required.
    14.4 Flattening Test:
    14.4.1 The flattening test of Specification A999/A999M
    shall be made on a specimen from one end of the pipe with the
    number of tests as specified in 14.2. Crop ends may be used. If
    a specimen from any length fails because of lack of ductility
    prior to satisfactory completion of the first step of the flattening
    test requirement, that pipe shall be rejected subject to retreatment
    in accordance with Specification A999/A999M and
    satisfactory retest. If a specimen from any length of pipe fails
    because of a lack of soundness that length shall be rejected,
    unless subsequent retesting indicates that the remaining length
    is sound.
    14.5 Bend Test:
    14.5.1 For pipe whose diameter exceeds NPS 25 and whose
    diameter to wall thickness ratio is 7.0 or less shall be subjected
    to the bend test instead of the flattening test. Other pipe whose
    diameter equals or exceeds NPS 10 may be given the bend test
    in place of the flattening test subject to the approval of the
    purchaser.
    14.5.2 The bend test specimens shall be bent at room
    temperature through 180° without cracking on the outside of
    the bent portion. The inside diameter of the bend shall be 1 in.
    [25 mm].
    14.5.3 Test specimens for the bend test shall be cut from one
    end of the pipe with the number of tests as specified in 14.2
    and, unless otherwise specified, shall be taken in a transverse
    direction. One test specimen shall be taken as close to the outer
    surface as possible and another from as close to the inner
    surface as possible. The specimens shall be either 1/2 by 1/2 in.
    [12.5 by 12.5 mm] in section or 1 by 1/2 in. [25 by 12.5 mm] in
    section with the corners rounded to a radius not over 1/16 in.
    [1.6 mm] and need not exceed 6 in. [150 mm] in length. The
    side of the samples placed in tension during the bend shall be
    the side closest to the inner and outer surface of the pipe,
    respectively.
100. Certification
     15.1 Certification and test reports, as described in Section
     25 of Specification A999/A999M, are required.
     15.2 In addition to the information required by Specification
     A999/A999M, the certification shall state whether or not the
     pipe was hydrostatically tested. If the pipe was nondestructively
     examined, the certification shall so state and shall show
     which practice was followed and what reference discontinuities
     were used. In addition, the test method information as given in
     Table 8 shall be appended to the specification number and
     grade shown on the certification.
101. Product Marking
     16.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
     A999/A999M, the marking shall include the length, an additional
     symbol “S”, if the pipe conforms to any of the Supplementary
     Requirements S1 to S6, the schedule number, if the
     pipe is ordered to a schedule number, and the heat number or
     manufacturer’s number by which the heat can be identified.
     Furthermore, the marking designated in Table 8 to indicate the
     test method(s) shall be included. Marking may be by stenciling,
     stamping, or rolling. Pipe that has been weld repaired in
     accordance with 7.6 shall be marked “WR.”
     16.2 P91 shall be additionally marked with the appropriate
     Type.
102. Government Procurement
     17.1 Scale Free Pipe:
     17.1.1 When specified in the contract or order, the following
     requirements shall be considered in the inquiry contract or
     order, for agencies of the U.S. Government where scale free
     TABLE 8 Test Method Information for Certification and Marking
     Ultrasonic Flux Leakage Eddy Current Hydrostatic Marking
     NO NO NO YES TEST PRESSUREA
     YES NO NO NO UT
     NO YES NO NO FL
     NO NO YES NO EC
     YES YES NO NO UT/FL
     YES NO YES NO UT/EC
     NO NO NO NO NH
     YES NO NO YES UT/TEST
     PRESSUREA
     NO YES NO YES FL/TEST
     PRESSUREA
     NO NO YES YES EC/TEST
     PRESSUREA
     ATest pressure is to be in psi [MPa].
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-335/SA-335M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     518
     pipe is required. These requirements shall take precedence if
     there is a conflict between these requirements and the product
     specification.
     17.1.2 The requirements of Specification A999/A999M for
     pipe shall be applicable when pipe is ordered to this specification.
     17.1.3 Pipe shall be one of the following grades as specified
     herein:
     Grade UNS Designation
     P11 K11597
     P22 K21590
     P5 K41545
     17.1.4 Part Number:
     17.1.4.1 Pipe shall be ordered to nominal pipe size and
     schedule specified in ASME B36.10M
     Example: A335/A335M Pipe P-11 NPS 12 Sch 40
     Specification Number ASTM A335/A335M
     Pipe P
     Grade P-11
     NPS 12
     Wall 0.375
     17.1.4.2
     Specification Number ASTM A335/A335M
     Tube T
     Grade P-11
     Outside Diameter 0.250
     Wall 0.035
     17.1.5 Ordering Information—Orders for material under
     this specification shall include the following in addition to the
     requirements of Section 3:
     17.1.5.1 Pipe or tube,
     17.1.5.2 Part number,
     17.1.5.3 Ultrasonic inspection, if required,
     17.1.5.4 If shear wave test is to be conducted in two
     opposite circumferential directions, and
     17.1.5.5 Level of preservation and packing required.
103. Keywords
     18.1 alloy steel pipe; high temperature service; seamless
     steel pipe; steel pipe; temperature service applications
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified in the
     purchase order. The purchaser may specify a different frequency of test or analysis than is provided
     in the supplementary requirement. Subject to agreement between the purchaser and manufacturer,
     retest and retreatment provisions of these supplementary requirements may also be modified.
     S1. Product Analysis
     S1.1 Product analysis shall be made on each length of pipe.
     Individual lengths failing to conform to the chemical composition
     requirements shall be rejected.
     S2. Transverse Tension Tests
     S2.1 A transverse tension test shall be made on a specimen
     from one end or both ends of each pipe NPS 8 and over. If this
     supplementary requirement is specified, the number of tests per
     pipe shall also be specified. If a specimen from any length fails
     to meet the required tensile properties (tensile, yield, and
     elongation), that length shall be rejected subject to retreatment
     in accordance with Specification A999/A999M and satisfactory
     retest.
     S3. Flattening Test
     S3.1 The flattening test of Specification A999/A999M shall
     be made on a specimen from one end or both ends of each pipe.
     Crop ends may be used. If this supplementary requirement is
     specified, the number of tests per pipe shall also be specified.
     If a specimen from any length fails because of lack of ductility
     prior to satisfactory completion of the first step of the flattening
     test requirement, that pipe shall be rejected subject to retreatment
     in accordance with Specification A999/A999M and
     satisfactory retest. If a specimen from any length of pipe fails
     because of a lack of soundness that length shall be rejected,
     unless subsequent retesting indicates that the remaining length
     is sound. The bend test shall be substituted for the flattening
     test for pipe whose diameter exceeds NPS 25 and whose
     diameter to wall thickness ratio is 7.0 or less.
     S4. Metal Structure and Etching Tests
     S4.1 The steel shall be homogeneous as shown by etching
     tests conducted in accordance with the appropriate portions of
     Method E381. Etching tests shall be made on a cross section
     from one end or both ends of each pipe and shall show sound
     and reasonably uniform material free from injurious
     laminations, cracks, and similar objectionable defects. If this
     supplementary requirement is specified, the number of tests per
     pipe required shall also be specified. If a specimen from any
     length shows objectionable defects, the length shall be rejected,
     subject to removal of the defective end and subsequent retests
     indicating the remainder of the length to be sound and
     reasonably uniform material.
     NOTE S4.1—Pending development of etching methods applicable to the
     product covered by this specification, it is recommended that the Recommended
     Practice for a Standard Macro Etch Test for Routine Inspection of
     Iron and Steel, described in the Metals Handbook, Am. Soc. for Metals,
     1948 edition, p. 389, be followed.
     S5. Photomicrographs
     S5.1 When requested by the purchaser and so stated in the
     order, the manufacturer shall furnish one photomicrograph at
     100 diameters from a specimen of pipe in the as-finished
     condition for each individual size and wall thickness from each
     heat, for pipe NPS 3 and over. Such photomicrographs shall be
     suitably identified as to pipe size, wall thickness, and heat. No
     photomicrographs for the individual pieces purchased shall be
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-335/SA-335M
     519
     required except as specified in Supplementary Requirement S6.
     Such photomicrographs are for information only, to show the
     actual metal structure of the pipe as finished.
     S6. Photomicrographs for Individual Pieces
     S6.1 In addition to the photomicrographs required in accordance
     with Supplementary Requirement S5, the purchaser may
     specify that photomicrographs shall be furnished from each
     end of one or more pipes from each lot of pipe NPS 3 and
     larger in the as-finished condition. The purchaser shall state in
     the order the number of pipes to be tested from each lot. When
     photomicrographs are required on each length, the photomicrographs
     from each lot of pipe in the as-finished condition
     which may be required under Supplementary Requirement S5
     may be omitted. All photo-micrographs required shall be
     properly identified as to heat number, size, and wall thickness
     of pipe from which the section was taken. Photomicrographs
     shall be further identified to permit association of each photomicrograph
     with the individual length of pipe it represents.
     S7. Alternative Heat Treatment—Grade P91 Type 1 and
     Type 2
     S7.1 Grade P91 shall be normalized in accordance with
     Table 2 and tempered at a temperature, to be specified by the
     purchaser, less than 1350 °F [730 °C]. It shall be purchaser’s
     responsibility to subsequently temper at 1350–1470 °F
     [730–800 °C] minimum. All mechanical tests shall be made on
     material heat treated in accordance with Table 2. The certification
     shall reference this supplementary requirement indicating
     the tempering temperature applied. The notation “S7” shall
     be included with the required marking of the pipe.
     S8. Melting Practice—Grades P2 and P12
     S8.1 Specific limits, if any, on grain size or deoxidation
     practice shall be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer
     and purchaser.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ð19Þ
     SPECIFICATION FOR ALLOY STEEL FORGINGS FOR
     PRESSURE AND HIGH-TEMPERATURE PARTS
     SA-336/SA-336M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A336/A336M-18.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-336/SA-336M
     521
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-336/SA-336M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     522
     Standard Specification for
     Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature
     Parts
104. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers ferritic steel forgings for
     boilers, pressure vessels, high-temperature parts, and associated
     equipment.
     1.2 Forgings made of steel grades listed in Specification
     A335/A335M, may also be ordered under this specification.
     The chemical, tensile, heat treatment, and marking requirements
     of Specification A335/A335M shall apply, except the
     forging shall conform to the chemical requirements of Tables 1
     and 2 of Specification A335/A335M only with respect to heat
     analysis. On product analysis they may deviate from these
     limits to the extent permitted in Table 1 of this specification.
     1.3 Supplementary Requirements S1 to S9 are provided for
     use when additional testing or inspection is desired. These shall
     apply only when specified individually by the purchaser in the
     order.
     1.4 Unless the order specifies the applicable “M” specification
     designation, the material shall be furnished to the inchpound
     units.
     1.5 Specification A336/A336M formerly included austenitic
     steel forgings, which are now found in Specification A965/
     A965M.
     1.6 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
     each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
     system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
     values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
     with the standard.
     1.7 This international standard was developed in accordance
     with internationally recognized principles on standardization
     established in the Decision on Principles for the
     Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
     issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
     Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
105. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A275/A275M Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination of
     Steel Forgings
     A335/A335M Specification for Seamless Ferritic Alloy-
     Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service
     A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
     of Steel Products
     A788/A788M Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements
     A965/A965M Specification for Steel Forgings, Austenitic,
     for Pressure and High Temperature Parts
     E165/E165M Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for
     General Industry
     2.2 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
     Section III Nuclear Power Plant Components
     Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications
     2.3 AWS Specifications:
     A5.5/A5.5M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal
     Arc Welding
     A5.23/A5.23M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for
     Submerged Arc Welding
     A5.28/A5.28M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Gas
     Shielded Arc Welding
     A5.29/A5.29M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored
     Arc Welding
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-336/SA-336M
     523
     TABLE 1 Tensile Requirements
     Ferritic Steels
     Grade
     F1
     F11,
     Class 2
     F11,
     Class 3
     F11,
     Class 1
     F12 F5 F5A F9 F6 F6NM
     F21,
     Class 3
     F21,
     Class 1
     F22,
     Class 3
     F22,
     Class 1
     F91,
     Type 1
     and
     Type 2
     F911 F92 F3V F3VCb F22V
     Tensile
     strength,
     ksi [MPa]
     70-
     95
     [485-
     660]
     70-
     95
     [485-
     660]
     75-
     100
     [515-
     690]
     60-
     85
     [415-
     585]
     70-
     95
     [485-
     660]
     60-
     85
     [415-
     585]
     80-
     105
     [550-
     725]
     85-
     110
     [585-
     760]
     85-
     110
     [585-
     760]
     115-
     140
     [790-
     965]
     75-
     100
     [515-
     690]
     60-
     85
     [415-
     585]
     75-
     100
     [515-
     690]
     60-
     85
     [415-
     585]
     90-
     110
     [620-
     760]
     90-
     120
     [620-
     830]
     90-
     120
     [620-
     830]
     85-
     110
     [585-
     760]
     85-
     110
     [585-
     760]
     85-
     110
     [585-
     760]
     Yield
     strength,
     min, ksi
     [MPa]
     40
     [275]
     40
     [275]
     45
     [310]
     30
     [205]
     40
     [275]
     36
     [250]
     50
     [345]
     55
     [380]
     55
     [380]
     90
     [620]
     45
     [310]
     30
     [205]
     45
     [310]
     30
     [205]
     60
     [415]
     64
     [440]
     64
     [440]
     60
     [415]
     60
     [415]
     60
     [415]
     Elongation
     in 2 in. or
     50 mm,
     min, %
     20 20 18 20 20 20 19 20 18 15 19 20 19 20 20 20 20 18 18 18
     Reduction
     of area,
     min, %
     40 40 40 45 40 40 35 40 35 45 40 45 40 45 40 40 45 45 45 45
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     SA-336/SA-336M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     524
106. Ordering Information and General Requirements
     3.1 In addition to the ordering information required by
     Specification A788/A788M, the purchaser should include with
     the inquiry and order the following information:
     3.1.1 Adrawing or sketch that shows test locations when the
     testing is in accordance with 8.1.1.3.
     3.1.2 The intended use of forgings if 5.1 is applicable.
     3.2 Material supplied to this specification shall conform to
     the requirements of Specification A788/A788M, which outlines
     additional ordering information, manufacturing
     requirements, testing and retesting methods and procedures,
     marking, certification, product analysis variations, and additional
     supplementary requirements.
     3.3 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
     with the requirements of Specification A788/A788M, the
     requirements of this specification shall prevail.
     3.4 For hubbed flatheads and tube sheets ordered for ASME
     Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code application, Supplementary
     Requirement S12 of Specification A788/A788M shall be
     specified.
     3.5 At the purchaser’s request the forgings shall be rough
     machined before heat treatment (5.2).
     3.6 For Section III, Part NB of the ASME Boiler and
     Pressure Vessel Code application, Supplementary Requirement
     S3 shall be specified.
107. Melting and Forging
     4.1 In addition to the melting and forging requirements of
     Specification A788/A788M, which may be supplemented by
     Supplementary Requirement S8, the following conditions apply:
     4.1.1 A sufficient discard shall be made to secure freedom
     from injurious pipe and undue segregation.
108. Machining
     5.1 Forged pressure vessels for steam power service shall
     have the inner surface machined or ground. Unfired pressure
     vessels shall have the inner surfaces sufficiently free of scale to
     permit inspection.
     5.2 Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, when
     rough machining is performed, it may be done either before or
     after heat treatment at the manufacturer’s option.
109. Heat Treatment
     6.1 Except as permitted in 6.1.1 for Grade F22V, and in
     6.1.2 for Grade F91 Type 1 and Type 2 and Grade F92, the steel
     forgings shall be annealed or normalized and tempered but
     alternatively may be liquid quenched and tempered when
     mutually agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
     purchaser. For all grades, normalizing or liquid quenching shall
     be followed by tempering at a subcritical temperature as shown
     in 6.1.4.
     6.1.1 Grade F22V forgings shall be normalized and tempered
     or liquid quenched and tempered at the manufacturer’s
     option.
     6.1.1.1 For Grade F22V forgings the minimum austenitizing
     temperature shall be 1650 °F [900 °C].
     6.1.2 Grade F91 Type 1 and Type 2 forgings having any
     section thickness greater than 3 in. [75 mm] shall be normalized
     and tempered or liquid quenched and tempered at the
     manufacturer’s option. Grade F92 forgings shall be normalized
     and tempered or liquid quenched and tempered at the manufacturer’s
     option.
     6.1.2.1 For Grade F91 Type 1 and Type 2, F911, and F92
     forgings, the austenitizing temperature shall be in the range of
     1900 to 1975 °F [1040 to 1080 °C].
     6.1.3 For Grade F6NM the austenitizing temperature shall
     be 1850 ºF [1010 ºC] minimum. The tempering temperature
     range shall be as shown in 6.1.4.
     6.1.4 Except for the following grades, the minimum tempering
     temperature shall be 1100 °F [595 °C]:
     Grade Tempering Temperature
     Minimum or Range, °F [°C]
     F6 1150 [620]
     F6NM 1040–1120 [560–600]
     F11, Class 2 1150 [620]
     F11, Class 3 1150 [620]
     F11, Class 1 1150 [620]
     F5, F5a 1250 [675]
     F9 1250 [675]
     F21, Class 1 1250 [675]
     F3V, F3VCb 1250 [675]
     F22, Class 1 1250 [675]
     F22V 1250 [675]
     F91 Type 1 and Type 2, F92 1350–1470 [730–800]
     F911 1365–1435 [740–780]
     F22, Class 3 1250 [675]
110. Chemical Composition
     7.1 Heat Analysis—The heat analysis obtained from sampling
     in accordance with Specification A788/A788M and shall
     comply with Table 2.
     7.2 Product Analysis—The manufacturer shall use the product
     analysis provision of Specification A788/A788M to obtain
     a product analysis from a forging representing each heat or
     multiple heat. The product analysis for columbium and calcium
     for Grade F22V shall conform to the requirements of Table 2
     of this specification. Boron is not subject to product analysis.
     The purchaser may also make this determination in accordance
     with Specification A788/A788M.
111. Mechanical Properties
     8.1 General Requirements—The material shall conform to
     the requirements for mechanical properties prescribed in Table
112. The largest obtainable tension test specimen as specified in
     Test Methods and Definitions A370 shall be used.
     8.1.1 Except as required in 3.4, for annealed, normalized,
     and tempered or quenched and tempered forgings, the longitudinal
     axis of the tension test specimens, and, when required,
     Charpy impact test specimens, shall be parallel to the direction
     of major working of the forging, except when Supplementary
     Requirement S2 is specified. For upset disk forgings, the
     longitudinal axis of the test specimen shall be in the tangential
     direction.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-336/SA-336M
     525
     8.1.1.1 Except as provided for liquid quenched and tempered
     forgings in 8.1.1.3, the longitudinal axis of the specimen
     shall be located midway between the parallel surfaces of the
     test extension if added to the periphery of disks or midway
     between the center and surface of solid forgings. For hollow
     forgings, the longitudinal axis of the specimens shall be located
     midway between the center and outer surfaces of the wall.
     When separately forged test blocks are employed, as defined in
     TABLE 2 Chemical RequirementsA
     Composition, %
     Grade
     Element F1 F11, Classes 2
     and 3
     F11, Class 1 F12 F5B F5AB F9 F6 F6NM
     Carbon 0.20–0.30 0.10–0.20 0.05–0.15 0.10–0.20 0.15 max 0.25 max 0.15 max 0.12 max 0.05 max
     Manganese 0.60–0.80 0.30–0.80 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.80 0.30–0.60 0.60 max 0.30–0.60 1.00 max 0.50–1.00
     Phosphorus,
     max
     0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.020
     Sulfur, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.015
     Silicon 0.20–0.35 0.50–1.00 0.50–1.00 0.10–0.60 0.50 max 0.50 max 0.50–1.00 1.00 max 0.60 max
     Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.50 max 0.50 max . . . 0.50 max 3.5–5.5
     Chromium . . . 1.00–1.50 1.00–1.50 0.80–1.10 4.0–6.0 4.0–6.0 8.0–10.0 11.5–13.5 11.5–14
     Molybdenum 0.40–0.60 0.45–0.65 0.44–0.65 0.45–0.65 0.45–0.65 0.45–0.65 0.90–1.10 . . . 0.50–1.00
     Grade
     Element F21, Classes
     1 and 3
     F22, Classes
     1 and 3
     Carbon 0.05–0.15 0.05–0.15
     Manganese 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60
     Phosphorus,
     max
     0.025 0.025
     Sulfur, max 0.025 0.025
     Silicon 0.50 max 0.50 max
     Nickel . . . . . .
     Chromium 2.7–3.3 2.00–2.50
     Molybdenum 0.80–1.06 0.90–1.10
     Vanadium . . . . . .
     Copper . . . . . .
     Nitrogen . . . . . .
     ColumbiumC . . . . . .
     Element Grade F91
     Type 1
     Grade F91
     Type 2
     Grade F911 Grade F92 F3V F3VCb F22V
     Carbon 0.08–0.12 0.08–0.12 0.09–0.13 0.07–0.13 0.10–0.15 0.10–0.15 0.11–0.15
     Heat Product . . . 0.07–0.13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Manganese 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.50D 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60
     Phosphorus,
     max
     0.025 0.020D 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.015
     Sulfur, max 0.025 0.005D 0.010 0.010 0.020 0.010 0.010
     Silicon 0.20–0.50 0.20–0.40D 0.10–0.50 0.50 0.10 max 0.10 max 0.10 max
     Nickel 0.40 max 0.20 maxD 0.40 max 0.40 . . . 0.25 max 0.25 max
     Chromium 8.0–9.5 8.0–9.5D 8.5–9.5 8.50–9.50 2.7–3.3 2.7–3.3 2.00–2.50
     Molybdenum 0.85–1.05 0.85–1.05 0.90–1.10 0.30–0.60 0.90–1.10 0.90–1.10 0.90–1.10
     Vanadium 0.18–0.25 0.18–0.25 0.18–0.25 0.15–0.25 0.20–0.30 0.20–0.30 0.25–0.35
     Heat Product . . . 0.16–0.27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     ColumbiumC 0.06–0.10 0.06–0.10 0.06–0.10 0.04–0.09 . . . 0.015–0.070 0.07 max
     Nitrogen 0.03–0.07 0.035–0.070D 0.04–0.09 0.030–0.070 . . . . . . . . .
     Aluminum 0.02 maxD 0.02 maxD 0.02 maxD 0.02 . . . . . . . . .
     Boron . . . 0.001 maxD 0.0003–0.006 0.001–0.006 0.001–0.003 . . . 0.0020 max
     N/Al ratio . . . $4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Tungsten . . . 0.05 maxD 0.90–1.10 1.50–2.00 . . . . . . . . .
     Titanium 0.01 maxD 0.01 maxD 0.01 maxD 0.01 0.015–0.035 0.015 max 0.030 max
     Copper . . . 0.10 maxD . . . . . . . . . 0.25 max 0.20 max
     Calcium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0005–0.0150 0.015 maxE
     Zirconium 0.01 maxD 0.01 maxD 0.01 maxD 0.01 . . . . . . . . .
     Tin . . . 0.010 maxD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Antimony . . . 0.003 maxD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Arsenic . . . 0.010 maxD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     A Where ellipses (…) appear in this table, there is no requirement, and the element need neither be analyzed for nor reported.
     B The present Grade F5A (0.25 %, maximum carbon) previous to 1955 was assigned the identification symbol F5. Identification symbol F5 has been assigned to the
     0.15 %, maximum, carbon grade to be consistent with ASTM specifications for other products such as pipe, tubing, bolting, welding, fittings, etc.
     C Columbium (Cb) and Niobium (Nb) are alternate names for Element 41 in the Periodic Table of the Elements.
     D Applies to both heat and product analyses.
     E For Grade F22V, rare earth metals (REM) may be added in place of calcium subject to agreement between the producer and the purchaser. In that case the total amount
     of REM shall be determined and reported.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-336/SA-336M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     526
     8.1.3, the tension test specimens shall be taken from a location
     that represents the midwall of the heaviest section of the
     production forgings. When specimens are required from opposite
     ends, they shall be taken from the diagonal corners of an
     axial plane. Alternatively, and when specified by the purchaser,
     the specimens shall be taken in accordance with Supplementary
     Requirement S3.
     8.1.1.2 For liquid quenched and tempered forgings, the test
     specimens shall have their longitudinal axis at least 1/4 T of the
     maximum heat-treated thickness from any surface and with the
     mid-length of the specimens at least one T from any second
     surface. This is normally referred to as 1/4 T × T, where T is the
     maximum heat-treated thickness. A thermal buffer may be used
     to adhere to the above condition.
     8.1.1.3 For liquid quenched and tempered forgings with
     prior purchaser approval, test specimens may be taken at a
     depth (t) corresponding to the distance from the area of
     significant stress to the nearest heat-treated surface and at least
     twice this distance (2 t) from any second surface. However, the
     test depth shall not be nearer to one heat-treated surface than
     3/4 in. [19 mm] and to the second treated surface than 11/2 in.
     [38 mm]. This method of test specimen location normally
     (known as tx2t testing) applies to thick and complex pressure
     vessel components where the testing in accordance with 8.1.1.2
     is not practical. Sketches showing the proposed exact test
     locations shall be approved by the purchaser when this method
     is used.
     8.1.2 Except as specified in this specification, tests for
     acceptance shall be made after heat treatment has been
     completed in accordance with Section 6. When the ends of the
     cylindrical forgings are closed in by reforging, the cylindrical
     forgings may be normalized and tempered or annealed and
     tested before reforging. After reforging, the entire forging shall
     be re-heat treated in the same manner and at the same
     temperature range as employed when the forging was heat
     treated before certification testing.
     8.1.3 When mutually agreed upon between the manufacturer
     and the purchaser, test specimens may be machined from
     a specially forged block suitably worked and heat treated with
     the production forgings. Such a special block shall be obtained
     from an ingot, slab, or billet from the same heat used to make
     the forgings it represents. This block shall receive essentially
     the same type of hot-working and forging reduction as the
     production forgings; however, a longitudinally forged bar with
     dimensions not less than T × T × 3T may be used to represent
     a ring forging. The dimension T shall be representative of the
     heaviest effective cross section of the forging. For quenched
     and tempered forgings for which tests are required at both ends
     by 8.2.2.3 and 8.2.2.4, separately forged test blocks are not
     allowed.
     NOTE 1—In using separately forged test blocks, attention is drawn to the
     effect of mass differences between the production forgings and the test
     blocks. This can be particularly significant when forgings are either
     normalized and tempered or quenched and tempered.
     8.2 Number and Location of Tests—The number and location
     of tests are based on forging length, weight, and heat
     treatment and shall be as prescribed below. The length and
     weight to be used for this purpose shall be the shipped length
     and weight of forgings produced individually or the aggregate
     shipped length and weight of all pieces cut from a multiple
     forging.
     8.2.1 Annealed or Normalized and Tempered Forgings:
     8.2.1.1 For forgings weighing 5000 lb [2250 kg] or less at
     the time of heat treatment, one tension test shall be taken from
     one forging per heat, per heat treatment charge. When heat
     treatment is performed in continuous type furnaces with
     suitable temperature controls and equipped with recording
     pyrometers so that complete heat treatment records are
     available, a tempering charge may be considered as any
     continuous run not exceeding an 8-h period.
     8.2.1.2 For forgings and forged bars weighing over 5000 lb
     [2250 kg] at the time of heat treatment, one tension test shall be
     taken from each forging.
     8.2.2 Quenched and Tempered Forgings:
     8.2.2.1 For quenched and tempered forgings weighing
     5000 lb [2250 kg] or less at the time of heat treatment, but not
     exceeding 12 ft [3.7 m] in length, one tension test shall be
     taken from one forging per heat, per heat treatment charge.
     When heat treatment is performed in continuous type furnaces
     with suitable temperature controls and equipped with recording
     pyrometers so that complete heat treatment records are
     available, a tempering charge may be considered as any
     continuous run not exceeding an 8-h period.
     8.2.2.2 For quenched and tempered forgings and forged bars
     weighing over 5000 to 10 000 lb [2250 to 4500 kg] at the time
     of heat treatment, but not exceeding 12 ft [3.7 m] in length, one
     tension test shall be taken from each forging.
     8.2.2.3 Quenched and tempered forgings that exceed 12 ft
     [3.7 m] in length shall be tension tested at both ends of the
     forging under test.
     8.2.2.4 For quenched and tempered forgings and forged bars
     weighing more than 10 000 lb [4500 kg] at the time of heat
     treatment, two tension test specimens shall be taken from each
     forging. These shall be offset 180° from each other except that
     if the length of the forging, excluding test prolongations,
     exceeds 12 ft [3.7 m], then one specimen shall be taken from
     each end of the forging.
     8.3 Notch Toughness Requirements–Grades F3V, F3VCb,
     F22V, and F6NM:
     8.3.1 Impact test specimens shall be Charpy V-notch, as
     shown in Test Methods and Definitions A370. The usage of
     subsize specimens due to material limitations must have prior
     purchaser approval.
     8.3.2 The Charpy V-notch test specimens shall be obtained
     as required for tension tests in 8.1 and 8.2. One set of three
     Charpy V-notch specimens shall be taken from each tensile
     specimen location.
     8.3.3 The longitudinal axis and mid-length of impact specimen
     shall be located similarly to the longitudinal axis of the
     tension test specimens. The axis of the notch shall be normal to
     the nearest heat treated surface of the forging.
     8.3.4 The Charpy V-notch tests shall meet a minimum
     energy absorption value of 40 ft·lbf [54 J] average of three
     specimens. One specimen only in one set may be below
     40 ft·lbf [54 J] and it shall meet a minimum value of 35 ft·lbf
     [48 J].
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-336/SA-336M
     527
     8.3.5 The impact test temperature shall be not warmer than
     0 °F [–18 °C].
     8.3.6 Unless Supplementary Requirement S13 of Specification
     A788/A788M is specified by the purchaser, for Grade
     F6NM forgings a minimum average absorbed energy of
     20 ft·lbf [27 J] for each test shall apply at a temperature not
     warmer than –100 ºF [–73 ºC].
113. Ultrasonic Examination
     9.1 For F91 Type 1 and Type 2 and F92 hollow forgings,
     either S20, Ultrasonic Examination, or S22, Ultrasonic Examination
     from the Bore Surface, of Specification A788/A788M,
     shall be mandatory.
114. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
     10.1 When forgings have been heat treated by quenching
     and tempering, all accessible surfaces shall subsequently be
     examined for quench cracks by the magnetic particle method in
     accordance with Practice A275/A275M.
115. Repair Welding
     11.1 Repair welding of forgings may be permitted but only
     at the option of the purchaser. Such repair welds shall be made
     in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
     Code, Section IX.
     11.2 All repair welds in F91 Type 1 and Type 2 shall be
     made with one of the following welding processes and consumables:
     SMAW, SFA 5.5 E90XX-B9; SAW, SFA 5.23 EB9 +
     flux; GTAW, SFA5.28 ER90S-B9; and FCAW5.29 E91T1-B9.
     In addition, the sum of the Ni+Mn content of all welding
     consumables used to fabricate F91 Type 1 and Type 2 forgings
     shall not exceed 1.0 %.
     11.3 All repair welds in F92 shall be made with one of the
     following processes: SMAW, SAW, GTAW, or FCAW; and the
     composition of the welding consumables shall meet the requirements
     for F92 in Table 2.
116. Marking
     12.1 In addition to the marking requirements of Specification
     A788/A788M, the specification marking shall be followed
     by the letter A for annealed, N for normalized and tempered, or
     Q for liquid quenched and tempered as applicable.
     12.2 For F91 additional marking shall include the appropriate
     Type.
117. Test Reports
     13.1 The certification requirements of Specification A788/
     A788M shall apply.
118. Keywords
     14.1 chromium alloy steel; chromium-molybdenum steel;
     martensitic stainless steel; pressure containing parts; pressure
     vessel service; steel forgings—alloy; temperature service
     applications—high
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the
     purchaser in the inquiry, contract, and order. Details of these supplementary requirements shall be
     agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
     S1. Rough Turning and Boring
     S1.1 The position of the rough turning and boring in the
     sequence of manufacturing operations shall be specified.
     S2. Transverse Mechanical Testing
     S2.1 Instead of test specimens taken in accordance with
     8.1.1, the longitudinal axis of the test specimens shall be
     transverse to the direction of major working of the forging. The
     tension test results shall conform with requirements of Table 1,
     with the exception of the ductility limits which shall be as
     prescribed in Table S2.1. When required, the Charpy impact
     test results shall conform to 8.3.
     S3. Alternative Test Specimen Requirements
     S3.1 The test requirements for materials of the ASME
     Boiler and Pressure Code, Section III, Article NB-2223.3, shall
     be used in place of that specified in 8.1.1.1.
     S4. Hydrostatic Test
     S4.1 A hydrostatic pressure test shall be applied. The details
     of the test, including its position in the sequence of manufacturing
     operations, shall be specified.
     S6. Liquid Penetrant Examination
     S6.1 After forgings have been heat treated by quenching
     and tempering, all accessible surfaces shall be inspected for
     quench cracks by the liquid penetrant method in accordance
     with Practice E165/E165M as an alternative to magnetic
     particle examination.
     S7. Marking
     S7.1 Forgings shall be marked at a location indicated by the
     purchaser in the purchase order or drawing.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-336/SA-336M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     528
     TABLE S2.1 Ductility Limits
     Grade
     F1 F11,
     Class 2
     F11,
     Class 3
     F11,
     Class 2
     F12 F5 F5A F9 F6 F6NM F21,
     Class 3
     F21,
     Class 1
     F22,
     Class 3
     F22,
     Class 1
     F3V F46 F22V F91
     Type 1
     and
     Type 2
     F911 F92
     Elongation
     in 2 in. or
     50 mm,
     min, %
     20 18 18 19 18 19 19 18 18 14 18 19 18 20 17 40 17 19 16 16
     Reduction
     of area,
     min, %
     30 35 30 40 25 35 35 35 35 40 35 35 25 35 35 50 35 40 30 30
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-336/SA-336M
     529
     S8. Forging Requirements
     S8.1 Large drum forgings shall be made from solid cast
     ingots, punched, bored, or trepanned, or from hollow ingots
     cast in metal molds. The walls of the hollowed or hollow ingots
     shall be reduced in thickness at least one-half by forging on
     mandrels.
     S8.2 Drum forgings with one solid closed end may be
     hollow forged in closed dies or on a draw bench provided the
     metal is worked thoroughly.
     S8.3 Drum forgings, either with open ends or one solid
     closed end, may also be produced by hot extrusion provided
     the metal is worked thoroughly.
     S8.4 Small drum forgings may be made as solid forgings,
     subsequently bored, provided the purchaser agrees to this
     method of forging. The cross-sectional area of the solid
     forgings shall have a reduction by forging from that of the
     ingot in the ratio of not less than 3:1.
     S8.5 Small sections or component parts of pressure vessels,
     which are to be subsequently assembled to form drums, may be
     made by expanding on a mandrel under a press or hammer, by
     hot extrusion or by ring rolling methods, provided the wall
     thickness is reduced at least one-half in the process.
     S8.6 Heads or covers shall be forged as disks, upset from
     blocks cut from ingots or billets. The length of block before
     upsetting shall be at least twice the thickness of the as-forged
     head or cover.
     S9. Individual Forging
     S9.1 Forgings, whether identical or not identical, shall be
     produced individually. They shall not be forged in multiple and
     separated prior to or after heat treatment.
     S9.2 The shape and size of individual forgings shall be
     agreed between the manufacturer and the purchaser by means
     of a forging drawing or the purchase order.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON AND LOW-ALLOY STEEL
     FORGINGS, REQUIRING NOTCH TOUGHNESS TESTING
     FOR PIPING COMPONENTS
     SA-350/SA-350M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A350/A350M-02b except for the deletion of 6.1.2 and 14.1, revision to 14.2.5, and
     test reports have been made mandatory.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-350/SA-350M
     531
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-350/SA-350M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     532
     SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON AND LOW-ALLOY
     STEEL FORGINGS, REQUIRING NOTCH TOUGHNESS
     TESTING FOR PIPING COMPONENTS
     SA-350/SA-350M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A 350/A 350M-02b except for the deletion of 6.1.2 and 14.1, revision to 14.2.5, and test reports have been
     made mandatory.)
119. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers several grades of carbon
     and low-alloy steel forged or ring-rolled flanges, forged
     fittings and valves intended primarily for low-temperature
     service and requiring notch toughness testing. They are
     made to specified dimensions, or to dimensional standards,
     such as the ASME and API Specifications referenced in
     Section 2. Although this specification covers some piping
     components machined from rolled bar and seamless tubular
     materials (see 5.3.3), it does not cover raw material produced
     in these product forms.
     1.2 No limitation on size is intended beyond the ability
     of the manufacturer to obtain the specified requirements.
     However, Class 3 of Grade LF787 is only available in the
     quenched-and-precipitation heat treated condition.
     1.3 Supplementary requirements are provided for use
     when additional testing or inspection is desired. These shall
     apply only when specified by the purchaser in the order.
     1.4 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound
     units and in SI units. However, unless the order specifies
     the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the
     material shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
     1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
     units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
     text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
     in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
     system must be used independently of the other. Combining
     values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
     with the specification.
     NOTE 1 — Refer to Test Methods and Definitions A 370 for notes on
     significance of notched-bar impact testing.
120. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
     of Steel Products
     A 788 Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements
     A 961 Specification for Common Requirements for Steel
     Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves, and Parts for Piping
     Applications
     2.2 ASME Standards:
     B 16.5 Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
     B 16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt-Welding Fittings
     B 16.10 Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous
     Valves
     B 16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and
     Threaded
     B 16.30 Unfired Pressure Vessel Flange Dimensions
     B 16.34 Valves-Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End
     B 16.47 Large Diameter Steel Flanges
     2.3 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
     Section IX Welding Qualifications
     2.4 AWS Standards:
     A 5.1 Mild Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes
     A 5.5 Low-Alloy Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes
     2.5 API Standards:
     600 Steel Gate Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends
     602 Compact Design Carbon Steel Gate Valves for Refinery
     Use
     605 Large Diameter Carbon Steel Flanges
121. Ordering Information
     3.1 It is the purchaser’s responsibility to specify in
     the purchase order information necessary to purchase the
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-350/SA-350M
     533
     needed material. In addition to the ordering information
     guidelines in Specification A 961, orders should include
     the following information:
     3.1.1 Additional requirements (see Table 1 footnotes).
122. General Requirements
     4.1 Product furnished to this specification shall conform
     to the requirements of Specification A 961, including any
     supplementary requirements that are indicated in the purchase
     order. Failure to comply with the general requirements
     of Specification A 961 constitutes nonconformance
     with this specification. In case of conflict between the
     requirements of this specification and Specification A 961,
     this specification shall prevail.
123. Manufacture
     5.1 Melting Process — The steel shall be produced by
     any of the following primary processes: open-hearth, basic
     oxygen, electric-furnace, or vacuum-induction melting
     (VIM). The primary melting may incorporate separate
     degassing or refining, and may be followed by secondary
     melting using electroslag remelting (ESR), or vacuum-arc
     remelting (VAR).
     5.1.1 The steel shall be fully killed, fine-grain
     practice.
     5.1.2 The molten steel may be vacuum treated prior
     to or during pouring of the ingot.
     5.2 Discard — A sufficient discard shall be made to
     secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation.
     5.3 Forging Process:
     5.3.1 Material for forgings shall consist of ingots, or
     forged, rolled, or strandcast blooms, billets, slabs, or bars.
     5.3.2 The finished product shall be a forging as
     defined in the Terminology section of Specification A 788.
     5.3.3 Except for flanges of all types, hollow, cylindrically-
     shaped parts may be machined from rolled bar or
     seamless tubular materials provided that the axial length
     of the part is approximately parallel to the metal flow lines
     of the stock. Other parts, excluding flanges of all types,
     may be machined from hot-rolled or forged bar up through
     and including NPS 4. Elbows, return bends, tees, and
     header tees shall not be machined directly from bar stock.
     5.4 Heat Treatment:
     5.4.1 After hot working and before reheating for heat
     treatment, the forging shall be allowed to cool substantially
     below the transformation range.
     5.4.2 Forgings of grades other than Grade LF787
     shall be furnished in the normalized, or in the normalized
     and tempered, or in the quenched and tempered condition
     described by the following procedures:
     5.4.2.1 Normalize — Heat to a temperature that
     produces an austenitic structure, holding sufficient time to
     attain uniform temperature throughout. Cool uniformly in
     still air.
     5.4.2.2 Normalize and Temper — Subsequent to
     normalize, reheat to 1100°F [590°C] minimum, holding at
     temperature a minimum of 30 min/in. [30 min/25 mm] of
     maximum thickness, but in no case less than 30 min. Cool
     in still air.
     5.4.2.3 Quench and Temper — The procedure for
     quenching shall consist of either (1) fully austenitizing the
     forgings followed by quenching in a suitable liquid medium
     or (2) using a multiple stage procedure whereby the forging
     is first fully austenitized and rapidly cooled, then reheated
     to partially reaustenitize, followed by quenching in a suitable
     liquid medium. All quenched forgings shall be tempered
     by reheating to a temperature between 1100°F
     [590°C] and the lower transformation temperature, holding
     at temperature a minimum of 30 min/in. [30 min/25 mm]
     of maximum thickness but in no case less than 30 min.
     Cool in still air.
     5.4.3 Grade LF787 forgings shall be furnished in
     either the normalized-and-precipitation heat treated condition
     or in the quenched-and-precipitation heat treated condition.
     The heat treatment procedures shall be as follows:
     5.4.3.1 Normalized-and-Precipitation Heat
     Treated — Heat to a temperature in the range from 1600
     to 1725°F [870 to 940°C], hold at the temperature for a
     time sufficient to attain uniform temperature throughout,
     soak at the temperature for not less than 1/2 h, and remove
     from the furnace and cool in air. Subsequently, heat to a
     temperature in the range from 1000 to 1200°F [540 to
     650°C], soak at the temperature for not less than 1/2 h, and
     cool at any convenient rate.
     5.4.3.2 Quenched-and-Precipitation Heat
     Treated — Heat to a temperature in the range from 1600
     to 1725°F [879 to 940°C], hold at the temperature for a
     time sufficient to attain uniform temperature throughout,
     soak at the temperature for not less than 1/2 h and quench
     in a suitable liquid medium by immersion; reheat to a
     temperature in the range from 1000 to 1225°F [540 to
     665°C], hold at the temperature for not less than 1/2 h, and
     cool at any convenient rate.
124. Chemical Composition
     6.1 Heat Analysis:
     6.1.1 A chemical heat analysis in accordance with
     Specification A 961 shall be made and conform to the
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-350/SA-350M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     534
     requirements as to chemical composition prescribed in
     Table 1. Leaded steels shall not be permitted.
     6.1.2 DELETED
     6.2 Product Analysis:
     6.2.1 The purchaser may make a product analysis
     on products supplied to this specification in accordance
     with Specification A 961.
125. Mechanical Properties
     7.1 Tension Tests:
     7.1.1 Requirements — The material shall conform to
     requirements for tensile properties in Table 2.
     7.1.1.1 The test specimen shall be obtained from
     a rough or finished forging, or prolongation thereof. For
     forgings under 10 000 lbs, at time of heat treatment, it
     may be obtained from separately forged test blanks from
     the same heat of steel as the production forgings. The test
     blank shall be reduced by forging in a manner similar to
     that for the products represented, and shall receive approximately
     the same hot working and reduction and the same
     heat treatment as the finished products represented. The
     test material shall be treated in the same furnace at the
     same time as the forging it represents, subject to the requirements
     of 7.1.2.1.
     7.1.1.2 The test specimen shall represent all forgings
     from the same heat and heat-treatment load whose
     maximum thicknesses do not exceed the thickness of the
     test forging or blank by more than 1/4 in. [6 mm].
     7.1.2 Number of Tests — One tension test at room
     temperature shall be made in accordance with 7.1.1.2 from
     each heat in each heat-treatment load.
     7.1.2.1 If heat treatment is performed in either a
     continuous or a batch-type furnace controlled within ±25°F
     [±14°C] of the required heat-treatment temperature and
     equipped with recording pyrometers so that complete records
     of heat treatment are available and if the same heattreating
     cycles are used on the forgings represented by the
     tension test, then one tension test from each heat shall be
     required, instead of one tension test from each heat in each
     heat treatment load in accordance with 7.1.1.2.
     7.1.3 Test Locations and Orientations — The test
     specimen shall be removed from the heaviest section of
     the forging or test blank, at locations described in 7.1.3.1,
     7.1.3.2, 7.1.3.5 or as close to these locations as practical,
     subject to forging size and geometry.
     7.1.3.1 For forgings or test blanks having a maximum
     heat-treated thickness, T, of 2 in. [50 mm] or less,
     the longitudinal axis of the test specimen shall be taken at
     mid-thickness and its mid-length shall be at least 2 in. [50
     mm] from a second heat treated surface, exclusive of the
     T dimension surfaces. (This is normally referred to as 1/2 T
     by 2 in. [50 mm]).
     7.1.3.2 For forgings or test blanks having a maximum
     heat-treated thickness, T, greater than 2 in. [50 mm],
     the central axis of the test specimen shall be taken at least
     1/4 T from the nearest heat-treated surface and at least T or
     4 in. [100 mm], whichever is less, from any second heattreated
     surface. For quenched and tempered forgings, the
     midlength of the test specimen shall be at least T from any
     second heat-treated surface. See Fig. 1 for test specimen
     location in separately forged test blanks for quenched and
     tempered forgings.
     7.1.3.3 Metal Buffers — The required distances
     from heat treated surfaces may be obtained with metal
     buffers instead of integral expansions. Buffer material may
     be carbon or low alloy steel, and shall be joined to the
     forging with a partial penetration weld that seals the buffered
     surface. Specimens shall be located at 1/2 in. [13 mm]
     minimum from the buffered surface of the forging. Buffers
     shall be removed and the welded areas subjected to magnetic
     particle test to assure freedom from cracks unless
     the welded areas are completely removed by subsequent
     machining.
     7.1.3.4 The test specimen shall have its longitudinal
     axis located parallel to the direction of major working
     of the forging or test blank.
     7.1.3.5 With prior purchaser approval, tests may
     be taken at a depth (t) corresponding to the distance from
     the area of significant loading to the nearest heat treated
     surface and at least twice this distance (2t) from any second
     surface. However, the test depth shall not be nearer to one
     treated surface than 3/4 in. [19 mm] and to the second treated
     surface than 11/2 in. [38 mm]. This method of test location
     would normally apply to contour-forged parts, or parts
     with thick cross-sectional areas where 1/4 T  T testing
     (7.1.3.2) is not practical. Sketches showing the exact test
     locations shall be approved by the purchaser when this
     method is used.
     7.1.4 Test Method — Testing shall be performed in
     accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The
     test specimen shall be as large as is practicable and shall
     be machined to the form and dimensions of Fig. 5 of Test
     Methods and Definitions A 370. When seamless tubular
     materials are used, testing shall be performed on longitudinal
     specimens in accordance with Annex A2, Steel Tubular
     Products, of Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
     7.2 Impact Test:
     7.2.1 Requirements — The material shall conform to
     the requirements for impact properties in Table 3 when
     tested at the applicable standard temperature in Table 4
     within the limits of 7.2.4.2 and 7.2.4.3. When subsize
     specimens are used, the impact energy values obtained
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-350/SA-350M
     535
     shall conform to Table 5 at energy values proportional to
     standard size. Exceptions to this requirement are permissible
     when Supplementary Requirement S1 is specified by
     the purchaser. Impact tests may be made at temperatures
     different from those in Table 4, provided that the test
     temperature is at least as low as the intended service temperature,
     and that the forging is suitably marked to identify
     the reported test temperature.
     7.2.1.1 The test specimens shall be machined from
     material obtained as in 7.1.
     7.2.2 Number of Tests — Three specimens shall constitute
     one test set. There shall be the same number of test
     sets as tension tests in 7.1.2.
     7.2.3 Test Locations and Orientations — The test
     specimen shall be located and oriented as described in
     7.1.3. The area under the notch of the impact test specimen
     shall be used to locate the specimen with respect to the
     second heat-treated surface. The base of the notch shall be
     perpendicular to the nearest heat-treated surface.
     7.2.4 Test Method — The notched bar impact test
     shall be made in accordance with the procedure for the
     Charpy V-notch type test as described in Test Methods
     and Definitions A 370.
     7.2.4.1 Standard size specimens shown in Fig. 11
     of Test Methods and Definitions A 370 shall be used for
     the impact test. Where the material is of insufficient thickness,
     or the shape of the forging precludes standard size,
     the largest obtainable subsize specimen described in Test
     Methods and Definitions A 370 shall be used.
     7.2.4.2 Where subsize specimens are used and
     represent forged material with thicknesses equal to or
     greater than 0.394 in. [10 mm], and where the largest
     obtainable specimen has a width along the notch of at least
     8 mm, such specimen shall be tested at the temperature in
     Table 4. Where the largest obtainable specimen has a width
     along the notch less than 8 mm, the temperature for testing
     shall be lower than the temperature in Table 4 by the
     amount shown in Table 6 for the actual specimen width
     tested.
     7.2.4.3 Where subsize specimens are used and
     represent forged material with thicknesses less than 0.394
     in. [10 mm], and where the largest obtainable specimen
     has a width along the notch of at least 80% of the forging
     thickness, the specimen shall be tested at the temperature
     in Table 4. Where the largest obtainable specimen has a
     width along the notch of less than 80% of the material
     thickness, the temperature for testing shall be lower than
     the temperature in Table 4 by an amount equal to the
     difference (referring to Table 6) between the temperature
     reduction corresponding to the thickness of the material
     represented, and the temperature reduction corresponding
     to the specimen width actually tested.
     7.3 Hardness Test:
     7.3.1 Except when only one forging is produced, a
     minimum of two forgings shall be hardness tested per
     batch or continuous run as defined in 7.1.2.1 to ensure that
     hardness of the forgings does not exceed 197 HB after
     heat treatment for mechanical properties. The hardness
     measurements shall be made in accordance with Test Methods
     and Definitions A 370. When only one forging is
     produced, it shall be hardness tested to ensure that it meets
     the 197 HB maximum of this specification. The purchaser
     may verify that this requirement has been met by testing
     at any location on the forging, provided that such testing
     does not render the forging useless.
126. Hydrostatic Test
     8.1 Forgings manufactured under this specification
     shall be capable of passing a hydrostatic test compatible
     with the rating of the finished item. Such tests shall be
     conducted by the manufacturer only when Supplementary
     Requirement S57 of Specification A 961 is specified.
127. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
     9.1 Forgings shall conform to the requirements of Specification
     A 961.
128. Retests
     10.1 If any test specimen shows flaws or defective
     machining, it may be discarded and another specimen substituted.
129. Rework and Retreatment
     11.1 If the results of the mechanical tests do not conform
     to the requirements specified, the manufacturer may
     reheat treat the forgings represented, and shall retest to the
     applicable requirements.
     11.2 Individually tested forgings meeting all requirements
     shall be acceptable.
     11.3 Repair by Welding—Weld repairs shall be permitted
     (see Supplementary Requirement S58 of Specification
     A 961) at the discretion of the manufacturer with the following
     limitations and requirements:
     11.3.1 Repair by welding shall be made using welding
     procedures and welders qualified in accordance with
     ASME Section IX of the Code. The weld procedure qualification
     test shall also include impact tests of the weld
     metal and heat-affected zone. All impact test specimens
     shall have the longitudinal axis transverse to the weld and
     the base of the notch normal to the weld surface. Weld
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-350/SA-350M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     536
     specimens shall have the notch in weld metal and heataffected
     zone specimens shall have the notch in the heataffected
     zone. The specimens shall be as large as permitted
     by the weldment thickness. Where full-size specimens can
     be obtained and where there is sufficient weldment thickness,
     the weld specimen shall be taken with one side of
     the specimen within 1/16 in. [1.6 mm] of the weld surface.
     Heat-affected zone impact test specimens shall be taken
     at the same depth and locations applicable to the forging
     in 7.1.3.1 and 7.1.3.2. When forgings are thermally treated
     after repair welding, the weld procedure test plate shall be
     subjected to the same thermal treatment. The mechanical
     properties of the weld procedure qualification test shall
     conform to Section 7.
     11.3.2 Defects shall be completely removed by chipping
     or grinding to sound metal as verified by magnetic
     particle, or liquid penetrant inspection prior to welding.
     11.3.3 For Grade LF1 forgings, and LF2 forgings
     that are to be only stress-relieved after repair welding, the
     weld metal shall be deposited using carbon steel electrodes
     E 7015, E 7016, or E 7018, complying with AWS A 5.1.
     For Grade LF2 forgings in all other conditions of postweld
     heat treatment, the weld metal shall be deposited
     using low-alloy steel electrodes E 7015-A1; E 7016-A1,
     or E 7018-A1 complying with AWS 5.5; for Grade LF3
     forgings the weld metal shall be deposited using low-alloy
     steel electrodes E 8016-C2 or E 8018-C2 complying with
     AWS A 5.5; for Grades LF5, LF9, and LF787 forgings,
     the weld metal shall be deposited using low-alloy steel
     electrodes E 8016-C1 or E 8018-C1 complying with AWS
     A 5.5. For Grade LF6, the electrodes shall be low-hydrogen,
     E-XX15, E-XX16, or E-XX18 complying with AWS
     A 5.1 or A 5.5, as applicable.
     11.3.4 After repair welding, the area welded shall
     be completely free of defects as verified by magnetic particle
     or liquid penetrant inspection.
     11.3.5 Forgings repair welded in the normalized,
     normalized and tempered, or the quenched and tempered
     conditions shall be stress-relieved after repair welding at
     1100°F [590°C] minimum, but not higher than the temperature
     previously used for tempering the base metal of the
     same forging, or shall be reheat treated in accordance
     with 5.4.
     11.3.6 When the purchaser specifies Supplementary
     Requirement S5, the same requirements shall apply to the
     weld procedure qualification tests.
     11.3.7 Repair by welding shall not exceed 10% of the
     surface area of the forging or 331/3% of the wall thickness of
     the finished forging, or 3/8 in. [9.5 mm], whichever is less,
     without prior approval of the purchaser.
     11.3.8 When approval of the purchaser is obtained,
     the limitations set forth in 11.3.7 may be exceeded, but all
     other requirements of 11.3 shall apply.
130. Inspection
     12.1 Inspection provisions of Specification A 961 shall
     apply.
131. Rejection and Rehearing
     13.1 Purchaser shall comply with provisions of Specification
     A 961.
132. Certification
     14.1 DELETED
     14.2 Test reports are required, they shall include certification
     that all requirements of this specification have been
     met, and shall be traceable to the forging represented.
     The specification designation included on test reports shall
     include year of issue and revision letter, if any. The manufacturer
     shall provide the following where applicable:
     14.2.1 Type heat treatment, Section 5,
     14.2.2 Chemical analysis results, Section 6 (Table 1),
     14.2.3 Product analysis results, 6.2 (Table 1),
     14.2.4 Tensile property results, Section 7 (Table 2)
     report the yield strength and ultimate strength, in ksi [MPa],
     elongation and reduction in area, in percent,
     14.2.5 Impact test results, 7.2 (Table 3, Table 4,
     Table 5, and Table 6), including specimen size if subsize
     samples were used,
     14.2.6 Hardness results, 7.3.1,
     14.2.7 Any supplementary testing required by the
     purchase order, and
     14.2.8 If repaired by welding, letter W is to follow
     the ASTM designation.
133. Product Marking
     15.1 In addition to the marking requirements of SpecificationA961,
     manufacturer’s name (see Note 2) or symbol
     shall be permanently marked on each forging.
     NOTE 2 — For purposes of identification marking, the manufacturer
     is considered the organization that certifies the piping component was
     manufactured, sampled, and tested in accordance with this specification
     and the results have been determined to meet the requirements of this
     specification.
     15.1.1 If the forgings have been quenched and tempered
     or quenched-and-precipitation heat treated, the letters
     QT shall be stamped on the forgings following the ASTM
     designation.
     15.1.2 Forgings repaired by welding shall be marked
     with the letter W following the ASTM designation.
     15.2 If identification stamps are objectionable and detrimental
     to the forging, and when so stated on the purchase
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-350/SA-350M
     537
     order, the marks may be painted or stenciled on the forging,
     or stamped on a metal or plastic tag which shall be securely
     attached to the forging.
     15.3 When test reports are required, additional marks
     shall be used as necessary to identify the part with the test
     report.
     15.4 If the test temperature is other than the standard
     temperature specified in Table 4, the mark shall also include
     the suffix letter S to the grade and class and the test temperature.
     A prefix 0 to the test temperature shall indicate a less
     than 0°F [-18°C] value. For example, LF2S 0175 denotes
     a test temperature of –175°F [-115°C] for an LF2 part.
     15.5 Parts meeting all requirements for more than one
     class may be marked with more than one class such as
     LF2 CL1/CL2; LF5 CL1/CL2, and so forth.
     15.6 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements in
     15.1, 15.2, 15.3, 15.4, and 15.5, bar coding is acceptable
     as a supplemental identification method. The purchaser
     may specify in the order a specific bar coding system to
     be used. The bar coding system, if applied at the discretion
     of the supplier, should be consistent with one of the published
     industry standards for bar coding. If used on small
     parts, the bar code may be applied to the box or a substantially
     applied tag.
134. Keywords
     16.1 carbon equivalent; pipe fittings, steel; piping applications;
     pressure containing parts; steel flanges; steel forgings,
     alloy; steel forgings, carbon; steel valves; temperature
     service applications, low
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-350/SA-350M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     538
     FIG. 1 TEST SPECIMEN LOCATION FOR QUENCHED AND TEMPERED FORGINGS
     NOTE 1 — For material with thickness T greater than 2 in. [50 mm], T2 pT3 pT4 = Tmax
     where:
     Tmax p maximum heat threated thickness
     TABLE 1
     CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
     Composition, wt. %
     Grade
     Element Grade LF1 Grade LF2 Grade LF3 Grade LF5 Grade LF6 LF9 Grade LF787
     Carbon, max 0.30 0.30 0.20 0.30 0.22 0.20 0.07
     Manganese 0.60–1.35 0.60–1.35 0.90 max 0.60–1.35 1.15–1.50 0.40–1.06 0.40–0.70
     Phosphorus, max 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.025 0.035 0.025
     Sulfur, max 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.025 0.040 0.025
     SiliconA 0.15–0.30 0.15–0.30 0.20–0.35 0.20–0.35 0.15–0.30 . . . 0.40 max
     Nickel 0.40 maxB 0.40 maxB 3.3–3.7 1.0–2.0 0.40 maxB 1.60–2.24 0.70–1.00
     Chromium 0.30 maxB,C 0.30 maxB,C 0.30 maxC 0.30 maxC 0.30 maxB,C 0.30 maxC 0.60–0.90
     Molybdenum 0.12 maxB,C 0.12 maxB,C 0.12 maxC 0.12 maxC 0.12 maxB,C 0.12 maxC 0.15–0.25
     Copper 0.40 maxB 0.40 maxB 0.40 maxC 0.40 maxC 0.40 maxB 0.75–1.25 1.00–1.30
     Columbium 0.02 max 0.02 max 0.02 max 0.02 max 0.02 max 0.02 max 0.02 min
     Vanadium 0.08 max 0.08 max 0.03 max 0.03 max 0.04–0.11 0.03 max 0.03 max
     Nitrogen . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.01–0.030 . . . . . .
     A When vacuum carbon-deoxidation is required by Supplementary Requirement S4, the silicon content shall be 0.12% maximum.
     B The sum of copper, nickel, chromium, vanadium, and molybdenum shall not exceed 1.00% on heat analysis.
     C The sum of chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed 0.32% on heat analysis.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-350/SA-350M
     539
     TABLE 2
     TENSILE PROPERTIES AT ROOM TEMPERATUREA
     Grades
     LF1 and LF2 LF3 Classes LF6 LF787
     LF5 Classes 1 and 2 LF5 Classes
     Class 1 1 and 2 Class 2 Class 1 2 and 3 LF9 Class 2 Class 3
     Tensile strength, ksi [MPa] 60–85 70–95 70–95 66–91 75–100 63–88 65–85 75–95
     [415–585] [485–655] [485–655] [455–630] [515–690] [435–605] [450–585] [515–655]
     Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa]B,C 30 [205] 36 [250] 37.5 [260] 52 [360] 60 [415] 46 [315] 55 [380] 65 [450]
     Elongation:
     Standard round specimen, or small 25 22 22 22 20 25 20 20
     proportional specimen, min % in
     4D gage length
     Strip specimen for wall thickness 5/16 28 30 30 30 28 28 28 28
     in. (7.94 mm) and over and for
     all small sizes tested in full section;
     min % in 2 in. (50 mm)
     Equation for calculating min elon- 48t + 13 48t + 15 48t + 15 48t + 15 48t + 13 48t + 13 48t + 13 48t + 13
     gation for strip specimens thinner
     than 5/16 in. (7.94 mm); min %
     in 2 in. (50 mm)
     t p actual thickness in inches
     Reduction of area, min, % 38 30 35 40 40 38 45 45
     A See 7.3 for hardness tests.
     B Determined by either the 0.2% offset method or the 0.5% extension under load method.
     C For round specimens only.
     TABLE 3
     CHARPY V-NOTCH ENERGY REQUIREMENTS FOR STANDARD
     SIZE [10 by 10 mm] SPECIMENS
     Minimum Impact
     Energy Required for Minimum Impact
     Average of Each Set Energy Permitted for
     of Three Specimens, One Specimen only of
     Grade ft-lbf [J] a Set, ft-lbf [J]
     LF1 and LF9 13 [18] 10 [14]
     LF2, Class 1 15 [20] 12 [16]
     LF3, Class 1 15 [20] 12 [16]
     LF5, Class 1 and 2 15 [20] 12 [16]
     LF787, Classes 2 and 3 15 [20] 12 [16]
     LF6, Class 1 15 [20] 12 [16]
     LF2, Class 2 20 [27] 15 [20]
     LF3, Class 2 20 [27] 15 [20]
     LF6, Classes 2 and 3 20 [27] 15 [20]
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-350/SA-350M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     540
     TABLE 4
     STANDARD IMPACT TEST TEMPERATURE FOR
     STANDARD SIZE [10 by 10 mm] SPECIMENS
     Grade Test Temperature, °F [°C]
     LF1 -20 [-29]
     LF2, Class 1 -50 [-46]
     LF2, Class 2 0 [-18]
     LF3, Classes 1 and 2 -150 [-101]
     LF5, Classes 1 and 2 -75 [-59]
     LF6, Classes 1 and 2 -60 [-51]
     LF6, Class 3 0 [-18]
     LF9 -100 [-73]
     LF787, Class 2 -75 [-59]
     LF787, Class 3 -100 [-73]
     TABLE 5
     MINIMUM EQUIVALENT ABSORBED ENERGY FT-LBF (J) FOR VARIOUS
     SPECIMEN SIZESA
     Standard 3/4 Size 2/3 Size 1/2 Size 1/3 Size 1/4 Size
     Size [10 by [10 by [10 by [10 by [10 by [10 by
     10 mm] 7.5 mm] 6.6 mm] 5 mm] 3.3 mm] 2.5 mm]
     15 [20] 12 [16] 10 [14] 8 [11] 5 [7] 4 [6]
     13 [18] 10 [14] 9 [12] 7 [10] 5 [7] 4 [6]
     12 [16] 10 [14] 9 [12] 7 [10] 4 [6] 3 [5]
     10 [14] 8 [11] 7 [10] 5 [7] 3 [5] 3 [5]
     A Straight-line interpolation for intermediate values is permitted.
     TABLE 6
     CHARPY IMPACT TEST TEMPERATURE REDUCTION BELOW TABLE 5 TEST
     TEMPERATURE WHEN THE SUBSIZE CHARPY IMPACT WIDTH ALONG NOTCH IS
     LESS THAN 80% OF THE FORGING THICKNESS
     Thickness of the Material
     Represented (see 7.2.4.3),
     or Charpy, Impact Temperature
     Specimen Width Along the Reduction,
     Size of Bar NotchA, in. [mm] °F [°C]
     Standard 0.394 [10] 0 [0]
     Standard 0.354 [9] 0 [0]
     Standard 0.315 [8] 0 [0]
     3/4-size 0.295 [7.5] 5 [3]
     3/4-size 0.276 [7] 8 [5]
     2/3-size 0.262 [6.67] 10 [6]
     2/3-size 0.236 [6] 15 [8]
     1/2-size 0.197 [5] 20 [11]
     1/2-size 0.158 [4] 30 [17]
     1/3-size 0.131 [3.33] 35 [20]
     1/3-size 0.118 [3] 40 [22]
     1/4-size 0.099 [2.5] 50 [28]
     A Straight-line interpolation for intermediate values is permitted.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-350/SA-350M
     541
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     In addition to any supplementary requirements of Specification A 961, the following supplementary
     requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the order:
     S1. Other Impact Test Temperatures
     S1.1 Impact test temperatures lower or higher than the
     standard temperature in Table 4 of this specification shall
     be used.
     S1.1.1 When higher test temperatures are employed,
     the actual test temperature may not be higher than that
     given in Table S1.1.1.
     S1.2 The test temperature shall be specified by the
     purchaser. When subsize specimens are used, the manufacturer
     shall adjust the test temperature in accordance with
     the size restrictions of 7.2.4.2 and 7.2.4.3.
     S1.3 The forging shall be marked with the specified test
     temperature in accordance with 15.4. A lower temperature
     shall not be marked on the forging because of the use of
     subsize specimens.
     S1.4 The test results shall comply with Table 3 for
     standard size specimens, and with Table 5 for subsize
     specimens.
     S2. Stress-Relieved Test Specimens
     S2.1 The test specimens shall be stress relieved. Stress
     relieving shall be done after heat treatment in 5.4 and
     before machining the specimens from the heat-treated test
     material.
     S2.2 The purchaser shall furnish the forging manufacturer
     with details of the stress-relief treatment desired.
     S3. Lateral Expansion
     S3.1 Lateral expansion of the Charpy V-notch test in
     accordance with Section 25 of Test Methods and Definitions
     A 370 shall be measured and reported.
     S4. Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steels
     S4.1 Material made to Grades LF1, LF2, LF3, LF5,
     and LF9 shall be vacuum carbon-deoxidized, in which case
     the silicon content shall be 0.12% maximum. The test
     report shall indicate that the steel was vacuum carbondeoxidized.
     S5. Special Impact Test Requirements for Flanges
     (Note S5.1)
     S5.1 Charpy test specimens shall be cut from an actual
     flange representing each size, heat, and heat-treatment lot.
     If more than one size flange is represented by the same
     heat and heat-treatment lot, the maximum size flange shall
     be considered representative.
     S5.2 The number, location, and orientation of the test
     specimens shall be stated on the order.
     S5.3 The test results shall comply with Table 3 for
     standard size specimens, and with Table 5 for subsize
     specimens.
     NOTE S5.1 — These special requirements should be considered for
     services when the applied stresses approach the maximum permissible
     limits of the governing code, or the installation is subject to severe cyclic
     conditions (7000 or more cycles over the expected life of the installation),
     or both.
     S6. Carbon Equivalent
     S6.1 The maximum carbon equivalent based on heat
     analysis shall be as shown in Table S6.1.
     S6.2 Determine the carbon equivalent (CE) as follows:
     CE p C + Mn/6 + (Cr + Mo + V)/5 + (Ni + Cu)/15
     S6.3 A lower maximum carbon equivalent may be
     agreed upon between the supplier and the purchaser.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-350/SA-350M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     542
     TABLE S1.1.1
     MAXIMUM SUPPLEMENTAL TEST
     TEMPERATURES
     Grade Maximum Test Temperature, °F (°C)
     LF1 -10 [-23]
     LF2, Class 1 -35 [-37]
     LF3, Classes 1 and 2 -125 [-87]
     LF5, Classes 1 and 2 -60 [-51]
     LF6, Classes 1 and 2 -40 [-40]
     LF9 -80 [-62]
     LF787, Class 2 -60 [-51]
     LF787, Class 3 -80 [-62]
     LF2, Class 2 +10 [-12]
     LF6, Class 3 +10 [-12]
     TABLE S6.1
     MAXIMUM CARBON EQUIVALENT VALUE
     Max. Thickness Less Max. Thickness
     Grade Than or Equal to 2 in. Greater Than 2 in.
     LF1 0.45 0.46
     LF2 CL1 and CL2 0.47 0.48
     LF6 CL1 0.45 0.46
     LF6 CL2 0.47 0.48
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR CASTINGS, AUSTENITIC,
     AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC (DUPLEX), FOR
     PRESSURE-CONTAINING PARTS
     SA-351/SA-351M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A351/A351M-00.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-351/SA-351M
     543
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-351/SA-351M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     544
     SPECIFICATION FOR CASTINGS, AUSTENITIC,
     AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC (DUPLEX), FOR
     PRESSURE-CONTAINING PARTS
     SA-351/SA-351M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A 351/A 351M-00.)
135. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers austenitic and austeniticferritic
     (duplex) steel castings for valves, flanges, fittings,
     and other pressure-containing parts (Note 1).
     NOTE 1—Carbon steel castings for pressure-containing parts are covered
     by Specification A 216/A 216M, and low-alloy steel castings by Specification
     A 217/A 217M.
     1.2 A number of grades of austenitic and austeniticferritic
     steel castings are included in this specification.
     Since these grades possess varying degrees of suitability
     for service at high temperatures or in corrosive environments,
     it is the responsibility of the purchaser to determine
     which grade shall be furnished. Selection will depend on
     design and service conditions, mechanical properties, and
     high-temperature or corrosion-resistant characteristics, or
     both.
     1.2.1 Because of thermal instability, Grades CE20N,
     CF3A, CF3MA, and CF8A are not recommended for service
     at temperatures above 800°F [425°C].
     1.2.2 Because of embrittlement phases, Grade
     CD4MCu is not recommended for service at temperatures
     above 600°F [316°C].
     1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
     units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
     text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
     in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
     system must be used independently of the other. Combining
     values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
     with the specification.
136. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A 216/A 216M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon,
     Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature
     Service
     A 217/A 217M Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic
     Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing Parts,
     Suitable for High-Temperature Service
     A488/A 488M Practice for Steel Castings, Welding, Qualification
     of Procedures and Personnel
     A 703/A 703M Specification for Steel Castings, General
     Requirements, for Pressure-Containing Parts
     E 165 Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination
     E 709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination
     2.2 Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve
     and Fittings Industry Standard:
     SP-55 Quality Standard for Steel Castings for Valves,
     Flanges, and Fittings and Other Components (Visual
     Method)
137. General Conditions for Delivery
     3.1 Material furnished to this specification shall conform
     to the requirements of Specification A 703/A 703M,
     including any supplementary requirements that are indicated
     in the purchase order. Failure to comply with the
     general requirements of Specification A 703/A 703M constitutes
     nonconformance with this specification. In case of
     conflict between the requirements of this specification and
     Specification A 703/A 703M, this specification shall
     prevail.
     3.2 The post weld heat treatment requirements of Supplementary
     Requirement S11 may be specified when austenitic
     castings other than HK, HT, or CT15C are to be
     subjected to severe corrosive service.
138. Ordering Information
     4.1 The inquiry and order should include or indicate
     the following:
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-351/SA-351M
     545
     4.1.1 A description of the casting by pattern number
     or drawing (dimensional tolerances shall be included on
     the casting drawing).
     4.1.2 Grade of steel,
     4.1.3 Options in the specification, and
     4.1.4 Supplementary requirements desired, including
     the standards of acceptance.
139. Process
     5.1 The steel shall be made by the electric furnace
     process with or without separate refining such as argonoxygen
     decarburization (AOD).
140. Heat Treatment
     6.1 All castings shall receive a heat treatment at the
     temperature specified in Table 1, followed by a quench in
     water or rapid cool by other means except as noted.
     NOTE 2 — Proper heat treatment of these alloys is usually necessary
     to enhance corrosion resistance and in some cases to meet mechanical
     properties. Minimum heat-treat temperatures are specified; however, it
     is sometimes necessary to heat-treat at higher temperatures, hold for some
     minimum time at temperature and then rapidly cool the castings in order
     to enhance the corrosion resistance and meet mechanical properties.
141. Chemical Composition
     7.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
     chemical composition prescribed in Table 2.
142. Tensile Properties
     8.1 Steel used for the castings shall conform to the
     requirements as to tensile properties prescribed in Table 3.
143. Quality
     9.1 The surface of the casting shall be examined visually
     and shall be free of adhering sand, scale, cracks, and
     hot tears. Other surface discontinuities shall meet the visual
     acceptance standards specified in the order. Visual Method
     SP 55 or other visual standards may be used to define
     acceptable surface discontinuities and finish. Unacceptable
     visual surface discontinuities shall be removed and their
     removal verified by visual examination of the resultant
     cavities.
     9.2 When additional inspection is desired, Supplementary
     Requirements S5, S6, and S10 may be ordered.
     9.3 The castings shall not be peened, plugged, or
     impregnated to stop leaks.
144. Repair by Welding
     10.1 Repairs shall be made using procedures and welders
     qualified under Practice A 488/A 488M.
     10.2 Weld repairs shall be inspected to the same quality
     standards that are used to inspect the castings. When castings
     are produced with Supplementary Requirement S5
     specified, weld repairs on castings that have leaked on
     hydrostatic test, or on castings in which the depth of any
     cavity prepared for repair welding exceeds 20% of the wall
     thickness or 1 in. [25 mm], whichever is smaller, or on
     castings in which any cavity prepared for welding is greater
     than approximately 10 in.2 [65 cm2], shall be radiographed
     to the same standards that are used to inspect the castings.
     When castings are produced with Supplementary Requirement
     S6 specified, weld repairs shall be inspected by liquid
     penetrant examination to the same standards that are used
     to inspect the castings.
     NOTE 3 — When austenitic steel castings are to be used in services
     where they will be subject to stress corrosion, the purchaser should so
     indicate in his order and such castings should be solution-heat treated
     following all weld repairs.
145. Keywords
     11.1 austenitic stainless steel; duplex stainless steel;
     pressure containing parts; stainless steel; steel castings
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-351/SA-351M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     546
     TABLE 1
     HEAT-TREATMENT REQUIREMENTS
     Temperature, min
     Grade °F °C
     HK30, HK40, HT30, CT15C as-cast as-cast
     CF3, CF3A, CF8, CF8A, CF3M, 1900 1040
     CF3MA, CF8M, CF3MN, CG3M, CF10,
     CF10M, CG8M, CD4MCu
     CF10SMnN, CF8C, CF10MC 1950 1065
     CD3MWCuN 2010 1100
     CN7M, CG6MMN, CE8MN 2050 1120
     CK3MCuN, CN3MN, CH8, CH10,
     CH20, CK20 2100 1150
     CE20NA 2225 1220
     A Grade shall be quenched in water or the castings may be furnace
     cooled to 2050°F [1120°C] minimum, held for 15 min minimum
     and then quenched in water or rapidly cooled by other means.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-351/SA-351M
     547
     TABLE 2
     CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
     Element, %
     (max, except
     where range
     is given)
     CF3,
     CF3A
     CF8,
     CF8A
     CF3M,
     CF3MA CF8M CF3MN CF8C CF10
     CF10M
     (J92901) CH8 CH10 CH20 CK20 HK30 HK40
     Carbon 0.03 0.08 0.03 0.08 0.03 0.08 0.04–0.10 0.04–0.10 0.08 0.04–0.10 0.04–0.20 0.04–0.20 0.25–0.35 0.35–0.45
     Manganese 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
     Silicon 2.00 2.00 1.50 1.50 1.50 2.00 2.00 1.50 1.50 2.00 2.00 1.75 1.75 1.75
     Sulfur 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040
     Phosphorus 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040
     Chromium 17.0–21.0 18.0–21.0 17.0–21.0 18.0–21.0 17.0–21.0 18.0–21.0 18.0–21.0 18.0–21.0 22.0–26.0 22.0–26.0 22.0–26.0 23.0–27.0 23.0–27.0 23.0–27.0
     Nickel 8.0–12.0 8.0–11.0 9.0–13.0 9.0–12.0 9.0–13.0 9.0–12.0 8.0–11.0 9.0–12.0 12.0–15.0 12.0–15.0 12.0–15.0 19.0–22.0 19.0–22.0 19.0–22.0
     Molybdenum 0.50 0.50 2.0–3.0 2.0–3.0 2.0–3.0 0.50 0.50 2.0–3.0 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
     Columbium
     (Niobium)
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Vanadium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Nitrogen . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.10–0.20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Copper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Tungsten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Iron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Note 1 — Tungsten is a new element for Table 2.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     SA-351/SA-351M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     548
     TABLE 2
     CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D)
     Element, %
     (max, except
     where range
     is given) HT30 CF10MC CN7M CN3MN CD4MCu CE8MN CG6MMN CG8M
     CF10SMnN
     CT15C CK3MCuN CE20N
     CG3M
     (J92999)
     CD3MWCuNA
     Carbon 0.25–0.35 0.10 0.07 0.03 max 0.04 0.08 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.05–0.15 0.025 0.20 0.03 0.03
     Manganese 2.00 1.50 1.50 2.00 max 1.00 1.00 4.00–6.00 1.50 7.00–9.00 0.15–1.50 1.20 1.50 1.50 1.00
     Silicon 2.50 1.50 1.50 1.00 max 1.00 1.50 1.00 1.50 3.50–4.50 0.50–1.50 1.00 1.50 1.50 1.00
     Sulfur 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.010 max 0.04 0.040 0.030 0.04 0.030 0.03 0.010 0.040 0.04 0.025
     Phosphorus 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 max 0.04 0.040 0.040 0.04 0.060 0.03 0.045 0.040 0.04 0.030
     Chromium 13.0–17.0 15.0–18.0 19.0–22.0 20.0–22.0 24.5–26.5 22.5–25.5 20.50–23.50 18.0–21.0 16.0–18.0 19.0–21.0 19.5–20.5 23.0–26.0 18.0–21.0 24.0–26.0
     Nickel 33.0–37.0 13.0–16.0 27.5–30.5 23.5–25.5 4.75–6.00 8.0–11.0 11.50–13.50 9.0–13.0 8.0–9.0 31.0–34.0 17.5–19.5 8.0–11.0 9.0–13.0 6.5–8.5
     Molybdenum 0.50 1.75–2.25 2.0–3.0 6.0–7.0 1.75–2.25 3.0–4.5 1.50–3.00 3.0–4.0 . . . . . . 6.0–7.0 0.50 3.0–4.0 3.0–4.0
     Columbium
     (Niobium)
     . . . C . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.10–0.30 . . . . . . 0.50–1.50 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Vanadium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.10–0.30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Nitrogen . . . . . . . . . 0.18–0.26 . . . 0.10–0.30 0.20–0.40 . . . 0.08–0.18 . . . 0.18–0.24 0.08–0.20 . . . 0.20–0.30
     Copper . . . . . . 3.0–4.0 0.75 max 2.75–3.25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.50–1.00 . . . . . . 0.5–1.0
     Tungsten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5–1.0
     Iron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bal . . . . . .
     Note 1 — Tungsten is a new element for Table 2.
     A % Cr + 3.3% Mo + 16% N = 40.
     B Grade CF8C shall have a columbium content of not less than 8 times the carbon content but not over 1.00%.
     C Grade CF10MC shall have a columbium content of not less than 10 times the carbon content but not over 1.20%.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-351/SA-351M
     549
     TABLE 3
     TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
     CF3 CF3A CF8 CF8A CF3M CF3MA CF8M CF3MN CF8C CF10
     CF10M
     (J92901) CH8 CH10 CH20 CK20 HK30
     Tensile strength,
     min, ksi [MPa]
     70 [485] 77 [530] 70 [485] 77 [530] 70 [485] 80 [550] 70 [485] 75 [515] 70 [485] 70 [485] 70 [485] 65 [450] 70 [485] 70 [485] 65 [450] 65 [450]
     Yield Strength,A
     min, ksi [MPa]
     30 [205] 35 [240] 30 [205] 35 [240] 30 [205] 37 [255] 30 [205] 37 [255] 30 [205] 30 [205] 30 [205] 28 [195] 30 [205] 30 [205] 28 [195] 35 [240]
     Elongation in 2
     in. or 50
     mm,B min, %
     35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 35.0 30.0 35.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 10.0
     Reduction of
     area, min, %
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     HK40 HT30 CF10MC CN7M CN3MN CD4MCu CE8MN CG6MMN CG8M CF10SMnN CT15C CK3MCuN CE20N
     CG3M
     (J92999) CD3MWCuN
     Tensile strength,
     min, ksi [MPa]
     62 [425] 65 [450] 70 [485] 62 [425] 80 [550] 100 [690] 95 [655] 85 [585] 75 [515] 85 [585] 63 [435] 80 [550] 80 [550] 75 [515] 100 [700]
     Yield Strength,A
     min, ksi [MPa]
     35 [240] 28 [195] 30 [205] 25 [170] 38 [260] 70 [485] 65 [450] 42.5 [295] 35 [240] 42.5 [295] 25 [170] 38 [260] 40 [275] 35 [240] 65 [450]
     Elongation in 2
     in. or 50
     mm,B min, %
     10.0 15.0 20.0 35.0 35.0 16.0 25.0 30.0 25.0 30.0 20.0 35.0 30.0 25.0 25.0
     Reduction of
     area, min, %
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     A Determine by the 0.2% offset method.
     B When ICI test bars are used in tensile testing as provided for in Specification A 703/A 703M, the gage length to reduced section diameter ratio shall be 4 to 1.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     SA-351/SA-351M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     550
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     The following supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified in the purchase
     order. A list of standardized supplementary requirements for use at the option of the
     purchaser is included in SpecificationA 703/A 703M. Those which are ordinarily considered
     suitable for use with this specification are given below. Others enumerated in Specification
     A 703/A 703M may be used with this specification upon agreement between the manufacturer
     and purchaser.
     S2. Destruction Tests
     S5. Radiographic Inspection
     S6. Liquid Penetrant Inspection
     S10. Examination of Weld Preparation
     S10.1 The method of performing the magnetic particle
     or liquid penetrant test shall be in accordance with Practice
     E 165 or Practice E 709.
     S11. Post Weld Heat Treatment
     S11.1 All austenitic castings, except Grades HK, HT,
     and CT15C, which have been subjected to weld repairs,
     shall be given a post weld solution heat treatment.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS, FERRITIC AND
     MARTENSITIC, FOR PRESSURE-CONTAINING PARTS,
     SUITABLE FOR LOW-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
     SA-352/SA-352M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A352/A352M-06 (R12).)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-352/SA-352M
     551
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-352/SA-352M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     552
     Standard Specification for
     Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure-
     Containing Parts, Suitable for Low-Temperature Service
146. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers steel castings for valves,
     flanges, fittings, and other pressure-containing parts intended
     primarily for low-temperature service.
     1.2 Several grades of ferritic steels and one grade of
     martensitic steel are covered. Selection of analysis will depend
     on design and service conditions (Note). The temperature
     shown is the lowest temperature at which the material ordinarily
     is required to meet the impact requirements of this
     specification (see Supplementary Requirement S22, Impact
     Test Temperatures). Users should note that hardenability of
     some of the grades mentioned may restrict the maximum size
     at which the required mechanical properties are obtainable (see
     Appendix X1).
     Grade Usual Minimum Testing
     Temperatures, °F [°C]
     LCA -25 [–32]
     LCB -50 [–46]
     LCC -50 [–46]
     LC1 -75 [–59]
     LC2 -100 [–73]
     LC2–1 -100 [–73]
     LC3 -150 [–101]
     LC4 -175 [–115]
     LC9 -320 [–196]
     CA6NM -100 [-73]
     NOTE 1—This specification covers the low-temperature requirements
     particularly pertinent for ferritic and martensitic steels. Certain of the
     grades of austenitic steel castings furnished in accordance with Specification
     A351/A351M have been found suitable for low-temperature service
     down to -300°F [-184°C] and others down to -425°F [-254°C]. These
     grades may be used when impact tested in accordance with Specification
     A352/A352M with energy levels and temperatures of test mutually agreed
     upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer. As a guide to the
     selection of energy levels and testing temperatures, Appendix X1 should
     be consulted.
     1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
     SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
     system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must
     be used independently of the other. Combining values from the
     two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification.
     Inch-pound units are applicable for material ordered to
     Specification A352 and SI units for material ordered to
     Specification A352M.
147. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A351/A351M Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for
     Pressure-Containing Parts
     A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
     of Steel Products
     A488/A488M Practice for Steel Castings, Welding, Qualifications
     of Procedures and Personnel
     A703/A703M Specification for Steel Castings, General Requirements,
     for Pressure-Containing Parts
     E165 Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General
     Industry
     E709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing
     2.2 Manufacturers’ Standardization Society of the Valve and
     Fittings Industry Standard:
     SP-55 Quality Standard for Steel Castings for Valves,
     Flanges, and Fittings and Other Piping Components (Visual
     Method)
148. General Conditions for Delivery
     3.1 Material furnished to this specification shall conform to
     the requirements of Specification A703/A703M including any
     supplementary requirements that are indicated in the purchase
     order. Failure to comply with the general requirements of
     Specification A703/A703M constitutes nonconformance with
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-352/SA-352M
     553
     this specification. In case of conflict between the requirements
     of this specification and Specification A703/A703M, this
     specification shall prevail.
149. Ordering Information
     4.1 The inquiry and order should include or indicate the
     following:
     4.1.1 A description of the casting by pattern number or
     drawing (dimensional tolerances shall be included on the
     casting drawing),
     4.1.2 Grade of steel,
     4.1.3 Options in the specification, and
     4.1.4 The supplementary requirements desired, including
     the standards of acceptance.
150. Heat Treatment
     5.1 All castings shall receive a heat treatment proper to their
     design and chemical composition. It should be recognized that
     liquid quenching of the ferritic grades is normally required to
     meet the mechanical properties of heavier sections and will
     greatly enhance the low-temperature properties of thinner
     sections.
     5.2 Ferritic castings shall be furnished in the normalized and
     tempered or liquid-quenched and tempered condition, except
     for Grade LC9, which shall be liquid-quenched and tempered.
     Castings shall be tempered at a minimum of 1100°F [590°C],
     except Grade LC4, which shall be 1050°F [565°C], and Grade
     LC9, which shall be tempered in the range of 1050 to 1175°F
     [565 to 635°C], followed by cooling in air or liquid.
     5.3 CA6NM castings shall be heat-treated by heating to
     1850°F [1010°C] minimum, and air cooling to 200°F [95°C]
     maximum before any optional intermediate temper, but shall
     cool to 100°F [40°C] maximum before the final temper, which
     shall be between 1050 and 1150°F [565 and 620°C].
     5.4 Castings shall be allowed to cool below the transformation
     range directly after pouring and solidification before they
     are reheated for normalizing or liquid quenching.
     5.5 Temperature Control—Furnace temperature for heat
     treating shall be controlled by use of pyrometers.
151. Chemical Composition
     6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
     chemical composition for the grade ordered as specified in
     Table 1.
152. Mechanical Requirements
     7.1 Tension Test:
     7.1.1 Tensile properties of steel used for the castings shall
     conform to the requirements specified in Table 1.
     7.2 Impact Test:
     7.2.1 The notched bar impact properties of the material shall
     be determined by testing a set of three Charpy V-notch impact
     specimens for each heat at one of the standard test temperatures
     shown in Table 1, depending on the intended service temperature
     (see Appendix X1). The average energy value of the three
     specimens shall not be less than specified, with not more than
     one value permitted below the average minimum specified and
     no value permitted below the minimum specified for a single
     specimen.
     7.2.2 The notched bar impact test shall be made in accordance
     with Test Methods and Definitions A370.
     7.2.3 Impact test specimens shall be machined to the form
     and dimensions shown in Test Methods and Definitions A370,
     Fig. 11.
153. Quality
     8.1 The surface of the casting shall be examined visually
     and shall be free of adhering sand, scale, cracks, and hot tears.
     Other surface discontinuities shall meet the visual acceptance
     standards specified in the order. Visual Method SP-55 or other
     visual standards may be used to define acceptable surface
     discontinuities and finish. Unacceptable visual surface discontinuities
     shall be removed and their removal verified by visual
     examination of the resultant cavities. When methods involving
     high temperature are used in the removal of discontinuities,
     castings shall be preheated to at least the minimum temperatures
     in Table 2.
     8.2 When additional inspection is desired, Supplementary
     Requirements S4, S5, and S10, may be ordered.
     8.3 The castings shall not be peened, plugged, or impregnated
     to stop leaks.
154. Repair by Welding
     9.1 Repairs shall be made using procedures and welders in
     accordance with Practice A488/A488M.
     9.2 Welding of Grade LC9 shall be accomplished using
     nonmagnetic filler material of AWS classification ENiCrFe-2,
     and shall require liquid penetrant inspection of the weld
     (Supplementary Requirement S6) when magnetic particle inspection
     (Supplementary Requirement S4) is specified for the
     casting.
     9.3 Weld repairs shall be inspected to the same quality
     standards that are used to inspect the castings. When castings
     are produced with Supplementary Requirement S4 specified,
     weld repairs shall be inspected by magnetic particle examination
     to the same standards that are used to inspect the castings.
     When castings are produced with Supplementary Requirement
     S5 specified, weld repairs on castings that have leaked on
     hydrostatic tests, or on castings in which the depth of any
     cavity prepared for repair welding exceeds 20 % of the wall
     thickness or 1 in. [25 mm] whichever is smaller, or on castings
     in which any cavity prepared for welding is greater than
     approximately 10 in.2 [65 cm 2shall be radiographed to the
     same standards that are used to inspect the castings.
     9.4 Castings containing any repair weld that exceeds 20 %
     of the wall thickness, or 1 in. [25 mm], whichever is smaller,
     or that exceeds approximately 10 in.2 [65 cm2 ] in area, or that
     was made to correct hydrostatic test defects shall be stress
     relieved or heat treated after welding. This mandatory stress
     relief or heat treatment shall be in accordance with the
     procedure qualification used. When stress relief is required for
     Grade LC9, cooling shall be in still air.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-352/SA-352M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     554
155. Product Marking
     10.1 All marking shall be on a raised pad using low-stress
     stamps.
     10.2 In addition to the marking required by Specification
     A703/A703M, castings that have been liquid quenched and
     tempered shall be marked with the letters “QT”.
     TABLE 1 Chemical, Tensile, and Impact Requirements
     Type Carbon
     Steel
     Carbon
     Steel
     Carbon-
     Manganese
     Steel
     Carbon-
     Molybdenum
     Steel
     21/2 %
     Nickel
     Steel
     Nickel-
     Chromium-
     Molybdenum
     Steel
     31/2 %
     Nickel
     Steel
     41/2 %
     Nickel
     Steel
     9 %
     Nickel
     Steel
     121/2 %
     Chromium,
     Nickel-
     Molybdenum
     Steel
     Grade LCA LCBA LCC LC1 LC2 LC2-1 LC3 LC4 LC9 CA6NM
     UNS Number J02504 J03003 J02505 J12522 J22500 J42215 J31550 J41500 J31300 J91540
     Element, % (max, except where range is given)
     Carbon 0.25A 0.30 0.25A 0.25 0.25 0.22 0.15 0.15 0.13 0.06
     Silicon 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.50 0.60 0.60 0.45 1.00
     Manganese 0.70A 1.00 1.20A 0.50-0.80 0.50-0.80 0.55-0.75 0.50-0.80 0.50-0.80 0.90 1.00
     Phosphorus 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
     Sulfur 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.03
     Nickel 0.50B 0.50B 0.50B . . . 2.00-3.00 2.50-3.50 3.00-4.00 4.00-5.00 8.50-10.0 3.5-4.5
     Chromium 0.50B 0.50B 0.50B . . . . . . 1.35-1.85 . . . . . . 0.50 11.5-14.0
     Molybdenum 0.20 0.20B 0.20B 0.45-0.65 . . . 0.30-0.60 . . . . . . 0.20 0. 4-1.0
     Copper 0.30 0.30B 0.30B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.30 . . .
     Vanadium 0.03B 0.03B 0.03B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.03 . . .
     Tensile
     Requirements:C
     Tensile strength,
     ksi [MPa]
     60.0-85.0
     [415-585]
     65.0-90.0
     [450-620]
     70.0-95.0
     [485-655]
     65.0-90.0
     [450-620]
     70.0-95.0
     [485-655]
     105.0-130.0
     [725-895]
     70.0-95.0
     [485-655]
     70.0-95.0
     [485-655]
     85.0
     [585]
     110.0-135.0
     [760-930]
     Yield strength,D
     min, ksi [MPa]
     30.0 [205] 35.0 [240] 40.0 [275] 35.0 [240] 40.0 [275] 80.0 [550] 40.0 [275] 40.0 [275] 75.0 [515] 80.0 [550]
     Elongation in 2 in.
     or 50 mm,
     min, %E
     24 24 22 24 24 18 24 24 20 15
     Reduction of area,
     min, %
     35 35 35 35 35 30 35 35 30 35
     Impact Requirements
     Charpy VNotchC,
     F
     Energy value, ft·lbf
     [J], min value for
     two specimens
     and min avg of
     three
     specimens
     13 [18] 13 [18] 15 [20] 13 [18] 15 [20] 30 [41] 15 [20] 15 [20] 20 [27] 20 [27]
     Energy value, ft·lbf
     [J], min for single
     specimen
     10 [14] 10 [14] 12 [16] 10 [14] 12 [16] 25 [34] 12 [16] 12 [16] 15 [20] 15 [20]
     Testing temperature,
     °F [°C]
     -25 [-32] -50 [-46] -50 [-46] -75 [-59] -100 [-73] -100 [-73] -150
     [-101]
     -175
     [-115]
     -320
     [-196]
     -100 [-73]
     A For each reduction of 0.01 % below the specified maximum carbon content, an increase of 0.04 % manganese above the specified maximum will be permitted up to
     a maximum of 1.10 % for LCA, 1.28 % for LCB, and 1.40 % for LCC.
     B Specified Residual Elements—The total content of these elements is 1.00 % maximum.
     C See1.2.
     D Determine by either 0.2 % offset method or 0.5 % extension-under-load method.
     E When ICI test bars are used in tensile testing as provided for in Specification A703/A703M, the gage length to reduced section diameter ratio shall be 4 to 1.
     F See Appendix X1.
     TABLE 2 Minimum Preheat Temperatures
     Grade Thickness, in. [mm] Minimum Preheat
     Temperature, °F [°C]
     LCA all 50 [10]
     LCB all 50 [10]
     LCC all 50 [10]
     LC1 over 5/8 [15.9] 250 [120]
     5/8 and under 50 [10]
     LC2 all 300 [150]
     LC2-1 all 300 [150]
     LC3 all 300 [150]
     LC4 all 300 [150]
     CA6NM all 50 [10]
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-352/SA-352M
     555
156. Keywords
     11.1 alloy steel; carbon steel; ferritic steel; low temperature
     applications; martensitic stainless steel; pressure containing
     parts; stainless steel; steel castings
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     The following supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified in the purchase order. A
     list of standardized supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser is included in
     Specification A703/A703M. Those which are ordinarily considered suitable for use with this
     specification are given below together with additional supplementary requirements that are applicable
     only to this specification. Other supplementary requirements enumerated in A703/A703M may be
     used with this specification upon agreement between the manufacturer and purchaser.
     S1. Unspecified Elements
     S2. Destruction Tests
     S4. Magnetic Particle Inspection
     S5. Radiographic Inspection
     S9. Drop Weight Tests
     S10. Examination of Weld Preparation
     S10.1 The method of performing the magnetic particle or
     liquid penetrant test shall be in accordance with Practice E709
     or Practice E165.
     S21. Heat Treatment
     S21.1 Castings shall be liquid quenched and tempered.
     S22. Impact Test Temperatures
     S22.1 When an impact test temperature other than that listed
     in Table 1 is used, the lowest test temperature at which the
     material met the impact test requirements shall be stamped
     with low-stress stamps on a raised pad located immediately
     ahead of the material symbol; for example, 25 LCB for +25°F
     [–4°C] and 025 LCB for –25°F [–32°C].
     S22.2 Lateral expansion of V-notch specimens shall be
     measured in accordance with 23.2.3.1 of Test Methods and
     Definitions A370, and reported for information.
     S23. Carbon Equivalent
     S23.1 When specified on the order the maximum carbon
     equivalent shall be:
     Grade Carbon Equivalent, max
     LCA 0.50
     LCB 0.50
     LCC 0.55
     S23.2 Determine carbon equivalent, CE, as follows:
     CE5 C1
     Mn
     6 1
     Cr1Mo1V
     5 1
     Ni1Cu
     15
     APPENDIX
     (Nonmandatory Information)
     X1. EXPLANATION OF THE USE OF NOTCHED BAR IMPACT TESTS IN DETERMINING THE ACCEPTABILITY OF
     STEELS FOR LOW-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
     X1.1 Years of experience and test work have shown that
     some materials, particularly ferritic steels, change from tough
     to brittle behavior with a decrease in temperature. The transition
     temperatures and the levels of notch toughness vary with
     different materials, depending on many factors. When materials
     are used under conditions where brittle behavior may occur,
     there is danger that flaws, which would be considered nonhazardous
     if the material were tough, may propagate to disastrous
     failure of the equipment.
     X1.2 Accordingly, many varieties of tests have been developed
     in an effort to evaluate the toughness of materials and the
     conditions under which they will transform from tough to
     brittle behavior. There are many opinions and shadings of
     opinion as to which test is most suitable for evaluating the
     suitability of materials for service at low temperatures; however,
     as yet, only the Charpy impact test has received sufficient
     general acceptance and has been used as a basis for purchasing
     for sufficient time to be included in ASTM standards. Furthermore,
     this test is required for low-temperature service vessels
     and piping constructed in accordance with ASME Code for
     Unfired Pressure Vessels and the American National Standard
     Code for Pressure Piping (ANSI B31), respectively. These
     ASTM specifications for materials for low-temperature service
     are primarily used in piping and pressure vessel construction
     that are subjected to temperatures lower than ambient; consequently,
     the notched bar impact test requirements are written to
     provide material that in quality and by its testing can be
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-352/SA-352M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     556
     validated for use under the construction codes.
     X1.3 No assurance is offered that compliance with these
     requirements will provide a material that will resist brittle
     failure under all possible conditions of service to as low as the
     specified impact test temperature. It may eventually be possible
     that other types of tests will provide greater assurance of
     material suitability for low-temperature services, but at this
     time there is insufficient knowledge for agreement and general
     acceptance of some test other than the Charpy impact test.
     X1.4 Attention is directed to the following subjects which
     have a bearing on the value of Charpy impact tests:
     X1.4.1 Much of the original work in the field of notch
     toughness was done on wrought materials that had definite
     directional grain flow parallel to the axis of the bar, and the
     specimens were taken with the longitudinal axis of the specimen
     parallel to the axis of the bar. It has been well established
     that the results from impact testing of the same piece of steel
     may vary considerably, depending upon the orientation of the
     specimen to the direction of grain flow. Although it is known
     that specimens taken with their axis transverse to the direction
     of grain flow will have lower values depending on the amount
     of cross rolling or forging the material has received, there were
     insufficient test data to permit specific mandatory requirements
     on the impact properties of wrought materials determined in
     any direction other than parallel to the direction of grain flow.
     Except in special cases this limitation still exists.
     X1.4.2 It is acknowledged that notched bar impact tests are
     of a qualitative rather than a quantitative nature. As yet, except
     possibly for ship steel, no satisfactory correlation has been
     possible between tests on small standardization specimens and
     the behavior of a structural part under any given conditions of
     loading in service. The required values as determined by the
     Charpy V-notch impact test are arbitrary values which can be
     met by carbon and low-alloy constructional steels when tested
     at temperatures above that where their behavior changes from
     tough to brittle as judged by this test. The acceptability of this
     dividing line seems to be justified by service experience on
     carbon and certain low-alloy steels.
     X1.4.3 The literature shows that notched bar impact
     strengths in constructional steels differ widely in accordance
     with many variables. Consequently, there is bound to be some
     discrepancy between an individual test bar and the entire part
     that it represents. No system of test bar selection can guarantee
     that every sample would meet minimum requirements. Test bar
     selection must be a compromise to generally represent the
     product.
     X1.4.4 The committees responsible for these material specifications
     have had as an objective the selection of test specimens
     that will represent the properties of the materials, in the
     form in which they will be used. However, accomplishment of
     this objective has only partially been realized. At this time it is
     impossible to select samples for testing that will represent all
     parts and sizes of the product involved. Particularly in ferritic
     steels, it is impractical to remove the test bars from heavy
     sections over about 4 in. [100 mm] and expect them to show
     results as high as tests from light sections of the same material.
     The practical commercial limits on the amount of testing
     possible, as well as limits to knowledge of what results may be
     expected from testing in non-standard locations, have been
     considered in drafting these specifications. With time and
     increased knowledge, it may be possible to require more
     representative testing.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ð19Þ
     SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES,
     ALLOY STEEL, DOUBLE-NORMALIZED AND TEMPERED
     9% NICKEL
     SA-353/SA-353M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A353/A353M-17.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-353/SA-353M
     557
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-353/SA-353M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     558
     Standard Specification for
     Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Double-Normalized and
     Tempered 9 % Nickel
157. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers double-normalized and tempered
     9 % nickel steel plates intended particularly for welded
     pressure vessels for cryogenic service.
     1.2 Plates produced under this specification are subject to
     impact testing at -320°F [-195°C] or at such other temperatures
     as are agreed upon.
     1.3 The maximum thickness of plates is limited only by the
     capacity of the material to meet the specific mechanical
     property requirements.
     1.4 This material is susceptible to magnetization. Use of
     magnets in handling after heat treatment should be avoided if
     residual magnetism would be detrimental to subsequent fabrication
     or service.
     1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
     SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
     system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must
     be used independently of the other. Combining values from the
     two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification.
     1.6 This international standard was developed in accordance
     with internationally recognized principles on standardization
     established in the Decision on Principles for the
     Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
     issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
     Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
158. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A20/A20M Specification for General Requirements for Steel
     Plates for Pressure Vessels
     A435/A435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
     Examination of Steel Plates
     A577/A577M Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination
     of Steel Plates
     A578/A578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
     Examination of Rolled Steel Plates for Special Applications
159. General Requirements and Ordering Information
     3.1 Material supplied to this material specification shall
     conform to Specification A20/A20M. These requirements outline
     the testing and retesting methods and procedures, permitted
     variations in dimensions, and mass, quality and repair of
     defects, marking, loading, and ordering information.
     3.2 In addition to the basic requirements of this
     specification, certain supplementary requirements are available
     when additional control, testing, or examination is required to
     meet end use requirements. The purchaser is referred to the
     listed supplementary requirements in this specification and to
     the detailed requirements in Specification A20/A20M.
     3.3 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
     with the requirements of Specification A20/A20M, the requirements
     of this specification shall prevail.
160. Manufacture
     4.1 Steelmaking Practice—The steel shall be killed and
     shall conform to the fine austenitic grain size requirement of
     Specification A20/A20M.
161. Heat Treatment
     5.1 All plates shall be heat treated in accordance with 5.2.
     Shell plates and other parts, including heads and reinforcing
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-353/SA-353M
     559
     pads that are heated for forming shall be heat treated after
     forming in accordance with 5.2.
     5.2 Heat Treatment Procedure:
     5.2.1 First Normalizing Treatment—Heat the plate to a
     uniform temperature of 1650 6 25°F [900 6 15°C], hold at
     that temperature for a minimum of 1 h/in. [2.4 min/mm] of
     thickness, but in no case less than 15 min, and cool in air.
     5.2.2 Second Normalizing Treatment—Reheat the plate to a
     uniform temperature of 1450 6 25°F [790 6 15°C], hold at
     that temperature for a minimum of 1 h/in. [2.4 min/mm] of
     thickness, but in no case less than 15 min, and cool in air.
     5.2.3 Tempering Treatment—Reheat the plate to a uniform
     temperature within the range from 1050 to 1125°F [565 to
     605°C], hold within that temperature range for a minimum of
     1 h/in. [2.4 min/mm] of thickness, but in no case less than 15
     min, and cool in air or water quench at a rate not less than
     300°F/h [165°C/h].
     5.2.4 If hot forming is performed after heating to a temperature
     within the range from 1650 to 1750°F [900 to 955°C] the
     first normalizing treatment (5.2.1) may be omitted.
     5.2.5 When the plates are heat treated by the fabricator, it
     shall be the fabricator’s responsibility to apply the proper heat
     treatment and to conduct tests it deems necessary to ensure that
     the specified properties are attained.
162. Chemical Requirements
     6.1 The steel shall conform to the chemical composition
     requirements shown in Table 1 unless otherwise modified in
     accordance with Supplementary Requirement S17, Vacuum
     Carbon-Deoxidized Steel, in Specification A20/A20M.
163. Mechanical Requirements
     7.1 Tension Test Requirements—The material as represented
     by the tension-test specimens shall conform to the requirements
     specified in Table 2.
     7.1.1 Upon agreement between the purchaser and the
     manufacturer, yield strength may be determined by the extension
     under load method, using 0.005 in./in. [0.005 mm/mm]
     total extension.
     7.1.2 For nominal plate thicknesses of 3/4 in. [20 mm] and
     under, the 11/2-in. [40-mm] wide rectangular specimen may be
     used for the tension test and the elongation may be determined
     in a 2-in. [50-mm] gage length that includes the fracture and
     shows the greatest elongation.
     7.1.3 One tension test shall be taken from each plate as heat
     treated.
     7.2 Impact Test Requirements:
     7.2.1 Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be made in accordance
     with Specification A20/A20M.
     7.2.2 The longitudinal axis of the test specimens shall be
     transverse to the final rolling direction of the plate.
     7.2.3 Unless otherwise agreed, tests shall be conducted at
     -320°F [-195°C].
     7.2.4 Each test specimen shall have a lateral expansion
     opposite the notch of not less than 0.015 in. [0.381 mm].
164. Finish
     8.1 Because retained scale may mask surface imperfections,
     as well as mar the plate surface, plates shall be descaled by the
     producer after heat treatment. In the case of material to be
     heat-treated by the purchaser, the plates shall be descaled by
     the producer prior to shipment.
165. Keywords
     9.1 alloy steel; alloy steel plate; pressure containing parts;
     pressure vessel steels; steel plates; steel plates for pressure
     vessel applications
     TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
     Element Composition, %
     Carbon, maxA 0.13
     Manganese, max
     Heat analysis
     Product analysis
     0.90
     0.98
     Phosphorus, maxA 0.015
     Sulfur, maxA 0.015
     Silicon:
     Heat analysis
     Product analysis
     0.15–0.40B
     0.13–0.45B
     Nickel:
     Heat analysis
     Product analysis
     8.50–9.50
     8.40–9.60
     A Applies to both heat and product analyses.
     B The specified minimum limit does not apply if the total aluminum content is
     0.030 % or more, or provided that acid soluble aluminum is 0.025 % or more.
     TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
     Tensile strength, ksi [MPa] 100–120 [690–825]
     Yield strength (0.2 % offset), min, ksi [MPa]A 75 [515]
     Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min, %B 20.0
     A See 7.1.1.
     B See Specification A20/A20M for elongation adjustment.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-353/SA-353M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     560
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     Supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified in the order.
     Alist of standardized supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser are included
     in Specification A20/A20M. Several of those considered suitable for use with this specification are
     listed below by title. Other tests may be performed by agreement between the supplier and the
     purchaser.
     S1. Vacuum Treatment,
     S2. Product Analysis,
     S4.1 Additional Tension Test,
     S6. Drop Weight Test,
     S8. Ultrasonic Examination in Accordance with Specification
     A435/A435M,
     S11. Ultrasonic Examination in Accordance with Specification
     A577/A577M,
     S12. Ultrasonic Examination in Accordance with Specification
     A578/A578M, and
     S17. Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel.
     ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     Also listed below are additional optional Supplementary Requirements S55 and S56, which are
     suitable for this specification.
     S55. Longitudinal Charpy Impact Energy Absorption Requirement
     S55.1 The longitudinal Charpy V-notch impact properties
     shall not be less than 25 ft·lbf [34 J] at the specified temperature.
     S55.2 Each impact-test value shall constitute the average
     value of three specimens, with not more than one value below
     the specified minimum value of 25 ft·lbf [34 J], but in no case
     below 20 ft·lbf [27 J] for full size specimens.
     S56. Transverse Charpy Impact Energy Absorption Requirement
     S56.1 The transverse Charpy V-notch impact properties
     shall not be less than 20 ft·lbf [27 J] at the specified temperature.
     S56.2 Each impact-test value shall constitute the average
     value of three specimens, with not more than one value below
     the specified minimum value of 20 ft·lbf [27 J] but in no case
     below 15 ft·lbf [20 J] for full-size specimens.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR QUENCHED AND TEMPERED
     ALLOY STEEL BOLTS, STUDS, AND OTHER
     EXTERNALLY THREADED FASTENERS
     SA-354
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A354-11 except for the deletion of the term “private label distributor” in 15.1 and
     15.3.5.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-354
     561
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-354 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     562
     Standard Specification for
     Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other
     Externally Threaded Fasteners
166. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers the chemical and mechanical
     requirements of quenched and tempered alloy steel bolts, studs,
     and other externally threaded fasteners 4 in. and under in
     diameter for application at normal atmospheric temperatures,
     where high strength is required and for limited application at
     elevated temperature (Note 1). Any alloy steel capable of
     meeting the minimum mechanical and chemical properties set
     forth in this specification may be used.
     NOTE 1—For bolts, studs, or other externally threaded fasteners, to be
     used at elevated temperatures, refer to Specification A193/A193M.
     1.2 Two levels of bolting strength are covered, designated
     Grades BC and BD. Selection will depend upon design and the
     stresses and service for which the product is to be used.
     NOTE 2—Quenched and tempered alloy steel bolts for structural steel
     joints up through 11/2 in. in diameter are covered in Specification A490.
     Alloy steel bolts, studs, and other externally threaded fasteners (that is,
     heavy hex-structural bolts over 11/2 in., hex bolts, anchor bolts, and
     countersunk bolts) exhibiting similar mechanical properties to bolts
     conforming to Specification A490 shall be covered by Grade BD of this
     specification.
     When bolts of Grade BD of this specification are considered for
     pretentioned applications in excess of 50 % of the bolt tensile strength, the
     additional requirements of head size, maximum tensile strength, nut size
     and strength, washer hardness, tests, and inspections contained in Specification
     A490 should be carefully considered.
     1.3 Nuts are covered in Specification A563. Unless otherwise
     specified, the grade and style of nut for each grade of
     fastener shall be as follows:
     Grade of Fastener and Surface Finish
     Nut Grade and
     StyleA
     BC, plain (or with a coating of insufficient thickness
     to require over-tapped nuts)
     C, heavy hex
     BC, zinc-coated (or with a coating thickness requiring
     over-tapped nuts)
     DH, heavy hex
     BD, all finishes DH, heavy hex
     A Nuts of other grades and styles having specified proof load stresses (Specification
     A563, Table 3) greater than the specified grade and style of nut are suitable.
     1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
     as the standard.
     1.5 Terms used in this specification are defined in Terminology
     F1789 unless otherwise defined herein.
167. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A193/A193M Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless
     Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure
     Service and Other Special Purpose Applications
     A490 Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat
     Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
     A563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
     A751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical
     Analysis of Steel Products
     B695 Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited
     on Iron and Steel
     D3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging
     F436 Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
     F606 Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical Properties
     of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners,
     Washers, Direct Tension Indicators, and Rivets
     F788/F788M Specification for Surface Discontinuities of
     Bolts, Screws, and Studs, Inch and Metric Series
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-354
     563
     F1470 Practice for Fastener Sampling for Specified Mechanical
     Properties and Performance Inspection
     F1789 Terminology for F16 Mechanical Fasteners
     F2329 Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements
     for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts,
     Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners
     2.2 ASME Standards:
     B1.1 Unified Screw Threads
     B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch Series
     B18.24 Part Identifying Number (PIN) Code System Standard
     for B18 Fastener Products
168. Ordering Information
     3.1 Orders for bolts and studs (including nuts and accessories)
     under this specification shall include the following:
     3.1.1 ASTM designation and year of issue,
     3.1.2 Name of product (that is, bolt or stud),
     3.1.3 Grade (that is, BC or BD),
     3.1.4 Quantities (number of pieces by size, including nuts),
     3.1.5 Size and length,
     3.1.6 Washers—Specify quantity and size (separate from
     bolts) (4.3),
     3.1.7 Zinc Coating—When zinc-coated Grade BC fasteners
     are required, specify the zinc-coating process required, for
     example hot-dip, mechanically deposited, or no preference (see
     4.4).
     3.1.8 Other Finishes—Specify other protective finish, if
     required.
     3.1.9 Specify if inspection at point of manufacture is
     required,
     3.1.10 Specify if Certification (Section 14) is required, and
     3.1.11 Specify additional testing (Section 9) or special
     requirements.
     3.1.12 For establishment of a part identifying system, see
     ASME B18.24.
169. Materials and Manufacture
     4.1 The steel shall be made by the open-hearth, electricfurnace,
     or basic-oxygen process.
     4.2 All fasteners shall be heat-treated. At the option of the
     manufacturer, heat treatment may be performed on the raw
     material, during the manufacturing operations, or after final
     machining. Heat treatment shall consist of quenching in a
     liquid medium (except Grade BD sizes 11/2 in. and smaller shall
     be quenched in oil) from above the transformation temperature
     and then temperating by reheating to a temperature of not less
     than 800°F (427°C) for Grade BC and for Grade BD.
     4.3 When used, suitable hardened washers shall be
     quenched and tempered (non-carburized) in accordance with
     Specification F436.
     4.4 Zinc Coatings, Hot-Dip and Mechanically Deposited:
     4.4.1 When zinc-coated fasteners are required, the purchaser
     shall specify the zinc coating process, for example,
     hot-dip, mechanically deposited, or no preference.
     4.4.2 When “hot-dip” is specified, the fasteners shall be zinc
     coated by the hot-dip process in accordance with the requirements
     of Specification F2329.
     4.4.3 When mechanically deposited is specified, the fasteners
     shall be zinc-coated by the mechanical-deposition process
     in accordance with the requirements of Class 55 of Specification
     B695.
     4.4.4 When no preference is specified, the supplier may
     furnish either a hot-dip zinc coating in accordance with
     Specification F2329, or a mechanically deposited zinc coating
     in accordance with Specification B695, Class 55. Threaded
     components (bolts and nuts) shall be coated by the same
     zinc-coating process and the supplier’s option is limited to one
     process per item with no mixed processes in a lot.
     NOTE 3—When the intended application requires that assembled
     tension exceeds 50 % of minimum bolt proof load, an anti-galling
     lubricant may be needed. Application of such a lubricant to nuts and a test
     of the lubricant efficiency are provided in Supplementary Requirement S1
     of Specification A563 and should be specified when required.
     4.5 Zinc-coated bolts and nuts shall be shipped in the same
     container unless specifically requested otherwise by the purchaser.
     NOTE 4—Research conducted on bolts of similar material and manufacture
     indicates that hydrogen-stress cracking or stress cracking corrosion
     may occur on hot-dip galvanized Grade BD bolts.
170. Chemical Composition
     5.1 All fasteners shall be made from alloy steel conforming
     to the chemical composition requirements in accordance with
     Table 1. The steel shall contain sufficient alloying elements to
     qualify it as an alloy steel.
     NOTE 5—Steel is considered to be alloy, by the American Iron and Steel
     Institute, when the maximum of the range given for the content of alloying
     elements exceeds one or more of the following limits: manganese, 1.65 %;
     silicon, 0.60 %; copper, 0.60 %; or in which a definite range or a definite
     minimum quantity of any of the following elements is specified or
     required within the limits of the recognized field of constructional alloy
     steels: aluminum, chromium up to 3.99 %, cobalt, columbium,
     molybdenum, nickel, titanium, tungsten, vanadium, zirconium, or any
     other alloying elements added to obtain a desired alloying effect.
     5.2 Product analysis may be made by the purchaser from
     finished material representing each lot of fasteners. The chemical
     composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements
     given in Table 1. Choice of alloy steel composition
     necessary to ensure meeting the specified mechanical requirements
     shall be made by the manufacturer and shall be reported
     to the purchaser for information purposes only.
     5.3 Application of heats of steel to which bismuth,
     selenium, tellurium, or lead has been intentionally added shall
     not be permitted.
     5.4 Chemical analyses shall be performed in accordance
     with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A751.
171. Mechanical Properties
     6.1 Fasteners shall not exceed the maximum hardness specified
     in Table 2. Fasteners less than three diameters in length
     and studs less than four diameters in length shall have hardness
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-354 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     564
     values not less than the minimum nor more than the maximum
     hardness limits required in Table 2, as hardness is the only
     requirement.
     6.2 Fasteners 13/8 in. in diameter or less for Grade BC and
     11/4 in. in diameter or less for Grade BD, other than those
     excepted in 6.1, shall be tested full size and shall conform to
     the tensile strength and either the proof load or the yield
     strength requirements in accordance with Table 3.
     6.3 Fasteners larger than 13/8 in. in diameter for Grade BC
     and fasteners larger than 11/4 in. in diameter for Grade BD,
     other than those excepted in 6.1, shall preferably be tested full
     size and when so tested, shall conform to the tensile strength
     and either the proof load or yield strength requirements in
     accordance with Table 3. When equipment of sufficient capacity
     for full-size testing is not available, or when the length of
     the fastener makes full-size testing impractical, machined
     specimens shall be tested and shall conform to the requirements
     in accordance with Table 4. In the event that fasteners
     are tested by both full-size and by the machined test specimen
     methods, the full-size test shall govern if a controversy
     between the two methods exists.
     6.4 For fasteners on which both hardness and tension tests
     are performed, acceptance based on tensile requirements shall
     take precedence in the event that there is controversy over low
     readings of hardness tests.
172. Dimensions
     7.1 Bolts—Unless otherwise specified, the bolts shall be
     Hex Head with dimensions conforming to the latest issue of
     ASME B18.2.1.
     7.2 Studs—Studs shall have dimensions conforming to those
     specified by the purchaser.
     7.3 Threads:
     7.3.1 Unless otherwise specified, threads shall be the Unified
     National Coarse Thread Series as specified in B1.1, and
     shall have Class 2 A tolerances.
     7.3.2 When specified, threads shall be the Unified National
     Fine Thread Series, 8-Pitch Thread Series for sizes over 1 in. or
     14-Pitch UNS on 1 in. size as specified in ANSI B1.1 and shall
     have Class 2A tolerances.
     7.3.3 Unless otherwise specified, bolts and studs to be used
     with nuts or tapped holes that have been tapped oversize, in
     accordance with Specification A563, shall have Class 2A
     threads before hot dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating.
     After zinc coating, the maximum limit of pitch and major
     diameter may exceed the Class 2A limit by the following
     amount:
     Diameter, in. Oversize Limit, in. (mm)A
     1/4 0.016
     5/16, 3/8 0.017
     7/16, 1/2 0.018
     9/16 to 3/4, incl 0.020
     7/8 0.022
     1.0 to 11/4, incl 0.024
     13/8, 11/2 0.027
     13/4 to 4.0, incl 0.050
     A These values are the same as the overtapping required for zinc-coated nuts in
     Specification A563.
173. Workmanship
     8.1 Surface discontinuity limits shall be in accordance with
     Specification F788/F788M.
174. Number of Tests
     9.1 Testing Responsibility:
     9.1.1 Each lot shall be tested by the manufacturer prior to
     shipment in accordance with the lot identification control
     quality assurance plan in 9.2 through 9.6.
     9.1.2 When fasteners are furnished by a source other than
     the manufacturer, the responsible party as defined in 12.1 shall
     be responsible for ensuring that all tests have been performed
     and the fasteners comply with the requirements of this specification.
     9.2 Purpose of Lot Inspection—The purpose of a lot inspection
     program is to ensure that each lot conforms to the
     requirements of this specification. For such a plan to be fully
     TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
     Alloy Steel
     Element Heat Analysis, % Product
     Analysis, %
     Carbon:
     For sizes through
     11/2 in.
     0.30 to 0.53 0.28 to 0.55
     For sizes larger than
     11/2 in.
     0.35 to 0.53 0.33 to 0.55
     Manganese, min 0.60 0.57
     Phosphorus, max 0.035 0.040
     Sulfur, max 0.040 0.045
     Alloying Elements A A
     Alloy Steel with Boron Addition
     Element Heat
     Analysis, %
     Product
     Analysis, %
     Carbon
     For sizes through
     1 1/2 in.
     0.30-0.48 0.28-0.50
     For sizes larger than
     1 1/2 in.
     0.35-0.53 0.35-0.55
     Manganese, min 0.60 0.57
     Phosphorus, max 0.040 0.045
     Sulfur, max 0.040 0.045
     Boron 0.0005-0.003 0.0005-0.003
     Alloying Elements A A
     ASteel, as defined by the American Iron and Steel Institute, shall be considered to
     be alloy when the maximum of the range given for the content of alloying elements
     exceeds one or more of the following limits: Manganese, 1.65 %; silicon, 0.60 %;
     copper, 0.60 % or in which a definite range or a definite minimum quantity of any
     of the following elements is specified or required within the limits of the recognized
     field of constructional alloy steels: aluminum, chromium up to 3.99 %, cobalt,
     columbium, molybdenum, nickel, titanium, tungsten, vanadium, zirconium, or any
     other alloying elements added to obtain a desired alloying effect.
     TABLE 2 Hardness Requirements for Full-Size Fasteners
     Size, in. Grade
     Hardness
     Brinell Rockwell C
     Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
     1/4 to 21 /2 BC 255 331 26 36
     Over 21/2 BC 235 311 22 33
     1/4 to 21 /2 BD 311 363 33 39
     Over 21/2 BD 293 363 31 39
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-354
     565
     TABLE 3 Tensile Requirements for All Full-Size Fasteners—Inch-Pound Units
     Bolt
     Size,
     in.
     Threads
     per
     inch
     Stress
     Area,A
     in.2
     Grade BC Grade BD
     Tensile
     Strength,
     min, lbfB
     Proof Load,
     min, lbfC
     Yield
     Strength
     (0.2 % offset),
     min, lbfD
     Tensile
     Strength,
     min, lbfE
     Proof Load,
     min, lbfF
     Yield
     Strength
     (0.2 % offset),
     min, lbfG
     1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
     1/4 20 0.0318 4 000 3 350 3 450 4 750 3 800 4 100
     1/4 28 0.0364 4 550 3 820 3 950 5 450 4 350 4 700
     5/16 18 0.0524 6 550 5 500 5 700 7 850 6 300 6 800
     5/16 24 0.0580 7 250 6 090 6 300 8 700 6 950 7 500
     3/8 16 0.0775 9 700 8 150 8 450 11 650 9 300 10 075
     3/8 24 0.0878 11 000 9 220 9 550 13 200 10 500 11 400
     7/16 14 0.1063 13 300 11 150 11 600 15 950 12 750 13 850
     7/16 20 0.1187 14 840 12 470 12 900 17 800 14 200 15 400
     1/2 13 0.1419 17 750 14 900 15 450 21 300 17 050 18 500
     1/2 20 0.1599 19 990 16 790 17 400 24 000 19 200 20 750
     9/16 12 0.182 22 750 19 100 19 850 27 300 21 850 23 600
     9/16 18 0.203 25 400 21 400 22 100 30 400 24 400 26 350
     5/8 11 0.226 28 250 23 750 24 650 33 900 27 100 29 400
     5/8 18 0.256 32 000 26 800 27 900 38 400 30 700 33 250
     3/4 10 0.334 41 750 35 050 36 400 50 100 40 100 43 400
     3/4 16 0.373 46 600 39 100 40 650 56 000 44 800 48 450
     7/8 9 0.462 57 750 48 500 50 350 69 300 55 450 60 100
     7/8 14 0.509 63 600 53 400 55 450 76 400 61 100 66 150
     1 8 0.606 75 750 63 650 66 050 90 900 72 700 78 800
     1 12 0.663 82 900 69 700 72 250 99 400 79 600 86 150
     1 14 UNS 0.679 84 900 71 300 74 400 101 900 81 500 88 250
     11/8 7 0.763 95 400 80 100 83 150 114 450 91 550 99 200
     11/8 8 0.790 98 750 82 950 86 200 118 500 94 800 102 700
     11/8 12 0.856 107 000 89 800 93 300 128 400 102 700 111 250
     11/4 7 0.969 121 150 101 750 105 600 145 350 116 300 126 000
     11/4 8 1.000 125 000 105 000 109 000 150 000 120 000 130 000
     11/4 12 1.073 134 100 112 600 116 950 161 000 128 800 139 450
     13/8 6 1.155 144 400 121 300 125 900 173 250 138 600 150 200
     13/8 8 1.233 154 150 129 450 134 400 185 000 148 000 160 300
     13/8 12 1.315 164 400 138 100 143 300 197 200 157 800 170 950
     11/2 6 1.405 175 650 147 550 153 150 210 750 168 600 182 500
     11/2 8 1.492 186 500 156 650 162 250 233 800 175 050 194 000
     11/2 12 1.581 197 600 166 000 172 300 237 200 189 700 205 500
     13/4 5 1.90 237 500 199 500 207 100 285 000 228 000 247 000
     13/4 8 2.08 260 000 218 400 226 700 312 000 249 600 270 000
     2 41/2 2.50 312 500 262 500 272 500 375 000 300 000 325 000
     2 8 2.77 346 250 290 850 301 950 415 000 332 400 360 000
     21/4 41/2 3.25 406 250 341 250 354 250 487 000 390 000 422 500
     21/4 8 3.56 445 000 373 800 388 050 534 000 422 200 462 800
     21/2 4 4.00 500 000 420 000 436 000 600 000 480 000 520 000
     21/2 8 4.44 550 000 466 200 483 950 666 000 532 800 577 200
     23/4 4 4.93 566 950 468 350 488 050 690 200 517 650 566 950
     23/4 8 5.43 624 450 515 850 537 550 750 200 570 150 624 450
     3 4 5.97 686 550 567 150 591 050 835 800 626 850 686 550
     3 8 6.51 748 650 618 450 644 500 911 400 683 550 748 650
     31/4 4 7.10 816 500 674 500 702 900 994 000 745 500 816 500
     31/4 8 7.69 884 350 730 550 761 300 1 076 600 807 650 884 350
     31/2 4 8.33 957 950 791 350 824 650 1 166 200 874 650 957 950
     31/2 8 8.96 1 030 400 851 200 887 050 1 254 400 940 800 1 030 400
     33/4 4 9.66 1 110 900 917 700 956 350 1 352 400 1 014 300 1 110 900
     33/4 8 10.34 1 199 100 983 300 1 023 650 1 447 600 1 085 700 1 189 100
     4 4 11.08 1 274 200 1 052 600 1 096 900 1 551 200 1 163 400 1 274 200
     4 8 11.81 1 358 200 1 122 000 1 169 200 1 653 400 1 240 050 1 358 150
     A Stress Area, in.2 = 0.7854 [D – 0.9743/ n] 2 where D = nominal diameter, in., and n = threads/in.
     B Based on 125 000 psi for sizes 1/4 to 21/2 in., inclusive, and on 115 000 psi for sizes over 21/2 to 4 in., inclusive.
     C Based on 105 000 psi for sizes 1/4 to 21/2 in., inclusive, and on 95 000 psi for sizes over 21/2 to 4 in., inclusive.
     D Based on 109 000 psi for sizes 1/4 to 21/2 in., inclusive, and on 99 000 psi for sizes over 21/2 to 4 in., inclusive.
     E Based on 150 000 psi for sizes 1/4 to 21/2 in., inclusive, and on 140 000 psi for sizes over 21/2 to 4 in., inclusive.
     F Based on 120 000 psi for sizes 1/4 to 21/2 in., inclusive, and on 105 000 psi for sizes over 21/2 to 4 in., inclusive.
     G Based on 130 000 psi for sizes 1/4 to 21/2 in., inclusive, and on 115 000 psi for sizes over 21/2 to 4 in., inclusive.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-354 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     566
     effective it is essential that secondary processors, distributors,
     and purchasers maintain the identification and integrity of each
     lot until the product is installed.
     9.3 Lot Processing—All fasteners shall be processed in
     accordance with a lot identification-control quality assurance
     plan. The manufacturer, secondary processors, and distributors
     shall identify and maintain the integrity of each lot of fasteners
     from raw-material selection through all processing operations
     and treatments to final packing and shipment. Each lot shall be
     assigned its own lot-identification number, each lot shall be
     tested, and the inspection test reports for each lot shall be
     retained.
     9.4 Lot Definition—A lot is a quantity of a uniquely identified
     fastener product of the same nominal size and length
     produced consecutively at the initial operation from a single
     mill heat of material and heat treatment lot and processed at
     one time, by the same process, in the same manner so that
     statistical sampling is valid. The identity of the lot is maintained
     throughout all subsequent operations and packaging.
     9.5 Number of Tests—The minimum number of tests from
     each production lot for the tests specified below shall be in
     accordance with Guide F1470.
     Hardness Coating Weight/Thickness
     Tensile Workmanship (Surface
     Discontinuities Section 8)
     Proof Load
     9.5.1 The number of tests for dimensional and thread fit
     compliance shall be in accordance with the quality assurance
     provisions of the referenced dimensional standards.
     9.6 If any test specimen shows defective machining it may
     be discarded and another specimen substituted.
175. Test Methods
     10.1 Test methods shall be conducted in accordance with
     Test Methods F606.
     10.2 Proof load, rather than yield strength determination is
     preferred and shall be the arbitration method for fasteners 11/4
     in. and under in diameter.
     10.3 Hexagon bolts shall be tested by the wedge tension
     method. Fracture shall be in the body or threads of the bolt
     without any fracture at the junction of the head and body.
     10.3.1 At the option of the manufacturer, the yield strength
     test (Method 2, Yield Strength paragraph of Test Methods
     F606) and the wedge tension test (Wedge Tension Testing of
     Full-Size Product paragraph, both from the Test Method
     section of Test Methods F606) may be accomplished concurrently
     to satisfy 10.2 and 10.3.
     10.4 Studs and bolts other than those in 10.3 shall be tested
     by the axial tension method.
     10.4.1 At the option of the manufacturer, the yield strength
     test and the axial tension test may be accomplished concurrently
     to satisfy 10.2 and 10.4.
     10.5 The speed of testing determined with a free running
     crosshead shall be a maximum of 1/8 in. (3.2 mm)/min for the
     bolt proof load (or yield strength) determination and a maximum
     of 1 in. (25.4 mm)/min for the tensile strength determination.
176. Inspection
     11.1 If the inspection described in 11.2 is required by the
     purchaser, it shall be specified in the inquiry and contract or
     purchase order.
     11.2 The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
     free entry to all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concern
     the manufacture of the material ordered. The manufacturer
     shall afford the inspector all reasonable facilities to satisfy him
     that the material is being furnished in accordance with this
     specification. All tests and inspections required by the specification
     that are requested by the purchaser’s representative shall
     be made before shipment, and shall be conducted as not to
     interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
177. Responsibility
     12.1 The party responsible for the fastener shall be the
     organization that supplies the fastener to the purchaser.
178. Rejection and Rehearing
     13.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
     this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
     to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
     dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
     supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
179. Certification
     14.1 When specified on the purchase order, the manufacturer
     or supplier, whichever is the responsible party in accordance
     with Section 12, shall furnish the purchaser a test report
     which includes the following:
     14.1.1 Product description, grade, quantity, ASTM Specification
     Number and issue date,
     14.1.2 Alloy grade (AISI, SAE, UNS, etc.), heat analysis,
     and heat number, and type of quench,
     14.1.3 Results of hardness, tensile, and proof load tests, as
     applicable,
     14.1.4 Statement of compliance to Protective Coating
     Specification (if applicable),
     14.1.5 Statement of compliance with the surface discontinuity
     requirements of Specification F788/F788M,
     14.1.6 Statement of compliance dimensionally,
     14.1.7 Report, describe, or illustrate manufacturer’s markings
     and their location,
     14.1.8 Lot number, purchase order number, and date
     shipped,
     TABLE 4 Mechanical Requirements for Machined Specimens
     Grade Size, in.
     Tensile
     Strength
     min, psi
     Yield Strength
     (0.2 % offset),
     min, psi
     Elongation
     in
     2 in.
     min, %
     Reduction
     of
     Area,
     min, %
     BC 1/4 to 21/2, incl 125 000 109 000 16 50
     BC Over 21/2 115 000 99 000 16 45
     BD 1/4 to 21/2, incl 150 000 130 000 14 40
     BD Over 21/2 140 000 115 000 14 40
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-354
     567
     14.1.9 Country of origin, and
     14.1.10 Title and signature of the individual assigned certification
     responsibility by the company officers, with complete
     mailing address.
     14.2 Failure to include all the required information on the
     test report shall be cause for rejection.
180. Product Marking
     15.1 Manufacturers Identification —All products shall be
     marked by the manufacturer with a unique identifier to identify
     the manufacturer.
     15.2 Grade Identification:
     15.2.1 All Grade BC products shall be marked “BC”.
     15.2.2 All Grade BD products shall be marked “BD”. In
     addition to the “BD” marking, the product may be marked with
     6 radial lines 60° apart if manufactured from alloy steel
     conforming to the requirements of this specification.
     15.3 Marking Location and Methods:
     15.3.1 Bolts shall be marked on the top of the bolt head.
     15.3.2 Where studs have both coarse and fine threads, all
     markings shall appear on the coarse thread end or, if preferred,
     the manufacturer’s identification shall appear on the fine thread
     end and the grade marking on the coarse thread end.
     15.3.3 Continuous thread studs may be marked on either
     end.
     15.3.4 All markings may be raised or depressed at the
     manufacturer’s option.
     15.3.5 Grade and manufacturer’s identification shall
     shall be separate and distinct. The two identifications
     shal l preferably be in di fferent locat ions and
     when on the same level shall be separated by at least two
     spaces.
181. Packaging and Package Marking
     16.1 Packaging:
     16.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, packaging shall be in
     accordance with Practice D3951.
     16.1.2 When special packaging requirements are required,
     they shall be defined at the time of the inquiry and order.
     16.2 Package Marking:
     16.2.1 Each shipping unit shall include or be plainly marked
     with the following information:
     16.2.1.1 ASTM designation and grade,
     16.2.1.2 Size,
     16.2.1.3 Name and brand or trademark of the manufacturer,
     16.2.1.4 Number of pieces,
     16.2.1.5 Purchase order number, and
     16.2.1.6 Country of origin.
182. Keywords
     17.1 alloy steel; bolts; steel; studs
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     S1. Marking
     S1.1 Studs that are continuously threaded with the same
     class of thread shall be marked on each end with the marking
     in accordance with Section 15.
     S1.2 Marking small sizes (customarily less than 0.375 in.
     (9.525 mm) may not be practical. Consult the producer for the
     minimum size that can be marked.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ð19Þ
     SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-FUSION-WELDED
     AUSTENITIC CHROMIUM-NICKEL STAINLESS STEEL
     PIPE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE AND
     GENERAL APPLICATIONS
     SA-358/SA-358M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A358/A358M-15 except for the deletion of 6.3.2.2 for HT-O pipe and 6.3.2.3 for
     HT-SO pipe, and editorial correction in 1.4. For products ordered to Section III and Section VIII, Division 1 of the ASME
     Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Supplementary Requirement S8 is mandatory.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-358/SA-358M
     569
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-358/SA-358M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     570
     Standard Specification for
     Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel
     Stainless Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service and
     General Applications
183. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers electric-fusion-welded austenitic
     chromium-nickel stainless steel pipe suitable for corrosive
     or high-temperature service, or both, or for general applications.
     NOTE 1—The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has
     been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal
     diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.”
     1.2 This specification covers the grades of alloy and stainless
     steel listed in Table 1. The selection of the proper grade
     and requirements for heat treatment shall be at the discretion of
     the purchaser, dependent on the service conditions to be
     encountered.
     1.3 Five classes of pipe are covered as follows:
     1.3.1 Class 1—Pipe shall be double welded by processes
     employing filler metal in all passes and shall be completely
     radiographed.
     1.3.2 Class 2—Pipe shall be double welded by processes
     employing filler metal in all passes. No radiography is required.
     1.3.3 Class 3—Pipe shall be single welded by processes
     employing filler metal in all passes and shall be completely
     radiographed.
     1.3.4 Class 4—Same as Class 3 except that the weld pass
     exposed to the inside pipe surface may be made without the
     addition of filler metal (see 6.2.2.1 and 6.2.2.2).
     1.3.5 Class 5—Pipe shall be double welded by processes
     employing filler metal in all passes and shall be spot radiographed.
     1.4 Supplementary requirements covering provisions ranging
     from additional testing to formalized procedures for
     manufacturing practice are provided. Supplementary Requirements
     S1 through S8 are included as options to be specified
     when desired.
     1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
     SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
     system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
     shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
     from the two systems may result in nonconformance with the
     specification. The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M”
     designation of this specification is specified in the order.
184. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A240/A240M Specification for Chromium and Chromium-
     Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure
     Vessels and for General Applications
     A262 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular
     Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels
     A480/A480M Specification for General Requirements for
     Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate,
     Sheet, and Strip
     A941 Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related
     Alloys, and Ferroalloys
     A999/A999M Specification for General Requirements for
     Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe
     E527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys in the
     Unified Numbering System (UNS)
     2.2 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
     Section II
     Section III
     Section VIII
     Section IX
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-358/SA-358M
     571
     TABLE 1 Plate and Filler Metal Specifications
     Grade
     UNS
     Designation
     Material,
     Type
     ASTM Plate
     Specification No.
     and Grade
     Filler Metal Classification and UNS DesignationA for ApplicableB AWS Specification
     A5.4/A5.4M A5.9/A5.9M A5.11/A5.11M A5.14/A5.14M A5.22/A5.22M A5.30/A5.30M
     Class. UNS Class. UNS Class. UNS Class. UNS Class. UNS Class. UNS
     . . . N08020 . . .
     A240/A240M
     N08020
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     . . .
     . . . N08367 . . .
     A240/A240M
     N08367
     . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo-3 W86112 ERNiCrMo-3 N06625 . . . . . . . . .
     . . .
     . . . N08700 . . .
     A240/A240M
     N08700
     . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo-3 W86112 ERNiCrMo-3 N06625 . . . . . . . . .
     . . .
     800E N08800 . . .
     A240/A240M
     N08800
     . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrFe-3 W86182 ERNiCr-3 N06082 . . . . . . . . .
     . . .
     800HE N08810 . . .
     A240/A240M
     N08810
     . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrFe-3F W86182F ERNiCr-3F N06082F . . . . . . . . .
     . . .
     . . . N08811 . . .
     A240/A240M
     N08811
     . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrFe-3F W86182F ERNiCr-3F N06082F
     . . . N08904 . . .
     A240/A240M
     N08904
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     . . .
     . . . N08926 . . .
     A240/A240M
     N08926
     . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo–3 W86112 ERNiCrMo–3 N06625 . . . . . . . . .
     . . .
     201 S20100 201
     A240/A240M
     Type 201
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     201LN S20153 201LN
     A240/A240M
     Type 201LN
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     . . . S20400 . . .
     A240/A240M
     S20400
     E 209 W32210 ER209 S20980 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     XM-19 S20910 XM-19
     A240/A240M
     Type XM-19
     E209 W32210 ER209 S20980 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     XM-29 S24000 XM-29
     A240/A240M
     Type XM-29
     E240 W32410 ER240 S24080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     304 S30400 304
     A240/A240M
     Type 304
     E308 W30810 ER308 S30880 . . . . . . . . . . . . E308T W30831 IN308 S30880
     304L S30403 304L
     A240/A240M
     Type 304
     E308L W30813 ER308L S30883 . . . . . . . . . . . . E308LT W30835 IN308L S30883
     304H S30409 304H
     A240/A240M
     Type 304H
     E308H W30810 ER308 S30880 . . . . . . . . . . . . E308T W30831 IN308 S30880
     . . . S30415 . . .
     A240/A240M
     S30415
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     304N S30451 304N
     A240/A240M
     Type 304N
     E308 W30810 ER308 S30880 . . . . . . . . . . . . E308T W30831 IN308 S30880
     304LN S30453 304LN
     A240/A240M
     Type 304LN
     E308L W30813 ER308L S30883 . . . . . . . . . . . . E308LTT W30835 IN308L S30883
     . . . S30600D . . .
     A240/A240M
     S30600D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     S30815 . . .
     A240/A240M
     S30815
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     309S S30908 309S
     A240/A240M
     Type 309S
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     309Cb S30940 309Nb
     A240/A240M
     Type 309Cb
     E309Cb W30917 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     310S S31008 310S
     A240/A240M
     Type 310S
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     310Cb S31040 310Cb
     A240/A240M
     Type 310Cb
     E310NB W31017 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .
     . . . S31254 . . .
     A240/A240M
     S31254
     . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo-3 W86112 ERNiCrMo-3 N06625 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     . . .
     S31266
     . . .
     A240/A240M
     S31266
     . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo–13 W86059 ERNiCrMo–13 N06059 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     SA-358/SA-358M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     572
     TABLE 1 Continued
     Grade
     UNS
     Designation
     Material,
     Type
     ASTM Plate
     Specification No.
     and Grade
     Filler Metal Classification and UNS DesignationA for ApplicableB AWS Specification
     A5.4/A5.4M A5.9/A5.9M A5.11/A5.11M A5.14/A5.14M A5.22/A5.22M A5.30/A5.30M
     Class. UNS Class. UNS Class. UNS Class. UNS Class. UNS Class. UNS
     . . .
     S31266
     . . .
     A240/A240M
     S31266
     . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo–10 W86022 ERNiCrMo–10 N06022 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     316 S31600 316
     A240/A240M
     Type 316
     E316 W31610 ER316
     S31680
     W31640
     . . . . . . . . . . . . E316T W31631 IN316 S31680
     316L S31603 316L
     A240/A240M
     Type 316L
     E316L W31613 ER316L S31683 . . . . . . . . . . . . E316LT W31635 IN316L S31683
     316H S31609 316H
     A240/A240M
     Type 316H
     E316H W31610 ER316H S31680 . . . . . . . . . . . . E316T W31631 IN316 S31680
     316N S31651 316N
     A240/A240M
     Type 316N
     E316 W31610 ER316 S31680 . . . . . . . . . . . . E316T W31631 IN316 S31680
     316LN S31653 316LN
     A240/A240M
     Type 316LN
     E316L W31613 ER316L S31683 . . . . . . . . . . . . E316LT W31635 IN316L S31683
     . . . S31655 . . .
     A240/A240M
     S31655
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     317 S31700 317
     A240/A240M
     Type 317
     E317 W31710 ER 317 S31780 . . . . . . . . . . . . E317LT W31735 . . . . . .
     317L S31703 317L
     A240/A240M
     Type 317L
     E317L W34713 ER317L S31783 . . . . . . . . . . . . E317LT W31735 . . . . . .
     . . . S31725 . . .
     A240/A240M
     S31725
     . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo-3 W86112 ERNiCrMo-3 N06625 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     . . . S31726 . . .
     A240/A240M
     S31726
     . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo-3 W86112 ERNiCrMo-3 N06625 . . . . . . . . . . . .
     . . . S31727 . . .
     A240/A240M
     S31727
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     . . . S32050 . . .
     A240/A240M
     S32050
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     . . .
     . . . S32053 . . .
     A240/A240M
     S32053
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     321 S32100 321
     A240/A240M
     Type 321
     E347 W34710
     ER321
     ER347
     S32180
     S34780
     . . . . . . . . . . . . E347T W34731 IN348 S34780
     321HC S32109C 321HC A240/A240M
     Type 321HC W34710
     ER321
     ER347
     S32180
     S34780
     E347T W34731 IN348 S34780
     . . . S32654 . . .
     A240/A240M
     S32654
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     . . . S34565 . . .
     A240/A240M
     S34565
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     347 S34700 347
     A240/A240M
     Type 347
     E347 W34710 ER347 S34780 . . . . . . . . . . . . E347T W34731 IN348 S34780
     347HC S34709C 347HC A240/A240M
     Type 347HC ER347 S34780 E347T W34731 IN348 S34780
     347LN S34751
     A240/A240M
     Type 347LN
     . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     348 S34800 348
     A240/A240M
     Type 348
     E347 W34710 ER347 S34780 . . . . . . . . . . . . E347T W34731 IN348 S34780
     A New designation established in accordance with Practice E527 and SAE J1086.
     B Choice of American Welding Society specification depends on the welding process used.
     C Minimum carbon content of the filler metal shall be 0.040 mass %.
     D In previous editions, S30600 was incorrectly shown as S01815.
     ECommon name, not a trademark, widely used, not associated with any one producer.
     FThese filler metals have a high nickel content and, therefore, lower creep strength than the parent metal at temperatures exceeding about 1470 °F [800 °C], and its resistance to sulphurous media is inferior in certain
     cases.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-358/SA-358M
     573
     2.3 AWS Specifications:
     A5.4/A5.4M Stainless Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal
     Arc Welding
     A5.9/A5.9M Bare Stainless Steel Welding Electrodes and
     Rods
     A5.11/A5.11M Nickel and Nickel-AlloyWelding Electrodes
     for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
     A5.14/A5.14M Nickel and Nickel-Alloy BareWelding Electrodes
     and Rods
     A5.22/A5.22M Stainless Steel Flux Cored and Metal Cored
     Welding Electrodes and Rods
     A5.30/A5.30M Consumable Inserts
     2.4 Other Standard:
     SAE J1086 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys
     (UNS)
185. Terminology
     3.1 Definitions:
     3.1.1 The definitions in Specification A999/A999M and
     Terminology A941 are applicable to this specification.
186. Ordering Information
     4.1 It shall be the responsibility of the purchaser to specify
     all requirements that are necessary for product under this
     specification. Such requirements to be considered include, but
     are not limited to, the following:
     4.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
     4.1.2 Name of material (electric-fusion-welded pipe),
     4.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
     4.1.4 Class (see 1.3),
     4.1.5 Size (outside diameter and nominal wall thickness),
     4.1.6 Length (specific or random),
     4.1.7 End finish (Section on Ends of Specification A999/
     A999M),
     4.1.8 Authorization for repair of plate defects by welding
     and subsequent heat treatment without prior approval if such is
     intended (see 9.3),
     4.1.9 Specification designation,
     4.1.10 Special requirements,
     4.1.11 Statement invoking requirements of 16.4 if such is
     intended.
     4.1.12 Circumferential weld permissibility (see Section 16),
     4.1.13 Supplementary Requirements (S1 through S8),
     4.1.14 Applicable ASME Code if known,
     4.1.15 For ASME Code Section III applications, the service
     classification intended, and
     4.1.16 Certification requirements (see Section on Certification
     of Specification A999/A999M).
187. General Requirements
     5.1 Material furnished to this specification shall conform to
     the applicable requirements of the current edition of Specification
     A999/A999M unless otherwise provided herein.
188. Materials and Manufacture
     6.1 Materials:
     6.1.1 The steel plate material shall conform to the requirements
     of one of the grades of Specification A240/A240M,
     listed in Table 1, except as provided in 6.3.2.3.
     6.2 Welding:
     6.2.1 The joints shall be full penetration double-welded or
     single-welded butt joints employing fusion welding processes
     as defined under “Definitions,” ASME Boiler and Pressure
     Vessel Code, Section IX. This specification makes no provision
     for any difference in weld quality requirements regardless of
     the weld joint type employed (single or double) in making the
     weld. Where backing rings or strips are employed, the ring or
     strip material shall be of the same P-Number (Table QW-422
     of Section IX) as the plate being joined. Backing rings or strips
     shall be completely removed after welding, prior to any
     required radiography, and the exposed weld surface shall be
     examined visually for conformance to the requirements of
     6.2.3. Welds made by procedures employing backing strips or
     rings that remain in place are prohibited. Welding procedures,
     and welding operators shall be qualified in accordance with
     ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
     6.2.2 Except as provided in 6.2.2.1 and 6.2.2.2, welds shall
     be made in their entirety by processes involving the deposition
     of filler metal.
     6.2.2.1 For Class 4 pipe employing multiple passes, the
     root-pass may be without the addition of filler metal.
     6.2.2.2 For Class 4 pipe, the weld surface exposed inside the
     pipe may result from a single pass made from the inside of the
     pipe without the addition of filler metal.
     6.2.2.3 All single-welded pipe shall be completely radiographed.
     6.2.3 The weld surface on either side of the weld is
     permitted to be flush with the base plate or to have a reasonably
     uniform crown, not to exceed 1/8 in. [3 mm]. It is permitted at
     the option of the manufacturer or by agreement between the
     manufacturer and purchaser to remove any weld reinforcement.
     The contour of the reinforcement should be reasonably
     smooth and free from irregularities. The deposited metal shall
     be fused uniformly into the plate surface. No concavity of
     contour is permitted unless the resulting thickness of weld
     metal is equal to or greater than the minimum thickness of the
     adjacent base metal.
     6.2.4 Weld defects shall be repaired by removal to sound
     metal and rewelding. Subsequent heat treatment and examination
     (that is, visual, radiographic, and dye penetrant) shall be as
     required on the original welds.
     6.3 Heat Treatment:
     6.3.1 All pipe shall be furnished in the heat-treated condition
     in accordance with the requirements of Table 2.
     6.3.2 The purchase order shall specify one of the following
     conditions if the heat-treated condition specified in 6.3.1 is not
     desired by the purchaser:
     6.3.2.1 A final heat-treatment temperature under 1900 °F
     [1040 °C]—Each pipe supplied under this requirement shall be
     stenciled with the final heat-treatment temperature in degrees
     Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius after the suffix “HT.” Controlled
     structural or special service characteristics may be specified as
     a guide for the most suitable heat treatment.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-358/SA-358M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     574
     6.4 A solution annealing temperature above 1950 °F [1065
     °C] may impair the resistance to intergranular corrosion after
     subsequent exposure to sensitizing conditions in Grades 321,
     321H, 347, 347H, and 348. When specified by the purchaser, a
     lower temperature stabilization or re-solution anneal shall be
     used subsequent to the initial high temperature solution anneal
     (see Supplementary Requirement S5).
189. Chemical Composition
     7.1 The chemical composition of the plate shall conform to
     the requirements of the applicable specification and grade
     listed in Specification A240/A240M.
     7.2 Except for Grade S34751, the chemical composition of
     the welding filler metal shall conform to the requirements of
     the applicable AWS specification for the corresponding grade
     shown in Table 1, or shall conform to the chemical composition
     specified for the plate in Specification A240/A240M, or
     shall, subject to purchaser approval, be a filler metal more
     highly alloyed than the base metal when needed for corrosion
     resistance or other properties. Use of a filler metal other than
     that listed in Table 1 or conforming to the chemical composition
     specified for the plate in Specification A240/A240M shall
     be reported and the filler metal identified on the certificate of
     tests. When nitrogen and cerium are specified elements for the
     ordered grade, the method of analysis for these elements shall
     be a matter of agreement between the purchaser and the
     manufacturer.
     7.3 The chemical composition of the welding filler metal for
     Grade S34751 shall conform to the chemical composition
     specified for the plate in Specification A240/A240M. The
     method for analysis for nitrogen shall be a matter of agreement
     between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
190. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
     8.1 Permissible Variations—The dimensions at any point in
     a length of pipe shall not exceed the following:
     8.1.1 Outside Diameter—Based on circumferential
     measurement, 60.5 % of the specified outside diameter.
     8.1.2 Out-of-Roundness—Difference between major and minor
     outside diameters, 1 %.
     8.1.3 Alignment—Using a 10-ft [3-m] straightedge placed
     so that both ends are in contact with the pipe, 1/8 in. [3 mm]
     deviation from contact with the pipe.
     8.1.4 Thickness—The minimum wall thickness at any point
     in the pipe shall not be more than 0.01 in. [0.3 mm] under the
     nominal thickness.
191. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
     9.1 The finished pipe shall have a workmanlike finish.
     9.2 Repair of Plate Defects by Machining or Grinding—It is
     permitted to repair pipes showing slivers, or other surface
     defects, by machining or grounding inside or outside to a depth
     that ensures the removal of all included scale and slivers,
     provided that the wall thickness is not reduced below the
     specified minimum wall thickness. Machining or grinding shall
     TABLE 2 Annealing Requirements
     Grade or UNS DesignationA Heat Treating
     TemperatureB
     Cooling/Testing
     Requirements
     All grades not individually listed below: 1900 °F [1040 °C] C
     304H, 309S, 309Cb, 310S, 310Cb,
     321H, 347H, S22100, S28300,
     1900 °F [1040 °C] D
     N08020 1800-1850 °F [980-1010 °C] D
     N08367 2025 °F [1110 °C] D
     N08700 2000 °F [1095 °C] D
     N08810 2050 °F [1120 °C] D
     N08811 2100 °F [1150 °C] D
     N08904 2000 °F [1095 °C] D
     N08926 2010 °F [1100 °C] D
     S30600 2100 °F [1150 °C] D
     S30815 1920 °F [1050 °C] D
     S31254 2100 °F [1150 °C] D
     S31266 2100 °F [1150 °C] D
     S31727 1975–2175 °F [1080 to 1180 °C] D
     S32050 2100 °F [1150 °C] D
     S32053 1975–2175 °F [1080 to 1180 °C] D
     S32654 2100 °F [1150 °C] D
     S34565 2050 °F [1120 °C] D
     A New designation established in accordance with Practice E527 and SAE J1086.
     B Minimum, unless otherwise stated.
     C Quenched in water or rapidly cooled by other means, at a rate sufficient to prevent reprecipitation of carbides, as demonstrable by the capability of passing Practices
     A262, Practice E. The manufacturer is not required to run the test unless it is specified on the purchase order (see Supplementary Requirement S7). Note that Practices
     A262 requires the test to be performed on sensitized specimens in the low-carbon and stabilized types and on specimens representative of the as-shipped condition for
     other types. In the case of low-carbon types containing 3 % or more molybdenum, the applicability of the sensitizing treatment prior to testing shall be a matter for
     negotiation between the seller and the purchaser.
     D Quenched in water or rapidly cooled by other means.
     6.3.2.2 DELETED
     6.3.2.3 DELETED
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-358/SA-358M
     575
     follow inspection of the pipe as rolled, and shall be followed by
     supplementary visual inspection.
     9.3 Repair of Plate Defects by Welding—It is permitted to
     repair by welding defects that violate minimum wall thickness,
     but only with the approval of the purchaser. Areas shall be
     suitably prepared for welding with tightly closed defects
     removed by grinding. Open, clean defects, such as pits or
     impressions, may require no preparation. All welders, welding
     operators, and weld procedures shall be qualified to the ASME
     Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. Unless the
     purchaser specifies otherwise, pipe required to be heat treated
     under the provisions of 6.3, shall be heat treated or reheat
     treated following repair welding. Repaired lengths, where
     repair depth is greater than 1/4 of the thickness, shall be pressure
     tested or repressure tested after repair and heat treatment (if
     any). Repair welds shall also be examined by suitable nondestructive
     examination techniques, including any techniques
     specifically required of the primary weld.
     9.4 The pipe shall be free of scale and contaminating iron
     particles. Pickling, blasting, or surface finishing is not mandatory
     when pipe is bright annealed. The purchaser is permitted
     to request that a passivating treatment be applied.
192. Heat Analysis
     10.1 An analysis of each heat of steel shall be made by the
     plate manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements
     prescribed in Specification A240/A240M. The chemical
     composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements
     prescribed in Specification A240/A240M.
193. Product Analysis
     11.1 For each lot of 500 ft [150 m] of pipe or fraction
     thereof, analysis shall be made by the manufacturer from the
     finished pipe of the plate and of the weld deposit. Drillings for
     analysis may be taken from the mechanical test specimens. The
     results of these analyses shall be reported to the purchaser or
     the purchaser’s representative, and shall conform to the requirements
     of Section 7, subject to the product analysis
     tolerances of Table 1 in Specification A480/A480M.
     11.2 If the analysis of one of the tests specified in 9.1 does
     not conform to the requirements specified in Section 7,
     analyses shall be made on additional pipe of double the original
     number from the same lot, each of which shall conform to the
     requirements specified.
194. Tensile Requirements
     12.1 The plate used in making the pipe shall conform to the
     requirements as to tensile properties of the applicable specifications
     listed in Table 1. Tension tests made by the plate
     manufacturer shall qualify the plate material.
     12.2 The transverse tension test taken across the welded
     joint specimen shall have a tensile strength not less than the
     specified minimum tensile strength of the plate.
195. Transverse Guided-Bend Weld Tests
     13.1 Two bend test specimens shall be taken transversely
     from the pipe. Except as provided in 13.2, one shall be subject
     to a face guided-bend test and the second to a root guided-bend
     test. One specimen shall be bent with the inside surface of the
     pipe against the plunger, and the other with the outside surface
     against the plunger.
     13.2 For wall thicknesses over 3/8 in. [9.5 mm] but less than
     3/4 in. [19 mm] side-bend tests may be made instead of the face
     and root-bend tests. For specified wall thicknesses 3/4 in. [19
     mm] and over, both specimens shall be subjected to the
     side-bend tests. Side-bend specimens shall be bent so that one
     of the side surfaces becomes the convex surface of the bend
     specimen.
     13.3 The bend test shall be acceptable if no cracks or other
     defects exceeding 1/8 in. [3 mm] in any direction is present in
     the weld metal or between the weld and the pipe metal after
     bending. Cracks that originate along the edges of the specimen
     during testing, and that are less than 1/4 in. [6.5 mm] measured
     in any direction shall not be considered.
196. Test Specimens and Methods of Testing
     14.1 Transverse tension and bend test specimens shall be
     taken from the end of the finished pipe; the transverse tension
     and bend test specimens shall be flattened cold before final
     machining to size.
     14.2 As an alternative to the requirements of 14.1, it is
     permitted to take the test specimens from a test plate of the
     same material as the pipe that is attached to the end of the
     cylinder and welded as a prolongation of the pipe longitudinal
     seam.
     14.3 Tension test specimens shall be made in accordance
     with Section IX, Part QW, Paragraph QW-150 of the ASME
     Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and shall be one of the types
     shown in QW-462.1 of that code.
     14.3.1 Reduced-section specimens conforming to the requirements
     given in QW-462.1(b) may be used for tension tests
     on all thicknesses of pipe having outside diameter greater than
     3 in. [76 mm].
     14.3.2 Turned specimens conforming to the requirements of
     QW-462.1(d) may be used for tension tests.
     14.3.2.1 If turned specimens are used as given in 14.3.2.2
     and 14.3.2.3, one complete set shall be made for each required
     tension test.
     14.3.2.2 For thicknesses to and including 11/4 in. [32 mm], it
     is permitted to use a single turned specimen.
     14.3.2.3 For thicknesses over 11/4 in. [32 mm], multiple
     specimens shall be cut through the full thickness of the weld
     with their centers parallel to the material surface and not over
     1 in. [25 mm] apart. The centers of the specimens adjacent to
     material surfaces shall not exceed 5/8 in. [16 mm] from the
     surface.
     14.4 The test specimens shall not be cut from the pipe or test
     plate until after final heat treatment.
197. Mechanical Tests Required
     15.1 For the purposes of the tension and bend test
     requirements, the term “lot” shall mean all pipe of the same
     grade, permitted to include more than one heat of steel, within
     a 3/16-in [4.7-mm] range of thickness and welded to the same
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-358/SA-358M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     576
     weld procedure, and when heat treated, done so to the same
     heat-treating procedure and in the same furnace. The maximum
     lot size shall be 200 linear ft [60 m] of pipe.
     15.1.1 Transverse Tension Test—One test shall be made to
     represent each lot of finished pipe.
     15.1.2 Transverse Guided-Bend Weld Test—One test (two
     specimens) shall be made to represent each lot of finished pipe.
     15.2 Hydrostatic Test—Each length of pipe shall be subjected
     to a hydrostatic test in accordance with Specification
     A999/A999M, unless specifically exempted under the provision
     of 15.3. Pressure shall be held for a sufficient time to
     permit the inspector to examine the entire length of the welded
     seam.
     15.3 The purchaser, with the agreement of the manufacturer,
     is permitted to complete the hydrostatic test requirement with
     the system pressure test, performed at a pressure either lower
     or higher than the specification test pressure, but in no case
     shall the test pressure be lower than the system design pressure.
     Each length of pipe furnished without the completed manufacturer’s
     hydrostatic test shall include with the mandatory
     marking the letters “NH.”
198. Radiographic Examination
     16.1 For Classes 1, 3, and 4 pipe, all welded joints shall be
     completely examined by radiography.
     16.2 For Class 5 pipe, the welded joints shall be spot
     radiographed to the extent of not less than 12 in. [300 mm] of
     radiograph per 50 ft [15 m] of weld.
     16.3 For Classes 1, 3, and 4 pipe, radiographic examination
     shall be in accordance with the requirements of the ASME
     Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, latest edition,
     Paragraph UW-51.
     16.4 For Class 5 pipe, radiographic examination shall be in
     accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and
     Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, latest edition,
     Paragraph UW-52.
     16.5 Radiographic examination is permitted to be performed
     prior to heat treatment.
199. Lengths
     17.1 Circumferentially welded joints of the same quality as
     the longitudinal joints shall be permitted by agreement between
     the manufacturer and the purchaser.
200. Product Marking
     18.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
     A999/A999M, the markings on each length of pipe shall
     include the plate material designations as shown in Table 1, the
     marking requirements of 6.3 and 15.3, and Class 1, 2, 3, or 4,
     as appropriate (see 1.3).
     18.2 Bar Coding—In addition to the requirements in 18.1,
     bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary identification
     method. Bar coding should be consistent with the Automotive
     Industry Action Group (AIAG) standard prepared by the
     Primary Metals Subcommittee of the AIAG Bar Code Project
     Team.
201. Keywords
     19.1 arc welded steel pipe; austenitic stainless steel;
     chromium-nickel steel; fusion welded steel pipe; high temperature
     application; steel pipe; temperature service applications;
     high; welded steel pipe
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified in the
     purchase order. The purchaser is permitted to specify a different frequency of test or analysis than is
     provided in the supplementary requirement. Subject to agreement between the purchaser and
     manufacturer, it is permitted to modify the retest and retreatment provisions of these supplementary
     requirements.
     S1. Product Analysis
     S1.1 Product analysis shall be made on each length of pipe.
     Individual lengths failing to conform to the chemical composition
     requirements shall be rejected.
     S2. Tension and Bend Tests
     S2.1 Tension tests (Section 12) and bend tests (Section 13)
     shall be made on specimens to represent each length of pipe.
     Failure of any test specimen to meet the requirements shall be
     cause for the rejection of the pipe length represented.
     S3. Penetrant Oil and Powder Examination
     S3.1 All welded joints shall be subjected to examination by
     a penetrant oil and powder method. The details of the method
     and the disposition of flaws detected shall be a matter for
     agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
     S4. Ferrite Control in Weld Deposits
     S4.1 The ferrite content of the deposited weld metal in any
     length of pipe shall be determined. The procedural details
     pertaining to this subject (that is, welding; plate and weld
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-358/SA-358M
     577
     deposit chemistry; testing equipment and method; number and
     location of test sites; and ferrite control limits) shall be a matter
     for agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
     S5. Stabilizing Heat Treatment
     S5.1 Subsequent to the heat treatment required in 6.3,
     Grades 321, 321H, 347, 347H, and 348 shall be given a
     stabilization heat treatment at a temperature lower than that
     used for the initial solution annealing heat treatment. The
     temperature of stabilization heat treatment shall be at a
     temperature as agreed upon between the purchaser and manufacturer.
     S6. Intergranular Corrosion Test
     S6.1 When specified, material shall pass intergranular corrosion
     tests conducted by the manufacturer in accordance with
     Practices A262, Practice E.
     NOTE S1—Practice E requires testing on the sensitized condition for
     low carbon or stabilized grades, and on the as-shipped condition for other
     grades.
     S6.2 A stabilization heat treatment in accordance with
     Supplementary Requirement S5 may be necessary and is
     permitted in order to meet this requirement for the grades
     containing titanium or columbium.
     S7. In-Process Heat Treatments
     S7.1 For H grades, separate solution treatments are required
     for solution annealing. In-process heat treatments are not
     permitted as a substitute for separate solution annealing.
     S8. ASME Section III or Section VIII, Division 1, Construction
     S8.1 Products furnished under this specification that are
     intended for application under the rules of Section III or
     Section VIII, Division 1, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
     Vessel Code shall be manufactured by holders of the appropriate
     ASME Certificate of Authorization and Certification Mark.
     The product is subject to all applicable requirements of Section
     III or Section VIII, Division 1, including welding, heat
     treatment, nondestructive examination, authorized inspection
     at the point of manufacture, and application of the Certification
     Mark.
     S8.2 The applicable ASME Partial Data Report form,
     signed by an Authorized Inspector or Authorized Nuclear
     Inspector and a material test report shall be furnished for each
     lot of pipe.
     S8.3 The welded joints shall be full penetration butt welds
     as obtained by double welding or by other means that will
     obtain the same quality of deposited weld metal on the inside
     and outside. Welds using metal backing strips that remain in
     place are prohibited.
     S8.4 In addition to the requirements of 15.1, for pipe that is
     not heat treated, or that is heat treated in a continuous furnace,
     a lot shall consist of each 200 ft [60 m] or fraction thereof, of
     all pipe of the same heat of plate starting material of the same
     thickness, subjected to the same heat treatment. For pipe that is
     heat treated in a batch-type furnace that is automatically
     controlled within a 50 °F [25 °C] range and is equipped with
     recording pyrometers so that the heating records are available,
     a lot shall be defined as for continuous furnace heat treatment.
     Each length of pipe shall be so marked as to identify each such
     piece of pipe with the lot and the material test report.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ð19Þ
     SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON AND FERRITIC ALLOY
     STEEL FORGED AND BORED PIPE FOR
     HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
     SA-369/SA-369M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A369/A369M-18.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-369/SA-369M
     579
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-369/SA-369M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     580
     Standard Specification for
     Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for
     High-Temperature Service
202. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers heavy-wall carbon and alloy
     steel pipe (Note 1) made from turned and bored forgings and is
     intended for high-temperature service. Pipe ordered under this
     specification shall be suitable for bending and other forming
     operations and for fusion welding. Selection will depend on
     design, service conditions, mechanical properties and hightemperature
     characteristics.
     NOTE 1—The use of the word “pipe” throughout the several sections of
     this specification is used in the broad sense and intended to mean pipe
     headers, or leads.
     NOTE 2—The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has
     been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal
     diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.”
     1.2 Several grades of ferritic steels are covered. Their
     compositions are given in Table 1.
     1.3 Supplementary requirements (S1 to S6) of an optional
     nature are provided. These supplementary requirements call for
     additional tests to be made, and when desired shall be so stated
     in the order, together with the number of such tests required.
     1.4 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
     SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
     system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
     shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
     from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the
     standard. The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M”
     designation of this specification is specified in the order.
     1.5 This international standard was developed in accordance
     with internationally recognized principles on standardization
     established in the Decision on Principles for the
     Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
     issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
     Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
203. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A999/A999M Specification for General Requirements for
     Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe
     E290 Test Methods for Bend Testing of Material for Ductility
     E381 Method of Macroetch Testing Steel Bars, Billets,
     Blooms, and Forgings
     2.2 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
     Section IX
     2.3 ANSI Standard:
     B 46.1 Surface Texture
     2.4 AWS Specifications:
     A5.5/A5.5M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
     for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
     A5.23/A5.23M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
     and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
     A5.28/A5.28M Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
     for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
     A5.29/A5.29M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored
     Arc Welding
204. Ordering Information
     3.1 Orders for material to this specification should include
     the following, as required, to describe the desired material
     adequately:
     3.1.1 Quantity (feet, centimetres, or number of lengths),
     3.1.2 Name of material (forged and bored pipe),
     3.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
     3.1.4 Size (inside diameter and minimum wall thickness),
     3.1.5 Length (Permissible Variations in Length Section of
     Specification A999/A999M),
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-369/SA-369M
     581
     3.1.6 Verification of tensile and hardness properties at
     mid-thickness for Grade FP91 Type 1 and Type 2 (9.2),
     3.1.7 End finish (13),
     3.1.8 Optional requirements (Sections 8, Supplementary
     Requirements S1 to S6; 13.2),
     3.1.9 Test report required (Certification Section of Specification
     A999/A999M),
     3.1.10 Specification designation, and
     3.1.11 Special requirements or exceptions to this specification.
205. General Requirements
     4.1 Material furnished under this specification shall conform
     to the applicable requirements of the current edition of
     Specification A999/A999M, unless otherwise provided herein.
206. Materials and Manufacture
     5.1 Discard:
     5.1.1 A sufficient discard shall be made from each ingot to
     secure freedom from injurious defects. The steel shall have a
     homogeneous structure.
     5.2 Manufacture:
     5.2.1 Material for forging shall consist of ingots or of
     blooms, billets, or solid-rolled bars forged or rolled from an
     ingot, and cut to the required length by a process that will not
     produce injurious defects in the forging.
     5.2.2 The material shall be forged (Note 3) by hammering or
     pressing, and shall be brought as nearly as practicable to the
     finished shape and size by hot working.
     NOTE 3—The cross-sectional area of the solid forging shall have a
     reduction by forging or by rolling and forging from that of the ingot in the
     ratio of not less than 3 to 1.
     5.2.3 Unless otherwise specified, the final forging operation
     shall be followed by a treatment suitable to the grade as
     specified in 5.4.
     TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
     Grade Composition, %
     FPA FPB FP1 FP2
     Carbon 0.25 max 0.30 max 0.10–0.20 0.10–0.20
     Manganese 0.27–0.93 0.29–1.06 0.30–0.80 0.30–0.61
     Phosphorus, max 0.035 0.035 0.025 0.025
     Sulfur, max 0.035 0.035 0.025 0.025
     Silicon 0.10 min 0.10 min 0.10–0.50 0.10–0.30
     Chromium … … … 0.50–0.81
     Molybdenum … … 0.44–0.65 0.44–0.65
     Grade FP5 FP9 FP11 FP12
     Carbon 0.15 max 0.15 max 0.05–0.15 0.05–0.15
     Manganese 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.61
     Phosphorus, max 0.025 0.030 0.025 0.025
     Sulfur, max 0.025 0.030 0.025 0.025
     Silicon 0.50 max 0.50–1.00 0.50–1.00 0.50 max
     Chromium 4.00–6.00 8.00–10.00 1.00–1.50 0.80–1.25
     Molybdenum 0.45–0.65 0.90–1.10 0.44–0.65 0.44–0.65
     Grade FP21 FP22 FP91 FP92
     Type 1 Type 2
     Carbon 0.07–0.13
     Heat 0.05–0.15 0.05–0.15 0.08–0.12 0.08–0.12
     Product … … … 0.07–0.13
     Manganese 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.50A 0.30–0.60
     Phosphorus, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.020A 0.020
     Sulfur, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.005A 0.010
     Silicon 0.50 max 0.50 max 0.20–0.50 0.20–0.40A 0.50 max
     Chromium 2.65–3.35 1.90–2.60 8.00–9.50 8.0–9.50A 8.50–9.50
     Molybdenum 0.30–0.60
     Heat 0.80–1.06 0.87–1.13 0.85–1.05 0.85–1.05
     Product … … … 0.80–1.05
     Others: W 1.50–2.00
     Ni 0.40 max 0.20 maxA V 0.15–0.25
     V Cb 0.04–0.09
     Heat 0.18–0.25 0.18–0.25
     Product … 0.16–0.27
     Cb N 0.030–0.070
     Heat 0.06–0.10 0.06–0.10
     Product … 0.05–0.11
     N 0.03–0.07 0.035–0.070A Ni 0.40 max
     Al 0.02 max 0.020 maxA Al 0.02 max
     Ti 0.01 max 0.01 maxA Ti 0.01 max
     Zr 0.01 max 0.01 maxA Zr 0.01 max
     Sn … 0.010 maxA B 0.001–0.006
     Sb … 0.003 maxA
     B … 0.001 maxA
     Cu … 0.10 maxA
     W … 0.05 maxA
     As … 0.010 maxA
     N/Al … $ 4.0
     AApplies to both heat and product analyses.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-369/SA-369M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     582
     5.3 Machining:
     5.3.1 All forgings shall have both the inner and outer
     surfaces machined.
     5.3.2 After heat treatment, the pipe shall be machined to a
     finish with a roughness value no greater than 250-µin. [6.4-µm]
     arithmetical average deviation (AA), terms as defined in ANSI
     B 46.1-1962, unless otherwise specified.
     5.4 Heat Treatment:
     5.4.1 All pipe of the grades shown in Table 1 other than
     FPA, FPB, FP1, FP2, FP12, FP91 Type 1 and Type 2, and FP92
     shall be reheated and furnished in the full-annealed or normalized
     and tempered condition. If furnished in the normalized
     and tempered condition (Note 4), the temperature for tempering
     shall be 1250 °F [680 °C] or higher for Grades FP5, FP9,
     FP21, and FP22, and 1200 °F [650 °C] or higher for Grades
     FP36 and FP11.
     NOTE 4—It is recommended that the temperature for tempering should
     be at least 100 °F [50 °C] above the intended service temperature;
     consequently, the purchaser should advise the manufacturer if the service
     temperature is to be over 1100 °F [600 °C].
     5.4.2 Pipe in Grades FPA and FPB as a final heat treatment
     shall be either normalized or shall be given a stress relieving
     treatment at 1200 to 1300 °F [650 to 705 °C]. Pipe in Grades
     FP1, FP2, and FP12, as a final heat treatment shall be given a
     stress-relieving treatment at 1200 to 1300 °F [650 to 705 °C].
     NOTE 5—Certain of the ferritic steels covered by this specification tend
     to harden if cooled rapidly from above their critical temperature. Some
     will air harden, that is, become hardened to an undesirable degree when
     cooled in air from high temperatures. Therefore, operations involving
     heating such steels above their critical temperatures, such as welding,
     hot-bending and other forming operations, should be followed by suitable
     heat treatment.
     5.4.3 Except when Supplementary Requirement S6 is specified
     by the purchaser, Grade FP91 Type 1 and Type 2 shall be
     normalized and tempered by reheating within the temperature
     range from 1900 to 1975 °F [1040 to 1080 °C], followed by air
     cooling and tempering in the temperature range of 1350 to
     1470 °F [730 to 800 °C].
     5.4.4 Except when Supplementary Requirement S6 is specified
     by the purchaser, Grade FP92 shall be normalized and
     tempered by reheating within the temperature range of 1900 to
     1975 °F [1040 to 1080 °C], followed by air cooling and
     tempering in the temperature range of 1350 to 1470 °F [730 to
     800 °C].
     5.5 Repair by Welding:
     5.5.1 Weld repair shall be permitted only subject to the
     approval of the purchaser and in accordance with Specification
     A999/A999M.
     5.5.2 All repair welds in FP91 shall be made with one of the
     following welding processes and consumables: SMAW, A5.5/
     A5.5M E90XX-B9; SAW, A5.23/A5.23M EB9 + neutral flux;
     GTAW, A5.28/A5.28M ER90S-B9; and FCAWA5.29/A5.29M
     E91T1-B9. In addition, the sum of the Ni + Mn content of all
     welding consumables used to weld repair FP91 Type 1 and
     Type 2 shall not exceed 1.0 %.
     5.5.3 All repair welds in FP92 shall be made using welding
     consumables meeting the chemical requirements for the grade
     in Table 1.
     5.5.4 After weld repair, Grades FP91 Type 1 and Type 2 and
     FP92 shall be heat treated at 1350–1470 °F [730–800 °C].
207. Chemical Composition
     6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
     chemical composition prescribed in Table 1.
208. Heat Analysis
     7.1 An analysis of each heat of steel shall be made by the
     steel manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements
     specified. If secondary melting processes are employed,
     the heat analysis shall be obtained from one remelted ingot or
     the product of one remelted ingot of each primary melt. The
     chemical composition thus determined, or that determined
     from a product analysis made by the tubular product
     manufacturer, shall conform to the requirements specified.
     7.2 In the case of large ingots poured from two or more
     heats, the weighted average of the chemical determinations of
     the several heats, made in accordance with 7.1, shall conform
     to the requirements specified in Section 6.
209. Product Analysis
     8.1 At the request of the purchaser, a product analysis shall
     be made by the manufacturer on every heat.
     8.2 The results of these analyses shall be reported to the
     purchaser or his representative, and shall conform to the
     requirements specified in Section 6.
     8.3 If the analysis of one of the tests specified in Section 7
     or Section 8 does not conform to the requirements specified in
     Section 6 an analysis of each billet or pipe from the same heat
     may be made, and all billets or pipes conforming to the
     requirements shall be accepted.
210. Tensile Requirements
     9.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
     tensile properties prescribed in Table 2. Tests for acceptance
     shall be made after final heat treatment of the forging.
     9.2 For Grade FP91 Type 1 and Type 2, when requested by
     the purchaser, the tensile and hardness properties shall be met
     and verified on material taken from the half-thickness location.
211. Mechanical Tests Required
     10.1 Transverse or Longitudinal Tension Test—One test
     shall be made on a specimen from one end of one length of
     pipe representing each heat in each heat-treatment lot.
     10.2 Flattening Test—For pipe NPS 14 or less, and diameter
     to wall thickness ratios of more than 7.0, a flattening test shall
     be carried out in accordance with Specification A999/A999M.
     A test shall be carried out on a specimen taken from one end of
     each length of pipe.
     10.3 Bend Test—For pipe larger than NPS 14 or NPS where
     diameters to wall thickness ratio is 7.0 or less, a bend test shall
     be carried out in accordance with Test Methods E290. Unless
     otherwise specified, the test specimens shall be taken in a
     transverse direction. The diameter of the pin shall be 2/3 t for
     longitudinal specimens or 11/3 t for transverse specimens,
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-369/SA-369M
     583
     where t is the specimen thickness. The bend test specimens
     shall be bent at room temperature through 180° without
     cracking. One bend test shall be taken from one end of each
     length of pipe.
212. Workmanship
     11.1 The pipe shall conform to the sizes and shapes specified
     by the purchaser.
213. Ends
     12.1 Pipe ends shall be machined as specified in the
     purchase order.
214. Finish
     13.1 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight and shall
     have a workmanlike finish.
     13.2 Repair of defects by welding shall be permitted only
     subject to the approval of the purchaser. Defects shall be
     thoroughly chipped or ground out before welding. Only qualified
     operators and procedures in accordance with the ASME
     Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, shall be used.
     Local or full heat treatment in accordance with 5.4 shall follow
     welding. Local grinding following welding and retreating shall
     be considered as meeting the requirements of 5.3.
215. Product Marking
     14.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
     A999/A999M, the marking shall include the wall thickness,
     piece mark, length, and additional symbol “S” if the pipe
     conforms to the supplementary requirements specified in
     Supplementary Requirements S1 to S5, and the heat number or
     the manufacturer’s number by which the heat can be identified.
     Indentation stamping, instead of stenciling, will be permitted
     only with the written approval of the purchaser.
     14.2 For FP91, additional marking shall include the appropriate
     Type.
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified in the
     purchase order. The purchaser may specify a different frequency of test or analysis than is provided
     in the supplementary requirement. Subject to agreement between the purchaser and manufacturer,
     retest and retreatment provisions of these supplementary requirements may also be modified.
     S1. Additional Tension Test
     S1.1 An additional tension test shall be made on a specimen
     from one or each end of each pipe. If this supplementary
     requirement is specified, the number of tests per pipe required
     shall be specified. If a specimen from any length fails to meet
     the required tensile properties (tensile, yield, and elongation),
     that length shall be rejected subject to retreatment in accordance
     with Specification A999/A999M and satisfactory retest.
     TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
     Grade FPA FPB FP1, FP2 FP12 FP91 Type 1
     and Type 2
     FP92 All Others
     Tensile strength, min; ksi [MPa]
     Yield strength, min; ksi [MPa]
     48 [330]
     30 [210]
     60 [415]
     35 [240]
     55 [380]
     30 [210]
     60 [415]
     32 [220]
     85 [585]
     60 [415]
     90 [620]
     64 [440]
     60 [415]
     30 [210]
     Elongation Requirements
     Grade
     FPA FPB
     FP91 Type 1 and Type 2
     and FP92
     All Others
     Longitudinal
     Transverse
     Longitudinal
     Transverse
     Longitudinal
     Transverse
     Longitudinal
     Transverse
     Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, %:
     Basic minimum elongation for wall 5/16 in. [8 mm]
     and over in thickness, strip tests, and for all small
     sizes tested in full-section
     35 25 30 17 27 18 30 20
     When standard round 2-in. or 50-mm gage length
     test specimen is used
     28 20 22 12 20 13 22 14
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-369/SA-369M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     584
     S2. Additional Flattening or Bend Tests
     S2.1 The appropriate flattening or bend test may be made on
     specimens from both ends of each length of pipe. Crop ends
     may be used. If the specimen from either end of any length
     fails to conform to the specific requirement, that length shall be
     rejected.
     S3. Ultrasonic Tests
     S3.1 Each pipe shall be ultrasonically tested to determine its
     soundness throughout the entire length of the pipe. Until
     suitable standards are established, the basis for rejection of
     material shall be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer
     and purchaser.
     S4. Hydrostatic Test
     S4.1 A hydrostatic pressure test shall be applied as agreed
     upon by the manufacturer and purchaser.
     S5. Metal Structure and Etching Tests
     S5.1 The steel shall be homogeneous as shown by etching
     tests conducted in accordance with the appropriate portions of
     Method E381. Etching tests shall be made on a cross section
     from one end or both ends of each pipe and shall show sound
     and reasonably uniform material free of injurious laminations,
     cracks, and similar objectionable defects. If this supplementary
     requirement is specified, the number of tests per pipe required
     shall also be specified. If a specimen from any length shows
     objectionable defects, the length shall be rejected, subject to
     removal of the defective end and subsequent retests indicating
     the remainder of the length to be sound and reasonably uniform
     material.
     S6. Alternative Heat Treatment—Grades FP91 Type 1
     and Type 2 and FP92
     S6.1 Grades FP91 Type 1 and Type 2 and FP92 shall be
     normalized in accordance with 5.4.3 or 5.4.4, respectively, and
     tempered at a temperature, to be specified by the purchaser,
     less than 1350 °F [730 °C]. It shall be the purchaser’s
     responsibility to subsequently temper in the range of 1350 to
     1470 °F [730 to 800 °C]. All mechanical tests shall be made on
     material heat treated in accordance with 5.4.3 or 5.4.4, respectively.
     The certification shall reference this supplementary
     requirement indicating the tempering temperature applied. The
     notation “S6’’ shall be included with the required marking of
     the pipe.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     TEST METHODS AND DEFINITIONS FOR MECHANICAL
     TESTING OF STEEL PRODUCTS
     SA-370
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A370-05.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
     585
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     586
     TEST METHODS AND DEFINITIONS FOR
     MECHANICAL TESTING OF STEEL PRODUCTS
     SA-370
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A 370-05)
216. Scope
     1.1 These test methods cover procedures and definitions
     for the mechanical testing of wrought and cast steels, stainless
     steels, and related alloys. The various mechanical tests
     herein described are used to determine properties required
     in the product specifications. Variations in testing methods
     are to be avoided, and standard methods of testing are to
     be followed to obtain reproducible and comparable results.
     In those cases in which the testing requirements for certain
     products are unique or at variance with these general procedures,
     the product specification testing requirements shall
     control.
     1.2 The following mechanical tests are described:
     Sections
     Tension 5 to 13
     Bend 14
     Hardness 15
     Brinell 16
     Rockwell 17
     Portable 18
     Impact 19 to 28
     Keywords 29
     1.3 Annexes covering details peculiar to certain products
     are appended to these test methods as follows:
     Annex
     Bar Products A1.1
     Tubular Products Annex A2
     Fasteners Annex A3
     Round Wire Products Annex A4
     Significance of Notched-Bar Impact Testing Annex A5
     Converting Percentage Elongation of Round Specimens Annex A6
     to Equivalents for Flat Specimens
     Testing Multi-Wire Strand Annex A7
     Rounding of Test Data Annex A8
     Methods for Testing Steel Reinforcing Bars Annex A9
     Procedure for Use and Control of Heat-Cycle Simulation Annex A10
     1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be
     regarded as the standard.
     1.5 When this document is referenced in a metric product
     specification, the yield and tensile values may be determined
     in inch-pound (ksi) units then converted into SI
     (MPa) units. The elongation determined in inch-pound
     gage lengths of 2 or 8 in. may be reported in SI unit
     gage lengths of 50 or 200 mm, respectively, as applicable.
     Conversely, when this document is referenced in an inchpound
     product specification, the yield and tensile values
     may be determined in SI units then converted into inchpound
     units. The elongation determined in SI unit gage
     lengths of 50 or 200 mm may be reported in inch-pound
     gage lengths of 2 or 8 in., respectively, as applicable.
     1.6 Attention is directed to Practices A 880 and E 1595
     when there may be a need for information on criteria for
     evaluation of testing laboratories.
     1.7 This standard does not purport to address all of
     the safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is
     the responsibility of the user of this standard to establish
     appropriate safety and health practices and determine the
     applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
217. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A 703/A 703M Specification for Steel Castings, General
     Requirements, for Pressure-Containing Parts
     A 781/A 781M Specification for Castings, Steel and Alloy,
     Common Requirements, for General Industrial Use
     A 833 Practice for Indentation Hardness of Metallic Materials
     by Comparison Hardness Testers
     A 880 Practice for Criteria for Use in Evaluation of Testing
     Laboratories and Organizations for Examination and
     Inspection of Steel, Stainless Steel, and Related Alloys
     E 4 Practices for Force Verification of Testing Machines
     E 6 Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical
     Testing
     E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
     587
     E 8MTest Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
     [Metric]
     E 10 Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials
     E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
     Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials
     E 23 Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of
     Metallic Materials
     E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
     Determine Conformance with Specifications
     E 83 Practice for Verification and Classification of Extensometer
     System
     E 110 Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Metallic
     Materials by Portable Hardness Testers
     E 190 Test Method for Guided Bend Test for Ductility of
     Welds
     E 290 Test Method for Bend Testing of Material for Ductility
     E 1595 Practice for Evaluating the Performance of
     Mechanical Testing Laboratories
     2.2 ASME Document:
     ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII,
     Division I, Part UG-8
218. General Precautions
     3.1 Certain methods of fabrication, such as bending,
     forming, and welding, or operations involving heating, may
     affect the properties of the material under test. Therefore,
     the product specifications cover the stage of manufacture at
     which mechanical testing is to be performed. The properties
     shown by testing prior to fabrication may not necessarily
     be representative of the product after it has been completely
     fabricated.
     3.2 Improper machining or preparation of test specimens
     may give erroneous results. Care should be exercised
     to assure good workmanship in machining. Improperly
     machined specimens should be discarded and other specimens
     substituted.
     3.3 Flaws in the specimen may also affect results. If
     any test specimen develops flaws, the retest provision of
     the applicable product specification shall govern.
     3.4 If any test specimen fails because of mechanical
     reasons such as failure of testing equipment or improper
     specimen preparation, it may be discarded and another
     specimen taken.
219. Orientation of Test Specimens
     4.1 The terms “longitudinal test” and “transverse test”
     are used only in material specifications for wrought products
     and are not applicable to castings. When such reference
     is made to a test coupon or test specimen, the following
     definitions apply:
     4.1.1 Longitudinal Test, unless specifically defined
     otherwise, signifies that the lengthwise axis of the specimen
     is parallel to the direction of the greatest extension of the
     steel during rolling or forging. The stress applied to a
     longitudinal tension test specimen is in the direction of the
     greatest extension, and the axis of the fold of a longitudinal
     bend test specimen is at right angles to the direction of
     greatest extension (Fig. 1, Fig. 2a, and 2b).
     4.1.2 Transverse Test, unless specifically defined
     otherwise, signifies that the lengthwise axis of the specimen
     is at right angles to the direction of the greatest extension
     of the steel during rolling or forging. The stress applied
     to a transverse tension test specimen is at right angles to
     the greatest extension, and the axis of the fold of a transverse
     bend test specimen is parallel to the greatest extension
     (Fig. 1).
     4.2 The terms “radial test” and “tangential test” are
     used in material specifications for some wrought circular
     products and are not applicable to castings. When such
     reference is made to a test coupon or test specimen, the
     following definitions apply:
     4.2.1 Radial Test, unless specifically defined otherwise,
     signifies that the lengthwise axis of the specimen is
     perpendicular to the axis of the product and coincident
     with one of the radii of a circle drawn with a point on the
     axis of the product as a center (Fig. 2a).
     4.2.2 Tangential Test, unless specifically defined
     otherwise, signifies that the lengthwise axis of the specimen
     is perpendicular to a plane containing the axis of the product
     and tangent to a circle drawn with a point on the axis
     of the product as a center (Fig. 2a, 2b, 2c, and 2d).
     TENSION TEST
220. Description
     5.1 The tension test related to the mechanical testing
     of steel products subjects a machined or full-section specimen
     of the material under examination to a measured load
     sufficient to cause rupture. The resulting properties sought
     are defined in Terminology E 6.
     5.2 In general, the testing equipment and methods are
     given in Test Methods E 8. However, there are certain
     exceptions to Test Methods E 8 practices in the testing of
     steel, and these are covered in these test methods.
221. Terminology
     6.1 For definitions of terms pertaining to tension testing,
     including tensile strength, yield point, yield strength,
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     588
     elongation, and reduction of area, reference should be made
     to Terminology E 6.
222. Testing Apparatus and Operations
     7.1 Loading Systems — There are two general types of
     loading systems, mechanical (screw power) and hydraulic.
     These differ chiefly in the variability of the rate of load
     application. The older screw power machines are limited
     to a small number of fixed free running crosshead speeds.
     Some modern screw power machines, and all hydraulic
     machines permit stepless variation throughout the range
     of speeds.
     7.2 The tension testing machine shall be maintained in
     good operating condition, used only in the proper loading
     range, and calibrated periodically in accordance with the
     latest revision of Practices E 4.
     NOTE 1— Many machines are equipped with stress-strain recorders
     for autographic plotting of stress-strain curves. It should be noted that
     some recorders have a load measuring component entirely separate from
     the load indicator of the testing machine. Such recorders are calibrated
     separately.
     7.3 Loading — It is the function of the gripping or
     holding device of the testing machine to transmit the load
     from the heads of the machine to the specimen under
     test. The essential requirement is that the load shall be
     transmitted axially. This implies that the centers of the
     action of the grips shall be in alignment, insofar as practicable,
     with the axis of the specimen at the beginning and
     during the test and that bending or twisting be held to a
     minimum. For specimens with a reduced section, gripping
     of the specimen shall be restricted to the grip section. In
     the case of certain sections tested in full size, nonaxial
     loading is unavoidable and in such cases shall be permissible.
     7.4 Speed of Testing — The speed of testing shall not
     be greater than that at which load and strain readings can
     be made accurately. In production testing, speed of testing
     is commonly expressed: (1) in terms of free running crosshead
     speed (rate of movement of the crosshead of the
     testing machine when not under load), (2) in terms of rate
     of separation of the two heads of the testing machine under
     load, (3) in terms of rate of stressing the specimen, or (4)
     in terms of rate of straining the specimen. The following
     limitations on the speed of testing are recommended as
     adequate for most steel products:
     NOTE 2 — Tension tests using closed-loop machines (with feedback
     control of rate) should not be performed using load control, as this mode
     of testing will result in acceleration of the crosshead upon yielding and
     elevation of the measured yield strength.
     7.4.1 Any convenient speed of testing may be used
     up to one half the specified yield point or yield strength.
     When this point is reached, the free-running rate of separation
     of the crossheads shall be adjusted so as not to exceed
     1/16 in. per min per inch of reduced section, or the distance
     between the grips for test specimens not having reduced
     sections. This speed shall be maintained through the yield
     point or yield strength. In determining the tensile strength,
     the free-running rate of separation of the heads shall not
     exceed 1/2 in. per min per inch of reduced section, or the
     distance between the grips for test specimens not having
     reduced sections. In any event, the minimum speed of
     testing shall not be less than 1/10 the specified maximum
     rates for determining yield point or yield strength and
     tensile strength.
     7.4.2 It shall be permissible to set the speed of the
     testing machine by adjusting the free running crosshead
     speed to the above specified values, inasmuch as the rate
     of separation of heads under load at these machine settings
     is less than the specified values of free running crosshead
     speed.
     7.4.3 As an alternative, if the machine is equipped
     with a device to indicate the rate of loading, the speed of
     the machine from half the specified yield point or yield
     strength through the yield point or yield strength may be
     adjusted so that the rate of stressing does not exceed 100
     000 psi (690 MPa)/min. However, the minimum rate of
     stressing shall not be less than 10 000 psi (70 MPa)/min.
223. Test Specimen Parameters
     8.1 Selection — Test coupons shall be selected in
     accordance with the applicable product specifications.
     8.1.1 Wrought Steels — Wrought steel products are
     usually tested in the longitudinal direction, but in some
     cases, where size permits and the service justifies it, testing
     is in the transverse, radial, or tangential directions (see Fig.
     1 and Fig. 2).
     8.1.2 Forged Steels— For open die forgings, the
     metal for tension testing is usually provided by allowing
     extensions or prolongations on one or both ends of the
     forgings, either on all or a representative number as provided
     by the applicable product specifications. Test specimens
     are normally taken at mid-radius. Certain product
     specifications permit the use of a representative bar or the
     destruction of a production part for test purposes. For ring
     or disk-like forgings test metal is provided by increasing
     the diameter, thickness, or length of the forging. Upset
     disk or ring forgings, which are worked or extended by
     forging in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the forging,
     usually have their principal extension along concentric
     circles and for such forgings tangential tension specimens
     are obtained from extra metal on the periphery or end of
     the forging. For some forgings, such as rotors, radial tension
     tests are required. In such cases the specimens are cut
     or trepanned from specified locations.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
     589
     8.1.3 Cast Steels — Test coupons for castings from
     which tension test specimens are prepared shall be in accordance
     with the requirements of Specifications
     A 703/A 703M or A 781/A 781M, as applicable.
     8.2 Size and Tolerances — Test specimens shall be the
     full thickness or section of material as-rolled, or may be
     machined to the form and dimensions shown in Figs. 3–6,
     inclusive. The selection of size and type of specimen is
     prescribed by the applicable product specification. Full
     section specimens shall be tested in 8 in. (200 mm) gage
     length unless otherwise specified in the product specification.
     8.3 Procurement of Test Specimens — Specimens shall
     be sheared, blanked, sawed, trepanned, or oxygen-cut from
     portions of the material. They are usually machined so as
     to have a reduced cross section at mid-length in order to
     obtain uniform distribution of the stress over the cross
     section and to localize the zone of fracture. When test
     coupons are sheared, blanked, sawed, or oxygen-cut, care
     shall be taken to remove by machining all distorted, coldworked,
     or heat-affected areas from the edges of the section
     used in evaluating the test.
     8.4 Aging of Test Specimens — Unless otherwise specified,
     it shall be permissible to age tension test specimens.
     The time-temperature cycle employed must be such that
     the effects of previous processing will not be materially
     changed. It may be accomplished by aging at room temperature
     24 to 48 h, or in shorter time at moderately elevated
     temperatures by boiling in water, heating in oil or in an
     oven.
     8.5 Measurement of Dimensions of Test Specimens:
     8.5.1 Standard Rectangular Tension Test Specimens—
     These forms of specimens are shown in Fig. 3.
     To determine the cross-sectional area, the center width
     dimension shall be measured to the nearest 0.005 in. (0.13
     mm) for the 8 in. (200 mm) gage length specimen and
     0.001 in. (0.025 mm) for the 2 in. (50 mm) gage length
     specimen in Fig. 3. The center thickness dimension shall
     be measured to the nearest 0.001 in. for both specimens.
     8.5.2 Standard Round Tension Test Specimens —
     These forms of specimens are shown in Fig. 4 and Fig.
224. To determine the cross-sectional area, the diameter shall
     be measured at the center of the gage length to the nearest
     0.001 in. (0.025 mm) (see Table 1).
     8.6 General— Test specimens shall be either substantially
     full size or machined, as prescribed in the product
     specifications for the material being tested.
     8.6.1 Improperly prepared test specimens often cause
     unsatisfactory test results. It is important, therefore, that
     care be exercised in the preparation of specimens, particularly
     in the machining, to assure good workmanship.
     8.6.2 It is desirable to have the cross-sectional area
     of the specimen smallest at the center of the gage length
     to ensure fracture within the gage length. This is provided
     for by the taper in the gage length permitted for each of
     the specimens described in the following sections.
     8.6.3 For brittle materials it is desirable to have fillets
     of large radius at the ends of the gage length.
225. Plate-Type Specimen
     9.1 The standard plate-type test specimen is shown in
     Fig. 3. This specimen is used for testing metallic materials
     in the form of plate, structural and bar-size shapes, and
     flat material having a nominal thickness of 3/16 in. (5 mm)
     or over. When product specifications so permit, other types
     of specimens may be used.
     NOTE 3— When called for in the product specification, the 8 in. gage
     length specimen of Fig. 3 may be used for sheet and strip material.
226. Sheet-Type Specimen
     10.1 The standard sheet-type test specimen is shown
     in Fig. 3. This specimen is used for testing metallic materials
     in the form of sheet, plate, flat wire, strip, band, and
     hoop ranging in nominal thickness from 0.005 to 3/4 in.
     (0.13 to 19 mm). When product specifications so permit,
     other types of specimens may be used, as provided in
     Section 9 (see Note 3).
227. Round Specimens
     11.1 The standard 0.500 in. (12.5 mm) diameter round
     test specimen shown in Fig. 4 is used quite generally for
     testing metallic materials, both cast and wrought.
     11.2 Fig. 4 also shows small size specimens proportional
     to the standard specimen. These may be used when
     it is necessary to test material from which the standard
     specimen or specimens shown in Fig. 3 cannot be prepared.
     Other sizes of small round specimens may be used. In any
     such small size specimen it is important that the gage
     length for measurement of elongation be four times the
     diameter of the specimen (see Note 4, Fig. 4).
     11.3 The shape of the ends of the specimens outside
     of the gage length shall be suitable to the material and of
     a shape to fit the holders or grips of the testing machine
     so that the loads are applied axially. Fig. 5 shows specimens
     with various types of ends that have given satisfactory
     results.
228. Gage Marks
     12.1 The specimens shown in Figs. 3–6 shall be gage
     marked with a center punch, scribe marks, multiple device,
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     590
     or drawn with ink. The purpose of these gage marks is to
     determine the percent elongation. Punch marks shall be
     light, sharp, and accurately spaced. The localization of
     stress at the marks makes a hard specimen susceptible to
     starting fracture at the punch marks. The gage marks for
     measuring elongation after fracture shall be made on the
     flat or on the edge of the flat tension test specimen and
     within the parallel section; for the 8 in. gage length specimen,
     Fig. 3, one or more sets of 8 in. gage marks may be
     used, intermediate marks within the gage length being
     optional. Rectangular 2-in. gage length specimens, Fig. 3,
     and round specimens, Fig. 4, are gage marked with a double-
     pointed center punch or scribe marks. One or more
     sets of gage marks may be used; however, one set must
     be approximately centered in the reduced section. These
     same precautions shall be observed when the test specimen
     is full section.
229. Determination of Tensile Properties
     13.1 Yield Point — Yield point is the first stress in a
     material, less than the maximum obtainable stress, at which
     an increase in strain occurs without an increase in stress.
     Yield point is intended for application only for materials
     that may exhibit the unique characteristic of showing an
     increase in strain without an increase in stress. The stressstrain
     diagram is characterized by a sharp knee or discontinuity.
     Determine yield point by one of the following
     methods:
     13.1.1 Drop of the Beam or Halt of the Pointer
     Method — In this method, apply an increasing load to the
     specimen at a uniform rate. When a lever and poise machine
     is used, keep the beam in balance by running out the poise
     at approximately a steady rate. When the yield point of
     the material is reached, the increase of the load will stop,
     but run the poise a trifle beyond the balance position, and
     the beam of the machine will drop for a brief but appreciable
     interval of time. When a machine equipped with a loadindicating
     dial is used there is a halt or hesitation of the
     load-indicating pointer corresponding to the drop of the
     beam. Note the load at the “drop of the beam” or the “halt
     of the pointer” and record the corresponding stress as the
     yield point.
     13.1.2 Autographic Diagram Method—When a
     sharp-kneed stress-strain diagram is obtained by an autographic
     recording device, take the stress corresponding to
     the top of the knee (Fig. 7), or the stress at which the curve
     drops as the yield point.
     13.1.3 Total Extension Under Load Method —
     When testing material for yield point and the test specimens
     may not exhibit a well-defined disproportionate
     deformation that characterizes a yield point as measured
     by the drop of the beam, halt of the pointer, or autographic
     diagram methods described in 13.1.1 and 13.1.2, a value
     equivalent to the yield point in its practical significance
     may be determined by the following method and may
     be recorded as yield point: Attach a Class C or better
     extensometer (Note 4 and Note 5) to the specimen. When
     the load producing a specified extension (Note 6) is reached
     record the stress corresponding to the load as the yield
     point (Fig. 8).
     NOTE 4— Automatic devices are available that determine the load at
     the specified total extension without plotting a stress-strain curve. Such
     devices may be used if their accuracy has been demonstrated. Multiplying
     calipers and other such devices are acceptable for use provided their
     accuracy has been demonstrated as equivalent to a Class C extensometer.
     NOTE 5— Reference should be made to Practice E 83.
     NOTE 6— For steel with a yield point specified not over 80 000 psi
     (550 MPa), an appropriate value is 0.005 in./in. of gage length. For values
     above 80 000 psi, this method is not valid unless the limiting total
     extension is increased.
     NOTE 7— The shape of the initial portion of an autographically determined
     stress-strain (or a load-elongation) curve may be influenced by
     numerous factors such as the seating of the specimen in the grips, the
     straightening of a specimen bent due to residual stresses, and the rapid
     loading permitted in 7.4.1. Generally, the aberrations in this portion of
     the curve should be ignored when fitting a modulus line, such as that
     used to determine the extension-under-load yield, to the curve.
     13.2 Yield Strength —Yield strength is the stress at
     which a material exhibits a specified limiting deviation
     from the proportionality of stress to strain. The deviation is
     expressed in terms of strain, percent offset, total extension
     under load, etc. Determine yield strength by one of the
     following methods:
     13.2.1 Offset Method — To determine the yield
     strength by the “offset method,” it is necessary to secure
     data (autographic or numerical) from which a stress-strain
     diagram with a distinct modulus characteristic of the material
     being tested may be drawn. Then on the stress-strain
     diagram (Fig. 9) lay off Om equal to the specified value
     of the offset, draw mn parallel to OA, and thus locate r,
     the intersection of mn with the stress-strain curve corresponding
     to load R, which is the yield-strength load. In
     recording values of yield strength obtained by this method,
     the value of offset specified or used, or both, shall be stated
     in parentheses after the term yield strength, for example:
     Yield strength (0.2% offset) p 52 000 psi (360 MPa) (1)
     When the offset is 0.2% or larger, the extensometer used
     shall qualify as a Class B2 device over a strain range of
     0.05 to 1.0%. If a smaller offset is specified, it may be
     necessary to specify a more accurate device (that is, a Class
     B1 device) or reduce the lower limit of the strain range (for
     example, to 0.01%) or both. See also Note 9 for automatic
     devices.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
     591
     NOTE 8— For stress-strain diagrams not containing a distinct modulus,
     such as for some cold-worked materials, it is recommended that the
     extension under load method be utilized. If the offset method is used for
     materials without a distinct modulus, a modulus value appropriate for
     the material being tested should be used: 30 000 000 psi (207 000 MPa)
     for carbon steel; 29 000 000 psi (200 000 MPa) for ferritic stainless steel;
     28 000 000 psi (193 000 MPa) for austenitic stainless steel. For special
     alloys, the producer should be contacted to discuss appropriate modulus
     values.
     13.2.2 Extension Under Load Method — For tests
     to determine the acceptance or rejection of material whose
     stress-strain characteristics are well known from previous
     tests of similar material in which stress-strain diagrams
     were plotted, the total strain corresponding to the stress at
     which the specified offset (see Note 9 and Note 10) occurs
     will be known within satisfactory limits. The stress on the
     specimen, when this total strain is reached, is the value of
     the yield strength. In recording values of yield strength
     obtained by this method, the value of “extension” specified
     or used, or both, shall be stated in parentheses after the
     term yield strength, for example:
     Yield strength (0.5% EUL) p 52 000 psi (360 MPa) (2)
     The total strain can be obtained satisfactorily by use of
     a Class B1 extensometer (Note 4, Note 5, and Note 7).
     NOTE 9— Automatic devices are available that determine offset yield
     strength without plotting a stress-strain curve. Such devices may be used
     if their accuracy has been demonstrated.
     NOTE 10— The appropriate magnitude of the extension under load
     will obviously vary with the strength range of the particular steel under
     test. In general, the value of extension under load applicable to steel at
     any strength level may be determined from the sum of the proportional
     strain and the plastic strain expected at the specified yield strength. The
     following equation is used:
     Extension under load, in./in. of gage lengthp(YS/E) + r (3)
     where:
     YS p specified yield strength, psi or MPa,
     E p modulus of elasticity, psi or MPa, and
     r p limiting plastic strain, in./in.
     13.3 Tensile Strength — Calculate the tensile strength
     by dividing the maximum load the specimen sustains during
     a tension test by the original cross-sectional area of
     the specimen.
     13.4 Elongation:
     13.4.1 Fit the ends of the fractured specimen together
     carefully and measure the distance between the gage marks
     to the nearest 0.01 in. (0.25 mm) for gage lengths of 2 in.
     and under, and to the nearest 0.5% of the gage length for
     gage lengths over 2 in. A percentage scale reading to 0.5%
     of the gage length may be used. The elongation is the
     increase in length of the gage length, expressed as a percentage
     of the original gage length. In recording elongation
     values, give both the percentage increase and the original
     gage length.
     13.4.2 If any part of the fracture takes place outside
     of the middle half of the gage length or in a punched or
     scribed mark within the reduced section, the elongation
     value obtained may not be representative of the material.
     If the elongation so measured meets the minimum requirements
     specified, no further testing is indicated, but if the
     elongation is less than the minimum requirements, discard
     the test and retest.
     13.4.3 Automated tensile testing methods using
     extensometers allow for the measurement of elongation in
     a method described below. Elongation may be measured
     and reported either this way, or as in the method described
     above, fitting the broken ends together. Either result is
     valid.
     13.4.4 Elongation at fracture is defined as the elongation
     measured just prior to the sudden decrease in force
     associated with fracture. For many ductile materials not
     exhibiting a sudden decrease in force, the elongation at
     fracture can be taken as the strain measured just prior to
     when the force falls below 10% of the maximum force
     encountered during the test.
     13.4.4.1 Elongation at fracture shall include elastic
     and plastic elongation and may be determined with autographic
     or automated methods using extensometers verified
     over the strain range of interest. Use a class B2 or better
     extensometer for materials having less than 5% elongation;
     a class C or better extensometer for materials having elongation
     greater than or equal to 5% but less than 50%; and
     a class D or better extensometer for materials having 50%
     or greater elongation. In all cases, the extensometer gage
     length shall be the nominal gage length required for the
     specimen being tested. Due to the lack of precision in
     fitting fractured ends together, the elongation after fracture
     using the manual methods of the preceding paragraphs
     may differ from the elongation at fracture determined with
     extensometers.
     13.4.4.2 Percent elongation at fracture may be
     calculated directly from elongation at fracture data and
     be reported instead of percent elongation as calculated in
     13.4.1. However, these two parameters are not interchangeable.
     Use of the elongation at fracture method generally
     provides more repeatable results.
     13.5 Reduction of Area — Fit the ends of the fractured
     specimen together and measure the mean diameter or the
     width and thickness at the smallest cross section to the
     same accuracy as the original dimensions. The difference
     between the area thus found and the area of the original
     cross section expressed as a percentage of the original area
     is the reduction of area.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     592
     BEND TEST
230. Description
     14.1 The bend test is one method for evaluating ductility,
     but it cannot be considered as a quantitative means of
     predicting service performance in bending operations. The
     severity of the bend test is primarily a function of the angle
     of bend and inside diameter to which the specimen is bent,
     and of the cross section of the specimen. These conditions
     are varied according to location and orientation of the test
     specimen and the chemical composition, tensile properties,
     hardness, type, and quality of the steel specified. Test
     Method E 190 and Test Method E 290 may be consulted
     for methods of performing the test.
     14.2 Unless otherwise specified, it shall be permissible
     to age bend test specimens. The time-temperature cycle
     employed must be such that the effects of previous processing
     will not be materially changed. It may be accomplished
     by aging at room temperature 24 to 48 h, or in
     shorter time at moderately elevated temperatures by boiling
     in water or by heating in oil or in an oven.
     14.3 Bend the test specimen at room temperature to an
     inside diameter, as designated by the applicable product
     specifications, to the extent specified without major cracking
     on the outside of the bent portion. The speed of bending
     is ordinarily not an important factor.
     HARDNESS TEST
231. General
     15.1 A hardness test is a means of determining resistance
     to penetration and is occasionally employed to obtain
     a quick approximation of tensile strength. Table 2, Table 3,
     Table 4, and Table 5 are for the conversion of hardness
     measurements from one scale to another or to approximate
     tensile strength. These conversion values have been
     obtained from computer-generated curves and are presented
     to the nearest 0.1 point to permit accurate reproduction
     of those curves. Since all converted hardness values
     must be considered approximate, however, all converted
     Rockwell hardness numbers shall be rounded to the nearest
     whole number.
     15.2 Hardness Testing:
     15.2.1 If the product specification permits alternative
     hardness testing to determine conformance to a specified
     hardness requirement, the conversions listed in Table 2,
     Table 3, Table 4, and Table 5 shall be used.
     15.2.2 When recording converted hardness numbers,
     the measured hardness and test scale shall be indicated in
     parentheses, for example: 353 HB (38 HRC). This means
     that a hardness value of 38 was obtained using the Rockwell
     C scale and converted to a Brinell hardness of 353.
232. Brinell Test
     16.1 Description:
     16.1.1 A specified load is applied to a flat surface
     of the specimen to be tested, through a hard ball of specified
     diameter. The average diameter of the indentation is used
     as a basis for calculation of the Brinell hardness number.
     The quotient of the applied load divided by the area of the
     surface of the indentation, which is assumed to be spherical,
     is termed the Brinell hardness number (HB) in accordance
     with the following equation:
     HB p P/(D/2)(D – D2 – d2)
     where:
     HB p Brinell hardness number,
     P p applied load, kgf,
     D p diameter of the steel ball, mm, and
     d p average diameter of the indentation, mm.
     NOTE 11— The Brinell hardness number is more conveniently secured
     from standard tables such as Table 6, which show numbers corresponding
     to the various indentation diameters, usually in increments of 0.05 mm.
     NOTE 12— In Test Method E 10 the values are stated in SI units,
     whereas in this section kg/m units are used.
     16.1.2 The standard Brinell test using a 10 mm ball
     employs a 3000 kgf load for hard materials and a 1500 or
     500 kgf load for thin sections or soft materials (see Annex
     A2 on Steel Tubular Products). Other loads and different
     size indentors may be used when specified. In recording
     hardness values, the diameter of the ball and the load must
     be stated except when a 10 mm ball and 3000 kgf load
     are used.
     16.1.3 A range of hardness can properly be specified
     only for quenched and tempered or normalized and tempered
     material. For annealed material a maximum figure
     only should be specified. For normalized material a minimum
     or a maximum hardness may be specified by
     agreement. In general, no hardness requirements should
     be applied to untreated material.
     16.1.4 Brinell hardness may be required when tensile
     properties are not specified.
     16.2 Apparatus— Equipment shall meet the following
     requirements:
     16.2.1 Testing Machine— A Brinell hardness testing
     machine is acceptable for use over a loading range
     within which its load measuring device is accurate to ±1%.
     16.2.2 Measuring Microscope — The divisions of
     the micrometer scale of the microscope or other measuring
     devices used for the measurement of the diameter of the
     indentations shall be such as to permit the direct measurement
     of the diameter to 0.1 mm and the estimation of the
     diameter to 0.05 mm.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
     593
     NOTE 13— This requirement applies to the construction of the microscope
     only and is not a requirement for measurement of the indentation,
     see 16.4.3.
     16.2.3 Standard Ball — The standard ball for Brinell
     hardness testing is 10 mm (0.3937 in.) in diameter with a
     deviation from this value of not more than 0.005 mm
     (0.0004 in.) in any diameter. A ball suitable for use must
     not show a permanent change in diameter greater than 0.01
     mm (0.0004 in.) when pressed with a force of 3000 kgf
     against the test specimen.
     16.3 Test Specimen — Brinell hardness tests are made
     on prepared areas and sufficient metal must be removed
     from the surface to eliminate decarburized metal and other
     surface irregularities. The thickness of the piece tested
     must be such that no bulge or other marking showing the
     effect of the load appears on the side of the piece opposite
     the indentation.
     16.4 Procedure:
     16.4.1 It is essential that the applicable product specifications
     state clearly the position at which Brinell hardness
     indentations are to be made and the number of such indentations
     required. The distance of the center of the indentation
     from the edge of the specimen or edge of another indentation
     must be at least two and one-half times the diameter
     of the indentation.
     16.4.2 Apply the load for a minimum of 15 s.
     16.4.3 Measure two diameters of the indentation at
     right angles to the nearest 0.1 mm, estimate to the nearest
     0.05 mm, and average to the nearest 0.05 mm. If the two
     diameters differ by more than 0.1 mm, discard the readings
     and make a new indentation.
     16.4.4 Do not use a steel ball on steels having a
     hardness over 450 HB nor a carbide ball on steels having
     a hardness over 650 HB. The Brinell hardness test is not
     recommended for materials having a hardness over 650
     HB.
     16.4.4.1 If a ball is used in a test of a specimen
     which shows a Brinell hardness number greater than the
     limit for the ball as detailed in 16.4.4, the ball shall be
     either discarded and replaced with a new ball or remeasured
     to ensure conformance with the requirements of Test
     Method E 10.
     16.5 Detailed Procedure — For detailed requirements
     of this test, reference shall be made to the latest revision
     of Test Method E 10.
233. Rockwell Test
     17.1 Description:
     17.1.1 In this test a hardness value is obtained by
     determining the depth of penetration of a diamond point
     or a steel ball into the specimen under certain arbitrarily
     fixed conditions. A minor load of 10 kgf is first applied
     which causes an initial penetration, sets the penetrator on
     the material and holds it in position. A major load which
     depends on the scale being used is applied increasing the
     depth of indentation. The major load is removed and, with
     the minor load still acting, the Rockwell number, which
     is proportional to the difference in penetration between the
     major and minor loads is determined; this is usually done
     by the machine and shows on a dial, digital display, printer,
     or other device. This is an arbitrary number which increases
     with increasing hardness. The scales most frequently used
     are as follows:
     Major Minor
     Scale Load, Load,
     Symbol Penetrator kgf kgf
     B 1/16 in. steel ball 100 10
     C Diamond brale 150 10
     17.1.2 Rockwell superficial hardness machines are
     used for the testing of very thin steel or thin surface layers.
     Loads of 15, 30, or 45 kgf are applied on a hardened steel
     ball or diamond penetrator, to cover the same range of
     hardness values as for the heavier loads. The superficial
     hardness scales are as follows:
     Major Minor
     Scale Load, Load,
     Symbol Penetrator kgf kgf
     15T 1/16 in. steel ball 15 3
     30T 1/16 in. steel ball 30 3
     45T 1/16 in. steel ball 45 3
     15N Diamond brale 15 3
     30N Diamond brale 30 3
     45N Diamond brale 45 3
     17.2 Reporting Hardness — In recording hardness values,
     the hardness number shall always precede the scale
     symbol, for example: 96 HRB, 40 HRC, 75 HR15N, or
     77 HR30T.
     17.3 Test Blocks — Machines should be checked to
     make certain they are in good order by means of standardized
     Rockwell test blocks.
     17.4 Detailed Procedure — For detailed requirements
     of this test, reference shall be made to the latest revision
     of Test Methods E 18.
234. Portable Hardness Test
     18.1 Although the use of the standard, stationary Brinell
     or Rockwell hardness tester is generally preferred, it is not
     always possible to perform the hardness test using such
     equipment due to the part size or location. In this event,
     hardness testing using portable equipment as described in
     Practice A 833 or Test Method E 110 shall be used.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     594
     CHARPY IMPACT TESTING
235. Summary
     19.1 A Charpy V-notch impact test is a dynamic test
     in which a notched specimen is struck and broken by a
     single blow in a specially designed testing machine. The
     measured test values may be the energy absorbed, the
     percentage shear fracture, the lateral expansion opposite
     the notch, or a combination thereof.
     19.2 Testing temperatures other than room (ambient)
     temperature often are specified in product or general
     requirement specifications (hereinafter referred to as the
     specification). Although the testing temperature is sometimes
     related to the expected service temperature, the two
     temperatures need not be identical.
236. Significance and Use
     20.1 Ductile vs. Brittle Behavior — Body-centeredcubic
     or ferritic alloys exhibit a significant transition in
     behavior when impact tested over a range of temperatures.
     At temperatures above transition, impact specimens fracture
     by a ductile (usually microvoid coalescence) mechanism,
     absorbing relatively large amounts of energy. At
     lower temperatures, they fracture in a brittle (usually cleavage)
     manner absorbing less energy. Within the transition
     range, the fracture will generally be a mixture of areas of
     ductile fracture and brittle fracture.
     20.2 The temperature range of the transition from one
     type of behavior to the other varies according to the material
     being tested. This transition behavior may be defined
     in various ways for specification purposes.
     20.2.1 The specification may require a minimum
     test result for absorbed energy, fracture appearance, lateral
     expansion, or a combination thereof, at a specified test
     temperature.
     20.2.2 The specification may require the determination
     of the transition temperature at which either the
     absorbed energy or fracture appearance attains a specified
     level when testing is performed over a range of temperatures.
     20.3 Further information on the significance of impact
     testing appears in Annex A5.
237. Apparatus
     21.1 Testing Machines:
     21.1.1 A Charpy impact machine is one in which a
     notched specimen is broken by a single blow of a freely
     swinging pendulum. The pendulum is released from a fixed
     height. Since the height to which the pendulum is raised
     prior to its swing, and the mass of the pendulum are known,
     the energy of the blow is predetermined. A means is provided
     to indicate the energy absorbed in breaking the
     specimen.
     21.1.2 The other principal feature of the machine is
     a fixture (See Fig. 10) designed to support a test specimen
     as a simple beam at a precise location. The fixture is
     arranged so that the notched face of the specimen is vertical.
     The pendulum strikes the other vertical face directly opposite
     the notch. The dimensions of the specimen supports
     and striking edge shall conform to Fig. 10.
     21.1.3 Charpy machines used for testing steel generally
     have capacities in the 220 to 300 ftWlbf (300 to 400
     J) energy range. Sometimes machines of lesser capacity
     are used; however, the capacity of the machine should
     be substantially in excess of the absorbed energy of the
     specimens (see Test Methods E 23). The linear velocity at
     the point of impact should be in the range of 16 to 19 ft/s
     (4.9 to 5.8 m/s).
     21.2 Temperature Media:
     21.2.1 For testing at other than room temperature,
     it is necessary to condition the Charpy specimens in media
     at controlled temperatures.
     21.2.2 Low temperature media usually are chilled
     fluids (such as water, ice plus water, dry ice plus organic
     solvents, or liquid nitrogen) or chilled gases.
     21.2.3 Elevated temperature media are usually
     heated liquids such as mineral or silicone oils. Circulating
     air ovens may be used.
     21.3 Handling Equipment — Tongs, especially adapted
     to fit the notch in the impact specimen, normally are used
     for removing the specimens from the medium and placing
     them on the anvil (refer to Test Methods E 23). In cases
     where the machine fixture does not provide for automatic
     centering of the test specimen, the tongs may be precision
     machined to provide centering.
238. Sampling and Number of Specimens
     22.1 Sampling:
     22.1.1 Test location and orientation should be
     addressed by the specifications. If not, for wrought products,
     the test location shall be the same as that for the
     tensile specimen and the orientation shall be longitudinal
     with the notch perpendicular to the major surface of the
     product being tested.
     22.1.2 Number of Specimens.
     22.1.2.1 ACharpy impact test consists of all specimens
     taken from a single test coupon or test location.
     22.1.2.2 When the specification calls for a minimum
     average test result, three specimens shall be tested.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
     595
     22.1.2.3 When the specification requires determination
     of a transition temperature, eight to twelve specimens
     are usually needed.
     22.2 Type and Size:
     22.2.1 Use a standard full size Charpy V-notch specimen
     (Type A) as shown in Fig. 11, except as allowed in
     22.2.2.
     22.2.2 Subsized Specimens.
     22.2.2.1 For flat material less than 7/16 in. (11 mm)
     thick, or when the absorbed energy is expected to exceed
     80% of full scale, use standard subsize test specimens.
     22.2.2.2 For tubular materials tested in the transverse
     direction, where the relationship between diameter
     and wall thickness does not permit a standard full size
     specimen, use standard subsize test specimens or standard
     size specimens containing outer diameter (OD) curvature
     as follows:
     (1) Standard size specimens and subsize specimens may
     contain the original OD surface of the tubular product as
     shown in Fig. 12. All other dimensions shall comply with
     the requirements of Fig. 11.
     NOTE 14— For materials with toughness levels in excess of about 50
     ft-lbs, specimens containing the original OD surface may yield values in
     excess of those resulting from the use of conventional Charpy specimens.
     22.2.2.3 If a standard full-size specimen cannot
     be prepared, the largest feasible standard subsize specimen
     shall be prepared. The specimens shall be machined so
     that the specimen does not include material nearer to the
     surface than 0.020 in. (0.5 mm).
     22.2.2.4 Tolerances for standard subsize specimens
     are shown in Fig. 11. Standard subsize test specimen
     sizes are: 10  7.5 mm, 10  6.7 mm, 10  5 mm, 10
      3.3 mm, and 10  2.5 mm.
     22.2.2.5 Notch the narrow face of the standard
     subsize specimens so that the notch is perpendicular to the
     10 mm wide face.
     22.3 Notch Preparation — The machining of the notch
     is critical, as it has been demonstrated that extremely minor
     variations in notch radius and profile, or tool marks at the
     bottom of the notch may result in erratic test data. (See
     Annex A5).
239. Calibration
     23.1 Accuracy and Sensitivity — Calibrate and adjust
     Charpy impact machines in accordance with the requirements
     of Test Methods E 23.
240. Conditioning — Temperature Control
     24.1 When a specific test temperature is required by
     the specification or purchaser, control the temperature of
     the heating or cooling medium within ±2°F (1°C) because
     the effect of variations in temperature on Charpy test results
     can be very great.
     NOTE 15— For some steels there may not be a need for this restricted
     temperature, for example, austenitic steels.
     NOTE 16— Because the temperature of a testing laboratory often varies
     from 60 to 90°F (15 to 32°C) a test conducted at “room temperature”
     might be conducted at any temperature in this range.
241. Procedure
     25.1 Temperature:
     25.1.1 Condition the specimens to be broken by holding
     them in the medium at test temperature for at least 5
     min in liquid media and 30 min in gaseous media.
     25.1.2 Prior to each test, maintain the tongs for handling
     test specimens at the same temperature as the specimen
     so as not to affect the temperature at the notch.
     25.2 Positioning and Breaking Specimens:
     25.2.1 Carefully center the test specimen in the anvil
     and release the pendulum to break the specimen.
     25.2.2 If the pendulum is not released within 5 s after
     removing the specimen from the conditioning medium,
     do not break the specimen. Return the specimen to the
     conditioning medium for the period required in 25.1.1.
     25.3 Recovering Specimens — In the event that fracture
     appearance or lateral expansion must be determined,
     recover the matched pieces of each broken specimen before
     breaking the next specimen.
     25.4 Individual Test Values:
     25.4.1 Impact energy — Record the impact energy
     absorbed to the nearest ftWlbf (J).
     25.4.2 Fracture Appearance:
     25.4.2.1 Determine the percentage of shear fracture
     area by any of the following methods:
     (1) Measure the length and width of the brittle portion
     of the fracture surface, as shown in Fig. 13 and determine
     the percent shear area from either Table 7 or Table 8
     depending on the units of measurement.
     (2) Compare the appearance of the fracture of the specimen
     with a fracture appearance chart as shown in Fig. 14.
     (3) Magnify the fracture surface and compare it to a
     precalibrated overlay chart or measure the percent shear
     fracture area by means of a planimeter.
     (4) Photograph the fractured surface at a suitable magnification
     and measure the percent shear fracture area by
     means of a planimeter.
     25.4.2.2 Determine the individual fracture appearance
     values to the nearest 5% shear fracture and record
     the value.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     596
     25.4.3 Lateral Expansion:
     25.4.3.1 Lateral expansion is the increase in specimen
     width, measured in thousandths of an inch (mils), on
     the compression side, opposite the notch of the fractured
     Charpy V-notch specimen as shown in Fig. 15.
     25.4.3.2 Examine each specimen half to ascertain
     that the protrusions have not been damaged by contacting
     the anvil, machine mounting surface, and so forth. Discard
     such samples since they may cause erroneous readings.
     25.4.3.3 Check the sides of the specimens perpendicular
     to the notch to ensure that no burrs were formed
     on the sides during impact testing. If burrs exist, remove
     them carefully by rubbing on emery cloth or similar abrasive
     surface, making sure that the protrusions being measured
     are not rubbed during the removal of the burr.
     25.4.3.4 Measure the amount of expansion on each
     side of each half relative to the plane defined by the undeformed
     portion of the side of the specimen using a gage
     similar to that shown in Fig. 16 and Fig. 17.
     25.4.3.5 Since the fracture path seldom bisects the
     point of maximum expansion on both sides of a specimen,
     the sum of the larger values measured for each side is the
     value of the test. Arrange the halves of one specimen so
     that compression sides are facing each other. Using the
     gage, measure the protrusion on each half specimen, ensuring
     that the same side of the specimen is measured. Measure
     the two broken halves individually. Repeat the procedure
     to measure the protrusions on the opposite side of the
     specimen halves. The larger of the two values for each
     side is the expansion of that side of the specimen.
     25.4.3.6 Measure the individual lateral expansion
     values to the nearest mil (0.025 mm) and record the values.
     25.4.3.7 With the exception described as follows,
     any specimen that does not separate into two pieces when
     struck by a single blow shall be reported as unbroken. If
     the specimen can be separated by force applied by bare
     hands, the specimen may be considered as having been
     separated by the blow.
242. Interpretation of Test Result
     26.1 When the acceptance criterion of any impact test
     is specified to be a minimum average value at a given
     temperature, the test result shall be the average (arithmetic
     mean) of the individual test values of three specimens from
     one test location.
     26.1.1 When a minimum average test result is specified:
     26.1.1.1 The test result is acceptable when all of
     the below are met:
     (1) The test result equals or exceeds the specified minimum
     average (given in the specification),
     (2) The individual test value for not more than one
     specimen measures less than the specified minimum average,
     and
     (3) The individual test value for any specimen measures
     not less than two-thirds of the specified minimum average.
     26.1.1.2 If the acceptance requirements of 26.1.1.1
     are not met, perform one retest of three additional specimens
     from the same test location. Each individual test
     value of the retested specimens shall be equal to or greater
     than the specified minimum average value.
     26.2 Test Specifying a Minimum Transition Temperature:
     26.2.1 Definition of Transition Temperature — For
     specification purposes, the transition temperature is the
     temperature at which the designated material test value
     equals or exceeds a specified minimum test value.
     26.2.2 Determination of Transition Temperature:
     26.2.2.1 Break one specimen at each of a series
     of temperatures above and below the anticipated transition
     temperature using the procedures in Section 25. Record
     each test temperature to the nearest 1°F (0.5°C).
     26.2.2.2 Plot the individual test results (ftWlbf or
     percent shear) as the ordinate versus the corresponding test
     temperature as the abscissa and construct a best-fit curve
     through the plotted data points.
     26.2.2.3 If transition temperature is specified as
     the temperature at which a test value is achieved, determine
     the temperature at which the plotted curve intersects the
     specified test value by graphical interpolation (extrapolation
     is not permitted). Record this transition temperature
     to the nearest 5°F (3°C). If the tabulated test results clearly
     indicate a transition temperature lower than specified, it
     is not necessary to plot the data. Report the lowest test
     temperature for which test value exceeds the specified
     value.
     26.2.2.4 Accept the test result if the determined
     transition temperature is equal to or lower than the specified
     value.
     26.2.2.5 If the determined transition temperature
     is higher than the specified value, but not more than 20°F
     (12°C) higher than the specified value, test sufficient samples
     in accordance with Section 25 to plot two additional
     curves. Accept the test results if the temperatures determined
     from both additional tests are equal to or lower than
     the specified value.
     26.3 When subsize specimens are permitted or necessary,
     or both, modify the specified test requirement
     according to Table 9 or test temperature according to
     ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Table UG-84.2,
     or both. Greater energies or lower test temperatures may
     be agreed upon by purchaser and supplier.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
     597
243. Records
     27.1 The test record should contain the following information
     as appropriate:
     27.1.1 Full description of material tested (that is,
     specification number, grade, class or type, size, heat
     number).
     27.1.2 Specimen orientation with respect to the material
     axis.
     27.1.3 Specimen size.
     27.1.4 Test temperature and individual test value for
     each specimen broken, including initial tests and retests.
     27.1.5 Test results.
     27.1.6 Transition temperature and criterion for its
     determination, including initial tests and retests.
     FIG. 1 THE RELATION OF TEST COUPONS AND TEST SPECIMENS TO ROLLING DIRECTION OR EXTENSION
     (APPLICABLE TO GENERAL WROUGHT PRODUCTS)
     Longitudinal
     ImpactTest
     Indicates Rolling Direction
     or Extension
     Longitudinal Flat Tension Test
     Longitudinal Round Tension Test
     Longitudinal Specimen
     Longitudinal
     Bend Test
     Transverse
     ImpactTest
     Transverse Flat
     Tension Test
     Transverse Specimen
     Transverse
     Bend Test
244. Report
     28.1 The specification should designate the information
     to be reported.
245. Keywords
     29.1 bend test; Brinell hardness; Charpy impact test;
     elongation; FATT (Fracture Appearance Transition Temperature);
     hardness test; portable hardness; reduction of
     area; Rockwell hardness; tensile strength; tension test; yield
     strength
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     598
     FIG. 2 LOCATION OF LONGITUDINAL TENSION TEST SPECIMENS
     IN RINGS CUT FROM TUBULAR PRODUCTS
     Tangential
     test
     Prolongation
     Radial test
     Longitudinal test
     Tangential
     test
     Longitudinal test
     (a) Shafts and Rotors
     (b) Hollow Forgings
     (c) Disk Forgings
     (d) Ring Forgings
     Prolongation
     Prolongation
     Prolongation
     Tangential test Tangential test
     Tangential test
     Tangential test
     Prolongation
     Prolongation
     Prolongation
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
     599
     FIG. 3 RECTANGULAR TENSION TEST SPECIMENS
     R
     B A
     W
     G
     B
     L
     C
     T
     DIMENSIONS
     Standard Specimens Subsize Specimen
     Plate-Type, Sheet-Type,
     11/2 in. Wide 1/2 in. Wide 1/4 in. Wide
     in. mm in. mm in. mm
     G—Gage length (Notes 1 and 2) 8.00 ± 0.01 200 ± 0.25 2.000 ± 0.005 50.0 ± 0.10 1.000 ± 0.003 25.0 ±0.08
     W—Width (Notes 3, 5, and 6) 11/2 + 1/8 40 + 3 0.500 ± 0.010 12.5 ± 0.25 0.250 ± 0.002 6.25 ± 0.05

• 1/4 – 6
  T—Thickness (Note 7) thickness of material
  R—Radius of fillet, min (Note 4) 1/2 13 1/2 13 1/4 6
  L—Over-all length, min (Notes 2 and 8) 18 450 8 200 4 100
  A—Length of reduced section. min 9 225 21/4 60 11/4 32
  B—Length of grip section, min (Note 9) 3 75 2 50 11/4 32
  C—Width of grip section, approximate 2 50 3/4 20 3/8 10
  (Notes 4, 10, and 11)
  NOTES:
  (1) For the 11/2 in. (40 mm) wide specimen, punch marks for measuring elongation after fracture shall be made on the flat or on the edge of the specimen
  and within the reduced section. Either a set of nine or more punch marks 1 in. (25 mm) apart, or one or more pairs of punch marks 8 in. (200 mm)
  apart may be used.
  (2) For the 1/2 in. (12.5 mm) wide specimen, gage marks for measuring the elongation after fracture shall be made on the 1/2 in. (12.5 mm) face or on
  the edge of the specimen and within the reduced section. Either a set of three or more marks 1.0 in. (25 mm) apart or one or more pairs of marks
  2 in. (50 mm) apart may be used.
  (3) For the three sizes of specimens, the ends of the reduced section shall not differ in width by more than 0.004, 0.002 or 0.001 in. (0.10, 0.05 or
  0.025 mm), respectively. Also, there may be a gradual decrease in width from the ends to the center, but the width at either end shall not be more
  than 0.015 in., 0.005 in., or 0.003 in. (0.40, 0.10 or 0.08 mm), respectively, larger than the width at the center.
  (4) For each specimen type, the radii of all fillets shall be equal to each other with a tolerance of 0.05 in. (1.25 mm), and the centers of curvature of
  the two fillets at a particular end shall be located across from each other (on a line perpendicular to the centerline) within a tolerance of 0.10 in.
  (2.5 mm).
  (5) For each of the three sizes of specimens, narrower widths (W and C) may be used when necessary. In such cases the width of the reduced section
  should be as large as the width of the material being tested permits; however, unless stated specifically, the requirements for elongation in a product
  specification shall not apply when these narrower specimens are used. If the width of the material is less thanW, the sides may be parallel throughout
  the length of the specimen.
  (6) The specimen may be modified by making the sides parallel throughout the length of the specimen, the width and tolerances being the same as those
  specified above. When necessary a narrower specimen may be used, in which case the width should be as great as the width of the material being
  tested permits. If the width is 11/2 in. (38 mm) or less, the sides may be parallel throughout the length of the specimen.
  (7) The dimension T is the thickness of the test specimen as provided for in the applicable material specifications. Minimum nominal thickness of 11/2 in.
  (40 mm) wide specimens shall be 3/16 in. (5 mm), except as permitted by the product specification. Maximum nominal thickness of 1/2 in. (12.5 mm)
  and 1/4 in. (6 mm) wide specimens shall be 3/4 in. (19 mm) and 1/4 in. (6 mm), respectively.
  (8) To aid in obtaining axial loading during testing of 1/4 in. (6 mm) wide specimens, the overall length should be as the material will permit.
  (9) It is desirable, if possible, to make the length of the grip section large enough to allow the specimen to extend into the grips a distance equal to two
  thirds or more of the length of the grips. If the thickness of 1/2 in. (13 mm) wide specimens is over 3/8 in. (10 mm), longer grips and correspondingly
  longer grip sections of the specimen may be necessary to prevent failure in the grip section.
  (10) For standard sheet-type specimens and subsize specimens the ends of the specimen shall be symmetrical with the center line of the reduced section
  within 0.01 and 0.005 in. (0.25 and 0.13 mm), respectively. However, for steel if the ends of the 1/2 in. (12.5 mm) wide specimen are symmetrical
  within 0.05 in. (1.0 mm) a specimen may be considered satisfactory for all but referee testing.
  (11) For standard plate-type specimens the ends of the specimen shall be symmetrical with the center line of the reduced section within 0.25 in. (6.35 mm)
  except for referee testing in which case the ends of the specimen shall be symmetrical with the center line of the reduced section within 0.10 in. (2.5 mm).
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  600
  FIG. 4 STANDARD 0.500 IN. (12.5 MM) ROUND TENSION TEST SPECIMEN WITH 2 IN. (50 MM) GAGE LENGTH
  AND EXAMPLES OF SMALL-SIZE SPECIMENS PROPORTIONAL TO THE STANDARD SPECIMENS
  G R
  D
  A
  DIMENSIONS
  Standard Specimen Small-Size Specimens Proportional to Standard
  in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
  Nominal Diameter 0.500 12.5 0.350 8.75 0.250 6.25 0.160 4.00 0.113 2.50
  G—Gage length 2.00± 50.0± 1.400± 35.0± 1.000± 25.0± 0.640± 16.0± 0.450± 10.0±
  0.005 0.10 0.005 0.10 0.005 0.10 0.005 0.10 0.005 0.10
  D—Diameter (Note 1) 0.500± 12.5± 0.350± 8.75± 0.250± 6.25± 0.160± 4.00± 0.113± 2.50±
  0.010 0.25 0.007 0.18 0.005 0.12 0.003 0.08 0.002 0.05
  R—Radius of fillet, min 3/8 10 1/4 6 3/16 5 5/32 4 3/32 2
  A—Length of reduced section, 21/4 60 13/4 45 11/4 32 3/4 20 5/8 16
  min (Note 2)
  NOTES:
  (1) The reduced section may have a gradual taper from the ends toward the center, with the ends not more than 1 percent larger in diameter
  than the center (controlling dimension).
  (2) If desired, the length of the reduced section may be increased to accommodate an extensometer of any convenient gage length. Reference
  marks for the measurement of elongation should, nevertheless, be spaced at the indicated gage length.
  (3) The gage length and fillets shall be as shown, but the ends may be of any form to fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way that
  the load shall be axial (see Fig. 9). If the ends are to be held in wedge grips it is desirable, if possible, to make the length of the grip section
  great enough to allow the specimen to extend into the grips a distance equal to two thirds or more of the length of the grips.
  (4) On the round specimens in Fig. 5 and Fig. 6, the gage lengths are equal to four times the nominal diameter. In some product specifications
  other specimens may be provided for, but unless the 4-to-1 ratio is maintained within dimensional tolerances, the elongation values may not
  be comparable with those obtained from the standard test specimen.
  (5) The use of specimens smaller than 0.250 in. (6.25 mm) diameter shall be restricted to cases when the material to be tested is of insufficient
  size to obtain larger specimens or when all parties agree to their use for acceptance testing. Smaller specimens require suitable equipment
  and greater skill in both machining and testing.
  (6) Five sizes of specimens often used have diameters of approximately 0.505, 0.357, 0.252, 0.160, and 0.113 in., the reason being to permit
  easy calculations of stress from loads, since the corresponding cross sectional areas are equal or close to 0.200, 0.100, 0.0500, 0.0200, and
  0.0100 in.2, respectively. Thus, when the actual diameters agree with these values, the stresses (or strengths) may be computed using the
  simple multiplying factors 5, 10, 20, 50, and 100, respectively. (The metric equivalents of these fixed diameters do not result in correspondingly
  convenient cross sectional area and multiplying factors.)
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  601
  FIG. 5 SUGGESTED TYPES OF ENDS FOR STANDARD ROUND TENSION TEST SPECIMENS
  B
  3
  2
  1
  5
  4
  A B
  A
  D
  D
  D
  G
  G
  G
  A B
  C
  B
  L
  L
  B E E
  F
  B
  L
  A
  BE EB
  G
  D
  D F
  F
  G
  B E A E B
  L
  L
  C
  C C
  C
  R 3/4 10 thd (M20 x 2.5)
  R R
  R
  3/4 10 thd (M20 x 2.5)
  R
  DIMENSIONS
  Specimen 1 Specimen 2 Specimen 3 Specimen 4 Specimen 5
  in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
  G—Gage length 2.000± 50.0± 2.000± 50.0± 2.000± 50.0± 2.000± 50.0± 2.00± 50.0±
  0.005 0.10 0.005 0.10 0.005 0.10 0.005 0.10 0.005 0.10
  D—Diameter (Note 1) 0.500± 12.5± 0.500± 12.5± 0.500± 12.5± 0.500± 12.5± 0.500± 12.5±
  0.010 0.25 0.010 0.25 0.010 0.25 0.010 0.25 0.010 0.25
  R—Radius of fillet, min 3/8 10 3/8 10 1/16 2 3/8 10 3/8 10
  A—Length of reduced section 21/4, min 60, min 21/4, min 60, min 4, ap- 100, ap- 21/4, min 60, min 21/4, min 60, min
  proxi- proximately
  mately
  L—Overall length, approximate 5 125 51/2 140 51/2 140 43/4 120 91/2 240
  B—Grip section (Note 2) 13/8, ap- 35, ap- 1, ap- 25, ap- 3/4, ap- 20, ap- 1/2, ap- 13, ap- 3, min 75, min
  proxi- proxi- proxi- proxi- proxi- proxi- proxi- proximately
  mately mately mately mately mately mately mately
  C—Diameter of end section 3/4 20 3/4 20 23/32 18 7/8 22 3/4 20
  E—Length of shoulder and . . . . . . 5/8 16 . . . . . . 3/4 20 5/8 16
  fillet section, approximate
  F—Diameter of shoulder . . . . . . 5/8 16 . . . . . . 5/8 16 19/32 15
  NOTES:
  (1) The reduced section may have a gradual taper from the ends toward the center with the ends not more than 0.005 in. (0.10 mm) larger in
  diameter than the center.
  (2) On Specimen 5 it is desirable, if possible, to make the length of the grip section great enough to allow the specimen to extend into the grips
  a distance equal to two thirds or more of the length of the grips.
  (3) The types of ends shown are applicable for the standard 0.500 in. round tension test specimen; similar types can be used for subsize specimens.
  The use of UNF series of threads (3/4 by 16, 1/2 by 20, 3/8 by 24, and 1/4 by 28) is suggested for high-strength brittle materials to avoid fracture
  in the thread portion.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  602
  FIG. 6 STANDARD TENSION TEST SPECIMENS FOR CAST IRON
  B E A E B
  D
  G
  C
  L
  R
  F
  DIMENSIONS
  Specimen 1 Specimen 2 Specimen 3
  in. mm in. mm in. mm
  G—Length of parallel Shall be equal to or greater than diameter D
  D—Diameter 0.500±0.010 12.5±0.25 0.750±0.015 20.0±0.40 1.25±0.025 30.0±0.60
  R—Radius of fillet, min 1 25 1 25 2 50
  A—Length of reduced section, min 11/4 32 11/2 38 21/4 60
  L—Over-all length, min 33/4 95 4 100 63/8 160
  B—Grip section, approximate 1 25 1 25 13/4 45
  C—Diameter of end section, approximate 3/4 20 11/8 30 17/8 48
  E—Length of shoulder, min 1/4 6 1/4 6 5/16 8
  F—Diameter of shoulder 5/8±1/64 16.0±0.40 15/16±1/64 24.0±0.40 17/16±1/64 36.5±0.40
  GENERAL NOTE: The reduced section and shoulders (dimensions A, D, E, F, G, and R) shall be shown, but the ends may be of any form to fit
  the holders of the testing machine in such a way that the load shall be axial. Commonly the ends are threaded and have the dimensions B and C
  given above.
  FIG. 7 STRESS-STRAIN DIAGRAM SHOWING YIELD
  POINT CORRESPONDING WITH TOP OF KNEE
  Strain
  Stress
  Yield point 0
  R
  m
  FIG. 8 STRESS-STRAIN DIAGRAM SHOWING YIELD
  POINT OR YIELD STRENGTH BY EXTENSION UNDER
  LOAD METHOD
  Strain
  om = Specified extension
  under load
  Stress
  0
  R
  m
  r
  n
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  603
  FIG. 9 STRESS-STRAIN DIAGRAM FOR
  DETERMINATION OF YIELD STRENGTH BY THE
  OFFSET METHOD
  A
  R
  0 m
  Strain
  om = Specified Offset
  Stress
  n
  r
  FIG. 10 CHARPY (SIMPLE-BEAM) IMPACT TEST
  40 mm
  (1.574 in.)
  8 mm rad
  (0.315 in.)
  1 mm rad
  (0.039 in.)
  0.25 mm rad
  (0.010 in.)
  4 mm
  (0.157 in.)
  30 deg 2 deg
  80 deg 2 deg
  90 deg 9 deg
  (2.5:1000)
  Striking
  edge
  Striking
  edge
  C
  A B
  D Specimen
  Specimen
  support
  Specimen
  W
  Anvil
  Anvil
  Center of strike
  Center of
  strike (W/2)
  GENERAL NOTES:
  (a)
  (b)
  (c)
  (d)
  All dimensional tolerances shall be 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
  unless otherwise specified.
  A shall be parallel to B within 2:1000 and coplanar with B
  within 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
  C shall be parallel to D within 20:1000 and coplanar with D
  within 0.125 mm (0.005 in.)
  Finish on unmarked parts shall be 4 m (125 in.).
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  604
  FIG. 11 CHARPY (SIMPLE-BEAM) IMPACT TEST
  SPECIMENS
  Notch length to edge
  Adjacent sides shall be at
  Cross-section dimensions
  Length of specimen (L)
  Centering of notch (L/2)
  Angle of notch
  Radius of notch
  Notch depth
  Finish requirements
  GENERAL NOTES:
  (a) Permissible variations shall be as follows:
  L/2
  90 deg
  45
  deg
  55 mm
  (2.165 in.)
  L
  2 mm
  (0.079 in.)
  10 mm
  (0.394 in.)
  0.25 mm
  (0.010 in.) rad
  10 mm
  (0.394 in.)
  90 deg 2 deg
  90 deg 10 min
  0.075 mm ( 0.003 in.)
  +0, –2.5 mm (+0, –0.100 in.)
  1 mm ( 0.039 in.)
  1 deg
  0.025 mm ( 0.001 in.)
  0.025 mm ( 0.001 in.)
  2 m (63 in.) on notched
  surface and opposite face;
  4 m (125 in.) on other
  two surfaces
  (b) On subsize specimens, all dimensions and tolerances
  of the standard specimen remain constant with the exception
  of the width, which varies as shown above and for which the
  tolerance shall be 1%.
  5 mm
  (0.197 in.)
  3.3 mm
  (0.130 in.)
  2.5 mm
  (0.098 in.)
  10 mm (0.394 in.)
  2 mm (0.079 in.)
  (a) Standard Full Size Specimen
  (b) Standard Subsize Specimen
  6.7 mm
  (0.264 in.)
  7.5 mm
  (0.295 in.)
  FIG. 12 TUBULAR IMPACT SPECIMEN CONTAINING
  ORIGINAL OD SURFACE
  t
  T
  A
  ABTt
  Machined surface
  Original OD surface
  Specimen thickness
  End thickness
  28 mm minimum
  13.5 mm maximum
  Figure 11
  1/2 T minimum
  Dimension Description Requirement
  B B
  FIG. 13 DETERMINATION OF PERCENT SHEAR
  FRACTURE
  A
  B
  Shear area
  (dull)
  Cleavage area
  (shiny)
  Notch
  GENERAL NOTES:
  (a)
  (b)
  Measure average dimensions A and B to the
  nearest 0.02 in. or 0.5 mm.
  Determine the percent shear fracture using
  Table 7 or Table 8.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  605
  FIG. 14 FRACTURE APPEARANCE CHARTS AND PERCENT SHEAR FRACTURE COMPARATOR
  FIG. 15 HALVES OF BROKEN CHARPY V-NOTCH IMPACT SPECIMEN JOINED FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF
  LATERAL EXPANSION, DIMENSION A
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  606
  FIG. 16 LATERAL EXPANSION GAGE FOR CHARPY IMPACT SPECIMENS
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  607
  FIG. 17 ASSEMBLY AND DETAILS FOR LATERAL EXPANSION GAGE
  1/4 (typ)
  After assembly of items 1 and 2
  cement rubber pad (item 3) to base
  NOTES:
  (1)
  (2)
  Flash chrome plate items 1 and 2.
  Dial indicator – Starrett No. 25-241
  range 0.001 – 0.250
  back – adjustable bracket
  contact point No. 2.
  0.625
  1.31
  0.68
  6
  2.62
  0.06
  Drill
  0.437 dia
  See Detail A
  See
  Detail
  B
  90 deg 10 deg
  5
  4
  3
  3
  2
  1
  2.375
  Detail A (enlarged) Detail B (enlarged)
  Drill (0.281) dia and C’bore
  (0.437) dia. x 0.31 deep
  Drill (0.281) dia.
  Drill and tap 1/4-20 NC-2
  0.75
  0.625
  0.062
  0.296
  1.7
  1.75
  3.5
  3.5
  0.5
  0.5
  6.25 0.0625
  Pad
  Bill of Material
  Item
  No. Quan
  Description
  Dual mount
  and stop
  4 x 5/8 x 1/2
  Screw-socket
  head cap
  Screw-socket
  head cap
  Dial indicator
  Steel SAE 1015-1020
  Rubber
  Steel SAE 1015-1020
  Steel 1/4  20 x 3/4 in. LG.
  Steel 1/4  20 x 1 in. LG.
  (See Note 2)
  Base plate 7 x 4 x 3/4
  Pad 61/4 x 31/2 x 1/16
  Material and Size
  1
  1
  1
  2
  1
  1
  1
  2
  3
  4
  5
  6
  No. 2 Starrett contact point
  0.31
  0.62
  0.12
  0.06
  0.06 R (typ)
  NOTE: These surfaces to be on same
  plane – lap at assembly
  45 deg
  45 deg
  0.265 0.328
  0.75
  C
  C
  2 2
  3.5
  1.87
  6.75
  0.25
  0.50
  4
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  608
  TABLE 1
  MULTIPLYING FACTORS TO BE USED FOR VARIOUS DIAMETERS OF ROUND TEST SPECIMENS
  Standard Specimen Small Size Specimens Proportional to Standard
  0.500 in. Round 0.350 in. Round 0.250 in. Round
  Actual Actual Actual
  Diameter, Area, Multiplying Diameter, Area, Multiplying Diameter, Multiplying
  in. in.2 Factor in. in.2 Factor in. Area, in.2 Factor
  0.490 0.1886 5.30 0.343 0.0924 10.82 0.245 0.0471 21.21
  0.491 0.1893 5.28 0.344 0.0929 10.76 0.246 0.0475 21.04
  0.492 0.1901 5.26 0.345 0.0935 10.70 0.247 0.0479 20.87
  0.493 0.1909 5.24 0.346 0.0940 10.64 0.248 0.0483 20.70
  0.494 0.1917 5.22 0.347 0.0946 10.57 0.249 0.0487 20.54
  0.495 0.1924 5.20 0.348 0.0951 10.51 0.250 0.0491 20.37
  0.496 0.1932 5.18 0.349 0.0957 10.45 0.251 0.0495 20.21
  (0.05) (A) (20.0) (A)
  0.497 0.1940 5.15 0.350 0.0962 10.39 0.252 0.0499 20.05
  (0.05) (A) (20.0) (A)
  0.498 0.1948 5.13 0.351 0.0968 10.33 0.253 0.0503 19.89
  (0.05) (A) (20.0) (A)
  0.499 0.1956 5.11 0.352 0.0973 10.28 0.254 0.0507 19.74
  0.500 0.1963 5.09 0.353 0.0979 10.22 0.255 0.0511 19.58
  0.501 0.1971 5.07 0.354 0.0984 10.16 . . . . . . . . .
  0.502 0.1979 5.05 0.355 0.0990 10.10 . . . . . . . . .
  0.503 0.1987 5.03 0.356 0.0995 10.05 . . . . . . . . .
  (0.1) (A) (10.0) (A)
  0.504 0.1995 5.01 0.357 0.1001 9.99 . . . . . . . . .
  (0.2) (A) (5.0) (A) (0.1) (A) (10.0) (A)
  0.505 0.2003 4.99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  (0.2) (A) (5.0) (A)
  0.506 0.2011 4.97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  (0.2) (A) (5.0) (A)
  0.507 0.2019 4.95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  0.508 0.2027 4.93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  0.509 0.2035 4.91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  0.510 0.2043 4.90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  NOTE:
  (A) The values in parentheses may be used for ease in calculation of stresses, in pounds per square inch, as permitted in 5 of Fig. 4.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  609
  TABLE 2
  APPROXIMATE HARDNESS CONVERSION NUMBERS FOR NONAUSTENITIC STEELS (A) (ROCKWELL C TO OTHER
  HARDNESS NUMBERS)
  Rockwell Superficial Hardness
  Rockwell 15N Scale, 30N Scale 45N Scale,
  Rockwell C Brinell Knoop A Scale, 60 15 kgf 30 kgf 45 kgf Approximate
  Scale, 150 kgf Vickers Hardness, Hardness, kgf Load, Load, Load, Load, Tensile
  Load, Diamond Hardness 3000 kgf Load, 500 gf Load Diamond Diamond Diamond Diamond Strength,
  Penetrator Number 10 mm Ball and Over Penetrator Penetrator Penetrator Penetrator ksi (MPa)
  68 940 . . . 920 85.6 93.2 84.4 75.4 . . .
  67 900 . . . 895 85.0 92.9 83.6 74.2 . . .
  66 865 . . . 870 84.5 92.5 82.8 73.3 . . .
  65 832 739 846 83.9 92.2 81.9 72.0 . . .
  64 800 722 822 83.4 91.8 81.1 71.0 . . .
  63 772 706 799 82.8 91.4 80.1 69.9 . . .
  62 746 688 776 82.3 91.1 79.3 68.8 . . .
  61 720 670 754 81.8 90.7 78.4 67.7 . . .
  60 697 654 732 81.2 90.2 77.5 66.6 . . .
  59 674 634 710 80.7 89.8 76.6 65.5 351 (2420)
  58 653 615 690 80.1 89.3 75.7 64.3 338 (2330)
  57 633 595 670 79.6 88.9 74.8 63.2 325 (2240)
  56 613 577 650 79.0 88.3 73.9 62.0 313 (2160)
  55 595 560 630 78.5 87.9 73.0 60.9 301 (2070)
  54 577 543 612 78.0 87.4 72.0 59.8 292 (2010)
  53 560 525 594 77.4 86.9 71.2 58.6 283 (1950)
  52 544 512 576 76.8 86.4 70.2 57.4 273 (1880)
  51 528 496 558 76.3 85.9 69.4 56.1 264 (1820)
  50 513 482 542 75.9 85.5 68.5 55.0 255 (1760)
  49 498 468 526 75.2 85.0 67.6 53.8 246 (1700)
  48 484 455 510 74.7 84.5 66.7 52.5 238 (1640)
  47 471 442 495 74.1 83.9 65.8 51.4 229 (1580)
  46 458 432 480 73.6 83.5 64.8 50.3 221 (1520)
  45 446 421 466 73.1 83.0 64.0 49.0 215 (1480)
  44 434 409 452 72.5 82.5 63.1 47.8 208 (1430)
  43 423 400 438 72.0 82.0 62.2 46.7 201 (1390)
  42 412 390 426 71.5 81.5 61.3 45.5 194 (1340)
  41 402 381 414 70.9 80.9 60.4 44.3 188 (1300)
  40 392 371 402 70.4 80.4 59.5 43.1 182 (1250)
  39 382 362 391 69.9 79.9 58.6 41.9 177 (1220)
  38 372 353 380 69.4 79.4 57.7 40.8 171 (1180)
  37 363 344 370 68.9 78.8 56.8 39.6 166 (1140)
  36 354 336 360 68.4 78.3 55.9 38.4 161 (1110)
  35 345 327 351 67.9 77.7 55.0 37.2 156 (1080)
  34 336 319 342 67.4 77.2 54.2 36.1 152 (1050)
  33 327 311 334 66.8 76.6 53.3 34.9 149 (1030)
  32 318 301 326 66.3 76.1 52.1 33.7 146 (1010)
  31 310 294 318 65.8 75.6 51.3 32.5 141 (970)
  30 302 286 311 65.3 75.0 50.4 31.3 138 (950)
  29 294 279 304 64.6 74.5 49.5 30.1 135 (930)
  28 286 271 297 64.3 73.9 48.6 28.9 131 (900)
  27 279 264 290 63.8 73.3 47.7 27.8 128 (880)
  26 272 258 284 63.3 72.8 46.8 26.7 125 (860)
  25 266 253 278 62.8 72.2 45.9 25.5 123 (850)
  24 260 247 272 62.4 71.6 45.0 24.3 119 (820)
  23 254 243 266 62.0 71.0 44.0 23.1 117 (810)
  22 248 237 261 61.5 70.5 43.2 22.0 115 (790)
  21 243 231 256 61.0 69.9 42.3 20.7 112 (770)
  20 238 226 251 60.5 69.4 41.5 19.6 110 (760)
  NOTE:
  (A) This table gives the approximate interrelationships of hardness values and approximate tensile strength of steels. It is possible that steels of
  various compositions and processing histories will deviate in hardness-tensile strength relationship from the data presented in this table. The
  data in this table should not be used for austenitic stainless steels, but have been shown to be applicable for ferritic and martensitic stainless
  steels. The data in this table should not be used to establish a relationship between hardness values and tensile strength of hard drawn wire.
  Where more precise conversions are required, they should be developed specially for each steel composition, heat treatment, and part.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  610
  TABLE 3
  APPROXIMATE HARDNESS CONVERSION NUMBERS FOR NONAUSTENITIC STEELS (A) (ROCKWELL B TO OTHER
  HARDNESS NUMBERS)
  Rockwell B Rockwell Superficial Hardness
  Scale, 100 Rockwell A Rockwell F 15T Scale, 30T Scale, 45T Scale,
  kgf Load Brinell Knoop Scale, 60 kgf Scale, 60 kgf 15 kgf 30 kgf 45 kgf Approximate
  1/16 in. Vickers Hardness, Hardness, Load, Load, 1/16 in. Load, 1/16 Load, 1/16 Load, 1/16 Tensile
  (1.588 Hardness 3000 kgf Load, 500 gf Load Diamond (1.588 mm) in. (1.588 in. (1.588 in. (1.588 Strength ksi
  mm) Ball Number 10 mm Ball and Over Penetrator Ball mm) Ball mm) Ball mm) Ball (MPa)
  100 240 240 251 61.5 . . . 93.1 83.1 72.9 116 (800)
  99 234 234 246 60.9 . . . 92.8 82.5 71.9 114 (785)
  98 228 228 241 60.2 . . . 92.5 81.8 70.9 109 (750)
  97 222 222 236 59.5 . . . 92.1 81.1 69.9 104 (715)
  96 216 216 231 58.9 . . . 91.8 80.4 68.9 102 (705)
  95 210 210 226 58.3 . . . 91.5 79.8 67.9 100 (690)
  94 205 205 221 57.6 . . . 91.2 79.1 66.9 98 (675)
  93 200 200 216 57.0 . . . 90.8 78.4 65.9 94 (650)
  92 195 195 211 56.4 . . . 90.5 77.8 64.8 92 (635)
  91 190 190 206 55.8 . . . 90.2 77.1 63.8 90 (620)
  90 185 185 201 55.2 . . . 89.9 76.4 62.8 89 (615)
  89 180 180 196 54.6 . . . 89.5 75.8 61.8 88 (605)
  88 176 176 192 54.0 . . . 89.2 75.1 60.8 86 (590)
  87 172 172 188 53.4 . . . 88.9 74.4 59.8 84 (580)
  86 169 169 184 52.8 . . . 88.6 73.8 58.8 83 (570)
  85 165 165 180 52.3 . . . 88.2 73.1 57.8 82 (565)
  84 162 162 176 51.7 . . . 87.9 72.4 56.8 81 (560)
  83 159 159 173 51.1 . . . 87.6 71.8 55.8 80 (550)
  82 156 156 170 50.6 . . . 87.3 71.1 54.8 77 (530)
  81 153 153 167 50.0 . . . 86.9 70.4 53.8 73 (505)
  80 150 150 164 49.5 . . . 86.6 69.7 52.8 72 (495)
  79 147 147 161 48.9 . . . 86.3 69.1 51.8 70 (485)
  78 144 144 158 48.4 . . . 86.0 68.4 50.8 69 (475)
  77 141 141 155 47.9 . . . 85.6 67.7 49.8 68 (470)
  76 139 139 152 47.3 . . . 85.3 67.1 48.8 67 (460)
  75 137 137 150 46.8 99.6 85.0 66.4 47.8 66 (455)
  74 135 135 147 46.3 99.1 84.7 65.7 46.8 65 (450)
  73 132 132 145 45.8 98.5 84.3 65.1 45.8 64 (440)
  72 130 130 143 45.3 98.0 84.0 64.4 44.8 63 (435)
  71 127 127 141 44.8 97.4 83.7 63.7 43.8 62 (425)
  70 125 125 139 44.3 96.8 83.4 63.1 42.8 61 (420)
  69 123 123 137 43.8 96.2 83.0 62.4 41.8 60 (415)
  68 121 121 135 43.3 95.6 82.7 61.7 40.8 59 (405)
  67 119 119 133 42.8 95.1 82.4 61.0 39.8 58 (400)
  66 117 117 131 42.3 94.5 82.1 60.4 38.7 57 (395)
  65 116 116 129 41.8 93.9 81.8 59.7 37.7 56 (385)
  64 114 114 127 41.4 93.4 81.4 59.0 36.7 . . .
  63 112 112 125 40.9 92.8 81.1 58.4 35.7 . . .
  62 110 110 124 40.4 92.2 80.8 57.7 34.7 . . .
  61 108 108 122 40.0 91.7 80.5 57.0 33.7 . . .
  60 107 107 120 39.5 91.1 80.1 56.4 32.7 . . .
  59 106 106 118 39.0 90.5 79.8 55.7 31.7 . . .
  58 104 104 117 38.6 90.0 79.5 55.0 30.7 . . .
  57 103 103 115 38.1 89.4 79.2 54.4 29.7 . . .
  56 101 101 114 37.7 88.8 78.8 53.7 28.7 . . .
  55 100 100 112 37.2 88.2 78.5 53.0 27.7 . . .
  54 . . . . . . 111 36.8 87.7 78.2 52.4 26.7 . . .
  53 . . . . . . 110 36.3 87.1 77.9 51.7 25.7 . . .
  52 . . . . . . 109 35.9 86.5 77.5 51.0 24.7 . . .
  51 . . . . . . 108 35.5 86.0 77.2 50.3 23.7 . . .
  50 . . . . . . 107 35.0 85.4 76.9 49.7 22.7 . . .
  49 . . . . . . 106 34.6 84.8 76.6 49.0 21.7 . . .
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  611
  TABLE 3
  APPROXIMATE HARDNESS CONVERSION NUMBERS FOR NONAUSTENITIC STEELS (A) (ROCKWELL B TO OTHER
  HARDNESS NUMBERS) (CONT’D)
  Rockwell B Rockwell Superficial Hardness
  Scale, 100- Rockwell A Rockwell F 15T Scale, 30T Scale, 45T Scale,
  kgf Load Brinell Knoop Scale, 60 kgf Scale, 60 kgf 15 kgf 30 kgf 45 kgf Approximate
  1/16-in. Vickers Hardness, Hardness, Load, Load, 1/16 in. Load, 1/16 Load, 1/16 Load, 1/16 Tensile
  (1.588 Hardness 3000 kgf Load, 500 gf Load Diamond (1.588 mm) in. (1.588 in. (1.588 in. (1.588 Strength ksi
  mm) Ball Number 10 mm Ball and Over Penetrator Ball mm) Ball mm) Ball mm) Ball (MPa)
  48 . . . . . . 105 34.1 84.3 76.2 48.3 20.7 . . .
  47 . . . . . . 104 33.7 83.7 75.9 47.7 19.7 . . .
  46 . . . . . . 103 33.3 83.1 75.6 47.0 18.7 . . .
  45 . . . . . . 102 32.9 82.6 75.3 46.3 17.7 . . .
  44 . . . . . . 101 32.4 82.0 74.9 45.7 16.7 . . .
  43 . . . . . . 100 32.0 81.4 74.6 45.0 15.7 . . .
  42 . . . . . . 99 31.6 80.8 74.3 44.3 14.7 . . .
  41 . . . . . . 98 31.2 80.3 74.0 43.7 13.6 . . .
  40 . . . . . . 97 30.7 79.7 73.6 43.0 12.6 . . .
  39 . . . . . . 96 30.3 79.1 73.3 42.3 11.6 . . .
  38 . . . . . . 95 29.9 78.6 73.0 41.6 10.6 . . .
  37 . . . . . . 94 29.5 78.0 72.7 41.0 9.6 . . .
  36 . . . . . . 93 29.1 77.4 72.3 40.3 8.6 . . .
  35 . . . . . . 92 28.7 76.9 72.0 39.6 7.6 . . .
  34 . . . . . . 91 28.2 76.3 71.7 39.0 6.6 . . .
  33 . . . . . . 90 27.8 75.7 71.4 38.3 5.6 . . .
  32 . . . . . . 89 27.4 75.2 71.0 37.6 4.6 . . .
  31 . . . . . . 88 27.0 74.6 70.7 37.0 3.6 . . .
  30 . . . . . . 87 26.6 74.0 70.4 36.3 2.6 . . .
  NOTE:
  (A) This table gives the approximate interrelationships of hardness values and approximate tensile strength of steels. It is possible that steels of
  various compositions and processing histories will deviate in hardness-tensile strength relationship from the data presented in this table. The
  data in this table should not be used for austenitic stainless steels, but have been shown to be applicable for ferritic and martensitic stainless
  steels. The data in this table should not be used to establish a relationship between hardness values and tensile strength of hard drawn wire.
  Where more precise conversions are required, they should be developed specially for each steel composition, heat treatment, and part.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  612
  TABLE 4
  APPROXIMATE HARDNESS CONVERSION NUMBERS FOR AUSTENITIC STEELS (ROCKWELL C TO OTHER
  HARDNESS NUMBERS)
  Rockwell A Scale, 60 Rockwell Superficial Hardness
  Rockwell C Scale, 150 kgf kgf Load, Diamond 15N Scale, 15 kgf Load, 30N Scale, 30 kgf Load, 45N Scale, 45 kgf Load,
  Load, Diamond Penetrator Penetrator Diamond Penetrator Diamond Penetrator Diamond Penetrator
  48 74.4 84.1 66.2 52.1
  47 73.9 83.6 65.3 50.9
  46 73.4 83.1 64.5 49.8
  45 72.9 82.6 63.6 48.7
  44 72.4 82.1 62.7 47.5
  43 71.9 81.6 61.8 46.4
  42 71.4 81.0 61.0 45.2
  41 70.9 80.5 60.1 44.1
  40 70.4 80.0 59.2 43.0
  39 69.9 79.5 58.4 41.8
  38 69.3 79.0 57.5 40.7
  37 68.8 78.5 56.6 39.6
  36 68.3 78.0 55.7 38.4
  35 67.8 77.5 54.9 37.3
  34 67.3 77.0 54.0 36.1
  33 66.8 76.5 53.1 35.0
  32 66.3 75.9 52.3 33.9
  31 65.8 75.4 51.4 32.7
  30 65.3 74.9 50.5 31.6
  29 64.8 74.4 49.6 30.4
  28 64.3 73.9 48.8 29.3
  27 63.8 73.4 47.9 28.2
  26 63.3 72.9 47.0 27.0
  25 62.8 72.4 46.2 25.9
  24 62.3 71.9 45.3 24.8
  23 61.8 71.3 44.4 23.6
  22 61.3 70.8 43.5 22.5
  21 60.8 70.3 42.7 21.3
  20 60.3 69.8 41.8 20.2
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  613
  TABLE 5
  APPROXIMATE HARDNESS CONVERSION NUMBERS FOR AUSTENITIC STEELS (ROCKWELL B TO OTHER
  HARDNESS NUMBERS)
  Rockwell Superficial Hardness
  Rockwell B 15T Scale, 30T Scale, 45T Scale,
  Scale, 100 Rockwell A Scale, 15 kgf Load, 30 kgf Load, 45 kgf Load,
  kgf Load, 1/16 Brinell Hardness, 60 kgf Load, 1/16 in. 1/16 in. 1/16 in.
  in. (1.588 Brinell Indentation 3000 kgf Load, Diamond (1.588 mm) (1.588 mm) (1.588 mm)
  mm) Ball Diameter, mm 10 mm Ball Penetrator Ball Ball Ball
  100 3.79 256 61.5 91.5 80.4 70.2
  99 3.85 248 60.9 91.2 79.7 69.2
  98 3.91 240 60.3 90.8 79.0 68.2
  97 3.96 233 59.7 90.4 78.3 67.2
  96 4.02 226 59.1 90.1 77.7 66.1
  95 4.08 219 58.5 89.7 77.0 65.1
  94 4.14 213 58.0 89.3 76.3 64.1
  93 4.20 207 57.4 88.9 75.6 63.1
  92 4.24 202 56.8 88.6 74.9 62.1
  91 4.30 197 56.2 88.2 74.2 61.1
  90 4.35 192 55.6 87.8 73.5 60.1
  89 4.40 187 55.0 87.5 72.8 59.0
  88 4.45 183 54.5 87.1 72.1 58.0
  87 4.51 178 53.9 86.7 71.4 57.0
  86 4.55 174 53.3 86.4 70.7 56.0
  85 4.60 170 52.7 86.0 70.0 55.0
  84 4.65 167 52.1 85.6 69.3 54.0
  83 4.70 163 51.5 85.2 68.6 52.9
  82 4.74 160 50.9 84.9 67.9 51.9
  81 4.79 156 50.4 84.5 67.2 50.9
  80 4.84 153 49.8 84.1 66.5 49.9
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  614
  TABLE 6
  BRINELL HARDNESS NUMBERS (A)
  (Ball 10 mm in Diameter, Applied Loads of 500, 1500, and 3000 kgf)
  Brinell Hardness Brinell Hardness Brinell Hardness Brinell Hardness
  Number Number Number Number
  Diameter of 500 1500 3000 Diameter of 500 1500 3000 Diameter of 500 1500 3000 Diameter of 500 1500 3000
  Indentation, kgf kgf kgf Indentation, kgf kgf kgf Indentation, kgf kgf kgf Indentation, kgf kgf kgf
  mm Load Load Load mm Load Load Load mm Load Load Load mm Load Load Load
  2.00 158 473 945 2.60 92.6 278 555 3.20 60.5 182 363 3.80 42.4 127 255
  2.01 156 468 936 2.61 91.8 276 551 3.21 60.1 180 361 3.81 42.2 127 253
  2.02 154 463 926 2.62 91.1 273 547 3.22 59.8 179 359 3.82 42.0 126 252
  2.03 153 459 917 2.63 90.4 271 543 3.23 59.4 178 356 3.83 41.7 125 250
  2.04 151 454 908 2.64 89.7 269 538 3.24 59.0 177 354 3.84 41.5 125 249
  2.05 150 450 899 2.65 89.0 267 534 3.25 58.6 176 352 3.85 41.3 124 248
  2.06 148 445 890 2.66 88.4 265 530 3.26 58.3 175 350 3.86 41.1 123 246
  2.07 147 441 882 2.67 87.7 263 526 3.27 57.9 174 347 3.87 40.9 123 245
  2.08 146 437 873 2.68 87.0 261 522 3.28 57.5 173 345 3.88 40.6 122 244
  2.09 144 432 865 2.69 86.4 259 518 3.29 57.2 172 343 3.89 40.4 121 242
  2.10 143 428 856 2.70 85.7 257 514 3.30 56.8 170 341 3.90 40.2 121 241
  2.11 141 424 848 2.71 85.1 255 510 3.31 56.5 169 339 3.91 40.0 120 240
  2.12 140 420 840 2.72 84.4 253 507 3.32 56.1 168 337 3.92 39.8 119 239
  2.13 139 416 832 2.73 83.8 251 503 3.33 55.8 167 335 3.93 39.6 119 237
  2.14 137 412 824 2.74 83.2 250 499 3.34 55.4 166 333 3.94 39.4 118 236
  2.15 136 408 817 2.75 82.6 248 495 3.35 55.1 165 331 3.95 39.1 117 235
  2.16 135 404 809 2.76 81.9 246 492 3.36 54.8 164 329 3.96 38.9 117 234
  2.17 134 401 802 2.77 81.3 244 488 3.37 54.4 163 326 3.97 38.7 116 232
  2.18 132 397 794 2.78 80.8 242 485 3.38 54.1 162 325 3.98 38.5 116 231
  2.19 131 393 787 2.79 80.2 240 481 3.39 53.8 161 323 3.99 38.3 115 230
  2.20 130 390 780 2.80 79.6 239 477 3.40 53.4 160 321 4.00 38.1 114 229
  2.21 129 386 772 2.81 79.0 237 474 3.41 53.1 159 319 4.01 37.9 114 228
  2.22 128 383 765 2.82 78.4 235 471 3.42 52.8 158 317 4.02 37.7 113 226
  2.23 126 379 758 2.83 77.9 234 467 3.43 52.5 157 315 4.03 37.5 113 225
  2.24 125 376 752 2.84 77.3 232 464 344 52.2 156 313 4.04 37.3 112 224
  2.25 124 372 745 2.85 76.8 230 461 3.45 51.8 156 311 4.05 37.1 111 223
  2.26 123 369 738 2.86 76.2 229 457 3.46 51.5 155 309 4.06 37.0 111 222
  2.27 122 366 732 2.87 75.7 227 454 3.47 51.2 154 307 4.07 36.8 110 221
  2.28 121 363 725 2.88 75.1 225 451 3.48 50.9 153 306 4.08 36.6 110 219
  2.29 120 359 719 2.89 74.6 224 448 3.49 50.6 152 304 4.09 36.4 109 218
  2.30 119 356 712 2.90 74.1 222 444 3.50 50.3 151 302 4.10 36.2 109 217
  2.31 118 353 706 2.91 73.6 221 441 3.51 50.0 150 300 4.11 36.0 108 216
  2.32 117 350 700 2.92 73.0 219 438 3.52 49.7 149 298 4.12 35.8 108 215
  2.33 116 347 694 2.93 72.5 218 435 3.53 49.4 148 297 4.13 35.7 107 214
  2.34 115 344 688 2.94 72.0 216 432 3.54 49.2 147 295 4.14 35.5 106 213
  2.35 114 341 682 2.95 71.5 215 429 3.55 48.9 147 293 4.15 35.3 106 212
  2.36 113 338 676 2.96 71.0 213 426 3.56 48.6 146 292 4.16 35.1 105 211
  2.37 112 335 670 2.97 70.5 212 423 3.57 48.3 145 290 4.17 34.9 105 210
  2.38 111 332 665 2.98 70.1 210 420 3.58 48.0 144 288 4.18 34.8 104 209
  2.39 110 330 659 2.99 69.6 209 417 3.59 47.7 143 286 4.19 34.6 104 208
  2.40 109 327 653 3.00 69.1 207 415 3.60 47.5 142 285 4.20 34.4 103 207
  2.41 108 324 648 3.01 68.6 206 412 3.61 47.2 142 283 4.21 34.2 103 205
  2.42 107 322 643 3.02 68.2 205 409 3.62 46.9 141 282 4.22 34.1 102 204
  2.43 106 319 637 3.03 67.7 203 406 3.63 46.7 140 280 4.23 33.9 102 203
  2.44 105 316 632 3.04 67.3 202 404 3.64 46.4 139 278 4.24 33.7 101 202
  2.45 104 313 627 3.05 66.8 200 401 3.65 46.1 138 277 4.25 33.6 101 201
  2.46 104 311 621 3.06 66.4 199 398 3.66 45.9 138 275 4.26 33.4 100 200
  2.47 103 308 616 3.07 65.9 198 395 3.67 45.6 137 274 4.27 33.2 99.7 199
  2.48 102 306 611 3.08 65.5 196 393 3.68 45.4 136 272 4.28 33.1 99.2 198
  2.49 101 303 606 3.09 65.0 195 390 3.69 45.1 135 271 4.29 32.9 98.8 198
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  615
  TABLE 6
  BRINELL HARDNESS NUMBERS (A) (CONT’D)
  (Ball 10 mm in Diameter, Applied Loads of 500, 1500, and 3000 kgf)
  Brinell Hardness Brinell Hardness Brinell Hardness Brinell Hardness
  Number Number Number Number
  Diameter of 500 1500 3000 Diameter of 500 1500 3000 Diameter of 500 1500 3000 Diameter of 500 1500 3000
  Indentation, kgf kgf kgf Indentation, kgf kgf kgf Indentation, kgf kgf kgf Indentation, kgf kgf kgf
  mm Load Load Load mm Load Load Load mm Load Load Load mm Load Load Load
  2.50 100 301 601 3.10 64.6 194 388 3.70 44.9 135 269 4.30 32.8 98.3 197
  2.51 99.4 298 597 3.11 64.2 193 385 3.71 44.6 134 268 4.31 32.6 97.8 196
  2.52 98.6 296 592 3.12 63.8 191 383 3.72 44.4 133 266 4.32 32.4 97.3 195
  2.53 97.8 294 587 3.13 63.3 190 380 3.73 44.1 132 265 4.33 32.3 96.8 194
  2.54 97.1 291 582 3.14 62.9 189 378 3.74 43.9 132 263 4.34 32.1 96.4 193
  2.55 96.3 289 578 3.15 62.5 188 375 3.75 43.6 131 262 4.35 32.0 95.9 192
  2.56 95.5 287 573 3.16 62.1 186 373 3.76 43.4 130 260 4.36 31.8 95.5 191
  2.57 94.8 284 569 3.17 61.7 185 370 3.77 43.1 129 259 4.37 31.7 95.0 190
  2.58 94.0 282 564 3.18 61.3 184 368 3.78 42.9 129 257 4.38 31.5 94.5 189
  2.59 93.3 280 560 3.19 60.9 183 366 3.79 42.7 128 256 4.39 31.4 94.1 188
  4.40 31.2 93.6 187 5.05 23.3 69.8 140 5.70 17.8 53.5 107 6.35 14.0 42.0 84.0
  4.41 31.1 93.2 186 5.06 23.2 69.5 139 5.71 17.8 53.3 107 6.36 13.9 41.8 83.7
  4.42 30.9 92.7 185 5.07 23.1 69.2 138 5.72 17.7 53.1 106 6.37 13.9 41.7 83.4
  4.43 30.8 92.3 185 5.08 23.0 68.9 138 5.73 17.6 52.9 106 6.38 13.8 41.5 83.1
  4.44 30.6 91.8 184 5.09 22.9 68.6 137 5.74 17.6 52.7 105 6.39 13.8 41.4 82.8
  4.45 30.5 91.4 183 5.10 22.8 68.3 137 5.75 17.5 52.5 105 6.40 13.7 41.2 82.5
  4.46 30.3 91.0 182 5.11 22.7 68.0 136 5.76 17.4 52.3 105 6.41 13.7 41.1 82.2
  4.47 30.2 90.5 181 5.12 22.6 67.7 135 5.77 17.4 52.1 104 6.42 13.6 40.9 81.9
  4.48 30.0 90.1 180 5.13 22.5 67.4 135 5.78 17.3 51.9 104 6.43 13.6 40.8 81.6
  4.49 29.9 89.7 179 5.14 22.4 67.1 134 5.79 17.2 51.7 103 6.44 13.5 40.6 81.3
  4.50 29.8 89.3 179 5.15 22.3 66.9 134 5.80 17.2 51.5 103 6.45 13.5 40.5 81.0
  4.51 29.6 88.8 178 5.16 22.2 66.6 133 5.81 17.1 51.3 103 6.46 13.4 40.4 80.7
  4.52 29.5 88.4 177 5.17 22.1 66.3 133 5.82 17.0 51.1 102 6.47 13.4 40.2 80.4
  4.53 29.3 88.0 176 5.18 22.0 66.0 132 5.83 17.0 50.9 102 6.48 13.4 40.1 80.1
  4.54 29.2 87.6 175 5.19 21.9 65.8 132 5.84 16.9 50.7 101 6.49 13.3 39.9 79.8
  4.55 29.1 87.2 174 5.20 21.8 65.5 131 5.85 16.8 50.5 101 6.50 13.3 39.8 79.6
  4.56 28.9 86.8 174 5.21 21.7 65.2 130 5.86 16.8 50.3 101 6.51 13.2 39.6 79.3
  4.57 28.8 86.4 173 5.22 21.6 64.9 130 5.87 16.7 50.2 100 6.52 13.2 39.5 79.0
  4.58 28.7 86.0 172 5.23 21.6 64.7 129 5.88 16.7 50.0 99.9 6.53 13.1 39.4 78.7
  4.59 28.5 85.6 171 5.24 21.5 64.4 129 5.89 16.6 49.8 99.5 6.54 13.1 39.2 78.4
  4.60 28.4 85.4 170 5.25 21.4 64.1 128 5.90 16.5 49.6 99.2 6.55 13.0 39.1 78.2
  4.61 28.3 84.8 170 5.26 21.3 63.9 128 5.91 16.5 49.4 98.8 6.56 13.0 38.9 78.0
  4.62 28.1 84.4 169 5.27 21.2 63.6 127 5.92 16.4 49.2 98.4 6.57 12.9 38.8 77.6
  4.63 28.0 84.0 168 5.28 21.1 63.3 127 5.93 16.3 49.0 98.0 6.58 12.9 38.7 77.3
  4.64 27.9 83.6 167 5.29 21.0 63.1 126 5.94 16.3 48.8 97.7 6.59 12.8 38.5 77.1
  4.65 27.8 83.3 167 5.30 20.9 62.8 126 5.95 16.2 48.7 97.3 6.60 12.8 38.4 76.8
  4.66 27.6 82.9 166 5.31 20.9 62.6 125 5.96 16.2 48.5 96.9 6.61 12.8 38.3 76.5
  4.67 27.5 82.5 165 5.32 20.8 62.3 125 5.97 16.1 48.3 96.6 6.62 12.7 38.1 76.2
  4.68 27.4 82.1 164 5.33 20.7 62.1 124 5.98 16.0 48.1 96.2 6.63 12.7 38.0 76.0
  4.69 27.3 81.8 164 5.34 20.6 61.8 124 5.99 16.0 47.9 95.9 6.64 12.6 37.9 75.7
  4.70 27.1 81.4 163 5.35 20.5 61.5 123 6.00 15.9 47.7 95.5 6.65 12.6 37.7 75.4
  4.71 27.0 81.0 162 5.36 20.4 61.3 123 6.01 15.9 47.6 95.1 6.66 12.5 37.6 75.2
  4.72 26.9 80.7 161 5.37 20.3 61.0 122 6.02 15.8 47.4 94.8 6.67 12.5 37.5 74.9
  4.73 26.8 80.3 161 5.38 20.3 60.8 122 6.03 15.7 47.2 94.4 6.68 12.4 37.3 74.7
  4.74 26.6 79.9 160 5.39 20.2 60.6 121 6.04 15.7 47.0 94.1 6.69 12.4 37.2 74.4
  4.75 26.5 79.6 159 5.40 20.1 60.3 121 6.05 15.6 46.8 93.7 6.70 12.4 37.1 74.1
  4.76 26.4 79.2 158 5.41 20.0 60.1 120 6.06 15.6 46.7 93.4 6.71 12.3 36.9 73.9
  4.77 26.3 78.9 158 5.42 19.9 59.8 120 6.07 15.5 46.5 93.0 6.72 12.3 36.8 73.6
  4.78 26.2 78.5 157 5.43 19.9 59.6 119 6.08 15.4 46.3 92.7 6.73 12.2 36.7 73.4
  4.79 26.1 78.2 156 5.44 19.8 59.3 119 6.09 15.4 46.2 92.3 6.74 12.2 36.6 73.1
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  616
  TABLE 6
  BRINELL HARDNESS NUMBERS (A) (CONT’D)
  (Ball 10 mm in Diameter, Applied Loads of 500, 1500, and 3000 kgf)
  Brinell Hardness Brinell Hardness Brinell Hardness Brinell Hardness
  Number Number Number Number
  Diameter of 500 1500 3000 Diameter of 500 1500 3000 Diameter of 500 1500 3000 Diameter of 500 1500 3000
  Indentation, kgf kgf kgf Indentation, kgf kgf kgf Indentation, kgf kgf kgf Indentation, kgf kgf kgf
  mm Load Load Load mm Load Load Load mm Load Load Load mm Load Load Load
  4.80 25.9 77.8 156 5.45 19.7 59.1 118 6.10 15.3 46.0 92.0 6.75 12.1 36.4 72.8
  4.81 25.8 77.5 155 5.46 19.6 58.9 118 6.11 15.3 45.8 91.7 6.76 12.1 36.3 72.6
  4.82 25.7 77.1 154 5.47 19.5 58.6 117 6.12 15.2 45.7 91.3 6.77 12.1 36.2 72.3
  4.83 25.6 76.8 154 5.48 19.5 58.4 117 6.13 15.2 45.5 91.0 6.78 12.0 36.0 72.1
  4.84 25.5 76.4 153 5.49 19.4 58.2 116 6.14 15.1 45.3 90.6 6.79 12.0 35.9 71.8
  4.85 25.4 76.1 152 5.50 19.3 57.9 116 6.15 15.1 45.2 90.3 6.80 11.9 35.8 71.6
  4.86 25.3 75.8 152 5.51 19.2 57.7 115 6.16 15.0 45.0 90.0 6.81 11.9 35.7 71.3
  4.87 25.1 75.4 151 5.52 19.2 57.5 115 6.17 14.9 44.8 89.6 6.82 11.8 35.5 71.1
  4.88 25.0 75.1 150 5.53 19.1 57.2 114 6.18 14.9 44.7 89.3 6.83 11.8 35.4 70.8
  4.89 24.9 74.8 150 5.54 19.0 57.0 114 6.19 14.8 44.5 89.0 6.84 11.8 35.3 70.6
  4.90 24.8 74.4 149 5.55 18.9 56.8 114 6.20 14.7 44.3 88.7 6.86 11.7 35.2 70.4
  4.91 24.7 74.1 148 5.56 18.9 56.6 113 6.21 14.7 44.2 88.3 6.86 11.7 35.1 70.1
  4.92 24.6 73.8 148 5.57 18.8 56.3 113 6.22 14.7 44.0 88.0 6.87 11.6 34.9 69.9
  4.93 24.5 73.5 147 5.58 18.7 56.1 112 6.23 14.6 43.8 87.7 6.88 11.6 34.8 69.6
  4.94 24.4 73.2 146 5.59 18.6 55.9 112 6.24 14.6 43.7 87.4 6.89 11.6 34.7 69.4
  4.95 24.3 72.8 146 5.60 18.6 55.7 111 6.25 14.5 43.5 87.1 6.90 11.5 34.6 69.2
  4.96 24.2 72.5 145 5.61 18.5 55.5 111 6.26 14.5 43.4 86.7 6.91 11.5 34.5 68.9
  4.97 24.1 72.2 144 5.62 18.4 55.2 110 6.27 14.4 43.2 86.4 6.92 11.4 34.3 68.7
  4.98 24.0 71.9 144 5.63 18.3 55.0 110 6.28 14.4 43.1 86.1 6.93 11.4 34.2 68.4
  4.99 23.9 71.6 143 5.64 18.3 54.8 110 6.29 14.3 42.9 85.8 6.94 11.4 34.1 68.2
  5.00 23.8 71.3 143 5.65 18.2 54.6 109 6.30 14.2 42.7 85.5 6.95 11.3 34.0 68.0
  5.01 23.7 71.0 142 5.66 18.1 54.4 109 6.31 14.2 42.6 85.2 6.96 11.3 33.9 67.7
  5.02 23.6 70.7 141 5.67 18.1 54.2 108 6.32 14.1 42.4 84.9 6.97 11.3 33.8 67.5
  5.03 23.5 70.4 141 5.68 18.0 54.0 108 6.33 14.1 42.3 84.6 6.98 11.2 33.6 67.3
  5.04 23.4 70.1 140 5.69 17.9 53.7 107 6.34 14.0 42.1 84.3 6.99 11.2 33.5 67.0
  NOTE:
  (A) Prepared by the Engineering Mechanics Section, Institute for Standards Technology.
  TABLE 7
  PERCENT SHEAR FOR MEASUREMENTS MADE IN INCHES
  Dimension Dimension A, in.
  B, 0.05 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.30 0.32 0.34 0.36 0.38 0.40
  in.
  0.05 98 96 95 94 94 93 92 91 90 90 89 88 87 86 85 85 84
  0.10 96 92 90 89 87 85 84 82 81 79 77 76 74 73 71 69 68
  0.12 95 90 88 86 85 83 81 79 77 75 73 71 69 67 65 63 61
  0.14 94 89 86 84 82 80 77 75 73 71 68 66 64 62 59 57 55
  0.16 94 87 85 82 79 77 74 72 69 67 64 61 59 56 53 51 48
  0.18 93 85 83 80 77 74 72 68 65 62 59 56 54 51 48 45 42
  0.20 92 84 81 77 74 72 68 65 61 58 55 52 48 45 42 39 36
  0.22 91 82 79 75 72 68 65 61 57 54 50 47 43 40 36 33 29
  0.24 90 81 77 73 69 65 61 57 54 50 46 42 38 34 30 27 23
  0.26 90 79 75 71 67 62 58 54 50 46 41 37 33 29 25 20 16
  0.28 89 77 73 68 64 59 55 50 46 41 37 32 28 23 18 14 10
  0.30 88 76 71 66 61 56 52 47 42 37 32 27 23 18 13 9 3
  0.31 88 75 70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 18 10 5 0
  GENERAL NOTE: Since this table is set up for finite measurements or dimensions A and B, 100% shear is to be reported when either A or B
  is zero.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  617
  TABLE 8
  PERCENT SHEAR FOR MEASUREMENTS MADE IN MILLIMETRES
  Dimension Dimension A, mm
  B, mm 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10
  1.0 99 98 98 97 96 96 95 94 94 93 92 92 91 91 90 89 89 88 88
  1.5 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
  2.0 98 96 95 94 92 91 90 89 88 86 85 84 82 81 80 79 77 76 75
  2.5 97 95 94 92 91 89 88 86 84 83 81 80 78 77 75 73 72 70 69
  3.0 96 94 92 91 89 87 85 83 81 79 77 76 74 72 70 68 66 64 62
  3.5 96 93 91 89 87 85 82 80 78 76 74 72 69 67 65 63 61 58 56
  4.0 95 92 90 88 85 82 80 77 75 72 70 67 65 62 60 57 55 52 50
  4.5 94 92 89 86 83 80 77 75 72 69 66 63 61 58 55 52 49 46 44
  5.0 94 91 88 85 81 78 75 72 69 66 62 59 56 53 50 47 44 41 37
  5.5 93 90 86 83 79 76 72 69 66 62 59 55 52 48 45 42 38 35 31
  6.0 92 89 85 81 77 74 70 66 62 59 55 51 47 44 40 36 33 29 25
  6.5 92 88 84 80 76 72 67 63 59 55 51 47 43 39 35 31 27 23 19
  7.0 91 87 82 78 74 69 65 61 56 52 47 43 39 34 30 26 21 17 12
  7.5 91 86 81 77 72 67 62 58 53 48 44 39 34 30 25 20 16 11 6
  8.0 90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0
  GENERAL NOTE: Since this table is set up for finite measurements or dimensions A and B, 100% shear is to be reported when either A or B
  is zero.
  TABLE 9
  CHARPY V-NOTCH TEST ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR VARIOUS SUB-SIZE SPECIMENS
  Full Size, 3/4 Size, 2/3 Size, 1/2 Size, 1/3 Size, 1/4 Size,
  10 by 10 mm 10 by 7.5 mm 10 by 6.7 mm 10 by 5 mm 10 by 3.3 mm 10 by 2.5 mm
  ft W lbf [J] ft W lbf [J] ft W lbf [J] ft W lbf [J] ft W lbf [J] ft W lbf [J]
  40 [54] 30 [41] 27 [37] 20 [27] 13 [18] 10 [14]
  35 [48] 26 [35] 23 [31] 18 [24] 12 [16] 9 [12]
  30 [41] 22 [30] 20 [27] 15 [20] 10 [14] 8 [11]
  25 [34] 19 [26] 17 [23] 12 [16] 8 [11] 6 [8]
  20 [27] 15 [20] 13 [18] 10 [14] 7 [10] 5 [7]
  16 [22] 12 [16] 11 [15] 8 [11] 5 [7] 4 [5]
  15 [20] 11 [15] 10 [14] 8 [11] 5 [7] 4 [5]
  13 [18] 10 [14] 9 [12] 6 [8] 4 [5] 3 [4]
  12 [16] 9 [12] 8 [11] 6 [8] 4 [5] 3 [4]
  10 [14] 8 [11] 7 [10] 5 [7] 3 [4] 2 [3]
  7 [10] 5 [7] 5 [7] 4 [5] 2 [3] 2 [3]
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  618
  ANNEXES
  (Mandatory Information)
  A1. STEEL BAR PRODUCTS
  A1.1 Scope
  A1.1.1 This supplement delineates only those details
  which are peculiar to hot-rolled and cold-finished steel bars
  and are not covered in the general section of these test
  methods.
  A1.2 Orientation of Test Specimens
  A1.2.1 Carbon and alloy steel bars and bar-size
  shapes, due to their relatively small cross-sectional dimensions,
  are customarily tested in the longitudinal direction.
  In special cases where size permits and the fabrication or
  service of a part justifies testing in a transverse direction,
  the selection and location of test or tests are a matter of
  agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
  A1.3 Tension Test
  A1.3.1 Carbon Steel Bars — Carbon steel bars are
  not commonly specified to tensile requirements in the asrolled
  condition for sizes of rounds, squares, hexagons,
  and octagons under 1/2 in. (13 mm) in diameter or distance
  between parallel faces nor for other bar-size sections, other
  than flats, less than 1 in.2 (645mm2 ) in cross-sectional area.
  A1.3.2 Alloy Steel Bars — Alloy steel bars are usually
  not tested in the as-rolled condition.
  A1.3.3 When tension tests are specified, the practice
  for selecting test specimens for hot-rolled and cold-finished
  steel bars of various sizes shall be in accordance with Table
  A1.1, unless otherwise specified in the product specification.
  A1.4 Bend Test
  A1.4.1 When bend tests are specified, the recommended
  practice for hot-rolled and cold-finished steel bars
  shall be in accordance with Table A1.2.
  A1.5 Hardness Test
  A1.5.1 Hardness Tests on Bar Products — flats,
  rounds, squares, hexagons and octagons — is conducted
  on the surface after a minimum removal of 0.015 in. to
  provide for accurate hardness penetration.
  A2. STEEL TUBULAR PRODUCTS
  A2.1 Scope
  A2.1.1 This supplement covers test specimens and
  test methods that are applicable to tubular products and
  are not covered in the general section of Test Methods and
  Definitions A 370.
  A2.1.2 Tubular shapes covered by this specification
  include, round, square, rectangular, and special shapes.
  A2.2 Tension Test
  A2.2.1 Full-Size Longitudinal Test Specimens:
  A2.2.1.1 As an alternative to the use of longitudinal
  strip test specimens or longitudinal round test specimens,
  tension test specimens of full-size tubular sections
  are used, provided that the testing equipment has sufficient
  capacity. Snug-fitting metal plugs should be inserted far
  enough in the end of such tubular specimens to permit the
  testing machine jaws to grip the specimens properly without
  crushing. A design that may be used for such plugs is
  shown in Fig. A2.1. The plugs shall not extend into that
  part of the specimen on which the elongation is measured
  (Fig. A2.1). Care should be exercised to see that insofar
  as practicable, the load in such cases is applied axially.
  The length of the full-section specimen depends on the
  gage length prescribed for measuring the elongation.
  A2.2.1.2 Unless otherwise required by the product
  specification, the gage length is 2 in. or 50 mm, except
  that for tubing having an outside diameter of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm)
  or less, it is customary for a gage length equal to four
  times the outside diameter to be used when elongation
  comparable to that obtainable with larger test specimens
  is required.
  A2.2.1.3 To determine the cross-sectional area of
  the full-section specimen, measurements shall be recorded
  as the average or mean between the greatest and least
  measurements of the outside diameter and the average or
  mean wall thickness, to the nearest 0.001 in. (0.025 mm)
  and the cross-sectional area is determined by the following
  equation:
  A p 3.1416t(D – t) (A2.1)
  where:
  A p sectional area, in.2
  D p outside diameter, in., and
  t p thickness of tube wall, in.
  NOTE A2.1— There exist other methods of cross-sectional area determination,
  such as by weighing of the specimens, which are equally accurate
  or appropriate for the purpose.
  A2.2.2 Longitudinal Strip Test Specimens:
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  619
  A2.2.2.1 As an alternative to the use of full-size
  longitudinal test specimens or longitudinal round test specimens,
  longitudinal strip test specimens, obtained from
  strips cut from the tubular product as shown in Fig. A2.2
  and machined to the dimensions shown in Fig. A2.3 are
  used. For welded structural tubing, such test specimens
  shall be from a location at least 90° from the weld; for
  other welded tubular products, such test specimens shall
  be from a location approximately 90° from the weld. Unless
  otherwise required by the product specification, the gage
  length is 2 in. or 50 mm. The test specimens shall be
  tested using grips that are flat or have a surface contour
  corresponding to the curvature of the tubular product, or
  the ends of the test specimens shall be flattened without
  heating prior to the test specimens being tested using flat
  grips. The test specimen shown as specimen no. 4 in Fig.
  3 shall be used, unless the capacity of the testing equipment
  or the dimensions and nature of the tubular product to be
  tested makes the use of specimen nos. 1, 2, or 3 necessary.
  NOTE A2.2— An exact formula for calculating the cross-sectional area
  of specimens of the type shown in Fig. A2.3 taken from a circular tube
  is given in Test Methods E 8 or E 8M.
  A2.2.2.2 The width should be measured at each
  end of the gage length to determine parallelism and also
  at the center. The thickness should be measured at the
  center and used with the center measurement of the width
  to determine the cross-sectional area. The center width
  dimension should be recorded to the nearest 0.005 in.
  (0.127 mm), and the thickness measurement to the nearest
  0.001 in.
  A2.2.3 Transverse Strip Test Specimens:
  A2.2.3.1 In general, transverse tension tests are
  not recommended for tubular products, in sizes smaller
  than 8 in. in nominal diameter. When required, transverse
  tension test specimens may be taken from rings cut from
  ends of tubes or pipe as shown in Fig. A2.4. Flattening of
  the specimen may be done either after separating it from
  the tube as in Fig. A2.4 (a), or before separating it as in
  Fig. A2.4 (b), and may be done hot or cold; but if the
  flattening is done cold, the specimen may subsequently be
  normalized. Specimens from tubes or pipe for which heat
  treatment is specified, after being flattened either hot or
  cold, shall be given the same treatment as the tubes or
  pipe. For tubes or pipe having a wall thickness of less than
  3/4 in. (19 mm), the transverse test specimen shall be of the
  form and dimensions shown in Fig. A2.5 and either or both
  surfaces may be machined to secure uniform thickness.
  Specimens for transverse tension tests on welded steel
  tubes or pipe to determine strength of welds, shall be
  located perpendicular to the welded seams with the weld
  at about the middle of their length.
  A2.2.3.2 The width should be measured at each
  end of the gage length to determine parallelism and also
  at the center. The thickness should be measured at the
  center and used with the center measurement of the width
  to determine the cross-sectional area. The center width
  dimension should be recorded to the nearest 0.005 in.
  (0.127 mm), and the thickness measurement to the nearest
  0.001 in. (0.025 mm).
  A2.2.4 Round Test Specimens:
  A2.2.4.1 When provided for in the product specification,
  the round test specimen shown in Fig. 4 may
  be used.
  A2.2.4.2 The diameter of the round test specimen
  is measured at the center of the specimen to the nearest
  0.001 in. (0.025 mm).
  A2.2.4.3 Small-size specimens proportional to
  standard, as shown in Fig. 4, may be used when it is
  necessary to test material from which the standard specimen
  cannot be prepared. Other sizes of small-size specimens
  may be used. In any such small-size specimen, it is
  important that the gage length for measurement of elongation
  be four times the diameter of the specimen (see Note
  4, Fig. 4). The elongation requirements for the round specimen
  2-in. gage length in the product specification shall
  apply to the small-size specimens.
  A2.2.4.4 For transverse specimens, the section
  from which the specimen is taken shall not be flattened or
  otherwise deformed.
  A2.2.4.5 Longitudinal test specimens are obtained
  from strips cut from the tubular product as shown in
  Fig. A2.2.
  A2.3 Determination of Transverse Yield Strength,
  Hydraulic Ring-Expansion Method
  A2.3.1 Hardness tests are made on the outside surface,
  inside surface, or wall cross-section depending upon
  product-specification limitation. Surface preparation may
  be necessary to obtain accurate hardness values.
  A2.3.2 A testing machine and method for determining
  the transverse yield strength from an annular ring specimen,
  have been developed and described in A2.3.3–8.1.2.
  A2.3.3 A diagrammatic vertical cross-sectional
  sketch of the testing machine is shown in Fig. A2.6.
  A2.3.4 In determining the transverse yield strength
  on this machine, a short ring (commonly 3 in. (76 mm) in
  length) test specimen is used. After the large circular nut
  is removed from the machine, the wall thickness of the
  ring specimen is determined and the specimen is telescoped
  over the oil resistant rubber gasket. The nut is then replaced,
  but is not turned down tight against the specimen. A slight
  clearance is left between the nut and specimen for the
  purpose of permitting free radial movement of the specimen
  as it is being tested. Oil under pressure is then admitted
  to the interior of the rubber gasket through the pressure
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  620
  line under the control of a suitable valve. An accurately
  calibrated pressure gage serves to measure oil pressure.
  Any air in the system is removed through the bleeder line.
  As the oil pressure is increased, the rubber gasket expands
  which in turn stresses the specimen circumferentially. As
  the pressure builds up, the lips of the rubber gasket act as
  a seal to prevent oil leakage. With continued increase in
  pressure, the ring specimen is subjected to a tension stress
  and elongates accordingly. The entire outside circumference
  of the ring specimen is considered as the gage length
  and the strain is measured with a suitable extensometer
  which will be described later. When the desired total strain
  or extension under load is reached on the extensometer,
  the oil pressure in pounds per square inch is read and by
  employing Barlow’s formula, the unit yield strength is
  calculated. The yield strength, thus determined, is a true
  result since the test specimen has not been cold worked
  by flattening and closely approximates the same condition
  as the tubular section from which it is cut. Further, the test
  closely simulates service conditions in pipe lines. One
  testing machine unit may be used for several different sizes
  of pipe by the use of suitable rubber gaskets and adapters.
  NOTE A2.3— Barlow’s formula may be stated two ways:
  (1) P p2St/D (A2.2)
  (2) S pPD/2t (A2.3)
  where:
  P p internal hydrostatic pressure, psi,
  S p unit circumferential stress in the wall of the tube produced by
  the internal hydrostatic pressure, psi,
  t p thickness of the tube wall, in., and
  D p outside diameter of the tube, in.
  A2.3.5 A roller chain type extensometer which has
  been found satisfactory for measuring the elongation of
  the ring specimen is shown in Fig. A2.7 and Fig. A2.8.
  Fig. A2.7 shows the extensometer in position, but
  unclamped, on a ring specimen. A small pin, through which
  the strain is transmitted to and measured by the dial gage,
  extends through the hollow threaded stud. When the extensometer
  is clamped, as shown in Fig. A2.8, the desired
  tension which is necessary to hold the instrument in place
  and to remove any slack, is exerted on the roller chain by
  the spring. Tension on the spring may be regulated as
  desired by the knurled thumb screw. By removing or adding
  rollers, the roller chain may be adapted for different sizes
  of tubular sections.
  A2.4 Hardness Tests
  A2.4.1 Hardness tests are made either on the outside
  or the inside surfaces on the end of the tube as appropriate.
  A2.4.2 The standard 3000 kgf Brinell load may cause
  too much deformation in a thin-walled tubular specimen.
  In this case the 500 kgf load shall be applied, or inside
  stiffening by means of an internal anvil should be used.
  Brinell testing shall not be applicable to tubular products
  less than 2 in. (51 mm) in outside diameter, or less than
  0.200 in. (5.1 mm) in wall thickness.
  A2.4.3 The Rockwell hardness tests are normally
  made on the inside surface, a flat on the outside surface,
  or on the wall cross-section depending upon the product
  limitation. Rockwell hardness tests are not performed on
  tubes smaller than 5/16 in. (7.9 mm) in outside diameter,
  nor are they performed on the inside surface of tubes with
  less than 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) inside diameter. Rockwell hardness
  tests are not performed on annealed tubes with walls less
  than 0.065 in. (1.65 mm) thick or cold worked or heat
  treated tubes with walls less than 0.049 in. (1.24 mm)
  thick. For tubes with wall thicknesses less than those permitting
  the regular Rockwell hardness test, the Superficial
  Rockwell test is sometimes substituted. Transverse Rockwell
  hardness readings can be made on tubes with a wall
  thickness of 0.187 in. (4.75 mm) or greater. The curvature
  and the wall thickness of the specimen impose limitations
  on the Rockwell hardness test. When a comparison is made
  between Rockwell determinations made on the outside surface
  and determinations made on the inside surface, adjustment
  of the readings will be required to compensate for
  the effect of curvature. The Rockwell B scale is used on
  all materials having an expected hardness range of B0 to
  B100. The Rockwell C scale is used on material having
  an expected hardness range of C20 to C68.
  A2.4.4 Superficial Rockwell hardness tests are normally
  performed on the outside surface whenever possible
  and whenever excessive spring back is not encountered.
  Otherwise, the tests may be performed on the inside. Superficial
  Rockwell hardness tests shall not be performed on
  tubes with an inside diameter of less than 1/4 in. (6.4 mm).
  The wall thickness limitations for the Superficial Rockwell
  hardness test are given in Table A2.1 and Table A2.2.
  A2.4.5 When the outside diameter, inside diameter,
  or wall thickness precludes the obtaining of accurate hardness
  values, tubular products shall be specified to tensile
  properties and so tested.
  A2.5 Manipulating Tests
  A2.5.1 The following tests are made to prove ductility
  of certain tubular products:
  A2.5.1.1 Flattening Test — The flattening test as
  commonly made on specimens cut from tubular products
  is conducted by subjecting rings from the tube or pipe to
  a prescribed degree of flattening between parallel plates
  (Fig. A2.4). The severity of the flattening test is measured
  by the distance between the parallel plates and is varied
  according to the dimensions of the tube or pipe. The flattening
  test specimen should not be less than 21/2 in.
  (63.5 mm) in length and should be flattened cold to the
  extent required by the applicable material specifications.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  621
  A2.5.1.2 Reverse Flattening Test — The reverse
  flattening test is designed primarily for application to electric-
  welded tubing for the detection of lack of penetration
  or overlaps resulting from flash removal in the weld. The
  specimen consists of a length of tubing approximately 4 in.
  (102 mm) long which is split longitudinally 90° on each
  side of the weld. The sample is then opened and flattened
  with the weld at the point of maximum bend (Fig. A2.9).
  A2.5.1.3 Crush Test — The crush test, sometimes
  referred to as an upsetting test, is usually made on boiler
  and other pressure tubes, for evaluating ductility (Fig.
  A2.10). The specimen is a ring cut from the tube, usually
  about 21/2 in. (63.5 mm) long. It is placed on end and crushed
  endwise by hammer or press to the distance prescribed by
  the applicable material specifications.
  A2.5.1.4 Flange Test — The flange test is
  intended to determine the ductility of boiler tubes and their
  ability to withstand the operation of bending into a tube
  sheet. The test is made on a ring cut from a tube, usually
  not less than 4 in. (100 mm) long and consists of having
  a flange turned over at right angles to the body of the tube to
  the width required by the applicable material specifications.
  The flaring tool and die block shown in Fig. A2.11 are
  recommended for use in making this test.
  A2.5.1.5 Flaring Test — For certain types of pressure
  tubes, an alternate to the flange test is made. This test
  consists of driving a tapered mandrel having a slope of 1
  in 10 as shown in Fig. A2.12 (a) or a 60° included angle
  as shown in Fig. A2.12 (b) into a section cut from the
  tube, approximately 4 in. (100 mm) in length, and thus
  expanding the specimen until the inside diameter has been
  increased to the extent required by the applicable material
  specifications.
  A2.5.1.6 Bend Test — For pipe used for coiling
  in sizes 2 in. and under a bend test is made to determine its
  ductility and the soundness of weld. In this test a sufficient
  length of full-size pipe is bent cold through 90° around a
  cylindrical mandrel having a diameter 12 times the nominal
  diameter of the pipe. For close coiling, the pipe is bent
  cold through 180° around a mandrel having a diameter 8
  times the nominal diameter of the pipe.
  A2.5.1.7 Transverse Guided Bend Test of
  Welds — This bend test is used to determine the ductility
  of fusion welds. The specimens used are approximately
  11/2 in. (38 mm) wide, at least 6 in. (152 mm) in length
  with the weld at the center, and are machined in accordance
  with Fig. A2.13 for face and root bend tests and in accordance
  with Fig. A2.14 for side bend tests. The dimensions
  of the plunger shall be as shown in Fig. A2.15 and the
  other dimensions of the bending jig shall be substantially
  as given in this same figure. A test shall consist of a face
  bend specimen and a root bend specimen or two side bend
  specimens. A face bend test requires bending with the
  inside surface of the pipe against the plunger; a root bend
  test requires bending with the outside surface of the pipe
  against the plunger; and a side bend test requires bending
  so that one of the side surfaces becomes the convex surface
  of the bend specimen.
  (a) Failure of the bend test depends upon the appearance
  of cracks in the area of the bend, of the nature and extent
  described in the product specifications.
  A3. STEEL FASTENERS
  A3.1 Scope
  A3.1.1 This supplement covers definitions and methods
  of testing peculiar to steel fasteners which are not
  covered in the general section of Test Methods and Definitions
  A 370. Standard tests required by the individual product
  specifications are to be performed as outlined in the
  general section of these methods.
  A3.1.2 These tests are set up to facilitate production
  control testing and acceptance testing with certain more
  precise tests to be used for arbitration in case of disagreement
  over test results.
  A3.2 Tension Tests
  A3.2.1 It is preferred that bolts be tested full size,
  and it is customary, when so testing bolts to specify a
  minimum ultimate load in pounds, rather than a minimum
  ultimate strength in pounds per square inch. Three times the
  bolt nominal diameter has been established as the minimum
  bolt length subject to the tests described in the remainder
  of this section. Sections A3.2.1.1–A3.2.1.3 apply when
  testing bolts full size. Section A3.2.1.4 shall apply where
  the individual product specifications permit the use of
  machined specimens.
  A3.2.1.1 Proof Load — Due to particular uses of
  certain classes of bolts it is desirable to be able to stress
  them, while in use, to a specified value without obtaining
  any permanent set. To be certain of obtaining this quality
  the proof load is specified. The proof load test consists of
  stressing the bolt with a specified load which the bolt must
  withstand without permanent set. An alternate test which
  determines yield strength of a full size bolt is also allowed.
  Either of the following Methods, 1 or 2, may be used but
  Method 1 shall be the arbitration method in case of any
  dispute as to acceptance of the bolts.
  A3.2.1.2 Proof Load Testing Long Bolts — When
  full size tests are required, proof load Method 1 is to be
  limited in application to bolts whose length does not exceed
  8 in. (203 mm) or 8 times the nominal diameter, whichever
  is greater. For bolts longer than 8 in. or 8 times the nominal
  diameter, whichever is greater, proof load Method 2 shall
  be used.
  (a) Method 1, Length Measurement — The overall
  length of a straight bolt shall be measured at its true center
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  622
  line with an instrument capable of measuring changes in
  length of 0.0001 in. (0.0025 mm) with an accuracy of
  0.0001 in. in any 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) range. The preferred
  method of measuring the length shall be between conical
  centers machined on the center line of the bolt, with mating
  centers on the measuring anvils. The head or body of the
  bolt shall be marked so that it can be placed in the same
  position for all measurements. The bolt shall be assembled
  in the testing equipment as outlined in A3.2.1.4, and the
  proof load specified in the product specification shall be
  applied. Upon release of this load the length of the bolt
  shall be again measured and shall show no permanent
  elongation. A tolerance of ±0.0005 in. (0.0127 mm) shall
  be allowed between the measurement made before loading
  and that made after loading. Variables, such as straightness
  and thread alignment (plus measurement error), may result
  in apparent elongation of the fasteners when the proof load
  is initially applied. In such cases, the fastener may be
  retested using a 3 percent greater load, and may be considered
  satisfactory if the length after this loading is the same
  as before this loading (within the 0.0005 in. tolerance for
  measurement error).
  A3.2.1.3 Proof Load-Time of Loading — The
  proof load is to be maintained for a period of 10 s before
  release of load, when using Method 1.
  (1) Method 2, Yield Strength — The bolt shall be assembled
  in the testing equipment as outlined in A3.2.1.4. As
  the load is applied, the total elongation of the bolt or any
  part of the bolt which includes the exposed six threads
  shall be measured and recorded to produce a load-strain
  or a stress-strain diagram. The load or stress at an offset
  equal to 0.2 percent of the length of bolt occupied by 6
  full threads shall be determined by the method described
  in 13.2.1 of these methods, A 370. This load or stress shall
  not be less than that prescribed in the product specification.
  A3.2.1.4 Axial Tension Testing of Full Size
  Bolts — Bolts are to be tested in a holder with the load
  axially applied between the head and a nut or suitable
  fixture (Fig. A3.1), either of which shall have sufficient
  thread engagement to develop the full strength of the bolt.
  The nut or fixture shall be assembled on the bolt leaving
  six complete bolt threads unengaged between the grips,
  except for heavy hexagon structural bolts which shall have
  four complete threads unengaged between the grips. To
  meet the requirements of this test there shall be a tensile
  failure in the body or threaded section with no failure at
  the junction of the body, and head. If it is necessary to
  record or report the tensile strength of bolts as psi values
  the stress area shall be calculated from the mean of the
  mean root and pitch diameters of Class 3 external threads
  as follows:
  As p 0.7854 [D – (0.9743/n)]2 (A3.1)
  where:
  As p stress area, in.2
  D p nominal diameter, in., and
  n p number of threads per inch
  A3.2.1.5 Tension Testing of Full-Size Bolts with
  a Wedge — The purpose of this test is to obtain the tensile
  strength and demonstrate the “head quality” and ductility
  of a bolt with a standard head by subjecting it to eccentric
  loading. The ultimate load on the bolt shall be determined
  as described in A3.2.1.4, except that a 10° wedge shall be
  placed under the same bolt previously tested for the proof
  load (see A3.2.1.1). The bolt head shall be so placed that
  no corner of the hexagon or square takes a bearing load,
  that is, a flat of the head shall be aligned with the direction
  of uniform thickness of the wedge (Fig. A3.2). The wedge
  shall have an included angle of 10° between its faces and
  shall have a thickness of one-half of the nominal bolt
  diameter at the short side of the hole. The hole in the
  wedge shall have the following clearance over the nominal
  size of the bolt, and its edges, top and bottom, shall be
  rounded to the following radius:
  Clearance Radius on
  Nominal Bolt in Hole, Corners of
  Size, in. in. (mm) Hole, in. (mm)
  1/4 to 1/2 0.030 (0.76) 0.030 (0.76)
  9/16 to 3/4 0.050 (1.3) 0.060 (1.5)
  7/8 to 1 0.063 (1.5) 0.060 (1.5)
  11/8 to 11/4 0.063 (1.5) 0.125 (3.2)
  13/8 to 11/2 0.094 (2.4) 0.125 (3.2)
  A3.2.1.6 Wedge Testing of HT Bolts Threaded to
  Head — For heat-treated bolts over 100 000 psi (690 MPa)
  minimum tensile strength and that are threaded 1 diameter
  and closer to the underside of the head, the wedge angle
  shall be 6° for sizes 1/4 through 3/4 in. (6.35 to 19.0 mm)
  and 4° for sizes over 3/4 in.
  A3.2.1.7 Tension Testing of Bolts Machined to
  Round Test Specimens:
  (1) Bolts under 11/2 in. (38 mm) in diameter which
  require machined tests shall preferably use a standard 1/2 in.,
  (13 mm) round 2 in. (50 mm) gage length test specimen
  (Fig. 4); however, bolts of small cross-section that will not
  permit the taking of this standard test specimen shall use
  one of the small-size-specimens-proportional-to-standard
  (Fig. 4) and the specimen shall have a reduced section as
  large as possible. In all cases, the longitudinal axis of the
  specimen shall be concentric with the axis of the bolt; the
  head and threaded section of the bolt may be left intact,
  as in Fig. A3.3 and Fig. A3.4, or shaped to fit the holders
  or grips of the testing machine so that the load is applied
  axially. The gage length for measuring the elongation shall
  be four times the diameter of the specimen.
  (2) For bolts 11/2 in. and over in diameter, a standard
  1/2 in. round 2 in. gage length test specimen shall be turned
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  623
  from the bolt, having its axis midway between the center
  and outside surface of the body of the bolt as shown in
  Fig. A3.5.
  (3) Machined specimens are to be tested in tension to
  determine the properties prescribed by the product specifications.
  The methods of testing and determination of properties
  shall be in accordance with Section 13 of these test
  methods.
  A3.3 Hardness Tests for Externally Threaded Fasteners
  A3.3.1 When specified, externally threaded fasteners
  shall be hardness tested. Fasteners with hexagonal or square
  heads shall be Brinell or Rockwell hardness tested on the
  side or top of the head. Externally threaded fasteners with
  other type of heads and those without heads shall be Brinell
  or Rockwell hardness tested on one end. Due to possible
  distortion from the Brinell load, care should be taken that
  this test meets the requirements of Section 16 of these test
  methods. Where the Brinell hardness test is impractical,
  the Rockwell hardness test shall be substituted. Rockwell
  hardness test procedures shall conform to Section 18 of
  these test methods.
  A3.3.2 In cases where a dispute exists between buyer
  and seller as to whether externally threaded fasteners meet
  or exceed the hardness limit of the product specification,
  for purposes of arbitration, hardness may be taken on two
  transverse sections through a representative sample fastener
  selected at random. Hardness readings shall be taken
  at the locations shown in Fig. A3.6. All hardness values
  must conform with the hardness limit of the product specification
  in order for the fasteners represented by the sample
  to be considered in compliance. This provision for arbitration
  of a dispute shall not be used to accept clearly
  rejectable fasteners.
  A3.4 Testing of Nuts
  A3.4.1 Proof Load — A sample nut shall be assembled
  on a hardened threaded mandrel or on a bolt conforming
  to the particular specification. A load axial with the
  mandrel or bolt and equal to the specified proof load of
  the nut shall be applied. The nut shall resist this load
  without stripping or rupture. If the threads of the mandrel
  are damaged during the test the individual test shall be
  discarded. The mandrel shall be threaded to American
  National Standard Class 3 tolerance, except that the major
  diameter shall be the minimum major diameter with a
  tolerance of +0.002 in. (0.051 mm).
  A3.4.2 Hardness Test — Rockwell hardness of nuts
  shall be determined on the top or bottom face of the nut.
  Brinell hardness shall be determined on the side of the
  nuts. Either method may be used at the option of the
  manufacturer, taking into account the size and grade of
  the nuts under test. When the standard Brinell hardness
  test results in deforming the nut it will be necessary to use
  a minor load or substitute a Rockwell hardness test.
  A4. ROUND WIRE PRODUCTS
  A4.1 Scope
  A4.1.1 This supplement covers the apparatus, specimens
  and methods of testing peculiar to steel wire products
  which are not covered in the general section of Test Methods
  A 370.
  A4.2 Apparatus
  A4.2.1 Gripping Devices — Grips of either the
  wedge or snubbing types as shown in Fig. A4.1 and Fig.
  A4.2 shall be used (Note A4.1). When using grips of either
  type, care shall be taken that the axis of the test specimen
  is located approximately at the center line of the head of
  the testing machine (Note A4.2). When using wedge grips
  the liners used behind the grips shall be of the proper
  thickness.
  NOTE A4.1— Testing machines usually are equipped with wedge grips.
  These wedge grips, irrespective of the type of testing machine, may be
  referred to as the “usual type” of wedge grips. The use of fine (180 or
  240) grit abrasive cloth in the “usual” wedge type grips, with the abrasive
  contacting the wire specimen, can be helpful in reducing specimen slipping
  and breakage at the grip edges at tensile loads up to about 1000 pounds.
  For tests of specimens of wire which are liable to be cut at the edges by
  the “usual type” of wedge grips, the snubbing type gripping device has
  proved satisfactory.
  For testing round wire, the use of cylindrical seat in the wedge gripping
  device is optional.
  NOTE A4.2—Any defect in a testing machine which may cause nonaxial
  application of load should be corrected.
  A4.2.2 Pointed Micrometer — A micrometer with a
  pointed spindle and anvil suitable for reading the dimensions
  of the wire specimen at the fractured ends to the
  nearest 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) after breaking the specimen
  in the testing machine shall be used.
  A4.3 Test Specimens
  A4.3.1 Test specimens having the full cross-sectional
  area of the wire they represent shall be used. The standard
  gage length of the specimens shall be 10 in. (254 mm).
  However, if the determination of elongation values is not
  required, any convenient gage length is permissible. The
  total length of the specimens shall be at least equal to the
  gage length (10 in.) plus twice the length of wire required
  for the full use of the grip employed. For example,
  depending upon the type of testing machine and grips used,
  the minimum total length of specimen may vary from 14
  to 24 in. (360 to 610 mm) for a 10 in. gage length specimen.
  A4.3.2 Any specimen breaking in the grips shall be
  discarded and a new specimen tested.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  624
  A4.4 Elongation
  A4.4.1 In determining permanent elongation, the
  ends of the fractured specimen shall be carefully fitted
  together and the distance between the gage marks measured
  to the nearest 0.01 in. (0.25 mm) with dividers and scale
  or other suitable device. The elongation is the increase in
  length of the gage length, expressed as a percentage of the
  original gage length. In recording elongation values, both
  the percentage increase and the original gage length shall
  be given.
  A4.4.2 In determining total elongation (elastic plus
  plastic extension) autographic or extensometer methods
  may be employed.
  A4.4.3 If fracture takes place outside of the middle
  third of the gage length, the elongation value obtained may
  not be representative of the material.
  A4.5 Reduction of Area
  A4.5.1 The ends of the fractured specimen shall be
  carefully fitted together and the dimensions of the smallest
  cross section measured to the nearest 0.001 in. (0.025 mm)
  with a pointed micrometer. The difference between the
  area thus found and the area of the original cross section,
  expressed as a percentage of the original area, is the reduction
  of area.
  A4.5.2 The reduction of area test is not recommended
  in wire diameters less than 0.092 in. (2.34 mm) due
  to the difficulties of measuring the reduced cross sections.
  A4.6 Rockwell Hardness Test
  A4.6.1 On heat–treated wire of diameter 0.100 in.
  (2.54 mm) and larger, the specimen shall be flattened on
  two parallel sides by grinding before testing. The hardness
  test is not recommended for any diameter of hard drawn
  wire or heat-treated wire less than 0.100 in. (2.54 mm) in
  diameter. For round wire, the tensile strength test is greatly
  preferred over the hardness test.
  A4.7 Wrap Test
  A4.7.1 This test is used as a means for testing the
  ductility of certain kinds of wire.
  A4.7.2 The test consists of coiling the wire in a
  closely spaced helix tightly against a mandrel of a specified
  diameter for a required number of turns. (Unless other
  specified, the required number of turns shall be five.) The
  wrapping may be done by hand or a power device. The
  wrapping rate may not exceed 15 turns per min. The mandrel
  diameter shall be specified in the relevant wire product
  specification.
  A4.7.3 The wire tested shall be considered to have
  failed if the wire fractures or if any longitudinal or transverse
  cracks develop which can be seen by the unaided
  eye after the first complete turn. Wire which fails in the
  first turn shall be retested, as such fractures may be caused
  by bending the wire to a radius less than specified when
  the test starts.
  A4.8 Coiling Test
  A4.8.1 This test is used to determine if imperfections
  are present to the extent that they may cause cracking or
  splitting during spring coiling and spring extension. A coil
  of specified length is closed wound on an arbor of a specified
  diameter. The closed coil is then stretched to a specified
  permanent increase in length and examined for uniformity
  of pitch with no splits or fractures. The required arbor
  diameter, closed coil length, and permanent coil extended
  length increase may vary with wire diameter, properties,
  and type.
  A5. NOTES ON SIGNIFICANCE OF NOTCHEDBAR
  IMPACT TESTING
  A5.1 Notch Behavior
  A5.1.1 The Charpy and Izod type tests bring out
  notch behavior (brittleness versus ductility) by applying a
  single overload of stress. The energy values determined
  are quantitative comparisons on a selected specimen but
  cannot be converted into energy values that would serve
  for engineering design calculations. The notch behavior
  indicated in an individual test applies only to the specimen
  size, notch geometry, and testing conditions involved and
  cannot be generalized to other sizes of specimens and
  conditions.
  A5.1.2 The notch behavior of the face-centered cubic
  metals and alloys, a large group of nonferrous materials
  and the austenitic steels can be judged from their common
  tensile properties. If they are brittle in tension they will be
  brittle when notched, while if they are ductile in tension,
  they will be ductile when notched, except for unusually
  sharp or deep notches (much more severe than the standard
  Charpy or Izod specimens). Even low temperatures do not
  alter this characteristic of these materials. In contrast, the
  behavior of the ferritic steels under notch conditions cannot
  be predicted from their properties as revealed by the tension
  test. For the study of these materials the Charpy and Izod
  type tests are accordingly very useful. Some metals that
  display normal ductility in the tension test may nevertheless
  break in brittle fashion when tested or when used in the
  notched condition. Notched conditions include restraints
  to deformation in directions perpendicular to the major
  stress, or multiaxial stresses, and stress concentrations. It
  is in this field that the Charpy and Izod tests prove useful
  for determining the susceptibility of a steel to notch-brittle
  behavior though they cannot be directly used to appraise
  the serviceability of a structure.
  A5.1.3 The testing machine itself must be sufficiently
  rigid or tests on high-strength low-energy materials
  will result in excessive elastic energy losses either upward
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  625
  through the pendulum shaft or downward through the base
  of the machine. If the anvil supports, the pendulum striking
  edge, or the machine foundation bolts are not securely
  fastened, tests on ductile materials in the range of 80 ftWlbf
  (108 J) may actually indicate values in excess of 90 to 100
  ftWlbf (122 to 136 J).
  A5.2 Notch Effect
  A5.2.1 The notch results in a combination of
  multiaxial stresses associated with restraints to deformation
  in directions perpendicular to the major stress, and a stress
  concentration at the base of the notch. A severely notched
  condition is generally not desirable, and it becomes of real
  concern in those cases in which it initiates a sudden and
  complete failure of the brittle type. Some metals can be
  deformed in a ductile manner even down to the low temperatures
  of liquid air, while others may crack. This difference
  in behavior can be best understood by considering the
  cohesive strength of a material (or the property that holds
  it together) and its relation to the yield point. In cases of
  brittle fracture, the cohesive strength is exceeded before
  significant plastic deformation occurs and the fracture
  appears crystalline. In cases of the ductile or shear type of
  failure, considerable deformation precedes the final fracture
  and the broken surface appears fibrous instead of crystalline.
  In intermediate cases the fracture comes after a
  moderate amount of deformation and is part crystalline
  and part fibrous in appearance.
  A5.2.2 When a notched bar is loaded, there is a
  normal stress across the base of the notch which tends to
  initiate fracture. The property that keeps it from cleaving,
  or holds it together, is the “cohesive strength.” The bar
  fractures when the normal stress exceeds the cohesive
  strength. When this occurs without the bar deforming it is
  the condition for brittle fracture.
  A5.2.3 In testing, though not in service because of
  side effects, it happens more commonly that plastic deformation
  precedes fracture. In addition to the normal stress,
  the applied load also sets up shear stresses which are about
  45° to the normal stress. The elastic behavior terminates
  as soon as the shear stress exceeds the shear strength of
  the material and deformation or plastic yielding sets in.
  This is the condition for ductile failure.
  A5.2.4 This behavior, whether brittle or ductile,
  depends on whether the normal stress exceeds the cohesive
  strength before the shear stress exceeds the shear strength.
  Several important facts of notch behavior follow from this.
  If the notch is made sharper or more drastic, the normal
  stress at the root of the notch will be increased in relation
  to the shear stress and the bar will be more prone to brittle
  fracture (see Table A5.1). Also, as the speed of deformation
  increases, the shear strength increases and the likelihood
  of brittle fracture increases. On the other hand, by raising
  the temperature, leaving the notch and the speed of deformation
  the same, the shear strength is lowered and ductile
  behavior is promoted, leading to shear failure.
  A5.2.5 Variations in notch dimensions will seriously
  affect the results of the tests. Tests on E 4340 steel specimens
  have shown the effect of dimensional variations on
  Charpy results (see Table A5.1).
  A5.3 Size Effect
  A5.3.1 Increasing either the width or the depth of
  the specimen tends to increase the volume of metal subject
  to distortion, and by this factor tends to increase the energy
  absorption when breaking the specimen. However, any
  increase in size, particularly in width, also tends to increase
  the degree of restraint and by tending to induce brittle
  fracture, may decrease the amount of energy absorbed.
  Where a standard-size specimen is on the verge of brittle
  fracture, this is particularly true, and a double-width specimen
  may actually require less energy for rupture than one
  of standard width.
  A5.3.2 In studies of such effects where the size of
  the material precludes the use of the standard specimen,
  as for example when the material is 1/4 in. plate, subsize
  specimens are necessarily used. Such specimens (see Fig.
  6 of Test Methods E 23) are based on the Type A specimen
  of Fig. 4 of Test Methods E 23.
  A5.3.3 General correlation between the energy values
  obtained with specimens of different size or shape is
  not feasible, but limited correlations may be established
  for specification purposes on the basis of special studies
  of particular materials and particular specimens. On the
  other hand, in a study of the relative effect of process
  variations, evaluation by use of some arbitrarily selected
  specimen with some chosen notch will in most instances
  place the methods in their proper order.
  A5.4 Effects of Testing Conditions
  A5.4.1 The testing conditions also affect the notch
  behavior. So pronounced is the effect of temperature on
  the behavior of steel when notched that comparisons are
  frequently made by examining specimen fractures and by
  plotting energy value and fracture appearance versus temperature
  from tests of notched bars at a series of temperatures.
  When the test temperature has been carried low
  enough to start cleavage fracture, there may be an
  extremely sharp drop in impact value or there may be a
  relatively gradual falling off toward the lower temperatures.
  This drop in energy value starts when a specimen
  begins to exhibit some crystalline appearance in the fracture.
  The transition temperature at which this embrittling
  effect takes place varies considerably with the size of the
  part or test specimen and with the notch geometry.
  A5.4.2 Some of the many definitions of transition
  temperature currently being used are: (1) the lowest temperature
  at which the specimen exhibits 100% fibrous fracture,
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  626
  (2) the temperature where the fracture shows a 50% crystalline
  and a 50% fibrous appearance, (3) the temperature
  corresponding to the energy value 50% of the difference
  between values obtained at 100% and 0% fibrous fracture,
  and (4) the temperature corresponding to a specific energy
  value.
  A5.4.3 A problem peculiar to Charpy-type tests
  occurs when high-strength, low-energy specimens are
  tested at low temperatures. These specimens may not leave
  the machine in the direction of the pendulum swing but
  rather in a sidewise direction. To ensure that the broken
  halves of the specimens do not rebound off some component
  of the machine and contact the pendulum before it
  completes its swing, modifications may be necessary in
  older model machines. These modifications differ with
  machine design. Nevertheless the basic problem is the same
  in that provisions must be made to prevent rebounding
  of the fractured specimens into any part of the swinging
  pendulum. Where design permits, the broken specimens
  may be deflected out of the sides of the machine and yet
  in other designs it may be necessary to contain the broken
  specimens within a certain area until the pendulum passes
  through the anvils. Some low-energy high-strength steel
  specimens leave impact machines at speeds in excess of
  50 ft (15.3 m)/s although they were struck by a pendulum
  traveling at speeds approximately 17 ft (5.2 m)/s. If the
  force exerted on the pendulum by the broken specimens
  is sufficient, the pendulum will slow down and erroneously
  high energy values will be recorded. This problem accounts
  for many of the inconsistencies in Charpy results reported
  by various investigators within the 10 to 25-ftWlbf (14 to
  34 J) range. The Apparatus Section (the paragraph regarding
  Specimen Clearance) of Test Methods E 23 discusses
  the two basic machine designs and a modification found
  to be satisfactory in minimizing jamming.
  A5.5 Velocity of Straining
  A5.5.1 Velocity of straining is likewise a variable
  that affects the notch behavior of steel. The impact test
  shows somewhat higher energy absorption values than the
  static tests above the transition temperature and yet, in
  some instances, the reverse is true below the transition
  temperature.
  A5.6 Correlation with Service
  A5.6.1 While Charpy or Izod tests may not directly
  predict the ductile or brittle behavior of steel as commonly
  used in large masses or as components of large structures,
  these tests can be used as acceptance tests of identity for
  different lots of the same steel or in choosing between
  different steels, when correlation with reliable service
  behavior has been established. It may be necessary to make
  the tests at properly chosen temperatures other than room
  temperature. In this, the service temperature or the transition
  temperature of full-scale specimens does not give the
  desired transition temperatures for Charpy or Izod tests
  since the size and notch geometry may be so different.
  Chemical analysis, tension, and hardness tests may not
  indicate the influence of some of the important processing
  factors that affect susceptibility to brittle fracture nor do
  they comprehend the effect of low temperatures in inducing
  brittle behavior.
  A6. PROCEDURE FOR CONVERTING
  PERCENTAGE ELONGATION OF A
  STANDARD ROUND TENSION TEST
  SPECIMEN TO EQUIVALENT
  PERCENTAGE ELONGATION OF A
  STANDARD FLAT SPECIMEN
  A6.1 Scope
  A6.1.1 This method specifies a procedure for converting
  percentage elongation after fracture obtained in a
  standard 0.500 in. (12.7 mm) diameter by 2 in. (51 mm)
  gage length test specimen to standard flat test specimens
  1/2 in. by 2 in. and 11/2 in. by 8 in. (38.1 by 203 mm).
  A6.2 Basic Equation
  A6.2.1 The conversion data in this method are based
  on an equation by Bertella, and used by Oliver and others.
  The relationship between elongations in the standard
  0.500 in. diameter by 2.0 in. test specimen and other standard
  specimens can be calculated as follows:
  e p eo [4.47(A)/L]a (A6.1)
  where:
  eo p percentage elongation after fracture on a standard
  test specimen having a 2 in. gage length and 0.500
  in. diameter
  e p percentage elongation after fracture on a standard
  test specimen having a gage length L and a crosssectional
  area A, and
  a p constant characteristic of the test material
  A6.3 Application
  A6.3.1 In applying the above equation the constant
  a is characteristic of the test material. The value a p 0.4
  has been found to give satisfactory conversions for carbon,
  carbon-manganese, molybdenum, and chromium-molybdenum
  steels within the tensile strength range of 40 000
  to 85 000 psi (275 to 585 MPa) and in the hot-rolled, in
  the hot-rolled and normalized, or in the annealed condition,
  with or without tempering. Note that the cold reduced and
  quenched and tempered states are excluded. For annealed
  austenitic stainless steels, the value a p 0.127 has been
  found to give satisfactory conversions.
  A6.3.2 Table A6.1 has been calculated taking a p
  0.4, with the standard 0.500 in. (12.7 mm) diameter by
  2 in. (51 mm) gage length test specimen as the reference
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  627
  specimen. In the case of the subsize specimens 0.350 in.
  (8.89 mm) in diameter by 1.4 in. (35.6 mm) gage length,
  and 0.250 in. (6.35-mm) diameter by 1.0 in. (25.4 mm)
  gage length the factor in the equation is 4.51 instead of
  4.47. The small error introduced by using Table A6.1 for
  the subsized specimens may be neglected. Table A6.2 for
  annealed austenitic steels has been calculated taking a p
  0.127, with the standard 0.500-in. diameter by 2-in. gage
  length test specimen as the reference specimen.
  A6.3.3 Elongation given for a standard 0.500 in.
  diameter by 2 in. gage length specimen may be converted
  to elongation for 1/2 in. by 2 in. or 11/2 in. by 8 in. (38.1 by
  203 mm) flat specimens by multiplying by the indicated
  factor in Table A6.1 and Table A6.2.
  A6.3.4 These elongation conversions shall not be
  used where the width to thickness ratio of the test piece
  exceeds 20, as in sheet specimens under 0.025 in.
  (0.635 mm) in thickness.
  A6.3.5 While the conversions are considered to be
  reliable within the stated limitations and may generally be
  used in specification writing where it is desirable to show
  equivalent elongation requirements for the several standard
  ASTM tension specimens covered in Test Methods A 370,
  consideration must be given to the metallurgical effects
  dependent on the thickness of the material as processed.
  A7. METHOD OF TESTING MULTI-WIRE
  STRAND FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
  A7.1 Scope
  A7.1.1 This method provides procedures for the tension
  testing of multi-wire strand for prestressed concrete.
  This method is intended for use in evaluating the strand
  properties prescribed in specifications for “prestressing
  steel strands.”
  A7.2 General Precautions
  A7.2.1 Premature failure of the test specimens may
  result if there is any appreciable notching, cutting, or bending
  of the specimen by the gripping devices of the testing
  machine.
  A7.2.2 Errors in testing may result if the seven wires
  constituting the strand are not loaded uniformly.
  A7.2.3 The mechanical properties of the strand may
  be materially affected by excessive heating during specimen
  preparation.
  A7.2.4 These difficulties may be minimized by following
  the suggested methods of gripping described in
  A7.4.
  A7.3 Gripping Devices
  A7.3.1 The true mechanical properties of the strand
  are determined by a test in which fracture of the specimen
  occurs in the free span between the jaws of the testing
  machine. Therefore, it is desirable to establish a test procedure
  with suitable apparatus which will consistently produce
  such results. Due to inherent physical characteristics
  of individual machines, it is not practical to recommend a
  universal gripping procedure that is suitable for all testing
  machines. Therefore, it is necessary to determine which
  of the methods of gripping described in A7.3.2 to A7.3.8
  is most suitable for the testing equipment available.
  A7.3.2 Standard V-Grips with Serrated Teeth (Note
  A7.1).
  A7.3.3 Standard V-Grips with Serrated Teeth (Note
  A7.1), Using Cushioning Material — In this method, some
  material is placed between the grips and the specimen
  to minimize the notching effect of the teeth. Among the
  materials which have been used are lead foil, aluminum
  foil, carborundum cloth, bra shims, etc. The type and thickness
  of material required is dependent on the shape, condition,
  and coarseness of the teeth.
  A7.3.4 Standard V-Grips with Serrated Teeth (Note
  A7.1), Using Special Preparation of the Gripped Portions
  of the Specimen — One of the methods used is tinning, in
  which the gripped portions are cleaned, fluxed, and coated
  by multiple dips in molten tin alloy held just above the
  melting point. Another method of preparation is encasing
  the gripped portions in metal tubing or flexible conduit,
  using epoxy resin as the bonding agent. The encased portion
  should be approximately twice the length of lay of
  the strand.
  A7.3.5 Special Grips with Smooth, Semi-Cylindrical
  Grooves (Note A7.2) — The grooves and the gripped portions
  of the specimen are coated with an abrasive slurry
  which holds the specimen in the smooth grooves, preventing
  slippage. The slurry consists of abrasive such as
  Grade 3-F aluminum oxide and a carrier such as water or
  glycerin.
  A7.3.6 Standard Sockets of the Type Used for Wire
  Rope — The gripped portions of the specimen are anchored
  in the sockets with zinc. The special procedures for socketing
  usually employed in the wire rope industry must be
  followed.
  A7.3.7 Dead-End Eye Splices — These devices are
  available in sizes designed to fit each size of strand to be
  tested.
  A7.3.8 Chucking Devices — Use of chucking
  devices of the type generally employed for applying tension
  to strands in casting beds is not recommended for testing
  purposes.
  NOTE A7.1— The number of teeth should be approximately 15 to 30
  per in., and the minimum effective gripping length should be approximately
  4 in. (102 mm).
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  628
  NOTE A7.2— The radius of curvature of the grooves is approximately
  the same as the radius of the strand being tested, and is located 1/32 in.
  (0.79 mm) above the flat face of the grip. This prevents the two grips
  from closing tightly when the specimen is in place.
  A7.4 Specimen Preparation
  A7.4.1 If the molten-metal temperatures employed
  during hot-dip tinning or socketing with metallic material
  are too high, over approximately 700°F (370°C), the specimen
  may be heat affected with a subsequent loss of strength
  and ductility. Careful temperature controls should be maintained
  if such methods of specimen preparation are used.
  A7.5 Procedure
  A7.5.1 Yield Strength — For determining the yield
  strength use a Class B-1 extensometer (Note A7.3) as
  described in Practice E 83. Apply an initial load of 10%
  of the expected minimum breaking strength to the specimen,
  then attach the extensometer and adjust it to a reading
  of 0.001 in./in. of gage length. Then increase the load until
  the extensometer indicates an extension of 1%. Record the
  load for this extension as the yield strength. The extensometer
  may be removed from the specimen after the yield
  strength has been determined.
  A7.5.2 Elongation — For determining the elongation
  use a Class D extensometer (Note A7.3), as described
  in Practice E 83, having a gage length of not less than 24
  in. (610 mm) (Note A7.4). Apply an initial load of 10%
  of the required minimum breaking strength to the specimen,
  then attach the extensometer (Note A7.3) and adjust it to
  a zero reading. The extensometer may be removed from
  the specimen prior to rupture after the specified minimum
  elongation has been exceeded. It is not necessary to determine
  the final elongation value.
  A7.5.3 Breaking Strength — Determine the maximum
  load at which one or more wires of the strand are
  fractured. Record this load as the breaking strength of the
  strand.
  NOTE A7.3 — The yield-strength extensometer and the elongation
  extensometer may be the same instrument or two separate instruments.
  Two separate instruments are advisable since the more sensitive yieldstrength
  extensometer, which could be damaged when the strand fractures,
  may be removed following the determination of yield strength. The elongation
  extensometer may be constructed with less sensitive parts or be
  constructed in such a way that little damage would result if fracture
  occurs while the extensometer is attached to the specimen.
  NOTE A7.4— Specimens that break outside the extensometer or in the
  jaws and yet meet the minimum specified values are considered as meeting
  the mechanical property requirements of the product specification, regardless
  of what procedure of gripping has been used. Specimens that break
  outside of the extensometer or in the jaws and do not meet the minimum
  specified values are subject to retest. Specimens that break between the
  jaws and the extensometer and do not meet the minimum specified values
  are subject to retest as provided in the applicable specification.
  A8. ROUNDING OF TEST DATA
  A8.1 Rounding
  A8.1.1 An observed value or a calculated value shall
  be rounded off in accordance with the applicable product
  specification. In the absence of a specified procedure, the
  rounding-off method of Practice E 29 shall be used.
  A8.1.1.1 Values shall be rounded up or rounded
  down as determined by the rules of Practice E 29.
  A8.1.1.2 In the special case of rounding the number
  “5” when no additional numbers other than “0” follow
  the “5,” rounding shall be done in the direction of the
  specification limits if following Practice E 29 would cause
  rejection of material.
  A8.1.2 Recommended levels for rounding reported
  values of test data are given in Table A8.1. These values
  are designed to provide uniformity in reporting and data
  storage, and should be used in all cases except where they
  conflict with specific requirements of a product specification.
  NOTE A8.1— To minimize cumulative errors, whenever possible, values
  should be carried to at least one figure beyond that of the final
  (rounded) value during intervening calculations (such as calculation of
  stress from load and area measurements) with rounding occurring as the
  final operation. The precision may be less than that implied by the number
  of significant figures.
  A9. METHODS FOR TESTING STEEL
  REINFORCING BARS
  A9.1 Scope
  A9.1.1 This annex covers additional details specific
  to testing steel reinforcing bars for use in concrete reinforcement.
  A9.2 Test Specimens
  A9.2.1 All test specimens shall be the full section
  of the bar as rolled.
  A9.3 Tension Testing
  A9.3.1 Test Specimen— Specimens for tension tests
  shall be long enough to provide for an 8-in. (200-mm) gage
  length, a distance of at least two bar diameters between each
  gage mark and the grips, plus sufficient additional length
  to fill the grips completely leaving some excess length
  protruding beyond each grip.
  A9.3.2 Gripping Device — The grips shall be
  shimmed so that no more than 1/2 in. (13 mm) of a grip
  protrudes from the head of the testing machine.
  A9.3.3 Gage Marks —The 8 in. (200 mm) gage
  length shall be marked on the specimen using a preset 8 in.
  (200 mm) punch or, alternately, may be punch marked
  every 2 in. (50 mm) along the 8 in. (200 mm) gage length,
  on one of the longitudinal ribs, if present, or in clear spaces
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  629
  of the deformation pattern. The punch marks shall not be
  put on a transverse deformation. Light punch marks are
  desirable because deep marks severely indent the bar and
  may affect the results. A bullet-nose punch is desirable.
  A9.3.4 The yield strength or yield point shall be
  determined by one of the following methods:
  A9.3.4.1 Extension under load using an autographic
  diagram method or an extensometer as described
  in 13.1.2 and 13.1.3,
  A9.3.4.2 By the drop of the beam or halt in the
  gage of the testing machine as described in 13.1.1 where
  the steel tested as a sharp-kneed or well-defined type of
  yield point.
  A9.3.5 The unit stress determinations for yield and
  tensile strength on full-size specimens shall be based on
  the nominal bar area.
  A9.4 Bend Testing
  A9.4.1 Bend tests shall be made on specimens of
  sufficient length to ensure free bending and with apparatus
  which provides:
  A9.4.1.1 Continuous and uniform application of
  force throughout the duration of the bending operation,
  A9.4.1.2 Unrestricted movement of the specimen
  at points of contact with the apparatus and bending around
  a pin free to rotate, and
  A9.4.1.3 Close wrapping of the specimen around
  the pin during the bending operation.
  A9.4.2 Other acceptable more severe methods of
  bend testing, such as placing a specimen across two pins
  free to rotate and applying the bending force with a fix
  pin, may be used.
  A9.4.3 When retesting is permitted by the product
  specification, the following shall apply:
  A9.4.3.1 Sections of bar containing identifying
  roll marking shall not be used.
  A9.4.3.2 Bars shall be so placed that longitudinal
  ribs lie in a plane at right angles to the plane of bending.
  A10. PROCEDURE FOR USE AND CONTROL
  OF HEAT-CYCLE SIMULATION
  A10.1 Purpose
  A10.1.1 To ensure consistent and reproducible heat
  treatments of production forgings and the test specimens
  that represent them when the practice of heat-cycle simulation
  is used.
  A10.2 Scope
  A10.2.1 Generation and documentation of actual
  production time — temperature curves (MASTER
  CHARTS).
  A10.2.2 Controls for duplicating the master cycle
  during heat treatment of production forgings. (Heat treating
  within the essential variables established during A1.2.1).
  A10.2.3 Preparation of program charts for the simulator
  unit.
  A10.2.4 Monitoring and inspection of the simulated
  cycle within the limits established by the ASME Code.
  A10.2.5 Documentation and storage of all controls,
  inspections, charts, and curves.
  A10.3 Referenced Documents
  A10.3.1 ASME Standards:
  ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section III,
  latest edition.
  ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII,
  Division 2, latest edition.
  A10.4 Terminology
  A10.4.1 Definitions:
  A10.4.1.1 master chart— a record of the heat
  treatment received from a forging essentially identical to
  the production forgings that it will represent. It is a chart
  of time and temperature showing the output from thermocouples
  imbedded in the forging at the designated test
  immersion and test location or locations.
  A10.4.1.2 program chart— the metallized sheet
  used to program the simulator unit. Time-temperature data
  from the master chart are manually transferred to the program
  chart.
  A10.4.1.3 simulator chart — a record of the heat
  treatment that a test specimen had received in the simulator
  unit. It is a chart of time and temperature and can be
  compared directly to the master chart for accuracy of duplication.
  A10.4.1.4 simulator cycle — one continuous heat
  treatment of a set of specimens in the simulator unit. The
  cycle includes heating from ambient, holding at temperature,
  and cooling. For example, a simulated austenitize and
  quench of a set of specimens would be one cycle; a simulated
  temper of the same specimens would be another cycle.
  A10.5 Procedure
  A10.5.1 Production Master Charts:
  A10.5.1.1 Thermocouples shall be imbedded in
  each forging from which a master chart is obtained. Temperature
  shall be monitored by a recorder with resolution
  sufficient to clearly define all aspects of the heating, holding,
  and cooling process. All charts are to be clearly identified
  with all pertinent information and identification
  required for maintaining permanent records.
  A10.5.1.2 Thermocouples shall be imbedded 180°
  apart if the material specification requires test locations
  180° apart.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  630
  A10.5.1.3 One master chart (or two if required in
  accordance with A10.5.3.1) shall be produced to represent
  essentially identical forgings (same size and shape). Any
  change in size or geometry (exceeding rough machining
  tolerances) of a forging will necessitate that a new master
  cooling curve be developed.
  A10.5.1.4 If more than one curve is required per
  master forging (180° apart) and a difference in cooling
  rate is achieved, then the most conservative curve shall be
  used as the master curve.
  A10.5.2 Reproducibility of Heat Treatment Parameters
  on Production Forgings:
  A10.5.2.1 All information pertaining to the
  quench and temper of the master forging shall be recorded
  on an appropriate permanent record, similar to the one
  shown in Table A10.1.
  A10.5.2.2 All information pertaining to the
  quench and temper of the production forgings shall be
  appropriately recorded, preferably on a form similar to that
  used in A10.5.2.1. Quench records of production forgings
  shall be retained for future reference. The quench and
  temper record of the master forging shall be retained as a
  permanent record.
  A10.5.2.3 A copy of the master forging record
  shall be stored with the heat treatment record of the production
  forging.
  A10.5.2.4 The essential variables, as set forth on
  the heat treat record, shall be controlled within the given
  parameters on the production forging.
  A10.5.2.5 The temperature of the quenching
  medium prior to quenching each production forging shall
  be equal to or lower than the temperature of the quenching
  medium prior to quenching the master forging.
  A10.5.2.6 The time elapsed from opening the furnace
  door to quench for the production forging shall not
  exceed that elapsed for the master forging.
  A10.5.2.7 If the time parameter is exceeded in
  opening the furnace door to beginning of quench, the forging
  shall be placed back into the furnace and brought back
  up to equalization temperature.
  A10.5.2.8 All forgings represented by the same
  master forging shall be quenched with like orientation to
  the surface of the quench bath.
  A10.5.2.9 All production forgings shall be
  quenched in the same quench tank, with the same agitation
  as the master forging.
  A10.5.2.10 Uniformity of Heat Treat Parameters
  — (1) The difference in actual heat treating temperature
  between production forgings and the master forging
  used to establish the simulator cycle for them shall not
  exceed ±25°F (±14°C) for the quench cycle. (2) The tempering
  temperature of the production forgings shall not
  fall below the actual tempering temperature of the master
  forging. (3) At least one contact surface thermocouple shall
  be placed on each forging in a production load. Temperature
  shall be recorded for all surface thermocouples on a
  Time Temperature Recorder and such records shall be
  retained as permanent documentation.
  A10.5.3 Heat-Cycle Simulation:
  A10.5.3.1 Program charts shall be made from the
  data recorded on the master chart. All test specimens shall
  be given the same heating rate above, the AC1, the same
  holding time and the same cooling rate as the production
  forgings.
  A10.5.3.2 The heating cycle above the AC1, a
  portion of the holding cycle, and the cooling portion of
  the master chart shall be duplicated and the allowable limits
  on temperature and time, as specified in (a)–(c), shall be
  established for verification of the adequacy of the simulated
  heat treatment.
  (a) Heat Cycle Simulation of Test Coupon Heat Treatment
  for Quenched and Tempered Forgings and Bars —
  If cooling rate data for the forgings and bars and cooling
  rate control devices for the test specimens are available,
  the test specimens may be heat-treated in the device.
  (b) The test coupons shall be heated to substantially the
  same maximum temperature as the forgings or bars. The
  test coupons shall be cooled at a rate similar to and no faster
  than the cooling rate representative of the test locations and
  shall be within 25°F (14°C) and 20 s at all temperatures
  after cooling begins. The test coupons shall be subsequently
  heat treated in accordance with the thermal treatments
  below the critical temperature including tempering and
  simulated post weld heat treatment.
  (c) Simulated Post Weld Heat Treatment of Test Specimens
  (for ferritic steel forgings and bars) — Except for
  carbon steel (P Number 1, Section IX of the Code) forgings
  and bars with a nominal thickness or diameter of 2 in.
  (51 mm) or less, the test specimens shall be given a heat
  treatment to simulate any thermal treatments below the
  critical temperature that the forgings and bars may receive
  during fabrication. The simulated heat treatment shall utilize
  temperatures, times, and cooling rates as specified on
  the order. The total time at temperature(s) for the test
  material shall be at least 80% of the total time at temperature(
  s) to which the forgings and bars are subjected during
  postweld heat treatment. The total time at temperature(s)
  for the test specimens may be performed in a single cycle.
  A10.5.3.3 Prior to heat treatment in the simulator
  unit, test specimens shall be machined to standard sizes that
  have been determined to allow adequately for subsequent
  removal of decarb and oxidation.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  631
  A10.5.3.4 At least one thermocouple per specimen
  shall be used for continuous recording of temperature on
  an independent external temperature-monitoring source.
  Due to the sensitivity and design peculiarities of the heating
  chamber of certain equipment, it is mandatory that the hot
  junctions of control and monitoring thermocouples always
  be placed in the same relative position with respect to the
  heating source (generally infrared lamps).
  A10.5.3.5 Each individual specimen shall be identified,
  and such identification shall be clearly shown on
  the simulator chart and simulator cycle record.
  A10.5.3.6 The simulator chart shall be compared
  to the master chart for accurate reproduction of simulated
  quench in accordance with A10.5.3.2(a). If any one specimen
  is not heat treated within the acceptable limits of
  temperature and time, such specimen shall be discarded and
  replaced by a newly machined specimen. Documentation of
  such action and reasons for deviation from the master
  chart shall be shown on the simulator chart, and on the
  corresponding nonconformance report.
  A10.5.4 Reheat Treatment and Retesting:
  A10.5.4.1 In the event of a test failure, retesting
  shall be handled in accordance with rules set forth by the
  material specification.
  A10.5.4.2 If retesting is permissible, a new test
  specimen shall be heat treated the same as previously. The
  FIG. A2.1 METAL PLUGS FOR TESTING TUBULAR
  SPECIMENS, PROPER LOCATION OF PLUGS IN
  SPECIMEN AND OF SPECIMEN IN HEADS OF
  TESTING MACHINE
  d
  d
  d
  d
  d
  d
  d
  2d
  Gage
  length
  Testing
  machine
  jaws should
  not extend
  beyond this
  limit
  production forging that it represents will have received the
  same heat treatment. If the test passes, the forging shall
  be acceptable. If it fails, the forging shall be rejected or
  shall be subject to reheat treatment if permissible.
  A10.5.4.3 If reheat treatment is permissible, proceed
  as follows: (1) Reheat treatment same as original heat
  treatment (time, temperature, cooling rate): Using new test
  specimens from an area as close as possible to the original
  specimens, repeat the austenitize and quench cycles twice,
  followed by the tempering cycle (double quench and temper).
  The production forging shall be given the identical
  double quench and temper as its test specimens above. (2)
  Reheat treatment using a new heat treatment practice. Any
  change in time, temperature, or cooling rate shall constitute
  a new heat treatment practice. A new master curve shall
  be produced and the simulation and testing shall proceed
  as originally set forth.
  A10.5.4.4 In summation, each test specimen and
  its corresponding forging shall receive identical heat treatment
  or heat treatment; otherwise the testing shall be
  invalid.
  A10.5.5 Storage, Recall, and Documentation of
  Heat-Cycle Simulation Data —All records pertaining to
  heat-cycle simulation shall be maintained and held for a
  period of 10 years or as designed by the customer. Information
  shall be so organized that all practices can be verified
  by adequate documented records.
  FIG. A2.2 LOCATION OF LONGITUDINAL TENSION —
  TEST SPECIMENS IN RING CUT FROM TUBULAR
  PRODUCTS
  GENERAL NOTE: The edges of the blank for the specimen
  shall be cut parallel to each other.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  632
  FIG. A2.3 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES FOR LONGITUDINAL STRIP TENSION TEST SPECIMENS FOR
  TUBULAR PRODUCTS
  t
  C Rad 1 in. min.
  Gage
  length
  D
  Reduced
  section
  3 in.
  min.
  B A
  DIMENSIONS
  Dimensions, in.
  Specimen No. A B C D
  1 1/2 ± 0.015 11/16 approximately 2 ± 0.005 21/4 min
  2 3/4 ± 0.031 1 approximately 2 ± 0.005 21/4 min
  4 ± 0.005 41/2 min
  3 1 ± 0.062 11/2 approximately 2 ± 0.005 21/4 min
  . . . . . . 4 ± 0.005 41/2 min
  4 11/2 ± 1/8 2 approximately 2 ± 0.010 21/4 min
  4 ± 0.015 41/2 min
  8 ± 0.020 9 min
  GENERAL NOTES:
  (a) Cross-sectional area may be calculated by multiplying A and t.
  (b) The dimension t is the thickness of the test specimen as provided for in the applicable material specifications.
  (c) The reduced section shall be parallel within 0.010 in. and may have a gradual taper in width from the ends toward the center, with the ends
  not more than 0.010 in. wider than the center.
  (d) The ends of the specimen shall be symmetrical with the center line of the reduced section within 0.10 in.
  (e) Metric equivalent: 1 in. p 25.4 mm.
  (f) Specimens with sides parallel throughout their length are permitted, except for referee testing, provided: (a) the above tolerances are used;
  (b) an adequate number of marks are provided for determination of elongation; and (c) when yield strength is determined, a suitable extensometer
  is used. If the fracture occurs at a distance of less than 2A from the edge of the gripping device, the tensile properties determined may not
  be representative of the material. If the properties meet the minimum requirements specified, no further testing is required, but if they are
  less than the minimum requirements, discard the test and retest.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  633
  FIG. A2.4 LOCATION OF TRANSVERSE TENSION
  TEST SPECIMENS IN RING CUT FROM TUBULAR
  PRODUCTS
  A
  B
  FIG. A2.5 TRANSVERSE TENSION TEST SPECIMEN
  MACHINED FROM RING CUT FROM TUBULAR
  PRODUCTS
  GENERAL NOTES:
  (a)
  (b)
  (c)
  (d)
  The dimension t is the thickness of the test specimen
  as provided for in the applicable material specifications.
  The reduced section shall be parallel within 0.010 in.
  and may have a gradual taper in width from the ends
  toward the center, with the ends not more than 0.010 in.
  wider than the center.
  The ends of the specimen shall be symmetrical with
  the center line of the reduced section within 0.10 in.
  Metric equivalent: 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
  Rad 1 in. min. t
  Reduced
  section
  21/4 in. min.
  Approx. 2 in.
  11/2 in. 1/8 in.
  3 in.
  min.
  2.000 in. 0.005 in.
  gage length
  FIG. A2.6 TESTING MACHINE FOR DETERMINATION
  OF TRANSVERSE YIELD STRENGTH FROM ANNULAR
  RING SPECIMENS
  Rubber
  gasket
  Test
  specimen
  Air
  bleeder
  line
  Hydraulic pressure line
  Nut
  FIG. A2.7 ROLLER CHAIN TYPE EXTENSOMETER,
  UNCLAMPED
  FIG. A2.8 ROLLER CHAIN TYPE EXTENSOMETER,
  CLAMPED
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  634
  FIG. A2.9 REVERSE FLATTENING TEST
  90 deg
  90 deg
  FIG. A2.11 FLARING TOOL AND DIE BLOCK FOR FLANGE TEST
  GENERAL NOTE: Metric equivalent: 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
  Flaring Tool Die Block
  A = Outside diameter of tube plus 1/32 in.
  A = Outside diameter of tube less 5/8 in.
  B = Outside diameter of tube less 3/8 in.
  C = Outside diameter of tube plus 3/16 in.
  A
  A
  3/8 in.
  1/4 in.
  41/4 in.
  1/32 in. radius
  Position
  after using
  flaring tool
  Liners
  Position after
  using flatter
  3/4 in.
  B C
  FIG. A2.10 CRUSH TEST SPECIMEN
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  635
  FIG. A2.12 TAPERED MANDRELS FOR FLARING TEST
  Slope 1 in 10
  60 deg
  included
  angle
  FIG. A2.13 TRANSVERSE FACE- AND R00T-BEND TEST SPECIMENS
  GENERAL NOTE: Metric equivalent: 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
  Face Bend Specimen Root Bend Specimen
  6 in. min. 6 in. min.
  T T
  T
  t t
  t T
  11/2 in. 11/2 in.
  Rad 1/8 in. max. Rad 1/8 in. max.
  t
  Pipe Wall Thickness (t), in. Test Specimen Thickness, in.
  Up to 3/8, incl t
  Over 3/8
  3/8
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
  636
  FIG. A2.14 SIDE-BEND SPECIMEN FOR FERROUS MATERIALS
  T t
  1/8 in. min. R1 = 1/8 in.
  max.
  See Note
  t, in. T, in.
  3/8 to 11/2 t
  11/2
  5 in. min.
  If flame cut, not less than 1/8 in.
  shall be machined from edges
  When t exceeds 11/2 use one of the following:
  1.
  2.
  GENERAL NOTE: Metric equivalent: 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
  Cut along line indicated by arrow. Edge may be flame cut
  and may or may not be machined.
  Specimens may be cut into approximately equal strips
  between 3/4 in. and 11/2 in. wide for testing or the
  specimens may be bent at full width (see requirements
  on jig width in Fig. 32.)
  3/8 in.
  FIG. A2.15 GUIDED-BEND TEST JIG
  GENERAL NOTE: Metric equivalent 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
  3/4 in.
  3/4 in.
  37/8 in.
  Yoke 71/2 in.
  D rad
  B rad
  Shoulders hardened
  and greased
  Plunger member
  9 in.
  63/4 in.
  11/8 in.
  1/8 in.
  3/4 in.
  3/4 in.
  3/4 in.
  3/4 in.
  rad
  1/2
  in.
  1/4 in.
  11/8 in.
  2 in.
  Tapped hole to suit
  testing machine
  Hardened rollers, 11/2 in. diameter may be
  substituted for jig shoulders
  As required
  As required
  3 in.
  min.
  2 in.
  min.
  A
  C
  Test Specimen Thickness, in. A B C D
  3/8 11/2
  3/4 23/8 13/16
  t 4t 2t 6t + 1/8 3t + 1/16
  Material
  3/8 21/2 11/4 33/8 111/16 Materials wih a specified minimum tensile strength of 95 ksi
  t 62/3t 31/3t 82/3t + 1/8 41/2t + 1/16 or greater.
  Manufacture
  Stockholder
  Distributor
  ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
  637
  FIG. A3.1 TENSION TESTING FULL-SIZE BOLT
  FIG. A3.2 WEDGE TEST DETAIL
  c

dRT

Clearance of wedge hole
Diameter of bolt
Radius
Thickness of wedge at short
side of hole equal to
one-half diameter of bolt d + c
d
T
10 deg
R
R
R
FIG. A3.3 TENSION TEST SPECIMEN FOR BOLT
WITH TURNED-DOWN SHANK
21/4 in.
2 in. 0.005 in. gage length for
elongation after fracture
Minimum radius recommended
3/8 in. but not less than 1/8 in.
Permitted
1/2 in. 0.01 in.
GENERAL NOTE: Metric equivalent: 1 in. = 25.4 mm.
Parallel Section
FIG. A3.4 EXAMPLES OF SMALL SIZE SPECIMENS
PROPORTIONAL TO STANDARD 2 in. GAGE LENGTH
SPECIMEN
GENERAL NOTE: Metric equivalent: 1 in. = 25.4 min.
Gage length
Gage length
0.252 in. 0.005 in.
1.000 in. 0.005 in.
Reduced
section
11/4 in. min.
Reduced section
13/4 in. min.
Radius 1/4 in.
min.
0.357 in. 0.005 in.
1.400 in. 0.005 in. Radius 3/8 in.
min.
FIG. A3.5 LOCATION OF STANDARD ROUND 2 in.
GAGE LENGTH TENSION TEST SPECIMEN WHEN
TURNED FROM LARGE SIZE BOLT
Manufacture
Stockholder
Distributor
SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
638
FIG. A3.6 HARDNESS TEST LOCATIONS FOR BOLTS IN A DISPUTE
Section B–B Section A–A
1/2 radius
B
B
A
Dnom
Dnom
Dnom
A
GENERAL NOTE: XpLocation of hardness impressions.
FIG. A4.1 WEDGE-TYPE GRIPPING DEVICE
Spherical
bearing
Serrated faces
on grips
Cross-head
of testing
machine
Specimen Cylindrical seat
A
Section A–A
A
FIG. A4.2 SNUBBING-TYPE GRIPPING DEVICE
Spherical
bearing
Specimen
Manufacture
Stockholder
Distributor
ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
639
TABLE A1.1
PRACTICES FOR SELECTING TENSION TEST SPECIMENS FOR STEEL BAR PRODUCTS
Thickness, in. (mm) Width, in. (mm) Hot-Rolled Bars Cold-Finished Bars
Flats
Under 5/8 (16) Up to 11/2 (38), incl Full section by 8 in. (203 mm) gage Mill reduced section to 2 in. (51 mm)
length (Fig. 4). gage length and approximately
25% less than test specimen width.
Over 11/2 (38) Full section, or mill to 11/2 in. Mill reduced section to 2 in. gage
(38 mm) wide by 8 in. (203 mm) length and 11/2in. wide.
gage length (Fig. 4).
5/8 to 11/2 (16 to 38), excl Up to 11/2 (38), incl Full section by 8 in. gage length or Mill reduced section to 2 in. (51 mm)
machine standard 1/2 by 2 in. gage length and approximately
(13 by 51 mm) gage length 25% less than test specimen width
specimen from center of section or machine standard 1/2 by 2 in.
(Fig. 5). (13 by 51 mm) gage length
specimen from center of section
(Fig. 5).
Over 11/2 (38) Full section, or mill 11/2in. (38 mm) Mill reduced section to 2 in. gage
width by 8 in. (203 mm) gage length and 11/2 in. wide or machine
length (Fig. 4) or machine standard 1/2 by 2 in. gage length
standard 1/2 by 2 in. gage (13 by specimen from midway between
51 mm) gage length specimen edge and center of section (Fig. 5).
from midway between edge and
center of section (Fig. 5).
11/2 (38) and over Full section by 8 in. (203 mm) gage Machine standard 1/2 by 2 in. (13 by
length, or machine standard 1/2 by 51 mm) gage length specimen from
2 in. (13 by 51 mm) gage length midway between surface and center
specimen from midway between (Fig. 5).
surface and center (Fig. 5).
Rounds, Squares, Hexagons, and Octagons
Diameter or Distance Between
Parallel Faces, in. (mm) Hot-Rolled Bars Cold-Finished Bars
Under 5/8 Full section by 8 in. (203 mm) gage length Machine to sub-size specimen (Fig. 5).
on machine to subsize specimen (Fig. 5).
5/8 to 11/2 (16 to 38), excl Full section by 8 in. (203 mm) gage length Machine standard 1/2 in. by 2 in. gage length specimen
or machine standard 1/2 in. by 2 in. from center of section (Fig. 5).
(13 by 51 mm) gage length specimen
from center of section (Fig. 5).
11/2 (38) and over Full section by 8 in. (203 mm) gage length Machine standard 1/2 in. by 2 in. (13 by 51 mm gage
or machine standard 1/2 in. by 2 in. (13 length specimen from midway between surface and
by 51 mm) gage length specimen from center of section (Fig. 5)).
midway between surface and center of
section (Fig. 5).
Other Bar-Size Sections
All sizes Full section by 8 in. (203 mm) gage length Mill reduced section to 2 in. (51 mm) gage length
or prepare test specimen 11/2 in. and approximately 25% less than test specimen
(38 mm) wide (if possible) by 8 in. width.
(203 mm) gage length.
GENERAL NOTE: For bar sections where it is difficult to determine the cross-sectional area by simple measurement, the area in square inches
may be calculated by dividing the weight per linear inch of specimen in pounds by 0.2833 (weight of 1 in.3 of steel) or by dividing the weight per
linear foot of specimen by 3.4 (weight of steel 1 in. square and 1 ft long).
Manufacture
Stockholder
Distributor
SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
640
TABLE A1.2
RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR SELECTING BEND TEST SPECIMENS FOR STEEL
BAR PRODUCTS
Flats
Thickness, in. (mm) Width, in. (mm) Recommended Size
Up to 1/2 (13), incl Up to 3/4 (19), incl Full section.
Over 3/4 (19) Full section or machine to not less than 3/4 in.
(19 mm) in width by thickness of specimen.
Over 1/2 (13) All Full section or machine to 1 by 1/2 in. (25 by 13 mm)
specimen from midway between center and surface.
Rounds, Squares, Hexagons, and Octagons
Diameter or Distance Between
Parallel Faces, in. (mm) Recommended Size
Up to 11/2 (38), incl Full section.
Over 11/2 (38) Machine to 1 by 1/2-in. (25 by 13-mm) specimen from
midway between center and surface.
GENERAL NOTES:
(1) The length of all specimens is to be not less than 6 in. (150 mm).
(2) The edges of the specimen may be rounded to a radius not exceeding 1/16 in. (1.6 mm).
TABLE A2.1
WALL THICKNESS LIMITATIONS OF SUPERFICIAL
HARDNESS TEST ON ANNEALED OR DUCTILE
MATERIALS FOR STEEL TUBULAR PRODUCTS (A)
(“T” Scale (1/16 in. Ball))
Wall Thickness, in. (mm) Load, kgf
Over 0.050 (1.27) 45
Over 0.035 (0.89) 30
0.020 and over (0.51) 15
NOTE:
(A) The heaviest load recommended for a given wall thickness is
generally used.
TABLE A5.1
EFFECT OF VARYING NOTCH DIMENSIONS ON STANDARD SPECIMENS
High-Energy Specimens, High-Energy Specimens, Low-Energy Specimens,
ft W lbf (J) ft W lbf (J) ft W lbf (J)
Specimen with standard dimensions 76.0 ± 3.8 (103.0 ± 5.2) 44.5 ± 2.2 (60.3 ± 3.0) 12.5 ± 1.0 (16.9 ± 1.4)
Depth of notch, 0.084 in. (2.13 mm) (A) 72.2 (97.9) 41.3 (56.0) 11.4 (15.5)
Depth of notch, 0.0805 in. (2.04 mm) (A) 75.1 (101.8) 42.2 (57.2) 12.4 (16.8)
Depth of notch, 0.0775 in. (1.77 mm) (A) 76.8 (104.1) 45.3 (61.4) 12.7 (17.2)
Depth of notch, 0.074 in. (1.57 mm) (A) 79.6 (107.9) 46.0 (62.4) 12.8 (17.3)
Radius at base of notch, 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) (B) 72.3 (98.0) 41.7 (56.5) 10.8 (14.6)
Radius at base of notch, 0.015 in. (0.381 mm) (B) 80.0 (108.5) 47.4 (64.3) 15.8 (21.4)
NOTES:
(A) Standard 0.079 ± 0.002 in. (2.00 ± 0.05 mm).
(B) Standard 0.010 ± 0.001 in. (0.25 ± 0.025 mm).
TABLE A2.2
WALL THICKNESS LIMITATIONS OF SUPERFICIAL
HARDNESS TEST ON COLD WORKED OR HEAT
TREATED MATERIAL FOR STEEL TUBULAR
PRODUCTS (A)
(“N” Scale (Diamond Penetrator))
Wall Thickness, in. (mm) Load, kgf
Over 0.035 (0.89) 45
Over 0.025 (0.51) 30
0.015 and over (0.38) 15
NOTE:
(A) The heaviest load recommended for a given wall thickness is
generally used.
Manufacture
Stockholder
Distributor
ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
641
TABLE A6.1
CARBON AND ALLOY STEELS — MATERIAL
CONSTANT a p 0.4. MULTIPLICATION FACTORS FOR
CONVERTING PERCENT ELONGATION FROM 1/2 IN.
DIAMETER BY 2 IN. GAGE LENGTH STANDARD
TENSION TEST SPECIMEN TO STANDARD 1/2 BY 2 IN.
AND 11/2 BY 8 IN. FLAT SPECIMENS
1/2 by 11/2 by 11/2 by
Thickness, 2 in. 8 in. Thickness 8 in.
in. Specimen Specimen in. Specimen
0.025 0.574 . . . 0.800 0.822
0.030 0.596 . . . 0.850 0.832
0.035 0.614 . . . 0.900 0.841
0.040 0.631 . . . 0.950 0.850
0.045 0.646 . . . 1.000 0.859
0.050 0.660 . . . 1.125 0.880
0.055 0.672 . . . 1.250 0.898
0.060 0.684 . . . 1.375 0.916
0.065 0.695 . . . 1.500 0.932
0.070 0.706 . . . 1.625 0.947
0.075 0.715 . . . 1.750 0.961
0.080 0.725 . . . 1.875 0.974
0.085 0.733 . . . 2.000 0.987
0.090 0.742 0.531 2.125 0.999
0.100 0.758 0.542 2.250 1.010
0.110 0.772 0.553 2.375 1.021
0.120 0.786 0.562 2.500 1.032
0.130 0.799 0.571 2.625 1.042
0.140 0.810 0.580 2.750 1.052
0.150 0.821 0.588 2.875 1.061
0.160 0.832 0.596 3.000 1.070
0.170 0.843 0.603 3.125 1.079
0.180 0.852 0.610 3.250 1.088
0.190 0.862 0.616 3.375 1.096
0.200 0.870 0.623 3.500 1.104
0.225 0.891 0.638 3.625 1.112
0.250 0.910 0.651 3.750 1.119
0.275 0.928 0.664 3.875 1.127
0.300 0.944 0.675 4.000 1.134
0.325 0.959 0.686 . . . . . .
0.350 0.973 0.696 . . . . . .
0.375 0.987 0.706 . . . . . .
0.400 1.000 0.715 . . . . . .
0.425 1.012 0.724 . . . . . .
0.450 1.024 0.732 . . . . . .
0.475 1.035 0.740 . . . . . .
0.500 1.045 0.748 . . . . . .
0.525 1.056 0.755 . . . . . .
0.550 1.066 0.762 . . . . . .
0.575 1.075 0.770 . . . . . .
0.600 1.084 0.776 . . . . . .
0.625 1.093 0.782 . . . . . .
0.650 1.101 0.788 . . . . . .
0.675 1.110 . . . . . . . . .
0.700 1.118 0.800 . . . . . .
0.725 1.126 . . . . . . . . .
0.750 1.134 0.811 . . . . . .
TABLE A6.2
ANNEALED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS —
MATERIAL CONSTANT a p 0.127. MULTIPLICATION
FACTORS FOR CONVERTING PERCENT ELONGATION
FROM 1/2 IN. DIAMETER BY 2 IN. GAGE LENGTH
STANDARD TENSION TEST SPECIMEN TO STANDARD
1/2 BY 2 IN. AND 11/2 BY 8 IN. FLAT SPECIMENS
1/2 by 11/2 by 11/2 by
Thickness, 2 in. 8 in. Thickness, 8 in.
in. Specimen Specimen in. Specimen
0.025 0.839 . . . 0.800 0.940
0.030 0.848 . . . 0.850 0.943
0.035 0.857 . . . 0.900 0.947
0.040 0.864 . . . 0.950 0.950
0.045 0.870 . . . 1.000 0.953
0.050 0.876 . . . 1.125 0.960
0.055 0.882 . . . 1.250 0.966
0.060 0.886 . . . 1.375 0.972
0.065 0.891 . . . 1.500 0.978
0.070 0.895 . . . 1.625 0.983
0.075 0.899 . . . 1.750 0.987
0.080 0.903 . . . 1.875 0.992
0.085 0.906 . . . 2.000 0.996
0.090 0.909 0.818 2.125 1.000
0.095 0.913 0.821 2.250 1.003
0.100 0.916 0.823 2.375 1.007
0.110 0.921 0.828 2.500 1.010
0.120 0.926 0.833 2.625 1.013
0.130 0.931 0.837 2.750 1.016
0.140 0.935 0.841 2.875 1.019
0.150 0.940 0.845 3.000 1.022
0.160 0.943 0.848 3.125 1.024
0.170 0.947 0.852 3.250 1.027
0.180 0.950 0.855 3.375 1.029
0.190 0.954 0.858 3.500 1.032
0.200 0.957 0.860 3.625 1.034
0.225 0.964 0.867 3.750 1.036
0.250 0.970 0.873 3.875 1.038
0.275 0.976 0.878 4.000 1.041
0.300 0.982 0.883 . . . . . .
0.325 0.987 0.887 . . . . . .
0.350 0.991 0.892 . . . . . .
0.375 0.996 0.895 . . . . . .
0.400 1.000 0.899 . . . . . .
0.425 1.004 0.903 . . . . . .
0.450 1.007 0.906 . . . . . .
0.475 1.011 0.909 . . . . . .
0.500 1.014 0.912 . . . . . .
0.525 1.017 0.915 . . . . . .
0.550 1.020 0.917 . . . . . .
0.575 1.023 0.920 . . . . . .
0.600 1.026 0.922 . . . . . .
0.625 1.029 0.925 . . . . . .
0.650 1.031 0.927 . . . . . .
0.675 1.034 . . . . . . . . .
0.700 1.036 0.932 . . . . . .
0.725 1.038 . . . . . . . . .
0.750 1.041 0.936 . . . . . .
Manufacture
Stockholder
Distributor
SA-370 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
642
TABLE A8.1
RECOMMENDED VALUES FOR ROUNDING TEST DATA
Test Quantity Test Data Range Rounded Value (A)
Yield Point, up to 50 000 psi, excl (up to 50 ksi) 100 psi (0.1 ksi)
Yield Strength, 50 000 to 100 000 psi, excl (50 to 100 ksi) 500 psi (0.5 ksi)
Tensile Strength 100 000 psi and above (100 ksi and above) 1000 psi (1.0 ksi)
up to 500 MPa, excl 1 MPa
500 to 1000 MPa, excl 5 MPa
1000 MPa and above 10 MPa
Elongation 0 to 10%, excl 0.5%
10% and above 1%
Reduction of Area 0 to 10%, excl 0.5%
10% and above 1%
Impact Energy 0 to 240 ft W lbf (or 0 to 325 J) 1 ft W lbf (or 1 J) (B)
Brinell Hardness all values tabular value (C)
Rockwell Hardness all scales 1 Rockwell Number
NOTES:
(A) Round test data to the nearest integral multiple of the values in this column. If the data value is exactly
midway between two rounded values, round in accordance with A8.1.1.2.
(B) These units are not equivalent but the rounding occurs in the same numerical ranges for each. (1 ft W lbf p
1.356 J.)
(C) Round the mean diameter of the Brinell impression to the nearest 0.05 mm and report the corresponding
Brinell hardness number read from the table without further rounding.
Manufacture
Stockholder
Distributor
ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-370
643
TABLE A10.1
HEAT-TREAT RECORD-ESSENTIAL VARIABLES
Master Production Production Production Production Production
Forging Forging 1 Forging 2 Forging 3 Forging 4 Forging 5
Program chart number
Time at temperature and actual temperature
of heat treatment
Method of cooling
Forging thickness
Thermocouple immersion
Beneath buffer (yes/no)
Forging number
Product
Material
Thermocouple location — 0 deg
Thermocouple location — 180 deg
Quench tank No.
Date of heat treatment
Furnace number
Cycle number
Heat treater
Starting quench medium temperature
Time from furnace to quench
Heating rate above 1000°F (538°C)
Temperature upon removal from quench after
5 min
Orientation of forging in quench
Manufacture
Stockholder
Distributor
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Manufacture
Stockholder
Distributor
SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON AND ALLOY STEEL
FORGINGS FOR THIN-WALLED PRESSURE VESSELS
SA-372/SA-372M
(Identical with ASTM Specification A372/A372M-03(R08).)
ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-372/SA-372M
645
Manufacture
Stockholder
Distributor
SA-372/SA-372M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
646
SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON AND ALLOY STEEL
FORGINGS FOR THIN-WALLED PRESSURE VESSELS
SA-372/SA-372M
[Identical with ASTM Specification A 372/A 372M-03(R08).]

1. Scope
   1.1 This specification covers relatively thin-walled
   forgings (including gas bottles) for pressure vessel use.
   Three types of carbon steel and six types of alloy steel are
   included. Provision is made for integrally forging the ends
   of vessel bodies made from seamless pipe or tubing.
   NOTE 1 — When working to the chemical and tensile requirements of
   this specification, the influence of wall thickness and cooling rate will
   necessarily eliminate certain forging sizes in each class.
   NOTE 2 — Designations have been changed as follows:
   Current Formerly
   Grade A Type I
   Grade B Type II
   Grade C Type III
   Grade D Type IV
   Grade E Class 55 Type V Grade 1 Class 55
   Grade E Class 65 Type V Grade 1 Class 65
   Grade E Class 70 Type V Grade 1 Class 70
   Grade F Class 55 Type V Grade 2 Class 55
   Grade F Class 65 Type V Grade 2 Class 65
   Grade F Class 70 Type V Grade 2 Class 70
   Grade G Class 55 Type V Grade 3 Class 55
   Grade G Class 65 Type V Grade 3 Class 65
   Grade G Class 70 Type V Grade 3 Class 70
   Grade H Class 55 Type V Grade 4 Class 55
   Grade H Class 65 Type V Grade 4 Class 65
   Grade H Class 70 Type V Grade 4 Class 70
   Grade J Class 55 Type V Grade 5 Class 55
   Grade J Class 65 Type V Grade 5 Class 65
   Grade J Class 70 Type V Grade 5 Class 70
   Grade K Type VI
   Grade L Type VII
   Grade J Class 110 Type VIII
   Grade M Class 85 Type IX Class A
   Grade M Class 100 Type IX Class B
   1.2 The values stated in either inch-pound or SI [metric]
   units are to be regarded separately as the standard. Within
   the text and the tables, the SI units are shown in brackets.
   The values stated in each system are not exact equivalents;
   therefore, each system must be used independently of the
   other. Combining values from the two systems may result
   in nonconformance with the specification.
   1.3 Unless the order specifies the applicable “M” specification
   designation (SI units), the material shall be furnished
   to inch-pound units.
2. Referenced Documents
   2.1 ASTM Standards:
   A 275/A 275M Test Method for Magnetic Particle Examination
   of Steel Forgings
   A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
   of Steel Products
   A 388/A 388M Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of
   Heavy Steel Forgings
   A 530/A 530M Specification for General Requirements
   for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe
   A 788 Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements
   E 112 Test Methods for Determining the Average Grain
   Size
   E 165 Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination
   E 290 Test Method for Semi-Guided Bend Test for Ductility
   of Metallic Materials
   E 433 Reference Photographs for Liquid Penetrant
   Inspection
3. Ordering Information and General
   Requirements
   3.1 In addition to the ordering information required by
   Specification A 788, the purchaser shall include with the
   inquiry and order a detailed drawing, sketch, or written
   description of the forging and the areas of significant loading
   in the forging when required (see 6.4.2.2).
   Manufacture
   Stockholder
   Distributor
   ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-372/SA-372M
   647
   3.2 Material supplied to this specification shall conform
   to the requirements of Specification A 788, which outlines
   additional ordering information, manufacturing requirements,
   testing and retesting methods and procedures, marking,
   certification, product analysis variations, and
   additional supplementary requirements.
   3.3 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
   with the requirements of Specification A 788, the
   requirements of this specification shall prevail.
4. Materials and Manufacture
   4.1 Melting Practice:
   4.1.1 The steel melting procedures of Specification
   A 788 shall apply except that for Grade M forgings, only
   steel that has been vacuum treated prior to or during the
   pouring of the ingot, in order to remove objectionable
   gases, particularly hydrogen, shall be used.
   4.2 Production Methods:
   4.2.1 Methods for the production of gas bottles and
   similar vessels shall include the cupping of slabs or plates,
   the piercing of billets or plates, and the subsequent drawing
   of cups so produced. Such semifinished forgings or seamless
   steel pipe or tubing shall be closed by spinning, swedging,
   or pressing. In all cases there shall be sufficient discard
   to ensure soundness in the completed forging.
   4.3 Heat Treatment:
   4.3.1 At the option of the manufacturer, Grades A,
   B, C, D and Classes 55, 65, 70 of Grades E, F, G, H, and
   J forgings shall be normalized, normalized and tempered,
   or liquid-quenched and tempered.
   4.3.2 Grades K, L, M, and Class 110 of Grade J
   forgings shall be liquid-quenched and tempered.
   4.3.3 When normalized forgings are to be tempered,
   or when forgings have been quenched, they shall be
   reheated to a subcritical temperature and held for at least
   1/2 h/in. [25 mm] of maximum cross section.
   4.3.3.1 Minimum tempering temperatures shall be
   as follows:
   Grades E, F, G, H, J in Classes 55, 65, 70 1100°F [595°C]
   Grade K 1100°F [595°C]
   Grade L 1000°F [540°C]
   Grade J Class 110 1000°F [540°C]
   Grade M 1100°F [595°C]
   4.3.3.2 If an attachment is welded onto a previously
   quenched and tempered pressure vessel, the post
   weld heat treatment temperature of a weldment shall not
   exceed the prior tempering temperature of the pressure
   vessel. Fabrication welding of pressure shell is not permitted.
   Attachment welding prior to heat treatment is not
   permitted.
   4.3.4 All quenched and tempered forgings shall be
   subject to magnetic particle examination in accordance
   with Section 7.
   4.3.5 Heat treatment is to be performed after all
   forming operations.
5. Chemical Composition
   5.1 Heat Analysis — The heat analysis obtained from
   sampling in accordance with Specification A 788 shall
   comply with Table 1.
   5.2 Product Analysis — The purchaser may use the
   product analysis provision of Specification A 788 to obtain
   a product analysis from a forging representing each heat
   or multiple heat.
   5.3 Starting material produced to a specification that
   specifically requires the addition of any element beyond
   those listed in Table 1 for the applicable grade of material
   is not permitted. This does not preclude use of deoxidation
   or inclusion control additions. Supplementary Requirements
   S1 and S2 of Specification A 788 shall apply.
6. Mechanical Properties
   6.1 Mechanical tests for acceptance shall be made after
   the final heat treatment of the forgings.
   6.2 Tension Test — When tested in accordance with
   Test Methods and Definitions A 370, the material shall
   conform to the requirements of Table 2. The yield strength
   shall be determined by the 0.2% offset method.
   6.3 Bending Properties — Depending upon the outside
   diameter, D, and the wall thickness, T, of hollow or bored
   forgings, a bend test or flattening test will be required.
   6.3.1 For bored or hollow forgings with outside
   diameters of 14 in. [355 mm] or less and with a D/T ratio
   of more than 10.0, a flattening test is required. This shall
   be carried out in accordance with Specification
   A 530/A 530M and Table 3. No breaks or cracks in the
   test ring are acceptable until the distance between the plates
   is less than that shown in Table 3.
   6.3.2 For bored or hollow forgings with outside
   diameters over 14 in. [355 mm], or where the D/T ratio
   is 10.0 or less at the manufacturer’s option, the flattening
   test specified in 6.3.1, or a transverse bend test in accordance
   with Arrangement C of Test Method E 290 is
   required. The bend test pin diameter shall be as specified
   in Table 4. No cracks or ruptures in the test piece are
   allowable when the test piece is bent through the required
   angle.
   Manufacture
   Stockholder
   Distributor
   SA-372/SA-372M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
   648
   6.4 Orientation and Location of Test Specimens:
   6.4.1 Test specimens representing vessel bodies or
   shells shall be taken from a prolongation of a forging, from
   test rings that have been heat treated with the forgings
   they represent, or from a representative forging after heat
   treatment in accordance with 4.3.
   6.4.1.1 Test specimens representing vessel bodies
   or shells shall be located at a position corresponding to
   the mid-wall location of the parallel side wall of the heattreated
   forging and shall be oriented parallel to the longitudinal
   axis of the vessel.
   6.4.1.2 A test ring shall be in the shape of a right
   circular cylinder having the same diameter and wall thickness
   as the cylinders it represents. In addition, the test ring
   shall be from the same heat of steel and be subjected to
   the same heat treatment as the cylinders it represents. The
   method of quenching the test ring must duplicate that of
   the cylinders; if the cylinders are quenched from the outside
   only, then the test ring must have its ends closed. The
   length of test rings that will be liquid quenched must be
   at least 24 in. [610 mm]. The ends of such test rings may
   be vented to prevent pressure buildup during heat treating.
   6.4.2 Test specimens representing vessel covers or
   similar components may be taken from a full section prolongation
   of the cover, from a representative forging, or
   from an integral prolongation when the part is contourmachined
   prior to heat treatment.
   6.4.2.1 Test specimens taken from full size prolongations
   or representative forgings shall be located at a
   position midway between the center and the surface.
   6.4.2.2 When forgings are contour-machined prior
   to heat treatment so that highly stressed surfaces are
   exposed, the test specimens may be taken at an equal
   distance (t) from the nearest quenched surface as the highly
   stressed area, but not less than 3/4 in. [20 mm]. The location
   of the specimens from a second surface shall be at least
   the greater of 11/2 in. [40 mm] or 2t.
   6.5 Number of Tests:
   6.5.1 Up to 200 like forgings, each with a heattreated
   weight of less than 1000 lb [510 kg] when heat
   treated in a single batch furnace charge, shall have one
   tension test taken in accordance with 6.4.1 or 6.4.2 to
   represent each heat. In addition, for hollow or bored forgings,
   one bend or flattening test shall be taken in accordance
   with 6.3.
   6.5.2 Like forgings, weighing less than 1000 lb
   [450 kg] each when heat treated in a continuous furnace,
   shall have one tensile test taken to represent each heat and
   not more than 200 forgings in any continuous period up
   to 4 h duration. In addition, bored or hollow forgings shall
   have one bend or flattening test taken per heat per 200
   forgings in any continuous period up to 4 h duration in
   accordance with 6.3.
   6.5.3 For heat-treated forgings weighing 1000 lb
   [450 kg] or more, one tension test shall be taken in accordance
   with 6.4.1 or 6.4.2 to represent each heat and not
   more than ten forgings in a heat-treat lot. In addition,
   hollow or bored forgings shall have one bend or flattening
   test, taken in accordance with 6.3, to represent each ten or
   fewer forgings from the same heat and heat-treatment lot.
   6.6 Hardness Testing:
   6.6.1 Forgings under 1000 lb [450 kgm] in weight,
   heat treated in a batch lot of up to 200 pieces (6.5.1) or
   in a continuous furnace run covering up to 200 pieces in
   up to four hours production (6.5.2) shall be subject to a
   uniformity check by Brinell hardness testing, or an equivalent
   method. For this purpose, 10% of the furnace production
   shall be sampled and shall meet the minimum hardness
   specified in Table 2 for the type and shall also be within
   20 Brinell points of the hardness of the forging from which
   the tensile test was taken.
   6.6.2 In the event that the test sample does not meet
   these criteria, the remainder of that production group shall
   be hardness tested and all of those forgings that fall outside
   these limits shall be retempered or reheat-treated at the
   manufacturer’s option and retested.
7. Magnetic Particle Examination
   7.1 All quenched and tempered forgings shall be subject
   to magnetic particle examination after heat treatment. The
   methods used shall be in accordance with Test Method
   A 275/A 275M.
   7.2 Only direct current or rectified alternating (full or
   half wave) current shall be used as the electric power source
   for any of the magnetizing methods.
   7.3 The forgings shall be free from linear indications
   indicative of cracks. In case of doubt as to the type of
   condition giving rise to linear magnetic particle indications,
   they may be inspected for Type II indications referenced
   in Reference Photographs E 433 when inspected by the
   liquid penetrant method in accordance with Practice E 165.
   Alternatively, some other suitable method for classifying
   the indications may be used as agreed upon between the
   manufacturer and the purchaser.
8. Workmanship
   8.1 If the thickness of a portion of the wall of a forging
   is less than that specified, the forgings may be accepted
   by the purchaser, provided that such irregularity will not
   require lowering the allowable working pressure below
   that for which the forging was designed.
   Manufacture
   Stockholder
   Distributor
   ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-372/SA-372M
   649
9. Repair Welding
   9.1 Repair welding shall be permitted when mutually
   agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer
   and shall be performed in accordance with all the requirements
   of the applicable code or rules of construction.
   TABLE 1
   CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
   Composition, %
   Elements Grade A Grade B Grade C Grade D
   Carbon 0.30 max 0.35 max 0.48 max 0.40–0.50
   Manganese 1.00 max 1.35 max 1.65 max 1.40–1.80
   Phosphorus, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
   Sulfur, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
   Silicon 0.15–0.35 0.15–0.35 0.15–0.35 0.15–0.35
   Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . .
   Chromium . . . . . . . . . . . .
   Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . 0.17–0.27
   Grade E Grade F Grade G Grade H Grade J
   Classes Classes Classes Classes Classes 55,
   55, 65, 70 55, 65, 70 55, 65, 70 55, 65, 70 65, 70, 110
   Carbon 0.25–0.35 0.30–0.40 0.25–0.35 0.30–0.40 0.35–0.50
   Manganese 0.40–0.90 0.70–1.00 0.70–1.00 0.75–1.05 0.75–1.05
   Phosphorus, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
   Sulfur, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
   Silicon 0.15–0.35 0.15–0.35 0.15–0.35 0.15–0.35 0.15–0.35
   Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
   Chromium 0.80–1.15 0.80–1.15 0.40–0.65 0.40–0.65 0.80–1.15
   Molybdenum 0.15–0.25 0.15–0.25 0.15–0.25 0.15–0.25 0.15–0.25
   Grade M
   Classes
   Grade K Grade L 85 and 100
   Carbon 0.18 max 0.38–0.43 0.23 max
   Manganese 0.10–0.40 0.60–0.80 0.20–0.40
   Phosphorus, max 0.025 0.025 0.020
   Sulfur, max 0.025 0.025 0.020
   Silicon 0.15–0.35 0.15–0.35 0.30 max
   Nickel 2.0–3.3 1.65–2.00 2.8–3.9
   Chromium 1.00–1.80 0.70–0.90 1.50–2.00
   Molybdenum 0.20–0.60 0.20–0.30 0.40–0.60
   Vanadium . . . . . . 0.08 max
10. Keywords
    10.1 alloy steel forgings; carbon steel forgings; gas
    bottles; pressure vessels; thin wall
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-372/SA-372M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    650
    TABLE 2
    MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
    Yield Elongation
    Strength in 2 in.
    Tensile Strength, (0.2% Offset), [50 mm], Hardness,
    Type ksi [MPa] ksi [MPa], min min, % HB, minA
    Grade A 60–85 [415–585] 35 [240] 20 121
    Grade B 75–100 [515–690] 45 [310] 18 156
    Grade C 90–115 [620–795] 55 [380] 15 187
    Grade D 105–130 [725–895] 65 [450] 15 217
    Grades E, F, G, H, J 85–110 [545–760] 55 [380] 20 179
    (Class 55)
    Grades E, F, G, H, J 105–130 [725–895] 65 [450] 19 217
    (Class 65)
    Grades E, F, G, H, J 120–145 [825–1000] 70 [485] 18 248
    (Class 70)
    Grade J (Class 110) 135–160 [930–1100] 110 [760] 15 277
    Grade K 100–125 [690–860] 80 [550] 20 207
    Grade L 155–180 [1070–1240] 135 [930] 12 311
    Grade M (Class 85) 105–130 [725–895] 85 [585] 18 217
    Grade M (Class 100) 120–145 [825–1000] 100 [690] 16 248
    A When required by 6.6.
    TABLE 3
    DISTANCE BETWEEN PLATES FOR FLATTENING
    TESTSA
    Distance Between Plates,
    Type min, in. [mm]
    Grade A 0.50 D
    Grade B 0.6 D
    Grade C 0.65 D
    Grade D 0.7 D
    Grades E, F, G, H, J (Class 55) 0.7 D
    Grades E, F, G, H, J (Class 65) 0.8 D
    Grades E, F, G. H, J (Class 70) 0.8 D
    Grade J (Class 110) 0.9 D
    Grade K 0.8 D
    Grade L 0.9 D
    Grade M (Class 85) 0.7 D
    Grade M (Class 100) 0.8 D
    A D p outside diameter.
    TABLE 4
    MAXIMUM PIN DIAMETERS AND MINIMUM ANGLE
    FOR BEND TEST
    Type Pin Diameter Angle, deg
    Grade A 2t 180
    Grade B 2t 180
    Grade C 3t 180
    Grade D 4t 150
    Grades E, F, G, H, J (Class 55) 4t 150
    Grades E, F, G, H, J (Class 65) 4t 150
    Grades E, F, G, H, J (Class 70) 4t 150
    Grade J (Class 110) 6t 150
    Grade K 4t 150
    Grade L 6t 150
    Grade M (Class 85) 4t 150
    Grade M (Class 100) 4t 150
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-372/SA-372M
    651
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified
    by the purchaser on the inquiry, contract, or order. Details of these supplementary requirements
    shall be agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser.
    S1. Grain Size
    S1.1 When a grain size range is required, it shall be
    specified in the ordering information, and shall be determined
    by an agreed-upon method from Test Methods
    E 112.
    S1.2 Samples for grain size estimation shall be taken
    from the tension test specimen location.
    S2. Rough Machining
    S2.1 Rough machining shall be performed in the
    sequence and manner as specified.
    S3. Impact Testing
    S3.1 Charpy V-notch test specimens shall be taken
    from the same location and in the same orientation as
    tension test specimens. The number of specimens, minimum
    energy values, and test temperature(s) shall be as
    specified.
    S4. Fracture Toughness
    S4.1 Specific fracture toughness requirements are levied
    by certain sections of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
    Vessel Code. Forgings in the permitted types shall comply
    with the applicable code sections.
    S4.2 The necessary code references toughness criteria
    and test temperature data shall be included in the ordering
    information.
    S5. Ultrasonic Examination
    S5.1 Ultrasonic examination of forgings shall be carried
    out in accordance with Practice A 388/A 388M.
    S5.2 Acceptance criteria shall be specified and shall
    be in accordance with the applicable Code or purchaser’s
    specification and shall be included as part of the ordering
    information.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS AUSTENITIC STEEL
    PIPE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE CENTRAL-STATION
    SERVICE
    SA-376/SA-376M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A376/A376M-06 except for the deletion of HT-O option from 6.2 and 14.1 and
    clarification of heat treatment requirements in 6.2.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-376/SA-376M
    653
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-376/SA-376M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    654
    SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS AUSTENITIC STEEL
    PIPE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE CENTRAL-STATION
    SERVICE
    SA-376/SA-376M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A 376/A 376M-06, except for the deletion of HT-O option from 6.2 and 14.1 and clarification of heat
    treatment requirements in 6.2.)
11. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers seamless austenitic steel
    pipe intended for high-temperature central-station service.
    Among the grades covered are five H grades and two
    nitrogen grades (304N and 316N) that are specifically
    intended for high-temperature service.
    1.2 Optional supplementary requirements (S1 through
    S10) are provided. These supplementary requirements
    specify additional tests that will be made only when stated
    in the order, together with the number of such tests
    required.
    1.3 Grades TP321 and TP321H have lower strength
    requirements for nominal wall thicknesses greater than
    3/8 in. [9.5 mm].
    1.4 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
    units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
    text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
    in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
    system must be used independently of the other. Combining
    values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
    with the specification. The inch-pound units shall apply
    unless the “M” designation of this specification is specified
    in the order.
    NOTE 1 — The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has
    been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal
    diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.”
12. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A 262 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular
    Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels
    A 941 Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel,
    Related Alloys, and Ferroalloys
    A 999/A 999M Specification for General Requirements
    for Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe
    E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
    E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
    and Tubing
    E 381 Method of Macroetch Testing Steel Bars, Billets,
    Blooms, and Forgings
    E 426 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Examination
    of Seamless and Welded Tubular Products, Austenitic
    Stainless Steel and Similar Alloys
    2.2 Other Standards:
    SNT-TC-1A Personnel Qualification and Certification in
    Nondestructive Testing
13. Terminology
    3.1 Definitions — For definitions of terms used in this
    specification, refer to Terminology A 941.
14. Ordering Information
    4.1 Orders for material to this specification should
    include the following, as required to describe the desired
    material adequately:
    4.1.1 Quantity (feet, centimetres, or number of
    lengths),
    4.1.2 Name of material (seamless austenitic steel
    pipe),
    4.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
    4.1.4 Size (nominal size, or outside diameter and
    schedule number or average wall thickness),
    4.1.5 Lengths (specific or random), (Permissible
    Variations in Length Section of Specification
    A 999/A 999M),
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-376/SA-376M
    655
    4.1.6 End finish (Ends Section of Specification
    A 999/A 999M),
    4.1.7 Optional requirements (Section 9) (see Hydrostatic
    Test Requirements Section and the Permissible Variation
    in Weight for Seamless Pipe Section for weighing
    individual lengths, of Specification A 999/A 999M), (see
    10.6, repairing by welding; 14.3, die stamping),
    4.1.8 Test report required (Certification Section of
    Specification A 999/A 999M),
    4.1.9 Specification designation, and
    4.1.10 Special requirements or any supplementary
    requirements selected, or both.
15. General Requirements
    5.1 Material furnished to this specification shall conform
    to the applicable requirements of the current edition
    of Specification A 999/A 999M unless otherwise provided
    herein.
16. Materials and Manufacture
    6.1 Manufacture — At the manufacturer’s option, pipe
    may be either hot finished or cold finished, with a suitable
    finishing treatment, where necessary.
    6.2 Heat Treatment:
    6.2.1 All pipe shall be furnished in the heat-treated
    condition. For H grades, separate solution treatments are
    required for solution annealing: in process heat treatments
    are not permitted as a substitute for the separate solution
    annealing treatments.
    6.2.2 As an alternate to final heat treatment in a
    continuous furnace or batch-type furnace, immediately following
    hot forming while the temperature of the pipes is
    not less than the specified minimum solution treatment
    temperature, pipes may be individually quenched in water
    or rapidly cooled by other means.
    6.2.3 Grades TP304, TP304N, TP304LN, TP316,
    TP316N, TP316LN, TP321, TP347, TP348, 16-8-2H,
    S31725, and S31726 — Unless otherwise stated in the
    order, heat treatment shall consist of heating to a minimum
    temperature of 1900°F [1040°C] and quenching in water
    or rapidly cooling by other means.
    6.2.3.1 The purchaser may specify controlled
    structural or special service characteristics which shall be
    used as a guide for the most suitable heat treatment. If
    the final heat treatment is at a temperature under 1900°F
    [1040°C], each pipe shall be stenciled with the final heat
    treatment temperature in degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius
    after the suffix “HT.”
    6.2.4 Grades TP304H, TP316H, TP321H, TP347H,
    TP348H, and 16-8-2H — If cold working is involved in
    processing, the minimum solution-treating temperature for
    Grades TP321H, TP347H, and TP348H shall be 2000°F
    [1100°C], for Grades TP304H and TP316H, 1900°F
    [1040°C], and for Grade 16-8-2H, 1800°F [980°C]. If the
    material is hot-rolled, the minimum solution-treating temperatures
    for Grades TP321H, TP347H, and TP348H shall
    be 1925°F [1050°C], for Grades TP304H and TP316H,
    1900°F [1040°C], and for Grade 16-8-2H, 1800°F [980°C].
    6.2.5 Grade S34565 — Heat treatment shall consist
    of heating to a temperature in the range of 2050°F [1120°C]
    minimum and 2140°F [1170°C] maximum, and quenching
    in water or rapidly cooling by other means.
    6.3 A solution annealing temperature above 1950°F
    [1065°C] may impair the resistance to intergranular corrosion
    after subsequent exposure to sensitizing conditions in
    TP321, TP321H, TP347, TP347H, TP348, and TP348H.
    When specified by the purchaser, a lower temperature stabilization
    or re-solution anneal shall be used subsequent to
    the initial high temperature solution anneal (see Supplementary
    Requirement S9).
    6.4 The grain size of grades 304H, 316H, 321H, 347H,
    and 348H as determined in accordance with Test Methods
    E 112, shall be No. 7 or coarser.
17. Chemical Composition
    7.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
    chemical composition prescribed in Table 1.
18. Product Analysis
    8.1 At the request of the purchaser, an analysis of one
    billet from each heat or two pipes from each lot (Note 2)
    shall be made by the manufacturer. A lot of pipe shall
    consist of the following:
    NPS Designator Lengths of Pipe in Lot
    Under NPS 2 400 or fraction thereof
    NPS 2 to NPS 5, incl 200 or fraction thereof
    Over NPS 5 100 or fraction thereof
    NOTE 2 — A lot shall consist of the number of lengths specified in 8.1
    of the same size and wall thickness from any one heat of steel.
    8.2 The results of these analyses shall be reported to
    the purchaser or the purchaser’s representative, and shall
    conform to the requirements specified in Table 1.
    8.3 If the analysis of one of the tests specified in
    Section 9 does not conform to the requirements specified
    in Section 7, an analysis of each billet or pipe from the
    same heat or lot may be made, and all billets or pipe
    conforming to the requirements shall be accepted.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-376/SA-376M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    656
19. Tensile Requirements
    9.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as
    to tensile properties prescribed in Table 2.
20. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
    10.1 The pipe manufacturer shall explore a sufficient
    number of visual surface imperfections to provide reasonable
    assurance that they have been properly evaluated with
    respect to depth. Exploration of all surface imperfections
    is not required but may be necessary to assure compliance
    with 10.2.
    10.2 Surface imperfections that penetrate more than
    121/2% of the nominal wall thickness or encroach on the
    minimum wall thickness shall be considered defects. Pipe
    with such defects shall be given one of the following dispositions:
    10.2.1 The defect may be removed by grinding provided
    that the remaining wall thickness is within specified
    limits.
    10.2.2 Repaired in accordance with the repair welding
    provisions of 10.6.
    10.2.3 The section of pipe containing the defect may
    be cut off within the limits of requirements on length.
    10.2.4 Rejected.
    10.3 To provide a workmanlike finish and basis for
    evaluating conformance with 10.2, the pipe manufacturer
    shall remove by grinding the following:
    10.3.1 Mechanical marks, abrasions (see Note 3),
    and pits, any of which imperfections are deeper than 1/16 in.
    [1.6 mm].
    NOTE 3 — Marks and abrasions are defined as cable marks, dinges,
    guide marks, roll marks, ball scratches, scores, die marks, and so forth.
    10.3.2 Visual imperfections commonly referred to
    as scabs, seams, laps, tears, or slivers found by exploration
    in accordance with 10.1 to be deeper than 5% of the nominal
    wall thickness.
    10.4 At the purchaser’s discretion, pipe shall be subject
    to rejection if surface imperfections acceptable under 10.2
    are not scattered, but appear over a large area in excess of
    what is considered a workmanlike finish. Disposition of
    such pipe shall be a matter of agreement between the
    manufacturer and the purchaser.
    10.5 When imperfections or defects are removed by
    grinding, a smooth curved surface shall be maintained,
    and the wall thickness shall not be decreased below that
    permitted by this specification. The outside diameter at
    the point of grinding may be reduced by the amount so
    removed.
    10.5.1 Wall thickness measurements shall be made
    with a mechanical caliper or with a properly calibrated
    nondestructive testing device of appropriate accuracy. In
    case of dispute, the measurement determined by use of the
    mechanical caliper shall govern.
    10.6 Weld repair shall be permitted only subject to the
    approval of the purchaser and in accordance with Specification
    A 999/A 999M.
    10.7 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight.
    10.8 The pipe shall be free of scale and contaminating
    iron particles. Pickling, blasting, or surface finishing is not
    mandatory when pipe is bright annealed. The purchaser
    may request that a passivating treatment be applied.
21. Hydrostatic or Nondestructive Electric Test
    11.1 Each pipe shall be subjected to the Nondestructive
    Electric Test or the Hydrostatic Test. Unless specified by
    the purchaser, either test may be used at the option of the
    producer.
    11.2 Hydrostatic Test — Each length of finished pipe
    shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test in accordance with
    SpecificationA 999/A 999M, unless specifically exempted
    under the provisions of 11.3 and 11.4.
    11.3 For pipe sizes NPS 24 and over, the purchaser,
    with the agreement of the manufacturer, may complete the
    hydrostatic test requirement with the system pressure test,
    which may be lower or higher than the specification test
    pressure, but in no case shall the test pressure be lower than
    the system design pressure. Each length of pipe furnished
    without the completed manufacturer’s hydrostatic test shall
    include with the mandatory marking the letters “NH.”
    11.4 Nondestructive Examination — Each pipe shall be
    examined with a nondestructive test in accordance with
    Practice E 213 or Practice E 426. Unless specifically called
    out by the purchaser, the selection of the nondestructive
    electric test will be at the option of the manufacturer. The
    range of pipe sizes that may be examined by each method
    shall be subject to the limitations in the scope of the respective
    practices.
    11.4.1 The following information is for the benefit
    of the user of this specification:
    11.4.1.1 The reference standards defined in
    11.10.1 through 11.10.4 are convenient standards for calibration
    of nondestructive testing equipment. The dimensions
    of these standards should not be construed as the
    minimum size imperfection detectable by such equipment.
    11.4.1.2 The ultrasonic testing (UT) can be performed
    to detect both longitudinally and circumferentially
    oriented defects. It should be recognized that different
    techniques should be employed to detect differently oriented
    imperfections. The examination may not detect short,
    deep, defects.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-376/SA-376M
    657
    11.4.1.3 The eddy-current testing (ET) referenced
    in Practice E 426 has the capability of detecting significant
    discontinuities, especially the short abrupt type.
    11.4.1.4 A purchaser interested in ascertaining the
    nature (type, size, location, and orientation) of discontinuities
    that can be detected in the specific application of these
    examinations should discuss this with the manufacturer of
    the tubular product.
    11.5 Time of Examination — Nondestructive testing for
    specification acceptance shall be performed after all
    mechanical processing, heat treatments, and straightening
    operations. This requirement does not preclude additional
    testing at earlier stages in the processing.
    11.6 Surface Condition:
    11.6.1 All surfaces shall be free of scale, dirt, grease,
    paint, or other foreign material that could interfere with
    interpretation of test results. The methods used for cleaning
    and preparing the surfaces for examination shall not be
    detrimental to the base metal or the surface finish.
    11.6.2 Excessive surface roughness or deep scratches
    can produce signals that interfere with the test.
    11.7 Extent of Examination:
    11.7.1 The relative motion of the pipe and the transducer(
    s), coil(s), or sensor(s) shall be such that the entire
    pipe surface is scanned, except as in 6.2.
    11.7.2 The existence of end effects is recognized,
    and the extent of such effects shall be determined by the
    manufacturer, and, if requested, shall be reported to the
    purchaser. Other nondestructive tests may be applied to
    the end areas, subject to agreement between the purchaser
    and the manufacturer.
    11.8 Operator Qualifications — The test unit operator
    shall be certified in accordance with SNT-TC-1A, or an
    equivalent recognized and documented standard.
    11.9 Test Conditions:
    11.9.1 For eddy-current testing, the excitation coil
    frequency shall be chosen to ensure adequate penetration
    yet provide good signal-to-noise ratio.
    11.9.2 The maximum eddy-current coil frequency
    used shall be as follows:
    On specified walls up to 0.050 in.—100 KHz max
    On specified walls up to 0.150 in.—50 KHz max
    On specified walls up to 0.150 in.—10 KHz max
    11.9.3 Ultrasonic — For examination by the ultrasonic
    method, the minimum nominal transducer frequency
    shall be 2.00 MHz and the maximum nominal transducer
    size shall be 1.5 in.
    11.9.3.1 If the equipment contains a reject notice
    filter setting, this shall remain off during calibration and
    testing unless linearity can be demonstrated at that setting.
    11.10 Reference Standards:
    11.10.1 Reference standards of convenient length
    shall be prepared from a length of pipe of the same grade,
    size (NPS, or outside diameter and schedule or wall thickness),
    surface finish, and heat treatment condition as the
    pipe to be examined.
    11.10.2 For Ultrasonic Testing, the reference ID and
    OD notches shall be any one of the three common notch
    shapes shown in Practice E 213, at the option of the manufacturer.
    The depth of each notch shall not exceed 121/2%
    of the specified nominal wall thickness of the pipe or
    0.004 in., whichever is greater. The width of the notch
    shall not exceed twice the depth. Notches shall be placed
    on both the OD and ID surfaces.
    11.10.3 For Eddy-Current Testing, the reference
    standard shall contain, at the option of the manufacturer,
    any one of the following discontinuities:
    11.10.3.1 Drilled Hole — The reference standard
    shall contain three or more holes, equally spaced circumferentially
    around the pipe and longitudinally separated by a
    sufficient distance to allow distinct identification of the
    signal from each hole. The holes shall be drilled radially
    and completely through the pipe wall, with care being
    taken to avoid distortion of the pipe while drilling. One
    hole shall be drilled in the weld, if visible. Alternately, the
    producer of welded pipe may choose to drill one hole in
    the weld and run the calibration standard through the test
    coils three times with the weld turned at 120° on each
    pass. The hole diameter shall vary with NPS as follows:
    NPS Designator Hole Diameter
    0.039 in. (1 mm)
    above 1/2 to 11/4 0.055 in. (1.4 mm)
    above 11/4 to 2 0.071 in. (1.8 mm)
    above 2 to 5 0.087 in. (2.2 mm)
    above 5 0.106 in. (2.7 mm)
    11.10.3.2 Transverse Tangential Notch — Using a
    round tool or file with a 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) diameter, a notch
    shall be filed or milled tangential to the surface and transverse
    to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Said notch shall
    have a depth not exceeding 121/2% of the specified nominal
    wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004 in. (0.102 mm), whichever
    is greater.
    11.10.3.3 Longitudinal Notch — A notch 0.031 in.
    or less in width shall be machined in a radial plane parallel
    to the tube axis on the outside surface of the pipe, to have
    a depth not exceeding 121/2% of the specified wall thickness
    of the pipe or 0.004 in., whichever is greater. The length
    of the notch shall be compatible with the testing method.
    11.10.3.4 More or smaller reference discontinuities,
    or both, may be used by agreement between the
    purchaser and the manufacturer.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-376/SA-376M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    658
    11.11 Standardization Procedure:
    11.11.1 The test apparatus shall be standardized at
    the beginning and end of each series of pipes of the same
    size (NPS or diameter and schedule or wall thickness),
    grade and heat treatment condition, and at intervals not
    exceeding 4 h. More frequent standardization may be performed
    at the manufacturer’s option or may be required
    upon agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
    11.11.2 The test apparatus shall also be standardized
    after any change in test system settings; change of operator;
    equipment repair; or interruption due to power loss, process
    shutdown, or when a problem is suspected.
    11.11.3 The reference standard shall be passed
    through the test apparatus at the same speed and test system
    settings as the pipe to be tested.
    11.11.4 The signal-to-noise ratio for the reference
    standard shall be 21/2 to 1 or greater. Extraneous signals
    caused by identifiable causes such as dings, scratches,
    dents, straightener marks, and so forth, shall not be considered
    noise. The rejection amplitude shall be adjusted to be
    at least 50% of full scale of the readout display.
    11.11.5 If upon any standardization, the rejection
    amplitude has decreased by 29% (3 dB) of peak height
    from the last standardization, the pipe since the last calibration
    shall be rejected. The test system settings may be
    changed, or the transducer(s), coil(s) or sensor(s) adjusted,
    and the unit restandardized, but all pipe tested since the last
    acceptable standardization must be retested for acceptance.
    11.12 Evaluation of Imperfections:
    11.12.1 Pipes producing a signal equal to or greater
    than the lowest signal produced by the reference standard(s)
    shall be identified and separated from the acceptable pipes.
    The area producing the signal may be reexamined.
    11.12.2 Such pipes shall be rejected if the test signal
    was produced by imperfections that cannot be identified
    or was produced by cracks or crack-like imperfections.
    These pipes may be repaired in accordance with Sections 13
    and 14. To be accepted, a repaired pipe must pass the same
    nondestructive test by which it was rejected, and it must
    meet the minimum wall thickness requirements of this
    specification.
    11.12.3 If the test signals were produced by visual
    imperfections such as:
    (1) Scratches,
    (2) Surface roughness,
    (3) Dings,
    (4) Straightener marks,
    (5) Cutting chips,
    (6) Steel die stamps,
    (7) Stop marks, or
    (8) Pipe reducer ripple.
    The pipe may be accepted based on visual examination
    provided the imperfection is less than 0.004 in. (0.1 mm)
    or 121/2% of the specified wall thickness (whichever is
    greater).
    11.12.4 Rejected pipe may be reconditioned and
    retested providing the wall thickness is not decreased to
    less than that required by this or the product specification.
    The outside diameter at the point of grinding may be
    reduced by the amount so removed. To be accepted,
    retested pipe shall meet the test requirement.
    11.12.5 If the imperfection is explored to the extent
    that it can be identified as non-rejectable, the pipe may be
    accepted without further test providing the imperfection
    does not encroach on the minimum wall thickness.
22. Mechanical Tests Required
    12.1 Transverse or Longitudinal Tension Test — The
    tension test shall be performed on 1% of the pipe from
    each lot.
    NOTE 4 — The term “lot” applies to all pipe of the same nominal size
    and wall thickness (or schedule) which is produced from the same heat
    of steel and subjected to the same finishing treatment in a continuous
    furnace or by directly obtaining the heat treated condition by quenching
    after hot forming. When final heat treatment is in a batch-type furnace,
    the lot shall include only that pipe which is heat treated in the same
    furnace charge.
    12.2 Flattening Test — For pipe heat treated in a batchtype
    furnace, the flattening test shall be made on 5% of
    the pipe from each heat-treated lot (see Note 4). When
    heat treated by the continuous process or when treated
    condition is obtained directly by quenching after hot forming,
    this test shall be made on a sufficient number of pipe
    to constitute 5% of the lot (Note 4) but in no case less
    than two pipes.
23. Certification
    13.1 In addition to the certification required by Specification
    A 999/A 999M, the certification for pipe furnished
    to this specification shall identify each length of pipe which
    is furnished without the manufacturer’s completed hydrostatic
    test, in accordance with 11.3.
24. Product Marking
    14.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
    A 999/A 999M, the marking shall include the ANSI
    schedule number, the heat number or manufacturer’s number
    by which the heat can be identified, and, if applicable,
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-376/SA-376M
    659
    NH when hydrotesting is not performed and ET when
    eddy-current testing is performed, or UT when ultrasonic
    testing is performed.
    14.2 If the pipe conforms to any of the supplementary
    requirements specified in S1 through S10, compliance shall
    be so indicated by adding the symbol “S” directly followed
    by the number of the applicable supplementary requirement
    to the marking prescribed in 14.1.
    14.3 No steel indentation stamping shall be done without
    the purchaser’s consent.
25. Keywords
    15.1 austenitic stainless steel; feedwater heater tubes;
    stainless steel tube; steel tube; welded steel tube
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-376/SA-376M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    660
    TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
    Grade
    UNS
    Designation
    Composition, %
    Carbon
    Manganese,
    max
    Phosphorus,
    max
    Sulfur,
    max
    Silicon,
    max Nickel Chromium Molybdenum
    Titanium
    Columbium
    Tantalum
    Nitrogen (A) Others
    TP304 S30400 0.08 max 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 8.0–11.0 18.0–20.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP304H S30409 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 8.0–11.0 18.0–20.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP304N S30451 0.08 max 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 8.0–11.0 18.0–20.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.10–0.16 . . .
    TP304LN S30453 0.035 max 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 8.0–11.0 18.0–20.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.10–0.16 . . .
    TP316 S31600 0.08 max 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 11.0–14.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP316H S31609 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 11.0–14.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP316N S31651 0.08 max 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 11.0–14.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 . . . . . . . . . 0.10–0.16 . . .
    TP316LN S31653 0.035 max 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 11.0–14.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 . . . . . . . . . 0.10–0.16 . . .
    TP321 S32100 0.08 max 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 9.0–13.0 17.0–19.0 . . . (B) . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP321H S32109 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 9.0–13.0 17.0–19.0 . . . (C) . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP347 S34700 0.08 max 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 9.0–13.0 17.0–19.0 . . . . . . (D) . . . . . . . . .
    TP347H S34709 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 9.0–13.0 17.0–19.0 . . . . . . (E) . . . . . . . . .
    TP348 (F) S34800 0.08 max 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 9.0–13.0 17.0–19.0 . . . . . . (D) 0.10 . . . Co 0.20 max
    TP348H S34809 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–13.0 17.0–19.0 . . . . . . (E) . . . . . . . . .
    16-8-2H S16800 0.05–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 7.5–9.5 14.5–16.5 1.50–2.00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S31725 0.030 max 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 13.5–17.5 18.0–20.0 4.0–5.0 . . . . . . . . . 0.20 max Cu 0.75 max
    . . . S31726 0.030 max 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 14.5–17.5 17.0–20.0 4.0–5.0 . . . . . . . . . 0.10–0.20 Cu 0.75 max
    . . . S34565 0.030 max 5.0–7.0 0.030 0.010 1.0 16.0–18.0 23.0–25.0 4.0–5.0 . . . . . . . . . 0.040–0.060 Cb 0.10 max
    NOTES:
    (A) The method of analysis for nitrogen shall be a matter of agreement between the purchaser and manufacturer.
    (B) The titanium content shall be not less than five times the carbon content and not more than 0.70%.
    (C) The titanium content shall be not less than four times the carbon content and not more than 0.70%.
    (D) The columbium content shall be not less than ten times the carbon content and not more than 1.10%.
    (E) The columbium content shall be not less than eight times the carbon content and not more than 1.10%.
    (F) This grade is intended for special purpose applications.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-376/SA-376M
    661
    TABLE 2 TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
    Elongation in 2 in. Tensile (A) or 50 mm
    Strength, min, Yield Strength, (or 4D) min, %
    Grade ksi [MPa] min, ksi [MPa] Longitudinal Transverse
    TP304, TP304H, 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 25
    TP304LN, TP316,
    TP316H,
    TP316LN, TP347,
    TP347H, TP348,
    TP348H, 16-8-2H,
    S31725
    TP304N, TP316N, 80 [550] 35 [240] 35 25
    S31726
    S34565 115 [790] 60 [415] 35 30
    TP321, TP321H
    =3/8” 75 [515] 30 [205] 35 25
    3/8” (B) 70 [480] 25 [170] 35 25
    NOTES:
    (A) For grade TP304, NPS 8 or larger, and in schedules 140 and heavier, the required minimum tensile
    strength shall be 70 ksi [480 MPa].
    (B) Prior to the issuance of A 376/A 376M — 88, the tensile and yield strength values were 75 [520] and
    30 [210] respectively, for nominal wall greater than 3/8 in. [9.5 mm].
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-376/SA-376M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    662
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPE REQUIRING SPECIAL
    CONSIDERATION
    One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified
    in the purchase order. The purchaser may specify a different frequency of test or analysis
    than is provided in the supplementary requirement. Subject to agreement between the
    purchaser and manufacturer, retest and retreatment provisions of these supplementary
    requirements may also be modified.
    S1. Product Analysis
    S1.1 Product analysis shall be made on each length of
    pipe. Individual lengths failing to conform to the chemical
    composition requirements shall be rejected.
    S2. Transverse Tension Tests
    S2.1 A transverse tension test shall be made on a specimen
    from one end or both ends of each pipe NPS 8 and over
    in nominal diameter. If this supplementary requirement is
    specified, the number of tests per pipe shall also be specified.
    If a specimen from any length fails to meet the required
    tensile properties (tensile, yield, and elongation), that
    length shall be rejected subject to retreatment in accordance
    with Specification A 999/A 999M and satisfactory retest.
    S3. Flattening Test
    S3.1 The flattening test of SpecificationA 999/A 999M
    shall be made on a specimen from one end or both ends
    of each pipe. Crop ends may be used. If this supplementary
    requirement is specified, the number of tests per pipe shall
    also be specified. If a specimen from any length fails
    because of lack of ductility prior to satisfactory completion
    of the first step of the flattening test requirement that pipe
    shall be rejected subject to retreatment in accordance with
    Specification A 999/A 999M and satisfactory retest. If a
    specimen from any length of pipe fails because of a lack of
    soundness that length shall be rejected, unless subsequent
    retesting indicates that the remaining length is sound.
    S4. Etching Tests
    S4.1 The steel shall be homogeneous as shown by
    etching tests conducted in accordance with the appropriate
    portions of Method E 381. Etching tests shall be made on
    a cross section from one end or both ends of each pipe
    and shall show sound and reasonably uniform material free
    from injurious laminations, cracks, and similar objectionable
    defects. If this supplementary requirement is specified,
    the number of tests per pipe required shall also be specified.
    If a specimen from any length shows objectionable defects,
    the length shall be rejected, subject to removal of the
    defective end and subsequent retests indicating the remainder
    of the length to be sound and reasonably uniform
    material.
    S5. Photomicrographs
    S5.1 Photomicrographs at 100 diameters may be made
    from one end of each piece of pipe furnished in sizes 6 in.
    [152 mm] and larger in the as-furnished condition. Such
    photomicrographs shall be suitably identified as to pipe
    size, wall thickness, piece number, and heat. Such photomicrographs
    are for information only, and shall show the
    actual metal structure of the pipe as finished.
    S6. Ultrasonic Test
    S6.1 Each piece of pipe may be ultrasonically tested
    to determine its soundness throughout the entire length of
    the pipe. Each piece shall be ultrasonically tested in a
    circumferential direction in such a manner that the entire
    piece is scanned by the ultrasonic beam. The calibration
    standard shall be prepared from a section of pipe which
    has two notches, one in the inside surface and one in the
    outside surface. The notches shall be at least 11/2 in. [38 mm]
    long and have a depth of 3% of the wall thickness, or
    0.004 in. [0.1 mm], whichever is the greater. Any pipe
    showing an ultrasonic indication of greater amplitude than
    the amplitude of the indication from the calibration standard
    shall be subject to rejection.
    S7. Hot Ductility Test for Indicating Weldability
    S7.1 A high-temperature ductility test may be made
    upon each heat of material supplied in heavy-wall pipe
    sections. An appropriate specimen shall be heated to an
    initial temperature, cooled 100°F [50°C], then subjected
    to a tension test, and shall show a minimum reduction of
    area of 60%. The initial temperature is that temperature
    50°F [30°C] below the temperature at which material
    exhibits zero ductility. Rejection of material shall not be
    based upon this test.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-376/SA-376M
    663
    S8. Retests
    S8.1 Upon the purchaser’s request, retests shall be
    made from sections of material removed from any part of
    the pipe. Failure to meet the requirements stated in this
    specification shall be cause for rejection.
    S9. Stabilization Heat Treatment
    S9.1 Subsequent to the solution anneal required in 6.4,
    Grades TP321, TP321H, TP347, TP347H, TP348, and
    TP348H shall be given a stabilization heat treatment at a
    temperature lower than that used for the initial solution
    annealing heat treatment. The temperature of stabilization
    heat treatment shall be at a temperature as agreed upon
    between the purchaser and vendor.
    S10. Intergranular Corrosion Test
    S10.1 When specified, material shall pass intergranular
    corrosion tests conducted by the manufacturer in accordance
    with Practices A 262, Practice E.
    NOTE S10.1 — Practice E requires testing on the sensitized condition
    for low carbon or stabilized grades, and on the as-shipped condition for
    other grades.
    S10.2 A stabilization heat treatment in accordance with
    Supplementary Requirement S9 may be necessary and is
    permitted in order to meet this requirement for the grades
    containing titanium or columbium, particularly in their H
    versions.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ð19Þ
    SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES,
    ALLOY STEEL, CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM
    SA-387/SA-387M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A387/A387M-17a.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-387/SA-387M
    665
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-387/SA-387M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    666
    Standard Specification for
    Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-
    Molybdenum
26. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers chromium-molybdenum alloy
    steel plates intended primarily for welded boilers and pressure
    vessels designed for elevated temperature service.
    1.2 Plates are available under this specification in several
    grades having different alloy contents as follows:
    Nominal Nominal
    Chromium Molybdenum
    Grade Content, % Content, %
    2 0.50 0.50
    12 1.00 0.50
    11 1.25 0.50
    22 2.25 1.00
    21 3.00 1.00
    5 5.00 0.50
    9 9.00 1.00
    91 9.00 1.00
    1.3 Each grade except Grade 91 is available in two classes
    of tensile strength levels as defined in the Tensile Requirements
    tables. Grade 91 is available only as Class 2. Grade 91 consists
    of two types, with Type 2 differentiated from Type 1 by
    requiring restricted composition for the enhancement of creep
    resistance.
    NOTE 1—Grade 911, previously covered by this specification, is now
    covered by Specification A1017/A1017M.
    1.4 The maximum thickness of plates is limited only by the
    capacity of the composition to meet the specified mechanical
    property requirements.
    1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system are not exact equivalents. Therefore, each system must
    be used independently of the other. Combining values from the
    two systems may result in nonconformance with this specification.
    1.6 This international standard was developed in accordance
    with internationally recognized principles on standardization
    established in the Decision on Principles for the
    Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations
    issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
    Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
27. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A20/A20M Specification for General Requirements for Steel
    Plates for Pressure Vessels
    A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    A435/A435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
    Examination of Steel Plates
    A577/A577M Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination
    of Steel Plates
    A578/A578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
    Examination of Rolled Steel Plates for Special Applications
    A1017/A1017M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
    Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten
    2.2 AWS Specifications:
    A5.5/A5.5M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal
    Arc Welding
    A5.23/A5.23M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for
    Submerged Arc Welding
    A5.28/A5.28M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Rods for
    Gas Shielded Arc Welding
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-387/SA-387M
    667
    A5.29/A5.29M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored
    Arc Welding
28. General Requirements and Ordering Information
    3.1 Material supplied to this material specification shall
    conform to Specification A20/A20M. These requirements outline
    the testing and retesting methods and procedures, permissible
    variations in dimensions and weight, quality and repair of
    defects, marking, loading, and ordering information.
    3.2 In addition to the basic requirements of this
    specification, certain supplementary requirements are available
    when additional control, testing, or examination is required to
    meet end use requirements. The purchaser is referred to the
    listed supplementary requirements in this specification and to
    the detailed requirements in Specification A20/A20M.
    3.3 If the requirements of this specification are in conflict
    with the requirements of Specification A20/A20M, the requirements
    of this specification shall prevail.
29. Manufacture
    4.1 Steelmaking Practice—The steel shall be killed.
30. Heat Treatment
    5.1 Except for Grade 91, all plates shall be thermally treated
    either by annealing, normalizing and tempering, or, when
    permitted by the purchaser, accelerated cooling from the
    austenitizing temperature by air blasting or liquid quenching,
    followed by tempering. Minimum tempering temperatures
    shall be as follows:
    Grade Temperature, °F [°C]
    2, 12, and 11 1150 [620]
    22, 21, and 9 1250 [675]
    5 1300 [705]
    5.1.1 Grade 91 plates shall be thermally treated, either by
    normalizing and tempering or by accelerated cooling from the
    austenitizing temperature by air blasting or liquid quenching,
    followed by tempering. Grade 91 plates shall be austenitized at
    1900 to 1975°F [1040 to 1080°C] and shall be tempered at
    1350 to 1470°F [730 to 800°C].
    5.2 Grade 5, 9, 21, 22, and 91 plates ordered without the
    heat treatment required by 5.1 shall be furnished in either the
    stress relieved or the annealed condition.
    5.3 For plates ordered without the heat treatment required
    by 5.1, heat treatment of the plates to conform to 5.1 and to
    Table 2 or Table 3, as applicable, shall be the responsibility of
    the purchaser.
31. Chemical Requirements
    6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
    chemical composition shown in Table 1 unless otherwise
    modified in accordance with Supplementary Requirement S17,
    Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel, in Specification A20/A20M
    for grades other than Grade 11.
32. Metallurgical Structure
    7.1 Austenitic Grain Size—Grade 2 material shall have a
    coarse austenitic grain size.
33. Mechanical Requirements
    8.1 Tension Test Requirements:
    8.1.1 The material as represented by the tension test specimens
    shall conform to the applicable requirements of Table 2
    or Table 3, as specified on the order.
    8.1.2 Adjustment of the percentage elongation requirements
    is permitted in accordance with Specification A20/A20M for
    plates up to 3/4 in. [20 mm] inclusive, in thickness when an 8-in.
    [200-mm] gage length is used.
34. Repair Welding
    9.1 Repair welding shall be permitted only with the approval
    of the purchaser. Repair welds shall meet the requirements
    of the construction code specified by the purchaser.
    9.2 All repair welds in Grade 91 shall be made with one of
    the following welding processes and consumables: SMAW,
    A5.5/A5.5M E90XX-B9; SAW, A5.23/A5.23M EB9 + neutral
    flux; GTAW, A5.28/A5.28M ER90S-B9; and FCAW A5.29/
    A5.29M E91T1-B9. In addition, the sum of the Ni+Mn content
    of all welding consumables used to weld repair Grade 91 plate
    shall not exceed 1.0 %.
35. Marking
    10.1 In addition to the marking required in Specification
    A20/A20M, each plate shall be legibly stamped or stenciled,
    depending upon the ordered thickness, with the letter A for
    annealed, N for normalized and tempered, and Q for accelerated
    cooled and tempered, as applicable. Grade 91 plates shall
    be marked with the appropriate type. Plates ordered to, and
    conforming to, Type 2 may be marked Type 1 as well.
36. Keywords
    11.1 alloy steel; alloy steel plate; creep resistance; elevated
    temperature; pressure containing parts; pressure vessel steels;
    steel plates; steel plates for pressure vessels
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-387/SA-387M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    668
    TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
    NOTE 1—Where “. . .” appears, there is no requirement.
    Element
    Composition, %
    Grade and UNS Number
    Grade 2
    S50460
    Grade 12
    K11757
    Grade 11
    K11789
    Grade 22
    K21590
    Grade 21
    K31545
    Grade 5
    S50200
    Grade 9
    K90941
    Grade 91
    Type 1
    K90901
    Grade 91
    Type 2
    K90901
    Carbon:
    Heat analysis 0.05–0.21 0.05–0.17 0.05–0.17 0.05–0.15A 0.05–0.15A 0.15 max 0.15 max 0.08–0.12 0.08–0.12
    Product analysis 0.04–0.21 0.04–0.17 0.04–0.17 0.04–0.15A 0.04–0.15A 0.15 max 0.15 max 0.06–0.15 0.06–0.15
    Manganese:
    Heat analysis 0.55–0.80 0.40–0.65 0.40–0.65 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.60 0.30–0.50
    Product analysis 0.50–0.88 0.35–0.73 0.35–0.73 0.25–0.66 0.25–0.66 0.25–0.66 0.25–0.66 0.25–0.66 0.30–0.50
    Phosphorus, max:
    Heat analysis 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.020 0.020
    Product analysis 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.020
    Sulfur, max:
    Heat analysis 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.010 0.005
    Product analysis 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.012 0.005
    Silicon:
    Heat analysis 0.15–0.40 0.15–0.40 0.50–0.80 0.50 max 0.50 max 0.50 max 1.00 max 0.20–0.50 0.20–0.40
    Product analysis 0.13–0.45 0.13–0.45 0.44–0.86 0.50 max 0.50 max 0.55 max 1.05 max 0.18–0.56 0.20–0.40
    Chromium:
    Heat analysis 0.50–0.80 0.80–1.15 1.00–1.50 2.00–2.50 2.75–3.25 4.00–6.00 8.00–10.00 8.00–9.50 8.0–9.50
    Product analysis 0.46–0.85 0.74–1.21 0.94–1.56 1.88–2.62 2.63–3.37 3.90–6.10 7.90–10.10 7.90–9.60 8.0–9.50
    Molybdenum:
    Heat analysis 0.45–0.60 0.45–0.60 0.45–0.65 0.90–1.10 0.90–1.10 0.45–0.65 0.90–1.10 0.85–1.05 0.85–1.05
    Product analysis 0.40–0.65 0.40–0.65 0.40–0.70 0.85–1.15 0.85–1.15 0.40–0.70 0.85–1.15 0.80–1.10 0.80–1.05
    Nickel, max:
    Heat analysis … … … … … … … 0.40 0.20
    Product analysis … … … … … … … 0.43 0.20
    Vanadium:
    Heat analysis … … … … … … 0.04 max 0.18–0.25 0.18–0.25
    Product analysis … … … … … … 0.05 max 0.16–0.27 0.16–0.27
    Columbium (niobium):B
    Heat analysis … … … … … … … 0.06–0.10 0.06–0.10
    Product analysis … … … … … … … 0.05–0.11 0.05–0.11
    Boron, maxC … … … … … … … … 0.001
    Nitrogen:
    Heat analysis … … … … … … … 0.030–0.070 0.035–0.070
    Product analysis … … … … … … … 0.025–0.080 0.035–0.070
    Nitrogen/aluminum … … … … … … … … $4.0
    Aluminum, maxC … … … … … … … 0.02 0.020
    Titanium, maxC … … … … … … … 0.01 0.01
    Zirconium, maxC … … … … … … … 0.01 0.01
    Tungsten, maxC … … … … … … … … 0.05
    Copper, maxC … … … … … … … … 0.10
    Antimony, maxC … … … … … … … … 0.003
    Arsenic, maxC … … … … … … … … 0.010
    Tin, maxC … … … … … … … … 0.010
    A The carbon content for plates over 5 in. [125 mm] in thickness is 0.17 max on product analysis.
    B Columbium and niobium are interchangeable names for the same element and both names are acceptable for use in A01 specifications.
    C Applies to both heat and product analysis.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-387/SA-387M
    669
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    Supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified in the order. A list of standardized
    supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser is included in Specification
    A20/A20M. Several of those considered suitable for use with this specification are listed below by
    title. Other tests may be performed by agreement between the supplier and the purchaser.
    S1. Vacuum Treatment,
    S2. Product Analysis,
    S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of Mechanical
    Test Coupons,
    S4.1 Additional Tension Test,
    S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test,
    S6. Drop Weight Test (for Material 0.625 in. [16 mm] and
    over in Thickness),
    S7. High-Temperature Tension Test,
    S8. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A435/A435M,
    S9. Magnetic Particle Examination,
    S11. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A577/A577M,
    S12. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with Specification
    A578/A578M, and
    S17. Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel.
    TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements for Class 1 Plates
    Grades 2 and 12 Grade 11 Grades 22, 21, 5, 9
    Tensile strength, ksi [MPa] 55 to 80 [380 to 550] 60 to 85 [415 to 585] 60 to 85 [415 to 585]
    Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa] 33 [230] 35 [240] 30 [205]
    Elongation in 8 in. [200 mm], min, %A 18 19 …
    Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min, %A 22 22 18
    Reduction of area, min, % … … 45B
    40C
    A See Specification A20/A20M, elongation adjustments.
    B Measured on round test specimens.
    C Measured on flat specimen.
    TABLE 3 Tensile Requirements for Class 2 PlatesA
    Grade 2 Grade 11 Grade 12 Grades 22, 21, 5, 9 Grade 91
    Tensile strength, ksi [MPa] 70 to 90 75 to 100 65 to 85 75 to 100 85 to 110
    [485 to 620] [515 to 690] [450 to 585] [515 to 690] [585 to 760]
    Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa]/(0.2 % offset) 45 [310] 45 [310] 40 [275] 45 [310] 60 [415]
    Elongation in 8 in. [200 mm], min, %B 18 18 19 … …
    Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min, %B 22 22 22 18 18
    Reduction of area, min, % … … … 45C …
    40D
    A Not applicable to annealed material.
    B See Specification A20/A20M, elongation adjustments.
    C Measured on round test specimens.
    D Measured on flat specimen.
    FIG. S1.1 Transition Temperature Curves Before and After Step
    Cool Heat Treatment
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-387/SA-387M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    670
    ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    In addition, the following supplementary requirements are suitable for this application. S62 and S63
    are applicable for Grades 22 and 21 only.
    S53. Alternative Location for Mechanical Testing
    When specified by the purchaser, the axis of the tensile and
    impact test specimens shall come from the mid-thickness of
    each plate tested, in lieu of midway between the center
    thickness and the top or bottom surface of the plate.
    S60. Restricted Carbon
    S60.1 The maximum carbon content of Grade 5 shall be
    0.10 %.
    S62. Temper Embrittlement Factor
    S62.1 The composition of the steel, based on heat analysis,
    shall be restricted in accordance with the following equations:
    J 5 ~Si1Mn! 3~P1Sn! 3104 # 150 ~Si, Mn, P and Sn in wt%!
    Cu# 0.20%
    Ni# 0.30%
    S62.1.1 Lower values of J, Cu, and Ni can be specified by
    agreement between purchaser and the supplier.
    S62.1.2 When so specified by the purchaser, the maximum
    value of J shall not exceed 100.
    S62.1.3 The values of J shall be reported.
    S62.1.4 If the plates are repaired by welding, the composition
    of the weld deposit shall be restricted in accordance with
    the following equations:
    X 5 ~10P15Sb14Sn1As!/100# 15 ~P, Sb, Sn and As in ppm!
    Cu# 0.20%
    Ni# 0.30%
    S62.1.5 The values of X shall be reported.
    S63. Impact Properties After Step Cooling
    S63.1 The Charpy V-notch impact properties shall be determined
    as follows:
    S63.1.1 A sufficient amount of Charpy V-notch test specimens
    shall be taken from the same location from a plate from
    each heat of steel to construct two transition temperature
    curves.
    S63.1.2 The test specimens for one transition temperature
    curve shall be given the minimum post weld heat treatment
    (PWHT) cycle specified by the purchaser.
    S63.2 The test specimens for the other transition temperature
    curve shall be given the PWHT cycle specified in S63.1.2
    plus the following step cooling heat treatment:
    Hold at 1100°F (593°C) for 1 h, then cool at 10°F (5.6°C)/h
    to 1000°F (538°C).
    Hold at 1000°F (538°C) for 15 h, then cool at 10°F (5.6°C)/h
    to 975°F (524°C).
    Hold at 975°F (524°C) for 24 h, then cool at 10°F (5.6°C)/h
    to 925°F (496°C).
    Hold at 925°F (496°C) for 60 h, then cool at 5°F (2.8°C)/h
    to 875°F (468°C).
    Hold at 875°F (468°C) for 100 h, then cool at 50°F
    (27.8°C)/h to 600°F (315°C).
    Cool in still air.
    S63.3 Test the Charpy V-notch test specimens in accordance
    with Test Methods and Definitions A370 to determine the 40
    ft-lbs (55 J) transition temperature from each transition temperature
    curve using a set of three test specimens at each test
    temperature. The test temperatures shall include tests on the
    upper and lower shelves and a minimum of four intermediate
    temperatures.
    S63.4 The following requirements shall be met.
    vTr4012.5?vTr40# 50°F
    vTr5512.5?vTr55# 10°C
    where:
    vTr40 (vTr55) = the 40 ft-lbs (55 J) transition temperature
    of the material subjected to the
    minimum PWHT specified by the purchaser.
    ?vTr40 (?vTr55) = the shift of the 40 ft-lbs (55 J) transition
    temperature the of the step cooled material.
    (The 40 ft-lbs (55 J) transition
    temperature the of the step cooled material
    minus that of the material subjected
    to the minimum PWHT only).
    S63.5 The 40 ft-lbs (55 J) transition temperatures for the
    two material conditions shall be reported.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR FERRITIC DUCTILE IRON
    PRESSURE-RETAINING CASTINGS FOR USE AT
    ELEVATED TEMPERATURES
    SA-395/SA-395M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A395/A395M-99(R14).)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-395/SA-395M
    671
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-395/SA-395M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    672
    SPECIFICATION FOR FERRITIC DUCTILE IRON
    PRESSURE-RETAINING CASTINGS FOR USE AT
    ELEVATED TEMPERATURES
    SA-395/SA-395M
    [Identical with ASTM Specification A 395/A 395M-99(R14).]
37. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers ductile iron castings for
    pressure-retaining parts for use at elevated temperatures.
    Castings of all grades are suitable for use up to 450°F. For
    temperatures above 450°F and up to 650°F, only Grade
    60-40-18 castings are suitable (Note 1).
    1.2 Valves, flanges, pipe fittings, pumps, and other
    piping components are generally manufactured in advance
    and supplied from stock by the manufacturer, jobber, or
    dealer.
    1.3 For supplemental casting requirements, Specification
    A 834 may be utilized.
    1.4 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
    units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
    text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
    in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
    system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
    values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
    to the specification.
    NOTE 1 — For service other than as specified in this section, reference
    should be made to Specification A 536 for Ductile Iron Castings.
38. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A 247 Test Method for Evaluating the Microstructure of
    Graphite in Iron Castings
    A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
    of Steel Products
    A 536 Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
    A 732/A 732M Specification for Castings, Investment,
    Carbon and Low Alloy Steel for General Application,
    and Cobalt Alloy for High Strength at Elevated Temperatures
    A 834 Specification for Common Requirements for Iron
    Castings for General Industrial Use
    E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
    E 10 Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials
    E 186 Reference Radiographs for Heavy-Walled (2 to
    41/2 in. [51 to 114 mm]) Steel Castings
    E 280 Reference Radiographs for Heavy-Walled (41/2 to
    12 in. [114 to 305 mm]) Steel Castings
    E 446 Reference Radiographs for Steel Castings up to 2 in.
    [51 mm] in Thickness
    E 689 Reference Radiographs for Ductile Iron Castings
    E 1806 Practice for Sampling Steel and Iron for Determination
    of Chemical Composition
    F 1476 Specification for Performance of Gasketed
    Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications
    F 1548 Specification for the Performance of Fittings for
    Use with Gasketed Mechanical Couplings used in Piping
    Applications
    2.2 Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the
    Valve and Fittings Industry Standard:
    SP 25 Standard Marking Systems for Valves, Flanges, Pipe
    Fittings, and Unions
39. Classification
    3.1 Castings ordered to this specification are classified
    by grades based on mechanical property requirements, as
    listed in Table 1. See note following Table 1.
40. Ordering Information
    4.1 Orders for material under this specification shall
    include the following applicable information:
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-395/SA-395M
    673
    4.1.1 Drawing, catalog number, or part identifications,
    4.1.1.1 For grade 65-45-15, drawing indicating
    critical area(s) of casting (see 7.2.2 and 7.3.2).
    4.1.2 Quantity (weight or number of pieces),
    4.1.3 ASTM designation and year of issue,
    4.1.4 Grade (See Table 1), if a Grade is not specified,
    the manufacturer shall supply grade 60-40-18.
    4.1.5 Heat-treating requirements (see 5.2.1),
    4.1.6 Pressure test requirements (see 7.4.3),
    4.1.7 Test samples from castings (see 11.1.1 and
    12.1.1),
    4.1.8 Test coupons size (see 11.2),
    4.1.9 Metallographic option (see 12.1.1),
    4.1.10 Place of inspection (see 16.1),
    4.1.11 Certification requirements (see 17.1),
    4.1.12 Identification marking (see 18.2), and
    4.1.13 Supplemental Requirements (see 1.4, 7.4.2,
    S1 and S2).
41. Materials and Manufacture
    5.1 The melting method and the nodularizing practice
    shall be optional with the foundry.
    5.2 Except as provided in 5.2.1, all castings Grade
    60-40-18 shall be given a ferritizing heat treatment that
    produces essentially a ferritic structure that contains no
    massive carbides.
    5.2.1 When specified in the purchase order, Grade
    60-40-18 castings may be provided in an as-cast condition
    provided they comply with the requirements of 7.1 and
    7.2.1.
    5.2.2 Castings supplied in accordance with 5.2.1 may
    be stress relieved by agreement between the manufacturer
    and purchaser.
    5.3 Castings Grade 65-45-15 may be provided in ascast
    condition or heat treated, provided they comply with
    the requirements of 7.1, 7.2.2, and 7.3.2.
42. Chemical Requirements
    6.1 The casting shall conform to the following requirements
    for chemical composition (Note 2):
    Total carbon, min, % 3.00
    Silicon, max, % 2.50
    Phosphorus, max, % 0.08
    6.1.1 The chemical analysis for total carbon shall be
    made on chilled cast pencil type specimens or from thin
    wafers approximately 1/32 in. [0.8 mm] thick cut from test
    coupons. Drillings are not reliable because of the probable
    loss of graphite.
    6.1.2 For each reduction of 0.01% below the maximum
    specified phosphorus content, an increase of 0.08%
    silicon above the specified maximum will be permitted up
    to a maximum of 2.75%.
    NOTE 2 —Silicon contents above 2.75%, or phosphorus contents above
    0.08 % have a tendency to lower the impact resistance of the material.
    If the carbon content is below 3.00%, excess cementite may form during
    cooling and if this is not removed during heat treatment, the impact
    resistance of the material may be lowered.
43. Requirements
    7.1 Tensile Properties:
    7.1.1 The ductile iron as represented by the test
    specimens shall conform to the mechanical property
    requirements in Table 1.
    7.2 Hardness:
    7.2.1 For Grade 60-40-18, the hardness of the castings
    and test specimens shall be within the limits in Table 1.
    7.2.2 For Grade 65-45-15, the hardness of test specimen
    and the critical area(s) of the casting, as identified on
    the casting drawing, shall be within the limits in Table 1. If
    the grade 65-45-15 casting drawing does not have critical
    area(s) of the casting identified, all areas of the casting
    shall be within the hardness limits in Table 1.
    7.3 Microstructure:
    7.3.1 For Grade 60-40-18, the microstructure of the
    separately cast test coupon or the casting shall be essentially
    ferritic and contain no massive carbides, and have a
    minimum of 90% Type I and Type II Graphite as in Fig. 1
    or Plate I of Test Method A 247.
    7.3.2 For Grade 65-45-15, the microstructure of the
    critical areas of the casting, as identified on the casting
    drawing, shall be 45% pearlitic, maximum, contain no
    massive carbides, and have a minimum 90% Type I and
    Type II Graphite as in Fig. 1 or Plate I of Test Method
    A 247.
    7.4 Pressure Test Requirements:
    7.4.1 Each pressure retaining Grade 60-40-18 casting
    shall be tested after machining to the test pressure specified
    by the applicable standard of ANSI, ASME Boiler and
    Pressure Vessel Code, or other pertinent code, and shall
    show no leaks.
    7.4.2 Castings Grade 65-45-15 manufactured under
    this specification shall be capable of passing hydrostatic
    test(s) compatible with the rating of the finished cast component.
    Such tests shall be conducted by the casting manufacturer
    only when Supplementary Requirement S2 is
    specified.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-395/SA-395M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    674
    7.4.3 Castings Grade 60-40-18, ordered under this
    specification not covered by ANSI standards and ASME
    Pressure Vessel Code, and castings for special service
    applications, shall be tested to such pressures as may be
    agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser.
    7.4.4 For castings Grade 60-40-18, it is realized that
    the foundry may be unable to perform the hydrostatic test
    prior to shipment, or that the purchaser may wish to defer
    testing until additional work or machining has been performed
    on the casting. Castings ordered in the rough state
    for final machining by the purchaser may be tested hydrostatically
    prior to shipment by the manufacturer at pressures
    to be agreed upon with the purchaser. However, the foundry
    is responsible for the satisfactory performance of the castings
    under the final hydrostatic test.
44. Workmanship and Finish
    8.1 The surface of the casting shall be examined visually
    and shall be free from adhering sand, scale, cracks,
    and hot tears. Any other surface discontinuities shall meet
    visual acceptance standards specified in the order.
45. Repair
    9.1 Castings for valves, flanges, pipe fittings, pumps,
    and other piping components ordered under applicable
    ANSI standards shall not be repaired by plugging, welding,
    brazing, or impregnation.
    9.2 Castings Grade 60-40-18 not covered in 9.1 which
    leak on hydrostatic tests may be repaired by plugging,
    provided the following requirements are met:
    9.2.1 No welding or brazing is permitted.
    9.2.2 The diameter of the plug shall not exceed the
    diameter of a standard 2 in. [ISO R2] pipe plug.
    9.2.3 The plugs, where practical, shall conform in
    all dimensions to the standard ISO 3/8 plugs. In addition,
    they shall have full thread engagement corresponding to
    the thickness in the repaired section. Where a tapered plug
    is impractical because of the excess wall thickness in terms
    of plug diameter and coincident thread engagement, other
    types of plugs may be used provided both full engagement
    and effective sealing against pressure are obtained. Where
    possible, the ends of the plug should be ground smooth after
    installation to conform to the inside and outside contours of
    the wall of the pressure vessel or pressure part.
    9.2.4 The material from which the plug is manufactured
    shall conform in all respects to the materials specifications
    that apply to the pressure vessel or pressure part.
    9.2.5 The area adjacent to the drilled hole shall be
    examined by radiography, and shall meet the Level 3
    acceptance requirements of Reference Radiographs E 689
    and supporting Reference Radiographs E 446, E 186, or
    E 280 as applicable and defined in accordance with Reference
    Radiographs E 689.
    9.2.6 The thickness of any repaired section in relation
    to the size of the plug used shall not be less than that given
    in Table 2.
    9.2.7 The minimum radius of repaired sections of
    cylinders or cones in relation to the size of plug used shall
    not be less than that given in Table 3.
    9.2.8 A repaired area may consist of a maximum of
    three plugs with a spacing such that the ligaments between
    adjacent plugs shall not be less than listed in Table 4. Other
    defective areas may also be repaired by plugging provided
    the minimum ligament between plugs in adjacent areas is
    not less than twice the distance from the nearest plug, the
    values for which are listed in Table 4.
    9.3 Surface imperfections in castings Grade 60-40-18
    other than valves, flanges, pipe fittings, pumps, and other
    piping components may be repaired by plugging provided
    the depth of the plug is not greater than 20% of the thickness
    of the casting section and the diameter of the plug is not
    greater than its length. Repair of surface defects may not
    be done on pressure-containing portions of castings. The
    plug need not be threaded. The conditions of 9.2.1 and
    9.2.4 shall also be satisfied.
46. Sampling
    10.1 A lot shall consist of one of the following:
    10.1.1 All the metal from a single heating in a batchtype
    melting furnace.
    10.1.2 All the metal poured from two or more batchtype
    melting furnaces into a single ladle or a single casting.
    10.1.3 All the metal poured from a continuous melting
    furnace for a given period of time between changes in
    charge, processing conditions, or aim-for chemistry, or 8 h,
    whichever is the shorter period.
47. Test Coupon
    11.1 The separately cast test coupons poured from the
    same lot as the castings they represent from which the
    tension test specimen is machined shall be cast to the size
    and shape shown in Fig. 2, Fig. 3, or Fig. 4. Cast coupons
    shall be identified with the castings they represent. Sectioning
    procedure for removing test specimens from
    Y-blocks is shown in Fig. 5.
    11.1.1 Test samples may be removed from castings
    at locations designated on a drawing or as agreed to by
    manufacturer and purchaser.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-395/SA-395M
    675
    11.1.2 Test bars removed from castings shall conform
    to Fig. 6. The testing diameter shall be 1/2 in. [12.5 mm]
    if possible. Smaller diameters shall be utilized if necessary.
    11.2 The test coupon size shall be as mutually agreed
    upon between the manufacturer and purchaser. In the
    absence of agreement, it shall be the option of the manufacturer.
    11.3 The test coupons shall be cast in molds made of
    suitable core sand having a minimum wall thickness of
    11/2 in. [38 mm] for the 1/2 in. [12.5 mm], 1 in. [25 mm]
    sizes, and 3 in. [75 mm] for the 3 in. [75 mm] size. The
    coupons shall be left in the mold until they have changed
    to a black color (approximately 900°F [480°C] or less).
    The keel block as shown in Fig. 2 or the modified keel
    block produced from the mold shown in Fig. 4 may be
    substituted for the 1 in. [25 mm] block shown in Fig. 3.
    11.4 When investment castings are made to this specification,
    the manufacturer may use test specimens cast to
    size incorporated in the mold with the castings or separately
    cast to size using the same type of mold and the same
    thermal conditions that are used to produce the castings.
    These test specimens shall be made to the dimensions
    shown in Fig. 1 of Specification A 732/A 732M or Fig. 5
    and Fig. 6 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
    11.5 The manufacturer shall cast a sufficient number
    of test coupons to provide for each ferritizing anneal. The
    test coupons shall be heat treated with the castings they
    represent. Sectioning of the test coupons prior to heat treating
    is not permitted.
    11.6 The metallographic examination shall be made on
    a test lug from the test coupon shown in Fig. 7 or from a
    casting; or from a representative test coupon poured with
    the casting(s). The test coupon shall represent the metal
    treated with the nodularizing agent.
48. Number of Tests and Retests
    12.1 One tension test shall be made from sections cut
    from the test coupons (Fig. 5) required by Section 11.
    12.1.1 Unless otherwise stated in the contract or
    order for castings, a metallographic examination may be
    substituted for the tension test when separately cast test
    coupons are used. When the microstructure option is used,
    a minimum of one tension test is required from each day’s
    melt and for each heat treatment (see 12.2).
    12.2 If any tension test specimen shows obvious
    defects, another from the same coupon, or from another
    coupon/or representing the same metal and the same anneal
    charge, may be tested. If an apparently sound test specimen
    fails to conform to this specification, castings may be reannealed,
    if required, and two retests made. If either retest
    fails to conform to this specification, the castings they
    represent shall be rejected.
49. Tension Test Specimen Preparation
    13.1 The standard machined 1/2 in. [12.5 mm] round
    tension test specimen with 2 in. [50 mm] gage length as
    shown in Fig. 6 shall be used except where the 1/2 in.
    [12.5 mm] Y-block test coupon is required. In this case,
    either of the small size specimens, 0.375 or 0.250 in.
    [9 or 6.5 mm] round as shown in Fig. 6, shall be used.
50. Test Methods
    14.1 Chemical analysis shall be made in accordance
    with Test Method E 1806.
    14.2 The yield strength shall be determined in accordance
    with Test Methods E 8 using one of the following
    methods:
    14.2.1 The 0.2% off-set method, or
    14.2.2 Extension under load method where the yield
    strength may be determined as the stress producing an
    elongation under load of 0.375%; that is, 0.0075 in.
    [0.19 mm] in a gage length of 2 in. [50 mm].
    14.3 The hardness of the ductile iron as represented
    by the test specimens and castings shall be determined in
    accordance with Test Method E 10.
    14.4 The percentage of each graphite type shall be
    determined by manual counting, semi-automatic, or automatic
    image analysis methods. The sum of all graphite
    types shall total to 100%.
51. Records
    15.1 Records of the chemical composition, mechanical
    properties, and metallographic examination, when applicable,
    shall be systematically made and maintained.
52. Inspection
    16.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
    order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for carrying
    out all the tests and inspection required by this
    specification.
    16.2 The inspector representing the purchaser shall
    have entry at all time, while work on the contract of the
    purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s
    works which concern the manufacturer of the material
    ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-395/SA-395M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    676
    reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being
    furnished in accordance with these specifications. Unless
    otherwise specified, all tests and inspection shall be made
    at the place of manufacture or by an approved independent
    laboratory prior to shipment, and shall be so conducted as
    not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the
    works.
53. Certification
    17.1 When agreed upon in writing by the purchaser
    and the supplier, a certification shall be made on the basis
    of acceptance of the material. This shall consist of a copy
    of the manufacturer’s test report or a statement by the
    supplier accompanied by a copy of the test results, that
    the material has been sampled, tested, and inspected in
    accordance with the provisions of this specification. Each
    certification so furnished shall be signed by an authorized
    agent of the supplier or manufacturer.
54. Product Marking
    18.1 Castings for valves, flanges, pipe fittings, and
    unions shall be marked for material identification in accordance
    with the Standard Marking System for Valves,
    Flanges, Pipe Fittings, and Unions, SP-25. Castings for
    gasketed mechanical couplings and fittings may be marked
    in accordance with Specification F 1476 or F 1548 respectively.
    18.2 Castings, other than valves, flanges, pipe fittings,
    and unions, shall be identified subject to agreement by the
    manufacturer and the purchaser.
    18.3 Marking shall be in such a position as not to injure
    the usefulness of the castings.
55. Keywords
    19.1 casting; ductile iron; mechanical properties; pressure-
    retaining; pressure test; tensile strength; tension testing;
    yield strength
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-395/SA-395M
    677
    FIG. 1 SUGGESTED CLASSIFICATION OF GRAPHITE FORM IN DUCTILE CAST IRON
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-395/SA-395M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    678
    FIG. 2 KEEL BLOCK FOR TEST COUPONS
    [25 mm]
    1 in.
    [25 mm]
    [12.5 mm]
    [60 mm]
    1 in.
    1/2 in. R
    [40 mm]
    11/2 in. 21/2 in.
    NOTE: The length of the keel block shall be 6 in. [152 mm]
    FIG. 3 Y-BLOCKS FOR TEST COUPONS
    C
    A
    A
    B
    D
    E + 1/8 in.
    [4 mm]
    E
    1/16 in.
    [2 mm]
    “Y” Block Size
    For Castings of For Castings of
    For Castings of Thickness Thickness of
    Thickness Less 1/2 in. [13 mm] 11/2 in.
    Than 1/2 in. to 11/2 in. [38 mm]
    [13 mm] [38 mm] and Over
    Dimensions in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm]
    A 1/2 [13] 1 [25] 3 [75]
    B 15/8 [40] 21/8 [55] 5 [125]
    C 2 [50] 3 [75] 4 [100]
    D 4 [100] 6 [150] 8 [200]
    E 7 [175] 7 [175] 7 [175]
    approx. approx. approx.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-395/SA-395M
    679
    FIG. 4 MOLD FOR MODIFIED KEEL BLOCK
    B
    A
    A
    B
    Section B – B
    Section A – A
    [17.6 mm]
    6 in. [152 mm]
    12 in. [305 mm] 5 in. [305 mm]
    9 in. [229 mm]
    8 in. [203 mm]
    3/16 in.
    [4.8 mm]
    [41 mm]
    15/8 in.
    [86 mm]
    33/8 in.
    [86 mm]
    33/8 in.
    [41 mm]
    15/8 in.
    1/2 in. R
    [13 mm]
    23/4 in. [70 mm]
    [152 mm]
    6 in.
    11/16 in.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-395/SA-395M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    680
    FIG. 5 SECTIONING PROCEDURE FOR Y-BLOCKS
    B
    A
    (a) 1/2 in. [13 mm] Y-block — two blanks for 0.252 in. [6.40 mm]
    diameter tension test specimens.
    (b) 1 in. [25 mm] Y-block — two blanks for 0.50 in. [12.5 mm]
    diameter tension test specimens.
    (c) 3 in. [75 mm] Y-block — two blanks for 0.50 in. [12.5 mm]
    diameter tension test specimens.
    B
    A
    B
    A
    D
    C
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-395/SA-395M
    681
    FIG. 6 STANDARD 1/2 IN. [12.5 MM] ROUND TENSION TEST SPECIMEN WITH 2 IN. [50.0 MM] GAGE LENGTH
    AND EXAMPLES OF SMALL SIZE SPECIMENS PROPORTIONAL TO THE STANDARD SPECIMEN
    A
    G R
    D
    Standard Specimen, in. [mm] Small Size Specimens Proportionate to Standard, in. [mm]
    Dimensions 1/2 [12.5] Round 0.350 [9] Round 0.250 [6.5] Round
    G—Gage length 2.000 ± 0.005 [50 ± 0.13] 1.4 ± 0.005 [35 ± 0.13] 1.0 ± 0.005 [25 ± 0.13]
    D—Diameter (Note 1) 0.500 ± 0.010 [12.5 ± 0.25] 0.350 ± 0.007 [9 ± 0.18] 0.250 ± 0.005 [6.5 ± 0.13]
    R—Radius of fillet 3/8 [9.5], min 3/8 [9.5], min 1/4 [6.5], min
    A—Length of reduced section (Note 2) 21/4 [58], min 13/4 [45], min 11/4 [32], min
    NOTES:
    (1) The reduced section may have a gradual taper from the ends toward the center, with the ends not more than 0.005 in. [0.13 mm] larger in
    diameter than the center on the standard specimen, and not more than 0.003 in. [0.076 mm] larger in diameter than the center on the small
    size specimens.
    (2) If desired, on the small size specimens the length of the reduced section may be increased to accommodate an extensometer. However, reference
    marks for measurement of elongation should nevertheless be spaced at the indicated gage length.
    (3) The gage length and fillets shall be as shown, but the ends may be of any form to fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way that
    the load shall be axial. If the ends are to be held in grips it is desirable, to make the length of the grip section great enough to allow the
    specimen to extend into the grips a distance equal to two thirds or more of the length of the grips.
    FIG. 7 TEST COUPONS FOR MICROSCOPICAL EXAMINATION OF DUCTILE IRON
    [22 mm]
    A
    A
    [13 mm]
    1/2 in.
    [95 mm]
    33/4 in.
    53/4 in.
    [57 mm]
    21/4 in.
    [19 mm]
    3/4 in.
    [146 mm]
    13/4 in.
    [44 mm]
    [10 mm] [19 mm]
    [6.4 mm]
    23/4 in.
    [70 mm]
    Section A-A
    17/8 in.
    [48 mm]
    25/8 in.
    [67 mm]
    [22 mm]
    11/2 in.
    [38 mm]
    7/8 in.
    3/8 in. 3/4 in.
    1/4 in.
    7/8 in.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-395/SA-395M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    682
    TABLE 1
    MECHANICAL PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS
    Grade Grade
    Property 60-40-18 65-45-15
    Tensile Strength Minimum, 60 000 [415] 65 000 [450]
    psi [MPa]
    Yield Strength Minimum, 40 000 [275] 45 000 [310]
    psi [MPa]
    Elongation in 2 in. 18 15
    Minimum, %
    Hardness HB, 3000 kgf 143–187 156–201
    Load
    NOTE: If a grade is not specified in the ordering information, grade
    60–40–18 will be supplied.
    TABLE 2
    MINIMUM THICKNESS OF REPAIRED SECTIONS
    Iron Pipe Size Minimum Thickness Repaired
    Plug, in. Section, in. [mm]
    1/8
    11/32 [8]
    1/4
    7/16 [10]
    3/8
    1/2 [13]
    1/2
    21/32 [17]
    3/4
    3/4 [19]
    1 13/16 [21]
    11/4
    7/8 [23]
    11/2
    15/16 [24]
    2 1 [26]
    TABLE 3
    MINIMUM RADIUS OF REPAIRED SECTIONS
    Iron Pipe Size Minimum Radius of Cylinder
    Plug, in. or Cone, in. [mm]
    1/8
    9/16 [15]
    1/4
    11/16 [18]
    3/8 11/16 [28]
    1/2 11/4 [32]
    3/4 2 [52]
    1 21/2 [64]
    11/4 4 [104]
    11/2 51/4 [136]
    2 81/8 [208]
    TABLE 4
    MINIMUM LIGAMENT BETWEEN PLUGSA,B
    Nominal Plug Minimum Ligament Between Plugs, in. [mm]
    Diameter, in. 1/8, 1/4, 3/8
    1/2, 1/4 1, 11/4 11/2, 2
    1/8, 1/4, 3/8 25/8 [67] 41/8 [105] 65/8 [169] 91/2 [242]
    1/2, 3/4 41/8 [105] 41/8 [105] 65/8 [169] 91/2 [242]
    1, 11/4 65/8 [169] 65/8 [169] 65/8 [169] 91/2 [242]
    11/2, 2 91/2 [242] 91/2 [242] 91/2 [242] 91/2 [242]
    A Based on efficiency of 80%.
    B Example: Assume three plugs are required for repair, one 1/8 in.,
    one 3/8 in., and one 11/2 in. The minimum distance permitted is as
    follows:
    Ligament distance between 1/8 and 3/8 in. plugs is 25/8 in. [67 mm]
    Ligament distance between 1/8 and 11/2 in. plugs is 91/2 in.
    [242 mm]
    Ligament distance between 3/8 and 11/2 in. plugs is 91/2 in.
    [242 mm]
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-395/SA-395M
    683
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    The following supplementary requirement shall not apply unless specified in the purchase
    order.
    S1. Casting
    S1.1 For Castings Grade 60-40-18, a microstructure
    test lug is to be cast attached to the casting at the location
    designated on the casting drawing. The microstructure of
    the test lug shall be essentially ferritic and contain no
    massive carbides.
    S2. Pressure Test, Casting Grade 65-45-15
    S2.1 A hydrostatic test at a pressure agreed upon by
    the manufacturer and the purchaser shall be applied by the
    manufacturer.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR WROUGHT AUSTENITIC
    STAINLESS STEEL PIPING FITTINGS
    SA-403/SA-403M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A403/A403M-15 except for the correction of Table 2 Ni minimum for Grade WP
    S38815, the deletion of 5.14 and 5.15, clarified heat treatment requirements in 6.1 and 6.4, and the deletion of requirements
    for Grades 321 and 321H in Table 5.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-403/SA-403M
    685
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-403/SA-403M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    686
    Standard Specification for
    Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings
56. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers wrought stainless steel fittings
    for pressure piping applications.
    1.2 Several grades of austenitic stainless steel alloys are
    included in this specification Grades are designated with a
    prefix, WP or CR, based on the applicable ASME or MSS
    dimensional and rating standards, respectively.
    1.3 For each of the WP stainless grades, several classes of
    fittings are covered, to indicate whether seamless or welded
    construction was utilized. Class designations are also utilized
    to indicate the nondestructive test method and extent of
    nondestructive examination (NDE). Table 1 is a general
    summary of the fitting classes applicable to all WP grades of
    stainless steel covered by this specification. There are no
    classes for the CR grades. Specific requirements are covered
    elsewhere.
    1.4 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound units
    and in SI units. However, unless the order specifies the
    applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the material
    shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
    1.5 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
    shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
    from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the
    standard.
    1.6 This specification does not apply to cast steel fittings.
    Austenitic stainless steel castings are covered in Specifications
    A351/A351M, A743/A743M, and A744/A744M.
57. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A351/A351M Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for
    Pressure-Containing Parts
    A743/A743M Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium,
    Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General
    Application
    A744/A744M Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium-
    Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for Severe Service
    A751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical
    Analysis of Steel Products
    A960/A960M Specification for Common Requirements for
    Wrought Steel Piping Fittings
    E112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
    E165 Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General
    Industry
    2.2 ASME Standards:
    ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt-Welding
    Fittings
    ASME B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and
    Threaded
    2.3 MSS Standards:
    MSS SP-25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings,
    Flanges, and Unions
    MSS SP-43 Standard Practice for Light Weight Stainless
    Steel Butt-Welding Fittings
    MSS SP-79 Socket-Welding Reducer Inserts
    MSS SP-83 Steel Pipe Unions, Socket-Welding and
    Threaded
    MSS SP-95 Swage(d) Nipples and Bull Plugs
    MSS SP-97 Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet
    Fittings—Socket Welding, Threaded and Buttwelding
    Ends
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-403/SA-403M
    687
    2.4 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
    Section VIII Division I
    Section IX
    2.5 AWS Standards:
    A 5.4 Specification for Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and
    Chromium-Nickel Steel Covered Welding Electrodes
    A 5.9 Specification for Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and
    Chromium-Nickel Steel Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes
    A 5.11 Specification for Nickel and Nickel-Alloy Welding
    Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
    A5.14 Specification for Nickel and Nickel-Alloy BareWelding
    Rods and Electrodes
    2.6 ASNT:
    SNT-TC-1A (1984) Recommended Practice for Nondestructive
    Testing Personnel Qualification and Certification
58. Common Requirements and Ordering Information
    3.1 Material furnished to this specification shall conform to
    the requirements of Specification A960/A960M including any
    supplementary requirements that are indicated in the purchase
    order. Failure to comply with the common requirements of
    Specification A960/A960M constitutes nonconformance with
    this specification. In case of conflict between this specification
    and Specification A960/A960M, this specification shall prevail.
    3.2 Specification A960/A960M identifies the ordering information
    that should be complied with when purchasing material
    to this specification.
59. Material
    4.1 The material for fittings shall consist of forgings, bars,
    plates, or seamless or welded tubular products that conform to
    the chemical requirements in Table 2. See Table 3 for a list of
    common names.
    4.2 The steel shall be melted by one of the following
    processes:
    4.2.1 Electric furnace (with separate degassing and refining
    optional),
    4.2.2 Vacuum furnace, or
    4.2.3 One of the former followed by vacuum or electroslagconsumable
    remelting.
    4.3 If secondary melting is employed, the heat shall be
    defined as all ingots remelted from a primary heat.
    4.4 Grain Size—Annealed Alloys UNS N08810 and UNS
    N08811 shall conform to an average grain size of ASTM No.
    5 or coarser.
60. Manufacture
    5.1 Forming—Forging or shaping operations may be performed
    by hammering, pressing, piercing, extruding, upsetting,
    rolling, bending, fusion welding, machining, or by a combination
    of two or more of these operations. The forming procedure
    shall be so applied that it will not produce injurious defects in
    the fittings.
    5.2 All fittings shall be heat treated in accordance with
    Section 6.
    5.3 Grade WP fittings ordered as Class S shall be of
    seamless construction and shall meet all requirements of
    ASME B16.9, ASME B16.11, MSS SP-79, MSS SP-83, MSS
    SP-95, or MSS SP-97.
    5.4 Grade WP fittings ordered as Class W shall meet the
    requirements of ASME B16.9 and:
    5.4.1 Shall have all pipe welds made by mill or the fitting
    manufacturer with the addition of filler metal radiographically
    examined throughout the entire length in accordance with the
    Code requirements stated in 5.5, and,
    5.4.2 Radiographic inspection is not required on single
    longitudinal seam welds made by the starting pipe manufacturer
    if made without the addition of filler metal; and
    5.4.3 Radiographic inspection is not required on longitudinal
    seam fusion welds made by the fitting manufacturer when
    all of the following conditions have been met:
    5.4.3.1 No addition of filler metal,
    5.4.3.2 Only one welding pass per weld seam, and,
    5.4.3.3 Fusion welding from one side only.
    5.4.4 In place of radiographic examination, welds made by
    the fitting manufacturer may be ultrasonically examined in
    accordance with the Code requirements stated in 5.6.
    5.5 Grade WP fittings ordered as Class WX shall meet the
    requirements ofASME B16.9 and shall have all welds, whether
    made by the fitting manufacturer or the starting material
    manufacturer, radiographically examined throughout their entire
    length in accordance with Paragraph UW-51 of Section
    VIII, Division I, of theASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
    5.6 Grade WP fittings ordered as Class WU shall meet the
    requirements ofASME B16.9 and shall have all welds, whether
    made by the fitting manufacturer or the starting material
    manufacturer, ultrasonically examined throughout their entire
    length in accordance with Appendix 12 of Section VIII,
    Division 1 of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
    5.7 The radiography or ultrasonic examination of welds for
    this class of fittings may be done at the option of the
    manufacturer, either prior to or after forming.
    5.8 Personnel performing NDE examinations shall be qualified
    in accordance with SNT-TC-1A.
    5.9 Grade CR fittings shall meet the requirements of MSS
    SP-43 and do not require nondestructive examination.
    TABLE 1 Fitting Classes for WP Grades
    Class Construction Nondestructive Examination
    S Seamless None
    W Welded Radiography or Ultrasonic
    WX Welded Radiography
    WU Welded Ultrasonic
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-403/SA-403M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    688
    TABLE 2 Chemical Requirements
    NOTE 1—Where an ellipsis (…) appears in this table, there is no requirement and the element need neither be analyzed for or reported.
    GradeA Composition, %
    Grade WP Grade CR UNS Designation
    CB MnB PB SB SiB Ni Cr Mo Ti NC Others
    WPXM-19 CRXM-19 S20910 0.06 4.0–6.0 0.045 0.030 1.00 11.5–13.5 20.5–23.5 1.50–3.00 . . . 0.20–
    0.40
    D
    WP20CB CR20CB N08020 0.07 2.00 0.045 0.035 1.00 32.0–38.0 19.0–21.0 2.00–3.00 . . . Cu 3.0-4.0
    Cb 8XC min,
    1.00 max
    WP6XN CR6XN N08367 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 23.5–25.5 20.0–22.0 6.0–7.0 . . . 0.18–0.25 Cu 0.75
    WP700 CR700 N08700 0.04 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 24.0–26.0 19.0–23.0 4.3–5.0 Cu0.50
    Cb 8XC min
    WPNIC CRNIC N08800 0.10 1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 30.0–35.0 19.0–23.0 . . . 0.15–0.60 . . . Al 0.15–0.60
    Cu 0.75
    Fe 39.5 min
    WPNIC10 CRNIC10 N08810 0.05– 0.10 1.50 0.045 0.015 1.00 30.0–35.0 19.0–23.0 . . . 0.15–0.60 . . . Al 0.15–0.60
    Cu 0.75
    Fe 39.5 min
    WPNIC11 CRNIC11 N08811 0.60– 0.10 1.50 0.040 0.015 1.00 30.0–35.0 19.0–23.0 . . . 0.15–0.60 . . . Al 0.15–0.60
    Cu 0.75
    Fe 39.5 min
    WP904L CR904L N08904 0.020 2.00 0.045 0.035 1.00 23.0–28.0 19.0–23.0 4.0–5.0 . . . 0.10 Cu 1.0–2.0
    WP1925 CR1925 N08925 0.020 1.00 0.045 0.030 0.50 24.0–26.0 19.0–21.0 6.0–7.0 0.10–0.20 Cu 0.8-1.5
    WP1925N CR1925N N08926 0.020 2.00 0.030 0.010 0.50 24.0–26.0 19.0–21.0 6.0–7.0 . . . 0.15–0.25 Cu 0.5-1.5
    WP304 CR304 S30400 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 8.0–11.0 18.0–20.0 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    WP304L CR304L S30403 0.030E 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 8.0–12.0 18.0–20.0 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    WP304H CR304H S30409 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 8.0–11.0 18.0–20.0 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    WP304N CR304N S30451 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 8.0–11.0 18.0–20.0 . . . . . . 0.10–
    0.16
    . . .
    WP304LN CR304LN S30453 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 8.0–11.0 18.0–20.0 . . . . . . 0.10–
    0.16
    . . .
    WP309 CR309 S30900 0.20 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 12.0–15.0 22.0–24.0 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    WP310S CR310S S31008 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 19.0–22.0 24.0–26.0 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    WPS31254 CRS31254 S31254 0.020 1.00 0.030 0.010 0.80 17.5–18.5 19.5–20.5 6.0–6.5 . . . 0.18–
    0.25
    Cu 0.50–1.00
    WPS31266 CRS31266 S31266 0.030 2.00–4.00 0.035 0.020 1.00 21.00–24.00 23.00–25.00 5.2–6.2 . . . 0.35–0.60 Cu 1.00–2.50
    W 1.50–2.50
    WP316 CR316 S31600 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 10.0–14.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 . . . . . . . . .
    WP316L CR316L S31603 0.030E 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 10.0–14.0F 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 . . . . . . . . .
    WP316H CR316H S31609 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 10.0–14.0 16.0–18.0 2.00-3.00 . . . . . . . . .
    WP316N CR316N S31651 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 10.0–13.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 . . . 0.10-
    0.16
    . . .
    WP316LN CR316LN S31653 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 10.0–13.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 . . . 0.10–
    0.16
    . . .
    WP317 CR317 S31700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 11.0–15.0 18.0–20.0 3.0–4.0 . . . . . . . . .
    WP317L CR317L S31703 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 11.0–15.0 18.0–20.0 3.0–4.0 . . . . . . . . .
    WPS31725 CRS31725 S31725 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 13.5–17.5 18.0–20.0 4.0–5.0 . . . 0.20 . . .
    WPS31726 CRS31726 S31726 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 13.5–17.5 17.0–20.0 4.0–5.0 . . . 0.10–
    0.20
    . . .
    WPS31727 CRS31727 S31727 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.030 1.00 14.5–16.5 17.5–19.0 3.8–4.5 . . . 0.15–
    0.21
    Cu 2.8–4.0
    WPS31730 CRS31730 S31730 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.010 1.00 15.0–16.5 17.0–19.0 3.0–4.0 . . . 0.045 Cu 4.0–5.0
    WPS32053 CRS32053 S32053 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.010 1.00 24.0–26.0 22.0–24.0 5.0–6.0 . . . 0.17–
    0.22
    . . .
    WP321 CR321 S32100 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–12.0 17.0–19.0 . . . G . . . . . .
    WP321H CR321H S32109 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–12.0 17.0–19.0 . . . H . . . . . .
    WPS33228 CRS33228 S33228 0.04–0.08 1.00 0.020 0.015 0.30 31.0–33.0 26.0–28.0 . . . . . . . . . Ce 0.05–0.10
    Al 0.025
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-403/SA-403M
    689
    TABLE 2 Continued
    GradeA Composition, %
    Grade WP Grade CR UNS Designation
    CB MnB PB SB SiB Ni Cr Mo Ti NC Others
    Cb 0.6–1.0
    WPS34565 CRS34565 S34565 0.030 5.0–7.0 0.030 0.010 1.00 16.0–18.0 23.0–25.0 4.0–5.0 . . . 0.40–
    0.60
    Cb 0.10
    WP347 CR347 S34700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–12.0 17.0–19.0 . . . . . . . . . I
    WP347H CR347H S34709 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–12.0 17.0–19.0 . . . . . . . . . J
    WP347LN CR347LN S34751 0.005–
    0.020
    2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–13.0 17.0–19.0 . . . . . . . . . Cb 0.20–0.50,K N
    0.06–0.10C
    WP348 CR348 S34800 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–12.0 17.0–19.0 . . . . . . . . . Cb+Ta=10×(C)-1.10
    Ta 0.10
    Co 0.20
    WP348H CR348H S34809 0.04–0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 9.0–12.0 17.0–19.0 . . . . . . . . . Cb+Ta=8×(C)-1.10
    Ta 0.10
    Co 0.20
    WPS38815 CRS38815 S38815 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.020 5.5-6.5 15.0-17.0 13.0-15.0 0.75-1.50 . . . . . . Cu 0.75-1.50
    Al 0.30
    A See Section 15 for marking requirements.
    B Maximum, unless otherwise indicated.
    C The method of analysis for nitrogen shall be a matter of agreement between the purchaser and manufacturer.
    D Columbium 0.10–0.30 %; Vanadium, 0.10–0.30 %.
    E For small diameter or thin walls, or both, where many drawing passes are required, a carbon maximum of 0.040 % is necessary in grades TP304L and TP316L. Small outside diameter tubes are defined as those less
    than 0.500 in. [12.7 mm] in outside diameter and light wall tubes as those less than 0.049 in. [1.24 mm] in average wall thickness.
    F On pierced tubing, the nickel may be 11.0–16.0 %.
    G 5X(C+N) min–0.70 max.
    H 4X(C+N) min–0.70 max.
    I The columbium content shall be not less than ten times the carbon content and not more than 1.10 %.
    J The columbium content shall be not less than eight times the carbon content and not more than 1.10 %.
    KThe columbium content shall be not less than 15 times the carbon content.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/02/2019 13:57:10 MDT
    Distributor
    SA-403/SA-403M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    690
    5.10 All fittings shall have the welders, welding operators,
    and welding procedures qualified under the provisions of
    Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
    except that starting pipe welds made without the addition of
    filler metal do not require such qualification.
    5.11 All joints welded with filler metal shall be finished in
    accordance with the requirements of Paragraph UW-35 (a) of
    Section VIII, Division I, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
    Vessel Code.
    5.12 Fittings machined from bar shall be restricted to NPS 4
    or smaller. Elbows, return bends, tees, and header tees shall not
    be machined directly from bar stock.
    5.12.1 All caps machined from bar shall be examined by
    liquid penetrant in accordance with Supplementary Requirement
    S52 in Specification A960/A960M.
    5.13 Weld buildup is permitted to dimensionally correct
    unfilled areas produced during cold forming of stub ends.
    Radiographic examination of the weld buildup shall not be
    required provided that all the following steps are adhered to:
    5.13.1 The weld procedure and welders or welding operators
    meet the requirements of 5.10.
    5.13.2 Annealing is performed after welding and prior to
    machining.
    5.13.3 All weld surfaces are liquid penetrant examined in
    accordance with Appendix 8 of Section VIII, Division 1 of the
    ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
    5.13.4 Repair of areas in the weld is permitted, but 5.13.1,
    5.13.2, and 5.13.3 must be repeated.
    5.14 DELETED
    .
    5.15 DELETED
    5.16 After final heat treatment, all “H-Grade” steel fittings
    shall have a grain size of 7 or coarser in accordance with Test
    Methods E112.
61. Heat Treatment
    6.1 All fittings shall be furnished in the heat-treated condition.
    For H grades, including Grade S33228, separate solution heat
    6.2, shall consist of solution annealing the fittings
    Table 4 until the
    chromium carbides go into solution, and then cooling at a
    sufficient rate to prevent reprecipitation.
    6.2 A solution annealing temperature above 1950 °F [1065
    °C] may impair the resistance to intergranular corrosion after
    subsequent exposure to sensitizing conditions in 321, 321H,
    TABLE 3 Common Names
    Grade WPA Grade CRA UNS Designation TypeB
    WPXM-19 CRXM-19 S20910 XM-19C
    WP20CB CR20CB N08020 . . .
    WP6XN CR6XN N08367 . . .
    WP700 CR700 N08700 . . .
    WPNIC CRNIC N08800 800C
    WPNIC10 CRNIC10 N08810 800HC
    WPNIC11 CRNIC11 N08811 . . .
    WP904L CR904L N08904 904LC
    WP1925 CR1925 N08925 . . .
    WP1925N CR1925N N08926 . . .
    WP304 CR304 S30400 304
    WP304L CR304L S30403 304L
    WP304H CR304H S30409 304H
    WP304N CR304N S30451 304N
    WP304LN CR304LN S30453 304LN
    WP309 CR309 S30900 309
    WP310S CR310S S31008 310S
    WPS31254 CRS31254 S31254 . . .
    WPS31266 CRS31266 S31266 . . .
    WP316 CR316 S31600 316
    WP316L CR316L S31603 316L
    WP316H CR316H S31609 316H
    WP316N CR316N S31651 316N
    WP316LN CR316LN S31653 316LN
    WP317 CR317 S31700 317
    WP317L CR317L S31703 317L
    WPS31725 CRS31725 S31725 317LMC
    WPS31726 CRS31726 S31726 317LMNC
    WPS31727 CRS31727 S31727 . . .
    WPS31730 CRS31730 S31730 . . .
    WPS32053 CRS32053 S32053 . . .
    WP321 CR321 S32100 321
    WP321H CR321H S32109 321H
    WPS33228 CRS33228 S33228 . . .
    WPS34565 CRS34565 S34565 . . .
    WP347 CR347 S34700 347
    WP347H CR347H S34709 347H
    WP347LN CR347LN S34751 347LN
    WP348 CR348 S34800 348
    WP348H CR348H S34809 348H
    WPS38815 CRS38815 S38815 . . .
    A Naming system developed and applied by ASTM International.
    B Unless otherwise indicated, a grade designation originally assigned by the
    American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
    C Common name, not a trademark widely used, not associated with any one
    producer.
    treatments are required for solution annealing; in-process heat
    treatments are not permitted as a substitute for the separate solution
    annealing treatments. The heat-treat procedure, except for those
    grades listed in
    at the temperatures listed for each grade in
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-403/SA-403M
    691
    347, and 347H. When specified by the purchaser a lower
    temperature stabilization or resolution anneal shall be used
    subsequent to the initial high-temperature solution anneal (see
    Supplementary Requirement S2).
    6.3 All welding shall be done prior to heat treatment.
    6.4 Fittings machined directly from solution-annealed forgings
    and bar stock that were solution annealed in accordance
62. Chemical Composition
    7.1 The chemical composition of each cast or heat used
    shall be determined and shall conform to the requirements of
    the chemical composition for the respective grades of materials
    listed in Table 2. The ranges as shown have been expanded to
    include variations of the chemical analysis requirements that
    are listed in the various specifications for starting materials
    TABLE 4 Heat Treatment
    Grade
    WPA
    Grade
    CRA
    UNS Designation Solution Anneal
    Temperature, min °F [°C]B
    Quench Media
    WPXM-19 CRXM-19 S20910 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP20CB CR20CB N08020 1700–1850
    [927–1010]
    water or other rapid cool
    WP6XN CR6XN N08367 2025 [1107] water or other rapid cool
    WP700 CR700 N08700 2025–2100
    [1107–1150]
    water or other rapid cool
    WPNIC CRNIC N08800 1800–1900
    [983–1038]C
    water or other rapid cool
    WPNIC10 CRNIC10 N08810 2100–2150
    [1147–1177]C
    water or other rapid cool
    WPNIC11 CRNIC11 N08811 2100–2150
    [1147–1177]C
    water or other rapid cool
    WP904L CR904L N08904 1985–2100
    [1085–1150]
    water or other rapid cool
    WP1925 CR1925 N08925 1800–1900
    [983–1038]
    water or other rapid cool
    WP1925N CR1925N N08926 2150 [1177] water or other rapid cool
    WP304 CR304 S30400 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP304L CR304L S30403 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP304H CR304H S30409 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP304N CR304N S30451 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP304LN CR304LN S30453 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP309 CR309 S30900 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP310S CR310S S31008 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WPS31254 CR31254 S31254 2100 [1150] water or other rapid cool
    WPS31266 CRS31266 S31266 2100 [1150] water or other rapid cool
    WP316 CR316 S31600 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP316L CR316L S31603 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP316H CR316H S31609 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP316N CR316N S31651 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP316LN CR316LN S31653 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP317 CR317 S31700 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP317L CR317L S31703 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WPS31725 CRS31725 S31725 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WPS31726 CRS31726 S31726 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WPS31727 CRS31727 S31727 1975–2155
    [1080–1180]
    water or other rapid cool
    WPS31730 CRS31730 S31730 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WPS32053 CRS32053 S32053 1975–2155
    [1080–1180]
    water or other rapid cool
    WP321 CR321 S32100 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP321H CR321H S32109 1925 [1050] water or other rapid cool
    WPS33228 CRS33228 S33228 2050–2160
    [1120–1180]
    water or other rapid cool
    WPS34565 CRS34565 S34565 2050–2140
    [1120–1170]
    water or other rapid cool
    WP347 CR347 S34700 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP347H CR347H S34709 1925 [1050] water or other rapid cool
    WP347LN CR347LN S34751 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP348 CR348 S34800 1900 [1040] water or other rapid cool
    WP348H CR348H S34809 1925 [1050] water or other rapid cool
    WPS38815 CRS38815 S38815 1950 [1065] water or other rapid cool
    ANaming system developed and applied by ASTM International.
    BWhere a range of temperature is not listed, the single value shown shall be the minimum required temperature.
    CHeat Treatment is highly dependent on intended service temperature; consult material manufacturer for specific heat treatments for end use temperature.
    with 6.1 need not be resolution annealed.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-403/SA-403M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    692
    (pipe, tube, plate, bar, and forgings) normally used in the
    manufacturing of fittings to this specification. Methods and
    practices relating to chemical analyses required by this specification
    shall be in accordance with Test Methods, Practices,
    and Terminology A751. Product analysis tolerances in accordance
    with Specification A960/A960M are applicable.
    7.2 The steel shall not contain any unspecified elements for
    the ordered grade to the extent that it conforms to the
    requirements of another grade for which that element is a
    specified element having a required minimum content.
    7.3 In fittings of welded construction, the alloy content
    (carbon, chromium, nickel, molybdenum, columbium, and
    tantalum) of the deposited weld metal shall conform to that
    required of the base metal or for equivalent weld metal as given
    in the AWS filler metal specification A 5.4 or A 5.9 (Type 348
    weld metal is listed in AWS A 5.9 but not in AWS A 5.4).
    Exceptions are when welding on Types 304L and 304 base
    metals, the deposited weld metal shall correspond,
    respectively, to AWS E308L(ER308L) and E308 (ER308),
    when welding on Type 321 base metal, the weld metal shall
    correspond to AWS Type E347 (ER347 or ER321); and, when
    welding on S31725, S31726, S31254, S31266, or S33228
    deposited weld metal shall correspond either to the alloy
    content of the base metal or to AWS A5.11 E NiCrMo·3 (UNS
    W86112) (AWS A5.14 Ni Cr Mo·3 (UNS N06625)), and when
    welding on S31730, deposited weld metal and filler metal used
    shall correspond either to the alloy content of the base metal or
    to AWS A5.14 ERNiCr-3 (UNS N06082), or ERNiCrMo-3
    (UNS N06625), or ERNiCrMo-4 (UNS N10276). On S38815
    base metals, the deposited weld metal and filler metal used
    shall be agreed upon between purchaser and manufacturer. In
    fittings of welded construction made from predominantly
    ferrous alloys N08020, N08367, N08700, N08800, N08810,
    N08811, N08904, N08925 & N08926, the alloy content of the
    deposited weld metal shall conform to that required of the base
    metal or for the equivalent weld metal given in the AWS Filler
    Metal Specification A5.11 and A5.14. However, it is possible
    that weld deposit chemistry will not meet the limits of either
    the base metal or the filler metal for some elements. The weld
    deposit chemistry shall meet the lowest minimum and highest
    maximum values for each specification element in either of the
    base metal or filler metal specification. Dilution of the base and
    filler metal must be considered when determining weld deposit
    criteria for over-alloyed filler metals.
    7.3.1 Supplementary Requirement S1 may be specified
    where 16-8-2 filler metal is required for joining thick sections
    of Types 316, 321, or 347 and has adequate corrosion resistance
    for the intended service.
63. Tensile Properties
    8.1 The tensile properties of the fitting material shall conform
    to the requirements of Table 5. The testing and reporting
    shall be performed in accordance with Specification A960/
    A960M.
    8.1.1 Specimens cut either longitudinally or transversely
    shall be acceptable for the tensile test.
    8.1.2 While Table 5 specifies elongation requirements for
    both longitudinal and transverse specimens, it is not the intent
    that both requirements apply simultaneously. Instead, it is
    intended that only the elongation requirement that is appropriate
    for the specimen used be applicable.
    8.2 Records of the tension test made on the starting material
    shall be certification that the material of the fitting meets the
    requirements of this specification provided that heat treatments
    are the same.
    8.3 If the raw material was not tested, or if the heat
    treatment of the raw material was different than the heat
    treatment of the fitting, the fitting manufacturer shall perform
    at least one tension test per heat on material representative of
    the fitting, and in the same condition of heat treatment as the
    fitting it represents. Qualification of welding procedures shall
    be in accordance with 5.8.
    8.4 If a tension test through the weld is desired, Supplementary
    Requirement S51 in Specification A960/A960M should be
    specified.
64. Hydrostatic Tests
    9.1 Hydrostatic testing is not required by this specification.
    9.2 All Grade WP fittings shall be capable of withstanding
    without failure, leakage, or impairment of serviceability, a test
    TABLE 5 Tensile Requirements
    All WP and CR Grades
    Yield Strength, min,
    ksi [MPa]
    Tensile Strength, min,
    ksi [MPa]
    304, 304LN, 304H, 309, 30 [205] 75 [515]
    310S, 316, 316LN, 316H,
    317, 317L,
    347, 347H, 347LN, 348,
    348H
    321, 321H,
    S31266 61 [420] 109 [750]
    S31725
    S31727 36 [245] 80 [550]
    S31730 25 [175] 70 [480]
    S32053 43 [295] 93 [640]
    304L, 316L 25 [170] 70 [485]
    304N, 316N, S31726 35 [240] 80 [550]
    XM-19 55 [380] 100 [690]
    N08020 35 [240] 80 [550]
    N08367 45 [310] 95 [655]
    N08700 35[240] 80[550]
    N08800 25 [205] 65 [520]
    N08810 25 [170] 65 [450]
    N08811 25 [170] 65 [450]
    N08904 31 [220] 71 [490]
    N08925 43[295] 87 [600]
    N08926 43 [295] 94 [650]
    S31254 44 [300] 94 [650] to 119 [820]
    S33228 27 [185] 73 [500]
    S34565 60 [415] 115 [795]
    S38815 37 [255] 78 [540]
    Elongation Requirements
    Longitudinal Transverse
    Standard round specimen, or small
    proportional specimen, or
    strip- type specimen, minimum %
    in 4 DA
    28 20
    A S38815 Elongation in 2 in. — 30 % min.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-403/SA-403M
    693
    pressure equal to that prescribed for the specified matching
    pipe or equivalent material.
    9.3 All Grade CR fittings, except tees covered in 9.3.1, shall
    be capable of withstanding without failure, leakage, or impairment
    of serviceability, a test pressure based on the ratings in
    MSS SP-43.
    9.3.1 Grade CR tees fabricated using intersection welds
    shall be capable of passing a hydrostatic test based on 70 % of
    the ratings in MSS SP-43.
65. Surface Finish, Appearance, and Corrosion
    Protection
    10.1 The requirements of Specification A960/A960M apply
    except as modified as follows:
    10.2 Fittings supplied under this specification shall be
    examined visually. Selected typical surface discontinuities
    shall be explored for depth. The fittings shall be free from
    surface discontinuities that penetrate more than 5 % of the
    specified nominal wall thickness, except as defined in 10.4 and
    10.5, and shall have a workmanlike finish.
    10.3 Surface discontinuities deeper than 5 % of the specified
    nominal wall thickness, except as defined in 10.4 and 10.5,
    shall be removed by the manufacturer by machining or
    grinding to sound metal, and the repaired areas shall be well
    faired. The wall thickness at all points shall be at least 871/2 %
    of the specified nominal wall thickness, and the diameters at all
    points shall be within the specified limits.
    10.4 Surface checks (fish scale) deeper than 1/64 in. [0.4
    mm] shall be removed.
    10.5 Mechanical marks deeper than 1/16 in. [1.6 mm] shall
    be removed.
    10.6 When the removal of a surface discontinuity reduces
    the wall thickness below 871/2 % of the specified nominal wall
    thickness at any point, the fitting shall be subject to rejection or
    to repair as provided in 11.
66. Repair by Welding
    11.1 Repair of unacceptable imperfections in the base metal
    is permissible for fittings made to the dimensional standards
    listed in 1.1 or for other standard fittings made for stock by the
    manufacturer. Prior approval of the purchaser is required to
    repair special fittings made to the purchaser’s requirements.
    Welding of unacceptable imperfections in no case shall be
    permitted when the depth of defect exceeds 331/3 % of the
    nominal wall thickness or the defect area exceeds 10 % of the
    surface area of the fitting.
    11.2 The welding procedure and welders shall be qualified
    in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and
    Pressure Vessel Code.
    11.3 The composition of the weld deposits shall be in
    accordance with 7.3 and in accordance with the procedure
    qualification for the applicable material.
    11.4 Unacceptable imperfections shall be removed by mechanical
    means or by thermal cutting or gouging methods.
    Cavities prepared for welding shall be examine with liquid
    penetrant in accordance with Practice E165. No cracks are
    permitted in the prepared cavities. Personnel performing NDE
    examinations shall be qualified in accordance with SNTTC-
    1A
    11.5 The weld repair shall be permanently identified with
    the welder’s stamp or symbol in accordance with Section VIII
    of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
    11.6 Weld repair area(s) shall be blended uniformly to thoe
    base metal and shall be examined by liquid penetrant in
    accordance with Practice E165. No cracks are permitted in the
    weld or surrounding 1/2 in. [12.7 mm] of base metal. Personnel
    performing NDE examinations shall be qualified in accordance
    with SNT-TC-1A.
    11.7 After weld repair, material shall be heat treated in
    accordance with Section 6.
    11.8 The fittings shall be free of scale and shall be passivated.
67. Dimensions
    12.1 For fittings covered by ASME B16.9, ASME B16.11,
    MSS SP-43, MSS SP-79, MSS SP-83, MSS SP-95, or MSS
    SP-97, the sizes, shapes, and dimensions of the fittings shall be
    as specified in those standards.
    12.1.1 Fittings of size or shape differing from these
    standards, but meeting all other requirements of this
    specification, may be furnished in accordance with Supplementary
    Requirement S58 Specification A960/A960M.
68. Rejection and Rehearing
    13.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
    this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
    to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
    dissatisfaction with the results of the tests, the producer or
    supplier may make claim for rehearing.
    13.2 Fittings that develop defects in shop working or
    application operations may be rejected. Upon rejection, the
    manufacturer shall be notified promptly in writing.
69. Certification
    14.1 Test reports are required for all fittings covered by this
    specification. Each test report shall meet the requirements for
    certification in Specification A960/A960M as well as include
    the following information specific to this specification:
    14.1.1 Chemical analyses results for all starting materials,
    Section 7 (Table 2), reported results shall be to the same
    number of significant figures as the limits specified in Table 2
    for that element,
    14.1.2 Tensile property results of all starting materials,
    Section 8 (Table 5), report the yield strength and the tensile
    strength in ksi [MPa] and elongation in percent,
    14.1.3 For construction with filler metal added, weld metal
    chemical analysis,
    14.1.4 For welded fittings, construction method, weld process
    and procedure specification number,
    14.1.5 Type heat treatment, Section 6 (Table 4),
    14.1.6 Results of all nondestructive examinations, and
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-403/SA-403M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    694
    14.1.7 Any supplementary testing required by the purchase
    order.
70. Product Marking
    15.1 In addition to marking requirements of Specification
    A960/A960M, the following additional marking requirements
    shall apply:
    15.1.1 All fittings shall have the prescribed information
    stamped or otherwise suitably marked on each fitting. See
    Table 6 for marking examples of grades and classes.
    15.1.2 Marking paint or ink shall not contain harmful
    amounts of chlorides, metals, or metallic salt, such as zinc or
    copper, that cause corrosive attack on heating. On wall
    thicknesses thinner than 0.083 in. [2.1 mm], no metal impression
    stamps shall be used. Vibrating pencil marking is acceptable.
    15.1.3 Threaded or socket-welding fittings shall be additionally
    marked with the pressure class. Plugs and bushings
    furnished to ASME B16.11 requirements are not required to be
    marked. The class S marking need not be added to the material
    grade for threaded or socket-welded fittings.
    15.1.4 When agreed upon between the purchaser and
    producer, and specified in the order, the markings shall be
    painted or stenciled on the fitting or stamped on a metal or
    plastic tag which shall be securely attached to the fitting.
    15.1.5 Fittings meeting the chemical and mechanical property
    requirements of Table 2 and Table 5 for more than one
    grade designation may be marked with more than one class or
    grade designation, such as WP304/304H; WP304/304L;
    WP304/304L/304N, WP316/316L, etc.
    15.2 Bar Coding—In addition to the requirements in 15.1,
    bar coding is acceptable as a supplemental identification
    method. The purchaser may specify in the order a specific bar
    coding system to be used. The bar coding system, if applied at
    the discretion of the supplier, should be consistent with one of
    the published industry standards for bar coding. If used on
    small fittings, the bar code may be applied to the box or a
    substantially applied tag.
71. Keywords
    16.1 austenitic stainless steel; corrosive service applications;
    pipe fittings; steel; piping applications; pressure containing
    parts; stainless steel fittings
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    One or more of the supplementary requirements described below or appearing in Specification
    A960/A960M may be included in the order or contract. When so included, a supplementary
    requirement shall have the same force as if it were in the body of the specification. Supplementary
    requirement details not fully described shall be agreed upon between the purchaser and the supplier.
    S1. Special Filler Metal
    S1.1 Filler metal shall be AWS Type E16-8-2 or ER 16-8-2
    (AWS Specifications A 5.4 and A 5.9, respectively). Fittings
    welded with 16-8-2 weld metal shall be marked WP _ HRW or CR _ HRW, as appropriate.
    S2. Stabilization Treatment
    S2.1 Subsequent to the solution anneal required by 6.2,
    Grades 321, 321H, 347, 347H, 348, and 348H shall be given a
    stabilization heat treatment at 1500 to 1600 °F [815 to 870 °C]
    for a minimum of 2h/in. [4.7 min/mm] of thickness and then
    cooling in the furnace or in air. In addition to the marking
    required in Section 15, the grade designation symbol shall be
    followed by the symbol “S2.”
    TABLE 6 Product Marking Examples for Grades and Classes
    Grade and Class Marking Description
    CR304 Single grade: No classes in CR grades
    CR304/304L Multiple grades, meet chemical and
    mechanical properties of each
    WP304-S Single Grade: seamless
    WP304-W Single Grade; welded : RT or UT pipe
    welds with filler metal and all fitting
    manufacturer’s welds
    WP304-WX Single grade: welded: RT all welds with
    or without filler metal
    WP304-WU Single grade; welded: UT all welds with
    or without filler metal
    WP304-304L-S Multiple grades: meet chemical and
    mechanical properties of each:
    seamless
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SPECIFICATION FOR WELDED LARGE DIAMETER
    AUSTENITIC STEEL PIPE FOR CORROSIVE OR
    HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
    SA-409/SA-409M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A409/A409M-15 except for clarified heat treatment requirements for H grade
    stainless steels and S30815 in para. 5.3.1, deletion of 5.3.2.2 and 5.3.2.3 for the non-heat treated pipe provisions, and
    the inclusion of a grain size requirement in para. 5.1.1 for H grade stainless steels and S30815. A requirement for ASME
    Stamping has been added and additional requirements apply as shown in the subtitle of the specification.)
    All products furnished under this SA specification are intended for application under the rules of Section III for Class 3
    Piping or for application under the rules of Section VIII-1. Furnishing of such products is limited to manufacturers who
    hold the appropriate ASME Certification Mark. Weld procedures, welders, and welding machine operators shall be
    qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. The product shall meet all applicable
    requirements of Class 3 piping or Section VIII, if applicable including those requirements pertaining to heat treatment and
    butt welds. Authorized inspection at the point of manufacture and application of
    the appropriate Certification Mark is required.
    The applicable ASME partial data report form, signed by an authorized inspector, and a certified mill test report shall be
    furnished for each lot of pipe. The term “lot” applies to all pipe of the same mill heat of material and wall thickness which is
    heat treated in one furnace charge. For pipe which is not heat treated or which is heat treated in a continuous furnace, a lot
    shall consist of each 200 ft [61 m] or fraction thereof of all pipe of the same mill heat of material and wall thickness,
    subjected to the same heat treatment. For pipe which is heat treated in a batch-type furnace which is automatically
    controlled within a 50°F range and is equipped with recording pyrometer so that the heating records are available, a lot
    may be defined the same as for continuous furnaces. Each length of pipe shall be marked in such a manner as to identify
    each such piece with the “lot” and the representative certified mill test report.
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-409/SA-409M
    695
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-409/SA-409M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    696
    Standard Specification for
    Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive
    or High-Temperature Service
72. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers straight seam or spiral seam
    electric-fusion-welded, light-wall, austenitic chromium-nickel
    alloy steel pipe for corrosive or high-temperature service. The
    sizes covered are NPS 14 to 30 with extra light (Schedule 5S)
    and light (Schedule 10S) wall thicknesses. Table X1.1 shows
    the wall thickness of Schedule 5S and 10S pipe. Pipe having
    other dimensions may be furnished provided such pipe complies
    with all other requirements of this specification.
    1.2 Several grades of alloy steel are covered as indicated in
    Table 1.
    1.3 Optional supplementary requirements are provided.
    These call for additional tests to be made, and when desired
    shall be stated in the order, together with the number of such
    tests required.
    1.4 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
    are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
    SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
    system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
    shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
    from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the
    standard. The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M”
    designation of this specification is specified in the order.
    NOTE 1—The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has
    been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as nominal
    diameter, size, and nominal size.
73. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A262 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular
    Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels
    A480/A480M Specification for General Requirements for
    Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate,
    Sheet, and Strip
    A999/A999M Specification for General Requirements for
    Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe
    E527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys in the
    Unified Numbering System (UNS)
    2.2 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
    Section IX
    2.3 AWS Standards:
    A 5.22 Flux Cored Arc Welding
    A 5.30 Consumable Weld Inserts for Gas Tungsten Arc
    Welding
    A 5.4 Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-
    Nickel Steel Covered Welding Electrodes
    A 5.9 Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-
    Nickel Steel Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes
    A 5.11 Nickel and Nickel-Alloy Covered Welding Electrodes
    A 5.14 Nickel and Nickel-Alloy Bare Welding Rods and
    Electrodes
    2.4 Other Standard:
    SAE J1086 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys
    (UNS)
74. Ordering Information
    3.1 Orders for material to this specification should include
    the following, as required, to describe the desired material
    adequately:
    3.1.1 Quantity (feet, centimetres, or number of lengths),
    3.1.2 Name of material (straight seam or spiral seam
    electric-fusion-welded austenitic steel pipe),
    3.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-409/SA-409M
    697
    3.1.4 Size (outside diameter and schedule number, or wall
    thickness).
    3.1.5 Length (specific or random) (Section 11),
    3.1.6 End finish (Section on Ends of Specification A999/
    A999M),
    3.1.7 Optional requirements (5.2.1 – 5.2.3 removal of weld
    bead; 5.3.2, special heat treatment; 15.2, nondestructive test;
    10.1.1, outside diameter tolerance; 11.2, length circumferentially
    welded; 12.3, repair by welding and heat treatment
    subsequent to repair welding; 12.4, sand blasted or pickled;
    17.1 Certification; Supplementary Requirements S1 to S6).
    3.1.8 Specification designation, and
    3.1.9 Special requirements.
75. General Requirements
    4.1 Material furnished to this specification shall conform to
    the applicable requirements of the current edition of Specification
    A999/A999M, unless otherwise provided herein.
76. Materials and Manufacture
    5.1 If a specific type of melting is required by the purchaser
    it shall be stated on the order.
    5.2 Welding:
    5.2.1 The welds shall be made by the manual or automatic
    electric-welding process. For manual welding, the operator and
    procedure shall be qualified in accordance with the ASME
    Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. Unless otherwise
    specified on the purchase order, the pipe may be welded with
    or without filler metal when the automatic electric-welding
    process is used.
    5.2.2 The weld surface on either side of the weld may be
    flush with the base plate or may have a reasonably uniform
    crown, not to exceed 1/16 in. [2 mm]. Any weld reinforcement
    may be removed at the manufacturer’s option or by agreement
    between the manufacturer and purchaser. The contour of the
    reinforcement should be reasonably smooth and free from
    irregularities. The weld metal shall be fused uniformly into the
    TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
    UNS
    DesignationsA
    Composition, %
    Carbon,
    max
    Manganese,
    max
    Phosphorus,
    max
    Sulfur,
    max
    Silicon
    Nickel Chromium Molybdenum
    Titanium
    Columbium
    Cerium Other Elements
    TP201 S20100 0.15 5.5–7.5 0.060 0.030 1.00 3.5–5.5 16.0–18.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . N 0.25
    TP201LN S20153 0.03 6.4–7.5 0.045 0.015 0.75 4.0–5.0 16.0–17.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . N 0.10–0.25,
    Cu 1.00
    TP304 S30400 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 8.0–11.0 18.0–20.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP304L S30403 0.035 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 8.0–12.0 18.0–20.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP309Cb S30940 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 12.0–16.0 22.0–24.0 . . . . . . . . . Cb 10 × C min,
    1.10 max
    TP309S S30908 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 12.0–15.0 22.0–24.0 . . . . . . . . .
    TP310Cb S31040 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 19.0–22.0 24.0–26.0 . . . . . . . . . Cb 10 × C min,
    1.10 max
    TP310S S31008 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 19.0–22.0 24.0–26.0 . . . . . . . . .
    TP316 S31600 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 10.0–14.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 . . . . . . . . .
    TP316L S31603 0.035 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 10.0–14.0 16.0–18.0 2.00–3.00 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP317 S31700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 11.0–15.0 18.0–20.0 3.0–4.0 . . . . . . . . . …
    . . . S31727 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.030 1.00 max 14.5–16.5 17.5–19.0 3.8–4.5 . . . . . . . . . N 0.15–0.21
    Cu 2.8–4.0
    . . . S32053 0.030 1.00 0.030 0.010 1.00 max 24.0–26.0 22.0–24.0 5.0–6.0 . . . . . . . . . N 0.17–0.22
    TP321 S32100 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 9.00–12.0 17.0–20.0 . . . B . . . . . . . . .
    TP347 S34700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 9.00–12.0 17.0–19.0 . . . . . . C . . . . . .
    TP348 S34800 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 9.00–12.0 17.0–19.0 . . . . . . D . . . . . .
    . . . S31254 0.020 1.00 0.030 0.010 0.80 max 17.5–18.5 19.5–19.5 6.0–6.5 . . . . . . . . . Cu 0.50–1.00
    N 0.18–0.25
    . . . S30815 0.05–0.10 0.80 0.040 0.030 1.40–2.00 10.0–12.0 20.0–22.0 . . . . . . . . . 0.03–0.08 N 0.14–0.20
    . . . S31725 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 13.5–17.5 18.0–20.0 4.0–5.0 . . . . . . . . . N 0.020 max
    . . . S31726 0.030 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 max 14.5–17.5 17.0–20.0 4.0–5.0 . . . . . . . . . N 0.10–0.20
    . . . S34565 0.030 5.0–7.0 0.030 0.010 1.00 max 16.0–18.0 23.0–25.0 4.0–5.0 . . . 0.10
    max
    . . . N 0.40–0.60
    . . . N08367 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 max 23.5–25.5 20.0–22.0 6.0–7.0 . . . . . . . . . Cu 0.75 max
    Ni 0.18–0.25
    . . . S20400 0.030 7.0–9.0 0.45 0.030 1.00 max 1.50–3.00 15.0–17.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . N 0.15–0.30
    . . . S31266 0.030 2.00–4.00 0.035 0.020 1.00 max 21.0–24.0 23.0–25.0 5.2–6.2 . . . . . . . . . Cu 1.00–2.50
    W 1.50–2.50
    N 0.35–0.60
    A New designation established in accordance with ASTM E527 and SAE J1086.
    B The titanium content shall be not less than 5 times the carbon content and not more than 0.70 %.
    C The columbium plus tantalum content shall be not less than 10 times the carbon content and not more than 1.10 %.
    D The columbium plus tantalum content shall be not less than 10 times the carbon content and not more than 1.10 %. The tantalum content shall be 0.10 % maximum,
    Co 0.20 % maximum.
    5.1.1 The grain size for all H grades and S30815 shall
    be No. 7 or coarser, when determined according to ASTM
    E112 Test Methods.
    plate surface. No concavity of contour is permitted unless the
    resulting thickness of weld metal is equal to or greater than the
    minimum thickness of the adjacent base metal.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-409/SA-409M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    698
    5.2.3 Weld defects, as determined by specified inspection
    requirements, shall be repaired by removal to sound metal and
    rewelding.
    5.3 Heat Treatment:
    5.3.1 Except as provided in 5.3.2, all pipe shall be furnished
    in the heat-treated condition. For H grades and S30815,
    shall consist of heating the material to a minimum temperature
    of 1900 °F [1040 °C], except for S31254, S31266, and S30815
    which shall be heat treated to 2100 °F [1150 °C] and 1920 °F
    [1050 °C] respectively, S31727 and S32053 which shall be
    heat treated in the range 1975 to 2155 °F [1080 to 1180 °C],
    S34565 which shall be heat treated in the range 2050 °F
    [1120 °C] to 2140 °F [1170 °C], and N08367, which shall be
    heated to a minimum temperature of 2025 °F [1107 °C], all
    materials to be followed by quenching in water or rapidly
    cooling by other means.
    5.3.2 The purchase order shall specify one of the following
    conditions if the heat-treated condition specified in 5.3.1 is not
    desired by the purchaser:
    5.3.2.1 A final heat-treatment temperature under 1900 °F
    [1040 °C]. Each pipe supplied under this requirement shall be
    stenciled with the final heat-treatment temperature in degrees
    Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius after the suffix “HT.” Controlled
    structural or special service characteristics may be specified as
    a guide for the most suitable heat treatment.
    5.3.2.2 DELETED
    5.3.2.3 DELETED
    5.4 A solution annealing temperature above 1950 °F
    [1065 °C] may impair the resistance to intergranular corrosion
    after subsequent exposure to sensitizing conditions in TP321,
    TP347, and TP348. When specified by the purchaser, a lower
    temperature stabilization or re-solution anneal shall be used
    subsequent to the initial high temperature solution anneal (see
    Supplementary Requirement S5).
77. Chemical Composition
    6.1 The steel shall conform to the chemical composition in
    Table 1.
    6.2 When specified on the purchase order, a product analysis
    shall be supplied from one tube or coil of steel per heat. The
    product analysis tolerance of Specification A480/A480M shall
    apply.
    6.3 Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, the
    chemical composition of the welding filler metal shall conform
    to the requirements of the applicable AWS specification for the
    corresponding grade shown in Table 2. Grades with no filler
    metal classification indicated shall be welded with filler metals
    producing deposited weld metal having a composition in
    accordance with the chemical composition specified in Table 1.
    The method of analysis for nitrogen and cerium shall be a
    matter of agreement between the purchaser and manufacturer.
    The purchaser may choose a higher-alloy filler metal when
    needed for corrosion resistance.
78. Tensile Requirements
    7.1 The tensile properties of the plate or sheet used in
    making the pipe shall conform to the requirements prescribed
    in Table 3. Certified mill test reports shall be submitted to the
    pipe manufacturer.
    7.2 Atransverse tension test taken across the welded joint of
    the finished pipe shall meet the same minimum tensile strength
    requirements as the sheet or plate. The weld section on the
    tension specimen shall be in the same condition as the finished
    pipe (with or without bead as specified).
79. Mechanical Tests Required
    8.1 Tension Test—One transverse tension test of the weld
    shall be made on each lot (Note 2) of finished pipe.
    NOTE 2—The term “lot” applies to each 200 ft [60 m] or less of pipe of
    the same NPS and wall thickness (or schedule number) which is produced
    from the same heat of steel and subjected to the same finishing treatment
    in a continuous furnace. When final heat treatment is in a batch-type
    furnace, the lot shall include only that pipe which is heat treated in the
    same furnace charge. When no heat treatment is performed following final
    forming operations, the lot shall include each 200 ft [60 m] or less of pipe
    of the same NPS and wall thickness (or schedule number) which is
    produced from the same heat of steel.
    8.2 Transverse Guided-Bend Weld Test—One test (two
    specimens) of the weld shall be made on each lot (Note 2) of
    finished pipe.
    8.3 Pressure or Nondestructive Electric Test—Each length
    of pipe shall be subjected to a pressure test or a nondestructive
    electric test as prescribed in Section 5.
80. Permissible Variations in Wall Thickness
    9.1 The minimum wall thickness at any point shall not be
    more than 0.018 in. [0.46 mm] under the specified wall
    thickness. (This tolerance is slightly more than commercial
    tolerances on sheet and plate to allow for possible loss of
    thickness caused by manufacturing operations.)
81. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
    10.1 Permissible variations in dimensions shall not exceed
    the following at any point in each length of pipe.
    10.1.1 Specified Diameter—Where the specified wall thickness
    is less than 0.188 in. [4.8 mm], the actual outside
    diameter, based on circumferential measurement, shall not vary
    more than 60.20 % from the specified outside diameter.Where
    the specified wall thickness is 0.188 in. [4.8 mm] and heavier,
    the actual outside diameter, based on circumferential
    measurement, may vary a maximum of 60.40 % from the
    specified outside diameter. (Outside diameter tolerances closer
    than shown above may be obtained by agreement between the
    pipe manufacturer and purchaser.)
    10.1.2 Out-of-Roundness—The difference between the major
    and the minor outside diameter shall not be more than 1.5 %
    of the specified outside diameter.
    separate solution heat treatments are required for solution
    annealing; in-process heat treatments are not permitted as a substitute
    for the separate solution heat treatments. The heat-treatment procedure
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-409/SA-409M
    699
    10.1.3 Alignment (Camber)—Using a 10-ft [3.0-m] straightedge
    placed so that both ends are in contact with the pipe, the
    camber shall not be more than 3/16 in. [4.8 mm].
82. Lengths
    11.1 Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, pipe
    of NPS 22 or less will be furnished in random lengths of 9 to
    12 ft (Note 3). For outside diameters of over NPS 22, the
    minimum length will be 5 ft (Note 3).
    NOTE 3—This value(s) applies when the inch-pound designation of this
    specification is the basis of purchase. The corresponding metric value(s)
    shall be agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
    11.2 When specified by the purchaser, two or more lengths
    may be circumferentially welded together to produce longer
    lengths.
    11.3 Circumferentially welded joints shall be of the same
    quality as the longitudinal joints.
83. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
    12.1 The finished pipe shall have a workmanlike finish.
    12.2 Repair of Defects by Machining or Grinding—Pipe
    showing moderate slivers or other surface defects may be
    machined or ground inside or outside to a depth which will
    TABLE 2 Filler Metal Specifications
    Grade
    UNS
    Designation
    Filler Metal Classification and UNS DesignationA for ApplicableB AWS Specification
    A5.4 A5.9 A5.11 A5.14 A5.22 A5.30
    Class. UNS Class. UNS Class. UNS Class. UNS Class. UNS Class. UNS
    TP201 S20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP201LN S20153 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP304 S30400 E308 W30810 ER308
    S30880
    W30840
    . . . . . . . . . . . . E308T W30831 IN308 S30880
    TP304L S30403 E308L W30813 ER308L
    S30883
    W30843
    . . . . . . . . . . . . E308T W30835 IN308L S30883
    TP309Cb S30940 E309Cb W30917 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP310Cb S31040 E310Cb W31017 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP316 S31600 E316 W31610 ER316
    S31680
    W31640
    . . . . . . . . . . . . E316T W31631 IN316 S31680
    TP316L S31603 E316L W31603 ER316L
    S31683
    W31643
    . . . . . . . . . . . . E316LT W31635 IN316L S31683
    TP317 S31700 E317 W31700 ER317
    S31783
    W31743
    . . . . . . . . . . . . E317T W31731 IN317 S31780
    . . . S31727 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S32053 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    TP321 S32100 E347 W34710H ER321
    ER347
    S32180
    W32140
    S34780
    W34740
    . . . . . . . . . . . . E347T W34733 IN348 S34780
    TP347 S34700 E347 W34710 ER347
    S34780
    W34740
    . . . . . . . . . . . . E347T W34733 IN348 S34780
    TP348 S34800 E347 W34710 ER347
    S34780
    W34740
    . . . . . . . . . . . . E347T W34733 IN348 S34780
    . . . S31254 . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo-3 W86112 ERNiCrMo-3 NO6625 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S31725 . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo-3 W86112 ERNiCrMo-3 NO6625 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S31726 . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo-3 W86112 ERNiCrMo-3 NO6625 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S34565 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . N08367 . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo-3 W86112 ErNiCrMo-3 N06625 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S20400 E209 W32210 ER209 W32240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . S31266 . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo-4 W80276 ERNiCrMo-4 N10276 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo-10 W86022 ERNiCrMo-10 NO6022 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo-13 W86059 ERNiCrMo-13 NO6059 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo-14 W86026 ERNiCrMo-14 N06686 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    . . . . . . . . . . . . ENiCrMo-17 W86200 ERNiCrMo-17 N06200 . . . . . . . . . . . .
    ANew designation established in accordance with Practice E527 and SAE J1086, Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
    BChoice of American Welding Society specification depends on the welding process used.
    TABLE 3 Tensile Requirements
    Grade UNS
    Designation
    Tensile Strength,
    min, ksi [MPa]
    Yield Strength,
    min, ksi [MPa]
    TP201 S20100 75 [515] 38 [260]
    TP201LN S20153 95 [655] 45 [310]
    TP304 S30400 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP304L S30403 70 [485] 25 [170]
    TP309Cb S30940 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP309S S30908 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP310Cb S31040 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP310S S31008 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP316 S31600 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP316L S31603 70 [485] 25 [170]
    TP317 S31700 75 [515] 30 [205]
    . . . S31727 80 [550] 36 [245]
    . . . S32053 93 [640] 43 [295]
    TP321 S32100 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP347 S34700 75 [515] 30 [205]
    TP348 S34800 75 [515] 30 [205]
    . . . S31254 94 [650] 44 [300]
    . . . S30815 87 [600] 45 [310]
    . . . S31725 75 [515] 30 [205]
    . . . S31726 80 [550] 35 [240]
    . . . S34565 115 [795] 60 [415]
    . . . S20400 95 [655] 48 [330]
    . . . N08367
    t # 0.187
    t > 0.187
    100 [690]
    95 [655]
    45 [310]
    45 [310]
    . . . S31266 109 [750] 61 [420]
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-409/SA-409M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    700
    ensure the removal of all defects providing the wall thickness
    is not reduced below the minimum specified in 9.1.
    12.3 Repair of Defects by Welding—Defects which violate
    minimum wall thickness may be repaired by welding, but only
    with the approval of the purchaser. Areas shall be suitably
    prepared for welding with tightly closed defects removed by
    grinding. Open, clean defects, such as pits or impressions, may
    require no preparation. All welders, welding operators, and
    weld procedures shall be qualified to the ASME Boiler and
    Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. Unless the purchaser specifies
    otherwise, pipe required to be heat treated under the
    provisions of 5.3 shall be heat treated or reheat treated
    following repair welding. Repaired lengths, where repair depth
    is greater than 1/4 of the thickness, shall be pressure tested or
    repressure tested after repair and heat treatment (if any). Repair
    welds shall also be examined by suitable non-destructive
    examination techniques, including any techniques specifically
    required of the primary weld.
    12.4 The pipe shall be free of scale and contaminating iron
    particles. Pickling, blasting, or surface finishing is not mandatory
    when pipe is bright annealed. The purchaser may request
    that a passivating treatment be applied.
84. Test Specimens
    13.1 Transverse tension and bend test specimens may be
    taken from a test plate of the same material as the pipe, made
    by attaching a formed cylinder to the end of the pipe and
    welding the abutting edges as a continuation and duplication of
    the seam of the pipe (run-off plate). As an alternative to a
    formed cylinder, the run-off plate may consist of flat plates
    with reinforcing bars clamped to the underside to prevent
    distortion. The run-off plate material shall be of the same heat,
    preferably shear croppings from the same plate.
    13.2 When heat treatment is required, test specimens shall
    be cut from pipe after the heat treating has been completed, or
    specimens removed from the pipe prior to heat treating shall be
    heat treated with the pipe.
85. Transverse Guided-Bend Weld Tests
    14.1 Two bend test specimens shall be taken transversely
    across the weld. One shall be subject to a face guided-bend test
    and the second to a root guided-bend test. One specimen shall
    be bent with the inside surface of the pipe against the plunger,
    and the other with the outside surface against the plunger.
    14.2 The bend test shall be acceptable if no cracks or other
    defects exceeding 1/8 in. [3 mm] in any direction are present in
    the weld metal or between the weld and the pipe metal after
    bending. Cracks which originate along the edges of the
    specimen during testing, and that are less than 1/4 in. [6.5 mm]
    measured in any direction shall not be considered.
86. Pressure Tests
    15.1 Where hydrostatic test equipment is not available, the
    pipe may be air or gas pressure tested with an internal pressure
    of 100 psi [700 kPa]. The weld and weld area shall be inspected
    with the use of soap solution or any other prepared solution
    which will detect the leakage of air or gas from the inside.
    15.2 Instead of a pressure test, when mutually agreed upon
    between the purchaser and manufacturer, the entire weld area
    of each pipe, including circumferential welds, may be tested by
    nondestructive testing methods. These methods shall be capable
    of detecting both surface and subsurface defects.
87. Inspection
    16.1 When specified in the purchase order, the pipe may be
    inspected at the manufacturer’s plant by an inspector representing
    the purchaser. The inspector shall have entry at all
    times. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, all reasonable
    facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished
    in accordance with these specifications.
88. Certification
    17.1 Upon request of the purchaser in the contract or order,
    certification in accordance with the provisions of Specification
    A999/A999M shall be furnished. When specified on the
    purchase order or when a specific type of melting has been
    specified on the purchase order, the type of melting used shall
    also be reported to the purchaser or the purchaser’s representative.
89. Product Marking
    18.1 Each length of pipe manufactured in accordance with
    this specification shall have the following identifying marking
    within 12 in. [300 mm] of one end: manufacturer’s name or
    trade-mark, specification number, grade number of the alloy,
    the manufacturer’s heat number, size, and schedule number.
    Additional marking requirements for heat treatment are described
    in Supplementary Requirement S2.
    18.2 Marking shall be legibly stenciled with a suitable paint
    or permanent marking compound, except when otherwise
    specified by the purchaser.
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-409/SA-409M
    701
    SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
    One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified in the
    purchase order. The purchaser may specify a different frequency of test or analysis than is provided
    in the supplementary requirement. Subject to agreement between the purchaser and manufacturer,
    retest and retreatment provisions of these supplementary requirements may also be modified.
    S1. Product Analysis
    S1.1 At the request of the purchaser a product analysis of
    one coupon representing finished sheet or plate from each heat
    shall be made by the pipe manufacturer. The drillings for
    product analysis may be taken from shear crop or test specimens.
    The results of product analysis shall conform to the
    requirements in Table 1 and shall be reported to the purchaser.
    S2. Radiographic Examination
    S2.1 Weld soundness shall be determined through radiographic
    examination made in accordance with requirements as
    agreed upon between the pipe manufacturer and purchaser.
    S3. Corrosion Requirements
    S3.1 Boiling Nitric Acid Test—Except for Grade TP321,
    coupons representing finished pipe made of nonmolybdenumbearing
    material (0.50 % and less molybdenum) shall meet the
    requirement of the boiling nitric acid test conducted according
    to Practice C of Practices A262. The condition of the test
    specimens and the corrosion rates are as follows: Type 347 and
    Type 348 shall be tested in the sensitized condition (heated for
    1 h at 1240 °F [675 °C]) and the rate of penetration shall not
    exceed 0.0020 in. [0.05 mm]/month. All other
    nonmolybdenum-bearing types, except for Grade TP321,
    shown in Table 1 shall be tested in the annealed and unsensitized
    condition and the rate of penetration shall not exceed
    0.0015 in. [0.04 mm]/month.
    S3.2 Acidified Copper Sulfate Test—Coupons representing
    finished pipe made of molybdenum-bearing material and Type
    321 (over 0.50 % molybdenum) shall meet the requirements of
    the copper-copper sulfate-sulfuric acid test (intergranular corrosion
    test) conducted in accordance with Practice E of
    Practices A262. The condition of the test specimen is as
    follows: All molybdenum-bearing types shown in Table 1 shall
    be tested in the annealed and unsensitized condition. Type 321
    shall be tested in the sensitized condition (heated for 1 h at
    1240 °F [675 °C]). All specimens shall meet the requirements
    of the prescribed bend test.
    S4. Ferrite Control of Weld Deposits
    S4.1 The ferrite content of the deposited weld metal in any
    length of pipe may be determined. The procedural details
    pertaining to this subject (that is, welding, plate and weld
    deposit chemistry, testing equipment and method, number and
    location of test sites, and ferrite control limits) shall be a matter
    for agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
    S5. Stabilizing Heat Treatment
    S5.1 Subsequent to the heat treatment required in 5.3,
    Grades TP321, TP347, and TP348 shall be given a stabilization
    heat treatment at a temperature lower than that used for the
    initial solution annealing heat treatment. The temperature of
    stabilization heat treatment shall be at a temperature as agreed
    upon between the purchaser and vendor.
    S6 Intergranular Corrosion Test
    S6.1 When specified, material shall pass intergranular corrosion
    tests conducted by the manufacturer in accordance with
    Practices A262, Practice E.
    NOTE S6.1—Practice E requires testing on the sensitized condition for
    low carbon or stabilized grades, and on the as-shipped condition for other
    grades.
    S6.2 A stabilization heat treatment in accordance with
    Supplementary Requirement S5 may be necessary and is
    permitted in order to meet this requirement for the grades
    containing titanium or columbium.
    APPENDIX
    (Nonmandatory Information)
    X1. Wall Thickness of Schedule 5S and Schedule 10S
    TABLE X1.1 Pipe Dimensions
    NPS Designator
    Wall Thickness
    Schedule 5S Schedule 10S
    in. mm in. mm
    14 0.156 3.96 0.188 4.78
    16 0.165 4.19 0.188 4.78
    18 0.165 4.19 0.188 4.78
    20 0.188 4.78 0.218 5.54
    22 0.188 4.78 0.218 5.54
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-409/SA-409M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    702
    TABLE X1.1 Continued
    NPS Designator
    Wall Thickness
    Schedule 5S Schedule 10S
    in. mm in. mm
    24 0.218 5.54 0.250 6.35
    30 0.250 6.35 0.312 7.92
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ð19Þ
    SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL, SHEET, CARBON, FOR
    PRESSURE VESSELS
    SA-414/SA-414M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A414/A414M-07 except for para. 1.3.)
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-414/SA-414M
    703
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-414/SA-414M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    704
    SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL, SHEET, CARBON, FOR
    PRESSURE VESSELS
    SA-414/SA-414M
    (Identical with ASTM Specification A 414/A 414M-07.)
90. Scope
    1.1 This specification covers hot-rolled carbon steel
    sheet for pressure vessels involving fusion welding or brazing.
    Welding and brazing technique is of fundamental
    importance and shall be in accordance with commercial
    practices.
    1.2 The following grades are included in this specification:
    Mechanical Requirements
    Tensile Strength,
    Yield Strength, min min
    Grade ksi MPa ksi MPa
    A 25 170 45 310
    B 30 205 50 345
    C 33 230 55 380
    D 35 240 60 415
    E 38 260 65 450
    F 42 290 70 485
    G 45 310 75 515
    1.3 Hot-rolled carbon steel sheet is generally furnished
    in cut lengths and to decimal thickness only. Coils may
    be furnished, provided tension test specimens are taken to
    represent the middle of the slab as required by 5.1.3. The
    purchaser should recognize this may require cutting the
    coils to obtain test samples and results in half-size coils.
    The sheet is furnished to the following size limits:
    Width, in. [mm]
    Thickness, in. [mm] Over 12 [Over 300]
    0.270 to 0.230 [7.0 to 6.0] sheet (coils only)
    Under 0.230 to 0.057 [6.0 to 1.5] sheet
    1.4 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
    units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
    text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
    in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
    system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
    values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
    with the specification.
    1.5 Tolerances are found in General Requirements
    Specifications A 568/A 568M and A 635/A 635M. The
    appropriate General Requirements specification is applied
    based on the thickness and width of the product ordered.
91. Referenced Documents
    2.1 ASTM Standards:
    A 568/A 568M Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon,
    Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled
    and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for
    A 635/A 635M Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
    Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
    High-Strength Low-Alloy, and High-Strength Low-
    Alloy with Improved Formability, General Requirements
    for
92. Ordering Information
    3.1 Orders for material under this specification shall
    include the following information, as required, to describe
    the material adequately:
    3.1.1 Designation or specification number, date of
    issue, and grade,
    3.1.2 Copper bearing steel, when required,
    3.1.3 Special requirements, if required,
    3.1.4 Condition — pickled (or blast cleaned), if
    required (material so ordered will be oiled unless ordered
    dry), and
    3.1.5 Dimensions, including type of edges.
    3.1.5.1 As agreed upon between the purchaser and
    the producer, material ordered to this specification will
    be supplied to meet the appropriate standard or restricted
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-414/SA-414M
    705
    thickness tolerance table shown in Specification
    A 568/A 568M or Specification A 635/A 635M.
    NOTE 1—Not all producers are capable of meeting all of the limitations
    of the thickness tolerance tables in Specification A 568/A 568M or SpecificationA635/
    A 635M. The purchaser should contact the producer regarding
    possible limitations prior to placing an order.
    3.1.6 Cast or heat analysis, or test report request, or
    both, if required.
    NOTE 2 — A typical ordering description is as follows: “ASTM A 414,
    Grade A, Hot-Rolled Sheet, 0.100 in. [2.54 mm] by 36 in. [914.4 mm]
    by 96 in. [2438 mm], cut edges.
93. Chemical Requirements
    4.1 Cast or Heat Analysis — The analysis of the steel
    shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 1.
    4.1.1 Unspecified elements may be present. Limits
    on elements shall be as stated in Table 2.
    4.1.1.1 Each of the elements listed in Table 2 shall
    be included in the report of the heat analysis. When the
    amount of an element present is less than 0.02%, the analysis
    may be reported as “<0.02%.”
    4.2 Product, Check, or Verification Analysis — Analyses
    may be made by the purchaser from finished material
    representing each heat.
    4.3 Deoxidation — For all grades, killed steel is
    required. See Table 1 and footnotes A and B.
94. Mechanical Property Requirements
    5.1 Tensile Strength:
    5.1.1 Requirements — Material as represented by the
    test specimen shall conform to the tensile requirements
    specified in Table 3.
    5.1.2 Number of Tests — Two tensile tests shall be
    made from the product of each slab as rolled.
    5.1.3 Location and Orientation (see Fig. 1):
    5.1.3.1 Tensile test specimens shall be taken at
    locations representing the middle and back end of each
    slab as rolled.
    5.1.3.2 Tensile test samples shall be taken from
    the full thickness of the sheet as rolled.
    5.1.3.3 Tensile test specimens shall be taken from
    a location approximately halfway between the center of
    the sheet and the edge of the material as-rolled.
    5.1.3.4 Tensile test specimens shall be taken with
    the axis of the test specimen perpendicular to the rolling
    direction (transverse test).
    5.1.4 Test Method — Yield strength shall be determined
    by either the 0.2% offset method or by the 0.5%
    extension under load method, unless otherwise specified.
95. General Requirements for Delivery
    6.1 Material furnished under this specification shall
    conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition
    of Specification A 568/A 568M or Specification
    A 635/A 635M unless otherwise provided herein.
96. Workmanship
    7.1 The material shall be free from injurious defects
    (see Specifications A 568/A 568M or A 635/A 635M, as
    appropriate due to thickness).
97. Finish and Appearance
    8.1 Surface Finish:
    8.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, the material shall
    be furnished without removing the hot-rolled oxide or
    scale.
    8.1.2 When required, the material may be specified
    to be pickled or blast cleaned.
    8.2 Oiling:
    8.2.1 Unless otherwise specified, the material shall
    be furnished not oiled.
    8.2.2 When specified to be pickled or blast cleaned,
    the material shall be furnished oiled. When required, pickled
    or blast-cleaned material may be specified to be furnished
    dry.
    8.3 Edges — Unless otherwise specified, mill edges
    shall be furnished on material that has not had the hot-rolled
    oxide or scale removed and cut edges shall be furnished on
    material that has had the hot-rolled oxide or scale removed.
98. Certification and Reports
    9.1 The manufacturer or processor shall furnish copies
    of a test report showing the results of the heat analysis and
    mechanical property tests made to determine compliance
    with this specification.
    9.2 The report shall include the purchase order number,
    the specification number and year date, product designation,
    grade, the heat number, and heat analysis and mechanical
    properties as indicated by the tension test.
    9.3 A signature is not required on the test report. However,
    the document shall clearly identify the organization
    submitting the report. Notwithstanding the absence of a
    signature, the organization submitting the report is responsible
    for the content of the report.
    9.4 A Material Test Report, Certificate of Inspection,
    or similar document printed from or used in electronic
    form from an electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission
    shall be regarded as having the same validity as a
    Manufacture
    Stockholder
    Distributor
    SA-414/SA-414M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    706
    counterpart printed in the certifier’s facility. The content
    of the EDI transmitted document must meet the requirements
    of the invoked ASTM standard and the purchaser
    and supplier. Notwithstanding the absence of a signature,
    the organization submitting the EDI transmission is responsible
    for the content of the report.
99. Product Marking
    10.1 The name or brand of the manufacturer, heat and
    slab number, specification designation number, and grade
    shall be legibly and durably marked on each cut length
    sheet in two places not less than 12 in. [300 mm] from
    the edges. Cut length sheets, the maximum lengthwise
    and crosswise, dimensions of which do not exceed 72 in.
    FIG. 1 LOCATION OF TEST SPECIMENS
    Alternate position
    tension test
    Alternate position
    tension test
    Tension test
    Tension test
    Front end off mill
    Back end off mill
    TABLE 1
    CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
    Composition — Weight, % Heat Analysis
    Element Grade A Grade B Grade C Grade D Grade E Grade F Grade G
    Carbon, max 0.15 0.22 0.25 0.25 0.27 0.31 0.31
    Manganese, max 0.90 0.90 0.90 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.35
    Phosphorus, max 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035
    Sulfur, max 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035
    AluminumA 0.02–0.08 0.02–0.08 0.02–0.08 0.02–0.08 0.02–0.08 0.02–0.08 0.02–0.08
    SiliconA 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
    Copper, when copper steel
    is specified, min 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
    A The steel shall be considered aluminum-silicon killed when the silicon is between 0.15 and 0.30, otherwise it shall be considered aluminum
    killed.
    [1800 mm], shall be legibly and durably marked in one
    place approximately midway between the center and a side
    edge. The manufacturer’s test identification number shall
    be legibly and durably marked on each test specimen. Steeldie
    marking of sheets is prohibited on material <0.250 in.
    [6 mm].
    10.2 For coil product, the information required in 10.1
    shall be legibly and durably marked both on each coil and
    on a tag affixed to each coil.
100. Keywords
     11.1 carbon steel sheet; pressure vessel steels; steel
     sheet
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-414/SA-414M
     707
     TABLE 2
     LIMITS ON UNSPECIFIED ELEMENTS (See 4.1.1)
     Copper, max %A Heat analysis 0.40
     Product analysis 0.43
     Nickel, max %A Heat analysis 0.40
     Product analysis 0.43
     Chromium, max %A,B Heat analysis 0.30
     Product analysis 0.34
     Molybdenum, max %A,B Heat analysis 0.12
     Product analysis 0.13
     Vanadium, max %C Heat analysis 0.03
     Product analysis 0.04
     Columbium, max %C Heat analysis 0.02
     Product analysis 0.03
     A The sum of copper, nickel, chromium, and molybdenum shall
     not exceed 1.00% on heat analysis. When one or more of these elements
     are specified, the sum does not apply; in which case, only
     the individual limits on the remaining unspecified elements will
     apply.
     B The sum of chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed
     0.32% on heat analysis. When one or more of these elements are
     specified, the sum does not apply; in which case, only the individual
     limits on the remaining unspecified elements will apply.
     C By agreement, the heat analysis limits for vanadium or columbium,
     or both, may be increased up to 0.10% and 0.05%, respectively.
     TABLE 3
     TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
     Grade A Grade B Grade C Grade D Grade E Grade F Grade G
     Tensile strength:
     min, ksi [MPa] 45 [310] 50 [345] 55 [380] 60 [415] 65 [450] 70 [485] 75 [515]
     max, ksi [MPa] 60 [415] 65 [450] 70 [485] 75 [515] 85 [585] 90 [620] 95 [655]
     Yield strength, min, ksi (MPa)A 25 [170] 30 [205] 33 [230] 35 [240] 38 [260] 42 [290] 45 [310]
     Elongation in 2 in. (50 mm), min, percent:
     Under 0.270 to 0.145 [Under 7.0 to 3.8] 26 24 22 20 18 16 16
     Under 0.145 to 0.089 [Under 3.8 to 2.2] 24 22 20 18 16 14 14
     Under 0.089 to 0.057 [Under 2.2 to 1.5] 23 21 19 17 15 13 13
     Elongation in 8 in. (200 mm), min, percent:
     Under 0.270 to 0.145 [Under 7.0 to 3.8] 20 18 16 14 12 10 10
     A Yield strength determined by the 0.2% offset or 0.5% extension under load methods.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR PIPING FITTINGS OF WROUGHT
     CARBON STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL FOR
     LOW-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
     SA-420/SA-420M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A420/A420M-04.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-420/SA-420M
     709
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-420/SA-420M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     710
     SPECIFICATION FOR PIPING FITTINGS OF WROUGHT
     CARBON STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL FOR LOWTEMPERATURE
     SERVICE
     SA-420/SA-420M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A 420/A 420M-04)
101. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers wrought carbon steel and
     alloy steel fittings of seamless and welded construction,
     covered by the latest revision of ASME B16.9, ASME
     B16.11, MSS-SP-79, and MSS SP-95. Fittings differing
     from these ASME and MSSVF standards shall be furnished
     in accordance with Supplementary Requirement S58 of
     Specification A 960. These fittings are for use in pressure
     piping and pressure vessel service at low temperatures.
     1.2 Optional supplementary requirements are provided
     for fittings where a greater degree of examination is desired.
     When desired, one or more of these supplementary requirements
     shall be specified in the order.
     1.3 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound
     units and in SI units. However, unless the order specifies
     the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the
     material shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
     1.4 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
     units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
     text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
     in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
     system must be used independently of the other.
102. Referenced Documents
     2.1 In addition to those Referenced Documents listed
     in Specification A 960, the following list of standards apply
     to this specification.
     2.2 ASTM Standards:
     A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
     of Steel Products
     A 960 Specification for Common Requirements for
     Wrought Steel Piping Fittings
     2.3 ASME Standards:
     B 16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt-Welding Fittings
     B 16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding Threaded
     Section VIII Division 1, Pressure Vessels
     2.4 MSS Standards:
     MSS SP-25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings,
     Flanges, and Unions
     MSS SP-79 Socket Welding Reducer Inserts
     MSS SP-95 Swage(d) Nipples and Bull Plugs
     2.5 ASNT Standard:
     ASNT (1984) Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A
103. Ordering Information
     3.1 See Specification A 960.
104. General Requirements
     4.1 Product furnished to this specification shall conform
     to the requirements of Specification A 960, including any
     supplementary requirements that are indicated in the purchase
     order. Failure to comply with the general requirements
     of Specification A 960 constitutes non-conformance
     with this specification. In case of conflict between the
     requirements of this specification and Specification A 960,
     this specification shall prevail.
105. Material
     5.1 The material for fittings shall consist of forgings,
     bars, plates, seamless or fusion welded tubular products
     with filler metal added. It shall conform to the chemical
     requirements in Table 1, and be made by one of the following
     processes: open-hearth, basic-oxygen, or electric-furnace.
     The steels shall be made using recognized melting
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-420/SA-420M
     711
     practices necessary to produce steels that shall meet the
     impact requirements of this specification.
106. Manufacture
     6.1 Forging or forming operations shall be performed
     by hammering, pressing, piercing, extruding, upsetting,
     working, bending, fusion-welding, or machining, or by a
     combination of two or more of these operations. The forming
     procedure shall be so applied that it will not produce
     injurious defects in the fittings.
     6.2 All welds, including welds in tubular products from
     which fittings are made, shall be (1) made by welders,
     welding operators and welding procedures qualified under
     the provisions of ASME Section IX, (2) heat treated in
     accordance with Section 7 of this specification, and (3)
     nondestructively examined throughout the entire length of
     each weld in accordance with Section 14 of this specification.
     The radiography of welds shall be done either prior
     to or after forming at option of manufacturer. Personnel
     performing NDE examinations shall be qualified in accordance
     with SNT-TC-1A.
     6.3 The welded joints of the fittings shall be finished
     in accordance with the requirements of Paragraph UW-
     35(a) of Section VIII, Division 1 of ASME Boiler and
     Pressure Vessel Code.
     6.4 All butt-weld tees manufactured by cold-forming
     methods shall be liquid penetrant or magnetic particle
     examined by one of the methods specified in Supplementary
     Requirement S52 or S53 of Specification A 960. This
     examination shall be performed after final heat treatment
     by NDE personnel qualified under the provisions of ASNT
     Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A. Only the sidewall
     areas of the tee need be examined. This area is defined
     by a circle that covers the area from the weld bevel of the
     branch outlet to the centerline of the body or run. Internal
     and external surfaces shall be examined when size permits
     accessibility. After the removal of any cracks, the tees shall
     be re-examined by the original method. Acceptable tees
     shall be marked with the symbol PT or MT, as applicable,
     to indicate compliance.
     6.5 Stubends may be produced with the entire lap added
     by the welding of a ring, made from plate or bar of the
     same alloy grade and composition, to the outside of a
     straight section of pipe, provided the weld is double
     welded, is a full penetration joint, satisfies the requirements
     of 6.2 for qualifications and radiography and 7.1 for post
     weld heat treatment.
107. Heat Treatment
     7.1 All fittings shall be furnished in the normalized,
     normalized and tempered, annealed, or quenched and tempered
     condition. All welding shall be completed prior to
     the austenitizing heat treatment.
     7.2 The full thickness of the material from which impact
     test specimens are to be obtained shall be heat treated with
     a furnace charge as specified in 10.4.2 or 10.4.3.
     7.3 After forming, the fittings shall be allowed to cool
     below the lower critical before applying one of the heat
     treatments listed in 7.1.
     7.4 When the fittings are to be post-weld heat treated
     after being welded by the purchaser and when so specified
     in the order, the test specimens shall be subjected to the
     same post-weld heat treatment. The purchaser shall use
     the post-weld heat treatment shown in Table 2, unless
     otherwise specified in the order.
108. Chemical Composition
     8.1 The steel shall conform to requirements of chemical
     composition for the respective material prescribed in
     Table 1.
     8.2 The steel shall not contain any unspecified elements
     for the ordered grade to the extent that it then conforms
     to the requirements of another grade for which that element
     is a specified element having a required minimum content.
     8.3 The chemical composition of weld metal is not
     required to meet the same limits of the base materials
     however, the composition of the weld deposit shall be
     such that it meets the minimum mechanical and impact
     requirements of this specification. In general, the alloy
     content shall be similar to that of the base metal but shall not
     exceed 6% except in the case of fittings of 9% nickel steel.
     8.4 A product analysis is optional.
109. Tensile Properties
     9.1 The tensile properties of the fittings material shall
     conform to the requirements for the applicable grade of
     material as listed in Table 3.
     9.2 At least one tension test shall be made on each
     heat of material and in the same condition of heat treatment
     as the finished fittings it represents provided that the wall
     thickness of the fitting and the representative sample thickness
     do not vary more than 1/4 in. [6 mm]. At least one
     tension test per heat of weld metal shall be made after heat
     treatment in the same manner as the base metal. Results
     need not be reported unless Supplementary Requirement
     S51 of Specification A 960 is specified.
     9.3 Records of the tension tests shall be certification
     that the material of the fitting meets the tensile requirements
     of this specification.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-420/SA-420M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     712
110. Impact Test Properties
     10.1 Properties:
     10.1.1 The notched bar impact properties of the base
     metal and weld metal shall conform to the requirements
     of Table 4 or Table 5 for the applicable grade of material.
     10.1.2 Retest – When the average value of the three
     specimens equals or exceeds the minimum value permitted
     for a single specimen and the value for more than one
     specimen is below the required average value, or when
     the value for one specimen is below the minimum value
     permitted for a single specimen, a retest of three additional
     specimens shall be made. The value for each of these retest
     specimens shall equal or exceed the required average value.
     When an erratic result is caused by a defective specimen,
     or there is uncertainty in test procedure, a retest shall be
     allowed.
     10.2 Procedures:
     10.2.1 All material furnished under this specification
     shall be tested for impact resistance at the temperature
     for the respective grade in Table 6. Exceptions to these
     requirements are permissible when agreed upon between
     the purchaser and producer and specified in the order, in
     that the impact test is acceptable when made at temperatures
     different from those shown in Table 6, provided the
     test temperature is at least as low as the intended service
     temperature, and fittings are suitably marked in accordance
     with Section 18 to identify the reported test temperature.
     10.2.2 The notched-bar impact test shall be made in
     accordance with the procedure for the simple-beam,
     Charpy-type test of Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
     Each impact test shall consist of breaking three specimens.
     10.3 Specimens:
     10.3.1 Notched-bar impact specimens shall be simple-
     beam, Charpy-type A with a V-notch in accordance
     with Test Methods and Definitions A 370. Standard specimens
     10 by 10 mm in cross section shall be used unless
     the material to be tested is of insufficient thickness, in
     which case the largest obtainable standard subsize impact
     specimens shall be used. When the size or shape of the
     finished fittings is insufficient to permit obtaining the smallest
     standard subsize impact specimens, an impact test by
     the fitting manufacturer will not be required. The material
     from which the specimens are taken shall be heat treated
     with a furnace charge in accordance with 10.4.2 or 10.4.3.
     Impact tests shall be made from either the raw material
     from which the fittings are made or from a finished fitting
     at the option of the manufacturer.
     10.3.2 Test specimens shall be obtained so that the
     longitudinal axis of the specimen is parallel to the longitudinal
     axis of the fitting while the axis of the “V” shall be
     perpendicular to the surface. On wall thickness over 1 in.
     [25 mm] the specimens shall be obtained with their longitudinal
     axis located 1/2 in. [13 mm] from the outer surface.
     10.3.3 When testing welds, the notch of the specimen
     shall be in the welded joint and, where the diameter and
     wall thickness permit, the longitudinal axis of the specimen
     shall be transverse to the longitudinal axis of the weld.
     The axis of the notch shall be perpendicular to the surface.
     10.4 Number of Tests:
     10.4.1 A notched-bar impact test, consisting of
     breaking three specimens shall be made. Each test shall
     represent only such fittings from a heat that do not vary
     from the thickness of the material from which the test
     specimens are taken by more than 1/4 in. [6 mm].
     10.4.2 When heat treatment is performed in furnaces
     not equipped with calibrated recording pyrometers, one
     impact test shall be made for each heat in each heat-treatment
     load. Test specimens shall be included with each
     furnace charge. If this heat treatment is conducted in continuous-
     type furnaces not equipped with calibrated recording
     pyrometers, then one test per heat shall be conducted for
     each 5000 lb or 2550 kg (or less) of product.
     10.4.3 When heat treatment is performed in furnaces
     controlled within a 50°F [28°C] range and equipped with
     calibrated recording pyrometers so that records of heat
     treatment are available, then one impact test from each
     heat is required, provided that all other heat treatments are
     conducted at the same temperatures and within the same
     50°F [28°C] range as the furnace charge that contained
     the test specimens.
     10.4.4 On fittings of welded construction, additional
     impact tests of the same number as required in 10.4.1 or
     10.4.2 shall be made to test the weld metal.
     10.4.5 Specimens showing defects while being
     machined or prior to testing shall be discarded, and replacements
     shall be considered as original specimens.
     10.5 Retreatment:
     10.5.1 If the results of impact tests conducted in
     accordance with 10.4.2 and 10.4.3 fail to conform to the
     test requirements specified in 10.1, that group of fittings
     shall be retreated and submitted for test. No group of
     fittings shall be retreated more than twice.
111. Hydrostatic Tests
     11.1 Hydrostatic testing of fittings is not required by
     this specification.
     11.2 All fittings shall be capable of withstanding without
     failure, leakage, or impairment of their serviceability,
     a hydrostatic test pressure equal to that prescribed for the
     specified matching pipe of equivalent material.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-420/SA-420M
     713
112. Dimensions
     12.1 Butt-welding fittings and butt-welding shortradius
     elbows and returns purchased in accordance with
     this specification shall conform to the dimensions and tolerances
     given in the latest revision of ASME B16.9. Steel
     socket-welding and threaded fittings purchased in accordance
     with this specification shall conform to the sizes,
     shapes, dimensions, and tolerances specified in the latest
     revision of ASME B16.11.
     12.2 Fittings of size or shape differing from these standards,
     but meeting all other requirements of the specification,
     shall be furnished in accordance with Supplementary
     Requirement S58 of SpecificationA960 only by agreement
     with the purchaser.
113. Surface Quality
     13.1 See Specification A 960.
     13.2 Repair by Welding (Base Metal):
     13.2.1 Repair welding, by the manufacturer, is permissible
     for parts made to dimensional standards such as
     those of ASME or equivalent standards.
     13.2.2 Prior approval of the purchaser shall be
     required to weld repair special parts made to the purchaser’s
     dimensional requirements.
     13.2.3 Welding shall be accomplished with a weld
     procedure designed to produce low hydrogen in the weldment.
     Short circuit gas metal arc welding is permissible
     only with the approval of the purchaser.
     13.2.4 The weld repair shall be permanently identified
     with the welder’s stamp or symbol in accordance with
     Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
     13.2.5 After weld repair, material shall be heat
     treated in accordance with 7.1.
     13.2.6 Tension and impact testing of representative
     deposited weld metal for each heat shall meet the requirements
     of 9.2 and 10.1.
114. Radiographic Examination
     14.1 All fusion-welded butt joints shall be radiographically
     examined throughout the entire length in accordance
     with Paragraph UW-51 of Section VIII, Division 1, of
     the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Instead of
     radiographic examination, welds made by the manufacturer
     may be ultrasonically examined in accordance with Appendix
     12 of Section VIII, Division 1, of the ASME Boiler and
     Pressure Vessel Code. In general, radiography or ultrasonic
     examination shall be performed after all forming operations
     have been completed. Fittings made from fusion-welded
     pipe need not be radiographed if the pipe has been radiographed,
     provided the fitting forming process does not
     materially affect the weld.
115. Inspection
     15.1 All tests and inspections shall be made at the place
     of manufacture, unless otherwise agreed to.
     15.2 Other tests, when required by agreement shall be
     made from materials of the lots covered in the order.
116. Rejection and Rehearing
     16.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements
     of this specification shall be rejected. Rejection should be
     reported to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing.
     In case of dissatisfaction with the results of the test,
     the producer or supplier shall make claim for a rehearing.
     16.2 Fittings that develop defects in shop working or
     application operations shall be rejected. Upon rejection,
     the manufacturer shall be notified promptly in writing.
117. Certification
     17.1 When requested by the purchaser, the manufacturer
     shall provide a certificate of compliance to this specification.
     In addition, if requested to provide test reports,
     the manufacturer shall also provide the following where
     applicable:
     17.1.1 Chemical analysis results, Section 8 (Table 1),
     17.1.2 Tensile property results, Section 9 (Table 3)
     report yield strength and ultimate strength in ksi [MPa]
     and elongation in percent,
     17.1.3 Impact test results, Section 10 (Table 4 and
     Table 5),
     17.1.4 Type heat treatment, Section 7,
     17.1.5 Radiographic examination statement, Section
     14, and
     17.1.6 Any supplemental testing required by the purchase
     order.
     17.2 Certification shall state whether welds have been
     examined radiographically or ultrasonically.
     17.3 Letters of compliance and test results shall state
     the specification number, year of issue, revision letter (if
     any), grade and class of the fittings.
118. Product Marking
     18.1 All fittings shall have the prescribed information
     marked on each fitting in accordance with MSS SP-25,
     latest revision.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-420/SA-420M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     714
     18.1.1 Fittings shall be marked by any method which
     will permanently identify the fittings and not result in sharp
     discontinuities. Stamping, when used, shall be done with
     blunt-nosed continuous or blunt-nosed interrupted dot
     stamps.
     18.1.2 When agreed upon between the purchaser and
     producer, and specified in the order, the markings shall be
     painted or stenciled on the fitting or stamped on a metal
     or plastic tag which shall be securely attached to the fitting.
     18.2 The prescribed information for butt-welding fittings
     shall be: the manufacturer’s name or trademark (see
     Note 1), material designation or grade, schedule number
     or nominal wall thickness designation, and the heat number
     or manufacturer’s heat identification. Fittings containing
     welds that have been ultrasonically examined instead of
     radiography shall be marked U after heat identity.
     NOTE 1—For purposes of identification marking, the manufacturer is
     considered the organization that certifies the piping component complies
     with this specification.
     18.3 The prescribed information for threaded or socket
     welding fittings shall be: the manufacturer’s name or trademark,
     material designation or grade, pressure class or
     schedule number, and size.
     TABLE 1
     CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
     Composition, %
     GradeA C Mn P S Si Ni Cr Mo Cu Cb V
     WPL6 0.30 0.50–1.35 0.035 0.040 0.15–0.40 0.40 0.30 0.12 0.40 0.02B 0.08
     WPL9 0.20 0.40–1.06 0.030 0.030 . . . 1.60–2.24 . . . . . . 0.75–1.25 . . . . . .
     WPL3C 0.20 0.31–0.64 0.05 0.05 0.13–0.37 3.2–3.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     WPL8D 0.13 0.90 0.030 0.030 0.13–0.37 8.4–9.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
     NOTE 1—All requirements are maximum unless otherwise indicated.
     NOTE 2—Where an ellipsis (. . .) appears in this table, there is no requirement.
     A When fittings are of welded construction, the symbols above shall be supplemented by the letter “W.”
     B By agreement, the limit for Columbium may be increased up to 0.05% on heat analysis and 0.06% on product analysis.
     C Fittings made from plate or forgings may have 0.90% max manganese.
     D Fittings made from plate may have 0.98% max manganese.
     18.4 When size does not permit complete marking,
     identification marks shall be omitted in the reverse order
     of those listed above and in accordance with MSS SP-25.
     18.5 The impact test temperature shall also be shown
     if it is different from the standard test temperature specified
     in Table 6, for example: WPL-6-60 or WPL3-176.
     18.6 Bar Coding – In addition to the requirements in
     18.1, 18.2, 18.3, 18.4, and 18.5, bar coding is acceptable
     as a supplemental identification method. The purchaser
     may specify in the order a specific bar coding system to
     be used. The bar coding system, if applied at the discretion
     of the supplier, should be consistent with one of the published
     industry standards for bar coding. If used on small
     fittings, the bar code may be applied to the box or a substantially
     applied tag.
119. Keywords
     19.1 pipe fittings; piping applications; pressure containing
     parts; pressure vessel service; temperature service
     applications, low
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-420/SA-420M
     715
     TABLE 2
     POST-WELD HEAT TREATMENT
     Metal Temperature
     Grade °F °C Minimum Holding Time
     WPL6 1100–1200 595–650 1 h/in. [25 mm] 3/4 h min
     WPL3 1100–1150 540–620 1/4 h/in. [25 mm] 1 h min
     WPL8 1050–1100 565–595 1/2 h/in. [25 mm] 1 h min
     WPL9A 1025–1085 550–585 1 h/in. [25 mm] 2 h min
     A 2 in. [51 mm] thickness and over. The cooling rate shall not be less than 300°F [150°C] per hour down to a temperature of 600°F
     [315°C].
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-420/SA-420M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     716
     TABLE 3
     TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
     Grade
     Requirement WPL6 WPL9 WPL3 WPL8
     Tensile strength, min ksi [MPa] 60 [415]–85 [585] 63 [435]–88 [610] 65 [450]–90 [620] 100 [690]–125 [865]
     Yield strength, min ksi [MPa] 35 [240] 46 [315] 35 [240] 75 [515]
     Grades
     WPL6 WPL9 WPL3 WPL8
     Longi- Trans- Longi- Trans- Longi- Trans- Longi- Trans-
     Elongation Requirements tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse
     Standard round specimen, or small proportional speci- 22 12 20 . . . 22 14 16 . . .
     men, min % in 4 D
     Rectangular specimen for wall thickness 5/16 in. [7.94 30 16.5 28 18 30 20 22 . . .
     mm] and over, and for all small sizes tested in full
     section; min % in 2 in. or 50 mm
     Rectangular specimen for wall thickness less than 5/16
     A A A A A A A . . .
     in [7.94 mm]; min%in 2 in. or 50 mm (1/2 in. [12.7
     mm] wide specimen)
     Note 1 — Where an ellipsis (. . .) appears in this table, there is no requirement.
     A For each 1/32 in. [0.79 mm] decrease in wall thickness below 5/16 in. [7.94 mm], a deduction of 1.5% (grades WPL6, WPL9, and WPL3) or
     1.25% (WPL8) for longitudinal and 1.0% (grades WPL6, WPL9, and WPL3) for transverse from the values shown above is permitted. The
     following table gives the minimum value for various wall thicknesses:
     Wall Thickness Grades
     WPL6 WPL9 WPL3 WPL8
     Longi- Trans- Longi- Trans- Longi- Trans- Longi- Transin.
     [mm] tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse
     5/16 (0.312) [7.94] 30.0 16.5 28.0 18.0 30.0 20.0 22.0 . . .
     9/32 (0.281) [7.14] 28.5 15.5 26.5 17.0 28.5 19.0 20.75 . . .
     1/4 (0.250) [6.35] 27.0 14.5 25.0 16.0 27.0 18.0 19.5 . . .
     7/32 (0.219) [5.56] 25.5 . . . 23.5 . . . 25.5 . . . 18.25 . . .
     3/16 (0.188) [4.76] 24.0 . . . 22.0 . . . 24.0 . . . 17.0 . . .
     5/32 (0.156) [3.97] 22.5 . . . 20.5 . . . 22.5 . . . 15.75 . . .
     1/8 (0.125) [3.17] 21.0 . . . 19.0 . . . 21.0 . . . 14.5 . . .
     3/32 (0.094) [2.38] 19.5 . . . 17.5 . . . 19.5 . . . 13.25 . . .
     1/16 (0.062) [1.59] 18.0 . . . 16.0 . . . 18.0 . . . 12.0 . . .
     NOTE — The preceding table gives the computed minimum elongation value for each 1/32 in. [0.79 mm] decrease in wall thickness. Where the
     wall thickness lies between two values above, the minimum elongation value is determined by the following equations:
     Direction of Test Equations
     WPL6 WPL9 WPL3 WPL8
     Longitudinal E p 48t + 15.00 48t + 13.00 E p 48t + 15.00 40t + 9.50
     Transverse t p 32t + 6.50 32t + 8.00 E p 32t + 10.00 . . .
     where:
     E p elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, %, and
     t p actual thickness of specimen, in.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-420/SA-420M
     717
     TABLE 4
     CHARPY IMPACT REQUIREMENTS FOR WPL6,
     WPL9, AND WPL3A
     Minimum Charpy
     Charpy V-Notch V-Notch
     Impact Impact Value Without
     Value Required for Requiring Retest
     Acceptance (Average (One Specimen Only
     of Three Specimens) of a Set)
     Size of Specimen,
     mm ft · lbf J ft · lbf J
     10 by 10.0 13 17.6 10 13.6
     10 by 7.5 10 13.6 8 10.8
     10 by 5.0 7 9.5 5 7.0
     10 by 2.5 4 5.4 3 4.1
     A Straight-line interpolation for intermediate values is permitted.
     TABLE 5
     CHARPY IMPACT REQUIREMENTS FOR WPL8
     Minimum Charpy
     Charpy V-Notch V-Notch
     Impact Impact Value Without
     Value Required for Requiring Retest
     Acceptance (Average (One Specimen Only
     of Three Specimens) of a Set)
     Size of Specimen,
     mm ft · lbf J ft · lbf J
     10 by 10.0 25.0 33.9 20.0 27.1
     10 by 7.5 21.0 28.5 17.0 23.1
     10 by 5.0 17.0 23.1 14.0 19.0
     10 by 2.5 8.0 10.8 6.0 8.1
     TABLE 6
     IMPACT TEST TEMPERATURE
     Impact Test Temperature,
     Grade °F [°C]
     WPL6 -50 [-45]
     WPL9 -100 [-75]
     WPL3 -150 [-100]
     WPL8 -320 [-195]
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-420/SA-420M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     718
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     One or more of the supplementary requirements appearing in Specification A 960 may be
     included in the order or contract. When so included, a supplementary requirement shall
     have the same force as if it were in the body of the specification. Supplementary requirement
     details not fully described shall be agreed upon between the purchaser and the supplier.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS AND
     ELECTRIC-WELDED LOW-ALLOY STEEL TUBES
     SA-423/SA-423M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A423/A423M-95(R04).)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-423/SA-423M
     719
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-423/SA-423M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     720
     SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS AND
     ELECTRIC-WELDED LOW-ALLOY STEEL TUBES
     SA-423/SA-423M
     [Identical with ASTM Specification A 423/A 423M-95(R04).]
120. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers minimum-wall-thickness,
     seamless and electric-resistance welded, low-alloy steel
     tubes for pressure containing parts such as economizers or
     other applications where corrosion resistance is important.
     1.2 The tubing sizes and thicknesses usually furnished
     to this specification are 1/2 to 5 in. [12.7 to 127 mm] in
     outside diameter and 0.035 to 0.500 in. [0.9 to 12.7 mm]
     inclusive, in minimum wall thicknesses. Tubing having
     other dimensions may be furnished, provided such tubes
     comply with all other requirements of this specification.
     1.3 Mechanical property requirements do not apply to
     tubing smaller than 1/4 in. [3.2 mm] in inside diameter or
     0.015 in. [0.4 mm] in thickness.
     1.4 An optional supplementary requirement is provided
     and, when desired, shall be so stated in the order.
     1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
     units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
     text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
     in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
     system must be used independently of the other. Combining
     values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
     with the specification. The inch-pound units shall apply
     unless the “M” designation of this specification is specified
     in the order.
121. Referenced Document
     2.1 ASTM Standard:
     E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
     and Tubing
     E 273 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Longitudinal
     Welded Pipe and Tubing
     A 450/A 450M Specification for General Requirements for
     Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel Tubes
122. Ordering Information
     3.1 Orders for material under this specification shall
     include the following, as required, to describe the desired
     material adequately;
     3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
     3.1.2 Name of material (seamless or electric-resistance
     welded tubes),
     3.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
     3.1.4 Manufacture (hot finished or cold finished),
     3.1.5 Size (outside diameter and minimum wall
     thickness)
     3.1.6 Length (specific or random),
     3.1.7 Optional requirements (hydrostatic or electric
     test, 13.7),
     3.1.8 Test report required (see Certification Section
     of Specification A 450/A 450M),
     3.1.9 Specification designation, and
     3.1.10 Special requirements and any supplementary
     requirements selected.
123. Manufacture
     4.1 Tubes made by the seamless process may be hot
     finished or cold finished.
124. Heat Treatment
     5.1 All tubes shall be normalized or given such heat
     treatment as may be necessary to conform to the requirements
     of this specification.
125. Chemical Composition
     6.1 The steel shall conform to requirements as to chemical
     composition prescribed in Table 1.
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-423/SA-423M
     721
126. Product Analysis
     7.1 An analysis of either one billet, one length of flatrolled
     stock or one tube shall be made from each heat. The
     chemical composition thus determined shall conform to
     the requirements specified.
     7.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests
     of two additional billets, lengths of flat-rolled stock, or
     tubes shall be made. Both retests, for the elements in question
     shall meet the requirements of the specification; otherwise
     all remaining material in the heat or lot (Note 1) shall
     be rejected or, at the option of the producer, each billet,
     length of flat-rolled stock or tube may be individually tested
     for acceptance. Billets, lengths of flat-rolled stock or tubes
     which do not meet the requirements of the specification
     shall be rejected.
     NOTE 1—For flattening, flaring, and flange requirements, the term lot
     applies to all tubes prior to cutting of the same nominal size and wall
     thickness that are produced from the same heat of steel. When final heat
     treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes
     of the same size and from the same heat which are heat treated in the
     same furnace charge. When the final heat treatment is in a continuous
     furnace the number of tubes of the same size and from the same heat in
     a lot shall be determined from the size of the tubes as prescribed in Table 2.
     NOTE 2—For tensile and hardness test requirements, the term lot applies
     to all tubes prior to cutting, of the same nominal diameter and wall
     thickness that are produced from the same heat of steel. When final heat
     treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes
     of the same size and the same heat which are heat treated in the same
     furnace charge. When the final heat treatment is in a continuous furnace,
     a lot shall include all tubes of the same size and heat, heat treated in the
     same furnace at the same temperature, time at heat, and furnace speed.
127. Tensile Requirements
     8.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as
     to tensile properties prescribed in Table 3.
128. Hardness Requirements
     9.1 The tubes shall have a hardness number not
     exceeding 170 HB or 87 HRB.
129. Forming Operations
     10.1 Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand
     expanding and beading without showing cracks or flaws.
130. Mechanical Tests Required
     11.1 Tension Test — One tension test shall be made
     on a specimen for lots of not more than 50 tubes. Tension
     tests shall be made on specimens from two tubes for lots
     of more than 50 tubes (Note 2).
     11.2 Flattening Test — One flattening test shall be
     made on specimens from each end of one finished tube,
     not the one used for the flaring or flanging test, from each
     lot (Note 1).
     11.3 Flaring Test (Seamless Tubes) — One flaring test
     shall be made on specimens from each end of one finished
     tube, not the one used for the flattening test, from each lot
     (Note 1).
     11.4 Flange Test (Welded Tubes) — One flange test
     shall be made on specimens from each end of one finished
     tube, not the one used for the flattening test, from each lot
     (Note 1).
     11.5 Hardness Test — Brinell or Rockwell hardness
     tests shall be made on specimens from two tubes from
     each lot (Note 2).
     11.6 Reverse Flattening Test — For welded tubes, one
     reverse flattening test shall be made on a specimen from
     each 1500 ft [460 m] of finished tubing.
     11.7 Hydrostatic or Nondestructive Electric Test —
     Each tube shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test, or,
     instead of this test, a nondestructive electric test may be
     used when specified by the purchaser.
131. General Requirements
     12.1 Material furnished under this specification should
     conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition
     of Specification A 450/A 450M, unless otherwise provided
     herein.
132. Product Marking
     13.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
     A 450/A 450M, the marking shall include whether
     hot finished or cold finished, and whether seamless or
     welded.
133. Keywords
     14.1 Seamless steel tube; steel tube; alloy; welded
     steel tube
     SA-423/SA-423M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     722
     TABLE 1
     CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
     Composition, %
     Grade 1 Grade 2
     Carbon, max 0.15 0.15
     Manganese, max 0.55 0.50–1.00
     Phosphorus 0.06–0.16 0.04 max
     Sulfur, max 0.060 0.05
     Silicon, min 0.10 . . .
     Copper 0.20–0.60 0.30–1.00
     Chromium 0.24–1.31 . . .
     Nickel 0.20–0.70 0.40–1.10
     Molybdenum, min . . . 0.10
     TABLE 2
     NUMBER OF TUBES IN A LOT HEAT TREATED BY
     THE CONTINUOUS PROCESS
     Size of Tube Size of Lot
     2 in. [50.8 mm] and over in outside diameter not more than 50
     and 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] and over in wall tubes
     thickness
     Less than 2 in. [50.8 mm] but over 1 in. not more than 75
     [25.4 mm] in outside diameter or over 1 tubes
     in. [25.4 mm] in outside diameter and
     under 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] in wall
     thickness
     1 in. [25.4 mm] or less in outside diameter not more than 125
     tubes
     TABLE 3
     TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
     Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa] 60 [415]
     Yield strength, min, or 50 mm, ksi [MPa] 37 [255]
     Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, % 25
     For longitudinal strip tests a deduction for each 1.25A
     1/32 in. [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickness below
     3/16 in. [8 mm] from the basic minimum elongation of
     the following percentage points shall be made
     A Calculated elongation requirements shall be rounded to the
     nearest whole number.
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-423/SA-423M
     723
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     The following supplementary requirement shall apply only when specified by the purchaser
     in the inquiry, contract, or order. Details of this supplemental requirement shall be agreed
     upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser.
     S1. Surface Condition
     S1.1 If pickling or shot-blasting, or both, are required, this shall be specifically stated in the order and shall be done
     at the purchaser’s expense.
     SA-423/SA-423M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     724
     ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     The following supplementary requirements may become a part of the specification when
     specified in the inquiry or invitation to bid, and purchase order or contract. These requirements
     shall not be considered unless specified in the order and the necessary tests shall be
     made at the mill.
     S2. Additional Testing of Welded Tubing per
     ASME Request
     S2.1 Each tube shall be subjected to an ultrasonic
     inspection employing Practices E 273 or E 213 with the
     rejection criteria referenced in Specification
     A 450/A 450M.
     S2.2 If Practice E 273 is employed, a 100% volumetric
     inspection of the entire length of each tube shall also be
     performed using one of the non-destructive electric tests
     permitted by Specification A 450/A 450M.
     S2.3 The test methods described in the supplement may
     not be capable of inspecting the end portions of tubes. This
     condition is referred to as end effect. This portion, as
     determined by the manufacturer, shall be removed and
     discarded.
     S2.4 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification
     A 450/A 450M, “S2” shall be added after the grade
     designation.
     SPECIFICATION FOR CENTRIFUGALLY CAST FERRITIC
     ALLOY STEEL PIPE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
     SA-426/SA-426M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A426/A426M-13.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-426/SA-426M
     725
     SA-426/SA-426M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     726
     Standard Specification for
     Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-
     Temperature Service
134. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers centrifugally cast alloy steel
     pipe intended for use in high-temperature, high-pressure service.
     1.2 Several grades of ferritic steels are covered. Their
     compositions are given in Table 1.
     1.3 Supplementary Requirements S1 through S12 are
     provided. The supplementary requirements provide for additional
     tests of an optional nature and when desired shall be so
     stated in the order (Section 4).
     1.4 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
     each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each
     system shall be used independently of the other. Combining
     values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
     with the standard.
     1.4.1 Within the text, the SI units are shown in brackets.
     1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
     safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
     responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appropriate
     safety and health practices and determine the applicability
     of regulatory limitations prior to use.
135. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
     of Steel Products
     A609/A609M Practice for Castings, Carbon, Low-Alloy,
     and Martensitic Stainless Steel, Ultrasonic Examination
     Thereof
     A941 Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related
     Alloys, and Ferroalloys
     A999/A999M Specification for General Requirements for
     Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe
     E94 Guide for Radiographic Examination
     E165 Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General
     Industry
     E186 Reference Radiographs for Heavy-Walled (2 to 41/2-in.
     (50.8 to 114-mm)) Steel Castings
     E208 Test Method for Conducting Drop-Weight Test to
     Determine Nil-Ductility Transition Temperature of Ferritic
     Steels
     E280 Reference Radiographs for Heavy-Walled (41/2 to 12-
     in. (114 to 305-mm)) Steel Castings
     E446 Reference Radiographs for Steel Castings Up to 2 in.
     (50.8 mm) in Thickness
     E709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing
     2.2 ANSI Standard:
     B46.1 Surface Texture
     2.3 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
     Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications
136. Ordering Information
     3.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
     the following, as required, to describe the desired material
     adequately:
     3.1.1 Quantity (feet, centimetres, or number of lengths),
     3.1.2 Name of material (centrifugally cast pipe),
     3.1.3 Specification number,
     3.1.4 Grade (Table 1),
     3.1.5 Size (outside or inside diameter and minimum wall
     thickness),
     3.1.6 Length (specific or random) (Section on Permissible
     Variations in Length of Specification A999/A999M),
     3.1.7 End finish (Section on Ends of Specification A999/
     A999M),
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-426/SA-426M
     727
     3.1.8 Optional Requirements S1 through S12 and Section
     14.1,
     3.1.9 Test report required (Section on Certified Test Report
     of Specification A999/A999M),
     3.1.10 Service temperature if over 1000°F [540°C] (Note 1),
     and
     3.1.11 Special requirements or additions to specification.
137. General Requirements for Delivery
     4.1 Material furnished under this specification shall conform
     to the applicable requirements of the current edition of
     Specification A999/A999M unless otherwise provided herein.
138. Materials and Manufacture
     5.1 Heat-Treatment—The pipe shall be furnished in the
     austenitized and tempered condition (Note 1) according to the
     requirements of Table 2.
     5.1.1 Heat treatment shall be performed after the pipe has
     been allowed to cool below the transformation range. Definition
     of heat-treatment terms shall be as given in Terminology
     A941.
     NOTE 1—It is recommended that the temperature for tempering should
     be at least 100°F [55°C] above the intended service temperature. The
     purchaser shall advise the manufacturer of the service temperature when
     it is over 1000°F [540°C]. (See 3.1.10.)
     5.2 Machining—The pipe shall be machined on the inner
     and outer surfaces to a roughness value no greater than 250 µ
     in. [6.35 µm] arithmetical average deviation (AA) from the
     mean line unless otherwise specified as in ANSI B46.1.
139. Chemical Analysis
     6.1 Heat Analysis—An analysis of each heat shall be made
     by the manufacturer to determine the percentages of elements
     specified in Table 1. The analysis shall be made on a test
     sample taken preferable during the pouring of the heat. The
     chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the
     requirements specified in Table 1.
     6.2 Product Analysis—A product analysis may be made by
     the purchaser. The sample for analysis shall be selected so as to
     be representative of the pipe being analyzed. The chemical
     composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements
     of Table 1.
140. Tensile and Hardness Requirements
     7.1 Steel used for the castings shall conform to the tensile
     and hardness requirements specified in Table 3.
141. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
     8.1 Thickness—The wall thickness shall not vary over that
     specified by more than 1/8 in. [3 mm]. There shall be no
     variation under the specified wall thickness.
142. Number of Tests
     9.1 One tension and one hardness test shall be made from
     each heat.
     9.2 If a specimen is machined improperly or if flaws are
     revealed by machining or during testing, the specimen may be
     discarded and another substituted from the same heat.
143. Retests
     10.1 If the results of the mechanical tests for any heat do not
     conform to the requirements specified, the castings may be
     reheat-treated and retested, but may not be re-austenitized
     more than twice.
144. Test Specimens
     11.1 Test coupons from which tension test specimens are
     prepared shall be removed from heat-treated casting prolongations.
     TABLE 1 Chemical RequirementsA
     Composition, %
     Grade
     UNS
     Number
     Carbon Manganese
     Phosphorus,
     max
     Sulfur,
     max
     Silicon Chromium Molybdenum
     CP1 J12521 0.25
     max
     0.30-0.80 0.030 0.025 0.10-0.50 … 0.44-0.65
     CP2 J11547 0.10–0.20 0.30-0.61 0.030 0.025 0.10-0.50 0.50-0.81 0.44-0.65
     CP5 J42045 0.20
     max
     0.30-0.70 0.030 0.025 0.75
     max
     4.00-6.50 0.45-0.65
     CP5b J51545 0.15
     max
     0.30-0.60 0.030 0.025 1.00-2.00 4.00-6.00 0.45-0.65
     CP9 J82090 0.20
     max
     0.30-0.65 0.030 0.025 0.25-1.00 8.00-10.00 0.90-1.20
     CP11 J12072 0.05–0.20 0.30-0.80 0.030 0.025 0.60
     max
     1.00-1.50 0.44-0.65
     CP12 J11562 0.05–0.15 0.30-0.61 0.030 0.025 0.50
     max
     0.80-1.25 0.44-0.65
     CP15 J11522 0.15
     max
     0.30-0.60 0.030 0.025 1.15-1.65 … 0.44-0.65
     CP21 J31545 0.05–0.15 0.30-0.60 0.030 0.025 0.50
     max
     2.65-3.35 0.80-1.06
     CP22 J21890 0.05–0.15 0.30-0.70 0.030 0.025 0.60
     max
     2.00-2.75 0.90-1.20
     CPCA15 J91150 0.15
     max
     1.00
     max
     0.030 0.025 1.50
     max
     11.5-14.0 0.50
     max
     A Where ellipses appear in this table, there is no requirement.
     SA-426/SA-426M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     728
     11.2 When agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
     purchaser, test coupons from which test specimens are prepared
     shall be cast attached to separate blocks from the same
     heat as the casting represented. The test blocks shall be heat
     treated in the same manner as the casting represented.
     11.3 Tension test specimens shall be machined to the form
     and dimensions of the standard round 2-in. [50-mm] gage
     length specimens shown in Fig. 6 of Test Methods and
     Definitions A370.
145. Hydrostatic Test
     12.1 Each length of pipe shall be hydrostatically tested in
     accordance with Specification A999/A999M.
     12.2 When agreed to between the manufacturer and the
     purchaser and so stated in the order, the hydrostatic test may be
     deferred and shall be performed later by the purchaser. Pipe
     furnished without the hydrostatic test shall include with the
     mandatory marking the letters “NH.” The manufacturer is
     responsible for the satisfactory performance of the casting
     when it is tested.
     12.3 When certification is required by the purchaser and the
     hydrostatic test has been omitted, the certification shall clearly
     state “not hydrostatically tested.” The specification number and
     material grade shown on the certification shall be followed by
     the letters “NH.”
146. Visual Inspection
     13.1 The surface of the casting shall be free from cracks and
     hot tears as determined by visual examination. Other surface
     imperfections shall be judged in accordance with visual acceptance
     criteria which may be specified in the order.
147. Rework and Retreatment
     14.1 Defects as defined in Section 13 shall be removed and
     their removal verified by visual inspection of the resultant
     cavities. Defects that are located by inspecting with supplementary
     requirements S6, S7, S8, or S9 shall be removed or
     reduced to an acceptable size.
     14.2 If removal of the defect does not infringe upon the
     minimum wall thickness, the depression may be blended
     uniformly into the surrounding surface.
     14.3 If the cavity resulting from defect removal infringes
     upon the minimum wall thickness, weld repair is permitted
     subject to the purchaser’s approval. The composition of the
     weld rod used shall be suitable for the composition of the metal
     being welded.
     14.3.1 Only welders and procedures qualified in accordance
     with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, shall
     be used. All repair welds will be inspected to the same quality
     standards used to inspect the casting.
     14.4 Local or full heat treatment in accordance with tempering
     temperatures specified in 5.1 shall follow welding.
     TABLE 2 Heat Treatment Requirements
     Grade
     Austenitizing
     Treatment
     Tempering
     Temperature,
     min, unless
     a range is
     shown, °F
     [°C]
     CP1 Normalized
     or Liquid
     Quenched
     1100 [595]
     CP2 Normalized
     or Liquid
     Quenched
     1100 [595]
     CP5 Normalized
     or Liquid
     Quenched
     1250 [675]
     CP5b Normalized
     or Liquid
     Quenched
     1250 [675]
     CP9 Normalized
     or Liquid
     Quenched
     1250 [675]
     CP11 Normalized
     or Liquid
     Quenched
     1100 [595]
     CP12 Normalized
     or Liquid
     Quenched
     1100 [595]
     CP15 Normalized
     or Liquid
     Quenched
     1100 [595]
     CP21 Normalized
     or Liquid
     Quenched
     1250 [675]
     CP22 Normalized
     or Liquid
     Quenched
     1250 [675]
     CPCA15 Normalized
     or Liquid
     Quenched
     1250 [675]
     TABLE 3 Tensile Properties and Hardness Requirements
     Tensile strength, min: psi [MPa]
     Grade CP1 65 000 [450]
     Grades CP11, CP22 70 000 [485]
     Grades CP5, CP9, CPCA15 90 000 [620]
     All other grades 60 000 [415]
     Yield strength, min: psi [MPa]
     Grade CP1 35 000 [240]
     Grades CP11, CP22 40 000 [275]
     Grades CP5, CP9 60 000 [415]
     Grade CPCA15 65 000 [450]
     All other grades 30 000 [205]
     Elongation, min: %A
     Grade CP1 24
     Grades CP11, CP22 20
     Grades CP5, CP9, CPCA15 18
     All other grades 22
     Reduction of area, min: %
     Grades CP1, CP2, CP11, CP12, CP15,
     CP21, CP22, CP5, CP5b, CP7, CP9
     35
     Grade CPCA15 30
     Hardness: HBW
     Grades CP5, CP5b, CP9, CPCA15, max 225
     All other grades, max 201
     A Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] using a standard round specimen, in either the
     transverse or longitudinal direction.
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-426/SA-426M
     729
148. Rejection
     15.1 Each length of pipe received from the manufacturer
     may be inspected by the purchaser and, if it does not meet the
     requirements of the specification based on the inspection and
     test method as outlined in the specification, the pipe may be
     rejected and the manufacturer shall be notified. Disposition of
     rejected pipe shall be a matter of agreement between the
     manufacturer and the purchaser.
149. Product Marking
     16.1 Each length of pipe shall be legibly marked with the
     manufacturer’s name or brand, the specification number and
     grade. In addition, heat numbers or serial numbers that are
     traceable to heat numbers shall be marked on each length of
     pipe.
150. Keywords
     17.1 alloy steel; centrifugal; ferritic; high-temperature service;
     pipe; stainless steel; steel castings
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     Supplementary requirements shall be applied only when specified by the purchaser. Details of the
     supplementary requirements shall be agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser. The
     specified tests shall be performed by the manufacturer prior to shipment of the castings.
     S1. Additional Tension Tests
     S1.1 Additional tension tests shall be made at a temperature
     to be specified by the customer, and the properties to be met are
     a matter of agreement between the purchaser and manufacturer.
     S2. Flattening Test
     S2.1 The flattening test shall be made on specimens from
     one or both ends of each length of pipe. If the specimen from
     any end of any length fails to conform to the requirements of
     Specification A999/A999M, that length shall be rejected.
     S3. Photomicrographs
     S3.1 The manufacturer shall furnish one photomicrograph at
     100 diameters from one specimen of as-finished pipe from each
     heat in each heat-treatment lot. Such photomicrographs shall
     be suitable identified as to pipe size, wall thickness, and heat.
     Such photomicrographs are for information only, to show the
     actual metal structure of the pipe as furnished. No photomicrographs
     for the individual pieces purchased shall be required
     except as specified in Section S4.
     S4. Photomicrographs for Individual Pieces
     S4.1 The manufacturer shall furnish photomicrographs from
     one or both ends of each pipe. All photomicrographs required
     shall be properly identified as to heat number, size, and wall
     thickness of pipe from which the section was taken. Photomicrographs
     shall be further identified to permit association of
     each photomicrograph with the individual length of pipe it
     represents.
     S5. Metal Structure and Etching Tests
     S5.1 Etching tests shall be made on transverse sections from
     the pipe and shall reveal the macrostructure of the material.
     Such tests are for information only.
     S6. Radiographic Examination
     S6.1 The castings shall be examined for internal defects by
     means of X rays or gamma rays. The inspection procedure shall
     be in accordance with Guide E94 and the types and degrees of
     discontinuities considered shall be judged by Reference Radiographs
     E186, E280, or E446. The extent of the examination
     and the basis for acceptance shall be subject to agreement
     between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
     S7. Liquid Penetrant Examination
     S7.1 The castings shall be examined for surface discontinuities
     by means of liquid penetrant inspection. The method of
     performing the liquid penetrant test shall be in accordance with
     Practice E165. The areas to be inspected, the methods and
     types of liquid penetrants to be used, the developing procedure,
     and the basis for acceptance shall be as specified on the inquiry
     or invitation to bid and on the purchase order or contract or
     both, or as agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser.
     S8. Magnetic Particle Inspection
     S8.1 The castings shall be examined by magnetic particle
     inspection. The inspection procedure used shall be in accordance
     with Practice E709. The extent of examination and the
     basis for acceptance shall be subject to agreement between the
     manufacturer and the purchaser.
     S9. Ultrasonic Inspection
     S9.1 The castings shall be examined ultrasonically in accordance
     with Practice A609/A609M. The extent of the examination
     and the basis of acceptance shall be subject to agreement
     between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
     S10. Residual Elements
     S10.1 An analysis for the elements specified in Table S1.1
     shall be included in those analyses specified in Section 6. The
     chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the
     requirements of Table S1.1.
     SA-426/SA-426M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     730
     S11. Charpy Impact Test
     S11.1 Charpy impact test properties shall be determined on
     each heat from a set of three Charpy V-notch specimens. The
     test coupons shall be taken as specified for tension specimens
     in Section 11 and tested at a test temperature agreed upon by
     the manufacturer and purchaser. The acceptance requirements
     shall be either energy absorbed or lateral expansion or percent
     shear area, and shall be that agreed upon by the manufacturer
     and purchaser. Test specimens shall be prepared as Type A and
     tested in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A370.
     S11.2 Absorbed Energy Value, of three specimens shall not
     be less than that agreed upon by the manufacturer and
     purchaser, with no more than one value permitted below the
     minimum average specified and no value permitted below the
     minimum specified for a single specimen.
     S11.3 Lateral Expansion Value, shall be agreed upon by the
     manufacturer and purchaser.
     S11.4 Percent Shear Area, shall be agreed upon by the
     manufacturer and purchaser.
     S12. Drop Weight Test
     S12.1 Drop weight test properties shall be determined by
     preparing and testing either Type P1, P2, or P3 specimens in
     accordance with Test Method E208. The test coupons shall be
     taken as specified for tension specimens in Section 11. The
     crack starter weld shall be deposited on the surface of the
     specimen which was nearest to the casting surface. Each test
     shall consist of at least two specimens tested at a temperature
     agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser. Each specimen
     shall exhibit a “no break” performance.
     TABLE S1.1 Residual Elements
     Grade
     Copper,
     max
     Nickel,
     max
     Chromium,
     max
     Tungsten,
     max
     Total Contents of
     These
     Unspecified Elements,
     max, %
     CP1 0.50 0.50 0.35 0.10 1.00
     CP2 0.50 0.50 … 0.10 1.00
     CP5 0.50 0.50 … 0.10 1.00
     CP5b 0.50 0.50 … 0.10 1.00
     CP7 0.50 0.50 … 0.10 1.00
     CP9 0.50 0.50 … 0.10 1.00
     CP11 0.50 0.50 … 0.10 1.00
     CP12 0.50 0.50 … 0.10 1.00
     CP15 0.50 0.50 0.35 0.10 1.00
     CP21 0.50 0.50 … 0.10 1.00
     CP22 0.50 0.50 … 0.10 1.00
     CPCA15 0.50 1.00 … 0.10 1.50
     ð19Þ
     SPECIFICATION FOR STRAIGHT-BEAM ULTRASONIC
     EXAMINATION OF STEEL PLATES
     SA-435/SA-435M
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-435/SA-435M
     731
     SA-435/SA-435M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     732
     The latest adopted edition of SA-435/SA-435M may be found in Section V.
     SPECIFICATION FOR STAINLESS AND ALLOY-STEEL
     TURBINE-TYPE BOLTING SPECIALLY HEAT TREATED
     FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
     SA-437/SA-437M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A437/A437M-12.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-437/SA-437M
     733
     SA-437/SA-437M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     734
     Standard Specification for
     Stainless and Alloy-Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Specially
     Heat Treated for High-Temperature Service
151. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers stainless and alloy-steel bolting
     specially heat treated for high-temperature service, such as
     steam turbine, gas turbine, and similar uses. See Specification
     A962/A962M for the definition of bolting. This material
     requires special processing and should not be used in generalpurpose
     applications. Bolting furnished as bars shall be hot
     wrought and may be further processed by centerless grinding
     or by cold drawing.
     1.2 The high-temperature properties of the bolting covered
     by this specification are dependent upon special heat treatment,
     which is required. Although the high-temperature properties
     are not specified, they are implied by control of the chemistry,
     heat treatment, and room-temperature properties of the material.
     1.3 Three levels of bolting strength are covered, designated
     Grades B4B, B4C, and B4D.
     1.4 The following referenced general requirements are indispensable
     for application of this specification: Specification
     A962/A962M.
     1.5 Supplementary requirements are provided for use at the
     option of the purchaser. The supplementary requirements shall
     apply only when specified individually by the purchaser in the
     purchase order or contract.
     1.6 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound units
     and in SI units; however, unless the purchase order or contract
     specifies the applicable M specification designation (SI units),
     the inch-pound units shall apply.
     1.7 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
     SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
     system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
     shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
     from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the
     standard.
152. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A962/A962M Specification for Common Requirements for
     Bolting Intended for Use at Any Temperature from Cryogenic
     to the Creep Range
     E292 Test Methods for Conducting Time-for-Rupture Notch
     Tension Tests of Materials
     E112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
153. Ordering Information
     3.1 It shall be the responsibility of the purchaser to specify
     all requirements necessary for product under this specification.
     Such requirements to be considered include, but are not limited
     to, the following:
     3.1.1 Specification designation, grade, issue date, and revision
     letter,
     3.1.2 Quantity (weight or number of pieces),
     3.1.3 Description (bars, bolts, nuts, etc.),
     3.1.4 Dimensions,
     3.1.5 Finish, and
     3.1.6 Impact testing of nuts, if required (see Section 8).
154. Common Requirements
     4.1 Bolting supplied to this specification shall conform to
     the requirements of Specification A962/A962M. These requirements
     include test methods, finish, thread dimensions,
     macroetch (Grade B4D only), marking, certification, optional
     supplementary requirements, and others. Failure to comply
     with the requirements of Specification A962/A962M constitutes
     nonconformance with this specification. In case of conflict
     between this specification and Specification A962/
     A962M, this specification shall prevail.
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-437/SA-437M
     735
155. Heat Treatment
     5.1 Grades B4B and B4C shall be heated to a temperature
     range of 1875 to 1925 °F [1025 to 1050 °C] and liquid
     quenched to below 600 °F [316 °C]. The material Grades B4B
     and B4C shall then be uniformly reheated for tempering at a
     tempering temperature at least 100 °F [55 °C] higher than the
     proposed operating temperature but not less than 1150 °F [620
     °C], then air or furnace cooled to room temperature. The
     material shall be at the tempering temperature for a minimum
     of 2 h. Double tempering may be used to enhance properties.
     5.2 Grade B4D shall be heated to a temperature range of
     1700 to 1750 °F [925 to 954 °C] and oil quenched. The
     material shall then be uniformly reheated or tempered at a
     temperature of 1200 °F [650 °C] minimum, followed by air or
     furnace cooling to room temperature.
     5.3 Stress relieving treatment of the bar material is required
     after any stretcher, roller, or rotary-straightening or coldfinishing
     operations performed after heat treatment for mechanical
     properties. Local gagging or press straightening to
     correct camber limitations in excess of 1/4 in. in any 5 ft [6 mm
     in any 1.5 m] shall be followed by a stress relieving heat
     treatment. The minimum stress relieving temperature shall be
     100 °F [55 °C] below the minimum tempering temperature as
     shown in 5.1 for Grades B4B and B4C or in 5.2 for Grade
     B4D.
156. Chemical Composition
     6.1 Material shall conform to the requirements as to chemical
     composition specified in Table 1.
157. Tensile Requirements
     7.1 Material shall conform to the requirements as to tensile
     properties prescribed in Table 2 at room temperature after heat
     treatment.
     7.2 The longitudinal axis of the test specimen shall be
     parallel to the direction of rolling.
158. Impact Requirements
     8.1 Grades B4B, B4C, and B4D shall conform to the
     requirements as to impact properties prescribed in Table 3 at
     room temperature after heat treatment.
159. Hardness Tests
     9.1 Grades B4B, B4C, and B4D shall conform to the
     requirements as to hardness as prescribed in Table 4 and Table
     5 at room temperature after heat treatment.
160. Nuts
     10.1 When specified by the purchaser, nuts shall be subject
     to the impact and tension requirements of this specification.
     The tests shall be made on test specimens taken from the bar or
     plate used in the manufacture of the nuts.
161. Threads
     11.1 All threads shall be formed after heat treatment.
162. Nondestructive Inspection
     12.1 Each bar or forged blank of starting material shall be
     subjected to NDE following final heat treatment. The method
     used shall be either the Eddy Current (EC), the Magnetic
     Particle (MPI) (wet or dry), the Liquid Penetrant (LPI), the
     Ultrasonic (UT), or the Visual Testing (VT), at the option of the
     producer. For LPI or MPI, linear indications (those indications
     longer than 1/16 in. [1.5 mm] with a length greater than three
     times their width) are unacceptable. For UT or ET, reject levels
     for linear indications shall be based on the alarm response from
     a surface notch with a maximum depth of 0.012 in. [0.30 mm]
     in a calibration bar. Product being subjected to VT shall be
     pickled prior to inspection. VT indications longer than 1/8 in.
     [3.2 mm] are prohibited.
     TABLE 1 Chemical RequirementsA
     Element Grades B4B, B4CB Grade B4D
     Range, % Product
     Variation, %,
     Over or
     Under
     Range, % Product
     Variation, %,
     Over or
     Under
     Carbon 0.20–0.25 0.02 0.36–0.44 0.02
     Manganese 0.50–1.00 0.03 0.45–0.70 0.03
     Phosphorus, max 0.025 0.005 over 0.04 0.005 over
     Sulfur, max 0.025 0.005 over 0.04 0.005 over
     Silicon 0.20–0.50 0.05 0.20–0.35 0.02
     Nickel 0.50–1.00 0.03 … …
     Chromium 11.0–12.5 0.15 0.80–1.15 0.05
     Molybdenum 0.90–1.25 0.05 0.50–0.65 0.03
     Vanadium 0.20–0.30 0.03 0.25–0.35 0.03
     Tungsten 0.90–1.25 0.05 … …
     Aluminum, maxC 0.05 … 0.015 …
     Titanium, max 0.05 … … …
     Tin, max 0.04 … … …
     A Steel to which lead has been added shall not be used.
     B UNS S42200.
     C Total, Soluble + Insoluble
     TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
     Grade Diameter, in. [mm] Tensile
     Strength,
     min, ksi
     [MPa]
     Yield
     Strength
     (0.2 %
     offset) min,
     ksi [MPa]
     Elongation
     in 2 in. or
     50 mm,
     min, %
     Reduction
     of Area,
     min, %
     B4B … 145 [1000] 105 [720] 13 30
     B4C … 115 [790] 85 [585] 18 50
     B4D 21/2 [65] and under 125 105 18 50
     [860] [720]
     over 21/2 to 4 [65 to
     100]
     110
     [760]
     95
     [655]
     17 45
     over 4 to 7 [100 to
     180]
     100
     [690]
     85
     [585]
     16 45
     TABLE 3 Impact Requirements
     Grade Minimum Impact Value, ft·lbf [J]
     B4B 10 [14]
     B4C 25 [34]
     B4DA 25 [34]
     A For bars over 5-in. [127-mm] diameter only.
     SA-437/SA-437M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     736
163. Certification
     13.1 Certification is required. See Specification A962/
     A962M.
164. Product Marking
     14.1 Use the grade symbol shown in Table 4. See Specification
     A962/A962M.
165. Keywords
     15.1 bolts—steel; chromium alloy steel; fasteners—steel;
     marking on fasteners; nuts—steel; stainless steel; steel bars—
     alloy; steel bolting material; temperature service
     applications—high; turbine materials
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall be applied only when specified by
     the purchaser in the inquiry, contract, or order; in which event the specified tests shall be made before
     shipment of the product.
     S1. Non-Destructive Examination
     S1.1 NDE is required following all machining and threading.
     The acceptance criteria of 12.1 shall apply.
     S2. Stress Rupture Testing—Grade B4B
     S2.1 Stress rupture testing shall be conducted at 1200 °F
     [650 °C] and 26 000 psi [180 MPa] using a combination test
     bar in accordance with Test Methods E292. Rupture shall occur
     in the smooth section of each test specimen. The test may be
     discontinued after 25 h provided the certification so notes.
     Stress rupture testing is not required on bars less than 1/2 in.
     [12.7 mm] in diameter or thickness.
     S3. Grain Size—Grades B4B and B4C
     S3.1 The average grain size shall be 4 or finer. The
     maximum size of individual grains, distributed at random, shall
     be a 2. When the average grain size is 5 or finer, only the
     average size need be reported. Grain size determination shall
     be performed in accordance with Test Methods E112.
     TABLE 4 Hardness Requirements for Bolts and Studs
     Grade Brinell Hardness Number,
     max
     B4B 331
     B4C 277
     B4D 302
     TABLE 5 Hardness Requirements for Nuts and Washers
     Grade Brinell Hardness
     Number
     Rockwell
     Hardness
     Number
     B4B 293–341 C 31–37
     B4C 229–277 C 21–29
     B4D 263–311 C 27–33
     SPECIFICATION FOR HEX CAP SCREWS, BOLTS AND
     STUDS, STEEL, HEAT TREATED, 120/105/90 ksi
     MINIMUM TENSILE STRENGTH, GENERAL USE
     SA-449
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A449-10 except for requiring that all mating fastener components be coated by the
     same zinc-coating process in 5.1.4, the removal of reference to bolts in 6.4, and the deletion of the term “private label
     distributor” in 16.1 and 16.3.2.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-449
     737
     SA-449 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     738
     Standard Specification for
     Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/
     105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use
166. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers quenched and tempered steel
     hex cap screws, bolts, and studs having a minimum tensile
     strength of 120 ksi for diameters 1.0 in. and smaller; 105 ksi for
     diameters over 1.0 in. to 11/2 in.; and 90 ksi for diameters 13/4
     in. to 3.0 in. inclusive. The term “fasteners” in this specification
     denotes hex cap screws, bolts, and studs.
     1.2 The fasteners are intended for general engineering use.
     1.3 The fasteners are furnished in diameters 1/4 to 3.0 in.
     inclusive. They are designated by type denoting chemical
     composition as follows:
     Type Description
     Type I Plain carbon steel, carbon boron steel, alloy
     steel, or alloy boron steel
     Type 2 Withdrawn 2003
     Type 3 Weathering steel
     1.4 Terms used in this specification are defined in Terminology
     F1789 unless otherwise defined in this specification.
     1.5 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
     as the standard. The values given in parentheses are provided
     for information purposes only.
     1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the
     safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
     responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appropriate
     safety and health practices and determine the applicability
     of regulatory limitations prior to use.
167. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
     A751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical
     Analysis of Steel Products
     B695 Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited
     on Iron and Steel
     D3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging
     F436 Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
     F606 Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical Properties
     of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners,
     Washers, Direct Tension Indicators, and Rivets
     F788/F788M Specification for Surface Discontinuities of
     Bolts, Screws, and Studs, Inch and Metric Series
     F1470 Practice for Fastener Sampling for Specified Mechanical
     Properties and Performance Inspection
     F1789 Terminology for F16 Mechanical Fasteners
     F2329 Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements
     for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts,
     Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners
     G101 Guide for Estimating the Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
     of Low-Alloy Steels
     2.2 ASME Standards:
     B 1.1 Unified Screw Threads
     B 18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws
     B 18.24 Part Identifying Number (PIN) Code System Standard
     for B18 Fastener Products
168. Ordering Information
     3.1 Orders for fasteners under this specification shall include
     the following:
     3.1.1 Quantity (number of pieces),
     3.1.2 Size, including nominal diameter and length,
     3.1.3 Name of product,
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-449
     739
     3.1.4 Type, that is, Type 1, or Type 3 as required,
     3.1.5 ASTM designation and year of issue, and
     3.1.6 Other components such as nuts and washers if required.
     3.1.7 Hot-Dip or Mechanically Deposited Zinc Coatings—
     For hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coatings covered by
     5.1 and requiring over-tapped nuts, specify the zinc coating
     process required, that is, hot-dip, mechanically deposited, or no
     preference (see 5.1).
     3.1.8 Other Coatings—Specify other protective coating if
     required (see 5.2).
     3.1.9 Specify if inspection at point of manufacture is required.
     3.1.10 Test reports if required.
     3.1.11 Supplementary or special requirements.
     3.1.12 For establishment of a part identifying system, see
     ASME B18.24.
     NOTE 1—A typical ordering description follows: 1000 pieces 1/8 in.
     diameter × 4.0 in. long hex cap screw, Type 1, ASTM A449–XX, each
     with one finished hex nut ASTM A563, Grade DH. Each component
     mechanically zinc coated in accordance with B695, Class 5, Type II.
     3.2 Suitable Nuts and Washers:
     3.2.1 Suitable nuts are covered in Specification A563.
     Unless otherwise specified, the grade and style of nut shall be
     as follows:
     Fastener Size and Surface Finish Nut Grade and StyleA
     1/4 to 11 /2 in., plain (or with a coating of insufficient
     thickness to require over-tapped nuts)
     B, hex
     Over 11/2 to 3 in., plain (or with a coating of insufficient
     thickness to require over-tapped nuts)
     A, heavy hex
     1/4 to 3 in., zinc-coated (or with a coating thickness
     requiring over-tapped nuts)
     DH, heavy hex
     1/4 to 3 in., Type 3 C3, DH3, heavy hex
     A Nuts of other grades and styles having specified proof load stresses (Specification
     A563, Table 3) greater than the specified grade and style of nut are suitable.
     3.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, washers ordered with
     fasteners shall be furnished to the requirements of Specification
     F436, Type 1 or Specification F436, Type 3. Washers for A449
     Type 3 fasteners shall conform to Specification F436 Type 3.
169. Materials and Manufacture
     4.1 Heat Treatment:
     4.1.1 Type 1 fasteners produced from medium carbon steel
     shall be quenched in a liquid medium from the austenitizing
     temperature.
     4.1.2 Type 1 fasteners produced from medium carbon steel
     to which chromium, nickel, molybdenum, or boron were
     intentionally added, and Type 3 fasteners, shall be quenched in
     oil from the austenitizing temperature.
     4.1.3 Type 1 and Type 3 fasteners, regardless of the steel
     used, shall be tempered by reheating to not less than 800°F.
     4.2 Threading—Threads shall be rolled, cut, or ground.
     4.3 Secondary Processing—If any processing which can
     affect the mechanical properties of the fasteners is performed
     after the initial testing, the fasteners shall be retested for all
     specified mechanical properties affected by the reprocessing.
170. Protective Coatings
     5.1 Zinc, Hot Dip, and Mechanically Deposited Requiring
     Over-tapped Nuts:
     5.1.1 When zinc-coated fasteners are required, the purchaser
     shall specify the zinc-coating process, such as, hot-dip,
     mechanically deposited, or no preference.
     5.1.2 When hot dip is specified, the fasteners shall be zinc
     coated by the hot-dip process in accordance with the requirements
     of Specification F2329.
     5.1.3 When mechanically deposited is specified, the fasteners
     shall be zinc coated by the mechanical deposition process
     in accordance with the requirements of Class 55 of Specification
     B695.
     5.1.4 When no preference is specified, the supplier may
     furnish either a hot-dip zinc coating in accordance with
     Specification F2329, or a mechanically deposited zinc coating
     in accordance with Specification B695, Class 55. All
     coating process, and the suppliers’ option shall be limited to
     one process per item with no mixed processes in a lot.
     NOTE 2—When the intended application requires that assembled
     tension exceeds 50 % of minimum bolt or stud proof load, an anti-galling
     lubricant may be needed. Application of such a lubricant to nuts and a test
     of the lubricant efficiency are provided in Supplementary Requirement S1
     of Specification A563 and should be specified when required.
     5.2 Other Coatings:
     5.2.1 When other coatings are required, the purchaser shall
     specify the coating specification, including the classification
     codes or grade numbers to identify the coating material,
     thickness, supplemental treatments, or other requirements to
     define the coating. The fasteners shall be coated in accordance
     with and conform to the specified coating specification.
     5.2.2 When a specification does not apply, the purchaser
     shall specify the desired coating, coating thickness, supplemental
     treatments, or other requirements to define the coating.
171. Chemical Composition
     6.1 Type 1 fasteners shall be plain carbon steel, carbon
     boron steel, alloy steel, or alloy boron steels, at the manufacturers
     option, conforming to the requirements in Table 1.
     6.2 Type 3 fasteners shall be weathering steel and shall
     conform to one of the chemical compositions specified in Table
172. The selection of the chemical composition, A, B, C, D, E or
     F, shall be a the option of the manufacuturer. See Guide G101
     for methods of estimating the atmospheric corrosion resistance
     of low alloy steel.
     6.3 Product analyses made on finished fasteners representing
     each lot shall conform to the product analysis requirements
     specified in Table 1 or Table 2, as applicable.
     6.4 Heats of steel to which bismuth, selenium, tellurium, or
     lead has been intentionally added shall not be permitted for
     bolts. Compliance shall be based on certification that heats of
     steel having any of the listed elements intentionally added were
     not used.
     6.5 Chemical analyses shall be performed in accordance
     with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A751.
     mating components shall be coated by the same zinc
     SA-449 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     740
173. Mechanical Properties
     7.1 Hardness—The fasteners shall conform to the hardness
     specified in Table 3. See Table 3, Note A.
     7.2 Tensile Properties:
     7.2.1 Except as permitted in 7.2.2 for long fasteners and
     7.2.3 for short fasteners, hex cap screws and hex and square
     head bolts in sizes 1.00 in. and smaller having a length of 21/4
     D and longer and sizes 11/8 to 11/2 in. inclusive having a length
     of 3D and longer shall be wedge tested full size. Bolts with
     heads other than hex or square shall be axially tested. Both
     wedge and axially tested hex cap screws and bolts shall
     conform to the proof load or alternative proof load, and
     minimum wedge tensile load in Tables 4 and 5, as applicable.
     The load applied during proof load testing shall be equal to or
     greater than the proof load in Table 4 or Table 5 as applicable.
     7.2.2 Hex cap screws and square head bolts larger than 11/2
     in. diameter, other than those excepted in 7.2.3, shall preferably
     be tested full size and when so tested shall conform to the
     tensile strength and either the specified proof load or yield
     strength requirements in Tables 4 and 5, as applicable. When
     equipment of sufficient capacity for full size testing is not
     available, or when the length of the bolt makes full size testing
     impractical, machined specimens shall be tested and shall
     conform to the requirements of Table 6.
     7.2.3 Sizes 1.00 in. and smaller having a length shorter than
     21/4 D down to 2D inclusive, which cannot be wedge tensile
     tested shall be axially tension tested full size and shall conform
     to the minimum tensile load and proof load or alternate proof
     load specified in Tables 4 and 5. Sizes 1.00 in. and smaller
     having a length shorter than 2D which cannot be axially tensile
     tested shall be qualified on the basis of hardness.
     7.2.4 Studs 3D and longer shall be axially tension tested full
     size and shall conform to the tensile and proof load or alternate
     proof load specified in Table 4 and Table 5, as applicable.
     When equipment for full size testing is not available, or when
     the studs are too long for full size testing, machined specimens
     shall be tested and shall conform to the tensile requirements in
     Table 6.
     7.2.5 If fasteners are subjected to both hardness and tensile
     tests, the tensile test results shall take precedence in the event
     of low hardness test results.
     7.2.6 If fasteners are subjected to both full size and machined
     specimen tests, the full size test results shall take
     precedence if the results of the two methods differ.
174. Dimensions
     8.1 Head and Body:
     8.1.1 Hex Cap Screws—Unless otherwise specified, hex cap
     screws shall be furnished with dimensions conforming to
     ASME B18.2.1.
     8.1.2 Bolts—When styles other than specified in 8.1.1 are
     required, they shall have dimensions conforming to those
     specified by the purchaser.
     8.1.3 Studs—Studs shall have dimensions conforming to
     those specified by the purchaser.
     8.2 Threads:
     8.2.1 Uncoated—Unless otherwise specified, uncoated
     threads shall be the Unified Coarse Thread Series as specified
     in the latest issue of ASME B1.1, and shall have Class 2A
     tolerances.
     8.2.2 Coated—Unless otherwise specified, zinc-coated
     bolts, to be used with zinc-coated nuts or tapped holes, which
     are tapped oversize in accordance with Specification A563,
     shall have UNC Class 2A threads before hot-dip or mechanically
     deposited zinc-coating. After zinc coating, the pitch
     diameter and major diameter shall not exceed the Class 2A
     limits by more than the following amounts:
     Nominal Diameter, in.
     Oversize Limit, in.A
     Hot-Dip Zinc Mechanical Zinc
     1/4 0.016 0.012
     5/16, 3/8 0.017 0.012
     7/16, 1/2 0.018 0.012
     9/16, 5/8,3/4 0.020 0.013
     7/8 0.022 0.015
     1.0 to 11/4 0.024 0.016
     13/8, 11/2 0.027 0.018
     13/4 to 3.0, incl 0.050 0.033
     A Hot-dip zinc nuts are tapped oversize after coating and mechanical zinc coated
     nuts are tapped oversize before coating.
     TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements for Type 1 Fasteners
     Element
     Carbon Steel
     Heat Analysis Product Analysis
     Carbon 0.30–0.52 0.28–0.55
     Manganese, min 0.60 0.57
     Phosphorus, max 0.040 0.048
     Sulfur, max 0.050 0.058
     Silicon 0.15–0.30 0.13–0.32
     Element
     Boron Steel
     Heat Analysis Product Analysis
     Carbon 0.30–0.52 0.28–0.55
     Manganese, min 0.60 0.57
     Phosphorus, max 0.040 0.048
     Sulfur, max 0.050 0.058
     Silicon 0.10–0.30 0.08–0.32
     Boron 0.0005–0.003 0.0005–0.003
     Element
     Alloy Steel
     Heat Analysis Product Analysis
     Carbon 0.30–0.52 0.28–0.55
     Manganese, min 0.60 0.57
     Phosphorus, max 0.035 0.040
     Sulfur, max 0.040 0.045
     Silicon 0.15–0.35 0.13–0.37
     Alloying Elements A A
     Element
     Alloy Boron Steel
     Heat Analysis Product Analysis
     Carbon 0.30–0.52 0.28–0.55
     Manganese, min 0.60 0.57
     Phosphorus, max 0.035 0.040
     Sulfur, max 0.040 0.045
     Silicon 0.15–0.35 0.13–0.37
     Boron 0.0005–0.003 0.0005–0.003
     Alloying Elements A A
     A Steel, as defined by the American Iron and Steel Institute, shall be considered to
     be alloy when the maximum of the range given for the content of alloying elements
     exceeds one or more of the following limits: manganese, 1.65 %; silicon, 0.60 %;
     copper, 0.60 % or in which a definite range or a definite minimum quantity of any
     of the following elements is specified or required within the limits of the recognized
     field of constructional alloy steels: aluminum, chromium up to 3.99 %, cobalt,
     columbium, molybdenum, nickel, titanium, tungsten, vanadium, zirconium, or any
     other alloying elements added to obtain a desired alloying effect.
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-449
     741
     8.2.3 Unless otherwise specified, fasteners electroplated or
     mechanically coated to 0.0005 in. or less, threads prior to
     plating shall conform to ASME B1.1 Class 2A and after plating
     shall not exceed the Class 3A maximum limits, that is, Class
     2A plus the allowance.
175. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
     9.1 Surface discontinuity limits, inspection, and evaluation
     shall be in accordance with Specification F788/F788M.
176. Number of Tests and Retests
     10.1 Testing Responsibility:
     10.1.1 Each lot shall be tested by the manufacturer prior to
     shipment in accordance with the lot identification control
     quality assurance plan in 10.2-10.5.
     10.1.2 When fasteners are furnished by a source other than
     the manufacturer, the responsible party as defined in 15.1 shall
     be responsible for assuring all tests have been performed and
     the fasteners comply with the requirements of this specification
     (see 4.3).
     10.2 Purpose of Lot Inspection—The purpose of a lot
     inspection program is to ensure that each lot conforms to the
     requirements of this specification. For such a plan to be fully
     effective, it is essential that secondary processors, distributors,
     and purchasers maintain the identification and integrity of each
     lot until the product is installed.
     10.3 Lot Processing—All fasteners shall be processed in
     accordance with a lot identification-control quality assurance
     plan. The manufacturer, secondary processors, and distributors
     TABLE 2 Chemical Requirements for Type 3 FastenersA
     Element Composition, %
     Type 3 FastenersA
     A B C D E F
     Carbon:
     Heat analysis 0.33–0.40 0.38–0.48 0.15–0.25 0.15–0.25 0.20–0.25 0.20–0.25
     Product analysis 0.31–0.42 0.36–0.50 0.14–0.25 0.14–0.25 0.18–0.27 0.19–0.25
     Manganese:
     Heat analysis 0.90–1.20 0.70–0.90 0.80–1.35 0.40–1.20 0.60–1.00 0.90–1.20
     Product analysis 0.86–1.24 0.67–0.93 0.76–1.39 0.36–1.24 0.56–1.04 0.86–1.24
     Phosphrous:
     Heat analysis 0.035 max 0.06–0.12 0.035 max 0.035 max 0.035 max 0.035 max
     Product analysis 0.040 max 0.06–0.125 0.040 max 0.040 max 0.040 max 0.040 max
     Sulfur:
     Heat analysis 0.040 max 0.040 max 0.040 max 0.040 max 0.040 max 0.040 max
     Product analysis 0.045 max 0.045 max 0.045 max 0.045 max 0.045 max 0.045 max
     Silicon:
     Heat analysis 0.15–0.35 0.30–0.50 0.15–0.35 0.25–0.50 0.15–0.35 0.15–0.35
     Product analysis 0.13–0.37 0.25–0.55 0.13–0.37 0.20–0.55 0.13–0.37 0.13–0.37
     Copper:
     Heat analysis 0.25–0.45 0.20–0.40 0.20–0.50 0.30–0.50 0.30–0.60 0.20–0.40
     Product analysis 0.22–0.48 0.17–0.43 0.17–0.53 0.27–0.53 0.27–0.53 0.17–0.43
     Nickel:
     Heat analysis 0.25–0.45 0.50–0.80 0.25–0.50 0.50–0.80 0.30–0.60 0.20–0.40
     Product analysis 0.22–0.48 0.47–0.83 0.22–0.53 0.47–0.83 0.27–0.63 0.17–0.43
     Chromium:
     Heat analysis 0.45–0.65 0.50–0.75 0.30–0.50 0.50–1.00 0.60–0.90 0.45–0.65
     Product analysis 0.42–0.68 0.47–0.83 0.27–0.53 0.45–1.05 0.55–0.95 0.42–0.68
     Vanadium:
     Heat analysis B B 0.020 min B B B
     Product analysis B B 0.010 min B B B
     Molybdenum:
     Heat analysis B 0.06 max B 0.10 max B B
     Product analysis B 0.07 max B 0.11 max B B
     Titanium:
     Heat analysis B B B 0.05 max B B
     Product analysis B B B 0.06 max B B
     AA,B,C,D, E and F are classes of material used for Type 3 fasteners. Selection of a class shall be at the option of the bolt manufacturer.
     BThese elements are not specified or required.
     TABLE 3 Hardness Requirements for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts, and Studs
     Nominal Diameter, in. Length, in.
     Brinell Rockwell C
     Min Max Min Max
     1/4 to 1, inclusive Less than 2DA 253 319 25 34
     2D and over . . . 319 . . . 34
     Over 1 to 11/2 , inclusive Less than 3DA 223 286 19 30
     3D and over . . . 286 . . . 30
     Over 11/2 to 3, inclusive Less than 3DA 183 235 . . . . . .
     3D and over . . . 235 . . . . . .
     A Hex cap screws and bolts larger than 1.00 in. diameter and shorter than 3D and all studs shorter than 3D are subject only to minimum and maximum hardness.
     D = Nominal diameter or thread size
     SA-449 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     742
     shall identify and maintain the integrity of each lot from raw
     material selection through all operations and treatments to final
     packing and shipment. Each lot shall be assigned its own
     lot-identification number, each lot shall be tested, and the
     inspection test reports for each lot shall be retained.
     10.4 Lot Definition:
     10.4.1 Standard Lot—A lot shall be a quantity of uniquely
     identified fasteners of the same nominal size and length
     produced consecutively at the initial operation from a single
     mill heat of material and processed at one time, by the same
     processor in the same manner so that statistical sampling is
     valid. The identity of the lot and lot integrity shall be
     maintained throughout all subsequent operations and packaging.
     10.5 Number of Tests—The minimum number of tests from
     each lot for the tests specified below shall be as follows:
     Tests Number of Tests
     in Accordance With
     Hardness, tensile strength, proof load Guide F1470
     Coating weight/thickness The referenced coating specificationA
     Surface discontinuities Specification F788/F788M
     Dimensions and thread fit ASME B18.2.1
     A Guide F1470 if the coating specification does not specify a testing frequency.
177. Test Methods
     11.1 Tensile, proof load, and hardness tests shall be conducted
     in accordance with Test Methods F606.
     11.2 Tensile strength for hex cap screws and hex and square
     bolts shall be determined using the wedge or axial tension
     testing method of full size product method or the machined test
     specimens method depending on size and length as specified in
     7.2.2-7.2.6. Bolts with heads other than hex or square shall be
     TABLE 4 Tensile Load Requirements for Coarse-Thread Full-Size Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs
     Bolt or Stud
     Diameter, in.
     Threads per in.A Stress Area,B in. 2 Tensile Load, min, lbfC Proof Load, Length
     Measurement Method, lbfC
     Alternative Proof Load,
     Yield Strength Method
     (0.2 % Offset), lbfC
     Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6
     1/4 20 0.0318 3 800 2 700 2 900
     5/16 18 0.0524 6 300 4 450 4 800
     3/8 16 0.0775 9 300 6 600 7 100
     7/16 14 0.1063 12 750 9 050 9 800
     1/2 13 0.1419 17 050 12 050 13 050
     9/16 12 0.182 21 850 15 450 16 750
     5/8 11 0.226 27 100 19 200 20 800
     3/4 10 0.334 40 100 28 400 30 700
     7/8 9 0.462 55 450 39 250 42 500
     1 8 0.606 72 700 51 500 55 750
     11/8 7 0.763 80 100 56 450 61 800
     11/4 7 0.969 101 700 71 700 78 500
     13/8 6 1.155 121 300 85 450 93 550
     11/2 6 1.405 147 500 104 000 113 800
     13/4 5 1.90 171 000 104 500 110 200
     2 41/2 2.50 225 000 137 500 145 000
     21/4 41/2 3.25 292 500 178 750 188 500
     21/2 4 4.00 360 000 220 000 232 000
     23/4
     3
     4
     4
     4.93
     5.97
     443 700
     537 300
     271 150
     328 350
     286 000
     346 200
     A For 8 threads per in., sizes 11/8 to 11/2 in., inclusive, stresses of 105 000 psi, 74 000 psi, and 81 000 psi shall be used for calculating the values in columns 4, 5, and
     6 respectively.
     B The stress area is taken from ASME B1.1 which uses the equation below to calculate the values:
     A s = 0.7854[ D – (0.9743/n)]2
     where:
     As = stress area,
     D = nominal diameter, and
     n = threads per in.
     C Values tabulated are based on the following:
     Bolt Size, in. Column 4, psi Column 5, psi Column 6, psi
     1/4 to 1, incl. 120 000 85 000 92 000
     11/8 to 11/2, incl. 105 000 74 000 81 000
     13/4 to 3, incl. 90 000 55 000 58 000
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-449
     743
     axially tested. Fracture on full size tests shall be in the body or
     threads of the fastener without a fracture at the junction of the
     head and body.
     11.3 Studs shall be tested by the axial tension method as
     described in the second paragraph of axial tension testing of
     full size products in the Test Methods section of Test Methods
     F606.
     11.4 Proof load shall be determined using Method 1, length
     measurement, or Method 2, yield strength, at the option of the
     manufacturer.
178. Inspection
     12.1 If the inspection described in 12.2 is required by the
     purchaser, it shall be specified in the inquiry and contract or
     order.
     12.2 The purchaser’s representative shall have free entry to
     all parts of the manufacturer’s works or supplier’s place of
     business that concern the manufacture or supply of the fasteners.
     The manufacturer shall afford the purchaser’s representative
     all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the fasteners are
     being furnished in accordance with this specification. All tests
     and inspections required by the specification that are requested
     by the purchaser’s representative shall be made before
     shipment, and shall be conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily
     with the operation of the manufacturer’s works or
     supplier’s place of business.
179. Rejection and Rehearing
     13.1 Disposition of nonconforming fasteners shall be in
     accordance with the section on Disposition of Nonconforming
     Lots of Guide F1470.
180. Certification
     14.1 When specified on the purchase order, the manufacturer
     or supplier, whichever is the responsible party as defined
     in Section 15, shall furnish the purchaser test reports which
     include the following:
     14.1.1 Heat analysis, heat number, and a statement certifying
     that heats having the elements listed in 6.4 intentionally
     added were not used to produce the fasteners,
     14.1.2 Results of hardness, tensile, and proof load tests,
     14.1.3 Zinc coating measured coating weight/thickness for
     coated fasteners,
     14.1.4 Statement of compliance with dimensional and
     thread fit requirements,
     14.1.5 Lot number and purchase order number,
     14.1.6 Complete mailing address of responsible party, and
     14.1.7 Title and signature of the individual assigned certification
     responsibility by the company officers.
     14.2 Failure to include all the required information on the
     test report shall be cause for rejection.
181. Responsibility
     15.1 The party responsible for the fastener shall be the
     organization that supplies the fastener to the purchaser.
182. Product Marking
     16.1 Manufacturers Identification—All hex cap screws and
     bolts and one end of studs 3/8 in. and larger, and whenever
     TABLE 5 Tensile Load Requirements for Fine-Thread Full-Size Hex Cap Screws, Bolts, and Studs
     Bolt or Stud
     Diameter, in.
     Threads per in. Stress Area,A in. 2 Tensile Load, min, lbfB Proof Load, Length
     Measurement Method, lbfB
     Alternative Proof Load, Yield
     Strength Method (0.2 %
     Offset), min, lbfB
     Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6
     1/4 28 0.0364 4 350 3 100 3 500
     5/16 24 0.0580 6 950 4 950 5 350
     3/8 24 0.0878 10 550 7 450 8 100
     7/16 20 0.1187 14 250 10 100 10 900
     1/2 20 0.1599 19 200 13 600 14 700
     9/16 18 0.203 24 350 17 250 18 700
     5/8 18 0.256 30 700 21 750 23 500
     3/4 16 0.373 44 750 31 700 34 300
     7/8 14 0.509 61 100 43 250 46 800
     1 12 0.663 79 550 56 350 61 000
     11/8 12 0.856 89 900 63 350 69 350
     11/4 12 1.073 112 650 79 400 86 900
     13/8
     11/2
     12
     12
     1.315
     1.581
     138 100
     166 000
     97 300
     117 000
     106 500
     128 000
     A See footnote B in Table 4.
     B See footnote C in Table 4.
     TABLE 6 Tensile Strength Requirements for Specimens
     Machined from Hex Cap Screws, Bolts, and Studs
     Nominal
     Diameter,
     in.
     Tensile
     Strength,
     min, psi
     Yield
     Strength,
     min, psi
     Elongation
     in 4D,
     min, %
     Reduction
     of Area,
     min, %
     1/4 to 1, incl. 120 000 92 000 14 35
     Over 1 to 11/2, incl. 105 000 81 000 14 35
     Over 11/2 to 3, incl. 90 000 58 000 14 35
     SA-449 ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     744
     feasible studs smaller than 3/8 in., shall be marked by the
     manufacturer with a unique identifier to identify the manufacturer.
     16.2 Type Identification:
     16.2.1 Type 1 hex cap screws and bolts and one end of Type
     1 studs 3/8 in. and larger, and whenever feasible studs smaller
     than 3/8 in., shall be marked “A449.”
     16.2.2 All Type 3 hex cap screws, blots, and studs shall be
     marked to indicate that they are produced from weathering
     steel. Heads of type 3 hex cap screws and bolts shall be marked
     “A449” underlined. Type 3 studs 3/8 in. and larger, and
     whenever feasible studs smaller than 3/8 in., shall be marked
     “A449” underlined on at least one end. Studs under 3/8 in. not
     marked “A449” underlined, shall be marked with the use of
     additional marks to indicate that they are produced from
     weathering steel.
     16.3 Marking Location and Methods:
     16.3.1 All markings shall be located on the top of a hex cap
     screw and bolt heads and on one end of studs and shall be
     either raised or depressed at the manufacturer’s option.
     16.3.2 Type and manufacturer ’s ident i f icat ion
     shall be separate and distinct. The two identifications
     shall preferably be in different locations and, when on
     the same level, shall be separated by at least two spaces.
     16.4 Acceptance Criteria—Fasteners which are not marked
     in accordance with these provisions shall be considered nonconforming
     and subject to rejection.
183. Packaging and Package Marking
     17.1 Packaging:
     17.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, packaging shall be in
     accordance with Practice D3951.
     17.1.2 When special packaging requirements are required,
     they shall be defined at the time of the inquiry and order.
     17.2 Package Marking:
     17.2.1 Each shipping unit shall include or be plainly marked
     with the following information:
     17.2.1.1 ASTM designation and type,
     17.2.1.2 Size,
     17.2.1.3 Name and brand or trademark of the manufacturer,
     17.2.1.4 Number of pieces,
     17.2.1.5 Lot number,
     17.2.1.6 Purchase order number, and
     17.2.1.7 Country of origin.
184. Keywords
     18.1 bolts; carbon steel; hex cap screws; steel; studs
     SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
     S1. Marking
     S1.1 Studs that are continuously threaded with the same
     class of thread shall be marked on each end with the marking
     required by Section 16.
     S1.2 Marking small sizes (customarily less than 0.375 in.)
     may not be practical. Consult the producer for the minimum
     size that can be marked.
     SPECIFICATION FOR GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
     CARBON AND LOW ALLOY STEEL TUBES
     SA-450/SA-450M
     (Identical with ASTM Specification A450/A450M-10.)
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-450/SA-450M
     745
     Manufacture
     Stockholder
     Distributor
     SA-450/SA-450M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     746
     Standard Specification for
     General Requirements for Carbon and Low Alloy Steel
     Tubes
185. Scope
     1.1 This specification covers a group of requirements
     which, with the exceptions of 5.3 and Sections 6, 7, 18, 19, 20,
     21, 22, 23, and 24, are mandatory requirements to the following
     ASTM tubular product specifications:
     Title of Specification ASTM DesignationA
     Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel and Carbon
     Manganese Steel Boiler Tubes
     A178/A178M
     Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-Carbon Steel Heat-
     Exchanger and Condenser Tubes
     A179/A179M
     Seamless Carbon Steel Boiler Tubes for High-Pressure
     Service
     A192/A192M
     Seamless Medium-Carbon Steel Boiler and Superheater
     Tubes
     A210/A210M
     Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Heat-
     Exchanger and Condenser Tubes
     A214/A214M
     Seamless and Electric-Welded Low-Alloy Steel Tubes A423/A423M
     Specification for Seamless and Welded Carbon Steel
     Heat-Exchanger Tubes with Integral Fins
     A498
     Seamless Cold-Drawn Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater
     Tubes
     A556/A556M
     Seamless, Cold-Drawn Carbon Steel Tubing for Hydraulic
     System Service
     A822/A822M
     A These designations refer to the latest issue of the respective specifications.
     1.2 One or more of Sections 5.3, 6, 7, 18, 19, 20, 21, 21.1,
     23, and 24 apply when the product specification or purchase
     order has a requirement for the test or analysis described by
     these sections.
     1.3 In case of conflict between a requirement of the product
     specification and a requirement of this general requirement
     specification only the requirement of the product specification
     need be satisfied.
     1.4 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
     are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
     SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
     system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system
     shall be used independently of the other. Combining values
     from the two systems may result in non-conformance with the
     standard. The inch-pound units shall apply unless the “M”
     designation (SI) of the product specification is specified in the
     order.
186. Referenced Documents
     2.1 ASTM Standards:
     A178/A178M Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded
     Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese Steel Boiler and
     Superheater Tubes
     A179/A179M Specification for Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-
     Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser Tubes
     A192/A192M Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel
     Boiler Tubes for High-Pressure Service
     A210/A210M Specification for Seamless Medium-Carbon
     Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes
     A214/A214M Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded
     Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser Tubes
     A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
     of Steel Products
     A423/A423M Specification for Seamless and Electric-
     Welded Low-Alloy Steel Tubes
     A498 Specification for Seamless and Welded Carbon Steel
     Heat-Exchanger Tubes with Integral Fins
     A530/A530M Specification for General Requirements for
     Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe
     A556/A556M Specification for Seamless Cold-Drawn Carbon
     Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes
     A700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading Methods
     for Steel Products for Shipment
     A751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical
     Analysis of Steel Products
     A822/A822M Specification for Seamless Cold-Drawn Carbon
     Steel Tubing for Hydraulic System Service
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-450/SA-450M
     747
     A941 Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related
     Alloys, and Ferroalloys
     A1047/A1047M Test Method for Pneumatic Leak Testing of
     Tubing
     D3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging
     E92 Test Method for Vickers Hardness of Metallic Materials
     (Withdrawn 2010)
     E213 Practice for Ultrasonic Testing of Metal Pipe and
     Tubing
     E273 Practice for Ultrasonic Testing of the Weld Zone of
     Welded Pipe and Tubing
     E309 Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel Tubular
     Products Using Magnetic Saturation
     E426 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Examination
     of Seamless and Welded Tubular Products, Austenitic
     Stainless Steel and Similar Alloys
     E570 Practice for Flux Leakage Examination of Ferromagnetic
     Steel Tubular Products
     2.2 Federal Standard:
     Fed. Std. No. 183 Continuous Identification Marking of Iron
     and Steel Products
     2.3 Military Standards:
     MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products Preparation for Shipment
     and Storage
     MIL-STD-271 Nondestructive Testing Requirements for
     Metals
     MIL-STD-792 Identification Marking Requirements for
     Special Purpose Equipment
     2.4 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
     Section IX Welding Qualifications
     2.5 Steel Structures Painting Council:
     SSPC-SP 6 Surface Preparation Specification No. 6 Commercial
     Blast Cleaning
     2.6 Other Document:
     SNT-TC-1A Recommended Practice for Nondestructive
     Personnel Qualification and Certification.
187. Terminology
     3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
     3.1.1 remelted heat—in secondary melting, all of the ingots
     remelted from a single primary heat.
     3.1.2 thin-wall tube—a tube meeting the specified outside
     diameter and specified wall thickness set forth as follows:
     Specified Outside
     Diameter
     Specified Wall Thickness
     2 in. [50.8 mm] or less 2 % or less of specified outside diameter
     Greater than 2 in. [50.8
     mm]
     3 % or less of specified outside diameter
     Any 0.020 in. [0.5 mm] or less
     3.2 Other defined terms—The definitions in Test Methods
     and Definitions A370, Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology
     A751, and Terminology A941 are applicable to this
     specification and to those listed in 1.1.
188. Process
     4.1 The steel may be made by any process.
     4.2 If a specific type of melting is required by the purchaser,
     it shall be as stated on the purchase order.
     4.3 The primary melting may incorporate separate degassing
     or refining and may be followed by secondary melting,
     such as electroslag remelting or vacuum-arc remelting.
     4.4 Steel may be cast in ingots or may be strand cast. When
     steel of different grades is sequentially strand cast, identification
     of the resultant transition material is required. The
     producer shall remove the transition material by an established
     procedure that positively separates the grades.
189. Chemical Composition
     5.1 Samples for chemical analysis, and method of analysis
     shall be in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and
     Terminology A751.
     5.2 Heat Analysis—If the heat analysis reported by the steel
     producer is not sufficiently complete for conformance with the
     heat analysis requirements of the applicable product specification
     to be fully assessed, the manufacturer may complete the
     assessment of conformance with such heat analysis requirements
     by using a product analysis for the specified elements
     that were not reported by the steel producer, provided that
     product analysis tolerances are not applied and the heat
     analysis is not altered.
     5.3 Product Analysis—Product analysis requirements and
     options, if any, are contained in the product specification.
190. Tensile Properties
     6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
     tensile properties prescribed in the individual specification.
     6.2 The yield strength corresponding to a permanent offset
     of 0.2 % of the gage length or to a total extension of 0.5 % of
     the gage length under load shall be determined.
     6.3 If the percentage of elongation of any test specimen is
     less than that specified and any part of the fracture is more than
     3/4 in. [19.0 mm] from the center of the gage length, as
     indicated by scribe marks on the specimen before testing, a
     retest shall be allowed.
     SA-450/SA-450M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     748
191. Standard Weights
     7.1 The calculated weight per foot, based upon a specified
     minimum wall thickness, shall be determined by the following
     equation:
     W 5 C~D 2 t!t (1)
     where:
     C = 10.69 [0.0246615],
     W = weight, lb/ft [kg/m],
     D = specified outside diameter, in. [mm], and
     t = specified minimum wall thickness, in. [mm]
     7.2 The permissible variations from the calculated weight
     per foot [kilogram per metre] shall be as prescribed in Table 1.
192. Permissible Variations in Wall Thickness
     8.1 Variations from the specified minimum wall thickness
     shall not exceed the amounts prescribed in Table 2.
     8.2 For tubes 2 in. [50.8 mm] and over in outside diameter
     and 0.220 in. [5.6 mm] and over in thickness, the variation in
     wall thickness in any one cross section of any one tube shall
     not exceed the following percentage of the actual mean wall at
     the section. The actual mean wall is defined as the average of
     the thickest and thinnest wall in that section.
     Seamless tubes 610 %
     Welded tubes 65 %
     8.3 When cold-finished tubes as ordered require wall thicknesses
     3/4 in. [19.1 mm] or over, or an inside diameter 60 % or
     less of the outside diameter, the permissible variations in wall
     thickness for hot-finished tubes shall apply.
193. Permissible Variations in Outside Diameter
     9.1 Except as provided in 9.2, variations from the specified
     outside diameter shall not exceed the amounts prescribed in
     Table 3.
     9.2 Thin-wall tubes usually develop significant ovality (out
     of roundness) during final annealing, or straightening, or both.
     The diameter tolerances of Table 3 are not sufficient to provide
     for additional ovality expected in thin-wall tubes, and, for such
     tubes, are applicable only to the mean of the extreme (maximum
     and minimum) outside diameter readings in any one cross
     section. However, for thin wall tubes the difference in extreme
     outside diameter readings (ovality) in any one cross section
     shall not exceed the following ovality allowances:
     Outside Diameter Ovality Allowance
     1 in. [25.4 mm] and under 0.020 in. [0.5 mm]
     Over 1 in. [25.4 mm] 2.0 % of specified outside diameter
194. Permissible Variations in Length
     10.1 Variations from the specified length shall not exceed
     the amounts prescribed in Table 4.
195. Permissible Variations in Height of Flash on Electric-
     Resistance-Welded Tubes
     11.1 For tubes over 2 in. [50.8 mm] in outside diameter, or
     over 0.135 in. [3.44 mm] in wall thickness, the flash on the
     inside of the tubes shall be mechanically removed by cutting to
     a maximum height of 0.010 in. [0.25 mm] at any point on the
     tube.
     11.2 For tubes 2 in. [50.8 mm] and under in outside
     diameter and 0.135 in. [3.4 mm] and under in wall thickness,
     the flash on the inside of the tube shall be mechanically
     TABLE 1 Permissible Variations in Weight Per FootA
     Method of Manufacture
     Permissible Variation in Weight
     per Foot, %
     Over Under
     Seamless, hot-finished
     Seamless, cold-finished:
     16 0
     11/2 in. [38.1 mm] and under OD 12 0
     Over 11/2 in. [38.1 mm] OD 13 0
     Welded 10 0
     A These permissible variations in weight apply to lots of 50 tubes or more in
     sizes 4 in. [101.6 mm] and under in outside diameter, and to lots of 20 tubes or
     more in sizes over 4 in. [101.6 mm] in outside diameter.
     TABLE 2 Permissible Variations in Wall ThicknessA
     Outside
     Diameter,
     in. [mm]
     Wall Thickness, %
     0.095
     [2.4]
     and
     Under
     Over
     0.095
     to 0.150
     [2.4 to
     3.8], incl
     Over 0.150
     to 0.180
     [3.8 to
     4.6], incl
     Over
     0.180,
     [4.6]
     Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under
     Seamless, Hot-Finished Tubes
     4 [101.6] and 40 0 35 0 33 0 28 0
     under
     Over 4 … … 35 0 33 0 28 0
     [101.6]
     Seamless, Cold-Finished Tubes
     Over Under
     11/2 [38.1] and 20 0
     under
     Over 11/2 [38.1] 22 0
     Welded Tubes
     All sizes 18 0
     A These permissible variations in wall thickness apply only to tubes, except
     internal-upset tubes, as rolled or cold-finished, and before swaging, expanding,
     bending, polishing, or other fabricating operations.
     TABLE 3 Permissible Variations in Outside DiameterA
     Outside Diameter,
     in. [mm]
     Permissible Variations, in. [mm]
     Over Under
     Hot-Finished Seamless Tubes
     4 [101.6] and under 1/64 [0.4] 1/32 [0.8]
     Over 4 to 71/2 [101.6 to 190.5], incl 1/64 [0.4] 3/64 [1.2]
     Over 71/2 to 9 [190.5 to 228.6], incl 1/64 [0.4] 1/16 [1.6]
     Welded Tubes and Cold-Finished Seamless Tubes
     Under 1 [25.4] 0.004 [0.1] 0.004 [0.1]
     1 to 11/2 [25.4 to 38.1], incl 0.006 [0.15] 0.006 [0.15]
     Over 11/2 to 2 [38.1 to 50.8], excl 0.008 [0.2] 0.008 [0.2]
     2 to 21/2 [50.8 to 63.5], excl 0.010 [0.25] 0.010 [0.25]
     21/2 to 3 [63.5 to 76.2], excl 0.012 [0.3] 0.012 [0.3]
     3 to 4 [76.2 to 101.6], incl 0.015 [0.38] 0.015 [0.38]
     Over 4 to 71/2 [101.6 to 190.5], incl 0.015 [0.38] 0.025 [0.64]
     Over 71/2 to 9 [190.5 to 228.6], incl 0.015 [0.38] 0.045 [1.14]
     A Except as provided in 9.2, these permissible variations include out-ofroundness.
     These permissible variations in outside diameter apply to hot-finished
     seamless, welded and cold-finished seamless tubes before other fabricating
     operations such as upsetting, swaging, expanding, bending, or polishing.
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-450/SA-450M
     749
     removed by cutting to a maximum height of 0.006 in. [0.15
     mm] at any point on the tube.
196. Straightness and Finish
     12.1 Finished tubes shall be reasonably straight and have
     smooth ends free of burrs. They shall have a workmanlike
     finish. Surface imperfections (see Note 1) may be removed by
     grinding, provided that a smooth curved surface is maintained,
     and the wall thickness is not decreased to less than that
     permitted by this or the product specification. The outside
     diameter at the point of grinding may be reduced by the amount
     so removed.
     NOTE 1—An imperfection is any discontinuity or irregularity found in
     the tube.
197. Repair by Welding
     13.1 Repair welding of base metal defects in tubing is
     permissible only with the approval of the purchaser and with
     the further understanding that the tube shall be marked “WR”
     and the composition of the deposited filler metal shall be
     suitable for the composition being welded. Defects shall be
     thoroughly chipped or ground out before welding and each
     repaired length shall be reheat treated or stress relieved as
     required by the applicable specification. Each length of repaired
     tube shall be tested hydrostatically as required by the
     product specification.
     13.2 Repair welding shall be performed using procedures
     and welders or welding operators that have been qualified in
     accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
     Section IX.
198. Retests
     14.1 If the results of the mechanical tests of any group or lot
     do not conform to the requirements specified in the individual
     specification, retests may be made on additional tubes of
     double the original number from the same group or lot, each of
     which shall conform to the requirements specified.
199. Retreatment
     15.1 If the individual tubes or the tubes selected to represent
     any group or lot fail to conform to the test requirements, the
     individual tubes or the group or lot represented may be
     retreated and resubmitted for test. Not more than two reheat
     treatments shall be permitted.
200. Test Specimens
     16.1 Test specimens shall be taken from the ends of finished
     tubes prior to upsetting, swaging, expanding, or other forming
     operations, or being cut to length. They shall be smooth on the
     ends and free of burrs and flaws.
     16.2 If any test specimen shows flaws or defective machining,
     it may be discarded and another specimen substituted.
201. Method of Mechanical Testing
     17.1 The specimens and mechanical tests required shall be
     made in accordance with Annex A2 of Test Methods and
     Definitions A370.
     17.2 Specimens shall be tested at room temperature.
     17.3 Small or subsize specimens as described in Test
     Methods and Definitions A370 may be used only when there is
     insufficient material to prepare one of the standard specimens.
     When using small or subsize specimens, the largest one
     possible shall be used.
202. Flattening Test
     18.1 A section of tube not less than 2 1/2 in. [63 mm] in
     length for seamless and not less than 4 in. [100 mm] in length
     for welded shall be flattened cold between parallel plates in two
     steps. For welded tubes, the weld shall be placed 90° from the
     direction of the applied force (at a point of maximum bending).
     During the first step, which is a test for ductility, no cracks or
     breaks, except as provided for in 18.4, on the inside, outside, or
     end surfaces shall occur in seamless tubes, or on the inside or
     outside surfaces of welded tubes, until the distance between the
     plates is less than the value of H calculated by the following
     equation:
     H 5
     ~11e!t
     e1t/D
     (2)
     where:
     H = distance between flattening plates, in. [mm],
     t = specified wall thickness of the tube, in. [mm],
     D = specified outside diameter of the tube, in. [mm], and
     e = deformation per unit length (constant for a given grade
     of steel: 0.07 for medium-carbon steel (maximum
     specified carbon 0.19 % or greater), 0.08 for low alloy
     steel, and 0.09 for low-carbon steel (maximum specified
     carbon 0.18 % or less)).
     During the second step, which is a test for soundness, the
     flattening shall be continued until the specimen breaks or the
     opposite walls of the tube meet. Evidence of laminated or
     unsound material, or of incomplete weld that is revealed during
     the entire flattening test shall be cause for rejection.
     18.2 Surface imperfections in the test specimens before
     flattening, but revealed during the first step of the flattening
     test, shall be judged in accordance with the finish requirements.
     18.3 Superficial ruptures resulting from surface imperfections
     shall not be cause for rejection.
     18.4 When low D-to-t ratio tubular products are tested,
     because the strain imposed due to geometry is unreasonably
     TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in LengthA
     Method of
     Manufacture
     Outside
     Diameter,
     in. [mm]
     Cut Length,
     in. [mm]
     Over Under
     Seamless, hot-finished All sizes 3/16 [5] 0 [0]
     Seamless, coldfinished
     Under 2 [50.8]
     2 [50.8] and over
     1/8 [3]
     3/16 [5]
     0 [0]
     0 [0]
     Welded Under 2 [50.8]
     2 [50.8] and over
     1/8 [3]
     3/16 [5]
     0 [0]
     0 [0]
     A These permissible variations in length apply to tubes before bending. They
     apply to cut lengths up to and including 24 ft [7.3 m]. For lengths greater than 24
     ft [7.3 m], the above over-tolerances shall be increased by 1/8 in. [3 mm] for each
     10 ft [3 m] or fraction thereof over 24 ft or 1/2 in. [13 mm], whichever is the lesser.
     SA-450/SA-450M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
     750
     high on the inside surface at the six and twelve o’clock
     locations, cracks at these locations shall not be cause for
     rejection if the D to t ratio is less than 10.
203. Reverse Flattening Test
     19.1 A5 in. [100 mm] in length of finished welded tubing in
     sizes down to and including 1/2 in. [12.7 mm] in outside
     diameter shall be split longitudinally 90° on each side of the
     weld and the sample opened and flattened with the weld at the
     point of maximum bend. There shall be no evidence of cracks
     or lack of penetration or overlaps resulting from flash removal
     in the weld.
204. Flaring Test
     20.1 A section of tube approximately 4 in. [100 mm] in
     length shall stand being flared with a tool having a 60° included
     angle until the tube at the mouth of the flare has been expanded
     to the percentages specified in Table 5 without cracking or
     showing imperfections rejectable under the provisions of the
     product specification.
205. Flange Test
     21.1 A section of tube shall be capable of having a flange
     turned over at a right angle to the body of the tube without
     cracking or showing imperfections rejectable under the provisions
     of the product specification. The width of the flange for
     carbon and alloy steels shall be not less than the percentages
     specified in Table 6.
206. Hardness Test
     22.1 For tubes 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] and over in wall thickness,
     either the Brinell or Rockwell hardness test shall be used.
     When Brinell hardness testing is used, a 10-mm ball with 3000,
     1500, or 500-kg load, or a 5-mm ball with 750-kg load may be
     used, at the option of the manufacturer.
     22.2 For tubes less than 0.200 in. [5.1 mm] to and including
     0.065 in. [1.7 mm] in wall thickness, the Rockwell hardness
     test shall be used.
     22.3 For tubes less than 0.065 in. [1.7 mm] in wall thickness,
     the hardness test shall not be required.
     22.4 The Brinell hardness test may be made on the outside
     of the tube near the end, on the outside of a specimen cut from
     the tube, or on the wall cross section of a specimen cut from the
     tube at the option of the manufacturer. This test shall be made
     so that the distance from the center of the impression to the
     edge of the specimen is at least 2.5 times the diameter of the
     impression.
     22.5 The Rockwell hardness test may be made on the inside
     surface, on the wall cross section, or on a flat on the outside
     surface at the option of the manufacturer.
     22.6 For tubes furnished with upset, swaged, or otherwise
     formed ends, the hardness test shall be made as prescribed in
     22.1 and 22.2 on the outside of the tube near the end after the
     forming operation and heat treatment.
     22.7 For welded or brazed tubes, the hardness test shall be
     made away from the joints.
     22.8 When the product specification provides for Vickers
     hardness, such testing shall be in accordance with Test Method
     E92.
207. Hydrostatic Test
     23.1 Except as provided in 23.2 and 23.3, each tube shall be
     tested by the manufacturer to a minimum hydrostatic test
     pressure determined by the following equation:
     Inch2 Pound Units:P 5 32000 t/D (3)
     SI Units:P 5 220.6t/D
     where:
     P = hydrostatic test pressure, psi or MPa,
     t = specified wall thickness, in. or mm, and
     D = specified outside diameter, in. or mm.
     23.1.1 The hydrostatic test pressure determined by Eq 3
     shall be rounded to the nearest 50 psi [0.5 MPa] for pressure
     below 1000 psi [7 MPa], and to the nearest 100 psi [1 MPa] for
     pressures 1000 psi [7 MPa] and above. The hydrostatic test
     may be performed prior to cutting to final length, or prior to
     upsetting, swaging, expanding, bending or other forming
     operations, or both.
     23.2 Regardless of the determination made by Eq 3, the
     minimum hydrostatic test pressure required to satisfy these
     requirements need not exceed the values given in Table 7. This
     TABLE 5 Flaring Test Requirements
     Ratio of Inside
     Diameter to Outside
     DiameterA
     Minimum Expansion of Inside
     Diameter, %
     Carbon Steels Low
     Alloy Steels
     0.9 21 15
     0.8 22 17
     0.7 25 19
     0.6 30 23
     0.5 39 28
     0.4 51 38
     0.3 68 50
     A In determining the ratio of inside diameter to specified outside diameter, the
     inside diameter shall be defined as the actual mean inside diameter of the material
     tested.
     TABLE 6 Flange Requirements
     Outside Diameter of Tube, in. [mm] Width of Flange
     To 21/2 [63.5], incl 15 % of OD
     Over 21/2 to 33/4 [63.5 to 95.2], incl 121/2 % of OD
     Over 33/4 to 8 [95.2 to 203.2], incl 10 % of OD
     TABLE 7 Hydrostatic Test Pressures
     Outside Diameter of Tube, in. [mm]
     Hydrostatic Test Pressure, psi [MPa]
     Under 1 [25.4] 1000 [7]
     1 to 11/2 [25.4 to 38.1], excl 1500 [10]
     11/2 to 2 [38.1 to 50.8], excl 2000 [14]
     2 to 3 [50.8 to 76.2], excl 2500 [17]
     3 to 5 [76.2 to 127], excl 3500 [24]
     5 [127] and over 4500 [31]
     ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-450/SA-450M
     751
     does not prohibit testing at higher pressures at manufacturer’s
     option or as provided in 23.3.
     23.3 With concurrence of the manufacturer, a minimum
     hydrostatic test pressure in excess of the requirements of 23.2
     or 23.1, or both, may be stated on the order. The tube wall
     stress shall be determined by the following equation:
     S 5 PD/2t (4)
     where:
     S = tube wall stress, psi or MPa, and all other symbols as
     defined in 23.1.1.
     23.4 The test pressure shall be held for a minimum of 5 s.
     23.5 If any tube shows leaks during the hydrostatic test, it
     shall be rejected.
     23.6 The hydrostatic test may not be capable of testing the
     end portion of the pipe. The lengths of pipe that cannot be
     tested shall be determined by the manufacturer and, when
     specified in the purchase order, reported to the purchaser.
208. Air Pressure Test
     24.1 Air Underwater Test—When this test is employed,
     each tube, with internal surface clean and dry, shall be
     internally pressurized to 150 psi [1000 kPa] minimum with
     clean and dry compressed air while being submerged in clear
     water. The tube shall be well-lighted, preferably by underwater
     illumination. Any evidence of air leakage of the pneumatic
     couplings shall be corrected prior to testing. Inspection shall be
     made of the entire external surface of the tube after holding the
     pressure for not less than 5 s after the surface of the water has
     become calm. If any tube shows leakage during the air
     underwater test, it shall be rejected. Any leaking areas may be
     cut out and the tube retested.
     24.2 Pneumatic Leak Test—When this test is employed,
     each tube shall be subjected to a pneumatic leak test in
     accordance with Specification A1047/A1047M.
     Acceptance criteria shall be as follows:
     Tube O.D. in [mm] Calibration Hole, max. in [mm]

1.5 [#40] 0.003 [0.076]

1.5#2.0 [>40#50] 0.004 [0.162]
2.0#2.5 [>50#65] 0.005 [0.127]
2.5#3.0 [>65#75] 0.006 [0.152]
3.0 [>75] by agreement

25. Nondestructive Examination
    25.1 When nondestructive examination is specified by the
    purchaser or the product specification, each tube shall be
    examined by a nondestructive examination method in accordance
    with Practice E213, Practice E309 (for ferromagnetic
    materials), Practice E426 (for non-magnetic materials), or
    Practice E570. Upon agreement, Practice E273 shall be employed
    in addition to one of the full periphery tests. The range
    of tube sizes that may be examined by each method shall be
    subject to the limitations in the scope of that practice. In case
    of conflict between these methods and practices and this
    specification, the requirements of this specification shall prevail.
    25.2 The following information is for the benefit of the user
    of this specification.
    25.2.1 Calibration standards for the nondestructive electric
    test are convenient standards for calibration of nondestructive
    testing equipment only. For several reasons, including shape,
    orientation, width, etc., the correlation between the signal
    produced in the electric test from an imperfection and from
    calibration standards is only approximate. A purchaser interested
    in ascertaining the nature (type, size, location, and
    orientation) of discontinuities that can be detected in the
    specific application of these examinations should discuss this
    with the manufacturer of the tubular product.
    25.2.2 The ultrasonic examination referred to in this specification
    is intended to detect longitudinal discontinuities having
    a reflective area similar to or larger than the calibration
    reference notches specified in 25.4. The examination may not
    detect circumferentially oriented imperfections or short, deep
    defects.
    25.2.3 The eddy current examination referenced in this
    specification has the capability of detecting significant discontinuities,
    especially of the short abrupt type. Practices E309 and
    E426 contain additional information regarding the capabilities
    and limitations of eddy-current examination.
    25.2.4 The flux leakage examination referred to in this
    specification is capable of detecting the presence and location
    of significant longitudinally or transversely oriented discontinuities.
    The provisions of this specification only provide for
    longitudinal calibration for flux leakage. It should be recognized
    that different techniques should be employed to detect
    differently oriented imperfections.
    25.2.5 The hydrostatic test referred to in Section 22 is a test
    method provided for in many product specifications. This test
    has the capability of finding defects of a size permitting the test
    fluid to leak through the tube wall and may be either visually
    seen or detected by a loss of pressure. This test may not detect
    very tight, through-the-wall defects or defects that extend an
    appreciable distance into the wall without complete penetration.
    25.2.6 A purchaser interested in ascertaining the nature
    (type, size, location, and orientation) of discontinuities that can
    be detected in the specific application of these examinations
    should discuss this with the manufacturer of the tubular
    products.
    25.3 Time of Examination—Nondestructive examination for
    specification acceptance shall be performed after all deformation
    processing, heat treating, welding, and straightening operations.
    This requirement does not preclude additional testing
    at earlier stages in the processing.
    25.4 Surface Condition:
    25.4.1 All surfaces shall be free of scale, dirt, grease, paint,
    or other foreign material that could interfere with interpretation
    of test results. The methods used for cleaning and preparing the
    surfaces for examination shall not be detrimental to the base
    metal or the surface finish.
    25.4.2 Excessive surface roughness or deep scratches can
    produce signals that interfere with the test.
    25.5 Extent of Examination:
    25.5.1 The relative motion of the tube and the transducer(s),
    coil(s), or sensor(s) shall be such that the entire tube surface is
    scanned, except for end effects as noted in 25.5.2.
    SA-450/SA-450M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    752
    25.5.2 The existence of end effects is recognized, and the
    extent of such effects shall be determined by the manufacturer,
    and, if requested, shall be reported to the purchaser. Other
    nondestructive tests may be applied to the end areas, subject to
    agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
    25.6 Operator Qualifications:
    25.6.1 The test unit operator shall be certified in accordance
    with SNT-TC-1A, or an equivalent documented standard
    agreeable to both purchaser and manufacturer.
    25.7 Test Conditions:
    25.7.1 For examination by the ultrasonic method, the minimum
    nominal transducer frequency shall be 2.0 MHz, and the
    maximum transducer size shall be 1.5 in. (38 mm).
    25.7.2 For eddy current testing, the excitation coil frequency
    shall be chosen to ensure adequate penetration, yet
    provide good signal-to-noise ratio.
    25.7.2.1 The maximum coil frequency shall be:
    Specified Wall Thickness Maximum Frequency
    <0.050 in. 100 KHz
    0.050 to 0.150 50
    0.150 10
    25.8 Reference Standards:
    25.8.1 Reference standards of convenient length shall be
    prepared from a length of tube of the same grade, specified size
    (outside diameter and wall thickness), surface finish and heat
    treatment condition as the tubing to be examined.
    25.8.2 For eddy current testing, the reference standard shall
    contain, at the option of the manufacturer, any one of the
    following discontinuities:
    25.8.2.1 Drilled Hole—The reference standard shall contain
    three or more holes, equally spaced circumferentially around
    the tube and longitudinally separated by a sufficient distance to
    allow distinct identification of the signal from each hole. The
    holes shall be drilled radially and completely through the tube
    wall, with care being taken to avoid distortion of the tube while
    drilling. The holes shall not be larger than 0.031 in. (0.8 mm)
    in diameter. As an alternative, the producer may choose to drill
    one hole and run the calibration standard through the test coil
    three times, rotating the tube approximately 120° each time.
    More passes with smaller angular increments may be used,
    provided testing of the full 360° of the coil is obtained. For
    welded tubing, if the weld is visible, one of the multiple holes
    or the single hole shall be drilled in the weld.
    25.8.2.2 Transverse Tangential Notch—Using a round tool
    or file with a 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) diameter, a notch shall be milled
    or filed tangential to the surface and transverse to the longitudinal
    axis of the tube. Said notch shall have a depth not
    exceeding 121/2 % of the specified wall thickness of the tube or
    0.004 in. (0.1 mm), whichever is greater.
    25.8.2.3 Longitudinal Notch—Anotch 0.031 in. (0.8 mm) or
    less in width shall be machined in a radial plane parallel to the
    tube axis on the outside surface of the tube, to have a depth not
    exceeding 121/2 % of the specified wall thickness of the tube or
    0.004 in. (0.1 mm), whichever is greater. The length of the
    notch shall be compatible with the testing method.
    25.8.3 For ultrasonic testing, the reference ID and OD
    notches shall be any one of the three common notch shapes
    shown in Practice E213, at the option of the manufacturer. The
    depth of the notches shall not exceed 121/2 % of the specified
    wall thickness of the tube or 0.004 in. (0.1 mm), whichever is
    greater. The width of the notch shall not exceed two times the
    depth. For welded tubing, the notches shall be placed in the
    weld, if the weld is visible.
    25.8.4 For flux leakage testing, the longitudinal reference
    notches shall be straight-sided notches machined in a radial
    plane parallel to the tube axis on the inside and outside surfaces
    of the tube. Notch depth shall not exceed 121/2 % of the
    specified wall thickness or 0.004 in. (0.1 mm), whichever is
    greater. Notch length shall not exceed 1 in. (25.4 mm), and the
    width shall not exceed the depth. Outside and inside notches
    shall have sufficient separation to allow distinct identification
    of the signal from each notch.
    25.8.5 More or smaller reference discontinuities, or both,
    may be used by agreement between the purchaser and the
    manufacturer.
    25.9 Standardization Procedure:
    25.9.1 The test apparatus shall be standardized at the
    beginning and end of each series of tubes of the same specified
    size (diameter and wall thickness), grade and heat treatment
    condition, and at intervals not exceeding 4 h during the
    examination of such tubing. More frequent standardizations
    may be performed at the manufacturer’s option or may be
    required upon agreement between the purchaser and the
    manufacturer.
    25.9.2 The test apparatus shall also be standardized after
    any change in test system settings, change of operator, equipment
    repair, or interruption due to power loss or shutdown.
    25.9.3 The reference standard shall be passed through the
    test apparatus at the same speed and test system settings as the
    tube to be tested, except that, at the manufacturer’s discretion,
    the tubes may be tested at a higher sensitivity.
    25.9.4 The signal-to-noise ratio for the reference standard
    shall be 2.5:1 or greater, and the reference signal amplitude for
    each discontinuity shall be at least 50 % of full scale of the
    display. In establishing the noise level, extraneous signals from
    identifiable surface imperfections on the reference standard
    may be ignored. When reject filtering is used during UT
    testing, linearity must be demonstrated.
    25.9.5 If, upon any standardization, the reference signal
    amplitude has decreased by 29 % (3.0 dB), the test apparatus
    shall be considered out of standardization. The test system
    settings may be changed, or the transducer(s), coil(s), or
    sensor(s) adjusted, and the unit restandardized, but all tubes
    tested since the last acceptable standardization must be retested.
    25.10 Evaluation of Imperfections :
    25.10.1 Tubing producing a test signal to or greater than the
    lowest signal produced by the reference standard shall be
    designated suspect, shall be clearly marked or identified, and
    shall be separated from the acceptable tubing.
    25.10.2 Such suspect tubing shall be subject to one of the
    following three dispositions:
    25.10.2.1 The tubes may be rejected without further examination,
    at the discretion of the manufacturer.
    25.10.2.2 If the test signal was produced by imperfections
    such as scratches, surface roughness, dings, straightener marks,
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-450/SA-450M
    753
    loose ID bead and cutting chips, steel die stamps, stop marks,
    tube reducer ripple, or chattered flash trim, the tubing may be
    accepted or rejected depending on visual observation of the
    severity of the imperfection, the type of signal it produces on
    the testing equipment used, or both.
    25.10.2.3 If the test signal was produced by imperfections
    which cannot be identified, or was produced by cracks or
    crack-like imperfections, the tubing shall be rejected.
    25.10.3 Any tubes with imperfections of the types in
    25.10.2.2 and 25.10.2.3, exceeding 0.004 in. (0.1 mm) or 121/2
    % of the specified minimum wall thickness (whichever is
    greater) in depth shall be rejected.
    25.10.4 Rejected tubes may be reconditioned and retested
    providing the wall thickness is not decreased to less than that
    required by this or the product specification. If grinding is
    performed, the outside diameter in the area of grinding may be
    reduced by the amount so removed. To be accepted, reconditioned
    tubes must pass the nondestructive examination by
    which they were originally rejected.
26. Certified Test Report
    26.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, the
    producer or supplier shall furnish a certified test report certifying
    that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested and
    inspected in accordance with the specification, including year
    date, the supplementary requirements, and any other requirements
    designated in the purchase order or contract, and that the
    results met the requirements of that specification, the supplementary
    requirements and the other requirements. A signature
    or notarization is not required on the certified test report, but
    the document shall be dated and shall clearly identify the
    organization submitting the report.
    NOTE 2—Notwithstanding the absence of a signature or notarization,
    the organization submitting the report is responsible for the contents of the
    report.
    26.2 In addition, the certified test report shall include the
    following information and test results, when applicable:
    26.2.1 Heat Number,
    26.2.2 Heat Analysis,
    26.2.3 Product Analysis, when specified,
    26.2.4 Tensile Properties,
    26.2.5 Width of the gage length, when longitudinal strip
    tension test specimens are used,
    26.2.6 Flattening Test acceptable,
    26.2.7 Reverse Flattening Test acceptable,
    26.2.8 Flaring Test acceptable,
    26.2.9 Flange Test acceptable,
    26.2.10 Hardness Test values,
    26.2.11 Hydrostatic Test pressure,
    26.2.12 Non-destructive Electric Test method,
    26.2.13 Impact Test results, and
    26.2.14 Other test results or information required to be
    reported by the product specification.
    26.3 Test results or information required to be reported by
    supplementary requirements, or other requirements designated
    in the purchase order or contract shall be reported, but may be
    reported in a separate document.
    26.4 The certified test report shall include a statement of
    explanation for the letter added to the specification number
    marked on the tubes (see 29.2), when all of the requirements of
    the specification have not been completed. The purchaser must
    certify that all requirements of the specification have been
    completed before removal of the letter (that is, X, Y, or Z).
    26.5 A test report, certificate of compliance, or similar
    document printed from or used in electronic form from an
    electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission shall be regarded
    as having the same validity as a counterpart printed in
    the certifier’s facility. The content of the EDI transmitted
    document shall meet the requirements of the invoked ASTM
    standard(s) and conform to any existing EDI agreement between
    the purchaser and supplier. Notwithstanding the absence
    of a signature, the organization submitting the EDI transmission
    is responsible for the content of the report.
27. Inspection
    27.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall have
    entry at all times while work on the contract of the purchaser
    is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s works
    that concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The
    manufacturer shall afford the inspector all reasonable facilities
    to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
    with this specification. All required tests and inspection shall
    be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless
    otherwise specified, and shall be conducted so as not to
    interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
28. Rejection
    28.1 Each length of tubing received from the manufacturer
    may be inspected by the purchaser and, if it does not meet the
    requirements of the specification based on the inspection and
    test method as outlined in the specification, the length may be
    rejected and the manufacturer shall be notified. Disposition of
    rejected tubing shall be a matter of agreement between the
    manufacturer and the purchaser.
    28.2 Material that fails in any of the forming operations or
    in the process of installation and is found to be defective shall
    be set aside and the manufacturer shall be notified for mutual
    evaluation of the material’s suitability. Disposition of such
    material shall be a matter for agreement.
29. Product Marking
    29.1 Each length of tube shall be legibly stenciled with the
    manufacturers’s name or brand, the specification number, and
    grade. The marking need not include the year date of the
    specification. For tubes less than 11/4 in. [31.8 mm] in diameter
    and tubes under 3 ft. [1 m] in length, the required information
    may be marked on a tag securely attached to the bundle or box
    in which the tubes are shipped.
    29.2 When it is specified that certain requirements of a
    specification adopted by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
    Committee are to be completed by the purchaser upon receipt
    of the material, the manufacturer shall indicate that all requirements
    of the specification have not been completed by a letter
    such as X, Y, or Z, immediately following the specification
    SA-450/SA-450M ASME BPVC.II.A-2019
    754
    number. This letter may be removed after completion of all
    requirements in accordance with the specification. An explanation
    of specification requirements to be completed is provided
    in Section 26.
    29.3 Bar Coding—In addition to the requirements in 29.1
    and 29.2, bar coding is acceptable as a supplemental identification
    method. The purchaser may specifiy in the order a
    specific bar coding system to be used.
30. Packaging, Marking, and Loading
    30.1 When specified on the purchase order, packaging,
    marking, and loading for shipment shall be in accordance with
    the procedures of Practices A700.
31. Government Procurement
    31.1 Scale Free Pipe:
    31.1.1 When specified in the contract or order, the following
    requirements shall be considered in the inquiry contract or
    order, for agencies of the U.S. Government where scale free
    tube is required. These requirements shall take precedence if
    there is a conflict between these requirements and the product
    specification.
    31.1.2 Tube shall be ordered to outside diameter (OD) and
    wall thickness.
    31.1.3 Responsibility for Inspection— Unless otherwise
    specified in the contract or purchase order, the manufacturer is
    responsible for the performance of all inspection and test
    requirements specified. The absence of any inspection requirements
    in the specification shall not relieve the contractor of the
    responsibility for ensuring that all products or supplies submitted
    to the Government for acceptance comply with all requirements
    of the contract. Sampling inspection, as part of the
    manufacturing operations, is an acceptable practice to ascertain
    conformance to requirements, however, this does not authorize
    submission of known defective material, either indicated or
    actual, nor does it commit the Government to accept the
    material. Except as otherwise specified in the contract or
    purchase order, the manufacturer may use his own or any other
    suitable facilities for the performance of the inspection and test
    requirements unless disapproved by the purchaser at the time
    the order is placed. The purchaser shall have the right to
    perform any of the inspections and tests set forth when such
    inspections and tests are deemed necessary to ensure that the
    material conforms to the prescribed requirements.
    31.1.4 Sampling for Flattening and Flaring Test and for
    Visual and Dimensional Examination—Minimum sampling for
    flattening and flaring tests and visual and dimensional examination
    shall be as follows:
    Lot Size (pieces per
    lot)
    Sample Size
    2 to 8 Entire lot
    9 to 90 8
    91 to 150 12
    151 to 280 19
    281 to 500 21
    501 to 1200 27
    1201 to 3200 35
    3201 to 10 000 38
    10 001 to 35 000 46
    In all cases, the acceptance number is zero and the rejection
    number is one. Rejected lots may be screened and resubmitted
    for visual and dimensional examination. All defective items
    shall be replaced with acceptable items prior to lot acceptance
    31.1.5 Sampling for Chemical Analysis— One sample for
    chemical analysis shall be selected from each of two tubes
    chosen from each lot. A lot shall be all material poured from
    one heat.
    31.1.6 Sampling for Tension and Bend Test— One sample
    shall be taken from each lot.Alot shall consist of all tube of the
    same outside diameter and wall thickness manufactured during
    an 8-h shift from the same heat of steel, and heat treated under
    the same conditions of temperature and time in a single charge
    in a batch type furnace, or heat treated under the same
    condition in a continuous furnace, and presented for inspection
    at the same time.
    31.1.7 Hydrostatic and Ultrasonic Tests— Each tube shall
    be tested by the ultrasonic (when specified) and hydrostatic
    tests.
    31.1.8 Tube shall be free from heavy oxide or scale. The
    internal surface of hot finished ferritic steel tube shall be
    pickled or blast cleaned to a free of scale condition equivalent
    to the CSa2 visual standard listed in SSPC-SP6. Cleaning shall
    be performed in accordance with a written procedure that has
    been shown to be effective. This procedure shall be available
    for audit.
    31.1.9 In addition to the marking in Specification A530/
    A530M, each length of tube 1/4 in. outside diameter and larger
    shall be marked with the following listed information. Marking
    shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 183 and MIL-STD-
32. (a) Outside diameter, wall thickness, and length (b) Heat
    or lot identification number.
    31.1.10 Tube shall be straight to within the tolerances
    specified in Table 8:
    31.1.11 When specified, each tube shall be ultrasonically
    examined in accordance with MIL-STD-271, except that the
    notch depth in the calibration standard shall be 5 % of the wall
    thickness or 0.005 in., whichever is greater. Any tube which
    produces an indication equal to or greater than 100 % of the
    indication from the calibration standard shall be rejected.
    31.1.12 The tube shall be free from repair welds, welded
    joints, laps, laminations, seams, visible cracks, tears, grooves,
    slivers, pits, and other imperfections detrimental to the tube as
    determined by visual and ultrasonic examination, or alternate
    tests, as specified.
    31.1.13 Tube shall be uniform in quality and condition and
    have a finish conforming to the best practice for standard
    quality tubing. Surface imperfections such as handling marks,
    TABLE 8 Straightness Tolerances
    Specified OD (in.)
    Specified Wall
    Thickness (in.)
    Maximum
    Curvature in Any 3
    ft (in.)
    Maximum
    Curvature in Total
    Length (in.)
    Up to 5.0, incl Over 3 % OD to
    0.5, incl
    0.030 0.010 × length, ft
    Over 5.0 to 8.0,
    incl
    Over 4 % OD to
    0.75, incl
    0.045 0.015 × length, ft
    Over 8.0 to 12.75,
    incl.
    Over 4 % OD to
    1.0, incl
    0.060 0.020 × length, ft
    ASME BPVC.II.A-2019 SA-450/SA-450M
    755
    straightening marks, light mandrel and die marks, shallow pits,
    and scale pattern will not be considered injurious if the
    imperfections are removable within the tolerances specified for
    wall thickness or 0.005 in., whichever is greater. The bottom of
    imperfections shall be visible and the profile shall be rounded
    and faired-in.
    31.1.14 No weld repair by the manufacturer is permitted.
    31.1.15 Preservation shall be level A or commercial, and
    packing shall be level A, B, or commercial, as specified. Level
    A preservation and level A or B packing shall be in accordance
    with MIL-STD-163 and commercial preservation and packing
    shall be in accordance with Practices A700 or Practice D3951.
33. Keywords
    32.1 alloy steel tube; austenitic stainless steel; carbon steel
    tube; general delivery; stainless steel tube; steel tube
    ASME Boiler and
    Pressure Vessel Code

Inspection & Approval Certificates : C/W Certificate (Calibration Works Certificate) EN 10204 3.1 / DIN 50049 3.1 / ISO 10474 3.1 Mill Test Certificate,
NACE HIC TM-0284 / NACE MR-0103 / NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15166, CE Marked, European Pressure Equipment Directive PED-2014/68/EU, AD-2000-WO,
ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code Section-II Part A Edition 2019, API 6A (American Petroleum Institute), with 3.2 Certificate duly Certified &
Approved by IBR (Indian Boiler Regulations), LR Class (Lloyd’s Register), GL (Germanischer Lloyd), BV (Bureau Veritas), DNV (Det Norske Veritas),
ABS Class (American Bureau of Shipping), SGS, TUV, RINA, IR Class (Indian Register of Shipping), NORSOK Approved Standard M-630, M-650 Rev.3

If you have any requirement of above items, please feel free to contact us

Regards,

CONTACT PERSON :

MUKESH SHAH
Director
Mobile No. 0091 – 9820292499
Email – marketing@rolexmetals.com

ROLEX METAL DISTRIBUTORS
57-A Khatargalli
Thakurdwar
Mumbai – 400 002 India
0091-22-23858802
0091-22-23823963
0091-22-23898724
marketing@rolexmetals.com
www.rolexmetals.com

CHAIRMAN – chairman@rolexmetals.com
MANAGING DIRECTOR – managingdirector@rolexmetals.com
TECHNICAL DIRECTOR – technicaldirector@rolexmetals.com
SALES DIRECTOR – salesdirector@rolexmetals.com
COMMERCIAL DIRECTOR – commercialdirector@rolexmetals.com
COMMERCIAL MANAGER – commercial@rolexmetals.com
GENERAL MANAGER – generalmanager@rolexmetals.com
SALES MANAGER – salesmanager@rolexmetals.com
PURCHASE MANAGER – purchasemanager@rolexmetals.com
TECHNICAL MANAGER – technical@rolexmetals.com
WORKS MANAGER – worksmanager@rolexmetals.com
STORES MANAGER – stores@rolexmetals.com
WAREHOUSE MANAGER – warehouse@rolexmetals.com
SALES DOMESTIC – salesdomestic@rolexmetals.com
SALES INTERNATIONAL – salesinternational@rolexmetals.com
SALES GENERAL – sales@rolexmetals.com
PURCHASE GENERAL – purchase@rolexmetals.com
FINANCE MANAGER – finance@rolexmetals.com
ACCOUNTS MANAGER – accounts@rolexmetals.com
GENERAL INFORMATION – info@rolexmetals.com
EXPORT MANAGER – export@rolexmetals.com
IMPORT MANAGER – import@rolexmetals.com
AIR EXPORT – airexport@rolexmetals.com
SEA EXPORT – seaexport@rolexmetals.com
CUSTOMS – customs@rolexmetals.com
AIR FREIGHT – airfreight@rolexmetals.com
SEA FREIGHT – seafreight@rolexmetals.com
DESPATCH – despatch@rolexmetals.com
INSPECTION – inspection@rolexmetals.com
LOGISTICS – logistics@rolexmetals.com
TRANSPORT – transport@rolexmetals.com
KALAMBOLI WAREHOUSE – kalamboli@rolexmetals.com
TALOJA WAREHOUSE – taloja@rolexmetals.com
KHOPOLI WAREHOUSE – khopoli@rolexmetals.com
NHAVA SHEVA WAREHOUSE – nhavasheva@rolexmetals.com
KANDLA WAREHOUSE – kandla@rolexmetals.com
MUMBAI WAREHOUSE – mumbai@rolexmetals.com
STOCKYARD – stockyard@rolexmetals.com
SERVICE – service@rolexmetals.com
SUPPORT – support@rolexmetals.com
RECRUITMENT – career@rolexmetals.com
WEBMASTER – webmaster@rolexmetals.com
CUSTOMER CARE – customercare@rolexmetals.com